Standard Handbook for Electrical Engineers, Seventeenth Edition [27th edition.] 9781259642586, 1259642585, 9781259642593, 1259642593

Citation preview

STANDARD HANDBOOK FOR ELECTRICAL ENGINEERS

00_Santoso_FM_i-xiv.indd 1

27/11/17 2:32 PM

ABOUT THE EDITORS

Surya Santoso, Ph.D., is a professor of electrical and computer engineering in the Cockrell School of Engineering at the University of Texas at Austin. He is co-author of Electrical Power Systems Quality, co-editor of Handbook of Electric Power Calculations, and author of Fundamentals of Electric Power Quality. He is an IEEE Fellow. H. Wayne Beaty  is the former managing editor of Electric Light & Power, co-editor of Handbook of Electric Power Calculations, and co-author of Electric Power Systems Quality.

00_Santoso_FM_i-xiv.indd 2

27/11/17 2:32 PM

STANDARD HANDBOOK FOR ELECTRICAL ENGINEERS Surya Santoso, Ph.D.  H. Wayne Beaty 

Editor

Editor

SEVENTEENTH EDITION

New York Chicago San Francisco Athens London Madrid Mexico City Milan New Delhi Singapore Sydney Toronto

00_Santoso_FM_i-xiv.indd 3

27/11/17 2:32 PM

Copyright © 2018 by McGraw-Hill Education. All rights reserved. Except as permitted under the United States Copyright Act of 1976, no part of this publication may be reproduced or distributed in any form or by any means, or stored in a database or retrieval system, without the prior written permission of the publisher. ISBN: 978-1-25-964259-3 MHID: 1-25-964259-3 The material in this eBook also appears in the print version of this title: ISBN: 978-1-25-964258-6, MHID: 1-25-964258-5. eBook conversion by codeMantra Version 1.0 All trademarks are trademarks of their respective owners. Rather than put a trademark symbol after every occurrence of a trademarked name, we use names in an editorial fashion only, and to the benefit of the trademark owner, with no intention of infringement of the trademark. Where such designations appear in this book, they have been printed with initial caps. McGraw-Hill Education eBooks are available at special quantity discounts to use as premiums and sales promotions or for use in corporate training programs. To contact a representative, please visit the Contact Us page at www.mhprofessional.com. Information contained in this work has been obtained by McGraw-Hill Education from sources believed to be reliable. However, neither McGraw-Hill Education nor its authors guarantee the accuracy or completeness of any information published herein, and neither McGraw-Hill Education nor its authors shall be responsible for any errors, omissions, or damages arising out of use of this information. This work is published with the understanding that McGraw-Hill Education and its authors are supplying information but are not attempting to render engineering or other professional services. If such services are required, the assistance of an appropriate professional should be sough .TERMS OF USE This is a copyrighted work and McGraw-Hill Education and its licensors reserve all rights in and to the work. Use of this work is subject to these terms. Except as permitted under the Copyright Act of 1976 and the right to store and retrieve one copy of the work, you may not decompile, disassemble, reverse engineer, reproduce, modify, create derivative works based upon, transmit, distribute, disseminate, sell, publish or sublicense the work or any part of it without McGraw-Hill Education’s prior consent. You may use the work for your own noncommercial and personal use; any other use of the work is strictly prohibited. Your right to use the work may be terminated if you fail to comply with these terms. THE WORK IS PROVIDED “AS IS.” McGRAW-HILL EDUCATION AND ITS LICENSORS MAKE NO GUARANTEES OR WARRANTIES AS TO THE ACCURACY, ADEQUACY OR COMPLETENESS OF OR RESULTS TO BE OBTAINED FROM USING THE WORK, INCLUDING ANY INFORMATION THAT CAN BE ACCESSED THROUGH THE WORK VIA HYPERLINK OR OTHERWISE, AND EXPRESSLY DISCLAIM ANY WARRANTY, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. McGraw-Hill Education and its licensors do not warrant or guarantee that the functions contained in the work will meet your requirements or that its operation will be uninterrupted or error free. Neither McGraw-Hill Education nor its licensors shall be liable to you or anyone else for any inaccuracy, error or omission, regardless of cause, in the work or for any damages resulting therefrom. McGraw-Hill Education has no responsibility for the content of any information accessed through the work. Under no circumstances shall McGraw-Hill Education and/or its licensors be liable for any indirect, incidental, special, punitive, consequential or similar damages that result from the use of or inability to use the work, even if any of them has been advised of the possibility of such damages. This limitation of liability shall apply to any claim or cause whatsoever whether such claim or cause arises in contract, tort or otherwise.

CONTENTS

Contributors   vii Preface   xi Acknowledgments   xiii

Section 1. Units, Symbols, Constants, Definitions, and Conversion Factors  H. Wayne Beaty 1 Section 2. Measurement and Instrumentation  Harold Kirkham 53 Section 3. Properties of Materials

95

Section 4. Interconnected Power Grids  Sarma Nuthalapati, Stephen Boroczky, Steven Darnell, Alan Honecker, Adam Peard, Shantha Ranatunga, Héctor Volskis, Xuanyuan Sharon Wang, Mini Shaji Thomas, Teruo Ohno, Spencer Burks, Kristian Koellner, Komla A. Folly, Kehinde Awodele, Leandro Kapolo, Nhlanhla Mbuli, Martin Kopa, and Oladiran Obadina 175

Section 5. Alternating-Current Power Transmission  Jose R. Daconti, Allen L. Clapp, A. M. DiGioia, Jr., Dale A. Douglass, I. S. Grant, Otto L. Lynch, John D. Mozer, J. R. Stewart, and Earle C. (Rusty) Bascom III 245

Section 6. Direct-Current Power Transmission

351

Section 7. Power Distribution  Surya Santoso 391 Section 8. Smart Grids and Microgrids  Anurag K. Srivastava, Sayonsom Chanda, Nikos Hatziargyriou, and Jianhui Wang 481 Section 9. Wind Power Generation  Zhe Chen, David Infield, and Nikos Hatziargyriou 523 Section 10. Solar Power Generation and Energy Storage  Benjamin Kroposki, Robert Margolis, Mark Mehos, Jim Eyer, Rahul Walawalkar, and Haresh Kamath 595

Section 11. Substations  Diane Watkins and George W. Becker 649

v

00_Santoso_FM_i-xiv.indd 5

27/11/17 2:32 PM

vi  CONTENTS

Section 12. Switchgear and Power Components  David S. Johnson, Jeffrey H. Nelson, T. W. Olsen, Michael W. Wactor, Kenneth Long, Hamid R. Sharifnia, and Mark McVey 709

Section 13. Power Transformers  Pavlos S. Georgilakis 801 Section 14. Electric Machines: Generators  Dan M. Ionel, Erik Abromitis, Samuel A. Drinkut, Franklin T. Emery, Om P. Malik, Osama A. Mohammed, Vandana Rallabandi, and Narges Taran 867 Section 15. Electric Machines: Motors and Drives 

Dan M. Ionel, Om P. Malik, Vandana Rallabandi, and Narges Taran 919

Section 16. Power Electronics  Alex Q. Huang and Xu She 961 Section 17. Power System Analysis  Francisco de León,

Tianqi Hong, and Ashhar Raza

1053

Section 18. Power System Operations  Hong Chen, Jianwei Liu, Jay Giri, Simon Tam, Mike Bryson, Patrick Panciatici, Federico Milano, Jian Zhou, Simon Bartlett, S. K. Soonee, S. R. Narasimhan, S. C. Saxena, and K. V. N. Pawan Kumar 1097

Section 19. Power System Protection  Héctor J. Altuve Ferrer 1169 Section 20. Power System Stability and Control  Arturo R. Messina, Emilio Barocio, Kai Sun, Daniel Ruiz-Vega, Nilanjan Senroy, and Sukumar Mishra 1239

Section 21. Electricity Markets  Ross Baldick and Resmi Surendran 1329 Section 22. Power Quality and ­Reliability  Surya Santoso, Mark F. McGranaghan, and Roger C. Dugan 1371 Section 23. Lightning and Overvoltage Protection

1427

Section 24. Computer Applications in the Electric Power Industry  Juan A. Martinez-Velasco 1503 Section 25. Standards in Electrotechnology, Telecommunications, and Information Technology  Marco W. Migliaro and Adam C. Newman 1575 Index   1609

00_Santoso_FM_i-xiv.indd 6

27/11/17 2:32 PM

CONTRIBUTORS

Erik Abromitis  Generator Engineering, Siemens Energy, Inc. (sec. 14) Héctor J. Altuve Ferrer  Distinguished Engineer and Dean, Schweitzer Engineering Laboratories, Inc. (SEL) University, Pullman, Washington (sec. 19) Kehinde Awodele  University of Cape Town, Cape Town, South Africa (sec. 4) Ross Baldick  Professor, University of Texas at Austin (sec. 21) Emilio Barocio  Professor, Graduate Studies Program in Electrical Engineering, Universidad de Guadalajara, Guadalajara, Mexico (sec. 20) Simon Bartlett  Professor, University of Queensland, Australia (sec. 18) Earle C. (Rusty) Bascom III  Principal Engineer, Electrical Consulting Engineers, P.C. (sec. 5) H. Wayne Beaty  Editor, Standard Handbook for Electrical Engineers (sec. 1) George W. Becker  Senior Substation Engineer, POWER Engineers, Inc., Fort Mill, South Carolina (sec. 11) Stephen Boroczky  Principal Engineer, Grid Systems, Australian Energy Market Operator (AEMO), Sydney, NSW, Australia (sec. 4) Mike Bryson  Vice President of Operations, PJM Interconnection, United States (sec. 18) Spencer Burks  Lower Colorado River Authority, Austin, Texas (sec. 4) Sayonsom Chanda  Research Engineer, Idaho National Lab, Idaho Falls, Idaho (sec. 8) Hong Chen  Senior Lead Engineer, PJM Interconnection, United States (sec. 18) Zhe Chen  Professor of Electrical Engineering, Department of Energy Technology, Aalborg University, Aalborg, Denmark (sec. 9) Allen L. Clapp  President, Clapp Research Associates, P.C. (sec. 5) Jose R. Daconti  Senior Staff Consultant, Siemens Power Technologies International (sec. 5) Steven Darnell  Principal Engineer, Systems Performance and Commercial, Australian Energy Market Operator (AEMO), Brisbane, QLD, Australia (sec. 4) Francisco de León  Associate Professor, Department of Electrical and Computer Engineering, NYU Tandon School of Engineering, New York University, Brooklyn, New York (sec. 17) A. M. DiGioia, Jr.  President, DiGioia Gray and Associates (sec. 5) Dale A. Douglass  Principal Engineer, Douglass Power Consulting, LLC (sec. 5) Samuel A. Drinkut  Generator Engineering, Siemens Energy, Inc. (sec. 14) Roger C. Dugan  Senior Technical Executive, Electric Power Research Institute, Knoxville, Tennessee (sec. 22) Franklin T. Emery  Generator Engineering, Siemens Energy, Inc. (sec. 14) Jim Eyer  Principal and Senior Analyst, E&I Consulting, Oakland, California (sec. 10) Komla A. Folly  University of Cape Town, Cape Town, South Africa (sec. 4) Pavlos S. Georgilakis  National Technical University of Athens (NTUA), Athens, Greece (sec. 13) Jay Giri  Director, GE Grid Software Solutions, United States (sec. 18) I. S. Grant  Manager, TVA (sec. 5)

vii

00_Santoso_FM_i-xiv.indd 7

27/11/17 2:32 PM

viii  CONTRIBUTORS

Nikos Hatziargyriou  Professor of Power Systems, School of Electrical and Computer Engineering, National Technical University of Athens, Athens, Greece, and CEO, Hellenic Electricity Distribution Network Operator SA (HEDNO) (secs. 8, 9) Alan Honecker  Senior Manager, NEM Real Time Operations, Australian Energy Market Operator (AEMO), Sydney, NSW, Australia (sec. 4) Tianqi Hong  Research Fellow, Department of Electrical and Computer Engineering, NYU Tandon School of Engineering, New York University, Brooklyn, New York (sec. 17) Alex Q. Huang  Dula D. Cockrell Centennial Chair in Engineering, University of Texas at Austin (sec. 16) David Infield  Professor of Renewable Energy Technologies, Department of Electronic and Electrical Engineering, University of Strathclyde, Glasgow, United Kingdom (sec. 9) Dan M. Ionel  Professor and L. Stanley Pigman Chair in Power, Department of Electrical and Computer Engineering, University of Kentucky (secs. 14, 15) David S. Johnson  Consultant, Pittsburgh, Pennsylvania (sec. 12) Haresh Kamath  Senior Program Manager, Energy Storage and Distributed Generation, Electric Power Research Institute, Palo Alto, California (sec. 10) Leandro Kapolo  NamPower, Windhoek, Namibia (sec. 4) Harold Kirkham   Staff Scientist, Pacific Northwest National Laboratory, Richland, Washington (sec. 2) Kristian Koellner  Lower Colorado River Authority, Austin, Texas (sec. 4) Martin Kopa  ESKOM, Johannesburg, South Africa (sec. 4) Benjamin Kroposki  Director, Power Systems Engineering Center, National Renewable Energy Laboratory, Golden, Colorado (sec. 10) K. V. N. Pawan Kumar  Senior Engineer, POSOCO, India (sec. 18) Jianwei Liu  Senior Lead Engineer, PJM Interconnection, United States (sec. 18) Kenneth Long  Engineering Manager, Transmission & Distribution, Stantec Consulting Ltd., Portland, Oregon (sec. 12) Otto L. Lynch  Vice President, Power Line Systems, Inc., Madison, Wisconsin (sec. 5) Om P. Malik  Professor Emeritus, Department of Electrical and Computer Engineering, University of Calgary, Calgary, Alberta, Canada (secs. 14, 15) Robert Margolis  Principal Energy Analyst, National Renewable Energy Laboratory, Golden, Colorado (sec. 10) Juan A. Martinez-Velasco  Professor, Universitat Politècnica de Catalunya, Spain (sec. 24) Nhlanhla Mbuli  ESKOM and University of Johannesburg, Johannesburg, South Africa (sec. 4) Mark F. McGranaghan  Vice President, Electric Power Research Institute, Knoxville, Tennessee (sec. 22) Mark McVey  Principal Engineer, Dominion, Richmond, Virginia (sec. 12) Mark Mehos  Program Manager, Concentrating Solar Power, National Renewable Energy Laboratory, Golden, Colorado (sec. 10) Arturo R. Messina  Professor, Graduate Studies Program in Electrical Engineering, Center for Research and Advanced Studies, Guadalajara, Mexico (sec. 20) Marco W. Migliaro  President and CEO, IEEE Industry Standards and Technology Organization (IEEE-ISTO) (sec. 25) Federico Milano  Professor, University College Dublin, Ireland (sec. 18) Sukumar Mishra  Professor, Indian Institute of Technology, Delhi, India (sec. 20) Osama A. Mohammed  Professor, Department of Electrical and Computer Engineering, Florida International University (sec. 14) John D. Mozer  Professional Engineer, Retired (sec. 5) S. R. Narasimhan  Additional General Manager, POSOCO, India (sec. 18) Jeffrey H. Nelson  Manager, Project Development, Transmission, Tennessee Valley Authority, Chattanooga, Tennessee (sec. 12)

00_Santoso_FM_i-xiv.indd 8

27/11/17 2:32 PM

CONTRIBUTORS  ix 

Adam C. Newman  Senior Director, Business Development and Alliance Management, IEEE Standards Association (sec. 25) Sarma Nuthalapati  Principal EMS Network Applications Engineer, PEAK Reliability, Vancouver, Washington (sec. 4) Oladiran Obadina  Electric Reliability Council of Texas (ERCOT), Austin, Texas (sec. 4) Teruo Ohno  TEPCO Research Institute, Tokyo Electric Power Holdings, Inc., Japan (sec. 4) T. W. Olsen  Retired Former Manager, Technology, Energy Management Division, Medium Voltage and Systems, Siemens Industry, Inc., Wendell, North Carolina (sec. 12) Patrick Panciatici  Scientific Advisor, RTE France, France (sec. 18) Adam Peard  Area Manager—System Analysis and Solutions, Network Planning, Western Power, Perth, WA, Australia (sec. 4) Vandana Rallabandi  Research Engineer, Department of Electrical and Computer Engineering, University of Kentucky (secs. 14, 15) Shantha Ranatunga  Specialist, Systems Performance and Commercial, Australian Energy Market Operator (AEMO), Brisbane, QLD, Australia (sec. 4) Ashhar Raza  Research Fellow, Department of Electrical and Computer Engineering, NYU Tandon School of Engineering, New York University, Brooklyn, New York (sec. 17) Daniel Ruiz-Vega  Professor, Graduate Program in Electrical Engineering, Instituto Politécnico Nacional, Mexico (sec. 20) Surya Santoso  Professor, Department of Electrical and Computer Engineering, University of Texas at Austin (secs. 7, 22) S. C. Saxena  Deputy General Manager, POSOCO, India (sec. 18) Nilanjan Senroy  Associate Professor, Indian Institute of Technology, Delhi, India (sec. 20) Hamid R. Sharifnia  Manager of Engineering, Stantec Consulting Ltd., Portland, Oregon (sec. 12) Xu She  Lead Electrical Engineer, GE Global Research (sec. 16) S. K. Soonee  Adviser, POSOCO, India (sec. 18) Anurag K. Srivastava  Associate Professor, School of Electrical Engineering and Computer Science, Washington State University, Pullman, Washington (sec. 8) J. R. Stewart  Consultant (sec. 5) Kai Sun  Associate Professor, University of Tennessee, Knoxville, Tennessee (sec. 20) Resmi Surendran  Senior Manager, Wholesale Market Operations and Analysis, Electric Reliability Council of Texas, Taylor, Texas (sec. 21) Simon Tam  Manager of Transmission Operations, PJM Interconnection, United States (sec. 18) Narges Taran  Research Engineer, Department of Electrical and Computer Engineering, University of Kentucky (secs. 14, 15) Mini Shaji Thomas  Director, National Institute of Technology, Tiruchirappalli, India (sec. 4) Héctor Volskis  Operador Nacional do Sistema Elétrico (ONS), Brazil (sec. 4) Michael W. Wactor  Technical Director, Corporate Product Development, Powell Industries, Inc., Houston, Texas (sec. 12) Rahul Walawalkar  President and Managing Director, Customized Energy Solutions India Pvt. Ltd., and Executive Director, India Energy Storage Alliance, Pune, India (sec. 10) Jianhui Wang  Department of Electrical Engineering, Southern Methodist University, Dallas, Texas, and Energy Systems Division, Argonne National Laboratory, Argonne, Illinois (sec. 8) Xuanyuan Sharon Wang  Jibei Electric Power Company, State Grid Corporation of China, Beijing, China (sec. 4) Diane Watkins  Manager, Substation Field Engineering, Xcel Energy, Denver, Colorado (sec. 11) Jian Zhou  Director, East China Grid, China (sec. 18)

00_Santoso_FM_i-xiv.indd 9

27/11/17 2:32 PM

This page intentionally left blank

00_Santoso_FM_i-xiv.indd 10

27/11/17 2:32 PM

PREFACE

Electrical engineering is one of the largest and most diverse fields of science and engineering. In its early days in the late nineteenth century, electrical engineering dealt with the study and application of electric power, telephony, and radiotelegraphy. Pioneers of these nascent fields include Thomas Edison, Alexander Graham Bell, and Guglielmo Marconi. Driven by continuous innovation and two world wars, electrical engineering grew rapidly. By the early twenty-first century, it covered electronics, computing and information technology, integrated circuits and embedded systems, nanotechnology, electronic materials, and synthetic biology. This list will certainly continue to expand in the coming decades. The first edition of the Standard Handbook for Electrical Engineers was written and compiled by “A Staff of Specialists” and published by the McGraw Publishing Company in 1907. Continuing its 100-plus years of legacy, this Handbook focuses on one particular branch of electrical engineering: electric power and its applications. The topics in the Handbook encompass the full spectrum of electric power engineering and include generation, transmission, distribution, operation, system protection, switchgear, power components, and electricity markets. Since the publication of the Sixteenth Edition of this Handbook, several changes have taken place that have had an impact on the science and technology of electric power engineering. The new and significantly revised sections in the Seventeenth Edition are as follows. The “Measurement and Instrumentation” section has been completely revised and updated to include the concept of and expression of uncertainty in measurement, digital measurement techniques, and power, energy, and phasor measurements, as well as the measurement of component values such as resistance, inductance, and capacitance. “Interconnected Power Grids” is a new section that provides a comprehensive overview of network structures, transmission and distribution service providers, and electricity markets for interconnected power grids around the world, that is, in Australia, Brazil, China, India, Japan, North America, and Africa. “Smart Grids and Microgrids” is a new section that introduces the ins and outs of microgrids and smart grids. Recent advances in computation, communication, controllable loads, and automation allow distribution circuits to operate in a complete island. Smart grids take advantage of various digital technologies to improve the system operation beyond that of a traditional grid. Renewable energy, both wind and solar, has been integrated into transmission and distribution grids in a greater proportion in the past decades. Energy storage has become a key technology enabler of renewable integration and ancillary grid services. As a result, two new sections, “Wind Power Generation” and “Solar Power Generation and Energy Storage,” have been added to the Handbook. Power transformers are an essential apparatus in power transmission and delivery. “Power Transformers” is dedicated to covering a range of topics in this area, including the characteristics, types, design, insulation, and operation of power transformers. Materials on prime movers and electric machines have been reorganized and consolidated into two sections, “Electric Machines: Generators” and “Electric Machines: Motors and Drives.” Among the topics included in these sections are prime movers, dc and ac generators and motors, special-purpose electric machines, and drives. “Power System Analysis” is a new section that provides fundamental knowledge necessary for analyzing power systems in steady state. It covers complex power, per-unit system, sequence impedance, power flow, and short-circuit analysis. “Power System Operations” is another new section that discusses how interconnected power systems operate efficiently. Major topics in this section include power balance, frequency control, xi

00_Santoso_FM_i-xiv.indd 11

27/11/17 2:32 PM

xii  PREFACE

transmission operation and security, and energy management and outage management systems. The section also presents international perspectives on power system operation in the United States, Europe, China, Australia, and India. Protective elements and systems are the first line of defense in detecting short-circuit faults and abnormal operating conditions. The main functions of such systems include disconnecting the protected elements and facilitating restoration. “Power System Protection,” a new section of the Handbook, provides a comprehensive introduction to power system protection. It covers numerous protection techniques and their applications to equipment protection such as buses, lines, transformers, and generators. Power system stability studies evaluate the ability of a power system to return to its stable operating condition without losing synchronism following a system disturbance. A new section on “Power System Stability and Control” has been added to the Handbook. It discusses small-signal and transient stability as well as the impact of wind and solar generation on system stability. Electricity markets are artificial constructs designed to realize the objective of providing dependable electrical power at the lowest cost of production. Electricity markets are essential for the modern operation and management of interconnected power grids. A new section on “Electricity Markets” has been added to the Handbook, and it covers the philosophy and principles, characteristics and building blocks, and design and implementation of electricity markets. The editors and contributors expect that this updated edition of the Handbook will continue to serve the professional careers of its readers. As with previous editions of the Handbook, the Seventeenth Edition contains, in a single volume, all major electric power topics and aims to be accurate and comprehensive in its technical treatment and to be of use in engineering practice and application as well as in study and preparation for such practice. Surya Santoso

00_Santoso_FM_i-xiv.indd 12

27/11/17 2:32 PM

ACKNOWLEDGMENTS

I would like to express my sincere gratitude to the contributors for their painstaking and immeasurable efforts in reviewing, updating, and authoring materials presented in the Seventeenth Edition of this Handbook. The contributors consist of more than 100 world-expert academics and practicing engineers in electric power and its various subspecialties. This Seventeenth Edition would not have been possible without their dedication and commitment. It is a privilege to work with such talented people. The materials compiled and presented in this Handbook have undergone continuous revision and refinement to reflect advances in the field of electric power and its applications. Grateful acknowledgment is given to each author who contributed to this Handbook since its Thirteenth Edition (1993): Donald G. Fink and Barry N. Taylor on “Units, Symbols, Constants, Definitions, and Conversion Factors” Donald G. Fink, Gerald Fitzpatrick, Norman Belecki, George Burns, Forest Harris, B. W. Mangum, and Martin R. Riley on “Measurement and Instrumentation” Glenn Davidson, Philip Mason Opsal, Donald J. Barta, T. W. Dakin, Charles A. Harper, Duane E. Lyon, Charles B. Rawlins, James Stubbins, John Tanaka, Anthony L. Von Holle, Kenneth L. Latimer, E. J. Croop, and Robert W. Bohl on “Properties of Materials” J. A. Williams, H. Brian White, L. O. Barthold, J. A. Moran, and D. D. Wilson on “AlternatingCurrent Power Transmission” Ram Adapa, Michael P. Bahrman, P. F. Albrecht, G. D. Breuer, K. Clark, R. C. Degeneff, H. J. Fielder, C. W. Flairty, D. W. Houghtaling, E. T. Jauch, J. J. LaForest, E. V. Larsen, J. C. McIver, F. Nozari, R. L. Rofini, H. M. Schneider, J. D. Stickler, J. Urbanek, and L. E. Zafanella on “DirectCurrent Power Transmission” Allen L. Clapp, Daniel J. Ward, Cheryl A. Warren, James L. Burke, and Walter J. Ros on “Power Distribution” John Randolph, Philip C. Bolin, Allen L. Clapp, W. Bruce Dietzman, Joseph Basilesco, Rusko Matulic, and Philip R. Nannery on “Substations” Craig A. Colopy, Carey J. Cook, Jon Hilgenkamp, Christopher McCarthy, Douglas M. Staszesky, Robert B. Hardin, Robert J. Landman, Kelly A. Shaw, Robert A. Brown, Ramsis S. Girgis, Louis C. Grove, James H. Harlow, Robert E. Kleeb, and Carl M. Pandza on “Switchgear and Power System Components” O. A. Mohammed, Thomas W. Nehl, E. H. Myers, Erik Abromitis, Samuel A. Drinkut, Franklin T. Emery, John D. Amos, Aleksandar Prole, Lon W. Montgomery, James L. Kirtley, Jr., R. E. Appleyard, L. T. Rosenberg, William H. Day, Donald H. Hall, Lawrence R. Mizen, and Roy P. Allen on “Electric Machines: Generators” Om P. Malik, Kenneth C. Cornelius, John H. Dulas, Alexander Kusko, Kelly A. Shaw, and Syed M. Peeran on “Electric Machines: Motors and Drives” Amit Kumar Jain, Raja Ayyanar, P. Wood, L. Gyugyi, Jerome B. Brewster, T. M. Heinrich, R. M. Oates, B. R. Pelley, and Donald Galler on “Power Electronics” John Adams, Hassan Bevrani, Math H. J. Bollen, Gustavo Brunello, Rujiroj Leelaruji, Christopher McCarthy, Yasunori Mitani, Sarma Nuthalapati, Oladiran Obadina, Paulo F. Ribeiro, Hesham

xiii

00_Santoso_FM_i-xiv.indd 13

27/11/17 2:32 PM

xiv  ACKNOWLEDGMENTS

Shaalan, Douglas M. Staszesky, George R. Stoll, Resmi Surendran, Luigi Vanfretti, Masayuki Watanabe, Christa Lorber, James R. Latimer, Bruce F. Wollenberg, W. A. Elmore, and Jalal Gohari on “Power System Operations” John B. Dagenhart on “Power Quality and Reliability” A. P. (Sakis) Meliopoulos on “Lightning and Overvoltage Protection” James V. Mitsche, M. M. Adibi, J. D. Cypert, and T. Q. Zhang on “Computer Applications in the Electric Power Industry” I would like to thank H. Wayne Beaty, who has served as co-editor of this Handbook with Donald G. Fink since 1978 and later was editor from 2000 to 2013. He joins an esteemed lineage of previous editors of this Handbook: Frank F. Fowle (1915–1933), Archer E. Knowlton (1941–1957), and Donald G. Fink (1968–1987). In addition, I would like to thank my doctoral students, Harsha V. Padullaparti, Naveen Ganta, Piyapath Siratarnsophon, Suma Jothibasu, David Rosewater, and Quan Nguyen, for examining and reviewing a number of sections from the Handbook, as well as Dr. Grazia Todeschini of Swansea University, U.K., and Michael McCabe of McGraw-Hill for their input and encouragement throughout the process. Special appreciation goes to Kritika Kaushik and her team at Cenveo Publisher Services for their patience in fulfilling my requests, meticulous adherence to perfection, and untiring effort in editing and typesetting the manuscript. Finally, one cannot overlook the support so generously given by his family during this enormous endeavor. When one lifts up his eyes and surveys the mountains, he asks “Where does my help come from?” Like the Psalmist’s, his help comes from the LORD, the Maker of heaven and earth! Surya Santoso

00_Santoso_FM_i-xiv.indd 14

27/11/17 2:32 PM

1

UNITS, SYMBOLS, CONSTANTS, DEFINITIONS, AND CONVERSION FACTORS H. Wayne Beaty Editor, Standard Handbook for Electrical Engineers; Senior Member, Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers; technical assistance provided by David B. Newell, Staff Scientist, National Institute of Standards and Technology, and Chair, CODATA Task Group on Fundamental Constants



1.1 THE SI UNITS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 1.2 CGPM BASE QUANTITIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 1.3 SUPPLEMENTARY SI UNITS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 1.4 DERIVED SI UNITS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 1.5 SI DECIMAL PREFIXES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 1.6 USAGE OF SI UNITS, SYMBOLS, AND PREFIXES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 1.7 OTHER SI UNITS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 1.8 CGS SYSTEMS OF UNITS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 1.9 PRACTICAL UNITS (ISU). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 1.10 DEFINITIONS OF ELECTRICAL QUANTITIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 1.11 DEFINITIONS OF QUANTITIES OF RADIATION AND LIGHT. . . . . . . . . . 13 1.12 LETTER SYMBOLS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 1.13 GRAPHIC SYMBOLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 1.14 PHYSICAL CONSTANTS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 1.15 NUMERICAL VALUES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 1.16 CONVERSION FACTORS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 1.17 BIBLIOGRAPHY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51 1.17.1 Standards. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51 1.17.2 Collections of Units and Conversion Factors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51 1.17.3 Books and Papers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52

1.1  THE SI UNITS The units of the quantities most commonly used in electrical engineering (volts, amperes, watts, ohms, etc.) are those of the metric system. They are embodied in the International System of Units (Système International d’Unités, abbreviated SI). The SI units are used throughout this handbook, in accordance with the established practice of electrical engineering publications throughout the world. Other units, notably the cgs (centimeter-gram-second) units, may have been used in citations in the earlier literature. The cgs electrical units are listed in Table 1-9 with conversion factors to the SI units.

1

01_Santoso_Sec01_p0001-0052.indd 1

23/11/17 2:27 PM

2  SECTION ONE

The SI electrical units are based on the mksa (meter-kilogram-second-ampere) system. They have been adopted by the standardization bodies of the world, including the International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC), the American National Standards Institute (ANSI), and the Standards Board of the Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE).

1.2  CGPM BASE QUANTITIES Seven quantities have been adopted by the General Conference on Weights and Measures (CGPMa) as base quantities, that is, quantities that are not derived from other quantities. The base quantities are length, mass, time, electric current, thermodynamic temperature, amount of substance, and luminous intensity. Table 1-1 lists these quantiTABLE 1-1  SI Base Units ties, the name of the SI unit for each, and the standard letter symbol by which each is Quantity Unit Symbol expressed in the International System (SI). Length meter m The units of the base quantities have Mass kilogram kg been defined by the CGPM as follows: Time second s Electric current ampere A Thermodynamic temperature* kelvin K Amount of substance mole mol Luminous intensity candela cd

*Celsius temperature is, in general, expressed in degrees Celsius (symbol °C).

Meter.  The length of the path traveled by light in vacuum during a time interval of 1/299 792 458 of a second (CGPM). Kilogram.  The unit of mass; it is equal to the mass of the international prototype of the kilogram (CGPM).

note: The prototype is a platinum-iridium cylinder maintained at the International Bureau of Weights and Measures, near Paris. The kilogram is approximately equal to the mass of 1000 cubic centimeters of water at its temperature of maximum density.

Second.  The duration of 9 192 631 770 periods of the radiation corresponding to the transition between the two hyperfine levels of the ground state of the cesium 133 atoms (CGPM). Ampere.  The constant current that if maintained in two straight parallel conductors of infinite length, of negligible circular cross section, and placed 1 meter apart in vacuum would produce between these conductors a force equal to 2 × 10-7 newton per meter of length (CGPM). Kelvin.  The unit of thermodynamic temperature is the fraction 1/273.16 of the thermodynamic temperature of the triple point of water (CGPM). note: The zero of the Celsius scale (the freezing point of water) is defined as 0.01 K below the triple point, that is, 273.15 K. See Table 1-27.

Mole.  That amount of substance of a system that contains as many elementary entities as there are atoms in 0.012 kilogram of carbon-12 (CGPM). note: When the mole is used, the elementary entities must be specified. They may be atoms, molecules, ions, electrons, other particles, or specified groups of such particles.

Candela.  The luminous intensity, in a given direction, of a source that emits monochromatic radiation of frequency 540 × 1012 Hz and that has a radiant intensity in that direction of 1/683 watt per steradian (CGPM). note: Until January 1, 1948, the generally accepted unit of luminous intensity was the international candle. The difference between the candela and the international candle is so small that only measurements of high precision are affected. The use of the term candle is deprecated. From the initials of its French name, Conference G´ene´rale des Poids et Mesures.

a

01_Santoso_Sec01_p0001-0052.indd 2

23/11/17 2:27 PM

UNITS, SYMBOLS, CONSTANTS, DEFINITIONS, AND CONVERSION FACTORS   3 

1.3  SUPPLEMENTARY SI UNITS Two additional SI units, numerics which are considered as dimensionless derived units (see Sec. 1.4), are the radian and the steradian, for the quantities plane angle and solid angle, respectively. Table 1-2 lists these quantities and their units and symbols. The supplementary units are defined as follows: TABLE 1-2  SI Supplementary Units Radian.  The plane angle between two radii of a Quantity Unit Symbol circle that cut off on the circumference an arc equal Plane angle radian rad in length to the radius (CGPM). Solid angle steradian sr Steradian.  The solid angle which, having its vertex in the center of a sphere, cuts off an area of the surface of the sphere equal to that of a square with sides equal to the radius of the sphere (CGPM).

1.4  DERIVED SI UNITS Most of the quantities and units used in electrical engineering fall in the category of SI derived units, that is, units which can be completely defined in terms of the base and supplementary quantities described above. Table 1-3 lists the principal electrical quantities in the SI system and shows their equivalents in terms of the base and supplementary units. The definitions of these quantities, as they appear in the IEEE Standard Dictionary of Electrical and Electronics Terms (ANSI/IEEE Std 100-1988), are Hertz.  The unit of frequency 1 cycle per second. Newton.  The force that will impart an acceleration of 1 meter per second to a mass of 1 kilogram.

TABLE 1-3  SI Derived Units in Electrical Engineering

SI unit

Expression Expression in terms of in terms of Quantity Name Symbol other units SI base units Frequency (of a periodic phenomenon) Force Pressure, stress Energy, work, quantity of heat Power, radiant flux Quantity of electricity, electric charge Potential difference, electric potential,   electromotive force Electric capacitance Electric resistance Conductance Magnetic flux Magnetic flux density Celsius temperature Inductance Luminous flux Illuminance Activity (of radionuclides) Absorbed dose Dose equivalent

hertz newton pascal joule watt coulomb volt

Hz 1/s s-1 N m ⋅ kg ⋅ s-2 Pa N/m2 m-1 ⋅ kg ⋅ s-2 J N ⋅ m m2 ⋅ kg ⋅ s-2 W J/s m2 ⋅ kg ⋅ s-3 C A ⋅ s s ⋅ A V W/A m2 ⋅ kg ⋅ s-3 ⋅ A-1

farad ohm siemens weber tesla degree Celsius henry lumen lux becquerel gray sievert

F C/V m-2 ⋅ kg-1 ⋅ s4 ⋅ A2 W V/A m2 ⋅ kg ⋅ s-3 ⋅ A-2 S A/V m-2 ⋅ kg-1 ⋅ s3 ⋅ A2 Wb V ⋅ s m2 ⋅ kg ⋅ s-2 ⋅ A-1 T Wb/m2 kg ⋅ s-2 ⋅ A-1 °C K H Wb/A m2 ⋅ kg ⋅ s-2 ⋅ A-2 lm cd ⋅ sr* lx lm/m2 m-2 ⋅ cd ⋅ sr* Bq I/s s-1 Gy J/kg m2 ⋅ s-2 Sv J/kg m2 ⋅ s-2

*In this expression, the steradian (sr) is treated as a base unit. See Table 1-2.

01_Santoso_Sec01_p0001-0052.indd 3

23/11/17 2:27 PM

4  SECTION ONE

Pascal.  The pressure exerted by a force of 1 newton uniformly distributed on a surface of 1 square meter. Joule.  The work done by a force of 1 newton acting through a distance of 1 meter. Watt.  The power required to do work at the rate of 1 joule per second. Coulomb.  The quantity of electric charge that passes any cross section of a conductor in 1 second when the current is maintained constant at 1 ampere. Volt.  The potential difference between two points of a conducting wire carrying a constant current of 1 ampere, when the power dissipated between these points is 1 watt. Farad.  The capacitance of a capacitor in which a charge of 1 coulomb produces 1 volt potential difference between its terminals. Ohm.  The resistance of a conductor such that a constant current of 1 ampere in it produces a voltage of 1 volt between its ends. Siemens (mho).  The conductance of a conductor such that a constant voltage of 1 volt between its ends produces a current of 1 ampere in it. Weber.  The magnetic flux which decreases to zero when linked with a single turn induces in the turn a voltage whose time integral is 1 volt-second. Tesla.  The magnetic induction equal to 1 weber per square meter. Henry.  The inductance for which the induced voltage in volts is numerically equal to the rate of change of current in amperes per second. Lumen.  The flux through a unit solid angle (steradian) from a uniform point source of 1 candela; the flux on a unit surface all points of which are at a unit distance from a uniform point source of 1 candela. Lux.  The illumination on a surface of 1 square meter on which there is uniformly distributed a flux of 1 lumen; the illumination produced at a surface all points of which are 1 meter away from a uniform point source of 1 candela. Table 1-4 lists other quantities and the SI derived unit names and symbols useful in engineering applications. Table 1-5 lists additional quantities and the SI derived units and symbols used in mechanics, heat, and electricity.

TABLE 1-4  Examples of SI Derived Units of General Application in Engineering Quantity Angular velocity Angular acceleration Radiant intensity Radiance Area Volume Velocity Acceleration Wavenumber Density, mass Concentration (of amount of substance) Specific volume Luminance

01_Santoso_Sec01_p0001-0052.indd 4

SI unit Name radian per second radian per second squared watt per steradian watt per square meter steradian square meter cubic meter meter per second meter per second squared 1 per meter kilogram per cubic meter mole per cubic meter cubic meter per kilogram candela per square meter

Symbol rad/s rad/s2 W/sr W ⋅ m-2 ⋅ sr -1 m2 m3 m/s m/s2 m-1 kg/m3 mol/m3 m3/kg cd/m2

23/11/17 2:27 PM

UNITS, SYMBOLS, CONSTANTS, DEFINITIONS, AND CONVERSION FACTORS   5 

TABLE 1-5  Examples of SI Derived Units Used in Mechanics, Heat, and Electricity

SI unit

Quantity Name Symbol Viscosity, dynamic Moment of force Surface tension Heat flux density, irradiance Heat capacity Specific heat capacity,   specific entropy Specific energy Thermal conductivity Energy density Electric field strength Electric charge density Electric flux density Permittivity Current density Magnetic field strength Permeability Molar energy Molar entropy, molar   heat capacity

Expression in terms of SI base units

pascal second newton meter newton per meter watt per square meter joule per kelvin joule per kilogram kelvin

Pa ⋅ s m-1 ⋅ kg ⋅ s-1 N ⋅ m m2 ⋅ kg ⋅ s-2 N/m kg ⋅ s-2 W/m2 kg ⋅ s-3 J/K m2 ⋅ kg ⋅ s-2 ⋅ K-1 J/(kg ⋅ K) m2 ⋅ s-2 ⋅ K-1

joule per kilogram watt per meter kelvin joule per cubic meter volt per meter coulomb per cubic meter coulomb per square meter farad per meter ampere per square meter ampere per meter henry per meter joule per mole joule per mole kelvin

J/kg m2 ⋅ s-2 W/(m ⋅ K) m ⋅ kg ⋅ s-3 ⋅ K-1 J/m3 m-1 ⋅ kg ⋅ s-2 V/m m ⋅ kg ⋅ s-3 ⋅ A-1 C/m3 m-3 ⋅ s ⋅ A C/m2 m-2 ⋅ s ⋅ A F/m m-3 ⋅ kg-1 ⋅ s4 ⋅ A2 A/m2 A/m H/m m ⋅ kg ⋅ s-2 ⋅ A-2 J/mol m2 ⋅ kg ⋅ s-2 ⋅ mol-1 J/(mol ⋅ K) m2 ⋅ kg ⋅ s-2 ⋅ K-1mol-1

1.5  SI DECIMAL PREFIXES All SI units may have affixed to them standard prefixes which multiply the indicated quantity by a power of 10. Table 1-6 lists the standard prefixes and their symbols. A substantial part of the extensive range (1036) covered by these prefixes is in common use in electrical engineering (e.g., gigawatt, gigahertz, nanosecond, and picofarad). The practice of compounding a prefix (e.g., micromicrofarad) is deprecated (the correct term is picofarad).

1.6  USAGE OF SI UNITS, SYMBOLS, AND PREFIXES Care must be exercised in using the SI symbols and prefixes to follow exactly the capital-letter and lowercase-letter usage prescribed in Tables 1-1 through 1-8, inclusive. Otherwise, serious confusion may occur. For example, pA is the SI symbol for 10-12 of the SI unit for electric current (picoampere), while Pa is the SI symbol for pressure (the pascal). TABLE 1-6  SI Prefixes Expressing Decimal Factors

01_Santoso_Sec01_p0001-0052.indd 5

Factor Prefix Symbol

Factor Prefix Symbol

1018 exa 1015 peta 1012 tera 109 giga 106 mega 103 kilo 102 hecto 101 deka

10-1 deci d 10-2 centi c 10-3 milli m 10-6 micro m 10-9 nano n 10-12 pico p 10-15 femto f 10-18 atto a

E P T G M k h da

23/11/17 2:27 PM

6  SECTION ONE

The spelled-out names of the SI units (e.g., volt, ampere, watt) are not capitalized. The SI letter symbols are capitalized only when the name of the unit stands for or is directly derived from the name of a person. Examples are V for volt, after Italian physicist Alessandro Volta (1745–1827); A for ampere, after French physicist André-Marie Ampère (1775–1836); and W for watt, after Scottish engineer James Watt (1736–1819). The letter symbols serve the function of abbreviations, but they are used without periods. It will be noted from Tables 1-1, 1-3, and 1-5 that with the exception of the ampere, all the SI electrical quantities and units are derived from the SI base and supplementary units or from other SI derived units. Thus, many of the short names of SI units may be expressed in compound form embracing the SI units from which they are derived. Examples are the volt per ampere for the ohm, the joule per second for the watt, the ampere-second for the coulomb, and the watt-second for the joule. Such compound usage is permissible, but in engineering publications, the short names are customarily used. Use of the SI prefixes with non-SI units is not recommended; the only exception stated in IEEE Standard 268 is the microinch. Non-SI units, which are related to the metric system but are not decimal multiples of the SI units such as the calorie, torr, and kilogram-force, are specially to be avoided. A particular problem arises with the universally used units of time (minute, hour, TABLE 1-7  Time and Angle Units Used in the SI day, year, etc.) that are nondecimal multiSystem (Not Decimally Related to the SI Units) ples of the second. Table 1-7 lists these and Name Symbol Value in SI unit their equivalents in seconds, as well as their standard symbols (see also Table 1-19). minute min 1 min = 60 s The watthour (Wh) is a case in point; it hour h 1 h = 60 min = 3 600 s is equal to 3600 joules. The kilowatthour day d 1 d = 24 h = 86 400 s (kWh) is equal to 3  600  000 joules or 3.6 degree ° 1° = (p/180) rad minute ′ 1′ = (1/60)° = (p/10 800) rad megajoules (MJ). In the mid-1980s, the second ″ 1″ = (1/60)′ = (p/648 000) rad use of the kilowatthour persisted widely, although eventually it was expected to be replaced by the megajoule, with the conversion factor 3.6 megajoules per kilowatthour. Other aspects in the usage of the SI system are the subject of the following recommendations published by the IEEE: Frequency.  The CGPM has adopted the name hertz for the unit of frequency, but cycle per second is widely used. Although cycle per second is technically correct, the name hertz is preferred because of the widespread use of cycle alone as a unit of frequency. Use of cycle in place of cycle per second, or kilocycle in place of kilocycle per second, etc., is incorrect. Magnetic Flux Density.  The CGPM has adopted the name tesla for the SI unit of magnetic flux density. The name gamma shall not be used for the unit nanotesla. Temperature Scale.  In 1948, the CGPM abandoned centigrade as the name of the temperature scale. The corresponding scale is now properly named the Celsius scale, and further use of centigrade for this purpose is deprecated. Luminous Intensity.  The SI unit of luminous intensity has been given the name candela, and further use of the old name candle is deprecated. Use of the term candle-power, either as the name of a quantity or as the name of a unit, is deprecated. Luminous Flux Density.  The common British-American unit of luminous flux density is the lumen per square foot. The name footcandle, which has been used for this unit in the United States, is deprecated. Micrometer and Micron.  The names micron for micrometer and millimicron for nanometer are deprecated. Gigaelectronvolt (GeV).  Because billion means a thousand million in the United States but a million million in most other countries, its use should be avoided in technical writing. The term billion electronvolts is deprecated; use gigaelectronvolts instead.

01_Santoso_Sec01_p0001-0052.indd 6

23/11/17 2:27 PM

UNITS, SYMBOLS, CONSTANTS, DEFINITIONS, AND CONVERSION FACTORS   7 

British-American Units.  In principle, the number of British-American units in use should be reduced as rapidly as possible. Quantities are not to be expressed in mixed units. For example, mass should be expressed as 12.75 lb, rather than 12 lb or 12 oz. As a start toward implementing this recommendation, the following should be abandoned: 1. British thermal unit (for conversion factors, see Table 1-25). 2. horsepower (see Table 1-26). 3. Rankine temperature scale (see Table 1-27). 4. U.S. dry quart, U.S. liquid quart, and U.K. (Imperial) quart, together with their various multiples and subdivisions. If it is absolutely necessary to express volume in British-American units, the cubic inch or cubic foot should be used (for conversion factors, see Table 1-17). 5. footlambert. If it is absolutely necessary to express luminance in British-American units, the candela per square foot or lumen per steradian square foot should be used (see Table 1-28A). 6. inch of mercury (see Table 1-23C).

1.7  OTHER SI UNITS Table 1-8 lists units used in the SI system whose values are not derived from the base quantities but from experiment. The definitions of these units, given in the IEEE Standard Dictionary (ANSI/IEEE Std 100-1988) are Electronvolt.  The kinetic energy acquired by an electron in passing through a potential difference of 1 volt in vacuum. note: The electronvolt is equal to 1.60218 × 10-19 joule, approximately (see Table 1-25B).

Unified Atomic Mass Unit.  The fraction ½ of the mass of an atom of the nuclide 12C. note: u is equal to 1.660 54 × 10-27 kg, approximately.

TABLE 1-8  Units Used with the SI System Whose Values Are Obtained Experimentally Name

Symbol

electronvolt eV unified atomic mass unit u astronomical unit* parsec pc *The astronomical unit does not have an interna­tional symbol. AU is customarily used in English, UA in French.

Astronomical Unit.  The length of the radius of the unperturbed circular orbit of a body of negligible mass moving around the sun with a sidereal angular velocity of 0.017 202 098 950 radian per day of 86 400 ephemeris seconds. note: The International Astronomical Union has adopted a value for 1 AU equal to 1.496 × 1011 meters (see Table 1-15C).

Parsec.  The distance at which 1 astronomical unit subtends an angle of 1 second of arc. 1 pc = 206 264.8 AU = 30 857 × 1012 m, approximately (see Table 1-15C).

1.8  CGS SYSTEMS OF UNITS The units most commonly used in physics and electrical science, from their establishment in 1873 until their virtual abandonment in 1948, are based on the centimeter-gram-second (cgs) electromagnetic and electrostatic systems. They have been used primarily in theoretical work, as contrasted with the SI units (and their “practical unit” predecessors, see Sec. 1.9) used in engineering. Table 1-9 lists the principal cgs electrical quantities and their units, symbols, and equivalent values in SI units. Use of these units in electrical engineering publications has been officially deprecated by the IEEE since 1966.

01_Santoso_Sec01_p0001-0052.indd 7

24/11/17 4:21 PM

8  SECTION ONE

TABLE 1-9  CGS Units and Equivalents

Quantity

Current Voltage Capacitance Inductance Resistance Magnetic flux Magnetic field strength Magnetic flux density Magnetomotive force Current Voltage Capacitance Inductance Resistance

Name

Symbol

Correspondence with SI unit

Electromagnetic system abampere abA = 10 amperes (exactly) abvolt abV = 10-8 volt (exactly) abfarad abF = 109 farads (exactly) abhenry abH = 10-9 henry (exactly) abohm abW = 10-9 ohm (exactly) maxwell Mx = 10-8 weber (exactly) oersted Oe = 79.577 4 amperes per meter gauss G = 10-4 tesla (exactly) gilbert Gb = 0.795 774 ampere Electrostatic system statampere statA = 3.335 641 × 10-10 ampere statvolt statV = 299.792 46 volts statfarad statF = 1.112 650 × 10-12 farad stathenry statH = 8.987 554 × 1011 henrys statohm statW = 8.987 554 × 1011 ohms Mechanical units

(equally applicable to the electrostatic and electromagnetic systems) Work/energy erg erg = 10-7 joule (exactly) Force dyne dyn = 10-5 newton (exactly)

The cgs units have not been used to any great extent in electrical engineering, since many of the units are of inconvenient size compared with quantities used in practice. For example, the cgs electromagnetic unit of capacitance is the gigafarad.

1.9  PRACTICAL UNITS (ISU) The shortcomings of the cgs systems were overcome by adopting the volt, ampere, ohm, farad, coulomb, henry, joule, and watt as “practical units,” each being an exact decimal multiple of the corresponding electromagnetic cgs unit (see Table 1-9). From 1908 to 1948, the practical electrical units were embodied in the International System Units (ISU, not to be confused with the SI units). During these years, precise formulation of the units in terms of mass, length, and time was impractical because of imprecision in the measurements of the three basic quantities. As an alternative, the units were standardized by comparison with apparatus, called prototype standards. By 1948, advances in the measurement of the basic quantities permitted precise standardization by reference to the definitions of the basic units, and the International System Units were officially abandoned in favor of the absolute units. These in turn were supplanted by the SI units which came into force in 1950.

1.10  DEFINITIONS OF ELECTRICAL QUANTITIES The following definitions are based on the principal meanings listed in the IEEE Standard Dictionary (ANSI/IEEE Std 100-1988), which should be consulted for extended meanings, compound terms, and related definitions. The United States Standard Symbols (ANSI/IEEE Std 260, IEEE Std 280) for these quantities are shown in parentheses (see also Tables 1-10 and 1-11). Electrical units used in the United States prior to 1969, with SI equivalents, are listed in Table 1-29.

01_Santoso_Sec01_p0001-0052.indd 8

23/11/17 2:27 PM

UNITS, SYMBOLS, CONSTANTS, DEFINITIONS, AND CONVERSION FACTORS   9 

Admittance (Y).  An admittance of a linear constant-parameter system is the ratio of the phasor equivalent of the steady-state sine-wave current or current-like quantity (response) to the phasor equivalent of the corresponding voltage or voltage-like quantity (driving force). Capacitance (C).  Capacitance is that property of a system of conductors and dielectrics which permits the storage of electrically separated charges when potential differences exist between the conductors. Its value is expressed as the ratio of an electric charge to a potential difference. Coupling Coefficient (k).  Coefficient of coupling (used only in the case of resistive, capacitive, and inductive coupling) is the ratio of the mutual impedance of the coupling to the square root of the product of the self-impedances of similar elements in the two circuit loops considered. Unless otherwise specified, coefficient of coupling refers to inductive coupling, in which case k = M/(L1L2)1/2, where M is the mutual inductance, L1 the self-inductance of one loop, and L2 the self-inductance of the other. Conductance (G) 1. The conductance of an element, device, branch, network, or system is the factor by which the mean-square voltage must be multiplied to give the corresponding power lost by dissipation as heat or as other permanent radiation or as electromagnetic energy from the circuit. 2. Conductance is the real part of admittance. Conductivity (g ).  The conductivity of a material is a factor such that the conduction current density is equal to the electric field strength in the material multiplied by the conductivity. Current (I).  Current is a generic term used when there is no danger of ambiguity to refer to any one or more of the currents described below. (For example, in the expression “the current in a simple series circuit,” the word current refers to the conduction current in the wire of the inductor and to the displacement current between the plates of the capacitor.) Conduction Current.  The conduction current through any surface is the integral of the normal component of the conduction current density over that surface. Displacement Current.  The displacement current through any surface is the integral of the normal component of the displacement current density over that surface. Current Density (J).  Current density is a generic term used when there is no danger of ambiguity to refer either to conduction current density or to displacement current density or to both. Displacement Current Density.  The displacement current density at any point in an electric field is (in the International System) the time rate of change of the electric-flux-density vector at that point. Conduction Current Density.  The electric conduction current density at any point at which there is a motion of electric charge is a vector quantity whose direction is that of the flow of positive charge at this point, and whose magnitude is the limit of the time rate of flow of net (positive) charge across a small plane area perpendicular to the motion, divided by this area, as the area taken approaches zero in a macroscopic sense, so as to always include this point. The flow of charge may result from the movement of free electrons or ions but is not in general, except in microscopic studies, taken to include motions of charges resulting from the polarization of the dielectric. Damping Coefficient (d).  If F is a function of time given by F = A exp (-dt) sin (2pt/T ) then d is the damping coefficient. Elastance (S).  Elastance is the reciprocal of capacitance. Electric Charge, Quantity of Electricity (Q).  Electric charge is a fundamentally assumed concept required by the existence of forces measurable experimentally. It has two forms known as positive and negative. The electric charge on (or in) a body or within a closed surface is the excess of one form of electricity over the other. Electric Constant, Permittivity of Vacuum ( Γe ).  The electric constant pertinent to any system of units is the scalar which in that system relates the electric flux density D in vacuum, to E,

01_Santoso_Sec01_p0001-0052.indd 9

23/11/17 2:27 PM

10  SECTION ONE

the electric field strength (D = ΓeE). It also relates the mechanical force between two charges in vacuum to their magnitudes and separation. Thus, in the equation F = ΓrQ1Q2/4pΓer2, the force F between charges Q1 and Q2 separated by a distance rΓe is the electric constant, and Γr is a dimensionless factor which is unity in a rationalized system and 4p in an unrationalized system. note: In the cgs electrostatic system, Γe is assigned measure unity and the dimension “numeric.” In the cgs electromagnetic system, the measure of Γe is that of 1/c2, and the dimension is [L-2T2]. In the International System, the measure of Γe is 107/4pc2, and the dimension is [L-3M-1T 4I 2]. Here, c is the speed of light expressed in the appropriate system of units (see Table 1-12).

Electric Field Strength (E).  The electric field strength at a given point in an electric field is the vector limit of the quotient of the force that a small stationary charge at that point will experience, by virtue of its charge, as the charge approaches zero. Electric Flux ( Ψ).  The electric flux through a surface is the surface integral of the normal component of the electric flux density over the surface. Electric Flux Density, Electric Displacement (D).  The electric flux density is a quantity related to the charge displaced within a dielectric by application of an electric field. Electric flux density at any point in an isotropic dielectric is a vector which has the same direction as the electric field strength, and a magnitude equal to the product of the electric field strength and the permittivity ϵ. In a nonisotropic medium, ϵ may be represented by a tensor and D is not necessarily parallel to E. Electric Polarization (P).  The electric polarization is the vector quantity defined by the equation P = (D - ΓeE)/Γr, where D is the electric flux density, Γe is the electric constant, E is the electric field strength, and Γr is a coefficient that is set equal to unity in a rationalized system and to 4p in an unrationalized system. Electric Susceptibility (ce ).  Electric susceptibility is the quantity defined by ce = (ϵr - 1)/Γr, where ϵr is the relative permittivity and Γr is a coefficient that is set equal to unity in a rationalized system and to 4p in an unrationalized system. Electrization (Ei ).  The electrization is the electric polarization divided by the electric constant of the system of units used. Electrostatic Potential (V).  The electrostatic potential at any point is the potential difference between that point and an agreed-on reference point, usually the point at infinity. Electrostatic Potential Difference (V).  The electrostatic potential difference between two points is the scalar-product line integral of the electric field strength along any path from one point to the other in an electric field, resulting from a static distribution of electric charge. Impedance (Z).  An impedance of a linear constant-parameter system is the ratio of the phasor equivalent of a steady-state sine-wave voltage or voltage-like quantity (driving force) to the phasor equivalent of a steady-state sine-wave current or current-like quantity (response). In electromagnetic radiation, electric field strength is considered the driving force and magnetic field strength the response. In mechanical systems, mechanical force is always considered as a driving force and velocity as a response. In a general sense, the dimension (and unit) of impedance in a given application may be whatever results from the ratio of the dimensions of the quantity chosen as the driving force to the dimensions of the quantity chosen as the response. However, in the types of systems cited above, any deviation from the usual convention should be noted. Mutual Impedance.  Mutual impedance between two loops (meshes) is the factor by which the phasor equivalent of the steady-state sine-wave current in one loop must be multiplied to give the phasor equivalent of the steady-state sine-wave voltage in the other loop caused by the current in the first loop. Self-impedance.  Self-impedance of a loop (mesh) is the impedance of a passive loop with all other loops of the open-circuited network. Transfer Impedance.  A transfer impedance is the impedance obtained when the response is determined at a point other than that at which the driving force is applied.

01_Santoso_Sec01_p0001-0052.indd 10

23/11/17 2:27 PM

UNITS, SYMBOLS, CONSTANTS, DEFINITIONS, AND CONVERSION FACTORS   11 

note: In the case of an electric circuit, the response may be determined in any branch except that which contains the driving force.

Logarithmic Decrement (Λ).  If F is a function of time given by F = A exp (-dt) sin (2pt/T ) then the logarithmic decrement Λ = Td. Magnetic Constant, Permeability of Vacuum (Γm ).  The magnetic constant pertinent to any system of units is the scalar which in that system relates the mechanical force between two currents in vacuum to their magnitudes and geometric configurations. For example, the equation for the force F on a length l of two parallel straight conductors of infinite length and negligible circular cross section, carrying constant currents I1 and I2 and separated by a distance r in vacuum, is F = ΓmΓr I12l/2pr, where Γm is the magnetic constant and Γr is a coefficient set equal to unity in a rationalized system and to 4p in an unrationalized system. note: In the cgs electromagnetic system, Γm is assigned the magnitude unity and the dimension “numeric.” In the cgs electrostatic system, the magnitude of Γm is that of 1/c2, and the dimension is [L-2T 2]. In the International System, Γm is assigned the magnitude 4p × 10-7 and has the dimension [LMT -2I-2].

Magnetic Field Strength (H).  Magnetic field strength is that vector point function whose curl is the current density and which is proportional to magnetic flux density in regions free of magnetized matter. Magnetic Flux (F).  The magnetic flux through a surface is the surface integral of the normal component of the magnetic flux density over the surface. Magnetic Flux Density, Magnetic Induction (B).  Magnetic flux density is that vector quantity which produces a torque on a plane current loop in accordance with the relation T = IAn × B, where n is the positive normal to the loop and A is its area. The concept of flux density is extended to a point inside a solid body by defining the flux density at such a point as that which would be measured in a thin disk-shaped cavity in the body centered at that point, the axis of the cavity being in the direction of the flux density. Magnetic Moment (m).  The magnetic moment of a magnetized body is the volume integral of the magnetization. The magnetic moment of a loop carrying current I is m = (1/2)Œ r × dr, where r is the radius vector from an arbitrary origin to a point on the loop, and where the path of integration is taken around the entire loop. note: The magnitude of the moment of a plane current loop is IA, where A is the area of the loop. The reference direction for the current in the loop indicates a clockwise rotation when the observer is looking through the loop in the direction of the positive normal.

Magnetic Polarization, Intrinsic Magnetic Flux Density (J, Bi ).  The magnetic polarization is the vector quantity defined by the equation J = (B - ΓmH)/Γr, where B is the magnetic flux density, Γm is the magnetic constant, H is the magnetic field strength, and Γr is a coefficient that is set equal to unity in a rationalized system and to 4p in an unrationalized system. Magnetic Susceptibility (cm ).  Magnetic susceptibility is the quantity defined by cm = (mr - 1)/Γr, where mr is the relative permeability and Γr is a coefficient that is set equal to unity in a rationalized system and to 4p in an unrationalized system. Magnetic Vector Potential (A).  The magnetic vector potential is a vector point function characterized by the relation that its curl is equal to the magnetic flux density and its divergence vanishes. Magnetization (M, Hi).  The magnetization is the magnetic polarization divided by the magnetic constant of the system of units used. Magnetomotive Force (Fm).  The magnetomotive force acting in any closed path in a magnetic field is the line integral of the magnetic field strength around the path.

01_Santoso_Sec01_p0001-0052.indd 11

23/11/17 2:27 PM

12  SECTION ONE

Mutual Inductance (M).  The mutual inductance between two loops (meshes) in a circuit is the quotient of the flux linkage produced in one loop divided by the current in another loop, which induces the flux linkage. Permeability.  Permeability is a general term used to express various relationships between magnetic flux density and magnetic field strength. These relationships are either (1) absolute per­ meability (m), which in general is the quotient of a change in magnetic flux density divided by the corresponding change in magnetic field strength, or (2) relative permeability (mr), which is the ratio of the absolute permeability to the magnetic constant. Permeance (Pm).  Permeance is the reciprocal of reluctance.

Permittivity, Capacitivity (ϵ).  The permittivity of a homogeneous, isotropic dielectric, in any system of units, is the product of its relative permittivity and the electric constant appropriate to that system of units. Relative Permittivity, Relative Capacitivity, Dielectric Constant (ϵr).  The relative permittivity of any homogeneous isotropic material is the ratio of the capacitance of a given configuration of electrodes with the material as a dielectric to the capacitance of the same electrode configuration with a vacuum as the dielectric constant. Experimentally, vacuum must be replaced by the material at all points where it makes a significant change in the capacitance. Power (P).  Power is the time rate of transferring or transforming energy. Electric power is the time rate of flow of electrical energy. The instantaneous electric power at a single terminal pair is equal to the product of the instantaneous voltage multiplied by the instantaneous current. If both voltage and current are periodic in time, the time average of the instantaneous power, taken over an integral number of periods, is the active power, usually called simply the power when there is no danger of confusion. If the voltage and current are sinusoidal functions of time, the product of the rms value of the voltage and the rms value of the current is called the apparent power; the product of the rms value of the voltage and the rms value of the in-phase component of the current is the active power; and the product of the rms value of the voltage and the rms value of the quadrature component of the current is called the reactive power. The SI unit of instantaneous power and active power is the watt. The germane unit for apparent power is the voltampere and for reactive power it is the var. Power Factor (Fp ).  Power factor is the ratio of active power to apparent power.

Q .  Q, sometimes called quality factor, is that measure of the quality of a component, network, system, or medium considered as an energy storage unit in the steady state with sinusoidal driving force which is given by Q=

2π × (maximum energy in storage) energy dissipated per cycle of the driving force

note: For single components such as inductors and capacitors, the Q at any frequency is the ratio of the equivalent series reactance to resistance, or of the equivalent shunt susceptance to conductance. For networks that contain several elements and for distributed parameter systems, the Q is generally evaluated at a frequency of resonance. The nonloaded Q of a system is the value of Q obtained when only the incidental dissipation of the system elements is present. The loaded Q of a system is the value Q obtained when the system is coupled to a device that dissipates energy. The “period” in the expression for Q is that of the driving force, not that of energy storage, which is usually half of that of the driving force.

Reactance (X).  Reactance is the imaginary part of impedance. Reluctance (Rm).  Reluctance is the ratio of the magnetomotive force in a magnetic circuit to the magnetic flux through any cross section of the magnetic circuit. Reluctivity (n).  Reluctivity is the reciprocal of permeability.

01_Santoso_Sec01_p0001-0052.indd 12

23/11/17 2:27 PM

UNITS, SYMBOLS, CONSTANTS, DEFINITIONS, AND CONVERSION FACTORS   13 

Resistance (R) 1. The resistance of an element, device, branch, network, or system is the factor by which the mean-square conduction current must be multiplied to give the corresponding power lost by dissipation as heat or as other permanent radiation or as electromagnetic energy from the circuit. 2. Resistance is the real part of impedance. Resistivity (r).  The resistivity of a material is a factor such that the conduction current density is equal to the electric field strength in the material divided by the resistivity. Self-inductance (L)  1. Self-inductance is the quotient of the flux linkage of a circuit divided by the current in that same circuit which induces the flux linkage. If u = voltage induced, u = d(Li)/dt. 2. Self-inductance is the factor L in the ½Li2 if the latter gives the energy stored in the magnetic field as a result of the current i. note: Definitions 1 and 2 are not equivalent except when L is constant. In all other cases, the definition being used must be specified. The two definitions are restricted to relatively slow changes in i, that is, to low frequencies, but by analogy with the definitions, equivalent inductances often may be evolved in high-frequency applications such as resonators and waveguide equivalent circuits. Such “inductances,” when used, must be specified. The two definitions are restricted to cases in which the branches are small in physical size when compared with a wavelength, whatever the frequency. Thus, in the case of a uniform 2-wire transmission line it may be necessary even at low frequencies to consider the parameters as “distributed” rather than to have one inductance for the entire line.

Susceptance (B).  Susceptance is the imaginary part of admittance. Transfer Function (H).  A transfer function is that function of frequency which is the ratio of a phasor output to a phasor input in a linear system. Transfer Ratio (H).  A transfer ratio is a dimensionless transfer function. Voltage, Electromotive Force (V).  The voltage along a specified path in an electric field is the dot product line integral of the electric field strength along this path. As defined, here voltage is synonymous with potential difference only in an electrostatic field.

1.11  DEFINITIONS OF QUANTITIES OF RADIATION AND LIGHT The following definitions are based on the principal meanings listed in the IEEE Standard Dictionary (ANSI/IEEE Std 100-2000), which should be consulted for extended meanings, compound terms, and related definitions. The symbols shown in parentheses are from Table 1-10. Candlepower.  Candlepower is luminous intensity expressed in candelas (term deprecated by IEEE). Emissivity, Total Emissivity (ϵ).  The total emissivity of an element of surface of a temperature radiator is the ratio of its radiant flux density (radiant exitance) to that of a blackbody at the same temperature. Spectral Emissivity, ϵ(l).  The spectral emissivity of an element of surface of a temperature radiator at any wavelength is the ratio of its radiant flux density per unit wavelength interval (spectral radiant exitance) at that wavelength to that of a blackbody at the same temperature. Light.  For the purposes of illuminating engineering, light is visually evaluated radiant energy. note 1: Light is psychophysical, neither purely physical nor purely psychological. Light is not synonymous with radiant energy, however restricted, nor is it merely sensation. In a general nonspecialized sense, light is the aspect of radiant energy of which a human observer is aware through the stimulation of the retina of the eye. note 2: Radiant energy outside the visible portion of the spectrum must not be discussed using the quantities and units of light; it is nonsense to refer to “ultraviolet light” or to express infrared flux in lumens.

01_Santoso_Sec01_p0001-0052.indd 13

23/11/17 2:27 PM

14  SECTION ONE

Luminance (Photometric Brightness) (L).  Luminance in a direction, at a point on the surface of a source, or of a receiver, or on any other real or virtual surface is the quotient of the luminous flux (F) leaving, passing through, or arriving at a surface element surrounding the point, propagated in directions defined by an elementary cone containing the given direction, divided by the product of the solid angle of the cone (dw) and the area of the orthogonal projection of the surface element on a plane perpendicular to the given direction (dA cos q). L = d 2 F/[dw  (da cos q)] = dI/(dA cos q). In the defining equation, q is the angle between the direction of observation and the normal to the surface. In common usage, the term brightness usually refers to the intensity of sensation which results from viewing surfaces or spaces from which light comes to the eye. This sensation is determined in part by the definitely measurable luminance defined above and in part by conditions of observation such as the state of adaptation of the eye. In much of the literature, the term brightness, used alone, refers to both luminance and sensation. The context usually indicates which meaning is intended. Luminous Efficacy of Radiant Flux.  The luminous efficacy of radiant flux is the quotient of the total luminous flux divided by the total radiant flux. It is expressed in lumens per watt. Spectral Luminous Efficacy of Radiant Flux, K(l).  Spectral luminous efficacy of radiant flux is the quotient of the luminous flux at a given wavelength divided by the radiant flux at the wavelength. It is expressed in lumens per watt. Spectral Luminous Efficiency of Radiant Flux.  Spectral luminous efficiency of radiant flux is the ratio of the luminous efficacy for a given wavelength to the value at the wavelength of maximum luminous efficacy. It is a numeric. note: The term spectral luminous efficiency replaces the previously used terms relative luminosity and relative luminosity factor.

Luminous Flux (F).  Luminous flux is the time rate of flow of light. Luminous Flux Density at a Surface.  Luminous flux density at a surface is luminous flux per unit area of the surface. In referring to flux incident on a surface, this is called illumination (E). The preferred term for luminous flux leaving a surface is luminous exitance (M), which has been called luminous emittance. Luminous Intensity (I).  The luminous intensity of a source of light in a given direction is the luminous flux proceeding from the source per unit solid angle in the direction considered (I = dF/dw). Quantity of Light (Q).  Quantity of light (luminous energy) is the product of the luminous flux by the time it is maintained, that is, it is the time integral of luminous flux. Radiance (L).  Radiance in a direction, at a point on the surface, of a source, or of a receiver, or on any other real or virtual surface is the quotient of the radiant flux (P) leaving, passing through, or arriving at a surface element surrounding the point, and propagated in directions defined by an elementary cone containing the given direction, divided by the product of the solid angle of the cone (dw) and the area of the orthogonal projection of the surface element on a plane perpendicular to the given direction (dA cos q). L = d2P/dw (dA cos q) = dI/(dA cos q). In the defining equation, q is the angle between the normal to the element of the source and the direction of observation. Radiant Density (w).  Radiant density is radiant energy per unit volume. Radiant Energy (W).  Radiant energy is energy traveling in the form of electromagnetic waves. Radiant Flux Density at a Surface.  Radiant flux density at a surface is radiant flux per unit area of the surface. When referring to radiant flux incident on a surface, this is called irradiance (E). The preferred term for radiant flux leaving a surface is radiant exitance (M), which has been called radiant emittance. Radiant Intensity (I).  The radiant intensity of a source in a given direction is the radiant flux proceeding from the source per unit solid angle in the direction considered (I = dP/dw). Radiant Power, Radiant Flux (P).  Radiant flux is the time rate of flow of radiant energy.

01_Santoso_Sec01_p0001-0052.indd 14

23/11/17 2:27 PM

UNITS, SYMBOLS, CONSTANTS, DEFINITIONS, AND CONVERSION FACTORS   15 

1.12  LETTER SYMBOLS Tables 1-10 and 1-11 list the United States Standard letter symbols for quantities and units (ANSI Std Y10.5, ANSI/IEEE Std 260). A quantity symbol is a single letter (e.g., I for electric current) specified as to general form of type and modified by one or more subscripts or superscripts when appropriate. A unit symbol is a letter or group of letters (e.g., cm for centimeter), or in a few cases, a special sign, that may be used in the place of the name of the unit. Symbols for quantities are printed in italic type, while symbols for units are printed in roman type. Subscripts and superscripts that are letter symbols for quantities or for indices are printed in roman type as follows: Cp heat capacity at constant pressure p aij, a45   matrix elements Ii, Io input current, output current For indicating the vector character of a quantity, boldface italic type is used (e.g., F for force). Ordinary italic type is used to represent the magnitude of a vector quantity. The product of two quantities is indicated by writing ab. The quotient may be indicated by writing a , b

a/b ,

or

ab −1

If more than one solidus (/) is required in any algebraic term, parentheses must be inserted to remove any ambiguity. Thus, one may write (a/b)/c or a/bc, but not a/b/c. Unit symbols are written in lowercase letters, except for the first letter when the name of the unit is derived from a proper name, and except for a very few that are not formed from letters. When a compound unit is formed by multiplication of two or more other units, its symbol consists of the symbols for the separate units joined by a raised dot (e.g., N ⋅ m for newton = meter). The dot may be omitted in the case of familiar compounds such as watthour (Wh) if no confusion would result. Hyphens should not be used in symbols for compound units. Positive and negative exponents may be used with the symbols for units. When a symbol representing a unit that has a prefix (see Sec. 1.5) carries an exponent, this indicates that the multiple (or submultiple) unit is raised to the power expressed by the exponent. Examples:

2 cm3 = 2(cm)3 = 2(10-2 m)3 = 2 ⋅ 10-6 m3 1 ms-1 = 1(ms)-1 = 1(10-3 s)-1 = 103 s-1 Phasor Quantities, represented by complex numbers or complex time-varying functions, are extensively used in certain branches of electrical engineering. The following notation and typography are standard:



Notation Remarks

Complex quantity Z Z = |Z| exp (jf) Z = Re Z + j Im Z Real part Re Z, Z′ Imaginary part Im Z, Z″ Conjugate complex quantity Z * Z * = Re Z - j Im Z Modulus of Z |Z| Phase of Z, Argument of Z arg Z arg Z = f

01_Santoso_Sec01_p0001-0052.indd 15

23/11/17 2:27 PM

16  SECTION ONE

TABLE 1-10  Standard Symbols for Quantities Quantity

Quantity symbol

Unit based on International System

Remarks

Space and time:   Angle, plane a,b,g,q,f,y radian Other Greek letters are permitted where no   conflict results.   Angle, solid W ⋅ ⋅ ⋅ w steradian  Length l meter   Breadth, width b meter  Height h meter  Thickness d, d meter  Radius r meter  Diameter d meter   Length of path line segment s meter  Wavelength l meter ~   Wave number s ⋅ ⋅ ⋅ n reciprocal meter s = 1/l The symbol n~ is used in spectroscopy.   Circular wave number k radian per meter k = 2p/l    Angular wave number  Area A ⋅ ⋅ ⋅ S square meter  Volume V, u cubic meter  Time t second  Period T second   Time constant t  ⋅ ⋅ ⋅ T second  Frequency f  ⋅ ⋅ ⋅ n second   Speed of rotation n revolution per  second   Rotational frequency   Angular frequency w radian per second w  = 2pf   Angular velocity w radian per second   Complex (angular) p ⋅ ⋅ ⋅ s reciprocal second p = -d + jw   frequency   Oscillation constant   Angular acceleration a radian per second  squared  Velocity u meter per second   Speed of propagation c meter per second In vacuum, c0    of electromagnetic waves   Acceleration (linear) a meter per second  squared   Acceleration of free fall g meter per second   Gravitational acceleration  squared   Damping coefficient d neper per second   Logarithmic decrement Λ (numeric)   Attenuation coefficient a neper per meter   Phase coefficient b radian per meter   Propagation coefficient g reciprocal meter g  = a + jb Mechanics:  Mass m kilogram   (Mass) density r kilogram per cubic Mass divided by volume  meter  Momentum p kilogram meter per  second   Moment of inertia I, J kilogram meter  squared

01_Santoso_Sec01_p0001-0052.indd 16

23/11/17 2:27 PM

UNITS, SYMBOLS, CONSTANTS, DEFINITIONS, AND CONVERSION FACTORS   17 

TABLE 1-10  Standard Symbols for Quantities (Continued) Quantity

Quantity symbol

Unit based on International System

Remarks

 Force F newton  Weight W newton Varies with acceleration of free fall   Weight density g newton per cubic meter Weight divided by volume   Moment of force M newton meter  Torque T  ⋅ ⋅ ⋅ M newton meter  Pressure p newton per square The SI name pascal has been adopted   meter   for this unit.   Normal stress s newton per square meter   Shear stress t newton per square meter   Stress tensor s newton per square meter   Linear strain e (numeric)   Shear strain g (numeric)   Strain tensor e (numeric)   Volume strain q (numeric)   Poisson’s ratio m, n (numeric) Lateral contraction divided by elongation   Young’s modulus E newton per square meter E = s/e    Modulus of elasticity   Shear modulus G newton per square meter G = t/g    Modulus of rigidity   Bulk modulus K newton per square meter K = - p/q  Work W joule  Energy E, W joule U is recommended in thermodynamics   for internal energy and for blackbody  radiation.   Energy (volume) density w joule per cubic meter  Power P watt  Efficiency h (numeric) Heat:   Thermodynamic temperature T  ⋅ ⋅ ⋅ Q kelvin   Temperature t  ⋅ ⋅ ⋅ q degree Celsius The word centigrade has been abandoned as    Customary temperature   the name of a temperature scale.  Heat Q joule   Internal energy U joule   Heat flow rate F ⋅ ⋅ ⋅ q watt Heat crossing a surface divided by time   Temperature coefficient a reciprocal kelvin   Thermal diffusivity a square meter per second   Thermal conductivity l  ⋅ ⋅ ⋅ k watt per meter kelvin   Thermal conductance Gq watt per kelvin   Thermal resistivity rq meter kelvin per watt   Thermal resistance Rq kelvin per watt   Thermal capacitance Cq joule per kelvin   Heat capacity   Thermal impedance Zq kelvin per watt   Specific heat capacity c joule per kelvin Heat capacity divided by mass  kilogram  Entropy S joule per kelvin   Specific entropy s joule per kelvin Entropy divided by mass  kilogram  Enthalpy H joule Radiation and light:   Radiant intensity I ⋅ ⋅ ⋅ Ie watt per steradian   Radiant power P, F ⋅ ⋅ ⋅ Fe watt   Radiant flux (Continued)

01_Santoso_Sec01_p0001-0052.indd 17

23/11/17 2:27 PM

18  SECTION ONE

TABLE 1-10  Standard Symbols for Quantities (Continued ) Quantity

Quantity symbol

Unit based on International System

Remarks

  Radiant energy W, Q ⋅ ⋅ ⋅ Qe joule The symbol U is used for the special case   of blackbody radiant energy.  Radiance L ⋅ ⋅ ⋅ Le watt per steradian   square meter   Radiant exitance M ⋅ ⋅ ⋅ Me watt per square meter  Irradiance E ⋅ ⋅ ⋅ Ee watt per square meter   Luminous intensity I ⋅ ⋅ ⋅ Iv candela   Luminous flux F ⋅ ⋅ ⋅ Fv lumen   Quantity of light Q ⋅ ⋅ ⋅ Qv lumen second  Luminance L ⋅ ⋅ ⋅ Lv candela per square meter   Luminous exitance M ⋅ ⋅ ⋅ Mv lumen per square meter  Illuminance E ⋅ ⋅ ⋅ Ev lux   Illumination   Luminous efficacy† K(l) lumen per watt   Total luminous efficacy K, Kt lumen per watt   Refractive index n (numeric)    Index of refraction  Emissivity† ϵ(l) (numeric)   Total emissivity ϵ, ϵt (numeric)  Absorptance† a(l) (numeric)  Transmittance† t (l) (numeric)  Reflectance† r(l) (numeric) Fields and circuits:   Electric charge Q coulomb    Quantity of electricity   Linear density of charge l coulomb per meter   Surface density of charge s coulomb per square  meter   Volume density of charge r coulomb per cubic  meter   Electric field strength E ⋅ ⋅ ⋅ K volt per meter   Electrostatic potential V ⋅ ⋅ ⋅ f volt   Potential difference   Retarded scalar potential Vr volt  Voltage V, E ⋅ ⋅ ⋅ U volt   Electromotive force   Electric flux Ψ coulomb   Electric flux density D coulomb per square   (Electric) displacement  meter  Capacitivity ϵ farad per meter Of vacuum, ev   Permittivity   Absolute permittivity   Relative capacitivity ϵr, k (numeric)   Relative permittivity   Dielectric constant   Complex relative ϵr*, k* (numeric) ϵr* = ϵ¢r - jϵ″r   capacitivity   Complex relative ϵ¢r is positive for lossy materials. The    permittivity   complex absolute permittivity ϵ* is   defined in analogous fashion.   Complex dielectric    constant

01_Santoso_Sec01_p0001-0052.indd 18

23/11/17 2:27 PM

UNITS, SYMBOLS, CONSTANTS, DEFINITIONS, AND CONVERSION FACTORS   19 

TABLE 1-10  Standard Symbols for Quantities (Continued ) Quantity

Quantity symbol

Unit based on International System

Remarks

  Electric susceptibility ce ⋅ ⋅ ⋅ ϵi (numeric) ce = ϵr - 1           MKSA  Electrization Ei ⋅ ⋅ ⋅ Ki volt per meter Ei = (D/Γe ) - E         MKSA   Electric polarization P coulomb per square P = D - ΓeE          MKSA  meter   Electric dipole moment p coulomb meter   (Electric) current I ampere   Current density J ⋅ ⋅ ⋅ S ampere per square  meter   Linear current density A ⋅ ⋅ ⋅ a ampere per meter Current divided by the breadth of the   conducting sheet   Magnetic field strength H ampere per meter   Magnetic (scalar) potential U, Um ampere   Magnetic potential    difference   Magnetomotive force F, Fm ⋅ ⋅ ⋅ ℱ ampere   Magnetic flux F weber   Magnetic flux density B tesla   Magnetic induction   Magnetic flux linkage Λ weber   (Magnetic) vector potential A weber per meter   Retarded (magnetic) Ar weber per meter    vector potential  Permeability m henry per meter Of vacuum, mv   Absolute permeability   Relative permeability mr (numeric)   Initial (relative) mo (numeric)   permeability   Complex relative mr* (numeric) mr* = m′r - jm″r   permeability m″r is positive for lossy materials.   The complex absolute permeability   m* is defined in analogous fashion.   Magnetic susceptibility cm ⋅ ⋅ ⋅ mi (numeric) cm = mr - 1           MKSA  Reluctivity n meter per henry n = 1/m  Magnetization Hi , M ampere per meter Hi = (B/Γm) - H         MKSA   Magnetic polarization J, Bi tesla J = B - ΓmH           MKSA   Intrinsic magnetic    flux density   Magnetic (area) moment m ampere meter squared The vector product m × B is equal   to the torque.  Capacitance C farad  Elastance S reciprocal farad S = 1/C   (Self-) inductance L henry   Reciprocal inductance Γ reciprocal henry   Mutual inductance Lij , Mij henry If only a single mutual inductance is  involved, M may be used without subscripts.   Coupling coefficient k ⋅ ⋅ ⋅ k (numeric) k = Lij(LiLj)-1/2   Leakage coefficient s (numeric) s = 1 - k2   Number of turns N, n (numeric)    (in a winding)   Number of phases m (numeric)   Turns ratio n ⋅ ⋅ ⋅ n* (numeric) (Continued)

01_Santoso_Sec01_p0001-0052.indd 19

23/11/17 2:27 PM

20  SECTION ONE

TABLE 1-10  Standard Symbols for Quantities (Continued) Quantity

Quantity symbol

Unit based on International System

Remarks

  Transformer ratio a (numeric) Square root of the ratio of secondary to   primary self-inductance. Where the   coefficient of coupling is high,   a ≈ n*.  Resistance R ohm  Resistivity r ohm meter   Volume resistivity  Conductance G siemens G = Re Y  Conductivity g, s siemens per meter g = 1/r The symbol s is used in field theory, as g  is   used for the propagation coefficient.  Reluctance R, Rm ⋅ ⋅ ⋅ ℛ reciprocal henry Magnetic potential difference divided by   magnetic flux  Permeance P, Pm ⋅ ⋅ ⋅ 𝒫 henry Pm = 1/Rm  Impedance Z ohm  Reactance X ohm   Capacitive reactance XC ohm For a pure capacitance, XC = -1/wC   Inductive reactance XL ohm For a pure capacitance, XL = wL   Quality factor Q (numeric) See Q in Sec. 1.10.  Admittance Y siemens Y = 1/Z = G + jB  Susceptance B siemens B = Im Y   Loss angle d radian d = (R/|X|)   Active power P watt   Reactive power Q ⋅ ⋅ ⋅ Pq var   Apparent power S ⋅ ⋅ ⋅ Ps voltampere   Power factor cos f ⋅ ⋅ ⋅ Fp (numeric)   Reactive factor sin f ⋅ ⋅ ⋅ Fq (numeric)   Input power Pi watt   Output power Po watt   Poynting vector S watt per square meter   Characteristic impedance Zo ohm   Surge impedance   Intrinsic impedance h ohm    of a medium   Voltage standing-wave ratio S (numeric)   Resonance frequency fr hertz   Critical frequency fc hertz   Cutoff frequency   Resonance angular wr radian per second   frequency   Critical angular frequency wc radian per second    Cutoff angular frequency   Resonance wavelength lr meter   Critical wavelength lc meter   Cutoff wavelength   Wavelength in a guide lg meter   Hysteresis coefficient kh (numeric)   Eddy-current coefficient ke (numeric)   Phase angle f, q radian   Phase difference (l) is not part of the basic symbol but indicates that the quantity is a function of wavelength.

†

01_Santoso_Sec01_p0001-0052.indd 20

23/11/17 2:27 PM

UNITS, SYMBOLS, CONSTANTS, DEFINITIONS, AND CONVERSION FACTORS   21 

TABLE 1-11  Standard Symbols for Units Unit

Symbol

Notes

ampere A SI unit of electric current ampere (turn) A SI unit of magnetomotive force ampere-hour Ah Also A ⋅ h ampere per meter A/m SI unit of magnetic field strength angstrom Å 1 Å = 10-10 m. Deprecated. atmosphere, standard atm 1 atm = 101 325 Pa. Deprecated. atmosphere, technical at 1 at = 1 kgf/cm2. Deprecated. atomic mass unit (unified) u The (unified) atomic mass unit is defined as one-twelfth of the   mass of an atom of the 12C nuclide. Use of the old atomic mass   (amu), defined by reference to oxygen, is deprecated. atto a SI prefix for 10-18 attoampere aA bar bar 1 bar = 100 kPa. Use of the bar is strongly discouraged, except   for limited use in meteorology. barn b 1 b = 10-28 m2 barrel bb1 1 bb1 = 42 galUS = 158.99 L barrel per day bb1/d This is the standard barrel used for petroleum, etc. A different   standard barrel is used for fruits, vegetables, and dry commodities. baud Bd In telecommunications, a unit of signaling speed equal to one   element per second. The signaling speed in bauds is equal to the   reciprocal of the signal element length in seconds. bel B becquerel Bq SI unit of activity of a radionuclide billion electronvolts GeV The name gigaelectronvolt is preferred for this unit. bit b In information theory, the bit is a unit of information content equal   to the information content of a message, the a priori probability   of which is one-half. In computer science, the bit is a unit of storage capacity. The   capacity, in bits, of a storage device is the logarithm to the base   two of the number of possible states of the device. bit per second b/s British thermal unit Btu calorie (International Table calorie) calIT 1 calIT = 4.1868 J. Deprecated. calorie (thermochemical calorie) cal 1 cal = 4.1840 J. Deprecated. candela cd SI unit of luminous intensity candela per square inch cd/in2 Use of the SI unit, cd/m2, is preferred. candela per square meter cd/m2 SI unit of luminance. The name nit is sometimes used for this unit. candle cd The unit of luminous intensity has been given the name candela;   use of the name candle for this unit is deprecated. centi c SI prefix for 10-2 centimeter cm centipoise cP 1 cP = mPa ⋅ s. The name centipoise is deprecated. centistokes cSt 1 cSt = 1 mm2/s. The name centistokes is deprecated. circular mil cmil 1 cmil = (p/4) ⋅ 10-6 in2 coulomb C SI unit of electric charge cubic centimeter cm3 3 cubic foot ft cubic foot per minute ft3/min cubic foot per second ft3/s cubic inch in3 cubic meter m3 cubic meter per second m3/s cubic yard yd3 curie Ci A unit of activity of radionuclide. Use of the SI unit, the becquerel,   is preferred, 1 Ci = 3.7 × 1010 Bq. cycle c (Continued)

01_Santoso_Sec01_p0001-0052.indd 21

23/11/17 2:27 PM

22  SECTION ONE

TABLE 1-11  Standard Symbols for Units (Continued) Unit

Symbol

Notes

cycle per second Hz, c/s See hertz. The name hertz is internationally accepted for this unit;   the symbol Hz is preferred to c/s. darcy D 1 D = 1 cP (cm/s) (cm/atm) = 0.986 923 mm2. A unit of permeability   of a porous medium. By traditional definition, a permeability of   one darcy will permit a flow of 1 cm3/s of fluid of 1 cP viscosity   through an area of 1 cm2 under a pressure gradient of 1 atm/cm.   For nonprecision work, 1 D may be taken equal to 1 mm2 and   1 mD equal to 0.001 mm2. Deprecated. day d deci d SI prefix for 10-1 decibel dB degree (plane angle) ⋅⋅⋅° degree (temperature):   degree Celsius °C SI unit of Celsius temperature. The degree Celsius is a special name   for the kelvin, for use in expressing Celsius temperatures or   temperature intervals.   degree Fahrenheit °F Note that the symbols for °C, °F, and °R comprise two elements,   written with no space between the ° and the letter that follows.   The two elements that make the complete symbol are not to   be separated.   degree Kelvin See kelvin   degree Rankine °R deka da SI prefix for 10 dyne dyn Deprecated. electronvolt eV erg erg Deprecated. exa E SI prefix for 1018 farad F SI unit of capacitance femto f SI prefix for 10-15 femtometer fm foot ft   conventional foot of water ftH2O 1 ftH2O = 2989.1 Pa (ISO) foot per minute ft/min foot per second ft/s foot per second squared ft/s2 foot pound-force ft ⋅ lbf footcandle fc 1 fc = 1 lm/ft2. The name lumen per square foot is also used for   this unit. Use of the SI unit of illuminance, the lux (lumen per   square meter), is preferred. footlambert fL 1 fL = (1/p) cd/ft2. A unit of luminance. One lumen per square   foot leaves a surface whose luminance is one footlambert in all   directions within a hemisphere. Use of the SI unit, the candela per   square meter, is preferred. gal Gal 1 Gal = 1 cm/s2. Deprecated. gallon gal 1 galUK = 4.5461 L 1 galUS = 231 in3 = 3.7854 L gauss G The gauss is the electromagnetic CGS unit of magnetic flux density.  Deprecated. giga G SI prefix for 109 gigaelectronvolt GeV gigahertz GHz gilbert Gb The gilbert is the electromagnetic CGS unit of magnetomotive   force. Deprecated. grain gr gram g gram per cubic centimeter g/cm3 gray Gy SI unit of absorbed dose in the field of radiation dosimetry

01_Santoso_Sec01_p0001-0052.indd 22

23/11/17 2:27 PM

UNITS, SYMBOLS, CONSTANTS, DEFINITIONS, AND CONVERSION FACTORS   23 

TABLE 1-11  Standard Symbols for Units (Continued) Unit

Symbol

Notes

hecto h SI prefix for 102 henry H SI unit of inductance hertz Hz SI unit of frequency horsepower hp The horsepower is an anachronism in science and technology. Use   of the SI unit of power, the watt, is preferred. hour h inch in   conventional inch of mercury inHg 1 inHg = 3386.4 Pa                 (ISO)   conventional inch of water inH2O 1 inH2O = 249.09 Pa                (ISO)   inch per second in/s joule J SI unit of energy, work, quantity of heat joule per kelvin J/K SI unit of heat capacity and entropy kelvin K In 1967, the CGPM gave the name kelvin to the SI unit of   temperature which had formerly been called degree kelvin and   assigned it the symbol K (without the symbol °). kilo k SI prefix for 103 kilogauss kG Deprecated. kilogram kg SI unit of mass kilogram-force kgf Deprecated. In some countries, the name kilopond (kp) has been   used for this unit. kilohertz kHz kilohm kW kilometer km kilometer per hour km/h kilopound-force klbf Kilopound-force should not be misinterpreted as kilopond   (see kilogram-force). kilovar kvar kilovolt kV kilovoltampere kVA kilowatt kW kilowatthour kWh Also kW ⋅ h knot kn 1kn = 1 nmi/h lambert L 1 L = (1/p) cd/cm2. A CGS unit of luminance. One lumen per   square centimeter leaves a surface whose luminance is one   lambert in all directions within a hemisphere. Deprecated. liter L 1 L = 10-3 m3. The letter symbol 1 has been adopted for liter by the   CGPM, and it is recommended in a number of international   standards. In 1978, the CIPM accepted L as an alternative symbol.   Because of frequent confusion with the numeral 1 the letter   symbol 1 is no longer recommended for U.S. use. The script letter ℓ,   which had been proposed, is not recommended as a symbol for liter. liter per second L/s lumen lm SI unit of luminous flux lumen per square foot lm/ft2 A unit of illuminance and also a unit of luminous exitance. Use of   the SI unit, lumen per square meter, is preferred. lumen per square meter lm/m2 SI unit of luminous exitance lumen per watt lm/W SI unit of luminous efficacy lumen second lm ⋅ s SI unit of quantity of light lux lx 1 lx = 1 lm/m2. SI unit of illuminance maxwell Mx The maxwell is the electromagnetic CGS unit of magnetic flux.  Deprecated. mega M SI prefix for 106 megaelectronvolt MeV megahertz MHz megohm MW meter m SI unit of length (Continued)

01_Santoso_Sec01_p0001-0052.indd 23

23/11/17 2:27 PM

24  SECTION ONE

TABLE 1-11  Standard Symbols for Units (Continued) Unit

Symbol

Notes

metric ton t 1 t = 1000 kg. The name tonne is used in some countries for this   unit, but use of this name in the U.S. is deprecated. mho mho Formerly used as the name of the siemens (S). micro m SI prefix for 10-6 microampere mA microfarad mF microgram mg microhenry mH microinch min microliter mL See note for liter. micrometer mm micron mm Deprecated. Use micrometer. microsecond ms microwatt mW mil mil 1 mil = 0.001 in mile (statute) mi 1 mi = 5280 ft miles per hour mi/h Although use of mph as an abbreviation is common, it should not be   used as a symbol. milli m SI prefix for 10-3 milliampere mA millibar mbar Use of the bar is strongly discouraged, except for limited use in  meteorology. milligram mg millihenry mH milliliter mL See note for liter. millimeter mm   conventional millimeter mmHg 1 mmHg = 133.322 Pa. Deprecated.    of mercury millimicron nm Use of the name millimicron for the nanometer is deprecated. millipascal second mPa ⋅ s SI unit-multiple of dynamic viscosity millisecond ms millivolt mV milliwatt mW minute (plane angle) ⋅ ⋅ ⋅ ′ minute (time) min Time may also be designated by means of superscripts as in the   following example: 9h46m30s. mole mol SI unit of amount of substance month mo nano n SI prefix for 10-9 nanoampere nA nanofarad nF nanometer nm nanosecond ns nautical mile nmi 1 nmi = 1852 m neper Np newton N SI unit of force newton meter N ⋅ m newton per square meter N/m2 SI unit of pressure or stress, see pascal. nit nt 1 nt = 1 cd/m2 The name nit is sometimes given to the SI unit of luminance, the   candela per square meter. oersted Oe The oersted is the electromagnetic CGS unit of magnetic field   strength. Deprecated. ohm W SI unit of resistance ounce (avoirdupois) oz pascal Pa 1 Pa = 1 N/m2 SI unit of pressure or stress

01_Santoso_Sec01_p0001-0052.indd 24

23/11/17 2:27 PM

UNITS, SYMBOLS, CONSTANTS, DEFINITIONS, AND CONVERSION FACTORS   25 

TABLE 1-11  Standard Symbols for Units (Continued ) Unit

Symbol

Notes

pascal second Pa ⋅ s SI unit of dynamic viscosity peta P SI prefix for 1015 phot ph 1 ph = lm/cm2 CGS unit of illuminance. Deprecated. pico p SI prefix for 10-12 picofarad pF picowatt pW pint pt 1 pt (U.K.) = 0.568 26 L 1 pt (U.S. dry) = 0.550 61 L 1 pt (U.S. liquid) = 0.473 18 L poise P Deprecated. pound lb pound per cubic foot lb/ft3 pound-force lbf pound-force foot lbf ⋅ ft pound-force per square foot lbf/ft2 pound-force per square inch lbf/in2 Although use of the abbreviation psi is common, it should not be   used as a symbol. poundal pdl quart qt 1 qt (U.K.) = 1.136 5 L 1 qt (U.S. dry) = 1.101 2 L 1 qt (U.S. liquid) = 0.946 35 L rad rd A unit of absorbed dose in the field of radiation dosimetry. Use of   the SI unit, the gray, is preferred. 1 rd = 0.01 Gy. radian rad SI unit of plane angle rem rem A unit of dose equivalent in the field of radiation dosimetry. Use of   the SI unit, the sievert, is preferred. 1 rem = 0.01 Sv. revolution per minute r/min Although use of rpm as an abbreviation is common, it should not be   used as a symbol. revolution per second r/s roentgen R A unit of exposure in the field of radiation dosimetry second (plane angle) ⋅ ⋅ ⋅ ″ second (time) s SI unit of time siemens S 1 S = 1 W-1 SI unit of conductance. The name mho has been used for this unit   in the U.S. sievert Sv SI unit of dose equivalent in the field of radiation dosimetry. Name   adopted by the CIPM in 1978. slug slug 1 slug = 14.593 9 kg square foot ft2 square inch in2 square meter m2 square meter per second m2/s SI unit of kinematic viscosity square millimeter per second mm2/s SI unit-multiple of kinematic viscosity square yard yd2 steradian sr SI unit of solid angle stilb sb 1 sb = 1 cd/cm2 A CGS unit of luminance. Deprecated. stokes St Deprecated. tera T SI prefix for 1012 tesla T 1 T = 1 N/(A ⋅ m) = 1 Wb/m2. SI unit of magnetic flux density   (magnetic induction). therm thm 1 thm = 100 000 Btu ton (short) ton 1 ton = 2000 lb ton, metic t 1 t = 1000 kg. The name tonne is used in some countries for this   unit, but use of this name in the U.S. is deprecated. (Continued)

01_Santoso_Sec01_p0001-0052.indd 25

23/11/17 2:27 PM

26  SECTION ONE

TABLE 1-11  Standard Symbols for Units (Continued) Unit

Symbol

Notes

(unified) atomic mass unit u The (unified) atomic mass unit is defined as one-twelfth of the mass   of an atom of the 12C nuclide. Use of the old atomic mass unit   (amu), defined by reference to oxygen, is deprecated. var var IEC name and symbol for the SI unit of reactive power volt V SI unit of voltage volt per meter V/m SI unit of electric field strength voltampere VA IEC name and symbol for the SI unit of apparent power watt W SI unit of power watt per meter kelvin W/(m ⋅ K) SI unit of thermal conductivity watt per steradian W/sr SI unit of radiant intensity 2 watt per steradian square meter W/(sr ⋅ m ) SI unit of radiance watthour Wh weber Wb Wb = V ⋅ s SI unit of magnetic flux yard yd year a In the English language, generally yr.

TABLE 1-12  Fundamental Constants of Physics and Chemistry

[An abbreviated list of the CODATA recommended values based on the 2014 adjustment]

Quantity Symbol Numerical value Unit

Relative std. uncert. ur

speed of light in vacuum c, c0 299 792 458 m s−1 exact magnetic constant m0 4p × 10−7 = 12.566 370 614... × 10−7 N A−2 exact electric constant 1/m0c2 ϵ0 8.854 187 817... × 10−12 F m−1 exact characteristic impedance of vacuum m0c Z0 376.730 313 461... W exact Newtonian constant of gravitation G 6.674 08(31) × 10−11 m3 kg−1 s−2 4.7 × 10−5 Planck constant h 6.626 070 040(81) × 10−34 J s 1.2 × 10−8  h/2p ℏ 1.054 571 800(13) × 10−34 J s 1.2 × 10−8 elementary charge e 1.602 176 620 8(98) × 10−19 C 6.1 × 10−9 magnetic flux quantum h/2e Φ0 2.067 833 831(13) × 10−15 Wb 6.1 × 10−9 conductance quantum 2e2/h G0 7.748 091 731 0(18) × 10−5 S 2.3 × 10−10 electron mass me 9.109 383 56(11) × 10−31 kg 1.2 × 10−8 proton mass mp 1.672 621 898(21) × 10−27 kg 1.2 × 10−8 proton-electron mass ratio mp/me 1836.152 673 89(17) 9.5 × 10−11 fine-structure constant e2/4pϵ0ℏc a 7.297 352 566 4(17) × 10−3 2.3 × 10−10   inverse fine-structure constant a−1 137.035 999 139(31) 2.3 × 10−10 Rydberg constant a 2mec/2h R∞ 10 973 731.568 508(65) m−1 5.9 × 10−12 Avogadro constant NA, L 6.022 140 857(74) × 1023 mol−1 1.2 × 10−8 Faraday constant NAe F 96 485.332 89(59) C mol−1 6.2 × 10−9 molar gas constant R 8.314 459 8(48) J mol−1 K−1 5.7 × 10−7 Boltzmann constant R/NA k 1.380 6485 2(79) × 10−23 J K−1 5.7 × 10−7 Stefan-Boltzmann constant s 5.670 367(13) × 10−8 W m−2 K−4 2.3 × 10−6  (p2/60)k4/ℏ3c2 Non-SI units accepted for use with the SI electron volt (e/C) J

eV 12

(unified) atomic mass unit m ( C) u 1 12

1.602 176 620 8(98) × 10−19 J

6.1 × 10−9

1.660 539 040(20) × 10

1.2 × 10−8

kg

−27

Source: CODATA recommended values of the fundamental physical constants: 2014; Peter J. Mohr, David B. Newell, and Barry N. Taylor; Rev. Mod. Phys. 88, 035009, 73 pages (2016).

01_Santoso_Sec01_p0001-0052.indd 26

23/11/17 2:27 PM

UNITS, SYMBOLS, CONSTANTS, DEFINITIONS, AND CONVERSION FACTORS   27 

1.13  GRAPHIC SYMBOLS An extensive list of standard graphic symbols for electrical engineering has been compiled in IEEE Standard 315 (ANSI Y32.2). Those concerned with the preparation of circuit diagrams and graphic layouts should conform to these standard symbols to avoid confusion with earlier, nonstandard forms.

1.14  PHYSICAL CONSTANTS Table 1-12 provides an abbreviated list of the CODATA recommended values of the fundamental constants of physics and chemistry based on the 2014 adjustment. A complete list of recommended values can be found in the reference paper given at the bottom of Table 1-12. Alternatively, they may also be found at physics.nist.gov/constants. Table 1-13 lists the values of some energy equivalents. TABLE 1-13  The Values of Some Energy Equivalents

[Derived from the relations E = mc2 = hc/l = hv = kT, and based on the 2014 CODATA adjustment of the values of the constants; 1 eV = (e/C) J, 1 u = mu = ½ m (12C) = 10-3 kg mol-1/NA, and Eh = 2R∞ hc = a2 mec2 is the Hartree energy (hartree).]

Relevant unit J

kg

m-1 Hz

1 J (1 J) = 1 J (1 J)/c = (1 J)/hc = (1 J)/h =   1.112 650 056… × 10-17 kg   5.034 116 651(62) × 1024 m-1   1.509 190 205(19) × 1033 Hz 1 kg (1 kg)c2 = (1 kg) = 1 kg (1 kg)c/h = (1 kg)c2/h =   8.987 551 787… × 1016 J   4.524 438 411(56) × 1041 m-1   1.356 392 512(17) × 1050 Hz 1 m-1 (1 m-1)hc = (1 m-1)h/c = (1 m-1) = 1m-1 (1 m-1)c = 299 792 458 Hz   1.986 445 824(24) × 10-25 J   2.210 219 057(27) × 10-42 kg 1 Hz (1 Hz)h = (1 Hz)h/c2 = (1 Hz)/c = (1 Hz) = 1 Hz   6.626 070 040(81) × 10-34 J   7.372 497 201(91) × 10-51 kg   3.335 640 951… × 10-9 m-1 1 K (1 K)k = (1 K)k/c2 = (1 K)k/hc = 69.503 457(40) m-1 (1 K)k/h = 2.083 661 2(12) × 1010 Hz   1.380 648 52(79) × 10-23 J   1.536 178 65(88) × 10-40 kg 1 eV (1 eV) = (1 eV)/c2 = (1 eV)/hc = (1 eV)/h =   1.602 176 620 8(98) × 10-19 J   1.782 661 907(11) × 10-36 kg   8.065 544 005(50) × 105 m-1   2.417 989 262(15) × 1014 Hz 1 u (1 u)c2 = (1 u) = (1 u)c/h = (1 u)c2/h =   1.492 418 062(18) × 10-10 J   1.660 539 040(20) × 10-27 kg   7.513 006 616 6(34) × 1014 m-1   2.252 342 720 6(10) × 1023 Hz 1 Eh (1 Eh) = (1 Eh)/c2 = (1 Eh)/hc = (1 Eh)/h =   4.359 744 650(54) × 10-18 J   4.850 870 129(60) × 10-35 kg   2.194 746 313 702(13) × 107 m-1   6.579 683 920 711(39) × 1015 Hz 2

Relevant unit K

eV

u

Eh

1 J (1 J)/k = (1 J) = (1 J)/c = (1 J) = 2.293 712 317(28) × 1017 Eh   7.242 973 1(42) × 1022 K   6.241 509 126(38) ×1018 eV   6.700 535 363(82) × 109 u 1 kg (1 kg)c2/k = (1 kg)c2 = (1 kg) = (1 kg)c2 =   6.509 659 5(37) × 1039 K   5.609 588 650(34) × 10 35 eV   6.022 140 857(74) × 1026 u   2.061 485 823(25) × 1034 Eh 1 m-1 (1 m-1)hc/k = (1 m-1)hc = (1 m-1)h/c = (1 m-1)hc =   1.438 777 36(83) × 10-2 K   1.239 841 973 9(76) × 10-6 eV   1.331 025 049 00(61) × 10-15 u   4.556 335 252 767(27) × 10-8 Eh 1 Hz (1 Hz)h/k = (1 Hz)h = (1 Hz)h/c2 = (1 Hz)h =   4.799 244 7(28) × 10-11 K   4.135 667 662(25) × 10-15 eV   4.439 821 661 6(20) × 10-24 u   1.519 829 846 008 8(90) × 10-16 Eh 1 K (1 K) = 1 K (1 K)k = (1 K)k/c2 = (1 K)k = 3.166 810 5(18) × 10-6 Eh     8.617 330 3(50) × 10-5 eV   9.251 084 2(53) × 10-14 u 1 eV (1 eV)/k = (1 eV) = 1 eV (1 eV)/c2 = (1 eV) =   1.160 452 21(67) × 104 K     1.073 544 110 5(66) × 10-9 u   3.674 932 248(23) × 10-2 Eh 1 u (1 u)c2/k = (1 u)c2 = (1 u) = 1 u (1 u)c2 =   1.080 954 38(62) × 1013 K   931.494 095 4(57) × 106 eV     3.423 177 690 2(16) × 107 Eh 1 Eh (1 Eh)/k = (1 Eh) = 27.211 386 02(17) eV (1 Eh)/c2 = (1 Eh) = 1 Eh   3.157 751 3(18) × 105 K   2.921 262 319 7(13) × 10-8 u   2

01_Santoso_Sec01_p0001-0052.indd 27

23/11/17 2:27 PM

28  SECTION ONE

1.15  NUMERICAL VALUES Extensive use is made in electrical engineering of the constants p and ϵ and of the numbers 2 and 10, the latter in logarithmic units and number systems. Table 1-14 lists functions of these numbers to 9 or 10 significant digits. In most engineering applications (except those involving the difference of large, nearly equal numbers), five significant digits suffice. The use of the listed values in computations with electronic hand calculators will suffice in most cases to produce results more than adequate for engineering work. TABLE 1-14  Numerical Values Used in Electrical Engineering Functions of p: p = 3.141 592 654 1/p = 0.318 309 886 p 2 = 9.869 604 404 π = 1.772 453 851 p/180° = 0.017 453 293 (= radians per degree) 180°/p = 57.295 779 51 (= degrees per radian) Functions of ϵ: ϵ = 2.718 281 828 1/ϵ = 0.367 879 441 1 - 1/ϵ = 0.632 120 559 ϵ2 = 7.389 056 096 ϵ = 1.648 721 271 Logarithms to the base 10: log10 p = 0.497 149 873 log10 ϵ = 0.434 294 482 log10 2 = 0.301 029 996   log10 x = (ln x)(0.434 294 482) = (log2 x)(0.301 029 996) Natural logarithms (to the base ϵ): ln p = 1.144 729 886 ln 2 = 0.693 147 181 ln 10 = 2.302 585 093 ln x = (log10 x)(2.302 585 093) = (log2 x)(0.693 147 181) Logarithms to the base 2: log2 p = 1.651 496 130 log2 ϵ = 1.442 695 042 log210 = 3.321 928 096 log2 x = (log10 x)(3.321 928 096) = (ln x)(1.442 695 042) Powers of 2: 25 = 32 210 = 1024 215 = 32,768 220 = 1,048,576 225 = 33,554,432 230 = 1,073,741,824 240 = 1.099 511 628 × 1012 250 = 1.125 899 907 × 1015 2100 = 1.267 650 601 × 1030 Logarithmic units: Power ratio Current or voltage ratio 1 2 3 4 5 10 15

1 1.414 214 1.732 051 2 2.236 068 3.162 278 3.872 983

Decibels* Nepers† 0 3.010 300 4.771 213 6.020 600 6.989 700 10 11.760 913

0 0.346 574 0.549 306 0.693 147 0.804 719 1.151 293 1.354 025 (Continued)

01_Santoso_Sec01_p0001-0052.indd 28

23/11/17 2:27 PM

UNITS, SYMBOLS, CONSTANTS, DEFINITIONS, AND CONVERSION FACTORS   29 

TABLE 1-14  Numerical Values Used in Electrical Engineering (Continued ) Values of 2(2N): Value of N 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

Value of 2(2N) 4 16 256 65,536 4,294,967,296 1.844 674 407 × 1019 3.402 823 668 × 1038 1.157 920 892 × 1077 1.340 780 792 × 10154 1.797 693 132 × 10308

*The decibel is defined for power ratios only. It may be applied to current or voltage ratios only when the resistances through which the currents flow or across which the voltages are applied are equal. † The neper is defined for current and voltage ratios only. It may be applied to power ratios only when the respective resistances are equal.

1.16  CONVERSION FACTORS The increasing use of the metric system in British and American practice has generated a need for extensive tables of multiplying factors to facilitate conversions from and to the SI units. Tables 1-15 through 1-28 list these conversion factors. Table

Quantity

SI unit

Subtabulation

Basis of grouping

1-15 Length meter 1-15A Units decimally related to one meter 1-15B Units less than one meter 1-15C Units greater than one meter 1-15D Other length units 1-16 Area square meter 1-16A Units decimally related to one square meter 1-16B Nonmetric area units 1-16C Other area units 1-17 Volume/capacity cubic meter 1-17A Units decimally related to one cubic meter 1-17B Nonmetric volume units 1-17C U.S. liquid capacity measures 1-17D British liquid capacity measures 1-17E U.S. and U.K. dry capacity measures 1-17F Other volume and capacity units 1-18 Mass kilogram 1-18A Units decimally related to one kilogram 1-18B Less than one pound-mass 1-18C One pound-mass and greater 1-18D Other mass units 1-19 Time second 1-19A One second and less 1-19B One second and greater 1-19C Other time units 1-20 Velocity meter per second 1-21 Density kilogram per cubic 1-21A Units decimally related to one kilogram   meter   per cubic meter 1-21B Nonmetric density units 1-21C Other density units 1-22 Force newton 1-23 Pressure pascal 1-23A Units decimally related to one pascal 1-23B Units decimally related to one   kilogram-force per square meter 1-23C Units expressed as heights of liquid 1-23D Nonmetric pressure units (Continued)

01_Santoso_Sec01_p0001-0052.indd 29

23/11/17 2:27 PM

30  SECTION ONE

(Continued) 1-24 Torque/bending newton meter  moment 1-25 Energy/work joule 1-25A 1-25B 1-25C 1-26 Power watt 1-26A 1-26B 1-27 Temperature kelvin 1-28 Light candela per 1-28A   square meter lux 1-28B

Units decimally related to one joule Units less than 10 joules Units greater than 10 joules Units decimally related to one watt Nonmetric power units Luminance units Illuminance units

Statements of Equivalence.  To avoid ambiguity, the conversion tables have been arranged in the form of statements of equivalence, that is, each unit listed at the left-hand edge of each table is stated to be equivalent to a multiple or fraction of each of the units to the right in the table. For example, the uppermost line of Table 1-15B represents the following statements: Column 2.  Column 3.  Column 4.  Column 5.  Column 6. 

1 meter is equal to 1.093 613 30 yards 1 meter is equal to 3.280 839 89 feet 1 meter is equal to 39.370 078 7 inches 1 meter is equal to 3.937 007 87 × 104 mils 1 meter is equal to 3.937 007 87 × 107 microinches

This table contains similar statements relating the meter, yard, foot, inch, mil, and microinch to each other, that is, conversion factors between the non-SI units as well as to and from the SI unit are given. In all, these tables contain over 1700 such statements. Exact conversion factors are indicated in boldface type. Tabulation Groups.  To produce tables that can be contained on individual pages of the handbook, units of a given quantity have been arranged in separate subtabulations identified by capital letters. Each such subtabulation represents a group of units related to each other decimally, by magnitude or by usage. Each subtabulation contains the SI unit,b so equivalent values can be found between units that are tabulated in separate tables. For example, to obtain equivalence between pounds per cubic foot and tonnes per cubic meter, we read from the fourth line of Table 1-21B: 1 pound per cubic foot is equal to 16.018 463 4 kilograms per cubic meter From the first line of Table 1-21A, we find: 1 kilogram per cubic meter is equal to 0.001 metric ton per cubic meter Hence,

1 pound per cubic foot is equal to 16.018 463 4 kilograms per cubic meter = 0.016 018 463 4 metric ton per cubic meter

b In Tables 1-17C, 1-17D, 1-17E, and 1-18B, a decimal submultiple of the SI unit (the liter and gram, respectively) is listed because it is most commonly used in conjunction with the other units in the respective tables. The procedure for linking the subtables is unchanged.

01_Santoso_Sec01_p0001-0052.indd 30

23/11/17 2:27 PM

01_Santoso_Sec01_p0001-0052.indd 31

TABLE 1-15  Length Conversion Factors

(Exact conversions are shown in boldface type. Repeating decimals are underlined.) The SI unit of length is the meter.

1 meter = 1 kilometer = 1 decimeter = 1 centimeter = 1 millimeter = 1 micrometer   (micron) = 1 nanometer = 1 ångström =

A. Length units decimally related to one meter Meters Kilometers Decimeters Centimeters Millimeters Micrometers Nanometers Ångströms (m) (km) (dm) (cm) (mm) (mm) (nm) (Å) 1 0.001 1 000 1 0.1 0.000 1 0.01 0.000 01 0.001 10-6 10-6 10-9

10 10 000 1 0.1 0.01 0.000 01

1 meter = 1 yard = 1 foot = 1 inch = 1 mil = 1 microinch =

1 meter = 1 rod = 1 statute mile = 1 nautical mile = 1 astronomical  unit* = 1 parsec = 1 foot =

1 000 000 109 1010 109 1012 1013 100 000 108 108 10 000 107 108 1 000 1 000 000 107 1 1 000 10 000 1 10 0.1 1

B. Nonmetric length units less than one meter Meters Yards Feet Inches Mils Microinches (m) (yd) (ft) (in) (mil) (min) 1 0.914 4 0.304 8 0.025 4 2.54 × 10-5 2.54 × 10-8

1.093 613 30 3.280 839 89 1 3 1/3 = 0.333 3 1 1/36 = 0.027 7 1/12 = 0.083 3 -5 2.777 × 10 8.333 × 10-5 2.777 × 10-8 8.333 × 10-8



1 000 1 000 000 100 10 1 0.001

10-9 10-12 10-8 10-7 10-6 0.001 10-10 10-13 10-9 10-8 10-7 0.000 1



100 100 000 10 1 0.1 0.000 1

39.370 078 7 3.937 007 87 × 104 3.937 007 87 × 107 36 36 000 3.6 × 107 12 12 000 1.2 × 107 1 1 000 1 000 000 0.001 1 1 000 10-8 0.001 1

C. Nonmetric length units greater than one meter (with equivalents in feet) Meters (m)

Rods (rd)

Statute miles (mi)

Nautical miles (nmi)

Astronomical units (AU)

Parsecs (pc)

Feet (ft)

1 5.029 2 1 609.344 1 852 1.496 × 1011

0.198 838 78 1 320 368.249 423 2.974 628 17 × 1010

6.213 711 92 × 10-4 0.003 125 1 1.150 779 45 92 957 130.3

5.399 568 04 × 10-4 2.715 550 76 × 10-3 0.868 976 24 1 80 777 537.8

6.684 491 98 × 10-12 3.361 764 71 × 10-11 1.075 764 71 × 10-8 1.237 967 91 × 10-8 1

3.240 733 17 × 10-17 1.629 829 53 × 10-16 5.215 454 50 × 10-14 6.001 837 80 × 10-14 4.848 136 82 × 10-6

3.280 839 89 16.5 5 280 6 076.115 48 4.908 136 48 × 1011

3.085 721 50 × 1016 0.304 8

6.135 611 02 × 1015 0.060 606

1.917 378 44 × 1013 1.893 939 × 10-4

1.666 156 32 × 1013 1.645 788 33 × 10-4

206 264.806 2.037 433 16 × -12

1 9.877 754 72 × 10-18

1.012 375 82 × 1017 1

(Continued) 31

23/11/17 2:27 PM

32

01_Santoso_Sec01_p0001-0052.indd 32

TABLE 1-15  Length Conversion Factors (Continued)

(Exact conversions are shown in boldface type. Repeating decimals are underlined.) The SI unit of length is the meter.

D. Other length units

1 cable = 720 feet = 219.456 meters 1 cable (U.K.) = 608 feet = 185.318 4 meters 1 chain (engineers’) = 100 feet = 30.48 meters 1 chain (surveyors’) = 66 feet = 20.116 8 meters 1 fathom = 6 feet = 1.828 8 meters 1 fermi = 1 femtometer = 10-15 meter 1 foot (U.S. Survey) = 0.304 800 6 meter 1 furlong = 660 feet = 201.168 meters 1 hand = 4 inches = 0.101 6 meter 1 league (international nautical) = 3 nautical miles = 5 556 meters 1 league (statute) = 3 statute miles = 4 828.032 meters 1 league (U.K. nautical) = 5 559.552 meters 1 light-year = 9.460 895 2 × 1015 meters (= distance traveled by light in vacuum in one sidereal year) 1 link (engineers’) = 1 foot = 0.304 8 meter 1 link (surveyors’) = 7.92 inches = 0.201 168 meter 1 micron = 1 micrometer = 10-6 meter 1 millimicron = 1 nanometer = 10-9 meter 1 myriameter = 10 000 meters 1 nautical mile (U.K.) = 1 853.184 meters 1 pale = 1 rod = 5.029 2 meters 1 perch (linear) = 1 rod = 5.029 2 meters 1 pica = 1/6 inch (approx.) = 4.217 518 × 10-3 meter 1 point = 1/72 inch (approx.) = 3.514 598 × 10-4 meter 1 span = 9 inches = 0.228 6 meter *As defined by the International Astronomical Union.

23/11/17 2:27 PM

01_Santoso_Sec01_p0001-0052.indd 33

TABLE 1-16  Area Conversion Factors

(Exact conversions are shown in boldface type. Repeating decimals are underlined.) The SI unit of area is the square meter.

1 square meter = 1 square   kilometer = 1 hectare = 1 square   centimeter = 1 square   millimeter = 1 square   micrometer = 1 barn =

A. Area units decimally related to one square meter Square meters (m)2

1 10-6 1 000 000 1 10 000 0.000 1

Hectares (square hectometers) (hm)2

Square Square centimeters millimeters (cm)2 (mm)2

0.000 1 100

Square micrometers Barns (mm)2 (b)

10 000 1 000 000 1012 1028 1010 1012 1018 1034

0.01 1 10-10 10-8

108 1010 1016 1032 1 100 108 1024

10-6 10-12 10-10 0.01 1 106 1022 10-12 10-18 10-16 10-8 10-6 1 1016 10-28 10-34 10-32 10-24 10-22 10-16 1



Square kilometers (km)2

B. Nonmetric area units (with square meter equivalents) Square meters (m)2

Square statute Acres Square rods Square yards Square feet Square inches Circular mils miles (mi)2 (acre) (rd)2 (yd)2 (ft)2 (in)2 (cmil)

1 square meter = 1 3.861 021 59 × 10-7 2.471 053 82 × 10-4 3.953 686 10 × 10-2 1.195 990 05 10.763 910 4 1 550.003 10 1.973 525 24 × 109 1 square statute 2 589 988.1 1 640 102 400 3 097 600 27 878 400 4.014 489 60 × 5.111 406 91 ×  mile = 109 1015 1 acre = 4 046.856 11 1/640 = 0.001 562 5 1 160 4 840 43 560 6 272 640 7.986 573 30 × 1012 1 square rod = 25.292 852 6 9.765 625 × 10-6 1/160 - 0.006 25 1 30.25 272.25 39 204 4.991 608 31 × 1010 1 square yard = 0.836 127 36 3.228 305 79 × 10-7 2.066 115 70 × 10-4 3.305 785 12 × 10-2 1 9 1 296 1.650 118 45 × 109 1 square foot = 0.092 903 04 3.587 006 43 × 10-8 2.295 684 11 × 10-5 3.673 094 58 × 10-3 1/9 = 0.111 111 1 144 1.833 464 95 × 108 1 square inch = 6.451 6 × 10-4 2.490 976 69 × 10-10 1.594 225 08 × 10-7 2.550 760 13 × 10-5 7.716 049 38 × 1/144 = 1 1.273 239 55 × 106 10-4 0.006 944 44 1 circular mil = 5.067 074 79 × 1.956 408 51 × 10-16 1.252 101 45 × 10-13 2.003 362 32 × 6.060 171 01 × 5.454 153 91 × 7.853 981 63 × 1 10-10 10-11 10-10 10-9 10-7 Exact conversions are:   1 acre = 4 046.856 422 4 square meters   1 square mile = 2 589 988.110 336 square meters 1 are = 100 square meters 1 centiare (centare) = 1 square meter 1 perch (area) = 1 square rod = 30.25 square yards = 25.292 852 6 square meters 1 rod = 40 square rods = 1 011.714 11 square meters 1 section = 1 square statute mile = 2 589 988.1 square meters 1 township = 36 square statute miles = 93 239 572 square meters

C. Other area units

33

23/11/17 2:27 PM

34

01_Santoso_Sec01_p0001-0052.indd 34

TABLE 1-17  Volume and Capacity Conversion Factors

(Exact conversions are shown in boldface type. Repeating decimals are underlined.) The SI unit of volume is the cubic meter.



A. Volume units decimally related to one cubic meter

Cubic Cubic Cubic meters decimeters centimeters Liters Centiliters Milliliters Microliters (steres) (m)3 (dm)3 (cm)3 (L) (cL) (mL) (mL) 1 cubic   meter = 1 cubic  decimeter = 1 cubic   centimeter = 1 liter = 1 centiliter = 1 milliliter = 1 microliter =

1

1 000

1 000 000

1 000

100 000

1 000 000

109

0.001

1

1 000

1

100

1 000

1 000 000

0.000 001

0.001

1

0.001

0.1

1

1 000

0.001 0.000 01 0.000 001 10-9

1 0.01 0.001 0.000 001

1 000 10 1 0.001

1 0.01 0.001 0.000 001

100 1 0.1 0.000 1

1 000 10 1 0.001

1 000 000 10 000 1 000 1

Barrels (U.S.) (bbl)

Acre-Feet (acre-ft)



B. Nonmetric volume units (with cubic meter and liter equivalents) Cubic meters (steres) (m)3

Liters (L)

Cubic inches (in)3

Cubic feet (ft)3

Cubic yards (yd)3

Cubic miles (mi)3

1 cubic meter = 1 1 000 6.102 374 41 × 35.314 666 1.307 950 62 6.289 810 97 8.107 131 94 × 2.399 127 59 × 104 10-4 10-10 1 liter = 0.001 1 61.023 744 1 0.035 314 66 1.307 950 62 × 6.289 810 97 × 8.107 131 93 × 2.399 127 59 × 10-3 10-3 10-7 10-13 1 cubic inch = 1.638 706 4 × 1.638 706 4 × 1 1/1 728 = 1/46 656 = 1.030 715 32 × 1.328 520 90 × 3.931 465 73 × 10-5 10-2 5.787 037 03 × 2.143 347 05 × 10-4 10-8 10-15 10-4 10-5 1 cubic foot = 2.831 684 66 × 28.316 846 592 1 728 1 1/27 = 0.178 107 61 1/43 560 = 6.793 572 78 × 10-2 0.037 037 2.295 684 11 × 10-12 10-5 1 cubic yard = 0.764 554 86 764.554 858 46 656 27 1 4.808 905 38 6.198 347 11 × 1.834 264 65 × 10-4 10-10 1 barrel (U.S.) = 0.158 987 29 158.987 294 9 702 5.614 583 33 0.207 947 53 1 1.288 930 98 × 3.814 308 05 × 10-4 10-11 1 acre-foot = 1.233 481 84 1.233 481 84 7.527 168 00 × 43 560 1 613 333 33 7 758.367 34 1 2.959 280 30 × × 106 107 10-7 1 cubic mile = 4.168 181 83 × 4.168 181 83 × 2.543 580 61 × 1.471 979 52 × 5.451 776 × 26.217 074 9 × 3 379 200 1 109 1012 1014 1011 109 109

23/11/17 2:27 PM

01_Santoso_Sec01_p0001-0052.indd 35



C. United States liquid capacity measures (with liter equivalents)

Liters (L)

Gallons (U.S. gal)

Quarts (U.S. qt)

Pints (U.S. pt)

Gills (U.S. gi)

Fluid ounces (U.S. floz)

Fluidrams (U.S. fldr)

Minims (U.S. minim)

1 liter = 1 0.264 172 05 1.056 688 2.113 376 8.453 506 33.814 023 270.512 18 16 230.73 1 gallon, U.S. = 3.785 411 8 1 4 8 32 128 1 024 61 440 1 quart, U.S. = 0.946 352 946 1/4 = 0.25 1 2 8 32 256 15 360 1 pint, U.S. = 0.473 176 5 1/8 = 0.125 1/2 = 0.5 1 4 16 128 7 680 1 gill, U.S. = 0.118 294 1 1/32 = 0.031 25 1/8 = 0.125 1/4 = 0.25 1 4 32 1 920 1 fluid ounce, 2.957 353 × 1/128 = 1/32 = 0.031 25 1/16 = 0.062 5 1/4 = 0.25 1 8 480  U.S. = 10-2 0.007 812 5 1 fluidram, 3.696 691 2 × 1/102 4 = 1/256 = 1/128 = 1/32 = 1/8 = 0.125 1 60  U.S. = 10-3 9.765 625 × 10-4 3.906 25 × 10-3 0.007 812 5 0.031 25 1 minim, U.S. = 6.161 152 × 1/61 440 = 1/15 360 = 1/7 680 = 1/1 920 = 1/480 = 1/60 = 1 10-5 1.627 604 16 × 6.510 416 66 × 1.302 083 33 × 5.208 333 3 × 2.083 333 3 × 0.016 666 6 -5 -5 -4 -4 -3 10 10 10 10 10

D. British Imperial liquid capacity measures (with liter equivalents) Liters (L)

Gallons (U.K. gal)

Quarts (U.K. qt)

Pints (U.K. pt)

Gills (U.K. gi)

Fluid ounces (U.K. floz)

Fluidrams (U.K. fldr)

1 liter = 1 0.219 969 2 0.879 876 6 1.759 753 7.039 018 35.195 06 281.560 5 1 gallon, U.K. = 4.546 092 1 4 8 32 160 1 280 1 quart, U.K. = 1.136 523 1/4 = 0.25 1 2 8 40 320 1 pint, U.K. = 0.568 261 5 1/8 = 0.125 1/2 = 0.5 1 4 20 160 1 gill, U.K. = 0.142 065 4 1/32 = 0.031 25 1/8 = 0.125 1/4 = 0.25 1 5 40 1 fluid ounce, 2.841 307 × 1/160 = 1/40 = 0.025 1/20 = 0.05 1/5 = 0.2 1 8  U.K. = 10-2 0.006 25 1 fluidram, 3.551 634 × 1/1 280 = 1/320 = 1/160 = 1/40 = 0.025 1/8 = 0.125 1  U.K. = 10-3 7.812 5 × 10-4 0.003 125 0.006 25 1 minim, U.K. = 5.919 391 × 1/76 800 = 1/19 200 = 1/9 600 = 1/2 400 = 1/480 = 1/60 = 10-5 1.302 083 33 × 5.208 333 33 × 1.041 666 66 × 4.166 666 66 × 2.083 333 33 × 0.016 666 66 -5 -5 -4 -4 -3 10 10 10 10 10

Minims (U.K. minim) 16 893.63 76 800 19 200 9 600 2 400 480 60 1

(Continued)

35

23/11/17 2:27 PM

36

01_Santoso_Sec01_p0001-0052.indd 36

TABLE 1-17  Volume and Capacity Conversion Factors (Continued)

(Exact conversions are shown in boldface type. Repeating decimals are underlined.) The SI unit of volume is the cubic meter.



E. United States and British dry capacity measures (with liter equivalents)

Liters (L)

U.S. dry measures Bushels (U.S. bu)

Pecks (U.S. peck)

Quarts (U.S. qt)

British dry measures Pints (U.S. pt)

Bushels (U.K. bu)

Pecks (U.K. peck)

Quarts (U.K. qt)

Pints (U.K. pt)

1 liter = 1 0.028 377 59 0.113 510 37 0.908 082 99 1.816 165 98 0.027 496 1 0.109 984 6 0.879 876 6 1.759 753 4 1 bushel, U.S. = 35.239 070 1 4 32 64 0.968 938 7 3.875 754 9 31.006 04 62.012 08 1 peck, U.S. = 8.809 767 5 1/4 = 0.25 1 8 16 0.242 234 7 0.968 938 7 7.751 509 15.503 02 1 quart, U.S. = 1.101 220 9 1/32 = 0.031 25 1/8 = 0.125 1 2 0.030 279 34 0.121 117 3 0.968 938 7 1.937 878 1 pint, U.S. = 0.550 610 5 1/64 = 0.015 625 1/16 = 0.062 5 1/2 = 0.5 1 0.015 139 67 0.060 558 67 0.484 469 3 0.968 938 7 1 bushel, U.K. = 36.368 73 1.032 057 4.128 228 33.025 82 66.051 65 1 4 32 64 1 peck, U.K. = 9.092 182 0.258 014 3 1.032 057 8.256 456 16.512 91 1/4 = 0.25 1 8 16 1 quart, U.K. = 1.136 523 0.032 251 78 0.129 007 1 1.200 950 2.401 900 1/32 = 0.031 25 1/8 = 0.125 1 2 1 pint, U.K. = 0.568 261 4 0.016 125 89 0.064 503 6 0.516 028 4 1.032 057 1/64 = 0.015 625 1/64 = 0.062 5 1/2 = 0.5 1 Exact conversion: 1 dry pint, U.S. = 33.600 312 5 cubic inches F. Other volume and capacity units 1 barrel, U.S. (used for petroleum, etc.) = 42 gallons = 0.158.987 296 cubic meter 1 barrel (“old barrel”) = 31.5 gallons = 0.119 240 cubic meter 1 board foot = 144 cubic inches = 2.359 737 × 10-3 cubic meter 1 cord = 128 cubic feet = 3.624 556 cubic meters 1 cord foot = 16 cubic feet = 0.453 070 cubic meter 1 cup = 8 fluid ounces, U.S. = 2.365 882 × 10-4 cubic meter 1 gallon (Canadian, liquid) = 4.546 090 × 10-3 cubic meter 1 perch (volume) = 24.75 cubic feet = 0.700 842 cubic meter 1 stere = 1 cubic meter 1 tablespoon = 0.5 fluid ounce, U.S. = 1.478 677 × 10-5 cubic meter 1 teaspoon = 1/6 fluid ounce, U.S. = 4.928 922 × 10-6 cubic meter 1 ton (register ton) = 100 cubic feet = 2.831 684 66 cubic meters

23/11/17 2:27 PM

01_Santoso_Sec01_p0001-0052.indd 37

TABLE 1-18  Mass Conversion Factors

(Exact conversions are shown in boldface type. Repeating decimals are underlined.) The SI unit of mass is the kilogram.



A. Mass units decimally related to one kilogram



Kilograms (kg)

1 kilogram = 1 tonne = 1 gram = 1 decigram = 1 centigram = 1 milligram = 1 microgram =

1 0.001 1 000 1 0.001 0.000 001 0.000 1 10-7 0.000 01 10-8 0.000 001 10-9 10-9 10-12



Tonnes (metric tons)

Grams (g) 1 000 1 000 000 1 0.1 0.01 0.001 0.000 001

Decigrams (dg)

Centigrams (cg)

Milligrams (mg)

Micrograms (mg)

10 000 100 000 1 000 000 109 107 108 109 1012 10 100 1 000 1 000 000 1 10 100 100 000 0.1 1 10 10 000 0.01 0.1 1 1 000 0.000 01 0.000 1 0.001 1

B. Nonmetric mass units less than one pound-mass (with gram equivalents)

Grams Avoirdupois (g) ounces-mass (ozm, avdp)

Troy ounces-mass (ozm, troy)

Avoirdupois drams (dr avdp)

Apothecary drams (dr apoth)

1 gram = 1 0.035 273 962 1 avdp ounce-mass = 28.349 523 1 1 1 troy ounce-mass = 31.103 476 8 1.097 142 86 1 avdp dram = 1.771 845 20 1/16 = 0.062 5 1 apothecary dram = 3.887 934 58 0.137 142 857 1 pennyweight = 1.555 173 83 0.054 863 162 1 grain = 0.064 798 91 1/437.5 = 2.285 714 29 × 10-3 1 scrople = 1.295 078 20 4.571 428 58 × 10-2

0.032 150 747 0.564 383 39 0.257 205 97 0.643 014 93 15.432 358 4 0.771 617 92 0.911 458 33 16 7.291 666 66 18.227 166 7 437.5 21.875 1 17.554 285 7 8 20 480 24 0.056 966 15 1 0.455 729 17 1.139 322 92 27.343 75 1.367 187 5 1/8 = 0.125 2.194 285 70 1 2.5 60 3 1/20 = 0.05 0.877 714 28 1/2.5 = 0.4 1 24 1.2 1/480 = 3.657 142 85 × 1/60 = 1/24 = 1 0.05 0.002 083 333 10-2 0.016 666 66 0.041 666 66 1/24 = 0.731 428 57 1/3 = 5/6 = 20 1 0.041 666 66 0.333 333 33 0.833 333 33

Pennyweights (dwt)

Grains (grain)

Scruples (scruple)

(Continued)

37

23/11/17 2:27 PM

38

01_Santoso_Sec01_p0001-0052.indd 38

TABLE 1-18  Mass Conversion Factors (Continued)

(Exact conversions are shown in boldface type. Repeating decimals are underlined.) The SI unit of mass is the kilogram.



C. Nonmetric mass units of one pound-mass and greater (with kilogram equivalents) Kilograms Long tons Short tons (kg) (long ton) (short ton)

1 kilogram = 1 1 long ton = 1 016.046 9 1 short ton = 907.184 74 1 long 50.802 345 4  hundredweight = 1 short 45.359 237  hundredweight = 1 slug = 14.593 903 1 avdp 0.453 592 37  pound-mass = 1 troy 0.373 241 72  pound-mass =

Long hundredweights (long cwt)

Short hundredweights Slugs (short cwt) (slug)

Avoirdupois pounds-mass (lbm, avdp)

Troy pounds-mass (lbm, troy)

9.842 065 28 × 1.102 311 31 × 1.968 411 31 × 2.204 622 62 × 0.068 521 77 2.204 622 62 2.679 228 89 10-1 10-3 10-2 10-2 1 1.12 20 22.4 69.621 329 2 240 2722.222 222 200/224 = 1 4 000/224 = 20 62.161 901 2 000 2 430.555 55 0.892 857 14 17.857 142 9 0.05 0.056 1 1.12 3.481 066 4 112 136.111 111 10/224 = 0.05 100/112 = 1 3.108 095 0 100 121.527 777 0.044 642 86 0.892 857 14 0.014 363 41 0.016 087 02 0.287 268 3 0.321 740 5 1 32.174 05 39.100 406 1/2 240 = 0.000 5 1/1 12 = 0.01 3.108 095 0 × 1 1.215 277 777 4.464 285 71 × 8.928 571 43 × 10-2 10-1 10-3 3.673 469 37 × 4.114 285 70 × 7.346 938 79 × 8.228 571 45 × 0.025 575 18 0.822 857 14 1 10-1 10-1 10-3 10-3

Exact conversions: 1 long ton = 1 016.046 908 8 kilograms         1 troy pound-mass = 0.373 241 721 6 kilogram 1 assay ton = 29.166 667 grams 1 carat (metric) = 200 milligrams 1 carat (troy weight) = 31/6 grains = 205.196 55 milligrams 1 myriagram = 10 kilograms 1 quintal = 100 kilograms 1 stone = 14 pounds, avdp = 6.350 293 18 kilograms

D. Other mass units

23/11/17 2:27 PM

01_Santoso_Sec01_p0001-0052.indd 39

TABLE 1-19  Time Conversion Factors

(Exact conversions are shown in boldface type. Repeating decimals are underlined.) The SI unit of time is the second.



A. Time units of one second and less



Seconds (s)

Milliseconds (ms)

1 second = 1 millisecond = 1 microsecond = 1 nanosecond = 1 picosecond =

1 1 000 0.001 1 0.000 001 0.001 10-9 0.000 001 10-12 10-9



Microseconds (ms) 1 000 000 1 000 1 0.001 0.000 001

Picoseconds (ps)

10 1 000 000 1 000 1 0.001 9

1012 109 1 000 000 1 000 1

B. Time units of one second and greater Mean solar seconds (s)

Mean solar minutes (min)

Mean solar hours (h)

Mean solar days (d)

Mean solar weeks (w)

Calendar (Gregorian) year (yr)

1 second = 1 1/60 = 1/3 600 = 1/86 400 = 1/604 800 = 3.168 873 85 × 10-8 0.016 666 6 0.000 277 7 1.157 407 407 × 10-5 1.653 439 15 × 10-6 1 minute = 60 1 1/60 = 1/1 440 = 1/10 080 = 1.901 324 31 × 10-6 0.016 666 6 0.000 694 44 9.920 634 92 × 10-5 1 hour = 3 600 60 1 1/24 = 1/168 = 1.140 794 50 × 10-4 0.041 666 6 5.952 380 95 × 10-3 1 day = 86 400 1 440 24 1 1/7 = 0.142 857 14 2.737 907 00 × 10-3 1 week = 604 800 10 080 168 7 1 1.916 534 90 × 10-2 1 calendar year = (Gregorian) 31 556 952 525 949.2 8 765.82 365.242 5 52.117 5 1 notes: The conventional calendar year of 365 days can be used in rough calculations only; the modern calendar is based on the Gregorian year of 365.2425 mean solar days, the value chosen by Pope Gregory XIII in 1582. This value requires that a leap-year day be introduced every four years as February 29, except that centennial years (1900, 2000, etc.) are leap years only when divisible by 400. The remaining difference between the Gregorian year and the tropical year (see below) introduces an error of 1 day in 3300 years.   The tropical year is the interval between successive vernal equinoxes and has been defined by the International Astronomical Union for noon of January 1, 1900 as 31 556 925.974 7 seconds = 365.242 198 79 mean solar days. The tropical year decreases by approximately 5.3 milliseconds per year. The sidereal year is the interval between successive returns of the sun to the direction of the same star. Sidereal time units, given in Table 1-18C, are used primarily in astronomy. The SI second, defined by the atomic process of the cesium atom, is equal to the mean solar second within the limits of their definition.

23/11/17 2:27 PM

39

1 decade = 10 Gregorian years 1 fortnight = 14 days = 1 209 600 seconds 1 century = 100 Gregorian years 1 millennium = 1 000 Gregorian years 1 sidereal year = 366.256 4 sidereal days = 31 558 149.8 seconds 1 sidereal day = 86 164.091 seconds 1 sidereal hour = 3 590.170 seconds 1 sidereal minute = 59.836 17 seconds 1 sidereal second = 0.997 269 6 second 1 shake = 10-8 seconds

C. Other time units

40

01_Santoso_Sec01_p0001-0052.indd 40

TABLE 1-20  Velocity Conversion Factors The SI unit of velocity is the meter per second.

1 meter per second = 1 kilometer per hour = 1 statute mile per hour = 1 knot = 1 foot per minute = 1 foot per second = 1 inch per second =

Meters per second (m/s)

Kilometers per hour (km/h)

Statute miles per hour (mi/h)

1 3.6 2.236 936 29 1/3.6 = 0.277 777 1 0.621 371 19 0.447 04 1.609 344 1 0.514 444 1.852 1.150 779 45 0.005 08 0.018 288 0.011 363 0.304 8 1.097 28 0.681 818 0.025 4 0.091 44 0.056 818

Knots (kn) 1.943 844 49 0.539 956 80 0.868 976 24 1 9.874 730 01 × 10-3 0.592 483 80 0.049 373 65

note: The velocity of light in vacuum, c = 299 792 458 meters per second = 670 616 629 statute miles per hour = 186 282.397 statute miles per second = 0.983 571 056 feet per nanosecond 1 foot per hour = 8.466 667 × 10-5 meter per second 1 statute mile per minute = 26.822 4 meters per second 1 statute mile per second = 1 609.344 meters per second

Other velocity units

Feet per minute (ft/min)

Feet per second (ft/s)

Inches per second (in/s)

196.850 394 3.280 839 89 39.370 078 7 54.680 664 9 0.911 344 42 10.936 133 0 88 88/60 = 1.466 666 88/5 = 17.6 101.268 592 1.687 780 99 20.253 718 4 1 1/60 = 0.016 666 1/5 = 0.2 60 1 12 5 1/12 = 0.083 333 1

23/11/17 2:27 PM

01_Santoso_Sec01_p0001-0052.indd 41

TABLE 1-21  Density Conversion Factors

(Exact conversions are shown in boldface type. Repeating decimals are underlined.) The SI unit of density is the kilogram per cubic meter.



A. Density units decimally related to one kilogram per cubic meter

Kilograms per cubic meter (kg/m3) 1 kilogram per   cubic meter = 1 tonne per   cubic meter = 1 gram per   cubic meter = 1 gram per liter = 1 milligram per liter = 1 microgram   per milliliter =

1 1 000

Tonnes Grams per per cubic cubic meter meter (t/m3) (g/m3)

Grams per liter (g/L)

Milligrams per liter (mg/L)

Micrograms per milliliter (mg/mL)

0.001

1 000

1

1 000

1 000

1

1 000 000

1 000

1 000 000

1 000 000

0.001 0.000 001 1 0.001 1 1 1 0.001 1 000 1 1 000 1 000 0.001 0.000 001 1 0.001 1 1 0.001 0.000 001 1 0.001 1 1 B. Nonmetric density units (with kilogram per cubic meter equivalents) Kilograms Short tons Avoirdupois pounds per cubic per cubic mile per acrefoot meter (kg/m3) (short tons/mi3) (lb avdp/acre-ft)

Avoirdupois pounds per cubic foot (lb avdp/ft3)

Avoirdupois pounds Avoirdupois ounces Avoirdupois drams Grains per per cubic inch per U.S. quart per U.S. fluid ounce U.S. fluid ounce (lb avdp/in3) (oz advp/U.S. qt) (dr advp/U.S. floz) (grain/U.S. floz)

1 kilogram 1 4 594 934 2 719.362 0 6.242 796 1 × 3.612 729 20 × 3.338 161 6 × 1.669 080 82 × 0.456 389 28   per cubic meter = 10-2 10-5 10-2 10-2 1 short ton per 2.176 451 9 × 1 5.918 560 5 × 1.358 714 5 × 7.862 931 3 × 7.265 348 2 × 3.632 674 1 × 9.933 0931 1 ×   cubic mile = 10-7 10-4 10-8 10-12 10-9 10-9 10-8 1 avdp pound 3.677 333 2 × 1 689.600 0 1 2.295 684 1 × 1.328 520 9 × 1.227 553 2 × 6.137 766 2 × 1.678 295 5 ×   per acrefoot = 10-4 10-5 10-8 10-5 10-6 10-4 1 avdp pound 16.018 463 4 73 598 976 43 560 1 1/1 728 = 0.534 722 2 0.267 361 1 7.310 655 0   per cubic foot = 5.787 037 03 × 10-4 1 avdp pound 27 679.905 1.271 790 4 × 75 271 680 1 728 1 924 462 12 632.812   per cubic inch = 1011 1 avdp ounce 29.956 608 1.376 395 5 × 81 462.86 1.870 130 0 1.082 251 1 × 1 0.5 13.671 874   per U.S. quart = 108 10-3 1 avdp dram per 59.913 216 2.752 793 0 × 162 925.72 3.740 259 8 2.164 502 3 × 2 1 27.343 748   U.S. fluid ounce = 108 10-3 1 grain per 2.191 111 9 10 067 357 5 958.426 3 0.136 786 65 7.915 894 0 × 0.073 142 86 0.036 571 43 1   U.S. fluid ounce = 10-5

41

23/11/17 2:27 PM

1 grain per gallon, U.S. = 17.118 06 grams per cubic meter 1 gram per cubic centimeter = 1 000 kilograms per cubic meter 1 avdp ounce per gallon, U.S. = 7.489 152 kilograms per cubic meter 1 avdp ounce per cubic inch = 1 729.994 kilograms per cubic meter 1 avdp pound per gallon, U.S. = 119.826 4 kilograms per cubic meter 1 slug per cubic foot = 515.379 kilograms per cubic meter 1 long ton per cubic yard = 1 328.939 kilograms per cubic meter

C. Other density units

42

01_Santoso_Sec01_p0001-0052.indd 42

TABLE 1-22  Force Conversion Factors

(Exact conversions are shown in boldface type. Repeating decimals are underlined.) The SI unit of force is the newton (N).

Kilograms-force Avoirdupois Newtons Kips Slugs-force (kilopond) pounds-force (N) (kip) (slugf ) (kgf ) (lbf avdp)

Avoirdupois ounces-force (ozf advp)

Poundals (pdl)

Dynes (dyn)

1 newton = 1 2.248 089 43 × 6.987 275 24 × 0.101 971 62 0.224 808 94 3.596 943 09 7.233 014 2 100 000 10-4 10-3 1 kip = 444 8.221 62 1 31.080 949 453.592 370 1 000 16 000 32 174.05 444 822 162 1 slug-force = 143.117 305 0.032 174 05 1 14.593 903 32.174 05 514 784 80 1 035.169 5 14 311 730 1 kilogram 9.806 650 2.204 622 62 × 6.852 176 3 × 1 2.204 622 62 35.273 961 9 70 931 638 4 980 665   force (kilopond) = 10-3 10-2 1 avdp pound force = 4.448 221 62 0.001 3.108 094 88 × 0.453 592 37 1 16 32.174 05 444 822.162 10-2 1 avdp ounce force = 0.278 013 85 1/16 000 = 1.942 559 30 × 2.834 952 3 × 1/16 = 1 2.010 878 03 27 801.385 0.000 062 5 10-3 10-2 0.062 5 1 poundal = 0.138 254 95 3.108 094 9 × 9.660 253 9 × 0.140 980 81 0.031 080 95 0.497 295 18 1 13 825.495 10-5 10-4 1 dyne = 0.000 01 2.248 089 43 × 6.987 275 24 × 1.019 716 21 × 2.248 089 43 × 3.596 943 10 × 7.233 014 2 × 1 10-8 10-8 10-6 10-6 10-5 10-5 The exact conversion is 1 avdp pound-force = 4.448 221 615 260 5 newtons.

23/11/17 2:27 PM

01_Santoso_Sec01_p0001-0052.indd 43

TABLE 1-23  Pressure/Stress Conversion Factors

(Exact conversions are shown in boldface type. Repeating decimals are underlined.) The SI unit of pressure or stress is the pascal (Pa).



A. Pressure units decimally related to one pascal

Dynes per square Decibars Millibars centimeter Pascals (Pa) Bars (bar) (dbar) (mbar) (dyn/cm2) 1 pascal = 1 bar = 1 decibar = 1 millibar = 1 dyne per square centimeter =

1 100 000 10 000 100 0.1

0.000 01 1 0.1 0.001 0.000 001

0.000 1 10 1 0.01 0.000 01

0.01 1 000 100 1 0.001

10 1 000 000 100 000 1 000 1

B. Pressure units decimally related to one kilogram-force per square meter (with pascal equivalents)

Kilograms-force Kilograms-force Kilograms-force Grams-force per square per square per square per square meter centimeter millimeter centimeter Pascals (kgf /m2) (kgf /cm2) (kgf /mm2) (gf /cm2) (Pa) 1 kilogram-force per   square meter = 1 kilogram-force   per square centimeter = 1 kilogram-force per   square millimeter = 1 gram-force per   square centimeter = 1 pascal =

1 10 000

0.000 1

0.000 001

0.1

9.806 65

1

0.01

1 000

98 066.5

1 000 000

100

1

100 000

9 806 650

10

0.001

0.000 01

1

98.066 5

0.101 971 62

1.019 7162 × 10-5

1.019 716 2 × 10-7

1.019 716 2 × 10-2 1

note: 1 atmosphere (technical) = 1 kilogram-force per square centimeter = 98 066.5 pascals.

(Continued)

43

23/11/17 2:27 PM

44

01_Santoso_Sec01_p0001-0052.indd 44

TABLE 1-23  Pressure/Stress Conversion Factors (Continued)

(Exact conversions are shown in boldface type. Repeating decimals are underlined.) The SI unit of pressure or stress is the pascal (Pa).



C. Pressure units expressed as heights of liquid (with pascal equivalents)



Millimeters of mercury at 0°C (mmHg, 0°C)

Centimeters of mercury at 60°C (cmHg, 60°C)

Inches of mercury at 32°F (inHg, 32°F)

1 millimeter of mercury, 0°C = 1 centimeter of mercury, 60°C = 1 inch of mercury, 32°F = 1 inch of mercury, 60°C = 1 centimeter of water, 4°C = 1 inch of water, 60°F = 1 foot of water, 39.2°F = 1 pascal =

1 9.971 830 25.4 25.328 45 0.735 539 1.866 453 22.419 2 7.500 615 × 10-3

0.100 282 1 2.547 175 2.54 0.073 762 0.187 173 2.248 254 7.521 806 × 10-4

0.039 370 1 0.392 591 9 1 0.997 183 1 0.028 958 0.073 482 0.882 646 2.952 998 × 10-4

Inches of mercury Centimeters of at 60°F water at 4°C (inHg, 60°F) (cmH2O, 4°C) 0.039 481 3 0.393 700 8 1.002 824 8 1 0.029 040 0 0.073 690 0 0.885 139 2.961 34 × 10-4

1.359 548 13.557 18 34.532 52 34.435 25 1 2.537 531 30.479 98 1.019 74 × 10-2

note: 1 torr = 1 millimeter of mercury at 0°C = 133.322 4 pascals.

D. Nonmetric pressure units (with pascal equivalents)

Avoirdupois Avoirdupois pounds-force pounds-force Atmospheres per square inch per square foot (atm) (lb/in2) (lbf /ft2, avdp) 1 atmosphere = 1 avdp pound-force per   square inch = 1 avdp pound-force   per square foot = 1 poundal per square foot = 1 pascal =

1 6.804 60 × 10-2

Poundals per square foot Pascals (pdl/ft2) (Pa)

14.695 95 2 116.217 68 087.24 1 144 4 633.063

101 325 6 894.757

4.725 414 × 10-4

1/144 = 0.006 944

1

32.174 05

47.880 26

1.468 704 × 10-5 9.869 233 × 10-6

2.158 399 × 10-4 1.450 377 × 10-4

0.031 080 9 0.020 885 4

1 0.671 968 9

1.488 164 1

note: 1 normal atmosphere = 760 torr = 101 325 pascals.

Inches of water Feet of water at 60°F at 39.2°F Pascals (inH2O, 60°F) (ftH2O, 39.2°F) (Pa) 0.535 775 6 5.342 664 13.608 70 13.570 37 0.394 083 8 1 12.011 67 4.018 65 × 10-3

0.044 604 6 0.444 789 5 1.132 957 1.129 765 0.032 808 4 0.083 252 4 1 3.345 62 × 10-4

133.322 4 1 329.468 3 386.389 3 376.85 98.063 8 248.840 2 988.98 1

23/11/17 2:27 PM

01_Santoso_Sec01_p0001-0052.indd 45

TABLE 1-24  Torque/Bending Moment Conversion Factors

(Exact conversions are shown in boldface type. Repeating decimals are underlined.) The SI unit of torque is the newton-meter (N ⋅ m).

Kilogram-force- Avoirdupois Newton-meters meters pound-force-feet (N ⋅ m) (kgf ⋅ m) (lbf ⋅ ft, avdp) 1 newton-meter = 1 kilogram-force-meter = 1 avdp pound-force-foot = 1 avdp pound-force-inch = 1 avdp ounce-force-inch = 1 dyne-centimeter =

1 9.806 65 1.355 818 0.112 984 8 7.061 552 × 10-3 10-7

0.101 971 6 1 0.138 255 0 1.152 124 × 10-2 7.200 779 × 10-4 1.017 716 × 10-8

Avoirdupois pound-force- inches (lbf ⋅ in, avdp)

Avoirdupois ounce-force- Dyne- inches centimeters (ozf ⋅ in, avdp) (dyne ⋅ cm)

0.737 562 1 8.850 748 1 141.611 9 10 000 000 7.233 013 86.796 16 1 388.739 98 066 500 1 12 192 13 558 180 1/12 = 0.083 333 1 16 1 129 848 1/192 = 0.005 208 3 1/16 = 0.062 5 1 70 615.52 7.375 621 × 10-8 8.850 748 × 10-7 1.416 119 × 10-5 1

45

23/11/17 2:27 PM

46

01_Santoso_Sec01_p0001-0052.indd 46

TABLE 1-25  Energy/Work Conversion Factors

(Exact conversions are shown in boldface type. Repeating decimals are underlined.) The SI unit of energy and work is the joule (J).



A. Energy/work units decimally related to one joule

Joules (J)

Megajoules (MJ)

Kilojoules (kJ)

Millijoules (mJ)

Microjoules Ergs (mJ) (erg)

1 0.000 001 0.001 1 000 1 000 000 107 1 000 000 1 1 000 109 1012 1013 1 000 0.001 1 1 000 000 109 1010 0.001 10-9 10-6 1 1 000 10 000 0.000 001 10-12 10-9 0.001 1 10 10-7 10-13 10-10 0.000 1 0.1 1

1 joule = 1 megajoule = 1 kilojoule = 1 millijoule = 1 microjoule = 1 erg = note: 1 watt-second = 1 joule.

B. Energy/work units less than ten joules (with joule equivalents)

Joules Foot-poundals Foot-pounds-force (J) (ft ⋅ pdl) (ft ⋅ lbf ) 1 joule = 1 foot-poundal = 1 foot-pound-force = 1 calorie (Int. Tab.) = 1 calorie (thermo) = 1 electronvolt =

1 4.214 011 × 10-2 1.355 818 4.186 8 4.184 1.602 19 × 10-18



0.737 562 1 3.108 095 × 10-2 1 3.088 025 3.085 960 1.181 71 × 10-19

Calories (thermochemical) (cal, thermo)

Electronvolts (eV)

0.238 845 9 1.006 499 × 10-2 0.323 831 6 1 0.999 331 2 3.826 77 × 10-20

0.239 005 7 1.007 173 × 10-2 0.324 048 3 1.000 669 1 3.829 33 × 10-20

6.241 46 × 1018 2.630 16 × 1017 8.462 28 × 1018 2.613 17 × 1019 2.611 43 × 1019 1

C. Energy/work units greater than ten joules (with joule equivalents)

Joules (J) 1 joule = 1 British thermal unit,   Int. Tab. = 1 British thermal   unit (thermo) = 1 kilowatthour = 1 horsepower hour,  electrical = 1 kilocalorie, Int. Tab. = 1 kilocalorie,   thermochemical =

23.730 36 1 32.174 05 99.854 27 99.287 83 3.802 05 × 10-18

Calories (International Table) (cal, IT)

British thermal units, International Table (Btu, IT)

British thermal units, Horsepower-hours, thermochemical Kilowatthours electrical (Btu, thermo) (kWh) (hp ⋅ h, elec)

Kilocalories, International Table (kcal, IT)

Kilocalories, thermochemical (kcal, thermo)

1 1 055.056

9.478 170 × 10-4 1

9.484 516 5 × 10-4 1.000 669

1/(3.6 × 106) 2.777 × 10-7 2.930 711 1 × 10-4

3.723 562 × 10-7 3.928 567 × 10-4

2.388 459 × 10-4 0.251 995 8

2.390 057 4 × 10-4 0.252 164 4

1 054.35

0.999 331

1

2.928 745 × 10-4

03.925 938 × 10-4

0.251 827 2

0.251 995 7

3 600 000 2 685 600

3 412.141 2 545.457

3 414.426 2 547.162

4 186.8 4 184

3.968 320 3.965 666

3.970 977 3.968 322

The exact conversion is 1 British thermal unit, International Table = 1 055.055 852 62 joules.

1 1/0.746 = 1.340 482 6 859.845 2 0.746 1 641.444 5 0.001 163 0.001 162 2

1.558 981 × 10-3 1.557 938 6 × 10-3

1 0.999 331

860.420 7 641.873 8 1.000 669 1

23/11/17 2:27 PM

01_Santoso_Sec01_p0001-0052.indd 47

TABLE 1-26  Power Conversion Factors

(Exact conversions are shown in boldface type. Repeating decimals are underlined.) The SI unit of power is the watt (W).



A. Power units decimally related to one watt

Watts (W) 1 watt = 1 megawatt = 1 kilowatt = 1 milliwatt = 1 microwatt = 1 picowatt = 1 erg per second =

Megawatts (MW)

Kilowatts (kW)

1 0.000 001 0.001 1 000 000 1 1 000 1 000 0.001 1 -9 0.001 10 0.000 001 0.000 001 10-12 10-9 10-9 10-15 10-12 10-7 10-13 10-10

Milliwatts (mW)

Microwatts Picowatts Ergs per second (mW) (pW) (ergs/s)

1 000 1 000 000 109 107 109 1012 1015 1013 1 000 000 109 1012 1010 1 1 000 1 000 000 10 000 0.001 1 1 000 10 0.000 001 0.001 1 0.01 0.000 1 0.1 100 1

note: 1 watt = 1 joule per second (J/s).

B. Nonmetric power units (with watt equivalents) British thermal units (International Table) per hour (Btu/hr, IT)

British thermal units Avoirdupois Kilocalories (thermochemical) foot-pounds- per minute per minute force per second (thermochemical) (Btu/min, thermo) (ft ⋅ lbf,/s avdp) (kcal/min, thermo)

Kilocalories per second Horsepower (International Table) (electrical) (kcal/s, IT) (hp, elec)

Horsepower (mechanical) (hp, mech)

1 British thermal unit 1 0.016 677 8 0.216 158 1 4.202 740 5 × 6.999 883 1 × 3.928 567 0 × 3.930 148 0 ×   (Int. Tab.) per hour = 10-3 10-5 10-4 10-4 1 British thermal unit 59.959 853 1 12.960 810 0.251 995 7 4.197 119 5 × 0.023 555 6 0.023 565 1   (thermo) per minute = 10-3 1 foot-pound-force 4.626 242 6 0.077 155 7 1 0.019 442 9 3.238 315 7 × 1.817 450 4 × 1/550 =   per second = 10-4 10-3 1.818 181 8 × 10-3 1 kilocalorie per 237.939 98 3.968 321 7 51.432 665 1 0.016 655 5 0.093 476 3 0.093 513 9   minute (thermo) = 1 kilocalorie per 14 285.953 238.258 64 3 088.025 1 60.040 153 1 5.612 332 4 5.614 591 1   second (Int. Tab.) = 1 horsepower 2 545.457 4 42.452 696 550.221 34 10.697 898 0.178 179 0 1 1.000 402 4  (electrical) = 1 horsepower 2 544.433 4 42.435 618 550 10.693 593 0.178 107 4 0.999 597 7 1  (mechanical) = 1 watt = 3.412 141 3 0.056 907 1 0.737.562 1 0.014 340 3 2.388 459 0 × 1/746 = 1.341 022 0 × 10-4 1.340 482 6 × 10-3 10-3 note: The horsepower (mechanical) is defined as a power equal to 550 foot-pounds-force per second. Other units of horsepower are: 1 horsepower (boiler) = 9 809.50 watts 1 horsepower (metric) = 735.499 watts 1 horsepower (water) = 746.043 watts 1 horsepower (U.K.) = 745.70 watts 1 ton (refrigeration) = 3 516.8 watts

Watts (W) 0.293 071 1 17.572 50 1.355 818 69.733 333 4 186.800 746 745.699 9 1

47

23/11/17 2:27 PM

48  SECTION ONE

TABLE 1-27  Temperature Conversions

(Conversions in boldface type are exact. Continuing decimals are underlined.)

Celsius (°C) °C = 5(°F–32)/9

Fahrenheit (°F) °F = [9(C°)/5] + 32

Absolute (K) K = °C + 273.15

–273.15 –459.67 0 –200 –328 73.15 –180 –292 93.15 –160 –256 113.15 –140 –220 133.15 –120 –184 153.15 –100 –148 173.15 –80 –112 193.15 –60 –76 213.15 –40 –40 233.15 –20 –4 253.15 –17.77 0 255.372 0 32 273.15 5 41 278.15 10 50 283.15 15 59 288.15 20 68 293.15 25 77 298.15 30 86 303.15 35 95 308.15 40 104 313.15 45 113 318.15 50 122 323.15 55 131 328.15 60 140 333.15 65 149 338.15 70 158 343.15 75 167 348.15 80 176 353.15 85 185 358.15 90 194 363.15 95 203 368.15 100 212 373.15 105 221 378.15 110 230 383.15 115 239 378.15 120 248 393.15 140 284 413.15 160 320 433.15 180 356 453.15 200 392 473.15 250 482 523.15 300 572 573.15 350 662 623.15 400 752 673.15 450 842 723.15 500 932 773.15 1 000 1 832 1 273.15 5 000 9 032 5 273.15 10 000 18 032 10 273.15 note: Temperature in kelvins equals temperature in degrees Rankine divided by 1.8 [K = °R/1.8].

01_Santoso_Sec01_p0001-0052.indd 48

23/11/17 2:27 PM

01_Santoso_Sec01_p0001-0052.indd 49

TABLE 1-28  Light Conversion Factors

(Exact conversions are shown in boldface type. Repeating decimals are underlined.)



A. Luminance units. The SI unit of luminance is the candela per square meter (cd/m2).

Candelas per Candelas per Candelas per square meter square foot square inch Apostilbs Stilbs Lamberts Footlamberts 2 2 (cd/m ) (cd/ft ) (cd/in2) (asb) (sb) (L) (fL) 1 candela per square meter = 1 0.092 903 04 6.451 6 × 10-4 p = 3.141 592 65 0.000 1 (0.000 1) p = 0.291 863 51 3.141 592 65 × 10-4 1 candela per square foot = 10.763 910 4 1 1/144 = 33.815 821 8 1.076 391 04 × 3.381 582 18 × p = 3.141 592 65 0.006 944 44 10-3 10-3 1 candela per square inch = 1 550.003 1 144 1 4 869.478 4 0.155 000 31 0.486 947 84 452.389 342 1 apostilb = 1/o = 0.029 571 96 2.053 608 06 × 1 3.183 098 86 × 0.000 1 0.092 903 04 0.318 309 89 10-4 10-5 1 stilb = 10 000 929.030 4 6.451 6 31 415.926 5 1 p = 3.141 592 65 2 918.635 1 lambert = 10 000/o = 295.719 561 2.053 608 06 10 000 1/o = 1 929.030 4 3 183.098 86 0.318 309 89 1 footlambert = 3.426 259 1 1/o = 2.210 485 32 × 10.763 910 4 3.426 259 1 × 1.076 391 03 × 1 0.318 309 89 10-3 10-4 10-3 note:  1 nit (nt) = 1 candela per square meter (cd/m2).      1 stilb (sb) = 1 candela per square centimeter (cd/cm2).

B. Illuminance units. The SI unit of illuminance is the lux (lux).

Lumens per square inch Luxes (lx) Phots (ph) Footcandles (fc) (lm/in2) 1 lux = 1 0.000 1 0.092 903 04 6.451 6 × 10-4 1 phot = 10 000 1 929.030 4 6.451   6 1 footcandle = 10.763 910 4 1.076 391 04 × 1 1/144 = 10-3 0.006 944 44 1 lumen per 1 550.003 1 0.155 000 31 144 1   square inch = note:

1 lux (lux) = 1 lumen per square meter (lm/m2). 1 phot (ph) = 1 lumen per square centimeter (lm/cm2). 1 footcandle (fc) = 1 lumen per square foot (lm/ft2).

49

23/11/17 2:27 PM

50  SECTION ONE

Use of Conversion Factors.  Conversion factors are multipliers used to convert a quantity expressed in a particular unit (given unit) to the same quantity expressed in another unit (desired unit). To perform such conversions, the given unit is found at the left-hand edge of the conversion table, and the desired unit is found at the top of the same table. Suppose, for example, the quantity 1000 feet is to be converted to meters. The given unit, foot, is found in the left-hand edge of the third line of Table 1-15B. The desired unit, meter, is found at the top of the first column in that table. The conversion factor (0.304 8, exactly) is located to the right of the given unit and below the desired unit. The given quantity, 1000 feet, is multiplied by the conversion factor to obtain the equivalent length in meters, that is, 1000 feet is 1000 × 0.304 8 = 304.8 meters. The general rule is: Find the given unit at the left side of the table in which it appears and the desired unit at the top of the same table; note the conversion factor to the right of the given unit and below the desired unit. Multiply the quantity expressed in the given unit by the conversion factor to find the quantity expressed in the desired unit. Listings of conversion factors are often arranged as follows:

To convert from

To

Multiply by



(Given unit)

(Desired unit)

(Conversion factor)

The equivalences listed in the accompanying conversion tables can be cast in this form by placing the given unit (at the left of each table) under “To convert from,” the desired units (at the top of the table) under “To,” and the conversion factor, found to the right and below these units, under “Multiply by.” Use of Two Tables to Find Conversion Factors.  When the given and desired units do not appear in the same table, the conversion factor between them is found in two steps. The given unit is selected at the left-hand edge of the table in which it appears, and an intermediate conversion factor, applicable to the SI unit shown at the top of the same table, is recorded. The desired unit is then found at the top of another table in which it appears, and another intermediate conversion factor, applicable to the SI unit at the left-hand edge of that table, is recorded. The conversion factor between the given and desired units is the product of these two intermediate conversion factors.

TABLE 1-29  U.S. Electrical Units Used Prior to 1969, with SI Equivalents A. Legal units in the U.S. prior to January 1948 1 ampere (US-INT) 1 coulomb (US-INT) 1 farad (US-INT) 1 henry (US-INT) 1 joule (US-INT) 1 ohm (US-INT) 1 volt (US-INT) 1 watt (US-INT)

= 0.999 843 ampere (SI) = 0.999 843 coulomb (SI) = 0.999 505 farad (SI) = 1.000 495 henry (SI) = 1.000 182 joule (SI) = 1.000 495 ohm (SI) = 1.000 338 volt (SI) = 1.000 182 watt (SI)

B. Legal units in the U.S. from January 1948 to January 1969 1 ampere (US-48) 1 coulomb (US-48) 1 farad (US-48) 1 henry (US-48) 1 joule (US-48) 1 ohm (US-48) 1 volt (US-48) 1 watt (US-48)

01_Santoso_Sec01_p0001-0052.indd 50

= 1.000 008 ampere (SI) = 1.000 008 coulomb (SI) = 0.999 505 farad (SI) = 1.000 495 henry (SI) = 1.000 017 joule (SI) = 1.000 495 ohm (SI) = 1.000 008 volt (SI) = 1.000 017 watt (SI)

23/11/17 2:27 PM

UNITS, SYMBOLS, CONSTANTS, DEFINITIONS, AND CONVERSION FACTORS   51 

For example, it is required to convert 100 cubic feet to the equivalent quantity in cubic centimeters. The given quantity (cubic feet) is found in the fourth line at the left of Table 1-17B. Its intermediate conversion factor with respect to the SI unit is found below the cubic meters to be 2.831 684 66 × 10-2. The desired quantity (cubic centimeters) is found at the top of the third column in Table 1-17A. Its intermediate conversion factor with respect to the SI unit, found under the cubic centimeters and to the right of the cubic meters, is 1 000 000. The conversion factor between cubic feet and cubic centimeters is the product of these two intermediate conversion factors, that is, 1 cubic foot is equal to 2.831 684 66 × 10-2 × 1 000 000 = 28 316.846 6 cubic centimeters. The conversion from 100 cubic feet to cubic centimeters then yields 100 × 28 316.846 6 = 2 831 684.66 cubic centimeters. Conversion of Electrical Units.  Since the electrical units in current use are confined to the International System, conversions to or from non-SI units are fortunately not required in modern practice. Conversions to and from the older cgs units, when required, can be performed using the conversions shown in Table 1-9. Slight differences from the SI units occur in the electrical units legally recognized in the United States prior to 1969. These differences involve amounts smaller than that customarily significant in engineering; they are listed in Table 1-29.

1.17 BIBLIOGRAPHY 1.17.1 Standards ANSI/IEEE Std 268; Metric Practice. New York, Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers. Graphic Symbols for Electrical and Electronics Diagrams, IEEE Std 315-1975 (also published as ANSI Std Y32.2-1975). New York, Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers. IEEE Standard Letter Symbols for Units of Measurement, ANSI/IEEE Std 260.1-2004. New York, Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, ANSI Letter Symbols Units of Measurements (SI Units, Customary InchPound Units, and Certain Other Units). Letter Symbols for Quantities Used in Electrical Science and Electrical Engineering; ANSI Std Y10.5. Also published as IEEE Std 280; New York, Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers. SI Units and Recommendations for the Use of Their Multiples and of Certain Other Units; International Standards ISO-1000 (E). Available in the United States from ANSI. New York, American National Standards Institute. Also identified as IEEE Std 322 and ANSI Z210.1.

1.17.2  Collections of Units and Conversion Factors Encyclopaedia Britannica (see under “Weights and Measures”). Chicago, Encyclopaedia Britannica, Inc. McGraw-Hill Encyclopedia of Science and Technology (see entries by name of quantity or unit and vol. 20 under “Scientific Notation”). New York, McGraw-Hill. Mohr, Peter J. and Barry N. Taylor, CODATA: 2014; Recommended Values of the Fundamental Physical Constants; Reviews of Modern Physics, July-September 2016, vol. 88, pp. 1–73, http://www.physics.nist.gov/constants. National Institute of Standards and Technology Units of Weight and Measure—International (Metric) and U.S. Customary; NIST Misc. Publ. 286. Washington, Government Printing Office. The Introduction of the IAU System of Astronomical Constants into the Astronomical Ephemeris and into the American Ephemeris and Nautical Almanac (Supplement to the American Ephemeris 1968). Washington, United States Naval Observatory, 1966. The Use of SI Units (The Metric System in the United Kingdom), PD 5686. London, British Standards Institution. See also British Std 350, Part 2, and PD 6203 Supplement 1. The World Book Encyclopedia (see under “Weights and Measures”). Chicago, Field Enterprises Educational Corporation. World Weights and Measures, Handbook for Statisticians, Statistical Papers, Series M, No. 21, Publication Sales No. 66, XVII, 3. New York, United Nations Publishing Service.

01_Santoso_Sec01_p0001-0052.indd 51

23/11/17 2:27 PM

52  SECTION ONE

1.17.3  Books and Papers Brownridge, D. R.: Metric in Minutes. Belmont, California, Professional Publications, Inc., 1994. Cornelius, P., de Groot, W., and Vermeulen, R.: Quantity Equations, Rationalization and Change of Number of Fundamental Quantities (in three parts); Appl. Sci. Res., 1965, vol. B12, pp. 1, 235, 248. IEEE Standard Dictionary of Electrical and Electronics Terms, ANSI/IEEE Std 100-2000. New York, Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, 2000. Page, C. H.: Physical Entities and Mathematical Representation; J. Res. Natl. Bur. Standards, October–December 1961, vol. 65B, pp. 227–235. Silsbee, F. B.: Systems of Electrical Units; J. Res. Natl. Bur. Standards, April–June 1962, vol. 66C, pp. 137–178. Young, L.: Systems of Units in Electricity and Magnetism. Edinburgh, Oliver & Boyd Ltd., 1969.

01_Santoso_Sec01_p0001-0052.indd 52

23/11/17 2:27 PM

2

MEASUREMENT AND INSTRUMENTATION Harold Kirkham Staff Scientist, Pacific Northwest National Laboratory, Richland, Washington





2.1 INTRODUCTION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54 2.2 WHAT IS MEASUREMENT? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54 2.2.1 Uncertainty. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 2.2.2 Model of the Process of Measurement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57 2.3 CALIBRATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 2.3.1 Reference Measuring System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60 2.3.2 Reference Source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60 2.3.3 No Stable Source Available. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60 2.3.4 External Networks in Calibration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 2.3.5 Propagating Uncertainties. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65 2.3.6 Test Uncertainty Ratio. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66 2.4 INSTRUMENTATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 2.4.1 Instrument Transformers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 2.4.2 Sampling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72 2.5 USE OF INSTRUMENTS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74 2.6 POWER MEASUREMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76 2.7 REACTIVE POWER. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77 2.8 POWER-FACTOR MEASUREMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78 2.9 ENERGY MEASUREMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78 2.10 MEASURING COMPONENT VALUES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 2.10.1 Resistance Measurements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 2.10.2 Capacitance Measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84 2.10.3 Inductance Measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84 2.11 FREQUENCY MEASUREMENT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 2.12 “UNUSUAL” MEASUREMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 2.12.1 High Voltage and Resistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 2.13 PHASOR MEASUREMENT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 2.13.1 Magnitude. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 2.13.2 Angle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 2.13.3 Frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93 2.13.4 Rate of Change of Frequency. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93 2.14 BIBLIOGRAPHY. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93

53

02_Santoso_Sec02_p0053-0094.indd 53

23/11/17 2:35 PM

54  SECTION TWO

2.1 INTRODUCTION Since the last edition of this handbook was published, the field of measurement has gone through a veritable revolution, because of the advances in digital technology and the reduction in cost of digital hardware. The approach taken in this edition is to acknowledge the improved performance and ease of use that the digital instrument provides, and to the greatest extent possible to relegate analog measurements to a safe distance. Metrologists anticipate further advances in measurement because the digital revolution continues, in its own quiet way. Modern digital instruments are capable of accomplishing more than their analog predecessors, and as they advance, the gap between old and new will widen. But ultimately, measurement is an application-driven endeavor. The observer cannot be separated from the application. As instrumentation advances, it will be increasingly important for the observer to understand his or her role in the process, to a depth that has not been common before now. In fact, as measurements become seemingly easier to make, their meaning should be increasingly scrutinized. One particular quantity provides a striking example. The quantity “reactive power” is very useful in power engineering. It is founded on the model of real power, which is defined for a single-phase circuit by the equation P = VI cos Φ, where Φ is the angle between the voltage and the current. Reactive power, which does no real work, is given by P = VI sin Φ, a version of the same equation with cosine replaced by sine. However, these equations are based on the assumption of a sine-wave model for all the quantities involved. In the real world, perfect sine-waves are rare. If the waves are distorted, the digital instrument has a multitude of ways to handle the harmonics. The user may have to make a choice! The topic of reactive power has been the subject of a sometimes bitter debate, yet resolution has seemingly evaded those involved. We will consider the matter in Sec. 2.7.

2.2  WHAT IS MEASUREMENT? When we make a measurement, we are doing a special kind of data compression. We are saying, in effect, that everything we want to know about this signal, or that component, is contained in the result of the measurement we are going to make. Given a voltage, for example, we might want to know the amplitude, or the frequency. That means that the very notion of a measurement assumes that we know, even before we make the measurement, something about the thing we are going to assign a value to. We know, for example, whether the quantity before us on the bench is characterized by a voltage or a mass, and we use different instruments for these measurements. If the quantity is electrical, we have more detailed expectations. In power engineering, we know the current is usually represented as a signal that is either alternating sinusoidally or is steady, for example. We have in our minds, in other words, a conceptual model of the thing to be measured, and we expect the thing being measured to have a magnitude that can be expressed in terms of that model. The act of measuring is one that uses some aspect of the physical world to obtain values for that conceptual model. These days, we are comfortable that a model is a mathematical thing. Some examples are shown in Table 2-1. It is a lot easier to acknowledge the existence of an equation defining what is being measured in the case of a digital instrument than an analog one, but it was true even in the analog instrument. The stationary indicating pointer indicated that two forces were in balance: that equality was the sign that the equation was solved. For some measurements, nonelectrical experiments can be done to show the validity of a result. For example, power and energy are quantities whose electrical measurements are verifiable by calorimetry. Much stronger assumptions are made about some things being characterized. In the case of a signal assumed to represent direct current, or a sinusoidal quantity called a phasor, for example, the form of the equation is fixed by the assumption that the signal indeed has the given character. It follows that if the signal does not have that character, the instrument may not give an accurate answer. Therefore, it is up to the user to be sure that the instrument settings are appropriate for the signal.

02_Santoso_Sec02_p0053-0094.indd 54

23/11/17 2:35 PM

Measurement And Instrumentation   55 

TABLE 2-1  Examples of Measurement Equations Measurand Name

Equation

Direct current Phasor

Ic = 〈i(t)〉 x (t ) = X m cos{ω t + ϕ } 

Changing phasor

 C′  x (t ) = X m cos ω ′+ ϕ  t 2   + ϕ ′+

Resistance

Cω′ 2  w t  − 300°C) hydrocarbon oils are being tried for power transformers with some fire resistance. Methods for assessing the risk of fire with such liquids, as well as with silicones, are still being debated. Perchlorethylene (tetrachloroethylene), a nonpolar liquid, is now in use in sealed medium-power transformers, where nonflammability is required. With a boiling point at atmospheric pressure of 121°C, this fluid is completely nonflammable. It is also widely used in dry cleaning. Other important classes of synthetic insulating fluids are discussed in the following subsections. Fluorocarbon Liquids.  A number of nonpolar nonflammable perfluorinated aliphatic compounds, in which the hydrogen has been completely replaced by fluorine, are available with different ranges of viscosity and boiling point from below room temperature to more than 200°C. These compounds have low permittivities (near 2.0) and very low conductivity. They are inert chemically and have low solubilities for most other materials. The chemical formula for these compounds is one of the following: CnF2n, CnF2n + 2, or CnF2nO. The presence of the oxygen in the latter formula does not seem to reduce the stability. These compounds have been used for filling electronic apparatus and large transformers to give high heat-transfer rates together with high dielectric strength. The vapors of these liquids also have high dielectric strengths. Silicone Fluids.  These fluids, chemically formed from Si—O chains with organic (usually methyl) side groups, have a high thermal stability, low temperature coefficient of viscosity, low dielectric losses, and high dielectric strength. They can be obtained with various levels of viscosity and correlated vapor pressures. Rated service temperatures extend from -65 to 200°C, some having short-time capability up to 300°C. Their permittivity is about 2.6 to 2.7, declining with increasing temperature. These fluids have a tendency to form heavier carbon tracks than other insulating liquids when breakdown occurs. They cannot be considered fireproof but will reduce the risk of fire due to their low vapor pressure. Ester Fluids.  There are a few applications, mostly for capacitors, where organic ester compounds are used. These liquids have a somewhat higher permittivity, in the range of about 4 to 7, depending on the ratio of ester groups to hydrocarbon chain lengths. Their conductivities are generally

03_Santoso_Sec03_0095-0174.indd 167

22/11/17 12:22 PM

168  SECTION THREE

somewhat higher than those of the other insulating liquids discussed here. The compounds are easily subject to hydrolysis with water to form acids and alcohols and should be kept dry, particularly if the temperature is raised. Their thermal stability is poor. Specifically, dibutyl sebacate has been used in high-frequency capacitors and castor oil in energy-storage capacitors. Bibliography

Berberich, L. J. 1947. “Oxidation Inhibitors in Electrical Insulating Oils.” ASTM Bulletin 149, pp. 65–73. ASTM, West Conshohocken, Pa. Berberich, L. J., Blodgett, R. B., and Bartlett, S. C. 1961. “Influence of Gaseous Electric Discharge on Hydrocarbon Oils.” AIEE Trans., vol. 80, p. 528. Clark, F. M. 1962. Insulating Materials for Design and Engineering Practices. Wiley, New York. Dakin, T. W., Studniarz, S. A., and Hummert, G. T. 1972. “Annual Report, NRC-NAS Conference on Electrical Insulation and Breakdown.” NRC, Washington D.C. Gruse, W. A., and Stevens, D. R. 1960. Chemical Technology of Petroleum. McGraw-Hill, New York. Kaufman, R. B., Shimanski, E. J., and MacFadyen, K. W. 1955. “Gas and Moisture Equilibrium in Transformer Oils.” AIEE Trans., vol. 74, no. 3, p. 312. Mandelcorn, L., Dakin, T. W., Miller, R. L., and Mercier, G. 1979. “High-Voltage Power Capacitor Dielectrics: Recent Developments,” in Proceedings of IEEE Conference, publication no. 79CH1510-7-EI. IEEE, New York. Peek, F. W. 1929. Dielectric Phenomena in High-Voltage Engineering. McGraw-Hill, New York. Rohlfs, A. F., and Turner, F. J. 1956. “Correlation between the Breakdown Strength of Large Oil Gaps and Oil Quality Gauges.” AIEE Trans., vol. 75, no. 3, pp. 45–51. Roth, A. 1959. Hochspannungstechnik. Springer-Verlag, Vienna. Weber, K. H., and Endicott, H. S. 1956. “Area Effect and Its External Basis for the Electric Breakdown of Transformer Oil.” AIEE Trans., vol. 75, no. 3, p. 371.

3.3.4  Insulated Conductors Insulated conductors vary from those carrying only a few volts to those carrying thousands of volts. They range from low-voltage bell wire with conductor gage of 22 to 24 to power cables with conductors of 2000 kcmil or 1013 mm2 in cross-sectional area. The conductors can be round, rectangular, braided, or stranded. They can be of aluminum or copper. The insulation can be thin as in magnet wire or thick as in underground or marine cables. The insulation system can vary with functional application. It can be extruded or taped. It can be thermoplastic or thermoset. It can be a polymer in combination with cotton or glass cloth. There can be several different layers with different functional roles. Some of the applications for insulated conductors are communications, control, bell, building, hookup, fixture, appliance, and motor lead. The insulation technology for magnet wire and for power cables has been studied extensively because of the severe stresses seen by these insulation systems. Flexible Cords.  Flexible cords and cables cover appliance and lamp cords, extension cords for home or industrial use, elevator traveling cables, decorative-lighting wires and cords, mobile home wiring, and wiring for appliances that get hot (e.g., hot plates, irons, cooking appliances). The requirements for these cables vary a great deal with application. They must be engineered to be water-resistant, impact-resistant, temperature-tolerant, flex-tolerant, linearly strong, and flame-resistant and have good electrical insulation characteristics. Magnet Wire Insulation.  The term magnet wire includes an extremely broad range of sizes of both round and rectangular conductors used in electrical apparatus. Common round-wire sizes for copper are AWG No. 42 (0.0025 in) to AWG No. 8 (0.1285 in). A significant volume of aluminum magnet wire is produced in the size range of AWG No. 4 to AWG No. 26. Ultrafine sizes of round wire, used in very small devices, range as low as AWG No. 60 for copper and AWG No. 52 for aluminum.

03_Santoso_Sec03_0095-0174.indd 168

22/11/17 12:22 PM

PROPERTIES OF MATERIALS   169

Approximately 20 different “enamels” are used commercially at present in insulating magnet wire. Magnet wire insulations are high in electrical, physical, and thermal performance and best in space factor. The most widely used polymers for film-insulated magnet wire are based on polyvinyl acetals, polyesters, polyamideimides, polyimides, polyamides, and polyurethanes. Many magnet wire constructions use different layers of these polymer types to achieve the best combination of properties. The most commonly used magnet wire is NEMA MW-35C, Class 200, which is constructed with a polyester basecoat and a polyamideimide topcoat. Polyurethanes are employed where ease of solderability without solvent or mechanical striping is required. The thermal class of polyurethane insulations has been increased up to Class 155 and even Class 180. Magnet wire products also are produced with fabric layers (fiberglass or Dacronfiberglass) served over bare or conventional film-insulated magnet wire. Self-bonding magnet wire is produced with a thermoplastic cement as the outer layer, which can be heat-activated to bond the wires together. Power Cables.  Insulated power cables are used extenTABLE 3-15  Typical Cable Sizes sively in underground residential distribution. There has Conductor cross been extensive replacement of PILC, or paper in lead cable, Cable size section, mm2 with extruded polymer-insulated cables. Although PILC is still dominant for underground transmission cables, AWG 2 33.6 extruded polymeric cables are also beginning to be used for AWG 1 42.4 these high-voltage applications. Typical cable sizes with the AWG 1/0 53.5 cross section of the conductor are shown in the Table 3-15. AWG 2/0 67.4 Typically, a cable rated at 15 kV will have insulation of AWG 3/0 85.0 AWG 4/0 107.2 wall thickness 175 mil (4.45 mm); one rated at 35 kV will 500 kcmil 253.5 have a wall thickness of 345 mil (8.76 mm); one rated at 750 kcmil 379.5 69 kV will have insulation thickness of 650 mil (16.5 mm); 1000 kcmil 507.0 and a 138-kV cable will have insulation of wall thickness 2000 kcmil 1013.0 850 mil (21.6 mm). A cable construction includes the conductor shield, insulation, and insulation shield. In addition, most cables these days have a jacket to diminish moisture penetration into the insulation. The conductor shield is a semiconductive material applied to the conductor to smooth out the stress. Since the conductors, especially the stranded conductors, have “bumps” that can enhance the field, the role of the semiconductor is to present an even voltage stress to the insulation. The insulation shield fulfills a similar role on the outer surface of the insulation. Grit, or especially metal particles, can be sites where breakdown begins. A clean interface and a semiconductive material prevent such sites from forming. The formulation of the conductor shield and the insulation shield is different. The formulation also depends on the insulating material used. A number of different materials have been used as the matrix material for semiconductive shields. These include low-density polyethylene (LDPE), ethylene–ethyl acrylate (EEA), ethylene–vinyl acetate (EVA), ethylene–propylene rubber (EPR), ethylene–propylene diene monomer (EPDM), butyl rubber, and various proprietary formulations. These materials, in themselves, are not conducting. They are made conducting by loading the polymer with carbon. There are two insulations in use for power cables. One is cross-linked polyethylene (XLPE) and the other is ethylene–propylene rubber (EPR). These insulating materials will be described in greater detail in the following paragraphs. Most of the cables being installed in the latter part of the 1990s are jacketed. The jacket provides protection against oil, grease, and chemicals. However, the primary role played by the jacket is to slow down the ingress of moisture, since moisture in the presence of an electric field causes the insulation to degrade by a process called treeing. One of the materials used extensively as a jacket material is linear low-density polyethylene (LLDPE). Jackets are approximately 50 mil (1.27 mm) thick. The discussion thus far has not described the chemistry of each of these insulating materials. The terms thermoset and thermoplastic are used without explanation. Material names such as PE, PTFE, PVC, and silicones are used without characterizing the chemistry or structure.

03_Santoso_Sec03_0095-0174.indd 169

22/11/17 12:22 PM

170  SECTION THREE

A thermoplastic resin is one with a melting point. With rising temperature, a thermoplastic resin first undergoes a glass-transition temperature (Tg) and then a crystalline melting point (Tm). Below the glass-transition temperature, a polymer is rigid and exhibits properties associated with the crystalline state. Above the glass-transition temperature, the material becomes plastic and viscous, and the material starts to slowly approach the structure of the liquid state. The glass-transition state can be detected by plotting the dielectric constant, refractive index, specific heat, coefficient of expansion, or electrical conductivity as a function of temperature. There is one characteristic slope below the glass-transition state and another steeper slope above the glass-transition temperature. Approximate values for Tg and Tm for polyethylene are -128 and 115°C, and for polystyrene they are 80 and 240°C. It is difficult to give exact values for a given generic polymer. This is so because the exact value will depend a great deal on the variation in the character of a particular polymer, with all the variations being grouped together and called by a common name. For example, for polyethylene, the molecular weight (the degree of polymerization) of the resin, the degree of branching, and the size or length of the branches will affect both Tg and Tm. With polyvinyl chloride, the steroregularity, copolymerization, and plasticization all will affect Tg and Tm. A thermoset resin does not exhibit a visible melting point. An epoxy or a phenolic resin has a three-dimensional network structure. The three-dimensional structure results in a rigid framework that cannot be made fluid without breaking a large number of bonds. The thermoplastic resins, on the other hand, are linear. They might be thought of as strands of spaghetti. The strands can slip by one another and can be fluid. The analogy to a bowl of spaghetti can be used in understanding how a thermoset material can be formed by cross-linking a thermoplastic polymer such as polyethylene. The cross-linking reaction forms bonds between the linear strands of polyethylene to form a three-dimensional structure. To visualize the cross-linking, an analogy that can be used is that of the bowl of spaghetti left in a refrigerator overnight. Once the strands of spaghetti stick together, the mass is no longer fluid. The mass can be taken out of the bowl, and it will retain the shape of the bowl. The only way to fluidize this spaghetti is to break most or all the bonds formed between the individual strands. Some of the insulation materials used for insulated conductors are polyethylene (PE), ethylene– propylene rubber (EPR), polyvinyl chloride (PVC), fluorinated ethylene propylene (FEP), ethylene chlorotrifluoroethylene, polytetrafluoroethylene (PTFE), butyl rubber, neoprene, nitrile–butadiene rubber (NBR), latex, polyamide, and polyimide. Polyethylene is made by polymerizing ethylene, a gas with a boiling point of –104°C. A reaction carried out at high temperature (up to 250°C) and high pressure (between 1000 and 3000 atm) produces low-density polyethylene. The reason for the low density is that the short and long branches on the long chains prevent the chains from packing efficiently into a crystalline mass. The use of Ziegler-Natta catalysts results in high-density polyethylene. The use of the catalyst results in less branching and thereby a polymer that can pack more efficiently into crystalline domains. Recently, shape-selective catalysts have become available that produce polyethylene polymers that can be made with designer properties. Even though polyethylene consists of chains of carbons, the properties can vary depending on molecular weight and molecular shape. Polyethylene sold for insulating purposes has only small amounts of additives. There is always some antioxidant. For crosslinked polyethylene, the residues of the cross-linking agent are present. Additives to inhibit treeing are added. Ethylene–propylene rubber is a copolymer made from ethylene and propylene. The physical properties of the neat polymer are such that it is not useful unless compounded. The finished compounded product has as much as 40% to 50% filler content. Fillers consist of clays, calcium carbonate, barium sulfate, or various types of silica. In addition to the filler, EPR is compounded with plasticizer, antioxidants, flame retardants, process aids, ion scavengers, coupling agents, a curing coagent, and a curative. Polyvinyl chloride is a polymer made from vinyl chloride, a gas boiling at -14°C. It is partially syndiotactic; that is, the stereochemistry of the carbons on which the chlorines are attached is more or less alternating. By being only partially syndiotactic, the crystallinity is low. However, the polymer is still fairly rigid, and for use where flexibility is desired, the polymer must be plasticized.

03_Santoso_Sec03_0095-0174.indd 170

22/11/17 12:22 PM

PROPERTIES OF MATERIALS   171

Dibutylphthalate is often used as a plasticizer. In addition to plasticizers, PVC contains heat and light stabilizers. Oxides, hydroxides, or fatty acid salts of lead, barium, tin, or cadmium are typical stabilizers. Polytetrafluoroethylene (or Teflon) is a polymer made from tetrafluoroethylene, a nontoxic gas boiling at –76°C. It is a linear polymer consisting of chains made of CF2 units. Its crystallinity is quite high, and its crystalline melting point is 327°C. It is resistant to almost all reagents, even up to the boiling point of the reagent. It is attacked only by molten alkali metals or the alkali metal dissolved in liquid ammonia. Polytetrafluoroethylene exhibits excellent electrical properties. It has a low dielectric constant and a low loss factor. These electrical properties do not change even when the polymer is kept at 250°C for long periods of time. Fluorinated ethylene propylene is a copolymer made from tetrafluoroethylene and hexafluoropropylene. It compares in toughness, chemical inertness, and heat stability to polytetrafluoro­ ethylene (PTFE). Polychlorotrifluoroethylene has performance properties that are surpassed only by PTFE and FEP. The crystalline melting point is 218°C, as compared with 327°C for PTFE. It retains useful properties to 150°C, as opposed to 250°C for PTFE. The advantage for polychlorotrifluoroethylene is that its melt viscosity is so low enough that molding and extrusion become more feasible than for PTFE and FEP. Polyamides or nylons are long-chain linear polymers made by molecules linked by amide linkages. Nylon 66 is made from hexamethylene diamine and adipic acid. Nylon 66 exhibits high strength, elasticity, toughness, and abrasion resistance. Nylon 6 is made from caprolactam, a cyclic amide. To form a polymer, the caprolactam opens and the amine group and carboxylic acid group form intermolecular amide links rather than the intramolecular amide link in the cyclic compound. Polyimides are polymers connected by imide bonds. An amide is formed when the OH group of a carboxylic acid is replaced by the NH of an amine. An imide is a related structure formed when the noncarbonyl oxygen of an acid anhydride is replaced by a nitrogen of an amine. A polyimide is usually formed from an aromatic diamine and an aromatic dianhydride. The aromatic nature of the polyimide imparts thermal stability. Rubbers used for electrical insulation can be either natural rubber or one of the synthetic rubbers. Natural rubber is obtained from the latex of different plants. The primary commercial source is the tree Hevea brasiliensis. Natural rubber is an isoprenoid compound wherein the isoprene (2-methyl-1,3-butadiene) is the unit of a high-molecular-weight polymer with a degree of polymerization of around 5000. Rubber without processing is too gummy to be of practical use. It is vulcanized (cross-linked) by reaction with sulfur. Natural rubber is flexible and elastic and exhibits good electrical characteristics. Butyl rubbers are synthetic rubbers made by copolymerizing isobutylene (2-methyl-1-propene) with a small amount of isoprene. The purpose of isoprene is to introduce a double bond into the polymer chain so that it can be cross-linked. Butyl rubbers are mostly amorphous, with crystallization taking place on stretching. They are characterized by showing a low permeability to gases, thus making them the material of choice for inner tubes of automobile tires. They are reasonably resistant to oxidative aging. Butyl rubbers have good electrical properties. Polychloroprene or neoprene is a generic term for polymers or copolymers of chloroprene (2-chloro-1,3-butadiene). Neoprene is an excellent rubber with good oil resistance. It has resistance to oxidative degradation, and is stable at high temperatures. Its properties are such that it would make excellent automobile tires, but the cost of the polymer makes it noncompetitive for this market. Its desirable properties are exploited for wire and cable insulations. Nitrile rubbers are polymers of butadiene and acrylonitrile. Nitrile rubbers are used where oil resistance is needed. The degree of oil resistance varies with acrylonitrile content of the copolymer. With 18% acrylonitrile content, the oil resistance is only fair. With 40% acrylonitrile content, the oil resistance is excellent. The oil resistance is characterized by retention of low swelling, good tensile strength, and good abrasion resistance after being immersed in gasoline or oil. Nitrile rubbers can be used in contact with water or antifreeze. For use in wire insulation where oil resistance is needed, nitrile rubber is slightly better than neoprene.

03_Santoso_Sec03_0095-0174.indd 171

22/11/17 12:22 PM

172  SECTION THREE

TABLE 3-16  Thermal Conductivity of Materials Commonly Used for Electrical Design

Thermal conductivity

Material

W/(in)(°C) Btu/(h)(ft)(°F)

Silver 10.6 241 Copper 9.6 220 Eutectic bond 7.50 171.23 Gold 7.5 171 Aluminum 5.5 125 Beryllia 95% 3.9 90.0 Molybdenum 3.7 84 Cadmium 2.3 53 Nickel 2.29 52.02 Silicon 2.13 48.55 Palladium 1.79 40.46 Platinum 1.75 39.88 Chromium 1.75 39.88 Tin 1.63 36.99 Steel 1.22 27.85 Solder (60–40) 0.91 20.78 Lead 0.83 18.9 Alumina 95% 0.66 15.0 Kovar 0.49 11.1 Epoxy resin, BeO-filled 0.088 2.00 Silicone RTV, BeO-filled 0.066 1.5 Quartz 0.05 1.41 Silicon dioxide 0.035 0.799 Borosilicate glass 0.026 0.59 Glass frit 0.024 0.569 Conductive epoxy 0.020 0.457 Sylgard resin 0.009 0.21 Epoxy glass laminate 0.007 0.17 Doryl cement 0.007 0.17 Epoxy resin, unfilled 0.004 0.10 Silicone RTV, BeO-filled 0.004 0.10 Air 0.016

TABLE 3-17  Thermal-Conductivity Conversion Factors To

From

(cal)(cm) (s)(cm 2 )(°C)

(cal)(cm) 1 (s)(cm 2 )(°C) (W)(cm) 2.39 × 10–1 (cm 2 )(°C)

03_Santoso_Sec03_0095-0174.indd 172

(W)(cm) (cm 2 )(°C) 4.18

(W)(in) (in 2 )(°C) 10.62

(Btu)(ft) (h)(ft 2 )(°F) 241.9

1 2.54 57.8

(W)(in) 9.43 × 10–2 (in 2 )(°C)

3.93 × 10–1

(Btu)(ft) 4.13 × 10–3 (h)(ft 2 )(°F)

1.73 × 10–2

1 22.83 4.38 × 10–2 1

22/11/17 12:22 PM

PROPERTIES OF MATERIALS   173

Bibliography

Billmeyer, F. W., Jr. 1962. Textbook of Polymer Science, 2nd ed. Wiley-Interscience, New York. National Electrical Code. 1996. The National Fire Protection Agency, Quincy, Mass. NEMA Standard MW 1000-1997. NEMA, Rosslyn, Va. UL Standard for Safety, UL-62. Northbrook, Ill: Underwriters Laboratory Inc. ASTM D2307. ASTM, Philadelphia, Pa.

3.3.5  Thermal Conductivity of Electrical Insulating Materials One of the general characteristics of electrical insulating materials is that they are also good thermal insulating materials. This is true, in varying degrees, for the entire spectrum of insulating materials, including air, fluids, plastics, glasses, and ceramics. While the thermal insulating properties of electrical insulating materials are not especially important for electrical and electronic designs which are not heat sensitive, modern designs are increasingly heat sensitive. This is often because higher power levels are being dissipated from smaller part volumes, thus tending to raise the temperature of critical elements of the product design. This results in several adverse effects, including degradation of electrical performance and degradation of many insulating materials, especially insulating papers and plastics. The net result is reduced life and/or reduced reliability of the electrical or electronic part. To maximize life and reliability, much effort has been devoted to data and guidelines for gaining the highest possible thermal conductivity, consistent with optimization of product design limitations such as fabrication, cost, and environmental stresses. This subsection will present data and guidelines which will be useful to electrical and electronic designers in selection of electrical insulating materials for best meeting thermal design requirements. Also, methods of determining thermal conductivity K will be described. Basic Thermal-Conductivity Data.  The thermal-conductivity values for a range of materials commonly used in electrical design are shown in Table 3-16. These data show the ranking of the range of materials, both conductors and insulating materials, from high to low. The magnitude of the differences in conductor and plastic thermal-conductivity values can be seen. Note that one ceramic, 95% beryllia, has a higher thermal-conductivity value than some metals—thus making beryllia highly considered for high-heat-dissipating designs which allow its use. Thermal conductivity is variously reported in many different units, and convenient conversions are shown in Table 3-17. Values of thermal conductivity do not change drastically up to 100°C or higher, and hence only a single value is usually given for plastics. For higher-temperature applications, such as with ceramics, the temperature effect should be considered. In addition to bulk insulating materials, insulating coatings are frequently used. Bibliography

Harper, C. A. (1995). Electronic Packaging and Interconnecting Handbook, 2nd ed. McGraw-Hill, New York. Harper, C. A. (1996). Handbook of Hybrid Microelectronics, 2nd ed. McGraw-Hill, New York. Harper, C. A. (1996). Handbook of Plastics and Elastomers, 3rd ed. McGraw-Hill, New York. Sergent, J. E., and Drum, A. (1997). Thermal Management Handbook. McGraw-Hill, New York.

03_Santoso_Sec03_0095-0174.indd 173

22/11/17 12:22 PM

This page intentionally left blank

03_Santoso_Sec03_0095-0174.indd 174

22/11/17 12:22 PM

4

INTERCONNECTED POWER GRIDS Sarma Nuthalapati Principal EMS Network Applications Engineer, PEAK Reliability, Vancouver, Washington

Stephen Boroczky Principal Engineer, Grid Systems, Australian Energy Market Operator (AEMO), Sydney, NSW, Australia

Steven Darnell Principal Engineer, Systems Performance and Commercial, Australian Energy Market Operator (AEMO), Brisbane, QLD, Australia

Alan Honecker Senior Manager, NEM Real Time Operations, Australian Energy Market Operator (AEMO), Sydney, NSW, Australia

Adam Peard Area Manager—System Analysis and Solutions, Network Planning, Western Power, Perth, WA, Australia

Shantha Ranatunga Specialist, Systems Performance and Commercial, Australian Energy Market Operator (AEMO), Brisbane, QLD, Australia

Héctor Volskis Operador Nacional do Sistema Elétrico (ONS), Brazil

Xuanyuan Sharon Wang Jibei Electric Power Company, State Grid Corporation of China, Beijing, China 175

04_Santoso_Sec04_p0175-0244.indd 175

27/11/17 2:36 PM

176  SECTION FOUR

Mini Shaji Thomas Director, National Institute of Technology, Tiruchirappalli, India

Teruo Ohno TEPCO Research Institute, Tokyo Electric Power Holdings, Inc., Japan

Spencer Burks Lower Colorado River Authority, Austin, Texas

Kristian Koellner Lower Colorado River Authority, Austin, Texas

Komla A. Folly University of Cape Town, Cape Town, South Africa

Kehinde Awodele University of Cape Town, Cape Town, South Africa

Leandro Kapolo NamPower, Windhoek, Namibia

Nhlanhla Mbuli ESKOM and University of Johannesburg, Johannesburg, South Africa

Martin Kopa ESKOM, Johannesburg, South Africa

Oladiran Obadina Electric Reliability Council of Texas (ERCOT), Austin, Texas

04_Santoso_Sec04_p0175-0244.indd 176

27/11/17 2:36 PM

INTERCONNECTED POWER GRIDS   177 



4.1 INTRODUCTION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178 4.2 INTERCONNECTED POWER GRIDS IN AUSTRALIA. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178 4.2.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178 4.2.2 System Statistics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178 4.2.3 National Electricity Market (NEM). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180 4.2.4 South West Interconnected System (SWIS). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187 4.2.5 References. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189 4.3 INTERCONNECTED POWER GRID IN BRAZIL. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190 4.3.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190 4.3.2 Structure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190 4.3.3 Planning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190 4.3.4 Operation and Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192 4.3.5 Smart Grid Initiatives. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193 4.3.6 Conclusion. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195 4.3.7 References. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195 4.4 INTERCONNECTED POWER GRID IN CHINA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195 4.4.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195 4.4.2 Structure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196 4.4.3 Interconnection of Different Regions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197 4.4.4 Planning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197 4.4.5 Operation and Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199 4.4.6 Regulatory Bodies. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200 4.4.7 Future Grid Initiatives. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200 4.4.8 Conclusion. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202 4.4.9 References. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202 4.5 INTERCONNECTED POWER GRID IN INDIA. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203 4.5.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203 4.5.2 Institutional Set Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204 4.5.3 Makeup and Size. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205 4.5.4 Voltage Levels. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205 4.5.5 Interconnection of Different Regions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205 4.5.6 Renewables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207 4.5.7 Operation and Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207 4.5.8 Unified Real-Time Dynamic State Measurement (URTDSM) Scheme. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208 4.5.9 Smart Grid Initiatives in India. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209 4.5.10 References. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211 4.6 INTERCONNECTED POWER GRID IN JAPAN. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211 4.6.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211 4.6.2 Paradigm Shift after Great East Japan Earthquake. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213 4.6.3 Planning of Interconnection Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214 4.6.4 Future Outlook. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214 4.6.5 Reference. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215 4.7 INTERCONNECTED POWER GRID IN NORTH AMERICA . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216 4.7.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216 4.7.2 Structure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216 4.7.3 Voltage Levels. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216 4.7.4 Functional Tiers of the Power Grid. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218 4.7.5 System Protection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218 4.7.6 HVDC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219 4.7.7 Distribution System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219 4.7.8 Generation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221 4.7.9 Planning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221 4.7.10 References. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225 4.8 INTERCONNECTED POWER GRID IN SOUTHERN AFRICAN COUNTRIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225 4.8.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225 4.8.2 Evolution of Southern Africa Power Pool. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226 4.8.3 Structure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229

04_Santoso_Sec04_p0175-0244.indd 177

27/11/17 2:36 PM

178  SECTION FOUR



4.8.4 Operation and Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233 4.8.5 Renewable Energy in Southern Africa . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236 4.8.6 Future Outlook. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237 4.8.7 Conclusion. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242 4.8.8 References. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242

4.1 INTRODUCTION BY SARMA NUTHALAPATI This section provides an overview of interconnected power grids. Any typical power grid consists of various components as shown in Fig. 4-1. It consists of a generation system that has generators generating power, a transmission system that transmits power at high voltages to different load centers, and a distribution system that distributes power to different loads. Figure 4-2 shows a typical layout of a distribution system for a city. It shows how power from high voltage network (transmission system) is being converted into medium voltage level network through extra high voltage (EHV) substations and further distributed to different regions of the city through medium voltage network, which is finally distributed to various loads through distribution substations and distribution feeders shown in Fig. 4-3. Different parts of the world have different practices of connecting the power grid and managing it. This section provides details about the interconnected grid across different parts of the world and gives readers a glimpse of various features of any interconnected power grid. Each subsection discusses the structure, planning, and operation aspects of the respective grid, as well as a future perspective.

4.2  INTERCONNECTED POWER GRIDS IN AUSTRALIA BY STEPHEN BOROCZKY, STEVEN DARNELL, ALAN HONECKER, ADAM PEARD, AND SHANTHA RANATUNGA 4.2.1 Introduction Australia’s power systems have developed from a number of independent regional systems, which evolved as population and industry developed in dispersed coastal areas of Australia. Subsequent interconnection has led to two main coastal interconnected systems: the national grid, where the National Electricity Market (NEM) operates in the east, and the South West Interconnected System (SWIS), where the Wholesale Electricity Market (WEM) operates in the west. Both of these systems operate at 50 Hz but at various high voltages that reflect their independent regional origins [1-6]. Figure 4-4 depicts the extent of the interconnected power systems in Australia. A number of smaller transmission systems and numerous isolated power systems service the more remote regions of Australia. 4.2.2  System Statistics From the demand data in Table 4-1, it can be surmised that regional maximum demand has not been increasing over the last 5 to 10 years. Coupled with the loss of some industrial load, this is largely due to the increasing penetration of “behind the meter” rooftop solar photovoltaic (PV) installations.

04_Santoso_Sec04_p0175-0244.indd 178

27/11/17 2:36 PM

INTERCONNECTED POWER GRIDS   179 

Generating plant Step-up transformers Circuit breakers Transmission system

Dispersed storage and generation (DSG)

Transformers in bulk power substations

Sub-transmission system Distribution substation DSG

Solar or wind sources (100 KW to 1MW)

Threephase primary feeders

Sectionalizing switch

Battery or fuel cells, 1 to 25 MW

Voltage regulator

Capacitor bank

Primary circuits One-phase lateral feeder

Distribution transformer

DSG

Photovoltaic power supply, up to 100 KW

Home

FIGURE 4-1  Typical components of a power grid.

04_Santoso_Sec04_p0175-0244.indd 179

27/11/17 2:36 PM

180  SECTION FOUR

EHV Sub-stations

Distribution s/s

FIGURE 4-2  Interconnected power grid in a typical city.

This has resulted in recent stagnant or even negative demand growth. Residential rooftop PV has grown to such an extent that the NEM, particularly in South Australia, has the highest percentage of households with PV installations in the world [17]. The energy mix shown in Fig. 4-5 shows the dominance of coal as an energy source in Australia, with currently roughly 75% of energy supplied by large coal fired power stations but nevertheless represents a significant reduction from 1990 levels. This scene is set to change further with Australia’s commitment to the 2015 Paris 21st Conference of Parties emission abatement targets to reduce carbon emissions by 26% to 28% below 2005 levels by 2030 [8,9]. 4.2.3  National Electricity Market (NEM) The national grid, operated as the NEM, is the largest interconnected system in Australia and represents the power system that spans eastern and southern states of Australia. It consists of an interconnection of state and regional based power systems, interconnected by AC and DC interconnectors. The AC transmission system predominantly runs along the coast stretching from Cairns in Far North Queensland through NSW and Victoria to Port Lincoln in South Australia for more than 4000 km,

04_Santoso_Sec04_p0175-0244.indd 180

27/11/17 2:36 PM

INTERCONNECTED POWER GRIDS   181 

Section 1 SW1

SW2 Distribution substation 1

Feeder 1

Feeder 2

Distribution substation 2

FIGURE 4-3  Typical layout of a distribution feeder. SW1/SW2: Normally open/Normally closed sectionalizing switch on a distribution feeder.

along with a DC interconnection to the island of Tasmania. As such it is a loosely meshed, long, thin network that represents one of the longest interconnected power systems in the world. This presents its own unique operational challenges. Governing Bodies and Participants Australian Competition and Consumer Commission.  The Australian Competition and Consumer Commission (ACCC) role is to protect, strengthen, and supplement Australian markets by enforcement of the Competitions and Consumer Act 2010. With respect to the NEM, it works with the Australian Energy Regulator (AER) to support fair trading, to promote competition and economic efficiency in the Australian markets and to remedy market failure [1]. Australian Energy Regulator.  AER regulates the energy markets and networks under national energy market legislation and rules. It monitors compliance and enforces the rules under which the energy markets operate.

04_Santoso_Sec04_p0175-0244.indd 181

27/11/17 2:36 PM

182  SECTION FOUR

TABLE 4-1  Australian Regional Based Data—2016 [1,4,7,8]

State or territory

Interconnected system

Maximum demand* (MW) (year obtained)

System operator/ market operator

Transmission Network Service Provider (TNSP)

Dominant transmission voltages (kV)

9154 (2015) 14744 (2011)

AEMO

PowerLink

275, 132, 110

AEMO

TransGrid

500, 330, 132

Distribution Network Service Provider (DNSP)

Queensland

NEM

NSW and ACT

NEM

Victoria

NEM

10576 (2009)

AEMO

Ausnet Services, AEMO†

500, 220, 66

Tasmania

NEM

AEMO

TasNetworks

220, 110

South Australia

NEM

AEMO

ElectraNet SA

275, 132

SA Power Networks

Western Australia‡ Northern Territory

SWIS

1790 (2008) 3399 (2011) 4286 (2016 360§ (2016)

Energex, Ergon Energy AusGrid, Endeavour Energy, Essential Energy, ActewAGL CitiPower and PowerCor, Jemena, United Energy, Ausnet Services TasNetworks

AEMO

Western Power

330, 220, 132

Western Power

Power and Water Corporation

Power and Water Corporation

132, 66

Power and Water Corporation

None

*Demand is measure of the total electrical power requirement met by generating units. †AEMO has a TNSP responsibility of planning of the Victorian transmission system. ‡Western Australia represents the South West Interconnected System (SWIS) only. §Total demand for the combined regulated networks in Northern Territory.

Australian Energy Market Commission.  The Australian Energy Market Commission makes and amends the National Electricity Rules that underpin the NEM. It conducts independent reviews and provides advice to governments on the development of electricity markets. Australian Energy Market Operator.  The Australian Energy Market Operator (AEMO) is responsible for the day-to-day operation of the NEM interconnected power system as well as a number of energy markets including the NEM wholesale electricity market. It is the independent system operator and the independent market operator of the NEM. Some of its operational responsibilities include: •  The secure operation of the NEM interconnected power system. •  Frequency control of the two DC connected NEM islands. •  Operation of the NEM and the various ancillary service markets. To fulfil its responsibilities in the NEM, AEMO operates the power system from two geographically separated control centers on the East coast of Australia. They are operated in a “co-primary” fashion, where both control centers are operated as primary control centers. Responsibilities are either duplicated or shared between the two control centers. Some functions that cannot be shared, such as automatic generation control (AGC), are initiated from an active site but can be transferred at any time. The two control centers are resourced so that either can seamlessly assume responsibility for the entire NEM if needed. Other AEMO functions include the operation of: •  Wholesale Electricity Market (WEM) in Western Australia, including all power system security functions

04_Santoso_Sec04_p0175-0244.indd 182

27/11/17 2:36 PM

INTERCONNECTED POWER GRIDS   183 

FIGURE 4-4  Map of Australia depicting the national grid in the East and South, and the SWIS in the South West corner of Western Australia. http://www.aemo.com.au/aemo/apps/visualisations/map.html.

•  Energy Retail markets in the NEM •  Various other Gas markets in Australia In its role as the national transmission planner, AEMO provides the long term strategic view of the development of the national transmission grid in the NEM. This culminates in the regular publication of reports such as the National Transmission Network Development Plan [3], the Electricity Statement of Opportunities (ESOO) [2] and the National Electricity Forecasting Report [4]. Transmission Network Service Providers.  Transmission Network Service Providers (TNSP) are generally state based transmission asset owners. They maintain, control and operate the assets in their portfolio. Transmission assets are usually operated under the direction of AEMO. As the asset owner, the TNSP owns and maintains all the supervisory and control equipment, as well as communication equipment associated with the operation of their assets. While each TNSP is somewhat unique, they all maintain a primary control center geographically located within their asset area with a “hot standby” control center in a physically different location.

04_Santoso_Sec04_p0175-0244.indd 183

27/11/17 2:36 PM

184  SECTION FOUR

Australian regional generation capacity (MW) by fuel type 30 June 2016

Generation capacity (MW)

18000 16000 14000 12000 10000 8000 6000 4000 2000 0

Coal

Queensland NSW & ACT Gas

Dual(Gas/Diesel)

Victoria Hydro

Tasmania Wind

South Australia Solar

Western Australia

Biomass

Northern Territory

Other

DSM

FIGURE 4-5  Australian state and territory generation and Demand Side Management (DSM) capacity by fuel type [2,7,9,14].

In planning their network, the TNSP will identify and assess emerging network limitations. An annual planning review identifies these constraints, as well as any aging infrastructure, and proposes options to address them. The annual planning review process may involve joint planning with Distribution Network Service Providers (DNSP), neighboring TNSPs and with AEMO to determine an efficient plan which not only considers network options but also options such as generation or demand side management [10,11]. Before any transmission augmentation can proceed, feasibility studies must be undertaken using the AER’s “Regulatory Investment Test for Transmission” framework to identify the most economically efficient option that addresses these limitations [12]. Distribution Network Service Providers.  Distribution Network Service Providers (DNSP) are responsible for the reticulation of electricity from the bulk supply points to the consumer. They maintain and manage the secure operation of the distribution assets in their portfolio. The DNSP will generally have both a primary and a backup control center to manage their distribution networks. NEM Market Generators.  Market Generators are power station asset owners or operators that participate as market players in the NEM. The National Electricity Rules state that generators of capacity larger than 30 MW should be registered as either Scheduled Generators or Semi-Scheduled Generators to be dispatched by AEMO’s central dispatch process.a They own or operate all the equipment associated with the generation of power, including any generator transformers that connect the generation asset to a high voltage bus in the transmission network. Scheduled generation will respond to AGC signals to follow their dispatch target and to provide frequency response for the interconnected system. They will also respond to requests from AEMO to manage the transmission voltage levels, either by adjusting their generator transformer tap position or by modifying generator excitation. Operating the National Electricity Market.  The central dispatch process is integral to the operation of the NEM and is the normal mechanism through which AEMO has to adjust power flows National Electricity Rules [5], Rule 2.2.

a

04_Santoso_Sec04_p0175-0244.indd 184

27/11/17 2:36 PM

INTERCONNECTED POWER GRIDS   185 

in the NEM. All MW control actions are initiated by manipulation of constraints in this securityconstrained dispatch process that is determined every 5 minutes. The interregional interconnectors remain the weak points and determine many of the constraints in this dispatch process. Table 4-2 summarizes the nature of these interconnector limitations. Frequency Control.  Dispatch instructions for scheduled generators are mostly via automatic generation control (AGC). Participants can follow dispatch instructions by AGC or manual control at their discretion. Renewable or intermittent dispatch is by semi-scheduled dispatch systems. Semischeduled dispatch means dispatch is binding only when constrained. Dispatch targets are derived from centralized wind and solar forecasting systems—the Australian Wind Energy Forecasting System (AWEFS) and a similar solar forecasting ASEFS. Frequency control is via eight separate minor markets known as frequency control ancillary services (FCAS). These eight FCAS services are raise and lower for regulation, 6-second, 60-second, and 5-minute response. Regulation is dispatched constantly on a 4-second cycle by AGC and seeks to correct for the 5-minute dispatch error and maintain system frequency at 50 Hz. The other FCAS services respond locally to frequency disturbances and seek to contain, stabilize and recover to normal frequency tolerance bands in response to contingency. As Tasmania is an isolated AC island, only connected to the mainland by a single HVDC cable, AEMO operates Tasmania as a separate AGC area from the mainland. AEMO dispatches the whole interconnected system, both market and operational in its entirety, so AGC is not complicated by the need to deploy tie line controls. Power System Security.  The nature of the NEM means that it can present some unique operational challenges. While, static constraints, such as thermal line or transformer limitations and equipment voltage limitations need to be addressed, all too often the limiting constraint is due to dynamic phenomena, such as transient stability, oscillatory stability, or voltage stability. As a result, accurate assessment of these dynamic limitations is critical to operate the interconnected system within its technical envelope.

TABLE 4-2  Summary of NEM Interconnector Characteristics [15,16] Interconnector

Type

Connected regions

Queensland—NSW Interconnector (QNI)

AC

Queensland—New South Wales

Terranora interconnector via DirectLink NSW—Victoria

AC interconnector in series with Voltage Source Converter HVDC AC

Queensland—New South Wales

Heywood interconnector

AC

MurrayLink

Voltage Source Converter HVDC

Victoria—South Australia

Basslink

Commutating HVDC with Submarine Cable

Victoria—Tasmania

New South Wales—Victoria Victoria—South Australia

Nominal rating

Type of limiting constraints

1078 MW South, 500 MW North (nominal) 224 MW

Thermal, voltage stability, oscillatory stability

1700 MW

Thermal, transient stability, voltage stability Thermal, transient, voltage and oscillatory stability

650 MW in either direction (design— currently testing) 220 MW 478 MW South,* 594 MW (short term) North

Thermal and voltage stability in nearby region

Can influence voltage stability on Victorian end, Local AC network, Thermal Thermal limitations in Tasmanian which are mitigated by advanced Special Protection schemes

*Basslink MW flows as measured at the inverter end.

04_Santoso_Sec04_p0175-0244.indd 185

27/11/17 2:36 PM

186  SECTION FOUR

The NEM market solution deploys constraints to respect static limitations and to estimate the impact of these dynamic limitations. Real-time dynamic assessment tools that simulate and estimate transient and voltage security limits are then used to give confidence that the system is being operated securely. By its nature, the system is susceptible to oscillatory instability and depends on active damping controls of power system stabilizers and SVC power oscillation dampers to maintain stable and secure operation. Real-time measurement of system damping completes the picture with the assessment of oscillatory stability issues. If issues are detected, additional constraints can be added to the market solution to achieve secure operation. By monitoring the damping of the interconnected power system, AEMO will constrain interconnector flow should poor damping be detected or the damping monitor be unavailable. AEMO is also in the process of automating the voltage control of the main transmission system to maintain system voltages within their respective normal and short-term post-contingent limits. An optimization engine determines a reactive dispatch based on violations and forecast voltage profiles and sends control requests electronically, via SCADA or other means, to the reactive plant operators that include both TNSP’s and market generators. NEM Market Structure.  The NEM is an energy only zonal pricing market. The five pricing zones are generally the coastal regions of five states: Queensland, New South Wales, Victoria, South Australia, and Tasmania. Spot prices in the NEM are set at nodes in the five pricing zones at 5-minute intervals. Associated generation is likewise dispatched at 5-minute intervals by a security constrained dispatch algorithm. These five regional reference prices (RRP) are defined as the marginal cost of energy at the reference node in each zone. Static loss factors modify the RRP at connection points. The market is formed by generator offers on the supply side, and demand forecasts on the demand side. Settlement is in 30-minute intervals and is derived from the average of the associated 5 minutes prices. Spot prices are capped at AUD$14,000 and AUD$1000 and in general range between average around AUD$20-AUD$80. Financial markets trade spot market derivatives (exchange and bilateral contracts) that enable participants to manage spot market risk. Forecast market outcomes cover a 2-day rolling window (pre-dispatch). Pre-dispatch is nonbinding and for information only. It forecasts at 5-minute resolution for 1 hour and at 30-minute resolution for the remainder of the 2-day period. Reserve management is over a 2-year period and forecasts capacity reserve (Projected Assessment of System Adequacy—PASA) and like pre-dispatch is for information only. PASA forecasts at a halfhourly resolution over 6 days and at a daily resolution over the remainder of the 2-year forecast. The ESOO assesses supply adequacy by running hourly Monte Carlo simulations for 10 years to help stakeholders assess opportunities in the NEM. Operational Challenges.  One of the emerging operational challenges facing Australia is a result of the changing nature of the generation mix. This is most acute in South Australia where high inertia synchronous generation is being displaced largely by low-inertia non-synchronous generation in the form of renewable energy sources (RESs) and distributed rooftop PV. While no issues have been identified under system normal conditions, there may nevertheless be extreme operating conditions where issues could become apparent unless preventive measures are taken. Conditions of high renewables, high distributed PV generation, and low inertia, coupled with the risk of islanding can lead to: •  High Rate of Change of Frequency (RoCoF) in South Australia and subsequent impact on equipment. •  Insufficient frequency control ancillary service to control frequency. •  Reduced effectiveness of Under Frequency Load Shedding schemes to abate extreme power system events. •  Reduced fault levels, reducing the effectiveness of protection equipment to detect and clear faults. The industry is examining these issues and looking at ways to address them [6].

04_Santoso_Sec04_p0175-0244.indd 186

27/11/17 2:36 PM

INTERCONNECTED POWER GRIDS   187 

The NEM has been in operation for about 20 years and one of its defining features is the dominance of large coal-fired generation—currently 75% of energy supplied, was as high as 90%. In recent times new investment has been mainly in intermittent generation—wind and solar—guided by government incentives. In the near future one of the main challenges for the governing institutions of the NEM will be to manage a transition from large coal-fired generation to smaller distributed intermittent generation. 4.2.4  South West Interconnected System (SWIS) The SWIS represents the largest interconnected power system in Western Australia. While its geographical footprint of around 260,000 km2 is only a small part of Western Australia, it services the majority of the population in the state. The market operating in the SWIS is referred to as the Wholeseale Electricity Market (WEM). It has both scheduled and non-scheduled generation as well as a number of demand-side management programs that participate in this market. Some of the defining characteristics of the SWIS include predominant coal and gas generation in the south, gas and wind generation in the north, and wind and gas in the east, along with large industrial loads that appear at the extents of the system. Its maximum demand is forecast to grow at only 1.4% per annum. [14]. Governing Bodies Minister for Energy (WA).  The Minister for Energy established the initial WEM rules and approves proposed changes. Public Utilities Office.  The Public Utilities Office provides advice to the Minister for Energy and administers emergency plans. Economic Regulation Authority.  The Economic Regulation Authority monitors compliance to the WEM rules, conducts market surveillance to ensure no abuse of market power and provides financial oversight. The Economic Regulation Authority regulates Western Power’s network, which is the only regulated Network in Western Australia. This includes acting as the authority over the Technical Rulesb which detail the technical requirements to be met by Western Power and by users who connect facilities to the transmission and distribution systems which make up the Western Power Network. Market Advisory Committee.  The Market Advisory Committee is designed to provide advice to AEMO on various aspects of market design and operation and includes members representing all types of market participants (generators, customers, network operators, system operator as well as AEMO). Australian Energy Market Operator.  AEMO in its role in Western Australia has taken over the day-to-day operation of the WEM and the System Management functions of operating the power system, dispatch, system security, and system reliability. Western Power.  Western Power is the Transmission Network Operator and the Distribution Network Operator for the SWIS. They own and operate the bulk of the transmission and distribution assets within the SWIS. Operating the SWIS.  The connection arrangements and dispatch of generation in the WEM is fundamentally based on an unconstrained dispatch philosophy.c The WEM operates on a 30-minute trading interval using less sophisticated central dispatch processes than the NEM. To manage power system security issues that arise from time to time during outage conditions, such as thermal or stability limitations, operators typically need to adjust generation dispatch manually, rather than relying on a central dispatch engine that automates the economic dispatch of generation, subject to constraints on the system. https://www.erawa.com.au/electricity/electricity-access/western-power-network/technical-rules/technical-rules When all transmission network elements are in service.

b c

04_Santoso_Sec04_p0175-0244.indd 187

27/11/17 2:36 PM

188  SECTION FOUR

Five ancillary services are provided in the WEM: •  Load Following (LFAS), or regulation, is provided by automatic generation control (AGC) that constantly adjusts generation to maintain system frequency at 50 Hz. •  Spinning Reserve (SRAS) provides raise contingency services to stabilize and recover normal frequency in response to generation loss contingencies. •  Load Rejection Reserve (LRRAS) provides lower contingency services to stabilize and recover normal frequency in response to load loss contingencies. •  System restart services (SRS) provide black start capability, and •  Dispatch support services (DSS) cover out-of-merit costs to manage constraints in the system. While dispatch is essentially an unconstrained process, there are a number of emerging constraints that need to be managed. The Eastern Goldfields, in the east of the SWIS, can present considerable operational challenges. It is connected to the rest of the SWIS by a single 650 km 220 kV transmission line and with the relatively low inertia of the local generation and minimal reactive reserve; it can present voltage, transient, and oscillatory stability issues. A number of special control schemes are in place to control these stability issues in order to maximize the transfer capability. A number of damping monitors have also been installed to identify oscillatory stability issues in real-time and to improve power system security in the area. There are also a number of other emerging voltage stability, thermal, and capacity constraints that have been identified in the SWIS. During system normal conditions, with all transmission elements in service, these limitations should not require any changes in the merit order dispatch plan for generation. During outage conditions the limitations can be more onerous and operators sometimes adjust dispatch to ensure system security and reliability requirements are maintained. Wholesale Electricity Market Structure.  Western Australia’s Wholesale Electricity Market (WEM) is combination of an energy market and a capacity market. A Reserve Capacity Mechanism is designed to ensure that there is sufficient installed capacity (including both generation and demand side management options) to meet the expected peak demands for the year including any minimum reserve margins. Capacity payments are paid to capacity providers and are funded by customers. Long-term bilateral contracts between market participants can be for energy or capacity and are off-market settlement. As the market operator, AEMO’s only interest in these contracts is that the bilateral energy transactions need to be scheduled the day ahead. The Short Term Energy Market (STEM) is an energy-only forward market that facilitates trading around the bilateral contract positions. Its primary purpose is to facilitate economic energy trade between market participants. The combination of bilateral contracts and the STEM results in the day-ahead “Net Contract Positions.” A Balancing Market then determines a common balancing price to account for the difference between these net contract positions and the actual real-time outcomes that meet system demand on the day. Frequency control services are provided by a combination of administered procurement and pricing mechanisms for contingency services as well as a market for frequency regulation service. Wholesale Electricity Market (WEM) Reform.  The WEM is currently undergoing market reform with the objectives of reducing electricity costs without compromising safe and reliable supply, reducing government risks, and to attract private investment in the energy market. Some of the areas being reviewed include: •  Replacement of the unconstrained dispatch model with a constrained dispatch model, allowing system limitations to be represented as constraints in the dispatch.

04_Santoso_Sec04_p0175-0244.indd 188

27/11/17 2:36 PM

INTERCONNECTED POWER GRIDS   189 

•  Reserve capacity auctions. •  Ex-ante pricing. The challenge for the future of the WEM will be in implementing these reforms and in delivering the reform objectives.

4.2.5 References [1] State of the Energy Market 2015, Australian Energy Regulator, https://www.aer.gov.au/publications/state-ofthe-energy-market-reports/state-of-the-energy-market-2015. [2] Electricity Statement of Opportunities for The National Electricity Market, Australian Energy Market Operator, August 2016, https://www.aemo.com.au/Electricity/National-Electricity-Market-NEM/Planningand-forecasting/NEM-Electricity-Statement-of-Opportunities. [3] National Transmission Network Development Plan for the National Electricity Market, Australian Energy Market Operator, November 2015, http://www.aemo.com.au/Electricity/National-Electricity-Market-NEM/ Planning-and-forecasting/National-Transmission-Network-Development-Plan. [4] National Electricity Forecasting Report for the National Electricity Market, Australian Energy Market Operator, June 2016, https://www.aemo.com.au/Electricity/National-Electricity-Market-NEM/Planningand-forecasting/National-Electricity-Forecasting-Report. [5] National Electricity Rules, Australian Energy Market Commission, http://www.aemc.gov.au/Energy-Rules/ National-electricity-rules/Current-Rules. [6] Future Power System Security Program, Australian Energy Market Operator, August 2016, https://www .aemo.com.au/Electricity/National-Electricity-Market-NEM/Security-and-reliability/FPSSP-Reports-andAnalysis. [7] Annual Planning Report 2015/16, Western Power, https://www.westernpower.com.au/media/1619/annualplanning-report-2015-16.pdf. [8] Network Management Plan 2013/14 to 2018/19, Power and Water Corporation, January 2015 and January 2016, https://www.powerwater.com.au/__data/assets/pdf_file/0020/64226/Network_Management_ Plan_2013-14_to_2018-19.pdf. [9] 2014/15 Annual Report Powering the NT, Territory Generation, http://territorygeneration.com.au/news_ and_publications/news/2015/territory_generation_annual_report_2014–15. [10] Victorian Electricity Planning Approach, Australian Energy Market Operator, June 2016, https://www.aemo .com.au/Electricity/National-Electricity-Market-NEM/Planning-and-forecasting/Victorian-transmissionnetwork-service-provider-role. [11] New South Wales Annual Planning Report, TransGrid, 2016, https://www.transgrid.com.au/news-views/ news/2015/Pages/2015-Transmission-Annual-Planning-Report-released.aspx. [12] Regulatory Investment Test for Transmission Application Guidelines, Australian Energy Regulator, June 2010, https://www.aer.gov.au/networks-pipelines/guidelines-schemes-models-reviews/regulatoryinvestment-test-for-transmission-rit-t-and-application-guidelines-2010. [13] Wholesale Electricity Market Design Summary, Independent Market Operator (now AEMO), 2012, https:// www.aemo.com.au/Electricity/-/media/F12B82DEB2484DD0848FD5C277DB5CA8.ashx. [14] Deferred 2015 Electricity Statement of Opportunities for the Wholesale Electricity Market, Australian Energy Market Operator, June 2016, https://www.aemo.com.au/-/media/Files/Electricity/WEM/ Planning_and_Forecasting/ESOO/2015/Deferred-2015-Electricity-Statement-of-Opportunities-for-theWEM.ashx. [15] Interconnector Capabilities for the National Electricity Market, Australian Energy Market Operator, September 2015, http://www.aemo.com.au/-/media/Files/PDF/Interconnector-Capabilities-v2.pdf [16] Heywood Interconnector: Overview of Upgrade and Current Status, Australian Energy Market Operator, August 2015, https://www.aemo.com.au/media/Files/Other/planning/The20Heywood20 Interconnector20UpgradeUpdate202015.pdf

04_Santoso_Sec04_p0175-0244.indd 189

27/11/17 2:36 PM

190  SECTION FOUR

4.3  INTERCONNECTED POWER GRID IN BRAZIL BY HÉCTOR VOLSKIS 4.3.1 Introduction Brazil spans a large part of the South American continent. The distance of the far ends of the Brazilian territory (from North to South, and from East to West) is about 3900 km. Electricity started in Brazil in the end of 19th century. After the Second World War started the idea to create an interconnected power system considering the Brazilian characteristics: many hydro generations with reservoirs (sources) faraway from great consuming centers (loads) and a rainfall that allows coordinating the use of the reservoirs to maximize managing energy/water. Brazilian Interconnect Power System-BIPS covers two-thirds of the Brazilian Territory (5 million km2) and hydro generation is dominant (70% of the installed capacity). 4.3.2 Structure Today BIPS attends near 97% of the country’s electricity consumption with a large transmission network that includes over 120,000 km of 230, 345, 440, 500, 525, and 765 kV AC transmission lines, two 600 kV HVDC transmission lines and more than 550 substations (Fig. 4-6). For operational purposes, BIPS is divided into four interconnected regions—South, Southeast/ Midwest, North and Northeast. The BIPS is characterized with a dominant hydroelectric power generation (amount to more than 70% of the total installed capacity of 140,000 MW and more than 90% of the total energy production), and long distance power transfers from generation parks to load centers. The hydro generation parks are formed by plants in cascade formation located along 12 major hydrographic basins all over the country and many of them are not close to the major load centers in the South and Southeast region. Rainfall and the resulting inflow patterns are distinct among regions, and vary significantly over the year for each region, as well between dry and wet years. Solar and wind power generation start to grow: Wind has 9390 MW installed capacity and Solar 27 MW (2016—Banco de Informações de Geração—ANEEL—Brazilian Electricity Regulatory Agency). International asynchronous interconnections with Argentina (Garabi—2000 MW) and Uruguay (Melo—500 MW) are established through HVDC frequency converters. 4.3.3 Planning Since 1996, Brazil has been struggling to redesign its energy sector, giving opportunity to private companies to invest and be responsible for the energy supply in the country. Four important organs compose the division of energy policy in Brazil. The CNPE (National Council for Energy Policy) is responsible for advising the government about the right policies and the right decisions about promoting the conscious use of energy resources in the country. The MME (Ministry of Mines and Energy) implements the political decisions taken by the CNPE. It is also responsible for defining preventive actions of security of the energy distribution systems in case of imbalances between supply and demand. The National Agency of Electric Energy (ANEEL) regulates and supervises the energy distribution systems. Finally, the Power Research Company (EPE) manages the research in energy sector in areas such as oil, natural gas, coal, renewable energy resources, and energy efficiency. The interconnected system of production and transmission of electric power in Brazil is a large hydrothermal system, with a strong predominance of hydro plants and multiple owners. Only 1.7% of the country’s electricity production capacity is out of the BIPS, in small isolated systems located mainly in the Amazonian region (source: ONS, 2017 PEN). In December 2016, the installed capacity in Brazil reached a total of 142,042 MW, of which 101,598 MW in hydro power plants (including small plants) and 29,950 MW in thermal power plants and 9,611 MW in wind plants (ONS, 2017 PEN).

04_Santoso_Sec04_p0175-0244.indd 190

27/11/17 2:36 PM

INTERCONNECTED POWER GRIDS   191 

FIGURE 4-6  Brazilian Interconnected Power System (BIPS). Source: ONS Annual Report.

Due to the magnitude of the system with large reservoirs spread over large geographic areas, any decision implies different spatial and temporal consequences, making the problem quite complex. Then, there is a relationship between the decision-making at any stage and its future consequences. If in the present, the option is to use lots of water for power generation, system reservoirs levels will be lower, so if a period of low inflows occurs, the deficit risk regarding demanded electric power supply will increase, which will drive to the necessity to operate the thermal power plants, increasing operation costs. Likewise, if in the present it is chosen to generate thermal energy in order to store hydraulic energy and if in the future a period of high flows occurs, system power spillage will be necessary, which leads to a more expensive and unnecessary operation. Therefore, it is necessary that the BIPS operation is preceded by a planning, in addition, the coordination of the operation of the reservoir system of the power sector, in conjunction with the operation of thermal power plants complementation allows the best use of the natural flows, avoiding the waste of water and excessive fuel costs. This coordination is done within the so-called Operation Planning of the Interconnected Power System, currently performed by ONS, Brazilian Independent System Operator.

04_Santoso_Sec04_p0175-0244.indd 191

27/11/17 2:36 PM

192  SECTION FOUR

Today this planning is made in three steps, and in each of them the mathematical models used have different planning horizons, discretization of time and degree of detailing in the representation of the generating units and operational constraints. These models are linked through coupling, at the end of their horizons, of allocation policies of hydro and thermal resources produced by the model of the previous step, forming a chain of steps that comes from medium-term to the short-term including more details at each step. At the top of the chain is the medium-term planning, where the stochastic optimization model, gets the allocation policy of hydro and thermal resources of minimum cost for each month considering a time horizon of 5 to 10 years. The hydroelectric plant is represented in an aggregated way in four equivalent reservoirs of energy, representing the subsystems of the south, southeast, northeast, and north. Next, in the short-term planning, also of stochastic optimization, determines a scheduling for each system’s power plant for the weeks of the following month and for the next month. At the base of the chain, is the daily programming, calculate the generation dispatch for each half hour of the following day. In this planning, the main objective is to minimize the expected value of the operation cost (thermal generation spending and penalties for not meeting demand) over the planning horizon, taking into account physical constraints and system reliability. However, in the planning, one must consider a lot of activities related to the multiple use of water in reservoirs in conjunction with the generation dispatch and multi period optimization of reservoirs. It is highlighted water withdrawals for other uses and flood control.

4.3.4  Operation and Control The Operador Nacional do Sistema Elétrico (ONS) is a nonprofitable company responsible to operate the BIPS. In Brazil there is only one Independent System Operator. ONS was created in 1998 with a mandate for performing a centralized cost-based scheduling and dispatch of BIPS after the deregulation of Brazil electricity market took effect in late 90s. It was created to substitute the previous cooperative structure and collegiate entities for operation coordination, which had shared utility responsibilities. The new model institutes ONS as the Brazilian Independent System Operator (ISO) in charge of the over 90,000 MW National Interconnected Power System. Today, there are 110 transmission companies, 170 generators and 95 distribution companies and high voltage consumers participating in the Brazilian electricity market. A hierarchical structure of control centers is used by ONS to operate in a global and integrated way the “Operation Network.” This network is the union of “Basic Network” (230 kV and upper voltage levels), the “Complementary Network” (facilities which impact the Basic Network) and the integrated power plants. ONS existing control center structure (see Fig. 4-7) is composed by: CNOS—Nation System Operation Center. The higher level one hierarchical is responsible for coordination, supervision, and control of the basic and complementary network. COSR—Regional System Operation Centers: Four centers owned by ONS (South located in Florianópolis, South-East in Rio de Janeiro, North located in Brasília and North-East in Recife). Responsible for coordination, supervision and control of the regional/local basic and complementary network, control of generation dispatch of independent power producers and command and dispatch execution of power plants under AGC. One of ONS main operational task is to help realize the economic gains through inter-regional power transfers to take advantage of seasonal rainfall and water flow differences in each of its operating regions. This is realized through optimization of hydro resources utilization and hydro-thermal coordination. The result has a direct impact on the overall operating cost of the system. On the other hand, for a system of this proportion, disturbances due to significant generation and load unbalances may cause excessive variations in the system frequency, tension collapse situations, and even system separation of certain parts of the BIPS network and loss of important load centers. The studies of the dynamic behavior of BIPS have also shown that inter-area low-frequency electromechanical oscillations (0.3 to 0.8 Hz), usually well damped, could in some disturbances spread with severe consequences.

04_Santoso_Sec04_p0175-0244.indd 192

27/11/17 2:36 PM

INTERCONNECTED POWER GRIDS   193 

COSR-NE Recife

CNOS/COSR-NCO Brasilia

COSR-NE

COSR-NCO CNOS COSR-S Florianópolis

COSR-SE

COSR-NE

COSR-S

FIGURE 4-7  ONS control centers. Source: ONS Annual Report.

To avoid such situations, ONS has deployed hundreds of System Integrity Protection Schemes (SIPS) that will take pre-determined actions, such as load shedding or generator tripping, in the event of predefined system contingencies, such as losing one or more circuits of a major transmission path. The economic and reliable operation of BIPS must also accommodate the needs of a deregulated electricity market in Brazil. The main operation challenge of BIPS for ONS thus is how to achieve optimal hydro resource utilization while ensuring a reliable system operation within the constraints of physical limits and market operation regulations. 4.3.5  Smart Grid Initiatives Since 2008, there has been a growing interest in smart energy technologies among Latin American countries, with Brazil leading the way. In 2010, almost all Brazilian electric utilities started to study Smart Grid in order to prepare them on this technology and to strategically direct their investments in new infrastructure and Research and Development (R&D) projects toward the modernization of own electric system (Fig. 4-8). The following issues might be considered as motivating factors for Smart Grid implementation in Brazil: (i) Reduction of non-technical losses; (ii) Increase of the operational efficiency; (iii) Expansion and automatization of the electric power system with standardized smart technologies; (iv) Increase the system and power quality, especially for industries and high-tech based companies.

04_Santoso_Sec04_p0175-0244.indd 193

27/11/17 2:36 PM

194  SECTION FOUR

Nuclear 1.4% Coal 2.23% Biomass 5.39% Oil + Diesel 3.33%

Wind 6.77% Hydro 71.52%

Hydro power plants Gas + GNL Thermo Plants

Gas + GNL 8.73%

Oil + Diesel Thermo Plants Biomass Thermo Plants Coal Thermo Plants Nuclear Thermo Plants Wind Plants

FIGURE 4-8  Brazil’s domestic electricity supply in 2016. Source: Brazilian Energy Balance 2017, Energy Research Agency.

Regarding the barriers for Smart Grid implementation in Brazil, most of them are the same as other countries. They are principally: (i) Market uncertainty and lack of policies on market structure and rules; (ii) Low public awareness and engagement; (ii) Interoperability and scalability assurance; (iv) Revenue uncertainty due to lack of regulatory definitions. In addition to these barriers, it is worth mentioning other particular issues in Brazil: (i) The electric power grid in Brazil is very large and it requires a huge amount of investment; (ii) In Brazil there are large and low density rural and remote areas. All-important entities are working to solve barriers allowing Smart Grid implementation in Brazil. We have CNPE, MME, ANEEL, EPE, ONS, and Brazilian Research Institutes like CEPEL. Currently, Brazil gets around 83.7% of its electricity from renewables—made up of the hydro, biomass, and wind segments of the pie chart below. Brazil’s energy mix consists of 40% renewables—the hydro, firewood, and charcoal—and sugar cane products. Figure 4-9 shows pie chart of segments of and other renewables segments of the pie chart below.

Hidráulica1/Hydraulic1 11,5%

Lenha e carvão vegetal/ Firewood and charcoal 8,1%

Outras não renováveis/Others non renewables 0,6% Urânio (U3O8)/Uranium 1,3%

Derivados da cana/Sugar cane products 15,7% Outras renováveis/Others renewables 4,1%

Carvão mineral e coque/Cool and coke 5,7%

Gás natural/Natural gas 13,5%

Petróleo e derivados/ Petroleum and oil products 39,4%

FIGURE 4-9  Brazil’s domestic energy supply in 2014. Source: Brazilian Energy Balance 2015, Energy Research Agency.

04_Santoso_Sec04_p0175-0244.indd 194

27/11/17 2:36 PM

INTERCONNECTED POWER GRIDS   195 

4.3.6 Conclusion The BIPS is very large (Brazil is a continental country when comparing with some country) and it requires a huge amount of investment. Nowadays, hydro generation corresponds a 67% of total generation capacity. Important generation sources are far away from the big load centers. To operating the BIPS, Brazil has only one Independent System Operator named ONS. The short term planning and operation of BIPS is responsibility of ONS. One of ONS main operational task is to help realize the economic gains through inter-regional power transfers to take advantage of seasonal rainfall and water flow differences in each of its operating regions. This is realized through optimization of hydro resources utilization and hydro-thermal coordination. The result has a direct impact on the overall operating cost of the system. Since 2008, there has been a growing interest in smart energy technologies among Latin American countries, with Brazil leading the way. Almost all Brazilian electric utilities started to study Smart Grid in order to prepare them on this technology and to strategically direct their investments in new infrastructure and R&D projects toward the modernization of own electric system. Some barriers for Smart Grid implementation in Brazil: Market uncertainty; Lack of policies on market structure and rules; Low public awareness and engagement; Interoperability and scalability assurance; Revenue uncertainty due to lack of regulatory definitions. All-important entities are working to solve barriers allowing Smart Grid implementation in Brazil. 4.3.7 References [1] Brazilian Interconnected Power System (BIPS) in numbers; http://www.ons.org.br/pt/paginas/sobreo-sin/o-sistema-em-numeros. [2] RA 2015 ONS Annual report and financial statements; http://www.ons.org.br/download/biblioteca_virtual/ relatorios_anuais/RAONS_2015/html/home-eng.html/. [3] Brazilian Energy Balance 2015, Energy Research Agency; https://ben.epe.gov.br/downloads/Relatorio _Final_BEN_2015.pdf/.

4.4  INTERCONNECTED POWER GRID IN CHINA BY XUANYUAN SHARON WANG 4.4.1 Introduction Being the world’s most populous country with a rapidly growing economy, China is the world’s largest energy producer and consumer. China’s interconnected power systems are featured by being large in size and high in voltage grades, coupled with diversified generation resources and fast growing demand. In addition, China developed ultra-high-voltage (UHV) grids to transmit massive power from energy centers in remote areas to load centers in big cities due to reverse distribution of primary energy and electricity demand. This subsection outlines China’s power grids in various aspects to provide readers with a brief review of the system. History and How It Evolved.  China’s power grid experienced a long process of development during its quest to keep up with generation increase and load growing. This process is characterized by four stages that entail evolvement of voltage levels and interconnections. 1. Stage One: The development of provincial grids (prior to the 1970s). The first 220 kV line was built in 1954 with an objective of exporting power from Fengman power plant. Later on in the

04_Santoso_Sec04_p0175-0244.indd 195

27/11/17 2:36 PM

196  SECTION FOUR

1960s and 1970s, the connection of isolated city grids commenced and it ended up forming 220 kV provincial grids that covered their respective provincial territories. 2. Stage Two: The development of inter-provincial grids (1970s to 1980s). In 1972, 330 kV lines were adopted with an aim of exporting power from Liu Jiaxia hydro-power plant. In 1981, 500 kV lines commenced operation of transmitting power from Pingdingshan to Wuhan. By the end of the 1980s, seven regional power grids were formed to cover Northeast China, North China, Central China, East China, Northwest China, Sichuan and Chongqiong, and South China. The 500 kV transmission lines became the backbone structure in most regional power grids except for in the Northwest region where 330 kV network prevailed. 3. Stage Three: The development of inter-regional grids (1989 to 2009). In September 1989, the ±500 kV DC transmission project commenced operation between Central and East China. This transmission project had a capacity of 1200 MW and it became a big achievement in China’s power system toward inter-regional grids. In addition, construction of transmission lines for Three Gorges project made active progresses, which played a key role in inter-regional connections for optimal resource allocation. 4. Stage Four: The development of UHV grids (2009 till now). China has launched a research and development of UHV technology and its grid applications since 2004. The progress had been positive and on January 6, 2009, the first 1000 kV UHV AC power line was put into operation. This was followed by an establishment of another two UHV AC lines and four UHV DC lines. Additionally, four UHVAC lines and six UHVDC lines are under construction, totaling China’s UHV power lines up to over 30,000 km. Moreover, the Zhundong-Wannan ±1100 kV UHVDC transmission project currently under construction is considered as the world’s highest voltage level, largest capacity (12,000 MW), and longest distance (3324 km) in transmission systems. China aims at building a strong and smart power grid that comprises of the UHV transmission system as the network backbone and maintains coordinated interactions in multi-level grid operations. 4.4.2 Structure China’s power system is composed of seven regional grids—Northeast China, North China, East China, Central China, Northwest China, Southwest China, and South China (Fig. 4-10). The Northeast China grid supplies power to Heilongjiang, Jilin, Liaoning and East Inner Mongolia,

Northeast China

Northwest China

North China

Central China

Southwest China

East China

South China

FIGURE 4-10  Regional power grids in China.

04_Santoso_Sec04_p0175-0244.indd 196

27/11/17 2:36 PM

INTERCONNECTED POWER GRIDS   197 

with generation capacity of 96 GW. The North China grid supplies power to Beijing, Tianjin, Hebei, Shanxi, Shangdong, and West Inner Mongolia, with generation capacity of 341 GW. The East China grid covers Shanghai, Jiangsu, Zhejiang, Anhui, and Fujian provinces, with generation capacity of 301 GW. The Central China grid covers Henan, Hubei, Hunan, and Jiangxi, with generation capacity of 194 GW. The Northwest China grid covers Shaanxi, Gansu, Qinghai, and Xinjiang, with generation capacity of 198 GW. The Southwest China covers Sichuan, Chongqing, and Tibet, with generation capacity of 109 GW. The South grid has a territory covering Guangdong, Guangxi, Yunnan, Guizhou, and Hainan, with generation capacity of 268 GW. In 2015, China’s installed capacity amounted to 1507 GW and electricity production was 5600 TWh, both being the world’s largest. Voltage Levels.  The continued growth in system capacity and electricity demand has led to needs for higher transmission capacity and hence voltage levels of transmission lines are gradually raised. Introduction of a higher voltage level was normally timed with the point when a large new generation plant was integrated to the system and typically took 20 to 30 years in China. At present, China has two series of voltage levels in AC transmission lines, 1000/500/220/110(66)/35/10/0.4 kV and 750/330(220)/110/35/10/0.4 kV. DC transmission voltage grades include ±500(±400), ±660, and ±800 kV. 1000 kV UHV AC and ±800 kV UHV DC transmission lines already commenced operation. Additionally, ±1100 kV UHV AC transmission lines are under construction. 4.4.3  Interconnection of Different Regions Regional connections are accelerated with the advancement of UHV technologies. As of 2015, central China was connected synchronously to North China through a 1000 kV UHV AC line and to Southwest through 500 kV AC lines. Asynchronous DC connections was developed between Northeast China and North China through a DC tie, between North China and Northwest China through ±660 kV lines, between Central China and East China through ±500 kV lines, between Central China and Northwest China through ±800 kV lines and a DC tie, between Central China and South China through ±500 kV lines, between Southwest China and East China through ±800 kV lines, between Southwest China and Northwest China through ±500 kV lines, between Northwest China and Tibet through ±400 kV lines. Based on inter-regional connections, six synchronous power grids have thus far been developed in China to realize nationwide connection with the exception of Taiwan. Six synchronous grids are Northeast China, North-Central-Southwest China, East China, Northwest China, South China, and Tibet Interconnection.

4.4.4 Planning Aligned with the national economic and social development planning process, China’s electricity planning cycle takes 5 years. It is a coordinated effort that jointly plans generation, transmission, and distribution in regards to capacity, construction timeline, and system integration. The National Energy Administration (NEA) issued Power System Planning Policy in 2016 as a guideline for electricity planning. The policy outlines that National and Provincial Energy Administrations are accountable for overall coordination of electricity planning process. Utility companies are responsible for providing information, running simulations, making proposals, and reviewing the consolidated plans. Electric power planning institutes are obliged with the responsibility of individual plan studies and the final plan consolidation. The national electricity plan focuses on large power plants, inter-provincial transmission projects, and lines above 500 kV. Provincial electricity plans focus on generation and transmission projects that are not included in the national plan as well as distribution projects. The national plan is published by the NEA, whereas provincial ones are published by each province after being approved by the NEA for an overall consistency.

04_Santoso_Sec04_p0175-0244.indd 197

27/11/17 2:36 PM

198  SECTION FOUR

The process of planning usually commences 2 years ahead and published in the first half of the first year during its 5-year implementation period. If there are unpredictable factors affecting implementation of the plans, revision processes may commence in the second year. Grid Development Plan.  A grid development plan is an essential component in the entire electricity planning. This is because a robust transmission grid is critical to implementation of national energy strategies as well as enhancement of the system’s reliability and economics. The 13th 5-year grid development plan published by State Grid of China (SGCC) outlines that consolidation of current wide-area synchronous grids need to be accelerated for optimal operations. By the end of 2020, four interconnections are expected to form. They are three power exporting synchronous grids that are Southwest, Northwest, and Northeast grids, and one power importing synchronous grid comprised of Central, North, and East China grids. The plan published by China Southern Power Grid (CSG) anticipates transporting power from the west to the east using DC transmission lines. In addition, current five provincial grids in south China will gradually merge into two synchronous grids with reasonable scale, clear structure and relative independence. Load Growth and Generation Mix Electricity Demand.  Since the 1980s, China’s electricity consumption has maintained a high growth momentum with an average annual growth rate of 7.8% between 1980 and 2000 and 10% between 2000 and 2015. In 2015, China’s total electricity consumption reached 5.6 TkWh. Despite that total power demand is the largest in the world, China’s consumption per capita is much lower compared to developed countries. For instance, China’s electricity consumption per capita was 4138 kWh in 2015, which is equivalent to that of the United States in the early 1960s. Based on anticipated improvement of Chinese people’s living standards and more electrical appliances at households, a rising trend is expected. China’s electricity consumption per capita is projected to be 5691 kWh in 2020, which will be equivalent to that of the United States in the mid1960s, Japan in the mid-1980s, and the United Kingdom in the mid-1990s. As China is still at a stage of late industrialization and rapid urbanization, economic and social development will maintain its growing trend at the foreseeable future. More so, the proportion of electricity at end-energy use will continue to increase in order to meet the need for low-carbonemission economic and social development. Therefore, electricity demand is projected to rise. Further predictions show that for periods of 2016 to 2020 and 2020 to 2030, China’s total electricity consumption grow by 6.4% to 7.4% and 3.0% annually to reach 8.1 to 8.6 TkWh and 11.9 TkWh, respectively; peak load grow by 7.3% to 8.3% and 3.4% annually to reach 1340 to 1400 GW and 1920 GW, respectively. Generation Mix.  China’s installed power capacity grew annually at an average rate of 8.2% from 1980 to 2000 and 10.9% from 2000 to 2015. At the end of 2015, China’s total installed capacity reached 1507 GW, consisting of 989 GW of thermal generation (65.7%), 320 GW of hydropower (21.2%), 130 GW of wind power (8.5%), 41 GW of solar power (2.8%), and 27 GW of nuclear power (1.8%). Installed capacity of Hydropower, wind, and solar became the largest in the world. China’s generation mix will be continuously adjusted and optimized toward a clean and green structure to achieve low-carbon development goals. According to the National Energy Development Strategy and Action Plan, China predicts that non-fossil energy will account for 15% and 20% of primary energy consumption by 2020 and 2030. It is also predicted that installed capacity of wind power and solar power will continue to grow rapidly, while thermal power will decrease gradually. According to planned generation mix, China’s installed capacity will reach 2070 GW in total by 2020, including 1120 GW coal generation, 240 GW wind generation, 150 GW solar generation, 347 GW hydro generation. This will help in increasing renewable capacity to over 800 GW, accounting for 39.3% in total generation mix. Renewables.  China has identified clean energy development as a key solution towards a lowcarbon society so that it can achieve sustainable growth by being less dependent on fossil fuels.

04_Santoso_Sec04_p0175-0244.indd 198

27/11/17 2:36 PM

INTERCONNECTED POWER GRIDS   199 

Since 2005, the average annual growth rate of renewable capacity is 15.1%. The main contributors for renewable capacity were wind at 58.2% and solar at 89.6%. Despite that China is a world leader in installed capacity of wind, solar, and hydropower, the country faces uneven renewable energy distribution. This is because hydro resource is abundant in the southwest and onshore wind resource is rich in the north, the northeast, and the northwest. Solar resource is abundant in the northwest, Tibet, and Inner Mongolia. This resulted in highly concentrated development of wind and solar power in resource bases located in remote areas that have less population and are far from load centers. More so, there are less fuel types in generation mix in north, northeast, and northwest China. Power supplies such as pumped storage and gas units have capabilities of operating and adjusting quickly, but they are less than 2% in total installed capacity. The situation is even worse in winter as most coal plants are expected to operate at certain levels to supply heat so they end up failing to pick up fluctuation in wind and solar power. These facts make issues associated with integration and operation of large-scale wind and solar generation in China become significant. One proposed solution is to accelerate development of UHV grids as a transmission corridor for long-distance power transfer and nation-wide resource allocation. It is expected that wind generation will continue to be developed in large scale and still locate in north, northeast, and northwest China, whereas Solar power will be either centrally developed in Qinghai, Gansu, and other west provinces or as distributed generation in Jiangsu, Zhejiang, and other central provinces. 4.4.5  Operation and Control Control Center.  China’s power sector’s reform in 2002 unbundled generation from vertically integrated power industry while grid companies still kept businesses in transmission, distribution, retail, as well as the responsibility of operating the system. Dispatch centers hence belong to grid companies as an internal division accountable for operating the grid to achieve its highest security, reliability, and economical efficiency. The national dispatch center, China’s only national level power dispatch center, affiliated with SGCC, has the highest authority in system operations and is primarily responsible for operating UHV grids, inter-regional power transmission lines, and large power plants deployed across regions. Six SGCC regional dispatch centers plus one CSG dispatch center are responsible for operating inter-provincial lines, transmission grids of 500 kV and above that are not under the national center’s oversight, and large power plants deployed across provinces. Thirty-three provincial centers are responsible for operating 220 (330) kV grids and power plants managed by provinces. Over four hundred prefectural centers as well as over 1600 county centers take the responsibility of operating grids at 110 kV and below as well as a few small-size local generators. Hierarchy and Inter-Control Center Operation.  China’s power system is a hybrid grid composed of both AC and DC systems, characterized by its complex structure and large size. To improve system controllability and management effectiveness, control centers at five different levels all follow the concept of coordinated operation and hierarchical management to ensure reliable and secure operation of the system. Being the highest in the structure, the national control center has the authority to give orders to subordinate centers with respect to system operations and control. Power exchanges across regions are scheduled by the national dispatch center and implemented by regional centers. Inter-provincial power exchanges are planned by regional centers and correspondent provinces dispatch generation accordingly. Transaction and Settlements.  At present, the majority of electricity is purchased by grid companies from power plants and sold to end users. The annual amount of electricity a conventional power plant produces is determined by Development and Reform Commissions through allocation processes based on average minimum-run hours as well as principles of energy save and emission reduction. Utility companies then formulate generators’ operating schedules and issue dispatching orders accordingly. Renewable units are not set by annual generating amount; instead, as long as

04_Santoso_Sec04_p0175-0244.indd 199

27/11/17 2:36 PM

200  SECTION FOUR

grids can maintain safe and reliable operation, they would run to the full extent. Power trades exist, though not much, mainly in forms of power purchase between big customers and generators as well as generation rights trades, through bilateral or centralized pool markets. Inter-regional and Inter-provincial power transactions are primarily mid to long term, determined by planning processes to implement national energy strategies on transferring power from the west to the east and from the north to the south. When power shortage occurs or there is residual capacity to purchase cost-effective power, short-term trades can be made between areas. Utility companies are responsible for settlements and billing of all power transactions. Currently, electricity pricing is set by the government on most power transactions except for market-based trades such as power purchase between big customers and generators. In 2015, the issue of No. 9 document by Chinese government started a new round of reform in China’s electricity market and power industry. It mandates the establishment of relatively dependent power exchange centers, opens up retail sectors, encourages big customers to purchase electricity directly from power plants, and promotes development of wholesale markets. The business and profit model of utility companies will be changed from being the single buyer and the single seller in the market to ones who provide transmission and distribution service and charge service fees under regulator’s supervision. It is also expected that generators’ price and schedules be more market based and less regulated.

4.4.6  Regulatory Bodies In China, regulation of power sectors is jointly carried out by the National Development and Reform Commission (NDRC), the National Energy Administration (NEA), and the State Owned Assets Supervision and Administration Commission (SASAC). The NDRC is a macroeconomic management agency under the State Council, which has a broad administrative and planning control over the Chinese economy. In the power sector, the NDRC is responsible to formulate plans for the development of China’s energy industry as well as guide and promote industry restructuring. It also regulates electricity tariff and generators’ annual schedules. The NEA, overseen by NDRC, was a consolidation of the former NEA and the State Electricity Regulatory Commission in 2013 to strengthen the integrated administration of energy industry in concert with the NDRC. Some of NEA’s responsibilities include drafting laws and regulations concerning the supervision and administration of energy development, supervising and regulating electricity market as well as safety and reliability of electricity production, supervising and examining power rates, setting prices for ancillary services, taking actions during any electricity emergencies, organizing or participating in investigation of safety mishaps during electricity production. In China, most large generation and utility companies are state-owned enterprises and therefore are supervised and regulated by the SASAC. The SASAC, a special commission directly under the State Council, was founded in 2003 through the consolidation of various other industry-specific ministries. It is responsible for ensuring efficient management of state-owned assets, appointing top executives and approving any mergers or sales of stock or assets, as well as drafting laws related to state-owned enterprises. 4.4.7  Future Grid Initiatives Smart Grid Initiatives.  Smart grid in China refers to a modernized power grid that is supported by a UHV grid as its backbone, features coordinated development of grids at different levels, and covers various power segments including generation, transmission, distribution, consumption, and dispatch. It integrates modern telecommunication, automatic control, decision support, and advanced power technologies and it is characterized by being informative, automatic and interactive. Smart grid is capable of friendly integration of renewable resources as well as interaction with users, with smart response and system self-recovery capabilities that enable it to substantially improve the safety, reliability, and operational efficiency of the power system.

04_Santoso_Sec04_p0175-0244.indd 200

27/11/17 2:36 PM

INTERCONNECTED POWER GRIDS   201 

Generation.  A vital goal in smart grid development is its capability to integrate large-scale renewable energy generation and resolve challenges associated with variability and uncertainty of intermittent resources. This requires adoption of forecasting tools that possess high accuracy for wind and solar resources, proper grid-connection plans as well as optimal and coordinated control mechanism on integrating multiple types of renewable generation. A national pilot project commenced in 2015 in Zhangjiakou and it specialized in co-operation of wind, solar, energy storage, and transmission systems. The project, being the largest in scale, launched 450 MW wind generation, 100 MW solar generation, 20 MW energy storage, and a 220 kV smart substation. The project is successful in integration of large-scale renewables using latest technologies and demonstrates economic and reliable co-operation of a system that comprises multiple models of wind turbines, large scale power control equipment of PV system, and chemical energy storage of various sizes and types. Transmission.  Online condition monitoring and real-time diagnosis for transmission equipment are fundamentals in building smart transmission. SGCC has completed installation of master stations for condition monitoring master stations of transmission and transformation equipment in 26 provinces (autonomous regions and municipalities) located in its operating area by the end of 2014. This accomplished online condition monitoring of 4263 transmission lines as well as transmission and transformation equipment in 3597 substations. Transformation.  Smart substation is a substantial support to elevate the overall intelligence level of power system. It is achieved by station digitalization and design compactness as well as equipment and business integration. By the end of 2014, SGCC has built 1527 smart substations, out of which 1135 substations are at 110 (66) kV, 344 substations are at 220 kV, 29 substations are at 500 kV, 12 substations are at 330 kV, and 7 stations are at 750 kV. Distribution.  The development of smart distribution made significant breakthroughs in the fields of distribution system self-recovery control, distribution terminal intelligentization, and distributed generation connection. By the end of 2014, SGCC has built smart distribution grids covering core centers of 78 cities and operating distribution automation systems for over 10,000 lines at 10 kV. Through this enhancement, distribution grids were improved in operational controllability and system reliability by demonstrating time reduction of unplanned outages, scope limitation of fault impacts, and reliability improvement of supplies. Consumption.  China conducted a series of projects in areas of smart meters, power consumption information acquisition, interactive marketing, demand-side management, user-side distributed generation, electric vehicle charging/swapping facilities, power quality monitoring, and power optical fiber to home. By the end of 2014, SGCC has built a power consumption information acquisition system containing 240 million smart meters, realizing remote automatic meter reading, self-service recharging, real-time consumption monitoring, line loss monitoring, and orderly load shedding management. Power optical fibers, a successful integration of power cables and optical fibers, were introduced into 470,000 households to provide end-users with not only electricity but internet, telecom, radio, TV signals, and other value-added services. Twenty-eight smart communities were built in Beijing, Shanghai, and other locations providing service platforms covering 287,000 households. The electric vehicle battery charging/swapping networks were built and it accumulated installation of 24,000 charging piles and 618 charging/ swap stations. Dispatch.  Intelligent dispatch focuses on conducting proactive and intelligent monitoring, analyses, early warning, decision-making support, and self-recovery control to ensure efficient utilization of renewable energy while maintaining safe and reliable operation of power grids. By the end of 2014, the smart grid operation system developed by SGCC has been implemented at 33 provincial dispatch centers and 5 regional dispatch centers, sharing 890,000 real-time data from 7011 plants or substations to achieve panoramic operation monitoring for lines at 220 kV and above. It also integrated phasor measurement unit (PMU) data from 2451 substations or power plants to provide dynamic

04_Santoso_Sec04_p0175-0244.indd 201

27/11/17 2:36 PM

202  SECTION FOUR

perception of faults in lines at 500 kV and above. Additionally, alarm information of lines at 500 kV and above were shared among all control centers by deploying smart alarm function at both control centers and substations. Microgrids.  As an effective way to utilize local renewable distributed generation, microgrids create sustainable, reliable, and more cost-effective energy system in conjunction with conventional grids and have gained great attention in China with rapid growth in renewables. In July 2015, the NEA issued Guidance on Promoting Renewable Microgrids Demonstration Projects Development, as a policy to encourage building microgrids with quantitative goals. By the end of 2015, the number of China’s microgrid demonstration projects in operation reached a total of 56. Existing microgrids in China are mainly supplied by solar and wind resources, either connected or disconnected from centralized grids. The application of microgrids is categorized into three scenarios: remote areas, islands, and cities. Microgrids in remote areas focus on rural electrification in distant regions such as Tibet, Qinhai, Xinjiang, and Inner Mongolia with very low population density and abundant renewable resources. Microgrids in islands alleviate the situation where habitants highly rely on diesel for electricity but are limited to diesel’s supply shortage as well as high cost. Microgrids in cities incorporate distributed renewables to provide end customers with a cleaner and more diversified power supplies as well as proven economic benefits. 4.4.8 Conclusion The existing China’s power grid evolved based on the need for societal and economic development as well as national energy strategies, driven by technology innovation and advancement. It provides a fundamental infrastructure for secure, clean, efficient, and sustainable development in the national energy sector. For years to come, China’s power grid is envisioned as a grid utilizing UHV transmission lines in long-distance massive clean electricity transfer from energy bases to load centers. It is also anticipated to be a robust, widely interconnected, highly intelligent, accessible and interactive, secure and reliable, as well as cost effective system combined with both AC and DC technologies. In addition, China proposed to build global energy interconnection to facilitate efforts in meeting global energy demand with clean and green energy at the United Nation Development summit in New York in 2015. It suggested connecting power grids globally through smart grids via UHV networks as its backbone and clean energy as main resources. Regardless of whether or not this would happen or when it would happen, the Chinese do hope for a cleaner, reliable, and sustainable energy system for the benefit of all mankind. 4.4.9 References [1] Liu, Z., Global Energy Interconnection. Amsterdam: Elsevier, 2015. [2] Liu, Z., Ultra-High Voltage AC/DC Grids. Amsterdam: Elsevier, 2014. [3] Liu, Z., Electric Power and Energy in China. Beijing: China Electric Power Press, 2012. [4] Zhao, Z., Development and Prospect of China Power Grids, in Electric Power, Vol. 37, No. 1, 2004, pp. 6–11. [5] Zhang, Q. et al., Review and Outlook for World’s Large Power Grids, Liu, Z. and Shu,Y., Eds., Beijing: China Electric Power Press, 2016. [6] Shu, Y., Promote the Scientific Development of Wind and Other Renewables, in China Energy News, Sept. 10th 2012, pp. 12. [7] Liu, Z., Development of Global Energy Interconnection for an Era of Sustainable Society, Keynote speech at Global Energy Interconnection Summit, Beijing, March 2016. [8] Zheng, B., Development of Network Interconnection in China, in Power System Technology, Vol. 27, No. 2, 2003, pp. 30–33. [9] Zhou, X., Chen, S., Lu, Z., Review and Prospect for Power System Development and Related Technologies: A Concept of Three-Generation Power Systems, Vol. 33, No. 22, Proceedings of the CSEE, 2013.

04_Santoso_Sec04_p0175-0244.indd 202

27/11/17 2:36 PM

INTERCONNECTED POWER GRIDS   203 

[10] Zhang, Y., Analysis on the Development Strategies of the UHV Grid in China, in Proceedings of the CSEE, Vol. 29, No. 22, 2009, pp. 1–7. [11] Prospect for 13th Five-Year Blue Print in Power, in Rural Power Management, Vol. 1, pp. 1, 2016. [12] Electric Power Law of the People’s Republic of China, 1995, 2015 Amendment. [13] NEA, Power System Planning Policy, May 2016. [14] State Council of the People’s Republic of China, Action Plan of Energy Development Strategy, June 2014. [15] State Council of the People’s Republic of China, Deepening the Reform on Power Restructuring (9th document), March 2015. [16] State Council of the People’s Republic of China, Power Industry Restructuring Plan (5th document), Feb. 2002. [17] Ministry of Commerce of the People’s Republic of China, Renewable Energy Law of the People’s Republic of China, December 20, 2013. [18] China Electricity Council, Data and Statistics of China Power Industry, http://english.cec.org.cn/No.110. index.htm. [19] National Development and Reform Commission, http://www.sdpc.gov.cn/. [20] National Energy Administration, http://www.nea.gov.cn/. [21] State-Owned Assets Supervision and Administration Commission of the State Council, http://www .sasac.gov.cn/. [22] State Grid of China Corporation, http://www.sgcc.com.cn/. [23] China Southern Power Grid Company Limited, http://www.csg.cn/.

4.5  INTERCONNECTED POWER GRID IN INDIA BY MINI SHAJI THOMAS 4.5.1 Introduction The Indian Power Sector is among the largest in the world and has been showing tremendous growth in the last few decades in terms of installed capacity, transmission capability, interconnections, transmission voltages, and integration of renewable sources. The history of Electric Power in India tracks down to July 24, 1879 with the demonstration of electric light in Calcutta (Kolkata). With the success of this, further demonstrations were conducted in Bombay (Mumbai) in 1882 at Crawford Market and Bombay Electric Supply and Tramways Company (BEST) set up a generating station in 1905. Darjeeling Municipality set up the first Hydroelectric Installation in India near a tea estate at Sidrapong. On August 5, 1905 the first electric street light in Asia was lit in Bangalore and the first electric train ran between Kurla and Victoria Terminus in Bombay in 1925. Indian Power Sector was concentrated in and around a few urban areas at the time of independence in 1947. In the 50s, huge river valleys projects came up and some limited inter-connected systems were set up to provide power to nearby population and efforts were made to set up projects for irrigation, agriculture and flood control. In the 60s there were huge developments in the power sector such as increase in generating unit size, transmission voltage and interconnection as there was rapid industrialization happening and power grids at the state level started to evolve. The 70s and 80s saw steady increase in the transmission voltage, establishment of thermal power station in response to rapid urbanization. The 90s saw the development in HVDC System for bulk power supply over large distances for inter-regional power transfer and back-to-back connections [5]. The important milestones in the development of Indian Power Sector are given in Table 4-3.

04_Santoso_Sec04_p0175-0244.indd 203

27/11/17 2:36 PM

204  SECTION FOUR

TABLE 4-3  Important Milestones in the Development of Indian Power Sector 1897–98 1910 1948 1964 1976 1991 1998 1998 2000 2003 2004 2007 2009 2010

First hydro (130 kW) Darjeeling/thermal (1 MW) in Calcutta by CESC. Indian Electricity Act 1910 enacted to regulate supply by the Licensees to the consumers. Indian Electricity (Supply) Act 1948 (ES Act). Formation of State Electricity Boards with full powers to control generation, distribution, and utilization of electricity within their respective states and Central Electricity Authority (CEA) for planning and development of power system. Five Regional Electricity Boards (REBs) formed by the Government of India to ensure integrated grid operation and regional cooperation on power. Creation of Central Generating Companies of NTPC, NHPC, NPC, NLC, and NEEPCO. ES Act 1948 amended for the formation of private Generating companies. 100% foreign investment in power sector without any export obligations. Electricity Regulatory Commission Act 1998 enacted, formation of Central Electricity Regulatory Commission (CERC) and State Electricity Regulatory Commissions (SERC). Regulatory power of the State governments transferred to SERC. Act amended to provide for of Central Transmission Utility (CTU) and State Transmission Utilities (STU). Indian Electricity Grid Code (IEGC) and Availability Based Tariff (ABT). Electricity Act 2003 enacted by the Parliament. Open Access allowed. Power Markets emerged. Unscheduled Interchange (UI) Regulations introduced. Renewable energy Certificate, sharing of Inter-State Transmission Charges and Losses.

4.5.2  Institutional Set Up The Institutional set up of the Indian Power Sector is given in Fig. 4-11. In India, Electric Power is a concurrent subject governed by both Central and State Governments. The overall monitoring and control is by the Ministry of Power, Government of India. The set up also includes public sector enterprises and central generating companies such as National Thermal Power Corporation (NTPC), National Hydro Electric Power Corporation (NHPC), and Nuclear Power Corporation (NPC).

CEA Central sector companies • Generating utilities: NTPC, NHPC, etc. • Transmission utility: POWERGRID • System operation: NLDC, RLDCs • Finance: PFC • Rural Electrification: REC

R&D CPRI, NPTI, PSTI

Mega IPPs

Ministry of Power Government of India

Appellate tribunal State Govt.

Trading Co. PTC India

State sector generation transmission distribution

Independent CERC

State IPPs

Independent SERC

FIGURE 4-11  Institutional set up of Indian Power Sector.

04_Santoso_Sec04_p0175-0244.indd 204

27/11/17 2:36 PM

INTERCONNECTED POWER GRIDS   205 

The public sector transmission company is Power Grid Corporation of India and the Grid Control Operations are managed by the newly created Power System Operations Corporation (POSOCO). The research Institutions created by the Central Government include Central Power Research Institute (CPRI), National Power Training Institute (NPTI), and Power System Training Institute (PSTI) for capacity building. Each state in India has its own Ministry of Power managing the generation, transmission, and distribution of power in the state and also to liaison with central entities. The Central Electricity Authority (CEA) advises the Ministry of Power on technical, financial, and economic matters. It prepares the National Power Plan, conducts load surveys, and comes out with the planning criteria to be followed regarding major generation and transmission infrastructure in the country. Power Finance Corporation (PFC) is a central sector entity for funding of power projects across the country. Rural Electrification Corporation (REC) is set up exclusively for the electrification of villages. India has an independent regulatory authority for electricity, the Central Electricity Regulatory Commission (CERC), set up under the Electricity Regulatory Commission’s Act 1998 as an independent statutory body with quasi-judicial powers. CERC regulates traffic related matter and interstate bulk sale of power, advises the Central Government on the formulation of tariff policy frames the guidelines regarding tariff and promotes competition and efficiency in the power sector. There are State Electricity Regulatory Commissions that regulate the activities at the state level. 4.5.3  Makeup and Size Indian Power Grid is one of the very large power grids in the world with an installed capacity of 305,554 MW as on August 31, 2016. Each state in India has its own generation transmission and distribution of electric power. Indian Electricity Generation is mostly coal based (69%) with renewable Generation (14%) edging over hydro Power (14%) recently and the rest contributed by other sources. Hydropower’s share has declined steeply from the mid-1960s, when it was over 45%, which dropped to 26% in 2005 and now to 14%. Figure 4-12 gives a comprehensive picture of the growth in installed capacity from thermal and renewable energy till now. 4.5.4  Voltage Levels India has been leading the efforts in increased transmission voltage among the countries in the world. The transmission voltage was 220 kV in the early 70s and 400 kV was introduced in 1977 in India. In 2000, 765 kV transmission lines were introduced, and 2014–15 saw the testing of 1200 kV substation at Bina in the state of Madhya Pradesh. In 2016 a test line of 1200 kV was set up successfully by a consortium of public and private companies under the leadership of Power Grid Corporation of India. This is the first 1200 kV line in the world to be operational and the transmission world is looking towards India for innovations like this. In high voltage DC (HVDC) scenario, 500 kV HVDC was tested in 1990 and 800 kV HVDC line was tested in 2012. The transmission utility “Powergrid” operates about 131,728 circuit km of transmission lines at 800/765 kV, 400 kV, 220 kV and 132 kV EHVAC and +500 kV HVDC levels and 213 substations. The transformation capacity is about 266,163 MVA as on 31st August 2016. This gigantic transmission network, spread over length and breadth of the country, is consistently maintained at an availability of over 99%. The distribution voltages range from 66 kV, 33 kV, and 11 kV in India and the household supply is at 400 V for three phase and 230 V for single phase. Indian power sector operates at a frequency of 50 Hz. 4.5.5  Interconnection of Different Regions India has a fair share of resources required for electricity generation, however, the distribution of natural resources (coal, water resources, wind, etc.) is spatial, with coal reserves in the eastern region, water resources in the northern Himalayas and northeast region and wind energy abundant in the

04_Santoso_Sec04_p0175-0244.indd 205

27/11/17 2:36 PM

206  SECTION FOUR

Installed capacity in India (MW) 3,50,000 3,05,554 3,00,000

2,71,722

2,50,000 1,99,877

MW

2,00,000

2,12,568 1,32,329

1,88,898

1,50,000 1,05,046 1,31,603

85,795

1,00,000 63,636 42,585

50,000 1,362 0 Total capacity

1,713

2,886

4,653

9,027

16,664

26,680 43,764

61,010 21658

74,429 26269

86,015 34654

38990 24,503

41267 35,777

42783 44,236

31-Dec-47 31-Dec-50 31-Mar-56 31-Mar-61 31-Mar-66 31-Mar-74 31-Mar-79 31-Mar-85 31-Mar-90 31-Mar-97 31-Mar-02 31-Mar-07 31-Mar-12 31-Mar-15 31-Aug-16 1,362

1,713

2,886

4,653

9,027

16,664

26,680

42,585

63,636

85,795

1,05,046

1,32,329

1,99,877

2,71,722

3,05,554

Thermal

854

1,153

1,825

2,736

4,903

9,058

15,207

27,030

43,764

61,010

74,429

86,015

1,31,603

1,88,898

2,12,568

Hydel

508

560

1061

1917

4124

6966

10833

14460

18307

21658

26269

34654

38990

41267

42783

902

1,628

7,760

24,503

35,777

44,236

Renewable

FIGURE 4-12  The growth of installed capacity in India from Independence in 1947 till now.

coastal regions. Hence, some of the states have abundance of power where as other regions and states have acute shortage of power. Hence, there was a need to set up central power generating agencies for coal and hydro generation coupled with high voltage transmission network crisscrossing the entire country. This led to the setting up of large thermal and hydro generating station where the raw material were available in the 70s and 80s and wiring of high voltage transmission lines across the country. The 29 states and 7 union territories of India are distributed in 5 regions—Northern, Southern, Eastern, Western, and Northeastern (NE) regions. Figure 4-13 shows a comprehensive picture of the five regions with the characteristics of each region. As mentioned earlier the northern region with eight states and two union territories is a deficit region, always drawing power from the east and northeast region which are high in generation capacity and low in loads. In the 70s and 80s, the states used to generate electricity, transmit and distribute within the state. Although the five regional electricity boards were formed as early as 1964, the pooling of resources within the region among states started in the 80s. The five regional grids operated with five frequencies in the 80s and early 90s. In October, 1991 the east and the northeast were synchronized, and in March, 2003 the western region was synchronized with east and northeast, forming the central grid, thus reducing the frequencies to three in the north, central, and southern grids. In August, 2006 the northern region was synchronized with the central grid forming the “New Grid.” In December, 2013 the southern grid was synchronized with the New Grid fulfilling the dream of “One Nation One Grid One Frequency,” thus creating the All India grid with a single frequency, catapulting it to the status of very large power system. India is also leading the efforts for the formation of the SAARC grid interconnecting Bhutan, Nepal, Sri Lanka, and Bangladesh.

04_Santoso_Sec04_p0175-0244.indd 206

27/11/17 2:36 PM

INTERCONNECTED POWER GRIDS   207 

One nation one grid from Dec 2013

Deficit region River hydro Highly weather sensitive loads Adverse weather condition

North NE East West

Very low load High hydro potential Evacuation problems Low load High coal reserves Industrial load and agricultural load

South

High load Monsoon dependent hydro

FIGURE 4-13  The five Regions in India with their characteristics.

4.5.6 Renewables Till recently India was adding large-scale conventional power plants which were not enough to meet the ever increasing demand for electric power. Currently India has a sizable footprint of renewable energy at 45 GW installed capacity, mainly wind at 27.7 GW, solar at 8 GW and the rest contributed by small hydro, biopower, and other sources. Refer to Fig. 4-12 for an overview of the growth. The Government of India is aiming to deploy and integrate 175 GW of Renewable Energy by 2022, the 75th year of Indian independence. The constituents being: (1) solar (utility-scale, distributed, off-grid/mini-grid—100 GW); (2) wind (utility-scale—60 GW); (3) small hydro (5 GW); (4) bioenergy (10 GW). This is feasible now as the solar and wind technologies are commercially viable. The Jawaharlal Nehru National Solar Mission aims to generate 100,000 MW of solar power by 2022, creating a positive environment among investors keen to tap into India’s potential.

4.5.7  Operation and Control India has one of the most modern and well-established transmission coordination and operations in the world, monitoring and controlling the transmission of power, especially interregional transfer and pricing issues. The setup of the transmission control centers are given in Fig. 4-14 where the National Load Despatch Center (NLDC), New Delhi, started functioning in 2009, whereas the five regional load dispatch centers (RLDCs) began operation in early 90s. There are five RLDCs, as shown in Fig. 4-14, which coordinates the activities of the states under each region. The state load dispatch

04_Santoso_Sec04_p0175-0244.indd 207

27/11/17 2:36 PM

208  SECTION FOUR

FIGURE 4-14  Transmission control center organizational diagram.

centers (SLDCs) are connected to the RLDCs. For example, the southern regional load dispatch center (SRLDC) monitors the states of Andhra Pradesh, Tamil Nadu, Karnataka, Kerala, and Puducherry and is connected to the respective SLDCs. The SLDCs, depending on the size of the state, have one or more sub-load dispatch centers which are connected to the major generating stations and substations. Hence the LDCs will have complete information regarding the generation, and flow of power. The RTUs at generating stations and substations of central utilities report directly to RLDCs. RLDCs and SLDCs are apex bodies and all constituents have to comply with the directions of NLDC for ensuring integrated operation of the inter-state transmission systems, to achieve maximum efficiency and economy. Implementation of Indian Electricity Grid Code (IEGC) w.e.f. Feburary 1, 2000 was a milestone in the history of Indian power sector, which puts obligations on various players in the grid for maintaining security of the inter-state transmission system. It brings set of rules to be followed by all utilities connected to the inter-state transmission system. The regional grids are proposed to be operated as loose power pools and strict control of tie line/generation schedule is not envisaged. Incentives/disincentives to give signals for correct grid operation are built in features of the Availability Based Tariff (ABT). Unscheduled interchanges are billed at a frequency linked rate which varies linearly from 0 at 50.5 Hz, the main suppliers of bulk power are the central sector and state owned power stations. 4.5.8  Unified Real-Time Dynamic State Measurement (URTDSM) Scheme The power grids are expected to operate closer to their limits in order to maximize utilization of the network and India is no exception. The role of the system operator and the decisions taken have become very critical, who completely rely on the information available to them in real time. The existing SCADA or EMS systems acquire analog and digital information such as voltage, frequency, active and reactive power flows and circuit breaker status through RTUs or IEDs spread throughout the system. This information is updated once every 2 seconds for status points and

04_Santoso_Sec04_p0175-0244.indd 208

27/11/17 2:36 PM

INTERCONNECTED POWER GRIDS   209 

10 seconds for analog values. Lack of a coordinated accurate time stamp for recorded data makes any reconstruction of a timeline difficult and is time consuming. Wide area monitoring through high-speed communication helps in securing the system in minimum amount of time, as the scan times are to the tune of 25 to 120 scans per second and time stamped angular separation of nodes are available using this technology, which will greatly enhance the information availability to the operator. Synchrophasor technology comprise of Phasor Measurement Units (PMUs), Phasor Data Concentrators (PDCs), Historian, communication network, real time visualization, and offline toolboxes. India has embarked on an ambitious project of installing PMUs and PDCs to help the system operation with better visualization and analytical tools for appropriate action during a contingency. This unified real-time dynamic state measurement (URTDSM) scheme requires a large number of PMUs and PDCs to be deployed. In the first phase, placement of 1186 PMUs at all lines in HVDC terminal stations, 400 kV and above voltage level substations, generating stations stepped up at 220 kV level and above where fiberoptic cable along with communication equipment is either existing or being implemented. Placement of 27 Nodal PDC at strategic substation, 25 Master PDC at SLDCs, 5 Super PDC at RLDCs, 2 PDCs at Main and Backup NLDC, with 16 Remote consoles are underway in this phase at the moment. Development of Analytics for various applications using PMU data is also being taken up in parallel. In phase 2, placement of balance 483 PMUs and respective equipment at similar locations along with provision of fiberoptic connectivity and communication equipment will be completed. 4.5.9  Smart Grid Initiatives in India [10] Government of India has taken a number of initiatives for transforming the existing grid to a smarter one. The most prominent initiatives being: a. National Smart Grid Mission (NSGM) b. Integrated power development scheme c. Indian Smart Grid Taskforce d. Smart city and AMRUT projects e. India Smart Grid Forum National Smart Grid Mission.  GOI has established a NSGM in power sector to plan and monitor implementation of policies and programs related to smart grid activities in India in March 2015. Ministry of Power (MoP), Ministry of New and Renewable Energy (MNRE), Ministry of Urban Development (MoUD), and Ministry of Heavy Industry (MoHI) are associated with this mission. Since Smart Grid is a dynamic and evolving concept due to constant technological innovations, the objectives, structure and functions of NSGM are such that it allows sufficient freedom and flexibility of operations without needing to refer the matter to different ministers/agencies frequently. NSGM is a three-tier body consisting Governing Council, Empowered Committee, and Technical committee. Smart Grid Knowledge Center (SGKC) is developed by Powergrid Corporation of India Limited, the transmission utility of India with funding from MoP. SGKC acts as a resource center for providing technical support to the mission in all technical matters, including development of technical workforce, capacity building, and outreach, suggesting curriculum changes in technical education, etc. Integrated Power Development Scheme (for Sub-Transmission and Distribution System).  The Government of India has implemented Integrated Power Development Scheme (IPDS) with an objective to cover the works relating to strengthening of sub-transmission and distribution system, including provisioning of solar panels, metering of distribution transformers, feeder, consumers in urban areas, and IT enablement of distribution sector in 2014. All the distribution companies (private and state power departments) are provided financial assistance to enhance and modernize the infrastructure. The DISCOMS assess the need of strengthening the urban distribution networks and has formulated bankable Detailed Project Reports (DPRs) which is recommended by existing Distribution Reforms Committee (DRC) at state level. Earlier, in an effort to move toward Smart

04_Santoso_Sec04_p0175-0244.indd 209

27/11/17 2:36 PM

210  SECTION FOUR

grid, GOI had launched Accelerated Power Development Program (APDP) in 2000 to 2001 and Accelerated Power Development and Reforms Program (APDRP) during 2002 to 2003. APDRP scheme was restructured as a Central Sector Scheme and renamed as Restructured Accelerated Power Development and Reforms Program (RAPDRP) to overcome the shortcomings of APDRP. The program mainly considers on reduction of sustained loss, establishment of reliable and automated systems, collection of accurate data, adoption of Information Technology, etc. for demonstrable performance. The States/Utilities have constituted the State Electricity Regulatory Commission so that it can achieve the following target of AT&C loss reduction at utility level: (a) utilities having AT&C loss above 30%—reduction by 3% per year; (b) utilities having AT&C loss below 30%—reduction by 1.5% per year. It commits a time frame for introduction of measures for better accountability at all levels in the project area. It is heartening to note that most of the distribution companies have been able to achieve the targets well ahead of time. Case studies related to Integrated Power Development Scheme and RAPDRP are cited later in this section in the case study subsection. Indian Smart Grid Taskforce.  India Smart Grid Task Force (ISGTF) was set up in September, 2010 under the aegis of the Ministry of Power to serve as Government’s focal point for activities related to “Smart Grid” including a road map for implementation of Smart Grids in India. The main functions of ISGTF are to ensure awareness, coordination, and integration of the diverse activities related to Smart grid technologies, practices and services for Smart Grid Research and Development, coordinate and integrate other relevant intergovernmental activities, collaborate on interoperability framework, review and validate recommendations from India Smart Grid Forum, etc. Smart City and AMRUT Projects.  A smart city is an urban center of the future which is ideally environmentally green, safe, and efficient. It owns advanced technical and infrastructural assist to provide high quality of life with economical growth. ISO37120 standards are drafted for framework and guidelines of smart city. Indian central government has launched three mega projects 100 Smart Cities project, AMRUT City projects, and Housing Scheme for all for transforming urban India. India Smart Grid Forum.  India Smart Grid Forum (ISGF) is a non-profit voluntary consortium of public and private stakeholders with the prime objective of accelerating development of Smart Grid technologies in the Indian Power Sector. In 2010, ISGF was set up to provide a platform through which different wings such as utilities, industry, academia, and other stakeholders could participate in the development of Indian smart grid systems by giving their relevant inputs to the government’s decision-making. The aim of the Forum is to comfort the Indian power sector to use Smart Grid technologies in an efficient, cost-effective, new and scalable manner by bringing all the main stakeholders and technologies together. ISGF leverage the global experience and standards by coordinating and cooperating with significant global and Indian bodies. Smart Grid Pilot Projects.  Ministry of Power has allotted 14 Smart Grid Pilot Projects to be implemented by state-owned Distribution Utilities. The projects incorporate automated metering infrastructure (AMI) for residential and industrial consumer, different portals such as community Portal, Consumer Portal, employee portal, etc. and data analytics for decision making and support. These projects cover or focus on automated metering infrastructure, outage management system, peak load management, power quality management, etc. Various benefits are envisaged such as aggregate technical and commercial losses are reduced, peak load consumption is reduced, reduction in failure unforeseen outages and recovery time, reduction in billing, meter reading, maintenance cost, etc. The smart grid projects in India amalgamate power sector with communication sector and manage energy consumption, peak load shifting, supply demand management system, improves grid stability, etc. These projects open up the markets, introduce flexible tariff system and empower endconsumer. A saturated rollout is needed to be achieved for the capital investment. Enhancement in perceptive of consumer behavior gives a very positive impact on the smart grid concept and has increased competitive environment leading to open access market. Meeting regulatory requirements and expectation is another challenge. Proper communication for data collection and management of these enormous and complex data are needed to be accounted. The deployment of smart grid and smart city can help Indian power system to achieve significant goals.

04_Santoso_Sec04_p0175-0244.indd 210

27/11/17 2:36 PM

INTERCONNECTED POWER GRIDS   211 

4.5.10 References [1] Thomas, Mini S. and McDonald, John D.: “Power system SCADA and Smart Grids,” CRC Press, Taylor and Francis, USA, April 2015. [2] Agrawal, V. K., Porwal, R. K., Kumar, Rajesh, Vivek, P., Muthukumar, T., Deployment of System Protection Schemes for enhancing reliability of power system: Operational experience of wide area SPS in Northern Regional Power System in India, in Power and Energy Systems (ICPS), 2011 International Conference on, 2011, pp. 1–6. [3] Mukhopadhyay, S., Dube, S. K., and Soonee, S. K., “Development of power market in India,” 2006 IEEE Power Engineering Society General Meeting, 2006, USA. [4] NITI Ayog: Report of the Expert Group on 175 GW renewable energy by 2022, 2015. http://niti.gov.in/ writereaddata/files/writereaddata/files/document_publication/report-175-GW-RE.pdf. [5] Ministry of Power: “National Smart Grid Mission,” March 2015. Available at: http://powermin.nic.in/upload/ pdf/National_Smart_Grid_Mission_OM.pdf. [6] Ministry of Power: “Integrated Power Development Scheme,” December, 2014. Available at: http://powermin .nic.in/upload/pdf/Integrated_Power_Development_Scheme.pdf. [7] Ministry of Power: “Guidelines for the Re-structured APDRP during XI Plan,” December 2008. Available at: http://powermin.nic.in/upload/pdf/Guidelines_APDR-P_XI_Plan.pdf. [8] India smart grid forum: “Smart Grid Bulletin,” Vol. 1, issue 9, Sept., 2014. Available at: http://indiasmartgrid .org/en/Lists/newsletter/Attachments/16/ISGF%20Smart%20Grid%20Bulletin%20-%20Issue%209%20 (September%202014).pdf. [9] Thomas, Mini S.: ‘Smart Cities: An Indian Perspective’, IEEE smart grid newsletter, May 2015. [10] Thomas, Mini S.: “Smart Grid Initiatives in India” IET Engineering & Technology Reference, 2016, 6 pp. DOI: 10.1049/etr.2015.0070, Online ISSN 2056-4007.

4.6  INTERCONNECTED POWER GRID IN JAPAN BY TERUO OHNO 4.6.1 Introduction There are 10 vertically integrated electric power companies that own generation, transmission, distribution, and retail in Japan. Among these 10 utilities, power systems of 9 utilities are interconnected mainly for the following purposes (Table 4-4): •  To share generation reserve •  To stabilize frequency •  Power interchange to reduce generation cost under the normal condition •  Power interchange for the power system security under the emergency condition •  Power provision from power stations co-developed by multiple utilities Figure 4-15 shows the interconnection of power systems in Japan. The interconnection between the eastern and western part of Japan is not a synchronous connection as they use different frequencies. The eastern part of Japan has been using a frequency of 50 Hz since 1896 when the Tokyo Dento Company introduced three-phase AC generators (two units × 265 kW) to its Asakusa Power Station from the German manufacturer AEG (Allgemeine Elektricitäts-Gesellschaft AG). In contrast, the western part of Japan has been using a frequency of 60 Hz since the same year when Osaka Dento Company introduced AC generators (four units × 150 kW) to its Saiwai-cho Power Station from the U.S. manufacturer GE.

04_Santoso_Sec04_p0175-0244.indd 211

27/11/17 2:36 PM

212  SECTION FOUR

TABLE 4-4  Major Events for the Interconnection of Power Systems in Japan Year

Events

1959

Tohoku EPCO (Electric Power Company) was interconnected to TEPCO (Tokyo EPCO) at 275 kV to send power from newly-developed large hydro power plant, Tagokura Power Station and Honna Power Station. Chubu EPCO was interconnected to Kansai EPCO at 275 kV. Chugoku EPCO was interconnected to Kyushu EPCO at 220 kV. The interconnection line, Shin-Kanmon Kansen, was upgraded for the 220 kV operation. Chugoku EPCO was interconnected to Shikoku EPCO at 220 kV. Hokuriku EPCO was interconnected to Kansai EPCO at 275 kV. All utilities are interconnected on the 60 Hz side by this connection. TEPCO was interconnected to Chubu EPCO at 275 kV at Sakuma Frequency Converter Station. This was the first interconnection between the 50 Hz system and the 60 Hz system. Hokkaido EPCO was interconnected to Tohoku EPCO through ±125 kV HVDC lines. All utilities are interconnected on the 50 Hz side by this connection. The interconnection between Tohoku EPCO and TEPCO was upgraded by the commissioning of new 500 kV interconnection lines. The interconnection between Kansai EPCO and Shikoku EPCO was upgraded by the commissioning of new ±250 kV HVDC lines, Kii-Suido HVDC lines.

1960 1962 1964 1965 1979 1995 2000

Hokkaido EPCO (4.32 GW) Hokuriku EPCO (4.95 GW)

↑ 0.60 GW ↓ 0.60 GW

Chubu EPCO (24.28 GW)

Tohoku EPCO (13.09 GW)

Chugoku EPCO (10.56 GW) Okinawa EPCO (1.43 GW)

→ 4.05 GW ← 2.78 GW → 2.53 GW ← 0.53 GW

→ 1.30 GW ← 1.62 GW

↑ 1.20 GW ↓ 1.20 GW

↑ 0.30 GW ↓ 0.30 GW

TEPCO (52.47 GW)

→ 2.50 GW ← 1.92 GW → 1.40 GW ← 1.40 GW

Kyushu EPCO (15.18 GW)

↑ 0.61 GW ↓ 4.85 GW

↑ 1.20 GW ↓ 1.20 GW

Kansai EPCO (26.34 GW) Shikoku EPCO (5.04 GW)

Note: Values in parentheses are averages of first three highest forecasted demands in each area in 2016, measured at transmission line ends of power stations. Values by the interconnection are transmission capacities of the interconnection during daytime on weekdays in August 2016. FIGURE 4-15  Interconnected power systems in Japan.

04_Santoso_Sec04_p0175-0244.indd 212

27/11/17 2:36 PM

INTERCONNECTED POWER GRIDS   213 

The unification of two frequencies has been studied since the 1940s, but the enormous required cost has almost prohibited the unification. The study was recently conducted after the Great East Japan Earthquake in 2011 when rolling blackouts occurred due to the shortage of generation. The study found that the required cost for the unification is approximately 100,000 million USD (1 USD = 100 JPY) for utilities to replace their generation, transmission, and distribution facilities. Additional cost will be necessary for the customer side also to replace their facilities. All utilities in the eastern part of Japan, Hokkaido EPCO, Tohoku EPCO, and TEPCO, use a frequency of 50 Hz, but Hokkaido EPCO is not synchronously connected to the other two utilities. Also, 1 of 10 utilities, Okinawa EPCO, is not interconnected to the other nine utilities due to its distance.

4.6.2  Paradigm Shift after Great East Japan Earthquake Until recently, it is a prime responsibility of each vertically integrated utility to have enough generation to supply demand in each area. Even though power systems of nine utilities are interconnected, the interconnection was for utilities to help, not to compete, each other. Therefore, the capacity of the interconnection was limited to the minimum required level, considering the cost to build the interconnection. In addition, the number of the AC connection between utilities is normally limited to one, and DC connections were built to enhance the interconnection capacity when necessary. Thanks to this practice, there has not been loop flow between utilities or cascading outages to neighboring utilities. Other reasons which has been limiting the interconnection capacity include: •  Because of the longitudinal shape of Japan, areas of nine utilities are aligned in series. Since the backbone of Japan is mostly mountainous, it is geographically difficult to build the meshed interconnection. •  The bulk power system in Japan tends to carry large power due to the difficulty to build transmission lines. It is typical for these lines to carry two to three times of SIL (Surge Impedance Loading) by the reactive power support from shunt capacitors. When the power flow through the interconnection is increased, it will, in many cases, lead to the transient instability. To solve the transient stability problem, it is often necessary to upgrade the bulk power system inside utilities. The Great East Japan Earthquake in 2011 and the shortage of supply after the earthquake have significantly changed the concept of the interconnection explained above. The following roles are now expected to the interconnection: •  Improve the supply reliability under extreme events, such as the Great East Japan Earthquake, by the enhancement of the power interchange. •  Reduce the electricity tariff by the introduction of the higher competition through the interconnection. Realize the EDC (economic dispatching control) with all generators in Japan, reducing a chance of market split. •  Accommodate higher penetration of RES. In line with this new expectations, a new HVDC line between Hokkaido EPCO and Tohoku EPCO and another new HVDC line between TEPCO and Chubu EPCO are under construction. To facilitate the extended roles of the interconnection, the Organization for Cross-regional Coordination of Transmission Operators, Japan (OCCTO) was established and has started its operation since April 1st, 2015. The main roles of OCCTO for the planning and operation of the interconnected power system are: •  Aggregate the electricity supply-demand plan and the network development plan submitted by electricity companies.

04_Santoso_Sec04_p0175-0244.indd 213

27/11/17 2:36 PM

214  SECTION FOUR

•  Enhance the interconnection capacity including the frequency converter stations between the eastern and western power system. •  Cross-regionally operate the interconnected power system. •  Under the normal condition, cross-regionally control the electricity supply-demand balance and frequency, which are controlled by transmission and distribution companies in each area. •  Under emergency conditions, instruct the adjustment of the cross-regional power interchange and the increase of generation. 4.6.3  Planning of Interconnection Lines OCCTO has established its Network Codes in April 2015 [1]. The Network Codes have been amended three times since then, and the latest version has been effective since July 11, 2016. The Network Codes define the planning and operation of the transmission network, including interconnection lines. Based on the Network Codes, OCCTO initiates the cross-regional network development planning process by a proposal from OCCTO itself or electric power suppliers or by a request from the government. The proposal from OCCTO itself is divided into two categories: a proposal to enable the stable supply and a proposal to facilitate the cross-regional trade. To enable the stable supply, OCCTO proposes the start of the cross-regional network development planning process under the following conditions: •  Unplanned outages of generators led to a power interruption even with the cross-regional power interchange was adjusted to the total transfer capacity. •  The development of interconnection lines is found to be necessary for the stable supply as a study of extreme contingencies and disasters. Additionally, the start of the cross-regional network development planning process is proposed by OCCTO to facilitate the cross-regional trade, for example, under the following conditions: •  The available transfer capacity of interconnection was equal to or less than 5% of the total transfer capacity for the duration which was equal to or longer than 20% of total time of the past 1 year. •  In the annual usage plan of interconnection lines, the available transfer capacity of interconnection is equal to or less than 5% of the total transfer capacity for the duration which is equal to or longer than 20% of total time of the annual usage plan. •  In the long-term usage plan of interconnection lines, the available transfer capacity of interconnection is 10% or less for three or more fiscal years. The cost of the development of interconnection lines is borne by beneficiaries. For example, when the interconnection line helps the stable supply by increasing the possible cross-regional power interchange in case of a lack of supply due to a disaster, the cost of the development of the interconnection line is borne by transmission and distribution companies whose stable supply is enhanced by the interconnection line. The cost is eventually shared by electricity users in the service area of the transmission and distribution companies. 4.6.4  Future Outlook After the Great East Japan Earthquake, the future of the energy and electricity supply has been discussed throughout Japan. In 2015, as a result of the discussions, the Japanese government established the energy mix in 2030, considering 3E+S: energy security, economic efficiency, environment, and safety. According to the energy mix, the RES will account for 22% to 24% of the electricity supply in 2030 as shown in Fig. 4-16, while the RES was approximately 10% of the electricity supply in 2015 (Table 4-5).

04_Santoso_Sec04_p0175-0244.indd 214

27/11/17 2:36 PM

INTERCONNECTED POWER GRIDS   215 

TABLE 4-5  Integration of PVs in Japan Area (EPCO)

Connected PVs (GW)*

Lowest peak demand (GW)†

Percentage (%)

Hokkaido Tohoku Hokuriku Chugoku Shikoku Kyushu

1.02 2.67 0.61 3.02 1.84 6.24

3.08 7.91 2.52 5.54 2.65 7.88

33.1 33.8 24.2 54.5 69.6 79.2

*As of the end of July 2016, except for Hokuriku (August 5, 2016) and Chugoku (August 26, 2016). †At 1 pm on May 12, 2014, except for Hokkaido (at noon on May 26, 2014) and Shikoku (at noon on May 12, 2014).

20– 22% 88%

88%

84%

8%

9%

9%

2013

2014

2015

Hydro Wind Biomass

Oil, Coal, LNG PV

Biomass 3.7–4.6% Geothermal 1.0–1.1% PV 7.0% Wind 1.7%

56.0%

Hydro 8.8–9.2% 2030 Nuclear Geothermal

FIGURE 4-16  Energy mix in Japan in 2030.

Due to the recent increase in PVs, however, the supply-demand operation is already an issue in utilities who are experiencing relatively high penetration of PVs for their demand levels. To solve the issue and achieve the target energy mix in 2030, it is important to use the interconnection more effectively and further facilitate the cross-regional operation. For example, the transaction of regulating power through the interconnection is considered to accommodate more RES. In addition to RES, the smart grid and smart community business is also growing with the help of the public funding. These businesses aim to extend across the interconnection in the future, and the interconnection is expected to accommodate the transaction. The role of the interconnection will become wider and more important in the future.

4.6.5 Reference [1] Organization for Cross-regional Coordination of Transmission Operators: “Network Codes,” April 2015. Available on the Web: https://www.occto.or.jp/en/companies/guideline/files/network_codes_20160928 .pdf.

04_Santoso_Sec04_p0175-0244.indd 215

27/11/17 2:36 PM

216  SECTION FOUR

4.7  INTERCONNECTED POWER GRID IN NORTH AMERICA BY SARMA NUTHALAPATI, SPENCER BURKS, AND KRISTIAN KOELLNER 4.7.1 Introduction The first power grid in North America was placed into service in the 1880s in New York City where a small DC grid was created to feed electric lighting in Manhattan [1]. In the decades to follow, small generating plants were constructed in city centers to light up those towns. In the decades to follow, these smaller grids began to interconnect, particularly during the First World War, and they continued to grow through the Second World War [2,3]. During the 1930s, efforts were made to provide power to rural areas and connect remote hydroelectric resources to load centers, and entities such as the Tennessee Valley Authority (TVA), Bonneville Power Administration (BPA), and the Lower Colorado River Authority (LCRA) were created. As electricity use continued to grow, larger capacity generators and transmission lines were constructed. In 1978, the Public Utilities Regulatory Policies Act was passed which encouraged the creation of power markets for non-utility power producers, moving power grids towards privatization. In response to the Northeast blackout in August 2003 that affected over 50 million people in the United States and Canada, The Energy Policy Act of 2005 was passed giving the Federal Energy Regulatory Commission (FERC) the authority to enforce reliability standards for the bulk electric system in the United States [4]. FERC then certified the North American Electric Reliability Corporation (NERC) as the “electric reliability organization” which now further develops and enforces these reliability standards in the United States, Canada, and part of the Baja California peninsula in Mexico. Today, there are four main interconnections in North America which have evolved and continue to operate asynchronously at 60 Hz. 4.7.2 Structure The four main interconnections in North America (Fig. 4-17): •  Western Interconnection—One of the two largest interconnections in North America. It stretches from the Western Canadian Provinces of British Columbia and Alberta through the Western states of the United States and down to Baja California. •  Eastern Interconnection—The other of the two largest interconnections in North America. It includes central and eastern provinces in Canada and central and eastern states in the United States, but excludes most of Texas and Quebec. •  The Electric Reliability Council of Texas (ERCOT)—This smaller interconnection consists of approximately 85% of the electric load in the state of Texas with DC interchanges between the Eastern and Western Interconnections and part of Mexico [5]. •  Quebec Interconnection—wholly operated by Hydro Quebec in the Canadian Province of Quebec with DC interchanges with New Brunswick, Ontario, and the U.S. Northeast [6]. Each interconnection consists of an electric power transmission system which allows for the bulk transfer of electricity between power generation sites, such as power plants, and load-serving substations. These substations are then the starting point of the power distribution system which connects to all end-use entities such as residential homes and businesses. 4.7.3  Voltage Levels Voltage levels in North America typically range from 69 to 765 kV for transmission and 2.4 to 35 kV for distribution. Standard residential service is 120 V/240 V in single phase, while some industrial services can be 480 V to 4.16 kV three phases (Fig. 4-18).

04_Santoso_Sec04_p0175-0244.indd 216

27/11/17 2:36 PM

INTERCONNECTED POWER GRIDS   217 

FIGURE 4-17  Interconnections in North America. Source: www.nerc.com.

70,000 60,000

Circuit miles

50,000 40,000 30,000 20,000 10,000 –

FRCC

MRO

Total DC

–

872

600 kV– 799 kV

–

–

1,201

149

300– 399 kV

–

200– 299 kV

6,798

400– 599 kV

NPCC

RFC

SERC

–

66

–

190

2,201

–

–

2,611

9,785

8,458

5,507

15,344

9,064

1,538

7,387

SPP

TRE

WECC

–

–

2,137

–

–

–

94

–

12,503

3,921

5,701

20,396

10,244

24,370

2,616

–

38,084

FIGURE 4-18  Existing transmission as of last of 2014. Source: Developed by DOE from NERC (2015b) http://www.nerc.com/pa/RAPA/tads/Pages/default.aspx.

04_Santoso_Sec04_p0175-0244.indd 217

27/11/17 2:36 PM

218  SECTION FOUR

4.7.4  Functional Tiers of the Power Grid In North America, interconnections are typically split into three separate categories—transmission, generation, and distribution. Transmission (generally above 60 kV) consists of interconnected transmission owners and operations mixed together to form the larger interconnection. Local control centers operates their independent transmission networks in coordination with a larger operator for the interconnection. Generation consists of independent generation stations operated on a unit by unit basis. They bid into power markets to supply power and are dispatched in the most economical way possible while maintaining grid reliability requirements. Distribution (generally below 60 kV) begins at load-serving substations connected to the transmission system and provides lower voltage paths from the substations to each individual residential, commercial, and industrial customer. The most basic task of grid operators is to manage appropriate power flows and voltage levels. On the transmission system, bulk power is transferred along transmission lines from generation sources to load-serving distribution substations. Transmission conductors have thermal limits which cannot be exceeded without damage to the conductor or causing the conductor to sag beyond safe clearance levels. In many locations, autotransformers are used to step up or down voltage levels to efficiently transport the power flows across a further distance. These autotransformers also have thermal limits which cannot be exceeded without damaging the insulation on the windings inside the transformer. Damage to insulation increases aging of the transformer until it eventually fails or needs to be replaced. For the most part, electricity demand is not controllable and power generation must match demand in real-time. Grid operators use centralized control systems to dispatch generation units to control these power flows. Generators are dispatched in the most economical way possible without violating thermal ratings on equipment. Good utility practice dictates that the generation units should be dispatched in a manner such that the power grid can lose any single element without causing any thermal limits to be exceeded, i.e. “N-1 secure”. Phase-shifting transformers may be installed to give operators additional control over real power flows across key transmissions elements. In some circumstances, dynamic stability issues are identified and are factored in to generation dispatch in addition to the thermal limits. Another consideration with power flows is voltage angle separation. Since transmission elements are primarily inductive by nature, power flows lead to differences in voltage angle across large geographical areas. If the difference becomes too large, system separation can occur and result in widearea blackouts. Grid operators actively monitor voltage angle conditions to ensure that this does not occur. By controlling regional generation dispatch, power flows can be altered to minimize the angle separation across the transmission system. Grid operators control voltage on the transmission system using both static and dynamic reactive control devices. The primary source of reactive power are steam-based thermal generation units operating synchronous machines with controllable excitation systems. These units stabilize voltage and maintain a reactive margin to respond to dynamic grid events such as line faults and generator trips. Modern renewable energy generators are also able to function as reactive resources when their energy source is available, but they accomplish this using specialized control systems since they are typically coupled to the grid using power electronics instead of synchronous machines. Since the locations of generators in a power system are not always where the reactive resources are needed the most, static reactive devices such as capacitor or reactor banks are installed and switched as needed. For grid locations which either require constant precision or are highly sensitive to varying power flows, many flexible reactive devices are installed and controlled through power electronics in the form of Static VAR Compensators (SVCs) or, alternatively, a Static Compensator (STATCOM).

4.7.5  System Protection An important issue in operating the transmission system is managing system faults and equipment failures which result in short-circuit conditions. During these events, voltage is suppressed across the system, sometimes across hundreds of miles, and large currents flow from generators and

04_Santoso_Sec04_p0175-0244.indd 218

27/11/17 2:36 PM

INTERCONNECTED POWER GRIDS   219 

inductive motors. It is imperative that faulted elements are isolated from the power system as quickly as possible. Suppressed voltages, if not resolved quickly, can lead to motor stall—a condition where connected inductive motors experience a locked rotor condition. Motor stall will increase the reactive demand on the system and further suppress voltage until there is a wide area voltage collapse. Fault currents increase loading on transmission elements and can cause permanent damage to transmission lines, induce transformer insulation failures, and cause generators to trip offline. The largest risk of poor system protection is a dynamic instability event which results in cascading loss of load, generation, and transmission elements. Power quality during faults is another issue affecting customers such as industrial plants with sensitive equipment. A lengthy fault and voltage sag can result in halting production, loss of product, and even safety concerns at these facilities. Isolation of faults is achieved using elaborate relaying schemes connected to circuit breakers which identify and switch out faulted elements. The primary relay scheme utilized at the transmission level are distance relays which are configured using known system impedances to determine the distance to the fault based on current and voltage measurements. If the fault is located within a defined zone, then the relay will trip accordingly. Due to the inherent variance in these measurements due to changing system configurations and differences in fault impedances, and the need for redundancy, relays are configured with multiple zones which are time coordinated to provide overlapping coverage and allow for the correct element to be isolated. In modern relay schemes, high-speed pilot communication between relays allows the protection scheme to reduce fault clearing times by validating fault location and eliminating the need for time-based coordination. As a secondary measure, inverse time over current relays are installed to detect fault currents on phase or neutral conductors. Improper relay coordination or the failure of relaying and communication equipment can lead to equipment damage, over-tripping, cascading outages, or uncontrolled generator separation. The majority of faults are phase to ground, and common causes of faults include lightning, animal contact, failed structures and insulators, transformer insulation failures, and foreign contact on exposed conductors. Differential schemes are also used for protection of transmission elements. Differential schemes rely on Kirchhoff’s current law (KCL) and monitor all current inputs and outputs in a given zone, and if these values do not sum to zero then circuit breakers isolate the element. The benefit of differential schemes is that they operate quickly and do not require any coordination with other relaying equipment since the location of the fault is already known. 4.7.6 HVDC In North America, High Voltage Direct Current (HVDC) is commonly used to allow for power transfers across long distances or between the asynchronous interconnections. Long distance HVDC lines can be used to connect generation-rich regions such as hydropower in Northern Oregon to load centers such as in Southern California at lower cost and with more controllability than AC alternatives. Cost benefits arise from reduced structure and conductor requirements and smaller Right-of-Way requirements. In cases of generation shortage or arbitrage pricing between interconnections, the HVDC ties act as generation sources and sinks in respective transmission systems. HVDC ties exist between the Eastern, Western, and ERCOT interconnections. The smaller ERCOT and Quebec interconnections have additional HVDC ties with Mexico and the Eastern Interconnection, respectively. 4.7.7  Distribution System The majority of distribution system are built with three-phase radial circuits called feeders. The feeders are routed through cities and rural areas at primary voltages between 2.4 kV and 35 kV. Individual three-phase and single phase circuits are tapped off of this circuit and provide a primary voltage source near customer property. Smaller transformers are then attached to these

04_Santoso_Sec04_p0175-0244.indd 219

27/11/17 2:36 PM

220  SECTION FOUR

lines to provide secondary voltage to customers and include a low voltage service line attaching to the meter for individual premises. The secondary voltage of these service lines typically ranges from 120/240 V for homes to 277/480 V for larger commercial or industrial customers. However, some customers will take primary voltage service and manage their own secondary system. These customers are typically large industrial customers with either sensitive load requiring special power quality equipment or of a large enough scale to create cost savings relative to typical utility rates. Characteristics of these distribution systems vary based on the nature of load they serve. Urban areas have higher load density that reduces the distance between load-serving substations to approximately 3 to 5 miles apart. This results in shorter feeders and allows for many ties between feeders. These ties allow for load to be transferred between feeder circuits during distribution outages. In some regions, distribution automation systems are installed to coordinate the restoration of large sections of load in response to faulted sections of line. Some commercial and industrial customers who require high reliability such as universities, hospitals, and sports stadiums will be configured with multiple distribution feeds and equipment to switch between the feeds if any outage occurs at any point of time. Rural areas have much lower load density and feeders tend to extend in length. Some rural feeders are 20 to 30 miles in length without the ability to move load during outage conditions. Reliability can be relatively worse in these areas due to the large amount of line exposure and lack of alternative feeders. Higher distribution primary voltage (22 to 35 kV) is more common in these areas due to voltage drop effects. Some downtown areas with extremely high residential or commercial density will have highly redundant distribution systems known as distribution networks. These system are configured with multiple feeders from multiple substation power transformers for each individual premise. This allows for one or more distribution faults to occur without interrupting customer service. Downtown networks are typically installed in duct banks under city streets and in vaults located inside of large skyscrapers. The vaults enclose distribution transformers which step down from primary to secondary voltage level to be distributed throughout the building. If the build is too tall to effectively distribute power at secondary voltage, then multiple vaults will be installed many stories above ground level with primary conductors running vertically through the building. Customer outages are extremely uncommon in these networked distribution systems, but higher fault duty inside of small electrical vaults raises concerns over arc-flash safety. Voltage is controlled on the distribution system to maintain voltage at each customer’s meter. Substation power transformers are typically equipment with either a load tap changer or stand-alone regulators which adjust the voltage on the low-side of the transformer. This shields the distribution system from any steady-state voltage fluctuations on the transmission system and accounts for varying load levels. The majority of customers load consists of inductive motor load which has high reactive power demands. It is common for distribution entities to install capacitor banks along feeders to improve the load power factor as seen by the transmission system and “flatten” the voltage profile along a feeder. Longer feeders, such as in rural areas, may rely upon these capacitors or downstream regulators to maintain proper voltage to the meter. Modern day distribution control centers will monitor the voltage along these feeders and switch capacitor banks in and out of service to correct both voltage and power factor. Power factor correction also reduces overall losses in the distribution system which falls under some utilities’ Volt-VAR Optimization (VVO) programs for energy efficiency. In a radial system, coordination and fault location is simplified. Protection begins inside the substation with feeder circuit breakers which monitor for and isolate faults down the line. For longer feeders, distribution reclosers are installed on the line such that a fault at the end of the feeder can be isolated without causing an outage to the entire feeder. Taps off of the main feeder circuit and secondary transformers are fused to help minimize the outage impact and aid in locating a fault in the distribution system. Modern distribution control centers will monitor smart meters to determine which upstream protective element operated and dispatch personnel to the site as quickly as possible. Reclosing schemes are common on feeder circuit breakers and reclosers with an initial fast trip time

04_Santoso_Sec04_p0175-0244.indd 220

27/11/17 2:36 PM

INTERCONNECTED POWER GRIDS   221 

and reclose cycle to attempt to clear temporary faults before fuses have time to operate. This is known as a “fuse-saving” scheme. Communication equipment is typically not required for distribution relaying and inverse timeover-current relays are coordinated to allow downstream devices to operate first. Communication equipment is used for locations with automatic fault isolation and restoration as discussed previously or in some locations with large distribution generation (DG). DG—the installation of small generators on the distribution system—is becoming increasingly common in North America. Residential solar installations have a minimal impact on the distribution system infrastructure, but some larger DG installation may require special considerations. Large installations (greater than 5 MW) may be served via an “express feeder” which is a dedicated distribution feed for the DG. Industrial plants with on-site generation are beginning to take advantage of some market programs to generate on the grid when electricity prices are high and available generation on the transmission system is scarce and system protection must be able to correctly isolate faults with power flows in multiple directions. 4.7.8 Generation In North America, utility scale power generation is predominantly steam based thermal generation using coal, natural gas, or nuclear fission as heat sources. The steam is then converted into electric power using synchronous machines which convert mechanical energy to electrical energy. Coal has historically been the dominant form for power generation until recent times where natural gas has begun taking its place due to availability, economics and emissions. Renewable energy in the form of hydroelectric power has been in place in North America for decades and remains the largest source of renewable electric power in the United States. Wind and solar have been steadily growing as electricity sources over the last decade due to changes in technology and governmental subsidies. Biomass and geothermal energy sources also exist, although at a smaller penetration level (Fig. 4-19). Grid level storage also exists at the utility scale. Pumped hydroelectric storage, such as TVA’s Raccoon Mountain facility where water is pumped into a lake which can be released through hydrogeneration units at any time, is the main source of storage. Thermal, compressed air, battery, and flywheel based storage also play significant roles (Fig. 4-20). 4.7.9 Planning Distribution Planning.  Planning for the power grid occurs in three inter-related stages—distribution, transmission, and generation—with the most basic form being the distribution system by distribution planning engineers. System expansion projects are either linked to specific new customers, such as industrial plants and commercial or residential developments, or regional changes in system demand. For new customer projects, builders and developers work directly with distribution utilities to provide service to new premises. Larger customer connections are routed through distribution planning groups for study. These distribution planners maintain computer-based models of the distribution system to perform load flow studies to assess if any system upgrades are required to support the new load. These loads and system upgrades are then incorporated into 1- to 5-year planning models that also factor in year-over-year aggregate increases in load. These increases are typically determined utilizing recorded feeder-level data or aggregating meter data. Planning engineers then make system upgrade recommendations to support changes to system load and reliability criteria. Overall increases in demand may lead to the installation of new distribution substations, new or larger substation transformers, new feeders, or upgrades to existing feeders. As new feeders and substations are installed, existing feeders are split into segments with normally open switches to connect the feeders together. This allows for utilities to move load between feeders in the case of localized power outages. Reducing the overall length of feeders also has the benefit of reducing the frequency of outage occurrences due to reduced exposure to typical causes of faults and minimizing the number of outage premises (Fig. 4-21).

04_Santoso_Sec04_p0175-0244.indd 221

27/11/17 2:36 PM

222  SECTION FOUR

U.S. Electricity Generation, 2015 Geothermal, 0.40%

Solar, 0.60%

Biomass, 1.60%

Petroleum,1%

Wind, 5% Hydro, 6%

Coal, 33% Nuclear, 20%

Natural Gas, 33% FIGURE 4-19  U.S. electricity generation by energy source, U.S. Energy Information Administration, 2015. https://www.eia.gov/tools/ faqs/faq.cfm?id=427&t=3

Transmission Planning.  The next level of planning is for the transmission system. Since the transmission system is an interconnected network, in comparison to radial distribution feeders, multiple transmission owners coordinate within their respective interconnections to develop common transmission models. Common transmission models are used for long-term transmission planning, usually ranging from 1 to 10 years. Distribution planning entities will submit their forecasted load data based upon

Pumped Hydro 95%, 23.4 GW

Thermal Batterystorage - 26%, 304 MW 36%, 431 MW

Other 1.2 GW

Flywheel 3%, 40 MW

Compressed air 35%, 423 GW

FIGURE 4-20  Rate power of U.S. grid storage projects, Department of Energy, 2013. http:// energy.gov/sites/prod/files/2014/09/f18/Grid%20Energy%20Storage%20December%202013.pdf.

04_Santoso_Sec04_p0175-0244.indd 222

27/11/17 2:36 PM

INTERCONNECTED POWER GRIDS   223 

FIGURE 4-21  Ten-year compound growth rate, NERC 2014. Source: http://www.nerc.com/pa/RAPA/ra/Reliability%20Assessments%20DL/2014LTRA_ERATTA.pdf.

known connection projects and forecasted regional growth for use in these transmission models. Known generation interconnection additions and retirements are also factored into these models. Individual transmission entities and regional transmission entities will recommend projects based on established system security requirements and economic options are chosen. These projects may consist of, for example, installing larger conductor on existing transmission lines, increasing overall autotransformer capacity at a specific substation, upgrading terminal equipment on transmission elements to increase capacity of existing assets, the construction of new transmission lines and substations, or converting select transmission elements to a higher voltage level. The construction of new transmission elements is a much more involved process for transmission than distribution. At distribution levels, small utility easements along roads are usually sufficient for installation of new facilities. In contrast, transmission facilities are much larger and frequently invoke the use of eminent domain. This requires transmission owners to prove the necessity of such a project with affected parties and regional Public Utility Commissions (PUCs). Once the necessity is determined, transmission planners propose multiple routes and options to affected property owners. Ultimately, a route is decided upon and approved by the PUCs. This process becomes more challenging for projects crossing state boundaries where multiple PUCs are involved. Similarly to distribution, transmission planners also perform studies for new load serving substations and generation interconnections. These studies are run to assess if there will be system security issues which arise from the new addition and to recommend any system expansion projects or improvements if required. For generator interconnections, transmission planners may also study and recommend projects to ensure that generators will be able to operate at an economic output with constraints from the transmission system. Generation Planning.  Generation planning differs by region, with some regions operating with both energy and capacity markets and others with energy only markets.

04_Santoso_Sec04_p0175-0244.indd 223

27/11/17 2:36 PM

224  SECTION FOUR

Energy only markets (e.g. ERCOT), as the name suggests, only purchase energy and energy services needed to operate the grid. Energy and “ancillary” energy services are sold in real-time or in day-ahead markets. The economics behind these markets allow for “surge pricing” when demand is high and supply is low. The assumption is that the long-term equilibrium state of prices will adjust such they support fixed costs associated with the construction of power plants. Capacity markets differ in that they create an avenue for regional planning entities to influence new generation construction. In large, new generators must bid into an auction to win the right to install generation capacity. The winners of the auction are then able to recover costs associated with construction of a new plant equal to their bid. Requests for bids are based upon forecasted demand levels, adjustments in existing generation supply, and the need to maintain a predetermined reserve margin to ensure system security. In the United States there are organized capacity markets in four ISOs: the PJM Interconnection; the New York ISO; ISO-New England; and the Midcontinent ISO [7]. Both energy and capacity markets typically have mechanisms which reward generation in some locations instead of others. The higher-valued locations are typically closer to system load have fewer transmission constraints for new generation additions, and benefit more for ancillary energy services. Examples of ancillary energy services include frequency regulation (maintaining 60 Hz), spinning reserves (in the case of generation trips), fast-frequency response (similar to spinning reserves but addresses dynamic grid responses), and black start units (which are able to quickly and reliably start in the extreme case of a wide-area blackout). Both markets also have mechanisms which allow demand response technologies to function as viable substitutes for additional generation capacity. Other Aspects of Grid Planning.  Grid planning considers additional factors beyond those discussed above, including many aspects guided by NERC reliability standards, regional criteria, and utility’s individual criteria. Power angle and voltage stability limits are also determined by engineers and projects are recommended to mitigate the threat of system angle separation and wide-area voltage collapses. Planning to limit the available fault duty (i.e. short circuit level) for energized equipment is also a consideration. Frequency response is also monitored to ensure that generation markets allow for the operation of the power grid without leading to cascading generation or load outages due to transient frequency responses improperly damped. Frequency response is a function of net rotating inertia on the power grid at any given point in time. After a generator trip occurs, inertial energy is transferred to the grid to arrest the decaying frequency until a new steady-state equilibrium is reached. If frequency dips too low, motor loads can stall and generation protection schemes or underfrequency load shed (UFLS) can actuate. As a larger proportion of generation made up of solid-state coupled RESs such as wind and solar are connected, the monitoring of frequency response becomes increasingly important. Due to the importance of dynamic planning criteria in preventing low-risk high-impact events, model validation has become increasingly important. Measurement equipment with high sampling rates are used for this purpose. A technology known as Phasor Measurement Units (PMUs) have been deployed across North America in recent years to gather data necessary to create dynamic planning models. In the Western Interconnection, grid operators even use a 1400-MW “braking resistor” at the BPA’s Chief Joseph substation to manually induce a controlled, transient event which can be used to record the system response across a wide area [8]. Integration of renewable resources and grid storage are another concern. Due to the intermittency of renewable resources such as wind and solar, planning entities will study an interconnection’s ability to respond to events such as decreases in wind energy and forecast the amount of installed capacity which can be relied upon over peak demand conditions. Another facet of renewables is building infrastructure to support it. Large transmission investments were made decades ago to support hydroelectric power and more recently to support wind energy. These projects connect generation resources which are located far away from load centers. The Competitive Renewable Energy Zone (CREZ) facilities in the ERCOT interconnection is an example of such a project [9]. Another consideration is Sub-Synchronous Resonance (SSR). This electromechanical phenomena occurs when transmission series capacitors alter system impedance such that a resonance condition exists between the transmission system and turbine generators. When conditions are unfavorable, a turbine can oscillate at a frequency less than 60 Hz causing stress to turbine generators which can quickly lead to shaft damage. Planning engineers must study locations where SSR can potentially occur and take prevention measures.

04_Santoso_Sec04_p0175-0244.indd 224

27/11/17 2:36 PM

INTERCONNECTED POWER GRIDS   225 

A more unexpected consideration for planning Engineers in North America is driven by space weather. A Coronal Mass Ejection (CME) by the sun can create a phenomenon known as a Geo-Magnetic Disturbance (GMD) where large currents flowing through Earth’s atmosphere induce a quasi-DC current flow in the transmission system. The current can lead to excessive heating, high reactive power consumption, and harmonic injection by autotransformers due to half-cycle saturation of these non-linear inductors. The tripping of shunt capacitors combined with increased reactive power demand can lead to grid situations where a fault can lead to a wide-area outage. In March 1989, a severe geomagnetic storm actually caused a massive blackout to Hydro-Quebec’s power grid [10]. The event is of particular concern for grid operators in Canada and Northern states which are impacted the most. Planning entities will perform studies to determine the impact of GMD and develop measures to prevent any potential grid outages.

4.7.10 References [1] “Edison’s Miracle of Light,” Public Broadcasting Station (PBS); http://www.pbs.org/wgbh/americanexperience/ features/introduction/light-introduction/. [2] “Transmission Issues and Power Exchanges in Texas,” Harold L. Hughes, Public Utility Commission of Texas; http://oaktrust.library.tamu.edu/bitstream/handle/1969.1/92173/ESL-IE-92-04-09.pdf. [3] “Energy In Brief,” U.S. Energy Information Administration; http://www.eia.gov/energy_in_brief/article/ power_grid.cfm. [4] “The Public Utility Regulatory Policies Act,” The National Museum of American History; http://americanhistory.si.edu/powering/past/history4.htm. [5] “ERCOT Quick Facts, April 2013,” ERCOT ISO; http://www.ercot.com/content/news/presentations/2013/ ERCOT_Quick_Facts_Apr%202013.pdf. [6] “Transmission System Overview,” Hydro-Quebec; http://www.hydroquebec.com/transenergie/en/reseaubref.html. [7] “Marginal Success—Capacity Markets in the U.S.,” Platt’s; https://www.platts.com/IM.Platts.Content%5Cab outplatts%5Cmediacenter%5Cpdf%5Cinsightdec13_uspower.pdf. [8] “A Tutorial on Detection and Characterization of Special Behavior in Large Electric Power Systems,” Pacific Northwest National Laboratory; http://www.pnl.gov/main/publications/external/technical_reports/PNNL14655.pdf. [9] “CREZ Transmission Lines,” The Texas Tribune; https://www.texastribune.org/tribpedia/crez-transmissionlines/about/. [10] “Mach 1989, Quebec experienced a blackout caused by a solar storm,” Hydro-Quebec; http://www .hydroquebec.com/learning/notions-de-base/tempete-mars-1989.html.

4.8  INTERCONNECTED POWER GRID IN SOUTHERN AFRICAN COUNTRIES BY KOMLA A. FOLLY, KEHINDE AWODELE, LEANDRO KAPOLO, NHLANHLA MBULI, MARTIN KOPA, AND OLADIRAN OBADINA 4.8.1 Introduction Africa is blessed with energy sources (both renewable and non-renewable) vast enough to meet all energy needs. In the last few decades, progress has been made with respect to energy development in the SADC region, with several strategic plans being enacted. However, in terms of electricity access, SADC region lags behind other regional economic communities in Africa. More than two-third of the population in the SADC region do not have access to electricity. The situation in the rural areas is worst, on average about 95% of the people living in rural areas do not have access to electricity. Although SADC

04_Santoso_Sec04_p0175-0244.indd 225

27/11/17 2:36 PM

226  SECTION FOUR

member states have abundant energy resources (both renewable and non-renewable), they are unable to effectively tap into these resources. As a result, energy production and consumption throughout the region are unevenly distributed. There is an unprecedented opportunity in the SADC member states to explore aspects of smart grid concepts that could improve the reliability, security and efficiency of the electricity power network that will contribute to the region’s economic and environmental health. 4.8.2  Evolution of Southern Africa Power Pool Historic Development.  In 1980, southern African countries that had attained political independence and majority rule, otherwise known as Front-Line States, convened an “Economic Summit of the Majority-Ruled States of Southern Africa” in Lusaka, Zambia. That summit created the Southern Africa Development Coordination Conference (SADCC). Over a decade later, at the 1992 summit held in Windhoek, capital of newly independent Namibia, the SADCC Heads of State and Government signed a Treaty transforming SADCC into Southern African Development Community (SADC). The event was a culmination of a process, which had fostered the experience of working together and a sense of regional identity. Figure 4-22 shows the historic development of the power system interconnection in SADC. The idea of power trade within southern Africa stretches back as far as 1906 when the Victoria Falls Power Company was registered in Southern Rhodesia “to harness the Victoria Falls and supply electricity to the mining industry on the Witwatersrand” in South Africa. This vision could not be realized at the time because the technology to transmit power over long distances did not exist. The transmission of power from the Zambezi to the Witwatersrand had to wait until the 1970s, when Cahora Bassa was built. Down South, abundant coal resources in South Africa provided power to the mines in the Witwatersrand. The Cahora Bassa—SA Link.  In the late 1960s, the Portuguese colonial regime in Mozambique began investigations into the development of a major power complex downstream of Kariba, at

Historic DRC

1950s: DRC - Zambia

Tanzania

Malawi

Angola Zambia

1960s: Zambia – Zimbabwe

Zimbabwe Namibia Mozambique

Botswana

1975: Mozambique – South Africa Swaziland South Africa

Lesotho

FIGURE 4-22  Historic development of the Power Interconnection in SADC [1].

04_Santoso_Sec04_p0175-0244.indd 226

27/11/17 2:36 PM

INTERCONNECTED POWER GRIDS   227 

Cahora Bassa on the Zambezi. The only market large enough for the proposed 2075 MW station was South Africa. Eskom and other South African companies were heavily involved in the planning and execution of the project, which was completed over the period 1969 to 1978. By the time that the last turbines were commissioned, Mozambique was embroiled in a civil war and the 1360 km HVDC power line was put out of operation by sabotage attacks in 1981. The line was only restored to full operation 17 years later in 1998. Development of Kariba.  In the Federation of Rhodesia and Nyasaland, the Kariba hydroelectric scheme was developed to supply the Northern Rhodesian (Zambian) Copperbelt and the mines and industry in Southern Rhodesia (Zimbabwe). The Kariba scheme was the first significant grid interconnection involving the construction of the Kariba Dam and 666 MW power station complex on the south bank (1955 to 1959) and the installation of 330 kV power lines providing a high-voltage backbone to the electricity systems of the two countries sharing the Zambezi River border on which the dam was built. Following the break-up of the Federation of Rhodesia and Nyasaland in 1963 and Zambia’s independence in 1964, the 900 MW Kafue Gorge power station and the 600 MW Kariba North power stations were developed with support from the World Bank and friendly countries that supported Zambia’s desire for self-sufficiency. By the late 1970s it was the Southern Rhodesia that now depended on its northern neighbor for power imports. The Central African Power Corridor (CAPCO).  On November 25, 1963, the Government of Southern Rhodesia (today Zimbabwe) and the government of Northern Rhodesia (today Zambia) signed an agreement related to the Central African Power Corporation (CAPCO) at Salisbury (today known as Harare). The aim was to see that there is an integrated system for the control of the generation of electric power and its transmission in the territories of the said governments, which was at that time, the responsibility of the Federal Power Board. CAPCO was to continue to operate and fully develop a transmission system from Kariba connecting both the Zambian and the Zimbabwean networks consisting of 330 kV overhead lines under the joint ownership and control of the two governments. This agreement was put into operation from 1964 and it was carried on until after the independence of both countries, first the Northern Rhodesia when it became Zambia in 1964 and later the Southern Rhodesia when it became Zimbabwe in 1980. Having survived the liberation struggle that put Zambia and the Southern Rhodesia on different sides, the Central African Power Corporation (CAPCO), was dissolved in 1987 and re-constituted as the Zambezi River Authority (ZRA), which is focused on the maintenance of the Kariba Dam complex and the regulation of the shared water resources of the Zambezi. CAPCO’s generation and transmission functions in the respective countries were taken over by the national power utilities, ZESA in Zimbabwe and ZESCO in Zambia. Development of the South African Network.  Further South, in 1909 the Earl of Selborne, GovernorGeneral of South Africa, established a Power Companies Commission to enquire into the desirability of the establishment of large electric power companies in the Transvaal. The commission recommended that: “Since the supply of electric power leads to the establishment of a virtual monopoly in a commodity which has become practically a necessity of modern civilisation, it should, while being left as far as possible to private enterprise, at the same time be placed under government control and subjected to regulations which shall secure the equitable supply of power, the public safety and public interests generally” [2]. This commission further recommended that the electricity supply industry remain in private hands mainly because of the need to attract foreign investment in industry in South Africa and also because the need for state capital for growth meant that the government was simply not in a position to finance the construction of a major power company. The Transvaal Power Act of 1910 enabled the VFTPC (Victoria Falls and Transvaal Power Company Ltd) and the Rand Mines Power Supply Company to obtain licenses to construct new power systems. The Act ended the fragmented and uncontrolled development of the power transmission industry but not of the distribution industry.

04_Santoso_Sec04_p0175-0244.indd 227

27/11/17 2:36 PM

228  SECTION FOUR

The Electricity Act of 1922 concluded the work done by Dr Merz [3], repealed the Transvaal Power Act of 1910 and was the first electricity Act to apply to the Union of South Africa as a whole. The first chapter of the Act provided for the establishment of a commission (to be known as the Electricity Supply Commission). On March 6, 1923, the birth of the Electricity Supply Commission (Escom as it later became known) was announced with the following notice in the The Electricity Supply Commission was established as a body corporate in law and had responsibility inter alia for the establishment, acquisition, maintenance and working of undertakings for an efficient supply of electricity; the investigation of new or additional facilities to supply electricity within an area; and the co-ordination and co-operation of existing undertakings to stimulate the provision, whenever required, of a cheap and abundant supply of electricity. Government Gazette [3]

The 1922 Electricity Act resulted in further centralization of the electricity industry and greater government control and ownership. Private ownership was not rejected but it became subject to more control. By 1948, Escom negotiated a take-over of VFTPC for 14.5 million pounds and this provided Escom with a well-established power system able to meet the demands of the Rand undertaking. The Electricity Act of 1958 was replaced in its entirety by a new Electricity Act of 1987 where Escom was renamed Eskom. Eskom had jurisdiction over tariff levels while the Electricity Control Board had jurisdiction over tariff structure. On April 1, 1995, a new regulatory authority, the National Electricity Regulator (NER), was established (in terms of the Electricity Act of 1987 as amended) as successor to the Electricity Control Board. The main objective of the NER was to control the electricity supply industry in terms of the Act. Its main regulatory areas were pricing and tariffs, licensing, customer complaints, and dispute resolution as well as quality of service and supply. Southern African Power Pool (SAPP).  The Southern African Power Pool (SAPP) is a regional utility grouping that was created by SADC member states to harness and create a platform for the regional power utilities to trade electricity amongst themselves while also improving the security of electricity supply. The SAPP member countries and the interconnected grid are shown in Fig. 4-23.

Key Facts 12 Countries

DR Congo

292 Million people

Tanzania

Installed generation - 62 GW Operating capacity - 46 GW

Angola

Peak demand - 48 GW

Malawi Zambia

Consumption - 400 TWh Zimbabwe

Namibia

Botswana

Mozambique Swaziland

South Africa

Lesotho

FIGURE 4-23  SAPP members countries [4].

04_Santoso_Sec04_p0175-0244.indd 228

27/11/17 2:36 PM

INTERCONNECTED POWER GRIDS   229 

At present, SAPP comprises all 12 SADC member countries in the subcontinent (the other SADC members are the island states of Madagascar, Mauritius, and Seychelles). Nine of these are operating members, that is, countries that are part of the interconnected grid, which carries around 97% of the energy produced by SAPP countries. The formal process of establishing a power pool started with the establishment of the Southern African Development Coordination Conference (SADCC) in the early 1980s. The drive toward greater regional cooperation in Southern Africa received an unlikely boost from the extreme drought in 1991 to 1992, which severely affected hydropower production in the Zambezi basin, leading to economically and socially disruptive load shedding in Zimbabwe and Zambia. This is the event that led to the first tripartite agreement between Zimbabwe, Zambia, and the Democratic Republic of the Congo (DRC) to source power from DRC for supply to Zimbabwe. The drought also expedited plans for the interconnection projects to connect Zimbabwe to the South African grid and to the Cahora Bassa power station. The interconnections allowed the drought-resistant coal-fired capacity of South Africa to provide backup for this and future droughts. The dismantling of apartheid in South Africa in 1994 removed the political constraints on South Africa’s participation in regional activities. SAPP itself was the culmination of efforts at coordinated energy development undertaken as part of the political goal of regional integration of the Southern African Development Community (SADC). Given the dominant role of South Africa in the power market, it was not possible to make much progress as long as South Africa was not a member of SADC. By 1995, later at the SADC summit held in August, it then became possible to formally establish the power pool. The founding agreements of SAPP were inspired by bilateral and multilateral agreements that were already in existence. SAPP was then created through a treaty by those governments as a body, and because it deals with energy infrastructures and operations thereof, it was then placed under the SADC’s Directorate of Infrastructure and Services (DIS). The initial benefits of SAPP include increase in system reliability coordination of Northern Hydro with South African coal and the provision of a forum for regional solutions to electric energy problems (capacity building). The expected future benefits are the development and the facilitation of the regional spot energy market that will attract investment in generation.

4.8.3 Structure Makeup and Size.  By 2016, the membership of SAPP has grown to include Operating (OP) members, Non-Operating (NP) members, Observers (OB), Independent Power Producers (IPPs) and Independent Transmission Companies (ITCs) as allowed in the revised governance documents. Table 4-6 shows the list of SAPP members as of 2016. The SAPP regional grouping capacity can roughly be divided into two distinct parts, namely, the hydro-potential north and the thermal potential south as shown in Fig. 4-24. This allows the southern part of the region to take advantage of cheap hydro energy generated in the north during the rainy season, with the net flow reversed during the dry season when the thermal south would export energy to its northern neighbors. The bulk of the power is generated from coal, concentrated in South Africa’s nothern provinces, eastern Botswana, and western Zimbabwe. South Africa also has a nuclear power plant in the Western Cape and a hydropower plant in the Drakensburg Mountains. The generation in the rest of the SADC countries is predominantly hydro-based, with power stations being located in the Zambezi Basin countries of Zambia, Zimbabwe, Mozambique, Malawi; at Inga in the Democratic Republic of Congo; the Kwanza Basin in central Angola; the Kunene Basin in the northern Namibia; and also in Tanzania. The initial operational statistics gave the following generation mix for SAPP: 74.3% coal, 20.1% hydro, 4% nuclear, and 1.6% diesel and gas at the onset of SAPP (1995); and over time this has changed to accommodate new technologies in the mix. SAPP Energy Resources.  By 2016 the current generation mix in SAPP is 62.05% coal, 21.02% hydro, 4.38% diesel and gas, 4.03% wind, 3.01% nuclear, 2.94% solar PV, 1.51% open cycle gas turbine (OCGT), 0.97% concentrated solar power (CSP), 0.07% Biomass, and 0.03% landfill as

04_Santoso_Sec04_p0175-0244.indd 229

27/11/17 2:36 PM

230  SECTION FOUR

TABLE 4-6  Details of the Utilities that Form the Membership of SAPP [5] No

Full name of utility

Status

1 2 3

Botswana Power Corporation Electricidade de Mocambique Electricity Supply Corporation of Malawi Empresa Nacional de Electridade ESKOM Lesotho Electricity Corporation NAMPOWER Societe Nationale d’Electricite Swaziland Electricity Corporation Tanzania Electricity Company Ltd ZESCO Limited Zimbabwe Electricity Authority Copperbelt Hydro Power Corporation Lusemfwa Hydro Power Station Hidroelectrica de Cahora Bassa Zimbabwe Electricity Authority

OP OP NP

BPC EDM ESCOM

Botswana Mozambique Malawi

NP

ENE

Angola

OP OP OP OP OP

Eskom LEC NamPower SNEL SEC

South Africa Lesotho Namibia DRC Swaziland

NP

TANESCO

Tanzania

OP OP ITC

ZESCO ZESA CEC

Zambia Zimbabwe Zambia

IPP OB OB

LHPS HCB MOTRACO

Zambia Mozambique Mozambique

4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

Abbreviation

Country

IPP = independent power producer; ITC = Independent Transmission Company; NOP = non-operating member; OB = observer; OP = operating member.

Historic Hydro Northern Network

DRC Tanzania

Malawi

Angola Zambia

Zimbabwe Namibia Mozambique

Botswana

Swaziland

Thermal Southern Network

South Africa

Lesotho

FIGURE 4-24  Source diversity of SAPP [1].

04_Santoso_Sec04_p0175-0244.indd 230

27/11/17 2:36 PM

INTERCONNECTED POWER GRIDS   231 

SAPP installed generation capacity-2016 Landfill 0.30%

Wind 4.03%

Hydro 21.02%

Solar PY 2.94%

Solar CSP 0.97% Nuclear 3.01% OCGT 1.51% Distillate 4.38%

Coal 62.05%

Biomass 0.07%

FIGURE 4-25  Current generation mix in SAPP—2016 [6].

shown in Fig. 4-25. The coal generation is predominantly in the South (South Africa, Botswana, and Zimbabwe) and the hydropower in the North in the Zambezi Basin (Zambia, Zimbabwe, Mozambique, and Malawi), DRC and Cunene (Angola and Namibia). The nuclear power station (the only one in Africa) is in the Western Cape (in South Africa), which is far from the coal-fired power plants in the northern and eastern provinces. Most of the diesel power plants are for small isolated rural networks. Cheap electricity in the region is brought about by the relatively cheap running cost of power stations in the thermal southern region, where there is an abundance of coal and the power stations are virtually built on top of coal fields, cutting down on transportation logistics. In the hydro northern region, the two major perennial rivers systems, namely, the Zambezi and the Congo Rivers, provide abundant free water as a driver of hydro power stations. Similar to the case of the thermal South’s coal power stations, most of the north’s hydro power stations have also been built between the 1960s and 1980s, most of which have been paid off. Until about 2007–8, the region had relatively cheap resources and a large operating margin. This hampered any new investment in the generation of power plants. While the supply side remained relatively constant, the demand side continued to grow until 2007–8 when the demand started to outstrip the supply side, causing wide spread load shedding activities in the region. This, for the first time, threatened security of supply throughout the region. Current Transmission System in SAPP.  The footprint of the SAPP regional grid is presented in Fig. 4-26, with the existing and planned transmission interconnectors between the utilities of member countries shown. Although the 220 kV, 275 kV, and 330 kV transmission voltages are used in the SAPP system, the main transmission voltage is 400 kV. There has also been the use of 765 kV technology since the 1980s. The 765 kV voltage was introduced in the South African networks and a number of lines at this voltage have been in operation. These lines were built in the corridor between Gauteng and the Western Cape Provinces which are located over 1500 km apart. Gauteng Province is located very close to the generation pool in Mpumalanga, where the majority of coal reserves is located. On the other hand, the Western Cape has a significant load, which is much higher than the generation located in the area, and the only mechanism of supporting the load is to transport power generated from Mpumalanga via the lines linked to the Gauteng Province. Among the constraints of power transfer in this scenario is voltage stability, and commissioning lines at 765 kV provided the solution.

04_Santoso_Sec04_p0175-0244.indd 231

27/11/17 2:36 PM

232  SECTION FOUR

Gabon

Congo

Brazzaville

Dem Rep of Congo

Kenya Nairobi

Rwanda Burundi

Kinshasa Tanzania Dar es Salaam

Luanda Angola

Malawi Zambia

Lilongwe

Lusaka

Mozambique

Harare Namibia

Zimbabwe

Botswana Windhoek

Gaborone Pretoria Johannesburg

South Africa Cape Town

Lesotho

Maputo Mbabane Swaziland Hydro station Pumped storage scheme Thermal station Nuclear station

FIGURE 4-26  Geographic Layout of the Interconnected Grid of Southern Africa [7].

There have also been advances in the utilization of Flexible AC Transmission System (FACTS) devices and examples of these are discussed below. In the Namibian power system, SVCs are at Auas substation to solve 50 Hz parallel resonance concerns [7] and Omburu substation to deal with voltage control problems in the network [8]. In the Eskom grid, numerous SVCs are also operational. Again due to the centralized nature of generation, that is, being concentrated in the coal pool in Mpumalanga, transmission lines to load centers tend to be long, posing all sorts of power transfer challenges. The Eskom SVCs are currently in operation mainly as solutions to potential overvoltage problems following rejection of major loads in the remote load centers and to enhance transfer of power to far-flung areas. There has been some experience in the SAPP network high voltage direct current (HVDC) transmission systems. Transferring power between Mozambique and South Africa, is the Apollo Songo ±533 kV, 1920 MW HVDC link. To tap the unutilized hydropower potential in Mozambique and to provide for the increasing load in South Africa in the 1970s, Cahora Bassa dam was developed and the link was conceived to transmit power generated at this facility over a distance in excess of 1400 km to Apollo Converter Station in Pretoria, South Africa. Due to internal strife within Mozambique, the line could not be operated until 1998 when it was rehabilitated and brought back into operation. In the DRC, one of the longest HVDC transmission lines, the Inga Kolwezi ±560 kV, 560 MW HVDC scheme is in operation. It was planned for commissioning in the early 1970s, but due to wars in that country it could only be brought into operation in 1982. It transmits power over a distance of 1700 km from Inga Falls to the mining load district of Katanga [9]. The Caprivi Link, connecting Zambezi converter station in Namibia’s Caprivi region near the Zambian border and Gerus converter station in central Namibia is the only VSC-HVDC scheme in Southern Africa [10]. It connects the ac networks of Zambia, where hydro power is generated, and Namibia via a 950 km overhead line at ±350 kV dc.

04_Santoso_Sec04_p0175-0244.indd 232

27/11/17 2:36 PM

INTERCONNECTED POWER GRIDS   233 

4.8.4  Operation and Control SAPP Control Areas.  A Control Area is defined in the Southern African Power Pool (SAPP) as: “an electrical system with borders defined by points of the interconnection and capable of maintaining continuous balance between the generation under its control, the consumption of electricity in the control area and the scheduled interchanges with other control areas” [12]. As per the SAPP operating guidelines, the criteria for control area operation is that the control equipment of each control area shall be designed and operated to enable the Control Area Operator to continuously meet its System and Interconnection control obligations and measure its performance. Control Area Operators are required to offer Control Area Services and Regulating Reserves for the secure control and operation of the interconnected system. A System Operator or Electricity Supply Enterprise that does not meet the criteria for a Control Area Operator must be hosted by a Control Area [13]. The SAPP currently has three Control Areas namely [14]: •  ZESCO, which covers Zambia and the Democratic Republic of Congo; •  ZESA, which covers Zimbabwe and northern Mozambique; and, •  Eskom, which covers South Africa, Botswana, Namibia, Swaziland, Lesotho, and southern Mozambique. The Electricity Supply Enterprises within a Control Area shall contract with the Control Area Operator for all applicable Control Area Services and required Regulating Reserves. Some of the Control Area services include system control, that is, tie line control and frequency control, energy interchange transaction scheduling and accounting, and inadvertent energy management [13]. SAPP System Power Frequency Control.  Power frequency is common across interconnected systems, so all customers are affected when the frequency deviates too far from its nominal value. Frequency is one common factor in an interconnected power system and, for Southern Africa, the nominal frequency is 50 Hz. The rate of frequency change depends on the inertias of rotating machines connected to the network and the difference between supply and demand. The frequency can be varied either by changing the generator’s MW or real power output or by changing the customers’ MW demand [14]. Control area operators are required to perform primary frequency control in their own areas depending on the amount of generation that they have on line. In primary frequency control, the generators in their control areas act directly in response to the actual frequency using the decentralized frequency control approach. The three control area operators, Eskom, ZESA, and ZESCO, perform secondary control using the centralized frequency control approach where generators and loads change their output on instruction from a central coordinator located at their national control centers (NCCs). Secondary frequency control is performed either manually or via automatic generating control (AGC). AGC is a centralized control loop that coordinates the generators and its main function is to restore the system frequency to the nominal value or to the agreed dead band. The agreed dead band for frequency control in SAPP is 50 Hz ± 0.15 Hz. Operational Constraints.  The main challenges observed on the SAPP interconnected system under steady state conditions, are those of power transfer during trading transactions being limited by thermal, voltage and voltage collapse constraints. This is due to transmission capacity constraints, especially while considering loss of major interconnecting transmission lines between the various utilities. Figure 4-27 shows Eskom tie lines that interconnect with SAPP [4]. Because of the nature of the power system and various changes in generation and loads, there are always power oscillations in the system. These oscillations are mainly due to the energy transfer between the rotating masses of the machines on the power systems interconnected by weak transmission lines. When these oscillations are excited by system disturbances, they grow to amplitudes that can cause undesirable effects on the system and could damage power system plant and equipment. A number of studies that have been conducted on the SAPP interconnected system, indicated that

04_Santoso_Sec04_p0175-0244.indd 233

27/11/17 2:36 PM

234  SECTION FOUR

SNEL DRC

TANESCO Tanzania

Peak = 1,012 MW

Peak = 509 MW

260 MW

ENE Angola

400 MW

ESCOM Malawi

ZESCO Zambia

Peak = 374 MW

Peak = 227 MW

Peak = 1.294 MW

400 MW

1400 MW 500 MW

ZESA Zimbabwe

HCB/EDM Mozambique

Peak = 2,069 MW

Peak = 1100 MW

350 MW å 600 MW ä

250 MW

250 MW

BPC Botswana

150 MW

1450 MW

1450 MW

Peak = 402 MW 150 MW

Nampower Namibia

Peak = 393 MW

500 MW

2000 MW

650 MW

ESKOM South Africa

250 MW

SEB Swaziland

Peak = 34,195 MW

Peak = 172 MW

230 MW

533 kV DC

275 kV

400 kV

220 kV

330 kV

132 kV 110 kV

1450 MW

LEC Lesotho

Peak = 90 MW

FIGURE 4-27  Eskom tie lines interconnecting with SAPP [4].

there are undamped 0.3 Hz inter-area power oscillations between the predominantly hydro system in the North (Cahora Bassa, ZESA, ZESCO, and SNEL) and the predominantly thermal system in the South (BPC and Eskom). These inter-area power oscillations are a characteristic of the relatively weak link between the two “systems.” When triggered, the oscillations are poorly damped especially when the ±175 MVar static var compensator installed at Insukamini substation along this link is out of service. Other studies conducted on the Eskom system have revealed that there are also 0.6 Hz inter-area oscillations between the Mpumalanga generation pool and the generators in the Cape network within South Africa. A number of power system stabilizers on the Eskom network have been tuned to damp out the inter-area oscillations on the Eskom system. Implementation of the Wide Area Monitoring System in the South African Power System.  Power oscillations are a growing concern among power system operators worldwide. The stability of these oscillations is of vital concern, and is a prerequisite for secure system operation. Wide Area Measurement Systems (WAMS) are increasingly used to monitor and improve these oscillations that are observed on the power systems. A phasor-based WAMS is a network of fast synchronized measurements of voltage and current phasors (synchrophasors) that enables users to monitor the angular stability and dynamics of a power system. Continuous monitoring enables operators to perform

04_Santoso_Sec04_p0175-0244.indd 234

27/11/17 2:36 PM

INTERCONNECTED POWER GRIDS   235 

corrective actions promptly, before an issue escalates and presents a risk to the integrity of the system. In this way, the reliability and security of a power network is improved. Most system operators are faced with challenges in operating modern power system networks because of capacity constraints, reserve shortages, and high penetration of intermittent renewable generation. Insufficient real-time information regarding congestion on transmission corridors and stressed equipment may result in conservative load shedding to save the network from collapsing. The Eskom System Operator identified the need to enhance the situational awareness of controllers at the national control center of the power system by implementing synchronized phasor measurements technology to improve the power system reliability and operational security during normal and highly stressed operating conditions. Eskom plans to have 50 PMUs in the future. The utility company already has 15 PMUs in operation and 7 are being commissioned. Planned installation rate is eight per annum. Already, a number of system disturbances on the interconnected system have been effectively and efficiently analyzed using the information obtained from the WAMS system. Energy Trading in SAPP.  Following the creation of SAPP, a coordination center (CC) for SAPP was established in February 2000 with offices in Harare, Zimbabwe. The center would help develop a spot market for electricity in the region and manage the transformation of the power pool from a cooperative pool to a competitive one with open markets for electricity. Some on the functions of the SAPP coordination center are to: implement SAPP objectives; provide a focal point for SAPP activities; facilitate the STEM; monitor the operations of SAPP transactions between the members; and to carry out technical studies on the power pool to evaluate the impact of future projects on the operation of the pool. Bilateral and Multilateral Contracts.  The trading arrangements between members have continued to operate predominantly under the pre-SAPP–type bilateral and multilateral contracts. Therefore, SAPP continues to go through a transition and is migrating from a cooperative pool to a competitive pool. A cooperative pool uses cost based trade whereas a competitive pool uses bidbased trade. SAPP’s focus has thus been to introduce a short-term energy market (STEM) to facilitate the trading of surplus energy not committed under existing contracts. Short-Term Energy Market (STEM).  The STEM that was developed and used over the period 2001 to 2007 is a notable achievement, even though the amounts involved were always a small proportion of the region’s total annual energy consumption, which is about 300,000 GWh. STEM will be a firm energy market and the only commodity that will be traded is energy. Energy will be sold through offers and bids by daily, weekly, or monthly contracts. The offers and bids will be matched at the coordination center and the results of successful bidders will be published on the billboard. It is hoped that STEM would be a precursor to the full spot market in the region. Long term bilateral agreements between participants will be given priority for transmission on the SAPP inter-connectors. Day-Ahead Market.  STEM has been replaced by a fully competitive day-ahead market (DAM), but most of the electricity trade in the region would continue to be via long-term bilateral contracts. DAM has been in operation since 2008 and it is a step in achieving a full energy trading on a SPOT market. The DAM is also a firm energy market where hourly energy contracts for each of the 24 hours of the following day, or a future day may be traded. It also caters for block bids for periods as specified by the SAPP Market Operator (MO). New Trading Platform Development.  By 2016 SAPP was busy concluding the development of the new trading platform (the SAPP-NTP); this new trading platform is to include day-ahead market (DAM), month- and week-ahead markets, as well as intraday market (IDM) that is an hour-ahead market. It is internet based with the server accessible to configured participants in their respective utilities. Recent Load and Generation Status.  The peak demands in the various member utilities and the total demand of the SAPP network for 2014 are summarized in Table 4-7. The load in the region reached a peak of 45.6 GW, with Eskom peak load reaching 35.9 GW, that is, 78% of the total peak [5].

04_Santoso_Sec04_p0175-0244.indd 235

27/11/17 2:36 PM

236  SECTION FOUR

TABLE 4-7  Peak load in the Southern Interconnected System for year 2014 [5] Utility name

Peak demand (MW)

SNEL TANESCO ESCOM ZESCO ENE ZESA HCB/EdM BPC NamPower ESKOM SEC LEC TOTAL

1040 890 278 1681 1073 1671 1606 578 611 35896 205 129 45658

4.8.5  Renewable Energy in Southern Africa Renewable Energy Potential.  Renewable energy resources (RESs) such as hydro, solar, wind, biomass, geothermal, and tidal waves abound in different countries in Southern Africa [15]. These potentials have been exploited in varying degrees in the different countries, and RESs now account for about 23.5% of total electricity generation with hydro being the major source [16]. The use of biodiesel and bioethanol for transport is established in Malawi and Zimbabwe while other countries like Angola, Mozambique, South Africa, Swaziland, and Zambia are establishing mandates for blending biodiesel and ethanol with fossil fuels [16]. In Mauritius, electricity generation from Bagasse has been considerably exploited, increasing from 70 GWh/year in 1992 to 360 GWh/year in 2002 [17,18]. Namibia, South Africa, and Zambia have geothermal energy sites whose potentials have been investigated [17]. Tanzania also has some geothermal sites [15]. Table 4-8 shows the renewable energy capacity of the Southern African countries. TABLE 4-8  Renewable Energy Capacity in Southern African Countries, 2014 [16] Technology type Country Angola Botswana DRC Lesotho Madagascar Malawi Mauritius Mozambique Namibia Seychelles South Africa Swaziland Tanzania Zambia Zimbabwe SADC

Large-scale Mediumhydro scale hydro 861 0 2360 72 130 346 42 2182 332 0 653 55 553 2244 680 10510

04_Santoso_Sec04_p0175-0244.indd 236

16 0 50 3 34 4 17 3 0 0 30 6 14 11 6 194

Small-scale Pumped hydro storage 1 0 6 2 1 1 2 1 0 0 3 2 6 2 2 29

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0590 0 0 0 0 1590

Solar PV

Onshore wind

0 1 0 0 3 1 18 1 5 0 922 0 11 2 5 969

0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 6 570 0 0 0 0 578

Biomass/ waste Bio-gas 0 0 0 0 0 17 271 0 0 0 242 75 62 43 97 807

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 13 0 0 0 0 13

% Change 2000 to Total 2014 878 1 2416 77 169 369 351 2187 337 6 4023 138 646 2302 790 14690

225 100 1 0 55 21 32 0 35 600 60 48 8 26 6 26

27/11/17 2:36 PM

INTERCONNECTED POWER GRIDS   237 

Barriers to Widespread Use of Renewable Energy in the Region.  In spite of the benefits of renewable energy and its potentials in the region, there are some barriers to its widespread use which include: absence of legal and regulatory framework in most countries, poor institutional framework, lack of coordination and linkage in renewable energy technology (RET) programs, price distortion, high initial capital, weak dissemination strategies, and lack of expertise [17]. Some of these issues are however receiving attention and the initial capital cost of some of the technologies such as solar PV is fast reducing as indicated in [19]. In recent years, some efforts have been made to improve the deployment of renewable energy in the SADC region through the Renewable Energy Support Programme (RESP) and the SADC Renewable Energy Strategy and Action Plan (RESAP). The region has plans to develop renewable energy resources (hydro, wind, solar, etc.). The development of Renewable energy resources has been driven primarily by electricity supply shortages in several key countries, accentuated by the absence of new investments in grid electricity generating capacity [16,17]. Other incentives for the development include the changing economics of wind and solar energy, emergence of new policy concepts such as Feed-in-Tariffs (FITs), auctioning of power supply to Independent Power Producers (IPPs), net metering and Renewable Energy Certificates (RECs). To expedite renewable energy development and energy efficiency, and reduce dependence on fossil fuels, SADC member states are developing their own targets and policies. A set of target activities was established in the SADC Energy Protocol (1996). For the period 2004 to 2018, a target of 70% access to modern energy sources by rural communities was set in the 2003 SADC Regional Indicative Strategic Development Plan (RISDP) [16]. This framework forms the basis for the development and operation of the renewable energy policies within the region but does not give any specific targets for member states to aim at, at the national level [17]. Harmonization.  To promote the widespread use of renewable energy technology in the region, a harmonized subregional framework for the renewable energy sector was developed, which comprised standardization and policy alignment in order to narrow the differences in the legal and regulatory issues, standards, regulations, and codes of practice of the different countries, promote the development and widespread utilization of new and renewable energy in the region, and promote regional trade in RETs [17]. In pursuance of renewable energy development and energy efficiency initiatives in the region, the SADC energy ministers approved in principle the formation of a SADC center for Renewable Energy and Energy Efficiency (SACREEE) with Namibia as host country [16]. Renewable Energy Generation in South Africa  There have been major strides in the area of renewable energy generation, especially in relation to the Renewable Energy Independent Power Producer Procurement Program (REIPPPP) in South Africa. The country is a signatory to the United Nations Framework Convention of Climate Change (UNFCC) and is committed to sustainable development and reducing greenhouse emissions. With these ends in consideration, and with the desire to increase the dwindling reserves after 2010, the REIPPPP was initiated to source renewable energy generation from the private sector. The sourcing of generators is done in a sequence of bid windows, with Ministerial determination stipulating the type and amount of renewable generation to be procured. Bid rounds 1, 2, 3, 3.5, and 4 of the REIPPP have been conducted, but allocations for only rounds 1 to 3.5 had been concluded, with the total number projects awarded equaling 64, and having an aggregated capacity of 3193.5 MW. The breakdown of capacity and the number of projects awarded, both by fuel type, is summarized in Fig. 4-28, where it is shown that the program has aimed at procuring renewable energy from a wide range of energy sources. The majority of projects awarded by the end of 2014 were in the areas of wind and solar photovoltaic generation. 4.8.6  Future Outlook Smart Grid Initiatives in SADC Countries.  Smart grid is a broad concept that covers the entire electricity supply chain and is characterized by the use of technologies to intelligently integrate the generation, transmission, and distribution of electricity. Some of the benefits of smart grid include optimized asset utilization and efficiency, increased integration of clean and renewable energy,

04_Santoso_Sec04_p0175-0244.indd 237

27/11/17 2:36 PM

238  SECTION FOUR Capacity awarded and number of projects in REIPPPP rounds 1-3.5 by fuel type 2000

1984

35 32

1483.5

Capacity awarded (MW)

1500

25

23

20 1000 15 10

500

400 5

5 2

0

14 Wind

Solar PV

CSP

Number of projects awarded

30

Small hydro Fuel type

16

1

Biomass

0

0

Biogass

16

1

Landfill gas

0

FIGURE 4-28  Generation procured from private producers at the end of 2014 by various fuel types and amount [4].

better integration of distributed generation (DG) and micro-grid/mini-grid, improved security, enabling active participation by consumers in demand response that allows a two-way communication between the utilities and customers, grid resilience, etc. [20]. Smart grid is critical for future economic growth and social development of SADC region and will be required to meet the goals of the Africa Power Vision (APV) which according to [21] is, “A long-term plan for increasing access to reliable and affordable energy by using Africa’s diversified energy resources in a coherent and well balanced manner, consistent with Agenda 2063, Africa’s new transformation strategy. APV primarily seeks to drive and rapidly accelerate the implementation of critical energy projects in Africa under the Programme for Infrastructure Development in Africa (PIDA).” Efforts to promote the concepts of smart grid are gaining momentum in several SADC countries with South Africa taking the lead. For example, in South Africa, the National Energy Development Institute (SANEDI) in partnership with industry took the initiative to create the South African Smart Grid Initiative (SASGI) in 2012 with the objectives of developing a Smart Grid vision for South Africa, providing policy and creating a framework and a platform for smart grid deployment [22]. The South African (state-owned) power utility Eskom, and the various municipalities have started experimenting with several technologies of smart grid. Eskom is looking at rolling out advanced metering infrastructure (AMI) to improve their billing system, the revenue and the demand-side management as well as to improve the demand response and the efficiency of the system [23]. Energy Efficiency.  Energy efficiency forms a significant part of smart grid. For Africa and SADC region, smart grid will come from the application of intelligent energy technology to optimize the use of generation resources and the delivery of power. In this context, several SADC member states and utilities are taking advantage of energy efficiency as a complement to renewable energy to reduce demand and delay the requirement for new generation capacity. Some of the main energy efficiency initiatives in SADC regions are: (a) the use of compact fluorescent lamps (CFLs) or light-emitting diodes (LEDs); (b) the adoption of solar water systems and hot water load control (i.e., remotely turning off of conventional water heaters during peak periods); (c) the use of demand side management (DSM) that could be linked to demand response. All the SADC member states, except two

04_Santoso_Sec04_p0175-0244.indd 238

27/11/17 2:36 PM

INTERCONNECTED POWER GRIDS   239 

(Madagascar and Seychelles) have adopted the CFLs energy efficient approach where incandescent light bulbs are exchanged for CFLs [16]. Challenges in Implementing Smart Grid Technologies in Southern Africa.  The urgency of speeding up the implementation of smart grid technologies in Southern Africa cannot be overstated. However, there are still significant challenges that must be overcome to deploy smart grids at the scale they are needed. Some of these challenges are technical, legal and regulatory, financial, and educational [24]. For example, ageing and outdated infrastructure will require a major overhaul and augmentation to support smart grids; old legacy systems cannot always be retrofitted with new technologies and early retirement of equipment may become an issue; many regulatory policies are old and outdated to deal with the consequences of smart grids; there is a lack of human skills and the “know how” required to deal with highly sophisticated equipment; greater public engagement and participation is lacking; significant investments are required to purchase the new technologies envisioned for communicating information between the end users, electricity service providers, and to modernize the ageing transmission and distribution infrastructure. There is a need for governments to establish clear and consistent policies that will facilitate innovative investment in the smart grid [24]. Also, greater public engagement (in particular, customers and consumers) will be required. Mini-Grids/Micro-Grids Potential in SADC Region.  Currently, the electricity access rate in most SADC countries is very low, and the majority of the population does not have access to modern fuels like natural gas, kerosene, or propane. They still rely on traditional use of biomass for cooking. This is hazardous to health and inefficient [25]. The region is faced with electricity shortage due to lack of enough generation capacity and ageing transmission and distribution infrastructure. As the demand for electricity grows, the countries in the SADC region will require alternative energy solutions based on the more flexible and decentralized (and off-grid) systems such as distributed generators, microgrids and/or mini-grids rather than the legacy centralized power grid. In most SADC countries, extending the grids to rural areas is often not financially viable. With the vast range of natural and renewable resources, the opportunities of micro-grid in the SADC region are enormous. Some international and regional bodies such as the African Development Bank’s Sustainable Energy Fund for Africa (SEFA) and the Regional Electricity Regulators Association of Southern Africa (RERA) are promoting the growth of mini-grids in sub-Saharan Africa (including Southern Africa) to unlock the region’s potential for clean energy and increase energy access in isolated communities. RERA, backed by the Africa-EU Renewable Energy Cooperation Program (RECP), managed by the EU Energy Initiative Partnership Dialogue Facility (EUEI-PDF) has developed guidelines to assist countries in the SADC region to create a framework for attracting investment in mini-grids [26]. Alongside traditional and renewable generation, micro-grids or mini-grids (i.e., large scale microgrids) offer the most attractive options for increasing access to electricity for the majority in remote and low income communities. These are localized grouping of electricity generation (renewable and non-renewable), energy storage, energy control and conversion, energy monitoring and management and load management tools which can operate while connected to traditional electricity grid or function independently. For some, micro-grid holds the promise of becoming a basic building block in the implementation of the next generation smart infrastructure [27]. In the last few years, renewable energy based micro-grids have received increasing attention in SADC region due to the values they can offer. Most of the micro-grids are solar PV based, although other renewable sources such as wind, geothermal, biomass, etc. have also been used. RESs such as solar, wind, etc. have enormous potentials in contributing to Southern Africa’s electricity portfolio [28]. Tanzania is leading in the development of mini-grids, most of which are Solar PV or mini-hydro, through the innovative standardized Power Purchase agreement (PPA) using an avoided-cost feedin-tariff (FIT). The government of Tanzania established the rural Energy Agency (REA) to focus on off-grid and renewable energy projects in Tanzania. According to the 2012 Tanzania Power Master Plan, the Tanzanian government is targeting 30% connectivity by 2015. Earlier in 2016, Jumeme

04_Santoso_Sec04_p0175-0244.indd 239

27/11/17 2:36 PM

240  SECTION FOUR

Rural Power Supply Ltd. unveiled their hybrid solar/mini-grids. There are plans to develop and implement solar-hybrid mini-grids in rural growth centers in Tanzania [29]. Several mini-grid initiatives and renewable energy projects are currently underway in other SADC member states such as Zimbabwe, Zambia, Swaziland, South Africa, Seychelles, Namibia, Mozambique, Mauritius, Malawi, Madagascar, Lesotho, DRC, Botswana and Angola [30]. The developments of mini-grids in those countries are undertaken by private companies, regional concessionaries or large International non-governmental organizations (NGOs) [16]. Future Perspective on Grid Development Generation Projects.  Major projects are committed for commissioning in the SAPP network in the next 5 years. The total capacity committed is 24,062 MW. Table 4-9 breaks down the contributions by various countries to the regional aggregate. About 11,274 MW, 47% of the planned capacity, will be for projects in South Africa. In relation to the installed capacity of 61.8 GW at the end of 2014, the total commissioned capacity represents an increase in installed capacity of close to 20% that can be considered as significant. If one looks at South Africa, there are ambitious plans for generation capacity expansions beyond 2019. In fact, the Integrated Resource Plan (IRP) [26] of the country states that the total installed generation capacity is planned to be 85,241 MW by 2030, representing an additional generation capacity of about 41,704 MW to the 2014 scenario, a virtual doubling of generation capacity of the network. The breakdown of this planned capacity by fuel type is shown in Fig. 4-29. Coal generation is expected to dominate the new capacity to be created with 41,704 MW (48.19%) planned for installation. Plans for adding to the fleet of gas turbines entails installing 9170 MW (10.76%) and 1896 MW (2.22%) of OCGT and CCGT, respectively. The plan also includes a significant 11,400 MW (13.37%) of possible nuclear power plants. RESs also feature strongly in the plan, with 11,800 MW (13.84%) of wind and 600 MW of CSP. Pumped storage capacity at 2192 MW (3.42%) also features in the plans. The Future of SAPP.  SAPP is striving to have a fully integrated, robust grid with a generation mix which can handle the climatic, technical, and economic conditions of the subcontinent. There is a drive to enhance and increase rural electrification projects as well as harnessing new/renewable energy resources for the region. There is also a drive to interconnect the non-operating members into the pool to enhance trade and ensure security of supply. Figure 4-30 shows the future SAPP pool inter-connector projects.

TABLE 4-9  Planned Generation Capacity Additions in SAPP for the Period 2015 to 2019 [4]. Country Angola Botswana DRC Lesotho Malawi Mozambique Namibia South Africa Swaziland Tanzania Zambia Zimbabwe TOTAL

04_Santoso_Sec04_p0175-0244.indd 240

2015

2016

2017

2018

2019

Total (MW)

— —  430 — —  205 — 1828 —  150  135   15 2763

1280 — —  — —   40   15 3462 — — — — 4797

2271 —  150 — — — — 3032 —  500  300  120 6373

—  300 — —   74  600 — 1476 — 1140  101 1200 4891

— — — —  300 —  800 1476   12  300 1090 1260 5238

3551 300 580 0 374 845 815 11274 12 2090 1626 2595 24062

27/11/17 2:36 PM

INTERCONNECTED POWER GRIDS   241 

Total generating capacity, MW and % of total installed generation by fuel type in 2030 Total generating capacity in 2030

41074

Total generating capacity in 2030 (MW)

40000

% of total generating capacity in 2030

35000 30000

48.19%

70.00%

60.00%

50.00%

25000

40.00%

20000 30.00% 15000 11800

11400 9170

10000

10.76% 2912 1896 3.42% 2.22%

5000 0

Coal

OCGT

CCGT

20.00% 13.84%

13.37% 5499 6.45%

10.00% 890 600 0.70% 0 0.00% 1.04%

Pumped Nuclear Hydro storage Fuel type

% of Installed capacity by 2030 (%)

45000

Wind

CSP

PV

Other

0.00%

FIGURE 4-29  Status of generation capacity in South Africa in 2030 (Adapted from [26]).

2015: 2nd DRC - Zambia 220 kV

DRC

2018: Morupule - Maun 400 kV

Tanzania

2019: Zizabona - 330 kV 2019: Zambia - Tanzania-Kenya 400 kV

Angola

Malawi

2020: Phokoje - Pandamatenga 400 kV

Zambia

2020: Mozambique - Malawi 400 kV

Zimbabwe

2022: MOZISA 400 kV

Namibia Mozambique

Botswana

2022: Botswana-RSA (BOSA) 400 kV 2022: Namibia - Angola 400 kV

Swaziland South Africa

2024: Mozambique STE - HVDC/AC

Lesotho

2024: Grand Inge Transmission - HVDC/AC FIGURE 4-30  Future SAPP pool inter-connector projects [5].

04_Santoso_Sec04_p0175-0244.indd 241

27/11/17 2:36 PM

242  SECTION FOUR

4.8.7 Conclusion A lack of access to electricity is a fundamental brake on development in many parts of Africa. It is clear that economic development in SADC region cannot be achieved without affordable energy, and it cannot be sustained unless the energy is reliable and secure. It is expected that SADC state members will continue to take advantage of recent smart grid concepts and technologies to meet the growing demand for electricity and greatly improve the efficiency, reliability, and security of the electricity supply. There is a need for governments, research institutions, industry, the financial sector, and international organizations to work together to achieve the “smart grid vision” of SADC region and through that the African Power Vision. SADC governments must promote broad deployment of energy efficiency, deal effectively with carbon capture and storage and put the right policies in place.

4.8.8 References [1] SAPP, “Southern Africa Power Pool Annual Report,” SAPP Coordination Centre Office, 1998. [2] Mountain, B. “Towards a Pricing Strategy for the South African Electricity Supply and Distribution Industry, page 64,” in MSc Dissertation, University of Cape Town, Cape Town, Cape Town, 1994. [3] South Rhodesian Government, “Agreement Relating to the Central African Power Corporation,” South Rhodesian Government Gazette Extra Ordinary, Vol. 41, No 51, 25 November, Signed at Salisbury, 1963. [4] SAPP, “Southern Africa Power Pool Annual Report,” Southern Africa Power Pool Coordination Centre, 2015. [5] SAPP, “Southern Africa Power Pool Annual Report,” Southern Africa Power Pool Coordination Centre Office, 2014. [6] Vajeth, O. “Introduction to SAPP,” Southern Africa Power Pool, 2016. [7] SAPP Grid, “Southern Africa Power Pool,” 2016. [Online]. Available: http://www.sapp.co.zw/sappgrid.html. [Accessed 1 August 2016]. [8] Hammad, A., Bosshoff, S., Van der Merwe, W. C., Van Dysk, C., Otto, W., and Kleywnstuber, U. H. E., “SVC for Mitigating 50 Hz Resonance of a Long 400 kV AC Interconnection,” Singapore, 1999. [9] Halonen, M., Rudin, S., Thorvaldsson, B., Kleyenstruber, U., Boshoff, S., and Van der Merwe, C., “SVC for Resonance Control in Nampower Electrical Power System,” Vancouver, BC, 2001. [10] ABB, “Inga-Kolwezi,” 2014. [Online]. Available: http://new.abb.com/systems/hvdc/references/inga-Kolwezi. [Accessed 1 August 2016]. [11] Magg, T. G., Manchen, M., Krige, E., Kandjii, E., Paisson, R., and Wasborg, J., “Comparison between Energized System and Real-Time Simulator Testing, CIGRE 2012,” 2012. [Online]. Available: https://library.e.abb .com/public/…./Caprivi-link-HVDC-Interconnector-Comparison-between-energized-System.pdf. [Accessed 1 August 2016]. [12] SAPP, “Operating Guidelines,” Southern Africa Power Pool, 1996. [13] SAPP, “Operating Guidelines,” Southern Africa Power Pool, 2013a. [14] SAPP, “Power Quality in Electrical Power Systems,” Southern Africa Power Pool, 2013b. [15] IRENA, “Southern Africa Power Pool: Planning and Prospects for Renewable Energy,” IRENA (International Renewable Energy Agency), 2013c. [16] Stiles, G. and Murove, C., “SADC Renewable Energy and Energy Efficiency Status Report,” Renewable energy Policy Network for the 21st Century (REN21), Paris, 2015. [17] ECA, “Sustainable Energy: A Framework for New and Renewable Energy in Southern Africa ECA/SA/ TPUB/2005/6,” Economic Commission for Africa (ECA), Southern Africa Office, 2006. [18] CEB, “Integrated Electricity Plan (2003–2012),” Central Electricity Board, Mauritius, Curepipe, Mauritius, 2003. [19] IRENA, “Renewable Power generation Costs for 2014,” IRENA (International Renewable Energy Agency), 2015. [20] USDoE, “What is the Smart Grid? Office of Electricity Delivery and Energy Reliability,” 2016. [Online]. Available: http://www.smartgrid.gov/the_smart_grid/smart_grid.html. [Accessed 17 August 2016].

04_Santoso_Sec04_p0175-0244.indd 242

27/11/17 2:36 PM

INTERCONNECTED POWER GRIDS   243 

[21] NEPAD, “Africa Power Vision Concept note & Implementation Plan: From Vision to Action,” January 2015. [Online]. Available: http://www.un.org/esa/ffd/wp-content/.../NEPAD-APV-Exec-Sum-ENG.pdf. [Accessed 2 August 2016]. [22] SASGI, “South Africa Smart Grid Initiative,” 2012. [Online]. Available: http://www.sasgi.org.za/about-sasgi/. [Accessed 2 August 2016]. [23] Engineering News, “South Africa Opts for Incremental Smart-grid Migration,” 20 March 2012. [Online]. Available: http://www.engineeringnews.co.za/article/business-needs-crucial-for-eskom-smart-gridmigration. [Accessed 4 August 2016]. [24] Folly, K. A., “Challenges in Implementing Smart Grid technologies in Africa,” Africa Utility Week: Cape Town, 2013. [25] Waagsaether, K., “Overview of the Energy Picture for SADc Countries, with a Focus on Renewable Energy,” Southern African Faith Communities Development Institute(SAFCEI): http://safcei.org/product/sadcenergy-report/, 2014. [26] SADoE, “Integrated Resource Plan 2010–2030,” Department of Energy, 2010. [27] Ainah, P. K. and Folly, K. A., “Development of Micro-Grid in Sub-Saharan Africa: An Overview,” International Review of Electrical Engineering (IRE), Vol. 10, no. 6, pp. 633–645, 2015. [28] Folly, K. A., “Wind Energy Integration into the South African Grid: Prospects and Challenges,” in Wind Energy: Developments, Potential and Challenges, pp. 93–120, Nova Publisher, USA, 2016. [29] Walker, M., “HOMER Energy Asssists with Mini-Grid Solar Project in Tanzania, Homer microgrid,” 2015. [Online]. Available: http://microgridnews.com/homer-energy-assists-with-mini-grid-solar-projectin-tanzania/. [Accessed 10 July 2016]. [30] Renewable Energy World, “Microgrids Seen as Answer for 620 Million African without Power,” 2015. [Online]. Available: http://www.renewableenergyworld.com/articles/2015/11/minigrids-seen-as-answerfor-620-million-africans-without-power.html. [Accessed 3 July 2016].

04_Santoso_Sec04_p0175-0244.indd 243

27/11/17 2:36 PM

This page intentionally left blank

04_Santoso_Sec04_p0175-0244.indd 244

27/11/17 2:36 PM

5

ALTERNATING-CURRENT POWER TRANSMISSION Jose R. Daconti Senior Staff Consultant, Siemens Power Technologies International; Senior Member, IEEE; Distinguished Member, CIGRE

Allen L. Clapp President, Clapp Research Associates, P.C.; Life Member, IEEE; Senior Member, ASCE

A. M. DiGioia, Jr. President, DiGioia Gray and Associates; Fellow, ASCE; Member, IEEE

Dale A. Douglass Principal Engineer, Douglass Power Consulting, LLC; Fellow, IEEE

I. S. Grant Manager, TVA; Fellow, IEEE

Otto L. Lynch Vice President, Power Line Systems, Inc., Madison, Wisconsin

John D. Mozer Professional Engineer, Retired; Life Member and SEI Fellow, ASCE

J. R. Stewart Consultant; Fellow, IEEE

Earle C. (Rusty) Bascom III Principal Engineer, Electrical Consulting Engineers, P.C.; Senior Member, IEEE 245

05_Santoso_Sec05_p0245-0350.indd 245

27/11/17 12:18 PM

246        SECTION FIVE





5.1 OVERHEAD AC POWER TRANSMISSION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246 5.1.1 Transmission Systems. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247 5.1.2 Voltage Levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247 5.1.3 Electrical Properties of Conductors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248 5.1.4 Electrical Environmental Effects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252 5.1.5 Line Insulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263 5.1.6 Line and Structure Location. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269 5.1.7 Mechanical Design of Overhead Spans. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274 5.1.8 Mechanical Interaction of Suspension Spans. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289 5.1.9 Supporting Structures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296 5.1.10 Line Accessories (Lines under EHV). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307 5.1.11 Foundations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310 5.1.12 Overhead Line Uprating and Upgrading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321 5.1.13 References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323 5.2 UNDERGROUND POWER TRANSMISSION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326 5.2.1 Cable Applications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326 5.2.2 Cable System Considerations and Types. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327 5.2.3 Extruded-Dielectric Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328 5.2.4 High-Pressure Fluid-Filled Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329 5.2.5 Self-Contained Liquid-Filled (SCLF) Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331 5.2.6 Direct Current Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331 5.2.7 Other Special Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331 5.2.8 Cable Capacity Ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332 5.2.9 Cable Uprating and Dynamic Ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333 5.2.10 Soil Thermal Properties and Controlled Backfill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334 5.2.11 Electrical Characteristics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337 5.2.12 Magnetic Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338 5.2.13 Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339 5.2.14 Special Considerations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340 5.2.15 Accessories. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342 5.2.16 Manufacturing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344 5.2.17 Operation and Maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345 5.2.18 Fault Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346 5.2.19 Corrosion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347 5.2.20 Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347 5.2.21 Future Developments. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348 5.2.22 References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348

5.1  OVERHEAD AC POWER TRANSMISSION BY JOSE R. DACONTI, ALLEN L. CLAPP, A. M. DIGIOIA, JR., DALE A. DOUGLASS, I. S. GRANT, OTTO L. LYNCH, JOHN D. MOZER, AND J. R. STEWART Overhead transmission of electric power remains one of the most important elements of today’s electric power system. Transmission systems deliver power from generating plants to industrial sites and to substations from which distribution systems supply residential and commercial service. Those transmission systems also interconnect electric utilities, permitting power exchange when it is of economic advantage and to assist one another when generating plants are out of service because of damage or routine repairs. Total investment in transmission and substations is approximately 10% of the investment in generation. Since the beginning of the electrical industry, research has been directed toward higher and higher voltages for transmission. As systems have grown, higher-voltage systems have rarely displaced existing systems, but have instead overlayed them. Economics have typically dictated that an overlay voltage should be between 2 and 3 times the voltage of the system it is reinforcing. Thus, it is common to see,

05_Santoso_Sec05_p0245-0350.indd 246

27/11/17 12:18 PM

ALTERNATING-CURRENT POWER TRANSMISSION        247 

for example, one system using lines rated 115, 230, and 500 kilovolts (kV). The highest ac voltage in commercial use is 765 kV although 1100 kV lines have seen limited use in Japan and Russia. Research and test lines have explored voltages as high as 1500 kV, but it is unlikely that, in the foreseeable future, use will be made of voltages higher than those already in service. This plateau in growth is due to a corresponding plateau in the size of generators and power plants, more homogeneity in the geographic pattern of power plants and loads, and adverse public reaction to overhead lines. Recognizing this plateau, some focus has been placed on making intermediate voltage lines more compact. Important advances in design of transmission structures as well as in the components used in line construction, particularly insulators, were made during the mid-1980s to mid-1990s. Current research promises some further improvements in lines of existing voltage including uprating and new designs for HVDC. 5.1.1  Transmission Systems The fundamental purpose of the electric utility transmission system is to transmit power from generating units to the distribution system that ultimately supplies the loads. This objective is served by transmission lines that connect the generators into the transmission network, interconnect various areas of the transmission network, interconnect one electric utility with another, or deliver the electrical power from various areas within the transmission network to the distribution substations. Transmission system design is the selection of the necessary lines and equipment which will deliver the required power and quality of service for the lowest overall average cost over the service life. The system must also be capable of expansion with minimum changes to existing facilities. Electrical design of ac systems involves (1) power flow requirements; (2) system stability and dynamic performance; (3) selection of voltage level; (4) voltage and reactive power flow control; (5) conductor selection; (6) losses; (7) corona-related performance (radio, audible, and television noise); (8) electromagnetic field effects; (9) insulation and overvoltage design; (10) switching arrangements; (11) circuit-breaker duties; and (12) protective relaying. Mechanical design includes (1) sag and tension calculations; (2) conductor composition; (3) conductor spacing (minimum spacing to be determined under electrical design); (4) types of insulators; and (5) selection of conductor hardware. Structural design includes (1) selection of the type of structures to be used, (2) mechanical loading calculations, (3) foundations, and (4) guys and anchors. Miscellaneous features of transmission-line design are (1) line location, (2) acquisition of rightof-way, (3) profiling, (4) locating structures, (5) inductive coordination (considers line location and electrical calculations), (6) means of communication, and (7) seismic factors. 5.1.2  Voltage Levels Standard transmission voltages are established in the United States by the American National Standards Institute (ANSI). There is no clear delineation between distribution, subtransmission, and transmission voltage levels. In some systems, 69 kV may be a transmission voltage while in other systems it is classified as distribution, depending on function. Table 5-1 shows the standard voltages listed in ANSI Standards C84 and C92.2, all of which are in use at present. The nominal system voltages of 345, 500, and 765 kV from Table 5-1 are classified as extrahigh voltages (EHV). They are used extensively in the United States and in certain other parts of the world. In addition, 400-kV EHV transmission is used, principally in Europe. EHV is used for the transmission of large blocks of power and for longer distances than would be economically feasible at the lower voltages. EHV may be used also for interconnections between systems or superimposed on large power-system networks to transfer large blocks of power from one area to another. One voltage level above 800 kV, namely, 1100 kV nominal (1200 kV maximum), is presently standardized. This level is not widely used, although sufficient research and development have been completed to prove technical practicability.1–3

05_Santoso_Sec05_p0245-0350.indd 247

27/11/17 12:18 PM

248        SECTION FIVE

TABLE 5-1  Standard System Voltages, kV Rating

Rating

Nominal

Maximum

Nominal

34.5 46 69 115 138 161

36.5 48.3 72.5 121 145 169

230 345 500 765 1100

Maximum 242 362 550 800 1200

5.1.3  Electrical Properties of Conductors Positive-Sequence Resistance and Reactances.  The conductors most commonly used for transmission lines have been aluminum conductor steel-reinforced (ACSR), all-aluminum conductor (AAC), all-aluminum alloy conductor (AAAC), and aluminum conductor alloy-reinforced (ACAR), but conductors able to operate at higher temperatures such as ACSS are available for a modest price premium and are becoming more common. Research is progressing on new high-temperature ceramic-cored conductors. Tables of the electrical characteristics of the most commonly used ACSR conductors are in Sec. 3. Characteristics of other conductors can be found in conductor handbooks or manufacturers’ literature and websites. The per mile resistance, inductive reactance, and capacitive reactance can be determined from the data in the tables of Sec. 3 and the spacing factors Xd and X′d . The positive-sequence resistance is listed as the 60-Hz value at 50°C. The expression for inductive reactance per mile is

X L = 0.004657f log

D (5-1) GMR

where D = equivalent spacing in feet, GMR = geometric mean radius in feet as given in the conductor tables of Sec. 3, and f = frequency in hertz. GMR for ACSR conductor is given at 60 Hz. However, 60-Hz values of GMR can be used at other commercial power-system frequencies with small error. XL also can be expressed as

X L = X a + X d = 0.004657f log

1 + 0.004657f log D (5-2) GMR

When the spacing is 1 ft, Xd becomes zero. Thus Xd is frequently called the “one-foot” inductive reactance. The expression for capacitive shunt reactance per mile is:

Xc =

4.099 × 106 D log (5-3) f rc

where rc is the conductor radius in feet. Xc can also be expres­­­­­sed as

X c = X a′ + X d′

where

05_Santoso_Sec05_p0245-0350.indd 248

X a′ =

4.099 × 106 1 log (5-4) f rc

27/11/17 12:18 PM

ALTERNATING-CURRENT POWER TRANSMISSION        249 

and X d′ =



4.099 × 106 log D (5-5) f

Bundle conductors consist of two or more conductors per phase mechanically and electrically connected and supported by an insulator assembly. The positive-sequence resistance is, to a first approximation, the 60-Hz, 50°C values in Sec. 3 tables divided by the number of conductors per phase. General formulas for the inductance and capacitance of bundle conductors are

Lφ =

24(S gm )n  r 1  0.74113 log c + 0.74113 log n GMR d( M gm )n–1   

mH/mi (5-6)

From Eq. (5-6) inductive reactance is found to be

XL =

24(S gm )n  1   K + 0.004657f log n d ( M gm )n–1   

Ω /mi at 60 Hz (5-7)

0.03883n log[24(S gm )n /d(M gm )n–1 ]

µF/mi (5-8)

and the capacitance is

Cφ =

In the above, n = number of conductors per phase (bundle); d = diameter of conductor in inches; Sgm = geometric mean distance between conductors of different phases in feet, found by taking the mean distance from all conductors of one phase to all conductors of the other phases; Mgm = geometric mean distance in feet between the n conductors of one phase; K = internal conductor reactance defined as

K = 0.004657f log

rc

GMR

Ω /mi (5-9)

The inductive series reactance and capacitive shunt reactances for bundled conductors can also Bundle Xaeq X′aeq be found by using the Xa + Xd method, by determining the equivalent Xa and X′a of the conduc1 (X – X ) 1 (X′ – X′) 2 conductors ⁄2 a ⁄ 2 s a s  tor bundle. The expressions for the equivalents 1 1 3 conductors ⁄3(Xa – 2Xs) ⁄3(X′a – 2X′s ) are given in Table 5-2. These expressions are for 1 (X – 3X ) 1 (X′ – 3X′) 4 conductors ⁄4 a ⁄ 4 s a s  three-conductor bundles on equilateral spacing and for four-conductor bundles on square spacing. The subscript s indicates the spacing of the conductors within the bundle in feet. Values for Xa and X′a are in the conductor tables in Sec. 3. Values for Xs and X′s are from the same formulas as Xd and X′d. TABLE 5-2  Equivalent Reactances



X s = 0.004657f log s (5-10)



X s′ =

4.099 × 108 log s (5-11) f

where s is in feet and f is frequency in hertz. Equation (5-11) is correct for a ratio of spacing s to conductor radius r of 5 or more.

05_Santoso_Sec05_p0245-0350.indd 249

27/11/17 12:18 PM

250        SECTION FIVE

TABLE 5-3  Typical Transmission-Line Impedance* Voltage, kV 69 115 230 345 500 765

R1 0.280 0.119 0.100 0.060 0.028 0.019

XL1 0.709 0.723 0.777 0.590 0.543 0.548

XC1 0.166 0.169 0.182 0.138 0.127 0.128

R0 0.687 0.625 0.591 0.551 0.463 0.428

XL0 2.74 2.45 2.26 1.99 1.90 1.77

XC0 0.315 0.265 0.275 0.208 0.198 0.185

X0/X1 3.86 3.39 2.91 3.37 3.50 3.23

*R , X , R , X are in ohms per mile; X , X are in megohm-miles. 1 L1 0 L0 C0 C1 Note:  1 mi = 1.61 km.

The value of Xaeq is added to Xd (the spacing factor, which is determined for the mean spacing between the conductors of the different phases). X′aeq and X′d are handled in a like manner. Zero-Sequence Impedances.  When earth-return currents due to faults or other causes are to be calculated, negative- and zero-sequence impedances must be determined in addition to positivesequence quantities. Negative-sequence quantities are the same as the positive-sequence values for transmission lines. Precise determination of the zero-sequence quantities is difficult because of the variability of the earth-return path. Calculation of zero-sequence impedance parameters is far more complex than for positivesequence quantities, being a function of conductor size, spacing, relative position of conductors with respect to overhead ground wires, electrical characteristics of overhead ground wires, and the resistivity of the earth-return circuit. Reference 4 includes a detailed analysis of zero-sequence parameters, which are normally calculated using digital computer programs. Table 5-3 lists representative values of positive- and zero-sequence impedances for different voltage transmission lines with shield wires. Zero-sequence reactance increases for unshielded lines. Nominal-p Representation.  Transmission lines can be represented by nominal p as in Fig. 5-1, in which half the capacitive susceptance, in siemens, is connected at each end of the line. The nominal-p representation is used in digital computer studies involving lines of moderate length (usually under 100 mi). Nominal-T Representation.  The nominal-T representation of a transmission line is shown in Fig. 5-2. The total line susceptance b, in siemens, is concentrated at A, the midpoint of the line. ABCD Parameters.  These line parameters (general circuit constants) are defined by the equations

Es = AEr − BIr (5-12)



I s = CEr − DIr (5-13)

For a short line (under 100 mi) if Z1 = R + jwL and Z2 = 2/jb (refer to the nominal-p line of Fig. 5-1) Z + Z2 (5-14) A=D= 1 Z2

FIGURE 5-1  Nominal-p line.

05_Santoso_Sec05_p0245-0350.indd 250

FIGURE 5-2  Nominal-T line.

27/11/17 12:18 PM

ALTERNATING-CURRENT POWER TRANSMISSION        251 



B = Z1l (5-15)



 Z + 2Z  C =  1 2 2  /l (5-16)  Z2  For longer lines where l is the length of the line



A = D = cosh(γ l ) (5-17)



B = Zc sinh(γ l ) (5-18)



C=

sinh(γ l ) (5-19) Zc

where

γ = ( R + jω L )( jω C ) (5-20)

and

Zc =

R + jω L (5-21) jω C

and R, L, and C are line resistance, inductance, and capacitance per mile. Formulas for ABCD constants for various circuit configurations are given in Table 5-4.

TABLE 5-4  Formulas for Generalized Circuit Constants Equivalent constants At

Bt

CE

Dt

1

Series impedance

1

Z

O

1

2

Shunt admittance

1

O

Y

1

3

Uniform line

A

B

C

A

4

Two uniform lines

A1A2 + C1B2

B1A2 + A1B2

A1C2 + A2C1

A1A2 + B1C2

5

Two nonuniform lines or networks General network and sending transformer impedance General network and receiving transformer impedance

A1A2 + C1B2

B1A2 + D1B2

A1C2 + D2C1

D1D2 + B1C2

A + CZTS

B + DZTS

C

D

A

B + AZTR

C

D + CZTR

No.

6 7

8

Type of network

Two networks in parallel

A1B2 + A2 B1 B1 + B2

C1 + C 2

B1B2 B1 + B2

+

( A1 − A2 )(D2 − D1 ) D1 B2 + D2 B1 B1 + B2 B1 + B2

Note:  All constants in this table are complex quantities; A = a1 + ja2 and D = d1 + jd2 are numerical values, B = b1 + jb2 = ohms, and C = c1 + jc2 = siemens. As a check on calculations of ABCD constants, note that AD - BC = 1.

05_Santoso_Sec05_p0245-0350.indd 251

27/11/17 12:18 PM

252        SECTION FIVE

TABLE 5-5  SIL of Typical Transmission Lines System kV

Zs, W

SIL, MW

Overhead lines 230 345 500 765 1200

367 300 285 280 250

144 400 880 2090 5760

Cables 230 345

38 25

1390 4760

Surge Impedance Loading.  The surge impedance of a transmission line is the characteristic impedance with resistance set equal to zero (i.e., R is assumed small compared to jwL of Eq. 5-21).          Z s =

L (5-22) C

The power which flows in a lossless transmission line terminated in a resistive load equal to the line’s surge impedance is denoted as the surge impedance loading (SIL) of the line. Under these conditions, the receiving end voltage ER equals the sending end voltage ES in the magnitude, but lags ES by an angle d corresponding to the travel time of the line. For a three-phase line         SIL =

( EL –L )2 (5-23) ZS

Since Zs has no reactive component, there is no reactive power in the line, QS = QR = 0. This indicates that for SIL the reactive losses in the line inductance are exactly offset by reactive power supplied by the shunt capacitance or I2wL = E2wC. SIL is a useful measure of transmission-line capability even for practical lines with resistance, as it indicates a loading where the line’s reactive requirements are small. For power transfer significantly above SIL, shunt capacitors may be needed to minimize voltage FIGURE 5-3  Overhead line loading in terms of SIL. drop along the line, while for transfer significantly below SIL, shunt reactors may be needed. SILs for typical transmission lines are given in Table 5-5. Cables normally have current ratings (ampacity) considerably below SIL, while overhead line current ratings may be either greater than or less than SIL. Figure 5-3 presents illustrative overhead line loadability as a function of line length and SIL. Although Fig. 5-3 is illustrative only of loading limits, it is a useful estimating tool. Long lines tend to be stability-limited and have a lower loading limit than shorter lines, which tend to be voltage-drop- or conductor-ampacity-limited. 5.1.4  Electrical Environmental Effects Corona and Field Effects.  There are two categories of electrical environmental effects of power transmission lines. Corona effects are those caused by electrical stresses at the conductor surface which result in air ionization (“corona”) and include radio, television, and audible noise. Field effects are those caused by induction to objects in proximity to the line. While the generic term is electromagnetic effects, within the electric power industry the fields are divided into two types: electric-field effects and magnetic-field effects. Electric fields, related to the voltage of the line, are the primary cause of induction to vehicles, buildings, and objects of comparable size. Magnetic fields, related to the currents in the line, are the primary cause of induction to long objects, such as fences and pipelines. Assessment Criteria.  In an electrical environmental analysis, it is important to determine the proper criteria for assessment of the impact. For example, the audible noise criterion in a commercial or industrial area would be inappropriate in a quiet residential neighborhood.5 Likewise, ground-level electric field criteria on a parking lot would be different from that in terrain inaccessible by motor vehicles. For audible noise, the only concern is annoyance, but for electric fields, safety, annoyance, and perception levels all may have to be considered.

05_Santoso_Sec05_p0245-0350.indd 252

27/11/17 12:19 PM

ALTERNATING-CURRENT POWER TRANSMISSION        253 

FIGURE 5-4  Factors affecting transmission line EMC for shock effects.

Probability of exposure is also an important criterion. The impact of radio noise in arid locations is different from that in places with considerable rainfall. Since different people have different perception and annoyance thresholds, statistical evaluations are necessary, recognizing that some percentage of people will find a generally accepted noise level annoying. Because of the combination of worst-case events which are normally assumed in an electrical environmental analysis, the overall probability of annoyance is usually considerably smaller than initially presumed. A predictive model is necessary to calculate the expected effect. Depending on the specific effect, it may be an empirical formula or may be quite sophisticated. However, it is only by calculating the effect and comparing it with specified criteria that the overall impact can be assessed. This is illustrated by Fig. 5-4,6 which is a flowchart of the analysis procedure for an example case of electricfield-induced shock. Audible Noise.  Corona-produced audible noise during foul weather, particularly during or following rain, can be an important design parameter for high-voltage ac transmission lines. Audible noise has two components, a random noise component and a low-frequency hum, each produced by different physical mechanisms. While the hum component is closely correlated with corona loss on the line, the random noise is not. Of these two, the most frequent cause of annoyance is the random noise, and it is this which is calculated and compared with acceptance criteria. Analyses to predict levels of audible noise consider A-weighted sound level [dB(A)] during rain, including L50, which is the level exceeded 50% of the time during rain (considering all rain storms over a period of time, usually 1 year). L5, which is the level exceeded 5% of the time during rain.

05_Santoso_Sec05_p0245-0350.indd 253

27/11/17 12:19 PM

254        SECTION FIVE

Average, which is the average level of noise expected during rain. (This is usually close to the L50 value and is sometimes called “wet-conductor” noise.) Heavy rain, which is the level expected during heavy rain. (This usually is representative of laboratory artificial rain tests but is assumed representative of the L5 level.) Reference 7 compares audible noise formulas, which have been developed throughout the world. One formula for both L5 and L50 values is given by g = Average-maximum surface gradient       of conductor or conductor bundle,       kV/cm

AN = A-weighted sound level of                                              the noise produced by one                                              phase of the line, dB(A)

n = Number of subconductors in a phase       (or pole) bundle

AN0 = A reference A-weighted                                            sound level, dB(A)

d = Diameter of subconductors, cm

K1, K2, K3, K4 = Constant coefficients

D = Distance from line to point at which      noise level is to be calculated, m sound level of the noise SL = A-weighted  produced by the line, dB(A)    Np = number of phases

Application = All line geometries Noise measure = L5 rain and L50 rain    Range of validity = 230–1500 kV, 1 ≤ n ≤ 16, 2≤d≤6

For each phase, the L5 noise level is given by AN5 =



−665 + 20 log n + 44 log d − 10 log D − 0.02 D + AN0 + K1 + K 2 (5-24) g

with AN0 = 75.2 for n < 3

= 67.9 for n ≥ 3

K1 = 7.5 for n = 1

= 2.6 for n = 2

= 0

for n ≥ 3

K2 = 0 for n < 3 d for n ≥ 3 = 22.9(n − 1) B where B is the bundle diameter, cm. The L50 level for each phase is obtained from

AN50 = AN5 − ∆A (5-25)

where

∆A = 14.2

gc − 8.2 for n < 3 g



= 14.2

gc d  − 10.4 − 8 (n − 1)  for n > 3 g B 

05_Santoso_Sec05_p0245-0350.indd 254

27/11/17 12:19 PM

ALTERNATING-CURRENT POWER TRANSMISSION        255 

FIGURE 5-5  Audible noise profile at ground level for a transmission line.

and

g c = 24.4(d −0.24 ) for n ≤ 8



= 24.4(d −0.24 ) − 0.25(n − 8) for n > 8



Np

SL = 10 log

∑10

AN i /10

(5-26)

i =1

Figure 5-5 illustrates a typical presentation of audible noise calculations. The profile, in this case for a representative 500-kV line and wet conductors, quantifies the level of noise in dB(A) greater than 0.002 mbar as a function of distance from the centerline of the structure. From this method of presentation, analysis of maximum levels as well as effect on width of right-of-way can be analyzed. Similarly, design variables such as conductor size, spacing, and configuration; height of conductors; and weather variations can be considered. Figure 5-63,8 quantifies experience with transmission-line audible noise complaints. These occur mostly during wet-conductor conditions and low ambient noise, such as after rain or during fog. During heavy-rain conditions, the noise of the rain masks the line noise. Other factors during heavy rain, such as closed windows, combine to make this condition less likely to result in complaints even though the noise is louder. In the absence of FIGURE 5-6  Audible noise compliance guidelines.

05_Santoso_Sec05_p0245-0350.indd 255

27/11/17 12:19 PM

256        SECTION FIVE

local noise regulations, comparison of calculated L50 or average audible noise with Fig. 5-6 gives a reasonable preliminary evaluation of the possibility of audible noise annoyance. When measurements are to be taken to confirm ambient noise or line noise, care must be taken to follow proper procedures.9 Radio and Television Noise.  Electromagnetic interference from overhead power lines is caused by two phenomena: complete electrical discharges across small gaps (microsparks) and partial electrical discharges (corona). Gap-type sources occur at insulators, line hardware, and defective equipment and are a construction and maintenance problem rather than a design consideration. They are responsible for about 90% of radio noise complaints and can be located and eliminated as they occur.10 Conductor and hardware corona is considered during the design phase. On a properly designed line, conductor corona noise rarely results in television interference complaints except perhaps in weak signal fringe areas. The specification of “corona-free” hardware is important to eliminate electromagnetic interference from conductor support hardware, and is especially important as lines are constructed with closer spacings and resulting higher electric fields on the hardware. Conductor clamps and other fittings, which were formerly acceptable at traditional phase spacings, may not be adequate for compact lines. For ac lines, radio and television noise are functions of the weather. Fair-weather noise may be significant and varies with the season, wind velocity, and barometric pressure. Two families of computation methods are available for radio noise: those based on conductor laboratory tests and analytical propagation theory (semianalytical methods) and those based on an empirical formula using data from long-term tests on operating lines (comparative methods). The comparison method11 is useful for conventional geometries and designs:

RI = −150.4 + 120 log g + 40 log d + 20 log

h + 10[1 − (log 10f )2 ] (5-27) D2

where g = average maximum surface gradient of conductor or conductor-bundle, kV peak/cm d = subconductor diameter, mm h = height of phase, m D = radial distance to observer, m f = frequency, MHz RI = fair-weather radio noise, dB RI is calculated for each phase and the maximum value is used as the RI of the line. Average foulweather RI levels are assumed to be 17 dB above fair weather, and heavy-rain RI 24 dB above fair weather. Other methods are described in Ref. 3. As with audible noise, the most useful data presentation is the level of radio noise as a function of distance from the centerline of the structure. An illustrative example for a specific 500-kV line is shown in Fig. 5-7. There are no generally accepted RI limits in the United States, because of the impossibility of setting universal criteria for all land use and local conditions.12 A Canadian standard exists for RI limits and is a useful guide.13 Two quantities are required to set criteria for evaluation of radio noise. These are the level of signal strength in the line vicinity and an appropriate signal/noise ratio. This latter ratio is typically assumed to be 24 to 26 dB at the edge of the right-of-way. Primary signal strengths may be 54 dB above 1 mV (0.5 mV/m) in rural areas to 88 dB or more in cities. Prediction of television noise is not as advanced as that of radio noise, primarily because of the limited number of actual cases of conductor corona television interference. As with radio noise, most television interference complaints result from microsparks which can be located and eliminated as they occur. These are not generally a design consideration. In the few cases where corona-caused television noise has occurred in foul weather, it has often been possible to remedy the situation by an improvement in the receiving antennas rather than changes to the transmission-line design. References 3 and 14 contain some work on prediction and evaluation of TVI.

05_Santoso_Sec05_p0245-0350.indd 256

27/11/17 12:19 PM

ALTERNATING-CURRENT POWER TRANSMISSION        257 

FIGURE 5-7  Radio noise profile at ground level for transmission line.

Gaseous Oxidants.  Gaseous oxidants can be produced by corona activity in air and, in sufficient concentrations, may produce adverse effects on flora and fauna. The most important oxidants are ozone (O3) and oxides of nitrogen (mainly NO and NO2), where ozone is the major constituent. Federal standards limit photochemical oxidants to 0.12 part per million for a maximum of 1-h concentration not to be exceeded more than once per year. Some states have more restrictive regulation; for example, the Minnesota Pollution Control Agency standards are for 0.07 ppm by volume (130 µg/m3). Ozone can be detected by smell at minimum concentrations of 0.01 to 0.15 ppm. Analytic studies and field measurements have been conducted on both operating and test lines.15–22 The highest calculated value for 1-mi/h wind parallel to the line was 0.019 ppm maximum groundlevel concentration. Measurements have indicated that transmission-line contribution to gaseous oxidants cannot be detected within statistical limits of significance and accuracy. With instrumentation capable of detecting 0.002 ppm, the transmission-line contribution was indistinguishable from ambient. Thus, gaseous oxidants are not a concern with respect to electric power transmission lines. Ground-Level Electric Fields.  Ground-level electric field effects of overhead power transmission lines relate to the possibility of exposure to electric discharges from objects in the field of the line. These may be steady currents or spark discharges. Other areas which have received attention are the possibility of fuel ignition and interference with wearers of prosthetic devices (e.g., pacemakers).23 It is appropriate to consider unlikely conditions when setting and applying electric-field safety criteria because of possible consequences; thus statistical considerations are necessary. Annoyance criteria need not be as stringent and mitigating factors can be considered. Electric-Field Calculations.  The resultant electric fields in proximity to a transmission line are the superposition of the fields due to the three-phase conductors. The conducting earth must be represented by image charges located below the conductors at a depth equal to the conductor height. For example, consider the three-conductor line of Fig. 5-8. The effect of earth can be represented by replacing the earth with image conductors as shown in Fig. 5-8. At 60 Hz and for typical values

05_Santoso_Sec05_p0245-0350.indd 257

27/11/17 12:19 PM

258        SECTION FIVE

of earth resistivity, the relaxation time of the earth (the time required for charges to redistribute themselves due to an externally applied field) is so small compared to the power frequency wave that for each instant of time the charge is distributed on the earth’s surface as in the static condition (i.e., the earth appears to be a perfect conductor). The electric fields surrounding the transmission line are a function of the instantaneous charges on the line. Usually, however, the charges are not known, but the voltages to ground of the different conductors are. Since the charge Q on each conductor is a function of the voltage on all conductors, an n × n capacitance matrix results, where n is the number of conductors, according to the formula [Q] = [C][V] (5-28) which, for a three-conductor configuration (ignoring shield wires), is

FIGURE 5-8  Representation of conducting earth: (a) earth; (b) image.



Cnm =

Qn Vm



Q1 = C11 V1 + C12V2 + C13V3 (5-29)



Q2 = C21 V1 + C22V2 + C23V3 (5-30)



Q3 = C31 V1 + C32V2 + C33V3 (5-31)

The off-diagonal (mutual) capacitance terms significantly affect the final results. The individual terms of the capacitance matrix are computed by all other voltages = 0 (5-32)

where n and m are conductors. The potential coefficient matrix is, however, more amenable to computation and is defined by [V] = [P][Q] (5-33) whose individual terms are given by

Pnm =

Vn Qm

all other charges = 0 (5-34)

This is an open-circuit matrix where the individual terms can be computed by assuming a charge at one conductor and calculating the voltage at the prescribed location assuming all the other conductors nonexistent (open-circuited). For a single conductor of radius r and a height h above the earth, the self-potential coefficient is given by

05_Santoso_Sec05_p0245-0350.indd 258

Pnm =

1 2h ln (5-35) 2πε o r

27/11/17 12:19 PM

ALTERNATING-CURRENT POWER TRANSMISSION        259 

For two conductors n and m where dnm is the distance between them, and dnm′ is the distance between conductor n and the image of conductor m, the mutual potential coefficient is given by

Pnm =

d 1 ln nm′ (5-36) 2πεo dnm

This potential coefficient matrix can be calculated and inverted to yield the capacitance matrix: [C] = [P]–1

(5-37)

This capacitance matrix allows the calculation of the charges on the individual conductors for the given initial voltage distribution according to Eqs. (5-29) through (5-31). Once these charges are obtained, the desired electric fields can be FIGURE 5-9  Single conductor. determined. For the single conductor and observer location of Fig. 5-9, the ground-level electric field is determined from E=



Ql (5-38) 2πεo r

The distance from the conductor to the observer is r = h 2 + L2 (5-39)

Thus

E=

Ql 2πεo h 2 + L2

(5-40)

Q must be determined from [Q] = [C][V]. For a single conductor this equation reduces to



Ql = P −1V =

1 V (5-41) 1 ln (2h/r ) (2π ε o )

For a multiconductor configuration, Q would come from the full matrix calculation. E is radially directed from the line charge. The vertical component is

E cos θ =

Ql 2π ε o

h2

h + L2

h2

+ L2

=

Ql

2π ε o

h2

h (5-42) + L2

The vertical component of the electric field at ground level because of the image is equal to the field from the conductor, since the image is the geometric mirror image and has the opposite sign charge. Thus, the total ground-level field is given by

05_Santoso_Sec05_p0245-0350.indd 259

E=

Ql h (5-43) π ε o h 2 + L2

27/11/17 12:19 PM

260        SECTION FIVE

At ground level, the horizontal components of the electric fields of the conductor and its image cancel and the resultant field is purely vertical. For a three-phase line, the fields of the three conductors and their images are computed separately and added. For fields extremely close to the line conductors, care must be taken to represent the local effects properly. For example, the surface field around the conductor is not uniform. For a bundled conductor, it is more nearly represented by a sinusoid. Farther from the conductors, a GMR representation will suffice. For a bundle of diameter D with n conductors of radius r, the GMR is given by GMR =



D 2

n

2nr (5-44) D

Replacing the conductor radius with the bundle GMR gives the appropriate representation. Figure 5-10 illustrates a representative electric-field profile, in kV rms per meter, from the centerline of the structure. This presentation clearly illustrates the maximum field, the location of the maximum, and the effect on right-of-way width considerations. Sensitivity to various parameters can also be quickly evaluated. Criteria for Evaluation.  The effects of electric fields on humans is due to discharges from objects insulated from ground; typically vehicles, buildings, and fences which become electrically charged by induction from the line. Table 5-6 summarizes effects on humans, ranging from no perception through severe shock and possible ventricular fibrillation.24 Criteria for spark discharges are expressed in terms of stored charge or stored energy on the charged object. Levels for perception in adult males are of the order of 0.12 mJ, while experience indicates that approximately 2 mJ results in an annoying spark. Safety is seldom of concern, since approximately 25 J is required for injury, a value beyond that expected on objects beneath transmission lines. Deno’s work, using test data, relates short-circuit current to the undisturbed electric field for objects insulated from ground.23 Initial calculations assume the worst possible combination of circumstances; no leakage path to ground exists for the object, complete grounding of the person involved, steady contact, and orientation of the vehicle parallel to the line. Table 5-7 lists sample criteria and electric fields needed to meet them for three sample vehicles.

FIGURE 5-10  Electric-field profile at ground level for transmission line.

05_Santoso_Sec05_p0245-0350.indd 260

27/11/17 12:19 PM

ALTERNATING-CURRENT POWER TRANSMISSION        261 

TABLE 5-6  Threshold Levels for 60-Hz Contact Currents rms current, mA

Threshold reaction and/or sensation Perception



0.09 0.13 0.24 0.33 0.36 0.49 0.73 1.10

Touch perception for 1% of women Touch perception for 1% of men Touch perception for 50% of women Grip perception for 1% of women Touch perception for 50% of men Grip perception for 1% of men Grip perception for 50% of women Grip perception for 50% of men



2.2 Estimated borderline hazardous reaction, 50% probability for women   (arm contact) 3.2 Estimated borderline hazardous reaction, 50% probability for women   (pinched contacts)

Startle



Let-go

4.5 6.0 9.0 10.5 16.0

Estimated let-go for 0.5% of children Let-go for 0.5% of women Let-go for 0.5% of men Let-go for 50% of women Let-go for 50% of men



15 23

Breathing difficult for 50% of women Breathing difficult for 50% of men



35 100

Respiratory tetanus

Fibrillation Estimated 3-s fibrillating current for 0.5% of 20-kg (44-lb) children Estimated 3-s fibrillating current for 0.5% of 70-kg (150-lb) adults Established standards

0.50 0.75 5.0

ANSI standard for maximum leakage (portable appliance) ANSI standard for maximum leakage (installed appliance) NESC recommended limit for induced current under transmission line

TABLE 5-7  Limiting Electric Field for Given Criteria, kV/m

Sample vehicles

Safety Annoyance Perception

05_Santoso_Sec05_p0245-0350.indd 261

Autos, pickups Sample criteria 5 mA 25 J 2 mA 2 mJ 1.1 mA 0.12 mJ

Farm vehicles

Buses, trailer trucks

A

B

C

22.32 259.00 8.92 2.37 4.91 0.58

10.86 159.00 4.35 1.41 2.39 0.35

6.33 106.50 2.50 0.95 1.39 0.23

27/11/17 12:19 PM

262        SECTION FIVE

TABLE 5-8  Likely Range of Maximum Vertical Electric Field for Various Voltage Transmission Lines Line voltage, kV

Near-ground vertical electric field, kV/m

765

8–13

345 230 161 138 115

4–6 2–3.5 2–3 2–3 1–2

500

5–9

High voltages may develop due to electric-field coupling, but the available short-circuit current is small (i.e., high-impedance source); thus calculations are based on a Norton equivalent and the short-circuit current. A relatively high resistance ground is sufficient to reduce electric-field-coupled voltage. Table 5-8 lists maximum electric fields on the right-of-way under lines of different voltage classes. The fields attenuate rapidly with distance from the line and are usually much lower at the right-of-way edge.

Fuel Ignition.  Theoretical calculations indicate that if several unlikely conditions exist simultaneously, a spark could release sufficient energy to ignite gasoline vapors. These conditions include a perfectly grounded person refueling a car perfectly insulated from ground with a metal can while the car is parked directly under a line. The spark would have to occur in the precise location of optimum fuel-air mixture. Research3,25 confirms the low probability of accidental fuel ignition under actual conditions. No confirmed cases of accidental ignition under transmission lines exist, confirming the low probability of these factors occurring simultaneously. Because of the consequences of a gasoline fire, some electric utilities advise that gasoline-fueled vehicles not be refueled near a line of 500 kV or above. If refueling were necessary, the vehicle could be grounded or the can connected to the vehicle to prevent sparks. 69

1–1.5

Ground-Level Magnetic Fields.  Magnetic-field coupling affects objects which parallel the line for a distance, such as fences and pipelines, and is generally negligible for vehicle- or building-sized objects. As opposed to electric-field coupling, magnetic-field coupling is a low-voltage, low-impedance source with relatively high short-circuit currents. Single grounds are ineffective in preventing magnetically coupled voltages and multiple low-resistance grounds are needed. The resistance of the person touching a fence or pipeline is the dominant current-limiting impedance in the equivalent electrical circuit.26 Calculations are based on a “longitudinal electromotive force” approach and are described in Refs. 27 to 29. A consideration in the calculation of magnetic fields, which is different from the electric-field calculation, concerns the images. A perfectly conducting earth can be assumed for the electric-field problem, even for realistic values of earth resistivity. The assumption of a transmission line in free space (no earth at all) gives a closer approximation to the ground-level magnetic fields than does the assumption of a perfectly conducting earth for measurements near the line. At distances beyond 100 m, the effect of earth becomes increasingly more significant. The effect of conducting earth is frequently treated by use of an image conductor located at a greater depth in the earth than the conductors are above the earth. Distances of several hundred meters are commonly used for this image depth, according to the relation D = 660 ρ /f meters where r is the earth resistivity in ohm-meters and f is the frequency. Magnetic-field calculations are given in Ref. 9, including the use of Carson’s terms to evaluate the effects of imperfectly conducting earth. It is normally adequate to consider conductors in free space without images. For the conductor of Fig. 5-9 without its image

B=

µo /I µo /I = (5-45) 2π r 2π h 2 + L2

This is then separated into vertical and horizontal components by multiplying by sin q and cos q. In general, both components must be retained. For a three-phase line, all conductors must be computed. Horizontal and vertical components of B from the three conductors must then be combined individually as phasors, considering the angles of the different currents. The combined horizontal and vertical

05_Santoso_Sec05_p0245-0350.indd 262

05/06/19 11:16 am

ALTERNATING-CURRENT POWER TRANSMISSION        263 

components in general have different angles, causing their resultant to trace an ellipse in time. Singleaxis magnetic-field meters with the sensing coil oriented for a maximum reading give the magnitude of the major axis of the field ellipse. A three-axis meter of the type presently used for data logging responds to the square root of the sum of the squares of the three field components (the “resultant” field). The resultant field can be as much as 41% greater than the major axis of the field ellipse for circularly polarized fields of the type which result from symmetrical conductor configurations.30 In the same manner, image currents at some assumed depth can be computed and their fields included. The use of matrix calculations allows inclusion of ground wires and bundled conductors as is the case of electric fields. With both electric and magnetic fields it is essential to follow proper measurement procedures30 for comparison with calculations. For electric fields it is important that the field not be perturbed by the presence of the operator or other nearby objects. For both electric and magnetic fields, it is necessary to accurately know the conductor positions, the conductor height, the distance to the observer, and the line operating conditions (voltage and current). Magnetic-field measurements frequently differ from calculations for a number of reasons beyond errors in distance and clearance measurement: 1.  Line current is continually varying, so in general it is not as well known as line voltage. In addition to uncertainty concerning the current magnitude at the time of the field measurement, line current unbalance in both magnitude and phase angle can be important. Unbalance has an increasingly significant effect on the magnetic field, the farther one moves from the line. Spot measurements, especially in homes and near distribution lines, are of limited usefulness to characterize exposure. For this reason, it is often advisable to statistically characterize the magnetic field. A statistical description of the field over time can be developed from measurements or calculations which assume balanced currents. It is also sometimes useful to develop a statistical distribution for a specific current level and an assumed maximum unbalance. 2.  Related to current unbalance is circulating current in the shield wires, return currents in the earth, and currents in nearby pipes. These currents may cause significant differences between calculation and measurement. 3.  The difference between single- and three-axis instruments has been described above. Two operators with different instruments can determine different answers based on the principles of measurement. 4.  In nonuniform fields, such as around appliances, the size of the sensing coil and presence or absence of ferromagnetic core material will affect the reading of instruments equally well calibrated in a uniform field. Calibration must be made in a calibrating coil sufficiently large that the field is uniform over the area of the sensing coil, yet not so large that other nearby currents do not affect the field. 5.  Harmonic currents have different effects depending on the frequency response of the instrument. Some instruments have a response linearly increasing with frequency, some are flat with frequency, and others have bandpass filters of different waveshapes. 5.1.5  Line Insulation Requirements.  The electrical operating performance of a transmission line depends primarily on the insulation. An insulator not only must have sufficient mechanical strength to support the greatest loads of ice and wind that may be reasonably expected, with an ample margin, but must be so designed as to withstand severe mechanical abuse, lightning, and power arcs without mechanically failing. It must prevent a flashover for practically any power-frequency operating condition and many transient voltage conditions, under any conditions of humidity, temperature, rain, or snow, and with such accumulations of dirt, salt, and other contaminants that are not periodically washed off by rains.31 Insulator Materials.  The majority of present insulators are made of glazed porcelain. Porcelain is a ceramic product obtained by the high-temperature vitrification of clay, finely ground feldspar,

05_Santoso_Sec05_p0245-0350.indd 263

27/11/17 12:19 PM

264        SECTION FIVE

and silica. Insulators of high-grade electrical porcelain of the proper chemical composition free from laminations, holes, and cooling stresses have been available for many years. The insulator glaze seals the porcelain surface and is usually dark brown, but other colors such as gray and blue are used. Porcelain insulators for transmission may be disks, posts, or long-rod types. Porcelain insulators have been used at all transmission line voltages and, if correctly manufactured and applied, have high reliability. A typical porcelain disk insulator is shown in Fig. 5-11. Glass insulators have been used on a significant proportion of transmission lines. These are made from toughened glass, and are usually clear and colorless or light green. For transmission voltages they are available only as disk types. Most glass disk insulators will shatter when damaged, but without mechanically releasing the conductor. This provides a simple method of inspection. Synthetic insulators, originally pioneered by the General Electric Company in 1963 for high-voltage transmission lines,32 and more recently introduced by several manufacturers, are finding increasing acceptance. Most consist of a fiberglass rod covered by weather sheds of skirts of polymer (silicon rubber, polytetrafluoroethylene, cycloaliphatic resin, etc.)33 as shown in Fig. 5-12. Other types include a cast polymer concrete called Polysil R34 and a coreless type with alternating metal and insulating sections.35 Improvements in design and manufacture in recent years have made synthetic insulators increasingly attractive since their strength-to-weight ratio is significantly higher than that of porcelain and can result in reduced tower costs, especially on EHV and UHV transmission lines. These insulators are usually manufactured as long-rod or post types. The light weight of most designs and resistance to damage aids construction. In addition, their performance under contaminated conditions may be significantly better than that of porcelain.36 Use of synthetic insulators on transmission lines is relatively recent and a few questions are still under study, in particular the lifetime behavior of insulating shed materials under contaminated conditions. It has been found necessary to use grading rings on some types at higher voltages to prevent damage to the sheds, and a very small number of insulators have experienced “brittle fractures,” in which the fiberglass core breaks close to an end fitting. Despite these problems it appears that reliable synthetic insulators are presently available. Insulator Design.  Transmission insulators may be strings of disks (either cap and pin or ball and socket), long-rods, or line posts. Posts are only infrequently applied above 230 kV.

FIGURE 5-11 Typical porcelain disk insulator: (a) clevis type; (b) ball-and-socket type. (Locke Insulators Inc.) 

05_Santoso_Sec05_p0245-0350.indd 264

FIGURE 5-12  Typical nonceramic insulators.

27/11/17 12:19 PM

ALTERNATING-CURRENT POWER TRANSMISSION        265 

Present suspension insulators conform to ANSI Standard C29.2, and standards have been established for 15,000-, 25,000-, 36,000-, and 50,000-lb ratings. It is common practice to use a factor of safety of 2 for the maximum mechanical stress applied to porcelain or glass insulators. For fiberglass-core insulators it is more common for the manufacturer to supply a recommended maximum working load. Each manufacturer supplies catalogs which provide a physical description of the insulator’s mechanical characteristics, wet and dry 60-Hz flashover strength, and positive- and negative-impulse (1.2 × 50 ms) critical (50%) flashover strength. Switching surge performance (250 × 3000 ms) is usually not supplied. In clean conditions most insulators of equivalent dimensions have very similar performance. Suspension insulator strings, that is, insulators used to support the conductor weight at a suspension or tangent structure, may be in I (vertical) or V configurations. The V configuration is used to prevent conductor movement and resultant clearance reductions at the structure. At dead-end or tension structures the insulators must also support the conductor tension, and it is not uncommon for these tension strings to be given a slightly higher flashover strength (e.g., by adding disks) to reduce the likelihood of a flashover that might lead to insulator string mechanical failure. Two or more strings of insulators in parallel can be used on suspension and tension strings to provide higher mechanical strength if required. The electrical strength of line insulation may be determined by power frequency, switching surge, or lightning performance requirements. At different line voltages, different parameters tend to dominate. Table 5-9 shows typical line insulation levels and the controlling parameter. In compacted or uprated designs, considerably fewer insulators than these have been successfully used.37,38 Detailed descriptions of insulation design for electrical performance for different conditions, line voltages, and line types are available39–41 from a number of studies. TABLE 5-9  Typical Line Insulation Line voltage, kV

115 138 230 345 500 765

No. of standard disks 7–9 7–10 11–12 16–18 24–26 30–37

Controlling parameter (typical) Lightning or contamination Lightning or contamination Lightning or contamination Lightning, switching surge, or contamination Lightning, switching surge, or contamination Switching surge or contamination

Insulator Standards.  The NEMA Publication High Voltage Insulator Standards, and AIEE Standard 41 have been combined in ANSI C29.1 through C29.9. Standard C29.1 covers all electrical and mechanical tests for all types of insulators. The standards for the various insulators covering flashover voltages; wet, dry, and impulse; radio influence; leakage distance; standard dimensions; and mechanical-strength characteristics are as follows: Ceramic C29.2, suspension; C29.3, spool; C29.4, strain; C29.5, low- and medium-voltage pin; C29.6, high-voltage pin; C29.7, high-voltage line post; C29.8, apparatus pin; C29.9, apparatus post, C29.12 and C29.13, nonceramic suspension; C29.17 and C29.18, nonceramic line post. These standards should be consulted when specifying or purchasing insulators. Line Insulation Design Power-Frequency Design.  The criteria for power-frequency design is usually that flashover shall not occur for normal operating conditions, including reduced clearances to the structure from high wind. A typical wind-design limit is the 50- or 100-year return period wind, that is, a wind velocity which occurs only once in 50 or 100 years. This velocity is obtained from local wind records and may be typically 80 to 100 mi/h. Maximum operating voltages are designed by ANSI C84 and C92 standards and are 5% or 10% above the nominal value. In clean conditions, power-frequency voltage is not a controlling parameter for insulator design (as distinct from air-gap clearance). However, even in quite lightly contaminated conditions it may become so. Design for contamination is usually expressed as inches of creepage per kilovolt, where the creepage distance is the length of the shortest path for a current over the insulator surface and ranges up to

05_Santoso_Sec05_p0245-0350.indd 265

27/11/17 12:19 PM

266        SECTION FIVE

2 in/kV or more for heavy contamination. Standard insulator disks (10 × 53⁄4 in) have a typical creepage length of 11.5 in per disk. To avoid very long insulator strings for contamination, disks with additional creepage distance are made. The creepage can be extended by use of lengthened skirts and deeper grooves in the underside. Fog-type disks have up to 21.5 in of creepage per 131⁄2 × 8-in units. A typical fog-type insulator is illustrated in Fig. 5-13. In extremely contaminated conditions, insulation with extended creepage may not be enough. In these cases insulator washing or the use of a silicone or petroleum grease coating (replaced at regular intervals) may be used. Table 5-10 provides a simplified indication of creepage distance as a function of contamination,39 and Fig. 5-14 shows guidelines from the IEEE application guide.40 FIGURE 5-13  Typical fog-type disk For nonceramic insulation the same approach is used, insulator. except that subject to manufacturer’s recommendations, a reduction in creepage distance up to 30% may be possible. This is due to the physical behavior of the nonceramic insulating material in moist conditions. Another approach that has sometimes been used to combat contamination effects is the semiconductive glaze insulator. The semiconducting glaze allows a small but definite power-frequency current to flow over the surface. The insulator does not improve the standard test values, such as wet and dry power-frequency flashover and short-time impulse flashover, although it may have some value under switching surge conditions. The glaze has a surface resistivity of about 10 MW per square. This is achieved by special formulations of materials involving, at the present stage of development, the use of tin-antimony additive to a more normal glaze composition. The presence of this small leakage current, of the order of 1 to TABLE 5-10  Insulation Requirements for Contamination: Provisional EHV Line Insulation Design Table for Various Contamination Conditions Standard 55/34 × 10-in vertical insulator units

Contamination Class Types

Provisional design values Equivalent amount NaCl, mg/cm2

 A Clean atmosphere—rural and forest regions; 0–0.03  no industrial contamination  B Slight atmospheric contamination; suburbs 0.04  of large industrial regions; railways;  frequent washing rains  C Moderate contamination containing soluble 0.06  salts up to 5%; furnaces, dust from  metallurgical plants, mine dust, fly ash,  fertilizer dust in small quantities  D Severe contamination containing 15% or 0.12  more of soluble salts; dust from  aluminum and chemical works, cement  plants, heavy agricultural fertilizing, fly  ash with high salt or sulfur content  E Salt precipitation—seaside regions, salt 0.30  marshes

05_Santoso_Sec05_p0245-0350.indd 266

Leakage distance in/kV rms line to ground

Average kV rms Per in axial length

Insulation requirements not set by contamination 1.04 2.0

Per unit

11.5

1.31

1.6

9.1

1.74

1.2

6.9

2.11

1.0

5.7

27/11/17 12:19 PM

ALTERNATING-CURRENT POWER TRANSMISSION        267 

FIGURE 5-14  Power frequency withstand voltage of contaminated suspension insulators in fog expressed in kV/m of connection length (spacing).

2 mA for suspension insulators, but which can be several times that value for large porcelains (such as are used in high-voltage bushings) has three effects: 1. Linearization of the voltage distribution over the insulator or string of insulators. This aids greatly in improving the performance of the insulator with respect to corona disturbance and RIV performance, plus having some benefits under dry and clean conditions. 2. Heating of the insulator. This occurs because of the power loss associated with the leakage current flow to a temperature which is usually about 5°C over the ambient air conditions. The heating effect enables the insulator to remain dry during conditions of fog or mist. This eliminates the majority of contaminated-insulator flashovers which occur when accumulated contamination becomes damp. This damp contamination condition is the most usual cause for contaminated-insulator flashover because most contaminants are more electrically conducting when damp or wet. 3. The elimination of “dry banding,” which is recognized as another major cause of flashover of standard insulators when contaminated. This occurs when the insulator has been thoroughly wetted, such as in a rain storm which wets but does not thoroughly clean the contamination from the insulator’s surface. Under these conditions, dry bands will form as the standard insulator dries, and arcs strike across the dry-band area. These arcs can progress until flashover of the entire insulator occurs. With a semiconducting insulator, the relatively low resistance of the glaze shunts the dryband area as the insulator dries and prevents the striking of the small power-frequency arcs. The improved performance possible with semiconducting insulators has been proved in the laboratory and field,42–46 but, because of the energy losses associated with the inherent leakage current, they are not widely used. In some severe contamination areas, the problem has been effectively attacked by the use of silicone grease coatings. The unique amoebic action of a thick layer of silicone grease on an insulating surface is such as to envelop conducting solid particles which are said to “load” up the silicone grease to the saturation point, at which time the “used” silicone grease is removed and replaced with new silicone grease. In severe contamination areas, the greasing and degreasing cycles may be required every few months; in less severe contamination areas, the cycle may be a year or more depending on experience acquired. In this manner, the time between insulator cleanings can be greatly extended, thus making for substantial savings. Once the silicone coating is used, the coatings must usually be

05_Santoso_Sec05_p0245-0350.indd 267

27/11/17 12:19 PM

268        SECTION FIVE

wiped off and replaced manually, as necessary. Among the manufacturers of silicone grease are the General Electric Company and the Dow-Corning Corporation. For the cleaning operation to remove contamination from the insulator surface, many contaminants such as salt deposits and water-soluble conducting liquids can be successfully removed by hot-line washing, using high-pressure water and insulated nozzles and hoses. Another method is “dry cleaning” by the use of an abrasive powder such as a limestone mixture or biodegradable plastic pellets, discharged at high pressure through hose and nozzle on the insulating surface. In many cases either hot-line washing or dry cleaning alone is sufficient to cope with the rate of accumulation encountered with the particular contaminant. An exception is substantially conducting materials, which take a chemical “set” after exposure to water, such as cement dust, some forms of gypsum, or asbestos, which often must first be manually chipped off or scrubbed off the insulating surface and then covered with silicone grease as previously described. It should be emphasized that these problems may be very severe or even nonexistent, due to the variability of contamination exposure, which in turn depends on the chemical and electrical nature of the contaminant, prevailing wind direction, persistence of fog, smog, or other weather factors. To monitor buildup of contaminants, some utilities collect data at the site to warn operating departments of an impending flashover, so as to promptly implement contamination-combative procedures. Switching Surge Design.  Operation of a circuit breaker on a transmission line can cause transient overvoltages, although flashovers due to such switching surges are rare in lines below 500 kV. If the breaker is opening, this may be due to restrikes across the breaker contacts as they separate, although restriking has been nearly eliminated with present breaker technology. If the breaker is closing, the cause may be unequal voltages on each side of the breaker, including the effect of residual charge on the line from a recent deenergization. The crest magnitudes of switching surges are normally defined in per unit of nominal power-frequency-crest phase-to-ground voltage. For example, on a 138-kV line (145 kV maximum), the per unit value is 118 kV. Typical switching surges range from 1 to as high as 4 or 5 per unit, and the varying characteristics of breaker operations provide a distribution of surge magnitudes which is often modeled as a truncated gaussian distribution. The criterion for switching surge design is usually that flashover shall not occur for most or all switching events. Several design methods have been used, including 1. The maximum expected surge is determined, for example, from a transient network analyzer (TNA) or digital study, and the line insulation is designed to withstand that surge. 2. Rather than the maximum surge, a surge value corresponding to a statistical level is used, typically the 2% value (i.e., the crest value determined from the statistical distribution of surge crests, such that the level will be exceeded by only 2% of all surges). 3. Rather than design insulation to withstand a maximum surge, a statistical approach is used to design for a low number of flashovers per switching event. Typical levels are one flashover per 100 or 1000 breaker operations. This often results in a more economical design than either of the withstand approaches above. 4. By modeling the statistical distribution of switching surge crests, the distribution of insulator flashover with voltage, and the statistical distribution of weather that can be obtained from local weather stations, a probabilistic design can be prepared using a relatively simple computer program based on the allowable flashover rate. Typical procedures, data, and examples for such calculations are provided in several publications.47,48 Impulse Surge Design.  Impulse surges on a line are caused by lightning strokes to or near the line. At transmission insulation levels, only strokes that directly intercept the line are capable of causing flashovers. A number of methods of calculating transmission-line lightning performance are described in Section 23. A computer program for this simplified calculation method is available from the IEEE WG on Transmission Line Lightning Performance, and more sophisticated programs for evaluation of multicircuit lines are available from a number of sources.

05_Santoso_Sec05_p0245-0350.indd 268

27/11/17 12:19 PM

ALTERNATING-CURRENT POWER TRANSMISSION        269 

It is unusual for line insulation to be determined by lightning performance alone. More typically, insulation is determined by other requirements and the lightning performance is then verified. If this performance is unsatisfactory, it is often more efficient to change other design parameters such as shield wires or grounding than to add insulation. Other methods of improving lightning performance have included addition of surge arresters at relatively frequent intervals along a line, and on double-circuit lines the use of unbalanced insulation so one circuit will flash over first and protect the other. Use of line arresters is most beneficial in regions of high ground resistance. Use of unbalanced insulation can improve the performance of the circuit with the highest insulation, but at the detriment of overall line performance. Phase-to-Phase Insulation.  The controlling paths for flashovers on most presently installed transmission lines are phase-to-ground, since there are usually grounded structure components between phases. However, for some new designs, such as the Chainette,49 and compact lines the controlling path may be phase-to-phase air gaps or even phase-to-phase insulators. Design methods for phase-to-phase insulation are essentially the same as for phase-to-ground insulation. Until recently, there was lack of knowledge of conductor clearance at midspan under various dynamic loading conditions, and lack of phase-to-phase switching surge data. Research studies sponsored by EPRI have now provided adequate design information on both topics.41,47,48 Protective and Grading Devices.  Damage to insulators from heavy arcs was a serious maintenance problem in the past, and several devices were developed to ensure that an arc would stay clear of the insulator string. Subsequent improvements in the use of overhead ground wires and fast relaying have reduced the likelihood of insulator damage to the point that arc protection devices are now rarely used in the United States. Earlier protective measures consisted of attaching small horns to the clamp, but it was found that horns with a large spread both at the top of the insulator and at the clamp were required to be effective. Under lightning impulse the arc tends to cascade the string, and tests show that the gap between horns should be considerably less than the length of the insulator string. Protection by arcing horns thus resulted in either a reduced flashover voltage or an increase in the number of units and length of the string. In any event, flashover persisted as a power arc until the line tripped out. For these reasons arcing horns have not been used in the United States for many years, although they are fairly common in Europe. The arcing ring or grading shield is mainly for the purpose of improving the voltage distribution over the insulator string, and its effectiveness is due to the more uniform field. Protection of the insulator is not, therefore, dependent on simply providing a shorter arcing path, as is the case with horns. Efficient rings are rather large in diameter and, for suspension strings, clearances to the structure should be at least as great as from ring to ring. These considerations have made this device generally unattractive for modern construction. Grading rings are now used only at very high voltages for special applications, or with nonceramic insulators. Corona shields help improve the voltage distribution at the line ends of insulator strings.

5.1.6  Line and Structure Location Preparation for Construction.  The cost of preparing for transmission-line construction is a considerable part of the total costs—under some conditions as much as 25%. Right-of-way and clearing are more or less fixed by local conditions, but the cost of surveys, accompanying maps, profiles, and engineering layout is to some extent governed by judgment. Many times in the past the overall costs have been increased by right-of-way difficulties and by delays in receiving proper materials because of inadequate preparations. The engineering work, properly carried out, makes it possible to obtain the right-of-way and complete the clearing well in advance of construction and to purchase every item of material and deliver it to the correct location. The work of locating and laying out a line does not require great refinement, but careful planning is essential. With inexperienced surveyors or drafters, it must be assumed that errors will be made, and every possible device must be used to discover these errors before construction is started.

05_Santoso_Sec05_p0245-0350.indd 269

27/11/17 12:19 PM

270        SECTION FIVE

Location.  The general character of the line location should be determined because it has a definite bearing on the type of design. In extreme cases, such as difficult mountainous sections or in highly developed areas near cities, this may be a determining factor in the selection of the conductor and type of structures. With today’s importance of the transmission grid, all transmission lines must be routed so that accessibility for inspection and repairs can be made quickly. Line location is a matter of judgment and requires a person of wide general experience capable of correctly weighing the divergent requirements for inexpensive and available right-of-way, low construction costs, and convenience in maintenance. In mountainous country or in thickly populated areas, it is generally not advisable to attempt a direct route or try to locate on long tangents. Small angles of a few degrees cost little more and add little to the length of line. Most designs provide suspension structures for line angles of 5° to 15° which are not excessively costly, although additional right-of-way costs should be considered for guyed structures. It is also a good idea to avoid high, exposed ridges to afford protection against both wind and lightning. Following a general reconnaissance by ground and air, for which 10 to 20 days per 100 mi should be allowed for traditional surveying methods, and the assembling of all available maps and information, control points can be established for a general route or areas selected for more detailed study which may prove to be determining factors in the location of the line. With this preliminary work completed, the major difficulties should have been determined. The policy as to such matters as right-of-way condemnation, electrical environmental assessments, telephone coordination, navigable-stream crossing, air routes, airports, and crossings with other utilities must be decided as definitely as possible. Preliminary specifications should be issued before the final survey is started. These should include (1) outline drawings of the various structures with the important dimensions; (2) conductor sag curves and a sag template; (3) the maximum spans and angles for each type of structure; and (4) the requirements for right-of-way and clearing. Estimated costs are valuable, especially comparative costs of the various types of structure. With this information the field engineer can often, in a difficult section, choose the location best suited to the design. Aerial maps can often be secured at much less cost than preliminary surveys, and in highly developed areas may be used to advantage for completely laying out the line without sending surveyors into the area until after the right-of-way has been secured. In today’s digital world, many lines can be routed without any additional aerial reconnaissance. Photographs taken at approximately 1⁄2 mi to the inch give sufficient detail for most work. Such maps can be photographically enlarged about four times for special detail. With a 1⁄2-mi-to-the-inch scale, the route of the line can be determined within a width of about 3 mi and sufficient landmarks located on a fairly accurate map to serve as a guide for flying the line. For modern digital photograph, 6-in pixels with 200 DPI imagery usually suffices for these photographs. Location Survey.  The actual survey party can typically be divided into four divisions, each of which can complete at least a mile a day in average weather and country. Their operations may be carried out separately or nearly concurrently by allowing a full week’s separation between successive operations and transferring personnel as needed. The work falls naturally into the following: (1) an alignment party, choosing the exact location and cutting out the line; (2) a staking party, driving stakes at 100-ft stations and locating all obstructions; (3) a level party, taking elevations and side slopes; and (4) a property and topography party, locating property lines. A field drafting force located at a convenient point for receiving field notes can complete the final plan and profile drawings as fast as the survey can be made. The method of procedure and size of survey organization depend on the character of the country, the length and type of line, the experienced personnel available, and the schedule which must be maintained. In level, sparsely populated country, satisfactory but incomplete property surveys and profiles have been made during an open dry winter for a wood H-frame line 50 mi in length in approximately 4 months’ time, with the personnel averaging a crew of eight and an engineer. Modern survey methods such as light distance and ranging (LiDAR) and modern line design program will greatly reduce this amount of time and manpower required. On a development involving the construction of several hundred miles of steel-tower line, the survey for a 65-mi line in rather difficult country, including 25 mi of inaccessible mountainous country,

05_Santoso_Sec05_p0245-0350.indd 270

27/11/17 12:19 PM

ALTERNATING-CURRENT POWER TRANSMISSION        271 

was completed with property maps and profiles in the form for permanent records in 2 months’ time with a crew of about 20 and a locating engineer. Purchase.  Generally, right-of-way is not purchased in fee, but a perpetual easement is secured in which the owner grants the necessary rights to construct and operate the line but retains ownership and use of the land. The width of the right-of-way may be stated as a definite width or in general terms, but the easement must provide for (1) a means of access to each structure; (2) permission to erect all structures and guys; (3) all trees and brush to be cleared over a specified width for erection; (4) the removal of trees, which would not safely clear the conductor if the conductor were to swing out under maximum wind or which would not safely clear the conductor if they were to fall; and (5) the removal of buildings, lumber piles, haystacks, etc., which constitute a fire hazard. One of the major causes of serious line outages is the neglect to adhere strictly to conservative rules for clearing. Structure Spotting.  The efficient location of structures on the profile is an important component of line design. Structures of appropriate height and strength must be located to provide adequate conductor ground clearance and minimum cost. In the past, most tower spotting has been done manually, using templates, but several computer programs have been available for a number of years for the same purpose. Manual Tower Spotting.  A celluloid template, shaped to the form of the suspended conductor, is used to scale the distance from the conductor to the ground and to adjust structure locations and heights to (1) provide proper clearance to the ground; (2) equalize spans; and (3) grade the line (Fig. 5-15). The template has been traditionally cut as a parabola on the maximum sag (usually at the maximum operating temperature of 100°C or higher) of the anticipated ruling span for the line and it should be extended by computing the sag as proportional to the square of the span for spans both shorter and longer than the ruling span. By extending the template to a span of several thousand feet, clearances may be scaled on steep hillsides. The form of the template is based on the fact that, at the time when the conductor is erected, the horizontal tensions must be equal in all spans of every length, both level and inclined, if the insulators hang plumb at the stringing temperature. The template, therefore, must be cut to a catenary or, as has been traditionally done in the past, approximately, a parabolic approximation. The parabolic approximation is accurate to within about one-half of 1% for sags up to 5% of the span, which is well within the necessary refinement for traditional designs with considerable clearance buffers, but may not be accurate enough for lines being re-rated today. Since vertical ground clearances are being established, the maximum operating temperature (100°C and higher) no-wind curve is often used in the template. This temperature is required by the National Electrical Safety Code ANSI C1-2012 for clearance above ground, rails, water, buildings, signs, tanks, etc., as the minimum temperature to be used. Thus, it is appropriate in most sections of the United States for neutrals, guys, communication cables on messengers, and similar items that are not expected to have significant heating from line losses. However, this temperature is not appropriate in many areas in the southwest United States for these items and is not appropriate for high-current distribution and transmission phase conductors—maximum operating temperature is required. IEEE Std. 738 contains information on calculating both steady-state and transient conductor temperatures. Wind speed affects conductor temperature—the lower the wind speed, the lower will be the cooling effect and the higher will be the temperature of the conductor. Note that, in some locales (such as near a seacoast), the highest conductor temperature may occur on less than the hottest day, since the inland area heats up more on the hottest days and creates a thermally driven wind bringing cool air in from the coast. Thus, a series of templates may be required for the same conductor (or cable) for different expected current loadings or different areas of the system. Special conditions may call for additional clearance checks. For example, if it is known that a line will have high temperature rise because of an emergency load current, conductor clearance should be checked for the estimated emergency conductor temperature rating. Glaze ice and wet snow loadings can also create excessive sag of conductors. Such occurrences may not normally be considered in line design, since when they occur, the line may be taken out of service until the ice or snow drops. However, lines that are subject to high ice loads will experience permanent deformation of the wire due to these loads and this should be considered in the original design. On existing lines where this was not considered in the original design, the wires may exhibit additional sag over the design sags and the wires may

05_Santoso_Sec05_p0245-0350.indd 271

27/11/17 12:19 PM

272        SECTION FIVE

be closer to the ground and other obstacles than anticipated (see http://www.nerc.com/fileUploads/ FilePressReleases/PR%20Facilityh%Ratings$2007@20Oct%2010.pdf). The template must be used subject to a “Creep” and “Load” correction for the conductors. Creep is a nonelastic conductor stretch which continues for the life of the line, with the rate of elongation decreasing with time. For example, the creep elongation during the first 6 months is equal to that of the next 91⁄2 years. All conductors of all materials are subject to creep, but conductors with aluminum are especially sensitive to creep. The conductor manufacturers should always be consulted for these values. “Sag-Tension Calculation Methods for Overhead Lines” by CIGRE Task Force B2.12.3 discusses creep, load, and how the final sags and tensions are calculated and is available at http://www.cigre.org. Precise values for creep are impossible to determine, since they vary with both temperature and tension, which are continuously varying during the life of the line. For example, it is found that a 1000-ft span of 954,000-cmil 48/7 ACSR when subjected to a constant tension of approximately 18% of its ultimate strength at a temperature of 60°F will have a sag increase in 1 day of approximately 5.5 in; in 10 days, 13 in; in 1 year, 27 in; in 10 years, 44 in; and in 30 years, 52 in. Unless it is known that the line will have a life of less than 10 years, no less than 10 years’ creep should be allowed for in the design. It is possible to prestress the creep out of small conductors, but for large conductors this requires time and special tensioning facilities not normally available. Also the time lost in constructing an EHV line will more than pay for the extra structure height required to compensate for the creep. Prestressing changes the modulus of elasticity, and this new modulus should be used in the design. Precise values for load are also difficult to determine as the maximum load that the line will experience cannot be accurately predicted. If the amount of ice and/or wind are over-predicted, the conductor will never reach its design sag and money will have been overspent making the structure taller than it needed to be. However, if the amount of ice and/or wind are under-predicted, the conductor will sag lower than designed and there will be unanticipated clearance violations resulting in violations of code requirements and/or costly line flashovers. The vertical weight supported at any structure is the weight of the length of conductor between low points of the sag in the two adjacent spans. For bare-conductor weights, this distance between low points can be scaled by using a template of the sag at any desired temperature. The maximum weight under loaded conditions should be scaled from a template made for the loaded sags. For most problems, the horizontal distance may be taken as equal to the conductor length. Distances to the low point of the sag may be computed by Eq. (5-58). Uplift.  On steep inclined spans the low point may fall beyond the lower support; this indicates that the conductor in the uphill span exerts a negative or upward pull on the lower tower. The amount of this upward pull is equal to the weight of the conductor from the lower tower to the low point in the sag. Should the upward pull of the uphill span be greater than the downward load of the next adjacent span, actual uplift would be caused, and the conductor would tend to swing clear of the tower. It is important that abrupt changes in elevation of the structures should not occur, so that the conductor will not tend to swing clear of any structure even at low temperatures. This condition would be indicated if the 0°F curve of the template can be adjusted to hang free of the center support and just touch the adjacent supports on either side. In northern states it would be well to add a curve to the template for the below-zero temperatures experienced. Insulator Swing.  The uplift condition should not even be approached in laying out suspension insulator construction; that is, each tower should carry a considerable weight of conductor. The minimum weight that should be allowed on any structure may be logically determined by finding the transverse angle to which the insulator string may swing without reducing the clearance from the conductor to the structure too greatly. Also, the ratio of vertical weight to horizontal wind load should be limited to avoid insulator swing beyond this angle. The maximum wind is usually assumed at a temperature of 60°F. The wind pressure, measured in pounds per square foot, to be used in swing calculations is a matter of judgment and depends on local conditions. Under high-wind conditions it is reasonable to require somewhat less than normal clearances. Generally a clearance corresponding to about 75% of the flashover value of the insulator is adequate. The insulator will swing in the direction of the resultant of the vertical and horizontal forces acting on the insulator string as shown in Fig. 5-15.

05_Santoso_Sec05_p0245-0350.indd 272

27/11/17 12:19 PM

ALTERNATING-CURRENT POWER TRANSMISSION        273 

FIGURE 5-15  Sag template determines clearances of a suspended conductor from the ground.

Long Spans.  Rough country may necessitate spans considerably longer than contemplated in the design and may involve a number of factors including (1) proper clearance between conductors, (2) excessive tensions under maximum load, and (3) structures adequate to carry the additional loads. Safe horizontal clearance between conductors is often based on the National Electrical Safety Code (NESC) formula, in which the spacing a in inches is given as proportional to the square root of sag; s is in inches.

a = 0.3 in/kV + 8

s (5-46) 12

This relation was developed for, and is useful on, comparatively short span lines of the smaller conductors and for voltages up to 69 kV; but for very long spans and heavy conductors, the formula results in spacings considerably larger than have proved satisfactory. It also results in spacings that are questionably small for very light conductors on long spans. Percy H. Thomas proposed an empirical formula69 which takes into account the weight of the conductor and its diameter, requiring less spacing for heavy conductors and a greater spacing for small conductors by the ratio of diameter D in inches to weight w in pounds per foot (D/w) as a means of determining the required conductor spacing for the average span of the line. The factor C in Eq. (5-71) includes an allowance to permit the standard spacing to be used on somewhat longer spans than average construction. The same formula, however, may be used to examine the spacings which have been successfully used on maximum spans and a value for C selected from experience for determining the safe spacing required for an occasional unusually long span. Excessive tensions on very long spans may be avoided by dead-ending at both ends and computing such a stringing sag as will result in the same maximum tension as elsewhere in the line. Such a span will be found to have considerably greater stringing sag and lower stringing tension than the normal span. Sag curves or charts are often prepared giving the sag for dead-end spans of various lengths such that the maximum tension under loaded conditions will be the same. Dead-end construction is costly, and consideration should be given to avoiding this additional expense. It is common practice to permit spans up to double the average span without dead ends, although spans of this length may require additional spacing between wires. A careful examination of some trial figures on the sags and tensions developed in a long span will often indicate how great a span may be carried on suspension structures. The maximum loaded tension which would occur in a long span, if this span were dead-ended and sagged to the same stringing tension as the rest of the line,

05_Santoso_Sec05_p0245-0350.indd 273

27/11/17 12:19 PM

274        SECTION FIVE

compared with the maximum tension for normal span lengths, is a good indication of the necessity for dead-end construction. In case a number of long spans are encountered in a line or section of line, it may prove more economical to reduce the tension in the entire section to the long-span values and accept an increase in sag and corresponding reduction in span length in order to avoid dead ends. Once all the structures have been spotted on the profile to meet the above requirements, the actual ruling span of each dead-end section should be calculated and compared to the original assumed ruling span used. If the actual ruling span of a section is more than 5% different than the assumed ruling span, that section should again be re-spotted using a new template with the revised ruling span. This process should be repeated perpetually on the line until all actual ruling spans are with 5% of the ruling span used to spot the structures. Computerized Line Design.50–52  In a line of any significant length there are a very large number of possible structure location sequences which meet the requirement for minimum electrical clearances yet also meet the maximum load limits of the chosen structure family. With considerable design experience, it is possible to select a reasonably economical structure spotting solution, but no manual structure spotting method can explore all the possibilities nor find the lowest-cost solution. In the past 25 years, computer programs have become available to explore all possible structure spotting combinations, selecting the least cost available. In addition to exploring minimumcost structure spotting combinations for new lines, these computer programs also allow the user to explore uprating alternatives including rerating, reconductoring, inserting structures, raising structures and attachment points, and retensioning the existing conductors. With the advent of more and more powerful personal computers and easier-to-use graphical interfaces, these programs are easily applied even to relatively small line designs. Such programs are particularly attractive when modern digital surveying methods such as LiDAR, which obtains complete three-dimensional terrain data, existing structure locations, heights, and catenaries, can be used to develop complete three-dimensional models of the transmission corridor. These models allow for differential pole and tower body/leg extensions to be selected, as well as guying requirements due to uneven terrain. These models not only enable highly accurate line designs, but can be used for vegetation analysis to find growing and falling tree infractions which can trip a line and lead to serious grid interruptions. Digital data collection and analysis allows the line designer to explore a number of design aspects that were simply impossible to do manually. For example, Fig. 5-16 shows the result of a series of lowest-cost numerical tower spotting calculations made to explore the effects of conductor type (allaluminum conductor, low-steel 45/7 ACSR, and high-steel 54/7 ACSR) and conductor stringing tension expressed as a percent of rated breaking strength (RBS). Each data point represents an optimized tower spotting calculation. It’s interesting to note that the lowest-cost solution is the weakest conductor at a modest tension level. In addition to the line design and optimization benefits, the computer programs also provide highly detailed and accurate plan and profile drawings and other important construction documentation such as stringing charts, offset clipping reports, and constructions staking reports. Accurate Bill of Materials can be developed virtually eliminating the errors, omissions, and conservative assumption discussed in the earlier part of this subsection that are normally associated with manual line-design methods. 5.1.7  Mechanical Design of Overhead Spans Catenary Calculations for Stranded Conductors.  The energized conductors of transmission and distribution lines must be placed in a manner that limits the opportunity for contact by people or equipment. Overhead conductors, however, elongate with time, temperature, and tension, thereby changing their original positions after installation. Despite the effects of weather and loading on a line, the conductors must remain at safe distances from buildings, objects, and people or vehicles passing beneath the line at all times. To ensure this safety, the shape of the terrain along the right-of-way, the height and lateral position of the conductor between support

05_Santoso_Sec05_p0245-0350.indd 274

27/11/17 12:19 PM

ALTERNATING-CURRENT POWER TRANSMISSION        275 

530 520 Cost of construction, $1000/mile

510 54/7 Cardinal ACSR

500 490 480 470

45/7 Rail ACSR

460 450 440 430

Magnolia AAC

6

9

12

15

18

24

Conductor everyday tension level @ 60°F, % RBS

FIGURE 5-16 

Cost of construction versus conductor tensions for 1200-ft (366 m) wind span.

points, and the position of the conductor between support points under all wind, ice, and temperature conditions must be known. Bare overhead transmission or distribution conductors are typically flexible and uniform in weight along their lengths. Because of these characteristics, they take the form of a catenary between support points. The shape of the catenary53,54 changes with conductor temperature, ice and wind loading, and time. To ensure adequate vertical and horizontal clearance under all weather and electrical loadings, and to ensure that the breaking strength of the conductor is not exceeded, the behavior of the conductor catenary under all conditions must be incorporated into the line design. The required prediction of the future behavior of the conductor are determined through calculations commonly referred to as sag-tension calculations, which predict the behavior of conductors according to recommended tension limits under varying loading conditions. These tension limits specify certain percentages of the conductor’s rated breaking strength that is not to be exceeded on installation or during the life of the line. These conditions, along with the elastic and permanent elongation properties of the conductor, provide the basis for determining the amount of resulting sag during installation and long-term operation of the line. Accurately determined initial sag limits are essential in the line design process. Final sags and tensions depend on initial installed sags and tensions and on proper handling during installation. The final sag shape of conductors is used to select support point heights and span lengths so that the minimum clearances will be maintained over the life of the line. If the conductor is damaged or the initial sags are incorrect, the line clearances may be violated or the conductor may break during heavy ice or wind loadings. Sag and Tension in Level Spans.  A bare stranded overhead conductor is normally held clear of objects, people, and other conductors by attachment to insulators on supporting structures at each end of the span. The elevation differences between the supporting structures affect the shape of the conductor catenary. The catenary’s shape has a distinct effect on the sag and tension of the conductor, which can be determined using well-defined mathematical equations. The shape of a catenary is a function of the conductor weight per unit length w, the horizontal component of tension, H, the span length S, and the sag of the conductor D. Conductor sag and span length are illustrated in Fig. 5-17 for a level span.

05_Santoso_Sec05_p0245-0350.indd 275

27/11/17 12:19 PM

276        SECTION FIVE

The exact catenary equation uses hyperbolic functions. Relative to the low point of the catenary curve shown in Fig. 5-17, the height of the conductor y(x) above this low point is given by the following equation:

FIGURE 5-17  The catenary curve for level spans.



D=

y( x ) =

H  wx   wx 2 (5-47) cosh  −1 ≅   H   2 H w

Note that x is positive in either direction from the low point of the catenary. The expression to the right is an approximate parabolic equation based on a MacLaurin series expansion of the hyperbolic cosine. For a level span, the low point is in the center and the sag D is found by substituting x = S/2 in the preceding equations. The exact catenary and approximate parabolic equations for sag become the following:

H  wS   wS 2 (5-48) cosh  −1 ≅   2 H   8 H w

The ratio H/w which appears in all of the preceding equations is commonly referred to as the catenary constant. An increase in the catenary constant causes the catenary curve to become shallower and the sag to decrease. Although it varies with conductor temperature, ice and wind loading, and time, the catenary constant typically has a value in the range of several thousand feet for most transmission-line catenaries. The approximate, or parabolic, expression is sufficiently accurate as long as the sag is less than 5% of the span length. As an example, consider a 1000-ft (304.8-m) span of Drake ACSR conductor with a per unit weight of 1.096 lb/ft (15.99 N/m) installed at a tension of 4500 lb (20.016 kN). The catenary constant H/w is 4106 ft (1251.8 m). The calculated sag is 30.48 ft (9.293 m) and 30.44 ft (9.280 m) using the hyperbolic and approximate parabolic equations, respectively. For this case where the sagto-span ratio is 3.4%, the difference in calculated sag between the hyperbolic and parabolic equations is 0.48 in (1.3 cm). The horizontal component of tension H is equal to the conductor tension at the point in the catenary where the conductor slope is horizontal. For a level span, this is the midpoint of the span. At the ends of the level span, the conductor tension T is equal to the horizontal component plus the conductor weight per unit length w multiplied by the sag D, as shown in the following: T = H + wD (5-49)



Given the conditions in the preceding example calculation for a 1000-ft (304.8-m) level span of ACSR Drake, the tension at the attachment points T exceeds the 4500-lb (20.016-N) horizontal component of tension H by only 36 lb (162 N), a difference of only 0.8%. This shows that the use of horizontal tension H and parabolic equations for the catenary are adequate for typical transmission spans and sags. However, there is little reason to use either approximation in numerical methods or computer programs. Conductor Length.  Application of calculus to the catenary equation allows the calculation of the conductor length L(x) measured along the conductor from the low point of the catenary in either direction. The equation for catenary length between the supports is

05_Santoso_Sec05_p0245-0350.indd 276

L( x ) =

H  x 2w 2   wx  (5-50) sinh  ≅ x 1+   H  w 6 H 2 

27/11/17 12:19 PM

ALTERNATING-CURRENT POWER TRANSMISSION        277 

For a level span, the conductor length corresponding to x = S/2, is half of the total conductor length L; thus

S 2w 2    2H   Sw  L= sinh  ≅ S 1 +    w   2H   24 H 2  (5-51)

The parabolic equation for conductor length can also be expressed as a function of sag D by substitution of the sag parabolic equation [Eq. (5-48)]: L=S+



8D 2 (5-52) 3S

Sag and tension in inclined spans may be analyzed using essentially the same equations that were used for level spans. The catenary equation for the conductor height above the low point in the span is the same. However, the span is considered to consist of two separate sections, one to the right of the low point and the other to the left as shown in Fig. 5-18. The shape of the catenary relative to the low point is unaffected by the difference in suspension point elevation (span inclination). In each direction from the low point, the conductor elevation y(x) relative to the low point is given by Eq. (5-47):

y( x ) =

H  wx   wx 2 (5-53) cosh  −1 ≈   H   2 H w

Note that x is considered positive in either direction from the low point. The horizontal distance xL from the left support point to the low point in the catenary is

S h  xL = 1 +  (5-54) 2  4D  The horizontal distance xR from the right support point to the low point of the catenary is



S h  xR = 1 −  (5-55) 2  4D 

where S = horizontal distance between support points h = vertical distance between support points S1 = straight-line distance between support points D = sag measured vertically from a line through the points of conductor support to a line tangent to the conductor (as shown in Fig. 5-18). The midpoint sag D is approximately equal to the sag in a horizontal span, with a length equal to the inclined span S1. Knowing the horizontal distance from the low point to the support point in each direction, we can apply the preceding equations for y(x), L, D, and T to each side of the inclined span. The total conductor length L in the inclined span is equal to the sum of the lengths in the xR and xL subspan sections:

05_Santoso_Sec05_p0245-0350.indd 277

 w2  L ≈ S + ( x L3 + x R3 ) (5-56)  6 H 2 

FIGURE 5-18  Inclined catenary span.

27/11/17 12:19 PM

278        SECTION FIVE

In each subspan, the sag is relative to the corresponding support point elevation

DR =

wx R2 , 2H

DL =

wx L2 (5-57) 2H

or in terms of sag D and the vertical distance between support points

2

2

h   DR = D  1 − ,  4 D 

h   (5-58) DL = D  1 +  4 D 

TR = H + wDR ,

TL = H + wDL (5-59)

and the maximum tension is

or in terms of upper and lower support points:

Tu = T1 + wh (5-60)

where DR = sag in right subspan section DL = sag in left subspan section TR = tension in right subspan section TL = tension in left subspan section Tu = tension in conductor at upper support T1 = tension in conductor at lower support The horizontal conductor tension is equal at both supports. The vertical component of conductor tension is greater at the upper support, and the resultant tension, Tu, is also greater. Conductor and Structure Loads.  When the conductors are exposed to ice and/or wind, effective conductor loading per unit length increases over that of the bare conductor weight per unit length. During occasions of heavy ice and/or wind load, the conductor catenary tension increases dramatically along with the loads on angle and deadend structures. Both the conductors and support structures can fail unless these conditions are considered in the design of the overhead transmission line. Ice Loading.  Ice loading of overhead conductors may take several physical forms (glace ice, rime ice, wet snow). The impact of lower-density ice formation is usually considered in the design of line sections at high altitudes. The formation of ice on overhead conductors has the following influence on line design: •  Ice loads determine the maximum vertical conductor loads that structures and foundations must withstand. •  In combination with simultaneous wind loads, ice loads also determine the maximum transverse loads on structures. •  In regions of heavy ice loads, the maximum sags and the permanent increase in sag with time (difference between initial and final sags) may be due to ice loadings. Ice loads for use in designing overhead lines are normally derived on the basis of past experience, code requirements, state regulations and analysis of historical weather data. Mean recurrence intervals for extreme ice loadings are a function of local conditions along various routings. The impact of varying assumptions concerning ice loading can be investigated with design software. The National Electrical Safety Code (NESC)55 is the regulatory document that specifies the required ice and wind loading conditions for the design of overhead transmission lines and supporting structures in the United States. The NESC specifies three loading conditions denoted as (1) district loading, (2) extreme wind loading, and (3) extreme ice with concurrent wind loading.

05_Santoso_Sec05_p0245-0350.indd 278

27/11/17 12:19 PM

ALTERNATING-CURRENT POWER TRANSMISSION        279 

The Warm Island Loading District includes American Samoa, Guam, Hawaii, Puerto Rico, Virgin Islands, and other islands located from 0° to 25° latitude, north or south. FIGURE 5-19  NESC loading districts map. (Reprinted with permission from the IEEE.)55

District Loading.  In this case, the United States is divided into four loading districts shown on map in Fig. 5-19. The specified radial ice thickness and horizontal wind pressure for each of these zones are given in Table 5-11. This table also gives the conductor temperature which is to be used along with the ice thickness and wind pressure in each of these zones. The ice is assumed to be a

TABLE 5-11  Ice Thickness, Wind Pressures, Temperatures and Added Load Constants (from NESC)55 Loading districts (see Fig. 5-19) Warm islands located at 0° to 25° latitude* Altitudes above 9000 ft

Extreme wind loading

Extreme ice loading with concurrent wind

Heavy

Medium

Light

Altitudes sea level to 9000 ft

Radial thickness   of ice (in)

0.5

0.25

0

0

0.25

0

See Fig. 5-19

Horizontal wind   pressure (lb/ft2)

4

4

9

9

4

See Fig. 5-19

See Fig. 5-19

Temperature (°F)

0

+15

+30

+50

+15

+60

+15

Constant K to  be added to the resultant load (lb/ft)

0.3

0.2

0.05

0.05

0.2

0

0

*Islands located at 0° to 25° latitude include American Samoa, Guam, Hawaii, Puerto Rico and the Virgin Islands.

05_Santoso_Sec05_p0245-0350.indd 279

27/11/17 12:19 PM

280        SECTION FIVE

uniformly thick glaze ice coated around each conductor having a density of 57 lb/ft3. The wind is assumed to acting in a horizontal direction perpendicular to the plane of each sagged conductor. Therefore, the corresponding wind and ice loading acting on each conductor are calculated to be Conductor wind load (lb/ft): ww = p × (Dc + 2t)/12 (5-61)



Conductor ice load (lb/ft): wi = 1.244 × t (Dc + t)



(5-62)

where p is the wind pressure in lb/ft2, t is the radial ice thickness in inches for the appropriate district loading from Table 5-11 and Dc is the bare conductor diameter in inches. If the conductor is subject to both wind and ice loading, the resultant load acting on the conductor becomes Resultant conductor load (lb/ft): w R = ww2 + (wc + wi )2 (5-63) in which wc is the conductor weight in lb/ft. For district loadings, the NESC also requires that an additional loading K (in lb/ft) listed in Table 5-11 for each loading district be added to the resultant ice and wind loading when performing sag and tension calculations. Therefore, the total resultant conductor load w for district loadings is

w = wR + K (5-64)



The wind load on the supporting structures is calculated by the following equation:

Structure wind load (lb): Ws = p × Cf  × A

(5-65)

where p is the wind pressure from Table 5-11 for the appropriate loading district, Cf is the structure force coefficient from Tables 5-14 or 5-15, and A is the projected area on the windward side of the structure. Extreme Wind Loadings.  For overhead lines and/or supporting structures that are more than 60 ft above the ground, the NESC55 requires that they also be designed for extreme wind loadings. For this loading case, the ice thickness t is zero, and the wind pressure p (in lb/ft2) used in Eq. (5-61) to calculate the conductor horizontal wind loading is given by the following formula: p = 0.00256 × V 2 × kz × GRF × Cf

(5-66)

in which V is the basic wind speed in mph given on the maps in Fig. 5-20, kz is the velocity pressure exposure coefficient given in Table 5-12, GRF is the gust response factor given in Table 5-13 and Cf is the force coefficients given in Tables 5-14 and 5-15. The force coefficient Cf   for stranded conductors can vary significantly depending on wind speed and stranding and, therefore, is usually assumed to be 1.0. The vertical conductor load is simply the weight of the conductor wc and the resultant conductor load is given by Eq. (5-64) with an ice load wi equal to zero. The K loading assumed in the district loading case is not added to on the resultant conductor load for this loading case. The basic wind speed map in Fig. 5-20 is taken from ASCE Standard 7-05,56 and these wind speeds are the 50-year return period 3-s gust wind speeds for the contiguous United States measured at 10 m above ground in open terrain. This is the terrain condition that should be assumed for the design of overhead transmission lines. The NESC55 and ASCE 7-0556 give more detailed basic wind speed maps for Alaska, and for the hurricane zones of the Gulf of Mexico and the southeastern, mid-Atlantic and north-Atlantic U.S. coastlines. The effective height h used in Tables 5-12 and 5-13 for determining the kz and GRF values is the distance above ground level to the center of pressure of the conductors or structure. For the conductors, this center of pressure can be approximated as the average attachment height of the conductors to the support structure insulators minus one-third the average sag of the conductors. For support structures with total heights of 200 ft or less, the effective height h can be approximated as two-thirds the average height of the support structures. For structures taller than 200 ft, the values of kz should be varied over the height of the structure to represent the increase in the wind speed with height above ground.

05_Santoso_Sec05_p0245-0350.indd 280

27/11/17 12:19 PM

ALTERNATING-CURRENT POWER TRANSMISSION        281 

FIGURE 5-20  Basic wind speeds for the contiguous United States. (Reprinted with permission from ASCE 7-05.)56

05_Santoso_Sec05_p0245-0350.indd 281

27/11/17 12:19 PM

282        SECTION FIVE

TABLE 5-12  Velocity Pressure Exposure Coeffcient, kz (from NESC)55

Height h (ft)

kz (structure)

kz (conductors at specified height on the structure, and component)

0–33 >33–50 >50–80 >80–115 >115–165 >165–250 >250

0.9 1.0 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 Use formulas in NESC55

1.0 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5 Use formulas in NESC55

TABLE 5.13  Structure and Conductor Gust Response Factors, GRF (from NESC)55 Conductor GRF for span length, L (ft) Height h (ft)

Structure GRF

–250

250–500

>500–750

>750–1000

>1000–1500

>1500–2000

>2000

0–33 >33–50 >50–80 >80–115 >115–165 >165–250 >250

1.02 0.97 0.93 0.89 0.86 0.83 *

0.93 0.88 0.86 0.83 0.82 0.80 *

0.86 0.82 0.80 0.78 0.77 0.75 *

0.79 0.76 0.75 0.73 0.72 0.71 *

0.75 0.72 0.71 0.70 0.69 0.68 *

0.73 0.70 0.69 0.68 0.67 0.66 *

0.69 0.67 0.66 0.65 0.64 0.63 *

* * * * * * *

*For heights greater than 250 ft and/or spans greater than 2000 ft, use the formulas given in the NESC55

TABLE 5-14  Force Coefficients Cf for Pole Structures and Members for Different Shapes (from ASCE Manual 74)57

05_Santoso_Sec05_p0245-0350.indd 282

Pole or member shape

Force coefficient Cf

Circular Square or rectangle 6-Sided polygonal 8-Sided polygonal 12-Sided polygonal 16-Sided polygonal

0.9 2.0 1.4 1.4 1.0 0.9

27/11/17 12:19 PM

ALTERNATING-CURRENT POWER TRANSMISSION        283 

TABLE 5-15  Force Coefficients Cf  for Normal Wind on Latticed Towers Having Flat-Sided Members (from ASCE Manual 74)57 Force coefficient Cf* Solidity ratio, f

Square-section towers

Triangular-section towers

αmin age is suddenly reduced, forcing the rectifier characteristic down resulting in a new operating point with the rectifier minimum firing Id angle setting the dc voltage and the inverter IORD current order setting the current. This shift IO margin in operating point is referred to a mode shift. A dc voltage regulator may also be used FIGURE 6-11  Static operating characteristics. with or without current compounding to achieve a positive slope at the inverter with minimum extinction angle or commutation margin as a backup. A mode shift can also occur for a sudden increase in inverter ac voltage if operating in constant extinction angle control. Other control functions are needed to synchronize the valve firing to the ac system commutation voltages, to clear and recover from dc line faults, to translate the alpha orders to firing pulses and distribute them to the high-voltage valves, to minimize the reactive power consumption and achieve stable recoveries from large signal disturbances and faults in the ac network. Figure 6-13 shows these basic functions in the converter firing control (CFC). The current order Io is received from the pole power control. If the dc voltage is very low as during faults, the current order is limited by the voltage-dependent current order limiter, VDCOL. The alpha firing order is then limited as to its minimum and maximum value and minimum valve firing voltage (UMIN) in the converter firing control. Alpha min is used in inverter operation to prevent firing in rectifier operation. Minimum commutation margin control is used in inverter operation to maintain the minimum voltage time area to ensure successful recovery of forward blocking capability after valve conduction.

Uac

CCA Iorder

+ −

Σ

∆I

12 α-ord

FC

CPG

Id

Iresp

FIGURE 6-12  Closed loop current control system.

06_Santoso_Sec06_p0351-0390.indd 363

21/11/17 12:06 PM

364  SECTION SIX

AMIN U

Block/Deblock

t

UAC = f(t)

&

Alpha min

Io

1

UMIN

UD

VDCOL

CCA

CPG

CP

& order

Id FIGURE 6-13  Converter firing control.

Figure 6-14 shows the static characteristics of the rectifier and inverter with addition of the VDCOL. The VDCOL acts to limit the dc current order below its normal set point if the dc current is above its break point and the dc voltage is lower than its break point. Taking into account dynamic performance, the current limitation is very fast acting during decreasing voltage due to faults, while the recovery is slower upon system voltage recovery depending on ac system strength or ability to deliver reactive power to the converter during recovery. The fundamental control functions described in the previous paragraphs are applied at the pole level and are independent of those on the other pole in a bipolar system. Coordination of the current orders between the terminals is required during ramping of the dc power during schedule changes. This is done during normal operation with secure communications between the terminals. Backup control strategies have been developed for communications outages. In a bipolar system, a master control is used for coordinated schedule changes and calculation of the current orders for each pole. The master control is used for compensation for loss of a pole by doubling the current order on the remaining pole subject to the equipment ratings. Figure 6-15 shows the current order coordination between the two terminals. For bipolar operation, the voltage fed to the power controller is the bipolar voltage Ud

With VDCOL

Without VDCOL

Id FIGURE 6-14  Ud-Id characteristics with VDCOL.

06_Santoso_Sec06_p0351-0390.indd 364

21/11/17 12:06 PM

DIRECT-CURRENT POWER TRANSMISSION   365 

(Current margin)

∆Io

Execution

Remote MW setting

MW setting 0 7 50 MW/min setting 0 1 0 ∆f1 ∆f2

Po

Pbo P-order stepping

Telecommunications equipment Io

Po Ud

Σ

Current control amplifier

∆Po

I-order synchronizer

Σ

Master load limiter

Damping controller

Ud

Id

v Execution

MW setting 0 8 5 0

∆Io (current margin) Telecom. equip.

MW/min setting 0 2 0

Current control amplifier I-order sync

Σ Ud

Id

FIGURE 6-15  Master power control and current order synchronization.

assuring equal current orders to each pole. Upon loss of a pole this voltage is cut in half. Normally, the master control is intentionally slow being only used for schedule changes. For loss of a pole, however, its response time is fast. The master control can also handle supplemental control functions such as power oscillation damping and frequency control. Synchronization of the current order is such that the current margin is maintained. 6.3.5  Multiterminal Operation The same control principles used for two-terminal operation can be applied to multiterminal operation with one terminal being assigned to voltage control, while the other terminals control their respective dc current orders (Fig. 6-16). The master control must also ensure that the sum of the rectifier current orders equals the sum of the inverter current orders on a per pole basis during all operating conditions. If one of the terminals is limited or tripped, the residual mismatch is allocated among the remaining stations according to prioritized distribution factors to ensure that Kirchoff’s law is met. If the tripped station is the voltage setting terminal (VST), one of the remaining stations must be assigned to voltage control. The same method for clearing dc line faults, force retard of the rectifier(s) to invert off the dc current, can be used along with fast-acting pole-isolating switches which in turn can be used to isolate a faulty terminal without using special purpose dc breakers.

06_Santoso_Sec06_p0351-0390.indd 365

21/11/17 12:06 PM

366  SECTION SIX

V

V

I1ref

V

I1

V

I2ref I2

I3ref

I3

I4ref

I4

I4ref

I4

(a) V

V

I1ref

V

I1

I2ref I2

V

I3

I3ref

(b) FIGURE 6-16  Static characteristics for 4-terminal HVDC system illustrating mode shift from inverter 4 (upper set) to Rectifier 2 (lower set) due to depressed ac voltage at Rectifier 2.

6.3.6  Economics and Efficiency The following factors influence the optimum solution for HVDC transmission systems: •  Power transfer requirements •  Transmission distance •  Capitalized cost of losses •  System configuration, that is, bipolar, monopolar, back-to-back OVHD line or cable system •  System connection voltages •  Relative system strength •  Reactive compensation requirements •  Environmental conditions •  Future expandability •  Transformer transport limitations There is an economy of scale for HVDC transmission. It would cost less per kilowatt to transfer 3000 MW a distance of 800 km at ± 500 kV than it would to transfer 1000 MW. It would cost less per kilowatt to transfer 600 MW over a monopolar submarine cable system than it would to transfer the same power on a 2-pole cable system with each pole rated at half the capacity. A 550-MW back-toback asynchronous link would cost less per kilowatt than a 150-MW link. HVDC applications at locations with relatively low short circuit capacities typically cost more per kilowatt due to constraints on reactive power compensation and dynamic overvoltage mitigation measures. A typical terminal cost breakdown of an HVDC transmission system for an OVHD line is shown in Fig. 6-17.

06_Santoso_Sec06_p0351-0390.indd 366

21/11/17 12:06 PM

DIRECT-CURRENT POWER TRANSMISSION   367 

Transformers and reactors Thyristor valves Valve hall, switchyards Engineering Filters and capacitor banks Arresters, CT’s, VT’s, and bushings Control eq., aux power, etc. FIGURE 6-17  Terminal cost.

6.4  ALTERNATIVE CONFIGURATIONS 6.4.1  Capacitor-Commutated Converters Converters with series capacitors connected between the valves and the transformers were introduced in the late 1990s for weak-system back-to-back applications. These converters are referred to as capacitor-commutated converters (CCC). The series capacitor provides some of the converter reactive power compensation requirements automatically with load current and provides part of the commutation voltage improving voltage stability. The overvoltage protection of the series capacitors is simple since the fault currents are limited by the impedance of the converter transformers. The CCC configuration allows higher power ratings in areas where the ac network is close to its voltage stability limit. The asynchronous Garabi interconnection between Brazil and Argentina consists of 4 × 550 MW parallel CCC links. The Rapid City Tie between the eastern and western interconnected systems consists of 2 × 100 MW parallel CCC links (Fig. 6-18). Both installations use a modular design with converter valves located within prefabricated electrical enclosures. 6.4.2  Grid Power Flow Controller A variation of the line-commutated design using a single 6-pulse converter has been used for a small back-to-back tie application. The term grid power flow controller (GPFC) has been used to describe this system design. By using a 6-pulse converter, there is no need for a second transformer secondary I

Ua Ub Uc

Valve enclosures

Commutation capacitor

Converter transformer

++

UIa Uca +

I

++

UIb Ucb +

I

++

UIc

1

3

5

4

6

2

Ucc Ic +

FIGURE 6-18  Rapid City Tie with modular 2 × 100 MW capacitor commutated converters.

06_Santoso_Sec06_p0351-0390.indd 367

21/11/17 12:06 PM

368  SECTION SIX

connection to obtain the requisite 30° phase displacement for 12-pulse operation. More ac harmonic filtering in the form of fifth and seventh branches is required, however. By using a 6-pulse converter and connecting the filters on the valve side, a simpler transformer connection can be utilized for matching the system voltage and blocking zero-sequence currents from flowing into the ac network. The ungrounded system has a large zero-sequence third order harmonic voltage component, however, appearing on the ungrounded neutrals and on the dc pole voltages, which increases the insulation levels. Despite using only one 6-pulse converter, the same number of series-connected thyristors is needed for the same dc voltage level. 6.4.3  Variable Frequency Transformer (VFT) A technology that competes with HVDC for small capacity back-to-back ties in the 100 MW range was introduced in the early 2000s. A variable frequency transformer (VFT) is a machine rotating at the slip frequency between the two networks with high current between the rotor and stator passing through slip rings. The angle of the rotor is positioned to achieve a scheduled power flow by means of dc drives. The machine is connected to the network via step-up transformers. The reactive power demands of the VFT must be supplied by mechanically switched capacitor banks. Power control is slow due to having to move the inertia of the rotor, so it cannot respond quickly to a trip of generation on one of the isolated networks, for example. It cannot respond rapidly to variations in frequency or phase angle in the network so there will be inadvertent flow for fast variations. The VFT and its transformers provide an impedance, albeit a high one of around 40%, between the two networks. Therefore, the VFT will act as a voltage divider for faults in the network. This means that reactive power will be drained from one network due to a fault in the other. Losses of the VFT are higher than those for conventional HVDC.

6.5  STATION DESIGN AND EQUIPMENT 6.5.1  Thyristor Valves For HVDC conversion, the thyristor valve must perform the following functions: •  Sequentially connect selected ac phases to the dc system per control pulses •  Conduct high current with low forward drop •  Block high voltages in both the forward and reverse directions •  Controllable and self monitoring •  Even voltage distribution and current turn-on •  Damp switching transients •  Fault tolerant and robust •  Accommodate cooling medium in high-voltage environment Thyristor valves are built up of series-connected thyristor modules and saturable reactors to limit valve turn-on di/dt. Each module contains a number of series-connected thyristors mounted on heat sinks. Each thyristor level is paralleled by an RC network for even voltage distribution and damping of commutation overshoots. Voltage measurement across each thyristor level is provided for thyristor monitoring, forward protection, and recovery protection. Each thyristor is coupled to the valve firing control at ground potential by means of two fiber optic links, one to carry valve trigger pulses to the thryistor gate circuit and the other for thyristor monitoring. Two types of thyristor triggering are used, electrically triggered thyristors (ETT) and lighttriggered thyristors (LTT). Both triggering methods require voltage measurement at each thyristor level for monitoring and protection. ETT derives energy for gating from the RC damping circuit and

06_Santoso_Sec06_p0351-0390.indd 368

21/11/17 12:06 PM

DIRECT-CURRENT POWER TRANSMISSION   369 

Thyristor module

Thyristor Single valve

Double valve

Quadruple valve

FIGURE 6-19  12-Pulse quadruple thyristor valve arrangement.

gating is initiated by trigger pulses generated by light-emitting diodes. LTT thyristors have an optical turning-on region integrated on the thyristor wafer itself and use higher-power trigger pulses provided by laser diodes. Each thyristor level is equipped with forward protection which gates the thyristor on if the forward blocking voltage becomes too high due to, for example, absence of a trigger pulse. In inverter operation, during the thyristor recovery time after conduction, the forward protection level can be temporarily lowered. This is called recovery protection. ETT permits recovery protection to be implemented independently at the individual thyristor level (Fig. 6-19). 6.5.2  Converter Transformers Converter transformers are the link between the ac and dc systems. They provide isolation between the two systems, preventing dc voltage and current from reaching the ac system. They also provide the phase displacement necessary for 12-pulse operation through wye- and delta-valve winding connections. Converter transformers have regulating windings with load-tap changers to maintain the ac voltage and converter firing angle within a narrow band across the entire converter operating range. Converter transformer impedance also limits the valve short-circuit levels to within their handling capability. As shown by Eq. 6-12, the 3-phase rating of the converter transformer for a 6-pulse bridge is proportional to UdiON and IdN. Converter transformer losses are those due to the fundamental frequency of load current plus those due to harmonics. The insulation design for converter transformers must take into account the direct voltage stresses superimposed on the normal ac voltage stresses. The ac stresses distribute as it would in a capacitive network while the dc voltage stresses distribute as according to a resistive network. Transformer design depends on the bridge rating and type of converter connection and takes into account spare parts requirements and transport restrictions. For a small back-to-back, for example, a 3-phase bank with double secondary (wye and delta) may be used, that is, nine windings on a single core structure in a common tank for each 12-pulse converter bridge. For larger converters, three, single-phase transformers with double secondary windings may be used for each 12-pulse bridge. For the largest converter ratings where there may be some transport limitations, single-phase, two-winding transformers may be used, that is, six transformers per 12-pulse bridge (Fig. 6-20).

06_Santoso_Sec06_p0351-0390.indd 369

21/11/17 12:06 PM

370  SECTION SIX

6.5.3  Smoothing Reactor A smoothing reactor is connected in series with the converter on the dc side to reduce the harmonic ripple in the dc current as well as reduce transient currents during faults. The smoothing reactor also protects the converter valves from voltage surges coming in on the dc line. The dc smoothing reactor together with shunt-connected dc filters serve to limit telephone interference disturbing currents from flowing on the dc line. Most smoothing reactors are air-core, naturally air-cooled. 6.5.4  AC Filters Converters inject harmonic currents into the ac network. AC filters are used to prevent these harmonic currents from flowing into the ac network impedance causing voltage distortion and induced telephone interference in FIGURE 6-20  Single-phase, threethe audible frequency range. AC filters provide a lowwinding converter transformer for a 3100 MW impedance path to ground at the harmonic frequencies. bipole. The ac filter comprises high-voltage capacitor banks and lower-voltage reactors, resistors, and capacitors, which together form a circuit tuned to the characteristic harmonic(s). The lower-order filters are single- or double-tuned, band-pass filters, while the higher harmonics are often taken care of by high-pass filters (Fig. 6-21). AC harmonic filter design involves calculating the harmonic currents generated and estimating harmonic impedance characteristics of the ac network across the whole range of operating conditions and tolerances. A filter design is then developed to meet the required performance requirements. Filter components are then rated with an adequate margin for the particular application. The most common filter performance criteria are individual and total harmonic voltage distortion, DT and Dh, and weighted telephone interference factor (TIF), calculated as follows: Dh = 100 × Vh /V1  49  DT =  ∑ Dh2   h= 2 

1

2

2  49  V  2  TIF =  ∑  Fh ⋅ h    h=2  V1   1



|z|

−∆f f0 + ∆f Frequency (a)

(b)

(c)

(d)

FIGURE 6-21  (a) Bandpass filter, (b) highpass filter, (c) double bandpass filter, (d) impedance vs. frequency.

06_Santoso_Sec06_p0351-0390.indd 370

21/11/17 12:06 PM

DIRECT-CURRENT POWER TRANSMISSION   371 

6.5.5  DC Filters Filters are required on the dc side for dc to limit interference with communication circuits, which are inductively coupled to the dc line, for example, parallel telephone lines. The design criterion for dc harmonic filters is a function of relating to the flow of harmonic currents at any point along the dc line to the interference with adjacent telephone lines. Significant parameters are the relative location of telephone lines with respect to the dc line, their shielding, the presence of any ground wires, and the earth’s resistivity. This criterion is typically expressed as equivalent disturbing current Ieq. Disturbance levels are lower in normal balanced bipolar mode, due to cancellation effects, than in monopolar mode. DC filter design must take into account the entire dc network with all harmonic sources and operating modes. DC harmonic filters consist of band-pass and high-pass filters connected in shunt outside the smoothing reactor. Many modern HVDC links use a single 12th harmonic band-pass filter on each pole with active filtering for the higher order harmonics (Fig. 6-22). Active filtering consists of measuring the actual dc-side harmonics from the converter and counter-injecting the same amount with opposite polarity.

Control

FIGURE 6-22  Active dc harmonic filter.

6.5.6  Power Line Carrier (PLC) Filters Commutation in HVDC converters discharges stray capacitances and generates electrical noise at the lower end of the power line carrier spectrum (PLC), that is, strongest at 30 to 70 kHz. This noise may pass onto the interconnecting ac and dc lines. Where low-level carriers exist at the lower end of the PLC spectrum, filters may be required. 6.5.7  Valve Cooling System Thyristor valves must be cooled to avoid too high thyristor junction temperatures and to dissipate heat from the valve damping circuits and reactors. Valve cooling is accomplished by a deionized water loop circulating via insulated tuning to the individual thyristor heat sinks. Waste heat is passed to outdoor liquid-to-air coolers. Redundant variable speed pumps and coolers fed from redundant power supplies are used for reliability, availability, and ease of maintenance (Fig. 6-23).

06_Santoso_Sec06_p0351-0390.indd 371

21/11/17 12:06 PM

372  SECTION SIX

Mechanical filters

Thyristor valves

Main pumps

Deaeration vessel

Outdoor coolers N+1

Filters N+1 Deionizer filters

Expansion vessel M Motor valves Replenishment system

FIGURE 6-23  Closed-loop water cooling system.

6.5.8  Reliability and Availability To meet high levels of reliability and availability plus facilitate ease of maintenance, redundancy is commonly used in HVDC converter station design. Typical guaranteed unavailability values are 0.5% for forced outages and 1.0% for scheduled outages. Redundant series-connected thyristor levels are used in the valves. The failure mode is short circuit of the thyristor, so operation can continue until a convenient time for restoring full redundancy. Redundant cooling pumps and cooler units are used. Use of redundant control and protection systems is often used. For major main circuit components, spare parts are provided at site to minimize the time for replacement.

6.6  VOLTAGE SOURCE CONVERTER–BASED HVDC TRANSMISSION 6.6.1  System Characteristics Conventional HVDC transmission employs line-commutated, current-source converters with thyristor valves. These converters require a relatively strong synchronous voltage source in order to commutate. The conversion process demands reactive power from filters, shunt banks, or series capacitors, which are an integral part of the converter station. Any surplus or deficit in reactive power must be accommodated by the ac system. This difference in reactive power needs to be kept within a given band to keep the ac voltage within the desired tolerance. The weaker the system or the further away from generation, the tighter the reactive power exchange must be to stay within the desired voltage tolerance. HVDC transmission using voltage source converters (VSCs) with pulse-width modulation (PWM) was introduced as HVDC Light® in the late 1990s by ABB. These VSC-based systems are force-commutated with insulated-gate bipolar transistor (IGBT) valves and solid-dielectric, extruded HVDC cables (Table 6-2).

06_Santoso_Sec06_p0351-0390.indd 372

21/11/17 12:06 PM

DIRECT-CURRENT POWER TRANSMISSION   373 

TABLE 6-2  HVDC VSC Projects Listing Project

Year Power rating, commissioned MW

Hellsjon Gotland Light Direct Link Tjaerborg Cross Sound Cable Murraylink Troll Offshore Estlink

DC voltage, kV

1997 3 ± 10 1999 50 ± 80 2000 3 × 60 ± 80 2000 7.2 ± 9 2002 330 ± 150 2002 200 ± 150 2005 2 × 42 ± 60 2006 350 ± 150

Cable, km 10 70 65 4.4 40 180 70 105

Location Sweden Sweden Australia Denmark United States Australia Norway Estonia/Finland

HVDC transmission and reactive power compensation with VSC technology has certain attributes which can be beneficial to overall system performance. VSC converter technology can rapidly control both active and reactive power independently of one another. Reactive power can also be controlled at each terminal independent of the dc transmission voltage level. This control capability gives total flexibility to place converters anywhere in the ac network since there is no restriction on minimum network short-circuit capacity. Forced commutation with VSC even permits black start, that is, the converter can be used to synthesize a balanced set of 3-phase voltages like a virtual synchronous generator. The dynamic support of the ac voltage at each converter terminal improves the voltage stability and increases the transfer capability of the sending and receiving end ac systems. 6.6.2 Applications The aforementioned attributes of VSC-based HVDC transmission makes it especially suitable in certain applications. These applications are summarized as follows: Underground Cable.  HVDC cable systems do not face the distance limitations or suffer the higher losses of ac cable systems. Therefore, long-distance HVDC cable transmission is possible. Extruded HVDC cables are lighter, more flexible, and easier to splice than the mass-impregnated, oil-paper cables (MIND) used for conventional HVDC transmission, thus making them more conducive for land cable applications where transport limitations can drive up costs. The lower cost cable installations made possible by the extruded HVDC cables makes long-distance underground transmission economically feasible for use in areas with ROW constraints. Power Supply to Isolated Load.  Forced-commutation, dynamic voltage control, and black-start capability allow VSC HVDC transmission to serve isolated loads on islands over long-distance submarine cables without any need for running expensive local generation. Offshore.  The VSC transmission is compact and can feed production or transportation loads on offshore oil or gas platforms from shore. This can eliminate the need for more expensive, less efficient, or higher emission offshore power production. The VSC converters can operate at variable frequency to more efficiently drive large compressor or pumping loads using high-voltage motors. Asynchronous Interconnections.  Interconnections between asynchronous networks are often at their periphery where the networks tend to be weak relative to the desired power transfer. The dynamic voltage support and improved voltage stability offered by VSC-based converters permits higher power transfers without as much need for ac system reinforcement. The VSC converters do not suffer commutation failures allowing fast recoveries from nearby ac faults. Economic power schedules, which reverse power direction, can be made without any restrictions since there is no minimum power or current restrictions.

06_Santoso_Sec06_p0351-0390.indd 373

21/11/17 12:06 PM

374  SECTION SIX

Urban Infeed.  Power supply for large cities depends on local generation and power import capability. Local generation is often older and less efficient than newer units located remotely. Often, however, the older, less-efficient units located near the city center must be dispatched outof-merit because they must be run for reliable voltage support or inadequate transmission. New transmission into large cities is difficult to site due to ROW and land-use constraints. Compact VSC-based underground transmission circuits can be placed on existing dual-use ROW to bring in power as well as provide voltage support, allowing a more economical power supply without compromising reliability. The receiving terminal acts like a virtual generator delivering power and voltage regulation. Stations are compact and housed mainly indoors making siting in urban areas somewhat easier. Outlet Transmission for Large-Scale Wind Generation.  Large remote wind generation arrays require a collector system, reactive power support, and outlet transmission. Transmission for wind generation must often traverse scenic or environmentally sensitive areas or bodies of water. The VSC-based HVDC transmission allows efficient use of long-distance land or submarine cables and provides reactive support to the wind generation complex. Multiterminal Systems.  The VSC HVDC transmission reverses power through reversal of current direction rather than polarity. This makes it easier to reverse power at an intermediate tap independently of the main power flow direction since voltage polarity reversal is not required. Conventional HVDC transmission requires switching for converter opposite pole connection or polarity reversal. 6.6.3  VSC Station Configuration and Design HVDC transmission systems based on VSC converter technology are configured as shown in Fig. 6-24. The transmission circuit consists of a bipolar two-wire HVDC system with converters connected pole-to-pole. The dc capacitors are used to provide a dc voltage source. The dc capacitors are grounded at their electrical center point to establish the earth reference potential for the transmission system. There is no earth return operation. The converters are coupled to the ac system through ac phase reactors and power transformers. Harmonic filters are located between the phase reactors and Converter valves DC capacitors (voltage sources)

Cables Phase reactors AC harmonic filters AC transformers, breakers/disconnectors FIGURE 6-24  VSC-based HVDC.

06_Santoso_Sec06_p0351-0390.indd 374

21/11/17 12:06 PM

DIRECT-CURRENT POWER TRANSMISSION   375 

UDC_P1

IDC_P1 +Ud

U_PCC Q1

Power transformer

I_VSC Converter reactor

U_AC PLC/RI filter

Auxiliary power

AC filter

−Ud Enclosure

UDC_P2

IDC_P2

Converter building

FIGURE 6-25  Simplified SLD for VSC station.

power transformers. Therefore, the transformers are exposed to no dc voltage stresses or harmonics loading allowing use of ordinary power transformers. A simplified single line diagram for a two-level VSC converter station is shown in Fig. 6-25. Principal station components are described in the following paragraphs. Power Transformer.  The transformer is an ordinary single- or 3-phase power transformer with load tap changer. The secondary voltage, that is, the filter bus voltage, can be controlled with the tap changer to achieve the maximum active and reactive power, both consumption and generation, from the converter. The tap changer is located on the secondary side, which has the largest voltage swing, and also to ensure that the ratio between the line winding and a possible tertiary winding is fixed. The current in the transformer windings contains hardly any harmonics and is not exposed to any dc voltage. In order to maximize the active power transfer, the converter can generate a low frequency zero-sequence voltage (252 V switch all stages out %V for %V > 100) NT = total number of system customers

07_Santoso_Sec07_p0391-0480.indd 472

21/11/17 4:27 PM

Power Distribution   473 

It is inevitable that more and more utilities will adopt some of these so-called power quality indices as their customers demand even better power for their sensitive loads. In these days of reduced budgets, when utilities are being required to increase reliability, some of the techniques which cost very little or even nothing to achieve the goal of greater power quality are as follows: •  Purchase better-quality equipment. •  Shorten lead lengths on arresters. •  Use open-tie protection on underground systems. •  Use higher fuse ratings for transformers and laterals. •  Increase the number of homes per transformer. •  Pay attention to proper grounding. •  Use predictive reliability computer analysis to optimize designs.

7.25  EUROPEAN PRACTICES In a time of deregulation and privatization, it has become common practice for a utility in one part of the world to own a utility in another country. While generation and transmission have relatively similar practices in all parts of the globe, distribution practices are considerably different depending on whether the system is based on American or European practices and standards. The following is a brief comparison of the two systems to familiarize engineers with the fact that in many ways distribution system operation and philosophy are so varied that direct comparison becomes extremely difficult. Voltage Levels.  In the United States, primary voltage levels can be just about anything. Figure 7-53 shows some of the more common voltage levels in the United States, with 13.8 kV probably being the most popular for the distribution primary. European voltage levels are much more standardized. Thus 30, 20, and 10 kV are used throughout the world where European standards are practiced.

Europe EHV 400 kV Generator

HV 36 kV to 300 kV

MV 30 kV 20 kV 10 kV Consumer

345 kV 500 kV 765 kV

34.5 kV 69 kV 115 kV 138 kV 230 kV

34.5 kV 24.9 kV 13.8 kV 13.2 kV 12.47 kV

United States FIGURE 7-53  European and U.S. primary voltage levels.

30-kV/10-kV Distribution.  Figure 7-54 is a typical European system design, showing a unigrounded system at the 10-kV level where most of the distribution loads are supplied. This voltage level tends to be radial but can be networked. The 30-kV system, on the other hand, tends to be looped and is a 3-wire delta system sometimes using a grounding transformer to facilitate overcurrent protection.

07_Santoso_Sec07_p0391-0480.indd 473

21/11/17 4:27 PM

474  SECTION SEVEN

132 kV 30 kV • No fuses • Clearing time 5 to 8 cycles • Distance (sometimes) and overcurrent Zone 1 — 5 to 8 cycles Zone 2 — 30 to 33 cycles

Zig-zag resistance grounded

30 kV 10 kV Uniground

FIGURE 7-54  European distribution system grounding practices.

Residential Distribution.  Table 7-25 illustrates some of the major differences in philosophy between the two designs which makes comparison difficult. The major difference is that European practice tends to use 3-phase transformers with a much larger kVA rating to supply many more homes. Higher-density loads and higher secondary voltages are part of the reason for this difference. Distributed Resources (DR) on the Distribution System.  Distributed resources is a term which includes a variety of small generation technologies, including fuel cells, photovoltaics, microturbines, reciprocating engines, wind turbines, etc., with and without battery storage, which could be installed on the distribution system. In addition, many of these resources are becoming more modular in design, so that manufacturing economies of scale are driving their costs down. Generally, distributed resources are small in size, ranging from less than 1 kW to a few hundred kWs. The practical size limit for generators on the distribution system is in the area of around 35 MW. The justification for introducing these newer technologies include the renewable resource aspect and lower environmental impact along with niche opportunities in particular regions when one or more of these technologies might excel. It is claimed that more DR means less T&D investment. Without storage, many DR technologies provide an additional energy source but no demand or investment savings. Even then improved reliability is often touted as a benefit, but this needs to be properly evaluated in the context of what technology is being discussed. Without careful engineering, a particular MW level of DR penetration can adversely affect the distribution system.

TABLE 7-25  1-Phase vs. 3-Phase Residential Distribution

Difference

United States

Distribution transformers Single phase, 25–100 kVA  typical Secondary voltage 120/240 V, 3-wire Service voltage 120/240 V Secondaries/transformer 1 Homes/transformer 4–6

07_Santoso_Sec07_p0391-0480.indd 474

Europe Three phase, 300–500 kVA 400 wye/230 V, 4-wire 230 V 5–10 100–200

21/11/17 4:27 PM

Power Distribution   475 

Distribution designs are based on a number of principles that can be upset by DR including: •  Most distribution circuits are radial in nature with power flow from the substation to the loads. •  Voltage control with line drop compensation through LTC transformers or voltage regulators presumes a dropoff of load and voltage as one proceeds from the substation and, further, that power flow is from the source side to the load side. •  Most overcurrent protective device selection and coordination is based on higher fault current magnitudes at the substation and declining fault current magnitudes toward the end of the circuit. •  Reclosing intervals of circuit breakers and reclosers and reclosing practice in general is based on reasonable fault clearing times and the expectation that the reclosing device will close into a deenergized line. •  Utility restoration practices are based on having a limited number of known sources controlled by switches and other protective devices with known states (energized or deenergized). •  Harmonics are limited to larger known sources and distributed smaller sources. •  Most 3-phase transformer connections on distribution are grounded-wye. With the arrival of distribution resources, many of these normal conditions now change, including •  Bidirectional power flow and fault current flow along portions of the circuit. •  Load magnitude dropping off along the feeder and then reaching a step change at the DR location(s) and dropping off beyond that point. •  Fault current profile showing the increase in total fault current due to added generation as well as the bidirectional fault current flows from the DRs depending on fault location. •  Automatic reclosing for utility circuit breakers and reclosers will have to be supervised with some form of voltage check and possible time delay. An alternative is to use transfer-tripping schemes to assure that the DR is off-line before reclosing takes place. •  Many DR advocates seek a delta-wye connection. Under backfeed conditions, a single-lineto-ground fault on the primary will overstress the surge arresters on the unfaulted phases. •  Photovoltaics and many small wind generators are dc machines that rely on invertors to produce an ac waveform and also produce high harmonic content. Induction-type machines draw reactive power from the power system. The combination introduces both voltage drop and power quality concerns. IEEE Std 1547-2003, Standard for Interconnecting Distributed Resources with Electric Power Systems, was developed to provide a uniform standard for the interconnection of distributed resources with electric power systems. It provides requirements relevant to the performance, operation, testing, safety considerations, and maintenance of the interconnection. Follow-on standards projects to Std 1547 are intended to address the different DR technologies and engineering concerns about the interconnection issues. A logical concern is—at what level of distributed resources does one have to be concerned with some of these potential issues becoming genuine problems? Unfortunately, we do not yet have an answer to that question.

7.26 BIBLIOGRAPHY 7.26.1  Books for General Reference Blume, L. F., Boyajian, A., Camilli, G., Lennox, T. C., Minneci, S., and Montsinger, V. M.: Transformer Engineering, Wiley, 1951. Burke, James J.: Power Distribution Engineering: Fundamentals and Applications, Marcel Dekker, 1994. Edison Electric Institute: Underground Systems Reference Book, Edison Electric Institute, 1957.

07_Santoso_Sec07_p0391-0480.indd 475

21/11/17 4:27 PM

476  SECTION SEVEN

Grainger, J. J. and Stevenson, W. D.: Power System Analysis, McGraw-Hill, 1994. Greenwood, A.: Electrical Transients in Power Systems, Wiley-Interscience, 1971. Padullaparti, H. V., Nguyen, Q., and Santoso, S.: Advances in volt-var control approaches in utility distribution systems, IEEE Power and Energy Society General Meeting, Boston, MA, 2016. Lewis, W. W.: Protection of Transmission Systems against Lightning, Wiley, 1950. Pansini, A. I.: Electrical Distribution Engineering, McGraw-Hill, 1983. Peterson, H. A.: Transients in Power Systems, Dover Publications, 1951. Short, T. A.: Electrical Power Distribution Handbook, CRC Press, 2004. Thue, W. A.: Electrical Power Cable Engineering, Marcel Dekker, 1999.

7.26.2  Manufacturers’ Publications Distribution Data Book, GET-1008M, General Electric Company, 1980. Distribution System Feeder Overcurrent Protection, GET-6450, General Electric Company, 1977. Distribution Transformer Guide, ABB, October 1991. Electric Utility Engineering Reference Book—Distribution Systems, Westinghouse Electric Corporation, vol. 3, 1965. Electrical Distribution—System Protection, Cooper Power Systems, 3rd ed., 1990. Electrical Transmission and Distribution Reference Book, Westinghouse Electric Corporation, 1964. Getting Down to Earth, Biddle Instruments, 1982. Overhead Conductor Manual, Southwire Company, 1994. Power Cable Manual, Southwire Company, 1997.

7.26.3  IEEE Transactions (Formerly AIEE) System Bankus, H. M. and Gerngross, J. E.: Unbalanced Loading and Voltage Unbalance on Three-Phase Distribution Transformer Banks, 1954, vol. 73, pt. III, p. 367. Bankus, H. M. and Gerngross, J. E.: Combined Single-Phase and Three-Phase Loading of Open-Delta Transformer Banks, Power Apparatus and Systems, February 1958, pp. 1337–1343. Easley, J. H. and Shula, W. E.: Cost and Reliability Evaluation of Four Underground Primary Distribution Feeder Plans, Transactions Paper, Conference Record—1974 Underground Transmission and Distribution Conference, 74-CH0832-6-PWR, pp. 436–443. Mitchell, C. F., Sweeney, J. O., and Cantwell, J. L.: An Economic Analysis of Distribution Transformer Application, Power Apparatus and Systems, December 1959, pp. 1196–1202. Nickel, D. L.: Distribution Transformer Loss Evaluation. I—Proposed Techniques, Power Apparatus and Systems, vol. PAS-100, no. 2, February 1981, pp. 788–797. Ward, D. J., Griffith, D. C., and Burke, J. J.: Power Quality—Two Different Perspectives, Trans. on Power Delivery, vol. 5, no. 3, July 1990, pp. 1501–1513.

System Planning Anderson, A. S. and Thiemann, V. A.: Distribution Secondary Conductor Economics, Power Apparatus and Systems, February 1960, pp. 1839–1843. Blake, D. K.: Some Observations on the Economic Benefits in Going from One System Voltage Level to a Higher System Voltage Level, Power Apparatus and Systems, vol. 71, pt. III, pp. 585–592. Campbell, H. E., Ender, R. C., Gangel, M. W., and Talley, V. C.: Economic Analysis of Distribution Systems, Power Apparatus and Systems, August 1960, pp. 423–443. Jones, A. I., Smith, B. E., and Ward, D. J.: Considerations for Higher Voltage Distribution, Trans. on Power Delivery, April 1992, pp. 782–788. Rudasill, C. L. and Ward, D. J.: Distribution Underground Cable Evaluation, Trans. on Power Delivery, July 1997, vol. 12, no. 3, pp. 1398–1403.

07_Santoso_Sec07_p0391-0480.indd 476

21/11/17 4:27 PM

Power Distribution   477 

Sarkas, R. H. and Thacker, H. B.: Distribution System Load Characteristics and Their Use in Planning and Design, Power Apparatus and Systems, August 1957, pp. 564–573. Schultz, N. R.: Distribution Primary Feeder I 2R Losses, Power Apparatus and Systems, March/April 1978, vol. PAS-97, no. 2, pp. 603–609. Smith, J. A.: Determination of Economical Distribution Substation Size, Power Apparatus and Systems, October 1961, pp. 663–670. Smith, J. A.: Economics of Primary Distribution Voltages of 4.16 through 34.5 kV, Power Apparatus and Systems, October 1961, pp. 670–683. Van Wormer, F. C.: Some Aspects of Distribution Load Area Geometry, Power Apparatus and Systems, December 1954, pp. 1343–1349. Webler, R. M., Gangel, M. W., Carter, G. K., Zeman, A. L., and Ender, R. C.: Secondary Distribution System Planning for Load Growth, Power Apparatus and Systems, December 1963, pp. 908–927.

Overvoltage and Overvoltage Protection Burke, J. J., Sakshaug, E. C., and Smith, S. L.: The Application of Gapless Arresters on Underground Distribution Systems, Trans. on Power Apparatus and Systems, March 1981, vol. 100, pp. 1234–1243. Clayton, J. M. and Hileman, A. R.: A Method of Estimating Lightning Performance of Distribution Lines, Power Apparatus and Systems, 1954, vol. 73, pt. III, p. 953. Headrickson, P. E., Johnson, I. B., and Schultz, N. R.: Abnormal Voltage Conditions Produced by Open Conductors on Three-Phase Circuits Using Shunt Capacitors, Power Apparatus and Systems, 1953, vol. 72, pt. III, p. 1183. Hopkinson, R. H.: Better Surge Protection Extends URD Cable Life, Trans. on Power Apparatus and Systems, October 1984, vol. 103, pp. 2827–2836. Hopkinson, R. H.: Ferroresonance during Single-Phase Switching of Three-Phase Distribution Transformer Banks, Power Apparatus and Systems, Apri1 1965, vol. PAS-4, pp. 289–293. Discussion, June 1965, pp. 514– 517. Kershaw, S. S., Gaibrois, G. L., and Stump, K. B.: Applying Metal Oxide Surge Arresters on Distribution Systems, Trans. on Power Delivery, January 1989, vol. 4, no.1, pp. 301–307. Mancao, R. T., Short, T. A., and Burke, J. J.: Application of MOVs in the Distribution Environment, Trans. on Power Delivery, January 1994, vol. 9, no. 1, pp. 293–305. Sakshaug, E. C., Kresge, J. S., and Miske, S. A., Jr.: A New Concept in Station Arrester Design, Trans. on Power Apparatus and Systems, March/April 1977, vol. 96, p. 647. Short, T. A.: Distribution Lightning Performance Calculations, IEEE Computer Applications in Power, November 1991. Task Force Report-Investigation and Evaluation of Lightning Protective Methods for Distribution Circuits— Part I, Model Study and Analysis; Part II, Applications and Evaluation, Power Apparatus and Systems, August 1969, vol. PAS-88, no.8, pp. 1232–1247. Working Group of Surge Protective Devices Committee: Voltage Rating Investigation for Application of Lightning Arresters on Distribution Systems, Trans. on Power Apparatus and Systems, May/June 1972, vol. 91, no. 3, pp. 1067–1074.

Overcurrent and Overcurrent Protection Arndt, R. H., Koch, R. E., and Schultz, N. R.: Concept Alternatives and Application Considerations in the Use of Current-Limiting Fuses for Transformer Protection, Transactions Paper, Conference Record—1974 Underground Transmission and Distribution Conference, 74-CH0832-6-PWR, pp. 259–267. Auer, G. G., Ender, R. C., and Wylie, R. A.: Digital Calculation of Sequence Impedances and Fault Currents for Radial Primary Distribution Circuits, Power Apparatus and Systems, February 1961, pp. 1264–1277. Burke, J. J. and Lawrence, D. J.: Characteristics of Fault Currents on Distribution Systems, January 1984, PAS vol. 103, no. 1, pp. 1–6. Harner, R. H.: Secondary-Fault Recovery Voltage Investigation, Power Apparatus and Systems, February 1968, vol. PAS-87, no.2, pp. 463–487. IEEE Tutorial Course on Application and Coordination of Reclosers, Sectionalizers, and Fuses, Publication 80 EHO157-8-PWR, 1980.

07_Santoso_Sec07_p0391-0480.indd 477

21/11/17 4:27 PM

478  SECTION SEVEN

Voltage Regulation and Kilovar Supply Barger, J. V. and Smith, D. R.: Impedance and Circulating Current Calculations for UD Multi-Wire Neutral Circuits, Power Apparatus and Systems, May–June 1972, vol. PAS-91, no.3, pp. 992–1006. Grainger, J. J. and Lee, S. H.: Optimum Size and Location of Shunt Capacitors for Reduction of Losses on Distribution Feeders, Power Apparatus and Systems, March 1981, vol. PAS-100, no. 3, pp. 1105–1118. Johnson, I. B., Schultz, A. J., Schultz, N. R., and Shores, R. B.: Some Fundamentals on Capacitance Switching, Power Apparatus and Systems, August 1955, pp. 727–736. Neagle, N. M. and Samson, D. R.: Loss Reduction from Capacitors Installed on Primary Feeders, Power Apparatus and Systems, October 1956, pp. 950–959.

Grounding Application Guide and Methods of Substation Grounding, AIEE Group on Substation Grounding Practices, 1954, vol. 73, pt. m, p. 271. Mancao, R. T., Myers, A., and Burke, J. J.: The Effect of Distribution System Grounding on MOV Selection, Trans. on Power Delivery, January 1993, vol. 8, p. 1.

7.26.4  Standards and Standards Publications American National Standards Institute (ANSI) C2-2012, National Electrical Safety Code. ANSI C84.1-2016, Voltage Ratings for Electric Power Systems and Equipment (60-Hz). ANSI/ICEA S-94-649 Concentric Neutral Cables Rated 5-46 kV, 2004. ANSI/ICEA S-97-682 Utility Shielded Power Cable Rated 5-46 kV, 2006. IEEE Std 835-1994 (R2006), Power Cable Ampacity Tables. NEC 2011, NFPA 70, National Electric 01 Code.

7.26.5 Periodicals System Burke, J. J.: Utility Characteristics Affecting Sensitive Industrial Loads, Power Quality Assurance Magazine, November–December 1996. Gangel, M. W. and Propst, R. F.: Investigating Distribution Transformer Load Characteristics, Distribution Magazine, July 1961, p. 6.

System Planning Brown, P. G., Propst, H. R., and Tice, J B.: Unity Power Factor Is Essential to Emergency Kilowatt Transportation, Electric Forum Magazine, Fall 1975, p. 10. Campbell, H. E.: Serving Critical Loads, Distribution Magazine, 1966, 4th quarter, p. 9. Hayes, R. H. and Hill, O. L.: Progress in Remote Line Switch Control, Transmission and Distribution, June 1975, p. 52. Van Wormer, F. C.: Design and Operation of Spot Networks, Distribution Magazine, 1966, 2d/3d quarter p. 5; 1966, 4th quarter, p. 19.

Overvoltage and Overvoltage Protection Auer, G. G.: Basic Considerations in Lighting Protection of URD Systems, Distribution Magazine, April 1968, p. 16. Barker, P. P. and Burke, J. J.: Protecting Underground Distribution Systems, Electric Light and Power, April 1991.

Overcurrent and Overcurrent Protection Howard, S.B. and Stroebed, R. W.: Can Single-Phase Cutouts Be Applied to Three-Phase Circuits, Distribution Magazine, 1964, 2d quarter, p. 4. Lasseter, J. A.: Burndown Tests on Bare Conductors, Electric Light and Power, December 15, 1956, p. 94.

07_Santoso_Sec07_p0391-0480.indd 478

21/11/17 4:27 PM

Power Distribution   479 

Voltage Regulation and Kilovar Supply Gangel, M. W.: Compensator Settings Made Easier, Distribution Magazine, pt. 1, April 1960, p. 22; pt. 2, July 1960, p. 18. Schultz, N. R.: Calculating Voltage Drop and Power Loss, Distribution Magazine, January 1969, p. 11.

Underground Systems Van Wormer, F. C.: Underground Distribution Systems for Residential Areas, Distribution Magazine, pt. 1, January 1959, p. 3; pt. 2, Apri1 1959, p. 12; pt. 3, April 1960, p. 16; pt. 4, Apri1 1962, p. 3; pt. 5, Apri1 1963, p. 22.

7.26.6  Miscellaneous Publications System Beaty, H. W.: 10th Annual T&D Construction Survey, Electrical World, September 1, 1975, pp. 35–42. Dudas, J. and Fletcher, C.: Underground Cable Specification Advances and Installation Practices of the Largest Investor Owned Utilities, Fall Insulated Conductors Committee Meeting, 2004. Gangel, M. W. and Propst, R. F.: Transformer Characteristics Correlated to Loading: Power Distribution Conference, University of Texas, October 1963. RUS Specifications and Drawings for 12.5/7.2 kV Line Construction 5/83, Bulletin 50-3, 2005. RUS Specification and Drawings for 34.5/19.9 kV Distribution Line Construction (11–86), Bulletin 50-4. RUS Specifications and Drawings for Underground Electric Distribution (3–90), Bulletin 50-6, 2000. RUS Specifications and Drawings for Underground Cable Installation, Doc. 345-152, Form 515d, 1989.

System Planning Campbell, H. E.: Today and Tomorrow, Underground Distribution to High Rise Buildings, IEEE Conference Record-Special Technical Conference on Underground Distribution, 31C35, September 1966, pp. 223–239. Crawford, J. W. and Hamner, F. G.: Demand and Diversity Characteristics of Residential Loads, Southeastern Electric Exchange, Engineering and Operating Conference, Apri1 1963. Load Growth Forces Higher Voltages, Electrical World, June 1, 1974, pp. 154–163.

Overcurrent Protection Beaty, H. W.: Special Report-Switching and Overcurrent Protection for Distribution Systems, Electrical World, April 1, 1974, pp. 41–56. Campbell, H. E.: Implication of Increased Short-Circuit Duty on Residential Distribution Systems, American Power Conference, vol. 35, 1973, pp. 1098–1104. Underground Systems. IEEE Conference Record-1974 Underground Transmission and Distribution, 74CHO832-6-PWR and 74CHO832-6-PWR (SUP.), April 1–5, 1974. IEEE Conference Record-1991 Transmission and Distribution Conference, 911CH3070-0, September 1991. Lewis, S. M.: URD Survey Report, Transmission and Distribution, July 1973, pp. 88–95. Specifications and Drawings for Underground Electric Distribution, RUS Bulletin 50-6, Rural Utilities Service, U.S. Department of Agriculture, March 1990. Underground Corrosion Control Guide, NRECA Research Project, August 1982.

07_Santoso_Sec07_p0391-0480.indd 479

21/11/17 4:27 PM

This page intentionally left blank

07_Santoso_Sec07_p0391-0480.indd 480

21/11/17 4:27 PM

81

SMART GRIDS AND MICROGRIDS Anurag K. Srivastava Associate Professor, School of Electrical Engineering and Computer Science, Washington State University, Pullman, Washington

Sayonsom Chanda Research Engineer, Idaho National Lab, Idaho Falls, Idaho

Nikos Hatziargyriou Professor of Power Systems, School of Electrical and Computer Engineering, National Technical University of Athens, Athens, Greece, and CEO, Hellenic Electricity Distribution Network Operator SA (HEDNO)

Jianhui Wang Department of Electrical Engineering, Southern Methodist University, Dallas, Texas, and Energy Systems Division, Argonne National Laboratory, Argonne, Illinois

8.1 INTRODUCTION TO SMART GRIDS AND MICROGRIDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . 483 8.1.1 Smart Grid System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 483 8.1.2 Microgrid System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 485 8.2 SMART GRID FUNDAMENTALS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 486 8.2.1 Smart Grid Domains. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 486 8.2.2 Enabling Technologies for Smart Grid. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 487 8.2.3 Implementation of Smart Grid. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 488 8.2.4 Cyber-Physical Interdependencies. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 493 8.3 SMART GRID INFRASTRUCTURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 494 8.3.1 Smart Meter Infrastructure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 494 8.3.2 Synchrophasor Infrastructure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 496 8.3.3 Distribution Automation Infrastructure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 497 8.4 CONTROL AND OPERATION OF SMART GRIDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 498 8.4.1 Demand Response. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 498 8.4.2 Distributed Control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 500 8.4.3 Distributed Energy Resources. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 501 8.4.4 Information Technology and Data Management. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 501 8.5 MICROGRID FUNDAMENTALS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 502 8.5.1 Islanding in a Microgrid. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 502 8.5.2 Black Start in Islanded Microgrids. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 504 8.5.3 Anti-Islanding and Islanding Control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 504 8.6 CONTROL AND OPERATION OF MICROGRIDS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 506 8.6.1 Centralized Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 507 8.6.2 Hierarchical Control Levels. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 507 481

08_Santoso_Sec08_p0481-0522.indd 481

23/11/17 2:59 PM

482  SECTION EIGHT



8.6.3 Inner Control Loops. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 508 8.6.4 Primary Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 509 8.6.5 Secondary Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 510 8.6.6 Tertiary Control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 511 8.6.7 Operation of Multiple Microgrids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 512 8.7 SMART GRID DEPLOYMENT PROJECTS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 513 8.7.1 Duke Energy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 513 8.7.2 Pacific Gas and Electric Company. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 513 8.7.3 State Grid Corporation of China (SGCC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 513 8.8 SMART GRID DEMONSTRATION PROJECTS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 513 8.8.1 Pacific Northwest Smart Grid Demonstration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 514 8.8.2 Southern California Edison Company. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 515 8.8.3 NSTAR Electric and Gas Corporation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 515 8.8.4 The Boeing Company. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 515 8.8.5 National Rural Electric Cooperative Association. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 515 8.8.6 GRID4EU. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 516 8.8.7 Internationalization of Smart Grid Goals. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 516 8.9 TRENDS IN SMART GRID DEPLOYMENT AND FUTURE OUTLOOK . . . 516 8.9.1 Distribution Automation Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 517 8.9.2 Synchrophasor Applications Projects. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 517 8.9.3 Microgrid Deployment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 518 8.9.4 Smart Grid Vision. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 518 8.10 REFERENCES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 519

Advancements in computational and communication technologies enabled the power grid to be “smart” with enhanced situational awareness, better decision support, distributed intelligence, and automated response. The large penetration of distributed energy resources (DERs) and push for energy security require a shift from traditional centralized control architecture and passive distribution system to a hierarchical and distributed control with active distribution systems and microgrids [1]. Based on needs of today’s economy and “prosumer” expectations, a modern power grid needs to have the following characteristics : •  Managing the impact of variability in power generation from renewable resources and facilitating power transfers across regions •  Informed and engaged consumers capable of participating in demand response and having ownership over small-scale distributed energy resources •  An increased emphasis on power quality, while giving consumers a wide variety of price options to choose their services from. •  Improved and more secure data acquisition of system states and focus on preventive control to minimize impact to consumers •  Automatic event detection and response to problems •  Resilience to unpredictable events and uncertainties, natural disasters, and rapid restoration capabilities •  Support higher penetration of renewable energy and energy security •  Support high reliability and resiliency using microgrid infrastructure The traditional vertical power system infrastructure needs to be collectively upgraded in order to make it suitable for existing and future needs. The next-generation power grid needs to be more robust, more reliable, and more resilient with active distribution systems and microgrids. In the following subsections, we analyze smart grids and microgrids in depth, and elaborate on key aspects pertaining to their development and deployment across the world.

08_Santoso_Sec08_p0481-0522.indd 482

23/11/17 2:59 PM

SMART GRIDS AND MICROGRIDS   483 

8.1  INTRODUCTION TO SMART GRIDS AND MICROGRIDS 8.1.1  Smart Grid System Smart grid is the name given to an evolved power system, engineered and managed to keep up with ongoing changes in the electric grid given renewable integration, environmental impact, active distribution system, and enhanced uncertainty. A series of renovations and paradigm shifts in technologies related to power generation, transmission, and distribution control will contribute to the eventual emergence of smart grids across all nations. Since smart grids are essentially subjected to constant evolution and developments, a working definition of smart grid should be attributed by: •  Secure communication among connected components of power system, as needed for system operation and control supported by adoption of advanced networking and computational solutions •  Adaptability to new operating conditions •  Automation, self healing capabilities, and resilience of the power grid •  Environment friendliness and ability to support distributed renewable resources •  Curtail peak demands and defer investments in large-scale power generation units •  Support demand response, distributed intelligence, and customer choice According to the European Technology Platform on Smart Grids [2], a smart grid is “an electricity network that can intelligently integrate the actions of all users connected to it generators, consumers and those that do both in order to efficiently deliver sustainable, economic and secure electricity supplies.” Smart grid leverages innovative products, modern computing algorithms, data analytics, and real-time services together with intelligent measurement, monitoring, control, communication, and self-healing technologies to (1) make information available to customers about their choice of services; (2) enable customers to participate in optimizing demand and supply in the energy grid; (3) enhance reliability of operation of generators across a broad spectrum of sizes and types; (4) minimize impact on the environment caused due to operation of the power grid; and (5) improve system security, resiliency, and reliability. The U.S. Department of Energy (DOE) has envisioned smart grids to have several components, as shown in Fig. 8-1 [3]. In order to enable all the aforementioned attributes, real-time measurements, and situation assessment will play a critical role in their operation.

Real-Time measurements

Renewable integration

Distribution automation

Energy efficiency

PCC Generation Transmission automation

Demand participation

System coordination and system awareness

Utility controlled Subject to customer participation

Microgrid

Smart appliance & electric vehicles

Distributed generation & battery storage

FIGURE 8-1  Smart grid architecture.

08_Santoso_Sec08_p0481-0522.indd 483

23/11/17 2:59 PM

484  SECTION EIGHT

According to [1], the smart grid architecture can be grouped into distinct sub-systems, which mutually interact with each other by means of communication links and other information flow mechanisms (such as optimization signals). Smart devices for monitoring and control form part of the generation components’ real-time information processes. In a smooth functioning smart grid, the sub-systems must be integrated in the operation of both primary energy delivery resources (such as sub-stations), as well as DERs closer to points of consumption. Along with the interface, a smart grid will comprise: 1. Transmission Subsystem Component.  It is important to include real-time measurement and computation tools to perform dynamic optimal power flow analysis, state estimation, and stability assessment. Real-time monitoring based on synchrophasors from phasor measurement units (PMUs), and communication technologies are the most important and widely used tools for developing smart transmission functionality. 2. Distribution Subsystem Component.  At the distribution level, intelligent sup­port schemes are required in the smart grid that can actively monitor automation using smart meters, communication between consumers and utility control, energy management components, and advanced metering infrastructure (AMI). Distribution system automation refers to the ability to the grid to expedite and automate fault detection, self-heal from a large number of faults and disturbances, enable voltage optimization and intelligent load transfer, automate billing, and keeping the consumers informed about real-time pricing, and facilitating demand response [4]. The distribution system should also be able to isolate the consumers in case it observes large disturbances in the power grid, and continue to supply its consumers using local on-site power generation or storage tools. Such distribution systems that is coupled to the main transmission grid at normal times (using at special connection point called “point of common coupling” or PCC) and can strategically isolate itself is broadly referred to as a microgrid. Other features of a microgrid will be discussed in detail in later subsections. In Fig. 8-1, a microgrid has been shown within the dashed lines. 3. Demand Subsystem Component.  Tools are needed to facilitate demand-side management to disseminate service information to the consumers for demand response, aggregate customer-side power generation, and aid in deferring the use of expensive generators. 4. Storage Subsystem Component.  Power system consumption and renewable generation do not coincide under most operating scenarios. Thus, it is important to integrate a controllable energy absorption and injection resource into the system to absorb system uncertainties. Self-monitoring and self-healing attributes will be crucial to ensure smooth operation of the smart grid. The control technology component should be capable of adapting to variations in generation and demand, and be robust enough to mitigate grid congestion and override events that can cause significant instability across the grid. Bringing transmission and distribution systems at same level of sophistication in control will open new possibilities in terms of energy markets, and is perceived as one of the most significant contributions of the smart grid. Modernization of the legacy power grid into smart grid will be the result of improvements across the grid, as well as reflect modern lifestyle of the customers. The introduction of modern variable speed drive systems have replaced many traditional industrial and consumer induction motor loads across the grid. These induction motors (used in pumps, fans, washers, etc.) offer better control capabilities, and are significantly more efficient than their respective predecessors. Use of digital computers at homes, commercial places, and industries have surged astronomically. Purely resistive light bulbs have been replaced by energy-efficient compact fluorescent lamps (CFLs) and light emitting diodes (LED). Increase in more homes opting for installing affordable rooftop photovoltaic (PV) arrays,a using more energy-efficient appliances, constructing more thermally efficient buildings, and industries migrating to better equipment are reducing the amount of electricity needed from power companies. This is changing the traditional business models of the regulated utility industry. Market surveys show that electric vehicles (EVs) are growing at the rate of 18.6% in the United States compounded annually, according to [5]. If a The number of homes in the United States with solar PV installations has grown from 15,500 in 2004 to more than 600,000 by the end of 2014.

08_Santoso_Sec08_p0481-0522.indd 484

23/11/17 2:59 PM

SMART GRIDS AND MICROGRIDS   485 

this trend continues to hold or increase, EV charging will amount to a large fraction of total electricity demand from the power grid. Thus, changes in customer preferences also impact the future growth of smart grid technologies. In view of such dynamically shifting landscape of power systems, microgrids provide more reliable power supply to the consumers. 8.1.2  Microgrid System Microgrids are distribution systems with a certain level of automation and self-sufficiency, demandside integration of distributed generation (DGs), and renewable energy sources (RES). The transition of active distribution networks into microgrids that can island themselves with identified physical boundary from the larger grid in an automated manner and connect back to the larger grid as needed offers great flexibility in distribution network operation. Microgrids are identified as “building blocks of smart grids” [6–9]. There can be several perspectives for defining a microgrid, which are summarized below: •  Customer Point of View. Microgrids are resource for resilience in and enhanced reliability of energy supply, with co-generation of thermal and electricity capabilities. •  Grid Operator Point of View. Microgrids are considered as a singular controllable aggregation of loads or micro-generation resources, which, depending upon financial incentives can provide ancillary grid services, or aid in meeting energy demands to customers at a local level. Several definitions of microgrids have been provided across regulatory bodies [10]. A commonly accepted definition of the microgrids was put forwarded by a CIGRE Working Group (CIGRE WG 6.22 Definition of Microgrid) [11]: Microgrids are electricity distribution systems containing loads and distributed energy resources, (such as distributed generators, storage devices, or controllable loads) that can be operated in a controlled, coordinated way either while connected to the main power network or while islanded. Though one standard definition does not completely describe to the philosophy of microgrids, all definitions echo the following points: (a) Microgrid is seen as an entity that aggregates local micro-generation sources, energy storage infrastructure and demand resources located in a low voltage distribution grid. (b) A microgrid can operate in either grid-connected mode or operate when islanded from the main grid. (c) The most important distinction between a legacy grid penetrated by micro-generation resources and a microgrid is the control, management, and coordination of resources. (d) A microgrid operator can independently carry out tasks including aggregation of multiple generators, prioritize loads, and have control over its own emissions to serve multiple economic, technical, and environmental goals of the network, without explicitly involving the utility. According to some working definitions, microgrid must have the ability to voluntarily island and reconnect itself to the grid. A microgrid must be characterized by coordinated control and supervision of the generation resources and interaction with energy providers and consumers to ensure continuity of the power supply during contingencies. A distinction must also be made between microgrids and virtual power plants (VPP): these two terms cannot be used interchangeably. A VPP, also known as captive power plants in certain countries, is an aggregation of distributed microgeneration resources which can be operated as a single controllable entity. A VPP can be used instead of conventional power plants to provide higher system efficiency and increase flexibility of the overall network. In a microgrid, DERs are usually co-located with the local distribution network, downstream from the PCC. In a VPP, DERs may not be co-located with the local network; thus, they are coordinated over wide geographical areas. As of writing this, VPP aggregated energy production are more suited to participate in existing energy markets. The installed capacity of microgrids is relatively small (from few kW to several MW), while VPPs can be larger in capacity.

08_Santoso_Sec08_p0481-0522.indd 485

23/11/17 2:59 PM

486  SECTION EIGHT

TABLE 8-1  Differences between Existing Power Grid and Smart Grid Existing system Architecture

Monolithic

Smart grid Modular and agile

Generation profile Most power production using fossil fuel based, nuclear, hydropower plants

Mix of renewable energy resources and existing resources, with the intent of completely shifting toward renewable generation

Decision driver

Generation companies, utilties

Customers have opportunity to ensure that power companies prioritize their prerogative

Data-driven

Operational data and asset management are not strongly coupled to form control decisions

Leverage advances in big data and Internet of things capability of modern appliances to boost energy efficiency

Vulnerability

Highly vulnerable to cyber attacks and cascading power outages

Self-healing networks that make the entire power network robust and resilient with minimal power outage-related downtimes

Microgrids play a key role in integration of a large variety of micro-generation resources and DERs for utilities. Different micro-generation sources, such as roof-top solar panels and photovoltaics, fuel cells, micro-turbines, and wind turbines with a rated power ranging up to 100 kW can be integrated in the sub-transmission networks. Such units are usually cited closest to their owners, and other users who can benefit directly from these resources if needed. Micro-generation resources have proven to be a very viable option to meet rapidly increasing customer demand for reliable, and economical electric power. Microgrids are poised to play a crucial role in energy markets, and become a revenue resource for certain communities [12]. Energy markets vary widely in structure, regulation policies, and organization [13–15]. On the other hand, microgrid’s roles in the energy market are distinguishable by the level of their DER aggregation. In some microgrids, a simple collection of collaborative independent market players encompass all micro-generation resources and consumers. As in the case of transmission networks, the operational structure of a microgrid mainly depends on the ownership of microgeneration resources. Table 8-1 summarizes some key differences between contemporary microgrid operation and design, and legacy power delivery infrastructures.

8.2  SMART GRID FUNDAMENTALS In this subsection, fundamental architecture of the smart grid is discussed. A brief description of the communication technologies, and standards associated toward smart grid development is presented. Cyber-security risks and standards associated with smart grids are also discussed. 8.2.1  Smart Grid Domains Smart grid is characterized by active interactions of grid components enabled by embedded processors, sensors, data sharing, communications and distributed control at the transmission level, and at low voltage (LV) distribution system consumers. Real-time measurements obtained at distribution systems using smart meters and mechanisms such as demand response adopted by customers have also shaped the vision of smart grid. The smart grid is composed of seven high-level groups, or domains (1) Customer, (2) Market, (3) Service Provider, (4) Operations, (5) Bulk Generation, (6) Transmission, and (7) Distribution [3]. Transmission and distribution systems, with advanced automation, has been at the core of smart grid development, while the latest smart grid technologies focus on helping commercial, industrial, and even residential consumers to participate more actively in producing small amounts of energy

08_Santoso_Sec08_p0481-0522.indd 486

23/11/17 2:59 PM

SMART GRIDS AND MICROGRIDS   487 

for emergency use and even storing them using batteries. Smart grid domain comprises modern, communication-capable devices, systems, and programs. Technologies have been developed to enable, and continually evolve to improve the integration and cooperation of these distinct domains into a singular smart grid, such that it holds a much higher value proposition than a legacy grid. The smart grid framework is shown in Fig. 8-2. Each domain has its own management and technological boundaries and control areas, with distinguishing input and output sets. Figure 8-3 [3] shows a broad overview of a few major relationships that are being deployed and demonstrated across the smart grid domains. The overview helps engineers and system planners to identify smart grid components as might be necessary, possible communications paths in the smart grid, and for identifying potential intra and inter-domain interactions. In Fig. 8-3, an actor is either a human or a hardware or software-based computer system that can engage in communication with the smart grid. Domain gateway actor refers to actors that interfaces with other actors in other domains or in other networks, and “comms path” refers to communication channels between smart grid domains. 8.2.2  Enabling Technologies for Smart Grid Real-time situational awareness and communication between connected components play a crucial role in upgrading a legacy power grid to a smart grid. Smart grid requires instruments for realtime, accurate, and secure measurements at high, medium, and low voltage levels of the power grid. Cohesively, the network of these components provide the data necessary for operation of the power grid and provide informed control decisions on trends in the power market. The smart grid infrastructure is also extremely efficient in detecting outages and interruption of power lines. Between the late 1990s and 2010, there have been several new inventions and innovations in the power industry and communication technology enabling the smart grid to perform the aforementioned tasks with high efficiency. Advances in communication technology triggered the smart grid era, as scientists and engineers began to realize the potential of two-way communication between power system components to improve multiple aspects of the infrastructure, such as stability and reliability. Industrial acceptance of the benefits assured by two-way communication led to the development of high-speed, interactive infrastructure for gathering and analyzing power grid data for real-time control and operations. Using pricing signals, and through the implementation of time-of-use tariff in regions with typically high peak demands, congestion in transmission lines could be reduced, along with superior power systems protection capabilities, and improved power quality and voltage profile at consumer ends.

FIGURE 8-2  Smart grid architecture and framework [3].

08_Santoso_Sec08_p0481-0522.indd 487

23/11/17 2:59 PM

488  SECTION EIGHT

Markets

Service providers

Operations RTO/ISO Ops

Retailer/ wholesaler

Transmission Ops

Distribution Ops DMS

EMS

EMS

Aggregator

Energy market clearinghouse

ISO/RTO participant

Enterprise bus

Enterprise bus

RTO SCADA

Transmission SCADA

Asset Mgmt

Demand response

WAMS

Utility provider CIS

MDMS

Enterprise bus

Billing

Home/building manager Aggregator

Wide area networks

Plant control system

CIS

Retail energy provider

Billing

Metering system

Distribution SCADA

Substation controller

Substation LANs

Energy services interface

Field area networks

Data collector

Meter Field device

Generators

Others

Internet/ e-business

Internet e-business Market services interface

Third-party provider

Customer EMS

Premises networks

Customer equipment

Appliances

Bulk generation

Substation device

Domain

Electric storage

Network Actor Domain gateway actor Comms path Comms path changes owner/domain

Transmission Distribution

Electric storage Distributed generation

Electric vehicle Distributed generation

Thermostat

Customer

Distributed energy resources

FIGURE 8-3  Interaction between multiple domains of the smart grid [3].

From initial deployment projects and cost-benefit analyses, it was understood that smart grid can be enabled only if the communication network is characterized by: (a) High bandwidth to transfer large amounts of telemetry data. (b) Standard IPs, such as IPv4 and IPv6 (preferred). (c) Encrypted communication for cyber-security. The communications technologies that can be engineered to meet the above mentioned requisites can be used to establish a nation-wide, end-to-end, fully integrated smart grid. Examples of communication technologies are multiprotocol label switching (MPLS), worldwide interoperability for microwave access (WiMax), broadband over power lines (BPL), and wireless fidelity (WiFi). MLPS is commonly used for data transmission between nodes using high-performance telecommunications capabilities. WiMax is used over the Internet for point to multi-point data transmission. BPL facilitated powerline communication over the Internet, while WiFi is mostly used for setting up wireless local area networks for smart devices. Additional technologies include optical fiber, mesh, and multi-point spread spectrum. 8.2.3  Implementation of Smart Grid Overhaul of legacy systems, standards and protocols forms a significant part of the plan for grid modernization using smart grid concepts. New technologies of energy generation are being

08_Santoso_Sec08_p0481-0522.indd 488

23/11/17 2:59 PM

SMART GRIDS AND MICROGRIDS   489 

integrated with the power grid, rapid growth in the use of power electronic and electronic based interfaces for connecting and controlling, and reduced inertia in the grid due to diminishing fraction of power generated using rotating machines—raises concerns for safe and stable implementation of the smart grid. In addition, improving the physical network with robust material and new equipment, the vulnerable cyber-security of the communication channels that overlays the physical infrastructure needs to be protected using diverse, ever-evolving means to keep it ahead of malicious hackers. Thus, in order to migrate a critical infrastructure such as the power grid to a new cyber-physical architectural framework, there are needs of appropriate standards and protocols to piece it all together, so that components can operate at peak performance without conflict. Interoperability in Smart Grids.  Interoperability among several components of the smart grid depends upon the open architecture of technologies and the underlying software systems. This facilitates interaction among various devices with other systems and technologies [25]. In 2004, recognizing the importance of interoperability of mutiple components in a smart grid, the GridWise Architecture Council (GWAC) published interoperability concepts to facilitate the integration of diverse smart grid technologies. In 2007, Energy Independence and Security Act tasked the National Institute of Standards and Technology (NIST) to design a robust framework that will include various protocols, models and standards to bring greater levels of interoperability of smart grid devices and systems. In 2009, NIST launched the Smart Grid Interoperability Panel (SGIP) to involve experts and encourage community-wide discussions leading to contributions to NIST’s interoperability objectives. As a deliverable of that task, “NIST Framework and Roadmap for Smart Grid Interoperability Standards” was made available to the public in 2010. Since that publication, it has undergone several revisions, and more revisions are likely. The document presents a wellrounded, solid foundation for a secure, interoperable smart grid that can be adopted by many utilities worldwide to bootstrap their grid modernization efforts. Interoperability in smart grid will allow a network to seamlessly and autonomously integrate diverse components—such as power generation resources, monitoring devices, protection equipment, transmission, distribution, and substation equipment, management and communication equipment, renewable, and emergency power resources to work together—with minimal human intervention and downtime due to incompatibility. According to [1], simply adhering to or “merely having complete compliance to applicable smart grid standards” is not enough to enable interoperability among a large number of smart grid devices. In other words, interoperability ensures usage and interpretation of common semantics across the entire network. The IEEE (Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers) American National Standards project (P2030) is a key resource for benchmarking smart grid interoperability, in conjunction with the IEEE 1547 series of standards addressing distributed resources interconnection with the grid. These standards have an emphasis on the “system of systems” approach toward developing and deploying end-to-end smart grids. The International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC) projects have internal project-level standards to meet particular objectives of specific smart grid projects. The smart grids task force was set up by the European Commission in 2009 to advise on issues related to smart grid deployment and development. It consists of five expert groups who focus on specific areas. Expert Group 1 aims to explore smart grid services and operation, and how best to deliver smart grids for the benefit of the energy system and its users. The focus of attention for this expert group is the technical standards and provisions designed to allow the interoperability of systems and technologies within a smart grid environment. Based on work of this expert group, the European Commission has issued mandates to European Standardisation Organisations (ESOs)—CEN, CENELEC, and ETSI—to develop and update technical standards: 1. Mandate M/490 for smart grids (March 2011) 2. Mandate M/468 for electric vehicles (June 2010) 3. Mandate M/441 for smart meters (March 2009)

08_Santoso_Sec08_p0481-0522.indd 489

23/11/17 2:59 PM

490  SECTION EIGHT

TABLE 8-2  Summary of Commonly Used Standards Used to Implement Smart Grids Standard body

  Standard

International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC)

IEC 61850 IEC 61968

Applications to smart grid Substation automation, distributed generation, SCADA communications, distribution automation Distribution management and AMI back office interface Advanced Metering Infrastructure communications

IEC TC 13, 57 Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE)

IEEE 802.3

Ethernet

IEEE 802.11 IEEE 802.16 IEEE 802.15.4

WiFi WiMax Zigbee

Internet Engineering Task Force (IETF)

RFC 791

Internet Protocol (IP)

RFC 793 RFC 1945

Transport Control Protocol (TCP) HyperText Transfer Protocol (HTTP)

RFC 2571 RFC 3820

Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) Internet X509 Public Key Infrastructure (PKI) Security

American National Standards Institute (ANSI)

ANSI C12.19

Metering tables internal to the meter

ANSI C12.22

Communications for metering table

National Institute of Standards and Technology (NIST)

SP-800.53

Recommended security controls for federal information systems (USA)

SP-800.82

Guide to SCADA security

North American Reliability Corporation (NERC)

CIP 002-09

Bulk power standards with regards to critical cyber-assets Identification, security management controls, incident reporting, response planning and recovery plans for critical assets

Smart Grid Standards.  Standards are the specifications that have been established after many years of research and operational experience to ensure smooth functioning of a smart grid. It ensures interoperability among the components of the smart grid, safety, stability, and reliability of the overall power systems infrastructure. Many standards development committees and bodies, including the NIST, IEC, IEEE, IETF, ANSI, NERC, and the World Wide Web Consortium (W3C) are addressing interoperability issues for a broad range of problems concerning the power grid. Table 8-2 gives a summary of the globally recognized standards of the smart grid that is shaping the modernization of the power system. Since the smart grid is under rapid development, standards need to be developed and globalized at an unprecedented fast pace than the traditional time taken to develop, accept, and implement standards worldwide. NIST has adopted a robust framework for the longer term evolution of the standards and establishment of testing and certification procedures. Smart Grid Cyber Security.  Communication-driven grid modernization has ushered in a lot of positive changes in the power grid, but not without vulnerabilities. Table 8-3 shows the differences between vulnerabilities in a legacy power systems and the smart grid.

08_Santoso_Sec08_p0481-0522.indd 490

23/11/17 2:59 PM

SMART GRIDS AND MICROGRIDS   491 

TABLE 8-3  Comparison of Threats Faced by Legacy Power Systems and Smart Grids Threats faced by legacy system

Threats faced by smart grid

Impact

Direct physical damage

Indirect damage to resources, physical assets, by intrusion through software systems.

Location of attacks

Local

Local, remote, coordinated across multiple geographically distributed sites.

Occurrene

Infrequent (usually single episodes)

Attacks can happen multiple times if the system vulnerabilities are not completely removed, or the hackers continue to discover new methods to intrude into the system using software systems.

Duration of attack Immediate damage

Attacks may be designed to be surreptitious with long incubation periods, being dormant and undetectable for extended periods before damaging the system.

Restoration

Attacker may continue to prevent restoration after gaining access to the system.

Restoration after attack was easier to implement

The importance of two-way communication between interconnected power systems components in a smart grid cannot be overstated. As a result, smart grid cyber security gains equal, if not greater importance in modernizing the power grid. Since the modern end-to-end power grid is dependent heavily on internet-based communication, the entire network is exposed to a larger number of vulnerabilities from malicious hackers. The intent of a cyber-attack may range from being a playful ruse of a skilled cyber rogue to targeted terrorism intended to cripple national security or trigger financial loss. Today the electric power system does not have adequate measures to guarantee protection against malicious cyber-attacks, which makes it highly vulnerable. Various incidents and security concerns in the past have indicated the extent to which the nations power grid is vulnerable and the urgent need to protect it against cyber-attacks. Advanced threats, such as “Stuxnet,” present highly sophisticated, stealthy, and evolving attacks that encompass both traditional IT and control system environments to target physical systems [16]. Recent North American Electric Reliability Corporation (NERC) directives make it mandatory for utilities to perform cyber-security risk assessment to take preventive and corrective measures. In addition, the adoption of smart grid technologies will significantly increases the attack surface, which further underscores the importance of cyber security and its demands for more substantial information and communication dependencies. The U.S. DOE has documented attack resiliency as a primary requirement for the next-generation grid [17]. Intelligent cyber-attacks can significantly affect a power systems security and adequacy by negating the effect of system redundancy and other existing defense mechanisms. The National Institute for Standards and Technology (NIST) report NISTIR 7628 has thoroughly enumerated cyber security requirements for the smart grid. The NERC report [18] identifies State Estimators, Contingency Analysis, Wide-Area Monitoring and Control Systems, Special Protection Systems, and PMUs as some of the critical components which impact reliability of the bulk power system. NIST’s Guidelines for smart grid cyber security report identifies a need for intrusion detection methods tailored to the specialized smart grid devices and systems and the contextualized understanding of their usage. In addition, DOEs 2011 report, Roadmap to Achieve Energy Delivery Systems Cybersecurity identifies nearterm requirements for intrusion detection and response capabilities [19]. The NERC cyber-attack task force (CATF) has introduced strategies to provide attack tolerance within the grid [20]. For effective prevention, detection, and response of cyber-attacks, the cyber-physical characteristics of the electric grid should be taken into consideration from both the network infrastructure and power applications perspective. Thus a multilayered defense architecture (defense-in-depth), as shown in Fig. 8-4, with representative applications in wide-area monitoring, protection, and control will provide a holistic solution to enhance cyber-security of smart grids.

08_Santoso_Sec08_p0481-0522.indd 491

23/11/17 2:59 PM

492  SECTION EIGHT

FIGURE 8-4  Multi-layer defense architecture considering cyber-physical characteristics for WAMPAC.

Cyber-attacks can be used to steal customer data, override control decisions implemented by a utility or an operator, perpetrate a denial of service attack (DoS) to components that a community would depend on during contingent situations. Due to the cyber-attack, the power grid is subject to operational failures and loss of synchronization. Cyber-attacks will also lead to system-wide operational failures, resulting into damage of critical power system components. Such events will invariably interrupt the power supply and cause cascading disruptions in other critical infrastructures that depend on the power grid, as well as severe customer inconveniences and financial losses. How to Implement Cyber-Security.  Cyber-security implementation is still evolving and proactively implemented security protocols to defend the power system against unauthorized software activity, injected into the communication channel by computer or computer terminals and the protection of other physical assets from modification or damage from accidental or malicious misuse of computer-based control facilities. A cyber-security coordination task force has been established [21] to oversee the

08_Santoso_Sec08_p0481-0522.indd 492

23/11/17 2:59 PM

SMART GRIDS AND MICROGRIDS   493 

TABLE 8-4  Time Latency for Getting Different Classes of Data Time requirements

Data availability for the specific applications

Less than 4 ms

Protective relaying

Sub seconds

Transmission wide-area situational awareness monitoring

Seconds

Substation and feeder SCADA data

Minutes

Monitoring noncritical equipment and some market pricing information

Hours

Consumer energy meter reading and longer-term market pricing information

Days/Weeks/Months

Collecting long-term data such as power quality information

standardization of processes for designing grid security at the architectural level. As apparent from research and experiences worldwide, the security requirements of a Smart Grid is different from other critical infrastructures. In order to secure communications in the smart grid, it is important to objectively classify the problems into one of the following three types (1) data security, (2) data integrity, and (3) data privacy. One of the most popular ways to monitor system attack is by observing the time taken for data communication, and bandwidth used for the communication. If sustained anomalies in data latency and bandwidth are observed, a compromised power system is a possibility and raises a “data security” concern. The usual time latency of the availability of data from different domains of the smart grid is shown in Table 8-4. Other approaches to ensure cyber security in smart grids are to ensure data integrity is maintained. It refers to the ability of an operator to authenticate or validate the source and quality of data. The modification or destruction of original data leads to loss of data integration. Intrusion by a cyber attacker or due to some undetected component malfunction will compromise data integrity. Smart grid cybersecurity must also ensure operators, utilities, and users have fair rights to privacy of their data, and whenever data is exchanged, the transaction must happen only through secured channels. Commonly adopted approaches deployed by utilities to ensure cyber-security in smart grid are: •  Continuous monitoring of the system’s functionality and data flows to proactively detect malicious behavior and system anomalies. •  Data integrity must be upheld through encryption, hardening of existing firewalls and restricting access of personnel to mission-critical computers, computing networks or facilities. •  Use of backups to restore power grid operating channels to last known secure state prior to an attack, and then upgrading the security. •  Intrusion detection incident response. •  Staying up-to-date on security standards and upgrading security patches and firmware on products as soon as they are are released into the public domain. •  Hire ethical hackers (known as white-hat hackers in certain countries) to perform penetration testing (“pen-testers”) to analyze the cyber-security of the power grid. 8.2.4  Cyber-Physical Interdependencies With increasing integration of Information and Communication Technologies (ICT), the smart grids could achieve efficient and reliable grid operation and control. The physical power system and the communication networks are more dependent on each other, and forms the so-called “cyberphysical system (CPS).” While achieving the benefits, the inter-dependencies might intensify the risk of failure and have adverse effects on the resilience of the power system [22, 23]. The failures in the communication network contribute factors to degrade the stability of power systems that

08_Santoso_Sec08_p0481-0522.indd 493

23/11/17 2:59 PM

494  SECTION EIGHT

eventually causes blackouts. As a result of the interdependency, failures occurring to nodes/links in communication networks can cause failures to nodes or functionality in the power grid. Longer outage can cause failure of servers and components of the communication network. Thus, small fraction of failed nodes in one network can lead to a cascading process of failures between other networks, resulting into widespread damage to the entire system. Power grid black-outs are examples of consequences of cascading failures of power system nodes. Blackout events, such as the Italy 2003 blackout, can be traced back to a singular point of failure in a power station, which triggered a series of failures between power stations and communication servers that depended on the power grid [24]. Quantitative evaluation of cyber-physical inter-dependencies is of significance for understanding the reliability and resilience of power systems as CPS, and could provide guidance on the systems operation, control, and planning. The existing methodologies to study cyber-physical inter-dependencies in the literature can be divided into two categories: analytical-based methods and co-simulation-based methods. 1. The analytical-based methods apply graph-based models to represent both systems and their interactions. Reference [26] is the first work applying this method to analyze the interdependencies of CPS, where both the power system and communication system are modeled as a graph, and the interdependency is modeled as the links between the related nodes in each network. Although the work derived some analytical conclusion on the interdependency features, the drawback is that the model is oversimplified and lacks capturing characteristics of each individual system. The following work [25] add DC power flow model in the power system network model, but the communication network model is still simple graph without including dynamic features. The work in [26] abstracted the communication network using information flow to capture the unique features of the control-system communications. The existing approaches cannot provide a general analytical framework to quantify the interdependency features of CPS without losing key features of each individual system. 2. Co-simulation-based methods aim to develop integrated models of both power systems and communication networks and study the inter-dependencies using different scenarios. There are several existing simulation software, either open-source or commercial, to simulate power systems and communication systems individually. However, the co-simulation development to connect both systems is a non-trivial task. The most significant part of the challenge lies in setting up the connection, transmitting, receiving, and synchronizing the data between the connected simulators using their respective software interfaces. Time synchronization of the discrete and disparate events are crucial and challenging, mainly because each simulator have different time settings, which are not synchronized by any clock. Continuous time modeling in power system simulations where the power system state variables are time-dependent functions by nature of the system. The communication networks are modeled by using software-defined packet switching networks (i.e., IP-based technologies). Cyber events in the power grid are modeled as discrete event systems characterized by events such as sending and receiving of packets, latency, etc. The advantage of the co-simulation-based methods is that it can capture the complex characteristics in each individual system more accurately than the analytical-based method; thus could provide a high-fidelity results. However, the disadvantage comes from the need of a large amount of time taken to analyze number of scenarios to study the inter-dependency properties. For different systems the scenarios and the corresponding results may differ; thus the studies should be done case-by-case and are not easy to apply in a general case.

8.3  SMART GRID INFRASTRUCTURE 8.3.1  Smart Meter Infrastructure A smart meter is an electronic device that records consumption of electric energy typically every 15 minutes and sends the information to the utility for monitoring and billing. The U.S. DOE

08_Santoso_Sec08_p0481-0522.indd 494

23/11/17 2:59 PM

SMART GRIDS AND MICROGRIDS   495 

FIGURE 8-5  A typical AMI system architecture.

defines AMI as “an integrated system of smart meters, communications networks, and data management systems that enables two-way communication between utilities and customers”. AMI is also known as Smart Meter Infrastructures. Customer systems that are considered part of the AMI are in-home displays, home energy management systems (HEMS), and other customer-facing technologies used to communicate information from utility to the consumer. Combination and coordination of these resources enable smart grid technologies in residences, commercial buildings, and industrial facilities. The most important role AMI plays is to retrieve customer usage data for billing automation. Billing applications of AMI do not pose stringent timing requirements on the AMI system, as the data is typically collected at 15 minutes intervals, though sometimes it is more or less frequent, and the bill is sent out once a month or more. Figure 8-5 illustrates a typical AMI architecture in smart grid. Within the residential home, the smart meter is installed to monitor and record the energy usage of appliances. Some smart appliances may provide operational flexibility (e.g., clothes washers/dyers, dish washers, electric vehicles, etc.) so that the demand-side management can be achieved via the home area network (HAN) and HEMS, which is connected to the smart meter. The data of the smart meters of several homes (i.e., in a community) will be transmitted to data concentrator via neighborhood area network (NAN), which can be implemented using either power line communications or wireless mesh network. The collected data will then be sent to meter data management system (MAMS) in control center via wide area network (WAN). This hierarchical structure of the AMI provides a scalable solution for implementing large amount of smart meters. Besides the billing application, smart meters also provide wide range of applications with the potential to benefit the utilities. For example, through two-way communication capabilities, the customers can receive the real-time electricity price signals, and accordingly they can alter/shift the power usage to save the energy bills while the utilities can reduce peak load. Smart meters also have the potential to facilitate the outage management and restoration. The smart meters are able to report the outage information to the utilities’ outage management system (OMS), so the outage areas can be identified in a faster way than the traditional customers’ trouble call systems. Smart meters can also push real-time notifications to operators when power is restored, or even allow utilities to make “ping” requests to meters in the regions affected by the event to estimate the extent to which the grid is affected. It can also be used to verify the restoration progress, enabling field crews to be deployed more efficiently, thus reducing the restoration time. Other functionalities of smart meter infrastructure include improved energy diagnostics from more detailed load profiles, losses and theft detection, and ability for a retail energy service provider to manage its revenues through more effective financial management. All of these applications can serve to improve the efficiency of the grid or reduce costs and improve the customer experience.

08_Santoso_Sec08_p0481-0522.indd 495

23/11/17 2:59 PM

496  SECTION EIGHT

8.3.2  Synchrophasor Infrastructure Synchrophasors are time-synchronized measurements of both the magnitude and phase angle of the sine waves representing the voltage or current in the electric power grid. Synchrophasor technologies and systems use monitoring devices called PMUs. PMUs can measure the instantaneous voltage, current, and frequency at specific locations in the power grid. The voltage and current measurements are used to characterize the delivery of electric power from generation plants to end-user loads, while frequency helps to monitor the demand-supply ratio in the power grid. The measurement is then timestamped, based on the Global Positioning System (GPS) clock. This ensures that all measurements taken by PMUs in different locations and collected by other transmission operators are collated accurately. In this way, PMUs can help to reconstruct a very complete picture of transmission system operations across the power grid. Synchrophasor infrastructure includes PMUs, phasor data concentrators (PDCs), and the underlying communication networks. PMUs are used to gather and transmit time-stamped measurements of the power system, typically about 200 times faster than traditional SCADA. The PMUs comprise bus voltage phasors and branch current phasors, along with geo-spatial information and other user-defined bits. They are equipped with sensitive sensing devices that can observe the state of the system with high accuracy at several locations at the same time, and then synchronize the obtained information to one instant of time. The high accuracy is ensured by taking voltage and current analog sampling up to 6 to 12 times in a cycle, in conjunction with GPS clock data for reporting, and compute phasors and frequency about 15 to 60 times per second. This helps in advanced monitoring of the power system, including dynamics. If anomalies are observed, appropriate actions can be taken while there is still room to recuperate without interrupting the continuity of power supply to any load. Usage of PMUs, invented in 1988, has proliferated to about 1700 installations in North America.b Several modern, microprocessor based relays and disturbance fault recorders are bundled together with PMUs, which help improve wide area monitoring. PMUs greatest role is to aid in power system automation and form an integral part of grid modernization efforts. PMUs and their various applications for enabling smart grid are discussed in greater depth in Sec. 8.3. PMUs transmits the data gathered to the PDCs, which are specially designed servers with appropriate software parts to receive data streams from many PMUs and other PDCs, time-align synchrophasor data from a large number of sources, and forward the data to control centers or next-level PDCs (e.g., superPDCs). PDCs also perform data-quality checks, monitor the performance of the PMUs, and feed a data archive. Increasingly, PDC functionality can be located within the grid at transmission substations, aggregating local PMU data and feeding it to local applications and actions, as well as passing the data upstream to multiple applications and operations centers. The underlying communication systems for PMU network include a WAN and gateways that provide access to the network [27]. Figure 8-6 shows a typical synchrophasor infrastructure, which has a hierarchical architecture. Wide area monitoring systems (WAMS) are designed and deployed by the utilities to operate the transmission grid at its optimal capacity, by using synchrophasor measurements from multiple locations and leveraging that information to create a demand-supply balance in the grid. Synchrophasor data specifications are defined in IEEE Standard C37.118-2011 [28], including data reporting rate, data quality, data frame format, etc. Synchrophasor technology is used for online (near real-time) operations. Data obtained from synchrophasors are also used for deeper off-line analytics to gain insights about operation of the grid, and then use them to improve grid reliability, stability and efficiency, and lowering operational and maintenance costs. Online applications include wide-area monitoring and visualization, oscillation detection, frequency stability monitoring, voltage stability monitoring, disturbance detection, state estimation, islanding, restoration, etc. Offline applications include post-event analysis and power system model validation. WAMS technologies are under active developments and can prevent the spread of disturbances across the power grid, as it is capable of providing real-time information on stability and operating safety margins for the power grid. Using its network of distributed sensors, time-synchronized data and GPS, WAMS can detect disturbances and generate early warnings to operators, so that they have Source:  NASPI Synchrophasor Fact Sheet 2014.

b

08_Santoso_Sec08_p0481-0522.indd 496

23/11/17 2:59 PM

SMART GRIDS AND MICROGRIDS   497 

FIGURE 8-6  Illustration of a typical synchrophasor infrastructure.

ample time to act in a manner to mitigate the possibility of system-wide blackouts. The other benefits of the expanding synchrophasor infrastructure are as follows: 1. PMU technology will help refine the engineering models that simulate individual power plants and operational behavior of large power system interconnections. Better models will translate into more accurate identification of system operating points and thresholds. 2. PMU technology can prevent potential power plant damages, and even help in stopping cascading failures by enabling the operators to run the power system closer to operational limits by analysing real-time data and comparing them to historical outage scenario data. As an example, let us consider the use of synchrophasor data by Bonneville Power Administration (BPA) in the western United States. BPA own and maintains a 4.8 GW inter-tie to facilitate power exchange between the Pacific Northwest and California. Without synchrophasor data, BPA frequently operates below capacity to be conservative about the safety and security of the tie-line. PMUtechnology deployments and simulation helped in predicting that energy flows in the inter-tie can be increased by 100 MW or more using synchrophasors to take real-time control actions. This automation will translate into approximately monetary gains worth $35 million to $75 million over 40 years without any new high-voltage capital investments. In another example, BPA used archived synchrophasor data on the actual performance of the 1100 MW Columbia Nuclear Generating Station to validate and calibrate the plants dynamic model. This helped in avoiding to take the plant offline for manual tests every 5 years for reliability inspection. Thus, the online data analysis method resulted into savings worth $700,000 for Energy Northwest, the owners of the plant. Apart from the monetary savings, data analytics helped in improving the plants model used for behavior prediction. 8.3.3  Distribution Automation Infrastructure Unlike electric transmission systems, automation of distribution systems are recent trends in the power system industry. Infrequent manual set-point changes were deemed to be sufficient for management and operation of the distribution system. However, due to improvements in power distribution system automation, capacitor bank switches can be controlled to turn on or off based on local signals, such as load demand, reactive power support requirement, time of day or current. Automatic reclosers deployed as a part of distribution automation (DA) attempt reclosing a set number of times before locking out after a local fault has been detected. Lateral fuses would blow if the current became too high.

08_Santoso_Sec08_p0481-0522.indd 497

23/11/17 2:59 PM

498  SECTION EIGHT

DA aims to extend the intelligent control over electrical power grid functions to the distribution level and beyond. The implementation of DA will facilitates utilities to improve the operation of distribution grid effectively and efficiently via distribution management system (DMS), and better handle the challenges of increasing penetration of DERs and demand response. To implement DA functionalities properly, it is important to interconnect control systems, communication networks, and devices installed in the field. For example, to include fault location, isolation, and service restoration (FLISR) capabilities within the DMS, an underlying communication network must exist between field devices such as smart relays and automated feeder switches. The network should be coordinated such that the system reliability and resilience can be improved. Another example of voltage/volt-ampere reactive (VAR) control includes field devices such as automated capacitors, voltage regulators, and voltage sensors which are managed by DMS via communication networks. Evidently, power system communication networks play a vital role in the DA development. Communication networks help in the process of acquiring large amount of data from sensors, filter the data, and generate and propagate appropriate control signals to operate equipment. To better manage these geographically dispersed field devices, multi-layered communication systems are usually applied between information and control systems and field devices. For two-layer communications system case, the first layer of the network connects substations and the DMS at control center, and consists of high-speed, fiberoptic or microwave communications systems. As of 2017, many utilities prefer to use existing supervisory control and data acquisition (SCADA) communications systems for this layer due to legacy and reliability reasons. The second layer of the network is used to connect substations with multiple field devices and employs commonly used protocols for wireless networks or power line carrier communications [29]. Information and control systems collect the measurements from field sensor devices and provide strategies for the field devices to actuate to achieve DA functionalities. Generally, there are two types of approaches: centralized and decentralized. Centralized schemes involve coordination among field devices and centralized control systems. Decentralized approaches use local control mechanism to operate automated equipment. In most cases, a combination of centralized and decentralized approaches, that is, hierarchical control mechanism, are employed to achieve better trade-off between response time requirements and controllability.

8.4  CONTROL AND OPERATION OF SMART GRIDS This subsection presents the common concepts associated with ensuring smooth control and operations of the smart grid. 8.4.1  Demand Response According to the Federal Energy Regulatory Commission (FERC), the definition of demand response (DR) is “Changes in electric usage by demand-side resources from their normal consumption patterns in response to changes in the price of electricity over time, or to incentive payments designed to induce lower electricity use at times of high wholesale market prices or when system reliability is jeopardized”. “Changes in electric usage” mentioned in the definition above refer to customer participation in DR. DR schemes will work most effectively with loads that can have significant operational flexibility. Thus appliances that are suitable for DR can be used to “shift” electricity usage in time and bring benefits for both the grid and the consumers connected to the grid. Customers, if adequately educated and informed by utility and provided with financial incentive, will opt to use smart dish washer or smart laundry systems whose start time can be modified to serve the goals of the utility. Proliferation in the use of electric vehicles is being hailed by experts as the most important emerging load type that has the potential to offer flexibility in the energy demand. A large battery-load can be considered a valuable asset for demand response because individual battery charging can be controlled,

08_Santoso_Sec08_p0481-0522.indd 498

23/11/17 2:59 PM

SMART GRIDS AND MICROGRIDS   499 

FIGURE 8-7  Two types of demand response techniques [13].

coordinated, and effectively optimized, by aggregating multiple batteries across the whole network. From the point of view of utilities, peak shaving will bring in the following benefits: •  Reduction in the cost of drawing power from efficient generation during periods of peak demand. •  Reduce congestion in the transmission grid. •  Improve grid stability. From the point of view of the customer, DR has the most important advantage of helping them reduce their spending on energy consumption. Despite these advantages, utilities still need to design definitive, scalable, and robust means of implementing DR schemes and properly informing customers about their incentives to participate in DR programs. Transactive signals, discussed later in the section, provide a framework for implementing DR schemes at the utility level. Current techniques on DR can be divided into two categories: direct load control approach and pricing-based approach [30], as shown in Fig. 8-7. 1. Direct Load Control (DLC).  Existing DLC programs offered by most utilities in the United States are contract-based. Customers who want to participate in the DR program must formally agree to giving the utilities the option to remotely shut down appliances during peak periods or during unforeseen power supply emergencies. In exchange, the customers receive credit on energy consumption bills for their participation. “Contracted Direct Load Control” by Wisconsin Public Service and “Distribution Load Relief Program” by ComEdison are examples of DLC implemented in the United States. 2. Pricing-Based Approaches.  In this approach, the electric utility controls customers’ appliances indirectly by sending pricing signals. Specifically, variations in wholesale electricity prices are integrated to retail electricity prices and thus eventually affect customers’ cost of energy consumption. Due to variations in time of use energy tariff, customers may be motivated to shift usage of some high-energy appliances from high-price periods to low-price periods. This type of pricing-based approach have been implemented by utilities like Ameren Illinois and ComEdison in the United States. Based on the level of aggregation, DR implementation and participation in the layered structure of the electricity market is divided into three categories [31] as shown in Fig. 8-8. 1. Consumer Premise Level.  The DR implemented in this level minimizes the cost of energy consumption by scheduling operating times of several large-load appliances within a home. This is coordinated by the energy management controller (EMC) that can communicate with appliances as well as the utility.

08_Santoso_Sec08_p0481-0522.indd 499

23/11/17 2:59 PM

500  SECTION EIGHT

FIGURE 8-8  Three levels of DR aggregation in electricity market [31].

2. Retail Market Level.  The EMC’s interaction with appliance-level and the utilities can influence the utilities to design incentives to encourage the customers modify their power usage profile, either directly or indirectly (as discussed above). This will help to decrease peak demand and improve stability and reliability of the grid during periods of high demand. 3. Wholesale Market Level.  Large-scale aggregation of DR resources can participate in and impact the wholesale electricity market. Depending on the Independent System Operators (ISOs) market design, DR may provide energy, reserve ancillary service (A/S), or capacity in the wholesale electricity market [32]. Currently, several trials of DR programs have been implemented by some ISOs in the United States, e.g., New York ISO (NYISO), PJM [33] and ISO New England (ISO-NE). At the same time, stimulus of DR in the wholesale electricity market is also provided by regulatory institutions like FERC. For example, FERC Order No. 719 [34] and No. 745 [35] specify how ISOs can permit Demand Response Providers (DRPs) to bid DR on behalf of retail customers directly into the ISOs organized markets, and get compensated for the service at the locational marginal price (LMP). 8.4.2  Distributed Control Smart grids proactively employ state-of-the-art technologies in communications, computing, and control to improve the efficiency, reliability, sustainability, and stability of the electric power grid. The trend of high penetration of DERs integration and the increasing deployment of large numbers of sensors and controllable devices as a result of DA pose great challenges on the corresponding control mechanisms. Since centralized control schemes usually suffer from computation scalability, communication, and robustness issues, distributed control may provide a viable solution to address these challenges. For example, distributed control usually involves local communications and computation so that the scheme is of low communication infrastructure costs and low computation burden compared to the centralized method. In addition, distributed control does not rely on a central controller so the single point of failure can be avoided. Examples of distributed control techniques include: 1. Consensus-Based Techniques.  In networks of agents, consensus means to reach an agreement regarding a certain quantity of interest that depends on the state of all agents. A consensus-based algorithm is an interaction rule that specifies the information exchange between an agent and all of its neighbors on the network [36]. Graph Laplacian and their spectral properties are important

08_Santoso_Sec08_p0481-0522.indd 500

23/11/17 2:59 PM

SMART GRIDS AND MICROGRIDS   501 

graph-related metrics that play a crucial role in convergence analysis of consensus algorithm, as the network topology impacts the convergence and the design of optimal consensus algorithm. By carefully designing the agent states, the global distributed control objective can be achieved by just using local interaction among neighboring agents. Examples of using consensus-based algorithms for power system applications in a distributed manner include economic dispatch problem [30], demand response [30], and distribution system restoration [37]. 2. Decomposition-Based Techniques.  Decomposition-based techniques aim to decompose the original optimization problem into a number of sub-problems that were solved iteratively until convergence. This type of approach usually exploits the separable structure of the optimization problem. Several decomposition methods can be applied to optimization problems, e.g., dual decomposition, augmented Lagrangians, and alternating direction method of multipliers (ADMM). Decomposition-based techniques have been applied in several power system applications in a distributed manner, e.g., reactive power control [38], optimal power flow [39], state estimation [40]. 8.4.3  Distributed Energy Resources DERs are energy sources connected to a distribution grid in a dispersed manner, such as PV, wind turbines, small hydro, combined heat and power (CHP), and fuel cell, as well as distributed energy storage units, e.g., batteries, flywheels, and ultra-capacitors. While DERs can be defined based on their energy sources and technologies, from an electrical perspective, DERs can be categorized into two classes: (1) inverter-based generation, e.g., PV, and (2) rotational machine-based generation, e.g., CHP. The energy storage technologies, regardless of whether they are inverter-based, like battery storage, or rational machine-based, like pump storage, have to be modelled differently because they can operate in either the generation mode or load mode. High penetration of DERs poses a series of challenges to distribution grids. The traditional distribution grid is passive, and radially configured with one-way power flow. Due to the connections of DERs along the distribution feeder circuits, distribution networks will become active and involve two-way power flow. The network topology may or may not be radial, depending on how a utility manages and configures its feeders. Therefore, the voltage profiles and power flow directions in the individual feeder circuits will not be obviously observed from the topology and need to be dynamically determined from real-time measurements and/or load-flow or state-estimation calculations from time to time. The static and dynamic operational characteristics of individual DERs, as well as their connection/ disconnection to/from the grid, will have direct impacts on operational reliability and power delivery quality. As a result, most of applications in DMS need adjustment to accommodate the changes from the integration of DERs. With high-level penetration of DER in a distribution grid, it may be necessary to have a Distributed Energy Resources Management System (DERMS) to aggregate, control, and manage the operation of the DER dispersed widely in the network. Its key objectives and functionalities mainly consist of effectively organizing, managing, optimizing, and controlling DERs for maximum economic benefits, enhanced grid operation reliability and service quality, including how the DERs are aggregated or grouped, e.g., at the substation level, feeder level, or even at the feeder section level, as well as in other ways, such as by generation types, capacities, response rates or other characteristics. The optimal schedules may be allocated to the individual DER through disaggregation for actual execution. A DERMS may directly monitor and control the individual DER or may coordinate through shared SCADA, AMI, field area network (FAN), or other communication-capable applications. A DERMS solution illustration (by OATI [41]) is shown in Fig. 8-9. 8.4.4  Information Technology and Data Management With the development of the smart grid, a large number of sensing and measurement devices are being deployed in the grids, which generate large volume and different types of data. While these data have the potential to improve the grid operation efficiency and reliability, utilities are facing significant

08_Santoso_Sec08_p0481-0522.indd 501

23/11/17 2:59 PM

502  SECTION EIGHT

FIGURE 8-9  Illustration of a DERMS solution [35].

challenges on how to manage these data effectively and efficiently such that the information behind the data can be better retrieved and utilized. These challenges include: •  Data storage costs can explode due to increased data volumes from large numbers of smart grid devices, e.g., smart meters, PMUs, field measurement devices in DA, asset monitoring sensors, etc. The traditional, relational database technologies are not suitable for ever increasing data volume challenge [42]. •  Time requirements for the data are diverse due to different types of power system applications. For example, for the power grid monitoring and disturbance detection, it involves large volumes of high-velocity data, and the analysis of the data should be completed in a strict deadline; while for post-event analysis, or billing applications, the time requirements are not stringent. In this sense, the data management solution needs to handle diverse time requirements. •  System integration is also a difficult task. Many smart grid applications are composite applications that draw on data and functions from multiple systems, thus it is challenging to design and implement architectures that allow easy data access, sharing, and collaboration between systems. In addition, most of the data generated are unstructured, so a unified data structure is necessary to facilitate the system integration. Unlike the IT systems, the big data issues in the power systems have their own characteristics which are highly related to the features of power system operation and control. In this sense, the off-the-shelf data management solutions from IT vendors may not be tailored well to power system requirements, e.g., they may include unnecessary features and there is lack of alignment with operational processes. However, the data management solutions from operational technology (OT) vendors may not have as good analytics and IT integration capabilities as for IT vendors. Thus, it will be beneficial for collaboration of both IT and OT to develop a better data management solution to enable smart grid development.

8.5  MICROGRID FUNDAMENTALS 8.5.1  Islanding in a Microgrid Islanding of a microgrid is a strategically implemented control action designed to prevent propagation of failures, which might have had far-reaching consequences. Islanding is achieved by controlling the circuit breakers located in the utility point of common coupling, also known as PCC.

08_Santoso_Sec08_p0481-0522.indd 502

23/11/17 2:59 PM

SMART GRIDS AND MICROGRIDS   503 

Planned Islanding.  There are three primary scenarios to transition to island a microgrid voluntarily, also known as intentional islanding. These situations are summarized as: •  Emergency islanding when a utility grid outage occurs and significant power resources (by means of renewable or diesel generators) are available within the microgrid to supply its own critical loads (or all loads). •  Planned islanding due to forecasts of severe weather or other factors •  Black start when a utility grid outage occurs and sufficient DG is not online Intentional islanding of a microgrid is initiated by a microgrid operator, or by an MGMS, when notified about an impending emergency situation. In this scenario, the generators are brought online to bring the power exchange at the PCC to zero. The MGMS is programmed to calculate the load shed plan for fast balancing of load and generation within the microgrid. If critical loads are identified, critical loads are re-prioritized, and the system is brought to stable operating condition. Unplanned Islanding.  Unplanned islanding is the disconnection of a microgrid from the main grid without any prior warning provided to the operator or the MGMS. For example, utility outages occur and PCC breaker opens, leading to unintentional islanding of the microgrid. In such scenarios, the MGMS is programmed to assign a frequency to the largest generator in the microgrid, so that it becomes “grid forming”. Critical loads are picked up and the generators in the microgrid are resynchronized using volt/var management of isochronous motors if there is one available. Communication Infrastructure.  Some of the common means of setting up communications within a microgrid are listed below: 1. Dedicated Copper Wiring.  Large generators (if connected as distributed energy resource within the microgrid) use dedicated copper wiring for control. Though they tend to be very reliable connections, connecting large numbers of individual DG systems with copper systems will drive the installations costs very high. 2. Continuous-Carrier Power Line Communications Carriers.  Though no longer common, some utilities still use power-line communication for automating their meter reading process. These connections have been replaced by modern technologies due to reliability reasons. The lack of reliability is attributed to the fact that the power line communications carrier signal is lost if the connection to the utility is lost. However, this kind of communication can be used very effectively for inverter anti-islanding control in microgrids. Other reasons why the industry has moved away from power line communications are high cost of installation, low bandwidth of the communication channel, and high energy requirement for data transmission. 3. Ad hoc Mesh Networks.  These networks comprise small-scale, smart network topologies that can discover the presence of other devices and automatically set-up a “cooperative mesh network” [43]. They are capable of establishing a giant infrastructure with end-to-end routing links, consisting of small resilient sub-networks. 4. Dedicated Fiber-Optic Link.  Control centers and substations under these control centers commonly use fiber-optic links for dedicated, secure communications. Such connections ensure high communication speed and reliability that facilitates real-time data exchange and communication with synchrophasors. 5. Ethernet.  Ethernet is used to set-up communications building-level deployment of power system automation. However, they must also be connected to a wide-area-network technology for proper control. It must be noted that wide-area networks lack reliability required to support protection functions. 6. Wireless Local Area Network (IEEE802.11).  Like the Ethernet, wireless local area network are most commonly used inside and outside of buildings to provide short distance transmission of wireless data.

08_Santoso_Sec08_p0481-0522.indd 503

23/11/17 2:59 PM

504  SECTION EIGHT

7. Wireless Metropolitan Area Networks (IEEE802.16d).  This technology is often used in cities or crowded spaces to transmit data wirelessly to another node spaced about 2 km apart, with no need for line-of-sight antenna configurations. It can also be used for up to 10 km wireless data transmission with unobstructed path. 8. Personal area networks.  Provides short-distance (few meters) wireless communications. 9. BACnet.  This communication protocol was developed by the American Society of Heating, Refrigerating, and Air Conditioning Engineers (ASHRAE), BACnet is internationally accepted standard for control networking. It provides one of the data link/physical layers of BACnet. BACnet is used extensively in deploying building automation technologies, including smart homes, homes with roof-top solar generation units, and homes and commercial buildings that are technically equipped for utility controlled demand response. 8.5.2  Black Start in Islanded Microgrids Energizing disconnected loads when a microgrid is in an islanded state is called black start. Black start in microgrids are designed to energize the loads by reconnecting the loads to DGs, either seamlessly or with minimum downtime. During the phase of black start, the operating states of the loads being reconnected must be carefully considered as the capability of the microgrid must be able to withstand start-up voltage and current surges and maintain acceptable voltage profile. Thus, local, low-level load controllers (LCs) must be developed in close coordination with the MGMS. Operation of the MGMS must also be tested under dynamic operating conditions. The blackstart functionality in microgrids help: 1. Assure distribution system operation during power outages caused due to failures in the transmission system. 2. Improve power supply reliability. 3. Reliability of power to critical loads. In order to improve the resilience of the power system and ensure that black start capabilities of the microgrid can be leveraged during all types of contingencies, several sources within the advanced microgrid must have black-start capabilities. It is a common practice to install stand-by power supply and a monitoring and control scheme in the microgrid control center. A consensus on common standards for black start microgrid restoration is still evolving. In order to facilitate black-start with limited resources, loads are prioritized by utilities and only the critical loads are picked up first. Black start functionalities within microgrids will require continuous amendments to available standards (such as IEEE 519 for harmonics and voltage with specifications for microgrids).

8.5.3  Anti-Islanding and Islanding Control With an increase in power electronics interface based renewable energy resources, such as PV systems, connected to utility systems, the risk of formation of unintentional islands also increases. Utilities have to strike the balance while trying to keep their systems secure, and not limiting customers with roof-top PV units. However, many utilities lack adequate experience and expertise with these systems, disabling operators from taking informed control decisions. In the absence of such certainty, utilities must operate carefully, often leading operators to operate with more caution than necessary, and far below safe and acceptable operation limits. Anti-islanding protection is both critical and costly. In order to observe whether a distribution system is at risk of islanding—(1) passive approaches, such as monitoring rate of change of voltage and frequency, (2) active approaches such as impedance monitoring, or (3) communication-based approaches, such as using direct transfer trip (DTT) communications with breakers, power line communications, remote terminal units, SCADA integration of inverters, etc. can be used.

08_Santoso_Sec08_p0481-0522.indd 504

23/11/17 2:59 PM

SMART GRIDS AND MICROGRIDS   505 

Due to the expense in unintentional islanding detection mechanisms, the objective is to reduce the number of cases of unnecessary application of additional protection while giving utilities a basis on which to request additional study in cases where it is indispensable. There are several cases in which the literature, accumulated experience, and physical reasoning suggest that unintentional islanding is so unlikely as to be considered impossible for all practical purposes. According to suggested guidelines by industry experts on microgrid islanding [44], those cases include the following: •  The Two-Thirds Rule.  If the aggregated nameplate AC rating of all DG systems within the potential island is less than the minimum real power load within the potential island—a sustained islanded operation of a microgrid is not possible, eliminating the need of anti-islanding protection. If PV is the only type of DG in the potential island, then the value that should be used is the minimum load during daylight hours. Considering that load and PV output both rise during the morning hours, the time at which the fraction of PV output to load may realistically become meaningful is not at dawn, but rather closer to 10 AM, at which point feeder load is likely to be above the required minimums. In the case in which the net DG rating is below the specified loading fraction, after the switch opens, the loads voltages decrease rapidly. “Some fraction” refers to 77% (88% squared), because below this level, the voltage decreases to less than 0.88 p.u. and the inverter enters an operational state in which IEEE 1547 requires a 2-second trip, but this is strictly true only for impedance loads. Thus, a practical observation says that a sustained island is not possible if the sum of the AC nameplate ratings of all the DG in a potential island is less than two-thirds of the minimum feeder load within the potential island. The two-thirds fraction is somewhat conservative (since the actual fraction is 77%) and easy to remember. The caveat to this rule is that reliable data on minimum load must be available. Also, if IEEE 1547 is changed from existing 2016 standards to allow low-voltage ride through (LVRT) capability, the two-thirds rule will need modifications. •  Reactive Supply Imbalance.  If the reactive power supply and demand within the potential unintended island cannot be balanced, a sustained island cannot be formed.  Since most loads and power system components connected to distribution systems absorb VArs, there must be a source of VAr in the potential island in order for islanding to be sustained. The most obvious VAr source is capacitance, which is often installed for power factor correction or occur as a consequence of underground cabling. PV inverters operate at unity power factor, but, increasingly, larger inverters are being designed to operate at a fixed power factor according to a schedule or command, thus behaving like a VAr sink. If the load VAr demand is larger than the VAr sources within the island, then the chances of a sustained unintended islanding are minimized. This is due to the rise in system frequency beyond the IEEE 1547 specified limit of 60.5 Hz, triggering frequency relays to disrupt power supply in the distribution system. The mechanism of this frequency change is the phase locked loop (PLL) used by the inverters to synchronize to the grid frequency. When the grid source is lost, the PLL will change the frequency of the inverters output current to bring the inverters voltage and current into a phase relationship the PLL is programmed to maintain (usually, zero). Thus, in such cases, anti-islanding protection is not required. •  If DTT is properly implemented, only a failure of the DTT communications system would result in a failure to detect an unintentional island. The utility operators may choose to exercise advanced diagnostics in which the potential island contains large capacitors, and the power factor within that potential island is very close to 1.0. Similarly, systems with a very large numbers of inverters, or with inverters from several different manufacturers, systems that have both inverters and rotating generators are known to have unintended islanding frequently. As operational practice, the approach suggested by Sandia National Laboratory in a assessment guideline document for minimizing DG unintentional islanding risk can be adopted by microgrid operators to prevent unintentional islanding [44]: Steps: (a) Determine whether the aggregate power output rating of all DG installed in the microgrid exceed two-thirds of the minimum demand of the downstream feeders. (b) Determine if the total reactive power demand in the microgrid is within 1% of the total aggregate capacitor rating within the island.

08_Santoso_Sec08_p0481-0522.indd 505

23/11/17 2:59 PM

506  SECTION EIGHT

(c) Determine if the potential unintended island is made up of a combination of inverterbased DG and traditional rotating machinery, and that the total AC ratings of the rotating DG exceed 25% of the total AC rating are all DGs in the potential island. If all of the rotating machine AC ratings are greater than 25% of the total DG, then further study may be prudent. If the sum of all rotating machine AC ratings is less than 25% of the total DG, then proceed to Step 4. (d) Sort the inverters by manufacturer, compute and sum up the total AC rating of each manufacturers product within the potential island, and determine each manufacturers percentage of the entire DG-power production. Based on the two-thirds rule discussed in the last page, the risk of unintentional islanding can be assumed to be minimal if more than two-thirds of the total DG is from a single manufacturer.

8.6  CONTROL AND OPERATION OF MICROGRIDS A control and management architecture is required in order to facilitate full integration of local generation and active load management into modern, specialized LV distribution systems, such as microgrids. The coordinated control of a large number of DERs can be achieved in a variety of manners: ranging from decentralized hierarchical controls to vertical tightly coupled control of demand, supply, and operation. The control strategy adopted by a particular microgrid operator depends on the share of responsibilities assumed by a central controller and the local device-level controllers of the DGs and controllable loads. The control of a microgrid is coordinated by the use of Microgrid Central Controller (MGCC), which is also known as microgrid management systems (MGMS). A basic framework for microgrid control is shown in Fig. 8-10, and distinctions between centralized and decentralized control of microgrids are presented in Table 8-5. The LC are low-level or device controllers, responsible for controlling and monitoring DERs, storage devices, and customer loads. A typical LC could either be an integrable piece of hardware or a software installed in either the digital interface of the power electronic components, electronic meters, or any other device deployed in the field with requisite computing and communicating capabilities. The MGMS provides the primary point of interaction between the microgrid and players in distribution system management and control, such as the distribution system operator (DSO), or the energy services company (ESCO). The MGMS in distribution microgrids can be assigned different roles: ranging from the main responsibility for the maximization of the microgrid value to optimal operation of the local LCs, or meeting certain environmental criteria. The MGMS can be configured to generate reference set-points for the MCs, for data acquisition, or for passive observation and supervision of the operation of the microgrid’s load and controllers. The MGMS is typically located inside the substation and the MGMS human-machine interface includes a specialized Prices from the market Microgrid management system

Loads to be served/curtailed Real and reactive power setpoints

Local, device -level controller

Microgrid settings

Device level feedback on price, set-points, and bidding suggestions FIGURE 8-10  Microgrid management system operation schematic.

08_Santoso_Sec08_p0481-0522.indd 506

23/11/17 2:59 PM

SMART GRIDS AND MICROGRIDS   507 

TABLE 8-5  General Differences between Centralized and Decentralized Control of Microgrids Centralized control

Decentralized control

DG ownership

Single owner of assets

Multiple owners of assets

Network operators

Usually have lesser automation and employs personnel to manage network operations like traditional distribution systems

Higher dependence on software-based control of multiple assets across different voltage levels and geographical locations

Market participation

Feasible

Some units may not participate in energy trading

Optimization of control

Complex algorithms may be deployed by single owners

Open nature of the control system requires less complex algorithms for active participation of assets of multiple owners

Communication requirements

High

High

Collaboration among assets

Feasible

Some units may compete against each other in the same microgrid

software routines of functionalities depending on the role of the MGMS. Depending upon the vendor, sometimes the MGMS software can be integrated with the DMS. 8.6.1  Centralized Control A commonly used architecture for centralized microgrid control is shown in Fig. 8-12. The power distribution system (i.e. the microgrid) is interfaced with the prime-mover based PQ and VSI controllers through a converter mechanism, as shown in the illustration of a typical microgrid control architecture. Microgrids can be centrally managed by extending and properly adapting the functionalities of existing energy management system (EMS) functions. The basic feature of centralized control is that decisions about the operation of the DER are taken by the microgrid operator or ESCO at the MGCC level. The MGCC is equipped, among other things, with scheduling routines that provide optimal setpoints to the MCs, based on the overall optimization objectives. 8.6.2  Hierarchical Control Levels There are typically three levels of controls in hierarchical control of power systems. Such control topologies are not exclusive to microgrids. The Union for the Coordination of Transmission of Electricity (UCTE, Continental Europe) has defined a hierarchical control for large power systems [45]. However, the same hierarchical control theory for large transmission systems cannot be ported into microgrids without significant adaptation. Original hierarchical control systems for power grids were designed to operate over large high inertia synchronous machines and inductive networks. However, in microgrids that have large power electronic interfaces to integrate renewable energy resources, there are very limited inertia, and the networks have high R/X ratios. However, like hierarchical control in transmission systems, the primary control in microgrids deals with the inner control of the DG units by adding virtual inertia and controlling their output impedance. The secondary control serves to restore the amplitude and frequency deviations resulting from the virtual inertia and output virtual impedance. The tertiary control is used to monitor and control the power flows between the main grid and the microgrid at the PCC.

08_Santoso_Sec08_p0481-0522.indd 507

23/11/17 2:59 PM

508  SECTION EIGHT

8.6.3  Inner Control Loops The use of intelligent power interfaces between the electrical generation sources and the microgrid is a critical component. These interfaces consists of DC-AC inverters, that operate as current-source inverters (CSIs) and as voltage-source inverters (VSIs) depending upon specific operating scenarios. Such inverters consist of an inner current loop and a PLL to continuously stay synchronized with the grid, and the VSIs, which consist of an inner current loop and an external voltage loop. In order to inject current to the grid, CSIs are commonly used, while in island or autonomous operation, VSIs are needed to keep the voltage stable, and within constraints. It is not required for VSIs to have external reference points to maintain synchronism. VSIs can provide voltage ride through capability and power quality enhancement to the DG. VSIs are responsible for controlling the power import from, or the power export to the main grid. Thus, VSIs facilitate the ability of the microgrid to operate in both grid-connected and islanded modes (Fig. 8-11). VSIs and CSIs have closely associated roles in modern microgrids. The VSIs are integrated with energy storage devices, and maintain a fixed frequency and voltage level within the microgrid. The CSIs are integrated with low capacity DERs, such as wind turbines or solar panel cells. It must be noted that these DG inverters be used to perform the duties of the VSIs if required. Thus, it is feasible to have multiple CSIs and VSIs, or VSIs exclusively connected in parallel to form a microgrid. When these inverters are inter-connected to operate in grid-connected mode, they change their core functionality from being VSI to CSI.

P, Q, and V measurements from microgrid controller and load controller frequency measurement from voltage source inverter (VSI) Droop Settings Microgrid Management System Load Switching

AC Vdc

DC

Power distribution systems (microgrid)

V, I VSI Controller

P, Q Settings

Q setpoints PQ Controller Controller V, I

P AC DC

Prime mover Vdc

Load controller

Load

VSI controller

Controller P

V, I AC DC

Vdc

Prime mover

FIGURE 8-11  Typical microgrid control architecture.

08_Santoso_Sec08_p0481-0522.indd 508

23/11/17 2:59 PM

SMART GRIDS AND MICROGRIDS   509 

8.6.4  Primary Control The key concept of primary control is to implement the inertial behavior of a synchronous generator, which proportionally decreases the frequency due to increase in active power in the microgrid. Primary control level alters the amplitude of voltage and the frequency reference used by internal voltage and current control loops. When connecting multiple VSIs are connected in parallel, it is possible to detect circulating active and reactive powers. Thus, the primary control principle can be used by VSIs to implement the P/Q droop method in microgrids, which is decribed by: f = f∗−GP (s).(P−P∗) (8-1) V = V∗−GQ (s).(P−P∗) (8-2)



where P and Q are the active and reactive powers, P∗ and Q∗ are active and reactive power references, V and f are the amplitude and frequency of the output voltage reference, V∗ and f∗ are the amplitude and frequency references, and GP(s) and GQ(s) are active and reactive power transfer functions. The DC gains of GP(s) and GQ(s) compensators contribute to static ∆f/∆V and ∆Q/∆V deviations, which are important to maintain the system in sync with other rotating machinery, and for maintaining the voltage stability of the microgrid. Proportional droop terms of the compensators GP(s) and GQ(s) parameters are m and n, respectively. They are described mathematically as follows: ∆f (8-3) Pmax n = ∆V (8-4) 2Qmax



m=

where ∆V and ∆f are the maximum tolerated voltage and frequency deviations; and, Pmax and Qmax are the maximum active and reactive powers delivered by the inverter, respectively. Figure 8-12 shows the correlation between the Pf and QV droops and the PQ circle of a DG or DER unit. The DG or DER unit has the capability to inject active power (P > 0) and store energy (V < 0) Q

Q

Q

S = P + jQ

*

Primary response

Capacitive Q>0 P

V

Inductive Q 0 for capacitor-behavior) or absorbing reactive power (Q for inductor-behavior). In the conventional droop method used by large power systems, the output impedance of high inertia synchronous generators and the line impedance is mostly inductive. In systems with a significant amount of power electronics integration, the output impedance depends on the control techniques adopted by the inner control loops. Also, the line impedance in low-voltage applications has approximately pure resistive values. Thus, the control droops in Eqs. (8-1) and (8-2) can be subjected to Park Transformation, based on the impedance angle q of the system. f = f ∗ −GP (s)[(P − P∗) sinq − (Q − Q∗) cosq] (8-5) V = V∗ −GQ (s)[(P − P∗) cosq + (Q − Q∗) sinq] (8-6) The primary control technique depends upon a virtual output impedance loop. The output voltage of the loop is expressed as:

v0∗ = Vref − ZD (s)

(8-7)

where Vref is the reference voltage reference obtained from Eqs. (8-5) and (8-6) with Vref = V sin(2πft) and ZD (s) represents the transfer function of the virtual output impedance. Under usual operating scenarios, the Vref is used to enforce inductive behavior at the frequency of the grid. The virtual impedance ZD (s) must be selected such that it exceeds the sum of impedance of the inverter and the line impedance, such that the total equivalent output impedance is close to the values of ZD (s). The virtual output impedance ZD (s) is approximately equal to the total series impedance of a synchronous generator. Virtual output impedance has features that distinguish it from a physical impedance, such as: (1) virtual output impedance has zero power loss, and (2) it is possible to implement resistance without reducing operating efficiency. Also, virtual impedance control loop helps to achieve two additional things: 1. Control Over Inverter Output Impedance.  This can be achieved by adjusting the phase angle of Eqs. (8-6) and (8-7) according to the known R/X ratio of the line impedance q = arctan(X/R) and the angle of the output impedance at the frequency of the grid. 2. Harmonic current sharing and hot-swap operation are feasible by means of having virtual output impedance [46–48]. 8.6.5  Secondary Control A secondary control can be used to compensate for the excursions in frequency and amplitude and frequency due to variations in load or generation inside the microgrid. It operates by sensing the frequency and amplitude levels in the microgrid fMG and VMG are sensed and comparing them with the reference frequency f*MG and reference voltage V*MG  , respectively. The errors are filtered by means of compensators (δf and δV); and then the filtered frequency voltage and amplitude values are propagated to all connected units to restore the output voltage frequency and amplitude. The secondary control is used in power systems to limit grid frequency deviation within allowable limit. It comprises a proportional-integral (PI)-type controller, to allow load-frequency control commonly used in several European microgrids; and automatic gain controller generally used in the United States. In the case of AC microgrids, the frequency and amplitude restoration controller parameters Gf and GV can be designed as follows:

08_Santoso_Sec08_p0481-0522.indd 510

(8-8) δf = kp  f (  f*MG − fMG) + ki  f (  f*MG − fMG )dt + ∆fs δV = kpV (V*MG − VMG) + ki  V (V*MG − VMG)dt (8-9)

23/11/17 2:59 PM

SMART GRIDS AND MICROGRIDS   511 

f

V V*

f*

–Qmax

Pmax

P*

Q*

Qmax

(a) P-F and Q-V primary and secondary control actions fMG

VMG fG = f*

–PGmax –PG*

PG*

PGmax –QGmax QG*

VG = V*

QG* QGmax

(b) f-P and V-Q tertiary control actions FIGURE 8-13  Microgrid control mechanism.

where kp  f, kpV, ki  f and ki V are the control parameters of the secondary control compensator, and ∆fs is a synchronization flag variable which remains equal to zero when the microgrid is operating in islanded mode. It must be noted that d f and d V must not surpass the maximum tolerated frequency and amplitude deviations, specific to the microgrid. Figure 8-13(a) shows the primary and secondary control actions over the P − f and Q − E characteristics. Secondary control in a droop-controlled microgrid enables the frequency and amplitude restoration process. The restoration process also implies corresponding increase in real and reactive demands. If secondary control is not correctly implemented, both frequency and amplitude of the microgrid will be dependent on the incumbent load of the microgrid. 8.6.6  Tertiary Control While operating the microgrid when it is connected to the main grid, the power flow in the microgrid is controllable by means of modifying the frequency or by varying the steady state phase angle. These actions also correspond to variation of the voltage amplitude inside the microgrid [48]. By measuring the P/Q at the PCC, PG and QG, they can be compared with the desired P*G and Q*G and controlled as follows: f*MG = kpP (P*G−PG) + kiP Ú (P*G−PG)dt (8.10) V*MG = kpQ (Q*G−QG) + kiQ Ú (Q*G−QG)dt (8.11) where kpP, kiP, kpQ, and kiQ are the control parameters of the tertiary control compensator. Note that f*MG and V*MG will become saturated if they operate outside of their respective maximum tolerated limits. These variables f*MG = fG and V*MG = VG are depenedent on the secondary control. When the microgrid is in grid-connected mode, the synchronization process commences, and f*MG and V*MG must match with their corresponding values in the power grid to enable successful synchronization. After synchronization is complete, these signals can be described by the tertiary control.

08_Santoso_Sec08_p0481-0522.indd 511

23/11/17 2:59 PM

512  SECTION EIGHT

Depending on whether P*G and Q*G is positive or negative, the active and reactive-power flows can be independently imported or exported. Figure 8-13(b) shows the tertiary control action, which facilitates the interchange of P and Q at the PCC. It also helps maintain the observability of the bidirectionality of the power flow in the microgrid. The grid has constant amplitudes and frequency (EG = E* and fG = f*), represented by horizontal lines. The amount of P and Q exchanged between the microgrid and the grid (PG and QG) can be determined geometrically from the intersection region of the droop characteristics of the horizontal lines of the grid and the operating lines of the microgrid. Thus, the generated power PG is controllable by variation of the microgrid reference frequency f*MG. In this formulation, it is easy to remember that the microgrid injects P to the grid if f*MG > fG, and the microgrid absorbs active power P from the grid if f*MG < fG. It also leads to variation of the power angle. For reactive-power, similar equations can be framed. It can be seen from Eqs. (8-10) and (8-11), that, if kiP = 0 and kiQ = 0, the tertiary control will behave as the primary control of the microgrid. It will thus be able to allow the interconnection of multiple microgrids, as discussed in Sec. 8.5.8. Thus, this control loop can be leveraged to improve the power quality at the PCC. To enable voltage dip ride-through capabilities in the microgrid, it must be capable of injecting reactive power to the grid, thus achieving inner voltage stability. Observe that, if kiQ = 0, the microgrid will automatically inject Q as soon as a voltage sag is identified, or will automatically absorb reactive power when there is a voltage surge in the grid. This provides low voltage ride through capability to the MicroGrid. Islanding detection is used to disconnect both the tertiary control references and the integral terms of the reactive-power PI controllers to avoid voltage instabilities, particularly during scenarios of unplanned islanding. In events of unplanned islanding, the tertiary control will endeavor to absorb active power P from the grid. If it fails to do so, the frequency will start to decrease. If the thresholds of tolerance are crossed, the microgrid islands itself from the grid for its own safety. 8.6.7  Operation of Multiple Microgrids The microgrid concept can be extended to the development of a new concept of the multiple microgrids, or “multi-microgrids” (MMG). In addition to developments in microgrid implementation, MMG concept will require a complete re-design of a distribution system control architecture as well as the development of new management tools or the adaptation of existing DMS tools. MMG architecture corresponds to a high-level structure created at the medium voltage (MV) level, consisting of several LV microgrids and DG units connected to the adjacent network of MV feeders. A large number of LV networks with micro-sources and loads, that are no longer passive elements of the distribution grid, then need to be operated together in a coordinated way. Therefore, the system to be managed grows in complexity and dimension, requiring a completely new control and management architecture. An effective management of this MMG can be achieved using hierarchical control architecture, where control will be coordinated by an intermediate controller, the m-MGMS controller (i.e. Multiple Microgrid Management System), to be installed at the MV bus level of a substation, supervised by a DSO. An m-MGMS controller will also have to deal with technical and commercial constraints and contracts, in order to manage the MMG both in grid-connected operating mode and in grid disconnected modes, during emergencies. Key functionalities of m-MGMS will be: •  Volt-VAR support. •  Frequency support through active coordination between DG and loads across the entire MMG network. •  Control scheduling in energy markets, if available. •  State estimation. •  Restoration based on load prioritization, and other emergency functions as deemed by the operation.

08_Santoso_Sec08_p0481-0522.indd 512

23/11/17 2:59 PM

SMART GRIDS AND MICROGRIDS   513 

8.7  SMART GRID DEPLOYMENT PROJECTS Here are some examples of smart grid deployment projects: 8.7.1  Duke Energy This project involved implementation of AMI and DA systems in five states in the United States (there were major deployments in North Carolina and Ohio, while smaller deployments of DA were carried out in Indiana, Kentucky, and South Carolina). Duke Energy also took the initiative to launch pilot-scale programs for electricity pricing. Their efforts included deployment of peak-time discounts, time-of-use rates, and critical peak pricing. Customers (who participated in these pilot programs) were actively using Web portals, controlling their home temperature using smart thermostats, and had installed direct load control devices (such as smart dishwasher, washer and dryer, etc.) to reduce their electricity consumption and peak demand. The project utilized multiple distributed resources at both the customer and distribution level. Energy storage using Li-ion batteries were installed to be used by multiple applications. Several photo-voltaic units were also commissioned for installation for residential generation. 8.7.2  Pacific Gas and Electric Company In 2014, Pacific Gas and Electric Company (PG&E) introduced its “Grid of Things” vision to mobilize its grid modernization efforts to aid in the optimization of DERs. The “Grid of Things” integrated smart energy devices and novel technologies with the grid. PG&E encouraged their customers (who owned small scale DERs and smart appliances) to participate in their large-scale effort to “greater value from PG&E’s energy technology investments.” PG&E encouraged purchase and installation of rooftop solar, EVs, energy storage, demand response technologies, etc., through a large number of customer-facing monetary initiatives. Through their efforts, PG&E is aiming to establish four critical capabilities for the smart grid: (1) integrate environment-friendly, DERs (2) aid decision-making for both operators and customers (3) oversee grid automation and self-healing capabilities of networks, and (4) enable customer participation. 8.7.3  State Grid Corporation of China (SGCC) SGCC proposed to develop the “Strong & Smart Grid” in 2009. The project laid its foundations by developing an ultra-high-voltage (UHV) to support the development of automated and smart subsystems of the power grid at all levels. SGCC approach toward smart grid deployment was essentially a top-down approach toward restructuring the grid, that included meticulous planning before construction was commissioned.

8.8  SMART GRID DEMONSTRATION PROJECTS Main research and development challenges in smart grid include the ability to include more RES connected to distribution networks, improving the efficiency of customer participation in electricity markets, secure energy supply, improve network reliability, deploy network automation in medium and low voltage networks, smarter data-driven demand management, optimal use of the controllable loads (like EVs), storage technologies, and microgrids. However, in order to move from theory to practice, several pilot projects were deemed to be necessary by industry and regulatory bodies by several nations across the globe. The Smart Grid Demonstration Program (SGDP) in United States was launched to demonstrate the potential of existing and emerging smart grid concepts to be integrated to prove technical,

08_Santoso_Sec08_p0481-0522.indd 513

23/11/17 2:59 PM

514  SECTION EIGHT

operational, and business-model feasibility for modernizing the power grid. FERC aims to “demonstrate new and more cost-effective smart grid technologies, tools, techniques, and system configurations that significantly improve on the ones commonly used today.” The program comprised 32 projects in the two broad areas: Smart Grid Regional Demonstrations (16 projects) and Energy Storage Demonstrations (16 projects). Smart Grid Regional Demonstrations focused on regional smart grid demonstrations to validate the feasibility and determine the costs-to-benefits ratio for expensive smart grid investments. The project also aimed to validate new smart grid business models that could easily facilitate scale-up of the developed smart grid technologies. Energy Storage Demonstrations emphasised research and development of energy storage technologies—flywheels, pump-hydro storage, compressed air energy storage systems for load shifting, batteries, frequency regulation design, ramp control design. The research and development projects also focused on the grid integration of renewable resources. 8.8.1  Pacific Northwest Smart Grid Demonstration The U.S. DOE partnered with industries in late 2009 to partially sponsor Pacific Northwest Smart Grid Demonstration (PNWSGD). The PNWSGD project can be counted as one of the largest and most comprehensive demonstrations of electricity grid modernization. PNWSGD project successfully accomplished demonstrations across several states in the United States, and received cooperation from multiple electric utilities, including rural electric coops, public utilities, municipal utilities, and other investor-owned utilities. The local objectives for these systems were (i) improved reliability, (ii) energy conservation, (iii) improved efficiency, and (iv) demand responsiveness. The demonstration pioneered the development of a “transactive system” that enabled easy coordination of many of the project’s DERs and demand-responsive components. The transactive energy framework helped in countering of challenges associated with unpredictability in load demands and renewable energy production. The transactive energy framework could also be used by multiple utilities to meet the regional goals. The transactive system showed the feasibility and advantages of being able to coordinate electricity supply, and distribution, and engaging end-users by making all participants in the energy supply chain involved. A utility in the Pacific Northwest region involved in the project, Avista Utilities, demonstrated a high level of integration among the demonstrated asset systems across transmission and distribution system, down to end-user appliances, as shown in Fig. 8-14. “ZigBee” smartmeters were deployed for

FIGURE 8-14  Technologies installed by Avista Utilities during smart grid demonstration in the Pacific Northwest power system [49].

08_Santoso_Sec08_p0481-0522.indd 514

23/11/17 2:59 PM

SMART GRIDS AND MICROGRIDS   515 

each customer in Pullman, Washington, along with “ecobee” smart thermostats in certain homes. Data was sampled every 5 minutes and updated to the system every 15 minutes over standard, secure IP, HTTPS. This data was visible to customers and utility alike through Web-based interfaces, as well as used for analytics for operation and control of the modern grid. A key lesson learned during this project was that despite the well-structured integration, benefit rendered by each individual component could not be quantified in the demonstration. While the integration of systems is one of the important aspects of a smart grid, a type of unit testing of the individual subsystems is recommended for cost-benefit analysis before commissioning other projects. 8.8.2  Southern California Edison Company Southern California Edison Company (SCEC) demonstrated smart grid benefits in Irvine, California, with a total investment of $80 million. Like PNWSGC, SCEC also demonstrated an end-to-end, easyto-scale approach to develop and deploy a smart grid system from transmission to customer end-use appliances, such as smart washer/dryer and electric vehicles. From the lessons learned from this project, several gaps have been identified in the interoperability of several smart devices in the grid. Results and insights from the SCEC smart grid project have been incorporated in many smart grid related standards. 8.8.3  NSTAR Electric and Gas Corporation NSTAR demonstrated smart grid benefits in a densely populated urban area of United States, which faces extreme seasonal demands. The project was based in and around Boston, Massachusetts. This project showcased the successful use of smart, sensor-based data observation and measurement instrumentation in distribution systems in Boston, Massachusetts. Using the results of the demonstration project, NSTAR leveraged several state-of-the-art big data analytics tools and techniques to gain further understanding of the power grid status and behavior. They upgraded their system to perform proactive maintenance activities that can lead to significant reliability of their operations. The results from the project were also used to increase the system’s capability to accommodate renewable DERs in the grid. Analysts are able to extrapolate the experiences gained from the project to secondary area network grids in large urban areas with similar climates, such as New York City, Chicago, and Philadelphia. 8.8.4  The Boeing Company Smart grid demonstration projects are not limited to utilities and federal organizations like U.S. Department of Energy, but several private corporate-driven investigations have been commissioned to evaluate the move toward smart grid. World’s leading aeroplane and space equipment manufacturer, The Boeing Company, launched smart grid projects in several of its corporate and manufacturing campuses in the United States, viz., St Louis, Missouri, Sunnyvale, California, and Huntington Beach, California. The investment was about $17 million. The Boeing Company endeavored to demonstrate an advanced smart grid technology with military-grade cyber security for optimizing regional transmission system planning and operation by enabling wide-area situational awareness, coordination, and collaboration. The project team included regional transmission operators and utilities, impacting more than 90 million customers across 21 states in the United States. 8.8.5  National Rural Electric Cooperative Association National Rural Electric Cooperative Association (NRECA) is the organization that represents the interests of over 900 electric cooperatives in the United States, to various legislatures. Independent electric utilities are not-for-profit and are owned by their members. NRECA invested about $67 million in grants and projects to demonstrate smart grid viability in transmission and distribution

08_Santoso_Sec08_p0481-0522.indd 515

23/11/17 2:59 PM

516  SECTION EIGHT

system in sparsely populated cities and counties in the United States. Their efforts led to the installation and operation of a suite of diverse smart grid technologies such as smart meters and PMUs. The projects also assisted in aggregation of data from 17 rural electric cooperatives across 11 states. Deployed grid modernization infrastructure included more than 130,000 meters and over 18,000 demand response switches. The project also installed hundreds of voltage sensors and fault detectors in the networks it covered. The demonstration data from all sites and locations were collected and organized into a single database. Several analytical results were obtained from the subsequent studies, such as self-healing feeder design for higher system reliability, advanced Volt/VAr for total demand, peak pricing, DER location optimization, research on customer’s appliance control, and time-of-use tariffs for providing better incentives for rural customers. 8.8.6 GRID4EU GRID4EU, an European smart grid demonstration project, was launched in 2011 with an investment worth 25.5 million euros by the European Union (EU). The project amassed overall expenditure in the tune 54 million euros prior to successful completion, making it one of the biggest smart grid investments by EU. GRID4EU led to the formation of a consortium of six major European energy distributors (alphabetically CEZ, Enel Distribuzione, ERDF, Iberdrola, CEZ Distribuce, RWE, and Vattenfall Eldistribution). The project investigated the feasibility and benefits of deploying smart grids in certain regions of Europe as well as researched on increasing renewable energy integration, proliferation of use of EVs, power system automation, loss minimization, utility as well as customer-side demand management, energy storage, and energy efficiency. Six demonstrators joined resources to investigate innovative solutions that can directly lead to improvement of MV and LV network automation technologies to face the constraints introduced by the increased amount of DER and new usages (e.g., electric vehicles, heat pumps) and reduce energy losses and maintain or harden the system to cyber-physical attacks. Demand response and investigation of optimal integration of renewable resources were also key research topics in the smart grid demonstration projects carried out by GRID4EU. 8.8.7  Internationalization of Smart Grid Goals Several countries in North America and Europe have signed bilateral assistance commitments to among neighboring countries to modernize the electric grid. Many countries in Asia, South America, and Africa have launched intensified efforts to encourage the development of indigenous smart grids. International coordination will provide multiple benefits, such as: •  Development of world-wide industry standards will ensure the expansion of the market for smart grid vendors and suppliers across the world. An internationally coordinated approach will lead to increase in exchange exports of their smart grid solutions and technologies, and deployment services overseas, which in turn will increase further innovation and job growth in the power sector worldwide. •  The use of international standards results in manufacturing efficiency and encourages an “open market” environment, which will drive competition and improvement of products and services in the smart grid industry.

8.9  TRENDS IN SMART GRID DEPLOYMENT AND FUTURE OUTLOOK The definition of smart grid is often contextual, and specific to national or regional interests. Thus, the valuation of technologies that are critical to smart grids vary from utility to utility. A few more years of experimental operation and learning from different smart grid strategies will be required to

08_Santoso_Sec08_p0481-0522.indd 516

23/11/17 2:59 PM

SMART GRIDS AND MICROGRIDS   517 

efficiently estimate the total costs and benefits of smart grid technologies, especially as several utilities across the world begin to mine new and large data-sets from deployed smart grid systems. Utilities, federal and regional regulators have a diverse experiences with smart grid technologies. Thus it is common to come across differing opinions and views on costs and benefits. As a result, investment decisions and deployment rates are determined at very region-specific projects motivated by individual local energy goals, availability of funds and investments, and the level of smart grid expertise and experience at individual utilities. In the United States, DOE and Electric Power Research Institute (EPRI) invested time and resources to design an organized framework for utilities to proactively compute costs and benefits, based on observations from prior smart grid demonstrations projects. Analysis of previous smart grid projects leads to development of new smart grid paradigms. The advances are further augmented by progress in technology, algorithms, metering devices, forecasting tools, and computing technologies. The evolution of smart grid depends strongly on the insights from historical data, and additional benefits are generated by including a larger number of enabling technologies to existing smart grid systems [50]. 8.9.1  Distribution Automation Projects DA technologies significantly improves resilience and reliability of the power grid. The benefits also extend to marked improvements in the system’s operational efficiencies across the network. Grid modernization projects in the United States that installed automated feeder switches have reported that outage times have been reduced to 56% shorter durations, and the frequency of such outages dropped by 11% to 49%. Following a severe windstorm on July 5, 2012, utilities in Chattanooga, Tennessee were able to quickly restore power to more than 40,000 customers (i.e. more than half the impacted customers) within 2 seconds using automated feeder switching. Apart from being able to avoid outage damages to residents and businesses, the utility also did not lose revenue worth $1.4 million as it was able to restore power more quickly. Several utilities across the world are inclined to adopt smart grid technologies to optimize voltage and reactive power levels in certain distribution circuits dynamically. Smart devices are being able to save 2.2% energy reductions and 1.8% peak load reductions per distribution circuit on average over an extended period of time [51–53]. Multiple ARRA projects have deployed CVR within their distribution systems [54]. By automating capacitor banks on their lines (the concept was first reported in the 1970s), a few utilities (especially in California) are making an active endeavor to reduce peak energy demands [55, 56]. Several subsequent studies have successfully replicated the energy saving algorithms. From prior CVR-based projects, it is possible to estimate that substantial energy efficiency improvements (approximately 6500 MW) are possible by using CVR technologies alone [57]. 8.9.2  Synchrophasor Applications Projects Modernization and upgrading the transmission system refers to more widespread installation of digital, high precision measuring equipment to monitor and control local operations of the grid. Synchrophasor technology, which uses time-synchronized devices called PMUs to measure the instantaneous voltage, current, and frequency at substations, is installed in a large number of locations to improve wide-area monitoring and control of the transmission system. The data obtained from the PMUs are propagated across the network in real time to advanced software applications that allow engineers and operators to identify points of system instability, monitor, detector, or even predict frequency and voltage excursions. Synchrophasor technology has given power system operators the ability to have real-time (and sometimes even proactive) insights about the system behavior and its likelihood to exceed acceptable operating limits. Thus, such insights are very useful to take corrective and preventative measures for disturbances before grid stability is very severely impacted. It is important to know that data obtained from the PMUs also facilitate coordination and control of generators of all scales and sizes, including renewable resources (e.g., solar farms, wind power plants, etc.).

08_Santoso_Sec08_p0481-0522.indd 517

23/11/17 2:59 PM

518  SECTION EIGHT

The 2003 Northeast blackout in the United States was largely attributed to the lack of situational awareness for grid operators. In order to take measures to prevent such large blackouts in the future, widespread PMU installations can be used. PMUs installed in the substations can provide time-stamped data 30 times per second or faster, which is approximately a hundred times faster than conventional SCADA technology. Deployment of PMU-based synchrophasor technology includes phasor data concentrators (commonly known as PDCs) in the power grid. 8.9.3  Microgrid Deployment DOE launched Advanced Microgrid Program in 2013 to encourage development of microgrids across the United States [58]. The Advanced Microgrid Program (AMP) intended improve the resilience and reliability of microgrids, initially limited to less than 10 MW capacity. AMP laid great emphasis on improving existing communications technology by emphasising on data security and consumer privacy. AMP also leverage “adaptive logic” to ensure maintaining a balance between the system’s energy resources and the energy storage. By focusing on designing innovative interfaces for advanced autonomous operation (islanded operation) with rest of the existing legacy power grid, AMP intended to make it easier from control and operations point of view. Deployment of smart inverters and controllers helped in increasing interactivity of low voltage power equipment with the transmission level EMS and facilitate demand response in the low voltage network. 8.9.4  Smart Grid Vision Developed and developing nations around the world are investing significant resources in modernizing their power grids to increase reliability and sustainability of the energy critical infrastructure. These efforts include developing and installing new equipment to facilitate the transition to renewable sources of energy, and adding additional communication capabilities in increasingly larger number of nodes in the power grid. A communication-driven redesign of power system operation and control must require modifications in security protocols and business models followed by utilities today, worldwide. The customer evolution into “prosumers” and their increased participation in the distribution grid will have impact on energy markets as well. With greater levels of customer-side generation and higher efficiency in transmission and distribution, the traditional utility business model is likely to see significant revisions [59]. A “transactive energy framework” is being proposed as the common ground in which utilities, consumers, and other participants in the energy market will be able to determine the most appropriate technologies, configurations, and system designs that will make the power grid more reliable and economical. The transactive energy framework also insists on maintaining optimality in power flow and meeting financial goals of the participants [60]. Modernization of the power grid is a cost-intensive venture, and it will be prudent to have longterm investment strategies in place. The tasks and responsibilities need to be shared with organizations and utilities at all levels of the power grid in order to minimize duplication of efforts, or having two entities compete for resources to meet the same overall objective. The future power grid will see benefit from advances in material science for improving storage and insulation requirements of the grid, reducing losses, and increasing ability for more power transfer at higher reliability. Advancements in the areas of parallel and distributed high power computing will be necessary to solve complicated optimization problems in real-time. Improved information technology resources will also be required to ensure security and scalability of computational complexity caused by additional uncertainty factors introduced in the smart grid. It cannot be stressed enough that cyber-physical security need to be embedded in smart grid synchrophasor applications, DA, and microgrid controllers as well as in other digital devices being adopted with the smart power grid. Thus, in other words, the deployment of resilient and efficient smart grid calls for interdisciplinary contributions from many domains of science, society, and technology.

08_Santoso_Sec08_p0481-0522.indd 518

23/11/17 2:59 PM

SMART GRIDS AND MICROGRIDS   519 

8.10 REFERENCES  [1] Momoh, J., Smart Grid: Fundamentals of Design and Analysis. John Wiley & Sons, vol. 63, 2012.   [2] “European technology platform for the electricity networks of the future,” European Technology Platform on Smartgrids, 2010.   [3] Locke G. and P. D. Gallagher, “NIST framework and roadmap for smart grid interoperability standards, release 1.0,” National Institute of Standards and Technology, vol. 33, 2010.   [4] Wiginton, L., Nguyen, H., and Pearce, J. M., “Quantifying rooftop solar photovoltaic potential for regional renewable energy policy,” Computers, Environment and Urban Systems, vol. 34, no. 4, pp. 345–357, 2010.   [5] Pelletier, S., Jabali, O., and Laporte, G., “Goods distribution with electric vehicles: Review and research perspectives,” Technical Report CIRRELT-2014-44. CIRRELT, Montréal, Canada, 2014.   [6] Lasseter, R., Akhil, A., Marnay, C., Stephens, J., Dagle, J., Guttromson, R., Meliopoulous, A., Yinger, R., and Eto, J., “The certs microgrid concept, white paper on integration of distributed energy resources,” California Energy Commission, Office of Power Technologies-US Department of Energy, LBNL-50829, http:// certs. lbl. gov, 2002.  [7] Hatziargyriou, N., and Strbac, G., “Microgrids: A possible future energy configuration?” IEA Seminar Distributed Generation: Key Issues, Challenges and Roles, 2004.   [8] Hatziargyriou, N., Asano, H., Iravani, R., and Marnay, C., “Microgrids,” IEEE Power and Energy Magazine, vol. 5, no. 4, pp. 78–94, 2007.   [9] Katiraei, F., Iravani, R., Hatziargyriou, N., and Dimeas, A. “Microgrids management,” IEEE Power and Energy Magazine, vol. 6, no. 3, pp. 54–65, 2008. [10] Agrawal, P., “Overview of DOE microgrid activities,” Symposium on Microgrid, Montreal, June, vol. 23, 2006. [11] “Microgrids evolution roadmap, microgrids 1: Engineering, economics, & experience,” CIGRE. Working Group C6.22, 2015. [12] Venkataramanan, G. and Marnay, C., “A larger role for microgrids,” IEEE power and energy magazine, vol. 6, no. 3, pp. 78–82, 2008. [13] Tsikalakis, A. G. and Hatziargyriou, N. D., “Centralized control for optimizing microgrids operation,” IEEE power and energy society general meeting, 2011, pp. 1–8. [14] Jiayi, H., Chuanwen, J., and Rong, X., “A review on distributed energy resources and microgrid,” Renewable and Sustainable Energy Reviews, vol. 12, no. 9, pp. 2472–2483, 2008. [15] Hatziargyriou, N. D., Dimeas, A., Tsikalakis, A. G., Lopes, J. P., Kariniotakis, G., and Oyarzabal, J., “Management of microgrids in market environment,” International Conference on Future Power Systems, vol. 18, Amsterdam, 2005. [16] Falliere, N., Murchu, L., and Chien, E., “W32. Stuxnet Dossier: Version 1.3,” Symantec Security Response, 2010. [Online]. Available: http://www.symantec.com/content/en/us/enterprise/media/security\response/ whitepapers/w32\ stuxnet\ dossier.pdf. [17] Batchelor, B., Han, D., and Kim, E., “Annual energy review (FY2010),” National Energy Technology Laboratory (NETL), Tech. Rep., 2010. [18] McCurley, P., Whitaker, V., Bacik, S., Kotting, C., Myrda, P., Siegfried, T., and Ilic, M., “Reliability considerations from the integration of smart grid,” North American Electric Reliability Corporation, 2010. [19] “Roadmap to achieve energy delivery systems cybersecurity,” Energy Sector Control Systems Working Group, Energetics, Inc, URL https://www. control-systemsroadmap.net/ieRoadmap\%20Documents/roadmap.pdf, 2011. [20] Johnson, S., “Critical infrastructure protection committee update,” North American Electric Reliability Corporation (NERC), 2011. [21] Creery, A., and Byres, E., “Industrial cybersecurity for power system and scada networks,” Record of Conference Papers Industry Applications Society 52nd Annual Petroleum and Chemical Industry Conference. IEEE, 2005, pp. 303–309. [22] Bajpai, P., Chanda, S., and Srivastava, A. K., “A novel metric to quantify and enable resilient distribution system using graph theory and choquet integral,” IEEE Transactions on Smart Grid, 2016. [23] Chanda, S., and Srivastava, A. K., “Defining and enabling resiliency of electric distribution systems with multiple microgrids,” IEEE Transactions on Smart Grid, vol. 7, no. 6, pp. 2859–2868, 2016.

08_Santoso_Sec08_p0481-0522.indd 519

23/11/17 2:59 PM

520  SECTION EIGHT

[24] Buldyrev, S. V., Parshani, R., Paul, G., Stanley, H. E., and Havlin, S., “Catastrophic cascade of failures in interdependent networks,” Nature, vol. 464, no. 7291, pp. 1025–1028, 2010. [25]  Parandehgheibi, M., Modiano, E., and Hay, D., “Mitigating cascading failures in interdependent power grids and communication networks,” International Conference on Smart Grid Communications (SmartGridComm). IEEE, 2014, pp. 242–247. [26] Xin, S., Guo, Q., Sun, H., Zhang, B., Wang, J., and Chen, C., “Cyber-physical modeling and cybercontingency assessment of hierarchical control systems,” IEEE Transactions on Smart Grid, vol. 6, no. 5, pp. 2375–2385, 2015. [27] N. A. S. Initiative et al., “Phasor gateway technical specifications for north american synchro-phasor initiative network,” Pacific Northwest National Laboratory, Richland, Washington, 2009. [28] P. S. R. Committee et al., “IEEE standards for synchrophasor measurements for power systems-ieee std c37. 118.1-2011,” New York, USA, 2011. [29] Fang, X., Misra, S., Xue, G., and Yang, D., “Smart grid the new and improved power grid: A survey,” IEEE Communications Surveys & Tutorials, vol. 14, no. 4, pp. 944–980, 2012. [30] Chen, C., Wang, J., and Kishore, S., “A distributed direct load control approach for large-scale residential demand response,” IEEE Transactions on Power Systems, vol. 29, no. 5, pp. 2219–2228, 2014. [31] Chen, C., “Topics in demand response for energy management in smart grid,” Ph.D. Dissertation, Lehigh University, 2013. [32] Rahimi, F., and Ipakchi, A., “Demand response as a market resource under the smart grid paradigm,” IEEE Transactions on Smart Grid, vol. 1, no. 1, pp. 82–88, 2010. [33] Manual, P., “11: Energy & ancillary services market operations,” Prepared by Forward Market Operations group at PJM, 2013. [34]  “719, wholesale competition in regions with organized electric markets,” Federal Energy Regulatory Commission, 2008. [35] F. E. R. Commission et al., “Demand response compensation in organized wholesale energy markets,” Washington DC, March, vol. 15, p. 2, 2011. [36] Olfati-Saber, R., Fax, J. A., and Murray, R. M., “Consensus and cooperation in networked multi-agent systems,” Proceedings of the IEEE, vol. 95, no. 1, pp. 215–233, 2007. [37] Chen, C., Wang, J., Qiu, F., and Zhao, D., “Resilient distribution system by microgrids formation after natural disasters,” IEEE Transactions on Smart Grid, vol. 7, no. 2, pp. 958–966, 2016. [38] Sˇulc, P., Backhaus, S., and Chertkov, M., “Optimal distributed control of reactive power via the alternating direction method of multipliers,” IEEE Transactions on Energy Conversion, vol. 29, no. 4, pp. 968–977, 2014. [39]  Erseghe, T., “Distributed optimal power flow using admm,” IEEE Transactions on Power Systems, vol. 29, no. 5, pp. 2370–2380, 2014. [40] Kekatos, V., and Giannakis, G. B., “Distributed robust power system state estimation,” IEEE Transactions on Power Systems, vol. 28, no. 2, pp. 1617–1626, 2013. [41] “Tame the impacts of distributed energy resources-the electric grid of the future,” OATI: http://www.oati. com/Solution/Smart-Energy/distributed-energy-resource-management, September 2016. [42]  “Managing big data for smart grids and smart meters,” Internet Security Group, IBM Corporation Whitepaper, 2012. [43]  “Smart grid research and development multi-year program plan,” US Department of Energy, 2011. [44] Ropp, M. and Ellis, A., “Suggested guidelines for assessment of dg unintentional islanding risk,” Sandia National Laboratories, Nat. Renewable Energy Lab., Albuquerque, New Mexico, Rep. SAND2012-1365, 2012. [45]  UCTE “Union for the co-ordination of transmission of electricity,” Brussels, Belgium, 2004. [46] Guerrero, J. M., De Vicuna, L. G., Matas, J., Castilla, M., and Miret, J., “Output impedance design of parallelconnected ups inverters with wireless load-sharing control,” IEEE Transactions on Industrial Electronics, vol. 52, no. 4, pp. 1126–1135, 2005. [47] Guerrero, J. M., Matas, J., De Vicuna, L. G. D. V., Castilla, M., and Miret, J., “Wireless-control strategy for parallel operation of distributed-generation inverters,” IEEE Transactions on Industrial Electronics, vol. 53, no. 5, pp. 1461–1470, 2006.

08_Santoso_Sec08_p0481-0522.indd 520

23/11/17 2:59 PM

SMART GRIDS AND MICROGRIDS   521 

[48] Guerrero, J. M., Vasquez, J. C., Matas, J., Castilla, M., and de Vicun˜a, L. G., “Control strategy for flexible microgrid based on parallel line-interactive ups systems,” IEEE Transactions on Industrial Electronics, vol. 56, no. 3, pp. 726–736, 2009. [49] Hammerstrom, D., Johnson, D., Kirkeby, C., Agalgaonkar, Y., Elbert, S., Kuchar, O., et al., “Pacific northwest smart grid demonstration project technology performance report volume 1: Technology performance,” PNWD-4445 volume, vol. 1, 2015. [50] Gellings, C., “Estimating the costs and benefits of the smart grid: a preliminary estimate of the investment requirements and the resultant benefits of a fully functioning smart grid,” Electric Power Research Institute (EPRI), Technical Report (1022519), 2011. [51] US Department of Energy, “Drivers and barriers for the application of conservation voltage reduction practices by electric utilities,” Report on Smart Grid Projects, 2014. [52] El-Hawary, M. E., “The smart gridstate-of-the-art and future trends,” Electric Power Components and Systems, vol. 42, no. 3-4, pp. 239–250, 2014. [53] Chanda, S., Shariatzadeh, F., Srivastava, A., Lee, E., Stone, W., and Ham, J., “Implementation of nonintrusive energy saving estimation for volt/var control of smart distribution system,” Electric Power Systems Research, vol. 120, pp. 39–46, 2015. [54] US Department of Energy, “Application of automated controls for voltage and reactive power management— initial results,” Report on Smart Grid Investment Grant Program, December 2012. [55] Lauria, D., “Conservation voltage reduction (cvr) at northeast utilities,” IEEE Transactions on Power Delivery, vol. 2, no. 4, pp. 1186–1191, 1987. [56] Barker, P. P., and De Mello, R. W., “Determining the impact of distributed generation on power systems. I. radial distribution systems,” in Power Engineering Society Summer Meeting, 2000. IEEE, vol. 3. IEEE, 2000, pp. 1645–1656. [57] Schneider, K. P., Tuffner, F., Fuller, J., Singh, R., et al. “Evaluation of conservation voltage reduction (cvr) on a national level,” Pacific Northwest National Laboratory report, 2010. [58] Smith, M., and Ton, D., “Key connections,” IEEE Power & Energy Magazine, vol. 11, no. 4, pp. 22–7, 2013. [59] Kind, P., “Disruptive Challenges: Financial Implications and Strategic Responses to a Changing Retail Electric Business,” 2013. [60]  Melton, R. B., “Gridwise transactive energy framework (draft version),” Pacific Northwest National Laboratory (PNNL), Richland, WA (US), Tech. Rep., 2013.

08_Santoso_Sec08_p0481-0522.indd 521

23/11/17 2:59 PM

This page intentionally left blank

08_Santoso_Sec08_p0481-0522.indd 522

23/11/17 2:59 PM

9

WIND POWER GENERATION Zhe Chen Professor of Electrical Engineering, Department of Energy Technology, Aalborg University, Aalborg, Denmark

David Infield Professor of Renewable Energy Technologies, Department of Electronic and Electrical Engineering, University of Strathclyde, Glasgow, United Kingdom

Nikos Hatziargyriou Professor of Power Systems, School of Electrical and Computer Engineering, National Technical University of Athens, Athens, Greece, and CEO, Hellenic Electricity Distribution Network Operator SA (HEDNO)



9.1 INTRODUCTION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 524 9.1.1 Wind Power Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 524 9.1.2 Wind Resource Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 525 9.1.3 Wind Turbines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 528 9.2 WIND ENERGY CONVERSION SYSTEMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 551 9.2.1 Wind Turbine Concepts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 551 9.2.2 Control of Wind Turbine Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 556 9.2.3 Wind Farms. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 562 9.3 OFFSHORE WIND POWER. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 565 9.3.1 Offshore Wind Turbines. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 566 9.3.2 Offshore Wind Farms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 568 9.4 WIND POWER IN POWER SYSTEMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 574 9.4.1 Challenges of Large-Scale Wind Power Integration and Power System Requirements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 574 9.4.2 Fault-Ride through and Reactive Power Support in Grid Faults. . . . . . . . 578 9.4.3 Enhancing the Controllability of Wind Power for Large-Scale Penetration in Power Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 580 9.4.4 Enhancing the Power System Capability of Accepting Large-Scale Wind Power. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 582 9.5 ACKNOWLEDGMENT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 589 9.6 REFERENCES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 589

523

09_Santoso_Sec09_p0523-0594.indd 523

23/11/17 3:14 PM

524        SECTION NINE

9.1 INTRODUCTION 9.1.1  Wind Power Introduction Wind is air flow caused by differences in the atmospheric pressure within the planetary boundary layer. Early civilizations made use of the power in the wind, in particular wind energy was used to propel boats along the Nile River as early as 5000 B.C. Windmills were used to pump water in China, while vertical-axis windmills were used to grind grain in Persia and the Middle East by 200 B.C. Windmills appeared in Europe during the Middle Ages and were refined by the Dutch for draining lakes and marshes of the Rhine River Delta. In the late 19th century, windmills were commonly used to pump water for farms [1]. The first documented electricity-generating wind turbine was for battery charging; it was designed and installed by an academic, Professor James Blyth, to light his holiday house in Marykirk, Scotland in July 1887 [2]. With the development of electric power generating technologies, small wind turbines were used to supply farms and homesteads remote from power networks. By the 1930s, wind generators for electricity generation were common on farms without grid connection in the United States [3, 4]. More recently larger wind generators have been developed for connection to electricity grids for commercial electricity power generation. Denmark has played a central role in modern wind power development. By 1900, there were about 2500 windmills for driving mechanical loads such as pumps and mills, producing an estimated combined peak power of about 30 MW. The largest machines were mounted on 24-m towers with fourbladed, approximately 23-m-diameter rotors. In 1957, Johannes Juul installed a 24-m-diameter wind turbine at Gedser. It was a three-bladed, horizontal-axis, upwind, and stall-regulated turbine and ran from 1957 until 1967. This became the basis for standard Danish turbines, many of which were manufactured and installed in the remainder of the 20th century, some of which are still in operation. However, large-scale modern wind turbines came to the fore only as a result of the oil crisis of the 1970s when Denmark turned seriously to renewable energy technologies, where incentives have been provided for larger wind turbines since the 1980s. Following this lead, more countries such as the United Kingdom, Germany, Spain, and the United States started to promote wind turbine developments from the early 1990s. Later other countries, notably China and India, joined in the promotion of wind power development. The Danish company Vestas led the field, having the largest wind turbine market share worldwide for a number of years in early 2000s. As a result of a dramatic growth in installation in recent years, China now leads the world in installed capacity. Power in the Wind.  Wind carries kinetic energy (E), which can be expressed for an air mass (M in kg) moving with a speed n (m/s), as E=



1 Mn 2 (J) 2

The air mass intercepted by a wind turbine rotor with swept area (A in m2) over a time interval Δt is the product of the air density r and the air volume which is A × n × Δt. Therefore, the corresponding kinetic energy in the air is

ΔE =

1 (rAn Δt)n 2 (J) 2

and the power in the wind PW is

PW =

∆E 1 = rAn 3 (W) ∆t 2

(9-1)

It can be seen that the wind power has a cubic relationship with the wind speed. The Beaufort scale shown in Table 9-1, taken from [5], is an empirical measure for describing wind conditions based on observed sea situations. Modern wind turbines are normally designed with a cut in wind speed between 3 and 5 m/s and a cutout wind speed about 25 m/s.

09_Santoso_Sec09_p0523-0594.indd 524

23/11/17 3:14 PM

WIND POWER GENERATION        525 

TABLE 9-1  Specifications and Equivalent Speeds [5] Mean wind speed Beaufort wind scale 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

Limits of wind speed

Knots

ms

Knots

ms−1

Wind descriptive terms

0 2 5 9 13 19 24 30 37 44 52 60 —

0 3 3 5 7 10 12 15 19 23 27 31 —

120 m, 5–10 MW

(b) FIGURE 9-39  Various types of offshore wind turbine foundations [58]. (a) Seabed fixed wind turbine foundations (EWEA); (b) wind turbine foundations with water depth (Principle Power).

09_Santoso_Sec09_p0523-0594.indd 567

23/11/17 3:14 PM

568        SECTION NINE

turbine foundations for use in shallow and moderate depth waters; and the floating structures for deep waters (over 60 m). The bottom fixed type of foundation includes monopile, gravity base, tripod pile, tripod caisson, and jacket caisson. A number of options exist for floating supports, including spar buoy (ballast stabilizing type), tension leg platform (mooring line stabilizing type), and semi-submersible [58]. The high offshore installation costs and their scaling are driving the trend to larger wind turbines. As discussed previously, larger wind turbines normally have lower speeds and thus must deal with higher torques. As a result direct drive generators without a gearbox, or hybrid drives with a reduced ratio gearbox, are often considered. For example, the 8-MW wind turbines of MHI Vestas V164, Gamesa and Areva the Adwen AD-180 use medium-speed geared drivetrains; while Siemens SWT-8.0-154 8MW and Enercon E-126 7.5MW wind turbines use a direct-drive drivetrain. 9.3.2  Offshore Wind Farms Similar to on land wind farms, the wind turbines in an offshore wind farm are normally connected via a medium voltage network. Each of the wind turbines has a step-up transformer to increase the voltage from the wind turbine’s low voltage to a higher voltage, for example 36 kV, for connecting to the wind farm power collection system. The transformer and related medium voltage switch gear will be usually installed inside the wind turbine’s tower or nacelle. The electrical connection of an offshore wind farm may have a similar layout to that of an onshore wind farm, except that all the electrical connection are made with sea cables, and all installations have to be installed using special equipment, which are normally quite expensive. Three Danish offshore wind farm configurations are shown in Fig. 9-40. Due to the geographical constraints and other issues, a wind farm may take an irregular layout as shown in Fig. 9-40c. The offshore wind farm configuration must be assessed to identify the optimal design, that is, the one which minimizes cost of wind energy considering the costs of investment, operation and maintenance, cabling losses, and wake losses within the wind farm [60–63]. A medium voltage dc network connecting the wind turbines in a wind farm may be a possible alternative for a wind farm collection system. In this situation, some dc electrical equipment becomes necessary, such as dc circuit breakers for clearing faults in a dc circuit, dc/dc transformers for transforming medium dc voltage of the collection system to high dc voltage for a dc transmission system. Relevant work has been reported [64–66]. Offshore Wind Power Transmission.  If an offshore wind farm is close to shore and the wind farm capacity is not too large, the wind farm may be directly connected to the onshore grid with an ac submarine cable at the same voltage level of the power collection system. This has the attraction of using simple, low cost, and mature technology. However, the larger offshore wind farms now tend to be located further from the shore. Such wind farms may have to transfer power via a high-voltage transmission system, therefore, an offshore substation at the wind farm site is needed to step up the medium voltage of the wind farm power collection system to a high voltage for transmission and connection to the onshore grid. An offshore substation is normally installed on a platform with a structure similar to that used in the oil and gas industry, and thus more expensive than an onshore substation. The onshore substation can be of conventional design, and may make use of an existing substation if sufficient spare capacity exists. Either high voltage alternating current (HVAC) or high voltage direct current (HVDC) cable transmission systems may be used for transferring power from an offshore wind farm to an onshore grid. HVAC is often used for the situation where the offshore wind farm is not too far from the onshore grid. However, the capacitive nature of the ac submarine cables limits HVAC application in high-power and long-distance transmission because the ac cable produces reactive current, which limits the capacity available for transferring active power and results in significant

09_Santoso_Sec09_p0523-0594.indd 568

23/11/17 3:14 PM

WIND POWER GENERATION        569 

FIGURE 9-40  Danish offshore configurations [59]. (a) Horns Rev I offshore wind farm; (b) Horns Rev II offshore wind farm; (c) Anholt offshore wind farm.

power losses. The amount of generated reactive current is propositional to the cable length and the cable voltage. It is possible to increase the transmission distance by installing the reactive power compensation along the transmission system, but this would be very expensive for undersea cable transmission. The installation of compensation reactors at the terminals can extend the transmission distance, whereas the effect is limited as shown in Fig. 9-41 [67]. Some investigations on the methods for increasing the transmission distance have been conducted, for example, to use a lower frequency, such as 16⅔ Hz, where capacitive reactive power effect of the cables is reduced. However, this requires larger transformers and reactors, and extra frequency converters for onshore grid connection. If a large-size offshore wind farm is remotely located, the excessive charging current and power losses make the HVAC cable option unsuitable, and HVDC is the obvious choice. HVDC has some advantages, for example, good controllability of power flow, interconnection of asynchronous grids, no cable reactive charging current and lower cable power loss and higher transmission capacity. Furthermore, ac transmission lines need to be designed for the peak voltage of the ac sine waveform. However, the effective power that can be transmitted through an ac line is related to the root mean squared (RMS) value of the voltage, a factor of 1/ 2 of the peak value. This means that for the design with the same maximum voltage, a dc line may carry more power than an ac line. HVDC links are normally point to point connected with one converter station at each end which suits the case of normal offshore wind farms. A three-phase ac system needs more cables than a dc transmission system,

09_Santoso_Sec09_p0523-0594.indd 569

23/11/17 3:14 PM

570        SECTION NINE

1000 Onshore compensation only 900

Compensation at both cable ends

Maximal transmitted power [MW]

800

400 KV

700 600 500 220 KV

400 300

132 KV

200 100 0

0

50

100

150 200 250 Transmission distance [km]

300

350

400

FIGURE 9-41  Limits of ac cables transmission capacity for three voltage levels, 132, 220, and 400 kV [67].

but a dc transmission system needs more expensive equipment at the converter stations, including power electronic converters. Consequently, for shorter distances, the cost of the equipment outweighs the savings in the cost of the transmission cables. Over longer distances, the cost and capacity limitation on the cable becomes more significant, which makes HVDC economically advantageous in comparison with HVAC systems. For underwater transmission systems, the cable losses due to capacitance are much greater than overhead lines that makes HVDC economically advantageous at a much shorter distance than on land overhead lines. Figure 9-42 illustrates a general relationship between the cost of HVAC and HVDC systems and the transmission distance. The substation cost for a dc system is higher than an ac system but the lower line/cable cost mean HVDC is more cost-effective for long-distance transmission. HVAC cable systems are favorable for transmission distance up to about 50 to 70 km [68]. The HVDC technology can be further categorized into conventional line-commuted converter based HVDC (LCC-HVDC) using thyristor technology and voltage source converter–based (VSC) HVDC (VSC-HVDC) using IGBTs. The LCC-HVDC has been in commercial application for more than half century with good reliability and availability. It offers higher voltage level and transmission capacity compared to VSC-HVDC. VSC-HVDC converters work at a higher frequency than the LCC-HVDC converters, and produces considerably less harmonics at the cost of the increased switching losses. However, LCC-HVDC requires a strong ac network for commutation as well as a comparatively large filters and reactive power compensation equipment at a converter station, thus a large offshore substation converter station, which limits LCC-HVDC’s application in offshore wind industry.

09_Santoso_Sec09_p0523-0594.indd 570

23/11/17 3:14 PM

WIND POWER GENERATION        571 

Total AC cost

Total DC cost

Cost

DC losses

AC losses DC line cost

AC line cost DC terminal cost AC terminal cost Distance FIGURE 9-42  Break-even point of HVAC and VSC-HVDC systems.

On the other hand, VSC-HVDC does not require a strong external ac grid. VSC-HVDC converter stations are relatively compact, which includes circuit breakers, the interface transformer, ac side harmonic filters, and converter side harmonic filters, while the dc link consists of dc subsea cable, dc capacitor, and dc harmonic filters. The converter station is much more compact than a LCC-HVDC converter station, and may be positioned in location where it can cost-effectively collect the power from the offshore wind turbines and transfer the power into the onshore grid. The VSC has the ability of performing independent reactive and active power control, black start, plus fast, and reversible power flow control. The above beneficial characteristics make VSC-HVDC a more attractive transmission system for large-scale offshore wind farms. On the other hand, VSCs have a limited current capability. Overcurrents, even for very short durations, may result in thermal stresses that degrade or cause permanent damage to the semiconductors. Under a grid fault, the VSC will not be able to provide the short circuit current as a conventional ac power system. A protection strategy for a dc overvoltage may be to use a dc chopper. When the dc link voltage exceeds a threshold value, the chopper is put into operation to dissipate the excess energy and prevent the possible overvoltage of the dc circuit and converters, and over speed of the generators. A possible configuration of an offshore wind farm dc collection system and HVDC transmission system is illustrated in Fig. 9-43. Submarine Power Cables.  Submarine power cables are an important component in offshore wind power transmission systems. A submarine power cable normally consists of a concentric assembly of conductor, insulation, and protective layers. The conductor is made from copper or aluminum wires. Different types of electric insulation around the conductor are used, including •  Self-contained fluid-filled cables, including oil filled or gas filled •  Paper insulated (lapped insulated) cables, including mass-impregnated, etc. •  Extruded cables including EPR (ethylene propylene rubber), PE (polyethylene), XLPE (crosslinked polyethylene)

09_Santoso_Sec09_p0523-0594.indd 571

23/11/17 3:14 PM

572        SECTION NINE

A DC wind turbine (DCWT) AC/DC

DC/DC

DCWT

DCWT

DC/DC

DC/AC HVDC link

Vs

Grid

DCWT

DC collection system FIGURE 9-43  A possible configuration of an offshore wind farm DC collection system and HVDC transmission system.

The conductor and the around insulation layers form the cable core. In single-core cables the core is surrounded by a concentric armoring. In three-core cables, three cable cores are laid up in a spiral configuration and then the armoring is applied. The armoring consists often of steel wires, soaked in bitumen for corrosion protection. The armoring is sometimes equipped with nonmagnetic metallic materials (stainless steel, copper, brass) to reduce the power losses caused by the alternating magnetic field in ac cables. Modern power cables, for example, cables for the interconnection of offshore wind turbines, may carry optical fibers for data transmission or measurement. Figure 9-44 shows a number of types of subsea cables [69], and high voltage cable construction is illustrated in Fig. 9-45. Extruded cables are an important part of a VSC-HVDC link. The environmental benefits are: the cable insulation is PE based and not dangerous, the risk of oil spill is eliminated in XLPE cables. Furthermore, they are lighter and more compact, therefore, very competitive in comparison with the other types of cables. For VSC-HVDC system the maximum voltage level with XLPE submarine cables presently available on the market is ±320 kV [70]. However, technology improves quickly and higher voltage and power levels are expected. Examples of Offshore Wind Power Transmission Systems [71].  Various types of offshore wind farm transmission systems for connecting to the onshore grid have been adopted. A few examples are introduced here. As mentioned, some offshore wind farms do not have an offshore substation and their wind turbines are directly connected to the onshore power grid via medium ac voltage cables. Examples are: the United Kingdom’s first offshore wind farm, North Hoyle (60 MW, 2003, 12 km offshore) connected to the shore via 33 kV cables; and the U.K. offshore wind farms, Kentish Flats (90 MW, 2005, 8.9 km offshore), and Scroby Sands (60 MW, 2004, 2.5 km offshore).

09_Santoso_Sec09_p0523-0594.indd 572

23/11/17 3:14 PM

WIND POWER GENERATION        573 

Rated Voltage Insulation

33 kV ac

150 kV ac

420 kV ac

320 kV dc

450 kV dc

XLPE, EPR

XLPE

Extruded

Mass Impregnated Long Interconnection distance of power connections grids over long of offshore distances platforms or wind parks

Typical Supply of small application islands, connection of offshore wind turbines

Supply to large islands, offshore platform export cables

Oil/paper or XLPE Crossings of rivers, straits with large transmission capacity

Max. length Typical rating

20-30 km

70-150 km

500 km

>500 km

30 MW

180 MW

700 MW/3 cables

1000 MW/ cable pair

600 MW/ cable

FIGURE 9-44  Submarine power cable types [69].

Conductor Insulation Sheath Fibre Optic Cores Armour Outer Serving FIGURE 9-45  HV cable construction [69].

Denmark’s Horns Rev wind farm constructed in 2002, a main European offshore pilot project with a capacity of 160 MW, is the first offshore wind farm using an offshore transformer substation, which connected to the onshore grid through a 15-km three-core ac cable with a rated voltage of 150 kV, while Denmark’s 165.6 MW Nysted wind farm, constructed in 2003, also has an offshore transformer station, connected to the onshore grid through a 10-km 132-kV ac submarine cable. The United Kingdom’s 90 MW Barrow wind farm, which was completed in 2006, also uses an offshore substation, which is connected to the onshore grid with a 7-km 132-kV ac cable.

09_Santoso_Sec09_p0523-0594.indd 573

23/11/17 3:14 PM

574        SECTION NINE

HVDC BorWin1 is the first VSC-HVDC in the world for connecting an offshore wind farm to an onshore grid, the system was built by ABB on the basis of experiences of Gotland HVDC Light, the world’s first commercial HVDC transmission using VSC converters. HVDC BorWin1 connecting BorWin Alpha, the first VSC-HVDC station in the world installed on an offshore platform, to Diele substation, consists of a 125-km of submarine cable and 75 km of underground cable, and can transfer 400 MW power at a bipolar voltage of ±150 kV. BorWin1 uses two-level converters in which several hundred IGBTs are connected directly in series in each valve. HVDC BorWin2 also uses a VSC-HVDC, built by Siemens with the modular multilevel converter (MMC) technology, 4.5 kV IGBTs are used as the switching elements. The VSC-HVDC link has a rated voltage of ±300 kV and a transmission capacity of 800 MW. The offshore converter is located on the BorWin Beta platform, the onshore converter station is also at Diele. Each converter station is equipped with two, three-phase transformers, each rated at 590 MVA (offshore) and 585 MVA (onshore). Each converter valve is equipped with a dry-type valve reactor of 50 mH. The cables are the extruded crosslinked polyethylene insulation supplied by Prysmian. The total cable length from BorWin Beta to the onshore substation is 200 km, of which 125 km is sea cable and 75 km is underground land cable.

9.4  WIND POWER IN POWER SYSTEMS 9.4.1  Challenges of Large-Scale Wind Power Integration and Power System Requirements [72] Wind turbines present significantly different features from conventional power plant using synchronous generators. Some of main issues are as follows: •  Wind power is variable and challenging to accurately predict, making it difficult to participate in power dispatch and electricity market. •  Wind power lacks reliability and wind power fluctuations may cause problems to power system balancing; large penetrations of wind power increase the demand for reserve capacity and ancillary services. •  Wind power plant is less flexible and less controllable in comparison to conventional power generation. •  Wind power conversion system may behave differently from conventional generators in terms of inertia, frequency control, reactive power regulation, and power system dynamic response. •  Modern wind power plants are mostly power electronic interfaced, the response speed and short circuit power are different from conventional generators. They may present different impedance characteristics over a range of frequencies which may create a risk of harmonic resonance. •  Wind power plants may be located in geographically unfavorable areas, far away from consumers/ load centers, with large amounts of fluctuating power needing to be transmitted over long distance transmission lines, which may cause transmission line instability. In order to realize stable, reliable, and economical operation of power grids with high wind power penetration, changes need to be made both to the power network (including conventional generators) and the wind plant. Wind turbine manufacturers and wind farm operators have been improving the performance of the wind turbines, while the grid operators have taken actions to secure the reliable operation of a grid with large-scale wind power penetration. Grid codes are part of the process. Power System Requirements: GRID CODES [73].  Grid codes relating to wind power specify the requirements wind turbines must meet before connecting to a power grid. A grid code covers many technical aspects, in general, it includes steady-state performance (frequency, voltage, active and reactive power, and power quality); dynamic performance (frequency gradients, start-stop, active power ramp rates, reactive power and voltage dynamic control, fault-ride through, inertia, overvoltage and

09_Santoso_Sec09_p0523-0594.indd 574

23/11/17 3:14 PM

WIND POWER GENERATION        575 

protection); communication and control; simulation models, certification/verification; commissioning and performance verification. When wind power penetration level was low, the wind turbines or wind farms were simply treated as industrial load in some grid codes which may be specified by a distribution system operator (DSO), for example, may only require power factor, harmonic, inrush current, etc. However, the rapid increase of wind power penetration level forces many transmission system operators (TSOs) to set up and continuously update the grid codes for wind turbine connection and operation. In this subsection, the grid codes are briefly introduced, some contents of the Danish grid code are used as illustrative examples, including the regulation of frequency and voltage, control of active and reactive power, fault ride–through capability, etc. Operation Range of Frequency and Voltage.  Electrical equipment connected to the grid is designed for a set of specified conditions; frequency and voltage are two very important parameters. In normal operation of a conventional power system, the frequency and voltage are respectively used to judge the balance of active and reactive power production and consumption. For example, a frequency rise indicates more active power production than consumption, and a voltage increase means more reactive power generation than consumption. A power system operator needs to maintain the power system frequency and voltage within specified ranges by respectively adjusting the active power and reactive power production to meet the active power and reactive power consumption. The nature of the wind energy resource may prevent a wind farm from adjusting its active power production freely. At the power grid level, more reserve may be needed for balancing. Traditionally the system operators would arrange for reserve to cover variations, but increasingly they expect wind farm operators to take some responsibility for balancing. For larger wind turbines, operation outside the normal conditions may be required for some specified time periods so that the system operator can have time to restore normal operation. Figure 9-46 shows the specified frequency/voltage operation range for wind farm between 25 kW and 1.5 MW [73]. Umax

U –10%

NORMAL PRODUCTION

U –5%

90-100% of normal production for minimum 5 hours

U

90-100% of normal production for minimum 30 minutes

U +5%

No req. for production 80-100% of normal production for minimum 20 seconds 85-100% of normal production for minimum 3 minutes

U point of connection

U +10%

60-100% of normal production for minimum 15 minutes

No req. for production

Umin 47.00 47.50 48.00 48.50 49.00 49.50 50.00 50.50 51.00 51.50 52.00 52.50 50.20 Frequency [Hz]

FIGURE 9-46  The required frequency/voltage operation range for wind power plants at 25 kW to 1.5 MW [73].

09_Santoso_Sec09_p0523-0594.indd 575

23/11/17 3:14 PM

576        SECTION NINE

To contribute to frequency regulation, the wind turbines are required to increase or decrease power output in line with power system frequency variation. The wind power output should be reduced if the frequency is higher than a specified range, on the other hand, the wind turbine needs to increase power production if the frequency is lower than a specified range. Figure 9-47 illustrates a required frequency power characteristic for a wind farm, where f1, f2, … can be specified by the system operator, while the active power production may be kept unchanged within a dead band between f2 and f3, and the linearly regulated with possible different slops in other frequency ranges. Control band Dead band Pavailable

Droop 1 PDelta

Droop 2 fmax

Active power

Droop 3

Droop 4

fmin f7

Pmin 0 47.00

48.00

49.00

50.00

f1 f2

f3 f4

51.00

52.00

f5

f6

Frequency [Hz]

FIGURE 9-47  Frequency control for wind power plants with a power output higher than 25 MW [73].

A number of operation modes should be made available at a wind farm and be ready to be put into operation, those operation modes may include •  Balance Control. Wind farm production can be adjusted up or down to specified levels. •  Delta Control. Wind farm is operated with a certain constant reserve capacity in relation to its available power production capacity, such reserve power may be used in a frequency/power control. •  Power Ramp Rate Limiter. This specifies the speed at which the wind farm power production can be adjusted. •  Automatic Frequency Control. A wind farm can automatically adjust its active power production in response to frequency variation at the measuring point. •  Reactive Power Control. A wind farm may be required to produce or absorb a specified amount of reactive power. •  Automatic Voltage Control. A wind farm can automatically adjust its reactive power production in response to voltage variation at the measuring point. Also the power production of a wind turbine should be able to be adjusted to any value between the maximum available power and the minimum power of the wind turbine within a specified period.

09_Santoso_Sec09_p0523-0594.indd 576

23/11/17 3:14 PM

WIND POWER GENERATION        577 

Wind farms are required to have the capability of providing a certain amount lagging/leading reactive power to contribute to reactive power balance and voltage support in both normal operation and fault situations. Grid codes often require wind turbines to be able to operate within a range of power factor and reactive power with reference to active power production. Figure 9-48 illustrates reactive power requirements for wind power plants.

1.0

P/Pn

0.8

0.6

Inductive Q-import

Capacitive Q-export

0.4

0.2

0.0 –0.480 0.900

–0.410 0.925

–0.330 0.950

–0.228 –0.100 0.00 0.100 0.228 0.975 0.995 1.000 0.995 0.975

0.330 0.950

0.410 0.925

Q/Pmax

0.410 0.925

Q/Pmax

(a)

Cos ϕ

1.0

P/Pn

0.8

0.6

Capacitive Q-export

Inductive Q-import

0.4

0.2

0.0 –0.480 0.900

–0.410 0.925

–0.330 0.950

–0.228 –0.100 0.00 0.100 0.228 0.975 0.995 1.000 0.995 0.975

(b)

0.330 0.950

Cos ϕ

FIGURE 9-48  Requirements for reactive power [73]. (a) Power range of wind turbine: 1.5 kW to 1.5 MW; (b) power range of wind turbine: 1.5 to 25 MW; (c) power range of wind turbine: >25 MW.

09_Santoso_Sec09_p0523-0594.indd 577

23/11/17 3:15 PM

578        SECTION NINE

1.0

P/Pn

0.8

0.6

Inductive Q-import

0.4

Capacitive Q-export

0.2

0.0 –0.480 0.900

–0.410 0.925

–0.330 0.950

–0.228 0.975

0.000 1.000

0.228 0.975

(c)

0.330 0.950

0.410 0.925

Q/Pmax Cos ϕ

FIGURE 9-48  (Continued )

From Fig. 9-48, it can be clearly seen that the demand on the reactive power capacity becomes greater if the size of the wind power plant increases. Sometimes, a wind farm may also be required to help keeping the voltage at the point of common coupling (PCC) within the required range. Early wind turbines based on conventional induction generators are normally only required to keep a good power factor, which is achieved by using switching capacitor banks or other reactive power compensation devices, such as SVCs. DFIG and full-scale power electronic interfaced wind power generators can contribute to reactive power regulation with power electronic interface systems. If more and flexible reactive power capacity is required, additional reactive power compensation systems, such as SVCs and STATCOMs (SVGs), may be used at the wind farm level to provide support in both normal and transient conditions. 9.4.2  Fault-Ride through and Reactive Power Support in Grid Faults To help power system recovery after a grid fault, grid codes require that wind turbines have the capability of fault-ride through, which means that the wind turbine systems should remain connected to electricity system during a grid fault so that the wind turbines can quickly support the grid recovery after the grid fault is cleared. The disconnection of wind turbines from the grid may cause significant loss of generation capacity if wind penetration is high, adding to the challenge of maintaining the power system and reducing system security. Under a power system fault, a wind turbine will experience a rapid voltage variation. Since most power system faults are temporary, that is, faults are usually cleared quickly by auto-reclosure. The severity and the time period of such a voltage variation will determine whether the wind turbine must not be disconnected. The requirements are normally specified as a characteristic, as shown in Fig. 9-49, where area A is the normal operation zone and area B is the fault-ride through zone, that is, wind turbines should not be disconnected from the grid if the voltage is in area B. To help system voltage recovery, reactive power support is very important and thus is also specified by grid codes, such an example is illustrated in Fig. 9-50. The grid code may also require that wind turbines be able to withstand more than one independent fault within an interval of a few minutes.

09_Santoso_Sec09_p0523-0594.indd 578

23/11/17 3:15 PM

WIND POWER GENERATION        579 

U Area A

U point of connection

90%

Area B

Area C

20%

0 0.0

0.5

1.0

1.5

2.0

2.5

3.0

3.5

4.0

Time [s] FIGURE 9-49  Requirement for tolerance of voltage drops (power output >1.5 MW) [73].

U Area A 90%

U point of connection

80% 70% 60%

Area B

50% 40% 30% 20% Area C

10% 0 0%

10%

20%

30%

40%

50%

60%

70%

80%

90% 100%

IQ/In FIGURE 9-50  Requirement for reactive power supply during voltage drops (power output >1.5 MW) [73].

09_Santoso_Sec09_p0523-0594.indd 579

23/11/17 3:15 PM

580        SECTION NINE

Grid codes also specify requirements for power quality, for example, rapid voltage variations, flicker, harmonics, and inter-harmonics. Monitoring and communication systems are recommended, such as a supervisory control and data acquisition (SCADA) system for wind power plants so that the information about operation and control can be communicated. In most situations, the wind farm operator is required to provide key information to the power system operator, while, more detailed signals are used by the wind farm owner to monitor and control the wind farm. Information generally includes voltage, current, frequency, active power, reactive power, wind speed, wind direction, regulation capability, temperature, and rotating speed. Different power system operators in different region/countries have different requirements in their grid codes for wind power. The requirements may vary significantly from one country to another depending on the grid conditions. For instance, a weak or isolated power network would require more restrictive fault-ride-through requirements (lower voltage and longer duration) than a strongly inter-connected power system. 9.4.3  Enhancing the Controllability of Wind Power for Large-Scale Penetration in Power Systems Wind Power Plant in Power Systems.  With the increase of wind power penetration, wind farms have had to an extent take over the role of conventional generators in some networks. In the future it will be expected that wind turbines and wind farms work as wind power plants (WPPs), that is, like a conventional generator to contribute to voltage and frequency control. Many efforts have been made to enhance WPP performance; some approaches are briefly discussed here. WPP Controller.  A WPP may consist of a large number of wind turbines, which are distributed in a relative large area. These wind turbines may be subject to very different operational conditions, such as wind speed, wind direction, and turbulence intensity. The wind turbines in a WPP need to be monitored and controlled in a coordinated manner, which requires significant computational effort and modern control and communication hardware. The two-level hierarchical structure, consisting of a wind power plant controller and individual wind turbine controllers discussed previously, may be used. The WPP controller communicates with the higher level control center and determines the operating points for wind turbines to meet grid demands. The turbine controllers respond to the power set point from WPP controller. Fast and accurate set point tracking is essential for efficiency so any communication delay between the wind turbine controllers and the wind power plant controller must be assessed in the context of possible unstable operation. The control strategy design should consider the wind power characteristics and grid code requirements, such as active power control, reactive power control, fault-ride through, power quality [74, 75], as well as other issues, including inertia, resonance, and oscillations. Improvement of WPP Power Forecast Accuracy.  The limited predictability of wind power presents a challenge for a WPP to perform well in grid operation and in the electricity market. As the percentage of wind energy in power generation capacity grows, it becomes increasingly important to improve the accuracy of wind power forecasts so as to help in operational planning, scheduling, and contractual agreements in power market. If the installed wind power capacity is large, a small error in the wind speed forecast can result in a significant error in the active power prediction. Optimization of regulation and reserve power would enable cost effective utilization of system resources. Such optimization will depend on the accuracy of wind forecasts. Improved forecasts can reduce the need for reserve capacity and ancillary services provision thus increasing profits and minimizing risks. Active Power-Frequency Control of WPP.  Conventional synchronous generators, using frequency and voltage control systems, can automatically adjust the production of active and reactive power in line with variations of power system frequency and voltage. The primary and secondary power and frequency controls are set at different response timescales to reduce respectively any power imbalance

09_Santoso_Sec09_p0523-0594.indd 580

23/11/17 3:15 PM

WIND POWER GENERATION        581 

and to bring the frequency back into the specified range. Conventional generation units are normally equipped with governor control, which works as primary frequency control to reduce power imbalance; secondary control is used to increase or decrease of power production of the specified generators in order to restore the frequency to its nominal value. Also, a conventional synchronous generator supports the system frequency by storing or releasing its kinetic energy in response to the speed/frequency variation. In order to enable a WPP contribute to the system inertia and frequency control, controllers may directly adjust the WPP output power reference commands in response to frequency variations [76]. For example, the WPP can increase its power output in response to a frequency drop through droop control. However, in order to deliver the required energy, the WPP needs either to be equipped with an energy storage system or to keep some spinning reserve, that is, be operated at a power level below the maximum available wind power level, which means a reduced utilization of the wind energy, and hence reduced revenues. While the wind farms are considered like other generating facilities to participate in the system frequency control, an overall optimization may be needed to decide how to distribute the primary and secondary control capacities among conventional power plants, WPPs, other generation units and possible energy storage systems. Energy Storage System for WPP.  Variable speed wind turbines can store or release energy by speeding up or slowing down the turbine rotor in a similar way as a flywheel to smooth out shortterm power spikes. However, dedicated energy storage systems may be needed to deal with long time and large-scale power fluctuations, especially in an islanded system or a system with weak interconnections. One way of fully exploiting the fluctuating wind power and providing a stable electricity supply from a WPP would be to combine the wind turbines with an energy storage system [77], such as hydro storage, compressed air energy storage systems, batteries, flywheels, or other types of energy storage. Energy storage systems could work well technically; however, further improvements on the energy storage technologies are required to make them more competitive from an economic perspective. From an overall power system perspective, large-scale system storage systems, such as hydropower or pump storage systems, are very useful. Fast-controllable hydro can be used for real-time balancing of power in areas where a large part of electricity power is provided by noncontrollable primary source like wind power. WPP Reactive Power and Voltage Control.  As indicated in grid codes, large wind farms are required to have the ability to control both active and reactive power. The simplest way of controlling reactive power is to use switched capacitor banks. For the wind farm with the fixed speed wind turbines equipped with conventional induction generators, the active power production and the reactive power absorption are strongly coupled. Thus, the active power fluctuations can result in similar fluctuations of the reactive power absorption, and consequently, the appropriate dynamic reactive power compensation equipment is needed to smooth the possible voltage fluctuations. Furthermore, reactive power can also be controlled to damp power system oscillations [78]. In a modern WPP, power electronics systems are normally used to interface wind turbines. These power electronic converters can contribute to reactive power control in order to compensate for the voltage variation caused by active power fluctuations, so that the fluctuations of the grid voltage can be limited within the specified range. Despite this, a WPP may need a centralized reactive power compensation system, for example, capacitor banks, reactors, SVCs or STATCOMs for providing voltage regulation. WPP in Power System Transients: Wind Turbines Fault-Ride Through.  During a short-circuit fault in a power system where a WPP is connected, the short circuit current may result in a voltage drop at the WPP terminal. Due to the voltage dip, the output electrical power and the electromagnetic torque of the wind generators are significantly reduced, while the mechanical torque may be still applied to the wind turbines from the wind. Consequently, the turbines and generators will be accelerated due to the resulting torque unbalance.

09_Santoso_Sec09_p0523-0594.indd 581

23/11/17 3:15 PM

582        SECTION NINE

After the fault clearance, the voltage tends to recover. If the voltage is not able to return to its normal range or the generator speed is too high, there may be insufficient electromagnetic torque to balance the mechanical torque. Hence, the machine would continue to accelerate. If this happens, the wind turbine may have to be disconnected, and thus fails to ride-through the fault. Such wind turbine disconnection should be avoided because losing a significant part of the power generation capacity could threaten the security of the power system. To ensure the security of a power system with high wind power penetration level, a WPP should be able to ride through the fault. Some modelling and control methods [79–83] to improve the faultride through capability are presented as follows: •  Wind turbine protection and control •  Fast power control (at the levels of wind turbines and WPP) •  Dynamic reactive power compensation (at the levels of wind turbines and WPP) •  Fast response energy storage/consumption system Some countries require fault-ride through systems to be experimentally tested before being accepted for connection to the power system. Power Oscillation Damping of WPP.  Fluctuating wind power, including the 3p component, may excite or amplify power system oscillations. Several studies have investigated the impacts of wind power on power system oscillations and small signal stability, for example [84]. The active and reactive power of a WPP can be controlled to damp power system oscillations. Several power oscillation damping controllers have been studied, including active power modulation, reactive power modulation, and a combination of both active power and reactive power modulations. Such a damping controller may be implemented within the WPP controller. Wind turbine mechanical resonance frequencies may be within the typical range for power system oscillations, and so attention should be paid to avoid exciting oscillations at mechanical resonance frequencies of the wind turbine. 9.4.4  Enhancing the Power System Capability of Accepting Large-Scale Wind Power Interconnected Networks and Virtual Power Plants.  Wind power fluctuates with wind speed, while the electrical grid must maintain a balance between the supply and the demand, normally by adjusting the power generation to follow the load variation. Large concentrated wind farms, such as offshore wind farms, may inject more significant power fluctuations into power systems than those wind turbines or wind farms distributed across a large area. Such power fluctuations may challenge the power balance and frequency control of power systems. For example, the offshore wind farm Horns Rev I (160 MW) in Western Denmark produces more significant active power fluctuations than the aggregated onshore wind power (over 3000 MW) in western Danish power system. A large geographical spread of wind power generation will reduce variability, increase predictability and decrease the occurrences of near zero or peak outputs. Geographical averaging is very useful to smooth wind power variations in all timescales. In order to deal with the power balance, the power system will need a sufficient amount of regulating power and appropriate arrangements for power exchange with neighboring power systems could also ease the task. It is clear that interconnection of power grids and distribution of wind power farms will help to smooth power fluctuations so as to reduce the challenge to system regulation and stability. Wind turbines distributed on land may be connected to distribution voltage level, such installations are relatively small in capacity individually, but can play an important role if a large number of such units exist in a power system, like the Danish power system. These distributed wind turbines and wind farms together with some other local generation units within the distribution systems may

09_Santoso_Sec09_p0523-0594.indd 582

23/11/17 3:15 PM

WIND POWER GENERATION        583 

be organized as a virtual power plant (VPP). The VPP may make a combined contribution to the power balance of the power system and can participate in the power market in a similar way to a conventional power plant, a VPP could also include the smart use of electricity household level, adjusting the use of dishwasher, heaters, refrigeration, and electric vehicles in response to a power market [85, 86]. A power dispatch center can perform the function of controlling a VPP by sending control signals, such as reference operating points, to a wind farm controller which then can perform the control of the wind turbines in the wind farm, for example, responding to frequency control, reactive power control and wind power curtailment. Wind Power and Electricity Price, Demand Side Management, and Flexible Generation Units.  Similar to other power generators, wind power can participate in power markets. Because the wind resource is free, high wind availability tends to drive down the electricity price as shown in Fig. 9-51 [87]. There may also be congestion in power transmission, especially during periods with high wind power generation. If the available transmission capacity cannot allow the power transmission freely, the constrained line may separate the area into two independent pricing areas. In the area with excess supply of power, the electricity price could be lower.

450

Spot price (DKK/MWh)

400

350

300

250

200 20

30

40

50 60 70 Wind power penetration (%)

80

90

100

FIGURE 9-51  Electricity price versus wind power production [87].

The electricity price may play a role of load regulation in a smart grid. The variation of electricity price could motivate the intelligent operation of electrical load and energy storage, including both electrical and thermal energy storage, such as electric vehicles, electrical boilers, heat pumps, household batteries, hydrogen fuel cells, and other types of storages, the integration and interaction of these units with the grid can contribute to power smooth and efficient use of wind power, and will affect the economics and security of the whole energy system, including thermal systems [88]. Nonelectrical energy systems, like heat storage, can also contribute, since a heat storage could decouple the heat production and electrical power production, giving more freedom for high efficiency CHPs (combine heat and power units) to perform power balance control and economic operation.

09_Santoso_Sec09_p0523-0594.indd 583

23/11/17 3:15 PM

584        SECTION NINE

Wind Power Transmission and Weak Grid Operation.  In some areas, the power system may not be designed to transfer the increased scale of wind power generation; consequently, the wind power transmission may have to be limited to reflect the possible power system constraints and bottlenecks. Actions, such as grid reinforcement and expansion, wind power curtailment and energy storage, may have to be taken to handle grid congestion and constraints violation. The cost of the transmission may have to be considered for selecting a wind farm location. Grid reinforcement may be necessary to maintain adequate transmission when wind power penetration increases. The construction of new lines may also be a prerequisite for reaching regions with a high wind resource. However, in some areas, the required network upgrades, especially the construction of new lines, may be a very lengthy process. The utilization of existing power lines may be increased by operating them at a higher capacity, assisted by temperature monitoring and dynamic line rating. Improving the cross-border electricity exchange between different networks is also a method for alleviating congestion. If controllable power plants are available within the congested area, coordinated automatic generation control (AGC) is also an option. There are also other ways of increasing the transmission capacity of the network, including 1. Increasing system capacity by increasing voltage level, adding transformers or new lines, 2. Improving the power flow distribution in the network to fit better with the line capacities, for example, by installing new facilities, like phase shifting transformers, or devices to increase voltage support (such as static VAR compensators) [89]. 3. Performing dynamic security assessment and preventive control to ensure the power system stability [90]. A wind farm may be connected to a weak grid which has a low short circuit capacity. A low short circuit ratio tends to give power quality and stability problems [91]. The problem may be mitigated by tuning the wind turbine/farm controllers, using a wind turbine power electronic interface, installing reactive power compensation devices and network enhancement. Wind Power Curtailment.  Reinforcing a transmission network may completely remove a bottleneck, however it may not be economically justified. Because the equivalent full load hours of a wind farm are normally only 2000 to 4000 h/year, this means that the wind turbines operate below their power rating for most of the year. Wind power curtailment to relieve congestion is considered as another solution for large-scale wind power integration in situations with limited or no grid reinforcement. Wind power curtailment may be achieved through either manual curtailment, AGC or frequency control. Wind Power in Island Systems.  Island systems are typically weak grids. Their electrification conventionally relies on conventional generating units, running on light fuel or heavy fuel oil, which leads to high operational costs. Because of lack of interconnections with neighboring systems, frequency stability is of primary concern [92]. Primary frequency control is performed by fast generation units, such as internal combustion diesel engines, combined-cycle units and peaking gas turbines, while secondary control is made either via automatic generation control systems, where available, or manually by the system operators. Due to the high operational costs, wind power exploitation becomes particularly attractive. With increasing wind power penetration levels, frequency response of wind turbines becomes a key factor to ensure secure integration into isolated electrical grids. Frequency controllers for variable speed wind turbines can incorporate any of the two fundamental frequency response methods of inertia and droop control or their combination. In principle, inertia control is incorporated in the individual wind turbine controllers of a wind farm, while droop control can be applied in the central wind farm controller. According to the inertia control principle, the wind turbine responds to the rate of change of the frequency. This feature is often referred to as “virtual inertia” effect, as it introduces an output power df term proportional to 2 HWT [93, 94]. dt

09_Santoso_Sec09_p0523-0594.indd 584

23/11/17 3:15 PM

WIND POWER GENERATION        585 

The droop control consists of providing an output power term proportional to the deviations of frequency:

(

)

WT = K ∆Pdroop droop f − f o (9-36)

where fo is the reference frequency. The gain K droop is the inverse of the droop parameter R:

R=

∆f 1 (9-37) = ∆P K droop

Values of 3% to 5% are common for R in conventional generators. In droop control a dead band may also be included, as shown in Fig. 9-47. The effects of the frequency response methods in an autonomous island grid have been studied by simulating the model system of Rhodes island shown in Fig. 9-52 and the results are presented in Fig. 9-53 [95]. This model includes two thermal power plants comprising steam turbines two 15 MW, gas turbines 28 MW and diesel two 15.6 MW, and five wind farms, of different technologies, namely type 3 (WFA1 and WFA2, DFIG of 17 MW), type 4 (WFB1 and WFB2, PMSG of 21 MW), and type 1 (WFC, SCIG of 12 MW). The operating scenario comprises load demand of 74.8 MW, thermal power generation of 35 MW, and wind power of 40.34 MW, that is, an instantaneous wind power penetration in excess of 50%. In such conditions, the system inertia decreases significantly and frequency control becomes challenging. A severe disturbance provoked by the sudden loss of the largest conventional generator (a 14-MW steam unit, operating at rated power) is considered. All wind farms operate at constant wind speed and frequency control is implemented to all variable speed wind turbines, assuming a 10% balance power level. The responses of the system frequency under the different frequency control methods are shown in Fig. 9-50. Without frequency control a frequency excursion of approximately 1.4 Hz is noted. Droop control alone achieves only a marginal improvement of the minimum frequency, while the maximum rate of change of the frequency (ROCOF) immediately after the event remains the same. When inertia control is applied, either alone or in combination with the droop controller (combined control), the frequency excursion is reduced by about 50% and the rate of frequency change is also lower. Notably, an increased delay is observed in the restoration of frequency to its final value when inertia control is applied, either alone or in a combined control. In island systems, the maximum frequency excursion and the ROCOF are the most crucial parameters, as they can trigger the load shedding protection systems. For this reason, it can be stated that the combined control achieves the best overall performance, in spite of the delay in frequency restoration, as the frequency remains within acceptable limits throughout the whole transient event. Offshore Super Grid and Wind Power.  A super grid is a large transmission network connecting a number of nations across a wide geographic area and can transfer volumes of electricity over long distances. It is also referred as a “mega grid.” Such super grids not only have intelligent features in the wide area transmission level but can also integrate local smart grids where the distributed renewable energy integration makes the energy flow become bidirectional, and turns the local smart grid into a virtual power plant. A super grid consists of high voltage transmission network. On land either HVAC systems or HVDC systems may be used, while HVAC system is easy for interconnection into a mesh network, and most existing HVDC systems are point to point transmission, with only a few multiterminal configurations. VSC-HVDC would be able to support traditional power systems, and thyristor technology–based HVDC systems [96] could play an important role in super grids. Offshore wind power will play an important role in meeting European future energy demand. It is possible that the European Union could be supplied only with the wind power. However, the variability of wind cannot secure a reliable power source. An interconnected European offshore super grid would connect the wind farms dispersed across a wide geographic area, ranging from the Baltic

09_Santoso_Sec09_p0523-0594.indd 585

23/11/17 3:15 PM

586        SECTION NINE

Steam 1 15 MW

Steam 2 15 MW

Gas 28 MW

Soroni Power Plant

Soroni 150 kV

Rodini 150 kV

Soroni 20 kV Ialissos 150 kV

Gennadi 150 kV Afantou 150 kV

Rodini 20 kV

Ialissos 20 kV Gennadi 20 kV Afantou 20 kV WF C 13x0.9 MW

WF B1 9x2 MW WF A1 13x0.85 MW

WF A2 7x0.85 MW

South Rhodes 150 kV

WF B2 5x0.6 MW

S. Rhodes Power Plant Rodos 20 kV Diesel 1 Diesel 2 15.6 MW 15.6 MW

Rodos 150 kV FIGURE 9-52  The power system of Rhodes island.

Sea to the Mediterranean and Atlantic. Such an offshore wind farm grid could provide the EU with a clean, sustainable, and secure power supply. The offshore super grid can help to solve the problem of the variability of wind by exploiting the meteorological characteristics to balance the fluctuations of wind power as the wind is likely always to be blowing somewhere. A lower power output from a wind farm may be balanced by a simultaneous high power output from another wind farm several hundred kilometers away. An ocean super grid will create a network between a number of countries to balance the fluctuations of wind energy and to solve the problem of the variability of wind, and may turn this fluctuating energy source into a quite stable power source. Furthermore, it is possible to combine the production of the fluctuating wind power with that from some dispatchable power

09_Santoso_Sec09_p0523-0594.indd 586

23/11/17 3:15 PM

WIND POWER GENERATION        587 

System frequency (Hz)

50.5 50

(b)

(d)

49.5 49

(c) (a)

48.5

0

5

10

15 Time (sec)

20

25

30

FIGURE 9-53  System frequency following the outage of the largest thermal unit under different frequency control methods. (a) No frequency control; (b) droop control; (c) inertia control; (d) combined control.

sources located at a distance, such as hydropower generation units, in order to keep an overall stable power supply. Hydropower plants may be used as energy storage to export or import power when the produced wind power is not enough or is excessive. Furthermore, the electricity markets in Europe require an adequate transport capacity among different power market zones to enable effective competition and the trade of electricity. Therefore, enhancing the suitability of the grid for the increased inter-market electricity transport is important for both the wind industry and electricity market development. The super grid could have an important function in distribution and transmission of renewable energy between the relevant countries and it can introduce additional flexibility to the power system operation and control. A super grid will facilitate an efficient international electricity market for Europe. For example, when the wind is very strong, the surplus wind energy produced in Denmark can be exported to Norway which has many hydropower plants, the Norwegian hydropower plants can stop production and hydro energy is stored; when the wind does not blow in Denmark, the Norwegian hydropower plants can produce the electricity and send it to Denmark. The important benefits of an offshore super grid include •  Increase the interconnection and transmission capacity within the relevant countries/areas. •  Reduce overall wind power fluctuations, improve the accuracy of short-term wind power forecasting. •  Increase the utilization of renewable energy, particular wind energy and reduce the curtailment of wind energy. •  Optimally use energy storage units and fast generating units, such as hydropower resources, to meet the rapid changes in demand and/or renewable energy production. •  Optimally deploy power reserve. •  Lower the cost of power in all connected countries by sharing the most efficient power plants within these countries. •  Significantly increase the use of renewables, decrease dependence of imported fuels and reduce greenhouse gas emission. A study has optimized a vast grid covering North Africa, Eastern Europe, Norway, and Iceland, with a number of scenarios, wind, concentrated solar power (CSP), nuclear, etc., and the results showed that all European power could largely come from wind energy, with relatively low amounts

09_Santoso_Sec09_p0523-0594.indd 587

23/11/17 3:15 PM

588        SECTION NINE

of combustion plants needed during low wind periods. Furthermore, the study showed that no new storage would be required; existing hydro is sufficient. The total cost of energy would be at the same level as or lower than that at present according to this study [97]. A number of European offshore super grids have been proposed, one example is shown in Fig. 9-54, from [98]. Other proposed schemes include Baltic Energy Market Interconnection Plan, Europagrid, North Sea Offshore Grid, EU PowerNet, ISLES, Low Grid, and High Grid.

CS2

CS3

Norway

CS1

CS26

CS4

CS25

CS5

Denmark CS24

CS22 CS21

Isle of Man

CS11

CS12

CS6

CS20

CS23

CS13

United Kingdom CS7

CS14 CS8

CS9

CS19

CS17

Netherlands CS18

CS10 CS16 CS15

Belgium

Germany

FIGURE 9-54  A proposed offshore super grid in North Sea [98].

A VSC-HVDC multiterminal system can be constructed if three or more HVDC wind farm converter stations are connected to a network with cables. In this case, only one converter may be used to regulate the dc voltage of the system and the other converters control the import or export power of the HVDC system. Figure 9-55 illustrates a multiterminal HVDC system. HVDC Link Example.  HVDC link NorNed was manufactured by ABB and Nexans Norway AS and is jointly owned (50/50) by two TSOs, Statnett in Norway and TenneT in The Netherlands. The construction work started in 2006 and the link was commissioned in May 2008. LCC-HVDC technology is used. The cable has a length of 580 km with a capacity of 700 MW at ±450 kV dc voltage and connects the Netherlands network, a part of European network UCTE synchronous area, to the Norwegian network, a part of the Nordic synchronous area. The cable has the capacity of transmitting power in both directions for balancing generation and consumption in both networks. In a typical situation, the consumption in Netherlands is higher

09_Santoso_Sec09_p0523-0594.indd 588

23/11/17 3:15 PM

WIND POWER GENERATION        589 

DC wind farm (DCWF) DC/DC

DC/AC

Vs

HVDC link

Grid

HVDC link HVDC link

AC wind farm (ACWF)

AC wind farm (ACWF) AC/DC

HVDC link

DC/AC

FIGURE 9-55  Illustration of a multiterminal HVDC system.

during the day, the cheaper hydro power is sent to the Netherlands via the cable from Norway. At night the power flow reverses its direction because Norway consumes more electricity during the night than during the day. The Netherlands export at night gas-produced electricity via the cable allowing the Norwegian reservoirs to fill up for the day time.

9.5 ACKNOWLEDGMENT The authors of this section would like to thank Dr. Eduard Muljadi, of the National Renewable Energy Laboratory in Golden, Colorado, for his support.

9.6  REFERENCES 1. Wind Energy Foundation, “History of Wind Energy.” 2016. http://windenergyfoundation.org/about-windenergy/history/. 2. Hardy, C., “Renewable Energy and Role of Marykirk’s James Blyth.” The Courier. Dundee, D.C. Thomson & Co. Archived from the original on 10 July 2010. 3. https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/History_of_wind_power. 4. History of Wind Energy in Encyclopedia of Energy Vol. 6. 5. Beaufort wind force scale, http://www.metoffice.gov.uk/guide/weather/marine/beaufort-scale. 6. Lalas, D. P. and Ratto, C. F., (eds), Modelling of Atmospheric Flow Fields, World Scientific, Singapore, 1996. 7. Burton, T., Jenkins, N., Sharpe, D., and Bossanyi, E., Wind Energy Handbook, 2nd ed., John Wiley & Sons, Ltd, 2011. 8. Chen, Z., “Advanced Wind Energy Converters Using Electronic Power Conversion,” Ph.D., University of Durham, UK, 1997. 9. http://onlinelibrary.wiley.com/doi/10.1002/9781118900116.app2/pdf, Accessed April 2017. 10. Siegfried Heier, “Grid Integration of Wind Energy Conversion Systems,” John Wiley & Sons, Ltd., United Kingdom, 1998. ISBN 0-471-97143-X. 11. Chen, Z., “Wind Turbine Drive Train Systems,” in Wind Energy Systems, Optimising Design and Construction for Safe and Reliable Operation, edited by John D. Sørensen and Jens N. Sørensen, Woodhead Publishing, Ltd., United Kingdom, 2011. ISBN: 978-1-84569-580-4.

09_Santoso_Sec09_p0523-0594.indd 589

23/11/17 3:15 PM

590        SECTION NINE

12. Bronzeado, H. S., Feitosa, E. A. N., Rosas, P. A. C., Miranda, M. S., de Barros, M. E. M., and Rohatgi, J., “Investigation of the Behaviour of Wind Turbines under Low Turbulence Wind Conditions and Their Interaction with the Distribution Grid,” Wind Eng., vol. 24, no. 2, pp. 101–109, 2000. 13. Chen, Z., Hu, Y., and Blaabjerg, F., “Stability Improvement of Induction Generator-Based Wind Turbine Systems,” IET Proc.—Renewable Power Generation, vol. 1, no. 1, pp. 81–93, Mar. 2007. 14. Li, H. and Chen, Z., “Overview of Different Wind Generator Systems and Their Comparisons,” IET Proc.— Renewable Power Generation, vol. 2, no. 2, pp. 123–138, Jun. 2008. 15. Zhang, J., Chen, Z., and Cheng, M., “Design and Comparison of a Novel Stator Interior Permanent Magnet Generator for Direct-Drive Wind Turbines,” IET Proc.—Renewable Power Generation, vol. 1, no. 4, pp. 203–210, Dec. 2007. ISSN 1752-1416. 16. Jianzhong, Z., Cheng, M., and Chen, Z., “Investigation of a New Stator Interior Permanent Magnet Machine,” IET Proc.—Electric Power Applications, vol. 2, no. 2, pp. 77–87, Mar. 2008. 17. Liu, X., Park, K., and Chen, Z., “A Novel Excitation Assistance Switched Reluctance Wind Power Generator,” IEEE Transactions on Magnetics, vol. 50, no. 11, pp. 1–4, 2014. 18. Lobato, P., Dente, J. A., Martins, J. F., and Pires, A. J., “Scale Models Formulation of Switched Reluctance Generators for Low Speed Energy Converters,” IET Electric Power Applications, vol. 9, no. 9, pp. 652659, 2015. 19. Melcescu, L., Popescu, M., Covrig, M., Cistelecan, M., and Craiu, O., “Numerical and Experimental Analysis of Two Permanent Magnet Claw Poles Wind Generators,” 18th International Conference on Electrical Machines, 2008. 20. Keysan, O., Radyjowski, P., Burchell, J., and Mueller, M. A., “Towards More Reliable and Cost Effective Superconducting Generators for Wind Turbines,” 7th IET International Conference on Power Electronics, Machines and Drives (PEMD 2014), Apr. 8–10, 2014. 21. Gorginpour, H., Oraee, H., and McMahon, R. A., “A Novel Modeling Approach for Design Studies of Brushless Doubly Fed Induction Generator Based on Magnetic Equivalent Circuit,” IEEE Transactions on Energy Conversion, vol. 28, no. 4, pp. 902–912, 2013. 22. van der Blij, N. H., Strous, T. D., Wang, X., and Polinder, H., “A Novel Analytical Approach and Finite Element Modelling of a BDFIM,” 2014 International Conference on Electrical Machines (ICEM), pp. 346–352, 2014. 23. Chen, Z., Wang, B., Chen, Z., and Yan, Y., “Comparison of Flux Regulation Ability of the Hybrid Excitation Doubly Salient Machines,” IEEE Transactions on Industrial Electronics, vol. 61, no. 7, pp. 3155–3166, Jul. 2014. 24. He, J., Tang, Y., Li, J., Ren, L., Shi, J., Wang, J., Qu, R., Su, L., Li, X., Xu, Y., and Zhu, Z., “Conceptual Design of the Cryogenic System for a 12 MW Superconducting Wind Turbine Generator,” IEEE Transactions on Applied Superconductivity, vol. 24, no. 3, pp. 1–5, 2014. 25. Liu, D., Polinder, H., Abrahamsen, A. B., and Ferreira, J. A., “Topology Comparison of Superconducting Generators for 10-MW Direct-Drive Wind Turbines: Cost of Energy Based,” IEEE Transactions on Applied Superconductivity, vol. 27, no. 4, pp. 1–7, 2017. 26. Shafaie, R., Amirkhanloo, F., and Kalantar, M., “Toward an Optimum Design of Large-Scale HTS Synchronous Generator for Wind Turbine Applications,” IEEE Transactions on Applied Superconductivity, vol. 26, no. 2, pp. 1–8, 2016. 27. Wang, R.-J., Brönn, L., Gerber, S., and Tlali, P. M., “Design and Evaluation of a Disc-Type Magnetically Geared PM Wind Generator,” 4th International Conference on Power Engineering, Energy and Electrical Drives, pp. 1259–1264, 2013. 28. Zhang, X., Liu, X., and Chen, Z., “A Novel Coaxial Magnetic Gear and Its Integration with Permanent-Magnet Brushless Motor,” IEEE Tarnation on Magnetics, vol. 52, no. 7, pp. 1–4, Jul. 2016. 29. Chen, Z., “An Overview of Power Electronic Converter Technology for Renewable Energy Systems,” in DirectDrive Wind and Marine Energy Systems, edited by Markus Mueller, Woodhead Publishing, Ltd., United Kingdom, 2013. 30. Chen, Z. and Spooner, E., “A Modular, Permanent-Magnet Generator for Variable speed Wind Turbines,” IEE International Conference EMD’95, Conference Publication No. 412, pp. 453–457, 1995. 31. Chen, Z., Spooner, E., Norris, W. T., and A. C.Williamson, “Capacitor-Assisted Excitation of PermanentMagnet Generators,” IEE Proc.—Electr. Power Applications, vol. 145, no. 6, pp. 497–508, Nov. 1998. 32. Chen, Z. and Spooner, E., “Grid Interface Options for Variable-Speed, Permanent-Magnet Generators,” IEE Proc.—Electr. Power Applications, vol. 145, no. 4, pp. 273–283, Jul. 1998. 33. Chen, Z. and Spooner, E., “Voltage Source Inverters for High-Power, Variable-Voltage DC Power Sources,” IEE Proc.—Generation, Transmission and Distributions, vol. 148, no. 5, pp. 439–447, Sep. 2001.

09_Santoso_Sec09_p0523-0594.indd 590

23/11/17 3:15 PM

WIND POWER GENERATION        591 

34. Li, J., Wu, X., Hu, S., Zhao, B., and Xu, H., “Direct-Drive Wind Power Generator System Based Interleaved Boost Converter,” Proceedings of ISES World Congress 2007 (Vol. I–V), vol. 6, pp. 2301–2304, 2007. 35. Chen Z. and Spooner, E., “Current Source Thyristor Inverter and Its Active Compensation System,” IEE Proc.—Generation, Transmission and Distributions, vol. 150, no. 4, pp. 447–454, Jul. 2003. 36. Chen, Z., “Compensation Schemes for a SCR Converter in Variable Speed Wind Power Systems,” IEEE Transactions on Power Delivery, vol. 19, no. 2, pp. 813–821, Apr. 2004. 37. Zeng, X., Chen, Z., and Blaabjerg, F., “Efficiency Comparisons of Full-Size Converters for Large Variable-Speed Wind Turbine Systems,” 13th European Conference on Power Electronics and Applications, EPE2007, Sep. 2007. 38. Muljadi, E., Singh, M., and Gevorgian, V., “Fixed-Speed and Variable-Slip Wind Turbines Providing Spinning Reserves to the Grid,” National Renewable Energy Laboratory, IEEE Power & Energy Society. General Meeting, Vancouver, BC, 2013. 39. Singh, M., Muljadi, E., Jonkman, J., Gevorgian, V., Girsang, I., and Dhupia, J., “Simulation for Wind Turbine Generators—with FAST and MATLAB-Simulink Modules,” Technical Report NREL/TP-5D00-59195, Apr. 2014. 40. McDonald, A. S., Mueller, M. A., and Polinder, H., “Comparison of Generator Topologies for Direct-Drive Wind Turbines Including Structural Mass,” in Proc. of the International Conference on Electrical Machines (ICEM), pp. 360.1–360.7, Sep. 2006. 41. Bang, D., Polinder, H., Shrestha, G., and Ferreira, J. A., “Review of Generator Systems for Direct-Drive Wind Turbines,” European Wind Energy Conference , 2011. 42. Offshore Class Prototypes http://www.wwindea.org/technology/ch01/en/1_3_4.html. 43. Li, H., Chen, Z., and Polinder, H., “Optimization of Multibrid Permanent Magnet Wind Generator Systems,” IEEE Transactions on Energy Conversion, vol. 24, no. 1, pp. 82–92, Mar. 2009. ISSN: 0885-8969 44. Blaabjerg F. and Chen, Z., “Power Electronic for Modern Wind Turbines, in Power Electronics Series, Morgan & Claypool Publishers, 2006. ISBN: 1598290320 45. Chen, Z., Guerrero, J. M., and Blaabjerg, F., “A Review of the State-of-the-Art of Power Electronics for Wind Turbines,” IEEE Transactions on Power Electronics, vol. 24, no. 8, pp. 1859–1875, Aug. 2009. 46. Wind turbine blade tip analysis using CFD, https://sites.google.com/site/ee535test/andrew-baker. 47. Zhang, Y., Chen, Z., and Cheng, M., “Proportional Resonant Individual Pitch Control for Mitigation of Wind Turbines Loads,” IET Renewable Power Generation, vol. 7, no. 3, pp. 191–200, May 2013. 48. Zhang, Y., Chen, Z., Hu, W., and Cheng, M., “Flicker Mitigation by Individual Pitch Control of Variable Speed Wind Turbines with DFIG,” IEEE Transactions on Energy Conversion, vol. 29, no. 1, pp. 20–28, Mar. 2014. 49. Dvorak, P., “How Vortex Generators Improve Wind Turbine Performance,” http://www.windpowerengineering.com/design/mechanical/blades/vortex-generators-improve-wind-turbine-performance/. 50. Chen, Z., “Power Electronic Converter Systems for Direct Drive Renewable Energy Applications,” in DirectDrive Wind and Marine Energy Systems, edited by Markus Mueller, Woodhead Publishing, Ltd., United Kingdom, 2013. 51. Sun, T., Chen, Z., and Blaabjerg, F., “Flicker Study on Variable Speed Wind Turbines with Doubly Fed Induction Generators,” IEEE Transactions on Energy Conversion, vol. 20, no. 4, pp. 896–905, Dec. 2005. 52. Hu, W., Chen, Z., Wang, Y., and Wang, Z., “Flicker Mitigation by Active Power Control of Variable Speed Wind Turbines with Full-Scale Back-to-Back Power Converters,” IEEE Transactions on Energy Conversion, vol. 24, no. 3, pp. 640–649, Sep. 2009. 53. Zhang, Y., Hu, W., Chen, Z., Cheng, M., and Hu, Y., “Flicker Mitigation Strategy for a Doubly Fed Induction Generator by Torque Control,” IET Renewable Power Generation, vol. 8, no. 2, pp. 91–99, Mar. 2014. 54. Zhao, B., Li, H., Wang, M., Chen, Y., Liu, S., Yang, D., Yang, C., Hu, Y., and Chen, Z., “An Optimal Reactive Power Control Strategy for a DFIG-Based Wind Farm to Damp the Sub-Synchronous Oscillation of a Power System,” Energies, vol. 7, no. 5, pp. 3086–3103, May 2014. 55. Zhang, B., Hou, P., Hu, W., Soltani, M., Chen, C., and Chen, Z., “A Reactive Power Dispatch Strategy with Loss Minimization for a DFIG-Based Wind Farm,” IEEE Transactions on Sustainable Energy, vol. PP, no. 99, pp. 1–10, Jan. 2016. 56. Tian, J., Zhou, D., Su, C., Chen, Z., and Blaabjerg, F., “Reactive Power Dispatch Method in Wind Farms to Improve the Lifetime of Power Converter Considering Wake Effect,” IEEE Trans. Sustainable Energy, 08, Sep. 2016. 57. http://www.offshorewindenergy.org/CA-OWEE/Resource_and_Economics_3.html, Accessed April 2017.

09_Santoso_Sec09_p0523-0594.indd 591

23/11/17 3:15 PM

592        SECTION NINE

58. Deep water—the next step for offshore wind energy, www.ewea.org/fileadmin/files/library/publications/ reports/Deep_Water.pdf, Accessed April 2017. 59. https://www.google.co.uk/search?q=danish+offshore+wind+farm+layouts&tbm=isch&imgil=7-ieJCLDMI ZiiM%253A%253BEazaDd6DF9ED8M%253Bhttp%25253A%25252F%25252Frsta.royalsocietypublishing. org%25252Fcontent%25252F373%25252F2035%25252F20140100&source=iu&pf=m&fir=7-ieJCLDMIZiiM %253A%252CEazaDd6DF9ED8M%252C_&usg=__8Gvutj6fColUNA37TWMyeZzHZyI%3D&biw=863&bi h=687&ved=0ahUKEwigvd-4xtnSAhUGDCwKHemcCg4QyjcIJQ&ei=Br_JWKCiOoaYsAHpuapw#tbm=is ch&q=layouts+of+Horns+Rev+offshore+wind+farms+&, Accessed April 2017. 60. Zhao, M., Chen, Z., and Blaabjerg, F., “Probabilistic Capacity of a Grid Connected Wind Farm Based on Optimization Method,” Renewable Energy, vol. 31, pp. 2171–2178, 2006. 61. Zhao, M., Chen, Z., and Blaabjerg, F., “Optimization of Electrical System for Offshore Wind Farms via Genetic Algorithm,” IET Proc.—Renewable Power Generation, vol. 3, no. 2, pp. 205–216, Jun. 2009. ISSN 1752-1416. 62. Hou, P., Hu, W., Chen, C., and Chen, Z., “Optimization of Offshore Wind Farm Cable Connection Layout Considering Levelised Production Cost Using Dynamic Minimum Spanning Tree Algorithm,” IET Renewable Power Generation, vol. 10, no. 2, pp. 175–183, 2016. 63. Hou, P., Hu, W., Soltani, M., Chen, C., and Chen, Z., “Combined Optimization for Offshore Wind Turbine Micro Siting,” Applied Energy, vol. 189, pp. 271–282, Mar. 2017. 64. Deng F. and Chen, Z., “Control of Improved Full-Bridge Three-Level DC/DC Converter for Wind Turbines in a DC Grid,” IEEE Transaction on Power Electronics, vol. 28, no. 1, pp. 135–143, 2013. 65. Deng F. and Chen, Z., “Design of Protective Inductors for HVDC Transmission Line within DC Grid Offshore Wind Farms,” IEEE Transactions on Power Delivery, vol. 28, no. 1, pp. 75–83, 2013. 66. Deng F. and Chen, Z., “Operation and Control of a DC Grid Offshore Wind Farms under DC Transmission System Faults,” IEEE Transactions on Power Delivery, vol. 28, no. 3, pp. 1356–1363, 2013. 67. Negra, N. B., Todorovic, J., and Ackermann, T., “Loss Evaluation of HVAC and HVDC Transmission Solutions for Large Offshore Wind Farms,” Electric Power Systems Research, vol. 76, no. 11, pp. 916–927, Jul. 2006. 68. HVDC vs. HVAC cables for offshore wind, http://analysis.windenergyupdate.com/offshore-wind/hvdc-vshvac-cables-offshore-wind. 69. Donaghy, R., “HV Submarine Cable Systems Design, Testing and Installation” CIGRE, Ireland Technical Seminar, Oct. 6, 2010. 70. Vrana, T. K., “Review of HVDC Component Ratings: XLPE Cables and VSC Converters,” IEEE International Energy Conference (ENERGYCON), 2016. 71. http://www.4coffshore.com/windfarms/, Accessed April 2017. 72. Chen Z. and Blaabjerg, F., “Wind Farm—A Power Source in Future Power Systems,” Renewable and Sustainable Energy Reviews, vol. 13, nos. 6, 7, pp. 1288–1300, Aug./Sep. 2009. ISSN: 1364-0321. 73. Technical regulation 3.2.5 for wind power plants with a power output greater than 11 kW, Energynet.dk. 74. Chen, P., Siano, P., B. Bak-Jensen, and Chen, Z., “Stochastic Optimization of Wind Turbine Power Factor Using Stochastic Model of Wind power,” IEEE Transactions on Sustainable Energy, vol. 1, no. 1, pp. 19–29, Apr. 2010. 75. Chen Z. and Spooner, E., “Grid Power Quality with Variable-Speed Wind Turbines,” IEEE Transactions on Energy Conversion, vol. 16, no. 2, pp. 148–154, Jun. 2001. 76. Wang, H., Chen, Z., and Jiang, Q., “Optimal Control Method for Wind Farm to Support Temporary Primary Frequency Control with Minimised Wind Energy Cost,” IET Renewable Power Generation, vol. 9, no. 4, pp. 350–359, 2015. 77. Wang, L., S.-Chen, S., Lee, W.-J., and Chen, Z., “Dynamic Stability Enhancement and Power Flow Control of a Hybrid Wind and Marine-Current Farm Using SMES,” IEEE Transactions on Energy Conversion, vol. 24, no. 3, pp. 626–639, Sep. 2009. 78. Zhao, B., Li, H., Wang, M., Chen, Y., Liu, S., Yang, D., Yang, C., Hu, Y., and Chen, Z., “An Optimal Reactive Power Control Strategy for a DFIG-Based Wind Farm to Damp the Sub-Synchronous Oscillation of a Power System,” Energies, vol. 7, no. 5, pp. 3086–3103, May 2014. 79. Muljadi, E., Zhang, Y. C., Gevorgian, V., and Kosterev, D., “Understanding Dynamic Model Validation of a Wind Turbine Generator and a Wind Power Plant,” Energy Conversion Congress and Exposition (ECCE), 2016 IEEE, pp. 18–22, Sep. 2016.

09_Santoso_Sec09_p0523-0594.indd 592

23/11/17 3:15 PM

WIND POWER GENERATION        593 

80. Li, H., Zhao, B., Yang, C., Chen, H. W., and Chen, Z., “Analysis and Estimation of Transient Stability for a Grid-Connected Wind Turbine with Induction Generator,” Renewable Energy, vol. 36, no. 5, pp. 1469–1476, May 2011. 81. Wei M. and Chen, Z., “Fast Control Strategy for Stabilizing Fixed-Speed Induction Generator Based Wind Turbines in an Islanded Distributed System,” IET Proc.—Renewable Power Generation, vol. 7, no. 2, pp. 144–162, Mar. 2013. 82. Jun, Y., Hui, L., Zhe, C., Xianfeng, X., Xiyin, C., Qing, L., and Yong, L., “Enhanced Control of a DFIGBased Wind-Power Generation System with Series Grid-Side Converter under Unbalanced Grid Voltage Conditions,” IEEE Transaction on Power Electronics, vol. 28, no. 7, pp. 3167–3181, 2013. 83. Zhu, R., Chen, Z., Wu, X., and Deng, F., “Virtual Damping Flux Based LVRT Control for DFIG-Based Wind Turbine,” IEEE Transaction Energy Conversion, vol. 30, no. 2, pp. 714–725, Jun. 2015. 84. Su, C., Hu, W., Chen, Z., and Hu, Y., “Mitigation of Power System Oscillation Caused by Wind Power Fluctuation,” IET Renewable Power Generation, vol. 7, no. 6, pp. 639–651, Dec. 2013. 85. Wen, L., W.Hu, H.Lund, and Chen, Z., “Electric Vehicles and Large-Scale Integration of Wind Power—the Case of Inner Mongolia in China,” Applied Energy, vol. 104, pp. 445–456, 2013. 86. Hu, W., Su, C., Chen, Z., and B. Bak-Jensen, “Optimal Operation of Plug-In Electric Vehicles in Power Systems with High Wind Power Penetrations,” IEEE Transaction on Sustainable Energy, vol. 4, no. 3, pp. 577–585, 2013. 87. Hu, W., Chen, Z., and B. Bak-Jensen, “Analysis of Electricity Price in Danish Competitive Electricity Market,” IEEE Power and Energy Society General Meeting, pp. 22–26, Jul. 2012. 88. Li, J., Fang, J., Zeng, Q., and Chen, Z., “Optimal Operation of the Integrated Electrical and Heating Systems to Accommodate the Intermittent Renewable Sources,” Applied Energy, vol. 167, pp. 244–254, Apr. 1, 2016. 89. Rather, Z. H., Chen, Z., Thøgersen, P., and Lund, P., “Dynamic Reactive Power Compensation of LargeScale Wind Integrated Power System,” IEEE Transactions on Power Systems, vol. 30, no. 5, pp. 2516–2526, Sep. 2015. 90. Liu, C., Sun, K., Hussain, Z., Chen, Z., Bak, C. L., Thøgersen, P., and P. Lund “A Systematic Approach for Dynamic Security Assessment and the Corresponding Preventive Control Scheme Based on Decision Trees,” IEEE Transaction on Power Systems, vol. 29, no. 2, pp. 717–730, Mar. 2014. 91. Abulanwar, E., Hu, W., Chen, Z., and Iov, F., “Adaptive Voltage Control Strategy for Variable-Speed Wind Turbine Connected to a Weak Network,” IET Renewable Power Generation, vol. 10, no. 2, pp. 238–249, Feb. 2016. 92. Hatziargyriou, N., Margaris, I., Stavropoulou, I., Papathanassiou, S., and Dimeas, A., “Non-Interconnected Island Systems: The Greek Case,” IEEE Electrification Magazine, 2017. 93. Lalor, G., Mullane, A., and M. J. O’Malley, “Frequency Control and Wind Turbine Technologies,” IEEE Transactions on Power Systems, vol. 20, no. 4, Nov. 2005. 94. Ramtharan, G., Ekanayake, J. B., and Jenkins, N., “Frequency Support from Doubly Fed Induction Generator Wind Turbines,” IET Renew. Power Gener., vol. 1, no. 1, pp. 3–9, 2007. 95. Margaris, I. D., Papathanassiou, S. A., Hatziargyriou, N. D., Hansen, A. D., and Sorensen, P., “Frequency Control in Autonomous Power Systems with High Wind Power Penetration,” IEEE Transactions on Sustainable Energy, vol. 3, no. 2, pp. 189–199, 2012. 96. Liu Y. and Chen, Z., “A Flexible Power Control Method of VSC-HVDC Link for the Enhancement of Effective Short-Circuit Ratio in a Hybrid Multi-Infeed HVDC System,” IEEE Transaction on Power System, vol. 28, no. 2, May 2013, pp. 1568–1581. 97. Czish, G., “Low Cost but Totally Renewable Electricity Supply for a Huge Supply Area, a European/TransEuropean Example,” http://transnational-renewables.org/Gregor_Czisch/projekte/LowCostEuropElSup_ revised_for_AKE_2006.pdf. 98. Grimaldi, A., Chen, Z., Chen, P., Siano, P., Piccolo, A., “Designing Offshore Super Grid for the Combined Operation of Offshore Wind Farms and Hydro Storage,” International Journal On Power System Optimization, vol. 2, no. 1, pp. 149–158, 2011. ISSN: 0975-458X.

09_Santoso_Sec09_p0523-0594.indd 593

23/11/17 3:15 PM

This page intentionally left blank

09_Santoso_Sec09_p0523-0594.indd 594

23/11/17 3:15 PM

10 1

SOLAR POWER GENERATION AND ENERGY STORAGE Benjamin Kroposki Director, Power Systems Engineering Center, National Renewable Energy Laboratory, Golden, Colorado

Robert Margolis Principal Energy Analyst, National Renewable Energy Laboratory, Golden, Colorado

Mark Mehos Program Manager, Concentrating Solar Power, National Renewable Energy Laboratory, Golden, Colorado

Jim Eyer Principal and Senior Analyst, E&I Consulting, Oakland, California

Rahul Walawalkar President and Managing Director, Customized Energy Solutions India Pvt. Ltd., and Executive Director, India Energy Storage Alliance, Pune, India

Haresh Kamath Senior Program Manager, Energy Storage and Distributed Generation, Electric Power Research Institute, Palo Alto, California



10.1 SOLAR ENERGY BASICS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 596 10.1.1 Bibliography. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 599 10.2 PHOTOVOLTAIC TECHNOLOGIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 599 10.2.1 Crystalline Silicon. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 599 10.2.2 Thin-Film Photovoltaic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 599 10.2.3 Concentrating Photovoltaic. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 600 10.2.4 Future Technologies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 602 10.2.5 Photovoltaics Balance of Systems. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 602 10.2.6 Examples of Photovoltaic Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 603 10.2.7 Bibliography. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 605 10.3 CONCENTRATING SOLAR POWER TECHNOLOGIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 605 10.3.1 Linear Concentrating Solar Power Systems. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 605 10.3.2 Power Tower Concentrating Solar Power Systems. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 606 595

10_Santoso_Sec10_p0595-0648.indd 595

21/11/17 5:48 PM

596  SECTION TEN



10.3.3 Dish/Engine Concentrating Solar Power Systems. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 608 10.3.4 Thermal Energy Storage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 609 10.3.5 Bibliography. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 609 10.4 SOLAR ENERGY MARKET. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 609 10.4.1 Photovoltaic Costs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 609 10.4.2 Photovoltaic Market Share. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 610 10.4.3 Concentrating Solar Power Costs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 611 10.4.4 Concentrating Solar Power Market Share. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 613 10.4.5 Bibliography. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 614 10.5 GRID INTEGRATION OF SOLAR ENERGY. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 614 10.5.1 Transmission Integration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 614 10.5.2 Distribution Integration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 615 10.5.3 Bibliography. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 616 10.6 ENERGY STORAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 617 10.6.1 Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 617 10.6.2 Storage Characteristics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 617 10.6.3 Storage Technologies. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 621 10.6.4 Economics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 633 10.6.5 Energy Storage Value Propositions and Applications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 641 10.6.6 References. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 647

10.1  SOLAR ENERGY BASICS BY BENJAMIN KROPOSKI, ROBERT MARGOLIS, AND MARK MEHOS Solar power generation may be classified as either direct or indirect. Direct solar power involves only one transformation into a usable form. The two examples discussed in this section include photovoltaic (PV) conversion of sunlight directly into electricity and concentrating solar power (CSP) applications wherein sunlight is concentrated to heat a surface that, in turn, transfers the energy to a fluid. Indirect solar power generation involves more than one transformation to reach a usable form and it is not discussed in detail in this section. Examples of indirectly solar generation include (1) vegetation that uses photosynthesis to convert solar energy to chemical energy, which can later be burned as fuel to generate electricity; (2) energy obtained from oil, coal, and peat that originated as solar energy, was captured by vegetation in the remote geological past, and became fossilized; (3) hydroelectric dams and wind turbines that are indirectly powered by solar energy through their interactions with the Earth’s atmosphere and the resulting weather phenomena; (4) that energy obtained from methane (natural gas) may be derived from solar energy as either a biofuel or fossil fuel; and (5) ocean thermal energy production, which uses the thermal and gradients that are present across ocean depths to generate power. PV and CSP technologies directly use sunlight to generate electricity. However, they do it in different ways and use different forms of the sun’s radiation. PV—or solar electric—systems use semiconductor solar cells to convert sunlight directly into electricity. In contrast, CSP—or solar thermal electric—systems use mirrors to concentrate sunlight and exploit the sun’s thermal energy. This energy heats a fluid that can be used to drive a turbine or piston, thus producing electricity. The Earth’s surface receives sunlight in either a direct or diffuse form as shown in Fig. 10-1. Direct sunlight is solar radiation whose path comes directly from the sun’s disk and is known as direct normal irradiance (DNI). This is the form used by CSP systems and concentrating PV systems, wherein the reflection or focusing of the sun is essential to the electricity-generating process. Flatplate, or non-concentrating, PV systems can also use this type of sunlight, but it can also produce electricity from diffuse sunlight. The map in Fig. 10-2 shows the annual direct-normal solar radiation in the United States; the highest concentration of direct sunlight is in the southwest United States. The other component to solar radiation is diffuse, which refers to sunlight that reaches the earth’s surface after passing through a thin cloud cover or having been first reflected off of particles or surfaces. Global radiation is the sum of the direct and diffuse components of sunlight. Global radiation, as well as direct or diffuse radiation, can be used by flat-plate PV systems to generate electricity. Figure 10-3

10_Santoso_Sec10_p0595-0648.indd 596

21/11/17 5:48 PM

SOLAR POWER GENERATION AND ENERGY STORAGE   597 

Reflected

Atmospheric scattering

Direct

Absorbed Diffuse

Ground-reflected

FIGURE 10-1  Components of solar radiation. (NREL.)

FIGURE 10-2  Solar radiation map of the United States, showing the intensity of directnormal sunlight averaged during a year. (NREL.)

10_Santoso_Sec10_p0595-0648.indd 597

21/11/17 5:48 PM

598  SECTION TEN

FIGURE 10-3  Annual solar radiation on a latitude-tilt surface in the United States. (NREL.)

shows the annual solar radiation on a latitude tilt surface for the United States. For fixed tilt systems, latitude tilt typically produces the maximum power output on an annual basis. This figure shows very high solar resources for the southwestern United States, however, relatively good production exists throughout the entire United States as well as throughout most areas around the world. The sun emits radiation over a wide range of wavelengths. Most of the solar radiation is in the wavelength range from 290 to 3000 nm and is referred to as broadband solar radiation. Figure 10-4 2.5

Spectrum of solar radiation (Earth) UV Visible

Infrared

Irradiance (W/m2/nm)

2 Sunlight without atmospheric absorption 1.5 5778 K blackbody 1 H 2O 0.5

H2O

O2 0

H2O

O3 250

500

750

Sunlight at sea level Atmospheric absorption bands H2O CO 2 H2O

1000 1250 1500 1750 2000 2250 2500 Wavelength (nm)

FIGURE 10-4  Solar irradiance spectrum from 250 to 2500 nm. (NREL.)

10_Santoso_Sec10_p0595-0648.indd 598

21/11/17 5:48 PM

SOLAR POWER GENERATION AND ENERGY STORAGE   599 

shows terrestrial (dark shade) and extraterrestrial spectrum (light shade) of DNI. Atmospheric absorption bands are due to water vapor and other gases in the atmosphere. The total radiant power from the sun is remarkably constant. In fact, the solar output has commonly been called the solar constant, but it does vary slightly over time due to cycles in the number of sunspots (cooler, dark areas on the sun) and changes in Earth’s elliptical orbit. The measured variation resulting from the sunspot cycle is ±0.2%, only twice the precision of the most accurate radiometers measuring the irradiance in space. There is, however, some large variability in a few spectral regions, especially the ultraviolet (wavelengths less than 400 nm), caused by solar activity. The annual variations in solar irradiance due to Earth’s orbit result in changes of ±3%. 10.1.1 Bibliography • M. Sengupta, A. Habte, S. Kurtz, A. Dobos, S. Wilbert, E. Lorenz, T. Stoffel, D. Renné, C. Gueymard, D. Myers, S. Wilcox, P. Blanc, and R. Perez, “Best Practices Handbook for the Collection and Use of Solar Resource Data for Solar Energy Applications,” NREL/TP-5D00-63112, February 2015. • T. Stoffel, D. Renné, D. Myers, S. Wilcox, M. Sengupta, R. George, C. Turchi, “CONCENTRATING SOLAR POWER Best Practices Handbook for the Collection and Use of Solar Resource Data,” NREL/TP-550-47465, September 2010.

10.2  PHOTOVOLTAIC TECHNOLOGIES BY BENJAMIN KROPOSKI, ROBERT MARGOLIS, AND MARK MEHOS A variety of materials can directly convert sunlight into electricity via the “photovoltaic” effect. These PV materials include silicon, thin films, and multi-junctions technologies from the III-V elements. These materials are manufactured into cells and integrated into PV modules. Typically silicon materials and thin film technologies are made into flat-plate modules. Advanced III-V materials typically use concentrated sunlight to reduce the cost of the module. These materials and designs are discussed in the following subsections. 10.2.1  Crystalline Silicon Silicon was one of the first materials to be used in early PV devices, and it continues to dominate the commercial solar cell market at more than 90% of the market share. Cells using silicon have been labeled as first-generation PV. Pure silicon is “doped” with minute amounts of other elements such as boron and phosphorus, which produces positive-type and negative-type semiconductor materials, respectively. Putting these two materials into contact with one another creates a built-in potential field. When this semiconductor device is illuminated, the energy of the sunlight frees electrons that then move out of the cell—due to the potential field—into wires that form an electrical circuit. This “photovoltaic” effect requires no moving parts and does not use up any of the material in the process of generating electricity. As shown in Fig. 10-5, a typical solar cell consists of a glass or plastic cover or other encapsulant, an antireflective surface layer, a front contact to allow electrons to enter a circuit, a back contact to allow them to complete the circuit, and the semiconductor layers wherein the electrons begin and complete their journey. 10.2.2  Thin-Film Photovoltaic Second-generation PV devices are a more recent development and rely on layers of semiconductor materials that are much thinner than those in silicon cells. The thickness of a crystalline silicon

10_Santoso_Sec10_p0595-0648.indd 599

21/11/17 5:48 PM

600  SECTION TEN

FIGURE 10-5  Basic components of a silicon PV cell. (NREL.)

(c-Si) cell may be 170 to 200 μm (10-6 m) thick, whereas the active region in a thin-film cell is on the order of only 2 to 3 μm thick. (For comparison, a human strand of hair has a thickness of approximately 80 μm.) If silicon is used, it is typically in the form of amorphous silicon (a-Si), which has no discernible crystal structure; in addition, microcrystalline silicon thin-film devices are also under development. But other thin-film materials have also been developed and commercialized, including cadmium telluride (CdTe) and copper indium gallium diselenide (CIGS). These PV devices require much less material than traditional c-Si devices. Thin films, compared to crystalline silicon cells, generally have a lower solar conversion efficiency—which is the percentage of the sun’s power shining on the cell that is converted into electric power by the cell. For example, if 1000 W of solar power illuminate a cell, and 200 W of electricity are generated, then the cell has a solar conversion efficiency of 20%. A commercial silicon cell may have an efficiency of around 20%, whereas a commercial CdTe cell is approximately of 11%. The thin-film cell uses less material and can be deposited with a method that is much less energy-intensive than that for silicon. Less material also equates to lighter weight. And some thinfilm technologies do not rely on rigid cells, rather, they can be deposited on flexible substrates of stainless steel or plastic. Flexibility may be a desirable aspect depending on the application. Thus, in theory, thin-film PV should be less expensive to manufacture and easier to integrate into a wide range of applications; however, in practice, crystalline silicon costs have remained at a competitive level by reducing manufacturing costs.

10.2.3  Concentrating Photovoltaic Another type of second-generation PV device is the high-efficiency multijunction cell that uses compounds from the group III and group V elements of the Periodic Table of Elements. An example of this type of multijunction cell (see Fig. 10-6) is a top layer of gallium indium phosphide, a middle layer of gallium arsenide, and a bottom layer of germanium. Very high efficiencies—over 40%—can be generated by this scheme. This is because each layer in this multijunction cell is designed to absorb and use a different portion of the solar spectrum. Figure 10-6 shows how the top layer would absorb

10_Santoso_Sec10_p0595-0648.indd 600

21/11/17 5:48 PM

SOLAR POWER GENERATION AND ENERGY STORAGE   601 

shorter wavelengths (blue light), while the bottom cell would absorb longer wavelengths (red light). PV cells from these III-V materials are expensive to produce and use concentrating systems wherein a relatively inexpensive lens or mirror can be used to focus sunlight on only a small area of cells. For example, if a 10-in by 10-in lens focuses that amount of incident sun onto a 0.5-in by 0.5-in cell, the concentration factor is 400 times (100 in2/0.25 in2). This cell with the lens can produce as much power as a 10-in by 10-in cell without a lens, but at approximately 1/400th the cell cost. Figure 10-7 shows a typical basic concentrator unit that consists of a lens to focus the light, cell assembly, housing element, and secondary concentrator to reflect offcenter light rays onto the cell, a mechanism to dissipate excess heat produced by concentrated sunlight, and various contacts and adhesives. The module depicted uses 12 cell units in a 2 × 6 matrix. These basic units may be combined in any configuration to produce a FIGURE 10-6 Typical multijunction module with the desired power output. Concentrating systems currently under develop- solar cell design showing three layers, each of which absorbs a different portion of the ment range in concentration levels from tens (10×) to solar spectrum to use in generating electricity. hundreds (100×). Although they are not suitable for (NREL.) small projects, concentrating systems could be very effective in large-scale power generation. One downside to concentrating PV systems is that they require a tracking mechanism that keeps the modules always pointed at the sun. This can increase the overall cost of the system as well as be an additional point of maintenance. The challenge is in developing concentrating systems that balance the overall system-level costs so that they can be competitive in the marketplace.

FIGURE 10-7  Concentrating PV system that uses a lens to concentrate sunlight onto a high-efficiency solar cell. (NREL.)

10_Santoso_Sec10_p0595-0648.indd 601

21/11/17 5:48 PM

602  SECTION TEN

10.2.4  Future Technologies Scientists are exploring approaches for third-generation solar cells. One pathway is that of very highefficiency cells, with their attendant high costs. The push is toward reaching the theoretical limits of various material systems and device configurations. The highest-efficiency device to date is a GaInP/ GaAs/GaInAs multijunction, which has a conversion efficiency of 40.8% under a concentration of 326 times. There is a push to lower the costs of these by one or two orders of magnitude. The world record efficiency for a two-junction cell at one sun is 31.1%. The other pathway is that of very low-cost cells, but they also have lower efficiencies. An example is the dye-sensitized cell, which operates under a completely different physical paradigm that uses dye molecules adsorbed onto very small spheres of titanium dioxide. To date, this photoelectrochemical device has been able to generate electricity on small areas at efficiencies exceeding 10% on small areas. Again, this efficiency is relatively low, but the simplicity of the materials and structure make it very inexpensive to manufacture. Other third-generation approaches, some of which are still only in the conceptual phase, include advanced cells based on quantum dots, organic PV, intermediate-band cells, and multiple-exciton generation. Verified efficiencies are typically in the single digits; however, there is considerable opportunity for technological innovation and improvement, and the potential for very low manufacturing costs. One new technology that holds promise is PV cells based on Perovskites. Perovskites are new polycrystalline thin film technologies that have demonstrated efficiencies higher than 20%. 10.2.5  Photovoltaics Balance of Systems Balance of systems (BOS) includes all of the components of a PV system beyond the actual PV module that produces the power. A frame structure may be needed to hold the module, keep it oriented toward the sun, and stabilize it in the outdoor elements such as wind and snow. The mounting structure can be relatively simple and installed on a flat roof or complex with PV modules mounted onto structural elements that track the sun’s position throughout time. PV systems produce direct-current (DC) electricity. If alternating current (AC) is required, as in most grid-tied applications, the BOS must include an inverter. This component usually decreases the overall system efficiency by approximately 5% to 10%, and typically has the greatest reliability problems of any component in the system. Figure 10-8 shows the components of a typical grid-connected PV system. System efficiency can be boosted by attaching a tracker to the solar modules. Single-axis trackers (Fig. 10-9) aligned with the axis in a north-south direction allow the module to follow the sun’s progress across the sky from east to west during the day. Dual-axis trackers further refine the module’s orientation, allowing the sun to always illuminate the cells that are perpendicular to the plane of the

FIGURE 10-8  Typical components of a grid-connected PV system. (NREL.)

10_Santoso_Sec10_p0595-0648.indd 602

21/11/17 5:48 PM

SOLAR POWER GENERATION AND ENERGY STORAGE   603 

FIGURE 10-9  Single-axis tracking PV system. (NREL.)

module. This geometry facilitates the maximum energy output from the system, but it increases costs and also typically requires additional spacing to prevent one module from shading an adjacent one. Flat-plate PV systems do not need trackers, but they will produce approximately 25% more energy if one is used. Concentrating PV systems require direct-normal radiation, making a tracking system essential. These concentrating systems also require a lens or mirror to focus the sunlight onto the solar cells. Fresnel lenses extruded from acrylic are one option for concentration, but mirrors can also provide concentration. These requires a sturdy frame and robust tracking mechanism to maintain optical accuracy and structural integrity against wind. In most cases, residential and commercial PV systems are directly connected to the grid without energy storage. Users draw power from the utility during hours of darkness or on cloudy days. As we move toward a smart grid in the future, more systems may incorporate battery energy storage to increase reliability if battery costs decrease or grid reliability is an issue. One potential way to incorporate energy storage with PV systems could be to integrate them with the use of plug-in electric hybrid vehicles if these vehicles are used on a large scale. If users have stand-alone systems—with no grid connection—then the BOS will include batteries and charge controllers to produce electricity at night or during cloudy conditions. The batteries store excess power that is generated from the PV array to be used later, and the charge controllers regulate the current to the batteries to prevent overcharging. 10.2.6  Examples of Photovoltaic Systems PV systems are unique power plants in that they can come in a range of sizes from 300 W to 500 MW. Residential systems are typically from 1 to 10 kW and connected to the grid via singlephase inverters. Figure 10-10 shows a typical residential PV system configuration with the addition of local batteries for backup power. The PV system produces DC electricity and connected through a charge controller to the battery bank. The charge controller regulates battery charging and will turn down the power from the PV system if the batteries have reached full charge. The dual-purpose inverter converts DC power from the batteries to AC power to either sell back to the grid or provide local power to the backup AC loads. Commercial PV systems range from 10 kW to 5 MW and are typically installed on the rooftops of stores. These systems use three-phase inverters to connect to the grid. Utility scale system can range from 1 MW to more than 500 MW. Currently, the largest installed PV systems in the United States are over 500 MW. These systems use three-phase inverters to connect to the grid and connect to the grid at both distribution and transmission systems. Figure 10-11 shows a typical layout of a utility scale PV system. Large utility scale systems typically

10_Santoso_Sec10_p0595-0648.indd 603

21/11/17 5:48 PM

604  SECTION TEN

FIGURE 10-10  Typical residential PV system with battery backup. (NREL.)

FIGURE 10-11  Utility scale PV system. (NREL.)

10_Santoso_Sec10_p0595-0648.indd 604

21/11/17 5:48 PM

SOLAR POWER GENERATION AND ENERGY STORAGE   605 

have a plant controller that will coordinate power output from all the PV inverters within the plant. The size of a typical inverter for these systems ranges from 250 kW to 4 MW, and there can be several hundred inverters to coordinate. For very large systems, a plant supervisory control and data acquisition (SCADA) system is used to communicate the operational state back to the grid operator. The grid operator may also request that the plant curtail power or provide other grid services to the grid. 10.2.7 Bibliography • V. Gevorgian and B. O’Neill, “Advanced Grid-Friendly Controls Demonstration Project for Utility-Scale PV Power Plants,” NREL/TP-5D00-65368, January 2016. • B. Kroposki, R. Margolis, and D. Ton, “Harnessing the Sun—An Overview of Solar Technologies,” IEEE Power and Energy Magazine, May/June 2009. • M. Morjaria, D. Anichkov, V.Chadliev, and S. Soni, “A Grid-Friendly Plant—The Role of Utility-Scale Photovoltaic Plants in Grid Stability and Reliability,” IEEE Power and Energy Magazine, May/June 2014.

10.3  CONCENTRATING SOLAR POWER TECHNOLOGIES BY BENJAMIN KROPOSKI, ROBERT MARGOLIS, AND MARK MEHOS CSP technologies use mirrors to reflect and concentrate sunlight onto receivers that collect the solar energy and convert it to heat. This thermal energy can then be used to produce electricity via a turbine (e.g., steam, air, supercritical carbon dioxide) or heat engine driving a generator. CSP systems are typically classified by how the various systems collect solar energy. The three main systems described below are linear, power tower, and dish/engine systems. BOS and thermal energy storage (TES) will also be discussed. 10.3.1  Linear Concentrating Solar Power Systems Linear CSP collectors capture the sun’s energy with large mirrors that reflect and focus the sunlight onto a linear receiver tube. The receiver contains a fluid that is heated by the sunlight and then used to create superheated steam that spins a turbine to drive a generator to produce electricity. Alternatively, steam can be generated directly in the solar field. In this method, no heat exchanger is used, but the system uses more costly pressure-rated piping throughout the entire solar field and typically has a lower operating temperature although recent years have seen as shift toward more efficient tower technology (see next subsection). Linear concentrating collector fields consist of a large number of collectors in parallel rows that are typically aligned in a north-south orientation to maximize both annual and summertime energy collection. With a single-axis sun-tracking system, this configuration enables the mirrors to track the sun from east to west during the day, ensuring that the sun reflects continuously onto the receiver tubes. The predominant CSP systems currently in operation in the United States are linear concentrating units that use parabolic trough collectors (see Fig. 10-12). In typical systems, the receiver tube is positioned along the focal line of each parabola-shaped reflector. The tube is fixed to the mirror, and the heated fluid—commonly a high-temperature oil—flows through and out of the field of solar mirrors to where it is used to create steam, and then it is sent directly to the turbine. The Solar Energy Generating Systems (SEGS) plants in the Mojave Desert of California currently have an aggregated output capacity of 359 MW. There are three additional operating plants in the southwestern United States each with capacities of at least 250 MW.

10_Santoso_Sec10_p0595-0648.indd 605

21/11/17 5:48 PM

606  SECTION TEN

FIGURE 10-12  Schematic showing the basic operation of a parabolic trough CSP system. (NREL.)

In addition, individual systems can be collocated with power plants such as the Martin Next Generation Solar Energy Center in Florida. This plant is an integrated solar combined cycle that is used as an auxiliary heat supply to the steam cycle of the natural gas plant. The capacity of this type of plant would be constrained only by the transmission capacity and the availability of contiguous land area. Trough designs can incorporate thermal storage. In such systems, the collector field is oversized to heat a storage system during the day that can be used in the evening to generate additional steam to produce electricity. Parabolic trough plants can also be designed as hybrid systems that use fossil fuel to supplement the solar output during periods of low solar radiation. In such a design, a natural-gasfired heater or gas-steam boiler/reheater is used. Troughs may also be integrated with combinedcycle natural-gas and coal-fired plants to improve the plant heat rate or provide a peaking boost to the steam turbine in a combined-cycle plant, much like a duct burner does. A second linear concentrating technology is the linear Fresnel reflective system (see Fig. 10-13). Flat or slightly curved mirrors mounted on trackers on the ground are configured to reflect sunlight onto a receiver tube fixed in space above these mirrors. A small parabolic mirror is sometimes added atop the receiver to further focus the sunlight. 10.3.2  Power Tower Concentrating Solar Power Systems CSP systems that use a power tower design, numerous, flat, sun-tracking mirrors, known as heliostats, focus sunlight onto a receiver at the top of a tower (see Fig. 10-14). There is a movement toward smaller heliostats (3 2.0–2.8

2.0–2.5

4. Single-stage closing resistors, compensated line

≤2.0

5. Two-stage closing resistors, optimum compensation

≤1.7

6. Two-stage closing resistors, combined with polarity-dependent closing, or compensation with optimized multistage closing resistors

1.5

Altitude Correction.  For installation at altitudes above 3300 ft (1000 m), altitude correction factors have to be applied. Altitude correction factors are covered in IEEE C37.100.1.15 The values of rated maximum voltages and insulation levels are multiplied by the factors to obtain the values for the application. Oil Circuit Breakers.  Oil circuit breakers are out of production today, but many remain in service. These circuit breakers were classified as either dead-tank “bulk oil” circuit breakers, or as live-tank “minimum oil” circuit breakers. Oil circuit breakers use oil as both an arc quenching and insulating medium, with dead-tank “bulk oil” designs using oil as the primary insulation to ground, within a grounded tank. Dead-tank “bulk oil” circuit breakers consist of a steel tank partly filled with oil, through the cover of which are high-voltage entrance bushings. Contacts at the bottom of the bushings are bridged by a conducting crosshead carried by a wood or composite lift rod. The circuit breaker typically opens by spring action, separating the interrupting contacts, and also further separating an isolation break below the contact system. Accelerating springs are used to increase the speed of opening. In some designs the crosshead is opened with a rotary motion by springs. Circuit breakers with three poles in one tank were made up to 69 kV. Higher voltages had separate tanks for each pole. Figure 12-3 shows a typical dead-tank “bulk oil” circuit breaker, and Fig. 12-21 shows a typical interrupter. Minimum oil circuit breakers were developed mainly in Europe to reduce space and the quantity of oil in circuit breakers. They were manufactured for indoor applications up through 38 kV and outdoor applications up through 800 kV. The layout and interrupter details of a medium voltage minimum-oil circuit breaker are shown in Fig. 12-22. Vacuum Circuit Breakers.  Progress in high-vacuum technology and circuit breaker development, combined with improved manufacturing and testing methods, has opened a growing area for vacuum circuit breaker application, concentrating, but not limited to voltages up to 38 kV, continuous current ratings up to 4000 A, and covering all standard interrupting ranges. Vacuum interrupters are available today up to 145 kV, though acceptance is a work in progress. The principal design of a vacuum interrupter is shown in Fig. 12-23. Two contacts are mounted on an insulating envelope from which virtually all air has been evacuated. One contact is stationary, the other movable. Vacuum interruption has the inherent advantage of moving a lightweight contact for only a very small distance in an almost perfect dielectric medium. This results in safe, quiet, and fast switching and interruption of load or fault currents. The moving contact is opened up to full gap distance by means of a driving mechanism. A metalvapor arc discharge thus occurs in the contact gap through which the current flows until the next current zero. The arc is quenched at current zero.

12_Santoso_Sec12_p0709-0800.indd 730

21/11/17 3:50 PM

SWITCHGEAR AND POWER COMPONENTS   731 

FIGURE 12-21  Details of a 161-kV outdoor oil circuit breaker interrupter: (a) closed position; (b) open position.

FIGURE 12-22  Outline and interrupter details of a 15-kV, 3-pole minimum-oil circuit breaker. (Courtesy of ABB T&D Company, Inc.)

12_Santoso_Sec12_p0709-0800.indd 731

21/11/17 3:50 PM

732  SECTION TWELVE

The metal-vapor plasma is fully deionized within a few microseconds by diffusion and recombination so that the conduction path very quickly recovers its dielectric strength. Figure 12-24 shows details of a horizontal-drawout vacuum circuit breaker. One or more interrupters may be utilized in series per pole. Vacuum interrupters may additionally be protected against outside influences by an insulating casing. They may also be fitted with hand- or motor-charged stored-energy-operated mechanisms or magnetic actuators. Because of their fast closing and opening times, vacuum circuit breakers are particularly suitable for automatic reclosing and FIGURE 12-23  Partial section of vacuum intersynchronizing duty. Breaking of the shortrupter 23 kV, 2000 A, 21 kA. (ABB T&D Company, Inc.) circuit currents with very steep initial rise of transient recovery voltage is possible due to restoration of the dielectric strength of the contact gap within a few microseconds. The steep rise of dielectric strength over the whole current range offers a high capacitive-current-switching capability. Switching of unloaded transmission lines and cables can therefore reliably be performed. Air Magnetic Circuit Breakers.  Medium voltage air magnetic circuit breakers are no longer manufactured. This type of circuit breaker is usually stored-energy mechanism-operated and interrupts the main circuit in the normal atmosphere under the influence of a strong magnetic field which acts to force the arc deep into a specially designed arc chute (see Fig. 12-25). The arc chute cools and lengthens the arc to a point where the arc cannot be maintained by the voltage of the system, and interruption is accomplished. The zone between the main contacts is clear of ionized air by the time interruption is obtained in the arc chute, and so restriking at this point is avoided. Since the magnetic effect is not great at low currents such as small load, transformer magnetizing, and cable-charging current, all designs used an air-pump “puffer” actuated by the operating mechanism that blows a blast of air across the arc and thereby ensures its entering the arc chute and giving rapid interruption

FIGURE 12-24  Outline and interrupter details of a 15-kV horizontal drawout vacuum circuit breaker 2000 A, 28 kA. (ABB T&D Company, Inc.)

12_Santoso_Sec12_p0709-0800.indd 732

21/11/17 3:50 PM

SWITCHGEAR AND POWER COMPONENTS   733 

FIGURE 12-25  Typical low-voltage air circuit breaker with magnetic air chutes; breaker in the open position.

at the low-current values. When the circuit breaker is opened, the arc transfers from the main arcing contacts to fixed arc runners which are within the arc chute. The magnetic field is produced by coils in the main-current circuit, in some cases wound around a magnetic core which magnetizes soft-iron plates in the sides of each arc chute. Some designs did not require an iron core. Magnetic air circuit breakers were available in any of the ratings of Table 2 of ANSI Standard C37.06-19874 (or earlier) through 15 kV. All were designed for use in metal-clad enclosures. Figure 12-26 shows the horizontal-drawout type of circuit breaker in a metal-clad enclosure. Although the design shown is for indoor use only, the same circuit breakers are placed in weatherproof housings for outdoor service. When they are so used, suitable heaters are put in the housings to avoid internal moisture condensation. Air-Blast Circuit Breakers.  Air blast circuit breakers are no longer manufactured. These circuit breakers fulfilled the heavy-duty requirements of circuit breakers in high-voltage systems. They have been used to provide the indoor ratings up to 38 kV. They were, however, mainly used in outdoor applications up to 800 kV. Today they have been replaced by SF6 technology at most ratings above 38 kV, and by vacuum technology up to 38 kV. Air-blast circuit breakers have been used for special applications as (1) generator circuit breakers with continuous current ratings of up to 42 kA and higher, (2) arc-furnace transformer circuit

12_Santoso_Sec12_p0709-0800.indd 733

21/11/17 3:50 PM

734  SECTION TWELVE

FIGURE 12-26  Horizontal-drawout, metal-clad magnetic circuit breaker in service position.

breakers with an extra-high number of switching operations (20 to 50 operations per day), and (3) extra high interrupting currents. Air-blast circuit breakers were usually fixed-mounted, but a variety of circuit breaker types were available truck-mounted for application in drawout metal-clad switchgear. All air blast circuit breakers make use of dry and clean air compressed to 15 to 25 bars, depending on the make and types of circuit breaker. The compressed air is used to operate the circuit breaker as well as to serve as the medium for arc quenching and insulation. Continuous current ratings up to 5000 A were possible. Total breaking time of 2 cycles (from energizing of trip coil until arc extinguishing) was first achieved by air-blast designs in the 1960s. Special designs allowed for even shorter breaking time. Some 69-kV circuit breakers are equipped with sequential isolators, but the bulk of designs did not integrate the isolator to form part of the circuit breaker. Some older designs employed separate chambers for opening and closing operation, but later air-blast circuit breakers perform opening and closing with the same contact system. Closing resistors and/or opening resistors, with some designs, were often used. Limited voltage capability per break led to many interrupter breaks at higher voltages, up to 12 to 15 per phase. Voltage distribution over the multiple breaks of one pole was usually achieved by parallel grading capacitors. Generator Circuit Breakers.  Generator circuit breakers represent another class rated for very high continuous currents and short-circuit currents, typically at generator voltages. Generator circuit breakers are often incorporated into iso-phase buses and can include other switchgear components for measuring current, detecting faults, and grounding. Generator circuit breakers are available up to 50 kA continuous current and up to 220 kA interrupting current. Three technologies are employed (1) air blast at the higher ratings (see Fig. 12-27), (2) SF6 self-blast at medium power levels (up to 120 kA), and (3) vacuum for lower power levels

12_Santoso_Sec12_p0709-0800.indd 734

21/11/17 3:50 PM

SWITCHGEAR AND POWER COMPONENTS   735 

FIGURE 12-27  Outline and interrupter details of a generator air-blast circuit breaker-type DR, 36 kV, up to 50 kA with forced cooling, 200 kA.

(up to 80 kA). For continuous currents above 20 kA the generator circuit breaker is usually equipped with a forced cooling system, using water, for example. Generator circuit breakers have been available since the 1960s. Advantages of using generator circuit breakers include the following: •  Simplification of operation, especially during commissioning and recommissioning; because the generator can be handled as a separate unit, isolated from the main and unit transformers. •  Fault protection between the generator and transformer. Two zones of protection are created and generator faults are cleared by the opening of the generator circuit breaker alone. •  Unbalanced load protection of the generator. •  Protection of the generator from transformer faults. •  Reliability/availability increase. Historically generator circuit breakers have been of air-blast design with pneumatic operators. This is the technology still used today for large nuclear and fossil fuel power plants (up to 1500 MW), and large pumped storage installations. The design has a tubular housing and is horizontal. Newer designs utilize SF6 self-blast technology and hydraulic operators. These are rated for application to smaller power plants (gas turbine/cogeneration, for example) from 60 to 400 MW and smaller pumped storage installations. Vacuum generator circuit breakers are increasingly used for generators from 10 to 80 MW and higher. SF6 Circuit Breakers.  Sulfur hexafluoride (SF6) gas has proven to be an excellent arc quenching and insulating medium for circuit breakers. SF6 is a very stable compound, inert up to about 500°C, nonflammable, nontoxic, odorless, and colorless. At a temperature of about 2000 K, SF6 has a very high specific heat and high thermal conductivity, which promotes cooling of the arc plasma just before and at current zero, and thus facilitates quenching of the arc. The electronegative behavior of the SF6, that is, the property of capturing free electrons and forming negative ions, results in high dielectric strength and also promotes rapid dielectric recovery of the arc channel after arc quenching.

12_Santoso_Sec12_p0709-0800.indd 735

21/11/17 3:50 PM

736  SECTION TWELVE

SF6 circuit breakers are available for all voltages up to 1200 kV, continuous currents up to 5000 A for conventional circuit breakers (higher for generator circuit breakers), and short-circuit interruption up to 80 kA. SF6 circuit breakers of the indoor type have been incorporated into some designs of metalclad switchgear (see Fig. 12-28). Outdoor designs include both dead-tank (see Fig. 12-4) and live-tank circuit breakers (see Fig. 12-7). Over the years, SF6 circuit breakers have reached a high degree of reliability; thus they can cope with all known switching phenomena. Their closed-gas system eliminates external exhaust during switching operations and thus adapts to environmental requirements. Their compact design considerably reduces space requirements and building and installation costs. In addition, SF6 circuit breakers require very little maintenance. Each pole is equipped with one or more interrupters; stored energy, FIGURE 12-28  Section of a SF6 puffer-piston spring, hydraulic, or pneumatic driving mechindoor circuit breaker, 23 kV. anisms are provided for each pole or three-pole unit. Gas-density monitors are standard. SF6 gas circuit breakers were initially of the two-pressure type, in which high pressure gas for interruption is compressed to 15 to 20 bars and then stored for later interrupting duty. Later designs employed the puffer principle, in which interrupting pressure is developed during the contact motion itself, and no high pressure gas is stored. Puffer interrupters require high mechanical forces and energies to be supplied from the operating mechanism to achieve the SF6 pressures needed for interruption. The interrupting principle of an SF6 puffer-type interrupter is shown in Fig. 12-29. The latest designs of SF6 gas circuit breakers reduce mechanical force requirements by using the arc energy itself to develop the interrupting pressure; these designs are referred to as self-blast or thermal-assist circuit breakers. Further force/energy reductions are achieved using double motion designs, in which both contacts move to achieve a higher relative speed, saving kinetic energy. Figure 12-30 illustrates the opening sequence of a typical puffer circuit breaker. In the closed position the current flows over the continuous current contacts and the complete volume of the circuit breaker pole is under the same pressure of SF6 gas. The precompression of the SF6 gas commences with the opening operation. The continuous current contacts separate and the current is transferred to the arcing contacts. At the instant of separation of the arcing contacts, the pressure required to extinguish the arc is reached. The arc produced is drawn and at the same time exposed to the gas, which FIGURE 12-29 Principle of puffer-type arc interrupters. escapes through the ring-shaped space between

12_Santoso_Sec12_p0709-0800.indd 736

21/11/17 3:50 PM

SWITCHGEAR AND POWER COMPONENTS   737 

FIGURE 12-30  Principle of SF6 puffer-type interrupter showing four positions during opening operation.

the extinction nozzle and the moving arcing contact. The escaping gas has the effect of a double blast in both axial directions. Until the open position is reached, SF6 gas flows out of the puffer cylinder. The existing overpressure maintains stability of the dielectric strength until the full open position of the contacts at the rated service pressure is reached. The self-blast principle of interruption is illustrated in Fig. 12-31. In the case of high-current interruption, arc energy heats the gas, resulting in a pressure rise in the static volume, V1. This pressure then quenches the arc at an ensuing current zero. In the low-current case an auxiliary puffer (volume V2) generates sufficient pressure for interruption. Necessary force requirements for the mechanical system are therefore drastically reduced. All ancillary equipment, including the oil pump and accumulator associated with the drive, form a modular assembly that is mounted directly on the circuit breaker, thus eliminating installation of piping on the site. The metal-enclosed GIS circuit breaker is provided with the necessary items to fit into the substation arrangement (see Fig. 12-32). The main equipment flanges of the circuit breaker are fitted with contact assemblies to accept the isolator moving contacts. Other equipment modules can be coupled to the same flanges. On the fixed-contact end of the circuit breaker, provision is made for coupling two modules, facilitating the mounting of an extension module to connect the second busbar isolator. Dead-tank SF6 circuit breakers typically employ gas-filled bushings, illustrated in Fig 12-5. Such bushings are usually integral to the circuit breaker itself and are not interchangeable with other apparatus bushings. Electrical grading is provided by a lower throat shield. Ring-type bushing current transformers are located at the base of the bushing. Potential taps are not generally available in SF6 bushings because of the lack of a capacitive grading structure. Porcelain alternatives, such as composites, have been used to provide greater safety (explosion resistance), easier handling (lighter and nonbrittle), seismic performance (lighter and stronger), and improved pollution performance. Current transformers (CTs) for dead-tank circuit breakers are of the ring-type bushing design. Outdoor circuit breakers of the live-tank layout are generally provided with free-standing CTs of the paper-oil-insulated or SF6 design. For oil-filled CTs hermetical seal of oil is either of the fixed design with gas cushion or of the pressurefree bellows type. Up to six magnetic cores can be provided per CT unit, generally in multiple ratios for 5 A or 1 A secondary by means of secondary taps. Primary-current ratings up to 2000 A normally employ the wound-type design with two or more turns. Higher primary currents up to 6000 A require the inverted or head design, with a straight tube as single-turn primary winding and the core and secondarywinding assembly arranged at the CT top to limit temperature rise and to increase the mechanical withstand capability of the CT. The latter design has its full main insulation on the secondary winding.

12_Santoso_Sec12_p0709-0800.indd 737

21/11/17 3:50 PM

738  SECTION TWELVE

FIGURE 12-31  Self-blast principle of interruption: (a) full-closed position; (b) low-current interruption; (c) high-current interruption; (d) full-open position.

12_Santoso_Sec12_p0709-0800.indd 738

21/11/17 3:50 PM

SWITCHGEAR AND POWER COMPONENTS   739 

FIGURE 12-32  Section of a 145 kV SF6 circuit breaker for gas-insulated substation (GIS) type ELK.

Free-standing CTs are available for all output and accuracy requirements for modern system relaying and measuring for voltages up to 1100 kV. For the upper voltage ranges, free-standing CTs are normally provided with separate potential layers. The CTs are generally dimensioned for the same dielectric and mechanical characteristics chosen for the related circuit breaker. 12.1.8  Low-Voltage Circuit Breaker Ratings The following ratings should be specified by the user in the application of low-voltage circuit breakers in an enclosure. •  Rated maximum voltage •  Rated continuous current •  Rated power frequency (for ac circuit breakers, 50 or 60 Hz) •  Rated short-time current •  Rated short-circuit current •  Rated peak current (for dc circuit breakers) Standard electrically and manually operated circuit breakers are listed in ratings up to and including 6000 A ac and 12,000 A dc. Electrically operated circuit breakers are available in higher current ratings for special applications. Standard circuit breakers are rated on the basis of a temperature rise on the contacts not to exceed 85°C above an ambient outside the enclosure of 40°C. Voltage ratings are 254 to 1000 V ac and 250 to 3200 V dc. The short-time current ratings are based on three-phase symmetric short-circuit currents; the single-phase short-circuit current ratings are 87% of these values. For details refer to the latest revision of IEEE C37.13.17

12_Santoso_Sec12_p0709-0800.indd 739

21/11/17 3:50 PM

740  SECTION TWELVE

12.1.9  Low-Voltage Circuit Breaker Construction Assembly Variations.  The circuit breakers are usually installed in a metal-enclosed cubicle for dead-front or drawout type of construction. Metal barriers between circuit breakers and busbars provide increased safety in service. Hand operation by means of a lever is common, even on large circuit breakers. Electric operation by means of a solenoid or motor mechanisms for 48, 125, or 250 V dc, or 120 or 240 V ac is available on all air circuit breakers and on higher-rated molded-case circuit breakers. Circuit breakers are supplied with an overcurrent trip mechanism which may be of the instantaneous or the time-delay type, or a combination of both. Trip devices are adjustable over a wide range of ratings. Other trip devices and arrangements may be used, for example undervoltage trips, shunt trips, reverse current, or overcurrent relays. Multiple-pole circuit breakers are commonly used in practically all capacities, one pole being used for each ungrounded line of a circuit, that is, a two-pole circuit breaker for a three-wire grounded circuit or a single-pole circuit breaker for a two-wire grounded circuit. Circuit breakers can usually be equipped with auxiliary contacts, alarm contacts, pushbutton control, position indicator, and key interlock. The widely used drawout type of circuit breaker may be moved into and locked in the connected, test, and disconnected positions and/or completely withdrawn. Refer to the latest revisions of IEEE C37.13,17 C37.14,18 C37.16,16 and C37.17.19 Air Circuit Breakers.  The usual construction of an air circuit breaker (Fig. 12-25) makes use of two fixed terminals mounted one above the other in a vertical plane, which, when the circuit breaker is closed, are bridged under heavy pressure by a bridging member operated by a system of linkages. Arcing contacts close before and open after the main contacts. The arcing contacts are easily renewable. The circuit breaker is held closed by a latch which may be tripped electrically or mechanically. Modern circuit breakers are trip-free. Many circuit breakers use a solid bridging member with spring-mounted self-aligning contacts. The contact surfaces are made of silver so that oxidation will not cause excessive resistance and overheating. Arcing contacts of modern circuit breakers use a silver-tungsten or copper-tungsten alloy which is arc-resisting. Barriers between poles are generally furnished with circuit breakers on ac and dc circuits 250 V and above, and special arc chutes, quenchers, or deionizing chambers are also used throughout the available lines of air circuit breakers. These devices are made in different forms by different manufacturers and serve to improve the interrupting performance of the circuit breaker and to decrease the arcing time. Molded-Case and Insulated-Case Circuit Breakers.  This circuit breaker is completely enclosed within a ruggedly constructed molded case of insulating material. It has received wide acceptance in industry and is particularly adaptable in large buildings and industrial plants. The molded-case circuit breaker, in smaller sizes, is adaptable in home lighting circuits where convenience of automatic protection with manual reset of the circuit breaker is desired. Continuous current ratings range from 15 to 6000 A; the interrupting ratings are from 5 to 45 kA within the standard range. High interrupting ratings up to 200 kA are available. For details of technical data, application, and accessories refer to manufacturers catalogs. Current-Limiting Circuit Breakers.  Low-voltage switchgear is often connected to systems with high or extra-high short-circuit currents. The standard-range circuit breaker cannot satisfy these requirements. Figure 12-33 outlines different methods to solve the problem. The currentlimiting circuit breaker with high interrupting capacity offers a technically sound and economical solution. Current-limiting circuit breakers operate extremely rapidly. Interruption takes place within the first half-cycle of short-circuit current, and act to limit the peak instantaneous current.

12_Santoso_Sec12_p0709-0800.indd 740

21/11/17 3:50 PM

SWITCHGEAR AND POWER COMPONENTS   741 

FIGURE 12-33  Methods of current-limiting in low-voltage circuits.

FIGURE 12-34  Current wave (a) with limitation, and (b) without limitation; ta = total break time a; tb = total break time b.

Figure 12-34 illustrates the current curve, and Fig. 12-35 shows the current-limiting characteristic of a 100-A circuit breaker. With an initial symmetric short-circuit current of 40 kA, the prospective peak value would be 82.5 kA, considering a dc component of 50% and power factor of 0.25. By using a current-limiting circuit breaker, the peak value is limited to about 20 kA. The mechanical stress on the conductors is thus reduced considerably. The contacts in current-limiting circuit breakers are so arranged that the interruption is assisted by the electrodynamic action of the short-circuit current. The higher the short-circuit current, the faster the interruption takes place.

12_Santoso_Sec12_p0709-0800.indd 741

FIGURE 12-35 Current-limiting capability of a motor-protection circuit breaker, 100-A continuous current rating.

21/11/17 3:50 PM

742  SECTION TWELVE

Because of the short opening time, the current-limiting circuit breaker, with suitable accessories, can be used to protect power electronic components. Rectifier circuits omitting fuses, for example can be built in this way.

12.1.10  Application of Low-Voltage Circuit Breakers Application.  Air circuit breakers are used on dc and ac circuits for reactive current switching, and for the protection of general lighting, power, motor circuits, and traction power systems. Distinction is made between various protection classes and different service and ambient conditions. For selection of a circuit breaker, type and rating, operating speed, selectivity with fuses, and rated voltage must be taken into account. Further consideration has to be given to severe or hazardous service conditions like tropical climate or marine- or explosion-proof installations. Reference is made to IEEE C37.13,17 C37.14,18 C37.16,16 and C37.17,19 UL-489.20

12.1.11 References 1. IEEE C37.04, Standard Rating Structure for AC High-Voltage Circuit Breakers. 2. IEEE C37.06, Standard for AC High-Voltage Circuit Breakers Rated on a Symmetrical Basis—Preferred Ratings and Related Required Capabilities for Voltages above 1000 V. 3. IEEE C37.100, Standard Definitions for Power Switchgear. 4. ANSI C37.06, Standard for AC High-Voltage Circuit Breakers Rated on a Symmetrical Basis—Preferred Ratings and Related Required Capabilities (up to the year 2000, C37.06 was an ANSI document under the ASC C37. The 2009 version is an ANSI/IEEE document. IEEE C37.06 will be made obsolete when revisions to IEEE C37.04 incorporate the preferred ratings values into C37.04). 5. IEEE C37.010, Application Guide for AC High-Voltage Circuit Breakers Rated on a Symmetrical Current Basis. 6. ASA C37.7-1960, Interrupting Rating Factors for Reclosing Service. 7. IEEE C37.04b-2008, Standard Rating Structure for AC High-Voltage Circuit Breakers Rated on a Symmetrical Basis—Amendment 2: To Change the Description of Transient Recovery Voltage for Harmonization with IEC 62271-100. 8. IEEE C37.011, Application Guide for Transient Recovery Voltage for AC High-Voltage Circuit Breakers. 9. IEEE C37.04a-2003, Standard Rating Structure for AC High-Voltage Circuit Breakers Rated on a Symmetrical Current Basis—Amendment 1: Capacitance Current Switching. 10. IEEE C37.09, Standard Test Procedure for AC High-Voltage Circuit Breakers Rated on a Symmetrical Current Basis. 11. IEEE 693, Recommended Practice for Seismic Design of Substations. 12. IEEE C37.012, Application Guide for Capacitance Current Switching for AC High-Voltage Circuit Breakers. 13. IEEE C37.015, Guide for the Application of Shunt Reactor Switching. 14. IEEE C37.12, Guide for Specification of High-Voltage Circuit Breakers (over 1000 Volts). 15. IEEE C37.100.1, Standard of Common Requirements for High-Voltage Power Switchgear Rated Above 1000 V. 16. IEEE C37.16, Standard for Preferred Ratings, Related Requirements, and Application Recommendations for Low-Voltage (635 V and below) and DC (3200 V and above) Power Circuit Breakers (IEEE C37.16 is now obsolete, as preferred ratings have been incorporated into IEEE C37.13 and IEEE C37.14). 17. IEEE C37.13, Standard for Low-Voltage AC Power Circuit Breakers Used in Enclosures. 18. IEEE C37.14, Standard for Low-Voltage DC Power Circuit Breakers Used in Enclosures. 19. IEEE C37.17, Standard for Trip Devices for AC and General Purpose DC Low-Voltage Power Circuit Breakers.

12_Santoso_Sec12_p0709-0800.indd 742

21/11/17 3:50 PM

SWITCHGEAR AND POWER COMPONENTS   743 

20. UL-489, Standard for Safety Molded-Case Circuit Breakers, Molded-Case Switches, and Circuit-Breaker Enclosures. 21. IEEE C37.09a-2005, Standard Test Procedure for AC High-Voltage Circuit Breakers Rated on a Symmetrical Current Basis—Amendment 1: Capacitance Current Switching.

12.1.12  Bibliography on Circuit Breakers Balestrero, A., Ghezzi, L., Popov, M., Tribulato, G., and van der Sluis, L., Black Box Modeling of Low-Voltage Circuit Breakers, IEEE Transactions on Power Delivery, vol. 25, Issue 4, Oct. 2010, Page(s): 2481–2488. Balestrero, A., Ghezzi, L., Popov, M., Tribulato, G., and van der Sluis, L., Current Interruption in Low-Voltage Circuit Breakers, IEEE Transactions on Power Delivery, vol. 25, Issue 1, Jan. 2010, Page(s):206–211. Bergman, W. J. B., Selecting Circuit Breaker Monitoring, 2001 IEEE/PES Transmission and Distribution Conference and Exposition, vol. 2, 28 Oct.-2 Nov. 2001, Page(s):1071–1076. Bibliography of Switchgear Literature: IEEE Committee Report, IEEE Transactions on Power Delivery, vol. 5, Issue 1, Jan. 1990, Page(s):177–188. Bibliography of Switchgear Literature: IEEE Committee Report, Veverka, E. F.; Schmunk, E. W., McCall, L. V., IEEE Transactions on Power Delivery, vol. 10, Issue 2, April 1995, Page(s):824–844. Bibliography of Switchgear Literature: IEEE Committee Report, Glinkowski, M. T.; Schmidt, L., Veverka, E. F., IEEE Transactions on Power Delivery, vol. 13, Issue 1, Jan. 1998, Page(s):135–156. Browne, T. E. Jr., ed., Circuit Interruption—Theory and Techniques, Marcel Dekker Inc., 1984. Brunke, J. H., Application of Metal Oxide Surge Arresters for the Control of Line Switching Transients, Paper Presented at Insulation Coordination Seminar—CRA Centennial Meeting, Toronto, Ontario, May 1991. Brunke, J. H., Application of Power Circuit Breakers for Switching Capacitive and Small Inductive Currents, Presented at the IEEE/PES General Meeting, 24 July 2008, available at: http://www.ewh.ieee.org/soc/pes/ switchgear/presentations/tech_pres.html. Bruettner, D. E., Colclaser, R. G., and Wagner, C. L., Thermal Requirements of Resistors Used in Circuit Breakers for Voltage Control, IEEE Transactions, vol. PAS-80, 1970. Canay, I. M., Comparison of Generator Circuit-Breaker Stresses in Test Laboratory and Real Service Condition, IEEE Transactions on Power Delivery, vol. 16, Issue 3, Jul. 2001, Page(s):415–421. Colcaser, R. G., Berkebile, L. E., and Buettner, D. E., The Effect of Capacitors on the Short-Line Fault Component of Transient Recovery Voltage, IEEE Transactions, vol. PAS-90, 1971. Dufournet, D., Recent Evolution of High-Voltage SF6 Circuit-Breakers, IEE Colloquium on Physics of Power Interruption, 31 Oct. 1995, Page(s):3/1–3/3. Dufournet, D. and Montillet, G. F., Transient Recovery Voltages Requirements for System Source Fault Interrupting by Small Generator Circuit Breakers, IEEE Transactions on Power Delivery, vol. 17, Issue 2, Apr. 2002, Page(s):474–478. Dufournet, D. and Smith, R. K., Transient Recovery Voltages for High-Voltage Circuit Breakers, Presented at the IEEE/PES General Meeting, 24 Jul. 2008, available at: http://www.ewh.ieee.org/soc/pes/switchgear/ presentations/tech_pres.html. Dufournet, D. and Hu, J., Revision of IEEE C37.011 Guide for the Application of Transient Recovery Voltages for AC High-Voltage Circuit Breakers, IEEE Transactions of Power Delivery, vol. 27, Issue 2, Apr. 2012, Page(s):1018–1022. Franck, C. M., HVCT Circuit Breakers: A Review Identifying Future Research Needs, IEEE Transactions on Power Delivery, vol. 26, Issue 2, Apr. 2011, Page(s):998–1007. Freeman, W., Seismic Considerations of Circuit Breakers, Presented at the IEEE/PES General Meeting, 24 Jul. 2008, available at: http://www.ewh.ieee.org/soc/pes/switchgear/presentations/tech_pres.html. Garzon, R. D., High-voltage Circuit Breakers: Design and Applications, Marcel Dekker Inc., 1997. Glinkowski, M. T.; Gutierrez, M. R.; Braun, D., Voltage Escalation and Reignition Behavior of Vacuum Generator Circuit Breakers During Load Shedding, IEEE Transactions on Power Delivery, vol. 12, Issue 1, Jan. 1997, Page(s):219–226. Greenwood, Allan, Electrical Transients in Power Systems, Wiley-Interscience, 1971. Hall, W. M. and Gregory, G. D., Short-Circuit Ratings and Application Guidelines for Molded-Case Circuit Breakers, IEEE Transactions on Industry Applications, vol. 35, Issue 1, Jan.-Feb. 1999, Page(s):135–143.

12_Santoso_Sec12_p0709-0800.indd 743

21/11/17 3:50 PM

744  SECTION TWELVE

Hedman, D. E., Johnson, I. B., Titus, C. H., and Wilson, D. O., Switching of Extra-High-Voltage Circuits II—Surge Reduction with Circuit-Breaker Resistors, IEEE Transactions, vol. PAS-83, 1964. Heiermeier, H., Testing of Reactor Switching for UHV Circuit Breakers, IEEE Transactions on Power Delivery, vol. 30, Issue 3, Jun. 2015, Page(s):1172–1178. Janssen, A. L. J., Brunke, J. H., Heising, C. R., and Lanz, W., CIGRE WG 13.06 Studies on The Reliability of Single Pressure SF6-Gas High-Voltage Circuit-Breakers, IEEE Transactions on Power Delivery, vol. 11, Issue 1, Jan. 1996, Page(s):274–282. Kimblin, C. W. and Long, R. W., Low-Voltage Power Circuit Breakers and Molded Case Circuit Breakers—A Comparison of Test Requirements, 1999 IEEE Industrial and Commercial Power Systems Technical Conference, 2–6 May 1999, Page(s):7. Koch, Herman J., Gas Insulated Substations, Wiley-IEEE Press, Aug. 2014. Lambert, S. R., Insulation Coordination for AC High-voltage Circuit Breakers, Presented at the IEEE/PES General Meeting, 24 Jul. 2008, available at: http://www.ewh.ieee.org/soc/pes/switchgear/presentations/ tech_pres.html. Landry, M., Turcotte, O., and Brikci, F., A Complete Strategy for Conducting Dynamic Contact Resistance Measurements on HV Circuit Breakers, IEEE Transactions on Power Delivery, vol. 23, Issue 2, Apr. 2008, Page(s):710–716. Legate, A. C., Brunke, J. H., Ray, J. J., and Yasuda, E. J., Elimination of Closing Resistors on EHV Circuit Breakers, IEEE Transactions on Power Delivery, vol. 3, Issue 1, Jan. 1988, Page(s):223–231. Lester, G. N. and Nelson, J. H., History of Circuit Breaker Standards, Presented at the IEEE/PES General Meeting, 24 July 2008, available at: http://www.ewh.ieee.org/soc/pes/switchgear/presentations/tech_pres.html. McCabe, A. K., Seyrling, G., Mandeville, J. D., and Willieme, J. M., Design and Testing of a Three-Break 800 kV SF6 Circuit Breaker with Zno Varistors for Shunt Reactor Switching, IEEE Transactions on Power Delivery, vol. 7, Issue 2, Apr. 1992, Page(s): 853–861. Meyer, J. M. and Rufer, A., A DC Hybrid Circuit Breaker with Ultra-Fast Contact Opening and Integrated Gate-Commutated Thyristors, IEEE Transactions of Power Delivery, vol. 21, Issue 2, Apr. 2006, Page(s):646–651. Musa, Y. I., Keri, A. J. F., Halladay, J. A., Jagtiani, A. S., Mandeville, J. D., Johnnerfelt, B., Stenstrom, L., Khan, A. H., and Freeman, W. B., Application of 800-kV SF6 Dead Tank Circuit Breaker with Transmission Line Surge Arrester to Control Switching Transient Overvoltages, IEEE Transactions on Power Delivery, vol. 17, Issue 4, Oct. 2002, Page(s): 957–962. Nelson, J. H., Electric Utility Considerations for Circuit Breaker Monitoring, 2001 IEEE/PES Transmission and Distribution Conference and Exposition, vol. 2, 28 Oct.-2 Nov. 2001, Page(s):1094–1097. Peelo, David F., Current Interruption Transients Calculation, Wiley Press, Apr. 2014. Peelo, D. F., Polovick, G. S., Sawada, J. H., Diamanti, P., Presta, R., Sarshar, A., and Beauchemin, R., Mitigation of Circuit Breaker Transient Recovery Voltages Associated with Current Limiting Reactors, IEEE Transactions on Power Delivery, vol. 11, Issue 2, April 1996, Page(s):865–871. Popov, M., Smeets, R. P. P, van der Sluiss, L., DeHerdt, H., and Decercq, F., Experimental and Theoretical Analysis of Vacuum Circuit Breaker Prestrike Effect on a Transformer, IEEE Transactions on Power Delivery, vol. 23, Issue 3, Jul. 2009, Page(s):1266–1274. Ribeiro, J. R., and McCallum, M. E., An Application of Metal Oxide Surge Arresters in the Elimination of Need for Closing Resistors in EHV Breakers, IEEE Transactions on Power Delivery, vol. PD-4, 1989. Roybal, D. D., Standards and Ratings for the Application of Molded-Case, Insulated-Case, and Power Circuit Breakers, IEEE Transactions on Industry Applications, vol. 37, Issue 2, Mar.-Apr. 2001, Page(s):442–451. Runde, M., Failure Frequencies for High-Voltage Circuit Breakers, Disconnectors, Earthing Switches, Instrument Transformers, and Gas-Insulated Switchgear, IEEE Transactions on Power Delivery, vol. 28, Issue 1, Jan 2013, Page(s):529–530. Smeets, R. P. P., High-Power Testing of Circuit Breakers Needs a Proper Choice of Test-Circuits, Presented at the IEEE/PES General Meeting, 24 Jul. 2008, available at: http://www.ewh.ieee.org/soc/pes/switchgear/ presentations/tech_pres.html. Smith, R. K., Tests Show Ability of Vacuum Circuit Breaker to Interrupt Fast Transient Recovery Voltage Rates of Rise of Transformer Secondary Faults, IEEE Transactions on Power Delivery, vol. 10, Issue 1, Jan. 1995, Page(s):266–273. Smith, R. K. and Dufournet, D., The Harmonization of IEEE and IEC Transient Recovery Voltage Waveforms, Presented at the IEEE/PES General Meeting, 24 July 2008, available at: http://www.ewh.ieee.org/soc/pes/switchgear/ presentations/tech_pres.html.

12_Santoso_Sec12_p0709-0800.indd 744

21/11/17 3:50 PM

SWITCHGEAR AND POWER COMPONENTS   745 

Steurer, M., Frohlich, K., Holaus, W., and Kaltenegger, K., A Novel Hybrid Current-Limiting Circuit Breaker for Medium Voltage: Principle and Test Results, IEEE Transactions on Power Delivery, vol. 18, Issue 2, Apr. 2003, Page(s):460–467. Sweetser, C., Bergman, W. J., Montillet, G., Mannarino, A., O’Donnell, E. J., Long, R.W., Nelson, J., Gavazza, R., and Jackson, R., Strategies for Selecting Monitoring of Circuit Breakers, IEEE Transactions on Power Delivery, vol. 17, Issue 3, July 2002, Page(s):742–746. Swindler, D. L., Schwartz, P., Hamer, P. S., and Lambert, S. R., Transient Recovery Voltage Considerations in the Application of Medium-Voltage Circuit Breakers, IEEE Transactions on Industry Applications, vol. 33, Issue 2, Mar.-Apr. 1997, Page(s):383–388. Valentine, R. D., A Perspective of Low-Voltage Circuit Breaker Interrupting Rating, IEEE Transactions on Industry Applications, vol. 36, Issue 3, May–Jun. 2000, Page(s):916–919. Valdes, M. E., Cline, C., Hansen, S., and Papallo, T., Selectivity Analysis in Low-Voltage Power Distribution Systems with Fuses and Circuit Breakers, IEEE Transactions on Industry Applications, vol. 46, Issue 3, Mar.-Apr. 2010, Page(s):593–602. Wagner, C. L. and Bankoske, J. W., Evaluation of Surge Suppression Resistors in High-Voltage Circuit Breakers, IEEE Transactions, vol. PAS-86, 1967. Wagner, C. L., Circuit Breaker Application, Westinghouse Printing, 1983. Wagner, C. L., Dufournet, D., and Montillet, G. F., Revision of the Application Guide for Transient Recovery Voltage for AC High-Voltage Circuit Breakers of IEEE C37.011: A Working Group Paper of the HighVoltage Circuit Breaker Subcommittee, IEEE Transactions on Power Delivery, vol. 22, Issue 1, Jan, 2007, Page(s):161–166. Yanabu, S., Zaima, E., and Hasegawa, T., Historical Review of High-Voltage Switchgear Developments in the 20th Century for Power Transmission and Distribution System in Japan, IEEE Transactions on Power Delivery, vol. 21, Issue 2, Apr. 2006, Page(s):659–664. York, R. A., Interrupting Mediums used in High-Voltage Circuit Breakers, Presented at the IEEE/PES General Meeting, 24 Jul. 2008, available at: http://www.ewh.ieee.org/soc/pes/switchgear/presentations/tech_pres.html.

12.2  SWITCHGEAR ASSEMBLIES BY JEFFREY H. NELSON, MICHAEL W. WACTOR, AND T. W. OLSEN Definitions of terms used in this subsection can be found in the IEEE standards and application guides referenced in this subsection and/or in the IEEE Standards Dictionary (available at http:// ieeexplore.ieee.org/xpls/dictionary.jsp?tag=1). The term “low-voltage” as used in this subsection refers to rated voltages up to 1000 V ac and 3200 V dc. The term “medium-voltage” as used in this subsection refers to rated voltages above 1000 V ac up to 38 kV ac (up to 52 kV ac for metal-enclosed gas-insulated switchgear). Switchgear assemblies cover a wide range of low-voltage and medium-voltage structures that are generally factory-assembled and are divided into the following main groups: (1) metalenclosed low-voltage power circuit breaker switchgear, (2) medium-voltage metal-clad switchgear, (3) metal-enclosed interrupter switchgear, (4) metal-enclosed bus, (5) metal-enclosed gas-insulated switchgear, and (6) switchboards. IEEE C37.20.1,1 C37.20.2,2 C37.20.3,3 C37.20.9,10 C37.23,4 and NEMA PB 25 apply. Any of these equipment types may be rated as “arc resistant metal-enclosed switchgear” by successfully meeting the requirements of IEEE C37.20.7.6 12.2.1  Metal-Enclosed Low-Voltage Power Circuit Breaker Switchgear Metal-enclosed low-voltage power circuit breaker switchgear indicates a design, which contains lowvoltage ac or dc power circuit breakers in individual grounded metal compartments. The circuit breakers can be either stationary or drawout; manually or electrically operated; fused or unfused; and either three-pole, two-pole or single-pole construction. The switchgear may also contain associated

12_Santoso_Sec12_p0709-0800.indd 745

21/11/17 3:50 PM

746  SECTION TWELVE

control, instruments, metering, protective and regulating equipment as necessary. Definitions, ratings, design and production tests, construction requirements, and guidelines for application, handling, storage, and installation are covered in IEEE C37.20.1.1 Low-voltage metal-enclosed switchgear is typically installed in industrial plants, utility and distributed-generation facilities, and commercial buildings for the protection and distribution of power for loads such as lighting, machinery, motor control centers, elevators, air conditioning, blowers, compressors, fans, pumps, and motors. Low-voltage switchgear is available in ac ratings up to 1000 V and 6000 A continuous and in dc ratings up to 3200 V and 12000 A continuous. Short-circuit current ratings are available up to 200 kA. 12.2.2  Metal-Clad Switchgear Metal-clad switchgear is used for low- and medium-capacity circuits, for indoor and outdoor installations with nominal voltages of 2.4 to 34.5 kV and continuous current ratings typically up to 4000 A. Short-circuit withstand current ratings of switchgear assemblies are at least equal the ratings of the lowest rated circuit breaker used. Metal-clad switchgear is commonly used for the control and protection of apparatus used for power generation, conversion, and transmission and distribution. The term “metal-clad switchgear” indicates a design of equipment specifically enhanced with features intended to isolate primary circuit components and restrict the communication of faults between sections. Metal-clad switchgear is characterized by the following required features. The main switching and interrupting device is of the removable (drawout) type arranged with a mechanism for moving it physically between connected and disconnected positions and equipped with self-aligning and selfcoupling primary disconnecting devices and disconnectable control wiring connections. Mechanical interlocks are provided for proper operating sequence under normal operating conditions. Ground connections are provided for all removable elements to ensure that the frame and mechanism are grounded until the primary circuit is disconnected and the removable element is moved a safe distance. Primary bus conductors and connections (live parts) are covered with insulating material throughout. All live parts are enclosed within grounded metal compartments. Major parts of the primary circuit, including the circuit switching or interrupting devices, buses, voltage transformers, and control power transformers are completely enclosed by grounded metal barriers that have no intentional openings between compartments. Additionally, instruments, meters, relays, secondary control devices, and their wiring are isolated by grounded metal barriers from all the primary circuit elements with the exception of short lengths of wire such as at instrument transformer terminals. Circuit breakers are generally the vacuum type, although air-magnetic circuit breakers were used for many years and SF6 circuit breakers are also available. Circuit breaker disconnection is typically accomplished by horizontal-drawout design, illustrated in Fig. 12-36; however, earlier designs used a vertical lift design as the connection means. Interlocks are provided in metal-clad assemblies to prevent disconnecting or connecting the circuit breaker while in the closed condition and to prevent circuit breaker operation while moving between disconnected and connected position or vice versa. The metal-clad assembly is equipped with shutters to protect personnel from coming in contact with the high-voltage circuits when the circuit breaker is removed from the compartment. A circuit breaker test position is standard to allow circuit breaker control with the main contacts (primary disconnecting devices) removed from the primary circuit, but maintaining auxiliary and ground contacts between compartment and circuit breaker truck. Definitions, ratings, design and production tests, construction requirements, and guidelines for application, handling, storage, and installation are covered in IEEE C37.20.2.2 Ground and test (G&T) devices are accessories available for metal-clad switchgear that may be temporarily inserted in place of a drawout circuit breaker for the purpose of grounding the main bus and/or external circuits connected to the switchgear assembly and/or primary circuit testing. Electrical and manual G&T device types are generally supplied for temporary circuit maintenance procedures for insertion in place of the circuit breaker. Electrical and manual G&T devices are required to have dielectric withstand, momentary current withstand, and short-time current withstand ratings at least equal to the circuit breaker they are intended to temporarily replace. Complete definitions,

12_Santoso_Sec12_p0709-0800.indd 746

21/11/17 3:50 PM

SWITCHGEAR AND POWER COMPONENTS   747 

FIGURE 12-36  Side view of a typical 15 kV metal-clad switchgear unit using horizontal-drawout circuit breaker design.

ratings, functional component requirements, design and production tests, construction and application of G&T devices are covered in IEEE C37.20.6.11 Electrical G&T devices are equipped with power-operated ground-making switches. An electrical G&T device is required to have a closing and latching current capability equal to that of the circuit breaker it is intended to temporarily replace. Test ports and test probes may also be provided to enable high-potential testing of primary circuits. Manual G&T devices ground the primary circuit by means of either manually connected grounding conductors or a manually operated switch. Manual G&T devices are not required to have a close and latch rating. 12.2.3  Metal-Enclosed Interrupter Switchgear Metal-enclosed interrupter switchgear assemblies include the following equipment as required: interrupter (interrupter switches and/or stationary-mounted circuit breakers), bare bus and connections, selector switches, power fuses [current-limiting or non-current-limiting (expulsion)], control and protective equipment, instrumentation, meters, and instrument transformers. The interrupter switches and power fuses may be stationary or withdrawable (drawout). When switches and fuses are withdrawable, mechanical interlocks are provided for proper operating sequence. Also, automatic shutters are provided which cover primary circuit elements when the withdrawable device is in the disconnected, test, or removed position.

12_Santoso_Sec12_p0709-0800.indd 747

24/11/17 4:11 PM

748  SECTION TWELVE

Definitions, ratings, design and production tests, construction requirements, and guidelines for application, handling, storage, and installation for metal-enclosed interrupter switchgear are covered in IEEE C37.20.3.3 Metal-enclosed interrupter switchgear is typically used in industrial or commercial environments where continuous load currents are low and frequent switching is not required. Interrupter switches will interrupt load currents up to their rated continuous current capability. Fuses can be installed to provide short-circuit protection. For example, if the interrupter switchgear is connected to other switching equipment, fuses can be installed in the connection between the two to prevent an interruption of one assembly from a fault in the other assembly. Typical applications for interrupter switchgear include main service disconnect, transformer primary and secondary switching, medium-voltage switchgear, primary and feeder circuit switching. The switching device may be manually operated or motor operated. Motor operated designs are often applied in an automatic transfer scheme. Metal-enclosed interrupter switchgear is typically available in ac ratings above 1 kV up to 38 kV and up to 2000 A continuous current. Short circuit withstand ratings have to be equivalent to the ratings of the switching and protective equipment used or to the rating of the current transformers used. 12.2.4  Metal-Enclosed Gas-Insulated Switchgear Medium-voltage metal-enclosed gas-insulated switchgear (MEGIS) is a type of equipment available internationally since the early 1980s, and since the 1990s in the United States, see Fig. 12-37. IEEE is in the process of developing a standard for this type of switchgear, identified as IEEE C37.20.9.10 MEGIS usually employs fixed-mounted circuit breakers with associated disconnect switches, but may be available with drawout type circuit breakers. When supplied with disconnect switches, the arrangement often includes a grounding switch to allow use of the circuit breaker to ground the outgoing circuit for maintenance purposes.

FIGURE 12-37 Typical medium-voltage metal-enclosed gas-insulated switchgear (MEGIS).

12_Santoso_Sec12_p0709-0800.indd 748

21/11/17 3:50 PM

SWITCHGEAR AND POWER COMPONENTS   749 

MEGIS switchgear is available for up to 52 kV ac, and up to 3000 A continuous current, and up to 40 kA rms symmetrical short-circuit current. Mechanical interlocks between the circuit breakers and their associated disconnect switches are provided for proper operating sequence. Primary buses and connections are normally bare (uninsulated) as the insulation is provided by the gas used. All primary conductors are enclosed in grounded metal compartments. The enclosure is gas-tight, with maximum permissible leakage rate of 0.5% per compartment per year if the gas in the enclosure can be replenished, and 0.1% per compartment per year if the design is not intended to require replenishment of the gas once installed. A variety of designs are available, including isolated-phase and nonsegregated phase designs. In the isolated-phase design, each phase is independently housed in a metal enclosure, providing phaseground isolation and eliminating the possibility of phase-to-phase faults inside the switchgear. In nonsegregated phase designs, all three phases are housed in a common enclosure. A gas, other than atmospheric air, is used in some or all portions of the MEGIS. Often, the gas (typically, sulfur-hexafluoride or SF6, although other types of gases are under investigation) is used only for insulation, with interruption accomplished using a vacuum interrupter, but some designs employ the gas for interruption as well as insulation. MEGIS originated in Europe in the early 1980s and its usage has grown significantly due at least in part to extremely compact size. A typical installation for 38 kV application can be as small as 25% of the size of a comparable air-insulated metal-clad switchgear lineup for the same system. 12.2.5  Metal-Enclosed Bus Metal-enclosed bus is an assembly of conductors with associated connections, joints, and insulating supports with a grounded metal enclosure. Metal enclosed buses have four basic types of construction: (1) nonsegregated-phase, (2) segregated-phase, (3) isolated-phase, and (4) cable bus. Rated voltages of ac metal-enclosed bus assemblies range from 635 V through 38 kV, and dc metalenclosed bus assemblies range from 300 V through 3200 V. Definitions, service conditions, ratings, testing, construction requirements, and application guidelines for metal-enclosed bus are covered in IEEE C37.23.4 An informative guide for calculating losses in isolated-phase bus is also included. Nonsegregated-Phase Metal-Enclosed Bus.  Nonsegregated-phase metal-enclosed bus is a type of design in which all phase conductors, with their associated connections, joints, and insulating supports, are enclosed in a common metal housing without barriers between phases, see Fig. 12-38. When associated with metal-clad switchgear, the phase conductors of a non-insulated bus assembly entering the switchgear assembly and connecting to the switchgear bus are covered with insulating material equivalent to the switchgear insulation FIGURE 12-38 Typical nonsegregated-phase system. Enclosures that are totally enclosed are metal enclosed bus. (Courtesy of Powell Industries, Inc.) preferred, but ventilated enclosures can be provided in indoor applications. Nonsegregated-phase metal-enclosed bus is utilized on circuits, which require higher reliability than can be obtained with the application of power cables. Typical applications are the connections between transformers and switchgear assemblies, connections from switchgear assemblies to rotating apparatus, tie connections between switchgear assemblies, connections between motor control centers and large motors, and as main generator leads for small generators. Preferred continuous self-cooled current ratings for nonsegregated-phase are available up to 12,000 A for 1000 V ac and all dc voltage ratings, 6000 A for 4.76 kV through 15.5 kV, and 3000 A

12_Santoso_Sec12_p0709-0800.indd 749

21/11/17 3:50 PM

750  SECTION TWELVE

above 15.5 kV through 38 kV. Short-time withstand current ratings (rms symmetrical) up to 85 kA for up to 1000 V ac, 63 kA for 4.76 kV up to 15 kV, and 40 kA for above 15 kV up to 38 kV are available, and up to 120 kA for dc ratings. Segregated-Phase Metal-Enclosed Bus.  Barriers may be installed between the phase conductors to segregate the conductors and the assembly is then referred to as segregated-phase metalenclosed bus, see Fig. 12-39. This design is also used on circuits, which require a higher degree of reliability. Segregated-phase bus is primarily used as generator leads in power plants, but it is also applied in heavy industrial environments and as tie connections in metal-enclosed substations. Preferred continuous self-cooled current ratings for segregated-phase are available up to 12,000 A for 635 V ac and all dc voltage ratings, 6000 A for 4.76 kV through 15.5 kV, and 3000 A FIGURE 12-39   Typical segregated-phase metal above 15.5 kV through 38 kV. Short-time withenclosed bus. (Courtesy of Powell Industries, Inc.) stand current ratings (rms symmetrical) up to 85 kA for up to 1000 V ac, 63 kA for 4.76 kV up to 15 kV, and 40 kA for above 15 kV up to 38 kV are available, and up to 120 kA for dc ratings. Isolated-Phase Metal-Enclosed Bus.  Isolated-phase metal-enclosed bus (iso-phase bus) is a type of design in which each phase is enclosed in an individual metal housing, and an air space is provided between the housings. It is considered to be the safest, most practical, and most economical way of preventing phase-to-phase short circuits by means of construction methods. The bus may be self-cooled or forced-cooled by circulating air or liquid. Definitions, ratings, design and production tests, construction requirements, and application guidelines for metal-enclosed bus are covered in IEEE C37.23.4 Briefly, the iso-phase bus has the following features: 1. Proof against contact; locked electrical premises not necessary 2. Faults only in the form of ground faults; protection against fault spreading to more than one phase 3. Field forces, static and dynamic, only between enclosures and conductor, not between phases 4. Protection against contamination and moisture 5. No losses in surrounding conductive material (grilles, railings, concrete reinforcements, lines, etc.) Isolated-phase buses are available up through 38 kV and include continuous current ratings from about 1.2 kA up to 24 kA self-cooled, or 40 kA with forced cooling. The momentary current ratings have to match the rating of attached equipment. With high current ratings, more attention must be paid to the following: 1. Progressive rise of conductor temperature due to skin effects 2. Heating of surrounding conducting material by the magnetic field of conductors 3. High forces on main or component conductors in the event of a short circuit In an enclosure with sections of tube insulation (sectional enclosure), eddy currents exist with values as large as the conductor current. These give rise to heat losses, and so the magnetic field of the main conductor is not always compensated for sufficiently. An important technical feature of the iso-phase bus, therefore, is the electrically continuous enclosure. The tubes enclosing each phase have electric conducting joints throughout their length and are short-circuited across the three phases at both ends. The enclosure thus constitutes a secondary circuit to the conductors (Fig. 12-40). The currents in the enclosures reach almost the corresponding conductor currents, depending on the resistance of the enclosure, but are of the opposite direction. The magnetic field outside the enclosure is

12_Santoso_Sec12_p0709-0800.indd 750

21/11/17 3:50 PM

SWITCHGEAR AND POWER COMPONENTS   751 

FIGURE 12-40 Three-phase arrangement of an isolatedphase bus and principle of enclosure connection; according to Kirchhoff ’s law sum of conductor currents (+) and sum of enclosure currents (-) is zero.

almost completely eliminated, and thus there are no external losses or field forces between the phases. Connections to machines and switchgear must be adaptable and removable. Current transformers for measurement and protection are of the bushing type or are integrated into the bus enclosure at a suitable place. Voltage transformers can be contained in the bus enclosure or mounted in separate instrument boards. The same applies to protective capacitors. Care must be taken that branch lines are adequately dimensioned with regard to thermal short-circuit strength. The reliability of iso-phase bus can be enhanced by employing means to maintain the air pressure in the enclosure. Although iso-phase bus enclosures are generally leak proof, the large number of dismantleable joints may cause a slight leakage and might lead to moisture condensation during a plant shutdown. Supplying the bus enclosure with filtered, precompressed air at slight positive pressure ensures that the airflow is only outward; contamination of the conductors is not possible. Drying the air by precompressing prevents condensation. Short-circuiting and grounding facilities are usually required in the bus system design to protect the generator and also for maintenance grounding purposes. Manually positioned links and straps are sufficient for small unit ratings; motor-operated grounding switches are recommended for higher capacities. A typical isolated-phase bus arrangement of a power station including generator circuit breaker is shown in Fig. 12-41. 12.2.6 Switchboards Floor-mounted deadfront switchboards typically consist of an enclosure, molded case or low-voltage power circuit breakers, fusible or non-fusible switches, instruments, metering equipment, monitoring equipment and/or control equipment, and are fitted with associated interconnections and supporting structures. Switchboards can consist of one or more sections which are electrically and mechanically interconnected. Main disconnect devices can be mounted individually or be an integral part of a panel assembly. Definitions, ratings, design and production tests, construction requirements, and guidelines for application, handling, storage, and installation are covered in NEMA PB 25 and UL 891.9 Switchboards are typically installed in industrial plants, utility and co-generation facilities, and commercial and residential buildings for the distribution of electricity for light, heat, and power.

12_Santoso_Sec12_p0709-0800.indd 751

21/11/17 3:50 PM

752  SECTION TWELVE

FIGURE 12-41  Generating-plant isolated-phase bus arrangement with generator circuit breaker type DR.

They are typically available in voltage ratings of 600 V or less, continuous current ratings of 6000 A or less, and short-circuit current ratings up to 200 kA. 12.2.7  Arc Resistant Metal-Enclosed Switchgear The term “arc resistant switchgear” indicates a design in which the equipment has met the requirements of IEEE C37.20.7.6 During internal arcing tests, the switchgear assembly is subjected to an internal arcing fault in key locations throughout the assembly for a specified current level and duration and the equipment performance is evaluated against five basic criteria. The arcing fault is initiated by a small wire placed across the primary conductors which vaporizes when current flows, providing an ionized air path for the arc. The preferred current level for this test is the short-time current rating of the equipment and the preferred duration for current flow is 0.5 s for all equipment unless that value exceeds the equipment short-time rating. Other values are permissible when stated by the manufacturer and indicated on the nameplate. The equipment is evaluated for its ability to mitigate conditions which could be hazardous to personnel working nearby. Until recently, the arc resistant rating was only applicable to low-voltage switchgear qualified to IEEE C37.20.11 and medium-voltage switchgear qualified to IEEE C37.20.22 or C37.20.3.3 In the 2017 edition of IEEE C37.20.7,6 the equipment types included were extended to cover more types of equipment, including metal-enclosed bus (IEEE Std C37.233), medium-voltage controllers (UL 3477), lowvoltage motor control centers (UL 8458), switchboards (UL 8919 and NEMA PB 2), and MEGIS (IEEE Std C37.20.910). Figure 12-42 illustrates the typical modifications made to a medium-voltage switchgear design for vacuum-type circuit breakers when converting to arc resistant performance. Definitions, ratings, test requirements, and guidelines for application and installation are covered in IEEE C37.20.7.6 12.2.8  Station-Type Cubicle Switchgear Another type of switchgear assembly that was previously used is station-type cubicle switchgear. Station-type cubicle switchgear is no longer manufactured, but is briefly discussed here for historical purposes. Requirements for station-type cubicle switchgear were included in IEEE Std C37.20.22 in the 1987 edition, but were eliminated from later editions as this type was no longer manufactured. The term “station-type cubicle switchgear” indicates a design in which the major component parts of a circuit, such as buses, circuit breakers, disconnecting switches, and current and voltage transformers, are in separate metal housings, and the circuit breakers are of the stationary

12_Santoso_Sec12_p0709-0800.indd 752

21/11/17 3:50 PM

SWITCHGEAR AND POWER COMPONENTS   753 

Pressure relief vents

Isolated instrument compartment (optional, based on rating)

Plenum Fault gas exhaust duct Pressure relief vents

Reinforced doors or panels

Reinforced door Closed-door operation

FIGURE 12-42  Side view of a typical 15-kV metal-clad switchgear unit using horizontaldrawout vacuum circuit breaker design with modifications for arc resistant performance.

type (Fig. 12-43). Phase segregation in station-type cubicle switchgear was required, in which a three-phase metal housing is divided into three single-phase compartments by means of metal barriers. Metal-enclosed station-type switchgear was used in industrial, commercial, and utility installations, generally for voltages of 14.4 to 69 kV, and continuous current ratings up to 5000 A.

FIGURE 12-43  Metal-enclosed station-type switchgear cubicle for outdoor installation, equipped with a heavy-duty, air-blast circuit breaker.

12_Santoso_Sec12_p0709-0800.indd 753

21/11/17 3:51 PM

754  SECTION TWELVE

12.2.9 References 1. IEEE C37.20.1, Standard for Metal-Enclosed Low-Voltage Power Circuit Breaker Switchgear. 2. IEEE C37.20.2, Standard for Metal-Clad Switchgear. 3. IEEE C37.20.3, Standards for Metal-Enclosed Interrupter Switchgear. 4. IEEE C37.23, Standard for Metal-Enclosed Bus. 5. NEMA PB 2, Standard for Deadfront Distribution Switchboards. 6. IEEE C37.20.7, Guide for Testing Switchgear Rated up to 52kV for Internal Arcing Faults. 7. UL 347, Medium-Voltage AC Contactors, Controllers, and Control Centers. 8. UL 845, Motor Control Centers. 9. UL 891, Switchboards. 10. IEEE C37.20.9, Metal Enclosed Switchgear Rated 1 kV to 52 kV Incorporating Gas Insulation Systems. 11. IEEE C37.20.6, Standard for 4.76 to 38 kV Rated Ground and Test Devices Used in Enclosures.

12.2.10  Bibliography on Switchgear Assemblies Bibliography of Switchgear Literature: IEEE Committee Report, IEEE Transactions on Power Delivery, vol. 5, Issue 1, Jan. 1990, Page(s):177–188. Bibliography of Switchgear Literature: IEEE Committee Report, Veverka, E. F., Schmunk, E. W., McCall, L.V., IEEE Transactions on Power Delivery, vol. 10, Issue 2, Apr. 1995, Page(s):824–844. Bibliography of Switchgear Literature: IEEE Committee Report, Glinkowski, M. T., Schmidt, L., Veverka, E.F., IEEE Transactions on Power Delivery, vol. 13, Issue 1, Jan. 1998, Page(s):135–156. Bibliography of Switchgear Literature, 1992–1996, IEEE/PES Switchgear Committee webpage, http://www.ewh .ieee.org/soc/pes/switchgear/index.htm. Bowen, J. and Burse, T.A., Medium-Voltage Replacement Breaker Projects, IEEE Transactions on Industry Applications, vol. 38, Issue 2, Mar.-Apr. 2002, Page(s):pp. 584–595. Bridger, B., Jr., Comparison of ANSI/IEEE and IEC requirements for Metal-Clad Switchgear, IEEE Transactions on Industry Applications, vol. 33, Issue 1, Jan.-Feb. 1997, Page(s):216–225. Bridger, B., Jr., Burse, T. A., and Wactor, M. W., Design Considerations for 38 kV Metal-Clad Switchgear Using Vacuum Interrupting Technology, Proceedings of the 1994 IEEE Power Engineering Society Transmission and Distribution Conference, 10–15 Apr. 1994, Page(s):15–20. Conangla, A. and White, H. F., Isolated-Phase Bus Enclosure Loss Factors, IEEE Transactions on Power Apparatus and Systems, vol. PAS-87, Jul. 1968, Page(s):1622–1628. Dwight, H. B., Electrical Coils and Conductors, New York; McGraw Hill, 1945. Dwight, H. B., Some Proximity Effect Formulas for Bus Enclosures, IEEE Transactions on Power Apparatus and Systems, vol. PAS-83, Dec 1964, Page(s):1167–1172. Eblen, M. L., Short, T. A., and Lee, W., Medium-Voltage Arc Flash in Switchgear and Live-Front Transformers, IEEE Transactions on Industry Applications, vol. 52, Issue 6, Nov.-Dec. 2016, Page(s):5280–5288. Elgar, E. C., Rehder, R. H. and Swerdlow, N., Measured Losses in Isolated-Phase Bus and Comparison with Calculated Values, IEEE Transactions on Power Apparatus and Systems, vol. PAS-87, Aug. 1968, Page(s):1724–1730. Garzon, R., The Arc Terminator, IEEE Industry Applications Magazine, vol. 9, Issue 3, May–Jun. 2003, Page(s):51–55. Heberlein, G. E., Jr., Malkowski, C., Jr., and Cibulka, M. J., The Effect of Altitude on the Operation Performance of Low-Voltage Switchgear and Controlgear Components, IEEE Transactions on Industry Applications, vol. 38, Issue 1, Jan.-Feb. 2002, Page(s):189–194. IEEE C37.13, Standard for Low-Voltage AC Power Circuit Breakers Used in Enclosures. IEEE C37.14, Standard for DC (3200 V and below) Power Circuit Breakers Used in Enclosures. IEEE C37.20.4, Standard for Indoor AC Switches (1 kV–38 kV) for use in Metal-Enclosed Switchgear. IEEE C37.21, Standard for Control Switchboards. IEEE C37.24, Guide for Evaluating the Effect of Solar Radiation on Outdoor Metal-Enclosed Switchgear. IEEE C37.81, Guide for Seismic Qualification of Class 1E Metal-Enclosed Power Switchgear Assemblies.

12_Santoso_Sec12_p0709-0800.indd 754

21/11/17 3:51 PM

SWITCHGEAR AND POWER COMPONENTS   755 

Kalkstein, E.W., Doughty, R. L., Paullin, A. E., Jackson, J. M., Ryner, J. L., Safety Benefits of Arc-Resistant Metalclad Medium-Voltage Switchgear, IEEE Transactions on Industry Applications, vol. 31, Issue 6, Nov.-Dec. 1995, Page(s):1402–1411. Koul, S., Comparitive Requirements of IEC and IEEE Standards for Medium-Voltage Switchgear, IEEE Transactions on Power Delivery, vol. 24, Issue 4, Oct. 2009, Page(s):1912–1923. Land, H. B., Determination of the Cause of Arcing Faults in Low-Voltage Switchboards, IEEE Transactions on Industry Applications, vol. 44, Issue 2, Mar.-Apr. 2008, Page(s):430–436. Land, H. B., The Behavior of Arcing Faults in Low-Voltage Switchboards, IEEE Transactions on Industry Applications, vol. 44, Issue 2, Mar.-Apr. 2008, Page(s):437–444. Lav, C. T., Staley, D. B., and Olsen, T. W., Practical Design Considerations for Application of GIS MV Switchgear, IEEE Transactions on Industry Applications, vol. 40, Issue 5, Sept.-Oct 2004, Page(s):1427–1434. Lee, W., Sahni, M., Methaprayoon, K., Chiman, K., Zhubing, R., and Sheeley, J. M., A Novel Approach for Arcing Fault Detection for Medium-/Low-Voltage Switchgear, IEEE Transactions on Industry Applications, vol. 45, Issue 4, Jul.-Aug. 2009, Page(s):1475–1483. Nemoller, A. B., Isolated-Phase Bus Enclosure Currents, IEEE Transactions on Power Apparatus and Systems, vol. PAS-87, Aug. 1968, Page(s):1714–1718. Pihler, J., Ticar, I., and Vorsic, J., Design and Development of Medium Voltage Metal-Clad Switchgear with Metal Partition Walls, IEEE Transactions on Power Delivery, vol. 18, Issue 2, Apr. 2003, Page(s):475–479. Rochette, D., Clain, S., and Gentils, F., Numerical Investigations on the Pressure Wave Absorption and the Gas Cooling Interacting in a Porous Filter, During an Internal Arc Fault in a Medium-Voltage Cell, IEEE Transactions on Power Delivery, vol. 23, Issue 1, Jan. 2008, Page(s):203–212. Shah, K. R., Cinsavich, A. L., and De Silva, P., Impact of Arc Flash Hazards on Medium-Voltage Switchgear, IEEE Transactions on Industry Applications, vol. 44, Issue 6, Nov.-Dec. 2008, Page(s):1859–1863. Valdes, M. E., Purkayastha, I., Papallo, T., The Single-Processor Concept for Protection and Control of Circuit Breakers in Low-Voltage Switchgear, IEEE Transactions on Industry Applications, vol. 40, Issue 4, Jul.-Aug. 2004, Page(s):932–940. Wactor, M., Olsen, T. W., Ball, C. J., Lemmerman, D. J., Puckett, R. J., and Zawadzki, J., Strategies for Mitigating the Effects of Internal Arcing Faults in Medium-Voltage Metal-Enclosed Switchgear, 2001 IEEE/PES Transmission and Distribution Conference and Exposition, vol. 1, 28 Oct.-2 Nov. 2001, Page(s):323–328. Wilkie, E., Comparison of ANSI/IEEE and IEC requirements for low-voltage switchgear, IEEE Transactions on Industry Applications, vol. 40, Issue 6, Nov.-Dec. 2004, Page(s):1656–1664.

12.3  FUSES AND SWITCHES BY KENNETH LONG AND HAMID R. SHARIFNIA 12.3.1 Fuses In electronics and electrical engineering, a fuse is a type of low-resistance component that acts as a sacrificial device to provide overcurrent protection, interrupting either the load or source circuit. Its essential component is a metal wire or strip that melts when excessive current flows through it, thereby interrupting the circuit that it connects. Short circuits, overloading, mismatched loads, or device failure are the prime reasons for excessive current. Fuses may be used as alternatives to circuit breakers in many cases. The fuses to be considered are current sensitive devices, designed to serve as the intentional weak link in the electrical circuit. Their function is to provide protection of discrete components, or of complete circuits, by reliably melting under current overload conditions. This subsection will cover some important facts about fuses, selection considerations, and standards. A fuse interrupts an excessive current so that further damage by overheating or fire is prevented. Wiring regulations often define a maximum fuse current rating for circuits. Overcurrent protection devices are essential in electrical systems to limit threats to human life and property damage. The time and current operating characteristics of fuses are chosen to provide adequate protection without needless interruption. Slow blow fuses are designed to allow harmless short-term currents over their rating while still interrupting a sustained overload. Fuses are manufactured in a wide range of current and voltage ratings to protect wiring systems and electrical equipment. Self-resetting fuses

12_Santoso_Sec12_p0709-0800.indd 755

21/11/17 3:51 PM

756  SECTION TWELVE

automatically restore the circuit after the overload has cleared, and are useful in environments where a human replacing a blown fuse would be difficult or impossible. Resistance.  The resistance of a fuse is usually an insignificant part of the total circuit resistance. Since the resistance of fractional amperage fuses can be several ohms, this fact should be considered when using them in low-voltage circuits. The fuse parameters and application concepts presented herein should be well understood to properly select a fuse for a given application. Since these are only a few of the contributing parameters, application testing is strongly recommended and should be used to verify performance in the circuit/application. Ambient Temperature.  Refers to the temperature of the air immediately surrounding the fuse and is not to be confused with “room temperature.” The fuse ambient temperature is appreciably higher in many low-voltage cases, because it is enclosed (as in a panel mount fuse holder) or mounted near other heat producing components, such as resistors, transformers, etc. Rating.  For 25°C ambient temperatures, it is recommended that fuses be operated at no more than 75% of the nominal current rating established using the controlled test conditions. These test conditions are part of UL/CSA/ANCE (Mexico) 248-14 “Fuses for Supplementary Overcurrent Protection,” whose primary objective is to specify common test standards necessary for the continued control of manufactured items intended for protection against fire, etc. Some common variations of these standards include: fully enclosed fuse holders, high contact resistances, air movement, transient spikes, and changes in connecting cable size (diameter and length). Fuses are essentially temperature-sensitive devices. Even small variations from the controlled test conditions can greatly affect the predicted life of a fuse when it is loaded to its nominal value, usually expressed as 100% of rating. Breaking Capacity.  Also known as interrupting rating or short-circuit rating, this is the maximum approved current which the fuse can safely break at rated voltage. Current Rating.  The nominal amperage value of the fuse. Manufacturer established value of current which the fuse can carry, based on a controlled set of test conditions. Catalog Fuse part numbers include series identification and amperage ratings. Voltage Rating.  The voltage rating, as marked on a fuse, indicates that the fuse can be relied upon to safely interrupt its rated short-circuit current in a circuit where the voltage is equal to, or less than, its rated voltage. Classification.  Fuses can be classified into three categories. The first is low-voltage fuses operating up through 600 V ac. Most of these devises are tested and approved by Underwriters’ Laboratories, Inc., and are marketed in a wide variety of characteristics and physical configurations. The second classification is medium-voltage through 44 kV (250 kV BIL), and the third is high-voltage fuses through 169 kV. Electric utilities use these fuses to protect transmission-distribution-class equipment and by large industrial complexes which have their own electrical distribution systems. Low-Voltage Fuses.  ANSI establishes low-voltage fuse standards, NEMA, or Underwriters’ Laboratories. Their characteristics include a voltage class, an ampere rating, and an interrupting rating and, for some classes of fuses, a current-limiting rating. Cartridge fuses are classified in the following voltage classes: not over 250 V ac, not over 300 V ac, and not over 600 V ac. Fuses should not be used for dc applications unless recommended by the manufacturer. Most low-voltage fuses must be used in accordance with the National Electrical Code. Exceptions include those used in ships, railways, aircraft, and automotive vehicles other than mobile homes and recreational vehicles. The standard lines of low-voltage fuses are available in several steps of ampere capacity, each of which is a different physical size (see Table 12-3). A minimum of 10,000-A interrupting capacity is typical in low-voltage fuses, but some sizes and types can interrupt up to 200,000 A ac or 100,000 A dc. The interrupting rating is the highest RMS

12_Santoso_Sec12_p0709-0800.indd 756

21/11/17 3:51 PM

SWITCHGEAR AND POWER COMPONENTS   757 

symmetrical alternating current which the fuse can interrupt at rated voltage. Low-voltage current-limiting fuses are designed so that non-current-limiting fuses cannot be inserted into the fuse holder as a direct replacement. Thus, Class K fuses which are interchangeable with Class H fuses are not permitted in the “current-limiting” label. A low-voltage current-limiting fuse successfully and safely interrupts all available currents within its specified interrupting rating and within its current-limiting range, and limits the clearing time at rated voltage to an interval equal to or less than the first major current loop. These fuses also limit peak letthrough current to a value less than the normal peak current that would be otherwise possible without current-limiting availability. Two electrical measurements express the currentlimiting characteristics of current-limiting fuses: (1) maximum peak let-through current, which is the maximum instantaneous value of current passed by the fuse during time of operation; and (2) maximum clearing I2t (amperessquared-seconds), an expression of the energy available because of current flow during the clearing time of operation.

TABLE 12-3  Typical Dimension Grouping of Low-Voltage Fuses Class

Volts

Amperes

G

300

0–15

G

300

16–20

G

300

21–30

G

300

31–60

H, K

250, 600

0–30

H, K

250, 600

31–60

H, K

250, 600

61–100

H, K

250, 600

101–200

H, K

250, 600

201–400

H, K

250, 600

401–600

L

600

601–800

L

600

801–1200

L

600

1201–1600

L

600

1601–2000

L

600

2001–2500

L

600

2501–3000

L

600

3001–4000

L

600

4001–5000

Medium- and High-Voltage Fuses. A 600 5001–6000 medium-voltage fuse is defined as any fuse (above L 600 V and less than 48.3 kV) or fuse device used to isolate an electric short circuit from an electrical distribution system. A high-voltage fuse is defined as any fuse rated above 48.3 kV and used for this same purpose (see Table 12-4). Classes of TABLE 12-4  Classes of High-Voltage Fuses or fuses, or fused devices, are enclosed cutouts and Fused Devices and Applicable Standards fuses, open cutouts and fuses, open-link cutouts Class device Standard and fuses, current-limiting fuses, power fuses, Distribution cutouts and fuse links ANSI C37.42 and oil-immersed protective links. Medium- and high-voltage fuses are used to Distribution oil cutouts and fuse links ANSI C37.44 protect potential transformers, distribution or ANSI C37.46 power transformers, and lateral taps from main Power fuses distribution feeder circuits. They are often used as Current-limiting fuses ANSI C37.47 sectionalizing devices on main feeder circuits. The ampacity and interrupting rating of these devices range up to 400 A, 20,000 A RMS symmetrical at 7200 V for medium-voltage fuses, and 400 A, 40,000 A RMS symmetrical at 169,000 V for high-voltage fuses. Fuses are generally used in electrical series with other fuses or circuit-protective devices. Care must be taken in coordinating the time-current characteristics for proper isolation of the electric circuit during fault and overload conditions. The goal with fuse selectivity is to isolate just the failed section and minimize the extent of any outage to maintain power to as much of the load as possible. Distribution fuse links for use with expulsion cutouts are available with many different timecurrent characteristics. Figure 12-44 shows the minimum melting time-current characteristics for NEMA Type K fuse links.

12_Santoso_Sec12_p0709-0800.indd 757

21/11/17 3:51 PM

758  SECTION TWELVE

FIGURE 12-44  Minimum melting time-current characteristics of a NEMA Type K fuse. (A.B. Chance Company.)

To standardize medium-voltage fuse-link characteristics, NEMA has adopted time-current characteristics for three basic fuse-link types: Type H (high surge), Type K (fast), and Type T (slow). These fuse links are designed to have the same time-current characteristics regardless of manufacturer. A wide variety of non-standardized fuse-link characteristics are also available. Fuse-link characteristics are usually based on tests at an ambient temperature of 25°C and no initial load. For characteristics at other ambient or for preloading variations, consult the individual manufacturer. Time-Current Curve.  The graphical presentation of the fusing characteristic, time-current curves are generally average curves which are presented as a design aid but are not generally considered part of the fuse specification. Time-current curves are extremely useful in defining a fuse, since fuses with the same current rating can be represented by considerably different time-current curves. The fuse specification typically will include a life requirement at 100% of rating and maximum opening times at overload points (usually 135% and 200% of rating depending on fuse standard characteristics). A time-current curve represents average data for the design; however, there may be some differences in the values for any one given production lot. Samples should be tested to verify performance, once the fuse has been selected (Fig. 12-45).

12_Santoso_Sec12_p0709-0800.indd 758

21/11/17 3:51 PM

SWITCHGEAR AND POWER COMPONENTS   759 

Time-Current Curve 104 6 4 2 103 6 4 2 102

FWJ-200A FWJ-250A FWJ-300A FWJ-350A FWJ-400A FWJ-500A FWJ-600A

Virtual Pre-Arcing Time in Seconds

6 4 2 101 6 4 2 100 6 4 2 10–1 6 4 FWJ-40A FWJ-50A

2 FWJ-60A 10–2 FWJ-70A 6 FWJ-80A 4 FWJ-90A

FWJ-100A

2 FWJ-125A FWJ-150A

10–3 FWJ-175A 6 4 2 10

–4

102

2

4

6 8

2 4 6 8 4 103 10 Prospective Current in Amps RMS

FIGURE 12-45  Time-current curve. (Edison Fuse Full Line Catalog, # 1005.)

12_Santoso_Sec12_p0709-0800.indd 759

21/11/17 3:51 PM

760  SECTION TWELVE

The characteristics of various mediumand high-voltage protective devices used on distribution power systems are 1. Expulsion cutouts a. Open type: 20 kA asymmetrical maximum interrupting current (IC), 5 to 38 kV, violent in operation at high faults, low cost, both initial and refusing. Maximum continuous-current rating of 200 A can be fitted with a solid blade for conversion to a disconnect switch with a rating of 300 A. Figure 12-46 shows a typical open-type cutout. b. Enclosed type: 8- to 10-kA asymmetric maximum interrupting current, used primarily where safety codes dictate use. Enclosed cutouts are no longer manufactured and are being replaced with open-type cutouts. c. Open link: Generally, less than 3000 A IC, 200 A maximum continuous current, applied on rural lines and/or small transformers generally at 27 kV FIGURE 12-46 Open-type distribution fuses and below. cutout. (Hubbell Power System/Chance.) 2. Oil cutouts: Considerable application in the past, especially in underground vaults; however, low interrupting current now poses serious underrating problems. 3. Liquid fuses: Nonviolent, low interrupting current (8 to 10 kA maximum), now obsolete and can be replaced with fuse limiters. 4. Power fuses: Reduced arc energy, somewhat less violent than cutouts on high faults, rated to 20,000 A IC; both initial purchase and replacement expensive. Figure 12-47a shows an indoor-type power fuse. 5. Under-oil protective link: 3500 A asymmetric maximum IC, violent in operation, low cost, contaminates insulating oil. 6. General-purpose current-limiting fuses: Nonviolent, current-limiting, high interrupting current (50 kA), requires coordination study, generated peak arc voltage, not affected by system transient recovery voltage, both initial purchase and replacement expensive. 7. High-range backup current-limiting fuses: Current-limiting, high interrupting current (50 kA), requires a low-current interrupting device in series, operates only at high currents, does not affect existing system coordination, low refusing cost on majority of outages because of only blowing expulsion link, not affected by system transient recovery voltage. 8. Vacuum fuses: Function with no external arcing or violence. They are nonrenewable and the associated cost is high. They have not found widespread application. 9. SF6 fuses: Function with no external arcing or violence. They utilize rotating-arc technology and have a 12.5-kA interrupting current rating. All expulsion-principle fuses depend on arc-quenching material—bone fiber, liquid solutions, or boric acid powder—to develop water vapor and/or other gases to cool the arc from the melted fuse link. These fuses have no energy-limiting ability and require a natural current-zero crossing to successfully interrupt a short-circuit current. Figure 12-47b shows a cross section of a power type fuse.

12_Santoso_Sec12_p0709-0800.indd 760

21/11/17 3:51 PM

SWITCHGEAR AND POWER COMPONENTS   761 

FIGURE 12-47  (a) Indoor-type power fuse; (b) cross-sectional view of power-fuses refill unit. (S&C Electric Company.)

Self-Resetting Fuses.  So-called self-resetting fuses use a thermoplastic conductive element known as a polymeric positive temperature coefficient (or PPTC) thermistor that impedes the circuit during an overcurrent condition (by increasing device resistance). The PPTC thermistor is self-resetting in that when current is removed, the device will cool and revert to low resistance. These devices are often used in aerospace/nuclear applications where replacement is difficult, or on a computer motherboard so that a shorted mouse or keyboard does not cause motherboard damage.

12_Santoso_Sec12_p0709-0800.indd 761

21/11/17 3:51 PM

762  SECTION TWELVE

Current-Limiting Fuses.  Highvoltage current-limiting fuses for use on distribution systems have two distinct classes: (1) general-purpose currentlimiting fuses, devices which will successfully interrupt currents which will melt the fusible element in 1 h or more on through the maximum interrupting current that it is rated to clear; and (2) backup current-limiting fuses, devices which have a definite minimum interrupting rating as specified by the manufacturer. These devices require other protective devices in electrical series to interrupt fault currents below its minimum interrupting rating. There are also backup currentlimiting fuses referred to as fuse limiters. These devices combine the series fuse and the current-limiting fuse into one package that handles just like a cutout and fits into the cutout mounting. The fuse limiter is available at 15 through 38 kV, and in current ratings through 20 kA. FIGURE 12-48  Fuse limiters. (S&C Electric Company.) It is specifically designed for protecting overhead distribution transformers (see Fig. 12-48). Three important parameters should be known about high-voltage current-limiting fuses: 1. Continuous current rating: The maximum current that the fuse is designed to carry continuously. 2. Peak arc voltage: Maximum voltage generated by the current-limiting fuse. If wire-wound, the voltage value is a function of fault current. If it is a ribbon-element fuse, the voltage is a function of applied voltage across the fuse. 3. I2t clearing: Maximum allowed by the current-limiting fuse. This measures the energy-limiting effect of the fuse. Care in application of current-limiting fuses per voltage rating must be maintained. In general, these fuses should not be applied to circuits with a voltage less than 50% of the fuse-voltage rating to avoid excessive peak arc voltages. It is equally important that fuses not be exposed to system recovery voltages more than their rating. Fuse Holders.  In many applications, fuses are installed in fuse holders. These fuses and their associated fuse holders are not intended for operation as a “switch” for turning power “on” and “off.” Fuses in Enclosures.  High-voltage fuses may be mounted in enclosures for several applications: industrial service entrance switchgear, pad-mounted switchgear, or transformers for underground circuits, or in enclosures for subsurface applications. Most fuses will require special adaptation. Power fuses are fitted with a muffler to reduce the intensity of the exhaust gases when used in enclosures. Current-limiting fuses are supplied with special seals to prevent the ingress of fluid when applied under oil such as in transformers. Fuse cutouts are not recommended for use in enclosures or vaults. Derating of fuses in enclosures may have to be considered because of restricted heat transfer. Consult the manufacturer. Electronically Controlled Protective Devices.  Electronically controlled protective devices offer greater flexibility and accuracy using state-of-the-art electronics. An electronic power fuse and an electronic sectionalizer for use at distribution voltage levels are two examples of this technology.

12_Santoso_Sec12_p0709-0800.indd 762

21/11/17 3:51 PM

SWITCHGEAR AND POWER COMPONENTS   763 

The electronic power fuse utilizes an electronic control module to provide current sensing, timecurrent characteristics, and control power for the fuse. High-speed interruption of fault currents to 40,000 A is provided by an interrupting module. The devices are completely self-contained (non-venting) and require no external power source. These power fuses are used in metal-enclosed switchgear, padmounted switchgear, and metal-enclosed fuse gear. They are available to 600 A continuous current and 4.16 through 25 kV. Three families of time-current characteristics are available. Figure 12-49 shows an electronic power fuse. The electronic sectionalizer consists of an electronic module which fits into the mounting of a standard open-type cutout. The sectionalizer counts the number of fault current pulses allowed by an upstream recloser and operates to an open position during the recloser’s open time. The sectionalizer has no time-current characteristics. It is generally used to replace a fuse at the distribution lateral where fuse coordination is difficult or impossible. Sectionalizer have no fault-interrupting capability and must be FIGURE 12-49 Electronic power fuse. used in conjunction with an upstream recloser. Sec- (S&C Electric Company.) tionalizer are available in continuous current ratings to 200 A; count settings of 1, 2, 3 or 4; and distribution voltage ratings from 15 to 38 kV. The electronic modules require no external power source. An electronic sectionalizer is shown in Fig. 12-50a. Other devices that can be used to replace a distribution lateral fuse include single-phase recloser and single-phase dropout recloser. These devices provide improved protection performance on laterals with frequent occurrences of momentary faults. They include fault interrupting capability so there is

FIGURE 12-50a  Electronic sectionalizer. (Hubbell Power Systems/Chance.)

12_Santoso_Sec12_p0709-0800.indd 763

21/11/17 3:51 PM

764  SECTION TWELVE

no momentary outage upstream from the device for lateral faults. The devices will eliminate permanent outages that would result from lateral fuses responding to temporary faults. The dropout style includes a selfpowered, electronically controlled vacuum interrupter that fits into a standard cutout mounting (see Fig. 12-50b). Thermal Fuses.  A low-voltage thermal fuse is often found in consumer equipment such as coffee makers or hair dryers or transformers powering small consumer electronics devices. They contain a fusible, temperature-sensitive alloy which holds a spring contact mechanism normally closed. When the surrounding temperature gets too high, the alloy melts and allows the spring contact mechanism to break the circuit. The device can be used to prevent a fire in a hair dryer for example, by cutting off the power supply to the heater elements when the air flow is interrupted (e.g., the blower motor stops or the air intake becomes accidentally blocked). Thermal fuses are a “one shot,” non-resettable device which must be replaced once they have been activated (blown). 12.3.2 Switches FIGURE 12-50b  Singlephase dropout recloser. (S&C Electric Company.)

Disconnecting switches are used primarily for isolation of equipment such as buses or other live apparatus. They are used for sectionalizing electric circuits such as buses or lateral circuits or even portions of main feeders for speTABLE 12-5  Standards Related to Disconnect cial purposes such as testing and maintenance. Switches Standards pertaining to disconnect switches are Ratings and Application Guide ANSI C37.32 listed in Table 12-5. Generally, these devices are not rated to break load current except when Rated Control Voltages ANSI C37.33 equipped with auxiliary devices. However, these Test Code ANSI C37.34 switches must be designed to carry rated load Operation and Maintenance ANSI C37.35 currents and remain closed for momentary current flow such as fault currents. Fault currents Loading Guide ANSI C37.37 more than a rating may cause the switch to be blown open by the magnetic forces due to the short-circuit current. There are three classes of disconnect switches: 1. Station 2. Transmission 3. Distribution Switches can be further categorized as group-operated or hookstick-operated, and loadbreak or nonloadbreak types. Overhead group-operated switches have a vertical drive linkage down the support structure or pole to a handle that operates all three phases of the switch. Hookstick-operated switches replace the vertical drive linkage with a latched switch blade that can be accessed and operated with the pulling action of a hookstick. This mechanism eliminates the requirement of any equipment on the pole and shortens the installation time. The basic insulation level (BIL) of station class equipment is normally higher than for transmission or distribution class equipment. Station equipment ranges from 2.4 to 800 kV at present. Disconnect switches rated up through 5000 A continuous current are available. Manual or motor-operated switching can be provided. The design of disconnecting switches demands considerable attention to the contact surfaces. Consideration must be given to the rigors of extreme environments.

12_Santoso_Sec12_p0709-0800.indd 764

21/11/17 3:51 PM

SWITCHGEAR AND POWER COMPONENTS   765 

High-pressure contacts are generally the form used to provide the current transfer. Current densities of 100,000 A/in2 are common when using silver for contact points. Contact pressures as high as 500,000 lb/in2 ensure that good cleaning action is achieved and keeps the current transfer points free from contamination. Reverse current lop jaw type contacts are also employed to apply addition force to the contacts during through fault conditions. Vertical-break and double-end-break style switches are commonly used in areas where ice build-up is prevalent, due to the rotational rolling movement of the blade and contact during the opening operation cycle. Transmission disconnecting switches equipped with load break capability are generally used as load-management tools. Increasing needs for transmission lines and decreasing availability of right-ofway makes automatic switching of transmission load desirable. Load management is often achieved during “dead time” by switching the proper disconnect automatically through sensing loss of voltage. There are also loadbreak switches available for systems up through 230 kV at 2000 A and 3000 A interrupting ratings. These switches use in-line or shunt SF6 interrupters to isolate the circuits. The objective of load management is to minimize outage time and allow for more efficient utilization of substation capacity at the distribution level. There is a growing interest in automating distribution class switches to achieve load-management objectives. Distribution disconnecting switches are the method of providing for both single- and three-phase sectionalizing. As reliability demands increase, the utility must provide more sectionalizing or switching capability or suffer large and longer outages during faults. Hence, at 25 kV one may find some switching capability every 2000 to 3000 ft of overhead conductor. Figure 12-51a shows a typical group-operated distribution loadbreak switch. Figure 12-51b shows an upright, horizontal, hookstick-operated distribution load-break switch. Single-phase disconnect switching with load-interrupter capability can be applied where ferroresonance is not a problem. This type of switching is found on single-phase circuits. Single-phase switching of a heavily loaded three-phase circuit is not desirable. Group-operated switches with loadbreak capability interrupt these loads without concern for ferroresonance problems. In FIGURE 12-51a  Gangapplication, these three-phase switches can be mounted in either operated, phase-over-phase, dishorizontal, phase-over-phase (tiered), or vertical (riser poles) tribution loadbreak switch. (S&C configurations. To ensure proper operation, the mounting Electric Company.) should be as rigid as possible. Care must be exercised in proper alignment of blades and interrupter shunt contacts. Attention to these matters allows proper operation for repeatable switching duty without any need for adjustment in the field. Load-Interrupter Devices.  Load-interrupter devices, when combined with disconnecting switches, provide the economical capability of switching load currents. Generally, these interrupters are auxiliary devices and are not continuous-duty in terms of carrying load current. They are often referred to as shunt interrupters. This load interruption can be achieved by: 1. Use of an interrupter paralleling the main contacts just prior to opening and interrupting in this auxiliary chamber after the main contacts open. This is typically accomplished with an expulsion type device or vacuum switch.

12_Santoso_Sec12_p0709-0800.indd 765

21/11/17 3:51 PM

766  SECTION TWELVE

FIGURE 12-51b  Hookstick-operated three-phase distribution loadbreak switch. (S&C Electric Company.)

2. Use of a blast of SF6 gas to effectively lengthen and cool the arc resulting from the main contacts opening. Figure 12-52 shows an expulsion-type load interrupter used on distribution disconnecting switches to assist in interrupting load current. Switches for Underground Circuits.  The continuing trend toward underground distribution circuits increases the need for pad-mounted switchgear. These are available in both live- and dead-front configurations, with the latter growing in popularity.

FIGURE 12-52  Load interrupter, expulsion type, used in distribution systems. (S&C Electric Company.)

12_Santoso_Sec12_p0709-0800.indd 766

21/11/17 3:51 PM

SWITCHGEAR AND POWER COMPONENTS   767 

Live-front switchgear is typically air-insulated and utilizes in-air switches for loadbreak operation and power fuses for fault interruption. All components are directly accessible and operable. Dead-front switchgear is typically air-, oil-, or gas-insulated. Air-insulated dead-front switchgear is like live-front switchgear except that components are isolated within grounded compartments and are not accessible when energized. Oil-insulated dead-front switchgear typically uses under-oil switches or vacuum interrupters for loadbreak operation and current-limiting fuses or vacuum interrupters for fault interruption. These have the advantage of being more compact than air-insulated units. The disadvantage is that the oil insulation can become contaminated following arc interruption or from external contaminants. SF6-insulated switchgear uses components like those used in oil-insulated switchgear. Contamination of SF6 is less of a concern, although SF6-insulated enclosures must be more carefully designed and constructed to ensure gas integrity. Dead-front designs generally provide increased isolation from energized components, but at the expense of operating simplicity and visual confirmation. External connections are made by means of separable insulated connectors. These connectors generally must be removed to provide a visible break when working on cable or equipment. Some more recent dead-front designs allow visual confirmation of internal visible breaks on both switches and fault interrupters, and some provide integral grounding of cables. This eliminates the need to move elbows and provides isolation from energized components, while also offering the visual confirmation provided in live-front switchgear. In addition, recent designs have become available either with provisions for motor operation or fully integrated with motor operation and controls for use with SCADA systems. Oil-insulated and SF6-insulated switchgear can also be submersible and thus used in subsurface applications where space is at a premium or aesthetics are critical, such as in metropolitan areas. Refer to ANSI C37.72 for standards governing dead-front pad-mounted switchgear, and ANSI/IEEE C37.71 for subsurface load-interrupting switches.

12.4  CIRCUIT SWITCHERS BY KENNETH LONG AND HAMID R. SHARIFNIA Circuit switchers are mechanical switching devices suitable for frequent switching operations; capable of making, carrying, and breaking currents under normal circuit conditions; capable of making, and carrying for a specified time, currents under specified abnormal conditions; and capable of breaking currents under certain other specified abnormal circuit conditions. They are not necessarily capable of high speed reclosing. Some configurations include an integral open-gap disconnecting device. Circuit switchers available today use SF6 as an interrupting medium and insulation for the interrupting contacts, and may be equipped with a trip device activated by a protective relaying device to open the circuit switcher’s interrupting contacts automatically under specified abnormal conditions, such as overcurrent or faults. A circuit switcher, like a circuit breaker, must carry normal load currents within a specified temperature range to prevent damage to key components such as contacts, linkage, terminals, and isolating device parts. Principal designating parameters of a circuit switcher are maximum operating voltage, BIL, rated load current, interrupting current, momentary and short time currents, reactive power switching requirements, whether a disconnecting or isolation device is required, whether a trip device is required, whether manual or motorized operation is required, and if motorized the station service and control voltages. A circuit switcher essentially combines the functions of a circuit breaker (without high-speed reclosing capability) and a disconnecting switch (by providing visible isolation). Several models are also available which match the interrupting speed of a circuit breaker. A circuit switcher provides a cost-effective alternative means of transformer protection and switching, line and loop switching, capacitor or reactor switching, and load management. Evolution of the circuit switcher concept provides a more in-depth understanding of its application versatility and its limitations.

12_Santoso_Sec12_p0709-0800.indd 767

21/11/17 3:51 PM

768  SECTION TWELVE

12.4.1  History of Circuit Switcher Development After World War II, the drive to electrify the remaining rural and sparsely populated areas of the United States was renewed. Providing fully rated circuit breakers for switching loaded circuits was frequently beyond budget limitations. This created a need for new transmission and subtransmission voltage circuit-switching devices. One such device could be described as a load interrupter. It appeared in a wide variety of forms. Most were attachments to disconnect switches. Initially, most of these devices used low-volume oil as an interrupting medium. Ablative gas generating devices and later vacuum displaced oil. With rare exceptions, these devices had deficiencies. In the mid-1950s, SF6 gas was first employed as an interrupting medium. The application was an interrupter attachment for disconnect switches. Whereas ablative devices and vacuum bottles were limited to approximately 30-kV recovery voltage per gap, this single-gap SF6 device was readily applied on 138-kV systems for up to 600 A load switching. Most of these vacuum, ablative, and SF6 devices were shunted into the circuit during the disconnect switch opening process. As the 1960s approached, the circuit switcher was born. It appeared as an in-line device. While the first version employed several ablative devices in series, it soon evolved into the use of SF6 as a medium. Because of the unfavorable experience with the earlier devices, the general acceptance of the circuit switcher took much effort and considerable time. A typical installation is shown in Fig. 12-53. Applications for circuit switchers have been primarily for high-side power transformer switching under load and fault protection. The circuit switcher provides load-switching capability and protection for faults that originate on the secondary or low-voltage side of the substation transformer. The zone of protection for circuit switchers in this application is typically from the current transformers inside the transformer on the high-voltage bushings to the secondary feeder breakers, or in some

FIGURE 12-53  Schematic of typical three-pole arrangement. Two poles have been deleted to clarify mechanical drive-train arrangement.

12_Santoso_Sec12_p0709-0800.indd 768

21/11/17 3:51 PM

SWITCHGEAR AND POWER COMPONENTS   769 

cases the low-side main circuit breaker. There is generally shorter strike distance on the secondary bus and more exposure to flashover from wildlife and other causes. Therefore, circuit switchers are specifically tested to interrupt current and withstand the higher transient recovery voltages (TRVs) associated with faults initiated on the secondary of the transformer and cleared by the high-side interrupting device. For applications where the available high-side short-circuit current exceeds the device’s capability, blocking relays can be used. However, in most distribution substation applications blocking or time delay is not necessary. New devices have come on the market which can also be used in the following applications: Capacitor Switching.  The special purpose SF6 capacitors switcher is used for routine switching of single step or back-to-back steps, either grounded or ungrounded. Its pre-insertion closing resistors or inductors provide transient suppression to minimize the detrimental effects of voltage transients on sensitive equipment and to minimize the detrimental effects of current transients on utility equipment’s. The key features of this device include circuit making in SF6 rather than in air, single mechanism spring operator for reliable long-life operation, and single gap per phase puffer interrupters having long contact life and multi-time fault closing capability. In addition, the SF6 switching device equipped with a pre-insertion resistor reduces the inrush current thus eliminating the need for inrush current reactors that are commonly used with vacuum switching devices. Note, outrush current limiting reactors may still be required in some back-to-back switching applications. Circuit switchers used in capacitor switching applications have the following features: •  Closing resistors provide the most reliable and consistently repeatable voltage and current transient suppression available in the market. •  Interrupting contacts which use SF6 as an insulation medium and direct it to extinguish the arc are designed and tested for restrike-free performance •  Makes and breaks circuit in SF6 gas rather than in air or vacuum •  Simple, cost effective, mechanical design provides repeatability •  Eliminates the need for inrush reactors Reactor Switching.  This application can impose a severe duty on the connected system, switching device, and the shunt reactor itself. Due to the relatively small inductive current, the interrupting device attempts to clear at a forced current zero; deviation from which results in current chopping. If the interrupter’s contacts have not separated enough to sustain the system voltage, a re-ignition of the arc will occur. These high magnitude and high frequency re-ignitions can shorten the life of the reactor and the switching device. Circuit switchers used in shunt reactor switching applications have the following features: •  Special nozzle/contact design resulting in very low probability of re-ignitions •  Increased reactor life due to less stress on its insulation system •  Patented interrupter minimizes probability and magnitude of re-ignitions •  Reduced turn-to-turn voltage stress on reactor windings •  Simplified design compared to that of a circuit breaker improves reliability •  Local visual indication of gas pressure provided by color coded temperature compensated gas gauge •  Common gas system with gas density switch with low-pressure alarm and low-pressure lockout for remote status monitoring •  Compact candlestick type design can fit in tight spaces 12.4.2  General Construction Today, most circuit switchers are designed as live-tank type interrupting chambers, using SF6 gas puffer-type interrupting contacts. In the closed position, the contacts are surrounded by a flow guide

12_Santoso_Sec12_p0709-0800.indd 769

21/11/17 3:51 PM

770  SECTION TWELVE

and piston assembly which is ready to mechanically generate a “puff” of SF6 to cool and deionize the arc that is established prior to circuit interruption. The moving cylinder attached to the contact assembly, is driven by the main opening spring-charged mechanism, causing the gas to be pressurized by the stationary piston. The stationary contact “follows” the moving contact as the piston assembly achieves the prepressurized gas condition. When the contacts (which are hollow tubes) part, an arc is established and the gas flow divides into two parts and flows down the stationary and moving contact tubes. The alternating nature of the arc current waveform results in two current zeros every cycle. If the arc is sufficiently “hot” or conductive through the SF6 dielectric medium, the current will reestablish itself. Modern circuit switchers have sufficient SF6 density such that at the first current zero the interrupting contacts can stop the arc from reestablishing itself, providing the necessary dielectric strength to sustain arc interruption. This entire process from trip signal initiation to current interruption requires from 3 to 8 cycles or 50 to 133 ms in modern circuit switchers. Figure 12-54 illustrates a typical “blade-disconnect model” circuit switcher with the interrupter and blade connected in series. For opening, the operator receives a trip signal when the relay system detects an abnormal condition within the specified range. By discharging its opening spring, the operator actuates the interrupters to interrupt the circuit. Once the interrupter is open, the blade opens to achieve visible isolation. The blade-hinge mechanism is actuated directly by rotating a support insulator through the driver mechanism. As the blades are opened, both the closing and opening springs are recharged. For closing, the reverse rotation of the insulators allows the blades to begin closing. The blades close slowly since they are not used to pick up the circuit for this design. Once the blades are in the closed position, the operator receives a signal to release the closing spring and close the contacts in the interrupters to complete the circuit. If the unit has closed into a faulted circuit condition that provides a trip signal, the opening process may proceed immediately since the opening spring is charged and ready. In some circuit switcher designs, the movement of the interrupting contacts is initiated with a shunt trip designed to achieve the proper opening speed. For models of this type without shunt trip, opening is accomplished by rotating the insulator to the point where the driver opening spring would normally be tripped by the shunt trip’s rotation. This configuration is used where protection duty is not a function of the circuit switcher. For this design, the closing operation may be achieved by first closing the interrupter during the opening stroke of the blade. Then, when a close operation is called for, all that is necessary is to close the blade because the interrupter is already closed. Since contact is established in air for this type of closing, high-speed operation of

FIGURE 12-54  Single pole of blade-type circuit switcher. (S&C Electric Company.)

12_Santoso_Sec12_p0709-0800.indd 770

21/11/17 3:51 PM

SWITCHGEAR AND POWER COMPONENTS   771 

the blade is necessary to minimize the impact of picking up the circuit with the blades. Both methods of closing in the interrupter or with the blade have been proven over many years of field use. Circuit switchers are available with integral blades and in bladeless configurations. The units with the integral disconnect can help to provide a visible gap on the same structure with the interrupters. This can be a significant benefit in locations where there is limited real estate. For bladeless circuit switchers, a separate disconnect switch is used to isolate the circuit after the interrupters are open. In these installations the circuit switcher is used to open and close the circuit, and the disconnect switch provides the isolation and visible gap. Transformer Protective Devices.  There is another type of device available for transformer protection that provides the same type of protection as a circuit switcher. It is designed for application on the high-side of substation transformers from 69 to 138 kV. These devices offer a three-cycle 31,500 A interrupting rating with electronically linked pole units. They have been tested for interrupting the high TRVs from secondary-side faults and provide an economical alternative to other protective devices. They are supplied in conjunction with a separate or integrated disconnecting device on the high-voltage bus side of the protective device. The transformer protective device is different from circuit switchers in the operating sequence. The standard version includes electronically tripped interrupters with manual reset of each interrupter. A disconnect is used to isolate the circuit and provide a visible gap after the interrupters are open. With the disconnect open, the interrupters are closed and charged manually or with charging motors. Since the individual interrupters are closed and charged slowly, they are not used to pick up the circuit. Once the interrupters are closed, the disconnect is used to pick up the transformer. Figure 12-55 shows a typical substation transformer protective device. 12.4.3 Ratings Short-Circuit Current.  Circuit switchers are “specific-duty” or “medium-fault” interrupting devices and generally fulfill a requirement between high-power fuses and circuit breakers in a

FIGURE 12-55  Substation transformer protective device. (S&C Electric Company.)

12_Santoso_Sec12_p0709-0800.indd 771

21/11/17 3:51 PM

772  SECTION TWELVE

transmission or distribution system. Circuit switcher designs to date do not encompass instantaneous reclosing capability since their most common application of transformer protection precludes this requirement. Typical short-circuit current interrupting ratings are from 4 to 40 kA rms symmetrical, depending on type of interrupting duty and voltage rating. When interruption occurs, a TRV is imposed in microseconds across the interrupting device because of system adjustments to the new state before a steady-state condition is achieved known as the normal-frequency recovery voltage. TRV attempts to reestablish the arc by either thermal reignitions or dielectric breakdown of the interrupting gap. Refer to ANSI definitions and ratings. The TRV seen by the high-side interrupting device after clearing a fault that initiated on the secondary of the transformer is high with high frequency because of the characteristics of transformers. Continuous Current.  A continuous current rating is the designated limit of current in rms amperes that can be carried continuously under usual service conditions and in an ambient temperature not more than 40°C without exceeding temperature limits assigned to the various materials comprising the current-carrying parts or that are in contact with these parts. For further information, refer to ANSI C37.04, C37.30, and IEC 694. Circuit-switcher continuous current ratings are 1200, 1600, and 2000 A. These ratings are typically well above the requirements for the transformer protection application based on size of the transformer being protected and the maximum continuous current of these transformers. Short-Time Current.  This is a dual rating to verify the capability of the circuit switcher to carry abnormally high currents in the closed position for short periods of time. Short-time current includes the following: 1. Rated momentary current is the total current in asymmetric rms amperes (ac and dc components), which the device can carry for 10 cycles on a 60-Hz basis. These ratings can approach 50 times the continuous current ratings, and provide an assurance that the device will withstand the high electromagnetic forces from initial transient conditions of a short circuit tending to bring about mechanical damage or contact separation. 2. Rated 1-second or 3-second current is 62.5% of the rated momentary current and verifies that the current carrying parts will withstand the heating effect without excessive annealing or contact welding. Common circuit switcher momentary ratings are 60, 70, and 80 kA. Close-and-Latch Current.  For those circuit switchers that make the circuit in the interrupting device, a close-and-latch rating is required as is a close rating for the type that closes the circuit on a disconnect switch blade. This rating verifies the capability of the contact structure and operating mechanism to withstand the forces developed by closing in on a fault. Close-and-latch ratings are 30 and 40 kA. Limited-duty close ratings for the blade type are of the same magnitudes. Rated Voltage.  Rated voltages for circuit switchers are generally stated in terms of maximum system design voltages that indicate the upper limit at which the device is designed to operate. Circuit switchers are most commonly applied at 72.5 through 242 kV but are also available for special applications at 362 kV. To provide safe phase-to-ground insulation levels and across the device when in the open position, the circuit switcher must withstand certain specified magnitudes and wave shapes of test voltages without flashover or puncture of any of its insulation systems. This is the rated dielectric strength and consists of: 1. 1-minute dry and 10-second wet low-frequency (60-Hz) withstand voltage. 2. Dry lightning-impulse (1.2 × 50 µs wave shape) withstand voltage. It is the positive-polarity withstand level that is the basic-insulation-level rating (BIL in kilovolts). 3. Dry and wet switching-impulse (250 × 2500 µs) withstand voltage. This rating applies only at 362 kV and above. 4. Dry chopped-wave impulse withstand voltage. The requirement for this rating has yet to be determined for a circuit switcher but is a standard rating for a circuit breaker. If applicable, this rating would apply to a bladeless model circuit switcher having graded gaps in series per pole.

12_Santoso_Sec12_p0709-0800.indd 772

21/11/17 3:51 PM

SWITCHGEAR AND POWER COMPONENTS   773 

Interrupting Time.  The rated interrupting time is the maximum permissible interval between energizing the shunt trip coils at rated control voltage and the interruption of the main circuit in all poles when interrupting a current within the required interrupting capabilities. This interrupting time may be modified under certain asymmetrical current conditions as detailed in ANSI C37.04. Circuit switchers are available from 3- to 8-cycle interrupting times. Duty Cycle.  Operating duty is the short-circuit current to be interrupted, closed upon, etc. The duty cycle is a stated sequence of closing and opening operations. Various types of circuit switchers will have different duty cycles. An example is O-17s-CO cycle is where the first operation is an open, followed by 17 seconds to permit the operating mechanism and blade to recycle, and then to repeat the close-open operation cycle. Corona-RIV.  A corona-free rating is commonly established to prevent radio and television interference. This is referred to as the radio influence voltage (RIV) and should be less than 500 µV as determined by a test circuit per NEMA Publication No. 107. As a rule, a circuit switcher that produces no visible corona under dark conditions at 105% of rated voltage will have a negligible RIV level. 12.4.4  Selection and Application The versatility of circuit switchers and related circuit-interrupting devices requires careful selection of the ratings, components, and accessories to be specified for a given protection and/or switching duty. The following criteria must be considered: 1. System data a. Nominal service voltage b. Maximum continuous current c. Through-fault current withstand d. Basic impulse (insulation) level 2. Circuit-protection duty a. Present and future available fault currents b. Length of overhead lines or underground cables c. Transformer ratings, impedance, and connections d. TRV e. Interrupting time, maximum 3. Switching duty a. Inductive currents (unloaded transformers) b. Small capacitive currents (unloaded lines and cables) c. Inductive/capacitive currents (choke coils, capacitors, grounded or ungrounded) d. Closing on fault e. Closing of long lines Approximately 80% of all circuit switchers are applied on the primary or high-voltage side of a substation transformer for switching and fault-protection duty. By means of protective relaying, faults which occur within the protection zone of the transformer can be detected to bring about tripping of the primary-side circuit switcher. Should the fault occur on the secondary side, which is most frequently the case, the transformer impedance will limit the magnitude of fault current at the circuit

12_Santoso_Sec12_p0709-0800.indd 773

21/11/17 3:51 PM

774  SECTION TWELVE

switcher’s location, and is generally less than the available primary-fault current. Hence, the use of the term “inherent secondary-fault current,” and for some circuit switchers, a dual short-circuit current rating for primary or secondary faults. Associated with these reflected secondary faults are the inherent capacitance and inductance of the transformer windings, which generally produce higher TRVs than is the case with a primary fault. These higher TRVs can increase the difficulty of the interruption process, while conversely, the impedance-limited fault current is easier to interrupt. Circuit switchers are tested for this condition as defined in the nearly completed ANSI C37.016 which is the new standard for circuit switchers. This test standard which applies to circuit switchers defines a secondary fault test with a TRV that is more severe than the circuit breaker test standard. The circuit switcher demonstrates its interrupting capability for this duty by passing these tests. In applications where the primary fault currents are greater than the switcher’s interrupting capability, the fault can often be cleared by source-side circuit breakers having interrupting times shorter than those of a circuit switcher. It is also common to block tripping of the circuit switcher when the fault current is greater than its rating and pass this duty on to the source-side breaker. Circuit switchers and interrupters are generally available in mounting arrangements like isolating air-disconnect switches. Since they are not freestanding, their application and that of the supporting structure design and/or optional freestanding pedestal is influenced by phase spacing’s desired, terminal height, altitude, atmospheric elements, seismic conditions, and wind, ice, and terminal pad loadings. The phase spacing recommended in the ANSI C37.32 differentiates between the minimums for vertical-break disconnect switches (also applying to bus supports) and the increased spacing’s required for horn gap switches (switching devices utilizing arcing in air as an operating mode). From a safety viewpoint, it is important to consider the method of operation in addition to the duty applications of the device as a determination in selecting the phase spacing. Elevation of the installation site, in addition to the temperature, humidity, and air-contamination characteristics, significantly affects the dielectric strength and coordination of these circuitinterrupting devices. The guidelines established in ANSI C37.30 for site elevations coupled with a further analysis of these other factors may dictate the use of higher-voltage-rated units or extraleakage-distance porcelain standoff insulators. Seismic, wind, ice, and terminal pad loadings must also be considered in the design of the supporting structure. Testing.  Industry standards specifically for circuit switchers are included in ANSI C37.016. Prior to this standard, applicable sections of existing standards for circuit breakers and disconnect switches had been used as a guide in establishing definitions, ratings, capabilities, and test procedures for circuit switchers (see ANSI C37.09 and C37.34). In addition, testing for secondary fault currents and the associated higher TRVs has been completed by some circuit switcher manufacturers. Tests can be considered to consist of four different groupings: 1. Type or design tests are for proving the capability of the switcher to meet the specified ratings. 2. Reliability tests are part of a quality assurance program to demonstrate that the circuit-switcher design has achieved a specified mechanical reliability. They consist of accelerated aging or prototype tests to improve on the established design reliability, demonstration, or pilot run tests to assure the reliability requirements have been met, and acceptance or production tests to verify that production units comply with the demonstrated design reliability. 3. Routine or production tests are done to ensure that the production is in accordance with established procedures. This includes testing of individual components and subassemblies. 4. Installation testing to assure that the circuit switcher will perform its intended function in the system. Accessories and Maintenance.  As discussed in a preceding section, circuit switcher manufacturers offer optional freestanding support pedestals at various heights in addition to many other accessories, some of which include bypass and grounding switches. Other options include the capability of monitoring the circuit switcher status through SCADA.

12_Santoso_Sec12_p0709-0800.indd 774

21/11/17 3:51 PM

SWITCHGEAR AND POWER COMPONENTS   775 

The maintenance requirements are specified by each manufacturer. Typical inspection recommendations will include a general visual check of the insulator condition along with checking the SF6 gas density levels and the connections. If the circuit switcher includes an integral disconnect, the contacts should be inspected and wiped clean of the old grease, and a light coating of new grease applied. In general, an overall inspection of the circuit switcher should be used to identify any condition that is not normal.

12.5  AUTOMATED FEEDER SWITCHING SYSTEMS BY KENNETH LONG AND HAMID R. SHARIFNIA The method known as SCADA has long been used to monitor and control transmission systems, providing the operational flexibility and speed required for efficient and reliable performance. The use of SCADA in the distribution system is becoming increasingly important as utilities seek to improve service to their customers. The acronym SCADA is being replaced by the generic term distribution automation (DA), which incorporates the principle of computers operating switching and other control devices automatically in response to events in the system. Automated switching of distribution feeder circuits provides significant improvements in reliability, enhances operational flexibility, and increases productivity of both utility personnel and distribution lines. Automated feeder switching systems utilize controls, sophisticated algorithms, and data communications to go beyond the reliability benefits of more traditional reclosers and automatic sectionalizers. An automated switching system can be programmed to not only reduce outage times, but also do so without subjecting unfaulted circuits to “bumps” caused by intentional closing into faults required by fault-detection or troubleshooting schemes. Further, an integrated fault-isolation and restoration system can incorporate real-time evaluation of pre-fault loads into the algorithm to prevent overloading of a backup circuit when transferring load from a faulted circuit. This allows the utility planner more flexibility in circuit design by increasing the amount of load that can normally be carried by a given circuit. Such systems, with current and voltage monitoring, also provide the utility with a convenient way to monitor distribution feeder circuits, thus enabling the utility to take immediate action in the event of current or voltage excursions exceeding normal operating limits. Modern systems also monitor the communications network for abnormal conditions, and will implement path switching or if necessary block automated responses to avoid miss operation. These features when implemented make it possible to improve power quality and continuity of service for the customer. Automated feeder switching systems can also provide the means to optimize feeder and substation loading by enabling the shifting of load from one feeder to another in a very short period. This same capability can yield hard-dollar cost savings associated with deferment of capital projects when coupled with planning practices that take advantage of the new technologies. 12.5.1  Examples of Automated Feeder Switching Systems A large investor-owned electric utility in New York needed to dramatically improve reliability in response to a challenge from the New York public utility commission. After analyzing its system as well as the nature and locations of faults, it was decided that an automated feeder switching system would provide the quickest route to needed improvements in electric service reliability. A typical feeder “loop” is shown in Fig. 12-56. It consists of two circuits joined by a normally open tie switch. In turn, each feeder circuit will have a normally closed automated switch installed at the electrical half-way point on the circuit. All switches are equipped with voltage and current monitoring as well as communication and control units (CCUs) housing the switch controls, power supplies, remote-terminal units (RTUs), and radios for establishing communication with the primary station. Faults occurring in section 2 will result in a trip of substation breaker BKR A. The control at switch SW1 will sense the passage of fault current and the subsequent loss of voltage precipitated by the opening of BKR A. A sectionalizing algorithm will initiate and open the switch after a predetermined time delay set to coordinate with the recloser interval of BKR A. The station breaker is

12_Santoso_Sec12_p0709-0800.indd 775

21/11/17 3:51 PM

776  SECTION TWELVE

FIGURE 12-56  Typical automated feeder circuit loop.

reclosed to determine if the fault condition is temporary or permanent. A typical reclosing breaker may reclose up to three times on some systems. Once SW1 is open and the fault is isolated, BKR A will reclose, restoring service to the customers in section 1. At this point, the crew can proceed directly to SW1 and commence the search for the fault from there, further reducing the amount of time for fault location. Faults occurring in section 1 will result in a lockout of substation BKR A. At this point, SW1 will see a loss of voltage and transmit an alarm to the primary station. The primary will then interrogate SW1 and determine that it experienced loss of voltage, but no overcurrent. This condition indicates a section 1 fault. The primary station will then initiate the section 1 fault algorithm and interrogate SW1 to determine the load in section 2 just prior to the fault. The primary then interrogates SW3 for load information. If the addition of section 2 load to the existing load on section 3 will not result in an overload condition, then the master station will instruct SW2 to close, restoring service to section 2. The automation system can be operated in three modes. The first is traditional SCADA, where the dispatcher must identify and analyze circuit conditions before deciding on restoration procedures, which must then be sent to the field devices individually. In the second mode, the primary station computer will identify and analyze the circuit condition and make an operational recommendation to the dispatcher through the human-machine interface (HMI), who can then choose to accept the recommendation and execute a simple acknowledge command which will automatically issue appropriate commands to field devices. The third mode identifies and analyzes circuit conditions and automatically issues commands to field devices to isolate faulted sections and restore service to unfaulted sections. These systems can also be used to automatically return the circuit to its normal operating configuration after receiving confirmation from the operator through the HMI. It should be noted that the system can utilize many switching devices on a given circuit loop like that shown in Fig. 12-56. The figure was simplified for clarity in this example. A large metropolitan utility wanted to improve electric service to its customers throughout its service area. However, it did not have a SCADA primary station at the beginning of the project and needed a way to improve service without installing one. In this case, the utility installed a system which utilizes distributed intelligence in the switch controllers to do all analysis as well as fault isolation and circuit restoration. Such a system operates in much the same way as described in the example above. The key difference is that this system does not utilize the first two modes of operation: traditional SCADA and suggesting operational recommendations. The advantage is the ability to install the system without the need for a communications network or SCADA primary station. This system does its work automatically without human intervention and the entire fault location, isolation, and service restoration occurs in less than 1 minute. It should be noted that the system can be easily disabled in the field for line work if desired and can be upgraded to work with a primary control station.

12_Santoso_Sec12_p0709-0800.indd 776

21/11/17 3:51 PM

SWITCHGEAR AND POWER COMPONENTS   777 

12.5.2  Automated Switches A key part of an automated feeder switching system is the automated switch. The term “automated” in this context means the switch is designed for use on a fully automated system, a SCADA system, or in a system using distributed intelligence. To be automated, existing switches may be retrofitted with motor operators, current and voltage sensors, RTUs, and communication devices to allow the remote operation necessary to realize the benefits available with automated feeder switching systems. However, switches designed for occasional, manual operation may not be entirely suitable for operation on an automated distribution circuit feeder. Manual switches are typically not designed to be operated the hundreds of times required by a fully automated system over the life of a typical switch. Nor are they ordinarily designed for duty-cycle fault-closing to allow the system operator to inadvertently close into a fault from the SCADA primary station and still leave the switch in an operable condition. There are several switches designed specifically for automation systems (Fig. 12-57). Such switches incorporate design features such as those described below that make them particularly suitable for use in an automated feeder switching system: Sealed SF6 interrupters

Disconnect operating lever

Two current sensors and one current/voltage sensor

Pull ring for manual operaton

Interrupter open/ closed indicator

Integral storedenergy operating mechanism Shielded control cable

Communication and control unit

FIGURE 12-57  Automated switches with integrated sensing. (S&C Electric Company.)

12_Santoso_Sec12_p0709-0800.indd 777

21/11/17 3:51 PM

778  SECTION TWELVE

1. Duty-cycle fault-closing allows the switch to be closed into a typical fault several times before experiencing damage severe enough to render the switch inoperable. 2. Integrated voltage and current sensors provide the ability to monitor voltages, currents, and loads that are in turn used as inputs to algorithms to effect automated switching for fault isolation and restoration, and for shifting loads for circuit optimization. 3. Integrated operating mechanisms enable the switches to be operated remotely via computer commands. Integration with the switch ensures optimum operation without the need for cumbersome ground-to-switch linkages. 4. Integrated load interrupters are typically designed to allow operation under most weather conditions since it will not be possible to visibly inspect the switch for ice or other problems prior to operation. 5. Integrated control power sources eliminate the need to rely on locally available control power sources, or to install such power sources. 6. Integrated visible air-gap isolation provides a visible air gap when required as a safety clearance point for certain types of overhead line work. An associated control package should include switch-operating controls, a local/remote switch, backup power for dead-line SCADA operation, a remote-terminal unit, and data-communication devices. The entire package should be assembled and tested for proper operation by a single supplier to eliminate the need for the utility to perform the integration. Similar automated switching devices are also available for underground distribution systems. In underground switchgear applications, the control interface should be isolated from the highvoltage compartments of the switchgear. Underground distribution systems commonly employ multifunction protective relaying devices with control logic to perform localized automated decision making.

12.6  POWER CAPACITORS BY JEFFREY H. NELSON AND MARK McVEY Definitions of terms used in this subsection can be found in the IEEE standards and application guides referenced in this subsection and/or in the IEEE Standards Dictionary (available at http:// ieeexplore.ieee.org/xpls/dictionary.jsp?tag=1). 12.6.1  System Benefits of Power Capacitors Power capacitors provide several benefits to power systems. Among these include power factor correction, system voltage support, increased system capacity, reduction of power system losses, reactive power support, and power oscillation damping. Power Factor Correction.  In general, the efficiency of power generation, transmission, and distribution equipment is improved when it is operated near unity power factor. The most cost-effective way to achieve near unity power factor is with the application of capacitors. Capacitors provide a static source of leading reactive current and can be installed in close proximity to the load. Thus, the maximum efficiency may be realized by reducing the magnetizing (lagging) current requirements throughout the system. Table 12-6 is a simple tool that can be used to determine the kilovars (kvar) required for correcting the system power factor. Find the row that corresponds to the existing power factor and the column that corresponds to the desired power factor and select the kilowatt multiplier where these intersect. Then simply multiply this factor by the power system load in kilowatts to determine the kilovars required to be installed to achieve the desired power factor.

12_Santoso_Sec12_p0709-0800.indd 778

21/11/17 3:51 PM

12_Santoso_Sec12_p0709-0800.indd 779

TABLE 12-6  Power Factor Correction Kilowatt Multipliers Present power-factor percentage 50 51

Corrected power-factor percentage 80

81

82

83

84

85

86

87

88

89

90

91

92

93

94

95

96

97

98

99

100

0.982 1.008 1.034 1.060 1.086 1.112 1.139 1.165 1.192 1.220 1.248 1.276 1.306 1.337 1.369 1.403 1.442 1.481 1.529 1.590 1.732 .937

.962

.989 1.015 1.041 1.067 1.094 1.120 1.147 1.175 1.203 1.231 1.261 1.292 1.324 1.358 1.395 1.436 1.484 1.544 1.687

52

.893

.919

.945

.971

.997 1.023 1.050 1.076 1.103 1.131 1.159 1.187 1.217 1.248 1.280 1.314 1.351 1.392 1.440 1.500 1.643

53

.850

.876

.902

.928

.954

.980 1.007 1.033 1.060 1.088 1.116 1.144 1.174 1.205 1.237 1.271 1.308 1.349 1.397 1.457 1.600

54

.809

.835

.861

.887

.913

.939

.966

55

.769

.795

.821

.847

.873

.899

.926

.952

.979 1.007 1.035 1.063 1.090 1.124 1.156 1.190 1.228 1.268 1.316 1.377 1.519

56

.730

.756

.782

.808

.845

.860

.887

.913

.940

.992 1.019 1.047 1.075 1.103 1.133 1.164 1.196 1.230 1.267 1.308 1.356 1.416 1.559 .968

.996 1.024 1.051 1.085 1.117 1.151 1.189 1.229 1.277 1.338 1.480

57

.692

.718

.744

.770

.796

.822

.849

.875

.902

.930

.958

.986 1.013 1.047 1.079 1.113 1.151 1.191 1.239 1.300 1.442

58

.655

.681

.707

.733

.759

.785

.812

.838

.865

.893

.921

.949

.976 1.010 1.042 1.076 1.114 1.154 1.202 1.263 1.405

59

.618

.644

.670

.696

.722

.748

.775

.801

.828

.856

.884

.912

.939

.973 1.005 1.039 1.077 1.117 1.165 1.226 1.368

60

.584

.610

.636

.662

.688

.714

.741

.767

.794

.822

.850

.878

.905

.939

.971 1.005 1.043 1.083 1.131 1.192 1.334

61

.549

.575

.601

.627

.653

.679

.706

.732

.759

.787

.815

.843

.870

.904

.936

.970 1.008 1.048 1.096 1.157 1.299

62

.515

.541

.567

.593

.619

.645

.672

.698

.725

.753

.781

.809

.836

.870

.902

.936

.974 1.014 1.062 1.123 1.265

63

.483

.509

.535

.561

.587

.613

.640

.666

.693

.721

.749

.777

.804

.838

.870

.904

.942

.982 1.030 1.091 1.233

64

.450

.476

.502

.528

.554

.580

.607

.633

.660

.688

.716

.744

.771

.805

.837

.871

.909

.949

.997 1.058 1.200

65

.419

.445

.471

.497

.523

.549

.576

.602

.629

.657

.685

.713

.740

.774

.806

.840

.878

.918

.966 1.027 1.169

66

.388

.414

.440

.466

.492

.518

.545

.571

.598

.626

.554

.682

.709

.743

.775

.809

.847

.887

.935

.996 1.138

67

.358

.384

.410

.436

.462

.488

.515

.541

.568

.596

.624

.652

.679

.713

.745

.779

.817

.857

.905

.966 1.108

68

.329

.355

.381

.407

.433

.459

.486

.512

.539

.567

.595

.623

.650

.684

.716

.750

.788

.828

.876

.937 1.079

69

.299

.325

.351

.377

.403

.429

.456

.482

.509

.537

.565

.593

.620

.654

.866

.720

.758

.798

.840

.907 1.049

70

.270

.296

.322

.348

.374

.400

.427

.453

.480

.508

.536

.564

.591

.625

.657

.691

.729

.769

.811

.878 1.020

71

.242

.268

.294

.320

.346

.372

.399

.425

.452

.480

.508

.536

.563

.597

.629

.663

.701

.741

.783

.850

.992

72

.213

.239

.265

.291

.317

.343

.370

.396

.423

.451

.479

.507

.534

.568

.600

.634

.672

.712

.754

.821

.963

73

.186

.212

.238

.264

.290

.316

.343

.369

.396

.424

.452

.480

.507

.541

.573

.607

.645

.685

.727

.794

.936

74

.159

.185

.211

.237

.263

.289

.316

.342

.369

.397

.425

.453

.480

.514

.546

.580

.618

.658

.700

.767

.909

75

.132

.158

.184

.210

.236

.262

.289

.315

.342

.370

.398

.426

.453

.487

.519

.553

.591

.631

.673

.740

.882

779

21/11/17 3:51 PM

(Continued)

780

12_Santoso_Sec12_p0709-0800.indd 780

TABLE 12-6  Power Factor Correction Kilowatt Multipliers (Continued) Present power-factor percentage

Corrected power-factor percentage 80

81

82

83

84

85

86

87

88

89

90

91

92

93

94

95

96

97

98

99

100

76

.105

.131

.157

.183

.209

.235

.262

.288

.315

.343

.371

.399

.426

.460

.492

.526

.564

.604

.652

.713

.855

77

.079

.105

.131

.157

.183

.209

.236

.262

.289

.317

.345

.373

.400

.434

.466

.500

.538

.578

.620

.687

.829

78

.053

.079

.105

.131

.157

.183

.210

.236

.263

.291

.319

.347

.374

.408

.440

.474

.512

.552

.594

.661

.803

79

.026

.052

.078

.104

.130

.156

.183

.209

.236

.264

.292

.320

.347

.381

.413

.447

.485

.525

.567

.634

.776

80

.000

.026

.052

.078

.104

.130

.157

.183

.210

.238

.266

.294

.321

.355

.387

.421

.459

.499

.541

.608

.750

.000

.026

.052

.078

.104

.131

.157

.184

.212

.240

.268

.295

.329

.361

.395

.433

.473

.515

.582

.724

.000

.026

.062

.078

.105

.131

.158

.186

.214

.242

.269

.303

.335

.369

.407

.447

.489

.556

.698

.000

.026

.052

.079

.105

.132

.160

.188

.216

.243

.277

.309

.343

.381

.421

.463

.530

.672

81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99

.000

.026

.053

.079

.106

.134

.162

.190

.217

.251

.283

.317

.355

.395

.437

.504

.645

.000

.027

.053

.080

.108

.136

.164

.191

.225

.257

.291

.329

.369

.417

.478

.620

.026

.053

.081

.109

.137

.167

.198

.230

.265

.301

.343

.390

.451

.593

.027

.055

.082

.111

.141

.172

.204

.238

.275

.317

.364

.425

.567

.028

.056

.084

.114

.145

.177

.211

.248

.290

.337

.398

.540

.028

.056

.086

.117

.149

.183

.220

.262

.309

.370

.512

.028

.058

.089

.121

.155

.192

.234

.281

.342

.484

.030

.061

.093

.127

.164

.206

.253

.314

.456

.031

.063

.097

.134

.176

.223

.284

.426

.032

.066

.103

.145

.192

.253

.395

.034

.071

.113

.160

.221

.363

.037

.079

.126

.187

.328

.042

.089

.150

.292

.047

.108

.251

.061

.203 .142

21/11/17 3:51 PM

SWITCHGEAR AND POWER COMPONENTS   781 

For example, with a load of 200 kW at 77% power factor, how many capacitive kilovars are needed to correct to a power factor of 95%? At the point where the row for the 77% existing power factor and the column for the desired power factor of 95% intersect, we find a kilowatt multiplier of 0.5. Therefore, the following calculation can be made to determine the kvar required to achieve 95% power factor.



3Ø kvar = 3Ø load (kW) × kilowatt multiplier = 200 kW × 0.5 = 100 kvar

(12-2)

System Voltage Support.  Power systems are predominately inductive in nature and during peak load conditions or during system contingencies there can be a significant voltage drop between the voltage source and the load. Application of capacitors to a power system results in a voltage increase back to the voltage source, and also past the application point of the capacitors in a radial system. The actual percentage increase of the system voltage is dependent upon the inductive reactance of the system at the point of application of the capacitors. The short-circuit impedance at that point is approximately the same as the inductive reactance; therefore, the three-phase short-circuit current at that location can be used to determine the approximate voltage rise. The following rule-of-thumb equation is commonly used.

∆V ≈

kvarC × 100% (12-3) kVASC

where ΔV is percent voltage rise at the point of the capacitor installation, kvarC is capacitor three-phase kvar, and kVASC is system three-phase short-circuit kVA at the point of the capacitor installation.

kVASC =

3 × VLL × I SC (12-4)

where VLL is system line-to-line (phase-to-phase) voltage, ISC is three-phase short-circuit current at the point of the capacitor installation. Increased System Capacity.  The application of shunt or series capacitors can affect the power system capacity. Application of shunt capacitors reduces the inductive reactive current on the power system, and thus reduces the system kVA loading. This can have the effect of increasing system capacity to serve additional load. Series capacitors are typically used to increase the power carrying capability of transmission lines. Series capacitors insert a voltage in series with the transmission line that is opposite in polarity to the voltage drop across the line, which decreases the apparent reactance and increases the power transfer capability of the line. The reduction in reactance often improves system stability. Many systems are not limited by thermal capacity but system stability. Power System Loss Reduction.  The installation of capacitors can reduce the current flow in a power system. Since losses are proportional to the square of the current, a reduction in current will lead to reduced system losses. Reactive Power Support.  Capacitors can help support steady-state stability limits and reactive power requirements at generators. Power Oscillation Damping.  Controlled series capacitors can provide an active damping for power oscillations that many large power systems experience. They can also provide support after significant disturbances to the power system and allow the system to remain in synchronous operation.

12_Santoso_Sec12_p0709-0800.indd 781

21/11/17 3:51 PM

782  SECTION TWELVE

12.6.2  Capacitor Units The terms capacitor unit, power capacitor or capacitor may be used interchangeably. The base standard which covers the ratings and requirements for capacitor units is IEEE 18.1 This standard applies to capacitors rated 216 V or higher, 2.5 kvar or more, and designed for shunt connection on alternating current (ac) power systems operating at a nominal power frequency of 50 or 60 Hz. IEEE 181 covers service conditions, ratings and capabilities, manufacturing, and testing of shunt capacitor units. IEEE 8242 specifies ratings, capabilities and testing requirements in addition to IEEE 181 for capacitor units to be utilized in series capacitor banks. IEEE 15313 covers considerations to take into account when specifying units to be used in a harmonic filter bank. There are typically two voltage classes of capacitor units applied and they are divided into the categories of low-voltage capacitors (below 1000 V) and high-voltage capacitors (1000 V and above). Low-Voltage Capacitor Units.  Low-voltage capacitor units are typically applied in industrial power systems. They are generally available in voltage ratings from 240 to 600 V over the range of 2.5 to 100 kvar three-phase. Low-voltage capacitors are typically dry-type, metalized polypropylene film (see Fig. 12-58). Typical voltage and kvar ratings are listed in IEEE 18.1 High-Voltage Capacitor Units.  High-voltage capacitor units are typically connected to industrial power systems or to utility transmission and distribution power systems. The units are generally available in voltage ratings from 2.4 to 25 kV. Modern manufacturing techniques continue to decrease the size of high-voltage capacitor units, which continues to increase the available kvar ratings for units. Typical voltage and kvar ratings are listed in IEEE 18.1 The capacitor elements in present day high-voltage capacitor units are manufactured using an all-film dielectric, typically two layers of polypropylene film between two layers of thin aluminum foil. The capacitor elements are connected in a series/parallel combination to achieve the desired voltage and kvar rating. The elements are placed in a metal enclosure with bushings for external connections and impregnated with a dielectric fluid. The unit is then hermetically sealed (see Fig. 12-59). Capacitor Unit Ratings.  IEEE 181 establishes the following standard ratings for capacitor units, as applied under the normal service conditions and ambient temperatures defined in the standard: 1. Voltage, rms (terminal-to-terminal) 2. Terminal to case (or ground) insulation class

(a)

(b)

FIGURE 12-58  Typical low-voltage capacitor units with self-healing metalized polypropylene capacitor elements: (a) liquid-free steel enclosure with three-phase connection terminals, and (b) single-phase epoxy encapsulated.

12_Santoso_Sec12_p0709-0800.indd 782

21/11/17 3:51 PM

SWITCHGEAR AND POWER COMPONENTS   783 

Capacitor unit

Bushings

Capacitor element

Insulation to container

Layers of plastic film Aluminum foil

Stainless steel container

Additional: - Discharge resistors - Internal fuses

FIGURE 12-59  Typical high-voltage capacitor unit.

3. Reactive power 4. Number of phases 5. Frequency Capacitors are intended to be operated at or below their rated voltage. They are designed to operate at overvoltages of 10% for bank contingencies, such as the failure of an individual unit or element, or system contingencies, such as high voltage. Note that the overvoltage capability of the individual capacitor elements inside the unit is 110% of its portion of the unit voltage rating. The capacitor unit is capable of operating continuously under contingency conditions provided that the peak voltage does not exceed 120% of rated peak voltage, including harmonics. The maximum peak voltage rating of the capacitor including harmonics, but excluding transients, is equal to

Vpk = 1.2 2 (Vrms rated) (12-5)

Also, the unit is designed to operate continuously if the current does not exceed 135% of nominal rms current based on rated kvar and rated voltage, and the kvar output does not exceed 135% of rated kvar. The total rms current is equal to

Irms = ( I1 )2 + ( I 2 )2 +  + ( In )2 (12-6)

where n is harmonic number.

12_Santoso_Sec12_p0709-0800.indd 783

21/11/17 3:51 PM

784  SECTION TWELVE

The kvar output of the capacitor increases as the square of the applied voltage:

kvarE2 = kvarE1

( E2 )2 (12-7) ( E1 )2

For example, a 200-kvar, 7200-V capacitor unit will supply 242 kvar at 7920 V:

kvarE2



(7920)2 (7200)2 = 242 kvar

kvarE2 = 200 ×

Transient Overvoltage and Overcurrent Withstand Capabilities.  When the installation of a switched rack or bank is contemplated, other nearby capacitor equipment must be evaluated. Capacitor banks switched in a back-to-back configuration can create very high peak magnitude and high frequency current transients. Also, when switching a capacitor bank without any type of transient suppression a voltage transient is generated, typically in the range of 300 to 800 Hz. This undamped voltage transient can couple through a power transformer to a lower voltage system and be transmitted several miles away. If a capacitor bank is installed on the lower voltage system a resonant condition may exist. If the resonant frequency of the LC circuit on the high-voltage bus where the capacitor bank is being switched is approximately equal to the LC circuit at the lower voltage capacitor bank, the voltage transient will be magnified. This phenomenon is known as voltage magnification. These switching conditions could result in high overvoltage and overcurrent transients. The use of series reactors, pre-insertion inductors or resistors, and/or special switching devices is sometimes required to reduce these transients to lower levels. Transient overvoltage and overcurrent capabilities for shunt capacitors are covered in IEEE 1036.4 Prior to 2002, they were covered in IEEE 18.1 Capacitance Tolerance.  In the 2002 revision to IEEE 18, the allowable capacitance tolerance range for shunt capacitor units was changed. In previous versions of IEEE 18 the allowable capacitance tolerance range of each unit was “−0% to +15%” of the nominal value based on rated kvar, voltage and frequency, measured at 25°C uniform case and internal temperature. In the 2002 revision, it was changed to “ −0% to +10%.” However, with today’s modern manufacturing practices, capacitance tolerances typically do not exceed +5% for standard units. A tighter tolerance range may be specified for units to be utilized in a harmonic filter capacitor bank, for example: “ −2% to +2%” of the nominal capacitance. This tolerance may be applied to the capacitance of the entire harmonic filter bank instead of the individual units. Capacitance tolerances for series capacitors are specified on a per phase basis for the entire bank (see IEEE 8242). Discharge Resistors.  Under certain conditions, when line voltage is removed from a power capacitor the possibility exists that the unit will retain an extremely high charge even days later. This characteristic of retaining such a charge is demonstrated by the high-efficiency and low-loss operation of a power capacitor. To eliminate this hazard, all power capacitors contain internal-discharge resistors. This resistor assembly will reduce the terminal voltage from line voltage to 50 V within 5 min of deenergization for a capacitor rated higher than 600 V ac, and within 1 min for capacitors rated 600 V ac or less. Capacitor Unit Losses.  The cost of operating high-voltage capacitors is lower per kvar than lowvoltage capacitors because of the basic difference in dielectric materials, which allows high-voltage capacitors to be operated more efficiently. Present day high-voltage capacitors operate at a lower

12_Santoso_Sec12_p0709-0800.indd 784

21/11/17 3:51 PM

SWITCHGEAR AND POWER COMPONENTS   785 

watts loss per kvar than do low-voltage capacitors. For example, capacitors that utilize an all-film dielectric may operate with losses of less than 0.1 W per kvar. Low-voltage capacitors using metalized polypropylene dielectric may experience losses of near 0.5 W per kvar. Capacitor Tank Rupture.  Capacitor tank rupture of high-voltage capacitors will occur if the total energy applied to the capacitor unit under failure conditions is greater than the ability of the capacitor tank to withstand such energy. Tank-rupture curves are essential to the correct selection of fuse links for overcurrent protection of externally fused capacitors. A typical tank rupture curve is shown in Fig. 12-60.

FIGURE 12-60  Typical high-voltage tank-rupture curve.

12_Santoso_Sec12_p0709-0800.indd 785

21/11/17 3:51 PM

786  SECTION TWELVE

Temperature.  Although very efficient, power capacitors do consume some power and generate heat. This heat must be adequately ventilated when enclosed or exposed to higher than normal ambient temperatures. Maximum and minimum operating temperatures for power capacitors are specified in IEEE 18. Capacitors are designed for continuous operation at a maximum ambient temperature of 46°C over a 24-hour period, with a peak of 55°C. The minimum ambient temperature for continuous operation is -40°C. Different requirements for maximum or minimum ambient temperatures can be specified by the user. Lower required minimum ambient temperatures may affect the maximum ambient at which the unit can operate, and conversely, higher required maximum ambient temperatures may affect the minimum ambient at which the unit can operate. Capacitor applications must be designed for adequate overvoltage and “corona” capabilities, since the partial discharge (corona) characteristics vary with temperature. It is necessary to consider the full range of temperatures to which the capacitors will be exposed, in both the energized and deenergized modes. 12.6.3  Shunt Capacitors The most common application of power capacitors is shunt connected capacitors and they are either energized continuously or switched on and off during load cycles. Common Shunt Capacitor Connections.  Figure 12-61 shows four of the most common capacitor connections: three-phase grounded wye, three-phase ungrounded wye, three-phase delta, and single phase. Grounded or ungrounded wye connections are usually made on medium- and high-voltage systems, whereas delta and single-phase connections are usually made on low-voltage systems. Grounded-wye capacitors can bypass some line surges to ground and therefore exhibit a certain degree of self-protection from transient voltages and lightning surges. The grounded-wye connection also provides a low impedance path for harmonics. If the capacitors are electrically connected ungrounded-wye, the maximum fault current would be limited to three times line current. If the available fault current exceeds the tank rupture curve the use of current limiting fuses must be considered. Low-Voltage Shunt Capacitors.  Low-voltage shunt capacitors are typically applied in industrial power systems, in voltage ratings from 240 to 600 V over the range of 2.5 to 100 kvar three-phase. They can be used for power factor improvement and voltage support on low-voltage systems where adjustable speed drives, power electronics, and other industrial equipment are applied. Low-voltage capacitors made with metalized polypropylene are self-healing. That is, the conductors consist of very thin layers of metal deposited on the film dielectric. In the event of short circuit, the conductor vaporizes to eliminate the fault with negligible loss of capacitance and continued operation. External fuses are not required on these units although some users add them for additional protection of their connections and for ground faults.

FIGURE 12-61  Common methods for connecting capacitors.

12_Santoso_Sec12_p0709-0800.indd 786

21/11/17 3:51 PM

SWITCHGEAR AND POWER COMPONENTS   787 

FIGURE 12-62  Typical pole-mounted distribution capacitor bank.

Distribution Shunt Capacitors.  Capacitors for overhead distribution systems can be polemounted, typically in banks of 300 to 3600 kvar, at nearly any system voltage up to 34.5 kV phaseto-phase. Pad-mounted capacitor equipments are used for underground distribution systems in the same range of sizes and voltage ratings. See Fig. 12-62 for a typical pole-mounted capacitor bank. The majority of the power capacitor equipment installed on medium-voltage distribution systems is connected grounded-wye. Grounded-wye capacitors are desirable on distribution lines where single-phase reclosers are applied. For example, if a recloser opens a single phase of a three-phase distribution line with an ungrounded-wye capacitor bank applied down circuit of the recloser, the neutral will shift on the capacitor bank and apply a voltage on the opened phase resulting in an unsafe system condition. With the grounded-wye connection, tanks and frames of switching equipment are at ground potential. This also provides increased personnel safety. In addition, grounded-wye connections provide for faster fuse operation in case of a capacitor failure. Distribution shunt capacitors can be protected with individual unit fuses or group fused. Tank rupture curves are essential to the correct selection of fuse links for overcurrent protection of any capacitor installation. Fuse selections should be based upon the coordination of the fuse-link maximum clearing curve (Fig. 12-63) and the high-voltage capacitor tank-rupture curve (Fig. 12-60). Several fundamental principles must be observed in the selection of fuses for capacitor applications: 1. The fuse link must be capable of continuously carrying 135% of the nominal capacitor current as a minimum. Higher values may be required when high harmonic currents are present. 2. The fuse cutout must have sufficient interrupting capacity to successfully handle the available fault current, clearing voltage, and available energy before the capacitor tank ruptures. Also, the fuse cutout voltage rating should be properly rated for the application. (If the capacitor bank is not grounded then phase-to-ground rated cutouts should not be used.) 3. The fuse link must withstand, without damage, the normal transient current during bank energization or de-energization. Similarly, it must withstand the capacitor unit’s discharge current during a terminal-to-terminal short. 4. For ungrounded-wye banks, maximum fault current is usually limited to three times normal line current. The fuse link must clear within 5 min at 95% of available fault current.

12_Santoso_Sec12_p0709-0800.indd 787

21/11/17 3:51 PM

788  SECTION TWELVE

6T

10T

15T

25T

12T 20T

8T

40T

65T 100T

30T 50T 80T

6T

10T 8T

200T 140T

15T 12T

25T

40T 65T 100T

20T

30T

50T 80T

200T 140T

5000 6000 7000 8000 9000 10000

4000

3000

2000

500 600 700 800 900 1000

400

300

200

40 50 60 70 80 90 100

30

20

4 5 6 7 8 9 10

3

2

0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 1

Melting characteristics for use link

Current in amperes FIGURE 12-63  Typical time-current curve for an expulsion fuse.

12_Santoso_Sec12_p0709-0800.indd 788

21/11/17 3:51 PM

SWITCHGEAR AND POWER COMPONENTS   789 

5. For effective capacitor protection, maximum asymmetric rms fault current should not exceed the current value at the intercept point of the capacitor tank-rupture time-current characteristic (TCC) curve and the minimum time shown on the fuse maximum-clearing TCC curve. 6. The maximum-clearing TCC curve of the fuse link must coordinate with the tank-rupture TCC curve of the capacitor unit. For more detailed information on the application of shunt capacitors in distributions systems refer to IEEE 1036.4 For application guidance on external fuses for shunt capacitors refer to IEEE C37.48.5 Substation Shunt Capacitor Banks.  Substation shunt capacitor banks are usually installed grounded-wye, ungrounded-wye, or delta. Delta connected shunt banks are usually at lower voltages, for example, 2400 V. Grounded-wye shunt capacitor bank installations are typically more economical than ungrounded-wye banks because the neutral does not have to be insulated for the system voltage. This advantage increases with system voltage. Also, the transient recovery voltages (TRV) for grounded-wye banks are less than ungrounded-wye, thus reducing the TRV requirements for switching equipment. A disadvantage of grounded-wye shunt capacitor banks is that there is the possibility of high frequency switching transients in the ground grid that could induce transients in relay and control cables resulting in erroneous relay operations. The effect of these transients can be mitigated by specific neutral grounding methods of the capacitor bank installation. Two common methods of neutral grounding utilized are single point grounding and peninsula type grounding. For single point grounding, the neutrals of all capacitor banks at a specific voltage within the station are connected together and tied to the substation ground grid at only one point, effectively keeping the transients out of the ground grid. For peninsula grounding, a ground grid is established in the capacitor area and the neutral of each capacitor bank is connected to the peninsula ground grid conductors, then the peninsula ground grid is connected to the main station ground grid at only one point. This isolates the transients from the main ground grid. These grounding methods are discussed in more detail in IEEE 1036.4 Ungrounded-wye shunt capacitor banks may be applied at any system voltage as long as the insulation and TRV requirements are considered. For shunt banks that have only one series group, it is more desirable to install an ungrounded-wye bank. In a grounded-wye bank with one series group, if one unit completely shorts and the phaseto-ground fault current is too high it will rupture the unit. With an ungrounded-wye bank, the fault current is limited to three times the bank current. There are three common substation shunt capacitor bank types utilized today: externally fused, internally fused, and fuseless. These three types are briefly described in this subsection. For more detailed information on the application and protection of substation shunt capacitor banks, refer to IEEE 1036,4 IEEE C37.99,6 and IEEE C37.48.5 Externally Fused Shunt Capacitor Banks.  An externally fused shunt capacitor bank is made up of series groups of parallel connected capacitor units. Each unit is individually fused with an expulsion or current-limiting fuse mounted external to the unit. A typical schematic for an externally fused shunt capacitor bank is shown in Fig. 12-64. A capacitor unit voltage rating is usually chosen to limit the number of series groups to as few as possible, while achieving the desired voltage rating of the bank. This usually results in the simplest design and highest sensitivity for unbalance protection. Fewer series groups may mean more units in parallel in each series group. This could require the use of current limiting unit fuses instead of expulsion type fuses. When a unit fails in an externally fused bank the other units in parallel with it will discharge into the failed unit through its individual fuse. When the energy from this discharge exceeds the energy capability of an expulsion fuse, the user will have to specify current limiting fuses which have a higher energy capability. To avoid this, the user can specify a lower-voltage rating for the units and design the bank with more series groups and fewer units in parallel. Another option is to split the bank in two sections, called a double-wye configuration.

12_Santoso_Sec12_p0709-0800.indd 789

21/11/17 3:51 PM

790  SECTION TWELVE

FIGURE 12-64  Schematic of a typical externally fused shunt capacitor bank.

For principles of fuse selection for the individual units refer to the earlier section on distribution shunt capacitors. For more detailed guidance on fusing refer to IEEE C37.485 and IEEE C37.48.1.7 It is also important to keep a minimum number of units in parallel in each series group. When a fuse operates and removes a unit from a series group the voltage will increase on the remaining units in parallel with it. It is desirable to have enough units in parallel so that the 110% overvoltage capability will not be exceeded for the loss of one unit. There are curves available to help determine the voltage on remaining capacitor units in a series group based on the percentage of capacitor units removed from the series group. These curves are located in IEEE 1036,4 which covers the application of shunt capacitors. The curves were previously located in an appendix of IEEE 18,1 but were removed from the 2002 revision. A typical externally-fused shunt capacitor bank is shown in Fig. 12-65.

FIGURE 12-65  Typical externally fused shunt capacitor bank.

12_Santoso_Sec12_p0709-0800.indd 790

21/11/17 3:51 PM

SWITCHGEAR AND POWER COMPONENTS   791 

Internally Fused Shunt Capacitor Banks.  An internally fused capacitor bank is made up of series and/or parallel connected capacitor units. The units are made up of capacitor elements connected in series/parallel combinations to achieve the desired rated voltage and kvar rating. A fuse is put in series with each element inside the unit case. An internally fused unit is shown schematically in Fig. 12-66. When a failure of a capacitor element occurs, its individual fuse will operate to isolate the element. The unit typically has a large number of elements in parallel so that the loss of one element does not have a significant increase in voltage on the remaining elements in parallel with the failed element. The kvar rating of internally fused units is typically much larger than externally fused units. Internally fused capacitor banks typically Unit have fewer units in parallel and more series FIGURE 12-66  Internal connection diagram of a groups than externally fused capacitor banks. A typical schematic for an internally fused typical internally fused capacitor unit. shunt capacitor bank is shown in Fig. 12-67. It is usually desirable to have at least two units in parallel. If one unit has a large number of failed elements, the unit in parallel will help keep down

FIGURE 12-67  Schematic of a typical internally fused shunt capacitor bank.

12_Santoso_Sec12_p0709-0800.indd 791

21/11/17 3:51 PM

792  SECTION TWELVE

FIGURE 12-68  Example of an internally fused shunt capacitor bank.

the terminal-to-terminal voltage. The maximum number of capacitor units that can be put in parallel is determined by the energy capability of the internally fused unit. A typical internally fused capacitor bank is shown in Fig. 12-68. Fuseless Shunt Capacitor Banks.  A fuseless shunt capacitor bank is not simply an externally fused capacitor bank with the fuses removed. The capacitor bank has a different arrangement of capacitor units designed to operate without fuses. A fuseless shunt capacitor bank is made up of units connected in series phase-to-ground or phase-to-neutral. This arrangement of units is called a series string. The unit voltage is selected to achieve the desired voltage rating of the bank. The kvar rating of the unit is chosen to achieve a desired reactive output per each string. Then the bank kvar rating can be increased in these increments by putting multiple series strings of capacitors in parallel. A schematic for a typical fuseless shunt capacitor bank is shown in Fig. 12-69. The fuseless capacitor bank is made up of parallel groups of series units, while the externally fused bank is made up of series groups of parallel units. Fuseless capacitor bank installations were made possible with the design of the all-film dielectric capacitor unit, described earlier in this section. The common failure mode of an element in an all-film dielectric unit is for it to fail shorted. When it shorts, the aluminum foil melts and welds together creating a low-resistance point that will continue to carry the current through the capacitor indefinitely. Typically, kvar ratings of units in fuseless capacitor banks are larger than units used in externally fused capacitor banks. This is because fuseless banks do not have the same design consideration of

12_Santoso_Sec12_p0709-0800.indd 792

21/11/17 3:51 PM

SWITCHGEAR AND POWER COMPONENTS   793 

Capacitor racks A

B

C

FIGURE 12-69  Schematic of a typical fuseless shunt capacitor bank. (Two parallel series strings of 12 units in series.)

keeping a minimum number of units in parallel for unbalance protection, as discussed previously for externally fused banks. With the units connected in series, if one element in a unit fails the voltage will increase proportionately across the remaining elements in series with it. For example: if a unit has 10 series groups of elements inside each unit and there are five units in a series string, then there will be 50 elements in series phase-to-neutral. If one element fails then the voltage on the remaining elements in series will increase by 1/50th of the total phase-to-neutral voltage. The unbalance protection would usually be set to trip when the overvoltage has exceeded the 110% capability of the elements. When designing a fuseless bank and choosing the rated voltage and kvar of the units, keep in mind the continuous current capability and the transient current capability of the units. With the series string design of a fuseless bank, there are typically fewer parallel paths for these currents. Also, keep in mind maintainability of the bank. Larger kvar units weigh more and may require special rigging or considerations. A typical fuseless shunt capacitor bank is shown in Fig. 12-70.

12_Santoso_Sec12_p0709-0800.indd 793

21/11/17 3:51 PM

794  SECTION TWELVE

FIGURE 12-70  Example of a fuseless shunt capacitor bank.

Harmonic Filter Shunt Capacitor Banks.  Non-linear devices or loads, such as rectifiers and arc furnaces, can create harmonic distortion on the power system. Excessive harmonic voltages or currents can create problems for equipment and the electrical system in general. One common way to eliminate these harmonics is to install a passive harmonic filter near the device or load to shunt some of the harmonic current and thereby reduce the harmonic current flowing into the system. A schematic for a typical harmonic filter capacitor bank is shown in Fig. 12-71. The need for harmonic filters can be on low-, medium-, or high-voltage electrical systems. For low-voltage systems the dry-type, metalized film capacitors are typically used and an inductor is used to create an LC circuit approximately tuned to the frequency of the harmonic being generated. For medium- and high-voltage systems the allfilm, oil-filled dielectric capacitors are commonly used and, depending on the system voltage, a drytype or oil-filled reactor is used to create an LC circuit approximately tuned to the frequency of the harmonic being generated. The capacitor portion for medium- and high-voltage harmonic filter banks can be externally fused, internally fused, or fuseless. Harmonic filter capacitor banks may look FIGURE 12-71  Typical schematic of a harsimilar to conventional shunt capacitor banks, but monic filter shunt capacitor bank.

12_Santoso_Sec12_p0709-0800.indd 794

21/11/17 3:51 PM

SWITCHGEAR AND POWER COMPONENTS   795 

there are different criteria to consider when designing a harmonic filter bank. In general, the following should be considered when designing a harmonic filter bank: 1. Reactive power (kvar) requirements 2. Harmonic limitations 3. Normal system conditions, including ambient harmonics 4. Normal harmonic filter conditions 5. Contingency system conditions, including ambient harmonics 6. Contingency harmonic filter conditions For detailed guidance in designing low-, medium-, and high-voltage harmonic filter capacitor banks refer to IEEE 1531.3 A typical harmonic filter shunt capacitor bank is shown in Fig. 12-72.

FIGURE 12-72  Typical high-voltage harmonic filter shunt capacitor bank.

12_Santoso_Sec12_p0709-0800.indd 795

21/11/17 3:51 PM

796  SECTION TWELVE

Protective Relaying for Shunt Capacitor Banks.  Protection of shunt capacitor banks includes bank and system protection schemes. Bank protection schemes usually involve some type of unbalance protection to trip the bank for overvoltage due to unit (element) failures, overcurrent protection for faults in the bank other than in units, and phase overcurrent or negative sequence protection for rack-to-rack flashovers in a phaseover-phase bank design. System protection schemes can involve phase voltage relays for system overvoltage conditions, bus overcurrent, ground-overcurrent, or differential protection for faults in the capacitor installation or major capacitor bank failure, harmonic overload protection for excessive harmonic currents in the system, undervoltage relays for system outages, and breaker failure relays. The following is a list of basic considerations for protection of shunt capacitor banks: 1. Type of shunt capacitor bank (externally fused, internally fused, or fuseless) 2. Bank connection (grounded-wye, ungrounded-wye, double-wye, etc.) 3. Capacitor bank design and arrangement of units 4. Normal and contingency system conditions 5. Point of connection to the power system 6. Capacitor unit capabilities 7. Impact of geomagnetic induced currents on protection and harmonic loading 8. Overvoltage on remaining capacitor units 9. Installation grounding for grounded banks (single-point or peninsula grounding) For detailed guidance on the protection of conventional and harmonic filter shunt capacitor banks refer to IEEE C37.99.6

12.6.4  Series Capacitor Banks Fixed (Conventional) Series Capacitors.  A fixed series capacitor bank is an assembly of different components inserted in series with a power line to reduce the apparent reactance, increase the power transfer capability, and improve system stability. The major components of a fixed series capacitor bank include capacitors, varistors, bypass gaps, bypass switches, discharge current limiting reactors, insulated structures, and protection and control systems. The inserted reactance is primarily established by the reactance of the capacitors. A schematic for a typical fixed series capacitor bank is shown in Fig. 12-73. The capacitors can be of the externally fused, internally fused, or fuseless design. Series capacitor banks are more commonly applied on higher-voltage transmission systems,

FIGURE 12-73  Schematic of fixed conventional series capacitor bank.

12_Santoso_Sec12_p0709-0800.indd 796

21/11/17 3:51 PM

SWITCHGEAR AND POWER COMPONENTS   797 

FIGURE 12-74  Typical fixed series transmission series capacitor bank.

but they have been applied on distribution systems. See Fig. 12-74 for a typical high-voltage series capacitor bank. For detailed information on the design, application and protection of fixed transmission series capacitor banks refer to IEEE 8242 and “Series Compensation of Power Systems.”8 For guidance in the functional specification of transmission fixed-series capacitor banks refer to IEEE 1726.9 For information on distribution series capacitors, the user can refer to an IEEE Transactions paper written by the IEEE Series Capacitor Working Group.10 For information on protection of transmission series capacitor banks refer to IEEE C37.116.11 General information about the protection of series capacitor banks can also be found in the IEEE Special Publication TP-126-0.12 Thyristor-Controlled Series Capacitors.  A thyristor-controlled series capacitor (TCSC) is a series capacitor bank paralleled with a thyristor-controlled reactor. In the controlled operation mode, periodic gating results in thyristor currents at a frequency higher than the power frequency, which add with the line current. This boosts the capacitor voltage beyond the level that would be obtained by the line current alone. Also, controlled operation provides dynamic var compensation to control line current or through power. A schematic for a TCSC bank is shown in Fig. 12-75. The ability to control TCSC reactance rapidly provides a degree of transient stability and subsynchronous resonance mitigation, which is an advantage a TCSC has over a fixed series capacitor bank. A typical TCSC is shown in Fig. 12-76. For FIGURE 12-75 Typical schematic of a thyristor detailed information on thyristor controlled series capacitors refer to IEEE 1534.13 controlled series capacitor bank.

12_Santoso_Sec12_p0709-0800.indd 797

21/11/17 3:52 PM

798  SECTION TWELVE

FIGURE 12-76  Typical thyristor controlled series capacitor bank.

12.6.5  Capacitor Switching This section will not go into the details of specifying equipment used to switch and protect capacitor banks. A bibliography of documents providing rating, application, and specification information on switching equipment for shunt and series capacitors is provided at the end of this section for the user’s reference. Many users apply fixed inductors, referred to as transient limiting inductors (TLI), to limit transient switching currents. The IEEE PES Capacitor Subcommittee developed a Technical Report, PES-TR16,14 to provide guidance on uses and sizing of TLIs, where to locate them, and the drawbacks of installing them. In addition, it provides appendices with information on capacitor bank switching transients and switching transient mitigation methods. 12.6.6 References 1. IEEE 18, Standard for Shunt Power Capacitors. 2. IEEE 824, Standard for Series Capacitor Banks in Power Systems. 3. IEEE 1531, Guide for Application and Specification of Harmonic Filters. 4. IEEE 1036, Guide for the Application of Shunt Power Capacitors. 5. IEEE C37.48, Guide for the Application, Operation, and Maintenance of High-Voltage Fuses, Distribution Enclosed Single-Pole Air Switches, Fuse Disconnecting Switches, and Accessories. 6. IEEE C37.99, Guide for the Protection of Shunt Capacitor Banks. 7. IEEE C37.48.1, Guide for the Operation, Classification, Application, and Coordination of Current-Limiting Fuses with Rated Voltages 1-38 kV. 8. P. M. Anderson and R. G. Farmer, Series Compensation of Power Systems, PBLSH! Inc., 1996, Internet http://www.pblsh.com/CDsBooks.

12_Santoso_Sec12_p0709-0800.indd 798

21/11/17 3:52 PM

SWITCHGEAR AND POWER COMPONENTS   799 

9. IEEE 1726, Guide for the Functional Specification of Fixed-Series Capacitor Banks for Transmission System Applications. 10. “Considerations for the application of series capacitors to radial power distribution circuits,” IEEE Transactions on Power Delivery, vol. 16, Issue 2, April 2001, Page(s):306–318. 11. IEEE C37.116, Guide for Protective Relay Application to Transmission-Line Series Capacitor Banks. 12. IEEE Special Publication TP-126-0, Series Capacitor Bank Protection. 13. IEEE 1534, Recommended Practice for Specifying Thyristor Controlled Series Capacitors. 14. PES-TR16, Transient Limiting Inductor Applications in Shunt Capacitor Banks, Nov. 2014.

12.6.7 Bibliography Capacitor Literature

Benitez, J., Application of Capacitors for Power Factor Correction of Industrial Electrical Distribution Systems, Industry Applications Society 39th Annual Petroleum and Chemical Industry Conference, 1992, Record of Conference Papers., 28–30 Sept. 1992, Page(s):77–86. Blooming, T. M. and Carnovale, D. J., Capacitor Application Issues, IEEE Transactions on Industry Applications, vol. 44, No 4, July-Aug 2008, Page(s):1013. Bonner, J. A., Hurst, W. M., Rocamora, R. G., Dudley, R. F., Sharp, M. R., and Twiss, J. A., Selecting Ratings for Capacitors and Reactors in Applications Involving Multiple Single-Tuned Filters, IEEE Transactions on Power Delivery, vol. 10, Issue 1, Jan. 1995, Page(s):547–555. Capacitive Current Switching—State of the Art, Electra No. 155, Aug. 1994, Page(s):33. Chang, G. W., Chao, J. P., Huang, H. M., Chen, C. I., and Chu, S. Y., On Tracking the Source Location of Voltage Sag and Utility Shunt Capacitor Switching; IEEE Transactions on Power Delivery, vol. 23, No. 4, Oct. 2008, Page(s):2124. Dugan, R. C. and Kennedy, B. W., Predicting Harmonic Problems Resulting from Customer Capacitor Additions for Demand-Side Management, IEEE Transactions on Power Systems, vol. 10, Issue 4, Nov. 1995, Page(s):1765–1771. Guillermin, C., Dujeu, O., and Lupin, J., Metallized Film Power Capacitors End-of-Life Study Through Monitored Destruction Tests, IEEE Transactions on Power Delivery, vol. 28, Issue 1, 2013, Pages:368–375. Hammond, P. W., A Harmonic Filter Installation to Reduce Voltage Distortion from Static Power Converters, IEEE Transactions on Industry Applications, vol. 24, Issue 1, Part 1, Jan.-Feb. 1988, Page(s):53–58. Jowder, F. A. R. A and Ooi, B., Series Compensation of Radial Power System by a Combination of SSSC and Dielectric Capacitors, IEEE Transactions on Power Delivery, vol. 20, No. 1, Jan. 2005, Page(s):458–465. Kalyuzhny, A., Switching Capacitor Bank Back-to-Back to Underground Cables, IEEE Transactions on Power Delivery, vol. 28, Issue 2, Apr. 2013, Page(s):1128–1137. Li, C., Initial Voltage Change on Capacitor Switching, IEEE Transactions on Power Delivery, vol. 27, Issue 1, Jan. 2012, Page(s):452–454. McGranaghan, M. F. and Mueller, D. R., Designing Harmonic Filters for Adjustable-Speed Drives to Comply with IEEE-519 Harmonic Limits, IEEE Transactions on Industry Applications, vol. 35, Issue 2, Mar.-Apr. 1999, Page(s):312–318. Mendis, S. R., Bishop, M. T., McCall, J. C., Hurst, W. M., Overcurrent Protection of Capacitors Applied on Industrial Distribution Systems, IEEE Transactions on Industry Applications, vol. 29, Issue 3, May–Jun. 1993, Page(s):541–547. Miske, S. A.(Working Group paper of the IEEE Capacitor Subcommittee), Considerations for the Application of Series Capacitors to Radial Power Distribution Circuits, IEEE Transactions on Power Delivery, vol. 16, Issue 2, Apr. 2001, Page(s):306–318. Nelson, J. H., Rostron, J. R., and Luke, D. J., Two-Stage, 161-kV, Fuseless Shunt Capacitor Bank, in Proc. 2014 IEEE/PES Transmission and Distribution Conference and Exposition, vol. 12, 14-17 Apr. 2014. Nepveux, F. J., Protection of Tuned Capacitor Banks, IEEE Transactions on Industry Applications, vol. 44, No. 4, Jul.-Aug. 2008, Page(s):973. Peggs, J. F., Powell, P. W., Grebe, T. E., Innovations for Protection and Control of High Voltage Capacitor Banks on the Virginia Power System, Proceedings of the 1994 IEEE Power Engineering Society Transmission and Distribution Conference, 10-15 Apr. 1994, Page(s):284–290.

12_Santoso_Sec12_p0709-0800.indd 799

21/11/17 3:52 PM

800  SECTION TWELVE

Peeran, S. M. and Cascadden, C. W. P., Application, Design, and Specification of Harmonic Filters for Variable Frequency Drives, IEEE Transactions on Industry Applications, vol. 31, Issue 4, Jul.-Aug. 1995, Page(s):841–847. Power Capacitor Bibliography, IEEE/PES Capacitor Subcommittee webpage, http://grouper.ieee.org/groups/td/ cap/. Power Capacitor for Harmonic Filter Bibliography, IEEE/PES Capacitor Subcommittee webpage, http://grouper. ieee.org/groups/td/cap/. Series Power Capacitor Bibliography, IEEE/PES Capacitor Subcommittee webpage, http://grouper.ieee.org/ groups/td/cap/. Sevigny, R., Menard, S., Rajotte, C., and McVey, M., Capacitor Measurement in the Substation Environment: A New Approach, 2000 IEEE ESMO-2000 IEEE 9th International Conference on Transmission and Distribution Construction, Operation and Live-Line Maintenance Proceedings, 8–12 Oct. 2000, Page(s):299–305. Thiel, P. H., Harder, J. E., and Taylor, G. E., Fuseless Capacitor Banks, IEEE Transactions on Power Delivery, vol. 7, Issue 2, Apr. 1992, Page(s):1009–1015. Standards and Application Guides for Equipment Used to Switch Power Capacitors IEEE 824, Standard for Series Capacitor Banks in Power Systems. IEEE 1247, Standard for Interrupter Switches for Alternating Current, Rated above 1000 Volts. IEEE C37.04, Standard Rating Structure for AC High-Voltage Circuit Breakers. IEEE C37.012, Application Guide for Capacitance Current Switching for AC High-Voltage Circuit Breakers. IEEE C37.016, Standard for Circuit Switchers. IEEE C37.66, Standard Requirements for Capacitor Switches for AC Systems, 1-38 kV. IEC 62271-109, Alternating Current Series Capacitor By-Pass Switches.

12_Santoso_Sec12_p0709-0800.indd 800

21/11/17 3:52 PM

13 1

POWER TRANSFORMERS Pavlos S. Georgilakis National Technical University of Athens (NTUA), Athens, Greece; Senior Member, IEEE

13.1 TRANSFORMER THEORY AND PRINCIPLES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 802 13.1.1 Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 802 13.1.2 Magnetic Materials. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 803 13.1.3 Induced Voltage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 803 13.1.4 Equivalent Circuit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 805 13.1.5 Derivation of Equivalent Circuit Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 807 13.2 TRANSFORMER ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 808 13.2.1 Rated Power. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 808 13.2.2 Temperature Rise. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 808 13.2.3 Ambient Temperature. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 808 13.2.4 Altitude of Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 809 13.2.5 Impedance Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 809 13.2.6 No-Load Losses. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 809 13.2.7 Load Losses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 809 13.2.8 Rated Voltages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 810 13.2.9 Vector Group. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 810 13.2.10 Frequency. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 811 13.2.11 Short-Circuit Current. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 811 13.2.12 No-Load Current. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 811 13.2.13 Voltage Regulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 811 13.2.14 Efficiency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 812 13.3 TRANSFORMER TYPES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 814 13.3.1 Classification According to Transformer Use. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 814 13.3.2 Classification According to Transformer Cooling Method . . . . . . . 815 13.3.3 Classification According to Transformer Insulating Medium. . . . . 815 13.3.4 Classification According to Transformer Core Construction . . . . . 816 13.4 TRANSFORMER CONNECTIONS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 816 13.4.1 Y-Y Connection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 817 13.4.2 Y-D Connection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 817 13.4.3 D-Y Connection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 817 13.4.4 D-D Connection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 818 13.4.5 Z-Connection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 819 13.5 STEP-VOLTAGE REGULATORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 819 13.5.1 Regulation Method. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 820 13.5.2 Regulator Technical Characteristics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 821 13.5.3 Regulator Control Functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 821 13.5.4 Bypassing Voltage Regulators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 822 13.5.5 Three-Phase Voltage Regulators. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 822 13.5.6 Voltage Regulator Developments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 822 13.6 TAP CHANGERS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 823 13.6.1 Types of Load Tap Changers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 824 13.6.2 Applications of Load Tap Changers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 824 13.6.3 Phase-Shifting Transformers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 825 13.7 TRANSFORMER DESIGN. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 826 13.7.1 Problem Formulation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 826 13.7.2 Objective Function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 827

801

13_Santoso_Sec13_p0801-0866.indd 801

23/11/17 11:23 AM

802  SECTION THIRTEEN



13.8

13.9

13.10

13.11 13.12

13.13 13.14 13.15

13.16 13.17 13.18 13.19

13.7.3 Constraints. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 827 13.7.4 Solution Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 827 13.7.5 Multiple Design Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 827 TRANSFORMER INSULATION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 828 13.8.1 Oil-Insulated Transformers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 829 13.8.2 Alternative Fluids of Liquid-Insulated Transformers . . . . . . . . . . . . 829 13.8.3 Gas-Insulated Transformers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 830 13.8.4 Design of Operating Structures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 830 TRANSFORMER COOLING. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 831 13.9.1 Heat Transfer Mechanisms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 832 13.9.2 Calculation of Temperatures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 832 13.9.3 Design Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 833 13.9.4 Insulation Aging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 834 TRANSFORMER SOUND LEVELS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 834 13.10.1 Source of Sound . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 835 13.10.2 Sound Measurement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 835 13.10.3 Sound Level Reduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 836 TRANSFORMER OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 836 13.11.1 Loading Practice. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 836 13.11.2 Parallel Operation of Transformers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 837 TRANSFORMER TESTING. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 844 13.12.1 Type Tests. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 844 13.12.2 Routine Tests. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 845 13.12.3 Special Tests. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 846 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 846 13.13.1 Overcurrent Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 847 13.13.2 Protection against Lightning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 847 TRANSFORMER NAMEPLATE INFORMATION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 848 TRANSFORMER INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . 849 13.15.1 Inspection on Arrival. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 849 13.15.2 Oil Sampling. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 850 13.15.3 Testing for Oil Dielectric Strength. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 850 13.15.4 Filtering to Increase Dielectric Strength. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 850 13.15.5 Drying the Core and Coils. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 851 13.15.6 Time Required for Drying. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 851 13.15.7 Insulation Resistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 851 13.15.8 Insulation Power-Factor Reading. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 851 13.15.9 Filling without Vacuum. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 851 13.15.10 Filling with Vacuum. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 852 13.15.11 Energization. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 852 13.15.12 Internal Inspection of In-Service Transformers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 853 13.15.13 Operating without Cooling. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 853 TRANSFORMER CONDITION MONITORING AND ASSESSMENT. . . . 853 TRANSFORMER LOSS EVALUATION AND SELECTION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 856 13.17.1 Evaluation Methodology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 856 TRANSFORMER STANDARDS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 862 FURTHER READING. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 864

13.1  TRANSFORMER THEORY AND PRINCIPLES 13.1.1 Introduction A power transformer is a static device that, by electromagnetic induction, transmits electrical power from one alternating voltage level to another without changing the frequency. It has two or more windings of wire wrapped around a ferromagnetic core. These windings are not electrically connected, but they are magnetically coupled, that is, the only connection between the windings is the magnetic flux present within the core.

13_Santoso_Sec13_p0801-0866.indd 802

23/11/17 11:23 AM

Power Transformers   803 

One of the transformer windings, the primary winding, is connected to an alternating current (ac) electric power source. The second transformer winding, the secondary winding, supplies electric power to loads. If the transformer has three windings, then the third winding, the tertiary winding, also supplies electric power to loads. The electrical energy received by the primary winding is first converted into magnetic energy that is reconverted back into a useful electrical energy in the secondary winding (and tertiary winding, if it exists). A transformer is called a step-up transformer if its secondary winding voltage is higher than its primary winding voltage. In a step-up transformer, the primary winding is also called the low-voltage winding and the secondary winding is also called the high-voltage winding. On the other hand, if the transformer secondary winding voltage is lower than its primary winding voltage, the transformer is called a step-down transformer. In a step-down transformer, the primary winding is also called the high-voltage winding and the secondary winding is also called the low-voltage winding. The transformer is an electrical machine that allows the transmission and distribution of electrical energy simply and inexpensively, since its efficiency is from 95% to 99%, that is, the transformer operates more efficiently than most electrical devices. This means that the transformer changes one ac voltage level to another while keeping the input power, that is, the power at the first voltage level is practically equal to the output power, that is, the power supplied to the loads. In a step-up transformer, the secondary voltage is higher than the primary voltage, which means that the secondary current has to be lower than the primary current to keep the input power equal to the output power. Because the power losses in the transmission lines are proportional to the square of the current in the transmission lines, raising the transmission voltage and reducing the resulting transmission currents by a factor of 10 with step-up transformers reduces transmission line losses by a factor of 100. That is why step-up transformers are used in power generating stations so that more power can be transmitted efficiently long distances. Step-down transformers are used in power distribution networks, factories, commercial buildings, and residences to reduce the voltage to a level at which the equipment and appliances can operate. Transformers play also a key role in the interconnection of power systems at different voltage levels. Without the transformer, it would simply not be possible to use electric power in many of the ways it is used today. Consequently, transformers occupy prominent positions in the electric power system, being the vital links between power generating stations and points of electric power utilization. 13.1.2  Magnetic Materials In the context of transformer manufacturing, the importance of magnetic materials is twofold. First, through their use it is possible to obtain large magnetic flux densities with relatively low levels of magnetizing force, which plays an important role in the performance of a transformer. Second, since magnetic materials can be used to constrain and direct magnetic fields in well-defined paths, in transformers the magnetic materials are used to maximize the coupling between the windings as well as to lower the excitation current required for transformer operation. 2 The relationship between the magnetic field density B (Wb/m or T ) and the magnetic field intensity H (A ⋅ t/m) for a magnetic material is both nonlinear and multivalued. In general, the characteristics of the material cannot be described analytically. They are commonly presented in graphical form as a set of empirically determined curves based on test samples of the material. The most common curve used to describe a magnetic material is the B − H curve or hysteresis loop. For many engineering applications it is sufficient to describe the material using the dc or normal magnetization curve, which is a curve drawn through the maximum values of B and H at the tips of the hysteresis loops. Such a curve is shown in Fig. 13-1. 13.1.3  Induced Voltage In magnetic circuits with windings, such as Fig. 13-2, when the magnetic field in the core varies with time, an induced voltage e is produced at the terminals, which is calculated by Faraday’s law:

13_Santoso_Sec13_p0801-0866.indd 803

e=N⋅

dφ dλ = (13-1) dt dt

23/11/17 11:23 AM

Magnetic flux density (T)

804  SECTION THIRTEEN

1.2 1 0.8 0.6 0.4 0.2 0

1

10 100 Magnetic field intensity (A.t/m)

1000

FIGURE 13-1  Magnetization curve.

Mean length Lc

i +

N turns

–

FIGURE 13-2  Magnetic circuit.

where N is the number of turns, f is the time-varying magnetic flux, and λ is the flux linkage of the winding (coil) in weber-turns ( Wb ⋅ t). Let us suppose that the magnetic flux f is sinusoidal:

φ = Φ max ⋅ sin(ω ⋅ t ) (13-2)



where Φ max is the maximum flux and ω (rad/s) is the angular frequency. By combining Eqs. (13-1) and (13-2), the induced voltage e is computed from the following equation: e = ω ⋅ N ⋅Φ max ⋅ cos(ω ⋅ t ) (13-3)



The effective value E of the induced voltage e is

ω ⋅ N ⋅Φ max 2 ⋅ π ⋅ f ⋅ N ⋅Φ max = ⇒ 2 2 E = 4.44 ⋅ f ⋅ N ⋅Φ max

E=

(13-4)

where f (Hz) is the frequency.

13_Santoso_Sec13_p0801-0866.indd 804

23/11/17 11:23 AM

Power Transformers   805 

The maximum flux Φ max is also computed as follows: Φ max = Bmax ⋅ Aeff (13-5)



where Bmax is the maximum magnetic induction (peak magnetic flux density) and Aeff is the effective core cross-section area of the magnetic flux. By combining Eqs. (13-4) and (13-5), the effective value E of the induced voltage e is computed from the following equation:

E = 4.44 ⋅ f ⋅ N ⋅ Bmax ⋅ Aeff (13-6)

13.1.4  Equivalent Circuit The elementary transformer magnetic circuit is shown in Fig. 13-3, where for simplicity the primary and secondary windings are shown on opposite legs of the core. The primary winding has N1 turns and the secondary winding has N 2 turns.

m1 m2

i2

i1 + v1

+ N1

l2

l1

–

N2

v2 –

FIGURE 13-3  Transformer magnetic circuit.

The leakage flux Φl1 is generated by current i1 flowing in winding 1 (primary) and it links only the turns of winding 1. The leakage flux Φl 2 is produced by current i2 flowing in winding 2 (secondary) and it links only the turns of winding 2. The magnetizing flux Φm1 is generated by current i1 flowing in winding 1 and it links all the turns of windings 1 and 2. The magnetizing flux Φm2 is generated by current i2 flowing in winding 2 and it links all the turns of windings 1 and 2. The transformer T equivalent circuit is as shown in Fig. 13-4, where i ϕ is the phasor of the excitation current (also called no-load current), i C is the core-loss current, and i M is the magnetizing current. The parameter a denotes the transformer turns ratio or voltage ratio, that is,

13_Santoso_Sec13_p0801-0866.indd 805

α=

N1 (13-7) N2

23/11/17 11:23 AM

806  SECTION THIRTEEN

i1

jXl1

r1

a 2 · r2

+

ja 2 · Xl2

i2 a +

i iC

v1

iM

RC

a · v2

jXM

–

–

FIGURE 13-4  Transformer T equivalent circuit with winding 1 being the reference winding.

In Fig. 13-4, r1 and r2 denote the resistance of the primary and secondary winding, respectively, while X l1 and X l 2 denote the reactance of the primary and secondary winding, respectively. The resistance RC and the reactance X M , shown in Fig. 13-4, model the core excitation effects. The resistances r1 and r2, shown in Fig. 13-4, model the transformer copper losses of the primary and secondary winding, respectively. Moving the excitation branch (shunt branch) representing the excitation current out from the middle of the T circuit of Fig. 13-4 to either the primary or the secondary windings, as in Figs. 13-5 and 13-6, respectively, often can appreciably reduce the computational effort involved. Error is introduced by neglecting the voltage drop in the primary or the secondary leakage impedance caused by the excitation current, but this error is insignificant in most problems involving power transformers.

i1

REQ

+

i2 a +

i iC

v1

jXEQ

RC

iM jXM

a · v2

–

– REQ = r1 + a 2 · r2 XEQ = Xl1 + a 2 · Xl2

FIGURE 13-5  Transformer approximate equivalent circuit referred to the primary winding of the transformer.

13_Santoso_Sec13_p0801-0866.indd 806

23/11/17 11:23 AM

Power Transformers   807 

Req

a · i2 +

v1 a

jXeq

i2 +

i iC

iM

RC

j

a2

XM

v2

a2

–

– Req = Xeq =

r1 a2 Xl1 a2

+ r2 + Xl2

FIGURE 13-6  Transformer approximate equivalent circuit referred to the secondary winding of the transformer.

13.1.5  Derivation of Equivalent Circuit Parameters In order to determine the parameters of the transformer approximate equivalent circuit of Figs. 13-5 and 13-6, the following two tests are used: 1. Open-circuit test measured from secondary side. During this test, the transformer primary side is open-circuited and rated voltage VOC is applied on the secondary winding, while the current IOC and the power POC on the secondary side are measured. 2. Short-circuit test measured from primary side. During this test, the transformer secondary side is short-circuited and appropriate voltage VSC is applied on the primary winding so as to obtain full-load primary current I SC , while the input power PSC is measured. The open-circuit test yields the values for the excitation branch RC and X M (referred to the secondary side). The magnitude of the excitation admittance (referred to the secondary side) is YEX =



IOC (13-8) VOC

and the angle of the excitation admittance is

 POC  θ EX = − cos −1  (13-9)  VOC ⋅ IOC 

so the excitation admittance is calculated as follows:

YEX = YEX ∠θ EX = GC − jBM (13-10)

where

13_Santoso_Sec13_p0801-0866.indd 807

RC =

1 1 and X M = (13-11) GC BM

23/11/17 11:23 AM

808  SECTION THIRTEEN

The short-circuit test yields the values for the equivalent series impedance Z EQ = REQ + jX EQ (referred to the primary side). The magnitude of the equivalent series impedance (referred to the primary side) is calculated as follows: Z EQ =



VSC (13-12) I SC

and the angle of the equivalent series impedance is computed as follows:

 PSC  θ EQ = cos −1  (13-13)  VSC ⋅ I SC 

and the equivalent series impedance is calculated as follows:

Z EQ = Z EQ ∠θ EQ = REQ + jX EQ (13-14)

13.2  TRANSFORMER ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS 13.2.1  Rated Power The rated power (MVA) of a transformer is the output that can be delivered at rated secondary voltage and rated frequency without exceeding the specified temperature rise limitations. The rated power Sn of a three-phase transformer is calculated using the following formula:

Sn = 3 ⋅U n ⋅ In (13-15)

where U n is the rated voltage and In is the rated current of the transformer. Similarly, the rated power Sn of a single-phase transformer is calculated by the following formula:

Sn = U n ⋅ In (13-16)

13.2.2  Temperature Rise The temperature rise is the difference between the temperature of the part under consideration (usually the average winding rise or the hottest-spot winding rise) and the ambient temperature. The average winding temperature rise of a transformer is the arithmetic difference between the average winding temperature of the hottest winding and the ambient temperature. The top-oil temperature rise is the arithmetic difference between the top-oil temperature (the temperature of the top layer of the insulating liquid in a transformer) and the ambient temperature. Typical characteristics for oil-immersed transformers: •  The average temperature rise of the winding is 65 K, that is, 65°C above the ambient temperature. •  The top-oil temperature rise is 60 K, that is, 60°C above the ambient temperature. 13.2.3  Ambient Temperature The ambient temperature is the temperature of the air into which the heat of the transformer is dissipated. The rated power of the transformer is typically calculated for the following conditions: •  Maximum ambient temperature of 40°C •  Average daily ambient temperature of 30°C •  Average annual ambient temperature of 20°C

13_Santoso_Sec13_p0801-0866.indd 808

23/11/17 11:23 AM

Power Transformers   809 

13.2.4  Altitude of Installation The rated power of a transformer is valid for installation altitudes up to 1000 m. If the transformer is going to be installed at an altitude higher than 1000 m, this should be mentioned in the transformer specification. 13.2.5  Impedance Voltage The impedance voltage or short-circuit impedance or short-circuit voltage is the percentage of the rated primary voltage that has to be applied at the transformer primary winding, when the secondary winding is short-circuited, in order to have the rated current at the primary winding. The impedance voltage is very important because it represents the transformer’s impedance. The higher the short-circuit impedance, the higher the voltage regulation. The lower the short-circuit impedance, the higher the short-circuit current, in case of a short circuit. Based on short-circuit impedance, the following are determined: the voltage regulation due to transformer loading, the distribution of loads in case of parallel operation of transformers, and the short-circuit current. 13.2.6  No-Load Losses Core loss is the power dissipated in the magnetic core subjected to a time-varying magnetizing force. Core loss includes hysteresis and eddy current losses of the core. No-load losses or excitation losses are incident to the excitation of the transformer. No-load losses include core loss, dielectric loss, conductor loss in the winding due to excitation current, and conductor loss due to circulating current in parallel windings. Table 13-1 presents the five lists (E0, D0, C0, B0 , and A0 ) of no-load losses for transformers from 50 to 2500 kVA with 24 kV maximum voltage according to EN 50464-1: 2007. It can be seen that for the same rated power, A0 has the lowest and E0 has the highest no-load losses. 13.2.7  Load Losses Load losses are incident to the carrying of a specified load. Load losses include I 2 ⋅ R loss in the current carrying parts (windings, leads, busbars, bushings), eddy losses in conductors due to eddy currents, and stray loss induced by leakage flux in the tank, core clamps, or other parts. TABLE 13-1  Lists of No-Load Losses According to EN 50464-1: 2007 No-load losses, W Rated power, kVA 50 100 160 250 315 400 500 630 630 800 1000 1250 1600 2000 2500

13_Santoso_Sec13_p0801-0866.indd 809

E0

D0

C0

B0

A0

190 320 460 650 770 930 1100 1300 1200 1400 1700 2100 2600 3100 3500

145 260 375 530 630 750 880 1030 940 1150 1400 1750 2200 2700 3200

125 210 300 425 520 610 720 860 800 930 1100 1350 1700 2100 2500

110 180 260 360 440 520 610 730 680 800 940 1150 1450 1800 2150

90 145 210 300 360 430 510 600 560 650 770 950 1200 1450 1750

Short-circuit impedance, % 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 6 6 6 6 6 6 6

23/11/17 11:23 AM

810  SECTION THIRTEEN

TABLE 13-2  Lists of Load Losses According to EN 50464-1: 2007 Load losses, W Rated power, kVA 50 100 160 250 315 400 500 630 630 800 1000 1250 1600 2000 2500

Dk 1,350 2,150 3,100 4,200 5,000 6,000 7,200 8,400 8,700 10,500 13,000 16,000 20,000 26,000 32,000

Ck

Bk

1,100 1,750 2,350 3,250 3,900 4,600 5,500 6,500 6,750 8,400 10,500 13,500 17,000 21,000 26,500

875 1,475 2,000 2,750 3,250 3,850 4,600 5,400 5,600 7,000 9,000 11,000 14,000 18,000 22,000

Ak 750 1,250 1,700 2,350 2,800 3,250 3,900 4,600 4,800 6,000 7,600 9,500 12,000 15,000 18,500

Short-circuit impedance, % 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 6 6 6 6 6 6 6

Table 13-2 presents the four lists (Dk , Ck , Bk , and Ak ) of load losses for transformers from 50 to 2500 kVA with 24 kV maximum voltage according to EN 50464-1: 2007. It can be seen that for the same rated power, Ak has the lowest and Dk has the highest load losses. For example, it is said that a transformer has a combination of losses of CkC0, if its load losses belong to list Ck and its no-load losses belong to list C0 . More specifically, one transformer with rated power of 1000 kVA and combination of losses CkC0 , has load losses equal to 10,500 W (see Table 13-2) and no-load losses equal to 1100 W (see Table 13-1).

13.2.8  Rated Voltages The rated primary voltage (input voltage) is the voltage at which the transformer is designed to operate. The rated primary voltage determines the basic insulation level (BIL) of the transformer, according to international standards (IEC 60076). The BIL is a basic transformer characteristic, since it indicates the ability of the transformer to withstand the overvoltages that can appear in the network. The calculation of the winding insulation is based on the BIL. The rated secondary voltage (output voltage) is the voltage at the terminals of the secondary winding at no-load, under rated primary voltage and rated frequency.

13.2.9  Vector Group The vector group determines the phase displacement between the primary and the secondary winding. The primary or secondary windings can be connected in different ways in order to have a threephase transformer. These connections are the following: •  D(d): delta connection for primary (secondary) winding •  Y(y): star connection for primary (secondary) winding •  Ζ(z): zigzag connection for primary (secondary) winding •  N(n): the neutral exists in primary (secondary) winding for connection outside the transformer

13_Santoso_Sec13_p0801-0866.indd 810

23/11/17 11:23 AM

Power Transformers   811 

13.2.10 Frequency The frequency at which the transformer is designed to operate is 50 or 60 Hz in accordance with the network frequency. 13.2.11  Short-Circuit Current The short-circuit current is composed of the asymmetrical and the symmetrical short-circuit current. The asymmetrical short-circuit current stresses the transformer mechanically, while the symmetrical short-circuit current stresses the transformer thermally. In case of sudden short-circuits, mechanical forces increase many times and can be dangerous for the transformer. In some cases, steady state short-circuit current reaches as high as 10 to 15 times the transformer rated current. Since the mechanical forces are proportional to the square of the current, they increase to as much as 100 to 225 times the mechanical forces at rated current. Such large mechanical forces can cause appreciable damage to the transformer. Hence, the transformer windings must be designed and constructed to withstand the mechanical forces during short circuits. 13.2.12  No-Load Current The no-load current or excitation current represents the current that the transformer absorbs, when rated voltage is applied to the primary winding and the secondary winding is open-circuited. The noload current is expressed as a percentage of the value of the rated primary current. 13.2.13  Voltage Regulation The voltage regulation ∆V of a transformer is defined as the difference in the magnitude of the secondary voltage at no-load v 2,nl and its value when loaded v 2 divided by v 2 with the primary voltage is held constant: v −v ∆V = 2,nl 2 (13-17) v2 Let us consider the simplified transformer equivalent circuit of Fig. 13-7, where the effects of the excitation branch on voltage regulation are ignored, so the equivalent transformer impedance is z eq = Req + jX eq (13-18)



In Fig. 13-7, it is assumed that v 2 is a reference phasor (zero phase angle), that is, v 2 = v 2 ∠00, and the load z L has power factor cosθ L lagging, thus i L = iL ∠ − θ L . Req

jXeq +

+ iL v1 a

–

zL

v2

–

FIGURE 13-7  Determination of transformer voltage regulation.

13_Santoso_Sec13_p0801-0866.indd 811

23/11/17 11:23 AM

812  SECTION THIRTEEN

Using basic circuit analysis, it can be concluded from Fig. 13-7 that z eq v1 v2 ⋅ 1 + − v2 zL v 2,nl − v 2 α − v 2 ∆V = = = ⇒ v2 v2 v2 ∆V = 1 +



z eq zL

(13-19)

−1



where in Eq. (13-19), the symbol w denotes the magnitude of the complex number w. Equation (13-19) can be further simplified and the following expression for the calculation of voltage regulation is obtained: 2

∆V =



iL 1 i  ⋅ ( Req ⋅ cosθ L + X eq ⋅ sinθ L ) + ⋅  L  ⋅ ( X eq ⋅ cosθ L − Req ⋅ sinθ L )2 (13-20) v2 2  v2 

Equivalently, the voltage regulation can also be calculated by the following equation: 2



∆V =

S 1 S ⋅ (er ⋅ cosθ L + e x ⋅ sinθ L ) + ⋅   ⋅ (er ⋅ sinθ L − e x ⋅ cosθ L )2 (13-21) Sn 2  Sn 

where er =



LL (13-22) Sn

and e x = U k2 − er2 (13-23)



where S (VA) is the transformer load, Sn (VA) is the transformer rated power, cosθ L is the power factor (θ L is positive for lagging load and negative for leading load), LL (W) are the transformer load losses, and U k (%) is the short-circuit impedance of the transformer. 13.2.14 Efficiency The power efficiency of any electrical machine is defined as the ratio of the useful power output, Pout (W), to the total power input, Pin (W). The efficiency can be defined by simultaneously measuring the output and the input power. However, this measurement is expensive and difficult, especially for large machines. Moreover, in the case of high-efficiency machines (e.g., transformer), higher precision can be achieved, if the efficiency is expressed through the losses. Consequently, the transformer efficiency n is calculated using the following formula:

n=

Pout Pout S ⋅ cosθ L = = (13-24) Pin Pout + losses S ⋅ cosθ L + losses

where S is the transformer load (VA), losses are the transformer losses (W) and cosθ L is the power factor. The transformer efficiency is increased with a decrease of transformer losses. The transformer losses are divided into no-load losses and load losses. The no-load losses are constant, while the load losses are proportional to transformer load. Consequently, the efficiency of transformer is calculated using the following formula:

13_Santoso_Sec13_p0801-0866.indd 812

n=

S ⋅ cosθ L  S S ⋅ cosθ L + NLL + LL ⋅    Sn 

2

(13-25)

23/11/17 11:23 AM

Power Transformers   813 

where NLL are the no-load losses (W), LL are the load losses (W), and Sn is the rated power of the transformer (VA). If L is the per-unit load: L=



S (13-26) Sn

then by substituting Eq. (13-26) into Eq. (13-25), we obtain the following expression for transformer efficiency: L ⋅ Sn ⋅ cosθ L n= (13-27) L ⋅ Sn ⋅ cosθ L + NLL + LL ⋅ L2 Taking L as an independent variable, the value of L that maximizes efficiency is calculated as follows:

 dn d  L ⋅ Sn ⋅ cosθ L =0⇒  =0⇒ dL dL  L ⋅ Sn ⋅ cosθ L + NLL + LL ⋅ L2 



( L ⋅ Sn ⋅ cosθ L + NLL + LL ⋅ L2 ) ⋅ Sn ⋅ cosθ L − L ⋅ Sn ⋅ cosθ L ⋅ (Sn ⋅ cosθ L + 2 ⋅ L ⋅ LL ) =0⇒ ( L ⋅ Sn ⋅ cosθ L + NLL + LL ⋅ L2 )2



L ⋅ Sn2 ⋅ cos 2 θ L + NLL ⋅ Sn ⋅ cosθ L + L2 ⋅ LL ⋅ Sn ⋅ cosθ L − L ⋅ Sn2 ⋅ cos 2 θ L −2 ⋅ L2 ⋅ LL ⋅ Sn ⋅ cosθ L = 0 ⇒



NLL ⋅ Sn ⋅ cosθ L − L2 ⋅ LL ⋅ Sn ⋅ cosθ L = 0 ⇒ NLL − L2 ⋅ LL = 0 ⇒



Lopt =



NLL (13-28) LL

As can be seen from Eq. (13-28), the optimum per-unit load, Lopt , that is, the per-unit load that maximizes transformer efficiency is independent of the power factor of the load. Substituting Eq. (13-28) into Eq. (13-27), we obtain the following expression for the maximum efficiency: nmax =



nmax =

NLL ⋅ S ⋅ cosθ L LL n

NLL NLL ⋅ S ⋅ cosθ L + NLL + LL ⋅ LL n LL NLL ⋅ Sn ⋅ cosθ L NLL ⋅ Sn ⋅ cosθ L + 2 ⋅ NLL ⋅ LL

⇒

(13-29)

Example 13-1.  Consider a three-phase transformer with rated power 630 kVA, rated primary voltage 20 kV, rated secondary voltage 0.4 kV, no-load losses 1200 W, load losses 9300 W, and short-circuit impedance 6%. Draw the transformer efficiency curves versus per unit load for power factor 1.0 and 0.8. Solution.  The maximum efficiency corresponds to the following per-unit load:

Lopt =

1 200 NLL = = 0.36 LL 9 300

At maximum efficiency, the transformer load is

13_Santoso_Sec13_p0801-0866.indd 813

Sopt = Lopt ⋅ Sn = 0.36 ⋅ 630 000 ⇒ Sopt = 226,800 VA

23/11/17 11:23 AM

814  SECTION THIRTEEN

For power factor 1.0, the maximum efficiency is nmax = nmax =



Sopt ⋅ cosθ L Sopt ⋅ cosθ L + NLL + LL ⋅ L2opt

⇒

226 800 ⋅1.0 ⇒ nmax = 98.95% 226 800 ⋅1.0 + 1 200 + 9 300 ⋅ 0.362



For power factor 0.8, the maximum efficiency is nmax =



226 800 ⋅ 0.8 ⇒ nmax = 98.69% 226 800 ⋅ 0.8 + 1 200 + 9 300 ⋅ 0.362

Similarly, the efficiency is computed for per-unit load varied from 0.1 to 1.2 and the obtained efficiency curves versus per-unit load are shown in Fig. 13-8.

Efficiency

100% nmax

99%

cosqL = 1

cosqL = 0.8

98%

97%

0.0

0.2

0.36

0.4

0.6

0.8

1.0

1.2

Per-unit load FIGURE 13-8  Efficiency curves versus per-unit load for Example 13-1.

13.3  TRANSFORMER TYPES The transformers are classified into various categories, according to their •  Use •  Cooling method •  Insulating medium •  Core construction 13.3.1  Classification According to Transformer Use Transformers are classified according to their use into the following categories: 1. Distribution Transformers. They are used in distribution networks in order to transmit energy from the medium voltage (MV) network to the low voltage (LV) network of the consumers. Their rated power usually ranges from 50 to 1600 kVA.

13_Santoso_Sec13_p0801-0866.indd 814

23/11/17 11:23 AM

Power Transformers   815 

2. Power Transformers. They are used in high-power generating stations for voltage step-up and in transmission substations for voltage step-up or step-down. Usually they are of power greater than 2 MVA. 3. Autotransformers. They are used for voltage transformation within relatively small limits, for connection of electric energy systems of various voltages, and for starting alternating current motors. 4. HVDC Transformers. They are key components in HVDC transmission systems. The HVDC transformers react as coupling elements between the connected ac grids and high-power rectifiers, and are necessary for adapting the voltage. They insulate the rectifier itself from the ac grid and generate a phase shift. 5. Test Transformers. They are used for the execution of performance tests with high or ultrahigh voltage. 6. Special Power Transformers. They are used for special applications, for example, traction systems, furnaces, and welding. 7. Instrument Transformers. They are used for the accurate measurement of voltage or current. 8. Telecommunication Transformers. They are used in telecommunication applications aiming at the reliable reproduction of a signal over a wide range of frequency and voltage.

13.3.2  Classification According to Transformer Cooling Method The identification of oil-immersed transformers according to the cooling method is expressed by a four-letter code. The first letter expresses the internal cooling medium in contact with the windings. The second letter identifies the circulation mechanism for the internal cooling medium. The third letter identifies the external cooling medium. The fourth letter identifies the circulation mechanism for external cooling medium. For example, if the internal cooling medium is mineral oil, which is circulated by natural flow, and the external cooling medium is air, which is circulated by natural convection, then this cooling method is coded as ONAN (oil natural air natural). In power transformers, various cooling methods are used, including oil circulation by pumps, or forced air circulation by fans, or both of the above. As a result, the following cooling methods exist: 1. ONAF: oil natural air forced 2. OFAN: oil forced air natural 3. OFAF: oil forced air forced 4. OFWF: oil forced water forced

13.3.3  Classification According to Transformer Insulating Medium Transformers are classified according to their insulating medium into the following categories: 1. Oil-Immersed Transformers. The insulating medium is mineral oil or synthetic (silicon) oil. 2. Dry Type Transformers. The cooling is implemented with natural air circulation and the windings are usually insulated with materials of H or F class. The materials of H class are designed to operate, in normal conditions, at temperatures up to 180°C and the materials of F class at temperatures up to 155°C. 3. Resin Type Transformers. The resin type transformer is a dry type transformer insulated with epoxy resin cast under vacuum.

13_Santoso_Sec13_p0801-0866.indd 815

23/11/17 11:23 AM

816  SECTION THIRTEEN

13.3.4  Classification According to Transformer Core Construction Construction of the magnetic circuit of three-phase transformers can be implemented, alternatively, as follows: 1. With Three Legs (Vertical Limbs). The magnetic flux of one leg must flow through the other two legs and the flux also flows through the windings of the other phases, that is, the transformer has no free return of the flux. 2. With Five Legs (Vertical Limbs). Free return of the flux through the external legs. There are two different technologies for stacking the electrical steel sheets of the magnetic material of the core: 1. Stack Core. The layers of the sheets of the magnetic material are placed one over the other and vertical and horizontal layers are overlapped. 2. Wound Core. The magnetic circuit is of shell type and the sheets are wound. Two different materials are used for core construction: 1. Silicon Steel Sheet. The silicon steel sheet that is used for core construction is an alloy consisting of 97% iron and 3% silicon. This material is crystalline. The silicon steel sheets have thickness from 0.18 to 0.5 mm. There are also silicon steel sheets for operation at high magnetic induction (Hi-B). 2. Amorphous Metal Sheet. The amorphous metal sheet that is used for core construction is an alloy consisting of 92% iron, 5% silicon, and 3% boron. This material is not crystalline. It has 70% lower no-load loss than silicon steel. The thickness of the amorphous metal sheet is 0.025 mm, that is, it is about 10 times thinner than the typical thickness of silicon steel sheet.

13.4  TRANSFORMER CONNECTIONS Three-phase transformer connections can be made either by using a three-phase transformer or three single-phase transformers. The primary and secondary windings of any three-phase transformer can be independently connected in either a wye (Y) or a delta (Δ). This gives a total of four possible connections for a three-phase transformer: 1. Y−Y: The primary and secondary windings are connected in a Y. 2. Y−Δ: The primary is connected in a Y and the secondary is connected in a Δ. 3. Δ−Y: The primary is connected in a Δ and the secondary is connected in a Y. 4. Δ−Δ: The primary and secondary windings are connected in a Δ. In a Y-connected winding the current flowing through each phase winding is equal to the line current. As a result, the Y connection, also called star connection, is the typical choice of connection for the highest voltages (lowest currents) and when the neutral is intended for loading. In a Δ-connected winding the current flowing through each phase winding is equal to the line current divided by 3 . As a result, the Δ-connected winding is advantageous in large power transformers when the current is high and the voltage is relatively low, like the low voltage winding of generator step-up transformers. Moreover, the Δ-connected winding requires 3 times as many turns as a Y-connected winding for the same voltage. When Y connection is used in the one winding of the transformer, the other winding should preferably be Δ-connected, especially when the neutral of the Y-connected winding is intended to be loaded. The Δ-connected winding provides ampere-turn balance for the zero sequence current flowing through the neutral and each phase of the Y-winding, which results in a reasonable zero sequence impedance.

13_Santoso_Sec13_p0801-0866.indd 816

23/11/17 11:23 AM

Power Transformers   817 

Another connection is the zigzag connection, also called interconnected Y connection and Z connection. The sole purpose of zigzag connection is to establish a neutral point for grounding purposes. 13.4.1  Y-Y Connection The Y-Y connection of a three-phase H2 step-down transformer is shown in Fig. 13-9. The high-voltage (primary winding) terminals are designated with H1, H2, and H3. The low-voltage (secondary winding) terminals are designated with X1, X2, and X3. The Y-Y connection (or Y-connected autotransformer) may be used to interconnect H 1 two delta systems and provide suitable neutrals for grounding both of them. H3 A Y-connected autotransformer may be used to interconnect two Y systems FIGURE 13-9  Y-Y connection. that already have neutral grounds, for reasons of economy. The Y-Y connection has two very serious disadvantages:

X2

X3 X1

1. The third-harmonic voltages can be large; they can be even larger than the fundamental voltage itself. 2. If the loads of the transformer are unbalanced, then the phase voltages of the transformer can become very unbalanced. The above two problems can be solved using one of the following two methods: 1. Solidly ground the neutrals of the transformer, especially the neutral of the primary winding. The grounding of the neutral permits the additive third-harmonic components to cause a current flow in the neutral (instead of building up large third-harmonic voltages). Moreover, the neutral provides a return path for the current imbalances of the load. 2. Add a tertiary (third) winding connected in Δ to the transformer bank. In this case, the thirdharmonic components of voltage in the Δ will add up, creating a circulating current flow in the winding, which suppresses the third-harmonic components of voltage. 13.4.2 Y-D Connection The Y-Δ connection of a three-phase transformer is shown in Fig. 13-10. The Y-Δ connection has no problem with third-harmonic components in its voltages, because they are consumed in a circulating current on the Δ side. The Y-Δ connection is also more stable to unbalanced loads, because the Δ partially redistributes any imbalance that may occur. 13.4.3  D-Y Connection The Δ-Y connection of a three-phase transformer is shown in Fig. 13-11. The Δ-Y connection has the same advantages as the Y-Δ connection. The Δ-Y step-up and the Y-Δ step-down connections are without question the best for highvoltage transmission systems. They are economical in cost, and provide a stable neutral whereby the high-voltage system may be directly grounded or grounded through resistance of such value as to damp the system critically and prevent the possibility of oscillation.

13_Santoso_Sec13_p0801-0866.indd 817

23/11/17 11:23 AM

818  SECTION THIRTEEN

H2

X2

X3 H1 H3

X1

FIGURE 13-10  Y-Δ connection.

H2

X2

H1 X3 H3

X1

FIGURE 13-11  Δ-Y connection.

13.4.4  D-D Connection The Δ-Δ connection of a three-phase transformer is shown in Fig. 13-12. The Δ-Δ connection may be used as step-up transformer for moderate voltages. The Δ-Δ connection has no problems with unbalanced loads or harmonics. Another advantage of the Δ-Δ connection, if composed of three single-phase transformers, is that one single-phase transformer can be removed (in case of damage), and the resulting connection that is called open Δ connection operates at 1/ 3 or 57.7% of the rating of the three-phase transformer.

H2

X2

H1

X3

H3

X1

FIGURE 13-12  Δ-Δ connection.

13_Santoso_Sec13_p0801-0866.indd 818

23/11/17 11:23 AM

Power Transformers   819 

The main disadvantage of Δ-Δ connection is that the neutral is not available. The insulation is more costly because the Δ-Δ connection has higher ground voltages during transient voltages or system fault. The Δ-connection insulation costs increase with increasing voltage. The Δ-Δ connection is typically limited to a maximum system voltage of 345 kV. 13.4.5 Z-Connection The zigzag connection is also called Z con- H2 nection as well as interconnected Y connection. The Z connection of the high-voltage (primary) winding of a three-phase trans- H0 former is shown in Fig. 13-13, where H1, H2, and H3 are the high voltage terminals, while H0 is the neutral. The sole purpose of Z connection is to establish a neutral point for grounding purposes. The Z connection may be used with either a Δ-connected winding or a Y-connected H1 winding for step-up or step-down operation. For example, if a Δ winding is used as H3 a primary winding and a Z winding is used as a secondary winding, the Δ-Z connection FIGURE 13-13  Z connection. is created. The Δ-Z connection provides the same advantages as the Δ-Y connection, like third harmonic suppression and ground current isolation. An additional advantage with the Δ-Z connection is that there is no phase angle displacement between the primary and the secondary windings. Therefore, the Δ-Z connection can be used in the same manner as Y-Y and Δ-Δ connections without introducing any phase shifts in the windings.

13.5  STEP-VOLTAGE REGULATORS An important objective of any electrical system is to provide consumers with a supply voltage compatible with their utilization equipment. Each electrical device is designed to operate at a certain rated voltage for optimum efficiency and maximum lifetime. In case of power distribution feeders without distributed energy resources, the voltage magnitudes decrease along the feeder, so the consumers at the end of the feeder have the lowest voltage. Power distribution systems must be designed in such a way that the voltage magnitudes always remain within a specified range as required by standards. This is achieved through the use of transformer on-load tap changers, switched and fixed capacitors, and single-phase and three-phase voltage regulators. Section 13.6 is devoted to tap changers. The step-voltage regulators are designed, manufactured, and tested according to the IEEE Standard C57.15. A step-voltage regulator is defined as a regulating autotransformer in which the voltage of the regulated circuit is controlled in steps by means of taps and without interrupting the load. The choice of using a three-phase or three single-phase voltage regulators depends on the cost and the need for unbalanced operation. A three-phase voltage regulator has no capability to correct the voltage imbalances caused by unequal loading. If feeders have similar load characteristics and voltage regulation requirements and if the incoming supply voltage is balanced, then the distribution side of the substation bus can be controlled by a three-phase voltage regulator. Consequently, if the load is mainly three-phase or consistently balanced, a three-phase voltage regulator may be the better choice. However, most rural power distribution systems contain only a small percentage of balanced threephase loads. Therefore, single-phase step-voltage regulators dominate the power distribution market. They are used in substations having up to 30 MVA as well as in power distribution feeders and laterals.

13_Santoso_Sec13_p0801-0866.indd 819

05/06/19 11:23 am

820  SECTION THIRTEEN

13.5.1  Regulation Method Currently, the most common single-phase step-voltage regulator has 32 steps, which provide ±10% voltage regulation with 0.625% voltage regulation per step. This means that the following 33 voltage regulation values can be obtained:

−10.000% − 9.375% ... − 0.625% 0.000% 0.625% ... 9.375% 10.000%

A typical single-phase step-voltage regulator involves a shunt winding, a series winding, and a bridging reactor or preventive autotransformer. The series winding has eight tapped sections of 2 × 0.625% or 1.25% voltage each, giving a total of 10% voltage regulation. A preventive autotransformer (or bridging reactor) is required to maintain continuity during a tap change and to provide impedance for limiting the amount of current to be interrupted by the tap changer. The preventive autotransformer is used as a voltage divider while bridging across a section of the tapped series winding to assist in providing the 0.625% voltage regulation steps. Step-voltage regulators being tapped autotransformers have part of one winding common to both the primary and the secondary circuits associated with that winding. In other words, the shunt (primary) winding is both electrically and magnetically connected to the series (secondary) winding. The shunt (exciting) winding is common to both primary and secondary; the series winding is connected in series with load (output) current. The process of moving from one voltageregulator tap to the adjacent voltage-regulator tap consists of closing the circuit at one tap before opening the circuit at the other tap. The movable tap-changer contacts move through stationary taps alternating in eight bridging and eight nonbridging (symmetrical) positions. Figure 13-14a shows the two movable tap-changer contacts on a symmetrical position, with the center tap of the reactor at the same voltage. This is the case at tap position neutral and all evenly numbered tap positions. Figure 13-14b shows an asymmetrical position that is realized when one tap connection is open before transferring the load to the adjacent tap. At this position, all of the load current flows through one-half of the reactor, magnetizing the reactor, and the reactance voltage is introduced into the circuit for about 25–35 ms during the tap change.

13_Santoso_Sec13_p0801-0866.indd 820

1.25% – + 1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

6

7

8

6

7

8

Load (a)

1.25% – + 1

2

3

4

5

Load (b)

1.25% – + 1

0.625%

2

3

4

5

0.625% Load (c)

FIGURE 13-14  (a) Two movable contacts on the same stationary contact on a symmetrical position. (b) One movable contact on stationary contact on an asymmetrical position. (c) Two movable contacts on adjacent stationary contacts.

23/11/17 11:24 AM

Power Transformers   821 

Figure 13-14c shows the movable contacts in a bridging position; voltage change is one-half of the 1.25% tap voltage of the series winding because of its center tap and movable contacts located on adjacent stationary contacts. This is the case at all oddly numbered tap positions. At the bridging position, a circulating current is established through the preventive autotransformer or a center tapped bridging reactor, and load voltage is seen to be the average voltage of the taps being bridged. To minimize the arc duration, a quick-break mechanism accelerates the moving contacts. The circulating current (IC ), resulting from the two contacts being at different positions (reactor energized with 1.25% tap voltage), is limited by the reactive impedance of this circuit. 13.5.2  Regulator Technical Characteristics The kVA rating of a step-voltage regulator is computed as follows: Sr = Vr ⋅ I r ⋅VR (13-30)



where Vr is its rated voltage, I r is its rated load current, and VR is its per-unit range of voltage regulation. For example, the kVA rating of a step-voltage regulator with 7.62 kV rated voltage, 100 A rated current, and with ±10% voltage regulation (VR = 0.1), is computed as follows:

Sr = 7.62 × 100 × 0.1 ⇒ Sr = 76.2 kVA

The purpose of the step-voltage regulator is the activation of the monitored tap changer to change taps to maintain the correct regulator output voltage. The regulator control settings are the values the regulator user has selected as control parameters for the regulated voltage. Tables are provided with the regulators to use in computing the appropriate settings. The basic regulator control settings are the following: 1. Set Voltage. The set voltage depends on the regulator rating and the system voltage on which it is installed. 2. Band Width. To avoid a hunting condition of the regulator, a band width is set to define the limits (total range) of acceptable voltage about the set voltage. For example, if the set voltage is 120 V and the band width is 2 V, then the regulator will be in-band if the output is in the range from 119 to 121 V. 3. Time Delay. The time delay is the time duration outside of the prescribed band required before tap-changer actuation. A general recommendation is a minimum time delay of 15 s. This time length covers the vast majority of temporary voltage swings due to equipment starting and coldload pickup. 4. Line-Drop Resistive and Reactive Compensation. The use of line-drop compensation will cause the regulator to hold the voltage-level setting at a point remote from the regulator, rather than at the regulator location. The classic illustration of the application of line-drop compensation involves a load center some miles from the substation. It is required to hold a given voltage at the load center. Given that the line is inductive in nature, this implies holding a higher voltage at the substation, the incremental voltage increase being a function of the line impedance (resistive and reactive) and the line current. Thus, the line-drop resistive and reactive compensation settings reflect the resistive and reactive line-drop to be anticipated between the regulator and the load when the system is carrying peak load current.

13.5.3  Regulator Control Functions Highly sophisticated, microprocessor-based digital control circuitry is included with the voltage regulator. All regulator controls comprise three major parts:

13_Santoso_Sec13_p0801-0866.indd 821

23/11/17 11:24 AM

822  SECTION THIRTEEN

1. A voltage-sensing device, which monitors the output voltage of the regulator and sends a signal to the motor drive circuitry. 2. An amplifying or switching section, which delays and transmits the signal to the tap changer motor. 3. A motor drive circuit which responds to the signal by closing relay contacts or actuating electronic switches that cause the motor to operate the tap changer drive mechanism.

13.5.4  Bypassing Voltage Regulators One of the advantages of the application of step-voltage regulators versus on-load tap-changing transformers is the ability of voltage regulators to be bypassed in service such that load interruption is not necessary during installation procedures. Taking step-voltage regulators in or out of service involves opening or closing a bypass switch between the source and the load bushings. It is critical that proper switching instructions are followed to avoid the extremely high circulating current that will appear in the series winding if by mistake bypassing occurs at other than the neutral tap position. Consequently, it is imperative the step-voltage regulator is placed in the neutral position before it is installed in or removed from the line. More specifically, to place the step-voltage regulator in service, first the source switch is closed. The regulator is checked out by running the tap changer in the raise and lower directions. The step-voltage regulator is returned to the neutral position, and the load switch is closed. After the load switch is closed, the bypass switch may be opened. To take the regulator out of service, the procedure is reversed. First the step-voltage regulator is run to the neutral position, the bypass switch is closed, and then finally the source switch is opened.

13.5.5  Three-Phase Voltage Regulators In three-phase installations, the choice of using a three-phase voltage regulator or three single-phase voltage regulators depends on the cost and the need for unbalanced operation. If the load is mainly three-phase or consistently balanced, a three-phase step-voltage regulator may be the better choice. However, most rural power distribution systems contain only a small percentage of balanced threephase loads. Consequently, three-phase step-voltage regulators are less common in the power distribution industry than the single-phase step-voltage regulators. The design of three-phase regulators is similar to single-phase regulators. More specifically, three single-phase regulators are located in the same tank with their tap changers ganged together and being monitored and operated by one control. The three-phase regulator has only one of its phases monitored to provide a voltage and current supply to the control. Consequently, all three phases are regulated based on the monitoring of only one phase. In three-phase installations, it is a very common application to use banks of three single-phase stepvoltage regulators. Configuring the regulators in Y, closed Δ, and open Δ can be acceptable alternatives, depending on system conditions. In deciding on the proper and safe connection for a given application, three basic phenomena should be considered: (1) third harmonics, (2) system line surges, and (3) line faults. 13.5.6  Voltage Regulator Developments Recently, innovation associated with step-voltage regulators has concentrated on the electronic control. The very nature of digital controls now offered routinely with new step-voltage regulators facilitates the mathematical manipulation of the measured line voltage and current into system parameters of interest to the user. Consequently, controls are available that display voltage, current, power factor, voltage and current harmonics, active and reactive power, various time-integrated demand quantities, and other conditions of interest.

13_Santoso_Sec13_p0801-0866.indd 822

23/11/17 11:24 AM

Power Transformers   823 

The control typically operates with one set of configuration settings that are programmed or changed through the human-machine interface or one of the available communications channels using interface software. Alternative configurations may be available allowing for the control to be programmed with an additional set of configuration settings. An additional feature available on many controls is the ability to communicate this information to a remote location so the regulator control becomes the sensory apparatus of the supervisory control and data acquisition system. Common communication interfaces available with the control are Fiber Optic, Ethernet, RS232, and RS485. Most step-voltage regulators are installed in power distribution networks with a well-defined power flow from source to load. However, some power distribution networks have interconnections or loops in which the direction of power flow through the regulator may change. For optimum power distribution system performance, step-voltage regulators, installed on such networks, have the capability of detecting this reverse power flow and then sensing and controlling the load-side voltage of the regulator, regardless of the direction of power flow. In distribution systems, the increasing levels of distributed generation pose new challenges to power distribution utilities in their use of step-voltage regulators. Traditionally, power distribution networks have been used purely to transmit energy from the transmission network down to lower voltage levels. A distributed generator delivering power directly to the distribution network can reverse the normal direction of power flow in a regulator. In the electronic control of the stepvoltage regulator, options are available for handling different types of scenarios that give rise to reverse power flow conditions.

13.6  TAP CHANGERS Power systems must be designed in such a way that the voltage magnitudes always remain within a specified range as required by standards. As already discussed in Sec. 13.5, one method of voltage control is through the use of tap changers in transformers. More specifically, the transformer is equipped with taps in the winding. The voltage control is achieved by changing the turn ratio. The tap changer changes the voltage ratio of a transformer by adding turns to or subtracting turns from either the primary or the secondary winding. Consequently, the transformer is equipped with a regulating or tap winding that is connected to the tap changer. The execution of tap-change operation can be done with the transformer either deenergized or energized and as a result, two types of tap changers are available: 1. Deenergized tap changer (DETC). The DETC, which is also called off-circuit tap changer, is designed to be operated only when the transformer is deenergized, that is, only when the transformer is disconnected on both the primary and the secondary winding. The DETCs are available as hand-driven (they are operated with a hand wheel or a hand crank) or motor-driven devices. The DETC is mainly used when the variation in the nominal operating voltage (which requires a tap changer operation) is not expected frequently. Figure 13-15 shows the basic connections of a DETC. 2. Load tap changer (LTC). The LTC, which is also called on-load tap changer, is a device that connects different taps of the tapped windings of transformers without

13_Santoso_Sec13_p0801-0866.indd 823

1

3

4

2

5

3 4 5 6 7

7 6

2

FIGURE 13-15  Basic connections of a de-energized tap changer.

05/06/19 11:24 am

824  SECTION THIRTEEN

interrupting the load. The LTC must be capable of switching from one tap position to another without interrupting the flow of the current to the load as well as without creating a short circuit between any two taps of the transformer winding. The LTC is mainly used when the variation in the nominal operating voltage (which requires a tap changer operation) is expected frequently. The selection between the DETC and the LTC depends on the frequency with which it is required to change taps as well as the size and importance of transformer. The rest of the subsection is devoted to LTC. 13.6.1  Types of Load Tap Changers The LTC must be capable of switching from one tap position to another without interrupting the flow of the current to the load as well as without creating a short circuit between any two taps of the transformer winding. According to the switching principle, two types of LTC have been used: 1. Resistor-Type LTC. In this case, resistors are used to handle the transition from one tap to another. This type of transition requires the resistors to be capable of withstanding the full load current plus the circulating current during the transition. To reduce the energy absorption requirement for the resistors, the duration of the complete transition has to be minimized. That is why resistortype LTCs normally have very fast transients. 2. Reactor-Type LTC. In this case, reactors are used to handle the transition from one tap to another. These reactors do not have to dissipate as much energy as the resistors. The reactors mainly use reactive energy, which does not produce any heat. Consequently, the reactor-type LTCs can be designed to withstand the full load plus the circulating current for long periods, even continuously. According to the location of the tap changer, there are two types of LTC: 1. In-Tank. The majority of resistor-type LTCs and the DETCs are installed inside the transformer tank. 2. Separate Compartment. The reactor-type LTCs are installed in a separate compartment, which is normally welded to the transformer tank. According to the switching technology, two types of LTC have been used: 1. Oil-Type LTC. In this case, the transformer oil is used as an insulating, cooling, lubricating, and arc-quenching medium. The LTC is immersed in transformer oil, and switching contacts make and break current under oil. This conventional LTC technology has reached a very high level and is capable of meeting most requirements of the transformer manufacturer. This applies to the complete voltage and power fields of today, which will probably remain unchanged in the foreseeable future. 2. Vacuum-Type LTC. The switching principles of vacuum-type LTCs differ from those of conventional oil-type LTCs. A simple duplication of the switching contacts of a conventional LTC with vacuum interrupters would lead to a solution that is unnecessarily more expensive and greater in volume. Therefore, special designs with special switching principles were created for the vacuumtype LTCs. The vacuum switching technology entirely eliminates the need for an online oil filtration system. Moreover, the vacuum switching technology offers reduced downtimes with increased availability of the transformer, simplified maintenance logistics, and substantial savings for the end user. Today’s resistor-type and reactor-type LTCs are based more and more on vacuum interrupters. 13.6.2  Applications of Load Tap Changers The control of transformer ratio under load is a desirable means of regulating the voltage of highvoltage feeders and of primary networks. It may be used for the control of the bus voltage in large distribution substations. It finds a wide field of application in controlling the ratio on step-up transformers operating from power stations whose bus voltage must be varied to suit local distribution.

13_Santoso_Sec13_p0801-0866.indd 824

23/11/17 11:24 AM

Power Transformers   825 

In industrial applications, it is used for the control of current in a variety of furnace operations and electrolytic processes. It also furnishes a convenient means for voltage regulation of concentrated industrial loads. A lot of LTC equipment is installed at points of interconnection between systems or between power stations, in order to control the interchange of reactive current, or, in other words, to control the power factor in the tie line. This reactive current may be highly undesirable, especially as it may add to the burden on a fully loaded generating system. It can be increased, eliminated, or reversed by inserting a suitable small ratio of transformation between the systems. It can be varied in amount and in direction of flow to suit varying system conditions, if this ratio is variable and under the control of a station operator. Inserting such a ratio of transformation in a tie line by means of tap-changing equipment is equivalent in its effect on the flow of reactive current to raising or lowering the voltage on one of the systems. Current can be exchanged at any power factor from zero lag to zero lead, without interfering with the voltage maintained on either system.

13.6.3  Phase-Shifting Transformers A phase-shifting transformer (PST) has the ability to control the phase angle of the voltage. Recently, there is a steady increase in PSTs that are used to control the power flow on transmission lines in meshed power systems. Transformers used to derive phase-angle control do not differ materially, either mechanically or electrically, from those used for in-phase control. In general, phase-angle control is obtained by interconnecting the phases, that is, by deriving a voltage from one phase and inserting it in another. The simple arrangement shown in Fig. 13-16 illustrates a single-core Δ-connected autotransformer in which the series windings are so interconnected as to introduce into the line a quadrature voltage. One phase A only is printed in solid lines so as to show more clearly how the quadrature voltage is obtained. The terminals of the common X winding are connected to the midpoints of the series winding in order that the inB phase voltage ratio between the primary Z lines ABC and secondary lines XYZ is unity for all values of phase angle introduced between them. As large high-voltage systems have become extensively interconnected, a need has developed to control the transfer of real Y power between systems by means of phaseC angle-regulating transformers. The most commonly used circuit for this purpose is FIGURE 13-16  Phase-shifting regulating transformer: the two-core, four-winding arrangement single-core Δ-connected common winding for low-voltage shown in Fig. 13-17. The high-voltage com- systems. mon winding is Y connected, with reduced insulation at the neutral for economy of design, and a series transformer is employed so that low-voltage-switching equipment may be used. The use of phase-shifting transformers has the following benefits: •  Reduction of overall system losses by elimination of circulating currents •  Improvement of power system capability by appropriate load management •  Improvement of power factor of the power system •  Control of power flow to meet contractual requirements

13_Santoso_Sec13_p0801-0866.indd 825

23/11/17 11:24 AM

826  SECTION THIRTEEN

A

X

Z

B C

Y

FIGURE 13-17  Phase-shifting regulating transformer: two-core Y-connected common winding for high-voltage systems.

13.7  TRANSFORMER DESIGN The objective of transformer design optimization (TDO) is to design the transformer so as to minimize the transformer manufacturing cost, that is, the sum of materials cost plus labor cost, subject to constraints imposed by international standards and transformer user specification. The aim of transformer design is to obtain the dimensions of all parts of the transformer in order to supply these data to the manufacturer. The transformer design should be carried out based on the specification given, using available materials economically in order to achieve low cost, low weight, small size and good operating performance. The transformer design is worked out using various methods based on accumulated experience realized in different formulas, equations, tables, and charts. Transformer design methods vary among transformer manufacturers. While designing a transformer, much emphasis should be placed on lowering its cost by saving materials and reducing to a minimum labor-consuming operations in its manufacture. The design should be satisfactory with respect to dielectric strength and mechanical endurance, and windings must withstand dynamic and thermal stresses in the event of short circuit. In order to meet the above requirements, the transformer designer should be familiar with the prices of basic materials used in the transformer. He should also be familiar with the amount of labor consumed in the production of transformer parts and assemblies. 13.7.1  Problem Formulation The TDO problem is formulated as follows: minimize an objective function subject to several constraints. Among the various objective functions of the TDO problem, the most commonly used objective functions are

13_Santoso_Sec13_p0801-0866.indd 826

23/11/17 11:24 AM

Power Transformers   827 

1. The minimization of transformer total owning cost. This is mainly used when designing transformers for electric utilities, since these users usually evaluate the cost of losses when purchasing transformers. 2. The minimization of transformer manufacturing cost. The transformer manufacturing cost includes the materials cost and the labor cost. This objective function is mainly used when designing transformers for industrial and commercial users, since these users usually do not evaluate the cost of losses when purchasing transformers. The constraints of the TDO problem are related to transformer operation, manufacturing capabilities, and transformer user special needs. 13.7.2  Objective Function In the bibliography of transformer design, several objective functions are optimized: (1) minimization of total owning cost, (2) minimization of manufacturing cost, (3) minimization of main materials cost, (4) minimization of active part cost, (5) minimization of active part mass, and (6) maximization of transformer rated power. 13.7.3 Constraints The most commonly used constraints of the TDO problem are the following: (1) induced voltage constraint, (2) turns ratio constraint, (3) no-load loss constraint, (4) load loss constraint, (5) total loss constraint, (6) impedance voltage constraint, (7) magnetic induction constraint, (8) heat transfer constraint, (9) temperature rise constraint, (10) efficiency constraint, (11) no-load current constraint, (12) voltage regulation constraint, (13) impulse voltage constraints, and (14) tank dimensions constraints. 13.7.4  Solution Methods The general TDO problem is a complex constrained mixed-integer nonlinear programming problem. The TDO problem is further complicated by the fact that the objective function is discontinuous. Several mathematical programming and heuristic optimization methods have been proposed for the solution of the TDO problem. Mathematical programming methods for the solution of TDO include geometric programming and mixed-integer nonlinear programming. Heuristic methods for the solution of TDO include multiple design method, genetic algorithm, and particle swarm optimization. 13.7.5  Multiple Design Method Transformer manufacturers usually use the multiple design method to solve the TDO problem. The multiple design method is a heuristic technique that assigns many alternative values to the design variables (unknowns of the TDO problem) so as to generate a large number of alternative designs and finally to select the design that satisfies all the problem constraints with the optimum value of the objective function, for example, with the minimum transformer manufacturing cost. The optimum design is implemented through the following steps: 1. Initially the input variables are entered in a computer program. Many different values of the design variables are given, so many candidate solutions are considered. For example, the magnetic circuit is typically designed using the specific no-load loss curve of the transformer, which has the form of Fig. 13-18.

13_Santoso_Sec13_p0801-0866.indd 827

23/11/17 11:24 AM

2. A computer program determines which candidate solutions are acceptable and which are rejected (they violate one or more of the constraints). 3. The acceptable solutions are sorted according to their manufacturing cost. The optimum transformer corresponds to the least-cost solution.

Magnetic induction (T)

828  SECTION THIRTEEN

If all the candidate solutions are rejected, then the computer file of nonacceptable solutions should be studied and the reasons for rejection understood. Generally, the following cases may appear: (1) necesNo-load loss (W/kg) sity to decrease or increase no-load loss, (2) necessity to decrease or increase load loss, and (3) necessity to FIGURE 13-18  Transformer specific decrease or increase impedance voltage. no-load loss curve. In fact, the multiple design method is a repetitive transformer design process. For example, Table 13-3 shows how changing core and conductor design can reduce no-load and load losses but also affects the cost of the transformer, when we try to further improve the optimum design.

TABLE 13-3  Loss Reduction Alternatives Impact of loss reduction technique on How to decrease no-load loss and load loss To decrease no-load loss: A. Use lower-loss core material B. Decrease flux density by 1. Increasing core cross-section area (CSA) 2. Decreasing volts per turn C. Decrease flux path length by decreasing conductor CSA To decrease load loss: A. Decrease current density by increasing conductor CSA B. Decrease current path length by 1. Decreasing core CSA 2. Increasing volts per turn

No-load loss

Load loss

Cost

Lower

No change

Higher

Lower Lower Lower

Higher Higher Higher

Higher Higher Lower

Higher

Lower

Higher

Higher Higher

Lower Lower

Lower Lower

13.8  TRANSFORMER INSULATION Transformer windings and leads have to operate at high voltages relative to the core, tank, and structural elements. Moreover, different windings and even parts of the same winding operate at different voltages. Consequently, some type of insulation must be provided between these various parts to avoid voltage breakdown or corona discharges. Although normal operating voltages are quite high (10-500 kV), the transformer must be designed to withstand even higher voltages that can occur when lightning strikes the power system or when power is suddenly switched on or off in some part of the electrical system. Insulation systems in power transformers consist of a fluid (either liquid or gas) together with solid materials. Currently, the standard insulating media for power transformers is mineral oil and cellulose. Within the core and coil assembly, insulation can be divided into two fundamental groups: major insulation and minor insulation. Major insulation separates the high-voltage and low-voltage windings, and the windings to core. Minor insulation may be used between the parts of individual coils or

13_Santoso_Sec13_p0801-0866.indd 828

23/11/17 11:24 AM

Power Transformers   829 

windings depending on construction. Finally, turn insulation is applied to each strand of conductor and/or groups of strands forming a single turn. The life of a power transformer is limited by the life of its insulation system. When the insulation ultimately reaches its end of life, the transformer will fail due to a dielectric or mechanical failure. Fortunately, the mineral oil can be drained from the transformer and reclaimed or replaced. However, the solid insulation cannot be replaced and consequently is the limiting factor in the life of a transformer. From the moment a transformer is placed in service, both the liquid and solid insulation begin a slow but irreversible degradation process. With the steady increase in power transmission voltages, the voltage ratings of power transformers have also increased making insulation cost a significant part of transformer cost. Moreover, insulation space impacts the cost of core and winding, as well as the quantity of mineral oil in the transformer. Verification of insulation design is essential for enhancing reliability and optimizing transformer cost. Robust insulation design methods, use of appropriate insulating materials, and controlled manufacturing processes ensure quality and reliability of power transformers. 13.8.1  Oil-Insulated Transformers

Voltage

Low-cost, high-dielectric strength, excellent heat transfer characteristics, and ability to recover after dielectric overstress make mineral oil the most widely used transformer insulating material. The oil is reinforced with solid insulation in various ways. The major insulation usually includes barriers of wood-based paperboard (pressboard), the barriers usually alternating with oil spaces. Because the dielectric constant of the mineral oil is 2.2 and that of the solid is approximately 4.0, the dielectric stress in the oil ends up being higher than that of the pressboard, and the design of the structure is usually limited by the stress in the oil. Voltage-time curves represent the relationship between voltage and time to breakdown. The higher the voltage the lower is the time that causes a breakdown. Figure 13-19 shows a typical impulse voltagetime curve of oil-gap in a transformer. The insulation on the conductors of the windings may be enamel or wrapped paper that is either woodbased or nylon-based. The use of insulation directly on the conductor actually inhibits the formation of potentially harmful streamers in the oil, thereby increasing the strength of the structure. Again, the limit of dielectric Time strength is usually that of mineral oil. Heavy paper wrapping is also usually used on the leads coming from the winding. In this case, the insu- FIGURE 13-19  Typical impulse voltagelation serves to reduce the stress in the oil, by moving time curve of oil-gap in a transformer. the interface from the surface of the conductor (where the stress is high) to a distance away from the conductor (where the stress is considerably lower). Again, the stress in the oil determines the amount of paper required, and the thermal considerations establish the minimum size of the conductor for the necessary insulation.

13.8.2  Alternative Fluids of Liquid-Insulated Transformers In addition to mineral oil, there are currently other alternative dielectric fluids used in liquidinsulated transformers. These alternative fluids are mainly used because of their enhanced thermal and flammability properties. Mineral oil has a fire point of 165°C. This value has proved to be too low for transformers installed inside or near buildings. Large transformers for indoor use must either

13_Santoso_Sec13_p0801-0866.indd 829

23/11/17 11:24 AM

830  SECTION THIRTEEN

be of the dry type (containing no liquid) or use a less flammable liquid, for example, silicon fluid (fire point of 350°C) or natural ester (fire point of 360°C). Currently, silicon-based or fluorinated hydrocarbons are used, where the additional expense of a fire-resistant liquid offsets additional building cost for a transformer vault. Combustion-resistant vegetable-oil-based dielectric coolants and natural esters are also becoming increasingly common as alternatives to naphthenic mineral oil. Esters are nontoxic to aquatic life, are readily biodegradable, and have a lower volatility and a higher flash point than mineral oil. 13.8.3  Gas-Insulated Transformers Gas insulation systems include fluorogases, nitrogen, and air. Fluorogases have better dielectric strength than the nitrogen or air. Although their heat transfer characteristics are poorer than oil, they are better than nitrogen or air because of their higher density. Both dielectric strength and heat transfer capability increase with pressure. In fact, the dielectric strength at 3 atm gage pressure (where some fluorocarbon-insulated transformers operate) can approach that of oil. The gas insulation is reinforced with solid insulation used in the form of barriers, layer or disk insulation, turn insulation, and lead insulation similar to oil-immersed transformers. It is usually economical to operate fluorogas-insulated transformers at higher temperatures than oil-insulated transformers. Suitable solid insulating materials include glass, asbestos, mica, high-temperature resins, and ceramics. Nitrogen and air insulated transformers are generally limited to 34.5 kV and lower operating voltages. Air-insulated transformers in clean locations are frequently ventilated to the atmosphere. In contaminated atmospheres a sealed construction is required, and nitrogen is generally used at approximately 1 atm and some elevated operating temperatures.

13.8.4  Design of Operating Structures Three factors must be considered in the evaluation of the dielectric capability of an insulation structure: (1) the voltage distribution must be calculated between different parts of the winding, (2) the dielectric stresses are then calculated knowing the voltages and the geometry, and (3) finally the actual stresses can be compared with breakdown or design stresses to determine the design margin. Voltage distributions are linear when the flux in the core is established. This occurs during all power frequency test and operating conditions and to a great extent under switching impulse conditions. Switching impulse waves have front times in the order of tens to hundreds of microseconds and tails in excess of 1000 μs. These conditions tend to stress the major insulation and not inside of the winding. For shorter-duration impulses, such as full wave, chopped wave, or front wave, the voltage does not divide linearly within the winding and must be determined by calculation or low-voltage measurement. The initial distribution is determined by the capacitive network of the winding. For disk and helical windings, the capacitance to ground is usually much greater than the series capacitance through the winding. Under impulse conditions, most of the capacitive current flows through the capacitance to ground near the end of the winding, creating a large voltage drop across the line-end portion of the coil. The capacitance network for shell form and layer-wound core form results in a more uniform initial distribution because they use electrostatic shields on both terminals of the coil to increase the ratio between the series and to ground capacitances. Static shields are commonly used in disk windings to prevent excessive concentrations of voltages on the line-end turns by increasing the effective series capacitance within the coil, especially in the line-end sections. Interleaving turns and introducing floating metal shields are two other techniques that are commonly used to increase the series capacitance of the coil. Following the initial period, electrical oscillations occur within the windings. These oscillations impose greater stresses from the middle parts of the windings to ground for long-duration waves than for short-duration waves. Very fast impulses, such as steep chopped waves, impose the greatest stresses between turns and coil portions. Note that switching impulse transient voltages are of two types: asperiodic and oscillatory. Unlike the asperiodic waves discussed earlier, the oscillatory

13_Santoso_Sec13_p0801-0866.indd 830

23/11/17 11:24 AM

Power Transformers   831 

waves can excite winding natural frequencies and produce stresses of concern in the internal winding insulation. Transformer windings that have low natural frequencies are the most vulnerable because internal damping is more effective at high frequencies. Dielectric stresses existing within the insulation structure are determined using direct calculation (for basic geometries), analog modeling, or most recently, sophisticated finite-element computer programs. Allowable stresses are determined from experience, model tests, or published data. For liquidinsulated transformers, insulation strength is greatly affected by contamination and moisture. The relatively porous and hygroscopic paper–based insulation must be carefully dried and vacuum impregnated with oil to remove moisture and gas to obtain the required high dielectric strength and to resist deterioration at operating temperatures. Gas pockets or bubbles in the insulation are particularly destructive to the insulation because the gas (usually air) not only has a low dielectric constant (about 1.0), which means that it will be stressed more highly than the other insulation, but also air has a low dielectric strength. High-voltage dc stresses may be imposed on certain transformers used in terminal equipment for dc transmission lines. Direct-current voltage applied to a composite insulation structure divides between individual components in proportion to the resistivities of the material. In general, the resistivity of an insulating material is not a constant but varies over a range of 100:1 or more, depending on temperature, dryness, contamination, and stress. Insulation design of high-voltage dc transformers in particular requires extreme care.

13.9  TRANSFORMER COOLING Core loss, copper loss in windings, stray loss in windings, and stray loss due to high-current field are mainly responsible for heat generation inside the transformer. The heat generated due to all these losses must be dissipated without allowing the core, winding, and structural parts to reach a temperature that will deteriorate the insulation. If the insulation is subjected to temperatures higher than the permitted value for a long time, the insulation gets aged and it loses its insulation properties, severely affecting transformer life. In oil-immersed transformers, the mineral oil provides a medium for both insulation and cooling. Heat from core, windings, and structural parts is dissipated by means of oil circulation. Finally, the heat is transmitted either to atmospheric air or water. Figure 13-20 shows the oil natural air natural (ONAN) method of cooling in a power transformer. More specifically, the heat developed in the active part (core and windings) is passed onto the surrounding oil through convection (heat transfer mechanism). The oil temperature increases and the oil specific gravity reduces, so the oil flows upward and then into the coolers. The oil heat is dissipated along the colder surfaces of the coolers, the specific gravity of the oil increases, and the oil flows downward and it enters the tank from the inlet Oil at the bottom. In ONAN cooling, the heat dissipation from the oil to the atmospheric air is done by natural means. In small rating transformers, the tank surface area may be able to dissipate heat directly to the atmosphere. Bigger rating transformers usually require much larger dissipating surface in the forms of radiators/tubes. If the number of radiators is small, they are preferably mounted directly on the tank in order to reduce the Air overall dimensions. When the number of radiators is large, they are mounted on a FIGURE 13-20  Oil natural air natural (ONAN) method of cooling. separate structure called radiator bank.

13_Santoso_Sec13_p0801-0866.indd 831

23/11/17 11:24 AM

832  SECTION THIRTEEN

Fan-cooled transformers use external fans to improve heat dissipation from the radiators, and sometimes internal pumps to circulate the oil through the radiators (and sometimes also through cooling ducts in the core and coils). Forced-oil-cooled transformers use external oil-to-air heat exchangers requiring both air fans and oil pumps for all operating conditions. Water-cooled transformers usually have the oil withdrawn from the transformers at the top of the tank, pumped through an external cooler, and returned to the bottom of the tank. Accurate estimation of temperatures on all surfaces is very important in the design of transformers to determine the operating magnetic induction in the core and the current densities in the windings. Moreover, it helps check the adequacy of cooling arrangements provided for the core and windings. 13.9.1  Heat Transfer Mechanisms Three different heat transfer mechanisms take place in a transformer: conduction, convection, and radiation. In oil-immersed transformers, convection is the most important and conduction is the least important. Rigorous mathematical treatment of these heat transfer mechanisms is very difficult and consequently transformer designers mostly rely on empirical formulas. The temperature drop (∆θ in °C) across the insulation, which is due to the conduction heat transfer mechanism, can be computed by the basic thermal law: ∆θ =



Q ⋅ ti (13-31) k⋅A

where Q is the heat flow (power loss) in W, ti is the insulation thickness in m, k is the thermal conductivity in W/(m ⋅ °C), and A is the cross-section area in m2. The heat transfer (PR in W), which is due to the radiation heat transfer mechanism, is computed by the Stephan-Boltzmann law: PR = η ⋅ E ⋅ AR ⋅ (Ts4 − Ta4 ) (13-32)



where η = 5.67 × 10−8 W/(m 2 ⋅ K 4 ) is the Stephan-Boltzmann constant, E is the surface emissivity, AR is the surface area for radiation in m2, Ts is the average temperature of radiating surface in K, and Ta is the ambient air temperature in K. The surface emissivity depends on the surface finish and the type of paint applied on the surface. The heat dissipation from the core and windings occurs mainly due to convection. When a heated surface (core, windings) is immersed in a fluid (oil), heat flows from the surface to the cooling medium (oil). The heat flow (Qc in W), which is due to the convection heat transfer mechanism, is computed by the formula:

Qc = h ⋅ Ah ⋅ (Th − T f ) (13-33)

where h is the heat transfer coefficient in W/(m 2 ⋅ °C), Ah is the area of the heated surface for convection in m2, Th is the temperature of the heated surface in °C, and T f is the temperature of the fluid (oil) in °C. 13.9.2  Calculation of Temperatures The IEEE C57.91 standard provides the methodology to calculate the oil temperatures and the hottest-spot temperatures and estimate the expenditure of insulation life expected during a specified load and ambient cycle for a specified transformer design. The ultimate top-oil rise for several time constants, TORu, is computed as follows: n



13_Santoso_Sec13_p0801-0866.indd 832

 TORr ⋅ K 2 + R  TORu =   (13-34)  R +1

23/11/17 11:24 AM

Power Transformers   833 

where TORr is the rated top-oil rise at the nameplate rating load, K is the per-unit load, R is the ratio of the transformer no-load and load loss, and n is the oil exponent that is between 0.7 and 1.0 (typically 0.8). Equation (13-34) provides the ultimate top-oil rise above an ambient temperature that a given transformer with a rated top-oil rise above ambient will reach if loaded to a load of K for period of time exceeding several time constants. For most liquid-immersed transformers, the top-oil time constant is several hours. The ultimate hottest-spot temperature gradient above the top-oil temperature HSGu is computed as follows: HSGu = HSGr ⋅ K 2⋅m (13-35)



where HSGr is the hottest-spot gradient above the TORr (top-oil rise at rated load), K is the per-unit load, and m is the winding exponent that is between 0.8 and 1.0 (typically 0.8). Given a daily load cycle and ambient temperature profile, and the top-oil and winding time constants, the temperatures of the top-oil and the hottest-spot can be calculated for any time during a cycle. If the load K is rising, the instantaneous top-oil rise, TORt , for the time interval t is computed by TORt = Ti + (Tu − Ti ) ⋅ (1 + e − t /tc ) (13-36)

If the load K is falling:

TORt = Tu + (Ti − Tu ) ⋅ e − t /tc (13-37)



where Tu is the ultimate top-oil temperature rise at load K, Ti is the initial top-oil temperature rise at the end of the previous moment in time, t is the time interval (hours), and tc is the oil time constant (hours). If the load K is rising, the instantaneous hot-spot gradient HSGt for the time interval t is computed by HSGt = g i + ( g u − g i ) ⋅ (1 + e − t /wc ) (13-38)



The instantaneous hottest-spot temperature HSt for the time interval t is computed by

HSt = Tt + TORt + HSGt (13-39)

where Tt is the ambient temperature during the time interval t. 13.9.3  Design Requirements International standards (IEEE, IEC) set the requirements that define the transformer thermal characteristics. The average ambient temperature of the air in contact with the cooling equipment for a 24 h period shall not exceed 30°C, and the maximum ambient temperature shall not exceed 40°C. The average winding temperature rise above ambient shall not exceed 65°C for a specified continuous-load current. The industry uses this criterion instead of the more relevant hot-spot temperature rise because manufacturers can check it by simply measuring the resistance of the windings during temperature-rise tests. The manufacturer must guarantee that the transformer meets this criterion. The hot spot rise (hottest-conductor temperature rise) in the winding shall not exceed 80°C under the same ambient conditions. This 80°C limit does not ensure that the hot-spot rise is 15°C higher than the average winding temperature rise. International standards specify requirements for operation of the transformer above rated voltage. For example, at no load, the voltage shall not exceed 110%. At full load, the voltage shall not exceed 105%.

13_Santoso_Sec13_p0801-0866.indd 833

23/11/17 11:24 AM

834  SECTION THIRTEEN

The nameplate rating (kVA or MVA) of a transformer is the continuous load at rated voltage that produces an average winding temperature rise within the 65°C limit and hot-spot temperature rise within the 80°C limit. 13.9.4  Insulation Aging The average, practical life of a transformer is probably 30 to 50 years. The aging of insulation impacts transformer life. The Arrhenius reaction equation is the basic principle for thermal-aging calculations of transformer insulation: L = A ⋅ e B/T (13-40)



where L is the insulation life in hours, T is the absolute temperature in K, while A and B are constants that depend on the aging rate, the end-of-life definition, and the condition of the insulation system. Normal life of cellulose insulation is the time in years for a transformer operated with a constant 110°C hot-spot winding temperature to reach its defined end-of-life criteria. As the hottest-spot conductor temperature moves below 110°C, the life expectancy increases rapidly, and vice versa. A rule of thumb is that the life doubles for every 8°C decrease in operating temperature. The insulation life halves for every 8°C increase in operating temperature. Users seldom operate transformers such that the hot-spot winding temperature is above 110°C. Even when peak loads cause 140°C hot-spot winding temperatures, the total time that the transformer operates above 110°C is relatively short, maybe less than 200 to 400 h/year.

13.10  TRANSFORMER SOUND LEVELS The transformer noise is mainly due to the magnetostriction of the electrical steel sheets of the magnetic circuit. In general, a transformer operating at low magnetic induction has low noise level. Other sources of transformer noise are the windings and the cooling equipment. Transformers located in residential areas should have sound level as low as possible. Table 13-4 presents the sound power levels of the five lists (E0, D0, C0, B0, and A0) of Table 13-1 for transformers from 50 to 2500 kVA with 24 kV maximum voltage according to EN 50464-1: 2007. It can be seen from Tables 13-1 and 13-4 that for the same rated power, A0 has the lowest, and E0 has the highest no-load losses and sound power levels. TABLE 13-4  Lists of Sound Power Levels According to EN 50464-1: 2007 Sound power level, dB Rated power, kVA

E0

D0

C0

B0

A0

Short-circuit impedance, %

50 100 160 250 315 400 500 630 630 800 1,000 1,250 1,600 2,000 2,500

55 59 62 65 67 68 69 70 70 71 73 74 76 78 81

50 54 57 60 61 63 64 65 65 66 68 69 71 73 76

47 49 52 55 57 58 59 60 60 61 63 64 66 68 71

42 44 47 50 52 53 54 55 55 56 58 59 61 63 66

39 41 44 47 49 50 51 52 52 53 55 56 58 60 63

4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 6 6 6 6 6 6 6

13_Santoso_Sec13_p0801-0866.indd 834

23/11/17 11:24 AM

Power Transformers   835 

13.10.1  Source of Sound There are three different sources of transformer noise: 1. Core vibration due to magnetic forces and mainly due to magnetostrictive forces. The core is the predominant source of transformer noise. Core steel laminations undergo elongations and contractions (magnetostriction) as flux through them varies. This magnetostriction is nonlinear and independent of flux direction. Hence, noise is emitted in even multiples of the power frequency, that is, 120, 240, 360 Hz, etc., for a system with 60-Hz power frequency. The harmonic components decrease in magnitude as the mode of vibration goes up. However, an overexcited transformer or core-resonance may produce abnormally high third or higher harmonic frequencies. 2. Load noise mainly due to electromagnetic forces in the windings. Load noise is caused by vibrations in transformer windings, tank walls, and magnetic shields due to the electromagnetic forces resulting from leakage fields generated by load currents. These electromagnetic forces are proportional to the square of the load currents. The frequency of load noise is usually twice the power frequency. 3. Noises from cooling equipment. All rotary machinery on a transformer, including fans and pumps, produce noise with a broadband frequency spectrum. This “white noise” can have various magnitude and directionality, depending on the design of the fans and pumps and on their arrangement.

13.10.2  Sound Measurement The sound level, expressed in decibels (dB), is measured using the so-called A-weighted scale that closely follows the sensitivity of the human ear. There are two main methods of sound measurement: sound pressure measurement and sound intensity measurement. The details of these methods are given in IEEE C57.12.90 and C57.12.91 and in IEC 60076-10 standards. The A-weighted sound pressure is the most commonly used method for determining sound levels in transformers. Sound pressure is a scalar quantity that requires simple instrumentation. Sound pressure measurements are quite sensitive to the ambient sound levels on the test location. Consequently, appropriate corrections for the ambient sound level and reflected sound from the surrounding surfaces must be also quantified to calculate the correct sound level of the transformer. The A-weighted ambient sound pressure levels must be measured immediately before and after the measurements on a transformer. According to the sound pressure measurement, the A-weighted sound power level, LWA in dB, is computed by

LWA = LPA + 10 ⋅ log(S ) (13-41)

where LPA is the A-weighted average sound pressure level in dB, and S is the area of the radiating surface in m2. The A-weighted sound intensity method measures the sound power radiated through a unit area per unit time. Sound intensity is a vector quantity and the method measures directional sound. Consequently, it is less affected by ambient sound. This means that the sound intensity method can provide more accurate measurements in the presence of ambient sound. The sound intensity method is especially suitable for transformers with very low sound levels. However, sound intensity measurements require higher skill personnel and more sophisticated instrumentation. According to the sound intensity measurement, the A-weighted sound power level, LWA in dB, is computed by

LWA = LIA + 10 ⋅ log(S ) (13-42)

where LIA is the A-weighted average sound intensity level in dB, and S is the area of the radiating surface in m2.

13_Santoso_Sec13_p0801-0866.indd 835

23/11/17 11:24 AM

836  SECTION THIRTEEN

13.10.3  Sound Level Reduction Manufacturers have at their disposal a variety of means of obtaining sound reduction. Most measures aim at reducing noise generation: 1. Reducing Core Vibration. Because magnetostriction is a function of flux intensity, a manufacturer’s first option is to reduce induction levels of transformers. This has an additional advantage of reducing no-load losses. Alternatively, grades of steel having a different magnetostrictive characteristics can be substituted for the same induction-level design. A step-lap design can also reduce noise emission from joints. Finally, the designer has to anticipate the natural frequencies of the core mechanical structure and avoid their coincidence with harmonics of 120 Hz (for 60 Hz power frequency). 2. Reducing Cooling Equipment Noises. The most significant noise reduction measure for cooling equipment is to reduce fan rotational speed or adjust the fan blade incidence angle. There is ample supply of low-noise designs, ranging from low speed to encased fans, from which manufacturers can choose. When all possibilities of noise emission are exhausted and still further noise reduction is required, some sort of a mass-damper or absorption system has to be incorporated on or outside the tank structure. Moderate reductions can be realized by the use of barriers within the tank. Some of these are “soft” barriers, which operate on the principle of absorbing vibrational energy from the core and reducing its transmission to the tank. Others are “mass” barriers, which operate on the principle of loading the tank to decrease its magnitude of vibration for given energy transmission from the core. To achieve large sound reductions (as much as 25 to 30 dB), some manufacturers employ complete external enclosures of steel. For smaller substation units, these enclosures can be preassembled and shipped in place over the transformer tank. To reduce the sound level of an existing transformer, the most satisfactory method has been found to be the erection of barrier walls on one or more sides of the transformer. The attenuation that can be achieved depends on the transmission loss through the barrier, the diffraction over and around the barrier, and the pressure buildup between the tank and the barrier. Transmission loss through a barrier wall is a function of the mass of the wall. Structural requirements of most practical masonry barriers ensure sufficient mass to produce 25 to 40 dB attenuation through the wall. The effectiveness is usually limited by diffraction around the edges of the barrier.

13.11  TRANSFORMER OPERATION 13.11.1  Loading Practice The temperature limitation of loading must be considered. Ordinarily, the kVA that a transformer should carry is limited by the effect of reactance on regulation or by the effect of load loss on system economy. At times, it is desirable to ignore these factors and increase the kVA load until the effect of temperature on insulation life is the limiting factor. High temperature decreases the mechanical strength and increases the brittleness of fibrous insulation, making transformer failure increasingly likely, even though the dielectric strength of the insulation material may not be seriously decreased. Overloading of transformers should be limited by reasonable consideration of the effect on insulation life and the probable effect on transformer life. The insulation life of a transformer is defined as the time required for the mechanical strength of the insulation material to lose a specified fraction of its initial value. Loss of 50% of the tensile strength is the usual basis for evaluating conductor insulation for power transformers. The temperature of the top oil should never exceed 110°C for power transformers with a 55°C average winding-rise insulation system or 110°C for those with a 65°C average winding-rise insulation system. The consequence of exceeding these limits could be oil overflow or excessive pressure. The winding hot spot should not exceed 150°C for the 55°C average winding-rise insulation system or 180°C for the 65°C average winding-rise insulation system. These limitations are based principally on a

13_Santoso_Sec13_p0801-0866.indd 836

23/11/17 11:24 AM

Power Transformers   837 

concern for rates of insulation aging, but it should be noted that free bubbles may be evolved at hot-spot temperatures above 140°C, with consequent weakening of dielectric strength. The peak short-duration loading should never exceed 200% of rating, except for transformers rated over 100 MVA a limit of 150% of rating is recommended. This reflects a concern for stray flux heating in large units. 13.11.2  Parallel Operation of Transformers To supply a load above the rating of an existing transformer, one or more transformers are connected in parallel with the existing transformer. It is usually economical to install another transformer in parallel instead of replacing the existing transformer by a single larger transformer. Moreover, it is better to have a parallel transformer for reliability reasons. The parallel operation of two or more transformers is feasible, when the following requirements are met: 1. Their voltage ratio (turns ratio) should be the same (the permitted tolerance is according to ANSI/IEEE and IEC standards). 2. Their vector groups should be the same. In other words, the transformers must have the same inherent phase angle difference between primary and secondary terminals, the same polarity and the same phase sequence. 3. Their series impedance should be the same (the permitted tolerance is according to ANSI/IEEE and IEC standards). The first two requirements ensure that the open-circuit secondary voltages of the transformers are closely matched in order to avoid excessive circulating currents when the parallel connections are made. The third requirement ensures that when transformers having the same series impedance are connected in parallel, the load currents will split in proportion to the kVA ratings of the transformers. Consequently, transformers with different kVA ratings can be successfully operated in parallel as long as their series impedance values are all approximately the same. Let us consider that two transformers with equal voltage ratios are operated in parallel. Figure 13-21 shows the simplified equivalent single-phase circuit referred to the secondary winding of these two transformers, which feed a load I at voltage V2. As can be seen in Fig. 13-21, the excitation branch is ignored in both transformers; the first transformer is represented by its series impedance Z A = RA + jX A and the second transformer is represented by its series impedance Z B = RB + jX B. Since the two transformers are operated in parallel, the voltage drop across the two transformers is the same: I A ⋅ Z A = I B ⋅ Z B = I ⋅ Z (13-43)

V1

V2 RA

IA

XA

I

PA I

QA RB

IB

XB

PL

PB

QL

QB 1

2

FIGURE 13-21  Simplified equivalent single-phase circuit referred to the secondary winding of two transformers operated in parallel.

13_Santoso_Sec13_p0801-0866.indd 837

23/11/17 11:24 AM

838  SECTION THIRTEEN

where Z is the equivalent series impedance of the two transformers, which is given by Z ⋅Z Z = A B (13-44) ZA + ZB By combining Eqs. (13-43) and (13-44), the following equations are obtained:

IA =

ZB ⋅ I (13-45) ZA + ZB



IB =

ZA ⋅ I (13-46) ZA + ZB

Since the voltage is V2 at the load terminals, the first transformer supplies complex power S A (active power PA and reactive power QA) that is given by S A = PA + jQA = V2 ⋅ I ∗A (13-47)



and the second transformer supplies complex power S B (active power PB and reactive power QB ) that is given by S B = PB + jQB = V2 ⋅ I ∗B (13-48)



Equation (13-43) can also be written as follows: I A I A ⋅ e jθ A I A j (θ A −θ B ) Z B Z B ⋅ e jϕ B Z B j (ϕ B −ϕ A ) = = ⋅e = = = ⋅e (13-49) I B I B ⋅ e jθ B I B Z A Z A ⋅ e jϕ A Z A



When ϕ B − ϕ A = 0, then θ A − θ B = 0, and Eq. (13-49) can be written as follows: I A Z B SnA ⋅ ukB = = (13-50) I B Z A SnB ⋅ ukA



where SnA and SnB is the rated power of the first and second transformer, respectively, while ukA and ukB is the short-circuit voltage of the first and second transformer, respectively. Equation (13-50) shows that when ukA = ukB, then there is proportionality between load currents I A and I B, impedances Z A and Z B, and rated power outputs SnA and SnB. Moreover, when ukA = ukB, the load current I A is proportional to the rated power SnA, and the load current I B is proportional to the rated power output SnB . When ukA ≠ ukB, the transformer with the smaller impedance takes the larger load current, which is no longer proportional to the rated power output of that transformer. Example 13-2.  Two three-phase transformers are connected in parallel and feed a three-phase load of 1700 kVA with power factor 0.8 lagging. Both transformers have rated primary voltage 20 kV, rated secondary voltage 0.4 kV, rated power 1000 kVA, per unit resistance 2%, and per unit impedance 6%. The voltage at the sending bus (20 kV) is V1 = 1.05∠00 pu . Compute the loading of the two transformers. Solution.  The base power of the power system is SBase = 1000 kVA. The reactance of each transformer is X = Z 2 − R 2 = 0.062 − 0.022 ⇒ X = X A = X B = 0.057 pu

The impedance of each transformer is Z = R + jX ⇒ Z = Z A = Z B = (0.02 + j 0.057) pu

13_Santoso_Sec13_p0801-0866.indd 838

23/11/17 11:24 AM

Power Transformers   839 

The per unit load is SL =

1700 ⋅ (0.8 + j 0.6) ⇒ S L = PL + jQL = (1.36 + j1.02) pu 1000

The single-line diagram of the power system is shown in Fig. 13-22. Using a power flow software, the solution of the power flow problem of Example 13-2 is V2 = 1.0075∠ − 1.53° pu . V1 = 1.05∠0° pu P12A I

V2 RA

IA

XA

Q12A P12B

PA I

QA RB

IB

XB

Q12B

PL QL

PB QB

1

2

FIGURE 13-22  Single-line diagram of the power system of Example 13-2.

The total current is I=

S ∗L 1.36 − j1.02 = ⇒ I = 1.6874 ∠ − 38.40° pu ∗ V2 1.0075 ∠1.53°

The current in the first transformer is IA =

Z B ⋅I I = ⇒ I A = 0.8437 ∠ − 38.40° pu ZA + ZB 2

The current in the second transformer is IB =

Z A ⋅I I = ⇒ I B = 0.8437 ∠ − 38.40° pu ZA + ZB 2

The complex power that the first transformer delivers is

S A = V2 ⋅ I ∗A ⋅ SBase = (1.0075∠ − 1.53°) ⋅ (0.8437 ∠38.40°) ⋅1000 ⇒



S A = PA + jQA = 680 kW + j510 kVAR ⇒ S A = 850∠36.87° kVA The complex power that the second transformer delivers is



S B = V2 ⋅ I ∗B ⋅ SBase = (1.0075∠ − 1.53°) ⋅ (0.8437 ∠38.40°) ⋅1000 ⇒



S B = PB + jQB = 680 kW + j510 kVAR ⇒ S B = 850∠36.87° kVA

Since the two transformers have the same rated power, the same voltage ratio, and the same impedance, the load (1700 kVA) is equally distributed between them. The complete power flow results are shown in Fig. 13-23.

13_Santoso_Sec13_p0801-0866.indd 839

23/11/17 11:24 AM

840  SECTION THIRTEEN

V1 = 1.05∠0° pu 694.2 kW 1388.4 kW

V2 = 1.0075∠ – 1.53° pu RA

XA

550.2 kVAR 694.2 kW

1100.4 kVAR

680.0 kW 510.0 kVAR 1360.0 kW

RB

XB

550.2 kVAR

680.0 kW 1020.0 kVAR 510.0 kVAR

1

2

FIGURE 13-23  Power flow results of Example 13-2.

An alternative approach to compute the loading (apparent power) SAa and SBa of the two transformers is as follows: SrA ZA

1000 0.06 S = ⋅S = ⋅1700 ⇒ SAa = 850 kVA SrA SrB L 1000 1000 + + 0.06 0.06 ZA ZB a A

SrB ZB

1000 0.06 S = ⋅S = ⋅1700 ⇒ SBa = 850 kVA SrA SrB L 1000 1000 + + 0.06 0.06 ZA ZB a B

It can be seen that the alternative approach provides the same results as the accurate power flow approach because the two transformers have the same rated power, the same voltage ratio, and the same impedance. Example 13-3.  Two three-phase transformers are connected in parallel and feed a three-phase load of 1700 kVA with power factor 0.8 lagging. Both transformers have rated primary voltage 20 kV, rated secondary voltage 0.4 kV, rated power 1000 kVA, and per unit resistance 2%. The first transformer has per unit impedance 6%. The second transformer has per unit impedance 8%. The voltage at the sending bus (20 kV) is V1 = 1.05∠0° pu. Compute the loading of the two transformers. Solution.  The base power of the power system is SBase = 1000 kVA. The reactance of the first transformer is X A = Z A2 − RA2 = 0.062 − 0.022 ⇒ X A = 0.057 pu The impedance of the first transformer is Z A = RA + jX A ⇒ Z A = (0.02 + j 0.057) pu The reactance of the second transformer is X B = Z B2 − RB2 = 0.082 − 0.022 ⇒ X B = 0.077 pu

13_Santoso_Sec13_p0801-0866.indd 840

23/11/17 11:24 AM

Power Transformers   841 

The impedance of the second transformer is Z B = RB + jX B ⇒ Z B = (0.02 + j 0.077) pu Using a power flow software, the solution of the power flow problem of Example 13-3 is V2 = 1.0022 ∠ − 1.86° pu . The total current is I=

S ∗L 1.36 − j1.02 = ⇒ I = 1.696 ∠ − 38.73° pu ∗ V2 1.0022∠1.86°

The current in the first transformer is IA =

Z B ⋅I ⇒ I A = 0.970∠ − 36.59° pu ZA + ZB

The current in the second transformer is IB =

Z A ⋅I ⇒ I B = 0.728∠ − 41.58° pu ZA + ZB

The complex power that the first transformer delivers is S A = V2 ⋅ I ∗A ⋅ SBase = (1.0022∠ − 1.86°) ⋅ (0.970∠36.59°) ⋅1000 ⇒ S A = PA + jQA = 799.1 kW + j553.9 kVAR ⇒ S A = 972.3∠34.73° kVA The complex power that the second transformer delivers is S B = V2 ⋅ I ∗B ⋅ SBase = (1.0022∠ − 1.86°) ⋅ (0.728∠41.58°) ⋅1000 ⇒ S B = PB + jQB = 560.9 kW + j 466.1 kVAR ⇒ S B = 729.2∠39.72° kVA The complete power flow results are shown in Fig. 13-24.

V1 = 1.05∠0° pu 817.9 kW 1389.4 kW

V2 = 1.0022∠ – 1.86° pu RA

XA

607.1 kVAR 571.5 kW

1114.2 kVAR

799.1 kW 553.9 kVAR

RB

XB

507.1 kVAR 1

1360.0 kW

560.9 kW 1020.0 kVAR 466.1 kVAR 2

FIGURE 13-24  Power flow results of Example 13-3.

13_Santoso_Sec13_p0801-0866.indd 841

23/11/17 11:24 AM

842  SECTION THIRTEEN

An alternative approximate approach to compute the loading (apparent power) SAa and SBa of the two transformers is as follows: SrA ZA

1000 0.06 S = ⋅S = ⋅1700 ⇒ SAa = 971.4 kVA SrA SrB L 1000 1000 + + 0.06 0.08 ZA ZB a A

SrB ZB

1000 0.08 S = ⋅S = ⋅1700 ⇒ SBa = 728.6 kVA SrA SrB L 1000 1000 + + 0.06 0.08 ZA ZB a B

In comparison to the accurate power flow approach, the error of the alternative approximate approach is e SA =

SAa − SA 971.4 − 972.3 ⋅100% = ⋅100% ⇒ eSA = −0.09% SA 972.3

e SB =

SBa − SB 728.6 − 729.2 ⋅100% = ⋅100% ⇒ eSB = −0.09% SB 729.2

Example 13-4.  Two three-phase transformers are connected in parallel and feed a three-phase load of 2700 kVA with power factor 0.8 lagging. Both transformers have rated primary voltage 20 kV, rated secondary voltage 0.4 kV, and per unit resistance 2%. The first transformer has rated power 1000 kVA and per unit impedance 6%. The second transformer has rated power 2500 kVA and per unit impedance 8%. The voltage at the sending bus (20 kV) is V1 = 1.05∠0° pu. Compute the loading of the two transformers. Solution.  The base power of the power system is SBase = 1000 kVA. The reactance of the first transformer is X A = Z A2 − RA2 = 0.062 − 0.022 ⇒ X A = 0.057 pu The impedance of the first transformer is Z A = RA + jX A ⇒ Z A = (0.02 + j 0.057) pu At the base power SBase, the resistance of the second transformer is RB = 0.02 ⋅

1000 ⇒ RB = 0.008 pu 2500

At the base power SBase, the magnitude of the impedance of the second transformer is Z B = 0.08 ⋅

1000 ⇒ Z B = 0.032 pu 2500

The reactance of the second transformer is X B = Z B2 − RB2 = 0.0322 − 0.0082 ⇒ X B = 0.031 pu

13_Santoso_Sec13_p0801-0866.indd 842

23/11/17 11:24 AM

Power Transformers   843 

The impedance of the second transformer is Z B = RB + jX B ⇒ Z B = (0.008 + j 0.031) pu Using a power flow software, the solution of the power flow problem of Example 13-4 is V2 = 1.0046 ∠ − 1.84° pu . The total current is I=

S ∗L 1.36 − j1.02 = ⇒ I = 2.688∠ − 38.71° pu ∗ V2 1.0046∠1.84°

The current in the first transformer is IA =

Z B ⋅I ⇒ I A = 0.936∠ − 35.45° pu ZA + ZB

The current in the second transformer is IB =

Z A ⋅I ⇒ I B = 1.754 ∠ − 40.45° pu ZA + ZB

The complex power that the first transformer delivers is S A = V2 ⋅ I ∗A ⋅ SBase = (1.0046∠ − 1.84°) ⋅ (0.936∠35.45°) ⋅1000 ⇒ S A = PA + jQA = 782.8 kW + j520.3 kVAR ⇒ S A = 939.9∠33.61° kVA The complex power that the second transformer delivers is S B = V2 ⋅ I ∗B ⋅ SBase = (1.0046∠ − 1.84°) ⋅ (1.754 ∠40.45°) ⋅1000 ⇒ S B = PB + jQB = 1377.2 kW + j1099.7 kVAR ⇒ S B = 1762.4 ∠38.61° kVA The complete power flow results are shown in Fig. 13-25.

V1 = 1.05∠0° pu 800.3 kW 2202.1 kW

V2 = 1.0046∠ – 1.84° pu RA

XA

569.8 kVAR 1401.8 kW

1764.7 kVAR

782.8 kW 520.3 kVAR

RB

XB

1194.9 kVAR 1

2160.0 kW

1377.2 kW 1620.0 kVAR 1099.7 kVAR 2

FIGURE 13-25  Power flow results of Example 13-4.

13_Santoso_Sec13_p0801-0866.indd 843

23/11/17 11:24 AM

844  SECTION THIRTEEN

An alternative approximate approach to compute the loading (apparent power) SAa and SBa of the two transformers is as follows: SrA ZA

1000 0.06 S = ⋅S = ⋅ 2700 ⇒ SAa = 939.1 kVA SrA SrB L 1000 2500 + + 0.06 0.08 ZA ZB a A

SrB ZB

2500 0.08 ⋅S = ⋅ 2700 ⇒ SBa = 1760.9 kVA S = SrA SrB L 1000 2500 + + 0.06 0.08 ZA ZB a B

In comparison to the accurate power flow approach, the error of the alternative approximate approach is e SA =

SAa − SA 939.1 − 939.9 ⋅100% = ⋅100% ⇒ eSA = −0.09% SA 939.9

e SB =

SBa − SB 1760.9 − 1762.4 ⋅100% = ⋅100% ⇒ eSB = −0.09% SB 1762.4

13.12  TRANSFORMER TESTING Power transformer reliability in service is considerably enhanced by the selection of appropriate tests and the specification of correct test levels. ANSI/IEEE standards C57.12.00, C57.12.90, C57.98, and C57.113 contain detailed, authoritative information on testing power and distribution transformers. These standards are very important because they facilitate precise communication and understanding between transformer manufacturers and users. These standards identify critical features, and provide minimum requirements for safe and reliable operation of power and distribution transformers. Transformer tests are classified, in accordance with IEC 60076-1 standard, as follows: •  Type tests •  Routine tests •  Special tests

13.12.1  Type Tests Type tests, which are made on one transformer from every transformer type, are the following: 1. Temperature Rise Test. The temperature rise test procedure is typically performed according to IEC 60076-2. The objective of this test is to verify guaranteed temperature rises for oil and windings. 2. Lightning Impulse Test. The lightning impulse test procedure is typically performed according to IEC 60076-3. A standard full-wave lightning impulse curve is shown in Fig. 13-26. The lightning impulse test checks if the transformer can withstand overvoltages. These overvoltages are caused by (1) traveling waves (caused by lightning) in transmission lines, (2) sudden on/off switching of breakers, and (3) short circuits. It should be noted that the lightning impulse test is a routine test for transformers with higher voltage for equipment U m greater than 72.5 kV and a type test for U m ≤ 72.5 kV .

13_Santoso_Sec13_p0801-0866.indd 844

23/11/17 11:24 AM

Power Transformers   845 

Voltage (%) 100

50

1.2

50

Time (µS)

FIGURE 13-26  A standard full-wave lightning impulse curve.

13.12.2  Routine Tests Routine tests are performed on every transformer separately, and include 1. Winding Resistance. The winding resistance is defined as the direct current (dc) resistance of a winding. The procedure for the measurement of windings resistance is typically performed according to IEC 60076-1. During this test the resistance of each winding is measured and the temperature is recorded. The test is performed with direct current. 2. Voltage Ratio and Check of Phase Displacement. Measurement of the voltage ratio is typically performed according to IEC 60076-1. The objective of the test is to compare the measured values of the transformer ratio with the respective guaranteed values. For the transformer, the voltage ratio is equal to the turns ratio, namely, V1 /V2 = N1 /N 2, where V1 and V2 is the phase voltage of the primary and secondary winding, respectively, and N1 and N 2 is the number of turns of the primary and secondary winding, respectively. 3. Impedance Voltage. Measurement of impedance voltage is typically performed according to IEC 60076-1. The impedance voltage, which is expressed as a percentage of the rated voltage, represents the transformer’s impedance. The IEC standard requires the impedance voltage to be calculated at the reference temperature of 75°C. The transformer impedance voltage is guaranteed by the manufacturer and is verified for the customer during the impedance voltage routine test. 4. Load Loss. The transformer load loss is guaranteed by the manufacturer and is verified for the customer during the load loss routine test. The measurement of load loss is implemented with the secondary winding short-circuit and by increasing the voltage of the primary winding until the current of the primary winding reaches its nominal value. The load losses are calculated at the reference temperature of 75°C according to the IEC standard. 5. No-Load Current and No-Load Losses. The measurement is typically performed according to IEC 60076-1. The no-load current represents the real value of current that is required to magnetize the magnetic core. The no-load losses represent the power that is absorbed by the transformer core when rated voltage and rated frequency are applied to one winding (e.g., secondary) and the other winding (e.g., primary) is open circuited. 6. Dielectric Routine Tests. The dielectric routine tests are the following: • Applied Voltage Dielectric Test. The duration of the test, according to IEC 60076-3, is 1 min. With this specific test, the following are checked: (1) the insulation between primary and secondary windings, (2) the insulation between the tested winding and the tank, and (3) the insulation between the tested winding and the magnetic circuit.

13_Santoso_Sec13_p0801-0866.indd 845

23/11/17 11:24 AM

846  SECTION THIRTEEN

• Induced Voltage Dielectric Test. A three-phase voltage, twice the rated voltage, is applied to the transformer for 1 min. However, the doubling of the voltage will double the magnetic induction resulting in transformer saturation and, consequently, there is a danger of the transformer being destroyed. In order to avoid saturation, the frequency is also doubled, so the magnetic induction remains constant. Consequently, during this test, the volts per turn and therefore the volts per layer are doubled. This test verifies the dielectric strength between turns and layers.

13.12.3  Special Tests Special tests are not included in the category of type or routine tests and are executed after agreement between customer and manufacturer. The special tests are the following: 1. Dielectric special tests. 2. Determination of capacitances of windings-to-earth and between windings. 3. Short-circuit withstand test. According to this test, the transformer is subjected to successive short circuits of 0.5 s duration and the transformer must withstand these short circuits. Since this test requires high power, it is executed in special test centers. 4. Determination of Sound Levels. The transformer is energized at no-load and at rated voltage and rated frequency, so the noise peripheral to the transformer can be measured. 5. Measurement of the harmonics of the no-load current. 6. Measurement of insulation resistance and/or measurement of dissipation factor of the insulation system capacitances. 7. Radio interference voltage. 8. Measurement of zero-sequence impedance.

13.13  TRANSFORMER PROTECTION The power transformer has to be protected against faults occurring on any part of the power system as well as against faults occurring within the transformer. The transformer has to be protected against the effects of power system faults, that is, overloads, short circuits, lightning, and earth faults. The transformer has also to be protected against the effects of faults arising in the transformer, that is, •  Insulation breakdown, which results in short circuits or ground faults. Insulation breakdown between windings or between windings and the core can be caused by insulation aging due to long time overtemperature, oil contamination and oil leakage, corona discharges in the insulation, transient overvoltages due to thunderstorms or network switching, and current forces on the windings due to high current external faults. •  Overheating due to overexcitation, which can damage the metal parts of the transformer. When a fault occurs in a transformer, the damage is usually severe. The transformer has to be transported to a workshop to be repaired, which needs considerable time. It is always difficult to operate a power transmission system with a power transformer out of service. In order to prevent faults and to minimize the damage in case of a fault, power transformers are equipped with protective relays and monitors. The choice of protective equipment varies depending on transformer size, importance of transformer within the power system, voltage level, winding connection and design.

13_Santoso_Sec13_p0801-0866.indd 846

23/11/17 11:24 AM

Power Transformers   847 

13.13.1  Overcurrent Protection

Fault duration (s)

A transformer may be subjected to overcurrents ranging from just in excess of nameplate rating to as much as 10 or 20 times rating. Currents up to about twice rating normally result from overload conditions on the system, while higher currents are a consequence of system faults. When such overcurrents are of extended duration, they may produce either mechanical or thermal damage in a transformer, or possibly both. At current levels near the maximum design capability (worst-case through-fault), mechanical effects from electromagnetically generated forces are of primary concern. The pulsating forces tend to loosen the coils, conductors may be deformed or displaced, and insulation may be damaged. Lower levels of current principally produce thermal heating. For all current levels, the extent of the damage is increased with time duration. Whatever the cause, magnitude, or duration of the overcurrent, it is desirable that some component of the system recognizes the abnormal condition and initiates action to protect the transformer. Fuses and protective relays are two forms of protective devices in common use. A fuse consists of a fusible conducting link that will be destroyed after it is subjected to an overcurrent for some period of time, thus opening the circuit. Typically, fuses are employed to protect distribution transformers and small power transformers up to 5000 to 10,000 kVA. Traditional relays are electromagnetic devices that operate on a reduced current derived from a current transformer in the main transformer line to close or open control contacts, which can initiate the operation of a circuit breaker in the Curve A transformer line circuit. Relays are used to protect Thermal all medium and large power transformers. All protective devices, such as fuses and relays, have a defined operating characteristic in the currenttime domain. This characteristic should be properly coordinated with the current-carrying capability of the transformer to avoid damage from prolonged overloads or through faults. Transformer capability is defined in general terms in a guide document, ANSI/ IEEE C57.109, IEEE guide for liquid-immersed Mechanical transformers through-fault-current duration. The format of the transformer capability curves is shown Transformer in Fig. 13-27. The solid curve, A, defines the thermal Curves B impedance capability for all ratings, while the dashed curves, B (appropriate to the specific transformer impedance), define mechanical capability. For proper coordiTimes rated base current nation on any power transformer, the protective device characteristic should fall below both the mechanical and thermal portions of the trans- FIGURE 13-27  Transformer through-fault protection curves. former capability curve. 13.13.2  Protection against Lightning Impulse insulation level may be demonstrated by factory impulse-voltage tests using 1.5 × 50-μs full waves and chopped waves. The full wave demonstrates the BIL for traveling waves coming into the station over the transmission line. The chopped wave demonstrates strength against a wave traveling along the transmission line after flashing over an insulator some distance away from the transformer. These waves do not simulate direct lightning strokes on or near the transformer terminals, which would result in the application of a steep-front wave to the transformer winding. Such strokes are usually avoided by ground wires or protecting grounded structures.

13_Santoso_Sec13_p0801-0866.indd 847

23/11/17 11:24 AM

848  SECTION THIRTEEN

A transformer may be subjected to severe lightning voltages as a result of a direct stroke to the transformer terminal, adjacent bus, or transmission line. Less severe voltages may result from strokes on a distant part of the system or from strokes to ground near the system. Since lightning voltage may exceed the insulation strength of the transformer, protection is necessary. Voltage-time curves are used in evaluating protection, because for short times the insulation strength changes significantly with duration of voltage. Protection is effective if the voltage-time curve of the transformer is above the voltage-time curve of the protective equipment, so that for any time duration the kilovolts insulation strength of the transformer exceeds the protective level at the same duration. The voltage-time curves of transformer insulation have considerable “turn-up,” that is, for durations under 10 μs the kilovolts insulation strength is much greater. Rod gaps in air are unsuitable for protecting transformers, because they have even more turn-up than do transformers. The modern surge arrester has very little turn-up and is an essential adjunct to the transformer whenever there is lightning exposure. The required surge arrester rating depends on the effectiveness of the neutral grounding. The rating is expressed in percent of rated line-to-line power-frequency voltage that the arrester will withstand. Effectiveness of system grounding is described by the ratios of the zero-sequence resistance and impedance to the positive-sequence resistance and impedance. An 80% arrester is commonly used when the ratio of zero sequence to positive sequence is between 0.5 and 1.5 for resistance and between 1 and 3 for impedance. Lower ratios may permit 75% or 70% arresters. Higher ratios may require 85% or 90% arresters. Use of the 100% protective level is not economical at high voltages.

13.14  TRANSFORMER NAMEPLATE INFORMATION Every power and distribution transformer has a metal nameplate attached to transformer tank that provides very important information on how the transformer has to be connected and operated. According to IEEE C57.12.00 standard, for transformers rated above 500 kVA, the minimum information to be provided on transformer nameplate is the following: •  Manufacturer name •  Transformer serial number •  Month/year of transformer manufacturing •  Cooling class •  Number of phases •  Operating frequency •  Power rating (kVA or MVA) •  Voltage ratings •  Tap voltages •  Rated temperature rise •  Polarity for single-phase transformers •  Phasor or vector diagram for polyphase transformers •  Percent impedance •  Basic lightning impulse insulation level (BIL) of each winding and each bushing •  Approximate mass of core and windings, tank and fittings, insulating oil, total weight, and heaviest piece •  Connection diagram •  References for installation and operating instructions •  The word “transformer” or “autotransformer” •  Suitability for step-up operation

13_Santoso_Sec13_p0801-0866.indd 848

23/11/17 11:24 AM

Power Transformers   849 

•  Maximum positive and negative operating pressures of the oil preservation system •  Maximum negative pressure of the tank for vacuum filling •  Liquid level below the top surface of the highest point of the highest manhole flange at 25°C •  Change in liquid level per 10°C change in liquid level •  Oil volume of each transformer compartment •  Type of insulating liquid •  Conductor material of each winding There is some flexibility in the standards for the layout of transformer nameplate. Each manufacturer arranges the data somehow differently. Some customers specify a particular layout that suits their needs. Figure 13-28 shows one typical layout of power transformer nameplate.

Manufacturer data Serial number

Impedances

Rated power and rated voltages Physical layout

Vector diagram

Connection diagram Winding taps and ratings Weights

BIL ratings

Oil levels and tank operating pressures FIGURE 13-28  Layout of power transformer nameplate.

13.15  TRANSFORMER INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE Proper installation and maintenance of power transformers is needed to ensure long life in service. General requirements from IEEE C57.93 and from manufacturer’s instructions are summarized below. Most power transformers have additional manufacturer’s installation and maintenance instructions that should be carefully observed. These instructions, including safety practices, should be followed for the protection of workers and the transformer. Transformers are tested and inspected before shipment. Smaller transformers are shipped filled with oil and fully assembled when shipping clearances and weights permit. For most large-power transformers, the external components, such as coolers and bushings, must be removed to meet shipping dimensions. Also, the oil is removed to reduce weight, and the unit is secured in dry gas. 13.15.1  Inspection on Arrival Before removal from the car, inspect for shipping damage. If damage is found, a claim should be filed with the carrier and the manufacturer should be notified. Transformers shipped oil-filled should be inspected for evidence or leakage or entrance of moisture during shipment. If the transformer is received in damaged condition, tests should be made to check the transformer for dryness. Oil samples taken from the bottom valve should be tested for moisture limits. Where bushings are shipped in place, insulation power-factor measurements can be used. Power factors of new transformers range from 0.2% to 0.5% at 25°C. In any case, a power factor measurement may be helpful for comparison with test values recorded by the manufacturer prior to shipment. Transformers shipped gas-filled are fitted with a connection to which a compound pressure/ vacuum gage can be connected. The gage should have a range of +10 lb/in2. A positive or negative pressure indicates that the tank is tight; a continuous zero reading indicates a probable leak. If there is a reason to question dryness, the moisture can be estimated by a dew-point measurement of the gas in the transformer. Add dry gas immediately to about 3-lb/in2 (gage) pressure and check for leaks. Dew point is sensitive to temperature changes; therefore it is essential that the insulation temperature be accurately determined. Some instruments will not provide accurate dew-point readings below 32°F. The final degree of insulation dryness should be determined by measuring the insulation

13_Santoso_Sec13_p0801-0866.indd 849

23/11/17 11:24 AM

850  SECTION THIRTEEN

power factor or insulation resistance. If the measured dew point exceeds an acceptable value, contact the manufacturer for recommended course of action. A preliminary internal inspection is not normally required unless shipping damage is apparent. 13.15.2  Oil Sampling Samples of oil should be taken from the bottom. An oil-sampling valve is provided at the bottom of the transformer tank for this purpose. A metal or glass thief tube can be conveniently used to obtain a bottom sample from an oil barrel. Test samples should be taken only after the oil has settled for some time, varying from 8 h for a barrel to several days for a large transformer. Cold oil is much slower in settling. In drawing samples of oil from a sampling valve, some oil should first be discarded so that the sample will come from the bottom of the container and not from the sampling pipe. Examine a sample in a clear glass container for free water, which in any quantity is readily observable. The sample container should be a large-mouthed glass bottle, 1 qt or larger, with cork or glass stopper. The bottle should be carefully cleaned and dried before being used. Bottles should be of amber color if samples are to be stored to be tested later for color or sludge-forming characteristics. Refer to ASTM D 923 standard practice for important details of oil-sampling technique. 13.15.3  Testing for Oil Dielectric Strength The testing fixture should be cleaned thoroughly to remove any particles or fibers and rinsed out with a portion of the oil to be tested. The testing fixture should be filled with oil, and both oil and fixture should be at room temperature. Allow 3 min for air bubbles to escape before applying voltage. Tests are made by two methods. ASTM D 877 uses 1-in-diameter square-edge electrodes spaced 0.10 in apart and a rate of voltage rise of 3000 V/s. ASTM D 1816 uses special radius-surface electrodes spaced 0.04 in apart, with continuous oil circulation, and a rate of voltage rise of 500 V/s. The latter test is more sensitive to slight moisture or particulate contamination. In either case, the average voltage for five breakdowns is taken as the dielectric strength of the oil. Strength of new oil should exceed the minimum value for good oil as shown in Table 13-5.

TABLE 13-5  Dielectric Strength of Oil kV average dielectric strength by ASTM D 877-1982 30 or over 26–29 Under 26

kV average dielectric strength by ASTM D 1816-1982

Condition of oil

29 or over 23–28 Under 23

Good Usable Poor

13.15.4  Filtering to Increase Dielectric Strength If the oil tests below “good,” it should be filtered to remove impurities and moisture. It is best to discharge filtered oil into a clean, dry tank and avoid mixing with unfiltered oil. If the filtered oil must be discharged back into the transformer tank, the oil should be withdrawn from the bottom filter-press valve and, after filtering, returned through the top filter-press valve. Oil should not be filtered while the transformer is energized, because the dielectric strength may be temporarily reduced by aeration. If no facilities are available for making dielectric tests, send a sample to the manufacturer marked with the serial number of the transformer.

13_Santoso_Sec13_p0801-0866.indd 850

23/11/17 11:24 AM

Power Transformers   851 

13.15.5  Drying the Core and Coils This should be necessary only if an accident occurs during shipping, storage, or service. If possible, determine the extent of the moisture and manner in which it entered the tank. The manufacturer should be contacted for recommendations concerning additional checks and strips for drying out the transformer. If drying is necessary, one or more of the following methods may be used, depending on the facilities available: •  Heat and vacuum (method 1) •  Vacuum only (method 2) •  Heat in oil (method 3) •  Heat in air (method 4) A low value of residual moisture can be attained most rapidly by method 1. Method 2 is effective but requires longer time and better vacuum equipment. Method 3 is very slow and not as effective as the vacuum method. Method 4 is recommended only for smaller, low-voltage transformers. 13.15.6  Time Required for Drying This can range from 72 h to 3 weeks depending on the size and condition of the transformer and the method of drying. In general, the use of a high vacuum and a cold trap is faster and more efficient than heat alone. 13.15.7  Insulation Resistance This will indicate the degree of dryness only when the transformer is dried without oil. If the initial insulation resistance is measured at room temperature, it may be high, although the insulation is not dry, but as the transformer is heated up, it will drop rapidly. As the drying proceeds at a constant temperature, the insulation resistance will generally increase gradually until toward the end of the drying period, when it increases quite rapidly and then levels off at a high value. The drying should continue until the resistance is constant for a period of 12 h. 13.15.8  Insulation Power-Factor Reading These readings (at 60 Hz) will indicate the degree of dryness. The power factor will first increase as the temperature increases and then will gradually decrease as drying progresses. Drying should continue until the power factor is constant for a period of 12 h. If power factor is measured on transformers dried in oil by the short-circuit method, the power factor should be used to supplement oil tests as a measure of dryness. 13.15.9  Filling without Vacuum This method should be practiced only on low-voltage transformers. Check manufacturer’s recommendations. Use extreme care to keep moisture out of the core and coils. The tank should not be opened to the atmosphere until the core and coils are under oil, unless vacuum filling is available. The oil shipping tank or oil drums should not be opened until their temperature is the same as or higher than that of the surrounding air and the transformer is in place and ready to receive the oil. Metal or synthetic rubber hose should be used for filling, because transformer oil is contaminated by natural rubber. Oil should never be added to a transformer without passing through a filter press.

13_Santoso_Sec13_p0801-0866.indd 851

23/11/17 11:24 AM

852  SECTION THIRTEEN

Static charges can be developed when transformer oil flows in pipes, hoses, or tanks. Oil leaving a filter press may be charged to over 50,000 V. To accelerate dissipation of the charge in the oil, ground the filter press, the tank, and all bushings or winding leads during oil flow into any tank. Conduction through oil is slow; therefore it is desirable to maintain these grounds for at least 1 h after the oil flow has ended. Avoid explosive gas mixtures in any container into which oil is flowing. Arcs can occur along the surface of the charged oil even though all metal is grounded. 13.15.10  Filling with Vacuum

Depth of impregnation (cm)

The vacuum line should be connected to a tapped opening on a cover-mounted shipping plate or to a valve near the top of the tank. An opening of 5.08 cm minimum is recommended. The oil line can be connected to a suitable opening on a cover-mounted shipping plate or the top filter-press valve. The oil line should always be connected at the top of the tank so that the oil can be deaerated as it enters. Transformers with operating voltage less than 161 kV and with core and coils not exposed to the atmosphere should be filled under vacuum better than 25 mmHg absolute pressure. The vacuum should be held 4 h before filling and continued during filling until the core and coils are covered. The vacuum can then be removed for installation of bushings and the remaining oil added without vacuum. Transformers with an operating voltage of 161 kV and above or transformers with core and coils exposed to the atmosphere should be completely filled under a vacuum better than 2 mmHg absolute pressure. A 2-mm vacuum should be held until the tank is filled to the 25°C level. The filling rate should be under 1500 gal/h to facilitate evacuation and complete oil filling of all air pockets and voids. It is also recommended that the core and coil temperature be above 10°C to prevent “frost” formation. Especially for extra high voltage transformers, once transformer is full, oil circulation is usually required to ensure full dehumidification and degassing of the oil together with full oil impregnation of the insulation structures. Larger transformers may have thick insulation structures that should be fully impregnated for appropriate dielectric performance. It can be seen from Fig. 13-29 that the depth of oil impregnation is strongly affected by time and temperature of the oil.

90°C 20°C

Time (h) FIGURE 13-29  Insulation impregnation chart.

13.15.11 Energization When the voltage is first applied, it should, if possible, be brought up slowly to its full value so that any wrong connection or other trouble will be discovered before damage results. After full voltage has been applied successfully, the transformer should preferably be operated for a short period without load.

13_Santoso_Sec13_p0801-0866.indd 852

23/11/17 11:24 AM

Power Transformers   853 

When the transformer is first energized it should be kept under close observation for the first 8 h. Check and record the oil temperature, the winding temperature, the tank pressure, and the ambient temperature. Watch particularly for any sudden changes. After 7 days of operation, check for oil leaks and for abnormally high usage of nitrogen if the transformer is equipped with Inertaire. Stop all oil and gas leaks. The observation should continue on a daily schedule for 7 days and then weekly for the first month of operation. An oil sample should be taken during the first month of operation for gas-in-oil analysis. This analysis should be repeated annually. Heat exchangers, tap changer, pumps, fans, etc. should be serviced per manufacturer’s instructions. 13.15.12  Internal Inspection of In-Service Transformers This is not necessary unless there is a specific indication of a problem. Oil analysis is a good method to discover potential problems. Sludging of the oil, low dielectric strength, moisture in the oil, or the presence of combustible gases are conditions that may merit an internal inspection of the transformer. Generation of combustible gas usually indicates internal trouble (not necessarily serious). Analysis of the gas sometimes helps to identify the source. If collection of combustible gas continues without discoverable cause, partial discharge voltage measurement may establish whether or not there is an internal fault. Severe system disturbances, incidence of through-fault, or a circuit-breaker operation would also be reason for an internal inspection of a transformer. 13.15.13  Operating without Cooling A liquid-cooled transformer should not be run continuously, even at no load, without the cooling liquid. In an emergency, forced-oil air-cooled transformers may be operated without fans and pumps (1) at rated load for approximately 1 h, starting at full-load temperature rise, (2) at rated load for approximately 2 h, starting cold (at ambient temperature), (3) at rated voltage and no load for approximately 6 h, starting at full-load temperature rise, and (4) at rated voltage and no load for approximately 12 h, starting cold. When only a portion of the cooling equipment is operating, the transformer may be operated at reduced load approximately as indicated in Table 13-6. TABLE 13-6  Operation with Limited Cooling Equipment Percent of cooling equipment in operation 33 40 50 80

Percent of rated load that may be carried 50 60 70 90

13.16  TRANSFORMER CONDITION MONITORING AND ASSESSMENT Transformer failures are due to any combination of electrical, thermal, or mechanical stresses. Figure 13-30 shows a typical failure distribution for power transformers with on-load tap changers. It can be seen from Fig. 13-30 that the majority of failures are related with the on-load tap changers and the windings. Figure 13-31 shows a typical failure distribution for transformers with off-load tap changers. It can be seen from Fig. 13-31 that the majority of failures are related with the terminals and the windings.

13_Santoso_Sec13_p0801-0866.indd 853

23/11/17 11:24 AM

854  SECTION THIRTEEN

Terminals: 12%

Core: 3%

On-load tap changers: 41%

Accessories: 12%

Tank/Fluid: 13%

Windings: 19% FIGURE 13-30  Failure distribution for power transformers with on-load tap changers.

Off-load tap changers: 5% Core: 6% Accessories: 11%

Terminals: 33%

Tank/Fluid: 18% Windings: 27% FIGURE 13-31  Failure distribution for transformers with off-load tap changers.

Transformer failures are sometimes catastrophic and almost always include irreversible internal damage of the power transformer. Some of such failures may lead to high cost for replacement or repair. Moreover, an unplanned outage of a power transformer is very uneconomical. Since some faults may occur, it is important to closely monitor online and offline the power transformers.

13_Santoso_Sec13_p0801-0866.indd 854

23/11/17 11:24 AM

Power Transformers   855 

There are three monitoring strategies for power transformers: 1. Reliability-Centered Monitoring Strategy. Various relays have been developed that respond to severe power failures requiring immediate removal of the faulty transformer from service, which means that outages are inevitable. This monitoring strategy cannot detect incipient faults. 2. Time-Based Monitoring Strategy. At regular time intervals, various offline tests are applied to detect possible incipient faults. This monitoring strategy is labor intensive and not cost-effective. 3. Condition-Based Monitoring Strategy. It employs advanced fault diagnosis techniques in order to detect online and offline incipient faults. It supplies information for transformer condition in real time, it processes this information and then it can determine when maintenance is needed. This monitoring strategy helps obtain the maximum practicable operating efficiency and the optimum life of power transformers. Moreover, this strategy minimizes the risks of premature failures and optimally schedules transformer maintenance. In recent years, there is a trend to move from time-based monitoring to condition-based monitoring, also called condition monitoring and assessment (CMA) of power transformers. More specifically, nowadays, in CMA, monitoring is online and monitoring equipment is permanently mounted on the transformer. Since in developed countries failure rates of power transformers are low, typically 0.2% to 2.0% per year and per transformer, the monitoring equipment for failure prevention must be cost-effective. There are four categories of diagnostic methods: 1. Methods for Thermal-Related Faults. These methods include dissolved gas analysis, degree of polymerization, furanic compounds analysis, and thermography. 2. Methods for Dielectric-Related Faults. These methods include localization of partial discharges and characterization of the type of partial discharges, also known as partial discharge analysis methods. 3. Methods for Mechanical-Related Faults. These methods include frequency response analysis and leakage inductance. 4. Methods for General Degradation. These methods include dielectric response, oil analysis, and furanic compounds analysis. Dissolved gas analysis (DGA) is currently the most widely used preventive maintenance technique for online monitoring of oil-immersed transformers. During normal operations, there is a slow degradation of the mineral oil and certain gases are dissolved in the oil. However, during an electrical fault inside a transformer, gases are produced much more rapidly. Methods for interpretation of DGA are given in the IEEE C57.104 international standard. Nowadays, the frequency response analysis (FRA) has received worldwide attention for detecting mechanical problems, for example, deformations or displacements in the windings and the core sheets, because these types of mechanical faults are difficult to locate using other techniques. Two FRA measurement techniques exist: impulse FRA (IFRA) and sweep FRA (SFRA). Details for FRA can be found in the international standards, for example, IEEE C57.149 and IEC 60076-18. In CMA, the term “condition monitoring” is defined as online collection of data and includes sensor development, measurement techniques, and data acquisition. The term “condition assessment” is defined as the process that contains interpretation of data acquired by condition monitoring. Condition assessment may also include offline measurements on transformers. Figure 13-32 shows the processes that are involved in CMA of power transformers. Nowadays, several manufacturers offer specialized cost-effective products for online CMA of power transformers. The products are generally easy to install and use. Besides the standard functions, the products are usually modular and expandable for additional requirements that may be needed in the future. The products usually include expert systems, that is, algorithms that analyze the online acquired data and provide recommendations and information regarding transformer operation and potential need for maintenance. The benefits of using the online CMA products include reduced probability of unexpected outages, condition-based maintenance cutting maintenance costs, instant diagnosis and data for condition assessment, cost-effective solution, and low overall investment cost due to product customization with parameterization.

13_Santoso_Sec13_p0801-0866.indd 855

23/11/17 11:24 AM

856  SECTION THIRTEEN

Experts

Asset management

Data acquisition

Sensor technologies FIGURE 13-32  Processes involved in condition monitoring and assessment of power transformers.

13.17  TRANSFORMER LOSS EVALUATION AND SELECTION Energy efficient transformers cost more but use less energy than low-efficiency transformers. The decision as to whether to purchase a low-cost, inefficient transformer or a more expensive, energyefficient transformer, is primarily an economic one. The common practice used by electric utilities for determining the cost-effectiveness of distribution transformers is based on the total owning cost (TOC) method, where TOC is equal to the sum of transformer-purchasing price plus the cost of transformer losses throughout the transformer lifetime. There are various methods to compute the total owning cost of transformers. Some methods compute TOC for industrial and commercial users of transformers, such as the method of Sec. 13.17.1. Other methods compute TOC for electric utilities, such as the method of IEEE C57.120 standard. Recently, TOC method has been developed that additionally takes into account the environmental cost due to transformer losses. 13.17.1  Evaluation Methodology The method of this subsection can be applied by the industrial and commercial users of transformers in order to evaluate and select their transformers. Among the various transformer offers, the most costeffective transformer is the one that minimizes the total owning cost, TOC, which is computed as follows:

TOC = BP + A ⋅ NLL + B ⋅ LL (13-51)

where BP is the transformer bid price ($) or purchasing price, NLL is the transformer no-load loss (W), LL is the transformer load loss (W), A is the no-load loss factor ($/W), and B is the load loss factor ($/W). The no-load loss factor is computed by

A = PVm ⋅ EP ⋅ HPY ⋅10−3 (13-52)

where EP is the electricity price ($/kWh), HPY is the number of hours per year that the transformer operates, and PVm is the present value multiplier that is computed by (1 + d )N − 1 (13-53) d ⋅ (1 + d )N −1 where d is the annual discount rate, and N is the number of years of transformer lifetime.

13_Santoso_Sec13_p0801-0866.indd 856

PVm =

23/11/17 11:24 AM

Power Transformers   857 

The load loss factor is computed by B = A ⋅ L2 (13-54)



where L is the per-unit load of transformer. The transformer annual energy loss (kWh/year) is EL = ( NLL + LL ⋅ L2 ) ⋅ HPY ⋅10−3 (13-55)



The annual energy savings ($/year) by selecting and using transformer j instead of transformer i are given by the formula: ES = ( ELi − EL j ) ⋅ EP (13-56)



where ELi is the annual energy loss of transformer i. The simple payback (years) by selecting and using transformer j instead of transformer i is calculated as follows: SP =



BPj − BPi ( ELi − EL j ) ⋅ EP

(13-57)

where BPi is the bid price of transformer i. Example 13-5.  Table 13-7 shows two competing offers for three-phase, oil-immersed, distribution transformers with 250-kVA rated power. The electricity price is 0.12 $/kWh. The discount rate is 7%. The transformer operates 8760 h/year. The transformer lifetime is 30 years. Compute the total owning cost of the two offers if the per-unit load is varied from 0.0 to 1.0 with step 0.1. TABLE 13-7  Data for Two Competing Transformer Offers Parameter

Offer 1

Offer 2

Rated power (kVA) No-load loss (W) Load loss (W) Bid price ($)

250 650 4,200 11,750

250 425 2,750 14,800

Solution.  The computation of the total owning cost of offer 1 will be shown for the case the per-unit load L is 0.4. The present value multiplier is PVm =

(1 + d )N − 1 (1 + 0.07)30 − 1 = ⇒ PVm = 13.2777 d ⋅ (1 + d )N −1 0.07 ⋅ (1 + 0.07)30−1

The no-load loss factor is A = PVm ⋅ EP ⋅ HPY ⋅10−3 = 13.2777 ⋅ 0.12 ⋅ 8760 ⋅10−3 ⇒ A = 13.9575 $/W The load loss factor is B = A ⋅ L2 = 13.9575 ⋅ 0.4 2 ⇒ B = 2.2332 $/W The total owning cost of offer 1 for per-unit load 0.4 is TOC = BP + A ⋅ NLL + B ⋅ LL = 11750 + 13.9575 ⋅ 650 + 2.2332 ⋅ 4200 ⇒ TOC = $ 30202 The total owning cost of the offers 1 and 2 for the different values of per-unit load is shown in Table 13-8 and Fig. 13-33.

13_Santoso_Sec13_p0801-0866.indd 857

23/11/17 11:24 AM

858  SECTION THIRTEEN

TABLE 13-8  Total Owning Cost for the Two Competing Transformer Offers of Example 13-5 Per-unit load

Total owning cost of offer 1, $

Total owning cost of offer 2, $

0.0 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 1.0

20,822 21,409 23,167 26,098 30,202 35,478 41,926 49,547 58,340 68,306 79,444

20,732 21,116 22,267 24,186 27,873 30,328 34,550 39,540 45,297 51,822 59,115

FIGURE 13-33  Total owning cost for the two offers of Table 13-7 as a function of per-unit load.

Example 13-6.  Table 13-9 shows nine competing offers for three-phase, oil-immersed, distribution transformers with 1000-kVA rated power. The electricity price is 0.12 $/kWh. The discount rate is 7%. The transformer operates 8760 h/year. The transformer lifetime is 30 years. The per-unit load is 0.5. Compute the simple payback and the savings due to the selection of the offer with the lowest total owning cost instead of the offer with the lowest bid price. Moreover, if the electricity price is varied from 0.08 to 0.16 $/kWh with step 0.01 $/kWh, compute the simple payback and the savings due to the selection of the offer with the lowest total owning cost instead of the offer with the lowest bid price. Solution.  Figure 13-34 ranks the offers of Table 13-9 from the lowest to the highest bid price. If the purchasing criterion is simply the lowest bid price, then offer O4 is the best choice, as can be seen from Fig. 13-34. The computation of the annual energy losses and the total owning cost of Offer O1 will be shown for the case the electricity price EP is 0.12 $/kWh.

13_Santoso_Sec13_p0801-0866.indd 858

23/11/17 11:24 AM

Power Transformers   859 

TABLE 13-9  Data for Nine Competing Transformer Offers Offer

No-load loss, W

Load loss, W

Bid price, $

O1 O2 O3 O4 O5 O6 O7 O8 O9

1700 1400 1100 1700 1400 1100 1700 1400 1100

10,500 10,500 10,500 13,000 13,000 13,000 9,500 9,500 9,500

28,630 29,600 32,820 27,150 27,420 30,650 30,500 31,550 35,300

FIGURE 13-34  Ranking of offers of Table 13-9 according to the bid price.

The annual energy losses of Offer O1 are EL = ( NLL + LL ⋅ L2 ) ⋅ HPY ⋅10−3 = (1700 + 10500 ⋅ 0.52 ) ⋅ 8760 ⋅10−3 ⇒ EL = 37887 kWh/year The present value multiplier is PVm =

(1 + d )N − 1 (1 + 0.07)30 − 1 = ⇒ PVm = 13.2777 N −1 d ⋅ (1 + d ) 0.07 ⋅ (1 + 0.07)30−1

The no-load loss factor is A = PVm ⋅ EP ⋅ HPY ⋅10−3 = 13.2777 ⋅ 0.12 ⋅ 8760 ⋅10−3 ⇒ A = 13.9575 $/W The load loss factor is B = A ⋅ L2 = 13.9575 ⋅ 0.52 ⇒ B = 3.4894 $/W The total owning cost of Offer O1 is TOC = BP + A ⋅ NLL + B ⋅ LL = 28630 + 13.9575 ⋅1700 + 3.4894 ⋅10500 ⇒ TOC = $88,996 The annual energy losses and the total owning cost of the nine offers of Table 13-9 are shown in Table 13-10. Figure 13-35 ranks the offers of Table 13-10 from the lowest to the highest total owning cost. If the purchasing criterion is the lowest total owning cost, then Offer O9 is the best choice, as can be seen from Fig. 13-35.

13_Santoso_Sec13_p0801-0866.indd 859

23/11/17 11:24 AM

860  SECTION THIRTEEN

TABLE 13-10  Annual Energy Losses and Total Owning Cost for the offers of Table 13-9 When the Electricity Price is 0.12 $/kWh Offer

Annual energy losses, kWh/year

O1 O2 O3 O4 O5 O6 O7 O8 O9

37,887 35,259 32,631 43,362 40,734 38,106 35,697 33,069 30,441

Total owning cost, $ 88,996 85,779 84,812 96,240 92,322 91,365 87,377 84,240 83,802

FIGURE 13-35  Ranking of offers of Table 13-9 according to the total owning cost.

Figure 13-35 shows that offers O9 and O4 have the lowest and highest total owning cost, respectively. Due to the selection of the offer with the lowest total owning cost (i.e., Offer O9, as Fig. 13-35 shows) instead of the offer with the lowest bid price (i.e., offer O4, as Fig. 13-34 shows), the savings in total owning cost are STOC = TOC4 − TOC9 = 96,240 − 83,802 ⇒ STOC = $12,438 The annual energy savings by selecting Offer O9 (with the lowest total owning cost) instead of Offer O4 (with the lowest bid price) are ES = ( EL4 − EL9 ) ⋅ EP = (43,362 − 30,441) ⋅ 0.12 ⇒ ES = 1550.52 $/year The simple payback (years) by selecting Offer O9 (with the lowest total owning cost) instead of Offer O4 (with the lowest bid price) is SP =

BP9 − BP4 35,300 − 27,150 = ⇒ SP = 5.26 years ( EL4 − EL9 ) ⋅ EP (43,362 − 30,441) ⋅ 0.12

All the previous calculations have been done for the case the electricity price is 0.12 $/kWh. The same calculations are done again for all the considered electricity prices and the results are presented in Table 13-11. Moreover, the results of Table 13-11 are plotted in Figs. 13-36 through 13-38.

13_Santoso_Sec13_p0801-0866.indd 860

23/11/17 11:24 AM

Power Transformers   861 

TABLE 13-11  Savings due to the Selection of the Offer Corresponding to the Minimum TOC instead of the Offer O4 corresponding to the minimum bid price Offer with minimum TOC

Selection of offer with minimum TOC instead of Offer O4

Offer O4

EP ($/kWh)

Offer

EL, kWh/year

TOC, $

EL, kWh/year

TOC, $

ES, $/year

SP, years

0.08 0.09 0.10 0.11 0.12 0.13 0.14 0.15 0.16

O8 O8 O8 O9 O9 O9 O9 O9 O9

33,069 33,069 33,069 30,441 30,441 30,441 30,441 30,441 30,441

66,676 71,067 75,458 79,760 83,802 87,844 91,886 95,928 99,970

43,362 43,362 43,362 43,362 43,362 43,362 43,362 43,362 43,362

73,210 78,967 84,725 90,482 96,240 101,997 107,755 113,512 119,269

823 926 1,029 1,421 1,551 1,680 1,809 1,938 2,067

5.34 4.75 4.27 5.73 5.26 4.85 4.51 4.21 3.94

STOC, $ 6,533 7,900 9,267 10,722 12,437 14,153 15,869 17,584 19,300

FIGURE 13-36  Total owning cost savings due to selection of the offer corresponding to the minimum TOC instead of the offer corresponding to the minimum bid price. These savings are plotted as a function of electricity price.

FIGURE 13-37  Annual energy savings due to selection of the offer corresponding to the minimum TOC instead of the offer corresponding to the minimum bid price.

13_Santoso_Sec13_p0801-0866.indd 861

23/11/17 11:24 AM

862  SECTION THIRTEEN

FIGURE 13-38  Simple payback due to selection of the offer corresponding to the minimum TOC instead of the offer corresponding to the minimum bid price.

It can be seen from Table 13-11 that if the electricity price is 0.08, or 0.09, or 0.10 $/kWh, then the most cost-effective offer is Offer O4, since it has the lowest total owning cost, while for all the other considered electricity prices, Offer O9 is the most cost-effective offer.

13.18  TRANSFORMER STANDARDS Transformer manufacturing is based on international standards as well as on specific customer needs. From time to time, some of the standards may be modified and in that case they are republished. Tables 13-12 presents IEEE/ANSI standards for transformers. Tables 13-13 presents IEC standards for transformers. TABLE 13-12  IEEE/ANSI Standards for Transformers Standard

Year

Description

C57.12.00 C57.12.01 C57.12.10 C57.12.20

2015 2015 2010 2011

C57.12.21

1992

C57.12.23

2009

C57.12.24

2009

C57.12.35 C57.12.37 C57.12.40

2013 2015 2011

C57.12.44 C57.12.50

2014 1981

General requirements for liquid-immersed distribution, power, and regulating transformers General requirements for dry-type distribution and power transformers Requirements for liquid-immersed power transformers Requirements for overhead type distribution transformers, 500 kVA and smaller; high voltage 34,500 V and below; low voltage 7,970/13,800 Y V and below Requirements for pad-mounted, compartmental-type self-cooled, single-phase distribution transformers with high voltage bushings; high voltage 34,500 GRYD/19,920 V and below; low voltage 240/120 V; 167 kVA and smaller Submersible single-phase transformers: 167 kVA and smaller; high voltage 25,000 V and below; low voltage 600 V and below Submersible, three-phase transformers, 3750 kVA and smaller: high voltage, 34,500 GrdY/19,920 V and below; low voltage, 600 V and below Bar coding for distribution transformers and step-voltage regulators Electronic reporting of distribution transformer test data Network, three-phase transformers, 2500 kVA and smaller; high voltage, 34,500 GrdY/19,920 and below; low voltage, 600 V and below; subway and vault types (liquid immersed) Requirements for secondary network protectors Requirements for ventilated dry-type distribution transformers, 1–500 kVA, single-phase, and 15–500 kVA, three-phase, with high voltage 601–34500 V, low voltage 120–600 V

13_Santoso_Sec13_p0801-0866.indd 862

23/11/17 11:24 AM

Power Transformers   863 

TABLE 13-12  IEEE/ANSI Standards for Transformers (Continued ) Standard

Year

Description

C57.12.51

2008

C57.12.52

2012

C57.12.55 C57.12.56

1987 1986

C57.12.58 C57.12.59 C57.12.60

1991 2015 2009

C57.12.70 C57.12.80 C57.12.90 C57.12.91 C57.15 C57.18.10 C57.91 C57.93 C57.94

2011 2010 2015 2011 2009 1998 2011 2007 2015

C57.96 C57.98 C57.100

2013 2011 2011

C57.104 C57.105 C57.110

2008 1978 2008

C57.111 C57.113

1989 2010

C57.116 C57.120 C57.121 C57.123 C57.124

2014 1991 1998 2010 1991

C57.125

2015

C57.127

2007

C57.129 C57.130

2007 2015

C57.131 C57.134 C57.135 C57.136

2012 2013 2011 2000

C57.138 C57.140 C57.142

1998 2006 2010

C57.143 C57.149 C57.150

2012 2012 2012

General requirements for ventilated dry-type power transformers, 501 kVA and larger, three-phase, with high voltage 601–34500 V, low voltage 208Y/120 V to 4160 V General requirements for sealed dry-type power transformers, 501 kVA and higher, three-phase, with high voltage 601–34,500 V, low voltage 208Y/120–4,160 V Transformers used in unit installations, including unit substations Test procedure for thermal evaluation of insulation systems for ventilated dry-type power and distribution transformers Guide for conducting a transient voltage analysis of a dry-type transformer coil Guide for dry-type transformer through-fault current duration Test procedure for thermal evaluation of insulation systems for dry-type power and distribution transformers, including open-wound, solid-cast, and resin-encapsulated transformers Terminal markings and connections for distribution and power transformers Terminology for power and distribution transformers Test code for liquid-immersed distribution, power, and regulating transformers Test code for dry-type distribution and power transformers Requirements, terminology, and test code for step-voltage regulators Practices and requirements for semiconductor power rectifier transformers Guide for loading mineral-oil-immersed transformers and step-voltage regulators Guide for installation and maintenance of liquid-immersed power transformers Recommended practice for installation, application, operation, and maintenance of dry-type distribution and power transformers Guide for loading dry-type distribution and power transformers Guide for transformer impulse tests Test procedure for thermal evaluation of insulation systems for liquid-immersed distribution and power transformers Guide for the interpretation of gases generated in oil-immersed transformers Guide for application of transformer connections in three-phase distribution systems Recommended practice for establishing liquid-filled and dry-type power and distribution transformer capability when supplying nonsinusoidal load currents Guide for acceptance of silicone insulating fluid and its maintenance in transformers Recommended practice for partial discharge measurement in liquid-filled power transformers and shunt reactors Guide for transformers directly connected to generators Loss evaluation guide for power transformers and reactors Guide for acceptance and maintenance of less-flammable hydrocarbon fluid in transformers Guide for transformer loss measurement Recommended practice for the detection of partial discharge and the measurement of apparent charge in dry-type transformers Guide for failure investigation, documentation, analysis, and reporting for power transformers and shunt reactors Guide for the detection and location of acoustic emissions from partial discharges in oil-immersed power transformers and reactors General requirements and test code for oil-immersed HVDC converter transformers Guide for the use of dissolved gas analysis applied to factory temperature rise tests for the evaluation of mineral oil-immersed transformers and reactors Requirements for load tap changers Guide for determination of hottest-spot temperature in dry-type transformers Guide for the application, specification, and testing of phase-shifting transformers Guide for sound level abatement and determination for liquid-immersed power transformers and shunt reactors rated over 500 kVA Recommended practice for routine impulse test for distribution transformers Guide for evaluation and reconditioning of liquid-immersed power transformers Guide to describe the occurrence and mitigation of switching transients induced by transformers, switching device, and system interaction Guide for application for monitoring equipment to liquid-immersed transformers and components Guide for the application and interpretation of frequency response analysis for oil-immersed transformers Guide for the transportation of transformers and reactors rated 10,000 kVA or higher

13_Santoso_Sec13_p0801-0866.indd 863

23/11/17 11:24 AM

864  SECTION THIRTEEN

TABLE 13-13  IEC standards for transformers Standard

Year

Description

60076-1 60076-2 60076-3

2011 2011 2013

60076-4

2002

60076-5 60076-6 60076-7 60076-8 60076-10 60076-11 60076-12 60076-13 60076-14

2006 2007 2005 1997 2016 2004 2008 2006 2013

60076-15 60076-16 60076-18 60076-19

2015 2011 2012 2013

60137 60156

2008 1995

60214-1 60214-2 61378-1 61378-2 61378-3 61558-1

2014 2004 2011 2001 2015 2005

Power transformers—Part 1: General requirements Power transformers—Part 2: Temperature rise for liquid-immersed transformers Power transformers—Part 3: Insulation levels, dielectric tests and external clearances in air Power transformers—Part 4: Guide to the lightning impulse and switching impulse testing—power transformers and reactors Power transformers—Part 5: Ability to withstand short circuit Power transformers—Part 6: Reactors Power transformers—Part 7: Loading guide for oil-immersed power transformers Power transformers—Part 8: Application guide Power transformers—Part 10: Determination of sound levels Power transformers—Part 11: Dry-type power transformers Power transformers—Part 12: Loading guide for dry-type power transformers Power transformers—Part 13: Self-protected liquid-filled transformers Power transformers—Part 14: Liquid-immersed power transformers using hightemperature insulation materials Power transformers—Part 15: Gas-filled power transformers Power transformers—Part 16: Transformers for wind turbine applications Power transformers—Part 18: Measurement of frequency response Power transformers—Part 19: Rules for the determination of uncertainties in the measurement of the losses on power transformers and reactors Insulated bushings for alternating voltages above 1000 V Insulating liquids—determination of the breakdown voltage at power frequency—test method Tap changers—Part 1: Performance requirements and test methods Tap changers—Part 2: Application guide Convertor transformers—Part 1: Transformers for industrial applications Convertor transformers—Part 2: Transformers for HVDC applications Convertor transformers—Part 3: Application guide Safety of power transformers, power supplies, reactors and similar products—Part 1: General requirements and tests

13.19  FURTHER READING Amoiralis, E. I., Georgilakis, P. S., Tsili, M. A., and Kladas, A. G.: Global transformer optimization method using evolutionary design and numerical field computation, IEEE Transactions on Magnetics, Vol. 45, pp. 1720−1723, Mar. 2009. Beaty, H. W. and Fink, D. G.: Standard Handbook for Electrical Engineers, 16th ed., McGraw-Hill, New York, 2013. Bengtsson, C.: Status and trends in transformer monitoring, IEEE Transactions on Power Delivery, Vol. 11, No. 3, pp. 1379−1384, Jul. 1996. Chapman, S. J.: Electric Machinery Fundamentals, 4th ed., McGraw-Hill, New York, 2005. Del Vecchio, R. M., Poulin, B., Feghali, P. T., Shah, D. M., and Ahuja R.: Transformer Design Principles: With Applications to Core-Form Power Transformers, 2nd ed., CRC Press, New York, 2010. Georgilakis, P. S.: Decision support system for evaluating transformer investments in the industrial sector, Journal of Materials Processing Technology, Vol. 181, pp. 307−312, Jan. 2007. Georgilakis, P. S.: Recursive genetic algorithm-finite element method technique for the solution of transformer manufacturing cost minimisation problem, IET Electric Power Applications, Vol. 3, pp. 514–519, Nov. 2009. Georgilakis, P. S.: Spotlight on Modern Transformer Design, Springer, London, 2009. Georgilakis, P. S. and Amoiralis, E. I.: Distribution transformer cost evaluation methodology incorporation environmental cost, IET Generation, Transmission, and Distribution, Vol. 4, No. 7, pp. 861–872, Jul. 2010.

13_Santoso_Sec13_p0801-0866.indd 864

23/11/17 11:24 AM

Power Transformers   865 

Georgilakis, P. S., Doulamis, N. D., Doulamis, A. D., Hatziargyriou, N. D, Kollias, S. D.: A novel iron loss reduction technique for distribution transformers based on a combined genetic algorithm-neural network approach, IEEE Transactions on Systems, Man and Cybernetics, Part C, Vol. 31, pp. 16−34, Feb. 2001. Georgilakis, P., Hatziargyriou, N., Paparigas, D.: AI helps reduce transformer iron losses, IEEE Computer Applications in Power, Vol. 12, pp. 41–46, Oct. 1999. Georgilakis, P. S. and Kagiannas, A. G.: A novel validated solution for lightning and surge protection of distribution transformers, International Journal of Electrical Power and Energy Systems, Vol. 63, pp. 373−381, Dec. 2014. Georgilakis, P. S., Katsigiannis, J. A., Valavanis, K. P., Souflaris, A. T.: A systematic stochastic petri net based methodology for transformer fault diagnosis and repair actions, Journal of Intelligent and Robotic Systems, Vol. 45, pp. 181−201, Feb. 2006. Georgilakis, P. S., Tsili, M. A., Souflaris, A. T.: A heuristic solution to the transformer manufacturing cost optimization problem, Journal of Materials Processing Technology, Vol. 181, pp. 260−266, Jan. 2007. Harlow, J. H.: Electric Power Transformer Engineering, 3rd ed., CRC Press, New York, 2012. Kulkarni, S. V. and Khaparde, S. A.: Transformer Engineering Design and Practice, Marcel Dekker, New York, 2004. Olivares-Galván, G. C., Georgilakis, P. S., Ocon-Valdez, R.: A review of transformer losses, Electric Power Components and Systems, Vol. 37, pp. 1046−1062, Sep. 2009. Tang, W. H. and Wu, Q. H.: Condition Monitoring and Assessment of Power Transformers Using Computational Intelligence, Springer, London, 2011. Wang, M., Vandermaar, A. J., Srivastava, K. D.: Review of condition assessment of power transformers in service, IEEE Electrical Insulation Magazine, Vol. 18, pp. 12−25, Nov./Dec. 2002. Winders, J. J., Jr.: Power Transformers Principles and Applications, Marcel Dekker, New York, 2002.

13_Santoso_Sec13_p0801-0866.indd 865

23/11/17 11:24 AM

This page intentionally left blank

13_Santoso_Sec13_p0801-0866.indd 866

23/11/17 11:24 AM

14

ELECTRIC MACHINES: GENERATORS Dan M. Ionel Professor and L. Stanley Pigman Chair in Power, Department of Electrical and Computer Engineering, University of Kentucky

Erik Abromitis Generator Engineering, Siemens Energy, Inc.

Samuel A. Drinkut Generator Engineering, Siemens Energy, Inc.

Franklin T. Emery Generator Engineering, Siemens Energy, Inc.

Om P. Malik Professor Emeritus, Department of Electrical and Computer Engineering, University of Calgary

Osama A. Mohammed Professor, Department of Electrical and Computer Engineering, Florida International University

Vandana Rallabandi Research Engineer, Department of Electrical and Computer Engineering, University of Kentucky

Narges Taran Research Engineer, Department of Electrical and Computer Engineering, University of Kentucky

867

14_Santoso_Sec14_p0867-0918.indd 867

23/11/17 10:56 AM

868  SECTION FOURTEEN



14.1 PRIME MOVERS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 868 14.1.1 Steam Prime Movers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 868 14.1.2 Steam-Turbine Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 870 14.1.3 Steam-Turbine Performance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 872 14.1.4 Gas Turbines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 873 14.2 DIRECT-CURRENT GENERATORS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 875 14.2.1 The DC Machine. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 875 14.2.2 General Principles. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 877 14.2.3 Armature Reactions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 879 14.2.4 Commutation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 881 14.2.5 Cooling and Ventilation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 883 14.2.6 Losses and Efficiency. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 883 14.2.7 Generator Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 885 14.2.8 Testing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 886 14.2.9 Special Generators. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 887 14.3 ALTERNATING-CURRENT GENERATORS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 888 14.3.1 Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 888 14.3.2 Topology. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 888 14.3.3 Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 890 14.3.4 Two-Reaction Theory or d-q Axis Transformation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 892 14.3.5 Machine Size and Utilization. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 893 14.3.6 Electromagnetics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 895 14.3.7 Armature Reaction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 896 14.3.8 Capability Diagram. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 897 14.3.9 Saturation Curves and Excitation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 898 14.3.10 Armature Windings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 900 14.3.11 Mechanical Construction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 901 14.3.12 Losses and Efficiency. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 902 14.3.13 Testing of AC Generators. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 902 14.3.14 Dynamic Models. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 904 14.3.15 Special AC Generators. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 909 14.4 BIBLIOGRAPHY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 915

14.1  PRIME MOVERS 14.1.1  Steam Prime Movers Steam prime movers are either reciprocating engines or turbines. Reciprocating engines offer low speed (100 to 400 r/min), high efficiency in small sizes (less than 500 hp), and high starting torque. Steam turbines are a product of the twentieth century and completely dominate the field of power generation and variable-speed applications in ship propulsion (through gears), centrifugal pumps, compressors, and blowers. Modern steam turbine types include condensing turbines most commonly in power plants, noncondensing or back pressure turbines widely used for process steam applications, reheat turbines also almost exclusively used in power plants, and induction turbines. Steam engine types include (1) simple D side engines rated less than 0.01 hp and are used for auxiliary drive and (2) single cylinder counterflow and uniflow engines rated less than 1000 hp and are used for generator or equipment drives. The basic thermodynamic cycle is shown in Fig. 14-1. The network of the cycle is represented by the area enclosed within the diagram and is represented by the mean effective pressure (mep), that is, the net work (area) divided by the length of the diagram. The power output is computed by the “plan” equation:

14_Santoso_Sec14_p0867-0918.indd 868

hp =

pm Lan 33,000

(14-1)

23/11/17 10:56 AM

Electric Machines: Generators   869 

FIGURE 14-1  Pressure-volume diagram for a steam-engine cycle. Phase 1-2, constant-pressure admission at Pi; phase 2-3, expansion, pv = C; phase 3-4, release; phase 4-5, constant-pressure exhaust pipe at Pb; phase 5-6, compression, pv = C; phase 6-1, constant-volume admission.

where hp is horsepower; pm is mep, pounds per square inch; L is length of stroke, feet; a is net piston area, square inches; and n is number of cycles completed per minute. Basically, steam turbines are a series of calibrated nozzles through which heat energy is converted into kinetic energy which, in turn, is transferred to wheels or drums and delivered at the end of a rotating shaft as usable power. Turbines are built in two distinct types: impulse and reaction. Impulse turbines have stationary nozzles, and the total stage pressure drop is taken across them. The kinetic energy generated is absorbed by the rotating buckets at essentially constant static pressure. Increased pressure drop can be efficiently utilized in a single stage (at constant wheel speed) by adding a row of turning vanes or “intermediates” which are followed by a second row of buckets. This is commonly called a Curtis or 2-row stage. In the reaction design, both the stationary and rotating parts contain nozzles, and an approximately equal pressure drop is taken across each. The pressure drop across the rotating parts of reaction-design turbines requires full circumferential admission and much closer leakage control. The first stage of the turbine must be designed to pass the maximum flow through the unit at rated inlet steam conditions. The turbine stage efficiency is defined as the actual energy delivered to the rotating blades divided by the ideal energy released to the stage in an isentropic expansion from P1 to P2 of the stage. The most important factors determining the stage efficiency are the relationship of the mean blade speed to the theoretical steam velocity, the aspect ratio (blade length/ passage width), and the aerodynamic shape of the passages. Figure 14-2 describes the typical variation in nozzle and bucket efficiencies with velocity ratio and nozzle height. A 100% efficiency cannot be obtained because of friction in the blading and clearance between the stationary and rotating parts, and because the nozzle angle cannot be zero degrees. Axial clearance increases in the stages further from the thrust bearing to satisfy the need to maintain a minimum clearance at extreme operating conditions when the differential expansion between the light rotor and FIGURE 14-2  Approximate relative effiheavy casing is at its worst. To reduce this leakage, ciencies of turbine stage types.

14_Santoso_Sec14_p0867-0918.indd 869

23/11/17 10:56 AM

870  SECTION FOURTEEN

radial spill-bands are used which are thin, metal-strip seals. There is also leakage around the nozzles between the bore of the blade ring or nozzle diaphragm and the drum or rotor that must be kept to a minimum. There are some other losses associated with the reduced efficiency. The rotation losses consist of losses due to the rotation of the disks, the blades, and shrouds. A carryover loss occurs on certain stages when the kinetic energy of the steam leaving the rotating blades cannot be recovered by the following stage because of a difference in stage diameters or a large axial space between adjacent stages. Exhaust loss, nozzle end loss, and supersaturation and moisture loss are other types of losses that need to be considered and minimized. The internal used energy of the stage is obtained by multiplying the isentropic energy available to the stage by the stage efficiency. The sum of the used energies of all stages in the turbine represents the total used energy of the turbine. The internal efficiency of the turbine can be obtained by dividing the total used energy by the overall isentropic available energy from throttle pressure and temperature conditions to the exhaust pressure. Other losses which must be accounted for to arrive at the turbine overall efficiency include valve-stem and shaft-end packing leakages and bearing and oil-pump losses. Determination of the overall efficiency of a turbine and its driven equipment must take into account the losses of gears or generators and their bearings as well. Since the early 1900s, horizontal-shaft units have been universally used. Horizontal units may be single-shaft or double-shaft, with single, double, or triple steam cylinders on one shaft. These modern units may be throttle or multiple-nozzle governed, have one or more steam extraction points, and exhibit innumerable variations in construction. Figure 14-3 shows an example modern noncondensing single automatic extraction turbine with construction details illustrated in cross section in Fig. 14-4. FIGURE 14-3 Basic construction of an Steam turbines require a number of systems example noncondensing single automatic extracand components to provide control and protective tion turbine. (General Electric.) capability. These may be divided into two functional categories: (1) primary control systems and (2) secondary and/or protective control systems. Primary control systems may be further subdivided into control valves and associated operating gear, speed/load control, and pressure control. Secondary or protective systems consist of overspeed limiting devices, emergency valves, trip devices, and associated alarm devices.

14.1.2  Steam-Turbine Applications Central station turbines usually are either a 60 MW nonreheat steam turbine which is typically installed in small utility plants, or a 600 to 800 MW tandem composed single reheat steam turbine typically used in large fossil fired central stations, or a nuclear steam turbine with a capacity of 1000 to 1300 MW. In many industrial plants, large amounts of electric power and process steam at various pressure levels are needed. Industrial users can generate their own power and charge a large part of the cost to the process, because the steam is also needed. Plants have historically been built and expanded with various condensing and noncondensing extraction turbine types, as the process requires, and in sizes ranging from 1 to 200 MW.

14_Santoso_Sec14_p0867-0918.indd 870

23/11/17 10:56 AM

14_Santoso_Sec14_p0867-0918.indd 871

5

6

7

8

20

17

1

19

2

4 3

12

14

18

13

9 11

10

15 16

FIGURE 14-4  Cross section of a modern single-automatic-extraction noncondensing steam turbine showing construction details. (General Electric.) 871

23/11/17 10:56 AM

872  SECTION FOURTEEN

The steam turbine is used extensively as the prime mover for ship propulsion at ratings above 10,000 shp. They are used almost exclusively in naval combat ships (aircraft carriers and nuclear submarines) as well as for large auxiliary supply ships. Applications are predominantly nonreheat, but because of the steadily rising cost of fuel, reheat applications are gaining popularity. 14.1.3  Steam-Turbine Performance The steam turbine constitutes the expansion portion of a vapor cycle, which requires separate devices, including a boiler, turbine, condenser, and feedwater pump, to complete the cycle. This vapor cycle for steam power plants is commonly called the Rankine cycle (Figs. 14-5 and 14-6) and is less efficient than the Carnot cycle because the exhaust vapor is completely liquefied to facilitate pumping, and because superheat is added at increasing temperature. The work of the cycle is equal to h1 - h2 minus the small pump work h4 - h3 = n3(P4 - P3)/J required, and the heat added to the cycle is equal to h1 - h4. Therefore

Rankine-cycle efficiency =

(h1 – h2 )– ν 3 ( P4 – P3 )/J h1 – h4

FIGURE 14-5  Pressure-volume diagram for the Rankine cycle: phase 4-1, constant-pressure admission; phase 1-2, complete isentropic expansion; phase 2-3, constant-pressure exhaust. Crosshatched area represents the work of the cycle.

(14-2)

FIGURE 14-6  T-S diagram; nonreheat, nonextracting turbine cycle.

Cycle efficiency is not commonly used when comparing plant efficiencies because it is only indirectly determined, compared with heat rate, which can be quickly measured. In the process industries, such as paper and petrochemical, large amounts of steam are used. Considerable by-product power can be generated by raising the boiler pressure above the process pressure and expanding the steam through a noncondensing turbine before exhausting it to the process. In this cycle, no heat is rejected because the exhaust steam is required for process and the thermodynamic cycle efficiency of this power is affected only by the boiler efficiency, the auxiliary losses chargeable to the power generation, and the mechanical and electrical losses of the turbine and generator. The station heat rate is used to measure power plant performance, but it is of little use in evaluating the specific pieces of equipment in the cycle. The engine efficiency of the steam turbine defines its actual performance to the ideal performance. The Rankine-cycle work of the turbine is most conveniently obtained by use of the Mollier diagram (Fig. 14-7), where FIGURE 14-7 Steam chart (Mollier diagram).

14_Santoso_Sec14_p0867-0918.indd 872



DW = h1 - h2 (14-3)

23/11/17 10:56 AM

Electric Machines: Generators   873 

and ΔW = Rankine-cycle work in Btu/lb, h1 = steam enthalpy at throttle in Btu/lb, h2 = steam enthalpy at exhaust in Btu/lb, and h1 and h2 are at the same entropy (vertical line). The actual work of a real turbine is less than the ideal Rankine-cycle work, with engine efficiency defined as

Engine efficiency =

actual work, Btu/lb (14-4) Rankine-cycle work, Btu/lb

Steam can be extracted at several stages in the turbine to heat feedwater being returned to the boiler. In the Rankine cycle (Figs. 14-5 and 14-6), it was shown that the feedwater was heated from h4 to h1 in the boiler. By raising the temperature h4 entering the boiler close to the saturation temperature in the drum, less fuel will be consumed in evaporating each pound of steam to h1 conditions. The heat in the extracted steam is added to the feedwater without loss, and the heat rejected to the condenser decreases as extraction flow increases. The kilowatts do not decrease inversely with extraction flow, however, as partial expansion is made down to the extraction stages. The result is an improvement in heat rate. The actual heat rate of a regenerative cycle must be determined from a heat balance prepared by using the extraction conditions available from the turbine and the heater characteristics as specified. Improvement in the steam cycle has been rapid. The advancement of steam conditions, regenerative feed heating, reheating, and size of unit has brought the overall station heat rate down from 16,000 Btu/kWh to less than 8800 Btu/kWh on the best station. The gas turbine developed very rapidly as a prime mover because of the improved steam cycle. During the 1950s, several exhaust-fired combined-cycle power plants were built, utilizing the exhaust gas from the gas turbine as the air supply for a fired main steam generator. After the Northeast Blackout of 1965, a large number of gas turbines were installed in the United States to serve as black start and peaking capacity units. As a result, they have become well established and accepted as a prime mover for peaking capacity. Combined-cycle interest was renewed with the development of non-radiant-heat recovery steam generators, and the electric generation in combined-cycle plants changed from 80% to 90% steamcycle power to 70% gas-cycle power. Since 1970, utilities have installed increasing numbers of this breed of combined-cycle plant, as they offer low initial cost, consume about one-third of the water used by straight steam plants, and provide a station heat rate 5% to 10% better than the most efficient steam plants. The major obstacle to universal acceptance of the steam-and-gas combined cycle is its fuel dependency on clean gaseous or liquid fuels. The automatic-extraction turbine provides the capability of delivering extraction steam at more than one process pressure simultaneously. When a condensing element is used, the kilowatt output of the unit can be maintained if the process flow varies, and will permit generation in excess of by-product power capability. The base efficiency for an automatic-extraction turbine is less than that of a straight condensing or straight noncondensing turbine because of (1) the introduction of a second control stage and accompanying parasitic losses, (2) the partial-load loss resulting when the high-pressure section of the automatic-extraction unit is passing only the nonextraction flow, and (3) the decreased pressure ratio of each section of the unit.

14.1.4  Gas Turbines Internal combustion engines, such as conventional automotive engines, operate on the Otto cycle; injection engines operate on the diesel cycle; and the gas or combustion turbine operates on the Brayton cycle (Fig. 14-8), also called the gas-turbine simple cycle. Referring to Fig. 14-9a, an axial or centrifugal compressor delivers the compressed air to the combustion system, and fuel is burned to increase the fluid temperature.

14_Santoso_Sec14_p0867-0918.indd 873

FIGURE 14-8  Ideal indicator cards (pressure-volume diagrams) for internal combustion cycles; (a) Otto cycle; (b) diesel cycle; (c) Brayton cycle. In general, phase 1-2 represents isentropic compression; phase 2-3, heat addition at constant pressure or volume; phase 3-4, isentropic expansion; and phase 4-1, heat rejection at constant pressure or volume.

23/11/17 10:56 AM

874  SECTION FOURTEEN

FIGURE 14-9  Typical gas-turbine cycles: (a) open, (b) intercooled, (c) regenerative, and (d) combined.

The products of combustion expand through the turbine, producing sufficient power to drive the compressor and the load. Some compressed air typically bypasses the combustor and is used to cool the turbine parts. The highest-pressure turbine airfoils contain internal cooling passages in order to maintain the metal temperature at acceptable levels for durability, while the gas path temperature is considerably higher than the metal temperature, to achieve high power and efficiency. An improvement in power output and efficiency can be obtained through the use of an intercooler (Fig. 14-9b), in which air is cooled after part of the compression process. The intercooler reduces the work of compression of the high-pressure compressor and allows higher airflow and overall pressure ratio to be attained, while reducing the temperature of the cooling air for the turbine section. Another efficiency improvement can be obtained from a regenerator or recuperator (Fig. 14-9c), which exchanges heat from the exhaust to the combustor inlet to reduce the fuel required to heat the gas. The highest efficiencies are available from combined cycles, where the gas turbine exhaust heat produces steam to drive a steam-turbine generator (Fig. 14-9d). The steam turbine output is obtained with no additional fuel input.

14_Santoso_Sec14_p0867-0918.indd 874

23/11/17 10:56 AM

Electric Machines: Generators   875 

The most effective utilization of the fuel input is available through cogeneration, or combined heat and power. A typical cycle has the gas-turbine generating power and producing steam from its exhaust heat. The steam is sent to an industrial process, in some cases after generating some power in a noncondensing steam turbine. When credit is taken for the heat sent to process plus the power generated, efficiencies exceeding 80% are commonly achieved. Simple cycles and combined cycles are by far the most commonly employed gas-turbine cycles. Some regenerative cycles were developed in the 1960s and early 1970s, but durability problems with the regenerators prevented further use. Newer regenerative cycle development started in the mid-1990s. Intercooled cycles are being studied principally as possible derivatives of commercial aircraft engines. Component efficiencies, airflow, pressure ratio, and turbine inlet (or firing) temperature are the major factors affecting gas-turbine output and efficiency. Typical multistage axial component efficiencies are in the 86% to 93% range. Material developments and turbine cooling techniques permit turbine rotor inlet temperatures to exceed 2500°F (1370°C) for the most advanced units. The most familiar application of gas turbines has been for aircraft propulsion, where the turbine drives only the compressor and the remaining energy is used for thrust. The industrial gas-turbine industry started in the late 1950s, following the development of aircraft gas turbines. Generation of electric power, mechanical drive (principally gas or oil pipeline compression), and marine propulsion are the three applications of industrial gas turbines. Over 90% of the gas-turbine applications, as measured in megawatts of power produced, are in electric power generation. The majority of the navies of the world use gas turbines to propel most of their surface ships. In electric power generation service, the combination of lower capital cost, shorter installation time, high efficiency, and environmental advantages compared to steam-turbine-based power plants has resulted in gas-turbine-based power plants having a major market for new power generation equipment. Much work has been done to adapt gas turbines to coal fuel. Coal gasification, utilized to remove contaminants, is particularly attractive since the gas-turbine combined cycle can be integrated into the gasification process for improved efficiency. Air extracted from the gas turbine can be used as the source of oxidant for the gasification process, and the steam produced in the process can be expanded through the steam turbine.

14.2  DIRECT-CURRENT GENERATORS 14.2.1  The DC Machine Applications.  The most important role played by the dc generator is the power supply for the important dc motor. It supplies essentially ripple-free power and precisely held voltage at any desired value from zero to rated levels. This is truly dc power, and it permits the best possible commutation on the motor because it is free of severe waveshapes of dc power from rectifiers. It has excellent response and is particularly suitable for precise output control by feedback control regulators. It is also well suited for supplying accurately controlled and responsive excitation power for both ac and dc machines. General Construction.  Figure 14-10 shows the parts of a medium or large dc generator. They differ from ac machines in having a commutator and the armature on the rotor. They also have salient poles on the stator, and, except for a few small cases, they have commutating poles between the main poles. Construction and Size.  Small dc machines have large surface-to-volume ratios and short paths for heat to reach dissipating surfaces. The cooling requires little more than the means to blow air over the rotor and between the poles. The rotor punchings are mounted solidly on the shaft, with no air passages through them. Larger units, with longer, deeper cores, use the same construction, but with longitudinal holes through the core punchings for cooling air to circulate. Medium and large machines must have large heat-dissipation surfaces and effectively placed cooling air, or “hot spots” will develop. Their

14_Santoso_Sec14_p0867-0918.indd 875

23/11/17 10:56 AM

876  SECTION FOURTEEN

FIGURE 14-10  The dc machine.

core punchings are mounted on arms to permit large volumes of cool air to reach the many core ventilation ducts and also the ventilation spaces between the coil end extensions. Design Components.  The armature-core punchings are usually of high-permeability electrical sheet steel, 0.017 to 0.025 inch thick, and have an insulating film between them. Small and medium units use “doughnut” circular punchings, but large units, above about 45 inch in diameter, use segmental punchings shaped as shown in Fig. 14-11, which also shows the fingers used to form the ventilating ducts. The main- and commutating-pole punchings are usually thicker than rotor punchings because only the pole faces are subjected to high-frequency flux changes. These range from 0.062 to 0.125 inch thick, and they are normally riveted. FIGURE 14-11  Armature The frame yoke is usually made from rolled mild steel plate, segment for a dc generator showbut, on high-demand large generators for rapidly changing loads, ing vent fingers applied. laminations may be used. The solid frame has a high magnetic time constant of about half a second due to currents induced by changes in load, thereby making laminated frames with smaller time constants of about 0.05 to 0.005 seconds, more viable for applications with rapidly changing loads. The commutator is truly the heart of the dc machine. It is made up of hard copper bars drawn accurately in a wedge shape. These are separated from each other by mica plate segments, whose

14_Santoso_Sec14_p0867-0918.indd 876

23/11/17 10:56 AM

Electric Machines: Generators   877 

thicknesses must be held accurately for nearly perfect indexing of the bars and for no skew. This thickness is 0.020 to 0.050 inch, depending on the size of the generator and on the maximum voltage that can be expected between the bars during operation. The mica segments and bars are clamped between two metal V-rings and insulated from them by cones of mica. On very high speed commutators of about 10,000 ft/min, shrink rings of steel are used to hold the bars. Mica is used under the rings. Carbon brushes ride on the commutator bars and carry the load current from the rotor coils to the external circuit. The brush holders hold the brushes against the commutator surface by springs to maintain a fairly constant pressure and smooth riding. 14.2.2  General Principles Electromagnetic Induction.  A magnetic field is represented by continuous lines of flux considered to emerge from a north pole and to enter a south pole. When the number of such lines linked by a coil is changed (Fig. 14-12), a voltage is induced in the coil equal to 1 V for a change of 108 linkages/s (Mx/s) for each turn of the coil, or E = (DfT × 10–8)/t V. If the flux lines are deformed by the motion of the coil conductor before they are broken, the direction of the induced voltage is considered to be into the conductor if the arrows for the distorted flux are shown to be pointing clockwise and outward if counterclockwise. This is the generator action (Fig. 14-13).

FIGURE 14-12 Generated emf by coil movement in a magnetic field.

FIGURE 14-13  Direction of induced emf by conductor movement in a magnetic field.

Force on Current-Carrying Conductors in a Magnetic Field.  If a conductor carries current, loops of flux are produced around it (Fig. 14-14). The direction of the flux is clockwise if the current flows away from the viewer into the conductor, and counterclockwise if the current in the conductor flows toward the viewer. If this conductor is in a magnetic field, the combination of the flux of the field and the flux produced by the conductor may be considered to cause a flux concentration on the side of the conductor, where the two fluxes are additive and a reduction on the side where they oppose. A force on the conductor results that tends to move it toward the side with reduced flux (Fig. 14-15). This is motor action. Generator and Motor Reactions.  It is evident that a dc generator will have its useful voltage induced by the reactions described above. An external driving means must be supplied to rotate the armature so that the conductor loops will move through the flux lines from the stationary poles. However,

14_Santoso_Sec14_p0867-0918.indd 877

23/11/17 10:56 AM

878  SECTION FOURTEEN

FIGURE 14-14  Magnetic fields caused by current-carrying conductors.

FIGURE 14-15  Force on a current-carrying conductor in a magnetic field.

these conductors must carry current for the generator to be useful, and this will cause retarding forces on them. The prime mover must overcome these forces. In the case of the dc motor, the conductor loops will move through the flux, and voltages will be induced in them. These induced voltages are called the “counter emf,” and they oppose the flow of currents which produce the forces that rotate the armature. Therefore, this emf must be overcome by an excess voltage applied to the coils by the external voltage source.

FIGURE 14-16  Direction of current in generator and motor.

14_Santoso_Sec14_p0867-0918.indd 878

Direct-Current Features.  Direct-current machines require many conductors and two or more stationary flux-producing poles to provide the needed generated voltage or the necessary torque. The direction of the current flow in the armature conductors under each particular pole must always be correct for the desired results (Fig. 14-16). Therefore, the current in the conductors must reverse at some time while the conductors pass through the space between adjacent north and south poles. This is accomplished by carbon brushes connected to the external circuit. The brushes make contact with the conductors by means of the commutator. To describe commutation, the Gramme-ring armature winding (which is not used in actual machines) is shown in Fig. 14-17. All the conductors are connected in series and are wound around a steel ring. The ring provides a path for the flux from the north

23/11/17 10:56 AM

Electric Machines: Generators   879 

to the south pole. Note that only the outer portions of the conductors cut the flux as the ring rotates. Voltages are induced as shown. With no external circuit, no current flow, because the voltages induced in the two halves are in opposition. However, if the coils are connected at a commutator C made up of copper blocks insulated from each other, brushes B- and B+ may be used to connect the two halves in parallel with respect to an external circuit and the currents will flow in the proper direction in the conductors beneath the poles. As the armature rotates, the coil M passes from one side of the neutral line to the other and the direction of the current in it is shown at three successive instants at A, B, and C in FIGURE 14-17  Principle of commutation. Fig. 14-17. As the armature moves from A to C and the brush changes contact from segment 2 to segment 1, the current in M is automatically reversed. For a short period, the brush contacts both segments and short circuits the coil. It is important that no voltage be induced in M during that time, or the resulting circulating currents could be damaging. This accounts for the location of the brushes so that M will be at the neutral flux point between the poles. Field Excitation.  Flux from the main poles is obtained by winding conductors around the pole bodies and passing current through them. This current may be supplied in different ways. When a generator supplies its own exciting current, it is “self-excited.” When current is supplied from an external source, it is “separately excited.” When excited by the load current of the machine, it is “series excited.” 14.2.3  Armature Reactions Cross-Magnetizing Effect.  Figure 14-18a represents the magnetic field produced in the air gap of a 2-pole machine by the magnetomotive force (mmf) of the main exciting coils, and part b represents the magnetic field produced by the mmf of the armature winding alone when it carries a load current. If each of the Z armature conductors carries Ic A, then the mmf between a and b is equal to ZIc/p At. That between c and d (across the pole tips) is y ZIc/p At, where y = ratio of pole arc to pole pitch. On the assumption that all the reluctance is in the air gap, half the mmf acts at ce and half at fd, and so the cross-magnetizing effect at each pole tip is

ψ ZIc 2p

ampere-turns (14-5)

for any number of poles.

FIGURE 14-18  Flux distribution in (a) main field, (b) armature field, and (c) load conditions.

14_Santoso_Sec14_p0867-0918.indd 879

23/11/17 10:56 AM

880  SECTION FOURTEEN

Field Distortion.  Figure 14-18c shows the resultant magnetic field when both armature and main exciting mmfs exist together; the flux density is increased at pole tips d and g and is decreased at tips c and h.

FIGURE 14-19  Flux distribution in a large machine with p poles.

Flux Reduction Due to Cross-Magnetization.  Figure 14-19 shows part of a large machine with p poles. Curve D shows the flux distribution in the air gap due to the main exciting mmf acting alone, with flux density plotted vertically. Curve G shows the distribution of the armature mmf, and curve F shows the resultant flux distribution with both acting. Since the armature teeth are saturated at normal flux densities, the increase in density at f is less than the decrease at e, so that the total flux per pole is diminished by the cross-magnetizing effect of the armature.

Demagnetizing Effect of Brush Shift.  Figure 14-20 shows the magnetic field produced by the armature mmf with the brushes shifted through an angle q to improve commutation. The armature field is no longer at right angles to the main field but may be considered the resultant of two components, one in the direction OY, called the “cross-magnetizing component,” and the other in the direction OX, which is called the “demagnetizing component” because it directly opposes the main field. Figure 14-21 gives the armature divided to show the two components. As can be seen, the demagnetizing ampere-turns per pair of poles are

ZIc 2θ × p 180

FIGURE 14-20  Demagnetizing effect.

ampere-turns (14-6)

FIGURE 14-21  Cross-magnetizing effect.

where 2q/180 is about 0.2 for small noncommutating pole machines where brush shift is used. The demagnetizing ampere-turns per pole would be 0.1ZIc /p  ampere-turns (14-7) No-Load and Full-Load Saturation Curves.  Curve 1 of Fig. 14-22 is the no-load saturation curve of a dc generator. When full-load current is applied, there is a decrease in useful flux, and therefore a drop in voltage ab due to the armature cross-magnetizing effect (see paragraph on flux reduction, above). A further voltage drop from brush shift is counterbalanced by an increase in excitation bc = 0.1 ZIc /p; also a portion cd of the generated emf is required in overcoming the voltage drop from the current in the internal resistance of the machine. The no-load voltage of 240 V requires 8000 At. At full load at that excitation, the terminal voltage drops to 220 V. To have both no-load and full-load voltages equal to 240 V, a series field of 10,700 - 8000 = 2700 At would be required.

14_Santoso_Sec14_p0867-0918.indd 880

23/11/17 10:57 AM

Electric Machines: Generators   881 

FIGURE 14-22  Saturation curves—dc generator.

14.2.4 Commutation Commutation Defined.  The voltages generated in all conductors under a north pole of a dc generator are in the same direction, and those generated in the conductors under a south pole are all in the opposite direction (Fig. 14-23). The currents will flow in the same direction as induced voltages in generators and in the opposite direction in motors. Thus, as a conductor of the armature passes under a brush, its current must reverse from a given value in one direction to the same value in the opposite direction. This is called “commutation.”

FIGURE 14-23  Conductor currents.

Conductor Current Reversal.  If commutation is “perfect,” the change of the current in a coil will be linear, as shown by the solid line in Fig. 14-24. Unfortunately, the conductors lie in steel slots, and self- and mutual inductances cause voltages to be induced in the coils short-circuited by the brushes. These result in circulating currents that tend to prevent the initial current change, delaying the reversal. In extreme cases, the delay may be as severe as indicated by the dotted line of Fig. 14-24. Because the current must be reversed by the time the coil leaves the brush (when there is no longer any path for circulating currents), the current remaining to be reversed at F must discharge its energy in an electric arc from the commutator bar to the heel of the brush. This is commutation sparking. It can burn the edges of the commutator bars and the brushes. However, most large and heavy-duty dc machines have some nondamaging sparking, and “sparkless” commutation is not required by accepted standards. However, commutation must not require undue maintenance.

14_Santoso_Sec14_p0867-0918.indd 881

23/11/17 10:57 AM

882  SECTION FOURTEEN

FIGURE 14-24  Commutation.

Commutating Poles.  The beneficial factors that limit the circulating currents in coils being commutated are not adequate to prevent serious delays in current reversal. Other means must be taken to prevent sparking. Stationary poles may be provided midway between the main poles. (Fig. 14-25). The windings on these commutating poles carry the load current. The commutating pole (C in the figure) flux is proportional to the rotor conductor currents and, theoretically, can cancel the voltages induced in the coils being commutated by the slot leakage flux. In the case of the dc motor, the current reverses in both the armature and the commutating field, and proper canceling is maintained. Almost all modern dc machines use commutating poles, although some small machines have only half as many as main poles.

FIGURE 14-25  Slot-leakage flux and commutating-pole flux.

Compensating Windings.  Although the commutating pole is a good solution for commutation, it does not prevent distortion of the main-pole flux by armature reaction. If the pole face is provided with another winding and connected in series with the load, it can set up an mmf equal and opposite to that of the armature. This would tend to prevent distortion of the air-gap field by armature reaction. Such windings are called compensating windings and are usually provided on medium-sized and large dc machines to obtain the best possible characteristics. They are also often needed to make machines less susceptible to flashovers.

14_Santoso_Sec14_p0867-0918.indd 882

23/11/17 10:57 AM

Electric Machines: Generators   883 

Compensation of armature reaction effectively reduces the armature circuit inductance. This makes the machine to be less susceptible to the bad effects of L(di/dt) voltages caused by very fast load current changes. 14.2.5  Cooling and Ventilation Cause of Temperature Rise.  The losses in a dc machine cause the temperature of the parts to rise until the difference in temperature between their surfaces and the cooling air is great enough to dissipate the heat generated. Permissible measured temperature rises of the parts are limited by the maximum “hot-spot” temperature that the insulation can withstand and still have reasonable life. The maximum surface temperatures are fixed by the temperature gradient through the insulation from the hot spot to the surface. The IEEE Insulation Standards have established the limiting hot-spot temperatures for systems of insulation. The American National Standards Institute Standard C50.4 for dc machines gives typical gradients for those systems, listing acceptable surface and average copper temperature rises above specified ambient-air temperatures for various machine enclosures and duty cycles. Typical values are 40°C for Class A systems, 60°C for Class B, and 80°C rise for Class F systems on armature coils. Class H systems usually contain silicones and are seldom used on medium and large dc machines. Silicone vapors can cause greatly accelerated brush wear at the commutator and severe sparking, particularly on enclosed machines. Temperature Gradients in Rotor Coils.  In case of the coils, the hot spot is probably at the core centerline and near the center of the conductor. Heat will probably travel along the conductor to the end turn and also through the insulation to the iron. The amount of heat flowing in each direction is difficult to calculate. Also, variations in the coils, such as resin fill and tightness in the slots, make heat conductivity factors difficult to predict. Heating of End Connections of Armature Windings.  Small machines often have “solid” end windings banded down on insulated “shelf ”-type coil supports. Larger machines are more heavily loaded per unit volume and usually have narrow coil supports, air spaces between the end turns, and ventilating air scouring both the top and bottom surfaces of the coil extensions. Commutator Heating.  In a modern DC motor, the commutator diameter ranges from 55% to 85% of the rotor core, and the commutator necks joining the bars with the rotor winding extensions are usually separated from one another by air spaces, so that, when the armature revolves, air circulation is set up as shown by the arrows. The heat to be dissipated is that due to brush friction and the brush contact I 2R losses. There may be other losses due to poor commutation, brush chattering, and commutator surface. If commutation is very good and the brush riding is excellent, the temperature will be lower. 14.2.6  Losses and Efficiency Armature Copper I2R Loss.  At 75°C the resistivity of copper is 8.25 × 10–7 W/in3. Thus, for an armature winding of Z conductors, each with a length of Lt /2 (half the mean length turn of the coil), each with a cross-sectional area of A and arranged in several parallel circuits, the resistance is

Ra = Z

Lt 8.25 × 10−7 2 A (circuits)2

ohms (14-8)

The Lt is best found by layout, but an approximate value is

Lt = 2[(1.35)(pole pitch) + (rotor length) × 3] (14-9)

There are also eddy current losses in the rotor coils, but these may be held to a minimum by conductor stranding. Some allowance for these is included in the load loss.

14_Santoso_Sec14_p0867-0918.indd 883

23/11/17 10:57 AM

884  SECTION FOURTEEN

Compensating, Commutating, and Series Field I2R Losses.  These fields also carry the line current, and the I2R losses are easily found when the resistance of the coils is known. Their Lt is found from sketch layouts. At 75°C

R =T

Lt 8.25 × 10−7 p A (circuits)2

ohms (14-10)

where R is the field resistance in ohms, T the number of turns per coil, p the number of poles, Lt the mean length of turn, and A the area of the conductor. The total of these losses ranges from 60% to 100% of the armature I2R for compensated machines and is less than 50% for noncompensated machines. The brush I2 loss is caused by the load current passing through the contact voltage drop between the brushes and the commutator. The contact drop is assumed to be 1 V. Brush I2R loss = 2(line amperes)   watts

(14-11)

Load Loss.  The presence of load current in the armature conductors results in flux distortions around the slots, in the air gap, and at the pole faces. These cause losses in the conductors and iron that are difficult to calculate and measure. A standard value has been set at 1% of the machine output.

Load loss = 0.01(machine output)

(14-12)

Shunt Field Loss.  Heating calculations are concerned only with the field copper I2R loss. It is customary, however, to charge the machine with any rheostat losses in determining efficiency. Thus

Shunt field and rheostat loss = If Vex  watts

(14-13)

where If is the total field current and Vex is the excitation voltage. Core Loss.  The flux in any portion of the armature passes through p/2 c/r (cycles per revolution) or through (p/2)[(r/min)/60] Hz. The iron losses consist of the hysteresis loss, which equals Kb 1.6 fw watts, and the eddy current loss, which equals Ke(b ft)2w watts. K is the hysteresis constant of the iron used, Ke is a constant inversely proportional to the electrical resistance of the iron, b is the maximum flux density in lines per square inch, f is the frequency in hertz, w is the weight in pounds, and t is the thickness of laminations in inches. The eddy loss is reduced by using iron with as high an electrical resistance as is feasible. Very high resistance iron has a tendency to have low flux permeability and to be mechanically brittle and expensive. It is seldom justified in dc machines. The loss is kept to an acceptable value by the use of thin core laminations, 0.017 to 0.025 inch thickness. Another significant loss is the pole-face loss. As the armature rotates and the teeth move past the pole face, emfs are induced which tend to cause currents to flow across the pole face. These losses are included in the core loss. Unfortunately, there are other losses in the core that may differ widely even on duplicate machines and that do not lend themselves to calculation. These include: 1. Loss due to filing of slots. 2. Losses in the solid spider, core end plates, and coil supports from leakage fluxes may be appreciable. 3. Losses due to nonuniform distribution of flux in the rotor core are difficult to anticipate. Brush Friction Loss.  This loss varies with the condition of the commutator surface and the grade of carbon brush used. A typical machine has about 8-W loss/(in2 of brush contact surface)(1000 ft/min) of peripheral speed when normal brush pressure of 2½ lb/in2 is used.

14_Santoso_Sec14_p0867-0918.indd 884

Brush friction = (8) (contact area)

peripheral velocity (14-14) 1000

23/11/17 10:57 AM

Electric Machines: Generators   885 

Friction and Windage.  Most large dc machines use babbitt bearings and many small machines use ball or roller bearings, although both types of bearing may be used in machines of any size. The bearing friction losses depend on the speed, the bearing load, and the lubrication. The windage losses depend on the construction of the rotor, its peripheral velocity, and the machine restrictions to air movement. The two losses are lumped in most estimates because it is not practical to separate them during machine testing. Figure 14-26 shows typical values of friction and windage losses for various rotor diameters referred to rotor velocities. Efficiency.  The efficiency of a generator is the ratio of the output to its input. The prime mover must supply the output and, in addition, the sum of all the losses. This is the input.

Efficiency =

FIGURE 14-26  Friction and windage versus rotor velocity.

output output = (14-15) input output + losses

14.2.7  Generator Characteristics The voltage regulation of a dc generator is the ratio of the difference between the voltage at no load and that at full load to the rated-load voltage. The characteristic is normally drooping as the load is increased. However, it can rise because of series field effects or the action of circulating currents of commutation at very low voltage operation. For a dc generator, the terminal-voltage equation is TV = E - IR = [(Kft)(r/min) - IR] (14-16) where E is the induced emf, IR is the armature circuit drop, K is a constant depending on the machine design, and ft is the total main-pole flux of the generator. The regulation curves are easily calculated by using the no-load and full-load saturation curves. The effect of the excitation method is found by the use of the field and rheostat IR line for self-excited machines and by the constant-ampere-turn line for separate excitation. A separately excited compensated generator which is shunt-wound will have a voltage-load characteristic which will approach a straight line; it droops to full load an amount equal to the percent IR drop. There is little or no flux loss due to armature reaction or brush shift. At voltages 10% or less of rated, the main-field strength is so weak that currents circulating in the coils short-circuited by the brushes at commutation may cause an increase in main-pole flux with load that causes a rising characteristic. These armature coils loop the main poles and their ampere-turns produce direct axis flux. A rising voltage characteristic can be undesirable, particularly if the generator supplies a dc motor whose speed is caused to rise with load, since this causes instability. A separately excited noncompensated dc generator which is shunt-wound has a nonlinear loss of flux due to armature reaction as the load current is increased. The characteristics of such dc generators drop at an ever increasing rate with load increase, giving a curve that is concave downward. A self-excited noncompensated dc generator which is shunt-wound has its shunt-field excitation decreased as the terminal voltage drops. This results in a reduction of main-field ampere-turns and a loss of still more flux. This gives a severe droop which may be so great that, above a certain peak-load

14_Santoso_Sec14_p0867-0918.indd 885

23/11/17 10:57 AM

886  SECTION FOURTEEN

current, the terminal voltage will not be high enough to provide enough field current to maintain the voltage and load current and the voltage will collapse, as shown in d of Fig. 14-27.

FIGURE 14-27  No-load and field-load saturation curves.

Instability of Self-Excited Generators.  A self-excited dc generator is unstable if the rheostat line does not make a definite intersection with the load-saturation curve. The shunt-field current is fixed by the terminal voltage, and the resistance is in the shuntfield circuit. Instability will exist if the slope of the rheostat line is nearly equal to or greater than the slope of a line tangent to the operating point on the saturation curve. In Fig. 14-27, point b is a stable operating condition, but point c is not, because a decrease in voltage decreases the shunt field ampere turns, and this produces a further decrease in voltage. If the field circuit resistance were set at d, the self-excited generator would never build up beyond residual voltage. Another cause of failure to build up may be the connection of the shunt field. If the current flow due to residual voltage is such that it tends to kill the flux producing the residual voltage, no buildup occurs.

Series Generators.  Curve 1 of Fig. 14-28 shows the relation between voltage and current if there is no armature resistance or armature reaction. This is actually the no-load curve of the machine obtained by separately exciting the series field. Curve 2 shows the actual relation between load current and terminal voltage. The total voltage drop is made up of a part caused by the decrease in flux by armature reaction and a part caused by the IR drop of the armature, brushes, and series fields.

FIGURE 14-28  Characteristic curves of a series generator.

Field Time Constants.  The major delay in change of output voltage by an excitation change is caused by the inductance of the main fields. The time constant of the shunt field is the ratio of its inductance in henries to its resistance in ohms, and this ratio represents the time in seconds required for 63% of a field current change to occur when the excitation voltage is suddenly changed. In the case of an example 2500-kW generator, a mean main-field inductance over the voltage range from zero to rated is 6.20 H. The mainfield resistance is 2.21 W. The field time constant is therefore 2.8 s.

Armature-Circuit Time Constants.  Compensating windings effectively lower the inductances of the armature circuit. An example 2500 kW DC machine has an armature-circuit inductance of 0.0001929 H and a circuit resistance of 0.00398 W for a time constant of 0.048 s. These are typical values for large dc machines. Smaller noncompensated units have longer time constants.

14.2.8 Testing Factory Tests.  These depend on the size, application, and design of the dc generator. The American National Standards Institute (ANSI) C50.4 for dc machines includes lists of recommended tests for dc generators and motors. The IEEE Test Code for dc machines covers recommended methods to be used for these tests.

14_Santoso_Sec14_p0867-0918.indd 886

23/11/17 10:57 AM

Electric Machines: Generators   887 

14.2.9  Special Generators General.  The adaptability of the dc generator for specific uses has led to the development of many special generators. These machines over the years made a significant contribution to industrial progress. However, most of these special applications have disappeared or are now being met with other devices such as silicon controlled rectifiers or programmed control of field currents to the main dc generator. Synchronous Converters.  Of all the special generators, this was one of the earlier and most widely used. It was the principal dc power source for streetcars and interurban lines. It was a most ingenious device, combining in a single armature and winding, an ac motor taking its current from the lines through slip rings at the rear and a dc generator providing dc power from a commutator on the front end. Because the flow of the currents was in opposition, the resulting rotor winding could be small in cross section. A single stator provided flux for both functions. With the decline of street railway systems, the synchronous converter disappeared. Rotating Regulators.  These dc machines had trade names like Rototrol, Regulex, and Amplidyne. They, too, have been replaced by solid-state devices. In addition to having fields for feedback intelligence, response was enhanced using self-excited shunt fields tuned to the air-gap line or by means of cross-magnetization from armature reaction. Three-Wire Devices.  Because three-wire dc circuits are no longer in use, balancer sets and threewire generators are relics in school labs or museums. Homopolar or Acyclic DC Generators.  The single-pole machine principle still fascinates electrical engineers and several research and development labs continue to study new arrangements of its basic parts. Fundamentally, it consists of a single conductor moving through a uniform singledirection flux with a collector at each end of the conductor. The output is a steady ripple-free pure dc current and no commutation. Currents reaching 270,000 A at 8 V were provided by one commercial unit shown in Fig. 14-29. Recent efforts have been mainly to use liquid metals to take the large currents from the rotating collectors and to obtain higher voltages by connecting units in series. Some success has been possible, but restricting the sodium potassium to the collector area has proved difficult.

FIGURE 14-29  Brush-type homopolar generator.

14_Santoso_Sec14_p0867-0918.indd 887

23/11/17 10:57 AM

888  SECTION FOURTEEN

14.3  ALTERNATING-CURRENT GENERATORS 14.3.1 Introduction This subsection deals with ac electric machines that convert mechanical power into electrical power. Such generators can be either synchronous generators or induction generators. Rotational speed of a synchronous generator is exactly at a speed that is synchronized with the ac power frequency, and this rotational speed is kept constant with varying loading conditions. Rotational speed of an induction generator is slightly above synchronous speed, and this rotational speed varies slightly with varying loading conditions. Induction generators find their major power generation application in wind turbine power generation. Synchronous ac generators dominate present-day commercial power generation by fossil fuels, nuclear reactors, and hydraulic turbines. All discussions of ac generators in this subsection are focused upon synchronous generators. AC synchronous generators range in size and capability from very modest machines that are rated at a few hundred watts to the largest machines that are rated at 2000 MW. 14.3.2 Topology All synchronous generators convert mechanical power into electrical power using an intermediate reservoir of energy in which the energy is stored in the form of magnetic fields. The magnetic fields are typically established by electrical currents circulated in stationary ac windings, called the armature, and rotating dc windings, called the field, and these magnetic fields are circulated within the generator through high permeability steel structures. In such a generator, the ac winding is electrically connected to an electrical power system and physically mounted on the stationary member of the generator (the stator), and the dc winding is electrically connected to a dc power source and physically mounted on the rotating member of the generator (the rotor). The ac winding usually has three phases. Small generators can be built to have a single phase. The dc field winding could be replaced with permanent magnets. The electromagnetic interaction between the ac armature winding and the dc field winding provides the basis for ac power generation. In a generator, like that illustrated in Fig. 14-30, the magnetic circuit consists of a steel stator core mounted inside the steel stator case and a steel rotor that is supported on bearings that are Stator case

Stator core

Armature winding

End rings End turns

Coupling

Field winding

Slip rings Bearings

Rotor

Seals

FIGURE 14-30  Elements of an ac generator.

14_Santoso_Sec14_p0867-0918.indd 888

23/11/17 10:57 AM

Electric Machines: Generators   889 

Stator (laminated iron) Rotor (solid iron)

Air gap

Stator coil -a1 Rotor coil S

a1

N

N

a2

S

Rotor coil

-a2

Magnetic flux line

Stator coil

Air gap (a)

(b)

FIGURE 14-31  4-Pole generator (a is round rotor, b is salient pole).

either set into the case or separately mounted to the foundation. The coils of the armature winding are mounted in the stator core, and the coils of the field winding are mounted on the rotor. Armature winding electrical coils for generators of the type shown in Fig. 14-30 are typically deployed in radial slots formed in the inner diameter of the stator, and field winding electrical coils are typically deployed in radial slots formed in the outer diameter of the rotor, as illustrated in Fig. 14-31. In a synchronous machine the armature (stator) winding must be designed for the same number of poles as the field (rotor) winding. The torque is produced by the magnetic interaction between a succession of rotating north-south magnetic-field pole pairs produced by the polyphase currents in the polyphase armature winding and the magnetic field poles on the rotor rotating at the same speed as the armature magnetic field. For a machine with the number of poles as P, the relationship between the electrical frequency fe (Hz) and mechanical speed N (rpm)is

N · P = 120 · fe (14-17)

Synchronous generators can be a round-rotor machine or a salient-pole machine. Round-rotor machines are constructed of a cylindrical rotor. Therefore, the air gap between rotor and stator is uniform. On the other hand, the rotor of a salient-pole machine is constructed of a number of pole pieces mounted on a central rotor shaft. Figure 14-31 represents a four pole generator with roundrotor and a salient pole generator. As illustrated in Fig. 14-31, the magnetic flux passes through the magnetic circuit of the machine which is made up of the airgap, the stator teeth and backiron, the rotor poles, and the shaft section. The function of the magnetic circuit is to carry flux that links the armature conductors to produce voltage.

In both round-rotor and salient-pole generators, the magnetic flux passing through the rotors does not vary in time, and the magnetic flux passing through the stator core does vary periodically in time at the electrical line frequency. Consequently, the rotors can be made of solid steel, but the stator

14_Santoso_Sec14_p0867-0918.indd 889

23/11/17 10:57 AM

890  SECTION FOURTEEN

cores must be made of thousands of thin layers (laminations) of highly permeable electrical steel. Each layer of stator core steel is coated with a thin layer of electrical insulation. Electrical insulation is also used to isolate conductors and strands from each other and ground. The thermal classes of insulation material, most frequently used in ac generators, are Classes 130, 155, and 180. 14.3.3 Operation The synchronous operation may be described in two elementary ways, referred to as the mmf method and the flux method. These are described here, assuming a simple, linear, round-rotor model for the machine. It should be noted that this model will, of necessity, be modified later to fully understand operation of the machine. MMF Method.  A principal feature of a synchronous generator is the mutual inductance between the field and the phase windings. Assuming a three-phase machine, the mutual inductances between the field winding and the three-phase windings are

Maf = M cos pf (14-18)



 2π  Mbf = M cos  pφ −  (14-19)  3 



 2π  M cf = M cos  pφ +  (14-20)  3 

where M is the peak value of mutual inductance and f is the angle, in mechanical radian, between the axes of the field winding and the armature (stator) phase winding designated a. If it is further assumed that phase-phase inductances, both self- and mutual, are not a function of rotor position, the use of energy methods gives a simple expression for machine torque:

  2π  2π  T = − pMiai f sin pφ − pMibi f sin  pφ −  − pMici f sin  pφ +  (14-21)   3  3 

Noting that the sum of phase currents is, under balanced conditions, zero and that the mutual phase-phase inductances are equal, this is

la = (La – Lab)ia + MIf cos pq = Ldia + MIf cos pq (14-22)

where Ld denotes the d-axis synchronous inductance taking the field axis the direct or d-axis. This flux is described by the equivalent circuit of Fig. 14-32, where, Eaf = jwMIf e jd (14-23) and d is the phase angle between internal voltage Eaf and terminal voltage V, and Xd = wLd. jXd

Ra

I

+ + Eaf

−

V

− FIGURE 14-32  Steady-state equivalent circuit (Ra is neglected for analysis).

14_Santoso_Sec14_p0867-0918.indd 890

23/11/17 10:57 AM

Electric Machines: Generators   891 

Assume Ra Lq. Terminal voltage now has these components Vd = -wlq = -w Lq Iq = V sin d (14-40) Vq = wld = wLdId + wMIf = V cos d (14-41) which is easily inverted to produce Id =



V cosδ − Eaf

Iq = −



Xd

(14-42)

V sinδ (14-43) Xq

where Xd = wLd, Xq = wLq, and Eaf = wMIf . In the complex frame of reference V = Vd + jVq

(14-44)

I = Id + jIq

(14-45)

complex power is, in the sense of a generator 3 3 P + jQ = − VI ∗ = − [(Vd I d + Vq Iq ) + j(Vq Id − Vd I q )] 2 2



(14-46)

or



P=

Q =−

3 2

 VEaf V2 sinδ +  2  X d

  1 1  −  sin2δ  (14-47)    Xq Xd 

      VEaf 3 V 2  1 1  V2  1 1  + − − cos2δ − cosδ  (14-48)  2  2  X q X d  2  X q X d  Xd  

14.3.5  Machine Size and Utilization Generators produce torque through interaction between magnetic flux density and current over the surface of the stator, and reaction torque through the same type of interaction over the surface of the rotor. The stator and rotor face each other across the air gap. Power produced is

14_Santoso_Sec14_p0867-0918.indd 893

P = ω mechT = 2 π

f N T = 2π T (14-49) p 60

23/11/17 10:57 AM

894  SECTION FOURTEEN

where torque produced is T = 2π R 2lσ



(14-50)

where f = electrical frequency, Hz N = mechanical speed, r/min R = stator inner radius l = active length s = average value of air gap shear stress, given approximately by

σ≈



1 B K (14-51) 2 1 z

where B1 is the peak value of fundamental magnetic flux density at the stator surface and Kz is the effective surface current density root mean square (rms) of the armature. The effective surface current density is ampere-turns per unit of periphery, modified by pitch and distribution factors, and by power factor. Shear stress normally increases with pole pitch for a particular voltage and number of poles because the deeper armature slots and greater field coil space allow more ampere-conductors per unit of periphery. Typical shear stress levels for indirectly cooled, salient-pole generators are shown in Fig. 14-35. Typically shear stress is higher for directly cooled machines and a consequence of increased current density.

FIGURE 14-35  Typical shear stress, salient-pole, air-cooled generators.

Another rough estimate of machine size employs the utilization factor:

c=

S (14-52) D2 l N

where S is machine rating, D and l are outside diameter and length, respectively, and N is rotational speed. The utilization factor depends on unit rating (high-speed machines) or unit rating per pole (low-speed machines) and on cooling.

14_Santoso_Sec14_p0867-0918.indd 894

23/11/17 10:57 AM

Electric Machines: Generators   895 

14.3.6 Electromagnetics Sketches of the major elements of synchronous generators, together with field “flux forms,” are shown in Figs. 14-36 and 14-37. Here the generator is “unrolled” and shown as if the air gap were flat. Note that the main flux distribution in the air gap is not exactly sinusoidal. Thus the voltage produced will contain time harmonics. Assign Cn to be the amplitude of the nth-space harmonic of the flux density, relative to the peak amplitude B0. The fundamental flux per pole is 2 RlB0C1 Φ1 = (14-53) p

FIGURE 14-36  (a) Generalized sketch of one pair of poles for a salient-pole machine; (b) flux form for typical pair of poles (current in field winding only).

FIGURE 14-37  (a) Generalized sketch of one pair of poles for cylindrical rotor machine; (b) flux form for a typical pair of poles (current in the field winding only).

14_Santoso_Sec14_p0867-0918.indd 895

23/11/17 10:57 AM

896  SECTION FOURTEEN

The rms amplitude of generated voltage is, for the time, fundamental

V1 =

1 ω N a kw Φ1 (14-54) 2

where V1 is the rms value of the time fundamental voltage induced in a phase and Na is the number of turns in the phase. In a three-phase machine connected in wye, line-line voltage is 3 times the phase voltage. The winding factor kwn is explained in Eqs. (14-55) through (14-57). As the voltage waveform is not perfectly sinusoidal, time harmonic voltage will be induced that can be estimated by C k Vn = V1 n wn (14-55) C1 kw It should be noted that certain time harmonics, those referred to as the triplen harmonics (odd factors of 3), are induced in all three phases of a three-phase machine in phase. Thus, if line-line voltage is measured, these harmonics (orders 3, 9, 15, . . .) will turn out to have zero amplitude. The winding factor is kwn = kpnkbnksn. Its component parts are called the pitch factor nα k pn = cos (14-56) 2 the breadth factor



mnγ 2 kbn = nγ m sin 2

(14-57)

nθ s 2 kbn = nθ s 2

(14-58)

sin

and, when applicable, the skew factor

sin

where a = pitch angle: the electrical angle between coil halves of the armature winding (this is generally a bit less than p to reduce the impact of higher harmonics and to make armature end windings shorter) m = number of slots per pole per phase g = electrical angle between slots qs = electrical angle of skew Here, the relevant angles are stated in electrical terms. The electrical angle is p times the physical angle. Thus, in a 4-pole machine with 72 slots, the electrical angle between slots is 2 × 360/72 = 10°. In many ac generators, the skew angle is zero for which the skew factor is unity. In some cases, the stator is skewed with respect to the rotor (or vice versa) to reduce the effects of slot openings in inducing currents in rotor parts with a consequent effect on rotor surface losses and noise. 14.3.7  Armature Reaction Current in the armature conductors produces an mmf which has the same number of poles as the field structure. The fundamental harmonic of this mmf rotates at synchronous speed, and adds to the field mmf in a vector sense as shown in Fig. 14-38. For generators supplying reactive current to an inductive load, the net effect of the armature reaction is to oppose the field mmf, requiring additional field current to sustain flux.

14_Santoso_Sec14_p0867-0918.indd 896

23/11/17 10:57 AM

Electric Machines: Generators   897 

FIGURE 14-38  Armature reaction (vector analysis of magnetic fields).

The peak value of the space fundamental of armature reaction current for a three-phase machine is

Fa =

34 2 N a Ik p kb ks (14-58) 2π

where I is rms terminal current, Na is the number of series turns per phase, and the winding factors are as defined above. Space harmonic components of armature reaction current can produce losses in the rotor as they turn asynchronously. 14.3.8  Capability Diagram In normal operation, real power is dictated by the prime mover, and reactive power is determined by the real power and by field current. Equations (14-47) and (14-48) are approximate ways of estimating the real and reactive power output of a generator as a function of field current and torque angle. (Eq. 14-59 is provided for additional clarification.) If these are cross-plotted a way of representing the capability of an ac generator emerges as shown in Fig. 14-39. This is called a capability diagram for obvious reasons and four limits are shown.



 E ⋅ sin(δ )   P = 3 ⋅ Vφ ⋅ I A ⋅ cos(θ z ) = 3 ⋅ Vφ  A Xs   (14-59)  3 ⋅ Vφ   ⋅ X S ⋅ I A sin(θ z ) = 3 ⋅ Vφ ⋅ I A sin(θ Z ) Q =   Xs 

1. The field winding limit is generally related to the thermal capability of the field winding and limits the operation of the generator at high reactive power conditions. 2. The armature winding limit is generally related to the thermal capability of the armature winding and is typically a limit on total kVA (kilovoltampere) output of the machine.

14_Santoso_Sec14_p0867-0918.indd 897

23/11/17 10:57 AM

898  SECTION FOURTEEN

Q

Field winding limit

d

Stator winding limit P

Prime mover limit

Stability limit

Stator core end heating limit

FIGURE 14-39  Capability diagram, round-rotor machine.

3. The stability limit is related to torque angles that are nearly at the peak of the torque-angle curve (90° for round-rotor machines). 4. Often, the configuration of magnetic flux is such that, at high reactive power absorption (negative Q), there is axial flux in the core ends, leading to excessive heating and limiting the reactive power that can be absorbed by the machine. Very often the prime-mover power rating is plotted on the capability chart. It is, of course, a line of constant real power. The heating related limits (armature, field, and core end) may be functions of the state of the cooling system of the machine, such as hydrogen pressure. (See Sec. 14.3.12 on cooling.) 14.3.9  Saturation Curves and Excitation Alternating-current generators are usually operated with at least part of the magnetic circuit partially saturated, so that the linear model of machine operation implied by some of the foregoing discussion does not give exactly the right answers. What follows is an approximate way of estimating excitation requirements for an ac generator. It should be noted that numerical methods, employing finite elements, are now available and capable of making even more accurate estimates of machine performance including excitation requirements. Figure 14-40 shows open- and short-circuit characteristic curves for an ac generator. These curves are taken with the generator operating at rated speed. Important curves are 1. The air gap line is the extrapolation of open-circuit voltage versus field current at low levels of field current. 2. The no-load saturation curve is the actual open-circuit voltage versus field current characteristic. 3. The short-circuit saturation curve typically does not show saturation. It represents a measurement of current in the terminals of the generator, with the terminals short-circuited, versus field current. 4. The rated current, zero power factor saturation curve shows voltage at the terminals of the machine versus field current if the machine is operated with rated armature current at zero power factor.

14_Santoso_Sec14_p0867-0918.indd 898

23/11/17 10:57 AM

Electric Machines: Generators   899 

FIGURE 14-40  Typical saturation curves of an ac generator showing graphic determination of Potier reactance (quantities are in per unit values).

where IFG is the field current required to excite the air gap, IFSI is the field current required to compensate for direct-axis armature current, and IFS is the field current required to compensate for saturation. Note that this method does not account for saturation of the quadrature axis. Armature resistance is generally neglected. Addition of the three components of current is shown in Fig. 14-41. In this figure, the field current that compensates for armature reaction is added at the power factor angle q. The current IFS is the current required to compensate for direct axis saturation. IFS is the distance from the air-gap line to the no-load saturation curve at the voltage corresponding to the flux level in the magnetic circuit. This voltage is referred to as the voltage behind Potier reactance. It is estimated as shown in Fig. 14-42. To find the (fictitious) Potier reactance, refer back to Fig. 14-40. Note that for the zero power factor test, all the fluxes are on the direct axis, so they add directly. Two of the current components, IFG and IFSI , are easily determined. The difference between field current for the zero power factor test and the sum of these two currents is IFS. Since this corresponds to the distance between the air-gap line and saturation curve at the voltage behind Potier reactance, it determines that voltage. For the zero power factor test, Iaxp is a vertical line of length xp since Ia = 1. The distance between the saturation curve and air-gap line is the same as IFS at a voltage found by casting a line parallel to the air-gap line from IF - IFSI. This is ab on Fig. 14-40. Then xp corresponds to bc on the same figure.

14_Santoso_Sec14_p0867-0918.indd 899

23/11/17 10:57 AM

900  SECTION FOURTEEN

FIGURE 14-41 ANSI method of calculating load excitation.

FIGURE 14-42  Calculation of voltage behind Potier reactance.

14.3.10  Armature Windings A wide variety of winding types may be used to produce a desired voltage with the desired number of phases and a suitable waveshape. Fractional slot windings, in which the number of slots per pole per phase is not an integer, have coil groups that differ from one another. These can be arranged to produce balanced voltages under circumstances that are beyond the scope of this discussion. At power frequencies (50 or 60 Hz), the skin depth in copper is on the order of 1 cm so that it is usually necessary to subdivide armature conductors into a number of parallel strands. In formwound coils, these strands are usually rectangular to allow for good space factor. To prevent circulating currents between parallel strands, it is necessary to employ transposition to ensure that voltages induced in each strand are approximately the same. Figure 14-43 shows an example winding diagram. For the purposes of this figure, the machine is shown “rolled out flat,” with the dotted lines on either side representing the same azimuthal location. Phase A winding

Slots

Teeth

End turns

Straight section

End turns

Terminals A A A A B B B B C C C C A A A A B B B B C C C C

Upper

C C A A A A B B B B C C C C A A A A B B B B C C

Lower

Slot allocation

FIGURE 14-43  Armature in 24 slots, 5/6 pitch.

14_Santoso_Sec14_p0867-0918.indd 900

23/11/17 10:57 AM

Electric Machines: Generators   901 

In this case, the machine has 24 slots, each with two half-coils, as shown in the slot allocation section of the drawing, at the bottom of the figure. The upper part of the figure shows how one phase of the winding would be laid out. This drawing shows a lap type winding (the most commonly used) with a 5∕6 pitch. In a 24-slot, two-pole winding a full-pitch coil would span 12 slots, while in the 5∕6 pitch winding the coils span 10 slots. Armature cores are built up of thin laminations with thin electrical insulation in between, to reduce the eddy currents. Successive layers or groups of layers are staggered to minimize the effect of the joints in the magnetic circuit. The core is clamped between pressure plates and fingers to support it with sufficient pressure to prevent undue vibration of the laminations. The armature windings are fitted tightly in the slots and secured radially by wedges driven into suitable notches at the air-gap end of the slots. It is necessary that the stator coil ends be able to resist the abnormal forces associated with short circuits. A supporting structure may be employed for this purpose. Coil supports ordinarily are designed to suit the need of a particular machine. The pole pieces of salient-pole alternators may be built up of steel laminations, both as manufacturing convenience and a means of limiting the loss in their air-gap surfaces due to pulsations in airgap flux. The field coils, wound directly on the poles or preformed and then mounted on the poles, are suitably insulated from the poles for the voltages associated with normal and transient operation. The shaft may be integral with the body, as in the case of a forging, or may be bolted to or inserted into the body. The rotor of a round-rotor machine is cylindrical in shape with axial slots provided in its body for the field coils. The body is usually a steel forging with integral shaft ends. The field coils are wound in axial slots in the rotor body, held in place by heavy slot wedges and by retaining rings over the coil ends. Wound filed excitation may be replaced with permanent magnet field excitation. These rotors can have surface mounted PMs (SPM) or interior PMs (IPM) which correspond to the round-rotor and salient-pole machines, respectively. The elimination of the filed windings results in a simpler construction in case of the PM synchronous generators. Although, antifriction bearings are occasionally used on alternators of smaller ratings, the great majority are furnished with oil-lubricated babbitted bearings. For horizontal shafts at small ratings ring-oiled bearings are used, but at higher ratings recirculation of externally cooled oil is used. Two principal types of thrust bearings are used on vertical alternators: the pivoted-shoe type and the spring type. The adjustable pivoted-shoe type, introduced in the United States by Albert Kingsbury, consists of a flat rotating collar or runner of steel or fine-grained cast iron resting on a stationary member consisting of several babbitted segmental shoes pivoted near their center on adjusting screws, which, by changing the elevation of the shoes, can provide equal loading on each. The screws also permit small adjustments in rotor elevation to correct generator and turbine clearances. The bearings are immersed in oil. In operation, a thin, wedge-shaped film of oil is formed between the runner and the shoe. The oil is continuously circulated by the rotation of the runner and is cooled by either radiation or water cooling, usually within the oil bath but occasionally by an external system. Some of the larger bearings are cooled by means of water circulated through tubes embedded below the babbitt surface. The spring-type bearing is inherently self-equalizing; that is, each shoe carries very nearly the same amount of load. A variation of the pivoted-shoe bearing, in which the shoes are supported on a system of interconnected levers, provides the same self-equalizing feature.

14.3.11  Mechanical Construction Generators consist of a rotor, a stator, and those mechanical parts required to hold the machine together and assure proper alignment, cooling, and other aspects of operation. Design criteria for the mechanical aspects of machine construction are based not only on anticipated steady state operation but also on abnormal aspects of operation such as overspeed and short circuits. Essential variations in machine construction are salient pole versus round rotor and horizontal versus vertical shaft. The prime mover determines if the shaft is horizontal or vertical. Most generators driven by steam turbines, gas turbines, or reciprocating engines have horizontal shafts. Larger, low-speed hydraulic

14_Santoso_Sec14_p0867-0918.indd 901

23/11/17 10:57 AM

902  SECTION FOURTEEN

turbines have vertical shafts, while smaller, higher-speed turbines can have shafts that are vertical, horizontal, or even inclined. 14.3.12  Losses and Efficiency Efficiency of a generator is defined as

η=

Pout Pin

≅ 1−

Pdissipation Pin

(14-60)

Dissipation or losses include: Windage and friction includes loss from the bearings, shearing of the air or hydrogen at the rotor surface, mechanical work done on the air or hydrogen that flows through the rotor, and power expended by the cooling fans. This loss is generally not a function of operating point, but it does vary with the pressure of the cooling gas inside the generator. Provided that the cooling gas pressure is kept constant, this loss is usually considered to be independent of load. Core loss is caused by hysteresis and eddy currents in the core laminations. It also includes losses induced in structural parts of the machine that are exposed to stray alternating magnetic flux at no-load conditions. Core loss is a function only of terminal voltage, and it is usually considered to be independent of load. Field loss is ohmic loss caused by field current flowing in the field winding. This loss depends on both the field current and the temperature of the field winding. It thus varies with load. Armature loss is ohmic loss caused by armature current flowing in the armature winding. This loss is defined by the square of the armature current multiplied by the dc resistance of the armature winding, corrected for temperature. This loss varies with load. Stray load loss explains sources of loss not adequately covered by the other categories. It includes eddy current loss in the armature and losses in structural elements exposed to magnetic fields arising from armature current and to those parts of the rotor surface affected by armature leakage fields. Stray loss is generally proportional to the square of armature current and may, with only small error, be expressed as a fraction of armature loss. Dissipation in generators appears as heat which must be removed. This heat appears in the armature conductors, field-winding conductors, stator core, rotor surface, and other structural elements of the machine. Cooling of armature and field conductors may be direct or indirect; the difference is direct contact of the cooling medium with the conductor or contact through electrical insulation. Alternating-current generators may be cooled by air, hydrogen, water, or (very infrequently) oil. In large machines, no matter what the cooling medium, heat is transferred to water in heat exchangers that are located within the machine case. Fans used in electric machines may be of either radial flow or axial flow, and a wide variety of cooling paths are used. Figure 14-44 represents an example of ventilation paths in a cooling system. 14.3.13  Testing of AC Generators Tests are performed on generators to determine the performance characteristics and machine parameters. Field and armature resistances are typically small, so measurements should be made using a 4-wire technique. It is important that resistance be measured at a known temperature so that correction can be made to actual operating temperature. The generator is driven by a motor to rated speed and excitation varied to produce terminal voltage over a range, typically from perhaps 30% to 120% that of rated. Some caution is required

14_Santoso_Sec14_p0867-0918.indd 902

23/11/17 10:57 AM

Electric Machines: Generators   903 

3

1

5

9

10

2 8

11

4

7 6

FIGURE 14-44  Cooling system, combination of gas and water. (1) stator core; (2) water-cooled stator winding; (3) water manifold; (4) water flow; (5) rotor body; (6) radial-flow fan; (7) diffuser; (8) air-gap baffle; (9) gas flow; (10) hydrogen cooler; (11) stator housing. (ABB.)

here, particularly for large machines in which excessive flux can damage the core. Open-circuit losses may be established by open circuit saturation curve if the drive motor is well characterized and input power is measured. Short-circuit saturation curve test is similar to the open-circuit test, except the armature terminals are short-circuited and excitation varied to produce armature current over some convenient range. Windage and friction losses may be inferred from power input at zero excitation. Stray load loss may be estimated as the difference between input power at rated armature current and the sum of friction and windage and armature I2R. For a relatively small generator, the zero power factor saturation curve can be determined by running the machine with its shaft unloaded, driven by a second generator. By adjusting the excitation on the ac generator under test and excitation on the second generator, it is possible to measure the zero power factor saturation curve. For large generators for which this “back-to-back” method is not practical, the zero power factor curve is usually determined by numerical methods. Deceleration may be used for determining losses if the inertia of the machine is known. Since, if the shaft of a machine is unloaded, power dissipated is

Pw = ωm J

dωm d  1 2  =  Jω  dt dt  2 m 

(14-61)

where wm is mechanical speed, deceleration through synchronous speed can give a good measure of dissipation. The test may be run with the machine operating either at open-circuit or short-circuit conditions, or at zero excitation. It is usually run from a slight overspeed. This test can be used to determine an unknown inertia from known losses and observed deceleration. Heat runs are tests performed by operating the generator at some condition until the temperature stabilizes. Heat runs at open-circuit, short-circuit, and zero power factor may be combined to estimate temperature rise in actual operation. In large machines, good estimates of dissipation may be made

14_Santoso_Sec14_p0867-0918.indd 903

23/11/17 10:57 AM

904  SECTION FOURTEEN

by measuring the temperature rise of coolant (e.g., water). This is an alternative or supplement to measuring input power to the drive motor or machine deceleration wm. 14.3.14  Dynamic Models In applying an ac generator to power systems, it is important to understand the dynamic performance of the machine. This subsection describes one way of estimating the dynamic performance of a generator. Voltages, currents, and impedances are often expressed as per unit values, that is, a base for each quantity is assumed and every ordinary variable is compared with that base. Thus, when a machine is operating at its rated condition, both voltage and current magnitude could be said to be “one per unit.” Multiplying voltage and current yields power, while dividing voltage by current yields impedance magnitude, so these can be expressed in per unit terms as well. The general form of the per unit (pu) is shown in Eq. (14-62). pu =



actual (14-62) base

Generally, the base apparent power or total power (Sbase) and the base voltage (Vbase) are specified; all other base values are determined from these two. Typical electrical models of electric machines represent the relationship between voltage and current in the various windings of the machine. Thus, the three-phase windings and the field winding are represented. Important dynamics, however, arise from currents in elements of the rotor surface, the rotor body or amortisseur or damper bars, or some combination of all of these factors. These are typically represented by equivalent windings, too. For the purpose of this discussion, only one additional winding (referred to here as the “damper”) will be included for each axis of the rotor. The analysis begins with normalized variables referred to as the direct and quadrature axes of the machine. The per unit fluxes are





 ψ  d  ψkd   ψ f

  x   d  =  x ad     x ad 

 ψ  q  ψ  kq

x ad x kd x fd

  x = q   x   aq

x ad   id  x fd    ikd  x f   if 

x aq   iq    x kq   ikq 

   (14-63)  

  (14-64)  

where the variables y represent per unit fluxes and i represents per unit currents. Subscripts d and q represent the direct and quadrature axes, respectively, while the subscripts a, k, and f represent the armature, damper, and field. There are only two armature variables here, where, strictly speaking, a third would be required. Ordinarily, the “zero” axis variable can be ignored as under the usually balanced operation of generators current in that winding is zero. The equivalent circuits shown in Fig. 14-45 represent the same flux-current relationship as do Eqs. (14-63) and (14-64), with winding resistances added if xd = xal + xad

(14-65)

xfd = xad + xakd

(14-66)

xkd = xfd + xkdl

(14-67)

14_Santoso_Sec14_p0867-0918.indd 904

23/11/17 10:57 AM

Electric Machines: Generators   905 

FIGURE 14-45  Direct and quadrature-axis equivalent circuits.

xf = xfd + xfl

(14-68)

xq = xal + xaq

(14-69)

xkq = xkql + xaq

(14-70)

The interesting dynamics of the rotor can be described by these two equivalent circuits. The various reactance and resistance parameters of the equivalent circuits of Fig. 14-45 may be calculated from first principles or may be measured. The equivalent circuits of Fig. 14-45 are only approximations to the actual performance of ac generators. In some cases it will be necessary to use higher-order models. Generally these are represented by multiples of the damper winding with different magnitudes and time constants. These are beyond the scope of this discussion. Voltages are produced by time variations of fluxes and by rotation of the machine. Translated into per unit measurement the voltages are

υd =

1 dψd ω − ψ + r i (14-71) ω0 dt ω0 q a d



υq =

ω 1 dψq ψd + + raiq (14-72) ω0 ω0 dt



υf =

1 dω f + rf i f ω0 dt

(14-73)



υkd =

1 dψkd + rkd ikd ω0 dt

(14-74)

14_Santoso_Sec14_p0867-0918.indd 905

23/11/17 10:57 AM

906  SECTION FOURTEEN



υkq =



υ0 =

1 dψkq + rkqikq ω0 dt 1 dψ0 + rai0 ω0 dt

(14-75) (14-76)

These expressions may be turned into a concise simulation model, suitable for use in modern computing apparatus for estimating the performance of an ac generator. This is simply done by isolating the first-order time derivatives. The state variables are the two stator fluxes yd , yq , two “damper” fluxes ykd , ykq , field yf , and rotor speed w and torque angle d. The most straightforward way of stating the model employs currents as auxiliary variables  i  d  ikd   i f



  x   d  =  x ad     x ad 

 i  q  i  kq



x ad x kd x fd

  x = q   x   aq

−1 x ad   ψd   x fd     ψkd   xf   ψf  

−1 x aq   ψq    x kq   ψkq  

   (14-77)  

  (14-78)  

Then the state equations are dψd = ω0υd + ωψq − ω0raid (14-79) dt



dψq



dt

= ω0υq − ωψd − ω0raiq (14-80) dψkd = −ω0rkd ikd (14-81) dt



dψkq



dt dψ f



dt

= −ω0rkqikq (14-82) = −ω0r f i f (14-83)



dω ω0 = (T + T ) (14-84) dt 2 H e m



dδ = ω − ω0 (14-85) dt

and Te = ψd iq − ψqid (14-86)



For a practical simulation, vd, vq, and mechanical torque Tm must be specified.

14_Santoso_Sec14_p0867-0918.indd 906

23/11/17 10:57 AM

Electric Machines: Generators   907 

It should be clear from examining the equivalent circuits of Fig. 14-45 that the behavior of the machine, meaning its flux/current relationship, is a function of the speed of any given disturbance. This leads to approximate analyses of ac generators, which recognize the frequency dependence of the rotor elements. Synchronous reactances xd and xq are applicable when the rotor is moving in synchronism with the mmf produced by the armature currents, or when the deviation in speed is very small. Transient reactance xd′ is applicable when armature mmf is changing with time, as in electromechanical transients or “swings.” This effective reactance is reduced by the tendency of (nearly) shortcircuited field winding to trap or hold flux nearly constant for periods comparable to or shorter than its time constant. This reactance is xd′ ≈ xal + xad || (xfd + xfl) (14-87) In some types of generators there may be an identifiable transient reactance on the quadrature axis, less than the quadrature-axis synchronous reactance, but in others the applicable reactance to use for the quadrature axis in transient events is just xq. For transient events that occur very rapidly, such as switching events and terminal short circuits, the effective reactances are the subtransient reactances. These result from the tendency of the amortisseurs (or even rotor iron) to support or trap flux. They are

xd″ = xal + xad || (xakd + xkdl || xfl)    xd″ = xal + xaq |xkql (14-88)

The foregoing reactances are applicable when the armature mmf and rotor are rotating in synchronism or nearly so. The negative-sequence reactance x2 is applicable with an armature mmf rotating backward at synchronous speed while the rotor is rotating forward. Negative-sequence currents arise from certain types of unbalanced operation. The negative-sequence reactance is approximately the average of subtransient reactances x2 = ½(xd″ + xq′)

(14-89)

Zero-sequence reactance is applicable to situations in which all three phases of the armature have identical currents such as would arise from a ground fault. Such currents do not produce substantial air-gap flux, and even some of the components of armature leakage are reduced, so the zero-sequence inductance is quite small. Torque-angle curves for operation of a synchronous generator may be written for both the synchronous and transient mode of operation. In per unit, these torque-angle curves are for the steady state case

te =

eaf xd

sin δ +

1   1 − sin2δ (14-90) x  x  q d 

sin δ +

1   1 − sin2δ (14-91) x  x d′   q

and for the transient case

te =

eq′ x d′

where d is the torque angle, eaf is the internal voltage, and e′q is the voltage behind transient reactance, and the terminal voltage is one per unit. The relationship between power, which is directly proportional to torque, and displacement (power) angle is shown in Fig. 14-46. Note that the torque-angle curve for transient operation has a higher peak torque, although the two curves coincide at the steady-state operating point. Disturbances from steady-state operation due to changes in prime mover torque, load changes, or faults cause load angle to change, usually with dynamic swings as described in this subsection. Generally, the most serious transient swing results from complete loss of load as from a nearby short-circuit. Under such a circumstance the generator, under the influence of prime mover torque,

14_Santoso_Sec14_p0867-0918.indd 907

23/11/17 10:57 AM

908  SECTION FOURTEEN

FIGURE 14-46  Torque-angle curves, steady state, and transient.

accelerates. The torque angle increases quadratically with time. Even after the power output is restored, the machine will swing forward until load torque stops its advance. A simple approximate way of estimating the maximum angle achieved is to use the equal-area criterion. The area of a disturbance is related to energy contributed to rotation, and for every (stable) situation the positive and negative areas must balance. Pictured in Fig. 14-46 is a “critical” swing. The area underneath the prime mover torque curve from d0 to dc is the area that would be contributed if all load torque were zero during a period of acceleration between those two angles. If the area above the prime-mover torque between dc and df is equal to or greater than this first area, the machine will regain synchronous operation. This establishes a critical angle. In turn, the critical clearing time tc is established by

δc − δ0 =



1 ω0 2 t (14-92) 2 2H c

If an ac generator is operated open-circuited at rated terminal voltage and then its terminals are suddenly short-circuited, the following currents flow in the terminal leads:  eaf  eaf eaf  − (t /Td′ ) ia =  + − +  e  x d  x d′ x d 

eaf  eaf eaf  − (t /T ′′)  d  cos(ω t – θ ) − cos θ 0 e − (t /Ta )  x ′′ − x ′  e 0 x ′′  d   d d 

 e  eaf eaf  e e    2π  eaf 2π –(t /Ta )  af  e −(t /Td′ ) +  af − af  e −(t /Td′′)  cos ωt − θ 0 − ib =  +  − cos θ 0 − e −     ′′ ′′ ′ x x 3 x 3   x d  x d′ x d   d d  d   e  eaf eaf  e e    2π  eaf 2π –(t /Ta )  af  e −(t /Td′ ) +  af − af  e −(t /Td′′)  cos ωt − θ 0 + ic =  +  − cos θ 0 + e −     ′′ ′′ ′ x x 3 x 3   x d  x d′ x d   d d  d  These currents are shown in Fig. 14-47.

14_Santoso_Sec14_p0867-0918.indd 908

23/11/17 10:57 AM

Electric Machines: Generators   909 

FIGURE 14-47  Three-phase (symmetric) fault.

14.3.15  Special AC Generators Permanent Magnet Synchronous Generators.  In recent years, permanent magnet synchronous (PMSG) generators have gained popularity, especially due to developments in magnetic materials and power electronics, which made possible new designs with high efficiency and compact dimensions. The construction and operation of PMSG is similar to that of ac synchronous machines, which have been previously discussed, with a main difference in the rotor field excitation that is provided by permanent magnets (PM), as illustrated in Fig. 14-48. A variety of designs is possible for PMSG rotors, including SPM, interior permanent magnet (IPM), and other topologies, as discussed in Sec. 15. Relatively low per-unit inductance and high back emf may be preferable for generator applications in order to ensure a high power factor. Such a requirement typically favors the SPM designs of the type shown in Fig. 14-48, in which the equivalent electromagnetic air gap is substantially larger as it includes the mechanical air gap and the magnet thickness. Large size and power PMSG typically employ a stator with multiple slots per pole and phase and distributed windings. In this case, short pitching the winding may result in improved performance. For example, a winding with a short pitch of 5/6, which can be implemented with a core design having two slots per pole and phase by employing a two layer arrangement with some of the slots shared by coil sides belonging to different phases, reduces the 5th and 7th order harmonics, resulting in a more sinusoidal back emf waveform, reduced 6th order harmonic torque pulsations (ripple), and lower rotor losses.

14_Santoso_Sec14_p0867-0918.indd 909

23/11/17 10:57 AM

910  SECTION FOURTEEN

Stator core PMs Rotor core Shaft

Coils

FIGURE 14-48 Cross-sectional view of a permanent magnet synchronous generator (PMSG). In this example, the rotor includes six magnets (PM) of alternating polarity attached to the surface of the rotor core facing the air gap. The stator has a core with slots in which a threephase six-pole winding with distributed coils is placed.

Smaller PMSG may employ fractional slot stator designs, for example for three-phase machines, with three slots for each pole pair, such as 9 slots 6 pole or 12 slots 8 pole combinations, or with the total number of slots equal to plus or minus 2, or plus or minus 1, the number of (rotor) poles. Such example combinations include 9 slots and 6 poles, 9 slots and 8 poles, and 12 slots and 10 poles. The concentrated coils only span one tooth pitch and are not overlapping with other phase coils resulting in compact end turns. Fractional slot concentrated windings may be of the single layer type, in which only alternate teeth are wound, or of the double layer type, with all teeth wound. The latter present lower fundamental winding factors, but have smaller end turns. As compared with distributed winding designs, concentrated winding machines, may result in copper weight saving and possibly lower copper losses, but they have larger mmf harmonics potentially leading to increased core losses and torque pulsations. Furthermore, the increased leakage reactance may be disadvantageous for generators. Applications for relatively low power PMSG include, among others, portable generation systems and small hydro. The use of damper bars in the rotors of PMSG employed in such distributed energy generation applications may improve stability. Latest generations of wind turbines, electric traction systems, and distributed generation applications benefit of the PMSG advantages in terms of increased efficiency and specific power density. Because the PM magnetization is basically fixed, specific controls are required in order to ensure functionality, as discussed in the following. Wind Turbine Generators Including PMSG, Induction, and Doubly Fed Induction Types.  In variable-speed wind turbines, typically for multi-MW utility applications, PMSG or electromagnetically excited synchronous generators employ a power electronics system with two back to back ac/dc and dc/ac converters connected via a dc link (Fig. 14-49). Power electronics is required in order to interface the variable voltage at the generator terminals, which is caused by the changes in wind speed, with the fixed grid frequency and voltage. A similar approach can be employed in conjunction with squirrel cage rotor induction generators. The drive system includes multiple control loops.

14_Santoso_Sec14_p0867-0918.indd 910

23/11/17 10:57 AM

Electric Machines: Generators   911 

Rotor field oriented control maybe used for the generator and the active current reference is derived from the speed loop. The reactive component of current is maintained at zero for PMSG, and derived from the rotor flux reference for an induction machine. The grid side and the generator side controllers cooperate to maintain the dc bus voltage at the required level, to ensure synchronization with the grid and deliver active and reactive power. Wind generators may include a gearbox or be directly coupled to the turbine rotor. Both configurations have their advantages and limitations. In the configuration that has been proven over the years, a gearbox is included in order to increase the rated speed of the generator and hence reduce the torque and size of the electrical machine, resulting in a drive system with components of comparable dimensions. In direct drive arrangements, the gearbox is eliminated, the number of components is reduced leading to potential reliability improvements and reduced maintenance costs. As the rotor and generator speed are very low in this case, the torque is extremely high, resulting in electric machines of very large dimensions with outer diameters in the order of meters for multi-MW power output. In order to maintain the generator frequency to reasonable levels the machine design employs very high number of poles. Both electromagnetically excited and PMSG have been implemented in direct drive wind turbines. Apart from the conventional radial flux configuration, the axial flux type has been proposed for wind turbine generators. In such a configuration, the rotor and the stator are substantially disk shaped, are placed to face each other axially. One advantage is that the area available for torque production is proportional to the square of the diameter, unlike in radial flux machines, where it is proportional only to the diameter. Axial flux generators may be realized in a single stator single rotor configuration, or may use a dual stator single rotor, or dual rotor single stator design. In variable wind turbine systems, such as the one illustrated in Fig. 14-49, the power electronics ensures full energy conversion and has the same rating as the generator. Reduced rating for the electronics can be achieved by employing a doubly fed induction generator (DFIG), in which case an ac-ac bidirectional converter is only connected to the rotor electric circuit, as shown in Fig. 14.50, and typically rated to only a quarter to a third of the generator power, depending on the maximum speed range. The ac/ac converter maybe implemented through two back-back ac-dc and dc-ac converters, respectively. Other solutions, such a direct ac-ac matrix converter without a stiff dc link are also possible, in principle. The stator is directly connected to the grid. Historically, this solution has been advantageous in terms of reduced cost for the power electronics, but more recently its applicability was limited due to new grid code requirements for reactive

Gearbox Synch/ Asynch Rotor blades

ωr

i sabc

Generator-side converter

Grid-side converter

AC/DC

DC/AC

v sabc

VDC

PWM

Grid Filter

PWM iabc vabc

Turbine angle

Control

P*grid and Q*grid V*DC

FIGURE 14-49  Schematic of a variable speed wind turbine drive and power conversion system, including back-to-back power electronic converters and associated controls. PMSG or squirrel-cage rotor induction generators maybe employed. Direct drive implementations do not use a gearbox.

14_Santoso_Sec14_p0867-0918.indd 911

23/11/17 10:58 AM

912  SECTION FOURTEEN

Bidirectional AC/AC Slip static converter rings Brushes

Transformer

DFIG

FIGURE 14-50  Schematic of a wind turbine employing a DFIG. The power electronic converter from the rotor side is rated for partial power, smaller than that of the generator. The bi-directional ac/ac converter may consist of two back-back ac-dc and dc-ac converters, respectively.

power capability and reactive power, which are better met with full conversion power electronic systems. A DFIG generator is generally controlled by orienting along the stator field. The grid side converter is controlled by orienting along the grid voltage, in order to maintain the dc bus voltage and provide the required reactive power. The DFIG may operate at sub-synchronous speeds, such that mechanical speed, wm, is lower than the synchronous speed, w1, and the stator produces and the rotor absorbs electrical power. During super-synchronous operation, both the stator and the rotor deliver electrical power output (Fig. 14-51). In order to address the maintenance and reliability issues associated with the use of slip rings, brushless doubly fed machines have been proposed. Typical designs of this kind include two independent sets of windings in the stator, each with a different number of poles, and with one winding connected to the grid and the other, “control” winding, connected to a partially rated power electronics inverter. The rotor has a special construction that may incorporate a nested variable reluctance structure with flux barriers or slots and rotor bars with specific end connections. As an interesting operational feature, if the “control” winding is dc supplied, the machine operates similarly to a wound rotor synchronous machine, and, if this winding if short-circuited, the machine operates similar to a cage rotor induction machine. Such machines typically have a low power factor, a disadvantage that offsets their benefits and limits widespread application. For small wind turbines, that do not require full variable speed operation, simple induction generators with shunt and series capacitors for self-excitation, and without power electronics converters may also be used. In terms of recent research for multi-MW wind turbines, multiphase generators, for example with nine phases, have been proposed as they may have advantages, such as smaller ratings of the power electronic switches equipment due to lower current per phase, and better fault tolerance and high redundancy. Superconducting generators with stationary dc field coils have been considered as a longer-term solution, especially for the extremely large wind turbines for offshore installations. Other Special Electric Generators.  In critical standby, remote and distributed generation applications with power ratings up to the MW range, the electric generator is a subsystem of a generator set (gen set), which includes a prime mover, such as a diesel engine, and associated switched gear and electronic controls. The synchronous electric generator system shown in Fig. 14-52 is a low voltage 2.5 MW unit that incorporates three separate electric machines on the same shaft, that is the main generator (on the right side of the figure) providing the output power, an exciter to power the rotor field winding of the main generator, and a small auxiliary PMSG used to power an electronic regulator for the control the output voltage and other system characteristics.

14_Santoso_Sec14_p0867-0918.indd 912

23/11/17 10:58 AM

Electric Machines: Generators   913 

Rotor electric Power input Pr Pm input Mechanical power

ωm = ω1 – ω2, ωm > ω1 ω2 < 0

Pm =

oP

losses

Rotor electric Power input Ps Stator electric power f1 = constant Vs = constant

+ Ps – Pr

Pr

Pm input Mechanical power

ωm = ω1 – ω2, ωm > ω1 ω2 < 0

Pm =

oP

losses

Ps Stator electric power f1 = constant Vs = constant

+ Ps + Pr

FIGURE 14-51  Power flow in the sub-synchronous (left) and super-synchronous modes of operation for a DFIG.

FIGURE 14-52  Rendering of an example low voltage 2.5 MW electromagnetically excited field wound salient-pole synchronous generator, incorporating on the same shaft the main generator, an exciter, and a small auxiliary PMSG. (Courtesy of Regal Beloit Corp.)

Claw pole generators are widely used in automotive applications in order to produce electrical energy on-board. Such a machine includes a stator with a multi-phase winding and a rotor with a core that is typically made of cast steel and specially shaped to include claws surrounding a circular coil (Fig. 14-53). When supplied with dc current, through slip rings and brushes, the rotor coil produces a magnetic field, which is directed by the claws into a multi-pole radial air-gap field. Typically, these generators have stators with one or two slots per pole per phase and 12, or up to 18, poles. The three-phase ac stator output is converted to dc for on-board battery connection using a full bridge diode rectifier. The robust and rather inexpensive construction have maintained the claw pole generator as a popular solution in the automotive industry. Variations of this topology include stationary dc windings and additional magnets in the rotor.

14_Santoso_Sec14_p0867-0918.indd 913

24/11/17 4:13 PM

914  SECTION FOURTEEN

Coil

Shaft

Stator core Claw poles

Field coil FIGURE 14-53 Example claw pole synchronous generator with three-phase stator winding and 12 poles. Each of the rotor “claws” attached to one rotor disk has the same polarity.

Drive trains for electric traction as, for example, those for hybrid electric vehicles require the electric machines to operate in motoring and generating modes, or employ separate electric motors and generators. During regenerative braking, energy is generated and stored in the battery leading to an increase in system efficiency, especially in urban driving cycles. These machines are typically of the radial flux type and are coupled to gearboxes. In-wheel direct drive machines employing, for example, axial flux PM topologies, such as the one depicted in Fig. 14-54 are also possible.

Stator core

Coil

PMs Rotor core

FIGURE 14-54 Example of an axial flux PM motor/ generator used for in-wheel electric traction applications, such as racing solar cars. During regenerative braking, the machine operates like a generator and the energy generated is stored in a battery.

14_Santoso_Sec14_p0867-0918.indd 914

23/11/17 10:58 AM

Electric Machines: Generators   915 

14.4 BIBLIOGRAPHY Alerich, W. N. and Keljik, J., Electricity 4: DC Motors & Generators, Albany, NY: Delmar, 2001. Alerich, W. N., Electricity 3: DC Motors & Generators, Controls, Transformers, Albany, NY: Delmar, 1981. Avallone, E. A., Baumeister III, T., and Sedegh, A., Marks’ Electronic Standard Handbook for Mechanical Engineers, New York: McGraw-Hill, 2006. Bapat, Circulating Current Losses in Electric Machines and Measures to Reduce Them (title translated); Techn. Mitt. AEG-TELEFUNKEN 63, 1973. Bartheld, R., Organizational Structure of IEC TC2, Conference Proceedings, IEEE Winter Power Meeting, New York, 1999. Berrong, D. B., McCown, W. R., Winnie, P. D., and Montgomery, L. W., Designing Central Station Turbine Generators for the Year 2000 and Beyond, CIGRE Session, 1998. Blalock, G. C., Direct-Current Machinery, New York: McGraw-Hill, 1947. Bloch, H. P., A Practical Guide to Steam Turbine Technology, New York: McGraw-Hill, 1996. Block, Heinz P. and Murari Singh, 2008. www.amazon.com. Boldea, I., Synchronous Generators. CRC Press, 2015. Boldea, I., Variable Speed Generators, CRC Press, 2nd edition, 2015. Boyse, M. P., Gas Turbine Engineering Handbook, 4th ed., Burlington, MA: Elsevier, Inc, 2011. Carlin, P. W., Laxson, A. S., and Muljadi, E. B., “The History and State of the Art of Variable-Speed Wind Turbine Technology,” NREL Technical Report, Feb., 2001. Chalmers, B. J. and Spooner, E., “An Axial-Flux Permanent-Magnet Generator for a Gearless Wind Energy System,” in IEEE Transactions on Energy Conversion, vol. 14, no. 2, pp. 251–257, Jun. 1999. Chapman, S. J., Electric Machinery Fundamentals, 4th ed., New York: McGraw-Hill, 2005. Chapman, S. J., Electric Machinery Fundamentals, New York: McGraw-Hill, 1998. Clayton, A. E., The Performance and Design of Direct Current Machines, A Textbook for Students at Universities and Technical Schools, London: Pitman, 1947. Clayton, A. E., The Performance and Design of Direct Current Machines, London: Pitman, 1959. Detinko, F. M., Cooper, G. D., and Montgomery, L. W., Mechanical Design of a New Hydrogen Inner-Cooled Modular Generator Line, International Joint Power Generation Conference and Exposition, October 1992. Drinkut, S. A. and Hurley, J. D., AC Generators and Generator Protection, Section 4.1, Standard Handbook of Power Plant Engineering, 2nd ed., New York: McGraw-Hill, 1997. Elliott, T. C., Chen, K., and Swanskamp, R., Standard Handbook of Powerplant Engineering, New York: McGraw-Hill, 1998. Emery, F. T. and Weddleton, R. F., Latest Advances Associated with Insulation Systems of High Voltage Stator Coils, IEEE Symposium on Electrical Insulation, June 1996. Emery, F. T., The Application of Conductive and Stress Grading Tapes to Vacuum Pressure Impregnated, High Voltage Stator Coils, IEEE Electrical Insulation Magazine, July/August, 1996. Fitzgerald, A. E., Kingsley, C., Jr., and Umans, S. D., Electric Machinery, New York: McGraw-Hill, 1990. Gott, B. E. B., Advances in Turbogenerator Technology, IEEE Electrical Insulation Magazine, July/August, 1996. Gott, B. E. B., McCown, W. R., Montgomery, L. W., and Michalec, J. R., Implications of Differences between the ANSI C50 Series and the IEC 60034 Series Standards for Large Cylindrical Rotor Synchronous Machines, Panel Discussion IEEE-PES Summer Meeting, Berlin, Germany, July 1997. Gott, B. E. B., McCown, W. R., Montgomery, L. W., and Michalec, J. R., Implications of Differences between the ANSI C50 Series and the IEC 34 Series Standards for Large Cylindrical Rotor Synchronous Machines, IEEE PES Panel Session on Harmonizing, Berlin, Germany, 1997. Gott, B. E. B., McCown, W. R., Montgomery, L. W., and Michalec, J. R., Progress in Revision of IEEE/ANSI C50 Series of Standards for Large Steam and Combustion Turbine Generators and Harmonization with the IEC 34 Series, International Conference on Electric Machines and Drives, Boston, MA, June 2001. Gott, B. E. B., McCown, W. R., Montgomery, L. W., and Michalec, J. R., Update of Revision of ANSI C50 Series of Standards for Large Synchronous Machinery and Harmonization with IEC 34 Series, Conference Proceedings, IEEE Winter Power Meeting, New York, 1999. Granicher, W., Air Cooled Turbogenerators up to 240 MVA, Proceedings of the American Power Conference, vol. 52, 1990.

14_Santoso_Sec14_p0867-0918.indd 915

23/11/17 10:58 AM

916  SECTION FOURTEEN

Haase, H., Largadier, H., and Suter, J., Air Cooled Turbogenerators in the 200 MVA Class, Brown Boveri Review, vol. 73, March 1986. Haldemann, J., Transpositions in Stator Bars of Large Turbogenerators, IEEE Transactions on Energy Conversion, vol. 19, no. 3, Sept. 2004. Heller, S., Direct Current Motors and Generators: Repairing, Rewinding, and Redesigning, New Canaan, CT, Datarule, 1982. Hubert, C. I., Electric Machines: Theory, Operating Applications, and Controls, 2nd ed., Upper Saddle River, NJ: Prentice Hall, 2002. Intichar, L. and Kulig, T. S., Development of Turbogenerators in Recent Years and in the Future, pp. 136–141, vol. 1, Proceedings of International Conference on the Evolution and Modern Aspects of Synchronous Machines, August 1991. Jovanovic, M. G., Betz, R. E., and Jian, Yu, “The use of doubly fed reluctance machines for large pumps and wind turbines,” in IEEE Transactions on Industry Applications, vol. 38, no. 6, pp. 1508–1516, Nov/Dec 2002. Kaminski, C. A., Panel Discussion of Issues Related to Harmonization of Standards for Electrical Machines, Panel Discussion, IEEE-PES Winter Meeting, New York, 1999. Kiameh, P., Power Generation Handbook, New York: McGraw-Hill, 2003. Kloeffer, R. G., Brenneman, J. L., and Kerchner, R. M., Direct Current Machinery, New York: Macmillan, 1950. Kurihara, K., “Effects of Damper Bars on Steady-State and Transient Performance of Interior Permanent-Magnet Synchronous Generators,” in IEEE Transactions on Industry Applications, vol. 49, no. 1, pp. 42–49, Jan.-Feb. 2013. Kurtz, M. and Stone, G. C., In-service Partial Discharge Testing of Generator Insulation, IEEE Transactions on Electrical Insulation, vol. EI-14, no. 2, Apr. 1979. Liu, X., Lin, H., Zhu, Z. Q., Yang, C., Fang, S., and Guo, J., “A Novel Dual-Stator Hybrid Excited Synchronous Wind Generator,” in IEEE Transactions on Industry Applications, vol. 45, no. 3, pp. 947–953, May-Jun., 2009. Liu, Y., Noe, M., and Doppelbauer, M., “Feasibility Study of a Superconducting DC Direct-Drive Wind Generator,” in IEEE Transactions on Applied Superconductivity, vol. 26, no. 4, pp. 1–6, June 2016. Langsdorf, A. S., Principles of Direct-Current Machines, New York, London: McGraw-Hill, 1940. Lister, E. C., and Rusch, R. J., Electric Circuits and Machines, New York: McGraw-Hill, 1993. Liwschitz-Garik, M., Direct-Current Machines, Princeton, NJ: Van Nostrand, 1956. McCown, W. R., Winnie, P. D., and Montgomery, L. W., Trends in Electric Generator Development, American Power Conference, vol. 59, 1997. Muller, S., Deicke, M., and De Doncker, R. W., “Doubly Fed Induction Generator Systems for Wind Turbines,” in IEEE Industry Applications Magazine, vol. 8, no. 3, pp. 26–33, May/Jun 2002. Nelson, R. J. and Montgomery, L. W., Electrical Design of a Modular Line of Two Pole Hydrogen Inner-Cooled Generators, American Power Conference, vol. 54, 1992. Nelson, R. J., Drinkut, S. A., and Gregory, M. D., ANSI vs. IEC Standards for Turbine Generators, Proceedings of the American Power Conference, vol. 54, 1992. Nilsson, N. E., Report on the Working Group to Revise ANSI C50.41, Conference Proceedings, IEEE,Winter Power Meeting, New York, 1999. Nippes, P. I., and Nilsson, N. E., International Harmonization of Standards Detailed Report, IEEE Transactions on Energy Conversion, vol. 14, no. 4, pp. 1318–1322, December 1999. Nippes, P. I., and Nilsson, N. E., International Harmonization of Standards, IEEE IEMDC’97, 1997. Nippes, P. I., IEC-US Standards Comparison by the IEEE-PES-EMC Task Force on Standards Harmonization, February 27, 1997. Polinder, H., Ferreira, J. A., Jensen, B. B., Abrahamsen, A. B., Atallah, K., and McMahon, R. A., “Trends in Wind Turbine Generator Systems,” in IEEE Journal of Emerging and Selected Topics in Power Electronics, vol. 1, no. 3, pp. 174–185, Sept. 2013. Potgieter, J. H. J. and Kamper, M. J., “Double PM-Rotor, Toothed, Toroidal-Winding Wind Generator: A Comparison With Conventional Winding Direct-Drive PM Wind Generators Over a Wide Power Range,” in IEEE Transactions on Industry Applications, vol. 52, no. 4, pp. 2881–2891, Jul.-Aug. 2016. Prieto-Araujo, E., Junyent-Ferré, A., Lavèrnia-Ferrer, D., and Gomis-Bellmunt, O., “Decentralized Control of a Nine-Phase Permanent Magnet Generator for Offshore Wind Turbines,” in IEEE Transactions on Energy Conversion, vol. 30, no. 3, pp. 1103–1112, Sept. 2015.

14_Santoso_Sec14_p0867-0918.indd 916

23/11/17 10:58 AM

Electric Machines: Generators   917 

Protsenko, K. and Xu, D., “Modeling and Control of Brushless Doubly-Fed Induction Generators in Wind Energy Applications,” in IEEE Transactions on Power Electronics, vol. 23, no. 3, pp. 1191–1197, May 2008. Rebhi, R., Ibala, A. and Masmoudi, A., “MEC-Based Sizing of a Hybrid-Excited Claw Pole Alternator,” in IEEE Transactions on Industry Applications, vol. 51, no. 1, pp. 211–223, Jan.-Feb. 2015. Rieger, K., D-C Generators and Motors. Scranton, PA, International Correspondence Schools, 1968. Ringland, W. L. and Rosenberg, L. T., A New Stator Coil Transposition for Large Machines, AIEE Transactions, 1959. Ruelle, G., Guillard, J. M., Bennett, R., and Jackson, R., Development of Large Air Cooled Generators for Gas Turbines and Combined Cycles, Paper 11-201, CIGRE Session, 1992. Sedlazeck, K., Adelmann, W., et al., Influence of Customer’s Specifications Upon Design Features of the EPR Turbogenerator, CIGRE Session, 2002. Shlyakhin, P., Steam Turbines: Theory and Design, Honolulu, HI: University Press of the Pacific, 2005. Siskind, C. S., Direct-Current Machinery, New York: McGraw-Hill, 1952. Stephan, C., Baer, J., Zimmerman, H., Neidhofer, G., and Egli, R., New Air-cooled Turbogenerator in the 300 MVA Class, ABB Review, Jan. 1996. Soong, W. L., Kahourzade, S., Liaw, C. Z., and Lillington, P., “Interior PM Generator for Portable AC Generator Sets,” in IEEE Transactions on Industry Applications, vol. 52, no. 2, pp. 1340–1349, Mar.-Apr. 2016. Williamson, S. and Ferreira, A. C., “Generalised theory of the brushless doubly-fed machine. 2. Model verification and performance,” in IEE Proceedings—Electric Power Applications, vol. 144, no. 2, pp. 123–129, Mar 1997. Williamson, S., Ferreira, A. C. and Wallace, A. K., “Generalised theory of the brushless doubly-fed machine. I. Analysis,” in IEE Proceedings—Electric Power Applications, vol. 144, no. 2, pp. 111–122, Mar. 1997. Woodruff, E. B., Lammars, H. B., and Lammars, T. F., Steam Plant Operation, New York: McGraw-Hill, 2005. Woods, E. J., Standards Harmonization: What Next, Conference Proceedings of the IEEE Winter Power Meeting, New York, 1999. Young, E. L., D-C Machines, Scranton, PA, International Correspondence Schools, 1975. (Based on material provided by Scott Hancock; rev. by E. L. Young.)

ANSI C42.10, Definitions of Electrical Terms. ANSI C50.22, Recommended Guide for Testing Insulation Resistance of Rotating Machinery. IEC 60034-1, Rotating Electrical Machines, Ratings and Performance. IEC 60034-2, Rotating Electrical Machines—Methods for Determining Losses and Efficiency from Tests (excluding machines for traction vehicles). IEC 60034-3, Rotating Electrical Machines—Specific Requirements for Cylindrical Rotor Synchronous Machines. IEC 60034-4, Rotating Electrical Machines—Methods for Determining Synchronous Machine Quantities from Test. IEC 60034-18, Functional Evaluation of Insulating Systems (various parts). IEC 62114, Electrical Insulation Systems (EIS)—Thermal Classification. IEEE C50.12, Standard for Salient-Pole 50 and 60 Hz Synchronous Generators and Generator/Motors for Hydraulic Turbine Applications Rated 5 MVA and Above. IEEE C50.13, Standard for Cylindrical-Rotor 50 and 60 Hz Synchronous Generators Rated 10 MVA and Above. IEEE 115, Test Procedures for Synchronous Machines. IEEE Std. 286-2000, Recommended Practice for Measurement of Power Factor Tip-Up of Electric Machinery Stator Coil Insulation. IEEE 1110, Guide for Synchronous Generator Modelling Practices and Applications in Power System Stability Analyses.

14_Santoso_Sec14_p0867-0918.indd 917

23/11/17 10:58 AM

This page intentionally left blank

14_Santoso_Sec14_p0867-0918.indd 918

23/11/17 10:58 AM

15

ELECTRIC MACHINES: MOTORS AND DRIVES Dan M. Ionel Professor and L. Stanley Pigman Chair in Power, Department of Electrical and Computer Engineering, University of Kentucky, Lexington, Kentucky

Om P. Malik Professor Emeritus, Department of Electrical and Computer Engineering, University of Calgary, Calgary, Alberta, Canada

Vandana Rallabandi Research Engineer, Department of Electrical and Computer Engineering, University of Kentucky, Lexington, Kentucky

Narges Taran Research Engineer, Department of Electrical and Computer Engineering, University of Kentucky, Lexington, Kentucky



15.1 GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 920 15.2 DC MOTORS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 921 15.2.1 Classification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 921 15.2.2 DC Motor Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 924 15.2.3 Basic Speed Control Methods. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 926 15.3 INDUCTION MACHINES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 926 15.3.1 Theory of the Polyphase Induction Motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 926 15.3.2 Construction and Manufacturing of Induction Motors . . . . . . . . . . . 933 15.3.3 Testing of Polyphase Induction Machines. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 933 15.3.4 Characteristics of Polyphase Induction Motors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 935 15.3.5 Single-Phase Induction Motors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 937 15.3.6 Induction Motor Online Starting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 940 15.4 SYNCHRONOUS MOTORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 940 15.4.1 Basics of Synchronous Motor Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 940 15.4.2 Synchronous Motor Online Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 944 15.5 BASIC METHODS OF SPEED CONTROL. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 946 15.5.1 Primary Voltage Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 946 15.5.2 Speed Control of Slip Ring Induction Motors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 947 15.6 VARIABLE SPEED DRIVES WITH POWER ELECTRONICS. . . . . . . . . . . . 948 15.6.1 DC Drives. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 948 15.6.2 AC Drives—Three-Phase Inverters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 948

919

15_Santoso_Sec15_p0919-0960.indd 919

21/11/17 6:53 PM

920  SECTION FIFTEEN



15.7 SPEED CONTROL OF AC MOTORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 950 15.7.1 Stability and Dynamics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 950 15.7.2 Scalar Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 950 15.7.3 Vector Control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 951 15.7.4 Direct Torque Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 951 15.8 ELECTRONICALLY OPERATED MOTORS OF THE PERMANENT MAGNET AND RELUCTANCE TYPE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 952 15.8.1 Permanent Magnet Synchronous Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 952 15.8.2 Brushless DC Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 953 15.8.3 Switched Reluctance Motors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 954 15.8.4 Synchronous Reluctance Motors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 956 15.9 OTHER SPECIAL MOTORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 956 15.10 AC COMMUTATOR MOTORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 957 15.11 MOTOR-PROTECTING DEVICES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 958 15.12 BIBLIOGRAPHY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 959 15.12.1 Books and Publications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 959 15.12.2 Websites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 960

15.1 GENERAL Types of Electric Motors.  Electric motors provide motive power to a wide variety of domestic and industrial machinery. Successful motor application depends on selecting a type of motor which satisfies the kinetic starting, running, and stopping requirements of the driven machinery. There are several methods of classifying electric motors. Based on the electric power supply, motors are classified as direct current (DC) and alternating current (AC) motors. Figure 15-1 shows further classification of ac and dc motors based upon the stator and rotor construction. NEMA classification according to the variability of speed includes constant-speed motors such as ac synchronous motors; induction motors with low, medium, or high slip; dc shunt-wound motors; varying-speed motors such as dc series motors or repulsion motors; and variable-speed motors such as dc shunt-, series-, and compound-wound motors.

FIGURE 15-1  Classification of ac and dc motors.

15_Santoso_Sec15_p0919-0960.indd 920

21/11/17 6:53 PM

Electric Machines: Motors And Drives   921 

15.2  DC MOTORS DC motors are used in a wide variety of industrial applications because of the ease with which the speed can be controlled. The speed-torque characteristic may be varied to almost any useful form. Continuous operation over a speed range of 8:1 is possible. While ac motors tend to stall, dc motors can deliver over 5 times the rated torque (power supply permitting). 15.2.1 Classification Permanent magnet motors are available in fractional horsepower ratings, while wound-field dc motors are classified as (1) shunt motor, in which the field winding is connected in parallel with the armature; (2) series motor, in which the field winding is connected in series with the armature; and (3) compound motor, which has a series-field and shunt-field winding. The construction of dc motors with a wound field is practically identical to that of dc generators; with minor adjustment, the same dc machine may be operated either as a dc generator or as a motor. Permanent magnet dc motors have fields supplied by permanent magnets that create two or more poles in the armature by passing magnetic flux through it. The magnetic flux causes the current-carrying armature conductors to create a torque. This flux remains basically constant at all motor speeds—the speed-torque and current-torque curves are linear. Shunt Motors.  DC shunt motors are suitable for application where almost constant speed is needed at any control setting or where appreciable speed range (by field control) is needed. The field circuit connection is shown in Fig. 15-2a.

FIGURE 15-2  Field circuit connections of dc motor.

Since a motor armature revolves in a magnetic field, an emf is generated in the conductors which is opposed to the direction of the current and is called the counter emf. The applied emf must be large enough to overcome the counter emf and also to send the armature current Ia through Rm, the resistance of the armature winding, commutator, and the brushes; or

Ea = Eb + Ia Rm

volts (15-1)

where Ea is applied emf and Eb is counter emf. Since the counter emf at zero speed, that is, at starting, is identically zero and since normally the armature resistance is small, it is obvious in view of Eq. (15-1) that, unless measures are taken to reduce the applied voltage, excessive current will circulate in the motor during starting. Normally, starting devices consisting of variable series resistors are used to limit the starting current of motors. The torque of a motor is proportional to the number of conductors on the armature, the current per conductor, and the total flux in the machine. The formula for torque is Torque = 0.1592 Zφ Ia

15_Santoso_Sec15_p0919-0960.indd 921

poles Nm (15-2) paths

21/11/17 6:53 PM

922  SECTION FIFTEEN

where Z is the total number of armature conductors, f is the total flux per pole in webers, and Ia is the armature current in amperes taken from the line.

Eb = Ea – Ia Rm = Zφ

or Speed = 60

r/min poles 60 paths

volts (15-3)

Ea − Ia Rm paths (15-4) Zφ poles

For a given motor, the number of armature conductors Z, the number of poles, and the number of armature paths are constant. The torque can therefore be expressed as

Torque = constant × φ Ia (15-5)

and the speed, likewise, is expressed as

Speed = constant × ( Ea – Ia Rm )/φ (15-6) In the case of the shunt motor, Ea, Rm, and f are constant, and the speed and torque curves are shown as curves 1 (Fig. 15-3); the effective torque is less than that generated by the torque required for the windage and the bearing and brush friction. The drop in speed from no load to full load seldom exceeds 5%; indeed, since f, the flux per pole, decreases with increase of load, owing to armature reaction, the speed may remain approximately constant up to full load.

Speed and Torque of Series Motors.  Equations (15-5) and (15-6) apply to motors of all continuous-current types. In the case of series motors, the flux f increases with the armature current Ia; the torque would be proportional to Ia2 were it not that the magnetic circuit becomes saturated with increase of current. Since f increases with load, the speed drops as the load increases. The speed and torque characteristics are shown in curves 3 (Fig. 15-3). If the load on a series motor becomes small, the speed becomes very high, so that a series motor should always be geared or direct-connected to the load. If it were belted and the belt were to break, the motor would run away FIGURE 15-3  Motor characteristics. and would probably burst. For a given load, and therefore for a given current, the speed of a series motor can be increased by shunting the series winding or by short-circuiting some of the series turns so as to reduce the flux. The speed can be decreased by inserting resistance in series with the armature. Compound Motors.  Compound motor connections are shown in Fig. 15-2c. As it has both the shunt and series connected field windings, characteristics of the compound motor are a compromise between the shunt and the series motors. By adjusting the direction of flow of current in the series field winding, the flux produced by the series field can assist (cumulative compounding) or oppose (differential compounding) the flux produced by the shunt field winding. In cumulative compounding, the series winding, which assists the shunt winding, the flux per pole increases with the load, so that the torque increases more rapidly and the speed decreases more rapidly than if the series winding were not connected. However, the motor cannot run away under light loads,

15_Santoso_Sec15_p0919-0960.indd 922

21/11/17 6:53 PM

Electric Machines: Motors And Drives   923 

because of the shunt excitation. The speed and torque characteristics for such a machine are shown in curves 2 (Fig. 15-3). The speed of a compound motor can be adjusted by armature and field rheostats, just as in the shunt machine. Power Supplies.  Power supplies to dc motors may be batteries, a dc generator, or rectifiers. The permanent-magnet and miniature motors use battery power supplies. Large integral-horsepower dc motors such as rolling-mill motors use dc generators as the power supply. Most fractionalhorsepower and integral-horsepower dc motors operate with rectifier power supplies. Permanent-Magnet DC Motors.  Permanent-magnet (PM) motors are available in fractional and low integral-horsepower sizes. They have several advantages over field-wound types. Excitation power supplies and associated wiring are not needed. Reliability is improved, since there are no exciting field coils to fail, and there is no likelihood of overspeed due to loss of field. Efficiency and cooling are improved by elimination of power loss in an exciting field, and the torque-versus-current characteristic is more nearly linear. Finally a PM motor may be used where a totally enclosed motor is required for a continuous-excitation duty cycle. Temperature effects depend on the kind of magnet material used. Integral-horsepower motors with Alnico-type magnets are affected less by temperature than those with ceramic magnets because flux is constant. Ceramic magnets ordinarily used in fractional-horsepower motors have characteristics that vary about as much with temperature as do the shunt fields of excited machines. Disadvantages are the absence of field control and special speed-torque characteristics. Overloads may cause partial demagnetization that changes motor speed and torque characteristics until magnetization is fully restored. Generally, an integral-horsepower PM motor is somewhat larger and more expensive than an equivalent shunt-wound motor, but total system cost may be less. A PM motor is a compromise between compound-wound and series-wound motors. It has better starting torque, but approximately half the no-load speed of a series motor. In applications where compound motors are traditionally used, the PM motor could be considered where slightly higher efficiency and greater overload capacity are needed. In series-motor applications, cost consideration may influence the decision to switch. Power Supplies.  Power supplies to dc motors may be batteries, a dc generator, or rectifiers. The PM and miniature motors use battery power supplies. Large integral-horsepower dc motors such as rolling-mill motors use dc generators as the power supply. Most fractional-horsepower and integralhorsepower dc motors operate with rectifier power supplies. Losses and Efficiency.  Power losses in dc motors are due to bearing friction, brush friction, windage, eddy currents and hysteresis in the armature core and pole faces, brush contact-drop, I2R losses in the armature, commutator, and field windings, and stray load losses. Typical values of total losses in industrial motors are 4% to 10% of the output. The bearing friction and brush friction losses are proportional to the speed of the motor, while the windage loss is proportional to the square of the speed. Eddy current loss in the armature teeth and in the armature core is proportional to the square of the speed and to the square of the air-gap flux density. Hysteresis loss in the armature teeth and core is proportional to the speed and the square of the flux density in the air gap. Brush contact drop is typically 1 V per brush arm for carbon-graphite brushes and 0.25 V for metal-graphite. Stray load losses are due to eddy currents in armature conductors, brush short-circuit losses in the commutator, and additional core loss arising from distortion of the magnetic field due to armature reaction. The efficiency of the dc motor is defined as

η = (input electric power − losses)/input power × 100% (15-7)

Typically efficiency of dc machines are provided in Fig. 15-4.

15_Santoso_Sec15_p0919-0960.indd 923

21/11/17 6:53 PM

924  SECTION FIFTEEN

FIGURE 15-4  Typical efficiency curves of dc machines.

15.2.2  DC Motor Starting Direct-current motors of small capacity may be started by connecting the motor directly to line voltage. Motors rated 2 hp or more generally require a reduced-voltage starter. The reduced voltage for starting is obtained by using resistance in series with the motor armature or by varying the armature supply voltage. Manual or magnetic control may be used. DC motors in adjustable-voltage, adjustable-speed drives are started by turning the speed control up from zero to the desired speed, or by internal circuits that ramp the armature voltage to the desired value. Starting equipment, other than the armature-voltage rectifier or generator, is not required. Direct-current manual starters are satisfactory for applications that do not require frequent starting and stopping and where the starter can be mounted near the operator without requiring long motor leads. Across-the-line starters provide the simplest means of starting small dc motors. Manually operated switches for this service are available in sizes up to 1.5 hp at 115 V and 2 hp at 230 V. For larger motors resistance is connected in series with the motor armature to limit the current inrush on starting. A manually operated means is then provided for removing the resistor from the circuit in a series of steps. Starters are available in the faceplate type, the multiple-switch type, and the drum type. The faceplate type is built for motors up to 35 hp, 115 V, and 50 hp, 230 V. It consists of a movable lever and a series of stationary contact segments to which sections of resistor are connected. The resistor sections are short-circuited one at a time by moving the lever across the segments. Manual starters have generally been replaced by push-button-operated magnetic control that incorporates overload protection and other safety features. Direct-current magnetic starters are used for applications where case and convenience of operation are important; where the starter is operated frequently; where the motor is located at a distance from the operator; where automatic control by means of a pressure switch, limit switch, or similar device is desired; and for large motors which require the switching of heavy currents. Resistance is connected in series with the motor armature to limit the initial current and is then short-circuited in one or more steps. For larger motors a series of magnetic contactors is used, each of which cuts out a step of armature resistance. The magnetic contactors are operated as the motor starts by one of two methods called current-line acceleration and time-limit acceleration; the starting time is always matched to the burden of the load. Time-limit acceleration is advantageous where the starting time of the motor must be integrated into a timing sequence for an overall machine or process. Examples of each will be given.

15_Santoso_Sec15_p0919-0960.indd 924

21/11/17 6:53 PM

Electric Machines: Motors And Drives   925 

Figure 15-5 shows a type of time-limit acceleration where the operation of contactors, and therefore the rate of acceleration, is governed by a magnetically operated definite time relay. This time relay operates on the principle of discharging a capacitor, thus obtaining a definite time period, which is unaffected by changes in temperature and load or by dust and dirt. With the motor at rest, a circuit is obtained through a normally closed contact on M to energize the CT timing-delay coil and to charge capacitor C1. Contacts CT1 and CT2 on relay CT are open with the relay energized. Capacitor C2 is charged through the normally closed contact on the 2A contactor. Pressing the “start” button energizes the main contactor M, which maintains itself through a normally open interlock finger. Relay FA is energized, and its contact FA1 short-circuits the field rheostat. The FIGURE 15-5  Time-limit acceleration motor accelerates from rest to a speed determined by with definite-time relay. the value of the R1-R3 resistor. The circuit to timing relay CT is opened by the interlock on M, and capacitor C1 discharges through the CT coil and the AB resistor. Contacts CT1 and CT2 can be individually adjusted to close at any time during the capacitor discharge period. Closing CT1 energizes the 1A contactor, which short-circuits the R1-R2 resistor. The motor then accelerates to a speed determined by the value of the R2-R3 resistor step. Closing CT2 energizes 2A and connects the motor across the line, permitting it to accelerate to normal speed. Relay FA is deenergized when 2A closes. Contacts FA1 and FA2 remain closed for a definite time because of the discharge of capacitor C2 through the FA relay coil. When contact FA1 opens, a resistance is inserted in the motor shunt field, equivalent to the field-rheostat resistance and XY resistance in parallel. Opening FA2 disconnects XY, and the motor runs at a speed determined by the setting of the field rheostat. Direct-current starters with current-limit acceleration are designed to half the starting operation whenever the required starting current exceeds an adjustable predetermined value, the starting operation being resumed when the current falls below this limit. With current-limit acceleration, the time required to accelerate will depend entirely upon the load. When the load is light, the motor will accelerate rapidly, and when it is heavy, the motor will require a longer time to accelerate. For this reason a current-limit starter is not so satisfactory as a time-limit starter for drives having varying loads. Time-limit starters are simpler in construction, accelerate a motor with lower current peaks, use less power during acceleration, and always accelerate the motor in the same time regardless of variations in load. Current-limit starters are desirable for motors driving high-inertia loads. A typical current-limit starter is shown in Fig. 15-6. The relays SR1-SR2 have normally closed contacts connected in series with the coils of the accelerating contactors. The coils of these relays are connected in the main motor circuit. The FIGURE 15-6 Direct-current seriesrelays are provided with an adjustment so they can be set to relay accelerations. close on a selected value of current. Pressing the “run” button energizes the main contactor M, which closes and connects the motor to the line in series with the R1-R3 resistor. Motor current will flow through the SR1 coil, and its contacts will open rapidly and prevent 1A from closing. When the motor has accelerated enough to bring the line current down to the value for which SR1 is set, the relay contacts will close; a circuit is then provided for 1A, which closes, cutting out the first step of resistance and short-circuiting the SR1 oil. Current now flows through the SR2 coil and the 1A contacts. SR2 relay contacts open and prevent 2A from being energized. The motor accelerates again, and when the current falls to the value for which SR2 is set, its contacts close, energizing 2A and connecting the motor across the line.

15_Santoso_Sec15_p0919-0960.indd 925

21/11/17 6:53 PM

926  SECTION FIFTEEN

Magnetic controllers for large dc motors are manufactured in forms to suit the application. The controllers are available in the following forms: (1) nonreversing, without and with dynamic braking; (2) nonreversing with speed regulation by field control, without and with dynamic braking; and (3) reversing with dynamic braking, without and with speed regulation by field control. 15.2.3  Basic Speed Control Methods Speed of a dc motor is controlled either by varying the voltage across the armature, the field winding, or both. Series-parallel combinations are an effective means of reducing armature voltage and motor speed. This method is applied in cam-controlled traction motors. Two identical motors are connected in parallel or in series. When in parallel, full voltage is applied across each motor, causing it to run at base speed. When in series, the motor speeds are essentially one-half of base speed. Field-series resistance in shunt motors weakens the field, which causes the motors to run above the base speed. Speed range as high as 8:1 may be obtained in special motors. Armature-series resistance used with shunt or series motors produces motor speed below the base speed. In the series motor the field winding is also affected by the armature-series resistance, producing greater effect on the speed-torque characteristic than for the shunt motor where the field is constant. Speed control by this method is usually limited to approximately 50% of the base speed. The above-speed control method results in power losses in the external resistors.

15.3  INDUCTION MACHINES 15.3.1  Theory of the Polyphase Induction Motor Principle of Operation.  An induction motor is simply an electric transformer whose magnetic circuit is separated by an air gap into two relatively movable portions, one carrying the primary and the other the secondary winding. Alternating current flowing in the primary winding, when an alternating voltage is applied from an electric power system, induces a voltage in the secondary and an opposing current flows in the secondary winding when the latter is short-circuited or closed through an external impedance. Relative motion between the primary and secondary structures is produced by the electromagnetic forces corresponding to the power thus transferred across the air gap by induction. The essential feature that distinguishes the induction machine from other types of electric motors is that the secondary currents are created solely by induction, as in a transformer, instead of being supplied by a dc exciter or other external power source, as in synchronous and dc machines. Induction motors are classified as squirrel-cage motors and wound-rotor motors. The secondary windings on the rotors of squirrel-cage motors are assembled from conductor bars short-circuited by end rings or are cast in place from a conductive alloy. The secondary windings of wound-rotor motors are wound with discrete conductors with the same number of poles as the primary winding on the stator. The rotor windings are terminated on slip rings on the motor shaft. The windings can be short-circuited externally by the brushes bearing on the slip rings, or they can be connected to resistors or solid-state converters for starting and speed control. Construction Features.  The normal structure of an induction motor consists of a cylindrical rotor carrying the secondary winding in slots on its outer periphery and an encircling annular core of laminated steel carrying the primary winding in slots on its inner periphery. The primary winding is commonly arranged for 3-phase power supply, with three sets of exactly similar multipolar coil groups spaced one-third of a pole pitch apart. The superposition of the three stationary, but alternating, magnetic fields produced by the 3-phase windings produces a sinusoidally distributed magnetic field revolving in synchronism with the power-supply frequency, the time of travel of the field crest from 1-phase winding to the next being fixed by the time interval between the reaching of their crest values by the corresponding phase currents. The direction of rotation is fixed by the time sequence of the currents in successive phase belts and so may be reversed by reversing the connections of one phase of a 2- or 3-phase motor.

15_Santoso_Sec15_p0919-0960.indd 926

21/11/17 6:53 PM

Electric Machines: Motors And Drives   927 

Figure 15-7 shows the cross section of a typical polyphase induction motor, having in this case a 3-phase 4-pole primary winding with 36 stator and 28 rotor slots. The primary winding is composed of 36 identical coils, each spanning 8 teeth, one less than the 9 teeth in one pole pitch. The winding is, therefore, said to have 8⁄9 pitch. As there are three primary slots per pole per phase, phase A comprises four equally spaced “phase belts,” each consisting of three consecutive coils connected in series. Owing to the short pitch, the top and bottom coil sides of each phase overlap the next phase on either side. The rotor, or secondary, winding consists merely of 28 identical copper or cast-aluminum bars solidly connected to conducting end rings on each end, thus forming a “squirrelcage” structure. Both rotor and stator cores are usually built on silicon-steel laminations, with partly closed slots, to obtain the greatest possible peripheral area for carrying magnetic flux across the air gap.

FIGURE 15-7  Section of squirrel-cage induction motor, 3-phase, 4-pole, 8/9-pitch stator winding.

The Revolving Field.  The key to understanding the induction motor is a thorough comprehension of the revolving magnetic field. The rectangular wave in Fig. 15-8 represents the mmf, or field distribution, produced by a single full-pitch coil, carrying H At. The air gap between stator and rotor is assumed to be uniform, and the effects of slot openings are neglected. To calculate the resultant field produced by the entire winding, it is most convenient to analyze the field of each single coil into its space-harmonic components, as indicated in Fig. 15-8 or expressed by the following equation:

H (x ) =

 4H  1 1 1  sin x + sin3x + sin5 x + sin7 x + (15-8)  3 5 7 π 

When two such fields produced by coils in adjacent slots are superposed, the two fundamental sine-wave components will be displaced by the slot angle q, the third-harmonic components by the angle 3q, the fifth harmonics by the angle 5q, etc. Thus, the higher spaceharmonic components in the resultant field are relatively much reduced as compared with the fundamental. By this effect of distributing the winding in several slots for each phase belt, and because of the further reductions due to fractional pitch and to phase connections, the space-harmonic fields in a normal motor are reduced to negligible values, leaving only the fundamental sine wave components to be considered in determining the operatFIGURE 15-8 Magnetic field proing characteristics. The alternating current flowing in the winding of duced by a single coil. each phase, therefore, produces a sine-wave distribution of magnetic flux around the periphery, stationary in space but varying sinusoidally in time in synchronism with the supply frequencies. Referring to Fig. 15-9, the field of phase A at an angular

15_Santoso_Sec15_p0919-0960.indd 927

21/11/17 6:53 PM

928  SECTION FIFTEEN

distance x from the phase axis may be represented as an alternating phasor I cos x cos wt but may equally well be considered as the resultant of two phasors constant in magnitude but revolving in opposite directions at synchronous speed: FIGURE 15-9 Resolution of alternating wave into two constant-magnitude waves revolving in opposite directions.

I I cos x cos ω t = [cos( x – ω t ) + cos( x + ω t )] (15-9) 2

Each of the right-hand terms in this equation represents a sine-wave field revolving at the uniform rate of one pole pitch, or 180 electrical degrees, in the time of each half cycle of the supply frequency. The synchronous speed Ns of a motor is therefore given by

Ns =

120 f P

r/min (15-10)

where f is the line frequency in hertz and P is the number of poles of the winding. Considering phase A alone (Fig. 15-10), two revolving fields will coincide along the phase center line at the instant its current is a maximum. One-third of a cycle later, each will have traveled 120 electrical degrees, one forward and the other backward, the former lining up with the axis of phase B and the latter with the axis of phase C. But at this moment, the current in phase B is a maximum, so that the forward-revolving B field coincides with the forward A field, and these two continue to revolve together. The backward B field is 240° behind the backward A FIGURE 15-10  Resolution of alternating emf of field, and these two remain at this angle, as they continue to revolve. After another third each phase into oppositely revolving constant-magnitude components shown at instant when phase A current is of a cycle, the forward A and B fields will reach the phase C axis, at the same moment zero (wt = 90°). that phase C current becomes a maximum. Hence, the forward fields of all three phases are directly additive, and together they create a constantmagnitude sine-wave-shaped synchronously revolving field with a crest value 1.5 times the maximum instantaneous value of the alternating field due to one phase alone. The backward-revolving fields of the three phases are separated by 120°, and their resultant is therefore zero so long as the 3-phase currents are balanced in both magnitude and phase. If a 2-phase motor is considered, it will have two 90° phase belts per pole instead of three 60° phase belts, and a similar analysis shows that it will have a forward-revolving constant-magnitude field with a crest value equal to the peak value of one phase alone and will have zero backwardrevolving fundamental field. A single-phase motor will have equal forward and backward fields and so will have no tendency to start unless one of the fields is suppressed or modified in some way. While the space-harmonic-field components are usually negligible in standard motors, it is important to the designer to recognize that there will always be residual harmonic-field values which may cause torque irregularities and extra losses if they are not minimized by an adequate number of slots and correct winding distribution. An analysis similar to that given for the fundamental field shows that in all cases the harmonic fields corresponding to the number of primary slots (seventh and nineteenth in a nine-slot-per-pole motor) are important and that the fifth and seventh harmonics on 3-phase, or third and fifth on 2-phase, may also be important.

15_Santoso_Sec15_p0919-0960.indd 928

21/11/17 6:54 PM

Electric Machines: Motors And Drives   929 

The third-harmonic fields and all multiples of the third are zero in a 3-phase motor, since the mmf’s of the three phases are 120° apart for both backward and forward components of all of them. Finally, therefore, a 3-phase motor has the following distinct fields: 1. The fundamental field with P poles revolving forward at speed Ns. 2. A fifth-harmonic field with 5P poles revolving backward at speed Ns/5. 3. A seventh-harmonic field with 7P poles revolving forward at speed Ns/7. 4. Similar thirteenth, nineteenth, twenty-fifth, etc., forward-revolving and eleventh, seventeenth, twenty-third, etc., backward-revolving harmonic fields. Figure 15-11 shows a test speed-torque curve obtained on a 2-phase squirrel-cage induction motor with straight (unspiraled) slots. The torque dips due to three of the forward-revolving fields are clearly indicated. Torque, Slip, and Rotor Impedance.  When the rotor is stationary, the revolving magnetic field cuts the short-circuited secondary conductors at synchronous speed and induces in them linefrequency voltage and currents flow. To supply the secondary IR voltage drop, there must be a component of voltage in time phase with the secondFIGURE 15-11  Speed-torque curve of 2-phase ary current, and the secondary current, therefore, motor showing harmonic torque. must lag in space position behind the revolving airgap field. A torque is then produced corresponding to the product of the air-gap field by the secondary current times the sine of the angle of their space-phase displacement. At standstill, the secondary current is equal to the air-gap voltage divided by the secondary impedance at line frequency, or I2 =



E2 E2 = (15-11) Z 2 R2 + jX 2

where R2 is the effective secondary resistance and X2 is the secondary leakage reactance at primary frequency. The speed at which the magnetic field cuts the secondary conductors is equal to the difference between the synchronous speed and the actual rotor speed. The ratio of the speed of the field relative to the rotor to synchronous speed is called the slip s s=

Ns – N Ns

N = (1– s )N s (15-12)

or

where N is the actual and Ns is the synchronous rotor speed. As the rotor speeds up, with a given air-gap field, the secondary induced voltage and frequency both decrease in proportion to s. Thus, the secondary voltage becomes sE2, and the secondary impedance R2 + jsX2, or

15_Santoso_Sec15_p0919-0960.indd 929

I2 =

sE2 E2 (15-13) = R2 + jsX 2 ( R2 /s ) + jX 2

21/11/17 6:54 PM

930  SECTION FIFTEEN

The only way that the primary is affected by a change in the rotor speed, therefore, is that the secondary resistance as viewed from the primary varies inversely with the slip. Analysis of Induction Motors.  Induction motors can be analyzed by equivalent circuit. Other methods such as circle diagram can also be used with less accuracy for detailed calculations and design. That is why this subsection focuses on analysis based on equivalent circuit. Figure 15-12 shows the polyphase motor circuit usually employed for accurate work. Some advantages of using this circuit for analysis are that it facilitates the derivation of simple formulas, charts, or computer programs for calculating torque, power factor, and other motor characteristics and that it enables impedance changes due to saturation or multiple squirrel cages to be readily taken into account. Formulas for calculating the constants from test data are given in Table 15-1, and their definitions are given in Table 15-2. Inspection of the circuit reveals several simple relationships which are useful for estimating purposes. The FIGURE 15-12 Equivalent circuit of maximum current occurs at standstill and is somewhat less than E0 /X. Maximum torque occurs when s = R2 /X, polyphase induction motor. approximately, at which point the current is roughly 70% of the standstill current. Hence, the maximum torque is approximately equal to E2/2X. This gives the basic rule that the percent maximum torque of a low-slip polyphase motor at a constant impressed voltage is about half the percent starting current. By choosing the value of R2, the slip at which maximum torque occurs can be fixed at any desired value. The maximum-torque value itself is affected, not by changes in R2, but only by changes in X and to a slight degree by changes in XM. The magnetizing reactance XM is usually 8 or more times as great as X, while R1 and R2 are usually much smaller than X, except in the case of special motors designed for frequent-starting service. The equivalent circuit of Fig. 15-12 shows that the total power Pg1 transferred across the air gap from the stator is Pg1 = mI 22



R2 (15-14) s

TABLE 15-1  Formulas for Calculating Circuit Constants from Test Data for 3-Phase Motors X=

f ft

V2  W  –    (see text) 3I 2  3I 2 

X1 = X2 = 0.5X for single squirrel-cage or wound-rotor motors X1 = 0.4X and X2 = 0.6X for low-starting-current motors WH + WF = WRL - 3IM2 R1  (see text) Ws  (see text) E X M = 0 – X1 IM

15_Santoso_Sec15_p0919-0960.indd 930

21/11/17 6:54 PM

Electric Machines: Motors And Drives   931 

TABLE 15-2  Definitions of Equivalent-Circuit Constants Unless otherwise noted, all quantities except watts, torque, and power output are per phase for 2-phase motors and per phase Y for 3-phase motors: E0 = impressed voltage (volts) = line voltage ÷ √3 for 3-phase motors I1 = primary current (amperes) I2 = secondary current in primary terms (amperes) IM = magnetizing current (amperes) R1 = primary resistance (ohms) R2 = secondary resistance in primary terms (ohms) R0 = resistance at primary terminals (ohms) X1 = primary leakage reactance (ohms) X2 = secondary leakage reactance referred to primary (ohms) X = X1 + X2 X0 = reactance at primary terminals (ohms) XM = magnetizing reactance (ohms) Z1 = primary impedance (ohms) Z2 = secondary impedance in primary terms (ohms) Z0 = impedance at primary terminals (ohms) Z = combined with secondary and magnetizing impedance in parallel (ohms) s = slip (expressed as a fraction of synchronous speed) N = synchronous speed (revolutions per minute) m = number of phases f = rated frequency (hertz) ft = frequency used in locked-rotor test T = torque (foot-pounds) W0 = watts input WH = hysteresis and eddy current core loss (watts) WF = friction and windage (watts) WRL = running light watts input Ws = stray-load loss (watts)

The total rotor copper loss is evidently

Rotor copper loss = mI 22 R2 (15-15)

The internal mechanical power P developed by the motor is therefore R2 − mI 22 R2 s 1− s = mI 22 R2 (15-16) s = (1 − s )Pg 1

P = Pg 1 − rotor copper loss = mI 22

We see, then, that of the total power delivered to the rotor, the fraction 1 - s is converted to mechanical power and the fraction s is dissipated as rotor-circuit copper loss. The internal mechanical power per stator phase is equal to the power absorbed by the resistance R2 (1 - s)/s. The internal electromagnetic torque T corresponding to the internal power P can be obtained by recalling that mechanical power equals torque times angular velocity. Thus, when ws is the synchronous angular velocity in mechanical radians per second

15_Santoso_Sec15_p0919-0960.indd 931

P = (1 − s )ω sT (15-17)

21/11/17 6:54 PM

932  SECTION FIFTEEN

FIGURE 15-13  Induction-motor equivalent circuit simplified by Thévenin’s theorem.

with T in newton-meters. By use of Eq. (15-16) T=



R 1 mI 22 2 (15-18) s ωs

Torque and Power.  Considerable simplification results from application of Thévenin’s network theorem to the induction-motor equivalent circuit. Thévenin’s theorem permits the replacement of any network of linear circuit elements and constant phasor voltage sources, as viewed from two terminals by a single phasor voltage source E in series with a single impedance Z. The voltage E is that appearing across terminals a and b of the original network when these terminals are open-circuited; the impedance Z is that viewed from the same terminals when all voltage sources within the network are short-circuited. For application to the induction-motor equivalent circuit, points a and b are taken as those so designated in Fig. 15-12. The equivalent circuit then assumes the forms given in Fig. 15-13. So far as phenomena to the right of points a and b are concerned, the circuits of Figs. 15-12 and 15-13 are identical when the voltage V1a and the impedance R1 + jX1 have the proper values. According to Thévenin’s theorem, the equivalent source voltage V1a is the voltage that would appear across terminals a and b of Fig. 15-12 with the rotor circuits open and is

V1a = E0 – I0 ( R1 + jX1 ) = E0

jX M (15-19) R1 + jX11

where IM is the zero-load exciting current and X11 = X1 + X M



is the self-reactance of the stator per phase and very nearly equals the reactive component of the zero-load motor impedance. For most induction motors, negligible error results from neglecting the stator resistance in Eq. (15-19). The Thévenin equivalent stator impedance R1 + jX1 is the impedance between terminals a and b of Fig. 15-12, viewed toward the source with the source voltage shortcircuited, and therefore is

R1 + jX1 = R1 + jX1

in parallel with jX M

From the Thévenin equivalent circuit (Fig. 15-13) and the torque expression [Eq. (15-18)], it can be seen that

15_Santoso_Sec15_p0919-0960.indd 932

T=

1 ωs

mV12a ( R2 /s ) (15-20) ( R1 + R2 /s )2 + ( X1 + X 2 )2

21/11/17 6:54 PM

Electric Machines: Motors And Drives   933 

The slip at maximum torque, smax T , is obtained by differentiating Eq. (15-20) with respect to s and equating to zero: smax T =

R2 R12 + ( X1 + X 2 )2

The corresponding maximum torque is Tmax =

0.5mV12a 1 ω s R + R 2 + ( X + X )2 1 1 1 2

15.3.2  Construction and Manufacturing of Induction Motors A typical construction of NEMA frame squirrel motors is illustrated in an exploded view in Fig. 15-14, showing the main components: stator frame and wound core, rotor core with squirrel cage, incorporating end rings, shaft, bearings, end-frames, terminal box, fan and fan cover. The stator and rotor cores are manufactured from thin laminations of silicon steel or cold rolled FIGURE 15-14  Exploded view of a NEMA frame motor laminated steel. The rotor and stator squirrel-cage induction motor illustrating the main compolaminations are stamped one by one with nents: stator frame and wound core, rotor core with squirrel a progressive die and a press. The high- cage, incorporating end rings, shaft, bearings, end-frames, productivity process punches the rotor lam- terminal box, fan and fan cover. (Image courtesy of Regal inations inside the stator laminations and Beloit Corporation.) separates them through a single cut. After assembling the rotor core and die casting an aluminum cage through the rotor slots, machining is performed on the outer rotor surface in order to ensure the small air-gap required for induction motors. Stator coils are form of random wound from conductive, copper or aluminum, wire with electric insulation and inserted in the stator core. Electric insulation is also provided in between the coils and the core, to the top of the slot, and in between the phases. End coils are compacted electrical connections in between the coils and the terminals and the winding is finally impregnated according to the insulation scheme. Construction and manufacturing are similar to those employed for other types of ac electric machines, such as those incorporating permanent magnets, which are inserted or attached to the rotor and magnetized. The construction is assembled within a frame and end-frames are attached in order to close the structure and support the shaft and bearings that enable rotation and the transmission of motoring torque. 15.3.3  Testing of Polyphase Induction Machines Proof of guaranteed performance, the determination of torque or efficiency of driven machines, and the evaluation of design changes are some of the purposes that require accurate tests of induction machines. Normally, running-light, locked-rotor, resistance, and dielectric tests only are made on standard motors. Input-output tests or segregated-loss tests are made when accurate efficiency determination is required. The inconvenience of making input-output tests and the inaccuracies inherent in any method which determines the losses as a small difference between two large quantities make the segregated-loss methods of test preferable in many cases. Such tests are especially necessary when actual performance under the varying conditions of service is to be determined from a limited number of factory or laboratory test runs. Experience has shown that the equivalent-circuit

15_Santoso_Sec15_p0919-0960.indd 933

21/11/17 6:54 PM

934  SECTION FIFTEEN

method of calculation enables accurate predictions of efficiency and other performance data to be made, provided the circuit “constants” are determined in advance by careful tests. Running Light Test.  The motor is run at no load with normal frequency and voltage applied, until the watts input becomes constant. On slip-ring motors, the brushes are short-circuited. Readings of amperes and watts are taken at one or more values of impressed voltage, with rated frequency maintained. Accurately balanced phase voltages and a sine-wave form of voltage are necessary for good results, requiring operation of the test alternator and transformers well below magnetic saturation. The watts input at rated voltage will be the sum of the friction and windage, core loss, and no-load primary I2R loss. The motor impedance per phase is determined from the volts, amperes, and watts readings. The total resistance component for a 3-phase motor is

R=

W Ω/phase Y (15-21) 3I 2

and the reactance component is

X=

V2 − R 2 Ω/phase Y (15-22) 3I 2

where W is the watts input, I is the line current, and V is the voltage between lines. Normally, the primary and secondary leakage-reactance values X1 and X2 are assumed equal, each having the value X/2. Locked-Rotor Test.  The rotor is locked so it cannot rotate; a reduced voltage of rated frequency is applied to the terminals; and readings of volts, watts, and amperes are taken. Readings should be taken quickly, and the temperature of the windings should be observed before and after the test to minimize errors due to changing resistance values. Slip Test.  Whenever feasible, a current-slip curve should be taken under actual load conditions, with rated voltage and frequency maintained at the motor terminals. Measurements at a few points in the neighborhood of full-load current are usually sufficient; but for slip-ring motors a wider range should be covered, owing to the variable resistance and should, therefore, be measured with a slip meter or stroboscopically. The slip-meter method makes use of a revolution counter differentially geared to the motor under test and to a small synchronous motor driven from the same power supply at the same synchronous speed. Care must be taken to correct the observed values of slip for the difference between the test temperature and the standard value of 75°C or the temperature attained in a full-load heat run with an ambient temperature of 25°C. In practice, the value of current corresponding to an assumed value of Rs2/s is calculated exactly by the equivalent circuit; the corresponding value of s is read off the slip-current curve; and the true value of R2 is obtained by multiplying R2/s by this value of s. However, R2 may be approximately determined as follows: Very roughly, the secondary resistance is equal to

R2 = K

E⋅s approx ⋅ Ω/phase (15-23) I1

where E is the terminal voltage per phase, s is the ratio of revolutions per minute of slip to synchronous speed, and I1 is the observed phase current. The coefficient K varies over a range of about 1 to 1.2, depending on the motor characteristics and the value of the test load. In case direct slip measurements are not practicable, the value of R2 determined by Eq. (15-21) in a low-frequency locked-rotor test may be used. Or, in the case of a wound rotor, the actual resistance between slip rings may be measured and multiplied by the square of the ratio of primary to secondary

15_Santoso_Sec15_p0919-0960.indd 934

21/11/17 6:54 PM

Electric Machines: Motors And Drives   935 

volts to obtain the resistance referred to primary. The voltage ratio is obtained by measurement of primary and secondary voltages at standstill with the slip rings open-circuited. Averages of several rotor positions are taken to avoid errors due to possible unbalance. Stray-Load Loss Tests.  Stray-load losses, Ws, are defined as the excess of the total measured losses above the sum of the friction and windage, core, and copper losses calculated for the conditions of load from the no-load tests described above. These extra losses are made up chiefly of high-frequency core losses and rotor I2R losses caused by the pulsations of the leakage-reactance fluxes produced by load currents. While the stray-load losses may be determined by direct input-output tests with a dynamometer or calibrated driving motor, the result is a small difference between two large quantities and so accuracy is very difficult to obtain. Whenever such tests are made, it is desirable to repeat them with the direction of power flow reversed, so the measurement errors may be substantially canceled out. Performance Calculations.  From the foregoing tests, all the circuit constants may be determined, enabling the equivalent-circuit calculations to be carried out. To facilitate this, the formulas for calculating the constants as defined in Table 15-2 are collected in Table 15-1. Temperature Tests.  Temperature tests are made to determine the temperature rise of insulated windings under load conditions. ANSI Standards specify a limiting temperature for continuousrated machines of 50°C by thermometer or 60°C by either the resistance- or the embedded-detector method for Class A insulating materials and corresponding values of 70°C by thermometer and 80°C by resistance or embedded detector for Class B insulation. The preferred method of making a full-load temperature test is to maintain nameplate voltage, current, and frequency until the temperature becomes constant, readings being taken every half hour. When constant temperature is reached, the motor is stopped as quickly as possible and additional thermometers are applied to the rotating parts as soon as these have come to rest.

15.3.4  Characteristics of Polyphase Induction Motors Types.  All polyphase induction motors may be classified as squirrel-cage or wound-rotor, and may be of the single-speed or multispeed type. Squirrel-Cage Motors.  All integral-horsepower induction-motor design categories can mechanically withstand the magnetic stresses and locked-rotor torques of full-voltage line starting. The torque- and current-speed curves for Design A, B, C, and D squirrel-cage motors are shown in Fig. 15-15. Design B motors are most widely used; they have starting-torque and line-starting current characteristics suitable for most power systems. Design C and D motors have higher torque than Class B motors. For motors of all designs, the percentage torques tend to decline with increased hp rating cost. Wound-Rotor Motors.  An insulated winding, usually 3 phase, is provided on the rotor; the terminal of each phase is connected to a slip ring on the shaft. The stationary brushes, which bear on the slip rings, are connected to external adjustable resistances or solid-state converters by which power can be removed from, or injected into, the rotor to adjust the speed. Speed-torque and speed-current curves for a typical wound-rotor motor for various amounts of external resistance are shown in Fig. 15-16. The numbers on the curves refer to the percent external resistance; 100% resistance gives rated torque at standstill. Wound-rotor motors are normally started with relatively high external resistance and this resistance is short-circuited in steps as the motor comes up to speed. This procedure allows the motor to deliver high-starting and accelerating torques, yet draw relatively light line current. The curves of Fig. 15-16 indicate that the external resistance reduces the speed at which the motor will operate with a given load torque.

15_Santoso_Sec15_p0919-0960.indd 935

21/11/17 6:54 PM

936  SECTION FIFTEEN

FIGURE 15-15  Typical speed-current curves for squirrelcage induction motors.

FIGURE 15-16 Speed-torque and speed-current curves of typical wound-rotor induction motor.

Efficiency and Power Factor.  Typical full-load efficiencies and power factors of standard Design B squirrel cage induction motors are given in Figs. 15-17, and 15-18, respectively. The efficiencies of Design A motors are generally slightly lower, and those of Design D motors considerably lower. The power factors of Design A squirrel-cage induction motors are slightly higher, and those of Design C are slightly lower. Energy-efficient motors are those whose design is optimized to reduce losses. Comparative efficiencies of standard and energy-efficient motors of NEMA Design B are shown in Fig. 15-19. Full-Load Current.  With the efficiency and power factor of a 3-phase motor known, its full-load current may be calculated from the formula

Full-load current =

746 × hp rating (15-24) 1.73 × efficiency × pf × voltage

where the efficiency and power factor are expressed as decimals.

FIGURE 15-17 Typical full-load efficiencies of Design B squirrel-cage motors.

15_Santoso_Sec15_p0919-0960.indd 936

FIGURE 15-18 Typical full-load power factors of Design B squirrel-cage motors.

21/11/17 6:54 PM

Electric Machines: Motors And Drives   937 

FIGURE 15-19  Nominal efficiencies for NEMA Design B, 4-pole motors, 1800 r/min; standard vs. energy-efficient motors.

Starting Methods.  Wound-rotor motors are invariably started on full voltage but with external resistance in the secondary circuit. Ordinarily sufficient resistance is provided to give 100% torque at standstill, which means that 100% current will be drawn from the line. If a higher torque is required to start the load, less external resistance must be used, and the current drawn is proportionately higher. As the motor accelerates, the external secondary resistance is short-circuited in one or more steps. 15.3.5  Single-Phase Induction Motors General Theory.  If one supply line to a polyphase induction motor is opened, the motor will not develop any starting torque, although if it is already operating, it will continue to run at a slightly reduced speed, with a somewhat lower breakdown torque. The crux of the single-phase motor problem, therefore, is in providing auxiliary means for starting. The magnetic field of a single-phase winding carrying alternating current may be represented as a phasor stationary in space but alternating in time, or as the sum of two equal and oppositely revolving field phasors, which are constant in magnitude. In a polyphase motor, the backward-revolving field phasors of the several phases cancel each other, and the forward-revolving ones add directly, giving a uniform revolving field. In the single-phase motor, means are provided to reduce the backward field, but this field has always some remaining magnitude (except at one particular load in the case of certain capacitor-run motors), and consequently a single-phase induction motor always has extra losses and a double-frequency pulsating torque not possessed by a polyphase motor. A simple way to visualize the effects of this backward field is to consider that the forward- and backward-revolving fields are separately produced by the same stator current; that is, they are connected in series. Each field may then be treated as a separate polyphase induction motor, the forward field having a slip s with respect to the rotor, and the other a slip 2 - s. At standstill, both values of slip are unity, and the two circuits are identical. At all times, the net torque developed is equal to the difference of the separate torques produced by the two fields. On this basis, the single-phase induction motor equivalent circuit is given by Fig. 15-20. The values of R1, X1, R2, X2, and XM are the impedance constants derived by measurements across the single-phase terminals. Since half the total air-gap impedance at standstill is due to each field, the magnetizing and secondary impedance values are divided by 2 to obtain the values corresponding to the separate fields.

15_Santoso_Sec15_p0919-0960.indd 937

21/11/17 6:54 PM

938  SECTION FIFTEEN

Inspection of this circuit reveals several interesting properties of the motor. At full speed, s is very small, and the backward field appears as an external series impedance of R2/4 + j(X2/2). The corresponding loss I 2R2/4 represents the power delivered to the rotor by the backward field. However, there is an equal loss due to the rotor’s being driven forward at speed 1 - s against the backward-field torque; so the total loss caused by the backward field is I 2R2/2, approximately. Since the backward-field rotor currents occur at double-line frequency, any double squirrel-cage or deep-bar rotor design which had an increased resistance at high freFIGURE 15-20  Equivalent circuit of quency would greatly increase the power losses, and single-phase induction motor. such designs, therefore, are seldom used for singlephase motors. The breakdown torque of a single-phase motor may be approximately calculated for a polyphase induction motor, if the impedance of the backward-revolving field is considered as a series impedance added in the primary circuit of the polyphase motor. Hence, any increase in the secondary resistance of a single-phase motor actually reduces the breakdown torque and lowers the speed at which breakdown occurs. Another interesting characteristic is the double-frequency torque pulsation. The doublefrequency current in the rotor reacting on the slip-frequency forward magnetic field evidently produces a torque pulsation, even at no load. Physically, the no-load part of the pulsating torque provides the means for supplying and removing the magnetic field twice each cycle in the axis at right angles to the stator winding, and the additional part under load corresponds to the doublefrequency pulsation of the single-phase power input to the rotor. To prevent objectionable transmitted vibration and noise from this cause, it is usual to mount single-phase machines on supports with torsional elasticity of some type, often rubber rings encircling the bearing housings in the case of fractional-horsepower motors. One of the issues of single-phase induction motors is the starting torque. The simplest way of providing a single-phase induction motor with starting torque is to place a permanently shortcircuited winding of relatively high resistance in the stator at an electrical angle of 30 to 60 from the main winding. Usually this auxiliary winding, called a “shading coil,” consists of an uninsulated copper strip encircling approximately one-third of a pole pitch. The current induced in the shading coil, by the portion of the main field linking it, reduces the magnitude of this flux and also causes it to lag in time phase. In consequence, the air-gap field has two components, an undamped alternating flux and a damped flux displaced both in space and in time. Shaded-pole motors are used only in very small sizes normally below 50 W output. Principal applications are for desk fans and air circulators, where their simplicity, low torque, and low cost are well suited to the requirements. A considerably greater starting torque can be obtained by providing a separate starting winding, or auxiliary phase, 90° displaced in space from the main winding of a single-phase induction motor. This extra winding is normally wound with fewer turns of a much smaller size of wire, so that it has a considerably greater resistance to reactance ratio than the main winding, and it is connected directly across the power supply, in parallel with the main winding. Just as in the case of the shaded-pole motor, the field of the auxiliary winding is displaced in time and in space, so that its vectorial combination with the main field gives a much larger forward than backward field component. The motor can be reversed by reversing either the main or the auxiliary winding. This design of single phase induction motors is called split-phase motor. Another way of obtaining single-phase-motor starting torque is to provide a dc winding and commutator on the rotor, with a single pair of short-circuited brushes for starting and a centrifugal mechanism, which short-circuits the entire commutator as the motor approaches full speed. This gives a pure repulsion-motor starting characteristic with very high torque per ampere and pure single-phase induction-motor operating characteristics. These motors are

15_Santoso_Sec15_p0919-0960.indd 938

21/11/17 6:54 PM

Electric Machines: Motors And Drives   939 

known as repulsion-start induction-run motor and are widely used in sizes up to about 5 hp. Low-cost low-voltage capacitors have proved extremely useful in improving the performance of split-phase motors. By inserting an external series capacitor in the auxiliary winding circuit and making this winding with many more turns of much lower resistance, the angle of phase split can be increased to 90, or even more, and the coincident increase in the turn ratio a permits a further decrease in the auxiliary winding current. Thus, the capacitor-start motor gives an adequate FIGURE 15-21  Capacitor-motor, starting-torque starting torque for a reasonable starting diagram. current and at the same time has so much greater thermal capacity than a resistance split-phase motor, by virtue of the reduced winding-current density, that it is satisfactory for nearly all industrial single-phase motor applications. Figure 15-21 illustrates a convenient method of determining the best size of capacitor to use with a given motor. IM represents the locked-rotor current in the main winding and IA the current in the auxiliary winding. With no external capacitor, XC = 0, and the motor becomes a plain resistance split type. As XC is increased, IA moves ahead in time phase, following a circular locus, increasing the torque and reducing the total current drawn from the line. Points of maximum starting torque and maximum starting torque per ampere are indicated on the diagram. Horsepower, Speed, and Voltage Ratings.  Standard horsepower and speed ratings of single-phase motors are given in Table 15-3. Motors built in frames having a continuous rating of less than 1 hp, open type, at 1700 to 1800 r/min are designated fractionalhorsepower motors, and those built in larger frames are called integral-horsepower motors. Both capacitor and split-phase motors are available in the multispeed as well as the single-speed type. They are used principally for belt and direct drive of centrifugal and propeller fans and are of the variable-torque class. The multispeed motors for fan drive allow a change in fan speed without changing pulleys, which is essential where remote or automatic control of the rate of air delivery is required. Temperature Rise.  The standard temperature rises and service factors for single-phase motors are the same as for polyphase motors.

TABLE 15-3  Standard Horsepower and Speed Ratings—Single-Phase Constant-Speed Motors Standard horsepower ratings 1∕20 1∕6 ½ 1½ 5 15 1∕12 ¼ ¾ 2 7½ 20 1∕8 1∕3 1 3 10 25 Standard speed ratings Rpm 60 cycles 3600 1800 1200 900

Fractional hp

Integral hp

1∕20—1 1½—25 1∕20—¾ 1—25 1∕20—½ ¾—25 1∕20—1∕3 ½—25

Rpm 50 cycles 3000 1500 1000 750

1∕20—1 1½—20 1∕20—¾ 1—20 1∕20—½ ¾—20 — ½—20

Efficiencies and Power Factors.  Typical efficiencies and power factors of the various types of induction motor that might be used to fill the requirements of the different ratings are shown in Fig. 15-22. Repulsion-start induction-run motors have about the same efficiencies and power factors except in the 1½- to 3-hp range, where they are lower. Repulsion-induction motors have roughly the same efficiencies but higher power factors.

15_Santoso_Sec15_p0919-0960.indd 939

21/11/17 6:54 PM

940  SECTION FIFTEEN

Single-Phase Motor Characteristics.  The fullload current of a single-phase motor is equal to    

FIGURE 15-22  Typical operating characteristics of 1800-r/min single-phase motors.

746 × hp (15-25) Efficiency × voltage × pf

where the efficiency and power factor are expressed as decimals. Characteristics of a 60-Hz, 4-pole, 1800-r/ min, single-phase motor are shown in Fig. 15-22. The horsepower rating of a single-phase motor is defined by its breakdown torque. Thus, any 1800-r/min motor with a breakdown torque between 31.5 and 40.5 oz ⋅ ft is, by definition, a 1⁄3-hp motor. The value used for definition is the minimum of the range of manufacturing variation for that particular design.

15.3.6  Induction Motor Online Starting Selection of an induction motor ac starter is a compromise between requirements and cost. The primary requirements of the starter, obviously, are that the motor starting torque shall be adequate to start the load under worst-case line voltage and load conditions; also, that the line current shall not exceed limits set by the utility or plant voltage dip. The secondary requirements in starter selection include smoothness of acceleration, maintenance, power factor, reliability, and efficiency. The selection of a closed-transition starter depends upon whether the motor and the supply line can withstand the peak current at the time the starter transfers the motor to full voltage. Alternating-current across-the-line starters are simple in construction, easy to install and maintain, and inexpensive. A typical starter consists of a 3-pole contactor with a thermal overload relay for protecting the motor. The starter connects the motor directly to the line, impressing full voltage on the motor terminals. It is particularly suitable for squirrel-cage motors. Since these starters connect the motor directly to the supply lines, the motor will draw an inrush current of 6 to 10 times running current. In the majority of installations this is not objectionable and will not damage the motor or the driven machinery. When the starting inrush must be lower, some form of reducedvoltage starting must be used. The common types of starters are autotransformer, primary-resistance, part winding Y-D, and solid state.

15.4  SYNCHRONOUS MOTORS 15.4.1  Basics of Synchronous Motor Operation Definition.  A synchronous motor is a machine that transforms electric power into mechanical power. The average speed of normal operation is exactly proportional to the frequency of the system to which it is connected. Unless otherwise stated, it is generally understood that a synchronous motor has field poles excited with direct current. Types.  The synchronous motor is built with one set of ac polyphase distributed windings, designated the armature, which is usually on the stator and is connected to the ac supply system. The configuration of the other member, usually the rotor, determines the type of synchronous motor. Motors with dc excited field windings on salient-pole or round rotors, rated 200 to 100,000 hp and larger,

15_Santoso_Sec15_p0919-0960.indd 940

21/11/17 6:54 PM

Electric Machines: Motors And Drives   941 

are the dominant industrial type. In the brushless synchronous motor, the excitation (field current) is supplied through shaft-mounted rectifiers from an ac exciter. In the slip-ring synchronous motor, the excitation is supplied from a shaft-mounted exciter or a separate dc power supply. Synchronousreluctance motors rated below 5 hp, usually supplied from adjustable-speed drive inverters, are designed with a different reluctance across the air gap in the direct and quadrature axis to develop reluctance torque. The motors have no excitation source for synchronous operation. Synchronous motors below 1 hp usually employ a permanent-magnet type of rotor. These motors are usually driven by a transistor inverter from a dc source; they are termed brushless dc motors. Theory of Operation.  The operation of the dc separately excited synchronous motor can be explained in terms of the air-gap magnetic-field model, the circuit model, or the phasor diagram model of Fig. 15-23.

FIGURE 15-23  Operation of synchronous motor: (a) air-gap magneticfield model; (b) circuit model; (c) phasor-diagram model.

In the magnetic-field model of Fig. 15-23a, the stator windings are assumed to be connected to a polyphase source, so that the winding currents produce a rotating wave of current density Ja and radial armature reaction field Ba as explained below. The rotor carrying the main field poles is rotating in synchronism with these waves. The excited field poles produce a rotating wave of field Bd. The net magnetic field Bt is the spatial sum of Ba and Bd; it induces an air-gap voltage Vag in the stator windings, nearly equal to the source voltage Vt. The current-density distribution Ja is shown for the current Ia in phase with the voltage Vt, and pf = 1. The electromagnetic torque acting between the rotor and the stator is produced by the interaction of the main field Bd and the stator current density Ja, as a J × B force on each unit volume of stator conductor. The force on the conductors is to the left (-f); the reaction force on the rotor is to the right (+f), and in the direction of rotation. The operation of the synchronous motor can be represented by the circuit model of Fig. 15-23b. The motor is characterized by its synchronous reactance xd and the excitation voltage Ed behind xd.

15_Santoso_Sec15_p0919-0960.indd 941

21/11/17 6:54 PM

942  SECTION FIFTEEN

The model neglects saliency (poles), saturation, and armature resistance, and is suitable for firstorder analysis, but not for calculation of specific operating points, losses, field current, and starting. The phasor diagram of Fig. 15-23c is drawn for the field model and circuit model described previously with unity power factor at the motor terminals. The phasor diagram neglects saliency and armature resistance. The phasors correspond to the waves in the field model. The terminal voltage Vt is generated by the field Bt; the excitation voltage Ed is generated by the main field Bd; the voltage drop jIaxd is generated by the armature reaction field Ba; and the current Ia is the aggregate of the currentdensity wave Ja. The power angle d is that between Vt and Ed, or between Bt and Bd. The excitation voltage Ed, in per-unit (pu),a is equal to the field current Ifd, in pu, on the air-gap line of the no-load (open-circuit) saturation curve of the machine. Power-Factor Correction.  Synchronous motors were first used because they were capable of raising the power factor of systems having large induction-motor loads. Now they are also used because they can maintain the terminal voltage on a weak system (high source impedance), they have lower cost, and they are more efficient than corresponding induction motors, particularly the low-speed motors. Synchronous motors are built for operation at pf = 1.0, or pf = 0.8 lead, the latter being higher in cost and slightly less efficient at full load. The selection of a synchronous motor to correct an existing power factor is merely a matter of bookkeeping of active and reactive power. The synchronous motor can be selected to correct the overall power factor to a given value, in which case it must also be large enough to accomplish its motoring functions; or it can be selected for its motoring function and required to provide the maximum correction that it can when operating at pf = 0.8 lead. In Fig. 15-24, a power diagram shows how the active and reactive power components Ps and Qs of the synchronous motor are added to the components Pi and Qi of an induction motor to obtain the total Pt and Qt components, the kVAt, and the power factor. The Qs of the synchronous motor is based on the rated kVA and pf = 0.8 lead, rather than the actual operating kVA. The synchronous motor can support the voltage of a weak system, so that a largerrating synchronous motor can be installed than an induction motor for the same source impedance. With an induction motor, both the P and Q components produce voltage drops in the source impedance. With a synchronous motor operating at leading power factor, the P component produces a voltage drop in the source resistance, but the Q component produces a voltage rise in the source FIGURE 15-24  Power diagram of induction motor reactance that can offset the drop and allow and synchronous motor operating in parallel, showing the terminal voltage to be normal. If necescomponent and net values of P and Q. sary, the field current of the synchronous motor can be controlled by a voltage regulator connected to the motor bus. The leading current of a synchronous motor is able to develop a sufficient voltage rise through the source reactance to overcome the voltage drop and maintain the motor voltage equal to the source voltage. Starting.  The interaction of the main field produced by the rotor and the armature current of the stator will produce a net average torque to drive the synchronous motor only when the rotor is revolving at speed n in synchronism with the line frequency f ; n = 120 f/p, p = poles. The motor must A reference unit for expressing all parameters on a common reference base. One pu is 100% of the chosen base.

a

15_Santoso_Sec15_p0919-0960.indd 942

21/11/17 6:54 PM

Electric Machines: Motors And Drives   943 

be started by developing other than synchronous torques. Practically, the motor is equipped with an induction-motor-type squirrel-cage winding on the rotor, in the form of a damper winding, in order to start the motor. The motor is started on the damper windings with the field winding short-circuited, or terminated in a resistor, to attenuate the high “transformer”-induced voltages. When the motor reaches the lowest slip speed, practically synchronous speed, the field current is applied to the field winding, and the rotor poles accelerate and pull into step with the synchronously rotating air-gap magnetic field. The damper windings see zero slip and carry no further current, unless the rotor oscillates with respect to the synchronous speed. Torque Definitions.  Locked-rotor torque is the minimum torque, which the synchronous motor will develop at rest for all angular positions of the rotor, with rated voltage at rated frequency applied. Pull-in torque is the maximum constant-load torque under which the motor will pull into synchronism, at rated voltage and frequency, when its rated field current is applied. In addition, the pull-up torque is defined as the minimum torque developed between standstill and the pull-in point. This torque must exceed the load torque by a sufficient margin to assure satisfactory acceleration of the load during starting. The reluctance torque is a component of the total torque when the motor is operating synchronously. It results from the saliency of the poles and is a manifestation of the poles attempting to align themselves with the air-gap magnetic field. It can account for up to 30% of the pull-out torque. The synchronous torque is the total steady-state torque available, with field excitation applied, to drive the motor and the load at synchronous speed. The maximum value as the motor is loaded is developed at a power angle d = 90° for the round rotor motor. In a salient-pole motor, the maximum torque is developed at an angle less than 90 due to the presence of reluctance torque. Synchronization.  Synchronization is the process by which the synchronous motor “pulls into step” during the starting process, when the field current is applied to the field winding. Initially, the rotor is revolving at a slip with respect to the synchronous speed of the air-gap magnetic-field waves. The rotor torque, produced by the damper windings, is in equilibrium with the load torque at that slip. The ability of the rotor to accelerate and synchronize depends upon the total inertia (Wk2), the initial slip, and the closing angle of the poles with respect to the field wave at the instant field current is applied. Damper Windings.  Damper windings are placed on the rotors of synchronous motors for two purposes: for starting and for reducing the amplitude of power-angle oscillation. The damper windings consist of copper or brass bars inserted through holes in the pole shoes and connected at the ends to rings to form the equivalent of a squirrel cage. The rings can extend between the poles to form a complete damper. Synchronous motors with solid pole shoes, or solid rotors, perform like motors with damper windings. Exciters.  DC separately excited synchronous motors are provided with a shaft-driven exciter to supply the field power. Exciters are classified into slip-ring types and brushless types. The slip-ring type consists of a dc generator, whose output is fed into the motor field winding through slip rings and stationary brushes. The brushless type consists of an ac generator, with rotating armature and stationary field; the output is rectified by solid-state rectifier elements mounted on the rotating structure and fed directly to the motor field winding. In each type, the motor field current is controlled by the exciter field current. Typical kilowatt ratings for exciters for 60-Hz synchronous motors are given in MG1-21.16 as a function of hp rating, speed, and power factor. For a given hp rating, the excitor kW increases as the speed is reduced, and as the power factor is shifted from pf = 1.0 to pf = 0.8 lead. During starting, the motor field winding must be disconnected from the exciter and loaded with a resistor, to limit the high induced voltage, to prevent damage to the rectifier elements of the brushless type, and to prevent the circulation of ac current through a slip-ring-type dc exciter. The switching is done with a contactor for the slip-ring type, and with thyristors on the rotating rectifier assembly for the brushless type. Except for the disconnection for starting, the synchronous-motor excitation system is practically the same as for an ac generator of the same rating.

15_Santoso_Sec15_p0919-0960.indd 943

21/11/17 6:54 PM

944  SECTION FIFTEEN

Standard Ratings.  Standard ratings for dc separately excited synchronous motors are given in NEMA MG1-1978, Part 21. Standard horsepowers range from 20 to 100,000 hp. Speed ratings extend from 3600 r/min (2-pole) to 80 r/min (90-pole) for 60-Hz machines, and five-sixths of the values for 50-Hz machines. The power factor shall be unity or 0.8 leading. The voltage ratings for 60-Hz motors are 200, 230, 460, 575, 2300, 4000, 4600, 6600, and 13,200 V. It is not practical to build motors of all horsepower ratings at these speeds and voltages. Efficiency.  Efficiency shall be determined at rated output, voltage, frequency, and power factor. The following losses shall be included in determining the efficiency: (1) I2R loss of armature and field; (2) core loss; (3) stray-load loss; (4) friction and windage loss; and (5) exciter loss for shaft-driven exciter. The resistances should be corrected for temperature. Typical synchronous motor efficiencies are shown in Fig. 15-25. The 0.8 pf synchronous motor, because of the increased copper loss, is lower in efficiency; its efficiency is closer to that of the induction motor at high speed, but better at low speed. Standard Tests.  Tests on synchronous motors shall be made in accordance with the latest issues of IEEE Test Procedure for Synchronous Machines, IEEE Standard 115, and ANSI C50.10-1965. The following tests shall be made on motors completely assembled in the factory and furnished with shaft and complete set of bearings: resistance test of armature and field windings; dielectric test of armature and field windings; mechanical balance; current balance at no load; and direction of rotation. The following tests may be specified on the same or duplicate motors: locked-rotor current; temperature rise; locked-rotor torque; overspeed; harmonic analysis and TIF; segregated losses; short-circuit tests at reduced voltage to determine reactances and time constants; fieldwinding impedance; and speed-torque curve. The following tests shall be made on all motors not completely assembled in the factory: resistance and dielectric tests of armature and field windings. The following field tests are recommended after installation: resistance and dielectric tests of armature and field windings not completely assembled in the factory; mechanical balance; bearing insulation; current balance at no load; direction of rotation. The following field tests may be specified on the same or duplicate motors: temperature rise; short-circuit tests at reduced voltage to determine reactances and time constants; field-winding impedance. The dielectric test for the armature winding shall be conducted for 1 min, with an ac rms voltage of 1000 V plus twice the rated voltage. For machines rated 6 kV and above, the test may be conducted with a dc voltage of 1.7 times the ac rms test value. The dielectric test for the field winding depends upon the connection for starting. For a short-circuited field winding, the ac rms test voltage is 10 times the rated excitation voltage, but no less than 2500 V, nor more than 5000 V. For a field winding closed through a resistor, the ac rms test voltage is twice the rms value of the IR drop, but not less than 2500 V, where the current is the value that would circulate with a short-circuited winding. When a test is made on an assembled group of several pieces of new apparatus, each of which has passed a high-potential test, the test voltage shall not exceed 85% of the lowest test voltage for any part of the group. When a test is made after installation of a new machine, which has passed its high-potential test at the factory and whose windings have not since been disturbed, the test voltages should be 75% of the original values.

15.4.2  Synchronous Motor Online Starting Methods of Starting.  The method used to start a synchronous motor depends on two factors: the required torque to start the load and the maximum starting current permitted from the line. Basically, the motor is started by using the damper windings to develop asynchronous (induction) torque or by using an auxiliary motor to bring the unloaded motor up to synchronous speed. Solidstate converters have also been used to bring up to speed large several-hundred-MVA synchronous motor/generators for pumped storage plants.

15_Santoso_Sec15_p0919-0960.indd 944

21/11/17 6:54 PM

Electric Machines: Motors And Drives   945 

FIGURE 15-25  Full-load efficiencies of (a) high-speed general-purpose synchronous motors and (b) low-speed synchronous motors.

Synchronous-motor starters of the full-voltage type connect the motor directly to the supply lines. The field winding is short-circuited through a discharge resistor during the starting period. The field is connected to the dc lines when the motor is at a speed near synchronism. Reduced-voltage starters connect the motor to a reduced voltage for starting and transfer to full voltage at a speed just below synchronism. This transfer may be controlled by a time relay or a frequency relay. The field is

15_Santoso_Sec15_p0919-0960.indd 945

21/11/17 6:54 PM

946  SECTION FIFTEEN

energized either immediately before or immediately after the full-voltage switch closes. Most modern synchronous motors obtain their field voltage from a brushless exciter on the shaft.

15.5  BASIC METHODS OF SPEED CONTROL Speed control of electric motors may be obtained by various means. The design of a speed-regulating controller is determined by the type of motor with which it will be used. Multispeed squirrel-cage motors are suitable for applications that require up to four operating speeds but that do not require speed control between these fixed speeds. However, a solid-state inverter plus a single-speed motor might be less costly than a multispeed motor, and provide much more cost-efficient operation. Controllers for multispeed ac squirrel-cage motors may be either the drum type or the magnetic type. Drum controllers are widely used, because the many changes in connections required to obtain different speeds can be readily accomplished. Drum controllers can be used with reconnected winding or separate-winding-type motors and with constant-torque, variable-torque, or constanthorsepower motors. Lowvoltage and overload protection can be obtained by using a magnetic contactor and overload relay. When complete control by push buttons or other pilot devices is required, magnetic contactors are used to change the motor connections. Controllers of this type can be arranged to permit starting at any speed or to permit starting only at the slowest speed and changing to each higher speed in sequence. With the developments in power electronics, the mechanical/electromagnetic type motor speed control schemes are being replaced by solid-state based motor drives that provide smoother, more flexible, efficient, and economical speed control of electric motors. 15.5.1  Primary Voltage Control AC squirrel-cage motors are inherently constant-speed motors when supplied directly from utility lines. Narrow-speed-range control is obtained by adjusting the primary voltage on Design D motors using saturable reactors or solid-state phase-controlled thyristors in the stator circuits. Wide-speedrange control is obtained by adjusting the primary frequency and voltage on Design B motors using motor-alternator sets or solid-state frequency converters. The frequency of 60-Hz motors is typically adjusted from 3 to 120 Hz. From 3 to 60 Hz, the voltage is raised proportional to frequency so that the motor can deliver its full rated and breakdown torque. From 60 to 120 Hz, the voltage is kept constant so that the motor can deliver its rated horsepower. Speed is controlled with thyristors in each of the lines to the stator of the induction motor as shown in Fig. 15-26a. Retarding the firing angles of the thyristors reduces the stator voltage of the motor.

FIGURE 15-26  Primary-voltage control: (a) circuit of controller; (b) torque-speed characteristic at three-stator voltages; pump characteristic and range for 10% to 100% power.

15_Santoso_Sec15_p0919-0960.indd 946

21/11/17 6:54 PM

Electric Machines: Motors And Drives   947 

The torque at each speed is reduced as V2, as shown in Fig. 15-26b. NEMA Design D motors ensure a sufficient range of descending torque in which the motor can stably drive its load. The power loss in the rotor is proportional to the torque × slip. With pump and fan loads, as shown in Fig. 15-26b, the torque is reduced as speed, so that the rotor power loss is acceptable at reduced speed. Typical ranges of pump and fan operation are 50% to 100% speed, 10% to 100% power. Single-phase ac versions of these regulators are still used in the speed control of single-phase ac motors in applications such as ceiling fans. A variable ac voltage is applied across the motor terminals by varying the turn on angle of the thyristors, thereby leading to variable speed operation. The motor currents are not sinusoidal, particularly at lower speeds, leading to torque pulsation and acoustic noise. 15.5.2  Speed Control of Slip Ring Induction Motors AC slip-ring motor control requires that power be extracted from the rotor windings via the slip rings to reduce the motor speed, that is, increase the slip. Three methods are used: (1) secondary resistors, (2) rotor-power recovery by auxiliary rotating machines, and (3) rotor-power recovery by auxiliary solid-state rectifier and converter. The auxiliary systems recover the electric energy that would be dissipated in the secondary resistors. AC slip-ring motor secondary-resistor speed regulators consist of a contactor to connect the primary of the motor to the supply lines and some form of resistance-switching device for the secondary circuit. The switching device may be a three-arm faceplate controller, a drum, or magnetic contactors. Regulating devices differ from starting devices in that the switching means can remain continuously on any one of the resistor steps. The motor will therefore operate continuously at a reduced speed, as determined by the amount of resistance remaining in the motor circuit. The use of secondary resistance for speed control is not an efficient method because of the power loss in the resistor. The amount of speed reduction obtained will vary directly with the load on the motor. Speed controllers of this type are usually designed for 50% speed reduction. Under favorable conditions, however, motors can be operated at 75% speed reduction. The resistors are of the same type as the resistors used for armature regulation of dc motors. Rotor-power recovery drives are often classified as either constant horsepower or constant torque; the designation refers to the inherent limitation in power based on full current and flux in the main machine. In the first scheme (constant-horsepower drive), the slip energy is converted into mechanical power and then returned to the main motor shaft. Since horsepower is a function of the product of torque and speed, such motors have high torque at low speeds and lower torque at higher speeds. In drives using this arrangement, the auxiliary machine is mounted on or mechanically geared to the main motor shaft (Fig. 15-27a). In the second scheme (constant-torque drive), the slip energy is converted into electric power of the frequency and voltage of the supply circuit and is returned or fed back into the line. Since this power is not delivered to the main motor shaft, the auxiliary machine is not mechanically FIGURE 15-27 (a) Constant-horsepower attached to the shaft but is separately driven. As drive; regulating machine, coupled to main motor, the limiting torque of the main motor is constant, returns power mechanically; (b) constant-torque the maximum horsepower output is proportional drive; regulating machine, mechanically separate from main motor, returns slip power electrically. to the operating speed (Fig. 15-27b). The classical recovery systems using auxiliary machines are termed the Scherbius drive and the Krämer drive. The former employs ac commutator machines; the latter relies on a dc link and rotary converters. A variation of the Krämer drive uses a synchronous motor and a dc generator in place of the rotary converter and a constant-speed set feeding the slip power back into the line. This drive has been used for a number of large wind-tunnel drives. It is particularly adapted to a wide range of speed control and to minimum disturbance on starting.

15_Santoso_Sec15_p0919-0960.indd 947

21/11/17 6:54 PM

948  SECTION FIFTEEN

15.6  VARIABLE SPEED DRIVES WITH POWER ELECTRONICS 15.6.1  DC Drives DC machine drives were historically very popular due to the relative straightforward implementation of controls for power electronics. This is because the speed of a dc machine can be controlled through the armature voltage and the torque through the field current. An ac source and phase-controlled rectifiers, such as half-wave and semiconverters, provide single quadrant, that is, positive voltage and current operation, while fully controlled converters can be used to operate the machine in two quadrants, that is, positive and negative voltage and positive current. For four-quadrant operation, dual converters, that is, back-back thyristor bridges, may be employed. It should be noted that rectifiers draw harmonic currents from the ac source, leading therefore to a poor power factor and input filters are typically required for performance improvement. Alternatively, dc-dc converters or choppers fed from a constant dc voltage, such as a battery or diode bridge rectifier, can be used to feed a variable dc voltage to the armature. These converters may employ IGBTs or MOSFETs. Configurations allowing only motoring or both motoring and regeneration are available. Both the phase controlled rectifiers and the dc-dc converters lead to discontinuous armature voltage across the armature, and, for some operating conditions, particularly low speed and low load, this might lead to discontinuous currents deteriorating the dynamic performance of the machine as well as the input power factor. For choppers, the use of a high-switching frequency may mitigate these limitations. A widely acknowledged drawback of dc drives is represented by the substantial maintenance required by the use of commutators and brushes in the electric motor. Advancements over the last decades in electric controls made possible the increased use of ac motor technologies and reduced the need for dc drives. 15.6.2  AC Drives—Three-Phase Inverters Two-Level Inverters.  An ac electric machine, such as an induction motor, requires variable voltage and frequency in order to achieve variable speed operation. Supply can be provided from a dc source via a dc-ac power electronics inverter or from an ac source via an ac-dc-ac combined converter. The ac-dc input stage of the ac-dc-ac converter may be an uncontrolled rectifier, such as a diode bridge rectifier. Uncontrolled rectifiers, which tend to have a low poor power factor, owing to the rather large value of the dc bus capacitance required in order to maintain a stiff dc link voltage, are typically used in conjunction with passive or active power factor correction circuits. The addition of a boost converter at the output of the uncontrolled rectifier and the appropriate control of its duty cycle also improves the power factor. Implementations of the ac-dc conversion stage with controllable power electronic switches, such as IGBTs and MOSFETs, have the advantage of ensuring bidirectional power flow. The dc-ac converter/inverter may be a voltage source or current source converter. Typically, a voltage source inverter (VSI), such as the one schematically illustrated in Fig. 15-28, requires a stiff dc link and employs IGBTs or MOSFETs switching at high frequencies. The output ac voltage at the VSI terminals includes a fundamental frequency sine wave and high-frequency harmonic components, the frequency of which depends on the switching frequency employed. The high-order harmonics may be filtered out, to a certain extent, by the inductance of the electric machine, as exemplified in Fig. 15-29. Different modulation techniques are available for the VSI inverters. These include sine-triangle pulse width modulation (PWM), hysteresis current regulation, and space vector PWM. According to the sine-triangle PWM algorithms, the gating pulses for the power switches, for example, IGBTs, are generated through the comparison of a sinusoidal modulating function with a high-frequency triangular carrier wave. The frequency of the sinusoidal modulating wave is equal to the fundamental frequency

15_Santoso_Sec15_p0919-0960.indd 948

21/11/17 6:54 PM

Electric Machines: Motors And Drives   949 

FIGURE 15-28  A two-level 3-phase voltage source inverter (VSI), which can be employed to drive ac machines, such as of the induction (asynchronous), wound rotor synchronous or PM synchronous type. The inverter output has three wires and the motor windings are typically wye (star) connected with an isolated neutral point.

of the output voltage. The magnitude of the output voltage is controlled by changing the ratio of the amplitude of the modulating signal to the amplitude of the carrier wave, a parameter known as the modulation index. The output ac voltage is directly proportional to the modulation index (m), as long as 0 < m 1, low-frequency harmonics begin to appear in the output voltage of the inverter. The maximum output ac voltage obtained for m = 1 is smaller than the dc link voltage. A higher ac voltage may be obtained for the same dc bus voltage if other types of modulating signals are used. Examples of this type include the use of a sine wave with a third harmonic component or the use of space vector modulation that improves the dc bus utilization.

FIGURE 15-29  Phase current and line voltage waveforms in a two-level VSI. The high-frequency components of the inverter output voltage are filtered by the machine inductance, rendering the currents quasi-sinusoidal.

Special Inverters.  In the case of backto-back controllable ac-dc-ac converters, specific algorithms allow the improvement of the power factor. Such a configuration has also the advantage of allowing power flow from the machine to the input source, which provides regenerative braking. Alternative means of ensuring bidirectional power flow include the use of thyristors for the input rectifier; a solution that may result in a poor power factor. If the electric machine has a leading power factor, another option is to use a current source inverter (CSI). In a CSI, thyristors may be employed in place of IGBTs or MOSFETs, and the configuration maybe advantageous, in principle, for large power ratings. Nevertheless, thyristors cannot be switched at high frequencies and, as a result, the current harmonic content is high leading to torque ripple and additional losses. Thyristor

15_Santoso_Sec15_p0919-0960.indd 949

21/11/17 6:54 PM

950  SECTION FIFTEEN

converters or line-commutated inverters may be used for large synchronous machine drives, in which case the machine is overexcited in order to ensure operation at a leading power factor. Direct ac converters, also known as matrix converters, have also been developed. These converters are built with a large number of switches and do not require a stiff dc link. For large power drives, the higher rated voltages impose an upper limit on the switching frequency thereby increasing torque ripple and loss. In this case, multilevel inverters, which yield a voltage output with reduced harmonic content, even at relatively low-switching frequencies, may be employed.

15.7  SPEED CONTROL OF AC MOTORS 15.7.1  Stability and Dynamics The first-order differential mechanical equation for a motor, under the assumption of rigid coupling, is given by Tem − TL = J



dω + Bω dt

where Tem is the electromagnetic torque, TL is the load torque, J is the moment of inertia, w is the rotor speed and B is the damping coefficient due to friction. In general, for stable operation, the following condition must be met: dTem dTL < dω dω



For line-fed machines, only some zones of the torque-speed curve lead to stable operation. With the use of power electronic controls, the torque-speed characteristic of the machine can be shaped as desired, subject to the availability of dc bus voltage, enabling thus, operation over a wide range of conditions. 15.7.2  Scalar Control Open Loop Scalar Control.  The control of induction motors according to this algorithm, which is schematically depicted in Fig. 15-30, requires maintaining the ratio of terminal voltage to frequency constant over a range of speeds. If the stator resistance and leakage reactance are neglected, this results in a substantially constant air-gap flux, providing constant maximum torque. The stator frequency and voltage can be varied continuously in order to maintain the mechanical speed of the motor constant for any load. This requires the knowledge of the slip, which in traditional schemes may be obtained under the assumption of a linear relationship between torque and slip. This approach may lead to errors at low speeds and slip compensation, as well as voltage boosting, may be employed in order to overcome this limitation.

1 s

θe

Vd = 0 ωe*

V/f curve

PWM Vq

AC motor

FIGURE 15-30  Diagram for open loop scalar control of an ac motor, which is typically employed for induction machines.

15_Santoso_Sec15_p0919-0960.indd 950

21/11/17 6:54 PM

Electric Machines: Motors And Drives   951 

Closed Loop Scalar Control.  In this scheme, the motor speed is measured, fed back, and compared with the set speed. The output of the speed controller is represented by the required slip, which along with rotor speed, is then used to determine the operating supply frequency for the motor. 15.7.3  Vector Control Vector control requires the independent control of torque and flux. While servicing a step change in load torque, a vector controlled machine shifts very rapidly to the new operating point with a better dynamic response, as compared with scalar control. The vector control ensures, in principle, that the stator currents are derived from set values of flux and torque. In case of an induction motor, this is achieved by regulation of the rotor, stator, or air-gap flux according to a scheme as shown in Fig 15-31. Transformations orienting the reference frame along the rotor, stator or air gap flux are employed in the process. In direct field orientation, the information required for the transformations is obtained using flux sensors or flux observers. In contrast, in case of indirect field orientation, the slip is calculated as a function of motor parameters and an encoder provides information about the rotor position. The slip depends on the desired reference frame of orientation and is a function of the parameters of the motor. The d-axis current is derived from an outer flux loop and the value of the set flux depends on the operating speed of the motor. The currents are maintained at their desired references with the aid of the inverter.

FIGURE 15-31  Diagram for vector control of ac motors. The determination of the transformation angle (q) depends upon the type of machine, i.e., induction or synchronous.

In a surface mounted permanent magnet synchronous motor, the stator currents are transformed to a reference frame oriented along the d axis of the rotor. The current along the d axis, or the flux producing current, is maintained at zero, while the q-axis component of the current or the torque producing current is derived from an outer speed loop. The rotor position information required for the transformation is provided by a position encoder or maybe estimated in a sensorless algorithm. For salient permanent magnet synchronous motors, the optimum value of d-axis current may not be zero, in order to take advantage of the reluctance torque component. In such a case, the desired values of d and q currents may be obtained from the maximum torque per ampere characteristics. 15.7.4  Direct Torque Control The advantage of this method for decoupled control of torque and flux is that it does not require reference frame transformations nor position encoders. The stator flux and torque are maintained at their respective references by the application of appropriate PWM pulses to the inverter. The method can be applied to both synchronous and asynchronous machines and requires flux and torque estimators.

15_Santoso_Sec15_p0919-0960.indd 951

21/11/17 6:54 PM

952  SECTION FIFTEEN

15.8  ELECTRONICALLY OPERATED MOTORS OF THE PERMANENT MAGNET AND RELUCTANCE TYPE 15.8.1  Permanent Magnet Synchronous Motors The rotor of permanent magnet synchronous motors (PMSM) includes PMs placed in different configurations, such as surface mounted, interior, and spoke (Fig. 15-32). The rotor topology influences the motor parameters, for example, inductances, and characteristics, such as saliency ratio and reluctance torque. Both high-energy rare earth, NdFeB or SmCo, magnets and less expensive ferrites can be used for PMSMs. Stators may employ distributed windings, similar to those of an induction motor, or nonoverlapping concentrated windings placed around the teeth. Each motor topology has its own advantages recommending it for specific applications. For example, PMSMs with concentrated windings may have shorter end turns leading to reduced copper weight and losses, but have a magnetic field rich in high-order harmonics, yielding high stator and rotor core losses, such that the motor may be better suited for low-speed high-torque drives. PMSMs are employed in a variety of high-efficiency applications, including electric vehicles, industrial and automotive drive systems, and home appliances. The operation of a PMSM is similar to a wound rotor synchronous motor with fixed excitation determined by the PM field. A back electromotive force (emf) with a substantially sinusoidal waveform, the magnitude and frequency of which are linearly dependent on the rotational speed, is induced across the stator windings. The stator coils, when excited with quasi-sine-wave regulated three-phase currents, of the type illustrated in Fig. 15-29, produce a sinusoidally distributed rotating mmf in the air gap, which interacts with the PM rotor field and produce electromagnetic torque. In PMSMs the torque is produced due to the interaction between the stator and rotor mmf’s, and in designs with interior permanent magnets an additional reluctance torque is generated because of the rotor saliency. These machines, particularly of the spoke PM type, with a large number of rotor poles also present flux concentration, which serves to increase the magnetic loading. This allows the use of weaker and less expensive magnets, such as ferrites. Electronic controls and power electronic inverters are employed for PMSMs. Rotor position information is provided by encoders or is estimated by sensorless algorithms. Drives with a PMSM are able to operate with suitable electric controls and motor parameters on a variety of characteristics, including the typical electric traction curve that includes a constant torque region up to the base speed and constant power at higher speeds. A typical construction of PMSMs is of the radial air-gap type having a cylindrical rotor placed inside and coaxially with a stator, as shown in Fig. 15-32, or have the rotor placed outside a cylindrical stator in what is commonly referred to as an “inside-out” arrangement. PMSMs may also be designed with substantially disk shaped stators and rotors separated by one or multiple axial air-gaps in what

FIGURE 15-32  Example configurations of 3-phase permanent magnet synchronous motors (PMSM). From left to right: surface permanent magnet rotor (SPM) with 8-poles and a 12-slot stator with concentrated coils around the teeth; interior permanent magnet rotor (IPM) with 4-poles and a stator with a distributed winding with two slots per pole and phase; spoke permanent magnet rotor with radially magnetized PMs, 12-poles, and a stator with a distributed winding with one slot per pole and phase.

15_Santoso_Sec15_p0919-0960.indd 952

21/11/17 6:54 PM

Electric Machines: Motors And Drives   953 

is commonly referred to as a “pancake” type construction. Due to the substantial magnetic attraction forces between the stator and the rotor, single-sided axial flux machines exhibit an unbalanced magnetic pull. Configurations with multiple rotors and stators are also possible, as discussed for example in the handbook section on generators.

15.8.2  Brushless DC Motors Motors with PMs in the rotor that are designed such that the back emf has a substantially trapezoidal waveform shape are best suited to be operated with quasi-square wave currents, in which case, they are referred to as of the brushless dc (BLDC) type. The power electronics inverter configuration for BLDC motor drives is the same as for PM synchronous motors (PMSM) with quasi-sine wave currents, which sometimes are referred to as of the brushless ac (BLAC) type, but the electronic control is different, so that the phase currents are regulated as illustrated, in principle, in Fig. 15-33. In this case, each phase conducts for 120 electrical degrees during the positive half cycle and for another 120 electrical degrees during the negative half cycle, such that for most of the time only two phase are conducting and contribute to the torque production. Commutation occurs every 60 electrical degrees, and the combination between the associated transients and the real waveforms for back emf and currents may cause torque ripple, which is not shown in the schematic illustration of principles from Fig. 15-33 and may be significant in real applications. Hall sensors are typically employed for rotor pole detection and for enabling phase commutation. The diodes, which are placed antiparallel to the power electronic switches, conduct in the commutation period. The rate of current rise and fall, following a phase energization and deenergization, respectively, is determined by the speed and hence the back emf and the BLDC motor time constant, including the inductance. At high speeds, in order to allow the current to raise fast enough, phases are turned on in advance of the of the pole commutation. BLDC motor drives may be cost-effective as they employ rather inexpensive Hall sensors and control electronics and, at least in principle, under ideal conditions, the motor can deliver for the same stator winding losses 15% higher torque output than in the PMSM/BLAC mode. Nevertheless, sinusoidal drives are typically reported to be advantageous in real applications in terms of lower torque ripple, lower acoustic noise, and higher efficiency.

15_Santoso_Sec15_p0919-0960.indd 953

FIGURE 15-33  Phase currents and back emfs, and the electromagnetic torque illustrating the ideal operation of a brushless dc motor (BLDC). Two phases produce electromagnetic torque at any given time. Under real operation, the rate of raise and fall of the current is limited by the operating speed, supply voltage and motor parameters, and the combination of transients related to phase switching and the actual waveforms for back emf and currents may cause significant current ripple, which is not included in the figure.

21/11/17 6:54 PM

954  SECTION FIFTEEN

15.8.3  Switched Reluctance Motors SRMs have magnetic saliency both on the laminated steel stator and rotor cores resulting in a doubly salient configuration, as shown in Fig. 15-34. Excitation is provided through multiphase stator windings that typically employ compact coils concentrated around the teeth. Torque is produced by energizing in appreciate sequence the phase windings, which tends to move the rotor from an unaligned toward an aligned position. The inductance of a phase winding increases as the rotor moves from the unaligned to the aligned position. Motoring torque is produced for as long as the phase winding remains energized when the inductance is increasing. The phase current must be switched off by the time the rotor reaches the aligned position for which the torque is zero. If the phase would continue to carry current beyond this position, a braking torque would be produced. The direction of the torque, being the outcome of attractive force corresponding to an equivalent electromagnet, represented by the stator active phase and the ferromagnetic rotor, is independent of the polarity of current. Neglecting saturation, it can be proved that the torque is given by

T=

i 2 dL 2 dθ

where i is the phase current, L is the phase inductance, and q is the rotor position. A typical power electronic inverter employed for SRM consist of an asymmetric H-bridge with the schematic illustrated in Fig. 15-35. The use of other inverter topologies with reduced number of switches per phase has been subject of research.

FIGURE 15-34  Cross-section of a 3-phase, 12-slot, 8-pole SRM (left). Flux lines and magnetic flux density illustrating substantially higher magnetic loading in the aligned position (right) than in the unaligned position (center).

FIGURE 15-35 Circuit diagram for an asymmetric bridge inverter typically employed for SRMs.

15_Santoso_Sec15_p0919-0960.indd 954

21/11/17 6:54 PM

Electric Machines: Motors And Drives   955 

In an SRM, positive motoring torque can be produced by each phase at the most for only 180 electrical degrees, as in a symmetrical machine, the inductance profile is rising for half the electrical cycle and falling for the other half. Thus, in single-phase and two-phase machines there are positions of zero torque, which are eliminated in designs with three or more phases. Due to the double salient construction with concentrated coils, the mutual coupling between the phases is negligible and the SR has inherently improved fault tolerance. Three-phase SRMs can be designed with several different stator slot/rotor pole combinations, such as 6/4, 6/8, 6/10, and their multiples. During typical ideal operation, only one phase conducts at a time, and thus each phase conducts for 120 electrical degrees (Fig. 15-36). The rotational speed of the SRM is a function of the number of rotor poles, P, and stator supply fundamental frequency f, N=

60 f P

The motor phases are energized at “firing” angles based on the information provided by a position sensor or estimated by a sensorless control algorithm. The unaligned inductance being typically small, the rate of rise of current is high. Phase turn off is initiated as the rotor approaches the aligned position when the inductance is significantly higher, resulting in a slower rate of fall of current as compared to its rate of rise. Phase commutation leads to torque ripple and acoustic noise, which are cited as major limitations of this machine. The main losses in SRMs include stator copper FIGURE 15-36  Phase currents and inductance prolosses and core losses in both the stator and file, and the electromagnetic torque illustrating the ideal rotor. As the flux density in different parts operation of an SRM. Only one phase produces torque at a of the magnetic circuit has high peak values given time. In real operation, the rates of rise and fall of curand high-frequency components the core rent are limited by the phase inductance and applied voltloss can be significant. SRM drives can have age, the waveforms deviate from the ideal profiles shown in very wide constant power operating regions. the figure and the torque ripple maybe substantially higher. Operation in this case may require advance turning on the phases and continuous phase conduction. Owing to its simple construction, lack of permanent magnets, wide constant power region with potential high efficiency, SRMs attracted substantial industrial and research interest over the last decades. For example, variations of this machine with full pitched windings, or with segmented rotor constructions, or with high number of rotor poles, as well as specific converters with reduced number of switches per phase have been proposed and studied.

15_Santoso_Sec15_p0919-0960.indd 955

21/11/17 6:54 PM

956  SECTION FIFTEEN

15.8.4  Synchronous Reluctance Motors Synchronous reluctance motors (SynRM) have a stator similar to that of an induction machine with distributed windings and a laminated rotor designed in order to achieve highly different reluctance along a d and q axis, respectively, resulting a high saliency ratio. The torque in an SynRM is produced because of the tendency of the rotor to align its highest magnetic permeance axis along the axis of the rotating field. Maximizing the saliency ratio is key to the design in order to improve the torque output. The typical implementation is with rotor laminations incorporating slots and bridges in order to create preferential magnetic flux guides or channels. Other rotor topologies that were subject of research included axially laminated versions. A power electronics inverter is typically employed and a position encoder or a sensor-less means of rotor position estimation is required in order to determine the phase of the applied stator currents. An SynRM can be vector controlled, similarly to a PMSM and IM. On line start-up, without an inverter maybe possible by incorporating in the rotor a squirrel cage, similar to that of an induction motor. The major advantage of SynRMs over PMSMs is represented by the lack of permanent magnets. Benefits of SynRMs above induction machines include significantly reduced, virtually zero, rotor losses and hence the potential for higher efficiency. Ranges of SynRMs of the very high IE4 efficiency class have become recently commercially available. The power factor of SynRMs is relatively low and an improvement in this respect can be achieved by the addition of permanent magnets optimally placed in the high-reluctance rotor structure. Such designs, typically referred to as permanent magnet (PM) assisted SynRM, have typically higher specific torque, efficiency, and constant power speed range.

15.9  OTHER SPECIAL MOTORS Multiphase Motors.  AC motors with more than three phases may provide the benefits of increased redundancy, higher torque density, lower rating of power electronics, reduction of the dc bus voltage ripple, lower mmf harmonics and torque ripple. For example, in the case of 3-phase IMs and PMSMs, the fifth and seventh harmonics from the the stator mmf produce sixth harmonic torque pulsations and cause additional losses in the rotor. The effect of these can be mitigated by using a multiphase stator configuration with two sets of three-phase windings shifted by 30° electrical from each other, wherein the torque ripple has a 12th harmonic of lower magnitude. Furthermore, in a PM motor, particularly of the BLDC type, there may be a significant third harmonic component in the back emf and, for example, in a 5-phase third harmonic currents can be used to produce additional torque. Stator PM Motors.  Such motors incorporate in the stator windings and PMs. The rotor contraction is similar to that from an SRM. In one topology, the stator has a salient structure, also similar to that of an SRM, and the PMs are placed in the stator back iron such that flux linked with the concentrated stator coils is a function of rotor position. In such a motor, the torque is produced both in the positive and negative half cycles and the flux linking the phase winding does not reverse. In another topology, typically referred to as a flux-switching machine, the PMs are placed in the center of the stator teeth, around which concentrated coils are placed. As the salient pole rotor moves through one rotor pole pitch, the flux linked with the coil varies from a positive maximum to zero, to negative maximum. The topology may have advantages in terms of specific torque output, but additional space is required by the PMs and manufacturing is complex. In contrast, in a motor of the flux reversal type, the PMs are placed on the face of the stator teeth facing the air gap. This approach simplifies the manufacturing. A typical drawback is a low power factor, as not all the PMs are simultaneously active. Stator PM machines have the advantages that most of the losses occur in the stator, which simplifies the cooling. The reliability is also higher because the permanent magnets are stationary. Similar to other PM synchronous machines, these machines can be driven with a vector controlled voltage source inverter.

15_Santoso_Sec15_p0919-0960.indd 956

21/11/17 6:54 PM

Electric Machines: Motors And Drives   957 

Pseudo-Direct Drive PM Motors.  These motors include, apart from a stator and a rotor, another active component in the form of a modulator resulting in very high torque output that may benefit especially low-speed applications of the direct-drive type. The fundamental component of the stator armature mmf is different from the number of PM rotor poles and the interaction is made possible through the modulator, which may be rotating or stationary. Different variations of this topology exists, including constructions in which the modulator is stationary and represented by notches that profile the stator tooth tips facing the air gap or is constructed as a separate body with alternating ferromagnetic and nonmagnetic sections. Low-power factor may be an issue, which may not be significant if the speed is substantially low and torque is high, such that the size of the electric machine is large and its cost is substantially higher than that of power electronics—or may require special design measures.

15.10  AC COMMUTATOR MOTORS Classification.  As compared with the induction motor, the ac commutator motor possesses two of the advantages of the dc motor: a wide speed range without sacrifice of efficiency and superior starting ability. In the induction motor, the starting torque is limited by the small space-phase displacement between the air-gap flux and the induced secondary current and by magnetic saturation of the flux paths. In the ac commutator motor, on the other hand, the air-gap flux and current are held at the optimum space-phase displacement by proper location of the brush axis, and the secondary current is not limited by magnetic saturation, giving high torque per ampere at starting. Furthermore, the series commutator motor may be operated far above the induction-motor synchronous speed, giving high power output per unit of weight. Single-Phase Straight Series Motor.  An ordinary dc series motor, if constructed with a welllaminated field circuit, will operate (although unsatisfactorily) if connected to a suitable source of single-phase alternating current. Since the armature is in series with the field, the periodic reversals of current in the armature will correspond with simultaneous reversals in the direction of the flux, and consequently the torque will always be in the same direction. But the inductance of the motor will be so great that the current will lag far behind the voltage, and the motor will have a very low power factor. The entire amount of armature flux produced along the brush axis generates a reactive voltage in the armature, which must be overcome by the applied voltage, without performing any useful function. The simple single-phase series motor has therefore two major faults, low power factor and poor commutation at low speeds, confining its use to fractional horsepower and very high-speed applications.

Single-Phase Compensated Series Motor.  In all, except the smallest sizes, it is usual to employ a compensating winding on the stator, in series with the armature and so arranged that its mmf as nearly as possible counteracts the armature mmf. A commutating winding is also frequently used, which somewhat overcompensates the armature reaction along the interpolar, or commutatingzone, axis and so provides a voltage to aid the current reversal, just as in a dc motor. By these means, the flux along the brush axis is reduced to a small fraction of its uncompensated value, and the power factor of the motor is greatly improved. Further improvement of the power factor is secured by using a smaller air gap and correspondingly fewer field ampere-turns than in an uncompensated motor, thus reducing the reactive voltage in the series field to a minimum. Universal Motors.  Small series motors up to about ½-hp rating are commonly designed to operate on either direct current or alternating current and so are called universal motors. Universal motors may be either compensated or uncompensated; the latter type is used for the higher speeds and smaller ratings only. Owing to the reactance voltage drop, which is present on alternating current but absent on direct current, the motor speed is somewhat lower for the same load ac operation,

15_Santoso_Sec15_p0919-0960.indd 957

21/11/17 6:54 PM

958  SECTION FIFTEEN

especially at high loads. On alternating current, however, the increased saturation of the field magnetic circuit at the crest of the sine wave of current may materially reduce the flux below the dc value, and this tends to raise the ac speed. It is possible, therefore, to design small universal motors to have approximately the same speed-torque performance over the operating range, for all frequencies from 0 to 60 Hz. On a typical compensated-type ¼-hp motor, rated at 3400 r/min, the 60-Hz speed may be within 2% of the dc speed at full-load torque but 15% or more lower at twice normal torque, while on an uncompensated motor the speed drop will be materially greater.

15.11  MOTOR-PROTECTING DEVICES Fuses should be provided for motor circuits, in accordance with the NEC. The current rating of the fuse must be considerably higher than the current rating of the motor, or the fuse will blow when the motor is started. For that reason fuses do not provide adequate overload protection. They furnish protection for the motor only in case of a short circuit or a very heavy overload. Their primary purpose is to protect the circuit rather than the motor. Magnetic-type overload relays are operated by direct magnetic action of the motor current on a plunger. The relay consists of a series coil connected in the motor circuit and a plunger which is pulled up into the center of the coil when a certain value of current has been reached. When the plunger is lifted, a contact is tripped, opening the motor contactor-coil circuit and disconnecting the motor from the line. The tripping current can be varied by adjusting the initial position of the plunger with respect to the coil. Time delay in tripping is obtained by attaching a small oil dashpot to the plunger. The time delay can be adjusted so that the overload will not trip on the starting-current inrush but will trip on small sustained overloads. Thermal overload relays are available in the bimetallic type and the fusible-alloy type. The bimetallic type has two heaters in series with the circuit to be protected, and above these heaters are two strips of bimetallic material, which act as latches for the contact members. Bending of the bimetallic strips under heating of overload current will release the latches and allow the contacts to open. The fusible-alloy type has two heaters, each surrounding a thermal element consisting of a small tube, inside which is a loose-fitting shaft. The tube and shaft are rigidly joined by a special lowmelting eutectic alloy. On overload, the increased current drawn melts the alloy, allowing the shaft to turn and the contacts to open. Characteristics of a typical thermal overload are shown in Fig. 15-37. An inspection of these curves shows that the thermal overload adequately protects the wiring, that the fuse blows first on short-circuit current, and that the thermal relay allows the motor ample time to accelerate. A thermal overload has a tripping characteristic which corresponds closely to the heating characteristics of a motor and, therefore, provides an ideal protecting means. An overload coil should be selected so that the maximum permissible output can be obtained from the motor. A motor rated 40°C rise on the basis of 40°C ambient temperature will have a final safe temperature of approximately 95°C and will operate at 15% overload continuously without overheating. An overload coil should therefore be selected having an ultimate tripping current equivalent to 15% overload on the motor. A continuous overload of 15% would therefore ultimately trip the thermal relay. For overloads in excess of 15%, the tripping time would be shorter than the time required FIGURE 15-37  Characteristics of thermal for the motor to reach a dangerous temperature. overload relays.

15_Santoso_Sec15_p0919-0960.indd 958

21/11/17 6:54 PM

Electric Machines: Motors And Drives   959 

Low-voltage protection is the effect of a device, operative on the reduction or failure of voltage, to cause and maintain the interruption of power to the main circuit. With magnetic controllers, this protection is obtained by using some form of 3-wire master switch. Should the line voltage drop to a low value or fail altogether, the main-line contactor will open and remain open, stopping the motor. To restart, it is necessary to push the “start” button. This type of control should always be used where the unexpected restarting of a motor after voltage failure may be dangerous to workers or equipment. Low-voltage release is the effect of a device, operative on the reduction or failure of voltage, to cause the interruption of power to the main circuit but not to prevent the reestablishment of the main circuit on return of voltage. Such protection is obtained when a 2-wire pilot device, for example, a snap switch, float switch, or pressure switch, is used. Phase-failure protection is the effect of a device, operative upon the failure of power in one wire of a polyphase circuit, to cause and maintain the interruption of power in all the wires of the circuit. Phase-reversal protection is the effect of a device, operative on the reversal of the phase rotation in a polyphase circuit, to cause and maintain the interruption of power in all wires of the circuit. Protection of this type is necessary on elevators, where reversing of the phases would cause the car to start in a direction opposite to that in which the operator expects it to move. Field-failure protection is usually provided in controllers for dc shunt- and compound-wound motors. The coil of a relay is connected in series with the motor shunt field, and a normally open contact of the relay is connected in the stop circuit. If the field circuit is opened, the relay will be deenergized and the motor will be disconnected from the line. This prevents overspeeding the motor owing to an open circuit in the field. A field protective relay is used to insert resistance in series with the shunt field whenever the motor is not running. The coil of the relay is connected in parallel with the main switch coil, and a normally open relay contact is used to short-circuit a step of resistor in the field circuit. The resistor should be designed to reduce the voltage across the field to one-half line voltage. This reduces the field wattage to one-fourth the normal value and prevents overheating the field with the motor at standstill. A field-discharge resistor should be provided for 230-V motors rated 7½ hp or more and for 550-V motors rated 5 hp or more whenever the shunt-field circuit must be opened. The ohmic value of a discharge resistor should be 1 to 3 times the ohms in the field. If a resistance of three times the field ohms is used, the induced voltage, when the circuit is opened, will be four times normal line voltage. This voltage, caused by the inductance of the field, must be limited to prevent damage to the insulation of the field windings. On nonreversing controllers without dynamic braking, the shunt field can be connected behind the main contactor and the field allowed to discharge through the motor armature.

15.12 BIBLIOGRAPHY 15.12.1  Books and Publications Alerich, W. N., and Herman, S. L., Electric Motor Control, Delmar Publishing, Albany, New York, 1998. Andreas, J. C., Energy-Efficient Electric Motors, Selection and Application, Marcel Dekker, New York, 1992. Beaty, H. W., and Kirtley, J. L., Jr., Electric Motor Handbook, McGraw-Hill, New York, 1998. Boldea, S. Nasar, Electric Drives, 2nd ed., CRC Press, 2006. Bose, B. K., Adjustable Speed AC Drive Systems, IEEE Press, New York, 1980. Chapman, S. J., Electric Machinery Fundamentals, McGraw-Hill, New York, 1998. Chau, K. T., “Vernier Permanent Magnet Motor Drives,” in Electric Vehicle Machines and Drives: Design, Analysis and Application, 1, Wiley-IEEE Press, 2015. Cochran, P. L., Polyphase Induction Motors, Analysis, Design, Application, Marcel Dekker, New York, 1989. Deodhar, R. P., Andersson, S., Boldea, I., and Miller, T. J. E., “The Flux-Reversal Machine: A New Brushless Doubly Salient Permanent-Magnet Machine,” in IEEE Transactions on Industry Applications, vol. 33, no. 4, pp. 925–934, Jul./Aug. 1997.

15_Santoso_Sec15_p0919-0960.indd 959

21/11/17 6:54 PM

960  SECTION FIFTEEN

Dorf, R. C. (ed.), The Electrical Engineering Handbook, 2nd ed., CRC Press, Boca Raton, Florida, 1997. EL-Refaie, M., “Fractional-Slot Concentrated-Windings Synchronous Permanent Magnet Machines: Opportunities and Challenges,” in IEEE Transactions on Industrial Electronics, vol. 57, no. 1, pp. 107–121, Jan. 2010. Emadi, Ali, Energy-Efficient Electric Motors, Marcel Dekker, New York, 2005. Fitzgerald, A. E., Kingsly, C., Jr., and Umans, S. D., Electric Machinery, 6th ed., McGraw-Hill, New York, 2005. Gieras, J. F., Wang, R. J., and Kamper, M. J., Axial Flux Permanent Magnet Brushless Machines, Springer, Netherland, 2008. Hamdi, E. S., and Hamdi, H. S., Design of Small Electrical Machines: Design and Measurement in Electronic Engineering, John Wiley & Sons, New York, 1994. Hendershot, J. R., and Miller, T. J. E., Design of Brushless Permanent Magnet Machines, 2nd ed., Motor Design Books LLC, 2010. Hughes, A., Electric Motors and Drives: Fundamentals, Types and Applications, Butterworth-Heinemann, Oxfordshire, England, 1993. Ishizaki, T. T., Takasaki, K., and Nishikata, S., “Theory and Optimum Design of PM Vernier Motor,” 1995 Seventh International Conference on Electrical Machines and Drives (Conf. Publ. No. 412), Durham, 1995, pp. 208–212. Kaiser, J., Electrical Power: Motors, Controls, Generators, Transformers, Goodheart-Willcox, Tinley Park, Illinois, 1998. Keljik, J., Electrical Motors and Motor Controls, Delmar Publishing, New York, 1995. Mecrow, B. C., and Jack, A. G., “A New High Torque Density Permanent Magnet Machine Configuration,” International Conference on Electric Machines, 1990. Miller, T. J. E., Switched Reluctance Machines and Their Control, Oxford University Press, 1993. Munoz-Garcia, A., Lipo, T. A., and Novotny, D. W., “A New Induction Motor V/f Control Method Capable of High-Performance Regulation at Low Speeds,” in IEEE Transactions on Industry Applications, vol. 34, no. 4, pp. 813–821, Jul./Aug. 1998. Murphy, J. M. D., Thyristor Control of AC Motors, Pergamon, New York, 1973. Nasar, S. A., and Boldea, I., Linear Motion Electric Machines, Wiley, New York, 1976. Novotny, D. W., and Lipo, T. A., Vector Control and Dynamics of AC Drives, Clarendon Press, Oxford, England, 1996 (Imprint of Oxford University Press). Parsa, L., “On Advantages of Multi-Phase Machines,” 31st Annual Conference of IEEE Industrial Electronics Society, IECON 2005, 2005. Rodriguez, J., Jih-Sheng Lai, and Fang Zheng Peng, “Multilevel Inverters: A Survey of Topologies, Controls, and Applications,” in IEEE Transactions on Industrial Electronics, vol. 49, no. 4, pp. 724–738, Aug. 2002. Say, M. G., Alternating Current Machines, 5th ed., Wiley, New York, 1983. Sen, P. C., Principles of Electric Machines and Power Electronics, 2nd ed., Wiley, New York, 1996. Shoults, D. R., Rife, C. J., and Johnson, T. C., Electric Motors in Industry, Wiley, New York, 1942. Smeaton, R. W., Motor Application and Maintenance Handbook, McGraw-Hill, New York, 1969. Subrahmanyam, V., Electric Drives: Concepts and Applications, McGraw-Hill, New York, 1996. Wheeler, P. W., Rodriguez, J., Clare, J. C., Empringham, L., and Weinstein, A., “Matrix Converters: A Technology Review,” in IEEE Transactions on Industrial Electronics, vol. 49, no. 2, pp. 276–288, Apr. 2002. Zhu, Z. Q., “Switched Flux Permanent Magnet Machines—Innovation Continues,” 2011 International Conference on Electrical Machines and Systems, Beijing, 2011, pp. 1–10.

15.12.2 Websites American National Standards Institute: http://ansi.org/IEEE Press: http://shop.ieee.org/ Library of Congress: http://catalog.loc.gov/McGraw-Hill.Professional Books: http://books.mcgraw-hill.com/ Wiley Publications: http://wiley.com/ http://www.ti.com/lit/an/sprabq8/sprabq8.pdf http://www.cypress.com/file/253451/download

15_Santoso_Sec15_p0919-0960.indd 960

21/11/17 6:54 PM

16

POWER ELECTRONICS Alex Q. Huang Dula D. Cockrell Centennial Chair in Engineering, Univesity of Texas at Austin

Xu She Lead Electrical Engineer, GE Global Research

16.1 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 962 16.1.1 Role of Power Electronic Converters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 962 16.1.2 Application Examples. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 962 16.2 PRINCIPLES OF SWITCHED MODE POWER CONVERSION. . . . . . . . . 964 16.2.1 Bi-Positional Switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 964 16.2.2 Pulse Width Modulation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 965 16.2.3 Concept of Steady State. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 967 16.2.4 Power Loss in the Bi-Positional Switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 968 16.3 DC TO DC CONVERTERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 969 16.3.1 Buck Converter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 969 16.3.2 Boost Converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 972 16.3.3 Flyback Converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 973 16.3.4 Full Bridge DC-DC Converter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 974 16.3.5 Other Isolated DC-DC Converters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 975 16.4 FEEDBACK CONTROL OF POWER ELECTRONIC CONVERTERS. . . . 976 16.4.1 Dynamic Modeling. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 977 16.4.2 Control Design. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 979 16.4.3 Current Mode Control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 980 16.4.4 Other Control Techniques. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 980 16.5 DC TO AC CONVERSION: INVERSION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 982 16.5.1 Single-Phase AC Synthesis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 982 16.5.2 Three-Phase AC Synthesis. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 985 16.5.3 Space Vector Modulation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 986 16.5.4 Multilevel Converters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 987 16.6 AC TO DC CONVERSION: RECTIFICATION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 991 16.6.1 Single-Phase Diode Bridge Rectifier. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 992 16.6.2 Three-Phase Diode Bridge Rectifier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 994 16.6.3 Controlled Thyristor Rectifiers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 994 16.7 AC TO AC CONVERSION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 998 16.7.1 Thyristor Cyclo-Converters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 998 16.7.2 Matrix Converters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 998 16.7.3 AC Regulator. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 999 16.8 APPLICATIONS OF POWER ELECTRONIC CONVERTERS. . . . . . . . . . . 999 16.8.1 DC Power Supplies. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 999 16.8.2 Electric Drives. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1000 16.8.3 Battery Charging. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1003 16.8.4 Fluorescent Lamps and Solid-State Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1004 16.8.5 Automotive Applications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1006 Grateful acknowledgment is given to past contributors to this section: Amit Kumar Jain and Raja Ayyanar. 961

16_Santoso_Sec16_p0961-1052.indd 961

22/11/17 10:59 AM

962  SECTION SIXTEEN



16.9 UTILITY APPLICATIONS OF POWER ELECTRONICS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1007 16.9.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1007 16.9.2 Renewable and Distributed Generation Interface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1008 16.9.3 Distributed Generation and Microgrids. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1011 16.9.4 Electric-Sourced Transportation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1011 16.9.5 Flexible AC Transmission Systems. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1012 16.9.6 Custom Power. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1016 16.9.7 Solid State Transformers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1018 16.9.8 Modular Multilevel Converters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1022 16.10 COMPONENTS OF POWER ELECTRONIC CONVERTERS. . . . . . . . . . . 1025 16.10.1 Silicon Power Semiconductor Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1025 16.10.2 Wide Bandgap Power Semicoductors Devices. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1030 16.10.3 Magnetic Components. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1039 16.10.4 Capacitors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1044 16.10.5 Heat Sinks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1045 16.11 REFERENCES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1045

16.1 INTRODUCTION 16.1.1  Role of Power Electronic Converters Power electronics is an enabling technology that achieves conversion of electric power from one form to another utilizing a combination of high-power semiconductor devices and passive components— chiefly transformers, inductors, and capacitors. The input and output may be ac or dc and may differ in magnitude and frequency. The conversion sometimes involves multiple stages with two or more converters connected in a cascade. The end goals of a power electronic converter are to achieve high efficiency of conversion, minimize size and weight, and achieve desired regulation of the output. Figure 16-1 shows power electronic converters in a generic application.

Source

Power electronic converter Controller

Load

Measurements

FIGURE 16-1  Application of power electronic converters.

16.1.2  Application Examples Power electronic converters can be classified into four different types on the basis of input and output— dc-dc, dc-ac, ac-dc, and ac-ac, named with the first part referring to the input and the second to the output. The diode bridge rectifier is the front end for most low-power converters. It converts line frequency ac (e.g., from a wall outlet) to an unregulated dc voltage, and the process is commonly called rectification. In a dc-dc converter both the input and the output are dc, and in the simplest case the output voltage needs to be regulated in presence of variation in load current and changes in the input voltage. A computer power supply has a diode bridge front end followed by a dc-dc converter, the combination of which converts line frequency ac voltage to several regulated dc

16_Santoso_Sec16_p0961-1052.indd 962

22/11/17 10:59 AM

POWER ELECTRONICS   963

12 V dc

5 V dc 5 V dc

120 V, 60 Hz ac ac/dc converter (rectifier) Controller dc/dc converter

FIGURE 16-2  Computer power supply.

voltages (Fig. 16-2). Electronic ballasts for compact fluorescent lamps consist of a line frequency rectifier followed by a dc to high-frequency ac converter (frequency range of 20 to 100 kHz) whose output is connected to a resonant tank circuit that includes the load. In an adjustable speed motor drive application (Fig. 16-3), the input is a three-phase ac supply, and the output is a three-phase ac whose magnitude and frequency are varied for optimum steady state operation and dynamic requirements of the drive. dc/ac converter (inverter) ac/dc converter (rectifier)

Motor

3 phase 60 Hz ac Currents DSP based control Position

FIGURE 16-3  Adjustable speed motor drive.

Development of power semiconductors with very high voltage and current ratings has enabled the use of power electronic converters for utility applications. In transmission systems, power electronic converters are being utilized to control power flow, damp power oscillations, and enhance system stability. At the distribution level, power electronic converters are used for enhancing power quality by means of dynamic voltage restorers, static var compensators, and active filters. Power electronic converters also play a significant role in grid connection of distributed generation and especially renewable energy sources; their functions include compensation for steady state and dynamic source characteristics leading to optimal energy transfer from the source, and protective action during contingencies.

16_Santoso_Sec16_p0961-1052.indd 963

22/11/17 10:59 AM

964  SECTION SIXTEEN

Future automotives are expected to have a large number of power electronic converters performing various functions, e.g., electric power steering, active suspension, control over various loads, and transferring power between the conventional 14-V bus and the 42-V Power Net,1 which has already been adopted in some high-end vehicles. Hybrid electric and all-electric vehicles also utilize controlled power electronic converters for interfacing the battery and motor/generator. The proliferation of power electronics connected to the utility grid has also led to power quality concerns due to injection of harmonic currents by grid-connected inverters, and highly distorted currents drawn by diode bridge rectifiers. Due to fast transients of voltages and currents within power converters, they can be a source of electromagnetic emissions leading to electromagnetic interference. Several solutions to limit and correct for these effects have therefore been developed.

16.2  PRINCIPLES OF SWITCHED MODE POWER CONVERSION This subsection presents some basic principles that are common to the analysis of most switch mode power converters. 16.2.1  Bi-Positional Switch The most basic component of a switch mode power converter is the bi-positional switch shown in Fig. 16-4a. Nodes 1 and 2 of the switch are invariably connected across a dc voltage source (or across a big capacitor whose voltage is close to a constant dc), and pole A of the switch is in series with a dc current source (or a big inductor whose current is close to a constant dc). This bi-positional switch, which is also referred to as a switching power pole, switches at very high frequencies, and is controlled by the signal qA(t). The switched pole A voltage and the input current based on the control signal qA(t) are listed in Table 16-1, and the corresponding waveforms shown in Fig. 16-4b. qA(t)

iin(t)

1 0

+ 1 A

Vin

iA(t)

0

+ 2

_

t

vA(t) V in

vA(t)

iin(t)

t

ia

_ 0

qA(t) (a)

TON

t TS (b)

FIGURE 16-4  (a) Bi-positional switch, (b) switching waveforms.

Figure 16-5a shows the electronic implementation of a complete bi-positional switch using MOSFETs. This implementation can support pole current in either direction and is useful for applications where current direction can reverse. In most dc to dc converter applications, the current through the pole A is unidirectional, and hence, the implementation shown in Fig. 16-5b is sufficient to realize the bi-positional switch.

16_Santoso_Sec16_p0961-1052.indd 964

22/11/17 10:59 AM

POWER ELECTRONICS   965

TABLE 16-1  States of a Bi-Positional Switch qA(t)

Switch position

MOSFET and diode state

Pole voltage and input current

1 2

S1 and D1 ON, S2 and D2 OFF S1 and D1 OFF, S2 and D2 ON

uA = Vin, iin = iA uA = 0, iin = 0

1 0

iin(t)

iin(t)

1

1 +

D1

S1

+

S1

iA(t)

iA(t)

D2

S2

+

+

vA(t)

_

A

Vin

A

Vin

D2

_

_

vA(t) _

2

2 (a)

(b)

FIGURE 16-5  Electronic implementation of bi-positional switch: (a) for bidirectional pole current, (b) for unidirectional pole current.

16.2.2  Pulse Width Modulation The concept of pulse width modulation (PWM) is central to all switch mode power converters. PWM refers to the control of the average value of a switching variable, for example, uA(t) in Fig. 16-4b, by controlling or modulating its pulse width. Some basic concepts and definitions necessary to understanding PWM are presented here. Duty Ratio.  The frequency at which the bi-positional switch is switched on and off is denoted by fs, and the corresponding time period by Ts (= 1/f s ). The transition between the two states of the switch occurs in a very small duration compared to Ts. The time for which the switch remains in position 1 during a switching period is denoted by Ton. The duty ratio d of the bi-positional switch is then defined as the ratio of on-time to total time period

d=

Ton (16-1) Ts

Averaging.  Currents and voltages in power electronic converters have (a) high-frequency components corresponding to the switching frequency of the bi-positional switch elements, and (b) low-frequency components due to slower variations caused by change in load demand, source magnitude, and changes in reference value of the desired outputs. For dynamic control and steady-state analysis, the low-frequency components are of primary interest. To study these components, it is sufficient to study

16_Santoso_Sec16_p0961-1052.indd 965

22/11/17 10:59 AM

966  SECTION SIXTEEN

their averages over one switching time period. It should be noted that the averaging presented here2 is a very basic form of the general averaging method3 and has limitations in terms of validity w.r.t. the switching frequency. However, this simplification is good enough for most practical purposes, and can be confidently used for steady state and dynamics up to one-fifth the switching frequency. Throughout this section the averaged variables, that is, averaged over one switching period, are denoted by a ‘-’ on top of the variables. Thus, the averaged value of x(t) is given by x (t ) =



1 Ts

∫

t

t −Ts

x (τ ) dτ (16-2)

In steady state, the average values of qA (t ) and υ A (t ) are given by



qA =

1 Ts

∫

υA =

1 Ts

∫

Ts 0

Ts 0

qA (τ ) dτ =

1 Ts

∫

υ A (τ ) dτ =

1 Ts

∫

Ton 0

Ton 0

1 dτ =

Ton = d (16-3) Ts

Vin dτ = d ⋅Vin

(16-4)



In general, the averaged quantities can be time varying, since the pulse widths of the switching waveform can vary with time. Thus,

qA (t ) = d(t )



υ A (t ) = d(t ) ⋅Vin

(16-5)



(16-6)



As an example of PWM, we can regulate the average value of uA(t) in Fig. 16-4b by varying the duty ratio d. If Vin = 10 V, fs = 100 kHz ⇒ Ts = 10 ms, then Ton = 5 ms ⇒ d = 0.5, and uA = 5 V, etc. By varying the duty ratio sinusoidally a low-frequency ac voltage can be synthesized from a dc voltage as illustrated in Fig. 16-6. 60 V vA(t)

vA(t)

40 V

20 V

0V 0s

1 ms

2 ms

3 ms

4 ms

V (PWR_SWITCH1: OUT, PWR_SWITCH4: in)

5 ms

6 ms

7 ms

8 ms

9 ms

10 ms

V (V4: +)*52 Time

FIGURE 16-6  AC synthesis using PWM.

16_Santoso_Sec16_p0961-1052.indd 966

22/11/17 10:59 AM

POWER ELECTRONICS   967

16.2.3  Concept of Steady State A converter is said to be in dc steady state when all its waveforms exactly repeat in each switching period, that is, x (t ) = x (t − Ts )∀t , where x is any of the converter variables. With reference to Eq. (16-2), it is clear that in steady state the average value of any variable is constant. Analysis of steady-state operation is essential to determine ratings and design of the power stage components in the converter, viz., power semiconductor devices, inductor, capacitors, and transformers. Important concepts that enable steady-state analysis from a circuit viewpoint are discussed below. It should be remembered that these are only valid during steady-state operation. Steady-State Averages of Inductor Voltage and Capacitor Current.  The instantaneous v-i relationship for an inductor is

υ L (t ) = L

diL (t ) dt

iL (t ) = iL (0) +

or

1 L

t

∫ υ (τ )dτ (16-7) 0

L

where uL(t) is the voltage across the inductor and iL(t) is the current flowing through the inductor. Since iL (Ts ) = iL (0) in steady state, from the integral form of Eq. (16-7) it follows that

υL =

1 Ts

∫

Ts 0

υ L (τ ) dτ = 0 (16-8)

The above relationship can also be derived directly in terms of the averaged quantities as below

υ L (t ) = L

diL (t ) = 0  [since iL (t ) is constant in steady state] dt

(16-9)

This is referred to as volt-second balance in an inductor. Figure 16-7 shows a typical steady-state waveform of an inductor voltage for many power converters. As seen, the positive area is exactly cancelled by the negative area, making the average value zero. It may be mentioned that during the start-up transient, u–L remains positive for several switching cycles, allowing the inductor current to rise vL(t) from zero to its final steady-state value. In a similar fashion it can be shown that in steady state the average current through a A capacitor is zero. This is referred to as amperesecond balance in a capacitor. Note that though 0 t the average value of the capacitor current is zero, B its root mean square (RMS) value, which is one of the main selection criteria for a capacitor, can be substantial depending on the converter Area A = Area B topology. Power Balance.  For analytical purposes, it is often useful to neglect all losses in the converter and consider input power to be equal to the output power, again in an average sense.

FIGURE 16-7  Volt-second balance for an inductor.

– – Pin = u–in iin = Po = u–o io (16-10) This implies that there is no increase or decrease in the energy stored in inductors and capacitors over one switching time period. This is valid for the input-output of the entire converter as well as any intermediate stage.

16_Santoso_Sec16_p0961-1052.indd 967

22/11/17 10:59 AM

968  SECTION SIXTEEN

Kirchoff ’s Laws for Averages.  Just like the instantaneous quantities, the averaged quantities also obey Kirchoff ’s current and voltage laws. The sum of average currents entering a node is zero. The proof follows from interchanging the order of summation (for individual currents) and integration (over a switching time period):



∑ i = T ∑  ∫ k

k

1

s

Ts

0

k

 1 ik  =  Ts

Ts

∫ ∑ i  = 0 k

0

k

(since

∑ i ≡ 0) (16-11) k

k

Similarly, the sum of average voltages in a circuit loop is zero.

∑υ



k

= 0 (16-12)

k

16.2.4  Power Loss in the Bi-Positional Switch Electronic implementations of the bi-positional switch shown in Fig. 16-5a and b use semiconductor switches and diodes, and they have significant power loss. The power loss can be divided into two kinds—conduction loss and switching loss. With reference to Fig. 16-5b, when the MOSFET is ON there is a nonzero voltage across it. Similarly the diode has a forward voltage drop while it is conducting. Both of these lead to power loss whose sum averaged over one switching time period is called conduction loss. A finite time interval is required to transition from one state to the other: (MOSFET ON and diode OFF) to (MOSFET OFF and diode ON), and vice versa. While the MOSFET is turning OFF, the diode cannot conduct until it is forward biased. As the voltage across the MOSFET increases from near zero to the full input voltage Vin , it conducts the full output current. Once the diode is forward biased the current starts transferring from the MOSFET to the diode. During the reverse transition, first current is transferred from the diode to the MOSFET, and then the voltage across the MOSFET reduces from Vin to the conduction voltage drop. Thus, the MOSFET incurs significant power loss during both transitions. The above description is simplified and there are other phenomena which contribute to loss during the transitions. The diode also has power loss during the transitions. The sum of losses in the MOSFET and diode during the transitions averaged over one switching time period is called the switching loss. Switching power loss increases with increase in switching frequency and increase in transition times. Sum of the conduction and switching loss, computed as averages over one complete switching periods, gives the total power loss shown in Fig. 16-8. isw

vsw

Io

Vin

Ploss

t FIGURE 16-8  Switching transients in bi-positional switch implementation.

16_Santoso_Sec16_p0961-1052.indd 968

22/11/17 10:59 AM

POWER ELECTRONICS   969

Similar losses occur in the realization of Fig. 16-5a. When S1 is turned off by its control signal, current iA(t) transfers to D2, the antiparallel diode of S2. After this transition S2 is turned on and the current transfers from the diode to the MOSFET channel (which can conduct in either direction). A short-time delay, called dead time, is required between the ON signals for S1 and S2. The dead time prevents potential shorting of the input voltage, also known as shoot-through fault. The nonidealities of nonzero voltage drop and switching times will be neglected for analysis of power electronic converters presented throughout this section. However, these are extremely important in design and selection of components for a real power converter.

16.3  DC TO DC CONVERTERS DC-DC converters represent one major area in power electronics. In a dc-dc converter, the input and output may differ in magnitude, the output may be electrically isolated from the input, and the output voltage may have to be regulated in the presence of variation in input voltage and load current. In a typical power distribution system for digital systems, several lower magnitude dc voltages are derived from a common input using one or more converters. Battery-powered portable devices use converters that boost the input 1.5 V cell voltage to 3.3, 5, or 9 V. Most of these converters have unidirectional power flow from input to output. The presentation here is limited to the basic converter types. The interested reader is referred to text books which deal with details of these converters.4–8 16.3.1  Buck Converter The buck converter is used to step down an input voltage to a lower magnitude output voltage. Figure 16-9a shows the schematic of a buck converter. A power MOSFET and diode combination is shown for implementation of the bi-positional switch with unidirectional output current. The bi-positional switch is followed by an L-C low-pass filter which attenuates the high-frequency switching component of the pole A voltage and provides a filtered dc voltage at the output. A high switching frequency is desirable to reduce the size of the filter, the higher limit depending on the power level of the converter and the semiconductor devices used. The final choice of switching frequency depends on several factors: size, weight, efficiency, and cost. It is usually above the audible range and frequencies above 100 kHz are very common. Operation.  The input voltage Vin is assumed to remain constant within a switching cycle. The inductor L and capacitor C are sufficiently large so that the inductor current iL and output voltage uo do not change significantly within one switching cycle. The load is represented by the resistor RL. Under steady-state operation it is assumed that the inductor current is always greater than zero. The MOSFET is turned ON in response to signal qA(t) for Ton = DTs, where D represents the steady-state duty ratio. During this time uA = Vin and iin = iL. When the MOSFET is turned OFF, the inductor current flows through diode D1 leading to ua = 0 and iin = 0. Since the average voltage across the inductor is zero, u–L = 0, the average output voltage is given by

u–o = u–a = DVin (16-13)

– The average current through the capacitor C, i¯c, is zero. Thus, iL = Io and the input current is given by

– iin = DIo (16-14)

From the above equations it is clear that the output voltage is lower than the input voltage and output current is higher than the input current. Also, power balance for averaged quantities can be verified

16_Santoso_Sec16_p0961-1052.indd 969

22/11/17 10:59 AM

970  SECTION SIXTEEN

iin

+

qA

S1

+

A

Vin

+ L

D

_

_

vL

+

iL

vA

D1

Io

+ _

iC R

C

Vo

_

_

ON interval

+ _

OFF interval

(a) qA vA

(b) qA = D

1 0

t

Vin

vA = DVin

0 Vin – Vo

vL

vL = 0

0 –Vo iL = Io

iL 0 iC

m1 =

m2 =

L

iC = 0

–Vo L

0

Vo 0 iin

iin = DIo 0

(c)

t

FIGURE 16-9  Buck converter: (a) circuit, (b) equivalent circuits during ON and OFF intervals, (c) steady-state waveforms.

from Eqs. (16-13) and (16-14). Within a switching cycle, instantaneous values of the inductor current and capacitor voltage vary as follows:

MOSFET ON:   L˙iL = Vin - uo MOSFET OFF:   L˙iL = -uo

C˙uo = iL - uo/RL C ˙uo = iL - uo/RL

(16-15)

Equivalent circuits for the two intervals and instantaneous waveforms are shown in Fig. 16-9b and c. Component Selection.  Usually the inductor and capacitor are significantly large so that within a switching period uo can be assumed constant in computation of iL. This leads to the linear variation of iL shown in Fig. 16-9c with a peak-to-peak ripple, ∆IL, given by

16_Santoso_Sec16_p0961-1052.indd 970

∆I L =

Vo (1 − D )Ts (16-16) L

22/11/17 10:59 AM

POWER ELECTRONICS   971

In most designs the inductance value is chosen to limit ∆IL between 10% and 30% of the full load current. Since the average capacitor current is zero, the instantaneous capacitor current is approximately equal to the ripple component of the inductor current. iC (t) = iL(t) - Io (16-17)



The peak-to-peak capacitor voltage ripple resulting from the capacitor current can then be derived as ∆Vo =



∆I L ⋅Ts (16-18) 8C

Capacitors used for filtering in most dc-dc converters are electrolytic capacitors which are characterized by significant effective series resistance (ESR) and effective series inductance (ESL). These parasitics also contribute to the output voltage ripple and should supplement Eq. (16-18) in the choice of capacitors. Film or ceramic capacitors, which have significantly lower ESR and ESL, are often used in addition with the electrolytic capacitors. The MOSFET has to be rated to block a voltage greater than Vin, and conduct an average current greater than Iin. Power dissipation and temperature considerations usually require MOSFETs to be rated for two to three times the maximum input average current expected. In addition, the peak MOSFET current, equal to the maximum peak of the inductor current, should not exceed its maximum current rating. The diode has to be rated to block Vin, and conduct an average current greater than the maximum output current. Diodes are usually chosen with ratings approximately two times the expected maximum current. Final selection of power semiconductors is based on a combination of acceptable power loss, cooling effort required to dissipate the power loss, maximum junction temperature with the available cooling mechanism, and reliability for expected operating conditions. PWM Control Implementation.  As evident from Eq. (16-13) the duty ratio of the switch controls the output voltage. In response to variation in input voltage and load current, the duty ratio has to be changed by a feedback-controlled system as shown in Fig. 16-10a. The error between the reference

vramp(t) Vo,ref Vo,sense

Error amplifier and controller

vc PWM

vc(t)

qA qA(t) 1 0

vramp PWM-IC (a)

DTS

t TS (b)

FIGURE 16-10  PWM generation: (a) ramp comparison, (b) control block diagram.

and actual output voltage is given to an appropriately designed error compensating amplifier, the output of which is a control voltage uc. This control voltage is compared with a constant frequency sawtooth waveform. The output of the comparator is the switching signal qA(t) which determines the ON or OFF state of the MOSFET. When the output voltage is lower than the reference value, the control voltage increases, leading to an increase in the duty ratio, which in turn increases the output voltage. The error amplifier and comparator, and several other features, are available in a single integrated circuit (e.g., UC3825A) available from several manufacturers.9–12 This integration of components leads to reduction in overall size and cost.

16_Santoso_Sec16_p0961-1052.indd 971

22/11/17 10:59 AM

972  SECTION SIXTEEN

16.3.2  Boost Converter As evident from the name the boost converter is used to step up an input voltage to a higher magnitude output voltage. Figure 16-11a shows the schematic. In this case the MOSFET is in the lower position while the diode is in the upper position. The inductor is on the input side and the output has a purely capacitive filter.

Io

id iin +

+ L

D1

vL

_

C

_

_ R

Vo vA

qA

+

+

+

iL S1

Vin

iC

ON interval +

_

_

_

D

OFF interval (b)

(a) qA

DTS

(1 – D)TS

1 0

t

Vo

vA vA = (1 – D) Vo 0 Vin

vL 0

Vin – Vo

iL 0

m1 =

iD

Vin L

m2 =

Vin – Vo L

iL

iD = Io 0

iC

0

–Io (c)

FIGURE 16-11  Boost converter: (a) circuit, (b) operating states, and (c) steady-state waveforms.

16_Santoso_Sec16_p0961-1052.indd 972

22/11/17 10:59 AM

POWER ELECTRONICS   973

Assumptions made for analysis of buck converter are made here as well. When the MOSFET is ON in response to qA(t) = 1, diode D1 is OFF, and the inductor current increases due to a positive voltage across it (Fig. 16-11b). When the MOSFET is switched OFF, the inductor current flows through diode D1 and its magnitude decreases as energy is transferred from the inductor to the output capacitor and load. Instantaneous values of the variables during ON and OFF intervals are

MOSFET ON

uA = 0;    id = 0     L˙iL = Vin ;        C˙uo = -uo/RL



MOSFET OFF

uA = uo;  id = iL  L˙iL = Vin -uo;  C˙uo = iL - uo/RL

(16-19)

– Noting that u–L = 0, the averaged pole A voltage is u–A = Vin = (1 - D)Vo. In addition, utilizing iC = 0 the steady state conversion ratios for the boost converter can be obtained as follows:

Vo 1 = Vin 1 − D

and

Iin 1 (16-20) = Io 1 − D

From the above equation it is evident that the output voltage is always higher than the input voltage, and conversely, the output current is always lower than the input current by the same ratio. Waveforms of the boost converter variables are shown in Fig. 16-11c. The PWM implementation is the same as in the buck converter (Fig. 16-10), with the control objective being regulation of output voltage to a desired value. The buck and boost converters are capable of either decreasing or increasing the input voltage magnitude but not both. The buck-boost converter is the third basic converter which can be used obtain an output voltage both lower and higher than the input voltage; since the output voltage is usually maintained constant, this implies that the input voltage may be higher or lower than the output voltage. A drawback of the buck-boost converter is that the output voltage polarity is inverted with respect to the input voltage return. The SEPIC converter (single-ended primary inductor converter) provides buck and boost gain without polarity inversion but at the expense of ´ additional components. The Cuk converter, derived from the buck-boost converter utilizing the duality of current and voltage, is another basic dc-dc converter topology.4,5 None of the above converters have electrical isolation between the input and the output, however, isolated versions for all of these can be derived. 16.3.3  Flyback Converter Figure 16-12a shows the buck-boost converter circuit. Discussion of this converter in its original configuration is omitted here. Instead, its electrically isolated version known as the flyback converter is described. The flyback converter is very common for low-power applications. It has the advantage of providing electrical isolation with low component count. Derivation of the flyback converter from the buck-boost converter is shown in Fig.  16-12a. The flyback converter has a coupled inductor instead of an inductor with just one winding. The primary winding is connected to the input while the secondary is connected to the output. The circuit diagram is shown in Fig. 16-12b. The coupled inductor is represented by an inductor on the primary and an ideal transformer between the primary and secondary. The coupling coefficient is assumed to be 1. Assuming the primary to secondary turns ratio is 1 : n, we get

υ L = Vin DTs −



⇒



⇒

16_Santoso_Sec16_p0961-1052.indd 973

Vo

Vin I in Io

Vo n

(1 − D )Ts = 0 (16-21)

=n

D (16-22) 1− D

=n

D (16-23) 1− D

22/11/17 10:59 AM

974  SECTION SIXTEEN

(a) vL + iL vL L _

iin + Vin

_

D1

isec

iC

+

C

_ Vo

Io

R

Vin –Vo /n

iL iin

S1 qA

isec

D

t (b)

(c)

FIGURE 16-12  Flyback converter: (a) derivation from buck-boost, (b) circuit, (c) steady-state waveforms.

Although the analysis presented here assumes that the inductor current never goes to zero (called continuous conduction mode or CCM), it is very common to design flyback converters so that the inductor current does go to zero within each switching cycle. This operation, known as discontinuous conduction mode (DCM), leads to simplification of control design for flyback converters.5 It should be noted that requirement of electrical isolation is not the only reason that a transformer or (coupled inductor) is used. Another important reason is that transformer turns ratio leads to better utilization of power semiconductor devices. 16.3.4  Full Bridge DC-DC Converter Figure 16-13a shows the full bridge dc-dc converter which is derived from the buck converter. The bridge circuit formed by switches S1, S2, S3, and S4, converts the input dc voltage to a high-frequency ac (≥ 100 kHz) which is applied to the primary of transformer T1. The high frequency results in a small size for the transformer. After isolation, the high-frequency ac at the secondary of the transformer is rectified by the center tapped diode bridge rectifier formed by D1 and D2, and subsequently filtered by the L and C as in a buck converter. The topology is very popular for power levels greater than 500 W, when isolation is required. Steady-state operating waveforms for the converter are shown in Fig. 16-13b. With switches S3 and S4 OFF, S1 and S2 are turned ON simultaneously for Ton = DTs /2, thereby applying a positive voltage across the transformer primary T1,prim and secondary T1,sec1. During this time diode D1 conducts and a positive voltage appears across the inductor. With all the switches OFF, the transformer primary and secondary voltages are zero and the inductor current splits equally between diodes D1 and D2. In the second half of the switching cycle S1 and S2 are OFF, while S3 and S4 are simultaneously turned on DTs/2. The rectified voltage waveform is similar to that in the buck converter and is at double the switching frequency of each switch. The magnetizing flux in the transformer is bi-directional

16_Santoso_Sec16_p0961-1052.indd 974

22/11/17 10:59 AM

POWER ELECTRONICS   975

iin S1

S3

D1

+ T1, sec1

Vin

T1, prim _

S4

T1, sec2

S2

L

iC

+ vrect _

Io

iL

+ Vo _

C R

D2

(a) s1, s2

ipri

s3, s4

vpri

isec

f

iLo

t vrect t (b)

FIGURE 16-13  Full bridge dc to dc converter: (a) circuit, (b) steady-state waveforms.

(Fig. 16-13b), resulting in better utilization of the core as discussed in the subsection “Transformer Design.” The conversion ratio is similar to the buck converter, but scaled by the secondary to primary transformer turns ratio. 16.3.5  Other Isolated DC-DC Converters Several other isolated converters are based on the buck converter. Figure 16-14a shows the forward converter. The operation and conversion ratio is similar to the buck converter. However, the output voltage is scaled by the transformer turns ratio, an additional winding and diode (DR) are needed to reduce the core flux to zero in each switching cycle, and an additional diode (D2) is required at the output. The forward and flyback converters have unidirectional core flux and are limited to lowpower applications. The push-pull converter (Fig. 16-14b), also derived from the buck converter, is better suited for higher power levels, limited by the voltage rating of the switches required. Details of these converters can be found in Refs. 4 and 5.

16_Santoso_Sec16_p0961-1052.indd 975

22/11/17 10:59 AM

976  SECTION SIXTEEN

Vin

vpri

+

+ D2

+ +

iL

isec

1:1: n

ipri

vsec

−

D1

−

vrect −

−

+ Vo −

+ S1

DR

ireset (a)

+ S1

S2

+

−

+

DTs S1

2

S2

Ts 2 (b)

FIGURE 16-14  Other isolated converters: (a) forward converter, (b) push-pull converter.

16.4  FEEDBACK CONTROL OF POWER ELECTRONIC CONVERTERS In the last subsection, we saw that the steady-state output of a dc-dc converter, usually the output voltage, is controlled by the duty ratio. To account for changes in load current, input voltage, losses, and nonidealities in the converter, feedback based automatic control is required. Figure 16-15 shows a block diagram of output voltage control for a buck converter. The laplace domain control block diagram is also shown. The sensed output voltage is multiplied by a feedback gain GFB(s) before being compared with a reference value. The error is fed to an appropriate error compensator which generates a control voltage uc that is converted to duty ratio d by the PWM block. Toward designing a suitable controller, we will first describe a dynamic model of the power converter and then a simple loop shaping control design method based on input to output bode plots. It is possible to design more complex controllers in order to meet specific requirements, and the

16_Santoso_Sec16_p0961-1052.indd 976

22/11/17 10:59 AM

POWER ELECTRONICS   977

+

+

Vin

Vo – d(t)

PWM

verr(s) vref (s)

+_

vc(t)

+

vc(s)

GC(s)

_

verr(t)

Voltage controller

d(s)

KPWM PWM

Controller

vfb(s)

Vo,ref

GP(s)

vo(s)

Power stage

GFB(s)

FIGURE 16-15  Block diagram of output voltage control for a buck converter.

converter topology or operating method may also be modified to make the control design easier (e.g., DCM operation of flyback converters). To keep the explanation simple it is assumed that the converter operates in CCM. 16.4.1  Dynamic Modeling The power converter essentially consists of the PWM block and the power stage itself. The feedback gain GFB is usually a constant. The PWM block shown in Fig. 16-10 converts the input control voltage u–c(t) to a duty ratio d(t). From geometrical considerations ˆ d(t)/u– (t) = 1/V = K (16-24) c

ramp

R

ˆ where V is the peak value of the ramp uramp(t). The power stage transfer function from d(s) to u–o(s) ramp can be derived using one of the methods stated below. Dynamics of Averaged Quantities.  As stated earlier, the bi-positional switch approach and averaging are valid for analyzing low-frequency dynamics (< fs/5) of the power converter. Unlike – steady-state analysis, under dynamic conditions u–L ≠ 0 and iC ≠ 0. Averaging the instantaneous state Eq. (16-25) over one switching cycle, dynamics of the averaged inductor current and capacitor voltage in a buck converter are – L i˙L = d(t) · Vin - u–o (16-25) ˙– = –i - u– /R (16-26) Cu o

L

o

L

Here the time varying duty cycle d(t) is the control input and the averaged output voltage u–o is the output that has to be regulated. The situation for the buck converter is simple because the model described by Eqs. (16-25) and (16-26) is linear if Vin and RL are assumed constant, for which case exact transfer functions describing large signal behavior can be derived. For boost and buck-boost

16_Santoso_Sec16_p0961-1052.indd 977

22/11/17 10:59 AM

978  SECTION SIXTEEN

converters, the averaged state equations involve terms with multiplications of d(t) with a state variable. Thus, the model has to be linearized, and small signal dynamics obtained at different operating points are utilized for linear control design. It is of course possible to design large signal control based on the nonlinear model at the expense of mathematical complexity.22 However, ease of design, and simple cost-effective implementation has made linear design the preferred method in most power electronic converters in the low to medium power range. Averaged Circuit Representation.  Instead of writing averaged state equations explicitly as in Eqs. (16-25) and (16-26), an averaged circuit representation of the bi-positional switch can be derived and substituted in different converter circuits.23–25 As shown in Fig. 16-16a the bi-positional switch

ivp(t)

ivp(t) +

icp(t) 1:d

+

+ icp(t)

vvp(t)

vcp(t)

vvp(t) + vcp(t)

voltage port

_

_

Current port

d

_ _

d (b)

(a)

~ dVvp

~ ivp

~ icp

1:D +

~ dIcp

+

~ vvp

~ vcp

_

_

(c) FIGURE 16-16  Bi-positional switch: (a) two-port network, (b) average representation, (c) small signal model.

16_Santoso_Sec16_p0961-1052.indd 978

22/11/17 10:59 AM

POWER ELECTRONICS   979

can be considered as a two-port network with a voltage port (‘up’) at the input and a current port (‘cp’) at the output. The average voltage and currents of the two ports are related as u–cp(t) = d(t) · u–vp(t) (16-27) – – iup(t) = d(t) · icp(t) (16-28) The relations in the above equations correspond to those of an ideal transformer with turns ratio of 1 : d(t). Thus, for analysis purposes, the bi-positional switch can be modeled as an ideal transformer whose turns ratio d(t) can be controlled as shown in Fig. 16-16b. This representation is extremely useful in conjunction with circuit simulators which can perform operating point (dc bias) calculations, linearization, and ac analysis. Parasitic effects, like series resistances of inductors and capacitors, can be easily incorporated in the averaged circuit model. Circuit simulators like SPICE,26 Saber, and Simplorer are commonly used for this purpose. The small signal circuit representation of the averaged circuit obtained via linearization is shown in Fig. 16-16c. Quantities in upper case indicate operating point values, while the quantities with a ‘~’ indicate small signal perturbations about the operating point. This representation can be utilized to derive small signal transfer functions using circuit analysis techniques. 16.4.2  Control Design For a dc-dc converter the main control objectives are stability, zero steady state error, specified transient response to step change in reference and step change in disturbance inputs (load and input voltage), and robustness to parametric changes. Transfer functions of different components – KR, GPS(s), and GFB(s)—are obtained as described above. The error compensator is then designed so that the openloop transfer function GOL(s) has a specified gain cross-over frequency and phase margin. The gain cross-over frequency determines the response time of the controlled converter to changes in reference voltage and load current. Phase margin is usually in the range of 45° to 60° depending on the overshoot tolerable. Details on relation between gain cross-over frequency, phase margin, and transient response can be found in any textbook on linear control.27 An integrator (pole at origin) is added in Gc(s) to obtain zero steady-state error. Zeroes are added at appropriate locations to obtain required phase margin. The dc gain of Gc(s) is adjusted to achieve the required cross-over frequency. Finally, to improve noise immunity, poles may be added for fast roll-off of the gain after the cross-over frequency. A systematic loop shaping procedure along with implementation suited to dc-dc converters is described in Ref. 28. Example: Voltage Control of a Buck Converter.  A controller has to be designed to regulate the output voltage of a buck converter to a constant value. The specifications, parameters, and control requirements are listed in Table 16-2. Using the methods described above, the duty ratio to output voltage transfer function can be derived to be

υ 0 (s ) = d(s ) 1 + s[CR



Vin (1 + sCRESR )

ESR

+ L/RL ] + s 2 LC[1 + RESR /RL ] (16-29)

TABLE 16-2  Control Design Example Specifications

Parameters

Requirements

Input voltage

20 to 30 V dc

L 75 mH

Cross-over frequency

8 kHz

Output voltage

15 V dc

C 47 mF

Phase margin

>60°

Max. load current

5 A

RESR 0.3 Ω

Switching frequency

200 kHz

KR 1

16_Santoso_Sec16_p0961-1052.indd 979

22/11/17 10:59 AM

980  SECTION SIXTEEN

The transfer function has a complex pole pair due to the L-C filter, and a left half zero due to the ESR of the output capacitor. The compensator designed in accordance with the aforementioned considerations is

Gc (s ) =

K c (1 + s/ω z )2 (16-30) s(1 + s/ω p1 )(1 + s/ω p 2 )

where Kc = 2011, wz = 2p × 2556 rad/s, wp1 = 2p × 11.3e3 rad/s, and wp1 = 2p × 80e3 rad/s. Representation of the controlled converter using ORCAD PSpice29 is shown in Fig. 16-17a. The bi-positional switch has been replaced by a two-port network which models a transformer with controllable turns ratio. The compensated and uncompensated transfer functions obtained using ac analysis are shown in Fig. 16-17b. The gain cross-over frequency and the corresponding phase of the compensated transfer function are indicated. Figure 16-17c shows dynamic response of the controlled converter when a step change in load is applied at 0.2 ms. 16.4.3  Current Mode Control In most converters, the inductor current is an internal state of the power converter. Changes in the input voltage and duty ratio are first reflected in the inductor current and subsequently in the output voltage. Thus, controlling the inductor current can lead to better performance. Figure 16-18 shows a cascaded control structure where the internal current controller is about an order of magnitude faster than the outer voltage loop. The average value of the inductor current is controlled to a reference that is generated by the error compensator for the voltage control loop. The current controller is designed using the transfer function from the duty ratio to the inductor current. For voltage controller, the current control loop is assumed to be ideal, that is, iL = iL,ref ; this is justified since the current controller is much faster than the voltage controller. The voltage compensator is then designed utilizing the inductor current to the output voltage transfer function. In a buck or buck-derived topology, the average inductor current is equal to the load current. Thus, fast control over the inductor current effectively mitigates steady state and transient variations in the input voltage without their affecting the output voltage. This current control method is called average current control. Another popular method is peak current mode control. In this method the peak value of the inductor current is controlled to the reference value (generated by the voltage control loop) in each switching cycle. Peak current mode control has the additional advantage of balancing the positive and negative flux excursions in transformer isolated topologies like full-bridge and push-pull. However, peak current mode control requires extra precautions to avoid subharmonic and chaotic operation.4,5,30 16.4.4  Other Control Techniques The basic modeling method described above is applicable to other types of converters (like dc-ac) as long as low-frequency behavior is being studied. Dynamics of the filter elements may of course be different. In dc-ac converters the control objective is usually to track a moving reference (e.g., sinusoidal control voltage or current). Using a stationary to rotating frame transformation, commonly called the abc to dq transformation, the tracking problem can often be reduced to a regulation problem. If current control is implemented in the stationary frame, where the control objective is to track a sinusoidally varying reference, then either average current control or hysteretic current control is used. In hysteretic current control, the current is maintained in a band about the reference value. If the current error is below the lower limit of the band a positive voltage is applied across the inductor (switch ON in a buck converter) to increase the current. To reduce the current a negative or zero

16_Santoso_Sec16_p0961-1052.indd 980

22/11/17 10:59 AM

POWER ELECTRONICS   981

VP1 Nvp = 1

common

TWO_PORT1 vin

CP1

L

R1

75 uH IC = 5A

1m

Ncp

20 V

PARAMETERS:

R_ESR 0.3

+

Vin

vo

RLOAD 3

−

C

47 uF IC = 15 V

d

0 verr Vref 15 V

+

wz = {2*3.1416*2556} wp1 = {2*3.1416*11.3e3} wp2 = {2*3.1416*80e3} Kc = 2011

1+s/{wz} 1 + s/{wp1}

1+s/{wz} 1 + s/{wp2}

vc

{Kc}

1

0v

− 0

(a)

50 (7.96 k, –0.35)

Mag

25 0 –25 DB [v(vo)/v(verr)]

0d

db[v(vo)/v(vc)]

Phase

–50 d (7.96k, –118) –100 d –150 d SEL>> 10 Hz 30 Hz 100 Hz 300 Hz 1.0 KHz 3.0 KHz p[v(vo)/v(verr)] p[v(vo)/v(vc)]

10 KHz

30 KHz

Frequency (b) 1 16

2 12 A

12

10 A

8

8A

4

6A

0

>> 4A 100 us 150 us 200 us 250 us 300 us 350 us 400 us 450 us 500 us 550 us v(vo) 15 2 i(L) 1 Time (c)

FIGURE 16-17  Controlled buck converter: (a) averaged representation using PSpice, (b) open-loop bode plots, (c) transient response.

16_Santoso_Sec16_p0961-1052.indd 981

22/11/17 10:59 AM

982  SECTION SIXTEEN

+

+ Vin

Vo

– d(t)

iL PWM

vc(t)

Current controller

Voltage controller iL,ref

Vo,ref

FIGURE 16-18  Average current control of a buck converter.

voltage is applied across the inductor. With hysteretic control the rise and fall times are only limited by the power components of the converter. However, it has the disadvantage of variable switching frequency, whose instantaneous value depends on a combination of several factors. Several other techniques have been proposed for control of power electronic converters: sigma-delta, sliding mode, dead beat, etc. Details of these control techniques can be found in Ref. 31. Control design described above is relevant for analog implementation. Due to advances in digital system implementation in terms of computation capability, power consumption, and cost, there has been significant effort in a complete digital implementation of the power converter control and PWM generation mechanisms. So far, digital control is only used in high-power converters, where the overall cost justifies the cost of digital and interface components. However, there is significant effort in extending the benefits of digital control to lower-power converters.32–34 The benefits include reduced sensitivity to compensator component variation, possibilities to adapt the controller based on operating point or variation in power converter component values over lifetime or production spreads, and inclusion of sophisticated methods that rely on more direct computation. In digital implementations, predictive current control is commonly used to reduce the effect of sensing and computational delays.

16.5  DC TO AC CONVERSION: INVERSION Dc to ac converters constitute a significant portion of power electronic converters. These converters, also called inverters, are used in applications such as electric motor drives, uninterruptible power supplies (UPS), and utility applications such as grid connection of renewable energy sources. Inverters for single-phase ac and three-phase three-wire ac systems are described in this subsection. 16.5.1  Single-Phase AC Synthesis In an ac system both the voltage and the current should be able to reverse in polarity. Further, the voltage and current polarities may or may not be the same at a given time. Thus, a dc to ac converter implementation should be able to output a voltage independent of current polarity. In the full bridge dc to dc converter shown in Fig. 16-19a the primary circuit consisting of four controlled switches, also called H-bridge, has two bi-positional switch implementations. Each bi-positional switch has bidirectional current capability but only positive output voltage (uAN >, uBN > 0). However, based

16_Santoso_Sec16_p0961-1052.indd 982

22/11/17 10:59 AM

POWER ELECTRONICS   983

iin S1 + A

Vin

s1, s2

S1 +

vAB

_ iAB

B

s3, s4

+ Load + _

S1

vAN _

vAN N

S1

_

vAB

Ts dTs 2

(a)

t (b)

FIGURE 16-19  Single-phase inverter: (a) circuit, (b) quasi-square wave synthesis.

on the duty cycles, the difference of the outputs, VAB = uAN - uBN , can reverse in polarity. Thus the H-bridge is used for synthesizing single-phase ac voltage from a dc voltage. Quasi-Square Wave Inverter.  The simplest form of dc to ac conversion, albeit with poor quality, is synthesis of quasi-square wave ac instead of a pure sine wave. Diagonally opposite switches in the H-bridge are turned on simultaneously. The pulse width of each pair is controlled to adjust the magnitude of the fundamental component, while the switching frequency is equal to the required output frequency. The synthesized voltage waveform is shown in Fig. 16-19b. The peak value of fundamental and harmonic components are

VAB ,n =

4Vin sin(nπ d/2)    n odd nπ

(16-31)

where d is the duty ratio and n the harmonic number. This converter is widely used for low cost low power UPS applications where the voltage waveform quality is not important. Incandescent lighting, universal input motors, and loads with a diode bridge or power factor corrected front end (discussed in Sec. 16.8) are not affected by the voltage waveform quality. The load current, iAB , has harmonics based on the load characteristics. Sometimes an LC filter is added at the output to reduce the harmonic content. Low power low cost inverters such as those used to generate ac from 14 V dc in automobiles usually have quasi-square wave voltage output. Single-Phase Sinusoidal Voltage Synthesis.  For applications requiring low voltage and current distortion high-frequency PWM is utilized to generate a sinusoidally varying average voltage. The power converter used is the H-bridge shown in Fig. 16-19a. The duty ratio for each bipositionalswitch, also called one leg of the inverter, is varied sinusoidally. The switching signals are generated by comparison of a sinusoidally varying control voltage with a triangle wave as shown in Fig. 16-20. Equations relating the control voltages, duty ratios, and the averaged output voltages are as follows:

υc = Vˆc ⋅ sin(ω mt ) (16-32)



υcA (t ) = υc = Vˆc ⋅ sin(ω mt ) (16-33)



υcB (t ) = −υc = −Vˆc ⋅ sin(ω mt ) (16-34)

16_Santoso_Sec16_p0961-1052.indd 983

22/11/17 10:59 AM

984  SECTION SIXTEEN

1.0 V 0.5 V

ˆ V tri

ˆ V c

0V –0.5 V –1.0 V 80 ms

82 ms

84 ms

86 ms

V (PWM_TRI1.Vtri: +)

88 ms

90 ms

92 ms

94 ms

96 ms

98 ms

100 ms

V (PWM_TRI1.E1: IN+) Time

200 V vAB(t)

0V vAB(t)

–200 V 20 ms

25 ms

V (L1: 1,VOUT–)

30 ms

35 ms

40 ms

45 ms

50 ms

V (V4: +)*100 Time

FIGURE 16-20  Single-phase sinusoidal ac synthesis waveforms.



1 υ  1 d A (t ) =  1 + cA  = [1 + m ⋅ sin(ω mt )] (16-35) 2  Vˆtri  2



1 υ  1 dB (t ) =  1 + cB  = [1 − m ⋅ sin(ω mt )] (16-36) 2  Vˆtri  2



1 υ AN (t ) = d A (t ) ⋅Vin = [1 + m ⋅ sin(ω mt )]⋅Vin (16-37) 2



1 υ BN (t ) = dB (t ) ⋅Vin = [1 − m ⋅ sin(ω mt )]⋅Vin (16-38) 2



υ AB (t ) = [d A (t ) − dB (t )]⋅Vin = m ⋅Vin ⋅ sin(ω mt ) = (Vin /Vˆtri ) ⋅υc (t ) (16-39)   kPWM

Here Vˆ c andVˆ tri are peak values of control voltage and the triangle wave respectively, m = Vˆ c/Vˆ tri ∈ [0, 1] is the modulation index, wm = 2p fm is the angular frequency of the sinusoid to be synthesized, while

16_Santoso_Sec16_p0961-1052.indd 984

22/11/17 10:59 AM

POWER ELECTRONICS   985

dA(t) and dB(t) are duty ratios of switches S1 and S3, respectively. In Eq. (16-39) kPWM may be regarded as the gain of the power converter that amplifies the control signal uc(t) to the average output voltage u–AB(t). The maximum peak value of the output voltage, obtained for m = 1, is Vin. This is significantly lower than that obtainable with the quasi-square wave inverter (4Vin /p). However, harmonics in the output voltage are significantly reduced and are at much higher frequencies: k ⋅ fs ± l ⋅ fm, where k and l are integers such that k + l is odd.4 The switching frequency is much higher than the output frequency fm, which has a maximum value of about 50/60 Hz for standard applications or 400 Hz for aerospace applications. If the load is inductive, such as a motor, the current harmonics are much lower than the voltage harmonics. For several applications maximum harmonic content for the voltage and current output from the inverter is specified. In these cases an L-C filter similar to the buck converter is used. Depending upon the application a two-stage L-C filter or a two-stage notch filter (to suppress the dominant switching frequency harmonics) may be used. Further, it has to be ensured that when connected to the load, the filter is adequately damped by a combination of passive selection and the control loop. This aspect is particularly important for line connected applications where the inverter is supplying power to the utility grid. Equation (16-37) can be rewritten as

υ AN (t ) = d A (t ) ⋅Vin =

Vin 2

+

kPWM 2

⋅υc (t ) (16-40)

This clearly shows that on an average basis the “neutral point” for the output of one inverter leg is Vin/2 above “N,” that is, at the mid-point of the input dc bus. Thus using the same H-bridge a splitphase ac (two ac voltages 180° out of phase with a common return) can be generated if the center point of the dc bus is available as the neutral connection for the output. This type of configuration is commonly used in generating ±120/240 from the same inverter. Furthermore, using three legs instead of two the converter can generate three-phase voltages with a neutral connection, with the flexibility that the three phases may be loaded independently. Common applications are inverters for interfacing photovoltaic systems to the utility grid and exporting power from vehicles.

16.5.2  Three-Phase AC Synthesis The last observation in the previous subsection leads us to three-phase inverters without a neutral connection. The circuit consists of three legs, one for each output with a common dc link as shown in Fig. 16-21a. Using sine triangle PWM with control voltages offset by 120° (instead of 180° as in the single-phase case) we obtain:

υc ,k (t ) = Vˆc ⋅ sin(ω mt ) (16-41)



υ kN (t ) =



Vin 2

+

kPWM 2

⋅υc , k (t ) (16-42)

k = A, B, C (16-43)

The zero sequence component of the output voltages, uz = (uAN + uBN + uCN)/3 = Vin/2, does not appear in the line-to-line voltages, and since there is no neutral connection to the inverter, zero sequence currents do not flow. The maximum peak value of the output line-to-line voltages is VˆLL = ( 3/2)Vin. Using square wave inversion, similar to that for the single-phase case, we can obtain higher magnitude for the fundamental component of the output voltages at the cost of adding harmonics. However, if, instead of all the harmonics, only the fundamental and those harmonics of the square wave that contribute zero sequence component (triplen harmonics) are retained, the output voltage amplitude increases without adding harmonics to the line-to-line voltages and the line currents. Usually, addition of the third

16_Santoso_Sec16_p0961-1052.indd 985

22/11/17 10:59 AM

986  SECTION SIXTEEN

b − axis iin + Vin 2 _

S1

S3

A

O +

Vin 2 _

iA

iB

B

+ S2

C

S4

vBN

_

V6 (110)

+ S6

vCN

_

V3 (011)

60°

iC

+

vAN N

V2 (010)

S5

60° 60°

3 V 2 in

60°

V4 (100)

V1 (001) a − axis V7: (111) V0: (000)

_

V5 (101) (b)

(a) Vo vAN

Vref 60°

t0 /2

V1 V3 t1

t3

V7

V7

V3

V1

Vo

Vo

V1 V3

V7

t0 /2

vBN vCN Tsw /2

Tsw (c)

FIGURE 16-21  Three-phase ac synthesis: (a) converter, (b) output voltage vectors, (c) instantaneous waveforms.

harmonic component is sufficient.35, 36 As described in Refs. 37 and 38 the most effective method is to add the following zero sequence component to the control voltages for each phase:

υcz (t ) = −

1 2

{max[υ

cA (t ),υ cB (t ),υ cC (t )] +

}

min[υcA (t ),υcB (t ),υcC (t )] (16-44)

In terms of output voltage generation, this is equivalent to space vector modulation (SVM). 16.5.3  Space Vector Modulation This method has become extremely popular for three-phase inverters in the low to medium power range. A very brief description will be presented here and details can be found in Refs. 31, 35, and 37. For three-phase systems with no zero sequence component, that is, uz = (uAN + uBN + uCN )/3 = 0, the three-phase quantities are linearly dependent and can be transformed to a two-phase orthogonal system commonly called the ab system. Quantities in the ab system can be represented by complex numbers and as two-dimensional vectors in a plane, called space vectors. The transformation from the abc to ab quantities is given by

16_Santoso_Sec16_p0961-1052.indd 986

 υαβ (t ) = υα (t ) + j ⋅υ β (t ) = e j 0 ⋅υa (t ) + e j 2π /3 ⋅υb (t ) + e j 4π /3 ⋅υc (t ) (16-45)

22/11/17 10:59 AM

POWER ELECTRONICS   987

With negative sequence components absent, a and b components of steady state sinusoidal abc quantities are also sinusoids with constant amplitude and a 90° phase difference between them. Under transient conditions  they are arbitrary time varying quantities. Thus, for balanced sinusoidal conditions, the space vector υαβ (t ) rotates in counter clockwise direction with angular frequency equal to frequency of ˆ , Vˆ being the peak of the phase voltage. the abc voltages, and describes a circle of radius(3/2) V ph ph The instantaneous output voltages of the three-phase inverter shown in Fig. 16-21a can assume eight different combinations based on which of the six MOSFETs are on. The space vectors for these eight combinations are shown in Fig. 16-21b. For example, vector V4 denoted by (100) corresponds to switch states uAN = Vin, uBN = 0, and uCN = 0. The vectors V0(000) and V7(111) have zero magnitude and are called zero vectors. Synthesis utilizing the idea of space vectors is done by dividing one switching time period into several time intervals, for each of which a particular voltage vector is output by the inverter. These time intervals and the vectors applied are chosen so that the average over oneswitching time period is equal to the desired output voltage vector. For the reference voltage vector υref , shown in Fig. 16-21b, the nonzero vectors adjacent to it (V1 and V3), and the zero vectors (V0 and V7) are utilized as shown in Fig. 16-21c. Relative values of time intervals t1 and t3 determine the direction, while ratio of t0 to the switching time period determines the magnitude of the output vector synthesized. The formulae for time intervals are as follows:

 Tsw  |υref | cos(30 + θ )  (16-46) t1 = 2  Vin cos(30) 



t3 =



 Tsw  |υref | cos(90 − θ )  (16-47) 2  Vin cos(30) 

t0 /2 = Tsw /2 − (t1 + t3 ) (16-48)

 where q is the angle of the vector υref measured from the a–axis. The maximum obtainable average vector lies along the hexagon connecting the six nonzero vectors. As stated earlier, balanced threephase sinusoidal quantities describe a circle in the ab plane. Thus, to synthesize distortion free and balanced three-phase sinusoidal voltages, the circle must be contained within the hexagon, that is, with a maximum radius of 3/2 ⋅Vin . This gives the maximum peak value of line-to-line voltage obtained with ˆ = V . This is significantly higher than that obtained using sine triangle PWM: 3/2 ⋅V . SVM as V LL in in Further, the sequence and choice of vectors applied can be optimized to minimize number of switchings and ripple in the resulting currents.39 There are several variations of SVM, each suited to a different application. SVM can be easily implemented digitally using microcontrollers or digital signal processors (DSPs), and is advantageous in control of three-phase ac machines using vector control and direct torque control (DTC).40–44 Experimental waveforms for an SVM inverter are shown in Fig. 16-22. 16.5.4  Multilevel Converters The converter topologies described so far are based on a two-level converter leg (bi-positional switch), where the output voltage of each leg (uAN) can be either zero or Vin. The converters are therefore called two-level converters. In two-level converters, all the switches have to block the full dc bus voltage (Vin). For high-power applications IGBTs and GTOs are used as the semiconductor switches. These have higher voltage and current ratings and lower on-state voltage drop compared to power MOSFETs, but cannot switch as fast. In some applications like some motor drives and utility applications, even the voltage ratings of available IGBTs and GTOs is not sufficiently high. Simple series connection, to achieve a higher blocking voltage, has problems of steady-state and dynamic voltage sharing. Moreover, due to the low switching frequency of high-power switches, the output voltage and current quality deteriorates. These issues are addressed by multilevel converters. In a multilevel converter,45,46 the output of each

16_Santoso_Sec16_p0961-1052.indd 987

22/11/17 10:59 AM

988  SECTION SIXTEEN

1

2 Time/div.: 5 ms Voltage/div.: 2 V Current/div. 2 A

THD = 0.129 (a)

THD = 0.056 Time/div.: 5 ms Voltage/div.: 2 V Current/div. 2 A

(b) FIGURE 16-22  Experimentally measured PWM signal and line current for one phase of a three-phase SVM inverter: (a) 60 Hz synthesis; (b) 20 Hz synthesis.

phase leg can attain more than two levels leading to improved quality of the output voltage and current. The circuit comprising each leg and its proper operation ensure that voltage blocked by the switches reduces as the number of levels is increased. In addition, multilevel converters are modular to some extent, thereby making it easy to scale voltage ratings by increasing the number of “cells.” Multilevel PWM.  For two-level PWM, comparison of the control voltage with a triangle wave generates the switching signal for the top switch, while the bottom switch is controlled in complement to the top switch. Each of these two states corresponds to the two levels of the output voltage. For multilevel converters, there are more than two effective switch states, each of which corresponds to an output voltage level. For example, in a three-level converter there are three effective states q(t) = 0, 1, 2, corresponding to output voltage levels uAN(t) = 0, Vin/2, Vin. The control voltage uc(t) is compared with two triangle waves to obtain two switching signals q1(t) and q2(t), and the effective switching signal can be obtained as q(t) = q1(t) + q2(t) as shown in Fig. 16-23. The output voltage is then given by uAN = q(t) · (Vin/2). Switching signals for the individual switches are derived using q(t) and the circuit topology. For the waveforms in Fig. 16-23, fs = 60 Hz and Vin = 2 kV. Since the vAN waveform is closer to desired sinusoid in the three level case, the output voltage has lower THD even if the switching frequency is low. For three-phase converters, space-vector-based PWM can be used for generating the switching signals,47 the advantage in the multilevel case compared to the two-level case being the significantly higher number of output voltage vectors. Multilevel Converter Topologies.  The chief multilevel converter topologies are diode clamped, flying capacitor, and cascaded full bridge.

16_Santoso_Sec16_p0961-1052.indd 988

22/11/17 10:59 AM

POWER ELECTRONICS   989

4.0 V 2.0 V 0V v (vcn)

v (tri_1)

v (tri_2)

1.0 V 0.5 V 0V

q1

1000 mV SEL>> 0V

q2

2.0 V 1.0 V 0V

q

2.0 K 1.0 K 0 0s

2 ms 4 ms avgx (vAN, 1 m) vAN

6 ms

8 ms

10 ms

12 ms

14 ms

16 ms

Time

FIGURE 16-23  Multilevel triangle comparison.

Diode Clamped Converter.  Figure 16-24a shows one phase leg of a three-level diode-clamped converter.48 The input dc bus is split by means of capacitors. Pairs of switches are turned on to obtain three different voltage levels for the output voltage uAN = 0, Vin/2, Vin as shown in Fig. 16-24c. It is evident that this circuit acts like a tri-positional switch connecting the output to one of three positions of the input dc bus. The minimum voltage at point “b1,” and the maximum voltage at point “b2,” is clamped to Vin/2 by the blocking diodes Db1 and Db2, respectively. Thus, all the switches have to block Vin/2 during their off state. This topology can be extended to more number of levels. However, it is eventually limited by the voltage rating of blocking diodes, which have to block increasing voltages as the number of levels is increased. One-phase leg of a five-level version is shown in Fig. 16-24b. Flying Capacitor Converter.  Figure 16-25 shows the topology of a three-level flying capacitor converter. The basic idea here is that the capacitor C is charged to half the input dc voltage by appropriate control of the switches. The capacitor can then be inserted in series with the output voltage, either adding or subtracting Vin/2, and thereby giving three output voltage levels. Cascaded Full Bridge Converters.  In this scheme,49 single-phase H-bridges shown in Fig. 16-19a are connected in series at the output to form one single-phase circuit as shown in Fig. 16-26a. Three separate circuits are required for a three-phase implementation. A delta connection of cascaded converters is shown in Fig. 16-26b. Since all the H-bridges are same, the circuit is modular and can be scaled by adding more H-bridges. However, dc sources at the input of all H-bridges have to be isolated from each other. It is also possible to combine different types of H-bridges—IGBT-based fast switching type and GTO-based slower switching type—or have different dc bus voltage magnitudes in different bridges to optimize losses or increase effective number of levels.50 One example of the

16_Santoso_Sec16_p0961-1052.indd 989

22/11/17 10:59 AM

990  SECTION SIXTEEN

Vin + 4 _

S1 S2 S3

+

Vin 4 _

S1 Db1

Vin + 2 _

S4

b1

iA

S2 iA

O

A +

S3 Db2

Vin + 2 _

b2

Vin + 4 _

S6 S7

vAN

S4 _ N

+ Vin 4 _

S1

S3

Vin + 2 _

S4 q=0

+

S1

_

S3

Vin + 2 _

S4

N q=1

S1

Vin + 2 _

S2

A

vAN

_ N

(b)

Vin + 2 _

S2

vAN

S8

(a)

Vin + 2 _

A +

S5

+

A

S3

Vin + 2 _

vAN _

S2

S4

N

+

A

vAN _

N

q=2

(c) FIGURE 16-24  Diode clamped converters: (a) one phase of a three-level converter, (b) one phase of five-level converter, (c) switching states in a three-level converter.

cascaded approach is the multilevel drive offering from Robicon, now a part of Siemens.51 In some solar inverters the dc input (PV panel) is common and the isolation is carried out by transformers at the output of the H-bridges; the transformer secondaries are then connected in series to obtain the stepped waveform construction of the ac voltage. Other Multilevel Converters.  The recently proposed modular multilevel converter (MMC)52 uses series connected cells that together generate the required voltage for each phase. The major advantage of this approach is that a common high voltage dc exist in the MMC which is very useful for forming a common dc link between an inverter and a rectifier. It also maintains the modular

16_Santoso_Sec16_p0961-1052.indd 990

22/11/17 10:59 AM

POWER ELECTRONICS   991

S1

b1 S2 + Vin

+ Vin 2 _

_

iA C

A +

S3

b2

vAN

S4 _ N FIGURE 16-25  Three-level flying capacitor converter.

Vdc1

HBridge

Vdc2

HBridge

A M1a

+

M1b

M2a

AC Input

AC

M3a B

Vdc3

HBridge

–

M2b

M1c

M3b M2c

M3c

C

(a)

(Input side connections not shown) (b)

FIGURE 16-26  Cascaded converters: (a) one phase; (b) three-phase connection in delta.

scalability and redundancy. A more detailed description of the MMC can be found in Sec. 16.9.8. Other types of multilevel converters proposed recently are the inter-connected multilevel converter53 and the Hexagram converter.54

16.6  AC TO DC CONVERSION: RECTIFICATION Ac to dc converters, or rectifiers, are used at the input of almost all line connected electronic equipment. Electronic devices that are powered directly from line and do not have regulation requirements use single- and three-phase diode bridge rectifiers for converting line frequency ac to an uncontrolled dc voltage. For control over the output dc voltage, thyristor-based rectifiers are used. Power factor corrected front end converters provide output voltage regulation as well as near unity power factor.

16_Santoso_Sec16_p0961-1052.indd 991

22/11/17 10:59 AM

992  SECTION SIXTEEN

16.6.1  Single-Phase Diode Bridge Rectifier Figure 16-27a shows the circuit of a single-phase diode bridge rectifier with a purely capacitive output filter. Due to its simplicity and low cost this circuit is preferred for low-power applications such as input stages of ac to dc adapters and computer power supplies. Diodes conduct in pairs to transfer energy from the input to the output when the input line voltage exceeds the output dc voltage in magnitude. Diodes D1 and D4 conduct when us > uo, while D2 and D4 conduct when -us > uo. The capacitor Cd gets charged by high-current pulses during these small intervals near the peak of us , and discharges with the almost constant load current during the rest of the line cycle as shown in Fig. 16-27b. The output dc voltage is approximately equal to the peak of the line voltage minus the forward voltage drop of two diodes. The capacitor value is chosen on the basis of the maximum load current and allowable output voltage ripple. The line current has significant harmonic content as shown in Fig. 16-27c. Source inductance of the line, common for regular utility supply, leads to lower peak input current, larger conduction times for the diodes, and reduced magnitude of the output voltage. To quantify the line current distortion the following definitions are commonly used. Total harmonic distortion (THD) is the ratio of rms values of the distortion component to the fundamental component, expressed as a percentage:

THD =

( I 2 − I12 ) I dist × 100 = × 100 (16-49) I1 I1

Real power is the actual value of power consumed computed as an average over one line cycle:

Preal =

2π ω

∫

2 π /ω 0

υ s (t )is (t )dt = VI1 cos(φ1 ) (16-50)

Apparent power is the product of the rms values of the input voltage and current: Papp = V · I­­­­



(16-51)

Power factor (PF) is defined as the ratio of real power to apparent power:

PF =

Preal

Papp

=

VI1 cos(φ1 ) VI

=

I1 I

⋅ cos(φ1 ) ­­­­

(16-52)

where V, I, and I1 denote the rms value of the voltage, current, and fundamental component of the current, respectively, f1 is the phase angle of the fundamental component of the current with respect to the input voltage (assumed sinusoidal), and Idist is the rms value of the distortion component of the input current. The term cos(f1) is called the displacement power factor, while the term I1/I is called the distortion power factor. For the circuit values of Fig. 16-27a, the load current is 0.84 A, the peak line current Iˆs = 19.4 A, rms line current Is = 3.8 A, rms of the fundamental component Is1 = 1.18 A, THD = 280%, and the power factor = (1.18/3.8) ⋅ cos(2.0) = 0.31. The quality of the input current can be improved significantly if an inductive filter is used at the output of the rectifier. With a high enough inductance, the output current can be maintained nearly constant. This leads to a square waveshape for the input current as shown in Fig. 16-27d, which has a THD of 48% and a power factor of 0.9. With the inductive filter, the output voltage has an average value equal to the average value of a rectified sinusoid, that is, 2Vˆs /π , where Vs is the peak value of the input phase voltage. Inductive output filter is preferable for medium power applications so that the input current has lower harmonic content.

16_Santoso_Sec16_p0961-1052.indd 992

22/11/17 10:59 AM

POWER ELECTRONICS   993

D1

is

io

D3

+ +

Cd

FREQ = 60 VAMPL = 170

vs _

2000 uF IC = 150 V

0

D4

vo _

Rload 200

D2 (a)

1 20 A

2 200 V

10 A

100 V

0A

0V

–10 A

–100 V

–20 A

>> –200 V 0s 1

5.0 ms 10.0 ms 15.0 ms 20.0 ms 25.0 ms 30.0 ms vo v_s is 5*io 2 Time–66.66667E–3 (b)

2.0 A 1.5 A 1.0 A 0.5 A 0A 0 Hz

0.5 KHz

1.0 KHz

is

1.5 KHz

2.0 KHz

2.5 KHz

3.0 KHz

20 ms

25 ms

30 ms

Frequency (c)

1

1.0 A

2 200 V 100 V

0A

0 V –100 V

–1.0 A

>> –200 V 0s 1

is

5 ms Io 2

10 ms 15 ms v_s vrect Time (d)

FIGURE 16-27  Single-phase diode bridge rectifier: (a) circuit, (b) waveforms, (c) line current harmonics, (d) waveforms with inductive filter.

16_Santoso_Sec16_p0961-1052.indd 993

24/11/17 4:15 PM

994  SECTION SIXTEEN

16.6.2  Three-Phase Diode Bridge Rectifier Figure 16-28a shows a three-phase diode bridge rectifier with an inductive output filter. The operation is similar to the single-phase case. Diodes conduct in pairs—one from the upper three and one from the lower three. Cathodes of diodes D1, D3, and D5 are connected together, so the diode with the highest voltage at its anode conducts. The converse holds for diodes D2, D4, and D6. The rectified voltage follows the envelope of the line voltages and their negatives: urect = max (|uab|, |ubc|, |uca|). This rectifier is also called the six-pulse rectifier because the voltage at the output of the diode bridge, urect, has six ˆ ,V ˆ being pulses in every line cycle. The average output voltage across the load is Vo = u–rect = (3/p) V LL LL the peak value of the line-to-line voltage. The input line currents can be derived considering which diodes are conducting at a given time. They have quasi-square waveshapes as shown in Fig. 16-28b. The harmonic distortion is lower than in the single-phase case with inductive filter: THD = 31%, and ˆ , while the input PF = 0.955. If the output filter is purely capacitive, the output voltage is equal to V LL currents are significantly distorted (Fig. 16-28c) and have harmonics at (6m ± 1)f, where f is the line frequency and m is an integer. As in the single-phase rectifier with capacitive output filter, THD of the input current depends significantly on the source impedance. The quality of input current and power factor generally improve when going from single phase to three phase, and can be further improved with higher number of phases if voltages with appropriate phase difference are generated from the utility supplied three phases. The output filter requirements also reduce as the number of phases is increased. With six voltage sources phase shifted by 30°, 12 diodes can be utilized to generate a 12-pulse rectifier. Isolated voltage sources phase shifted by 30° can be obtained using a wye-delta connected three-phase transformer. Other phase shifts are generated by vectorial combination of appropriately scaled, isolated, voltages that are obtained from the input three-phase voltages using line frequency transformers. Rectifiers with pulse numbers 12, 18, and 24 are common for medium and high-power applications that require good power factor and low THD but do not have stringent constraints on size and weight. 16.6.3  Controlled Thyristor Rectifiers Diode bridge rectifiers do not have any regulation capability and the output dc voltage varies with changes in line and load. This drawback is overcome by controlled thyristor rectifiers. Thyristor rectifiers are primarily used in medium to high-power applications where regulation of the output dc voltage is required but line current quality and power factor are not important (or can be corrected externally). Increasing concerns for power quality have resulted in reduced applications for these converters. High-power dc motor drives, especially those used in traction, battery chargers, and high voltage dc (HVDC) transmission are the most common uses for these converters. To understand the operation of thyristor rectifiers it is first necessary to know the basic terminal characteristics of thyristors. Thyristors, also called silicon-controlled rectifiers (SCRs), are high-power semiconductor devices which can block voltage of either polarity and conduct current in one direction (from anode to cathode). They can be switched on by applying a current pulse to their gate terminal when forward biased (positive voltage from anode to cathode), and can be switched off only by reducing the device current to zero. Single-Phase Thyristor Rectifier.  Figure 16-29a shows a single-phase fully controlled thyristor rectifier. The output has to be inductive for proper operation. For analysis presented here, it is assumed that Io is constant and that there is no source impedance. During the positive half of the line cycle (us > 0), T1 and T4 are switched on after a delay angle a from the zero crossing of us. The angle a is commonly called the firing angle. With T1 and T4 on, is = Io and urect = us. When us reverses in polarity, thyristors T1 and T4 keep conducting since the current through them has not been reduced to zero. During the negative half cycle, T2 and T3 are switched on after angle a from the zero crossing of us. At this point current is transferred from (T1, T4) to (T2, T3). In reality there is some finite source inductance, due to which the current transfer takes some time.4 Once T2 and T3 start conducting, is = -Io and there is a reverse voltage across T1 and T4 that keeps them in the

16_Santoso_Sec16_p0961-1052.indd 994

22/11/17 10:59 AM

POWER ELECTRONICS   995

D1

ia

D3

D5

+

vrect

ic Va

+ _

Vb

io

5m

+ Cd

ib

+ _

50 mH

+ _

500 uF IC = 280 V

Rload V 20 o

_

Vc D2

D4

FREQ = 60 0 VAMPL = 170

D6 _

(a)

400 V

0V

–400 V 20 ms 25 ms 30 ms 35 ms 40 ms 45 ms 50 ms Vo Vab Vbc Vca –Vab –Vbc –Vca Vrect Time 20 A 0A –20 A

ia

20 A 0A –20 A

ib

20 A 0A SEL >> –20 A

0s

5 ms 10 ms 15 ms 20 ms 25 ms 30 ms 35 ms 40 ms 45 ms 50 ms ic

Time (b)

100 50 0 –50 –100 66 ms 70 ms 75 ms 80 ms 85 ms 90 ms 95 ms 100 ms –I (Va)

V1 (Va)/2 Time (c)

FIGURE 16-28  Three-phase diode bridge rectifier: (a) circuit, (b) waveforms with inductive filter, (c) line current waveform with capacitive filter.

16_Santoso_Sec16_p0961-1052.indd 995

22/11/17 10:59 AM

996  SECTION SIXTEEN

Io

is

vs

T1

T3

+

vrect

+ T2

–

T4

+ Vo

L o a d

– –

(a) vs

a

vthy1

a vrect

is

Io t

-Io (b)

FIGURE 16-29  Single-phase thyristor rectifier: (a) circuit, (b) waveforms.

off state. Steady-state operating waveforms are shown in Fig. 16-29b. The average dc voltage across the load is given by

Vo = υrect =

1 π

∫

α +π

α

Vˆph sin(ω t )

d (ω t ) =

2cos(α ) ˆ (16-53) ⋅Vph π

Vo can be controlled by varying a ∈ [0°, 180°]. It is maximum for a = 0° where the thyristor rectifier behaves exactly like a diode bridge rectifier, and zero for a = 90°. For a > 90°, Vo < 0, and power is transferred from the dc side to the ac side. Where bidirectional power flow is not required, thyristors T2 and T4 are replaced by diodes resulting in a half controlled rectifier.55 THD of the input current is same as that in the diode bridge rectifier, but the fundamental component of the input current lags the input voltage by angle a, leading to a displacement power factor of cos(a). Thus, regulation of output voltage is achieved at the expense of lower power factor. Three-Phase Thyristor Rectifier.  The three-phase thyristor rectifier is shown in Fig. 16-30a. Similar to the single-phase case, each thyristor is switched with a delay of angle a after the anode to cathode voltage across it becomes positive. Each thyristor conducts for 120°, so the input line currents are quasi-square waves with magnitude equal to Io as shown in Fig. 16-30b. The average output voltage ˆ . For a > 90° power flows from the dc side to the ac side, and the converter is Vo = [3 cos(a)/p] V LL acts like an inverter. For unidirectional power flow, the three lower thyristors can be replaced with

16_Santoso_Sec16_p0961-1052.indd 996

22/11/17 10:59 AM

POWER ELECTRONICS   997

Io

–

va

+ ia

T1

T3

T5

L

+

+

ib ic

vrect

Vo

L o a d

– T2

T3

T6 – (a)

vrect

vab

vbc

vca

vab

vbc

vT1

a ia

Io −Io

ib

ic t T5, T4

T1, T4 T1, T6

T3, T6 T3, T2 T5, T2 T5, T4 T1, T4 (b)

FIGURE 16-30  Three-phase thyristor rectifier: (a) circuit, (b) waveforms.

diodes to give a half-controlled version. As with diode bridge rectifiers, thyristor bridges can also be used to obtain 12 (or higher) pulse rectification, resulting in lower THD for the input current and reduced size for the output filter. Due to the bidirectional power flow capability of this converter and very high voltage and current rating of thyristors, series connected thyristor rectifiers are utilized in HVDC transmission systems.56

16_Santoso_Sec16_p0961-1052.indd 997

22/11/17 10:59 AM

998  SECTION SIXTEEN

16.7  AC TO AC CONVERSION In applications where a controllable three-phase ac voltage has to be synthesized, the most common strategy is to first rectify line frequency ac to obtain a dc voltage, and then use a three-phase inverter. The dc link requires a substantial electrolytic capacitor, which filters the dc voltage and also provides energy storage for short duration line voltage sags and interruptions. Capacitors add significant size and cost, and electrolytic capacitors also have the problem of lower reliability. To reduce the number of stages from two to one, and to eliminate the electrolytic capacitor, there has been a significant research effort in direct ac to ac conversion. 16.7.1  Thyristor Cyclo-Converters These converters have been used extensively for direct ac-ac conversion in high power variable frequency ac drives.55 In these converters a low-frequency ac waveform is synthesized by a piecewise combination of the available input ac voltages. However, they have limited control over the magnitude, frequency, and quality of the output voltage, and quality of the input line current. 16.7.2  Matrix Converters Recently, matrix converters utilizing controllable bidirectional switches and PWM have been developed for direct ac-ac conversion. As the name suggests, the converter consists of a matrix of switches connecting each input phase to each output phase as shown in Fig. 16-31a. All the switches, denoted by square boxes in the figure, need to have bidirectional voltage blocking and current conduction capabilities. So far, a single semiconductor switch with these capabilities has not been invented. Thus, the switch has to be realized using a combination of existing power devices. Three different implementations are shown in Fig. 16-31b. va

vb

vc

Inputs Outputs A B

C (a)

(b)

FIGURE 16-31  Matrix converters: (a) three-phase matrix converter, (b) bidirectional switch implementations.

At any time instant each of the output phases is connected to one of the input phases, and more than one output phase may be connected to the same input phase. Selecting appropriate switches and utilizing PWM, output voltages with continuously variable amplitude and frequency can be synthesized. The synthesis is most easily understood by means of space vectors.31,57 The total number of meaningful switching combinations are 27. Out of these, 6 lead to output voltage space vectors rotating at the input line frequency, 18 lead to stationary output voltage space vectors, while 3 lead to zero vectors. As in the dc to three-phase ac case, on an average basis, a desired output voltage vector can be synthesized by utilizing a combination of the stationary nonzero and zero space vectors. There is sufficient flexibility to ensure that the input power factor is unity. Considerable research has also been done to ensure

16_Santoso_Sec16_p0961-1052.indd 998

22/11/17 10:59 AM

POWER ELECTRONICS   999

proper operation of matrix converters under unbalanced line conditions. However, as shown in Ref. 58 the output voltage of a matrix converter has a theoretical limitation of VLL ,op = ( 3/2)VLL ,in, which is considerably lower than that obtainable with an ac-dc-ac configuration (VLL,in). In addition, clamping circuits and small input and output filters are required for proper operation. So far matrix converters have not been commercially successful. This is chiefly due to the number and cost of bidirectional switches, limitation on the maximum amplitude of the output voltages, and lack of energy storage, required for ride-through capability during short duration line failures. Some of these challenges have been countered by introduction of bidirectional switch modules,59,60 and sparse matrix topologies61 that require fewer number of switches. 16.7.3  AC Regulator These converters consist of two thyristors connected in antiparallel configuration in each of three phases between the source and load. They are used for starting of line connected three-phase ac machines. During startup, the firing angle of the thyristors is ramped up from 0° in order to limit the inrush current. Once steady state is reached either the firing angle is maintained at close to 180° (continuous conduction) or the thyristors are shorted out by a three-phase relay.

16.8  APPLICATIONS OF POWER ELECTRONIC CONVERTERS The foregoing subsections described the principles and control of different power converters. This subsection describes the requirements of specific applications, and how power electronic converters are utilized for these. The next subsection is devoted to utility applications of power electronics. 16.8.1  DC Power Supplies DC power supplies are required for powering different components in electronic equipment. Their specific features and level of sophistication depend on the application. For example, in a bias supply, required for various analog components in a power converter, the main requirements are isolation and a (relatively) large tolerance in the output voltage level. The input to the bias supply may be derived from a regulated dc bus so that line regulation is not required. A simple push-pull converter without an output inductor can be used for this purpose. For use inside a sensitive instrument the power supply requirements would include: strignent regulation with respect to line and load, good dynamic response, compliance with EMI and input power quality standards, and adequate energy storage for normal operation during short-duration line failures. Features commonly required in dc power supplies are Output voltage regulation with respect to line and load. For high-current low-voltage power supplies there may be an additional requirement of regulating the voltage at the load terminals. This requirement, called remote sensing, accounts for voltage drops in the connecting wires. Dynamic requirements of response time and overshoot/undershoot in the output to step change in load current are also specified. Output current limit. This may be a fixed value, or have a foldback characteristic.6 With the latter, once the output current exceeds a certain value the current limit is varied as a function of output voltage—decreasing as the output voltage decreases. Isolation. Electrical isolation between output and input. Soft start. This is required to limit the inrush current for initial charging of capacitors. Holdup time. For line powered applications, there is usually a requirement for holdup time, time for which the power supply should operate normally in the absence of the input voltage. Usually

16_Santoso_Sec16_p0961-1052.indd 999

22/11/17 10:59 AM

1000  SECTION SIXTEEN

energy storage is provided by adding capacitors; sometimes auxiliary capacitors charged to a higher voltage to store more energy are used. Sleep mode. Typically power supplies have a low efficiency at light load. Thus, in battery-powered and portable applications light load condition is detected and the power supply operation is changed to reduce its losses, e.g., by reducing the switching frequency. Power factor corrected front end. For single-phase applications, it also helps in operation with universal input voltage range (100–240 V, 50/60 Hz). EMI compliance with a specified standard. Environmental compliance for temperature, humidity, and altitude of operation. Some features can be implemented with standard PWM control ICs leading to reduced number of components and design simplification. Commercial availability of low-power dc/dc converter modules with standard input and output voltages has increased significantly in recent years. Thus, a custom power converter design may not be required, unless there are special requirements as in space, defense, and some instrumentation applications. A specific application of dc power supplies is in digital systems. All digital systems need a power electronic converter to provide the requisite supply voltages. With the digital supply voltages going down and the clock frequencies going up, the requirements are increasingly toward low voltages and high currents. For a high-speed microprocessor the required values are around 2 V and a few hundred amperes. The dynamic requirements are also very demanding since the microprocessor load can go from almost zero current to full load current in a few microseconds. Furthermore, digital components operating at different supply voltage levels may be used in a complete digital system. For these applications, the intermediate bus architecture is used. First a 12-V (or a lower voltage) bus is derived from the input supply using an intermediate bus converter (IBC); the IBC may also provide isolation from the input. This low-voltage bus is then input to several point-of-load (POL) converters, which are located close to the loads and provide the required steady state and dynamic voltage regulation. POL converters do not provide isolation between input and output. IBCs and POLs with standard input and output voltages are commercially available as modules from several manufacturers.17,72

16.8.2  Electric Drives Introduction.  Traditionally electric motors have been powered by direct connection to ac line, or to dc voltage obtained from a rectifier. However, this usually results in inefficient operation due to lack of control. Electric motors powered by appropriately controlled power electronic converters lead to significant increase in the overall system efficiency due to the advantages of variable speed operation.73 Electric motor load has more than half the share of electric power consumption in the United States, of which about half is in industrial applications. Thus, any increase in system efficiency due to electronic-controlled motor drives can lead to large savings for the company and overall electricity consumption. Moreover, performance advantages of fast dynamic response and very accurate control over speed and position are obtained. Squirrel cage induction machines (IMs) are the most widely used electric motors. This is due to the advantages of simple, robust, and low-cost construction, ease of powering, and lower maintenance requirement due to absence of brushes. Thus, control of induction machines for better performance and improved efficiency has been researched extensively. The invention of vector control,40 and direct torque control41,42 have made the dynamic performance of induction machines similar to that of a dc machine. The popularity of vector control was also aided by development of PWM inverters and SVM described in Sec. 16.5. Developments in permanent magnets and power electronics, and increasing concerns for size, weight, and efficiency have led to significant interest in permanent magnet synchronous machines (PMSM) and brushless dc (BLDC) machines. PMSM and BLDC motors have the highest operating efficiency and the highest power density of all the motors.74 Further, due to development of power electronics, the switched reluctance machine (SRM), the first electromechanical machine invented in the early 1800s, has also been commercialized.75,76 This machine has a

16_Santoso_Sec16_p0961-1052.indd 1000

22/11/17 10:59 AM

POWER ELECTRONICS   1001

simple, robust, and inexpensive construction, and is powered from an inherently robust power converter topology. SRMs are most popular in the low to medium power range and high-speed applications requiring medium performance. Squirrel cage induction, PMSM, synchronous reluctance, and BLDC drives require a three-phase inverter for powering the stator windings and no electrical excitation for the rotor. SRMs have a special power converter that has independent sections for individual phases. For illustration, a vector-controlled ac drive and an SRM drive are discussed here. Details of these drives may be found in Refs. 35, 37, 43, 44, and 73–76. Vector-Controlled AC Drive.  Figure 16–32 shows the basic block diagram of a vector-controlled PMSM drive. The structure is identical for the squirrel cage induction motor drive. The input stage is a single- or three-phase diode bridge rectifier, the output of which is filtered to obtain a dc. The input current during initial charging of the dc bus capacitor is limited using either (a) parallel combination of a controllable switch and a current limiting resistor connected in series with the main power path, or (b) a half-controlled thyristor rectifier. The dc voltage is converted to variable frequency variable magnitude three-phase ac by means of a three-phase PWM inverter. During dynamic braking, energy stored in the inertia of the machine and load is transfered back to the electrical circuit. If the rectifier has bidirectional power transfer capability, this energy can be transfered to the source. Otherwise the energy charges the dc bus capacitance. To limit the dc bus voltage a brake resistor is connected in parallel with the dc bus by means of a controlled switch. The switching frequency of the inverter in ac drives is usually between 20 and 30 kHz, since the machine inductance is usually sufficient to filter the output current. Thus, IGBTs are commonly used for this application. MOSFETs are used if the dc voltage is below 600 V and a higher switching frequency is required in order to reduce the output current ripple. Intelligent power modules (IPMs) containing all the power semiconductor components along with gate drive and protection circuits in a single package are now available from several manufacturers.77–81 Use of IPMs results in considerable design simplification, size reduction, and smaller design cycles. The drive control is carried out using a microcontroller or DSP, with the use of DSPs becoming more popular due to increased computational requirements. In an industrial application, the DSP

Inrush current limiter Rectifier

Three-phase inverter

Brake +

vABC,N

Motor

Vin Single/threephase ac

iABC

_

Optical isolation

Optical Isolation Currents Communication bus

Encoder

Position

DSP

FIGURE 16-32  Vector-controlled three-phase ac drive.

16_Santoso_Sec16_p0961-1052.indd 1001

22/11/17 10:59 AM

1002  SECTION SIXTEEN

controls the machine in response to command signals (for speed or position) obtained over a communication interface bus. AC machines are usually controlled using either vector control or direct torque control. From the power electronics point of view, this requires control of the output currents with a high-control bandwidth (of the order of 1 kHz). This is done in a cascade manner: the current control algorithm generates reference voltage vectors which are then synthesized using space vector PWM. Both current control and PWM are implemented on the DSP. The final output of the DSP are switching signals for each of the three inverter legs and the brake switch. These signals are optically isolated and input to the gate drive circuitry for each of the controlled switches. Output currents of the inverter are sensed using either hall effect sensors or sense resistors. The analog current signal is converted to digital form using the internal ADCs of the DSP. The dc bus voltage may also be sensed for feedforward of input line variations and for dynamic braking. An optical encoder is used if direct rotor position sensing is required. Since the encoder outputs are already in digital form they can be easily interfaced. However, due to close proximity of the encoder and the machine windings, which are subject to pulsed voltages generated by the inverter, these signals have high common mode noise. To solve this problem, differential mode line drivers and receivers, and optical isolation of encoder signals are commonly employed. SRM Drive.  The basic structure of an SRM drive is similar to an ac motor drive. However, the power converter is quite different owing to the machine characteristics. Fig. 16-33a shows the cross-section θ = 0° θ ia a d

S1

ib

D2

b iph

c

c

b

d a

(a)

id

ic

+ Vdc

+

vph

–

– D1

S2

(b)

FIGURE 16-33  SRM drives: (a) cross-section of a four-phase 8/6 SRM, (b) asymmetric bridge converter.

of a four-phase SRM. The SRM has saliency on the stator as well as the rotor. Each phase consists of concentrated coils wound on diametrically opposite stator poles. If phase a carries current ia, then the closest set of rotor poles are attracted to the stator phase a poles. Once the rotor poles are aligned with the stator poles there is no torque on the rotor and ia has to be reduced to zero. By energizing and de-energizing phases in sequence, a continuous rotation can be achieved. To build up and reduce winding current, the converter needs to have bidirectional voltage capability. However, since the direction of torque is independent of the current polarity, only unidirectional current capability is required. At low speeds the back emf of the machine is very low so the winding current has to be controlled usually by hysteretic current control. This is done by letting the current freewheel with a zero voltage across the winding terminals, commonly called application of a zero voltage

16_Santoso_Sec16_p0961-1052.indd 1002

22/11/17 10:59 AM

POWER ELECTRONICS   1003

loop (ZVL). To determine which phase needs to be energized or de-energized, rotor position information is required; this may be sensed or estimated, and discrete position information is sometimes sufficient.76 The total torque produced by the machine has significant ripple, and unless instantaneous torque control is a requirement, average torque control is implemented. The average torque depends on the turn-on and turn-off angles (rotor positions w.r.t. the phase winding where that phase is energized and de-energized, respectively), and the current magnitude if current control is used.75 The control is implemented based on results of numerical simulation and then tuned experimentally. Ray et al. published one of the earliest papers on power converters for SRM,82 and suggested the asymmetric bridge converter, which is also known as the classical converter. The circuit topology, shown in Fig. 16-33b, is similar to a two-switch forward converter4 and fullfils all the basic requirements. Only one phase is shown, the circuit being identically for the other phases with a common connection to the input dc bus. The basic operating modes of the converter are Energization (S1, S2) on, (D1, D2) off

De-energization (D1, D2) on, (S1, S2) off

ZVL

(S1, D2) on, (S2, D1) off, or



(S2, D1) on, (S1, D2) off

uph = Vdc uph = -Vdc uph = 0

where all switches and diodes have been assumed ideal and the winding resistance has been neglected. This converter is extremely reliable and fault tolerant. The problem of “shoot-through’’ due to spurious turn-on of the two controlled switches in the same leg is avoided, since the phase winding is in series with the controlled switches. Shoot-through can be a major problem in full-bridge dc-dc converters and three phase inverters. Although this converter topology has become very popular and a packaged module similar to three-phase ac inverters is now available,83 there are several other converter topologies which may be suitable for specific applications. A detailed comparison of SRM converter topologies can be found in Refs. 75 and 84–86. DC motor drives use a dc-dc converter—buck, buck-boost, or full bridge depending on the requirements—and armature current control for controlling the instantaneous torque. The field current may also be controlled to reduce back emf at high speeds. Their popularity has been decreasing due to maintenance requirements and speed limitations of brushes. As the cost of power electronics reduces, better and low-cost permanent magnets are developed, better control and estimation techniques are implemented on lower-cost DSPs, and energy efficiency gains priority, it is expected that PMSM and BLDC drives will increase their share in the motor drives market. SRMs are also expected to gain ground in high-speed and harsh environment applications where energy efficiency is not the only driving factor. 16.8.3  Battery Charging Battery charging is a very large part of the ac-dc and dc-dc converter applications. The end use for batteries is in telecommunications, electric and hybrid electric vehicles, portable electronics, and energy storage for improving power system stability. Recently, storage for energy arbitrage and firming generation output of renewable sources is also gaining more attention. For a lead acid battery, there are three standard operating modes for the battery charger: (a) constant current (or bulk) charging during low state of charge, (b) constant voltage charging after about 80% state of charge, and (c) “float” or trickle charge after the battery reaches its open circuit voltage. Thus, the requirement on the power converter is to operate at its maximum current rating over a significant output voltage range with high efficiency. In addition, isolation from input line and power factor correction are usually required. In recent years lithium-ion (Li-ion) batteries have gained widespread usage for portable applications like laptop computers, PDAs, and cell phones. They have also been proposed for automotive applications. So far nickel metal hydride (NiMH) batteries are used in commercially available hybrid

16_Santoso_Sec16_p0961-1052.indd 1003

22/11/17 10:59 AM

1004  SECTION SIXTEEN

electric vehicles (HEV) while high-end electric vehicles use lithium-based battery chemistries.87 The advantages of Li-ion batteries are high-energy density, higher cell voltage of about 4.2 V, and low self-discharge rate.88 The disadvantages are high sensitivity to electrical stress and limited temperature range. The cell voltage has to be monitored for overvoltage (which is very close to the nominal open circuit voltage) to avoid catastrophic failure, and undervoltage to maintain battery life. Linear chargers are used for single-cell batteries requiring low-charging current, while switch mode converters are used for high-voltage and high-current charging. The charging technique is similar to lead acid—constant current followed by constant voltage. However, pulse charging (in combination with periodic discharge and periodic relaxation pulses) has also been proposed for improving battery life. A further complication with Li-ion is that the dependence of state of charge on open circuit cell voltage is only on a small voltage window (3.2–3.8 V). Thus, in the absence of a detailed cell model, a coulomb counting technique, which measures the charging and discharging current and estimates the self-discharge rate, is normally used to determine the battery state. 16.8.4  Fluorescent Lamps and Solid-State Lighting About 30% of the total electricity generated in the United States is consumed for lighting.89 Thus, there is significant interest in increasing energy efficiency of lighting mechanisms. Incandescent lighting although the most inefficient is still the cheapest in terms of $/lumens. Compact fluorescent lamps (CFLs) have gained ground due to their energy efficiency and are now commercially available as replacements for incandescent bulbs. In fact, in the United States, incandescent bulbs will not be available starting January 2012. Besides lighting, fluorescent lamps that emit ultraviolet light are used in several industrial applications like sterilization and curing (drying of coatings). CFLs and industrial lamps are usually powered using a switched mode converter called an electronic ballast. In one implementation, shown in Fig. 16-34a, the converter consists of a full- or halfbridge inverter with its output connected to an L-C-C (all in series) tank circuit. The dc voltage input to the inverter may be obtained using either a diode bridge rectifier or a power factor corrected frontend. The lamp filaments are connected in series with the L-C-C tank, with the two filaments being in parallel with one of the capacitors (Cp ). The other capacitor (Cs) provides dc blocking and also tunes the tank operation to a desirable characteristic. When the lamp is off (gas inside not ionized), it acts as an open circuit, so the inverter is effectively connected to a series resonant L-C circuit. To ionize the gas inside the lamp, the filaments have to be heated sufficiently followed by application of a high voltage [~ (kV)] across the lamp for a short time. Once the lamp is on (gas ionized) it acts as a resistive load, and the inverter load is then a series parallel tank circuit—series L-C-C with the equivalent resistance of the lamp in parallel with one capacitor. The inverter outputs a high-frequency square wave, typically in the range of 20 to 100 kHz; lamp operation at these frequencies results in increased light output. The switching frequency is varied to control the ballast operation. Initially, the tank circuit and the lamp are excited at a frequency significantly higher than the resonance frequency. During this time, called the preheat time, the lamp filaments increase in temperature. After a suitable delay the switching frequency is reduced toward resonance so that the voltage across the lamp increases until the gas inside the lamp ionizes and the lamp “ignites.” After ignition, the lamp acts like a resistive load, and the lamp output power is controlled indirectly by regulating the phase difference between the inverter current and voltage. The tank circuit also ensures resonant transitions of the converter switches90 leading to reduced losses. Several ICs that implement full control of a fluorescent lamp including preheat, ignition, and dimming control are commercially available.81 Operating waveforms from an electronic ballast are shown in Figs. 16-34b and 16-34c. High-intensity discharge (HID) lamps have a large share of commercial lighting such as street lighting, sports facilities, etc. They are of three types—mercury vapor, sodium vapor, and metal halide. The ballast requirements of these lamps differ from those of fluorescent lamps. Operation of these lamps at higher frequencies does not improve light output. Further, they exhibit acoustic resonance in the 10- to 100-kHz range. Thus electronic ballasts for these lamps operate at around 400 Hz. So far electronic ballasts for these lamps have not become very popular. Power supplies for plasma cutting have requirements similar to fluorescent lamp ballasts. Initially, a high voltage (~10 kV) is applied to produce an arc between two high-voltage electrodes.

16_Santoso_Sec16_p0961-1052.indd 1004

22/11/17 10:59 AM

POWER ELECTRONICS   1005

Cs Lr

Cp

Cs

C F L

(a)

(b)

(c) FIGURE 16-34  (a) compact fluorescent ballast circuit; (b) start-up waveforms for a 1-kW ballast (ignition occurs 0.6 s after turn-on); (c) steady-state waveforms of a 1-kW ballast.

16_Santoso_Sec16_p0961-1052.indd 1005

22/11/17 10:59 AM

1006  SECTION SIXTEEN

This is followed by arc transfer, transfer of the conducting ionized gas between the electrodes to the space between the negative electrode and the metal being cut (workpiece). Once the arc is transfered, the cutting procedure requires a current-controlled supply (at lower voltage) connected across the negative electrode and the workpiece. Since there are three terminals, two separate power supplies can be used—one for generating the initial high voltage, and the other for the actual cutting operation. The U.S. Department of Energy has identified solid-state lighting as a means to increase lighting efficiencies in the near future.89 Recent and expected breakthroughs in semiconductor and organic LEDs are the main impetus behind this. The major reasons to promote the LED are longer lifetime, mercury-free structure, energy saving property, and flexibility of color mixing and control. The LED can be connected in series, parallel, or combination of both, depending on the applications. A switched mode converter with a dc current regulated output is used to power the LED string. The output current is regulated to provide dimming control and to avoid failure due to overcurrent.91 At present LED lighting is not economically competitive with the alternatives in main stream applications although several innovations are being made to reduce the system level cost of adopting LEDs. When LEDs start replacing HID lamps, incandescent bulbs, and CFCs for commercial/residential lighting, they will open up a huge market for efficient and low-cost power electronic converters. 16.8.5  Automotive Applications Automotive applications of power electronics are in two domains: electric and hybrid electric drive trains, and auxiliary systems controlled by power converters. HEVs, PHEVs, and EVs.  Hybrid electric vehicles (HEVs) are now gaining commercial success due to their higher mileage, lower emissions, tax breaks, and rising oil prices. The basic ideas92 in an HEV are •  Operate engine at optimal efficiency, achieved at high speeds. •  During initial acceleration and at low speeds, power is supplied by a battery-powered motor leading to reduced idling losses and emissions. •  High acceleration power is derived from both the engine and the battery. •  During high speeds, the battery is charged from a generator connected to the engine. The motor used for generating mechanical power can also be used as a generator. •  During braking, the generator feeds energy back to the battery. Another variation is the so-called plug-in hybrid electric vehicle (PHEV). A PHEV operates from the energy stored in the battery for small distances (25 to 100 mi), e.g., commuting from home to work. The battery is then charged from a standard wall outlet or dedicated charging station. For longer distances the PHEV would switch to generating energy from gasoline. For the long range, besides the standard gasoline-engine approach, an alternate approach is to generate electricity from a generator set mounted on the vehicle. Fully electric vehicles (EV) have also been introduced notably by Tesla,93 Nissan,94 and Chevrolet.95 These operate from batteries (typically Li-ion) alone and are expected to have a range of 100 mi for a single charge. Means to increase their range via fast charging stations and quick battery swaps are being developed. On-board power electronic requirements for these are similar to HEVs. Charging stations with different levels of charging are currently under standardization by the SAE and IEEE. Hybrid and completely electric vehicles with fuel cells as the power source and some means of energy storage are also being developed by several auto manufacturers. These require power converters to interface fuel cell, energy storage element, motor/generator, and other electronically controlled loads. Auxiliary Systems.  In recent years electronically controlled load in automobiles has increased significantly. Further increase is expected due to more comfort features, and potential replacement

16_Santoso_Sec16_p0961-1052.indd 1006

22/11/17 10:59 AM

POWER ELECTRONICS   1007

of some mechanical systems by all electrical systems like active suspension and power steering. The present bus voltage in automotive systems (14 V), decided by the alternator charging voltage, implies very high currents for the expected high-power consumption. To keep the current levels manageable, the 42-V Power Net was proposed, and adopted by most auto companies and suppliers for future generation automobiles.1 The choice of 42 V has been made on the basis of safety considerations, load dump overvoltage transients, and optimal utilization of silicon in power semiconductor devices. It is expected that there will be a dual voltage system, with both 42 V and 14 V loads. Thus, a dc to dc converter, possibly bidirectional, will be required for interconnection between the two system voltages. Furthermore, converters with sophisticated controls will be required for features like active suspension and power steering.96

16.9  UTILITY APPLICATIONS OF POWER ELECTRONICS 16.9.1 Introduction The electric utility grid can be improved significantly leading to reduction in energy loss and operating costs, increased adoption of renewable generation sources, and more reliable operation, all with the use of mature technologies. This is the basic premise of the smart grid efforts for grid modernization in the United States. The smart grids umbrella covers advances from different fields like renewable generation, battery chemistry, grid monitoring and control, information technology, electric-sourced transportation, and conservation at point of use, to name a few. Power electronics is a key enabler for smart grids and has the potential to change the landscape of power generation, transmission, distribution, and end use. Renewable generation is a fast growing component of the generation mix as a result of several advances in generation and grid interface technology, and government incentives. Possibility of large-scale renewable adoption has posed challenges of variability in generated power, capacity underutilization, and effects on system dynamics. Power electronics technology in the form of grid interface converters for the generation sources and energy storage devices, and grid control devices is therefore an important component of sustainable generation. Currently in their infancy, electric vehicles represent a big shift in transportation from a dependence on oil to electric power that may eventually be generated from renewable sources. The effort ambitious in scope and daunting in infrastructure requirements is being realized in small steps trying out a variety of technologies addressing different aspects. Power electronic converters are a critical component in electric sourced transportation both for energy conversion within the vehicle and grid interface of the vehicles. Growing energy demand, coupled with economic, environmental, and political restrictions on newer generation and transmission infrastructure, means that the existing resources operate near their stability limits. As a result dynamic instability, interarea oscillations, voltage instability cascading to major blackouts have become issues of real concerns today. Power electronic technology in the form of FACTS devices is the key component that increases stability limits of the grid infrastructure. Several modern loads such as the processing plants in semiconductor industry or data centers require clean and uninterrupted power. Power electronic-based power quality solutions are essential for these loads to mitigate problems such as voltage sags, harmonics, and flicker in line voltage. Widespread use of power electronics in power systems is further fueled by dramatic advances in power semiconductor materials and devices, especially those based on silicon carbide (SiC),97,98 and advances in the fields of wide area power system monitoring and communication. This subsection briefly describes the major power electronics applications in power systems, namely, interfacing renewable generation and storage with electric grid, flexible ac transmission systems (FACTS), and custom power. Figure 16-35 shows the interconnected power system network with some of the major power electronics highlighted.

16_Santoso_Sec16_p0961-1052.indd 1007

22/11/17 10:59 AM

1008  SECTION SIXTEEN

SSB

500,230 kV

SSB

ASD DG

STATCOM

DVR DG

UPFC

DG DG

HVDC

Generation

120,240 V

DG

DG

Microgrid

Transmission

Distribution

EndUse

FIGURE 16-35  Power electronics applications in power systems.

16.9.2  Renewable and Distributed Generation Interface Renewable generation is an important energy option for the 21st century and a key element of the restructuring of electric grid. Renewable sources such as solar, wind, and ocean energy and hydrogen (with photovoltaics for hydrogen generation) represent one of the most promising paths to sustainable energy. Photovoltaics (PV), wind energy, fuel cells, and micro turbines are among the most promising technologies at present. Most of these resources require a power electronic converter to interface with the power system network. Fuel cells and PV require dc to ac conversion, micro turbines require high frequency to line frequency conversion, and generators used to capture wind energy are controlled through a rotor side power converter. Further, these may also require power electronics-controlled energy storage. Grid Interface for Photovoltaics.  Figure 16-36 shows a schematic diagram of the converter that can be used to interconnect photovoltaics with the utility. The input voltage from a PV array may vary from 50 to 500 V. This is converted to a well regulated and isolated dc voltage through a high frequency dc-dc converter. The dc link voltage is then converted to the required 60 Hz ac voltage by using a PWM voltage source converter. In a simple grid connection of PV, there is no need for the intermediate dc bus other than enabling the use of mature converter topologies for dc-dc and dc-ac conversion. DC link

PV

Lg

Li

Lboost

HFT Cf

CDC link

CPV

Isolated boost type DC - DC converter

Filter & energy storage

Grid

Rf

Full-bridge inverter

LCL filter

FIGURE 16-36  Single-phase grid interface for photovoltaics.

16_Santoso_Sec16_p0961-1052.indd 1008

22/11/17 10:59 AM

POWER ELECTRONICS   1009

Thus some PV inverters now use direct dc-ac conversion without an intermediate dc link: the dc output of PV panels is converted to high frequency (order of 10 kHz) ac, which after the required scaling by a high-frequency transformer is then converted to low-frequency ac using a cyclo-converter. This approach, although it requires bidirectional switches is now gaining popularity due to reducing cost of power semiconductor devices and elimination of high-voltage electrolytic capacitors. An important feature of a PV interface is maximum power point tracking (MPPT) circuitry designed to derive the maximum possible energy from solar radiation by suitably adjusting the current drawn from the solar panel. The cost of the power converter is quite small and its energy conversion efficiency very high relative to the PV panel. Thus, system level options that increase total energy capture via fine-grain MPPT using multiple power converters have been proposed (see Fig. 16-37). In the basic micro-inverter approach each PV panel has a grid interface

Micro DC-AC/DC converters/panel

Subpanel converter

FIGURE 16-37  PV collection architectures.

micro-inverter and panel level MPPT is performed.99 The scheme improves performance with respect to different solar conditions for different panels (e.g., shading on one panel will not affect performance of other panels) and manufacturing differences between panels. A variation of this approach is to convert the output of each PV panel with MPPT to a regulated dc and then use a central inverter to interface with the grid. This provides an opportunity to integrate energy storage at the intermediate dc bus. Going further, subpanel level MPPT can be performed by using several converters for each panel. This strategy accounts for partial shading of panels and differences between cells within the panel. It has been shown that the scheme increases total energy output even though an extra conversion stage is used.100,101 An emerging trend in PV inverters especially at high power ratings (MW) is the so-called smart inverters which provide grid interactive functionalities including reactive power support, voltage regulation, storage management, controllable ramp rates, and fault ride through. Fuel cells can also be interfaced to the grid using a similar configuration as shown in Fig. 16-38. Since fuel cells have very little over current or short-circuit rating, an energy storage capacitor is installed at the input side of the converter.

Fuel cell

Isolated dc-dc converter with dynamic energy storage

Splitphase inverter

Line Neutral Line

FIGURE 16-38  Fuel cell connection to the grid.

16_Santoso_Sec16_p0961-1052.indd 1009

22/11/17 10:59 AM

1010  SECTION SIXTEEN

Grid Interface for Wind Turbine.  Wind energy is widely considered to be the fastest growing alternate energy source. The cost of wind energy in large wind farms located in good wind sites, at about 5 cents/kWh, is now competitive with the conventional utility generation and is expected to reduce further. The total installed capacity of wind energy worldwide was 215,000 MW for the world and 42,432 MW for the United States as of June 2011. Large wind farms consist of several multimegawatt wind turbines that are interconnected with the utility grid through a medium voltage collector network. Doubly fed induction generators (DFIG) with a wound rotor and an ac/dc/ac PWM converter, as shown in Fig. 16-39, is the most widely used Wound rotor induction generator Gear box

T1

T3

T5

Rotor

T1

vdc T2

T4

T6

Rotor side converter

T3

T5

Rg

Lg Grid

c T2

DC link

T4

T6

Grid side converter

FIGURE 16-39  Grid connection of a doubly fed induction generator.

technology for wind generation for high power. The main advantage of the DFIG-based generation is that it allows extraction of maximum energy from the wind at varying wind speeds, with the power converter rated only for about 20% to 25% of the total power. The stator winding is connected directly to the utility grid while the rotor is supplied with controlled, variable frequency currents by the PWM converter. By appropriate control of the rotor currents the machine can generate power from subsynchronous to super synchronous speeds. Another advantage of DFIG is that the grid side converter can generate or absorb reactive power. Permanent magnet synchronous machines (PMSM) are widely used in wind turbines at lowpower levels (up to a few kW). These low-power systems usually have a diode bridge rectifier at the machine terminals and the generated dc power is then used to charge batteries or converted to ac via an inverter. PMSMs with fully rated converters are also beginning to be widely used in highpower wind energy generators. A typical configuration for the converter of PMSM wind generators consists of back-to-back PWM voltage source converters rated for the peak power and sharing a common dc link as shown in Fig. 16-40. In this configuration, the permanent magnet machine is fully decoupled from the grid, making it easier to provide fault and zero voltage ride through, and also provide enhanced grid support features. In addition the PMSM machines offer higher efficiency, wider range of speed control, smaller size, and lower requirements on maintenance due to the absence of slip rings.

16_Santoso_Sec16_p0961-1052.indd 1010

22/11/17 10:59 AM

POWER ELECTRONICS   1011

Machine side PWM rectifier

DC link

Grid side PWM inverter

Permanent magnet synchronous generator

3-phase transformer

Gear box Grid

FIGURE 16-40  Permanent magnet generator system for a wind turbine.

16.9.3  Distributed Generation and Microgrids Apart from serving as an environment-friendly energy source, the distributed generation (DG) systems are expected to provide various other benefits. For example, the concept of microgrids is gaining prominence.102 Microgrid is a cluster of distributed energy resources (DER) with power converters, energy storage, and loads, which can be controlled together and present to the grid as a single entity. With suitably designed power converters, and with coordinated control, the microgrids can enhance stability, provide relief to transmission congestion, and provide reactive power support. Another promising approach is to use distributed micro sources for combined heat and power (CHP).103 Due to the various ancillary functions expected, inverter-based DGs are becoming more widespread compared to traditional reciprocating engines. The interconnect standards for DG are still evolving, like the IEEE 1547 standard for interconnecting distributed resources with electric power systems.104 IEEE 1547 specifies the requirements for the DG to disconnect from the grid under deviations in voltage magnitude and frequency or under grid outages. Much work is still needed to understand the effect of large penetration of DG on fault currents, protection, and dynamic interactions with the power system. Standards work currently underway is looking at enhancing the role of DG. The IEEE standard on smart grid technology currently being formulated is expected to include interconnection requirements and added functionalities for DER and electric-sourced transportation. 16.9.4  Electric-Sourced Transportation Large-scale adoption of electric and plug-in electric vehicles will dramatically change the grid load profile and usage. Besides charging at residences, the limited range of these vehicles on one charge requires charging infrastructure similar to gas stations. Pilot installations of charging infrastructure are now being carried out in different parts of the United States. Three levels of charging with increasing power and decreasing charge times have been proposed. Level 1 charging is from a standard power outlet in the house. Level 2 charging is from ±120 V with an 80-A service. Level 3 charging uses a higher voltage dc interface. Power converters are required for charging stations external to vehicles and chargers within vehicles. Needless to say this is a potentially big application of power electronics. Integration of vehicle charging with a smart grid will include time of day-based charging in order to flatten the daily load profile seen by the utility, and thereby shift more generation to base-loaded plants. Besides acting as a load, several functions for these vehicles and the charging infrastructure have been proposed due to the presence of the battery and power converters. Among these are energy arbitrage, integration with demand response or load control, frequency regulation, reactive power control, and renewable firming. These functionalities are expected to offset the high cost of batteries. However, their ramifications on battery lifetime and capacity reduction are still being evaluated.

16_Santoso_Sec16_p0961-1052.indd 1011

22/11/17 10:59 AM

1012  SECTION SIXTEEN

16.9.5  Flexible AC Transmission Systems FACTS is a collective term for different types of power electronic devices/converters-based systems that are capable of controlling power flow in high-voltage ac transmission systems.105,106 With advances in power semiconductor devices, PWM methods, and control theory, the use of FACTS devices has seen a significant increase. FACTS devices are capable of the following major functions: •  Control power flow along desired transmission corridors, which is critical for a deregulated utility; they can also minimize loop flows. •  Increase transmission capacity without requiring new transmission infrastructure. •  Improve transient, dynamic, and voltage stability, and provide damping for interarea oscillations. jX V1 ∠ 0

V2 ∠ −δ

FIGURE 16-41  Single-line diagram of a two-bus system.

Different types of FACTS devices control different parameters of the transmission system like the effective line impedance, bus voltage magnitudes, or phase angles to control power flow and to increase stability margins. Consider the single line diagram of a two bus system shown in Fig. 16-41. The real power flow in the connecting transmission line is given by

P=

V1V2 X

sin(δ ) (16-54)

where V1, V2 are the magnitudes of sending and receiving end voltages, respectively, d is the phase angle between the two voltages, and X is the series line impedance.107 FACTS devices control one or more of these three parameters to control power flow and improve stability. Transient Stability.  FACTS devices have the ability to enhance both transient and dynamic stability of power system networks, thereby enabling increased power flow through existing transmission lines. Transient instability occurs when a major disturbance like fault, line outage, or loss of generation results in large rotor angle deviations leading to loss of synchronism. The rotor angle deviation is governed by the swing equation given in Eq. (16-55). 2 H d 2δ = Pm − Pe (16-55) ω o dt 2



A2

Amargin

Pe

Pm A1 δ1

δ2

δ3

δcrit

π

δ

FIGURE 16-42  Equal area criteria for transient stability.

16_Santoso_Sec16_p0961-1052.indd 1012

where H is the inertia constant in MJ/MVA, wo is the synchronous speed, while Pm and Pe are the mechanical power input and electrical power output, respectively. During a fault, the electrical energy drawn from the generator reduces significantly, while mechanical power input remains roughly constant, leading to increasing rotor angle. If the fault is not cleared before a critical time, transient instability occurs. The critical clearing time depends on the electrical power output during the fault and immediately after fault clearance. Since power flow can be controlled continuously using FACTS devices, power during and after a fault can be controlled to improve the stability margin of the system. Transient instability is often studied using the equal area criterion as shown in Fig. 16-42. Initially the mechanical input power input is equal to the electrical power transmitted, at an

22/11/17 10:59 AM

POWER ELECTRONICS   1013

angle d1. A fault at the generator makes the electrical power zero while the mechanical input power remains the same, leading to increase in rotor angle from d1 to d2, at which point the fault is cleared. During this interval, the stored kinetic energy in the machine increases, and increase in kinetic energy is equal to the area A1 in Fig. 16-42. After the fault is cleared the electrical power transmitted is higher (due to increased phase angle) than the mechanical power input. Hence, the machine begins to decelerate. However, the phase angle increases further due to the stored kinetic energy. The maximum angle is reached at d3, when the decelerating energy represented by the area A2 becomes equal to the accelerating area A1. If the phase angle extends beyond dcrit , then the system is unstable since decelerating energy cannot balance the accelerating energy. The area Amargin between d3 and dcrit. represents the transient stability margin of the system. FACTS devices can improve the margin by dynamically changing the P - d characteristics of the system. Thyristor-Controlled Series Capacitor.  The earlier FACTS devices were predominantly thyristor based, like the thyristor-controlled series capacitor (TCSC) and static VAR compensator (SVC).106 TCSC is a series-connected FACTS device that controls the effective impedance of the transmission line. Figure 16-43a shows the basic schematic of a TCSC, which consists of a capacitor in parallel with a thyristor-controlled reactor (TCR). TCR is a series combination of an inductor and a pair of phase-controlled thyristors. By suitably controlling the firing angle of the thyristors, the reactance (inductive) of TCR, and therefore, the effective fundamental impedance of TCSC, can be controlled continuously. The relationship between the firing angle and the effective TCSC impedance is highly nonlinear. The firing angle, a, is measured from the zero crossing of the capacitor voltage. As an example, corresponding to an installed capacitive impedance of 0.5 pu (per unit) and inductive reactance of 0.1667 pu, the effective impedance of TCSC can be controlled from about 4 pu capacitive to 2 pu inductive. The effect of TCSC control on the transient stability margin is illustrated in Fig. 16-43b. In the figure s indicates the degree of compensation. One of the major advantages of TCSC, when compared with uncontrolled series compensation, is the ability to mitigate subsynchronous resonance (SSR).106 Voltage Source Converter-Based FACTS.  The newer FACTS devices are based on voltage source converters (VSC) implemented using fully controllable devices such as GTO, MCT, IGCT, and IGBT.108 Within their voltage and current ratings, the VSC-based FACTS devices are capable of injecting any suitable, controlled voltages and/or currents at the line frequency. The main advantages of these FACTS devices, compared to the thyristor-based devices, are the speed of response and the extended control range which is mostly independent of the line operating conditions. The main VSC based FACTS devices are the static compensator (STATCOM), the static synchronous series compensator (SSSC), and the unified power flow controller (UPFC). Pe

Settings

Pe =

Feedback A2

L Iline

XL T

Amargin

Controller

V2 sin d X(1 − s)

C A1 TCSC module (a)

δ (b)

FIGURE 16-43  TCSC: (a) schematic, (b) enhancement of transient stability.

16_Santoso_Sec16_p0961-1052.indd 1013

22/11/17 10:59 AM

1014  SECTION SIXTEEN

Static Synchronous Compensator.  Static Synchronous Compensator (STATCOM) is a shunt FACTS device capable of injecting controlled currents at the point of connection with the transmission system.109,106 The injected current is usually in phase quadrature (leading or lagging) with the line voltage, so that only reactive power is supplied or consumed by the STATCOM. If real power capability is present, through the use of active energy sources or large energy storage systems, then the injected current can have different phase relationships with the line voltage, thereby extending its control range. Figure 16-44a shows the schematic of a STATCOM connected at the midpoint of a two bus transmission system model. The voltage source converter is capable of generating the required fundamental voltage such that the current injected into the system has the desired phase and magnitude to control power flow. The voltage at the dc link is kept constant by large capacitor banks. Losses in the system

VM ∠ d 2

X/2

X/2

Coupling transformer X/2

VM

∠

d 2

X/2

Iinj

LLk Vo ∠

VR ∠ 0

VS ∠ d Iq

d 2 VSC

d 2 Vdc (a) Pe 2V 2 d sin 2 X

V2 sind X

(b)

d

FIGURE 16-44  STATCOM: (a) mid-point connection, (b) variation of power with phase angle d.

16_Santoso_Sec16_p0961-1052.indd 1014

22/11/17 10:59 AM

POWER ELECTRONICS   1015

are compensated, and the capacitor voltage maintained, by drawing a small real power from the transmission system. The voltage source converter is connected to the transmission line through a line frequency coupling transformer, which enables the STATCOM to work with lower voltage switches. The output voltage of STATCOM (neglecting losses) is controlled to be in phase with the line voltage. Hence, the system can be modeled as two in-phase, line frequency voltage sources, connected by a reactor (usually the leakage inductance of the coupling transformer), which results in the current Iinj being purely reactive. Referring to Fig. 16-44a, if the magnitude of Vo is larger than Vm , then the STATCOM feeds reactive power into the system, and if Vo is smaller, it absorbs reactive power. Referring to Fig. 16-44a, the amplitudes of the sending end, midpoint, and receiving end voltages are assumed to be equal for simplicity (Vs = Vm = Vr = V). The STATCOM compensation at the midpoint effectively segments the transmission line into two independent parts, each with an effective line reactance of X/2. Neglecting losses, the real power flow is the same in both parts, and can be derived as given in Eq. (16-56).

P=

V2 δ  sin   (16-56) ( X/2)  2 

where d is the angle between the sending and receiving end voltages. Figure 16-44b shows the variation of real power flow with phase angle, as determined by Eq. (16-56). The curve corresponding to no compensation is also shown for comparison. It can be clearly seen that the STATCOM significantly improves the transient stability margin, that is, for a given fault clearing time, STATCOM allows a much higher real power to be transmitted. In the case of power system oscillations, such as inter-area oscillations, the shunt compensation is varied dynamically to provide damping. Static Synchronous Series Compensator.  The SSSC is a series connected device that injects a synchronous line frequency voltage, normally in quadrature with the line current. SSSC controls power flow by controlling the line voltage amplitude, phase angle, and effective line impedance. Unified Power Flow Controller.   The UPFC is a versatile FACTS device that combines the functions of a STATCOM and an SSSC, and extends their capability to inject shunt current or series voltage that involves real power flow as well.110 With UPFC, the real and reactive power can be controlled independently. UPFC is capable of controlling all the power system parameters such as voltage magnitudes, phase angles, and effective line impedance simultaneously, and therefore, meet multiple control objectives. Figure 16-45a shows the schematic diagram of the UPFC. It consists of two voltage source converters with separate controllers but sharing a common dc link with dc storage capacitors. In present installations of UPFC, most of the control functions are performed by the series converter by injecting a voltage Vinj whose phase is independent of the line current and can vary practically from 0° to 360°. The magnitude of the injected voltage can also be varied continuously within the rating of the series converter. The main function of the shunt converter is to provide the real power exchanged by the series converter with the system. It may be noted that the real power exchanged by the series converter is ultimately derived from the transmission line, but, the reactive power is absorbed or supplied locally by the series converter and does not need to come from the transmission system. The shunt converter can be operated at unity power factor or can be controlled to provide additional functions beyond supporting real power needs of the series converter. Figure 16-45b highlights the capabilities of the series converter of the UPFC, namely control of voltage magnitudes, phase angles, and impedance.106 With the injected voltage in phase or antiphase with the line voltage the UPFC provides voltage regulation or magnitude control. For a given voltage rating of the series converter, the in-phase addition provides maximum voltage magnitude control. For impedance control, the magnitude of the injected voltage is proportional to the line current and the phase is in quadrature (leading or lagging). In phase angle control, the magnitude and angle of the injected voltage are controlled such that the sending end voltage has the required phase angle without any change in the magnitude. These three features can be combined to achieve multifunction power flow control.

16_Santoso_Sec16_p0961-1052.indd 1015

22/11/17 10:59 AM

1016  SECTION SIXTEEN

V1 d 1

V2 d 2

+ vinj – iinj

Shunt VSC

VDC Series VSC Common DC Link (a)

V 1′

V1

V1

V1 V ′1

V ′1

s Iline Magnitude control

Impedance control

Phase control

(b) FIGURE 16-45  Unified power flow controller: (a) schematic, (b) control capabilities.

16.9.6  Custom Power The digital age loads, e.g., processing plants in semiconductor industry and data centers, require clean and uninterrupted power. These loads are highly intolerant to (even momentary) power quality problems such as voltage sags or interruptions, harmonics in line voltage, phase unbalance, and flicker in supply voltage. Power electronic systems that mitigate power quality problems in utility distribution systems (1 to 38 kV) are defined as custom power devices.111–113 Similar to FACTS, the custom power devices can be connected in shunt or series with the distribution line or a combination of both. The major custom power devices are the dynamic voltage restorer (DVR), distribution static compensator (DSTATCOM) and the unified power quality controller (UPQC). The DVR is a series connected device that injects a controlled voltage to compensate for voltage sags and other momentary disturbances. The DSTATCOM is a shunt connected device injecting controlled currents at the point of common coupling to compensate for power quality problems in the load current. UPQC combines the features of DVR and DSTATCOM. Dynamic Voltage Restorer.  Short duration voltage sags are the predominant power quality events, with estimated revenue lost per event of more than $1M for pharmaceutical industries. Power acceptability curves that quantify voltage disturbances in terms of magnitude of these sags (and swells) and duration of the disturbance have been developed.114 The most popular of the power acceptability curves is the CBEMA curve shown in Fig. 16-46. This was developed by the Computer Business Equipment Manufacturers Association (CBEMA), now the Information Technology Industry Council (ITIC). The semiconductor industry has its own standard called SEMI F47, developed by the Semiconductor Equipment and Materials Institute (SEMI). Dynamic voltage restorers, which are among the most installed custom power devices, protect sensitive equipment against short-term voltage disturbances.115 Figure 16-47 shows the schematic

16_Santoso_Sec16_p0961-1052.indd 1016

22/11/17 10:59 AM

POWER ELECTRONICS   1017

250

Overvoltage conditions 0.5 cycle

150 100 50 0

Acceptable power

−50 −100

0.0001 0.001

Rated voltage 8.33 ms

Change in bus voltage (%)

200

Undervoltage conditions

0.01 0.1 1 Time, (seconds)

10

100

1000

FIGURE 16-46  The CBEMA curve.

Fault 69/12 kV

Injected voltage

Fault

+

=

DVR

Critical load

FIGURE 16-47  Application of a DVR.

of a DVR. As seen, DVR is a voltage source converter-based series connected device that injects a line frequency voltage of appropriate magnitude and phase such that the voltage across the sensitive loads is always well regulated, and any disturbances in the input voltage is not propagated to the load. The voltage source converter is implemented using IGBT switches, which operate at frequencies in the range of tens of kHz. They have fairly high control bandwidth and can respond to voltage disturbances in a small fraction of the line frequency cycle. When the DVR is not connected to an active dc source and cannot handle real power in steady state, the injected voltage is constrained to be in phase quadrature with the load current. With this mode of control, the magnitude of sags that a DVR can correct becomes a function of the load power factor, and at higher power factor (close to unity) only a smaller voltage disturbance can be corrected.

16_Santoso_Sec16_p0961-1052.indd 1017

22/11/17 10:59 AM

1018  SECTION SIXTEEN

Since most of the sag events are of short duration, many of the installed DVRs rely on the large energy storage capacitor to supply real power for a short duration, and not constrain the injected voltage to be in-phase quadrature. Several other installations use a separate rectifier to supply real power to the dc link from the distribution system.116 DSTATCOM.  The distribution STATCOM has similar structure as that of the STATCOM used in transmission systems, and injects controlled currents. However, the main objectives of DSTATCOM are quite different. The load currents in distribution system can be unbalanced and contain reactive and harmonic components. Standards such as IEEE 519 and IEC 61000 place limits on maximum permissible harmonic currents for various types of equipment and voltage levels.62,63 The DSTATCOM with closed loop control, injects correction currents such that the compensated load draws balanced, fundamental, unity power factor current. Unified Power Quality Conditioner.  The unified power quality conditioner (UPQC) combines the features of a DVR and DSTATCOM and can inject current in shunt and voltage in series simultaneously. Figure 16-48 shows the schematic of a UPQC. It has the same structure as that of UPFC used in transmission systems, consisting of two voltage source converters sharing a common iS iL dc link. One of the converters is connected − + in series with the distribution line injecting A B vinj + controlled voltages and the other converter is connected in shunt and injects controlled L + v currents. Therefore, the UPQC can simultaneL o iinj vS ously correct for unbalances and distortion in a line voltage as well as load currents. d − − C Solid state switches used to connect critical loads to multiple feeders or to break shortUPQC circuit currents, hence improving power quality, are also considered as custom power devices. FIGURE 16-48  Unified power quality conditioner. These are referred to as network reconfiguring devices and include solid-state current limiter (SSCL), solid-state breaker (SSB), and solid-state transfer switch (SSTS).111 These are much faster than the conventional mechanical switches and hence, significantly enhance the reliability of the distribution system. 16.9.7  Solid State Transformers Power generation, transmission, and distribution are the three main parts of the modern power system, in which the power transformers play a critical role. The power transformers enable a high efficiency and long distance power transmission by boosting the voltage to a higher one on the generation side. On the distribution system side, this high voltage is stepped down to lower voltages for the industrial, commercial, and residential use. The traditional line frequency (60 Hz to 50 Hz) transformer (LFT) is totally a passive device. Its advantages are high efficiency and high reliability since it has been in use for more than a century. It could also be said that the invention and development of the LFT is a key reason that today’s electric grid is dominantly an ac grid. The main disadvantage of the LFT is its lack of any control functionality. These functionalities are increasing required by today’s grid, especially on the destitution side of the grid, also known as the edge of the grid. These functionalities, include, but not limited to reactive power support and voltage support, power flow control, harmonic mitigation, voltage ride through, and fault isolation. Also the size and weight of LFT is general very high and hence there is a desire to reduce them if possible. Some of the above mentioned functions are currently provided by solutions invented to address these issues on a case by case basis. Tap changer and capacitor banks, for example, are used to address the reactive power support and voltage control issue. Power electronics based solutions such as SVC and STATCOM are also used to provide reactive power and voltage control. Active power filter (APF)

16_Santoso_Sec16_p0961-1052.indd 1018

22/11/17 10:59 AM

POWER ELECTRONICS   1019

is used to mitigate the harmonic current in the grid. DVR is used to provide low voltage ride through capability. However, a much better and elegant solution is to replace the LFT with a solid-state transformer (SST) or power electronics transformer (PET). The motivation is that the SST will embed almost all of the above mention smart functions into a single equipment. Equipment with communication capability, it also allows a much better and faster control from a utility operator. The size and weight of the SST is also much smaller than the LFT because the galvanic isolation transformer is operating at a frequency significantly higher than 60 Hz. Shown in Fig. 16-49, the SST is a power electronic device that replaces the traditional LFT by means of high frequency transformer isolated ac-ac conversion technique. The basic operation of

Source

Solid state transformer

Load

FIGURE 16-49  Solid State transformer structure.

the SST is firstly to change the 50/60 Hz ac voltage to a high frequency one (normally in the range of several kHz to tens of kHz), then this high-frequency voltage is stepped up/down by a high-frequency transformer with dramatically decreased volume and weight, and finally shaped back into the desired 50/60 Hz one to feed the load. Voltage step down is also achieved by properly selecting the turns ratio of the high-frequency transformer. Depends on the application, at least one side of the SST is connected to very high voltages, making SST a very challenging application for power electronics. As an example, a single phase SST for residential customer in the United States may require the input side to operate with a 7.2 kV ac distribution grid voltage with a peak value of 10 kV. This will require semiconductor devices with breakdown voltages of more than 15 kV if simple two level topologies are used. Needless to say, the progress in power electronics technology, such as the multilevel converter topology and ultra-high voltage power semiconductor devices, is making the SST concept more practical today than many years ago. For example, 15 kV MOSFET transistor based on wide bandgap semiconductor material SiC has been proposed and researched as a key technology for SST application142,146 while 6.5 kV Si IGBT device and multilevel topology are used in a SST prototypes.145 The demand for smart grid functionalities and better renewable energy integration is another main driver for the world wide effort in investigating SST applications in power system.143 Numerous power electronics topology could be applied to the SST, and they can be classified as shown in Fig. 16-50. Each SST architecture has its own pros and cons in terms of efficiency, weight, and functionality. Type A SST represents a possible low cost, high reliability, and light weight solution due to the simple one-stage conversion configuration. Four-quadrant power devices will be needed in case of bidirectional power flow operation condition while unidirectional switches can be used if the power flow is in one direction. However, the lack of the dc link makes them unsuitable for applications where reactive power compensation is required. In addition, disturbances on one side may also affect the other side, which is one of the drawbacks of the LFT. Type B and Type C SSTs adopt a two-stage configuration, with an isolation stage on either the high- or low-voltage side. Four-quadrant power devices may also be needed on the ac side of the isolation stage for bidirectional power flow. Compared with the Type A configuration, reactive power compensation is possible for Type B and C SSTs if suitable topologies are chosen. Type B also offers a low-voltage dc link that can be used to power dc loads and dc resources such as PV and energy storage devices. However, Type B configuration is quite challenging from power electronics point of view since zero-voltageswitching (ZVS) is hard to be guaranteed in such a wide input range circuit, and also mature multilevel topologies cannot be easily applied on the high-voltage side. In this condition, high switching losses may not be avoided without sacrificing switching frequency, leading to lower efficiency, and

16_Santoso_Sec16_p0961-1052.indd 1019

22/11/17 10:59 AM

1020  SECTION SIXTEEN

Type A: HVAC

LVAC

Type B: HVAC

LVDC

LVAC

HVAC

HVDC

LVAC

HVAC

HVDC

Type C:

Type D: LVDC

LVAC

FIGURE 16-50  Classification of SST topologies.

difficult thermal management of the power devices. Type C topologies may not face such a problem since lots of works have been done for the high-voltage ac/dc conversion. Nonetheless, the lack of the low-voltage dc bus makes the integration of renewable resources on the low-voltage (potentially residential) side unfeasible. Most of the SST topologies developed so far use the structure shown in Type D, in which three stage structures are adopted. This structure can leverage many of the existing topologies, and optimized design could be achieved. If the semiconductor breakdown voltage is not high enough for the intended ac grid voltage, modular multilevel topologies can be used to increase the voltage handing capability. A typical implementation is shown in Fig. 16-51144 which also has three conversion stages, so it is of Type D SST but with a modular multilevel implementation instead of a simple two level implementation. The cascaded multilevel converter is utilized on the high-voltage side with identical (low voltage) H-bridges, thus low-voltage power device can be adopted. Several dc-dc converters with relatively high switching frequency (in the range of a few kHz to tens of kHz decided by the power devices) are High voltage side A B

Phase A Phase B Phase C

C

Low voltage side

a b c

Converter cell no.2

N

Converter cell no.N

FIGURE 16-51  A modular type SST for high-voltage and high-power application.

16_Santoso_Sec16_p0961-1052.indd 1020

22/11/17 10:59 AM

POWER ELECTRONICS   1021

Rectifier

Dual half bridge

L

DC/AC inverter

+ –

+ –

Ls Cs

+ –

+ –

Ls

Cs

FIGURE 16-52  A Type D SST with a two level converter using 15 kV SiC MOSFET.146

then parallel connected to a common low-voltage dc bus. In the last stage, conventional low-voltage source inverter technologies can be used. It is worth to point out that there is no limitation for the number of modules since this is the key feature of the cascaded type multilevel converter. The number of the modules is depended on the operating voltage and power device adopted. Single phase or three-phase SST can both be implemented with this architecture as shown in Fig. 16-51. If the semiconductor device breakdown voltage is high enough, SST can be implemented with a simple two level topology, such as the one shown in Fig. 16-52.146 In this case, six 15 kV SiC MOSFETs are used to implement a 20 kVA Type D SST. The isolated dc/dc converter operates at 20 kHz due low switching loss under the ZVS condition. The current rating required for the high-voltage MOSFETs is only 10 A, which is very low due to the low KVA rating needed for residential applications. As already mentioned, the SST is not a simple replacement of the LFT, it provides additional functions in addition to isolation and voltage conversion, such as voltage regulation, load regulation, harmonic compensation, etc. The future distribution system architecture is proposed as shown in Fig. 16-53. The existing power distribution network is depicted on the left part, where traditional

Wind farm Tidal power plant

AC/AC

Solar farm

DC/AC

Energy storage

Traction system

P

P

P

P

AC/AC

Wind farm

P

P

P

P SST energy storage

P

P

AC/AC

STATCOM, FACTs SVC...

Tidal power plant Solar farm

DC/AC

M

SST renewable energy integration

Q

Q

Harmonic

Harmonic

APFs Where we are

SST voltage conversion

Energy storage

M

Traction system

SST var Compensation SST harmonic filtering In the future

FIGURE 16-53  Vision of SST enabled future distribution power grid.

16_Santoso_Sec16_p0961-1052.indd 1021

22/11/17 10:59 AM

1022  SECTION SIXTEEN

transformers are adopted to interface renewable energy resources, energy storage devices, FACTs devices, and loads to the distribution line. The right hand side demonstrates conceptually how the future distribution system looks like with the SSTs as the main interface. It is clear that the SST could significantly change the architecture of future power distribution grid. 16.9.8  Modular Multilevel Converters Multilevel converters are attractive for two major reasons, the ability to increase the operating voltages and an improved ac waveform quality. Among many different types of multilevel converter topologies, MMC is a relatively new family member.147,148 It has gained its popularity quickly because of its advantages such as distributed location of capacitive energy storages, modular and scalable design, low switching frequency, transformer/inductor-less grid connection, and the availability of a common dc link which is very useful for HVDC transmission system application.149 Figure 16-54a

+

idc

vau

Cell 1 iau

+ vbu

vcu

ibu

Cell N

+ Vdc

icu

Cell N

Cell N

r

r

L

L

L

L

idiffa

r

ioa iob

L +

r

ial

Cell 1 vcl

ibl

Cell N

Cell N

voa vob voc

r

Cell 1 vbl

Lg

L ioc +

Cell 1 val

Cell 1

r

–

+

+

Cell 1

icl Cell N

(a)

Cell

(b) FIGURE 16-54  Configuration of a three-phase MMC converter: (a) power circuit, and (b) cell configuration.

shows the basic topology of the MMC. It consists of two arms per phase leg, in which several switching cells are connected in series together with an arm inductor. The switching cells are controlled to synthesize the desired ac phase voltage, and at the same time balance the distributed capacitor voltage. The arm inductor is necessary to limit the circulating current that flows within the converter.150

16_Santoso_Sec16_p0961-1052.indd 1022

22/11/17 10:59 AM

POWER ELECTRONICS   1023

Different switching cells could be adopted in MMC, while the most common ones are half-bridge circuit and full-bridge circuit as shown in Fig. 16-54b. The control architecture of MMC could be formed by the following modeling process by taking phase A as an example. Define the direction of circulating current as shown in Fig. 16-54, the arm current can be expressed as iau =

Thus the circulating current is

ioa 2

+ idiffa ial = −

ioa 2

+ idiffa (16-57)

1 idiffa = (iau + ial ) (16-58) 2



According to Kirchoff’s voltage law (KVL) Vdc di di + vau + L au + riau + L g oa + voa = 0 (16-59) 2 dt dt



−



−

Vdc di di + val + L al + rial − L g oa − voa = 0 (16-60) 2 dt dt

Substituting (16-57) into (16-59) and (16-60)



−

Vdc 2

Vdc 2

+ vau + − val +

di i di L dioa + L diffa + r oa + ridiffa + L g oa + voa = 0 (16-61) dt 2 dt 2 dt

di i di L dioa − L diffa + r oa − ridiffa + L g oa + voa = 0 (16-62) dt 2 dt 2 dt

From (16-61) and (16-62) vau − val + ( L + 2 L g )



dioa + rioa + 2voa = 0 (16-63) dt

Vdc − (val + vau ) − 2 L



didiffa dt

− 2ridiffa = 0 (16-64)

Rewriting the equations



voa =

val − vau  L r r  di L  di −  + L g  oa − ioa = ea −  + L g  oa − ioa (16-65) 2  dt 2 2  dt 2 2 Vdc 2

−

(val + vau ) 2

=L

didiffa dt

+ ridiffa = vdiffa (16-66)

Considering (16-65) and (16-66), the arm voltage references are given as

16_Santoso_Sec16_p0961-1052.indd 1023

val _ ref =

Vdc 2

+ ea − vdiffa (16-67)

22/11/17 10:59 AM

1024  SECTION SIXTEEN

voi

vod i oi voq w o Vod + + PI

abc/dq

wo

Pref iodref + iod

dq/abc

wo Led +

PI

ioqref

iod ioq

KP

iiu + +

1/2

0 + iil Circulating current controller

+ Vdiffi +

2wc Kr1s

s2 + 2wcs + (2w0)2

+ + Voq

+

+

Vdiffi

wo System controller

Vil_ref Viu_ref

ei (i=a,b,c)

wo Leq

ioq Qref

abc/dq

Vdiffi

Viu_ref

+

+ ei /N

+

e /N E/2N Voltage synthesis i

Vdci_j

Vil_ref

Sort and modulation

+ E/2N

FIGURE 16-55  Example control architecture of the MMC.



vau _ ref =

Vdc 2

− ea − vdiffa (16-68)

It is shown in (16-67) and (16-68) that the control objectives for MMC are to generate the ei (i = a, b, c) by system controller and the vdiffi (i = a, b, c) by the circulating current controller. Figure 16-55 shows one of control architecture of MMC.150 The system controller under d-q coordinate is implemented to regulate the active and reactive power flow. The circulating current is suppressed by an additional proportional resonant (PR) controller, and the capacitor voltage balanced is achieved with proper sorting and modulation algorithm. MMC has been investigated in various applications, such as HVDC, medium-voltage drive, etc.148 Figure 16-56 shows the HVDC transmission system based on MMC, transferring the off shore wind energy to onshore load centers. One MMC operates like an ac-dc rectifier while the other one acts as a dc-ac inverter. Compared with the traditional two-level voltage source converters, it significantly reduces the switching loss as well as increases the modularity. Because both MMCs are voltage source converter, they can also generate reactive power on both sides of the ac terminals. Several commercial installations of MMC based HVDC system have been reported. The dc link voltage can be as high as ±350 kV dc. In this case, many MMC cells based on high-voltage IGBT, IGCT, and ETO can be used.151 Figure 16-57 illustrates the operation of MMC for medium-voltage drive application. However due to the low frequency voltage fluctuation issue, it may only fit for applications with limited speed ranges, such as fan/blower applications.

Off shore wind farm AC/DC/AC HVDC transmission AC/DC/AC MMC

MMC

AC/DC/AC FIGURE 16-56  Off-shore wind farm based on MMC-HVDC transmission.

16_Santoso_Sec16_p0961-1052.indd 1024

22/11/17 10:59 AM

POWER ELECTRONICS   1025

Cell 1

Cell 1

Cell 1

Cell N

Cell N

Cell N

+ –

M

Cell 1

Cell 1

Cell 1

Cell N

Cell N

Cell N

FIGURE 16-57  Medium-voltage drive based on MMC.

16.10  COMPONENTS OF POWER ELECTRONIC CONVERTERS This subsection describes the individual components that constitute a power converter. These include power semiconductor devices and passive components (inductors, transformers, capacitors). A detailed description of the structure and physics of power semiconductor devices is beyond the the scope of the discussion here. The interested reader is referred to standard books on this subject.4,117,118 Details of magnetics, material properties, and capacitors are also likewise not covered. Unlike semiconductor devices and capacitors, very few magnetics are available as standard products from manufacturers, and therefore require custom design. Magnetics design is covered in significant detail in Ref. 119. Properties of magnetic materials, even though they follow some generic trends, have to be obtained from magnetic core manufacturers. Similarly, for details of capacitors, application notes and datasheets supplied by manufacturers have to be relied on. 16.10.1  Silicon Power Semiconductor Devices Power electronic circuits require high-power semiconductor switches and diodes. An ideal switch should have the following characteristics: full control over switch state (on/off), zero-voltage drop during on state, infinite impedance during off-state, and instantaneous transition between states. Diodes should have very low-voltage drop during conduction, infinite impedance in off-state, and instantaneous transition. Practical devices have nonideal characteristics, and different devices capitalizing on one advantage while sacrificing some other have been developed. Figure 16-58 shows the circuit symbols of common power semiconductor devices. These are listed below with their voltage, current, and switching limitations for silicon power devices. A discussion of power devices based on wide bandgap (WBG) materials such as SiC and GaN can be found in 16.10.2. Diodes: line frequency, fast recovery, ultra-fast recovery, and Schottky—in increasing order of switching speed, and decreasing order of reverse voltage rating MOSFETs (metal oxide semiconductor field effect transistor): good for low voltage ~100 s of volts, high switching frequency (> 100 kHz) IGBTs (insulated gate bipolar transistors): good from a few hundred volts to about 6.5 kV, currents up to 1.2 kA, and switching frequency up to 30 kHz

16_Santoso_Sec16_p0961-1052.indd 1025

22/11/17 10:59 AM

1026  SECTION SIXTEEN

Drain ‘D’

K

Collector ‘C’ ICE

ID A Power diode K

+

Gate ‘G’ + VGS

A Schottky diode

– Source ‘S’ MOSFET (N-Channel)

Gate ‘G’

VDS

+

–

VGE –

+

Cathode ‘K’

Gate ‘G’

Cathode ‘K’

Gate ‘G’

‘T1’

Gate ‘G’ Base

VCE

– Emittor ‘E’ IGBT

Collector

Emitter Anode ‘A’ Thyristor

Anode ‘A’ GTO

‘T2’ Triac

Power BJT (NPN)

FIGURE 16-58  Circuit symbols of common power semiconductor devices.

Thysristors or SCRs (silicon-controlled rectifiers): good for very high voltage and current [~ (kV) and (kA)], and low-power moderate performance applications GTOs (gate turn-off thyristors): good for very high voltage [~ (kV)], high-current applications [~ (kA)], with switching frequency up to a few kHz Miscellaneous: IGCT (integrated gate commutated thyristor), ETO (emitter turn-off thyristor), MCT (MOS-controlled thyristor), BJTs (bipolar junction transistors), triacs, diacs The ratings and device types listed above are those made with doped silicon. Recently introduced devices that are made with silicon carbide and gallium nitride semiconductors are discussed later in 16.10.2. Diodes.  There are essentially two types of power semiconductor diodes: PN junction and metalsemiconductor junction (Schottky). PN junction power diodes have an additional N- (lightly doped with N type impurities) drift region, so the overall structure is PN-N. The depletion layer of the PN junction extends in the N- region when the diode is reverse biased, and its length determines the maximum reverse voltage the diode can block. Intrinsically, the N- region has a high resistance. However, when the diode is forward biased there is injection of excess carriers in this region resulting in a low effective resistance. This phenomena is commonly called conductivity modulation. The on-state voltage drop across the diode consists of the PN junction drop and the resistive drop in the drift region; typically it ranges from 0.6 to 1 V. There is a small delay in going from off-state to on-state due to the time required for the carriers to build up. During turn-off, the excess carriers in the drift region have to be removed. Thus, for a short time, the diode conducts in the reverse direction with a high voltage across it. This phenomena, known as reverse recovery, leads to significant power loss and becomes one of the limiting factors in high-frequency circuits. PN junction-type power diodes are classified as •  Line frequency rectifiers: for rectification of 50/60 Hz utility input. •  Fast and ultra-fast recovery diodes: for high-frequency rectification. These have recovery time ranging from a couple of microseconds to 10 s of nanoseconds. Schottky diodes are based on metal-semiconductor junctions. These junctions have a lower junction potential leading to a lower forward voltage drop. Silicon-based Schottky power diodes have forward voltage drop ranging from 0.3 to 0.6 V and can withstand reverse voltages up to 200 V. As opposed to PN junction diodes, Schottkys are majority carrier devices, so they do not have any

16_Santoso_Sec16_p0961-1052.indd 1026

22/11/17 10:59 AM

POWER ELECTRONICS   1027

reverse recovery. Compared with PN junction diodes, Schottky diodes have higher reverse leakage current therefore Si Schottky diode is typically only available at lower voltages. Silicon-based Schottky diodes are suited for very high-frequency, low-voltage, and high-current rectification. Recently, silicon carbide (SiC)-based Schottky diodes have been developed and are now commercially available with rating up to 1700 V.120,121 The absence of reverse recovery makes them suitable for high-voltage high-frequency rectification, albeit at a higher cost. Because the resistance of the SiC Schottky is much lower than Si, a much higher Schottky barrier can be used (typically 0.7 to 0.9 V). This significantly reduces the reverse leakage current and much high voltage rating SiC Schottky diode and its variants can be developed. Research prototypes of 15,000 V has been demonstrated. Another development is the introduction of higher-voltage silicon diodes (e.g., Qspeed from power integrations122) that rely on innovative structure, combining benefits of Schottky and PN junction characteristics, and achieve higher blocking voltage capability with insignificant reverse recovery. Single dies rated up to 300 V and series combination of two devices in a single package rated up to 600 V are available at this time. In terms of performance and cost, these diodes lie in between ultrafast silicon PN diodes and silicon carbide Schottky diodes. MOSFETs.  Unlike signal level MOS devices which are fabricated laterally, power MOSFETs have a vertically diffused structure. For an N-channel MOSFET the doping is of the form N+PN-N+. The drain is the N+ terminal next to the N- region, while the source is the N+ region next to the P region. A positive voltage on the isolated gate terminal produces an electron channel in the P-region allowing current to flow from drain to source (or source to drain). Further, the P-type body is shorted to the source terminal resulting in an intrinsic diode with anode at the source and cathode at the drain. Although this diode is not very good in performance, it is useful for most power electronic circuits. Both P and N channel power MOSFETs are available, but N-channel MOSFETs are more prevelant due to their lower on-state resistance. The discussion here is therefore restricted to N-channel MOSFETs. The steady-state V-I characteristics for an N-channel MOSFET are shown in Fig. 16-59a. For VGS < Vth , the MOSFET acts as an open circuit from drain to source; Vth , the threshold voltage, is in the range of 2 to 4 V. For VGS > Vth, the MOSFET follows the characteristics shown in Fig. 16-59a. In amplifier circuits, MOSFETs are operated in their active region, where the drain current ID is almost independent of the drain to source voltage VDS. Power MOSFETs are operated in the ohmic region where ID is proportional to VDS, and the MOSFET behaves like a resistance. The effective on-resistance, designated RDS, depends on VGS, ID , and the junction temperature Tj. For MOSFETs, RDS increases with increasing temperature, a property useful in paralleling of devices to obtain higher current carrying capacity. The maximum value of VGS is usually ±20 V; for logic level power MOSFETs, it is limited to ±10 V. For most MOSFETs, increasing VGS beyond 10 V does not have significant effect on RDS. MOSFETs are rated for (a) maximum drain to source breakdown voltage (BVDSS) (b) maximum continuous average current for a specified temperature (e.g., ID25 at 25°C), and (c) a safe operating area (SOA) in terms of VDS, ID , and time duration for which ID flows. In high current applications, current capacity of leads and bond wires, and thermal performance of the device package also impose an additional constraint. MOSFET gate drive circuits usually run on a nominal Vcc = 15 or 12 V, and switch VGS between Vcc and 0 V. For very high current applications and improved noise sensitivity, a negative VGS may be applied during the off-time. Since the gate is insulated from the source, there is no dc current flow from gate to source. However, depending on their ratings power, MOSFETs have a significant input capacitance Ciss. Thus, to increase VGS from 0 to 15 V in a very short time (20 to 100 ns) a significant current (order of 1 A) is required. Figure 16-59b shows a basic MOSFET gate drive circuit. Another circuit shown in Fig. 16-59c has faster turn-off due to the additional path through Rg,off and a negative voltage for the off-state. Several gate drive ICs that can source and sink current up to a few amperes, while providing several other auxiliary functions, are commercially available.9,12 For high-side switches, switches whose source voltage changes with the switch state, as is the case for the MOSFET in a buck converter, an isolated gate drive is required. The isolation is provided by using either high-frequency transformers or high-speed optocouplers. There are several standard gate drive configurations, each with its own pros and cons. The best source of these circuits are application notes from device manufacturers.81

16_Santoso_Sec16_p0961-1052.indd 1027

22/11/17 10:59 AM

1028  SECTION SIXTEEN

ID Ohmic region

VGS increasing

Vcc Rg VGS > Vth

Gate signal

VGS < Vth 0

VDS (a)

(b) +15 V

Rg,off

Rg

Gate signal

–5 V (c)

FIGURE 16-59  MOSFETs: (a) V-I characteristics; (b) simple gate drive circuit; (c) fast turn-off gate drive.

Power MOSFETs can be used up to a few 100 kHz and in some applications in the MHz range. To increase operating frequencies further, RF Power MOSFETs have been introduced.123 These can be operated in the 10-MHz range and are expected to reduce converter size and weight considerably. MOSFET based on SiC and GaN are now being introdcued and they offer even faster switching speeds. Super-Junction MOSFETs.  Transistors and diodes that operate based on the majority carrier electrons (such as MOSFET, JFET, and Schottky diode) all have a resistive voltage-current relationship when conducting current. The resistance is theoretically related to the square of the breakdown voltage BV as R = 4BV2/Achip mnEc3, where Achip is the semiconductor chip area, mn is the electron mobility and Ec is the critical electric field causing avalanche breakdown. Therefore, the resistance increases quickly as the voltage rating of these devices go up. Remember the conduction loss is proportional to I2R, therefore the current handling capability of a power device decreases quickly when the breakdown voltage goes higher. Reducing the resistance can only be achieved by increasing chip area Achip. Practical chip size is limited to below 1 cm2 because of an increased cost due to a decreasing manufacturing yield. Power modules where parallel devices are used are equivalent to increasing Achip. The resistance can also be reduced by using different materials that have higher mn and Ec. This approach is the motivation behind the interest in WBG power semiconductor materials because they have much higher Ec than silicon. The resistance’s relationship to the breakdown voltage can be significantly improved to a much better linear relationship R = 2 × d × BV/Achip mnEc2 if the super-junction structure is used. This structure changed the way the PN junction is formed in a typical transistor, resulting in above significantly

16_Santoso_Sec16_p0961-1052.indd 1028

22/11/17 10:59 AM

POWER ELECTRONICS   1029

improved R-BV relationship. For this reason, power MOSFETs at higher voltages, especially for voltages beyond 500 V, super-junction MOSFET should be used. Several manufacturers, including Infineon Technologies and ST Microelectronics have introduced the super junction MOSFETs under various name, such as the CoolMOS products from Infineon. The breakdown voltage of these commercial products range from 500 to 1200 V. For power MOSFET constructed using WBG materials, the need to use super-junction concept is much less urgent since the resistance is significantly reduced by the much larger Ec. In Si super-junction MOSFETs, there is a significantly increased PN junction area. This causes the device to have a very bad reverse recover behavior when the MOSFET’s body diode is used as the freewheeling diode. For this reason, Si super-junction MOSFET should not be used where the current flow is bidirectional such as a motor drive. IGBTs.  The structure of IGBTs is similar to MOSFETs. Some simulation models for MOSFETs use a MOS gated bipolar junction transistor although the operation is more complicated than this simple model implies. IGBTs have significantly higher voltage and current ratings compared to MOSFETs, and their on-state voltage drop is also lower. In addition, several IGBT chips are paralleled inside one package to form an IGBT module with a significantly higher current rating. IGBTs modules are commercially available in voltage rating up to 6.5 kV, and currents up to 3600 A. The gate drive requirements of an IGBT are similar to that of MOSFETs. It is turned on by applying a positive gate source voltage (typically 15 V), and turned-off by applying a smaller negative voltage (about -5 V). Compared to MOSFETs, IGBTs have much longer switching times. Unlike MOSFETs, IGBTs are minority carrier devices, so their turn-off is characterized by a “tail current.” Their switching frequencies are generally limited to 30 kHz, and the maximum switching frequency reduces with power level. The IGBT only conducts current in one direction, therefore typically a fast recovery diode will have to be packaged together to allow reverse current flow needed in applications such as motor drive inverters and PV inverters. Thyristor and Similar Devices.  Thyristors, also called silicon-controlled rectifiers (SCRs), are high-power semiconductor devices which can block voltage of either polarity and conduct current in one direction only (from anode to cathode). They can be switched on by applying a current pulse to their gate terminal (with return path through cathode) when there is a positive voltage from anode to cathode. They are characterized by a latching action due to positive feedback of conductivity modulation in the PNPN structure: once the anode current reaches a threshold, the device continues to conduct until the current is reduced to zero by the external circuit. Their turn-off cannot be effected via the gate. Thyristors are available in very high current and voltage ratings and have a very low conduction voltage drop. Thyristors are mostly used for ac to dc (or vice versa) power conversion, where the device current is expected to reduce to zero. Normally, thyristors are switched at or close to the ac system frequency. They are ideally suited for high-power dc motor drives, and utility applications such as HVDC and controlled reactors. Gate turn-off (GTO) thyristors are high-power devices, with their low-end ratings overlapping with the high-end rating of IGBTs. Unlike a thyristor, they can be turned on and turned off using the gate terminal, although the gate drive is more complex compared to a MOSFET or an IGBT. The switching times for GTOs are of the order of 10 ms so their maximum switching frequency is in the kHz range. They are used exclusively in very high power applications like motor drives, FACTs devices, and active filters. GTOs are commercially available with ratings up to 6 kV and 6 kA. Enhancements to GTOs have led to the development of IGCT (integrated gate commutated thyristor)124 or GCT (gate commutated turn-off thyristor),125 ETO (emitter turn-off thyristor), and MTO (MOS turn-off thyristor).118 These enhancements lead to much faster switching speed in the order or 1~2 ms, and the elimination of the turn-off snubber. Overall circuit efficiency improves over conventional GTO based converters. At present there is still a strong research effort in development of high-power devices with high switching speeds. Ultra-high-voltage devices based on SiC are also being developed. Two thyristors connected in antiparallel (anode of one to the cathode of other) can conduct current in either direction and block voltages of either polarity. Triacs realize this functionality in a single semiconductor device. However, voltage and current ratings of triacs are very low compared

16_Santoso_Sec16_p0961-1052.indd 1029

22/11/17 11:00 AM

1030  SECTION SIXTEEN

to that of thyristors and their performance is inferior to that of thyristors. Solid-state switches utilize triacs and antiparallel connected thyristors. Power bipolar junction transistors (BJTs) have been almost completely replaced by MOSFETs and IGBTs, due to ease of control and higher switching frequency. However, they are still used in some applications like linear power supplies.

16.10.2  Wide Bandgap Power Semicoductors Devices Si power devices have been developed and improved over the last 60 years. As silicon power devices are approaching their limitations in terms of additional conduction and switching loss reduction, researchers turned their attentions to power devices developed on WBG materials that have higher bandgap (Eg) than silicon material. The direct benefit is a significantly increased breakdown critical electric field (Ec) which can be utilized to design power devices with much lower conduction resistance Ron for a given chip area. For semiconductor switches, such as MOSFET/BJT/JFET, the conduction resistance or on-resistance is theoretically related to the square of the breakdown voltage BV as R = 4BV2/AchipmnEc3, where Achip is the semiconductor chip area, mn is the electron mobility and Ec is the critical electric field causing avalanche breakdown. WBG materials typically have a much higher Ec therefore the resistance can be significantly reduced. For example, in SiC material, the critical electric field is about 10× time higher than silicon, therefore the resistance could theoretically be reduced by about 1000 times for the same chip size Achip. Commercial devices have not reached this level of predicted reductions yet. But it has so far achieved about 100× reduction at a breakdown voltage of 1200 V. This comparison is with Si 1200 V power MOSFET. The improvements over Si SJ MOSFET or Si IGBT is approximately 10× and 3×, respectively. Because of this large reduction in conduction resistance, power devices based on unipolar current conduction (MOSFET, JFET, etc.) are sufficient to cover a large spectrum of power electronics applications. The needs for bipolar devices are much less than the silicon case where silicon power MOSFET could not be scaled economically to higher than 600 V, even if the super junction (SJ) MOSFET concept is used. Therefore in high-voltage applications where the current state-of-the-art device is the silicon bipolar IGBT, WBG devices also have an upper hand in switching speed due to the unipolar current conduction mechanism. The switching speed is fundamentally determined by the parasitic capacitance in the device. Higher switching speed can be utilized to increase the system switching frequency without a major penalty in conversion efficiency. This can result in higher power density. The large bandgap also results in much lower leakage currents in the WBG power devices hence the intrinsic capability of these devices to operate at higher junction temperatures Tj is excellent. On the other hand, silicon power devices have higher leakage currents, which limits the device’s ability to operate above 125°C. However, due to the unipolar current conduction mechanism, the WBG power devices conduction resistance Ron increases with the temperature which will limit the extent of the high Tj benefit. Increasing Tj also have an impact on other supporting components in a WBG converter such as the gate driver circuit and packaging materials. Therefore, the high temperature roadmap for WBG power device is not currently a high priority but is actively studied. There are many materials that can be classified as WBG materials. Currently only SiC and Gallium Nitride (GaN) power devices are commercially introduced after several decades of development. There are research developments underway for power devices based on other WBG materials such as diamond, AlN, and Ga2O3. SiC Power Devices.  SiC power devices that have been commercially introduced are Schottky diodes, SiC MOSFET, SiC JFET, and SiC BJT. All of these devices conduct currents based on only one charge carrier, the electron, and all have extremely high switching speed. For users who are familiar with Si Schottky diodes and MOSFETs, one can view the development as a significant expansion of the power ratings served by these devices. SiC Schottky Diodes.  SiC diodes can be constructed as a Schottky diode or a PN junction diode. This is shown in Fig. 16-60. Currently only Schottky diodes are commercialized. Among the Schottky

16_Santoso_Sec16_p0961-1052.indd 1030

22/11/17 11:00 AM

POWER ELECTRONICS   1031

Schottky metal

Schottky metal/ Ohmic contact

Anode

Anode

P+

Schottky

JBS

Cathode

Anode

P+

N- epi N+ substrate

N- epi N+ substrate

Ohmic contact

PiN

N- epi N+ substrate

Cathode

Cathode

FIGURE 16-60  Three basic SiC diode structures.

diode family, there are two major variations, the standard Schottky diode and the JBS diode. JBS is used to reduce the leakage current of the Schottky as well as to improve the surge current capability. Fig. 16-61 shows the ratings of the discrete SiC Schottky diodes available from the major market players. The typical voltage ratings are 600 V, 650 V, 1.2 kV, and 1.7 kV. There are also some 3.3 kV and 8 kV products available as shown in Fig. 16-61; however, the current rating is currently limited. For instance, the current rating for the 8 kV SiC diode is only 50 mA. SiC diode 120

Current (A)

100 80 60 40 20 0

0

1

2

3 4 5 6 Blocking voltage (kV)

7

8

9

FIGURE 16-61  Commercially available SiC Schottky diodes ratings @25°C.

The key characteristics of a SiC Schottky diode are shown in Fig. 16-62. In the forward state the device can be modeled as a constant knee voltage VT plus a resistance Ron. Both are temperature dependent, with VT decreasing as temperature increases while Ron increasing as the temperature rises. The device has no reverse recover current except that contributed by the charging of the non-linear junction capacitance as shown in Fig. 16-62b. Due to this zero reverse recovery loss behavior, SiC Schottky diode are replacing Si PN junction diodes in high frequency converter applications such as flyback converters. SiC Schottky diode is also co-packaged with Si IGBT to form a high performance hybrid IGBT module in application such as PV inverters and motor drives. Research prototype devices of SiC PIN and JBS diode of more than 10 kV have been also been reported. Figure 16-63a shows a comparison of two 10 kV prototype devices forward conductions. PIN diode shows a better conduction at higher current levels due to the bipolar conduction mechanism. However, the PIN diode will have a noticeable reverse recovery current, as shown in Fig. 16-63b. SiC Three Terminal Switches.  Commercially introduced devices are SiC MOSFET, JFET, and BJT. Figure 16-64 shows the ratings of available devices on the market in discrete packages. Power modules

16_Santoso_Sec16_p0961-1052.indd 1031

22/11/17 11:00 AM

1032  SECTION SIXTEEN

30

500

Conditions: TJ = 25 °C Ftest = 1 MHz Vtest = 25 mV

450 25

400 350 TJ = 55 °C TJ = 25 °C TJ = 75 °C TJ = 125 °C TJ = 175 °C

15 10 5

C (pF)

IF (A)

20

300 250 200 150 100 50

0

0

0.0 0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5 3.0 3.5 4.0 4.5 5.0 VF (V) (a)

0

1

10 VR (V)

100

1000

(b)

FIGURE 16-62  Key characteristics of SiC Schottky diode: (a) forward I-V, (b) reverse capacitance.152

10 kV SiC JBS diode and PiN diode IV curve

10

Current (A)

Current (A)

8 6 4 SiC PiN diode SiC JBS diode

2 0

0

1

2

3

4

5

Voltage (V) (a)

6

7

8

15 kV SiC PiN diode reverse recovery current 250 180A 200 130A 150 90A 100 50A 50 25A 0 –50 –100 –150 3000 3100 3200 3300 3400 3500 Time (ns) (b)

FIGURE 16-63  (a) 10 kV SiC JBS diode and PiN diode I-V curves at room temperature, normalized to 0.32 cm2 chip area. (b) Reverse recover current tested at VR = 7 kV for a 15 kV SiC PiN diode (T = 25°C).

16_Santoso_Sec16_p0961-1052.indd 1032

22/11/17 11:00 AM

POWER ELECTRONICS   1033

SiC switch 180 160

Current (A)

140 120 100

SiC MOSFET

80 60

SiC BJT

40

SiC JFET

20 0

0

0.2

0.4

0.6 0.8 1 1.2 Blocking voltage (kV)

1.4

1.6

1.8

FIGURE 16-64  Commercially available SiC discrete switch ratings @25°C.

with higher ratings are also available such as the recently introduced 900 V/1.25 mohm SiC power MOSFET module in which several MOSFETs are placed in parallel to increase the current rating and reduce the on-resistance.153 MOSFETs on the market are all N-channel normally off device with a threshold voltage of several volts. On the other hand, most JFETs are N channel normally on devices with a threshold voltage of around −13 V.154 These JFETs therefore require a negative gate voltage of more than −15 V to keep it in the off state. This is not a desirable characteristic in power converters because it presents a short circuit during the converter start up. The JFET with a series connected Si MOSFET (so called JFET cascode structure as shown in Fig. 16-65) could be used to eliminate this issue.154 Since the BJT does not have a channel region, its on-resistance, is lower than SiC MOSFET. However, the current driving characteristic makes it less attractive for users who are familiar with the MOSFET drive interface. On the hand, the SiC BJT’s switch- FIGURE 16-65  JFET Cascode ing speed is similar to that of the MOSFET due to the absence of configuration which combines a normally on SiC JFET with a Si MOSFET any sizable minority carrier storage in the drift region. Due to the familiar MOS gate-driving interface, it is expected to form a three terminal device. that in the future the SiC MOSFET will dominate the market from 600 to 6500 V, competing or replacing Si IGBTs. Currently, 1200 V SiC MOSFETs have been introduced by several vendors. 600 V SiC MOSFETs are also introduced.155 The SiC MOSFETs have two basic structures, a planar SiC MOSFET and a trench SiC MOSFET as shown in Fig. 16-66, both have a vertical current flow path inside a SiC wafer. These structure are very similar to those used in Si MOSFETs. From a user point of view, one can consider that SiC MOSFETs expand the Si MOSFETs power ratings significantly and will compete and replace Si IGBTs from 1200 to 6500 V due to SiC MOSFET’s significant advantage in lowering the switching losses. The switching speed of the SiC MOSFET is fast because the device’s speed is only limited by the charging and discharging of the parasitic capacitance, which has been reduced due to significantly reduced chip size for a given current rating. 3.38 MHz operation has recently been demonstrated using a 1200 V SiC MOSFET.156 Another important characteristic of the SiC MOSFET is its 3rd quadrant operation such as the one shown in Fig. 16-67a.157 By turning on the device in the 3rd quadrant, the device exhibits the same low resistive I-V characteristic as in the 1st quadrant, hence allowing the converter to reduce the reverse conduction losses in applications such as PV inverters and electric motor drives. The SiC

16_Santoso_Sec16_p0961-1052.indd 1033

22/11/17 11:00 AM

1034  SECTION SIXTEEN

Gate P+

N+

P+

N+ Gate

P

P N- Drift layer

N- Drift layer

N+ Substrate

N+ Substrate (a) Planar structure

(b) Trench structure

FIGURE 16-66  Two typical SiC MOSFET structures.

MOSFET’s body diode only conducts during the short dead time hence the conduction loss is minimized. The reverse recovery current of the body diode is also very small, as shown in Fig. 16-67b, due to very poor bipolar operations in SiC PN junction diodes. There are various research activities underway to study SiC power switches for even higher voltages. For example, 27 kV SiC IGBT158 and 22 kV SiC GTO/ETO have been reported.159,160 Figure 16-68 shows a comparison of three devices forward conduction capabilities. The SiC MOSFET, IGBT, and GTO are all designed for a 15 kV voltage rating. It shows the advantage of bipolar devices at higher currents. High temperature characteristics of SiC IGBT and GTO are also significantly better than the MOSFET. On the other hand, the MOSFET is significantly faster during switching. Generally speaking, SiC power devices enable a more efficient power conversion system. It can also be used to improve the power density by operating at higher frequencies. Figure 16-69 shows the SiC device application roadmap predicted by Yole.161 SiC has already found its commercial applications in power factor correction (PFC), lighting, solar, railway traction, uninterrupted power supply (UPS), and will enter into drive, wind, electrical vehicle (EV) soon. Except for the technical design challenges,

–5

–4

–3

–2

–1

Drain-source current

TJ = 175 °C VGS = 15V

–40 –60 –80 –100 –120

Drain-source voltage

100

0 –20

VGS = –4V VGS = 0V

0

Drain-source current (A)

–6

80 60 40 20 0

25 °C

–20

150 °C –40 1000 1025 1050 1075 1100 1125 1150 1175 1200 Time (ns)

FIGURE 16-67  (a) 3rd Quadrant characteristics of the 900 V, 10 mΩ MOSFET at 175°C.6 (b) Reverse recovery characteristics of the 900 V/10 mohm SiC MOSFET, VR = 600 V.6

16_Santoso_Sec16_p0961-1052.indd 1034

22/11/17 11:00 AM

POWER ELECTRONICS   1035

A = 0.32 cm2 or normalized to 0.32 cm2

20 18

25 °C pGTO

125 °C IGBT 25 °C MOS

16 125 °C pGTO

Curretn (A)

14

25 °C IGBT

30

12

0W

/cm

10

2

125 °C MOS

8 6

200W

/cm 2

4

100W

/cm 2

2 0

0

2

4

8 6 Voltage (V)

10

12

14

FIGURE 16-68  I-V curve comparison of 15 kV SiC p-GTO, IGBT, and MOSFET, at 25°C and 125°C.

HEV and EV Wind Turbines Motor Drive Uninterrupted Power Supply Rail Traction Solar Inverters Power Factor Correction Lighting

< 2006

2008

2010

2012

2014

2016

2018

2020

...

FIGURE 16-69  SiC device application roadmap predicted by Yole.10

balancing higher cost of SiC device with improved system cost/performance is critical. The cost/W is one of the most concerned figure of merit from user perspective. Depending on the applications, the higher device cost does not necessary lead to higher system cost. In fact, the cost issue of SiC devices should be looked at from two aspects. First of all, the cost of SiC MOSFET decreases with the volume production. With larger volumes, better manufacturing process with larger wafers, and improved device performance, the cost/Amp of SiC devices will be reduced. Secondly, it is admitted that the absolute cost of SiC device is higher than Si due to intrinsic higher material cost. However, the cent/W cost of the

16_Santoso_Sec16_p0961-1052.indd 1035

22/11/17 11:00 AM

1036  SECTION SIXTEEN

A Si power conversion system

Si devices

A SiC power conversion system

Rest of system

SiC devices

Rest of system

Saving

FIGURE 16-70  Potential system cost benefit from SiC power devices.

overall system could potentially be reduced with a better balance of plant system design. Figure 16-70 shows the potential system cost saving by using a SiC power conversion systems. The saving may come from a smaller passive component, less cooling requirement, higher absolutely power rating, etc. It is demonstrated in Ref. 162 that the cost of a 17 kW solar inverter could be reduced by 20% with SiC JFET and SiC diode. Additionally, operational cost reduction gained from efficiency improvement could also justify the higher capital cost, such as in the UPS application.163 GaN Heterojunction Field Effect Transistor.  Gallium nitride (GaN) is another WBG material that has 10× increased critical electric field than Si, therefore it has also been intensively studied for power device applications. However, the material growth technique for GaN as well as the manufacturing process capability is significantly lag behind SiC, therefore there is currently no GaN power MOSFET developed or commercialized. Instead, GaN power transistor are developed based on the GaN Heterojunction FET (HFET) structure and commercial HFETs from 30 to 600 V are currently available on the market by an increased number of vendors. GaN HFET is developed on GaN-on-Si wafer and the current conduction path is lateral through the 2DEG formed by the GaN/AlGaN heterojunction as shown in Fig. 16-71. This structure results in lower cost since only a thin layer needs to be grown on a cheap Si substrate. The manufacturing techniques for the GaN HFET are also very similar to the Si CMOS process. These attributes result in the rapid commercialization of GaN HFETs in the last 5 years. Although the lateral structure is considered a disadvantage when compared to a

Source

Drain

Gate AIGaN GaN Buffer

2DEG

Si substrate

FIGURE 16-71  GaN HFET.

16_Santoso_Sec16_p0961-1052.indd 1036

22/11/17 11:00 AM

POWER ELECTRONICS   1037

TABLE 16-3  Comparison of 600 V Si SJ MOSFET, SiC MOSFET, and GaN HFET 600 V FETs

Ron Ciss FOM1 Coss(nF) FOM2 (mohm) (nF) (Ron × Ciss) @400 V (Ron × Coss) Qrr(μC)

Si SJ SiC MOS GaN HFET

37 120 25

7.24 1.2 .52

267 144 13

0.38 0.09 0.13

14 10.8 3.25

FOM3 (Ron × Qrr)

36 0.053 0.113

1332 6.3 2.8

Si SJ: Infineon IPW65R037C6. SiC MOSFET: Rohm SCT2120AF GaN HFET: GaNSystem GS66516T.

vertical power device due to the ineffective utilization of the chip area, GaN HFET’s Ron reduction is still very impressive when compared with Si power MOSFET, thanks to the high channel mobility (~2000 cm2/V·s) and the elimination of the substrate conduction resistance Rsub. Furthermore, the lateral HFET has even lower junction capacitance (Ciss, Coss) due to the lateral geometry, making them even more attractive in high frequency applications such as flyback converters. Table 16-3 compares device performance currently achieved by 600 V SiC MOSFET and GaN HFET and the best silicon SJ MOSFET. The important performance-dependent parameters are the three normalized figure of merits (FOMs) which can be obtained from the datasheet. Smaller FOM1 represents the advantage of fast gate driving capability. Both SiC and GaN are superior to SJ MOSFET but the advantage of the GaN over SiC is also clear. FOM2 represents the reduction in switching losses in hard switched or soft switched converters. Again, both SiC and GaN are superior to Si while there is still a clear advantage for GaN. Finally, FOM3 represents the reverse recovery loss reduction in SiC and GaN. Dramatic improvement is possible in both SiC and GaN when operate as a rectifier in the 3rd quadrant. As a matter of fact, the reverse recovery current and the associated losses, which have been a major headache for silicon power diodes, can be considered eliminated in future WBG converters using WBG Schottky diodes or 3rd quadrant operation of the FETs. The GaN HFET can also operate as a synchronous rectifier, similar to the case of SiC MOSFET, reducing further the reverse conduction loss. Due to the lateral device construction and its limitations, GaN HFET is expected to be primarily manufactured at breakdown voltages below 1200 V. SiC MOSFET will dominate the markets for higher-voltage devices. Future devices based on vertical GaN structure may change this conclusion. The low Ron and fast switching capability of the GaN HFET could have a dramatic impact on future power supplies by moving toward higher efficiency and higher power density. A record power density of 143 W/inch3 has been achieved in the Google Little Box competition in which 600 V GaN FETs are used.164 It can also simplify the power delivery architecture with substantial energy savings. A possible GaN enabled power supply roadmap is shown in Fig. 16-73 when compared to today’s architecture shown in Fig. 16-72. At the front end, the Totem-Pole bridgeless PFC (Fig. 16-74a)166 could be utilized to replace the currently used CCM PFC, achieving 99% efficiency while reducing the footprint due to >1 MHz operating frequency. Figure 16-74b shows a design of a 3 kW GaN prototype using two phase Totem-pole PFC topology. The GaN devices operate with a variable frequency under ZVS condition, and >99% efficiency have been measured. In Fig. 16-73 power delivery system, a single isolated

UF: Unfold AC voltage to |AC| voltage 400V 48V AC

UF

PFC

95%

DC//DC

95%

12V

1.2V

DC/DC

POL

Load

onboard

POL

Load

97%

91%

80% FIGURE 16-72  Today’s low-voltage power delivery system.

16_Santoso_Sec16_p0961-1052.indd 1037

22/11/17 11:00 AM

1038  SECTION SIXTEEN

400V

Totem-Pole PFC PFC

AC

48V DC//DC 1Mhz

1Mhz 99%

1.2V POL

Load

POL

Load

98%

92%

89% FIGURE 16-73  Simplified power deliver system with GaN. GaN@Mhz S11 in + vn –

L S12

CoolMos@60Hz +

SN1 + vS11 – SN2 + vS12 –

Cout + Vout –

(a) Efficiency(%)

(b)

Efficiency at 400V/DC, 240V/AC, L = 9.5uH

100 99.8 99.6 99.4 99.2 99 98.8 98.6 98.4 98.2 400

600

800

1000

1200 (c)

1400

1600 1800 Power(W)

FIGURE 16-74  (a) Totem-pole bridgeless PFC circuit where 600 V GaN switches at high frequency with ZVS condition. (b) A prototype design of a 2.3 kW GaN Totem-Pole PFC. (c) Measured efficiency exceeds 99%.

dc/dc stage based on soft switched converter topologies such as LLC167 or phase-shift half-bridge168 topology can be used to replace the current two-stage solution by eliminating the intermediate bus. The high switching frequency can be used to provide fast regulation of the 48 V (or 12 V) bus. 98.3% efficiency was achieved in Ref. 167 while more than 98% efficiency was also achieved by the phaseshift half-bridge as reported in Ref. 168. The circuit topology and results from Ref. 168 are shown in Fig. 16-75. Finally, the 48 V-to-1 V POL converter can be achieved by using 80 to 100 V GaN HFET in a non-isolated Buck converter.169 Thanks to the extremely fast switching speed, the ultra-low duty ratio and small dead time can be achieved. 92% peak efficiency has been reported in Ref. 169. With these innovations, the efficiency of the low-voltage power delivery system (universal ac input to POL) could be improved by 9%. This will be a substantial achievement if realized on a large scale.

16_Santoso_Sec16_p0961-1052.indd 1038

22/11/17 11:00 AM

POWER ELECTRONICS   1039 Controller board

GaN S3a + iHV

S1

C1 VHV

–

Ls

n:1:1 e n2 c il n 1 n3

a b

C2

T

S2

C3 S3

C5

d S4

+ VLV – GaN device

S4a

C4

(a)

Primary winding

LV Si device

(b)

100

Efficiency (%)

98 96 94 Discharge Charge

92 90

0

500 Power (W)

1000

(c)

FIGURE 16-75  (a) Phase shift half-bridge push-pull topology with active clamp. (b) A 1 kW prototype. (c) Measured efficiency exceeds 98%.

16.10.3  Magnetic Components In power electronic converters three types of magnetic components are used: single winding inductors (for filtering current and aiding in resonant transitions in some circuits), multi-winding coupled inductors (to provide filtering and isolation), and transformers (for isolation and stepping up/down voltage). Unlike semiconductor devices, these have to be custom designed using available cores, wires, etc. The primary consideration for their design are size/weight and power loss. Design procedures using the common area product method is presented here. Another approach is the core geometry method, which can be found in Refs. 5 and 119. It is assumed that the reader is familiar with basics of electromagnetism and magnetic circuits. An E-E type core will be used for illustration, but the method is applicable to any core shape. The E-E type core construction, along with relevant definitions of its geometry, is shown in Fig. 16-76. The complete core is formed with two E cores with possibly an air gap between them. The coils are wound over a plastic bobbin placed on the outside of the center leg of the E sections. Due to high-frequency magnetic fields, significant eddy currents are induced in the magnetic core and windings, and due to high-frequency electric field there can be significant capacitive currents between windings. Eddy currents lead to significant losses and necessitate the use of high-resistivity magnetic core materials and thinner wires (which may be paralleled for high current capacity) for the coils. Loss due to magnetic hysterisis also increases with increase in frequency. Magnetic Core Materials.  Inductors use one of three different kinds of core materials, depending on the currents they are supposed to carry. The three core material types are silicon steel for low-frequency filtering, powdered iron for high-frequency filtering, and ferrites for carrying highfrequency currents. Transformers in power converters always carry high-frequency currents and therefore use ferrite cores. For low-frequency filtering, where the inductor primarily carries a dc component with a 120-Hz ripple (as in-line frequency rectifiers), standard silicon steel laminations can be used to form the core. Silicon

16_Santoso_Sec16_p0961-1052.indd 1039

22/11/17 11:00 AM

1040  SECTION SIXTEEN

Air gap lg /2

Window area Aw Bobbin Core area Acore

Acore /2

Acore /2

FIGURE 16-76  Vertical and horizontal sections of an E-E core inductor.

steel has high-saturation flux density (~1.8 Tesla) and high-relative permeability (mr ~40,000). This results in a small core size without incurring significant core loss. However, the relative permeability reduces with increase in flux density, so the effective inductance value changes with the dc component of the current. For inductors that are supposed to carry currents consisting of a large dc component and a small high-frequency ac component (e.g., the inductor used at the output of a dc/dc converter), powdered iron or MolyPermalloy powder (MPP) cores are used. These cores have high resistivity leading to lower eddy current losses, high-saturation flux density (up to 1.4 Tesla) leading to lower core size, and distributed air gap leading to a low relative permeability. For most of these materials the relative permeability changes with flux density. The cores are available in toroidal and E shapes. Toroids are difficult to wind but can be used to make very good quality inductors. There are a variety of powdered iron and MPP materials with different relative permeability, loss characteristics, maximum operating temperature, and aging characteristics.136,137 For transformers and inductors that have to carry significant high-frequency current, the powdered iron material has unacceptable loss due to eddy currents and hysterisis. Ferrite materials, with very high resistivity, lower weight, but low-saturation flux density (~0.4 Tesla) are suitable for these. Common ferrite materials are 3F3 from Ferroxcube and PC44 from TDK. Cores made from these materials are available in a wide variety of shapes and sizes: toroids, pot core, E, PQ, RM, etc. Custom cores are commonly used for high-power applications. Nano-crystalline materials are a recent innovation in high-power, high-frequency (HF) magnetics.138–140 These have several advantages over iron- and cobalt-based amorphous materials, and Ni-Zn and MN-Zn ferrites: higher-saturation flux density (Bsat) in the range of 1.2 to 1.4 Tesla, compared to 0.4 to 0.5 Tesla for ferrites and 0.5 to 0.6 Tesla for cobalt-based amorphous metals; lower core losses; high operating temperature with stable characteristics up to 200°C; low magneto-striction; and high initial permeability. For power converters, these materials have the following applications (1) inductors and transformers due to high Bsat, low losses, high operating temperature, and low magneto-striction; (2) common mode chokes due to high initial permeability and high-saturation flux density. These

16_Santoso_Sec16_p0961-1052.indd 1040

22/11/17 11:00 AM

POWER ELECTRONICS   1041

materials are characterized by high eddy current loss. To minimize the loss, the cores are manufactured by depositing thin films on insulating plastic material which is wound as toroids or U-U cores. For transformers and inductors, the cores are particularly useful for high-efficiency and small-size in high-power medium frequency (>1 kW, 10–200 kHz) range. Inductor Design.  For inductors, the design requires specified values of the inductance (L), and the peak and rms current (Î and Irms) it has to carry. The relations between peak current and core area (Acore), rms current and window area (Aw), and the expression for the area product, Ap = Acore · Aw, are as follows:



λ = LIˆ = N Φ = NBmax ⋅ Acore ⇒ Acore =

LIˆ (16-69) NBmax

Irms = J ⋅ Acond = J ⋅ ⇒ Aw =

NI rms Jkw

Aw ⋅ kw N



(16-70) ∧



Ap = Aw ⋅ Acore =

L II rms (16-71) JBmax kw

Here l is the flux linkage, N is the number of turns of the winding, F is the magnetic flux corresponding to peak current Î, Bmax is the maximum flux density (may be different from the saturation flux density), J is the current density in the winding, Acond is the cross-sectional area of one conductor in the winding, and kw is called the winding factor is an emperical factor used to indicate the fraction of window area utilized by the copper of the windings. In the expression for Ap, the numerator consists of specified quantities, while the denominator has quantities which are chosen for design. Bmax may be chosen close to the saturation flux density depending on allowable core loss; J is chosen in the range of 2.5 to 8 A/mm2, depending on allowable conduction loss, mechanism for heat removal, and the allowable temperature rise; kw is in the range of 0.3 of 0.8 depending on space taken by bobbin and insulation, and the method of winding. Once the area product has been calculated, a core with the desired value of Ap can be chosen from manufacturers’ catalogs. The number of turns and the air gap required to achieve the desired inductance value are then calculated as



N=

LIˆ Bmax Acore

(16-72)

L = N / ℜ = N 2mo Acore /lg (16-73) 2

⇒ l g = N 2π o Acore /L

(16-74)

where ℜ is the core reluctance. The above equation assumes that mr /lm >>1/lg, where lm is the magnetic path length of the core. The conductor size is calculated as Acond = kw · Aw /N. If the current is expected to have a significant high-frequency component, the radius of the conductors should not exceed the skin depth of copper at the expected frequency. Several conductors may then be paralleled to achieve the required value of Acond. Finally, Pcond, conduction loss in the windings, and Pcore, loss in the core, should be calculated. Pcond requires an estimate of the winding resistance, while Pcore is computed using manufacturer-supplied empirical loss curves. Core loss in an inductor depends on

16_Santoso_Sec16_p0961-1052.indd 1041

22/11/17 11:00 AM

1042  SECTION SIXTEEN

the operating flux density B (related to the average value of the current), and change in flux density during each switching cycle ∆B (related to the expected current ripple). It is generally accepted that Pcond = Pcore indicates a good design. However, power loss in the core can be dissipated more easily compared to windings (especially if there are several layers). Thus, it may be desirable to have Pcond < Pcore . This affects the choice of Bmax and J values used above. Powdered-iron cores have distributed air gaps and the above procedure is not directly applicable to them. For selection of these cores, the manufacturers suggest a number of cores based on a metric similar to the product LÎIrms. The final core selection can then be made based on allowable losses (Pcond relating to J, and Pcore relating to Bmax), and temperature rise. The cores have a specified AL value, the inductance obtained from the core in nH/turns2. The number of turns required to obtain the inductance value then can be computed using the specified AL value. Finally, the inductance variation with dc current should be checked to make sure that the required value is obtained at the maximum operating current. Software packages are available from manufacturers for initial core selection and then detailed analysis of chosen design. Pictures of some inductors are shown in Fig. 16-77.

(a)

(b)

(c)

FIGURE 16-77  Pictures of some inductors: (a) single-layer toroid; (b) 5-A inductor for 1.25-kW, 100-kHz buck converter made with E-E powdered iron core and six parallel strands of solid copper wire; (c) 60-Hz three-phase line inductor made with silicon steel laminations.

16_Santoso_Sec16_p0961-1052.indd 1042

22/11/17 11:00 AM

POWER ELECTRONICS   1043

Transformer Design.  For a transformer, the design specifications are the turns ratio, rms current in all the windings, and the maximum volt-second product (Vsec, the maximum product of voltage and time for which the voltage is applied) expected across the primary winding. The window area can be related to the rms current, the core area to the maximum volt-second product, and the resulting area product calculated as follows:



kw ⋅ Aw = N p ⋅ Acond, p +

sm

⋅ Acond, sm )

m

⇒ Aw =

Np Jkw

{

⋅ I p ,rms +

∑



} (16-75)

m [( N sm /N p ) ⋅ I sm ,rms ]

∆λ = [V sec] = N p ∆Φ = N p ∆Bmax ⋅ Acore



∑ (N

⇒ Acore =



[V sec] (16-76) N p ∆Bmax

Ap = Aw ⋅ Acore

∑

 [( N sm /N p ) ⋅ I sm ,rms ] [V sec]⋅  I p ,rms + m   (16-77) = J ∆Bmax kw

The subscripts “p” and “s” indicate primary and secondary respectively, while the index m refers to the secondary number. In the above equations ∆Bmax is the maximum change in flux density; this equals the maximum value of Bmax for single quadrant operation (as in a forward converter), and twice Bmax when flux direction reverses (as in full-bridge dc/dc converters). Core loss has more than quadratic dependence on ∆Bmax. For transformers the value of Bmax is therefore chosen much lower than the saturation flux density (about 0.1 to 0.25 Tesla). After a core is chosen by utilizing the computed Ap, the number of primary turns are calculated as

Np =

[V sec] (16-78) Bmax Acore

In high-frequency transformers the magnetizing current can be a significant part of the primary current and should be accounted for in the above calculations. Conductor selection for transformers is similar to that for inductors. For very high-frequency and high-current applications, use of insulated copper foils and Litz wire are alternatives to use of multiple parallel conductors. A 1.25-kW, 100-kHz transformer is shown in Fig. 16-78. It has interleaved primary and secondary windings. The primaries are realized using copper foils, while the secondaries have solid copper wire with several strands in parallel. It should be noted that the procedures described above are rudimentary and several other factors have to be accounted for in a real design. These include: ambient temperature, temperature rise of the core (which affects the saturation flux density and the core loss significantly), hot spot temperature, winding loss due to fringing fields near the air gap, and winding loss due to proximity effect. In transformers, interleaving primary and secondary windings helps in reducing the proximity loss and leakage inductance at the expense of increased interwinding capacitance. To eliminate the winding process, planar magnetics that use tracks on multilayer PCBs to form the windings have been developed. Planar magnetics also have the benefit of a low profile. To reduce the number of discrete magnetic components, there has been significant research in integrated magnetics, realizing the functionality of several magnetic components using a single magnetic component.

16_Santoso_Sec16_p0961-1052.indd 1043

22/11/17 11:00 AM

1044  SECTION SIXTEEN

FIGURE 16-78  A 1.25-kW, 100-kHz transformer using PQ type ferrite cores; high current primary windings built with copper foil; secondaries made with paralleled solid copper wires; primaries and secondaries interleaved to minimize leakage inductance.

16.10.4 Capacitors There are several types of capacitors each with different advantages and limitations. For power electronic circuits the choice criteria are: capacitance value, voltage rating, ESR, and ESL, and the ripple and ac current capacity at different frequencies. All these can be found as specifications in manufacturers datasheets. ESR is either specified as a number at different frequencies (typically 120 Hz and 20/100 kHz), or in terms of the dissipation factor, tand = ESR × (2 × f × C). If ESL is specified, it may be either as a number or in terms of the series resonance frequency, fr = 1/(2π ESL × C ). The main capacitor types used in power electronic circuits are listed in Table 16-4. The list is by no means TABLE 16-4  Capacitors Types Commonly Used in Power Electronic Circuits Capacitor type

Characteristics

Application

Electrolytic Polarized (unipolar voltage only) DC input and output filters High density, high ESR and ESL Very short time energy storage Low reliability Voltage ratings up to 500 V Capacitance up to 100 s of mF Rated for ripple current capacity Ceramic and Very low ESL and ESR Paralleled for low-voltage output  multilayer ceramic Low capacitance values (up to ~100 mF)   filtering, bypass for gate drives   Maximum capacitance value reduces High-voltage capacitors (up to   with increasing voltage rating   1 kV) used in snubber circuits Metallized Low ESR and ESL In input and output dc filters:  Polyester film Low capacitance values (up to a few mF)   to suppress switching transients,   High voltage ratings (few kV)   ac filters Bigger than ceramic and electrolytic Snubber circuits Metallized Very low ESR and ESL In resonant converters: for carrying  Polypropylene film Low capacitance values (up to a few mF)   high frequency ac current   Very high rms current, and high   voltage ratings

16_Santoso_Sec16_p0961-1052.indd 1044

22/11/17 11:00 AM

POWER ELECTRONICS   1045

exhaustive and there are several other capacitor types suited to different applications, e.g., tantalum, mica, and high-power film capacitors. 16.10.5  Heat Sinks Power loss in power electronic circuits occurs in power semiconductor devices, windings and cores of the magnetic components, capacitors subjected to high-ripple current, and auxiliary circuits like gate drives. The resulting heat has to be removed from the components and eventually transferred to the atmosphere/ambient surroundings due to the following reasons. Power semiconductors have a maximum junction temperature rating beyond which they fail, and on-state resistance of devices like MOSFETs increases with junction temperature leading to reduced efficiency. Electrolytic capacitors can fail when heated beyond their ratings and their expected lifetime reduces with increase in temperature. Increased temperatures in magnetics can lead to higher power loss, poor magnetic core characteristics, insulation breakdown, and shorter lifetimes. Most semiconductor devices are cooled by mounting their package on a heat sink. A heat sink is essentially a piece of metal designed to dissipate heat by convection and radiation (by maximizing the heat sink surface area). The heat transfer from the device to the heat sink is via conduction. For high-power applications, the power semiconductor die is mounted on direct bonded copper (DBC) consisting of two sheets of copper with an insulating ceramic in between. One side of the DBC holds the die while the other side is soldered to a metal-base plate. This assembly of the die, DBC, base plate, and electrical terminals forms a power device module. The module is then mounted on a heat sink. For lower power/voltage applications the package of the device is not electrically isolated from its electrical terminals. In such cases an interface material like Silpads141 with good thermal conductivity and high dielectric breakdown voltage has to be used. For magnetics, resins may be used to conduct heat from the windings and the core to the metal heat sink. The heat sink itself may be cooled naturally, by forced convection using fans to blow air on the heat sink surface, or liquid cooled by circulating a liquid through the mass of the heat sink and cooling the liquid by a radiator. Simple steady analysis and design of heat sinks is carried out using specified thermal resistances, ratio of temperature difference to heat transferred across the material, of all the materials in the heat transfer path. For pulsed power applications, a transient thermal model, usually consisting of first order lags between two consecutive interfaces, is used.

16.11 REFERENCES 1. J. G. Kassakian, J. M. Miller, and N. Traub, “Automotive electronics power up,” IEEE Spectrum, vol. 37, no. 5, May 2000, pp. 34–36. ´ 2. R. Middlebrook and S. Cuk, Advances in Switched-Mode Power Conversion. CA, USA: TESLAco, 1981, vol. 1. 3. H. Khalil, Nonlinear Systems, 3rd ed. Upper Saddle River, NJ: Prentice Hall, 2002. 4. N. T. M. Undeland and W. P. Robbins, Power Electronics: Converters, Applications, and Design, 3rd ed. Hoboken, NJ: John Wiley & Sons, 2003. 5. R. W. Erickson and D. Maksimovic, Fundamentals of Power Electronics, 2nd ed. Modify. New York: Kluwer Academic Publishers, 2001. 6. A. I. Pressman, Switching Power Supply Design, 2nd ed. New York: McGraw-Hill, 1997. 7. K. Billings, Switchmode Power Supply Handbook, 2nd ed. New York: McGraw-Hill, 1999. 8. R. P. Severns and G. E. Bloom, Modern DC-to-DC Switchmode Power Converter Circuits, 1st ed. New York: Van Nostrand Reinhold Company Inc., 1985. 9. Texas Instruments company website. [Online]. Available: http://www.ti.com/ 10. National Semiconductors company website. [Online]. Available: http://www.national.com/ 11. Maxim company website. [Online]. Available: http://www.maxim-ic.com/ 12. Linear Technologies company website. [Online]. Available: http://www.analog.com/

16_Santoso_Sec16_p0961-1052.indd 1045

05/06/19 11:27 am

1046  SECTION SIXTEEN

13. R. Ayyanar and N. Mohan, “Novel soft-switching dc-dc converter with full zvs-range and reduced filter requirement part i: Regulated-output applications,” IEEE Transactions on Power Electronics, vol. 16, no. 2, Mar. 2001, pp. 184–192. 14. R. Ayyanar and N. Mohan, “Novel soft-switching dc-dc converter with full ZVS-range and reduced filter requirement ­part ii: Constant-input, variable-output applications,” IEEE Transactions on Power Electron­ics, vol. 16, no. 2, Mar. 2001, pp. 193–2001. 15. On Semiconductor company website. [Online]. Available: http://www.onsemi.com/ 16. Power Integrations company website. [Online]. Available: http://www.powerint.com/ 17. Texas Instruments power management webpage. [Online]. Available: http://www.ti.com 18. G. Schrom, P. Hazucha, F. Paillet, D. Rennie, S. Moon, D. G. T. Kamik, P. Sun, T. Nguyen, M. Hill, K. Radhakrishnan, and T. Memioglu, “A 100 MHz eight-phase buck converter delivering 12a in 25 mm2 using air-core inductors,” in Proc. of the Annual IEEE Applied Power Electronics Conference and Exposition (APEC2007), Anaheim, CA, Feb. 2007, pp. 1048–2334. 19. Proc. of international workshop on power supply on chip (2008 and 2010). [Online]. Available: http:// pwrsocevents.com 20. R. Jain and S. Sanders, “A 200 MA switched capacitor voltage regulator on 32 nm CMOS and regulation schemes to enable DVFS,” in European Power Electronics Conference (EPE ’11), Birmingham, UK, Aug. 2011. 21. J. Li, A. Stratakos, A. Schultz, and C. Sullivan, “Using coupled inductors to enhance transient performance of multi-phase buck converters,” in Proc. of the Annual IEEE Applied Power Electronics Conference and Exposition (APEC 2004), vol. 2, Washington, DC, Feb. 2004, pp. 1289–1293. 22. S. R. Sanders and G. C. Verghese, “Lyapunov-based control for switched power converters,” IEEE Transactions on Power Electronics, vol. 7, no. 1, Jan. 1992, pp. 17–24. 23. V. Vorpérian, “Simplified analysis of PWM converters using model of a PWM switch part i: continuous conduction mode,” IEEE Transactions on Aerospace and Electronic Systems, vol. 26, no. 3, May 1990, pp. 490–496. 24. V. Vorpérian, “Simplified analysis of PWM converters using model of a PWM switch part ii: discontinuous conduction mode,” IEEE Transactions on Aerospace and Electronic Systems, vol. 26, no. 3, May 1990, pp. 497–505. 25. N. Mohan, First Course on Power Electronics and Drives. Minneapolis, MN: MNPERE, 2003. 26. SPICE. University of Berkeley. [Online]. Available: http://www-cad.eecs.berkeley.edu/Software/software.html 27. K. Ogata, Modern Control Engineering, 4th ed. Upper Saddle River, NJ: Prentice Hall, 2001. 28. H. D. Veneble, “The k facor: a new mathematical tool for stability analysis and synthesis,” in Proc. of the International Solid-State Power Electronics Conference (POWERCON 10), San Deigo, CA, Mar. 1983, pp. 1–12. 29. ORCAD PSpice A/D User’s Guide, Cadence Design Systems, 2003. 30. G. C. Verghese, Nonlinear Phenomena in Power Electronics: Bifurcations, Chaos, Control, and Applications. Hoboken, NJ: John Wiley & Sons, 2001. 31. M. P. Kazmierkowski, R. Krishnan, and F. Blaabjerg, Control in Power Electronics: Selected Problems. Maryland Heights, MO: Elsevier Science & Technology Books, 2002. 32. Digital power controllers. Silicon Labs. [Online]. Available: https://www.silabs.com/products/powerover-ethernet/powered-devices 33. Digital power. Texas Instruments. [Online]. Available: http://www.ti.com/ww/en/analog/digital-power/ index.html 34. B. Patella, A. Prodic, A. Zirger, and D. Maksimovic, “High-frequency digital controller IC for dc/dc converters,” in Proc. of the Annual IEEE Applied Power Electronics Conference and Exposition (APEC 2002), vol. 1, Dallas, TX, Mar. 2002, pp. 374–380. 35. B. K. Bose, Power Electronics and Variable Frequency Drives: Technology and Applications. NJ: IEEE Press, 1996. 36. B. K. Bose, Modern Power Electronics and AC Drives. Upper Saddle River, NJ: Prentice Hall, 2001. 37. N. Mohan, Advanced Electric Drives. Minneapolis, MN: MNPERE, 2001. 38. R. C. Panaitescu and N. Mohan, “A simple space-vector PWM algorithm for VSI-fed ac motor drives,” in Proc. IEEE Applied Power Electronics Conference and Exposition (APEC’02), vol. 1, Dallas, TX, Mar. 2002, pp. 72–75.

16_Santoso_Sec16_p0961-1052.indd 1046

05/06/19 4:49 pm

POWER ELECTRONICS   1047

39. G. Narayanan, V. Ranganathan, D. Z. H. Krishnamurthy, and R. Ayyanar, “Space vector based hybrid PWM techniques for reduced current ripple,” IEEE Transactions on Industrial Electronics, vol. 55, no. 4, Apr. 2008, pp. 101–112. 40. F. Blashke, “The principle of field orientation as applied to the new transvector closed loop control system for rotating field machines,” Siemens Review, vol. 34, no. 5, 1972, pp. 217–220. 41. M. Depenbrock, “Direct self-control (DSC) of inverter-fed induction machine,” IEEE Transac­tions on Power Electronics, vol. 3, no. 4, 1988, pp. 420–429. 42. I. Takahashi and T. Noguchi, “A new quick-response and high efficiency control strategy of an induction motor,” IEEE Transactions on Industry Applications, vol. 22, no. 5, 1986, pp. 820–827. 43. P. Vas, Sensorless Vector and Direct Torque Control. New York: Oxford University Press, 1998. 44. D. W. Novotony and T. A. Lipo, Vector Control and Dynamics of AC Drives. Oxford, UK: Claredon Press, 1996. 45. K. Corzine, The Power Electronics Handbook, T. L. Skvaren­ina, ed. New York: CRC Press, 2002. 46. J. Rodriguez, J. Lai, and F. Peng, “Multilevel inverters: a survey of topologies, controls, and applications,” IEEE Transaction on Industrial Electronics, vol. 40, no. 4, Aug. 2002, pp. 724–738. 47. B. P. McGrath, D. G. Holmes, and T. Lipo, “Optimized space vector switching sequences for multilevel inverters,” IEEE Transactions on Power Electronics, vol. 18, no. 6, Nov. 2003, pp. 1293–1301. 48. A. Nabae, I. Tkahashi, and H. Akagi, “A new neutral-point clamped PWM inverter,” IEEE Transactions on Industry Applications, vol. IA-17, no. 5, Sep.-Oct. 1981, pp. 518–523. 49. L. M. Tolbert, F. Z. Peng, and T. G. Habetler, “Multilevel converters for large electric drives,” IEEE Transactions on Industry Applications, vol. 35, no. 1, Jan.-Feb. 1999, pp. 36–44. 50. G. R. Kamath and N. Mohan, “Series-connected, all-hybrid converters for utility interactive applications,” in Proc. of the 23rd International Conference on Industrial Electronics, Control and Instrumentation (IECON ’97), vol. 2, New Orleans, LA, Nov. 1997, pp. 726–731. 51. Siemens automation website. [Online]. Available: http://www.automation.siemens.com 52. A. Lesnicarand R. Marquardt, “An innovative modular multilevel converter topology suitable for a wide power range,” in Proc. of the 2003 IEEE Power Tech Conference, vol. 3, Bologna, Italy, Jun. 2003, pp. 1–6. 53. E. Cengelci, S. U. Sulistijo, B. O. Woo, P. Enjeti, R. Teoderescu, and F. Blaabjerg, “A new medium-voltage PWM inverter topology for adjustable-speed drives,” IEEE Transactions on Industry Applications, vol. 35, no. 3, May-Jun. 1999, pp. 628–637. 54. J. Wen and K. M. Smedley, “Synthesis of multilevel converters based on single and/or three-phase converter building blocks,” IEEE Transactions on Power Electronics, vol. 23, no. 3, May 2008, pp. 1247–1256. 55. G. K. Dubey, S. R. Doradla, A. Joshi, and R. M. K. Sinha, Thyristorised Power Controllers. New York: John Wiley & Sons, 1986. 56. K. R. Padiyar, HVDC Power Transmission Systems. New Delhi, India: Wiley Eastern Ltd., 1993. 57. P. W. Wheeler, J. Rodrigueza, J. C. Clare, L. Empringham, and A. Weinstein, “Matrix converters: A technology review,” IEEE Transactions on Industry Electronics, vol. 49, no. 2, Apr. 2002, pp. 276–278. 58. A. Alesina and M. G. B. Venturini, “Analysis and design of optimum-amplitude nine-switch direct ac-ac converters,” IEEE Transactions on Power Electronics, vol. 4, no. 1, Jan. 1989, pp. 101–112. 59. J. Chang, T. Sum, and A. Wang, “Highly compact ac-ac converter achieving high voltage transfer ratio,” IEEE Transactions on Industrial Electronics, vol. 49, no. 2, pp. 345–352, 2002. 60. Economac: the first all-in-one IGBT module for matrix converters. Eupec. [Online]. Available: http:// www.eupec.com 61. J. Kolar, M. Baumann, F. Schafmeister, and H. Ertl, “Novel three-phase ac-dc-ac sparse matrix converter,” in Proc. of Annual IEEE Applied Power Electronics Conference and Exposition (APEC’02), vol. 2, 2002, pp. 777–791. 62. IEEE Recommended Practices and Requirements for Harmonic Control in Electrical Power Systems, IEEE Std. 519-1992, 1992. 63. Electromagnetic Compatibility Part 3: Limits, International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC) Std. 1000-3, 1995. 64. R. Ayyanar and A. K. Jain, The Power Electronics Handbook, T. L. Skvarenina, ed. New York: CRC Press, 2002.

16_Santoso_Sec16_p0961-1052.indd 1047

05/06/19 11:33 am

1048  SECTION SIXTEEN

65. V. Rao, A. K. Jain, K. K. Reddy, and A. Behal, “Experimental comparison of digital con­trol techniques for single phase power factor correction,” IEEE Transactions on Industrial Electronics, vol. 55, no. 1, Jan. 2008, pp. 67–78. 66. PFC smart power module. Fairchild Semiconductor. [Online]. Available: http://www.fairchildsemi.com/ products/discrete/spm/pfc_spm.html 67. Accusine power correction system. Scheider Electric. [Online]. Available: http: //products.schneider-electric.us/ products-services/products/power-management-products/reactivar-power-factor-correction-capacitors/ accusine-power-correction-system/ 68. M. J. Nave, Power Line Filter Design for Switched-Mode Power Supplies. Van Nostrand Reinhold, 1991. 69. EMC/EMI products. Schaffner. [Online]. Available: http://www.schaffner.com 70. Federal Communications Commission website. [Online]. Available: http://www.fcc.gov 71. Verband deutscher elektrotechniker (association of German electrical engineers). [Online]. Available: https://www.vde.com/en 72. Artesyn Technologies company website. [Online]. Available: http://www.artesyn.com/powergroup 73. N. Mohan, Electric Drives: An Integrative Approach. Minneapolis, MN: MNPERE, 2003. 74. T. J. Miller, ed., Brushless Permanent-Magnet and Reluctance Motor Drives. Oxford, UK: Oxford University Press, 1989. 75. T. J. E. Miller, Switched Reluctance Motors and their Control. Oxford, UK: Magna Physics Publishing and Clarendon Press, 1993. 76. T. J. E. Miller, ed., Electronic Control of Switched Reluctance Machines. Oxford, UK: Newnes, 2001. 77. Powerex, Inc. company website. [Online]. Available: http://www.pwrx.com 78. Semikron company website. [Online]. Available: http://www.semikron.com 79. Mitshubishi electric semiconductor website. [Online]. Available: http://www.mitsubishielectric.com/ semiconductors/ 80. Eupec company website. [Online]. Available: http://www.eupec.com 81. International Recitifier company website. [Online]. Available: http://www.irf.com 82. W. F. Ray and R. M. Davis, “Inverter drive for doubly salient reluctance motor: its fun­damental behaviour, linear analysis, and cost implications,” IEE Journal on Electric Power Applications, vol. 2, no. 6, Dec. 1979, pp. 185–193. 83. Fcas50sn6: Smart power module for SRM. Fairchild Semiconductor. [Online]. Available: www.fairchildsemi .com/ 84. A. K. Jain, “Two phase modeling, experimental characterization, and power converter with fast demagnetization for switched reluctance motor drives,” Ph. D. dissertation, University of Minnesota, Minneapolis, MN, 2003. 85. M. Barnes and C. Pollock, “Power electronic converters for switched reluctance drives,” IEEE Transactions on Power Electronics, vol. 13, no. 6, Nov. 1998, pp. 1100–1111. 86. S. Vukosavic and V. R. Stefanovic, “SRM inverter topologies: a comparative evaluation,” IEEE Transactions on Industry Applications, vol. 27, no. 6, Nov.-Dec. 1991, pp. 1034–1047. 87. Roadster. Tesla Motors. [Online]. Available: http://www.teslamotors.com/roadster 88. B. Masoud, “Charging ahead with Li-ion and Li-pol batteries,” Power Electronics Technology, vol. 28, no. 7, Jul. 2002, pp. 26–29. 89. Building technologies program: Lighting research and development website. U.S. Department of Energy. [Online]. Available: http://www.eere.energy.gov/buildings/tech/lighting/ 90. R. L. Steigerwald, “A comparison of half-bridge resonant converter topologies,” IEEE Trans. on Power Electronics, vol. 3, no. 2, Apr. 1988, pp. 174–182. 91. P. Greenland and W. Burns, “Powering next-generation solid-state lighting,” Power Electron­ics Technology, vol. 30, no. 5, May 2004, pp. 34–39. 92. M. Ehsani, Y. Gao, and A. Emadi, Modern Electric, Hybrid Electric, and Fuel Cell Vehicles: Fundamentals, Theory, and Design. New York: CRC Press, 2009. 93. Tesla Motors company website. [Online]. Available: http://www.teslamotors.com/ 94. Nissan Leaf. Nissan. [Online]. Available: http://www.nissanusa.com/leaf-electric-car/index

16_Santoso_Sec16_p0961-1052.indd 1048

05/06/19 11:38 am

POWER ELECTRONICS   1049

95. Chevy Volt. Chevrolet. [Online]. Available: http://www.chevrolet.com/volt-electric-car/ 96. J. G. Kassakian, “Automotive electrical systems—the power electronics market of the future,” in Proc. of Annual IEEE Applied Power Electronics Conference and Exposition (APEC’00), vol. 1, New Orleans, LA, Feb. 2000, pp. 3–9. 97. J. Cooper and A. Agarwal, “SIC power-switching devices—the second electronics revolution?” Proceedings of the IEEE, vol. 90, no. 6, Jun. 2002, pp. 956–968. 98. A. Elasser and T. P. Chow, “Silicon carbide benefits and advantages for power electronic circuits and systems,” Proceedings of IEEE, vol. 90, no. 6, Jun. 2002, pp. 969–986. 99. Enphase Energy company website. [Online]. Available: http://www.enphase.com 100. L. Linares, R. W. Erickson, S. MacAlpine, and M. Brandemuehl, “Improved energy capture in series string photovoltaics via smart distributed power electronics,” in Proc. of the Annual IEEE Applied Power Electronics Conference and Exposition (APEC 2009), vol. 2, Washington, DC, Feb. 1996, pp. 904–910. 101. Solarmagic IC products. Texas Instruments. 1 02. R. Lasseter, “Microgrids,” in Proc. IEEE Power Engineering Society Winter Meeting, vol. 1, New York, Jan. 2002, pp. 305–308. 103. T. M. Kaarsberg and J. M. Roop, “Combined heat and power: how much carbon and energy can manufacturers save?” Aerospace and Electronic Systems Magazine, vol. 14, no. 1, Jan. 1999, pp. 7–12. 104. IEEE Standard for Interconnecting Distributed Resources with Electric Power Systems, IEEE Std. 1547, 2003. 105. N. G. Hingorani, “Flexible ac transmission,” IEEE Spectrum, vol. 30, no. 4, Apr. 1993, pp. 40–45. 106. N. G. Hingorani and L. Gyugyi, Understanding Facts: Concepts and Technology of Flexible AC Transmission Systems. New York: John Wiley & Sons, 1999. 107. P. Kundur, Power System Stability and Control. New York: McGraw-Hill, 1994. 108. L. Gyugyi, “Application characteristics of converter-based facts controllers,” in Proc. International Conference on Power System Technology (PowerCon’00), vol. 1, Perth, WA, Australia, Dec. 2000, pp. 391–396. 109. K. Sen, “Statcom-static synchronous compensator: theory, modeling, and applications,” in Proc. IEEE Power Engineering Society Winter Meeting, vol. 2, New York, Jan.-Feb. 1999, pp. 1177–1183. 110. L. Gyugyi, C. Schauder, S. Williams, T. Rietman, D. Torgerson, and A. Edris, “The unified power flow controller: a new approach to power transmission control,” IEEE Transactions on Power Delivery, vol. 10, no. 2, Apr. 1995, pp. 1085–1097. 111. A. Ghosh and G. Ledwich, eds., Power Quality Enhancement Using Custom Power. Boston: Kluwer Academic Publishers, 2002. 112. N. G. Hingorani, “Introducing custom power,” IEEE Spectrum, vol. 32, no. 6, Jun. 1995, pp. 41–48. 113. IEEE Standard on Custom Power, in Draft Stage, IEEE Std. P1409. 114. J. Kyei, R. Ayyanar, G. Heydt, R. Thallam, and J. Blevins, “The design of power acceptability curves,” IEEE Transactions on Power Delivery, vol. 17, no. 3, Jul. 2002, pp. 828–833. 115. J. Nielsen, M. Newman, H. Nielsen, and F. Blaabjerg, “Control and testing of a dynamic voltage restorer (DVR) at medium voltage level,” IEEE Transactions on Power Electronics, vol. 19, no. 3, May 2004, pp. 806–813. 116. N. Woodley, “Field experience with dynamic voltage restorer (ddvrtmmv) systems,” in Proc. IEEE Power Engineering Society Winter Meeting, vol. 4, New York, Jan.-Feb. 2000, pp. 2864–2871. 117. J. B. Baliga, Power Semiconductor Devices. New York: PWS Publishing Company, 1995. 118. T. L. Skvarenina, ed., The Power Electronics Handbook, Part I: Power Electronic Devices. New York: CRC Press, 2002. 119. W. T. McLyman, Transformer and Inductor Design Handbook, 3rd ed. New York: Marcel Dekker, 2002. 120. Infineon Technologies company website. [Online]. Available: http://www.infineon.com 121. Cree Semiconductors company website. [Online]. Available: http://www.cree.com 122. Qspeed family of diodes. Power Integrations. [Online]. Available: http://www.powerint.com/qspeed 123. Ixys Rf company website. [Online]. Available: http://www.ixysrf.com 124. Abb power semiconductors website. ABB. [Online]. Available: http://www.abb.com

16_Santoso_Sec16_p0961-1052.indd 1049

05/06/19 11:40 am

1050  SECTION SIXTEEN

125. Mitsubishi electric power semiconductors website. Mitsubishi Electric. [Online]. Available: http://www .mitsubishielectric.com/semiconductors/ 126. R. J. Callanan, A. Agarwal, A. Burk, M. Das, B. Hull, F. Husna, A. Powell, J. Richmond, S. Ryu, and Q. Zhang, “Recent progress in SIC DMOSFETS and JBS diodes at CREE,” in 34th IEEE Industrial Electronics Annual Conference (IECON 2008), Orlando, FL, Nov. 2008, pp. 2885–2890. 127. A. Hefner, S. H. Ryu, B. Hull, D. Berning, C. Hood, J. M. Ortiz-Rodriguez, A. Rivera-Lopez, T. Duong, A. Akuffo, and M. Hernandez-Mora, “Recent advances in high-voltage, high-frequency silicon-carbide power devices,” in IEEE Industry Applications Conference (IAS 2006), vol. 1, Oct. 2006, pp. 330–337. 128. A. Jain, D. McIntosh, M. Jones, and B. Ratliff, “Performance of a 25-kW 700-V galvanically isolated bidirectional dc-dc converter using 1.2 kV silicon carbide MOSFETS and Schottky diodes,” in 2011 International Conference on Silicon Carbide and Related Materials (ICSCRM ’11), Cleveland, OH, Sep. 2011, pp. 1–4. 129. A. Jain, D. McIntosh, M. Jones, and B. Ratliff, “A 2.5 kV to 22 V, 1 kW radar decoy power supply using silicon carbide semiconductors,” in European Power Electronics Conference (EPE ’11), Birmingham, UK, Aug. 2011, pp. 1–10. 130. Semisouth Laboratories, Inc. company website. [Online]. Available: http://www.semisouth.com 131. GeneSiC Semiconductor company website. [Online]. Available: http://www.genesicsemi.com 132. Rohm Semiconductor company website. [Online]. Available: http://www.rohm.com 133. Transic company website. Fairchild Semiconductor. [Online]. Available: http://www.transic.com/ 134. J. Wang, G. Wang, S. Bhattacharya, and A. Q. Huang, “Comparison of 10-kV SiC power devices in solidstate transformer,” in IEEE Energy Conversion Congress and Exposition (ECCE 2010), Atlanta, Sep. 2010, pp. 3284–3289. 135. L. Stevanovic. (2009) Advanced components for high speed, high-MW drives. [Online]. Available: http:// www.nist.gov/pml/high megawatt/upload/7 2-approved-Stevanovic.pdf 136. Micrometals, Inc. company website. [Online]. Available: http://www.micrometals.com/ 137. Magnetics, Inc. company website. [Online]. Available: http://www.mag-inc.com/ 138. M. Willard, “Nanocrystalline inductor materials for power electronic applications,” Passive Compoent Industry, Jul.-Aug. 2005. 139. Vacuumschmelze company website. [Online]. Available: www.vacuumschmelze.de 140. Finemet products. Metglas, Inc. [Online]. Available: http://www.metglas.com 141. The Bergquist Company website. [Online]. Available: www.bergquistcompany.com/ 142. Alex Q. Huang, Mariesa L. Crow, Gerald Thomas Heydt, Jim P. Zheng, and Steiner J. Dale, “The future renewable electric energy delivery and management (FREEDM) system: The energy internet,” Proceedings of the IEEE, vol. 99, no. 1, Jan. 2011, pp. 133–148. 143. Xu She, Alex Huang, and Rolando Burgos, “Review of solid state transformers and their application in power distribution system,” IEEE Journal of Emerging and Selected Topics in Power Electronics, vol. 1, no. 3, Sep. 2013. 144. Xu She, Xunwei Yu, Fei Wang, and Alex Q. Huang, “Design and demonstration of a 3.6 kV-120 V/10 kVA solid state transformer for smart grid application,” IEEE Transactions on Power Electronics, vol. 29, no. 8, pp. 3982–3996. 145. Chunhong Zhao, Drazen Dujic, Akos Mester, Juergen K. Steinke, Michael Weiss, Silvia Lewdeni-Schmid, Toufann Chaudhuri, and Philippe Stefanutti, “Power electronic traction transformer—medium voltage prototype,” IEEE Transactions on Industrial Electronics, vol. 61, no. 7, Jul. 2014, pp. 3257–3268. 146. Fei Wang, Gangyao Wang, Alex Q. Huang, Wensong Yu, and Xijun Ni, “Design and operation of a 3.6 kV high performance solid state transformer based on 13 kV SiC MOSFET and JBS diode,” in Proc. IEEE Energy Conversion Congress and Exposition (ECCE), 2014, pp. 4553–4560. 147. A. Lesnicar and R. Marquardt, “An innovative modular multilevel converter topology suitable for a wide power range,” in Proc. IEEE Bologna Power Tech Conference Proceedings, 2003, vol. 3. 148. Maryam Saeedifard and Reza Iravani, “Dynamic performance of a modular multilevel back-to-back HVDC system,” IEEE Transactions on Power Delivery, vol. 25, no. 4, Oct. 2010, pp. 2903–2912. 149. Makoto Hagiwara and Hirofumi Akagi, “Control and experiment of pulse width-modulated modular multilevel converters,” IEEE Transactions on Power Electronics, vol. 24, no. 7, Jul. 2009, pp. 1737–1746.

16_Santoso_Sec16_p0961-1052.indd 1050

05/06/19 4:48 pm

POWER ELECTRONICS   1051

150. Xu She and Alex Q. Huang, “Circulating current control of double-star chopper-cell modular multilevel converter for HVDC system,” in Proc. IEEE IECON, 2012, pp. 1234–1239. 151. Gahzal Falahi and Alex Q. Huang, “Design consideration of an MMC-HVDC system based on 4500 V/4000 A emitter turn-off (ETO) thyristor,” in Proc. IEEE ECCE, 2015, pp. 3462–3467. 152. Wolfspeed SiC Schottky Diode Datasheet, Part No. C3D20060D, www.wolfspeed.com. 153. J. Casady, et al., “Ultra-low (1.25 mΩ) on-resistance 900 V SiC 62 mm half-bridge power modules using new 10 mΩ SiC MOSFETs,” PCIM Europe 2016, pp. 1–8. 154. Infineon 1200 V CoolSiC™ Power Transistor, Part No. IJW120R070T1, www.infineon.com. 155. Rohm 650 V SiC MOSFET datasheet, Part No. SCT2120AF, www.rohm.com. 156. Guo, Suxuan, Zhang, Liqi, Lei, Yang, Li, Xuan, Xue, Fei, Yu, Wensong, Huang, and Alex Q., “3.38 Mhz operation of 1.2 kV SiC MOSFET with integrated ultra-fast gate drive,” in Wide Bandgap Power Devices and Applications (WiPDA), 2015 IEEE 3rd Workshop on, vol., no., 2–4 Nov. 2015, pp. 390–395. 157. V. Pala, G. Wang, B. Hull, S. Allen, J. Casady, and J. Palmour, “Record-low 10 mohm SiC MOSFETs in TO-247, rated at 900V,” 2016 IEEE Applied Power Electronics Conference and Exposition (APEC), Long Beach, CA, 2016, pp. 979–982. 158. E. Van Brunt, et al., “27 kV, 20 A 4H-SiC n-IGBTs,” Mat. Sci. Forum, vol. 821–823, pp. 847–850, 2015. 159. L. Cheng et al., “20 kV, 2 cm2, 4H-SiC gate turn-off thyristors for advanced pulsed power applications,” 2013 19th IEEE Pulsed Power Conference (PPC), San Francisco, CA, 2013, pp. 1–4. 160. Song, Xiaoqing, Huang, Alex Q., Lee, Mengchia, Peng, Chang, Cheng, Lin, O’Brien, Heather, Ogunniyi, Aderin, Scozzie, Charles, Palmour, and John, “22 kV SiC emitter turn-off (ETO) thyristor and its dynamic performance including SOA,” Power Semiconductor Devices & IC’s (ISPSD), 2015 IEEE 27th International Symposium on, vol., no., 10–14 May 2015, pp. 277–280. 161. Kamel Madjour, “Silicon carbide market update: From discrete devices to modules…” presented at PCIM Europe, Germany, 2014. 162. Ulrich Schwarzer, Stefan Buschhorn, and Klaus Vogel, “System benefits for solar inverters using SiC semiconductor modules,” in Proc. PCIM Europe, 2014, pp.787–794. 163. Stefan Buschhorn and Klaus Vogel, “Saving money: SiC in UPS applications,” in Proc. PCIM Europe, 2014, pp. 765–771. 164. https://www.littleboxchallenge.com/. 165. Y. Hayashi, H. Iso, D. Hara, and A. Matsumoto, “Current-fed GaN front-end converter for ISOP-IPOS converter-based high power density dc distribution system,” (EPE’15 ECCE-Europe), 2015 17th European Conference on, Geneva, 2015, pp. 1–10. 166. Z. Liu, X. Huang, M. Mu, Y. Yang, F. C. Lee, and Q. Li, “Design and evaluation of GaN-based dual-phase interleaved MHz critical mode PFC converter,” 2014 IEEE Energy Conversion Congress and Exposition (ECCE), Pittsburgh, PA, 2014, pp. 611–616. 167. M. Domb, “High power density, high efficiency 380 V to 52 V LLC converter utilizing E-Mode GaN switches,” PCIM Europe 2016, pp. 1–7. 168. F. Xue, R. Yu, W. Yu, and A. Q. Huang, “Distributed energy storage device based on a novel bidirectional Dc-Dc converter with 650 V GaN transistors,” 2015 IEEE PEDG, Aachen, 2015, pp. 1–6. 169. Texas Instrument, SNVU520–May 2016 “Using the LMG5200POLEVM-10 48 V to Point of Load EVM.”

16_Santoso_Sec16_p0961-1052.indd 1051

22/11/17 11:00 AM

16_Santoso_Sec16_p0961-1052.indd 1052

22/11/17 11:00 AM

17

POWER SYSTEM ANALYSIS Francisco de León Associate Professor, Department of Electrical and Computer Engineering, NYU Tandon School of Engineering, New York University, Brooklyn, New York

Tianqi Hong Research Fellow, Department of Electrical and Computer Engineering, NYU Tandon School of Engineering, New York University, Brooklyn, New York

Ashhar Raza Research Fellow, Department of Electrical and Computer Engineering, NYU Tandon School of Engineering, New York University, Brooklyn, New York



17.1 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1054 17.2 PHASOR ANALYSIS AND COMPLEX POWER. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1054 17.2.1 Complex Numbers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1054 17.2.2 Phasors and Phasor Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1055 17.2.3 Complex Power. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1056 17.3 COMPONENT MODELING. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1057 17.3.1 Generator. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1057 17.3.2 Transmission Lines. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1058 17.3.3 Transformers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1061 17.3.4 Loads. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1063 17.4 PER-UNIT SYSTEM. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1064 17.4.1 Calculation Formulas. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1065 17.4.2 Converting pu Values from One Base to Another. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1066 17.5 SYMMETRICAL COMPONENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1067 17.6 SEQUENCE IMPEDANCES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1070 17.6.1 Transmission Lines. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1070 17.6.2 Transformers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1071 17.7 POWER FLOW. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1072 17.7.1 Power Flow Problem. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1072 17.7.2 Bus Types. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1075 17.7.3 Transmission Systems. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1076 17.7.4 Distribution Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1083 17.7.5 Commercial and Royalty-Free Software. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1086 17.8 SHORT CIRCUIT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1087 17.8.1 Modeling Assumptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1087 17.8.2 Symmetrical Faults. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1087 17.8.3 Nonsymmetrical Faults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1088 17.8.4 Inversion of the Admittance Matrix by Column. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1092 17.9 REFERENCES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1096

1053

17_Santoso_Sec17_p1053-1096.indd 1053

23/11/17 12:02 PM

1054  SECTION SEVENTEEN

17.1 INTRODUCTION Since as far back as the 1970s, when mainframe computers became popular, the analysis of electric power systems is performed (almost exclusively) using digital computer simulations. Because of its high cost, experimentation in an actual power system is carried out very seldom. Additionally, the results from computer simulations are generally very accurate; therefore, power engineers today trust many of the analytical tools commercially (and royalty-free) available. Today (2017), and for many years already, most power system simulations of large power systems can be performed in personal computers and laptops. This section describes the concepts of what is called in the electric power industry power system steady-state analysis (or “power system analysis” for short). Power system steady-state analysis includes two very large areas of study: power flow and faults analyses. The former is, without any doubt, the most important study used today to design and operate the power system. It consists of the solution (in steady state) of the electrical circuit with the particularities of a power system (i.e., loads do not behave as constant impedances as in an electric circuit, but behave closer to constant power). In other words, with power flow analysis one computes the voltage at every location (bus or node) and the flow of power in every link (transmission line, cable, transformer, etc.). Those two quantities (bus voltage and power flow) are of paramount importance since all power equipment requires a narrow voltage range to operate correctly and power flow determines the size (and therefore the cost) of the equipment. The latter, power system fault analysis actually refers to the transient state when a fault occurs. Faults are very common in power systems because large portions are exposed to the elements, ageing, animal intrusion, and other internal and external situations. The calculation of fault currents is performed very efficiently in steady state even when faults last only for a few cycles. Traditionally power system analysis is performed independently for transmission and distribution systems. There are several reasons for this even when the entire system is interconnected: (1) transmission and distribution companies frequently have different owners; (2) for a transmission system, the distribution system (of a city for example) can be represented as lumped load (or several lump loads). For a distribution system, the transmission system can be seen as an impedance in series with an infinite bus, say its Thevenin equivalent; (3) transmission systems mostly operate balanced and thus a single phase equivalent (the positive sequence) can be used for power flow studies. Distribution systems are commonly unbalanced (or even contain fewer than three phases) and therefore the positive sequence equivalent does not apply. Both transmission and distribution systems, use the technique called symmetrical components transformation to perform unbalanced fault (or short-circuit) analysis, such as single-line-to-ground fault. This section starts with the presentation of the basic concepts of complex numbers and phasors as they apply to power system analysis. Next, the circuit models of the major pieces of equipment are described. This is followed by the derivation of the per unit system used in power engineering, the method of symmetrical components, and sequence impedances. The section ends with the main two subsections: one dedicated to power flow analysis and the other to fault analysis.

17.2  PHASOR ANALYSIS AND COMPLEX POWER 17.2.1  Complex Numbers A complex number F can be represented as F = a + jb where j = −1 stands for a unity imaginary number (in power systems, we use j rather than i for −1 because i is reserved for electrical current). a is the real part of the complex number F and b is a real number representing the imaginary part of the complex number F. The complex number F can be represented by a vector in the complex plane as illustrated in Fig. 17-1.

17_Santoso_Sec17_p1053-1096.indd 1054

23/11/17 12:02 PM

POWER SYSTEM ANALYSIS   1055 

According to Fig. 17-1, the complex number F can be represented in trigonometric form as

imaginary b

F

F = F (cosθ + j sinθ ) Using Euler’s formula F can be further rewritten as follows:

q a

jθ

F = F e = F ∠θ

real

FIGURE 17-1  Graphic representation of a complex number F.

where F is the modulus (or magnitude) of F and q is the angle of F (θ = arg( F )). The representation of a complex number as |F |∠θ is a very convenient way used by electrical engineers to denote a complex number by its magnitude and angle. The relationships between   F , q, a, and b are given below (all obtained from simple trigonometry): F = a2 + b2  b θ = arctan    a

a = F cosθ and b = F sinθ

Some useful functions and operations for complex numbers are listed in Table 17-1 (let F1 = a1 + jb1 and F2 = a2 + jb2). TABLE 17-1  Useful Functions and Operations for Complex Numbers Re[F1 ] = a1 and Im[F1 ] = b1 F1∗ = a1 − jb1 F1 ± F2 = (a1 ± a2 ) + j(b1 ± b2 ) F1 F2 = F1 F2 e j (θ1 +θ 2 ) = F1 F2 ∠(θ1 + θ 2 ) = (a1a2 − b1b2 ) + j(a1b2 + a2b1 ) F1 F1 j (θ1 −θ 2 ) F1 a a +bb a b −ab = e = ∠(θ1 − θ 2 ) = 1 2 2 1 2 + j 2 1 2 1 2 F2 F2 F2 F2 F2

17.2.2  Phasors and Phasor Diagrams AC current is represented in time domain by the following expression: i(t ) = 2 I rms cos(ω t + ϕ i )

(17-1)

where I rms is the root mean square value (rms) of the ac instantaneous current i(t); w is the angular frequency of i(t) and ϕ i is the phase angle. The phasor notation of ac current i(t) is I = I rms ∠ϕ i  

17_Santoso_Sec17_p1053-1096.indd 1055

(17-2)

23/11/17 12:02 PM

1056  SECTION SEVENTEEN

i(t)

I

R

v(t)

R

V

j v – ji

V L

jXI

jX = jw L

IR I

(a)

(c)

(b)

FIGURE 17-2  (a) Electric circuit in time domain; (b) electric circuit in phasor notation; (c) phasor diagram of the electric circuit.

Similarly, the phasor notation of the instantaneous ac voltage v(t) is V = Vrms ∠ϕ v

(17-3)

where Vrms is the rms value of the ac voltage v(t); ϕ v is its phase angle. For a linear electrical circuit, shown in Fig. 17-2a, we have from Kirchhoff voltage law (KVL): v (t ) = Ri (t ) + L

d i(t ) dt

(17-4)

Assume v(t) is a cosine function with its angular frequency equals to ω, i(t) is also a cosine function in steady state with the same frequency. Hence, the above equation can be rewritten as Vrms cos(ω t + ϕ v ) = RI rms cos(ω t + ϕ i ) − ω LI rms sin(ω t + ϕ i )

(17-5)

According to this equation, a phasor electrical circuit can be obtained shown in Fig. 17-2b. Based on the properties of complex numbers, a phasor diagram can be plotted to represent the electrical relationships of the electrical circuit; see Fig. 17-2c. 17.2.3  Complex Power The active power P of the circuit shown in Fig. 17-2a is defined as the average of the instantaneous power: P=

T

1 v(t )i(t )dt = Vrms I rms cos(ϕ v − ϕ i ) = Vrms I rms cosθ T ∫0

(17-6)

where q is the angle of the load impedance; cos q is the power factor of the circuit and it is a measure of how much the system is utilized to carry active power. The reactive power Q of the circuit is Q = Vrms I rms sinθ

(17-7)

The apparent power |S| of the circuit is | S | = Vrms I rms

17_Santoso_Sec17_p1053-1096.indd 1056

(17-8)

23/11/17 12:02 PM

POWER SYSTEM ANALYSIS   1057 

V

S jIX IR

q

jQ P

q

FIGURE 17-3  Comparison between circuit and power phasor diagrams.

According to the above equations, we have the following relationships between P, Q, and S :

P = | S |cosθ , Q = | S | sinθ , and | S | = P 2 + Q 2 .

Hence, a complex power can be defined as S = P + jQ = | S | ∠θ

(17-9)

The phasor diagram of the relationship between each power quantities is drawn in Fig. 17-3. The power triangle and the circuit triangle shown in Fig. 17-2c are similar triangles.

17.3  COMPONENT MODELING 17.3.1 Generator Synchronous generators are the most commonly used source of energy in power systems. There are two types of synchronous generators: cylindrical (nonsalient pole) synchronous and salient-pole synchronous generators. The simplified structures of those two types of synchronous generators are shown in Fig. 17-4. Cylindrical generators are commonly driven by high-speed steam turbines and contain a few poles, typically 2 or 4. Salient-pole generators are driven by low-speed hydraulic turbines and contain several dozen poles. On a salient pole rotor two axes can be defined. Regardless of their construction, both types of generators have the same equivalent circuit and the parameters are given by the manufacturer.

(a)

(b)

FIGURE 17-4  Structures of synchronous generators. (a) Cylindrical synchronous generator; (b) salient-pole synchronous generator.

17_Santoso_Sec17_p1053-1096.indd 1057

23/11/17 12:02 PM

1058  SECTION SEVENTEEN

Eq XS

Ra

q axis

d

Eq

V

d axis

q V

I

jXqI

RaI (b)

(a)

FIGURE 17-5 Equivalent circuit and phasor diagram of nonsalient pole synchronous generator. (a) Equivalent circuit; (b) phasor diagram.

Assume the common case when the power factor is lagging. Let the terminal voltage and current phasors be V and I, respectively. Taking the terminal voltage as reference we have V = | V | ∠0 and I = | I | ∠θ (17-10)



where |V | and | I | is the magnitudes of phasors V and I; q is the power factor angle. Let XS be the leakage reactance between the rotor and stator windings. The steady-state equivalent circuit of a generator is illustrated in Fig. 17-5a. According to the equivalent circuit, we can write Eq = | Eq | ∠δ = V + ( Ra + jX S )I

(17-11)

where Eq is the effective internal voltage, Ra is the armature resistance per phase. The corresponding phasor diagram is plotted in Fig. 17-5b. 17.3.2  Transmission Lines This subsection discusses the different methods of modeling transmission lines. The best model for a line depends on its length. Hence, there are three different models for the transmission line: short line model, medium line model, and the long line model. Calculations of line parameters are not discussed in this subsection. Short Line Model.  Lines shorter than 50 miles long are modeled as short lines. In the short-line model the capacitance of the line is ignored. The complex impedance of the line Z is written as VS

IS

R

jX

IR

VR

Z = (r + jω L )l

(17-12)

where r, L are the per-phase resistance and inductance of the line per unit length and l is the length of the line. FIGURE 17-6  Short-line model. w is the operating frequency. This model is drawn as shown in Fig. 17-6. VS , VR ,  I S ,  I R are the phasors of the sending and receiving end voltages, and sending and receiving end currents, respectively. The application of Kirchhoff’s laws (KVL and KCL) reveals that



17_Santoso_Sec17_p1053-1096.indd 1058

VS = I R ( R + jX ) + VR (17-13) IS = IR

23/11/17 12:02 PM

POWER SYSTEM ANALYSIS   1059 

In matrix form, the above equation can be written as  VS   1 R + jX   VR =   1  I S   0   I R

  

(17-14)

To make it more general, the above equation is written as a two-port circuit as  VS   A B   VR =    I S   C D   I R

  

(17-15)

where A = 1, B = R + jX, C = 0, and D = 1. An important measure of the operation of a line is voltage regulation. Voltage regulation is defined as percent change in voltage between no-load operation and full load operation as follows: Vreg (%) =

| VR , no load | − | VR , full load | | VR , full load |

× 100%

(17-16)

Efficiency of the line is given by

η=



SR (17-17) SS

jX Medium Line Model.  As the length of the line R IS VS IR VR increases, ignoring the capacitance yields erroneous results. For lines greater than 50 miles and less than IL ½Y ½Y 150 miles, the medium line model is used. In this model, the shunt admittance of the line Y is divided in two equals parts and added to each end of the line. This is called the nominal p model of the line and it is illus- FIGURE 17-7  Medium-length line model. trated in Fig. 17-7. Voltage and current equations for the nominal p medium line model are written as (from KVL and KCL):

VS = I L ( R + jX ) + VR

Y I L = VR   + I R  2

(17-18)

Y I S = I L + VS    2 Substituting IL into the other two equations, we get

 Y  VS =  ( R + jX )  + 1 VR + I R ( R + jX )  2  



 ( R + jX )Y   ( R + jX )Y  IS = Y  1 +  VR +  1 +  I R  2 4

(17-19)

In matrix form, the equations are written as

17_Santoso_Sec17_p1053-1096.indd 1059

 VS   A B   VR  =   I S   C D   I R

  

(17-20)

23/11/17 12:02 PM

1060  SECTION SEVENTEEN

where

   Y  Y  Y  A =   ( R + jX )  + 1 , B =  ( R + jX ), C =  Y  ( R + jX )  + 1 , D =   ( R + jX )  + 1  2   2   4    

Long Line Model.  For transmission lines longer than 150 miles, the medium line model does not yield accurate results. This is because the medium line model considers lumped parameters, whereas the long line model considers distributed parameters. A long transmission line model is shown in Fig. 17-8. The line is divided into several smaller sections of length Dx, where the parameters can be considered lumped. VS IS R∆x Y∆x

jX∆x

I+∆I

R∆x

jX∆x

Y∆x

V+∆V

I

IR

VR

V

FIGURE 17-8  Long line model.

To derive the two port circuit parameters of the long transmission line, let us consider the circuit shown in Fig. 17-8. From the circuit it can be seen that

∆V = I ( R + jX )∆x

(17-21)



∆V = I ( R + jX ) ∆x

(17-22)

∂V = I ( R + jX ) ∂x

(17-23)



∆I = (V + ∆V )Y ∆x

(17-24)



∆I = VY ∆x + Y ∆V ∆x  

(17-25)

As Dx → 0, Similarly from the circuit, we can see that

Neglecting the very small term YDVDx, we get ∆I = VY ∆x

(17-26)

∂I = VY ∂x

(17-27)

∂2 V ∂I = ( R + jX )   2 ∂x dx

(17-28)

As Dx → 0 Taking the derivative of Eq. (17-23) w.r.t. x,

17_Santoso_Sec17_p1053-1096.indd 1060

23/11/17 12:02 PM

POWER SYSTEM ANALYSIS   1061 

Substituting ∂ I / ∂ x from Eq. (17-27) ∂2 V = ( R + jX )VY ∂x 2



(17-29)

Solving the differential equation with the following boundary conditions: V = VR, I = I R at x = 0 and V = VS ,  I = I S at x = l, we can write  VS   A B   VR  =   I S   C D   I R

A = cosh δ l ;



B = ZC sinh δ l ;

C=

  

sinh δ l ; ZC

(17-30) D = cosh δ l

where ZC =



R + jX  Ω; Y

δ = Y ( R + jX )

17.3.3 Transformers Transformers make possible the long-distance transmission of electric power by changing the current and voltage to the appropriate level for each application. Additionally, transformers are used to regulate voltage, perform reactive power control, and limit short-circuit currents. In an electric power system, transformers can be either three-phase units or three single-phase units forming a three-phase bank. Popular transformer connections include Y - Y, D - D, and Y - D. Y connections are frequently grounded. Model of Two-Winding Transformers.  The accepted equivalent circuit for a two-winding transformer operating in steady state is given in Fig. 17-9a. RT and XT are the equivalent resistance and leakage reactance of the transformer. For most power system steady-state studies the small magnetizing current that transformers draw when energized can be neglected. According to the equivalent circuit of the two-winding transformer, the relationship between primary and secondary quantities can be obtained as Ip =



IP

ideal N: 1

Vp − NVs 2

N ( RT + jXT )

XT

RT

=

Vp − NVs 2

N ZT

Is

V  =  Vp − s  c 2YT  c

IP

cYT

(17-31)

Is

ZT VP

Vs

VM

(a)

VP

c(c – 1)YT

(1 – c)YT

Vs

(b)

FIGURE 17-9  Equivalent circuits for two-winding transformers; (a) standard equivalent circuit with ideal transformer; (b) p equivalent circuit. Both consider that the tap can be different than nominal.

17_Santoso_Sec17_p1053-1096.indd 1061

23/11/17 12:02 PM

1062  SECTION SEVENTEEN

Is =



NVs − Vp N ( RT + jXT )

= ( NVs − Vp )

YT  Vs  =  − Vp  cYT  N  c

(17-32)

where Vp and Ip are the primary voltage and current; Vs and Is are the secondary voltage and current, respectively; N is the turns ratio, which is a complex number with magnitude and angle. The magnitude gives the transformation ratio (given by the number of turns) and the angle gives the phase shift due to the connection. To integrate the transformer model into power flow calculations, we revise the equivalent circuit shown in Fig. 17-9a into a π model; see Fig. 17-9b. One can easily see that their output is identical. The analysis above can be directly applied to three-phase transformers. The factor 3 is caused by Y - D connection that can be considered into the parameter N. The phase shift caused by Y - D connection is normally not considered for balanced conditions. For unbalanced operation it becomes essential to consider the phase shift of the different voltage levels explicitly. Model of Three-Winding Transformers.  The equivalent circuit of a three-winding transformer is shown in Fig. 17-10a. To obtain the equivalent impedances of Zp, Zs, and Zt, we need to first calculate Zps, Zpt, and Zst from standard short-circuit tests, Zps is the leakage impedance measured in primary with secondary shorted and tertiary open. Zpt is the leakage impedance measured in primary with tertiary shorted and secondary open. Zst is the leakage impedance measured in secondary with tertiary shorted and primary open. Then the equivalent impedances Zp, Zs, and Zt can be obtained as follows: 1 Z p = ( Z ps + Z pt − Z st ) 2 1 Z s = ( Z ps + Z st − Z pt ) 2



(17-33)

1 Zt = ( Z pt + Z st − Z ps ) 2



Note that frequently one of the impedances is negative. This does not affect steady-state calculations in any. The model is mathematically correct. Through wye-delta transformation, a delta equivalent circuit of three-winding transformers can be obtained; see Fig. 17-10b. The corresponding π model of each terminal can be obtained as same as the two-winding transformer described in the previous subsection. P

Zp

Zt

T

P

T

Zpt Zts

Zs

Zps

S

S

(a)

(b)

FIGURE 17-10  One-line diagram of three-winding transformer; (a) three single-phase transformers in Y connection; (b) equivalent three single-phase transformers in Δ connection.

Model of Phase-Shifting Transformers.  The equivalent circuit of the phase-shifting transformer is illustrated in Fig. 17-11. Note that the turn’s ratio now needs to be a complex number. According to the equivalent circuit, we have

Vp ( I p )∗ = −VM ( I s )∗

(17-34)



Vp = | N | ∠α ⋅VM = | N |(cos α + j sin α )VM = (aT + jbT )VM

(17-35)

17_Santoso_Sec17_p1053-1096.indd 1062

23/11/17 12:02 PM

POWER SYSTEM ANALYSIS   1063 

|N|∠a: 1 YT

P

Is

M

S

FIGURE 17-11 One-line diagram of phase-shifting transformer.

Solving for Ip, Is from the two equations above, yielding ∗



 YT Y 1  IP = −  Is = (VM − Vs ) = 2 T 2 [Vp − (aT + jbT )Vs ] aT − jbT aT + bT  aT + jbT  Is =

YT [(aT + jbT )Vs − Vp ] aT + jbT

(17-36) (17-37)

Because the admittance from primary to secondary is not equal to the admittance from secondary to primary we cannot create a π equivalent circuit for the phase-shifting transformer. 17.3.4 Loads There are several ways to represent a load for power system studies. In this subsection, we will look at some of the common models used by various pieces of software. Constant Load Model.  The most common model used in load flow calculations is constant load model. Loads are represented by constant P and constant Q. This makes the problem nonlinear because Ohm’s law does not apply to constant power loads (in contrast with constant impedance loads). Since the problem is nonlinear sometimes a solution does not exist. To avoid such conditions in a constant PQ model, a cut-off voltage is commonly used. Below this cut-off voltage, the model is converted to constant impedance model to guarantee a solution. Most power electronics loads are constant power loads. Induction motors driving pumps, which account for a vast majority of modern day loads, are also very close to constant power in the working region. Therefore, most power flow software model loads as constant PQ. Constant Impedance Model.  In this method, the load is modeled as constant impedance. It means load is modeled as constant resistance, constant inductance, and constant capacitance. This kind of modeling reduces the circuit to a linear model and can be solved very easily in phasor domain using traditional circuit solvers. Today, very few of the devices are constant impedance devices. Common examples of constant impedance devices are incandescent bulbs and resistive heaters. These devices do not account for a very large proportion of the load demanded today. When performing power flow calculations below rated voltage, constant impedance is not a very wise choice because constant impedance models show a reduction in power. ZIP Coefficients Model.  As mentioned in the above two subsections, most loads are neither constant impedance nor constant power. Rather they are a combination of constant power, constant impedance, and constant current. A load modeled as ZIP coefficients load is written as follows:

  V 2  V  Pi = Po  Z p  i  + I p  i  + Pp   Vo    Vo  

(17-38)



  V 2  V  Qi = Qo  Z q  i  + I q  i  + Pq   Vo    Vo  

(17-39)

17_Santoso_Sec17_p1053-1096.indd 1063

23/11/17 12:02 PM

1064  SECTION SEVENTEEN

where Po , Qo ,and Vo are rated active power, reactive power, and voltage magnitude (not phasor), respectively. Pi , Qi are active and reactive power consumed at operating voltage Vi . Z p , I p ,  Pp are ZIP parameters for the active power, similarly Z q , I q ,  Pq are ZIP parameters for reactive power. As can be seen in the ZIP equation there are three parts: the first part can be seen of as the constant impedance component, the second part can be thought of as constant current component, and the last part is the constant power component. At Vi = Vo the equations becomes

Po = Po ( Z p + I p + Pp ) 

(17-40)



Qo = Qo ( Z q + I q + Pq )

(17-41)



Z p + I p + Pp = 1

(17-42)



Z q + I q + Pq = 1

(17-43)

which implies that

In reference [1], ZIP coefficient for most commonly found loads are tabulated. Since the ZIP model is most appropriate to describe loads, most modern day power flow pieces of software include an option to model loads as ZIP coefficients.

17.4  PER-UNIT SYSTEM In power system studies, voltage, current, and power are often written as dimensionless fraction with respect to a base rather than actual values in volts, amperes, and watts. This is called per-unit system. There are several advantages to such a system, the most obvious advantage of this system is that it immediately provides a reference to the engineer regarding the “health” of the quantity. For example, a transmission level voltage of 100 kV on a 138-kV base system will be written as 0.72 pu (100/138). An engineer uninformed of the working transmission level voltage cannot make a decision whether 100 kV is low, high, or appropriate voltage. On the other hand, if one sees a voltage of 0.72 pu, the conclusion is that this voltage is 28% less than the “normal” value. The per-unit system is very important for the description of voltages because most loads in a power system will not work well if the voltage is below 90% or above 110% of rated. Thus one can very easily see if the operating is not correct when presented in per unit. The same logic is applied to current and power. As one can deduce, the selection of the base quantity with respect to which the per-unit values are written is very important to have a meaningful per-unit value. We shall go over an example later in the section that shows how bases for various quantities are selected. Some of the other advantages of per-unit system are •  Per-unit voltages and currents are the same in line-to-ground and line-to-line calculations. Therefore, the 3 factor is not seen in per-unit system. •  Voltages and currents on either side of transformers are the same in per-unit system, which makes for much easier calculations. •  Calculations are vastly simplified when all values are converted to per-unit system with values around 1 pu. •  Comparison of per-unit impedance across the transformers gives an idea about voltage drop in the transformer. It is difficult to gauge this information from impedance values in ohm. For two identical power rating transformer, the one with a lower per-unit impedance produces lesser voltage drop. •  Per-unit system gives an idea about the relative magnitude of the quantity. In a list where quantities are written in per unit, it is very easy to search for low, high, and appropriate magnitude quantities, regardless of the base.

17_Santoso_Sec17_p1053-1096.indd 1064

23/11/17 12:02 PM

POWER SYSTEM ANALYSIS   1065 

17.4.1  Calculation Formulas The basic formula for all per-unit calculations is this: Quantity pu =



Quantity actual (17-44) Quantity base

From this we derive the following set of equations: Sactual, 3φ

Spu, 3φ =  

Spu, 1φ =



Sactual,1φ Sbase,1φ

=

3  Sactual,1φ 3  Sbase,1φ

Vpu ,  L− L =

=

Sactual,3φ Sbase,3φ

= S pu ,3φ

(17-46)

Vactual,  L−G Vbase ,   L−G

(17-47)

Vactual,  L− L 3 Vactual,  L−G Vactual,  L−G = = = Vpu ,  L−G Vbase ,    L− L 3 Vbase ,   L−G Vbase ,   L−G

(17-48)

Vpu ,  L−G =



(17-45)

Sbase, 3φ

Similarly, it can be shown that I pu ,phase = I pu ,line to line. This simplifies the calculations because the factor of 3 does not exist in a per-unit system. To calculate the base quantities, we start by selecting Vbase and Sbase. As is the norm in power system studies, any voltage quantity is always line-to-line rms voltage unless otherwise mentioned and power is three-phase power. After selecting the appropriate voltage and power bases, we calculate the bases for impedance, admittance, and current in the following manner: Sbase = 3 Vbase I base



(17-49)

Thus, Sbase 3 Vbase

I base =



Z base =



2 Vbase ,L−G Vbase ,L−G Vbase = = Sbase Sbase I base 3Vbase

Ybase =



(17-50)

1 Z base

=

(17-51)

Sbase 2 Vbase

(17-52)

Once we have calculated the appropriate bases we use the following formulas to calculate the per-unit values:

Spu =

Sactual , Sbase

Vpu =

Vactual , Vbase

I pu =

I actual , I base

Z pu =

Z actual , Z base

Ypu =

Yactual Ybase

(17-53)

Reactance and resistance per-unit values are computed from

17_Santoso_Sec17_p1053-1096.indd 1065

X pu =

X actual , Z base

Rpu =

Ractual Z base

(17-54)

23/11/17 12:02 PM

1066  SECTION SEVENTEEN

17.4.2  Converting pu Values from One Base to Another Let us consider that we have voltage, current, and power in old Sbase and Vbase . To convert these per-unit values from old base to per-unit values according to a new base we use the following formulas: Vbase ,old



Vpu ,new = Vpu ,old  



Spu ,new = Spu ,old  

(17-55)

Vbase ,new Sbase ,old Sbase ,new

(17-56)

Thus, I pu ,new = I pu , old  

S  V  I base ,old Sbase ,old 3 ∗Vbase ,new = I pu ,old     = I pu ,old   base ,old    base ,new  I base ,new Sbase ,new 3 ∗Vbase ,old  Sbase ,new   Vbase ,old 

(17-57)

2

Z pu ,new = Z pu ,old  



S  V  Z base ,old V2 S ,new = Z pu ,old   base ,old   base = Z pu ,old   base ,new    base ,old  2 Z base ,new Sbase ,old Vbase ,new  Sbase ,old   Vbase ,new 

(17-58)

Example 17-1.  Convert all the voltages and impedances to per-unit in the following one-line diagram circuit. We start by selecting voltages in each zone. There are three zones as shown in Fig. 17-12. Zones are demarcated by transformers. Sbase is same in all the zones. We select Sbase and Vbase1 arbitrarily. Most power system studies use Sbase as 100 MVA. Sbase = 100 MVA = Sbase1 = Sbase2 = Sbase3



Vbase1 = 13.8 kV



Vbase 2 = Vbase1  



Vbase3 = Vbase2  

1

138 = 144.27 kV 13.2 13.8 = 14.43 kV 138

2

Generator

Xfr-1

X = 15% 13.8 kV 15 MVA

X = 10% 13.2/138 kV 15 MVA

Transmission line

3

Xfr-2

100 + j200 Ω

X = 10% 13.8/138 kV 25 MVA

Load 10 MVA 0.8 pf

FIGURE 17-12  One-line diagram in physical quantities to be converted to per unit.

17_Santoso_Sec17_p1053-1096.indd 1066

23/11/17 12:02 PM

POWER SYSTEM ANALYSIS   1067 

Using formula for Zbase, we get Z base1 =

2 Vbase1 (13.8 × 103 )2 = = 1.90 Ω Sbase1 100 ∗106



Z base 2 =

2 Vbase (144.27 × 103 )2 2 = = 208.13 Ω Sbase 2 100 ∗106



Z base3 =

2 Vbase3 (14.43 × 103 )2 = = 2.08 Ω Sbase3 100 × 106



Z line,pu =

Z line 100 + j 200 = = 0.48 + j 0.96 Z base 2 208.13

Per-unit values are already given for transformers and generators by the manufacturers at their power base. We need to convert them to the system base that we have selected in this problem. For this we use the above equations to get 2

2 S  V   100   13.2    X xfr 1,pu , new = X xfr 1,pu ,old ∗  base ,new    base ,old  = 0.1  = 0.609955 pu    15   13.8   Sbase ,old   Vbase ,new  2

2 S  V   100   13.8  Z xfr 2,pu , new = Z xfr 2,pu ,old ∗  base ,new    base ,old  = 0.1  = 0.365835 pu    25   14.43   Sbase ,old   Vbase ,new  2

2 S  V   100   13.8  ZG ,pu , new = ZG ,pu ,old ∗  base ,new    base ,old  = 0.15  = 1 pu      15   13.8   Sbase ,old   Vbase ,new 

Sload 10 = = 0.1 pu Sbase 100 13.8 = = 1 pu 13.8

Sload,pu =

Vg ,pu



The new circuit in per-unit system looks like the one depicted in Fig. 17-13. j1

j0.6099

0.48 + j0.96

1 pu

j0.3658 0.1 pu, 0.8 pf

FIGURE 17-13  One-line diagram in per-unit system.

17.5  SYMMETRICAL COMPONENTS Symmetrical components method is a way of representing N unbalanced vectors as a sum of N set of balanced vectors. This concept was first introduced by C. L. Fortescue. Symmetrical components are particularly useful in fault analysis, where a balanced system becomes unbalanced due to a singleline-to-ground or a line-to-line fault. The use of symmetrical components will be demonstrated in this subsection using three-phase systems since existing power systems are three phase.

17_Santoso_Sec17_p1053-1096.indd 1067

23/11/17 12:02 PM

1068  SECTION SEVENTEEN

Vb2

Vc1

Va

Va0 = Vb0 = Vc0

Va1

Va2

Vb Vb1

Vc FIGURE 17-14  Unbalanced phasors.

Vc2

FIGURE 17-15  Zero, positive, negative, and sequence component.

In a three-phase system, the three sets of balanced vectors are called positive, negative, and zero sequences. Let us consider a set of unbalanced vectors as shown in Fig. 17-14. There exist three sets of balanced vectors such that adding them up yields the above unbalance system as shown in Fig. 17-15. The three balanced set of vectors are Va1 = V1∠0

Va2 = V2 ∠0

Va0 = V0 ∠0

Vb1 = V1∠240

Vb2 = V2 ∠120

Vb0 = V0 ∠0

Vc1 = V1∠120

Vc 2 = V2 ∠240

Vc0 = V0 ∠0

Adding the balanced set of vectors, we get Va = V1∠0 + V2 ∠0 + V0 ∠0

Vb = V1∠240 + V2 ∠120 + V0 ∠0

(17-59)

Vc = V1∠120 + V2 ∠240 + V0 ∠0 In matrix form, we can write it as



 Va   1 1    2  Vb  =  1 a  V   1 a  c  

1 a a2

  Va 0    Va1  V   a 2

    

(17-60)

where a = 1∠120 is a phasor that when multiplied by another phasor rotates the second by 120°. The above expression can be written in matrix form as Vabc = T  Va012 (17-61)



T is called the symmetrical components transformation matrix. Inversely, we can also say Va012 = T −1Vabc , where T −1 is the inverse symmetrical components transformation matrix given by

 1 1 1 T −1 =  1 a 3 2  1 a

1 a2 a

    

(17-62)

The following relations on “a” are fulfilled: a = 1∠ 120°

17_Santoso_Sec17_p1053-1096.indd 1068

a 2 = 1∠ − 120° = 1∠ 240°

23/11/17 12:02 PM

POWER SYSTEM ANALYSIS   1069 

a∗ = a 2 (a 2 )∗ = a a3 = 1 a4 = a



a + a2 + 1 = 0

(17-63)

a + a 2 = −1 a − a2 = j 3 a2 − a = − j 3 Example 17-2.  Consider the following set of unbalanced vectors: Va = 100∠10 Vb = 100∠ − 80 Vc = 80∠60



Calculate the sequence components and draw them. Solution.  We know that Va012 = T −1Vabc . Using this, we write



 Va 0   Va1  V  a 2

  1 1  1 =  1 a  3  1 a2  

1 a2 a

  Va   52.10∠ − 4.34°      Vb  =  71.81∠3.29°   Vc   30.47 ∠145°   

To help visualize, let us draw the original unbalanced vectors and the set of balanced vectors. Adding the symmetrical components in Fig. 17-17 yields the set of unbalanced vectors shown in Fig. 17-16. Even though in power system studies we only use three sets, there is no limit on number of vectors for this method. Useful Matlab code for generating the transformation matrix of a system of any order is given below.

    Vc Va Vb

FIGURE 17-16  Original unbalanced vectors (not to scale).

function T=TransM(n) % TransM outputs the tranformation matrix for % a set of n vectors. T=ones(n); a=cos(2*pi/n)+1i*sin(2*pi/n); for j=2:n T(2,j)=a^(n+1-j); end for k=2:n for l=3:n T(l,k)=(a^-(k-1)).*T(l-1,k); end end end

17_Santoso_Sec17_p1053-1096.indd 1069

23/11/17 12:02 PM

1070  SECTION SEVENTEEN

Vc1 Va2

Va = 0 Vb = 0 Vc

Va1

Vc2

0

Vb1

Vb2

FIGURE 17-17  Set of symmetrical balanced vectors (not to scale).

17.6  SEQUENCE IMPEDANCES Sequence components are mainly used in fault studies. Even a balanced system becomes unbalanced when a fault other than a three-phase fault occurs, for example, a single-line-to-ground or doubleline with or without ground. It is easier to divide the unbalanced circuit into three different balanced sequence circuits. Converting voltage into sequence components has been discussed above. In this subsection, sequence impedances are discussed. Sequence impedance is discussed for balanced transmission lines and transformers. 17.6.1  Transmission Lines In this subsection, we discuss the case of sequence components for a balanced transmission line. This happens only when the line is continuously transposed. The self-impedance is Zs and mutual impedance is Zm as shown in Fig. 17-18. The voltage current relationship is given by I a z a

b c

a´

s

zs

zm

zs

zm

Ib zm

Ic

 Vaa '      Vbb '  V  cc '

b´ c´

FIGURE 17-18  Transmission line showing the self and mutual inductances.



 V  aa '0 T  Vaa '1   Vaa '2

  Zs    =  Zm   Z   m

Zm Zs Zm

Zm   I a  Zm   Ib Z s   I c 

   (17-64)  

Converting voltage and currents to the sequence components, the equation becomes   Z   s  =  Zm     Zm

Zm Zs Zm

Zm   I a 0   Z m  T  I a1  Z s   I a 2  

    

(17-65)

where T is the symmetrical components transformation matrix. Multiplying both sides by T −1 on the left gives



17_Santoso_Sec17_p1053-1096.indd 1070

 V  aa '0  Vaa '1   Vaa '2

  Zs    = T −1  Zm   Z   m

Zm Zs Zm

Zm   I a 0   Z m  T  I a1  Z s   I a 2  

    

(17-66)

23/11/17 12:02 PM

POWER SYSTEM ANALYSIS   1071 

Simplifying yields



 V  aa′ 0  Vaa′1   Vaa′ 2

  Z + 2Z m   s = 0   0  

0

0

Z s − Zm

0

0

Z s − Zm

  Ia0    I a1    I a 2

    

(17-67)

The diagonal terms of the matrix are the sequence impedances for a balanced transmission line. Z 0 = Z s + 2 Zm

Z1 = Z s − Zm



(17-68)

Z 2 = Z s − Zm 17.6.2 Transformers In the case of three-phase transformers, the sequence circuits depend on the type of connections made at the primary and secondary. We look at five cases: (1) Yg-Yg, both neutrals grounded; (2) Yg-Y only one neutral grounded; (3) Yg-D, Y grounded; (4) Y-Y, ungrounded neutrals; and (4) D - D. In all these cases, the positive and negative sequence impedances are the same as described above. Each connection has a different zero sequence circuit. Y-Y, Both Neutrals Grounded (Yg-Yg).  The voltage equation on the primary side is

VA = VAN + VN

(17-69)

VAN is the primary side voltage across the winding of the ideal transformer. VN is the voltage across the neutral. Converting to sequence components, we have

0 1 2 VA0 + VA1 + VA2 = VAN + VAN + VAN + 3Z1 I A0

(17-70)

where I A0 is zero sequence current on the primary side Z1 is grounding resistance on the primary side. Similarly, on the secondary side

Va0 + Va1 + Va2 = Van0 + Van1 + Van2 − 3Z 2 I a0

(17-71)

where I a0 = zero sequence current on the secondary side. Z2 is grounding resistance on the secondary side. The negative sign in Eq. (17-70) is to account for the direction of the current. Using the transformation ratio, we can write the following relations between primary and secondary voltages and currents:

Van = nVAN ;

Ia =

IA n

(17-72)

n being the turns ratio. Substituting for it in Eq. (17-71), we have

17_Santoso_Sec17_p1053-1096.indd 1071

0 1 2 Va0 + Va1 + Va2 = nVAN + nVAN + nVAN −

3Z 2 I A0 (17-73) n

23/11/17 12:02 PM

1072  SECTION SEVENTEEN

Dividing both sides by n, we get

Va0 + Va1 + Va2 3Z I 0 0 1 2 = VAN + VAN + VAN − 22 A n n

(17-74)

Substituting Eq. (17-70), we can write

Va0 + Va1 + Va2 3Z I 0 = VA0 + VA1 + VA2 − 3Z1 I A0 − 22 A n n

(17-75)

By equating terms of same sequence one can obtain the following expressions:

Va1 = nVA1 ;

Va2 = nVA2

Va0 3Z = VA0 − 3Z1 + 22  I A0 n n  

(17-76)

Z 0 = Z + 3Z1 + 3Z 2′

(17-77)

Therefore,

where Z = leakage impedance Z1 = primary neutral impedance Z 2′ = secondary neutral impedance referred to primary Yg-Y, Only One Neutral Grounded.  In this case, no zero-sequence current can flow as one of the neutral is ungrounded. Therefore, the zero sequence circuit in the case of a Y-Y transformer with only neutral grounded is shown as an open circuit between primary and the secondary. Y-D, Y Grounded.  In this case, the zero sequence current flows only on the Y side. The zeros sequence component in this case is Z0 = 3ZN, where ZN is the grounding impedance. No zerosequence current can flow in the D side. Y-D, Ungrounded Neutral.  If the Y side is not grounded, there can be no zero-sequence current on the Y side. As discussed before, there can be no zero-sequence current in the D side. D - D Transformer.  In this case, there can be no zero-sequence current either on the primary or the secondary sides. Though there can be circulating zero sequence current in the delta winding. A summary of zero-sequence circuits for all different transformer connections is shown in Fig. 17-19.

17.7  POWER FLOW As mentioned in the Introduction, power flow analysis is the most important study necessary to plan and operate the system. The basic idea is to obtain the solution of the electrical circuit (i.e., compute voltage at every node and power flowing in every component, line and transformer) in steady state using the models described in the previous subsections of this section. Different from a typical electrical circuit, the power flow problem is nonlinear because the loads are nonlinear. 17.7.1  Power Flow Problem There exist several formulations of the power flow problem each one with advantages and disadvantages. They all start from the application of Kirchhoff current law (KCL) to all buses (nodes) in the system. Consider the connections to bus k as depicted in Fig. 17-20, where ykm = 1/zkm = gkm + j bkm are

17_Santoso_Sec17_p1053-1096.indd 1072

23/11/17 12:02 PM

POWER SYSTEM ANALYSIS   1073 

Z1g

Z1g

Z0

Zg

Z0

Zg

Z0

Z2g

Z2g

Zg

Zg

Z0

Z0

FIGURE 17-19  Connection of the zero sequence impedance for the most common transformer configurations.

17_Santoso_Sec17_p1053-1096.indd 1073

23/11/17 12:02 PM

1074  SECTION SEVENTEEN

1

2

k

Ik1

yk1

Ik2

yk2

Ikn Ikm n

ykn

Ik

Ikk

ykk

Sk

SGk

m ykm

SLk

G FIGURE 17-20  Connections to bus k.

the positive sequence (series) admittances of the lines connecting to the other buses in the system. The shunt admittances at bus k of all lines have been lumped into admittance ykk. SGk (= PGk + j QGk) is the power generated (or injected) at bus k. SLk (= PLk + j QLk) is the power consumed (or extracted) at bus k; in other words the load. Let Sk = SGk – SLk be the total power injected at bus k, which could be a positive or negative number. n is the total number of buses in the system. Because the solution is obtained by node (rather than by mesh) it is better to use the positive sequence admittances of the lines rather than their impedance zkm. Note that, due to the size of the system, the total number of buses is very large (tenths of thousands), while the number of direct connections to a given bus is very small (a hand full at most). Let us assume that all currents Ikm are in the direction departing from node k (power extractions). Then, the current Ik injected at bus k can be computed using KCL applied to node k as n

I k =  ∑I km =



m=1

n

∑y

m=1 m≠ k

km

(Vk − Vm ) +   y kkVk

(17-78)

where Vk and Vm are the voltages of buses k and m. The first term was obtained from Ohm’s law as I km =   y km (Vk −  Vm ) while the second is the current in the shunt admittances of lines and transformers. By combining elements, Eq. (17-78) can be written as n

I k = ∑y kmVk −



m=1

n

∑y

m=1 m≠ k

Vm

(17-79)

km

The above equation, when applied to all buses in the system, can be written in matrix for using the so-called Ybus matrix as follows:



17_Santoso_Sec17_p1053-1096.indd 1074

         

I1     I2      = Ik        In    

Y11

Y12

Y1k

Y21

Y22

Y2 k

Yk1

Yk 2

Ykk

Yn1

Yn 2

Ynk

Y1n    Y2n     Ykn     Ynn   

V1   V2     Vk     Vn  

(17-80)

23/11/17 12:02 PM

POWER SYSTEM ANALYSIS   1075 

This matrix can be built by inspection. The elements of the main diagonal are the sum of all the admittances directly connected to a given node and the off-diagonal elements are the negative of the admittances between nodes as follows:

n

Ykk = ∑y km ;

Ykm = − y km

m=1

(17-81)

Please note that lower case y is used to represent line/transformer admittances while upper case Y is used to represent the elements of the Ybus matrix. In matrix form, we have

[I ] = [Ybus ][V ]

(17-82)

The Ybus matrix as presented above is ill-conditioned because the connections to ground are weak since only the admittances to ground of lines are considered. To solve the problem a reference (or slack) bus is selected for the solution of the power flow problem. Let us now develop row k of Eq. (17-80):

n

I k =  ∑YkmVm

(17-83)

m=1

Using the definition of complex power in terms of voltage and current, we have

n

Sk∗ =   Pk −   jQk =  Vk∗ I k = Vk∗ ∑YkmVm (17-84) m=1

This equation needs to be solved for all n nodes giving the following set of nonlinear algebraic equations:

n

S1∗ =   P1 −   jQ1 =  V1∗ ∑Y1mVm m=1



n

S2∗ =   P2 −   jQ2 =  V2∗ ∑Y2mVm

(17-85)

m=1



n

Sn∗ =   Pn −   jQn =  Vn∗ ∑YnmVm m=1

The unknowns are the bus voltages (Vi). Once the bus voltages are known, the currents in all lines are computed from Ohm’s law I km =   y km (Vk −  Vm). The power flow is computed from its definition as * S = VI . In contrast with the current, the receiving end and sending end powers are different; the difference is the power consumed (or loss) in the line. Thus for line connecting buses k and m, we have

∗ ∗ Skm =  Vk I km ≠   Smk =  Vm Imk

(17-86)

Note that I km =   − Imk , but Vk ≠  Vm, thus Skm ≠   − Smk. The recommended numerical solution method depends on the type of system (transmission or distribution) and the reactance over resistance ratio of the lines involved. 17.7.2  Bus Types Because of its operation characteristics, buses in a power system are classified into three types: load buses (PQ), generator buses (PV), and slack bus. Most buses in a power system are load buses and contain customer loads. They are called PQ buses because their consumed power SLk = PLk + j QLk

17_Santoso_Sec17_p1053-1096.indd 1075

23/11/17 12:02 PM

1076  SECTION SEVENTEEN

is known. Some may even contain generation, but this generation is either not sufficient to supply all the load or it is operated in a way that the generators behave as negative loads (positive injected Sk). Regardless of whether SGk is larger, equal or smaller than SLk they are mathematically treated the same. For these buses the unknowns are the voltage magnitudes and angles. Buses containing generators are called PV buses because in addition to an active power (P) injection, the generator is operated in a way that the voltage magnitude (V) is controlled to a specified value. The unknown variables are the voltage angle (j) and the reactive power (Q). The voltage is controlled by varying the reactive power injection. Frequently, during the process of controlling voltage, the limits of reactive power are exceeded and the PV bus is operated, from that point on, as a PQ bus with fixed reactive power generation. Under those conditions, voltage control is not possible any longer. Typically one generator bus (the largest), but sometimes more are needed, is designated as a slack bus. The slack bus specifies the reference angle and voltage magnitude. The slack generator, in addition to providing a reference to the system of equations, supplies the losses in the system and does not participate in the solution of the set of equations. The system order is reduced to n − 1 for a solution containing only one slack bus (or n − nsb for nsb slack buses). Voltage magnitude and angle are considered known and the power injected (active and reactive) is computed after the solution is obtained. For multislack bus solutions a rule needs to be established on how to share the system losses; sharing by generator rating is recommended. 17.7.3  Transmission Systems There is a gamut of solution methods for the power flow equations for transmission systems. Here only the most commonly used methods will be described. Gauss Seidel.  Historically, Gauss-Seidel was the first method used for the solution of the power flow equations. For this method, it is best to use the complex form given in Eq. (17-85) for n − 1 buses. Let us develop the sum corresponding to the k row as k −1

Sk∗ =  Vk∗ ∑YkmVm   +  Vk∗Ykk  Vk +  Vk∗



m=1

n−1

∑Y

m= k +1

Vm (17-87)

km

Solving for Vk we have:  Vk = −



1 k−1 1 n−1 S∗ YkmVm + k ∗ − ∑ ∑ YkmVm Ykk m=1 YkkVk Ykk m=k+1

(17-88)

Starting from a suitable initial guess Vk(0)   ∀   k, Eq. (17-88) can be solved iteratively as follows:

Vk( j +1) =   −  

Sk∗ 1 k−1 1 n−1 YkmVm( j +1) + −  ∑ ∑ YkmVm( j ) ; ∗( j ) YkkVk Ykk m= k +1 Ykk m=1

k = 1, 2,…, n − 1

(17-89)

If a better initial condition is not known, a flat start is used (all voltage magnitudes equal to 1.0 pu and zero angle): Vk(0) = 1 + j 0  ∀   k . Frequently, power flow solutions are obtained in sequence, thus the last converged values are a good start for the next case when the conditions are similar. The stopping criterion for all power flow solution methods is the nodal power mismatch, that is, the difference between the power injected at every bus and the power flowing in the lines. Power mismatches are computed as

n

∗ ∆Sk =   Sk −  Vk ∑Ykm Vm∗

(17-90)

m=1

In this way, even when the numerical solution is approximate, the solution is accurate because balance of power is used as the converge criterion. Relative or absolute power mismatches can be used. The former gives equal weight for each node, while the latter gives more weight to the larger loads and generators.

17_Santoso_Sec17_p1053-1096.indd 1076

23/11/17 12:02 PM

POWER SYSTEM ANALYSIS   1077 

The Gauss-Seidel method has a robust convergence when the diagonal elements (Ykk) of Ybus are dominant. This happens for strongly meshed systems with solid ground connections. The GaussSeidel method is very easy to program. Additionally, in each equation there are only a few nonzero elements, which makes it very efficient. On the negative side it has only a linear convergence characteristic and the number of iterations (and simulation time) increase with the size of the system. Divergence is not very frequent, but it happens when the system is weakly meshed. Acceleration factors are successfully used as follows:



 1 k−1  Sk∗ 1 n−1 ∆Vk =  −   ∑YkmVm( j +1) + −  ∑ YkmVm( j )  − Vk( j ) ∗( j ) YkkVk Ykk m= k +1  Ykk m=1

(17-91)



Vk( j +1) =  Vk( j ) + α∆Vk

(17-92)

where the acceleration factor a is a number between 1 and 2. Frequently a = 1.6 is selected for the solution of the power flow. Newton Raphson.  The Gauss-Seidel method has problems converging when the system is relatively weak (radial systems). It also takes a large number of iterations when the system is large. For these systems, the Newton-Raphson method can be used to solve the set of Eq. (17-85). It is better to separate the real and imaginary parts. For this we use Euler’s formula V = V e jθ = V (cosθ + j sinθ )

 n−1 ∗ ∗  Pk = Re[Vk I k∗ ] = Re Vk ∑Ykm Vm  = Vk  m=1 

∑Y

 n−1 ∗ ∗  Qk = Im[Vk I k∗ ] = Im Vk ∑Ykm Vm  = Vk  m=1 

∑Y

n −1

m=1

km

Vm cos(θ k − θ m − φkm )

(17-93)

Vm sin(θ k − θ m − φkm )

(17-94)

and

n −1

m=1

km

where θk and θm are the angles of the bus voltages and φkm is the angle of the line impedance given by

 X  φkm = arctan  − km   Rkm 

(17-95)

The Newton-Rapson (NR) method is derived from the expansion of a nonlinear equation f (x) = 0 in Taylor series around an initial point and chopping the series at the second term as follows:

 df ( x (0) )  (0) f ( x (0) + ∆x (0) ) ≈ f ( x (0) ) +  ∆x ≈ 0  dx 

(17-96)

From where we get

 df ( x (0) )  ∆x (0) ≈ −   dx 

−1

f ( x (0) )

(17-97)

A value closer to the solution is computed as follows:

17_Santoso_Sec17_p1053-1096.indd 1077

 df ( x (0) )  x (1) = x (0) + ∆ x (0) = x (0) −   dx 

−1

f ( x (0) )

(17-98)

23/11/17 12:02 PM

1078  SECTION SEVENTEEN

For N equations the NR method becomes



 df  f1 ( x (0) ) +  1   dx1 

(0)

 df  f 2 ( x (0) ) +  2   dx1 

(0)

 df  ∆x1 +  1   dx 2 

(0)

 df  ∆x1 +  2   dx 2 

(0)

 df  ∆x 2 + … +  1   dx N 

(0)

 df  ∆x 2 + … +  2   dx N 

(0)

∆x N ≈ 0 ∆x N ≈ 0

(17-99)

  df  f N ( x (0) ) +  N   dx 

(0)

 df  ∆x1 +  N   dx  2

1

(0)

 df  ∆x 2 + … +  N   dx N 

(0)

∆x N ≈ 0

which can be written in matrix form as         



 df1   dx  1

(0)

 df1   dx  2

  df N   dx  1

(0)

(0)

  df N   dx  2

(0)

…  …

 df1   dx  N

(0)

  df N   dx  N

(0)

   ∆x1   f1 ( x (0) )    (0)    ∆x 2   f 2 ( x )  (17-100)   = −           f ( x (0) )   ∆x N  N  

or

[ J ]∆x = − f ( x (0) )

(17-101)

When applied to the following power flow equations for Pk and Qk n−1

fpk = ∑ Vk Yik Vm cos(θ k − θ m − φkm ) − Pk = 0



for  k = 1,2,…, n − 1

m=1 n−1

fqk = ∑ Vk Yik Vm sin(θ k − θ m − φkm ) − Qk = 0 m=1

(17-102)

for  k = 1,2,…, n − n pv − 1

we get          

dfp1 dθ  1

(0)

 dfqn−1  dθ  1

17_Santoso_Sec17_p1053-1096.indd 1078

dfp1 dθ  2

(0)

 (0)

dfqn−1  dθ  2

 dfp  1 …   d Vn−1  

(0)

(0)



 dfq  …  n−1  d Vn−1 

(0)

  (0)   ∆θ1   ∆θ (0) 2     (0)   ∆ Vn−npv −1  

  fp ( x (0) )   P1  1      (0)  P  fp )  2   2 (x = − −               Qn−  1   fqn−1 ( x (0) )      

(17-103)

23/11/17 12:02 PM

POWER SYSTEM ANALYSIS   1079 

where

x = [θ1 θ 2  θ n−1 | V1 | | V2 |  | Vn−npv −1 |]T (17-104)

The above equation can be written in matrix notation as follows:



      

∂ fp ∂θ ∂ fp ∂θ

∂ fq    ∆θ ∂ V   ∂ fq   ∆V ∂ V  

  P − fp   =   Q − fq  

  ∆P   =   ∆Q  

   

(17-105)

which is frequently written as

 H   J

N   ∆θ   ∆P  =   L   ∆ V   ∆Q   

(17-106)

Submatrix [H] is of rank n − 1 × n − 1. Submatrix [L] is of rank n − npv − 1 × n − npv − 1, where n is the total number of buses, and npv is the number of generator (PV) buses. Remember that we need one bus to be the slack and thus the base rank is n − 1. There exist analytical expressions for the terms in Eq. (17-105). Perhaps the easier to program are those published in the book by El-Hawary [2]. Here is the Matlab code to efficiently build the Jacobian matrix. function [Jaco] = JACO(G,B,P,Q,N,NG,NL,vm,an,e,f) % JACOBIAN according to El-Hawary pp. 328 - 334 % formed and calculated sparse N1 = N - 1 ; a = sparse(N1,N1) ; b = sparse(N1,N1) ; H = sparse(N1,N1) ; N = sparse(N1,NL) ; J = sparse(NL,N1) ; L = sparse(NL,NL) ; for i = 2 : N i1 = i - 1 ; inx = find(B(i,:)) ; ns = size(inx,1) ; for k = 1 : ns j = inx(k) ; if j > 1 j1 = j - 1 ; j2 = j - NG ; if i == j H(i1,j1) = - Q(i) - B(i,i) * vm(i)^2 ; if j > NG N(i1,j2) = P(i) + G(i,i) * vm(i)^2 ; end else a(i,j) = G(i,j) * e(j) - B(i,j) * f(j) ; b(i,j) = G(i,j) * f(j) + B(i,j) * e(j) ; H(i1,j1) = a(i,j) * f(i) - b(i,j) * e(i) ;

17_Santoso_Sec17_p1053-1096.indd 1079

23/11/17 12:02 PM

1080  SECTION SEVENTEEN

if j > NG N(i1,j2) = a(i,j) * e(i) + b(i,j) * f(i) ; end end if i > NG j3 = j - NG ; i2 = i - NG ; if i == j J(i2,j1) = P(i) - G(i,i) * vm(i)^2 ; if j > NG L(i2,j3) = Q(i) - B(i,i) * vm(i)^2 ; end else J(i2,j1) = - ( a(i,j) * e(i) + b(i,j) * f(i) ); if j > NG L(i2,j3) = a(i,j) * f(i) - b(i,j) * e(i) ; end end end end end end Jaco = [ H

N J

L ] ;

In the above Matlab code and the rest of the subsection we have separated Ykm in its real (conductance) and imaginary (susceptance) components as follows: Ykm = Gkm + jBkm



(17-107)

The Newton-Raphson power flow algorithm is as follows: Step 1. Establish an initial guess  θ (0)  (0)  V 



  θ (0) = k   Vk(0)  

   

(17-108)

If there is no better information, then use the flat start θ k = 0 &  Vk = 1.0  ∀k. Step 2. Compute the power mismatch n −1

∆Pk = Pk − ∑ Vk Ykm Vm cos(θ k − θ m + φik )

for  k = 1,2,…, n − 1

m=1



n−1

∆Qk = Qk − ∑ Vk Ykm Vm sin(θ k − θ m + φik ) m=1

  (17-109) for  k = 1,2,…, n − n pv − 1

Step 3. Test convergence: Is power mismatch smaller than a tolerance? Step 4. Compute (or update) the Jacobian matrix. Step 5. Solve the following equation:

17_Santoso_Sec17_p1053-1096.indd 1080

 H   J

N   ∆θ   ∆P  =   L   ∆ V   ∆Q   

(17-110)

23/11/17 12:02 PM

POWER SYSTEM ANALYSIS   1081 

Step 6. Add the previous value and the error

 θ ( j +1)  ( j +1)  | V |

  θ ( j) = ( j)   | V |

  ∆θ ( j ) + ( j)   ∆ | V |

  

(17-111)

Repeat steps 2 to 6 until convergence is obtained. Fast Decoupled.  It is well known to electric power engineers that the flow of active power (P) is strongly coupled to bus angle differences (θkm) and that reactive power (Q) flow is strongly coupled to bus voltage magnitude differences |Vkm|. The same physical phenomenon happens to the Newton power flow equations and the effect of submatrices [N] and [J] of the Jacobian matrix is much smaller than [H] and [L]. Therefore, a decoupled form, neglecting [N] and [J] is possible. An even better method was developed by Stott and Alsaç under the name of Fast Decoupled Load Flow (FDLF) [3]. A series of physically founded simplifications and assumptions are made to produce a very efficient algorithm. None of the simplifications affects the accuracy of the method because the convergence criterion is still the balance of power at every bus. The assumptions of the FDLF include the angle difference between buses is small and line conductance is much smaller than its susceptance. This is mathematically expressed as follows:



cos(θ km ) ≈ 1 Gkm sin(θ km )  Bkm



(17-112)

2 k

Qk  BkkV

The above assumptions are substituted in [H] and [L] to obtain the following FDLF equations:



 ∆P  = [B ][∆θ ] ′  V   ∆Q  = [B ][∆V ] ′′  V 

(17-113)

Matrices [B′] and [B″] have the same structure as [H] and [L] of the Newton power flow, but contain only network admittances. Therefore, they are constant and can be factorized in LU factors only once at the beginning of the calculation. DC Power Flow.  The dc power flow is a method used to solve ac power flow with real number calculations only as we do with a dc circuit, form where the name derived. For robust power systems one can assume that the voltage magnitudes are all equal to 1.0 per unit. Therefore, reactive power does not circulate. Also one can assume that in all transmission lines and transformers Rkm = i ) % compute elements of [U] by column for k = 1 : i-1 sum = sum + y(i,k) * y(k,j) ; end y(i,j) = y(i,j) - sum ; else % compute elements of [L] by row for k = 1 : j-1 sum = sum + y(i,k) * y(k,j) ; end y(i,j) = y(i,j) - sum ; y(i,j) = y(i,j) / y(j,j) ; end end end

The voltages of all buses during the short circuit are computed by forward and backward substitutions. Let us substitute [X] = [U][V] in [L][U][V] = [I] to get

[L][ X ] = [I ] (17-155)

Expanding the last equation, we get



 l11   l21     lk−1,1  l  k+1,1     ln1

0

0



l22

0



lk−1,2

lk−1,3 

lk+1,2

lk+1,3 

ln 2

ln 3



0   X1   1/Zsc1   0   X 2   1/Zsc2              0   X k−1  =  1/Zsck−1      0   X k+1   0               lnn   Xn   0 

(17-156)

which can be easily solved with the following simple forward substitutions: X1 = (1/Zsc1 )/l11 X 2 = (1/Zsc2 − l21 X1 )/l22 



17_Santoso_Sec17_p1053-1096.indd 1093

k −1  1  X k−1 =  − ∑lkj X j  /lk−1,k−1  Zsck−1 j =1 

(17-157)

23/11/17 12:03 PM

1094  SECTION SEVENTEEN

 k+1  X k+1 =  − ∑lkj X j  /lk +1,k +1  j =1    n  Xn =  − ∑lkj X j  /lnn  j =1  Finally, [X] = [U ][V ] is expanded as



          

1 u12

u13 

u1n

0

1

u23 

u2n

 0

0

0

 uk−1,n

0

0

0

 uk+1,n

 0

0

0



1

          

 V1   X1  V   X   2   2        V  =  X   k−1   k−1   Vk+1   X k+1             V   X  n n

(17-158)

The solution for [V] can be obtained with backward substitutions as Vn = Xn Vn−1 = Xn−1 − un−1 Xn Vn− 2 = Xn− 2 − un− 2,n−1 Xn−1 − un− 2,n Xn





Vk−1 = X k−1 −

n

∑u

j = k +1

kj

(17-159)

Xj

 n

V1 = X1 − ∑u1 j X j j=2

Now that when all bus voltages are known, we can compute the short-circuit currents in all branches from Ohm’s law. In particular, for the branches connected to bus k, we write

  I km = y km (Vk − Vm )

(17-160)

The total short-circuit current at bus k is computed as

n

Isck =  ∑I km

(17-161)

m=1

The above solution works very well when the short circuit currents for a given faulted bus are needed. If all (or many) buses need to be studied for short-circuit currents, as is frequency the case, the procedure needs to be repeated for each new calculation. Different rows and columns would be eliminated from Ybus and therefore the computation time would be large. Repeated refactorization can be avoided by recognizing that the circuit is linear and therefore the principle of superposition applies.

17_Santoso_Sec17_p1053-1096.indd 1094

23/11/17 12:03 PM

POWER SYSTEM ANALYSIS   1095 

When unbalanced faults are to be analyzed, the process of inverting the admittance matrices by column is repeated only for the zero sequence bus impedance matrix. The negative sequence bus impedance matrix is the same as the positive sequence bus matrix. Note that there are two particularities for the zero sequence bus impedance matrix that need to be considered: 1. The mutual coupling of lines sharing the same right of way. This is not necessary for the positive sequence, but it is important for the zero sequence impedance since the zero sequence currents in all three phases are the same. This complicates the calculation of the Ybus matrix that no longer can be computed by inspection. The impedance matrix of the mutually coupled lines needs to be obtained first. Then this (small) matrix is inverted and incorporated into the Ybus matrix. 2. The grounding connection of transformers, Y - Y, Y - D, etc., as described above, changes the connection of the zero sequence impedances. Sections of the circuit become disconnected from each other every time that we have an ungrounded transformer. Therefore the zero sequence bus admittance matrix Ybus0 is diagonal by blocks, which makes the calculation of it inverse very convenient and efficient. This frequently results in a smaller zero sequence fault impedance in comparison with the positive (or negative) sequence impedance and the fault currents are larger than for a three-phase fault. Example 17-5.  The IEEE/PES (Power and Energy Society), in addition to publishing power flow case studies, has also published systems to test faults. The link is the same: https://ewh.ieee.org/soc/ pes/dsacom/testfeeders/. Here we present a case study with the academic version of ASPEN http:// www.aspeninc.com. ASPEN is perhaps the most advanced commercially available program for the study of short circuits in power systems, including breaker rating, a protection relay settings. Figure 17-31 shows a circuit as drawn in ASPEN for the study of short circuit. Two faults are presented: three-phase (LLL) and single-line-to-ground (SLG). The positive, negative and zero sequence impedances of all components are given in Tables 17-3 and 17-4. The resulting current contributions Bus4 33.kV 10 0.328@179 6452@89 ← → 1871@90

Y Bus1 132.kV 4 0.122@177 12@165

8323@91

Y

0.00@0

Y ← 468@90

87@77 →

→ 88@103

82@96 ←

→51@96

397@89 → 729@88 ← Bus5 132.kV 6 0.130@177

← 729@92

80@98 ←

729@92 Bus7 132.kV 8 0.111@178

Bus2 132.kV 2 0.010@179 86@85 → 57@85 → 64@89

Bus6 13.8kV 11 0.000@0 0@0

8@171 ← 80@82

78@87 Bus3 132.kV 5 0.006@177

FIGURE 17-31  Circuit for the study of short circuits.

17_Santoso_Sec17_p1053-1096.indd 1095

23/11/17 12:03 PM

1096  SECTION SEVENTEEN

TABLE 17-3  Impedance Values From bus

To bus

1 2 2 5 1 5

2 3 5 7 2 4

Element Line Line Line Line Line Transformer

R0

X0

R1

X1

B0

B1

0.256 0.010 0.409 0.005 0.256 0

1.693 0.061 2.747 0.034 1.693 0.556

0.095 0.004 0.153 0.002 0.095 0

0.346 0.014 0.534 0.007 0.346 0.556

0.023 0.001 0.037 0.000 0.023 —

0.062 0.002 0.103 0.001 0.062 —

TABLE 17-4  Three-Winding Transformer Impedance Values Bus 1

Bus 2

Bus 3

Xps1

Xpt1

Xst1

Xps0

Xpt0

Xst0

5

4

6

0.318

0.416

0.318

0.318

0.416

0.318

TABLE 17-5  Short Circuit Results Fault type LLL SLG

Phase A (A)

Phase B (A)

Phase C (A)

Positive seq. (A)

Negative seq. (A)

Zero seq. (A)

8210 ∠−90.7 8322 ∠−90.9

8210 ∠−149.7 0

8210 ∠−29.3 0

8210 ∠−90.7 2773.4 ∠−90.9

0

0

2773.4 ∠−90.9

2773.4 ∠−90.9

are given in the diagram for the SLG fault. Table 17-5 shows the phase and sequence fault currents for both cases. Note that because the faulted bus has ungrounded transformers in the path from the sources, the short-circuit current for the SLG fault is slightly larger than that for the LLL fault.

17.9 REFERENCES 1. Bokhari, A., Alkan, A., Dogan, R., Diaz Aguiló, M., de León, F., Czarkowski, D., Zabar, Z., Birenbaum, L., Noel, A., and Uosef, R. E., “Experimental Determination of the ZIP Coefficients for Modern Residential, Commercial and Industrial Loads,” IEEE Transactions on Power Delivery, vol. 29, no. 3, pp. 1372–1381, Jun. 2014. 2.  El-Hawary, Mohamed E., Electrical Power Systems: Design and Analysis, Wiley-IEEE Press, 1995. 3. Stott, B., and Alsaç, O., “Fast Decoupled Load Flow,” IEEE Transactions on Power Apparatus and Systems, vol. PAS-93, no. 3, pp. 859–869, May 1974. 4. Bam, L., and Jewell, W., “Review: Power System Analysis Software Tools,” IEEE 2005 Power Engineering Society General Meeting.

17_Santoso_Sec17_p1053-1096.indd 1096

23/11/17 12:03 PM

18

POWER SYSTEM OPERATIONS Hong Chen Senior Lead Engineer, PJM Interconnection, United States

Jianwei Liu Senior Lead Engineer, PJM Interconnection, United States

Jay Giri Director, GE Grid Software Solutions, United States

Simon Tam Manager of Transmission Operations, PJM Interconnection, United States

Mike Bryson Vice President of Operations, PJM Interconnection, United States

Patrick Panciatici Scientific Advisor, RTE France, France

Federico Milano Professor, University College Dublin, Ireland

Jian Zhou Director, East China Grid, China

Simon Bartlett Professor, University of Queensland, Australia

S. K. Soonee Adviser, POSOCO, India 1097

18_Santoso_Sec18_p1097-1168.indd 1097

23/11/17 10:53 AM

1098  SECTION EIGHTEEN

S. R. Narasimhan Additional General Manager, POSOCO, India

S. C. Saxena Deputy General Manager, POSOCO, India

K. V. N. Pawan Kumar Senior Engineer, POSOCO, India



18.1 OVERVIEW. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1099 18.2 POWER BALANCE AND FREQUENCY CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1099 18.2.1 Power Balance Fundamental. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1099 18.2.2 Forecasting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1100 18.2.3 Reserves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1101 18.2.4 Generation Scheduling and Dispatch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1103 18.2.5 Area Control Error and Control Performance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1105 18.2.6 Frequency Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1106 18.2.7 Impact of Intermittent Renewable Resources on Frequency Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1106 18.3 TRANSMISSION OPERATION AND SECURITY. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1107 18.3.1 Security Criteria. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1107 18.3.2 Facility Thermal Limitation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1107 18.3.3 System Stability Limitation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1108 18.3.4 Voltage Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1108 18.3.5 Maintain Network Security. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1109 18.3.6 Impact of Intermittent Renewable Resources on Transmission Security. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1109 18.3.7 References. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1110 18.4 ENERGY MANAGEMENT SYSTEM. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1110 18.4.1 Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1110 18.4.2 EMS Subsystems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1111 18.4.3 Dispatcher Training Simulator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1116 18.4.4 Recent EMS Trends. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1117 18.4.5 Next Generation EMS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1117 18.4.6 Proactive Grid Management. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1120 18.4.7 Summary. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1120 18.4.8 Acknowledgments. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1122 18.4.9 Further Reading. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1122 18.5 OUTAGE SCHEDULING IN ISO SYSTEMS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1123 18.5.1 General Principles. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1123 18.5.2 Scheduling Transmission Outage Requests. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1123 18.5.3 Processing Transmission Outage Requests. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1124 18.6 IMPACT OF REGULATORY ISSUES ON POWER SYSTEM OPERATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1125 18.7 INTERNATIONAL EXPERIENCES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1128 18.7.1 Power System Operation Practices in European Countries. . . . . . . . . 1128 18.7.2 Power System Operation Practices in China. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1145 18.7.3 Power System Operation Practices in Australia. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1150 18.7.4 Power System Operation Practices in India . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1160

18_Santoso_Sec18_p1097-1168.indd 1098

23/11/17 10:53 AM

Power System Operations   1099 

18.1 OVERVIEW BY HONG CHEN The major components of power systems are generation resources, demand resources or load, connected by transmission and distribution facilities. A power system is considered as the largest machine (or control system) in the world [1]. Power systems are normally interconnected to reduce total generation requirements and production cost, and enhance reliability. Frequency and voltage are the two most important parameters of an interconnected power system. They are maintained at prescribed nominal ranges for stable system operations and equipment safety. Section 18.2 reviews the fundamentals of power balance and frequency control. The ultimate objective of power system operation is to keep the lights on. Power system operation is guided by the basic circuit theory: Ohm’s and Kirchhoff’s Laws. All facilities have physical limitations. As a control system, power system also has its dynamic characteristics and constraints. Section 18.3 discusses transmission operation and security. Energy management system (EMS) is an important tool to assist power system operation, in terms of monitoring, control, and analysis. The details are covered in Sec. 18.4. Because of the significant amount of equipment in operation simultaneously, regular maintenance is required. Outage scheduling is critical to system operation planning. The general practices in Independent System Operator (ISO) systems are discussed in Sec. 18.5. Regulatory issues are another leading forces on market and system operation. Their impact on system operation is examined in Sec. 18.6. Different regions have different operation practices. Operation experiences in Europe, China, Australia, and India are covered in Secs. 18.7.1, 18.7.2, 18.7.3, and 18.7.4, respectively.

18.2  POWER BALANCE AND FREQUENCY CONTROL BY HONG CHEN AND JIANWEI LIU The common practices of ensuring power balance are presented in the following sequence: power balance fundamental, forecasting, reserves, generation scheduling and dispatch, and frequency control. 18.2.1  Power Balance Fundamental Electricity demand or load is constantly changing in the system, every hour, every minute, and every second. It is significantly impacted by weather conditions and pattern of human activities. At current stage, it is still challenging to store electricity on a large scale. Due to limited energy storage devices, generation has to be balanced with demand at all times, which is a moving target. Since the generation is largely based on synchronous machines, if the total generation in the system is not balanced with the total system demand, system frequency changes. If generation is higher than demand, frequency increases; if generation is less than demand, frequency decreases, as shown in Fig. 18-1. The nominal frequency in North America is 60 Hz. In other parts of the world, frequency is maintained at 50 Hz. For interconnected power systems, the interchanges with neighboring systems are also important components in keeping power balance. Some of the transactions can be scheduled ahead of time based on the specified rules. Therefore, power balance equation can be expressed by Eq. (18-1):

Total Generation = Total Demand + Total Loss + Net Interchange

(18-1)

where Total Loss is the energy lost in the system equipment; and Net Interchange is the net flow out of the interconnected system, and equals the difference between total Exports and total Imports.

18_Santoso_Sec18_p1097-1168.indd 1099

23/11/17 10:53 AM

62

58

60

61

Exports

59

1100  SECTION EIGHTEEN

Imports

Losses Load

Power generated

Demand

Generation

FIGURE 18-1  Power balance and frequency impact.

18.2.2 Forecasting Load Forecast.  Electricity load varies during the day and with seasons. The main load types are industry load, commercial load, lighting, residential load, etc. Each load type has unique characteristics. Typical load patterns exist in most systems. For example, in the Northeast of United States, during winter time, heating and lighting load determines the morning and evening peaks; during summer time, air conditioning determines the summer peak load. Short-term load forecast (STLF) is critical to schedule and dispatch generation to maintain power balance. Many factors can impact load, therefore, they are accounted for in STLF. Main impacting factors are time, temperature, humidity, cloud covering, special social events, such as holidays or weekends. With electricity market in place and demand responses, electricity price also becomes an impacting factor. When scheduling generation 1 day to 1 week ahead, load is normally forecasted hourly for 24 hours or 168 hours ahead of time. When dispatching generation in real time, very short-term load forecast (VSTLF) is used to forecast load every 5 minutes for 1 to 3 hours ahead. The main forecasting methods used in industry are similar days methods according to season, day of work, and weather effects, time series methods such as autoregressive moving average (ARMA) and autoregressive integrated moving average (ARIMA), artificial neural network (ANN), fuzzy logic, and hybrid method. The correlation of load to temperature, humidity, light intensity, wind speed, and actual weather conditions is analyzed based on historical data. Interchange Forecast.  Unscheduled interchange (or loop flows) could occur from time to time, due to contract path scheduling practices. Interchanges are volatile and are significantly impacted by market dynamics. The uncertainty of interchanges poses challenge to balancing operation, and becomes one of the primary uncertainties faced by system operators today. Efforts have been started to forecast them, using ARIMA, ANN, random forecast, support vector regression (SVR), Bayesian model aggregation (BMA), with the potential to include weather and price information of neighboring control areas as impacting factors. Wind Power Forecast and Solar Power Forecast.  Unlike conventional power plants, wind power and solar power are very volatile and intermittent, therefore, not often dispatchable. Their outputs are often forecasted by system operators for generation scheduling and dispatch, as well as by

18_Santoso_Sec18_p1097-1168.indd 1100

23/11/17 10:53 AM

Power System Operations   1101 

plant owners for power trading. With increased penetration of wind and solar, their output forecast becomes very important to the overall system operation. Wind power output is a function of wind speed, and solar power output depends on the incoming radiation and on the solar panel characteristics, with seasonal variations and daily cycles. Both wind power and solar power are highly volatile and uncertain, therefore, hard to forecast. For short-term forecast up to 4 to 6 hours ahead, naïve methods based on the last measured values are often used as the reference methods. Advanced approaches use the predictions of meteorological variables as inputs: physical approach based on plant model characteristics and statistical approach capturing the relationship between meteorological predictions and power output, relying primarily on past data to “train” models. In practice, the physical approach and the statistical approach can be blended. More comprehensive stochastic learning techniques through master optimization process (MOP) have also gained attention. 18.2.3 Reserves There exist volatility and uncertainties on both generation and load sides. Generator tripping and sudden load increases cause the frequency to spike low while sudden large load decreases cause the frequency to spike high. To mitigate the associated power imbalance, reserves are needed in the system to control normal frequency deviation and to survive large disturbances. Reserves are the flexible unused available real power response capacity hold to ensure continuous match between generation and load during normal conditions and effectively respond to sudden system changes, such as loss of generation, sudden load changes, etc. Reserves are critical to maintain system reliability. Reserves are secured across multiple timescales to respond to different events. Terminologies and rules vary in different systems, but they all share some fundamental characteristics. In general, some reserve types are for nonevent continuous needs; and others are for contingency events (e.g., loss of generator or facility tripping) or longer timescale events (e.g., load ramps and forecast errors). They are further categorized based on response time, online/offline status and physical capabilities. In North America, according to North America Electric Reliability Corporation (NERC), operating reserves are defined as “that capability above firm system demand required to provide for regulation, load forecast error, equipment forced and scheduled outages, and local area protection. It consists of spinning and non-spinning reserve [2].” Reserves are often categorized as 30 minutes supplemental reserve, 10 minutes non-spinning reserve, 10 minutes spinning reserve and regulating reserve, etc. Operating reserves often refer to the generation available within 30 minutes from online or offline reserve resources. Figure 18-2 shows the general operating reserve categories. Regulating Reserves.  Regulating reserves are often procured in both upward and downward directions to respond to normal load changes, that is, short-term load deviations that may cause the

Operating reserve (T ≤ 30 min)

Regulating reserve (AGC)

Contingency reserve (T ≤ 10 min) Synchronous reserve (on-line)

Non-synchronous reserve (off-line)

Supplemental reserve (10 min ≤ T ≤ 30 min)

FIGURE 18-2  Operating reserve categories.

18_Santoso_Sec18_p1097-1168.indd 1101

23/11/17 10:53 AM

1102  SECTION EIGHTEEN

system to operate above or below normal frequency, e.g., 60 Hz in North America. With regulating reserves, the performance of power systems can be better controlled to provide minute-to-minute system power balance by adjusting power output of generating units connected to automatic generation control (AGC) system. They are the reserves responsive to AGC command and only carried in regulating resources. The details of AGC are covered in Sec. 18.4.2.2. Regulating resources are fast responding resources, having specific telecommunication, control and response capabilities to increase or decrease their output in response to a regulating control signal to control for frequency deviation. In many systems, regulating resources are required to respond to regulating signals within 4 seconds, and must increase or decrease their outputs at their ramp capability rates. In some systems, regulating resources are further divided into two types: one for traditional regulating resources, such as steam units and hydro units, which move relatively slow and can sustain for a long time; one for fast response resources, such as battery resources, which can move very fast but cannot sustain due to limited energy storage for short-term energy storage resources. The fast and slow types of regulating resources often receive different regulation signals, and are paid differently as well based on mileage and performance [3]. Contingency Reserves.  Contingency reserves are used for the loss of supply, e.g., generation losses. NERC refers to contingency reserves as on/off-line reserves available within 15 minutes. Some systems require response within 10 minutes. The severity of the event determines how quickly the reserves have to be picked up. Spinning or synchronous reserves are unused synchronized capacity and interruptible load, which is automatically controlled and made available within a given period of time, e.g., 10 minutes in most of the systems in North America. Synchronous reserves can be provided by on-line generators, synchronous condensers, load of pumped hydro resources, and interruptible load. Non-spinning or non-synchronous reserves are real power capability not currently connected to the system but can be available within a specified time period, which may vary in different systems. In some systems, quick start reserves refer to the generation available within 10 minutes. The resources that qualify for this type of reserves are mainly run-of-river hydro, pumped hydro, combustion turbines, combined cycle units, diesels, and interruptible demand resources. Supplemental Reserves.  Supplemental reserves are reserve capability that can be fully converted into energy or load that can be removed from the system within a 10- to 30-minute interval following a request from the system operator. Resources providing such a reserve do not need to be electrically synchronized to the system. Reserve Requirements.  Reserve requirements are lower-limit reliability requirements. Synchronous reserves, non-synchronous reserves, and supplemental reserves have a priority sequence based on the level of reliability they provide. Higher priority reserves can also qualify for the requirements of lower priority reserves, that is, synchronous reserves can also qualify for a requirement which requires non-synchronous or supplemental reserves; and non-synchronous reserves can also qualify for a requirement which requires supplemental reserves. Reserve requirements are set to protect system against instantaneous load variations, load forecasting error and loss of generation capabilities, for frequency control and area protection. Reserve requirements are often set differently in different systems. Common practices are based on the largest contingency of the system. NERC BAL-002 standard requirement is to maintain at least enough contingency reserve to cover the most severe single contingency [2]. Each region/system has different operation practices. For example, in New York system, 10-minute synchronous reserve requirement is set as one-half of the largest single contingency [4]; while PJM’s synchronous reserve requirement is set as the largest single contingency [5]. For regulating reserves, NERC does not impose explicit requirements, just to maintain sufficient regulating reserves to meet NERC control performance standards (CPS1, CPS2, or BAAL) [2]. The location of the reserves is also important due to transmission congestion. If there is not enough available transmission capacity, the affected zones need to have certain reserve requirements

18_Santoso_Sec18_p1097-1168.indd 1102

23/11/17 10:53 AM

Power System Operations   1103 

met by the reserve resources within the zones. Reserve deliverability is often evaluated in system operation. Zonal reserve requirements are set in most of the North America regional transmission operator (RTO) systems. With increasing penetration level of intermittent renewable resources, the reserve requirements are being re-evaluated and adjusted to account for increased variability. For example, in Electric Reliability Council of Texas (ERCOT), forecasted wind output is factored in setting the regulating and contingency reserve requirements [6]. 18.2.4  Generation Scheduling and Dispatch All generation resources have their physical limitations, such as time to start, minimum run time, minimum down time, minimum and maximum output, ramp rates, turn-around time, mill points, etc. Different types of generation have different characteristics. In general, nuclear units do not start up and shut down often, generate at relatively constant level, and their incremental costs are almost zero. Therefore, they serve base load. Steam units often start up and shut down slowly, and have relatively low incremental costs. They serve base load as well. Gas units can start up and shutdown quickly and often called “fast start units.” Traditionally, they have relatively high incremental costs, and often run during peak hours. For this reason, they are also called “peaking units.” With the increase of gas supply, the incremental costs of fast start units have decreased significantly. As a result, these units run much longer now than just the peak hours. Finally, hydro units often have fixed amount of energy for a day or a week. Therefore, hydro plants are normally scheduled for peak hours. As described in Sec. 18.2.2, intermittent renewable resources, such as wind and solar, are often considered neither schedulable nor dispatchable. Their outputs are often forecasted for system operation. To balance generation with demand and maintain system frequency, some generation (normally slow start generation) has to be scheduled way ahead of time based on forecasted load. As the time is closer to real-time, more generation (normally fast start generation) is committed to balance demand. Every 5 minutes, dispatchable generation is moved up or down to follow the load, and the output of regulating resources is adjusted based on AGC signal, often referred as secondary frequency control. The details of AGC will be covered in Sec. 18.4.2.2. The governor control of generators is often called as primary frequency control. In a summary, generation is staged to balance with load and maintain system frequency [7]. Unit Commitment.  Unit commitment (UC) is the key mathematical optimization problem for centralized generation scheduling both before the operating day and within the operating day. Before the operating day, UC provides the hourly generation schedules for the entire day, that is, 24 hours; within the operating day, UC provides the generation schedules for the look ahead hours. •  Inputs: •  Forecasted load •  Interchange schedules •  Reserve requirements •  Generation production cost model: such as startup cost, shutdown cost, no load cost, and incremental cost curve •  Generation parameters: time to start, minimum run time, minimum down time, minimum and maximum output limits, reserve limits, ramp rates •  Prescheduled status or output •  Derations •  Network loss •  Outputs: •  Hourly on/offline status of each generator •  Hourly megawatt output for each online generator

18_Santoso_Sec18_p1097-1168.indd 1103

23/11/17 10:53 AM

1104  SECTION EIGHTEEN

Mathematical Model.  UC is modeled as mathematical optimization problem. The objective is to minimize the total production cost, or maximize the total social welfare under the market environment when offers and bids are submitted by market participants. •  System constraints: •  Power balance constraint •  Reserve requirement constraints •  Unit constraints: •  Ramp up/down constraints •  Start-up/shutdown ramping constraints •  Minimum on/off time constraints •  Power generation limit constraints: minimum and maximum •  Reserve constraints Lagrange relaxation and mixed integer programming (MIP) have been used extensively in the industry to solve for large scale UC problems. Security Constrained Unit Commitment.  Security constrained unit commitment (SCUC) provides an hourly UC solution that is physically feasible and economically viable. It refers to the economic scheduling of generating units for serving the hourly demand and meeting the reserve requirements, while satisfying temporal and operation limits of generation and transmission facilities in contingency-based power systems. SCUC is the key decision-making component in today’s power system operation, especially for large-scale systems. Comparing to UC, transmission topology, parameters and flow limits are also included as inputs, so that operation constraints of transmission network are also considered, for both base and contingency cases. SCUC is a large-scale mixed integer optimization problem with a large number of binary variables, continuous and discrete control variables, and a series of prevailing equality and inequality constraints. Due to its computational complexity, it is a class of nondeterministic polynomial-time hard (NP-hard) problem. Direct current (DC) network constraints are often used for simplicity, with linear sensitivity factors. Alternate current (AC) network constraints are used for accurate network representation. Benders decomposition methods are generally used to solve the SCUC problem [8]. To account for the volatility brought by increased penetration of renewable resources, stochastic unit commitment is being considered and evaluated for practical operation. Security Constrained Economic Dispatch.  Security constrained economic dispatch (SCED) is the key algorithm for generation dispatch. It determines the most economic dispatch for all online generators, to serve forecasted load, meet reserve requirements, while satisfying all generation and transmission limitations. •  Inputs: •  Forecasted load •  Interchange schedule •  Reserve requirements •  Generation incremental cost •  Generation parameters: minimum and maximum output, reserve limits, ramp rates •  Prescheduled output •  Derations •  Transmission topology

18_Santoso_Sec18_p1097-1168.indd 1104

23/11/17 10:53 AM

Power System Operations   1105 

•  Transmission parameters •  Transmission flow limitations

•  Outputs: •  Megawatt output for each online generator •  Reserve assignment for each generator Mathematical Model.  SCED is modeled as mathematical optimization problem as well. The objective is also to minimize the total production cost, or maximize the total social welfare under market environment. •  System constraints: •  Power balance constraints •  Reserve requirement constraints •  Transmission security constraints •  Unit constraints: •  Ramp up/down constraints •  Power generation limit constraints: minimum and maximum •  Reserve constraints Comparing to SCUC, SCED is a much easier problem to solve, commonly solved by Linear Programming in practical systems. 18.2.5  Area Control Error and Control Performance The system-wide mismatch between generation and load results in frequency deviation from scheduled frequency. Area Control Error.  In North America, area control error (ACE) is used to identify the imbalance between generation and load (including interchange). Imbalance is measured indirectly based on the frequency deviation of the system. ACE is measured based on Eq. (18-2)

ACE = [NI A − NI S ] − [(10 × B) × ( FA − FS )] − I ME (18-2)

where NIA represents actual net interchange, NIS represents scheduled net interchange, B represents frequency bias constant, which is an estimate of system frequency response. FA represents the actual frequency, and FS represents scheduled frequency. IME represents Interchange metering error [9]. The ACE is measured in megawatts. System operators in North America operate in accordance with NERC resource and demand balancing (i.e., BAL) standards, to ensure their capability to utilize reserves to balance resources and demand in real-time, and to return interconnection frequency within defined limits following a reportable disturbance. NERC control performance standards (CPS) define a standard of minimum control performance for each Balancing area: CPS1 and CPS2. An alternative metric, balancing authority ACE limit (BAAL), has been used as a substitute for CPS2. CPS1.  The CPS1 indicates the relationship between the ACE and the system frequency on a 1-minute average over a period (usually 12 months). It is the measure of short-term error between load and generation, and is defined as

18_Santoso_Sec18_p1097-1168.indd 1105

 ACE   AVGperiod   [∆f ]clock −minute  ≤ ε12    −10 B clock −minute 

(18-3)

23/11/17 10:53 AM

1106  SECTION EIGHTEEN

where ∆ f is the clock-minute average of interconnection frequency error. B is the control area frequency bias and [ .]clock −minute represents the function of clock-minute average. ε1 is a constant derived from a targeted frequency bound set by NERC. For compliance with NERC, the CPS1 should not be less than 100%. If a control area closely matches generation with load, or if the mismatch causes system frequency to be driven closer to nominal frequency, the CPS1’s performance will be good. CPS2.  CPS2 would place boundaries on CPS1 to limit net unscheduled power flows that are unacceptably large. It sets limits on maximum average ACE for every 10-minute period. It imposes a limit on the magnitude of short-term ACE value. CPS2 prevents excessive generation/load mismatch even if a mismatch is in the proper direction. The average ACE for each of the six 10-minute periods during the hour, that is, for the 10-minute periods ending at 10, 20, 30, 40, 50, and 60 minutes past the hour, must be within specific limit, referred to as L10. Balancing Authority ACE Limit.  To meet the BAAL standard requirement, the ACE signal should satisfy the constraint

BAAL Low  ACE  BAAL High (18-4)

where BAALLow and BAALHigh are set based on NERC BAL-001-2 standard. BAALLow is calculated based on the low-frequency trigger limit, and BAALHigh is calculated based on the high-frequency trigger limit. When actual frequency is equal to scheduled frequency, BAALLow and BAALHigh do not apply. When actual frequency is less than scheduled frequency, BAALHigh does not apply, and when actual frequency is greater than scheduled frequency, BAALLow does not apply. NERC disturbance control standard (DCS) (BAL-002-0) is used by each balancing area to monitor control performance during recovery from disturbance conditions, which states that ACE must return either to zero or to its pre-disturbance level within 15 minutes following the start of the disturbance.

18.2.6  Frequency Control The governor control of generators is referred to as primary frequency control. Under normal operation, the small frequency deviation can be attenuated by the primary frequency control. For larger frequency deviation, AGC is responsible to restore system frequency. For serious load generation imbalance associated with rapid frequency change following a significant fault, contingency reserves are often deployed and economic dispatch is adjusted as well. Emergency frequency control and related protection schemes must be the last option to decrease the risk of cascade faults, additional generation events, load/network and separation events. Load shedding is the most popular emergency control scheme, by curtailing some parts of system load. If the frequency falls below a specified frequency threshold following a serious disturbance, underfrequency load shedding is then triggered to protect against excessive frequency decrease. 18.2.7  Impact of Intermittent Renewable Resources on Frequency Control Intermittent renewable resources, such as wind and solar, are highly volatile, not quite dispatchable and are hard to forecast as well. Increased penetration of these resources increases system operation uncertainty and causes significant challenges to power balancing, impacting on system reliability and control performance. In some systems, cloud covering could become the largest contingency. Stochastic methods provide natural solutions to account for increased system uncertainties. However, they are computationally challenging, especially for real-world problems.

18_Santoso_Sec18_p1097-1168.indd 1106

23/11/17 10:53 AM

Power System Operations   1107 

Existing tools, e.g., EMS, SCUC, and SCED, are all based on deterministic methods, therefore, they cannot reflect uncertainties well. Planning adequate reserves becomes an important issue in today’s system operation. For example, regulation reserve requirements may need to be increased to account for a larger amount of fluctuating wind power or solar power. Designing intermittent generators with the full range of performance capability, which is comparable to conventional synchronous generators, is also becoming possible. For example, wind power facilities can be equipped to provide governing control and participate in AGC. With the advancement of storage technologies and attractive market design, energy storages have become excellent frequency control resources, especially in the markets where they are compensated correspondingly for their fast responsive performances [3]. Also, the combination of energy storages with renewable resources has been proved to provide better system performance.

18.3  TRANSMISSION OPERATION AND SECURITY BY HONG CHEN AND JIANWEI LIU Power system operation follows basic physical laws: Ohms law and Kirchhoff ’s laws. Operating reliability, or security, plays the key role in system operation. Network (transmission and distribution) has limited capability to transfer power from generation to load due to facility thermal, stability and/or voltage limits. Power transfer can be restricted to any of these limits, or a combination of them. Network security constraints are non-linear, especially stability limits and voltage limits. Security constrained optimal power flow (OPF) is a fundamental tool to ensure a secure operation. 18.3.1  Security Criteria Uncertainty exists in all aspects of power system operation. A facility can trip or malfunction at any time. Facility tripping can overload other facilities. Therefore, the system has to be operated in a manner that it will stay within its technical limits under normal system conditions and also under the conditions that another facility trips. “Contingency” refers to the sudden loss of a generating unit, transmission line, transformer, or breaker. A single contingency may disconnect multiple generating facilities (e.g., a plant with single connection to bulk power system), or multiple transmission facilities (e.g., radial lines with tapping substation). The historical practice is the N-1 contingency criteria, which means that when a facility trips, no system limit violation occurs. Under certain conditions, for example, hurricane onset, a possible event resulting in the failure or malfunction of one or more facilities, that is, N-k, is considered. 18.3.2  Facility Thermal Limitation Network facilities, such as transmission lines and transformers, have thermal ratings limiting the amount of current or apparent power that can be carried. Exceeding the thermal limits of transmission lines can cause the conductors to sag and stretch due to overheating, which could further result in faults or fires. Most equipment can be safely overloaded by a certain degree. The key is how big the overload is and how long it lasts. Typically, thermal ratings are set to allow a specified overload for a specified period of time. Due to thermal capabilities, the flow on any facility has to be within its thermal limit, under normal system conditions and contingency conditions as well. In North America, normal continuous ratings and emergency ratings (long term and short term) are specified for each facility [10]. Some systems have load dump ratings as well [11, 12]. Ambient temperature can affect facility thermal ratings significantly. Some systems have their thermal ratings corresponding to

18_Santoso_Sec18_p1097-1168.indd 1107

23/11/17 10:53 AM

1108  SECTION EIGHTEEN

different temperature sets, such as PJM [11]. Dynamic line ratings are being implemented or investigated in many systems [6, 13]. The severity of thermal limit exceeding often determines corrective actions and time to correct with load shedding [11]. Power flow analysis and contingency analysis are utilized to determine the actual flow and contingency flow on the facilities. The actual flow on the facilities often come from measurements and/ or state estimation, and is continuously monitored in EMS. 18.3.3  System Stability Limitation As a control system, power systems are also subject to stability limitations, that is, system should be able to return to the stable states after a disturbance. There are two main stability categories experienced in a power system, namely, angular stability and voltage stability. Each category can be further divided based on how big the disturbance: small perturbation and large disturbance. According to [14], there is also a mid-term/long-term stability which involves large voltage and frequency shift. Voltage is the key to the overall stability of a power system. Angular stability is related to the angular separation between points in the power system; and voltage stability is related to the magnitude of the system voltages and reactive power reserves. Often, angular and voltage instability go together. Angular Stability.  A power system is composed of many synchronous machines. Angular stability has to be maintained for the synchronization of the grid, to ensure that system torque and power angle remain controllable. The angles change as system conditions change. An interconnected power system loses synchronization when the power transfer rises to extreme large magnitudes that power angles reach excessive values. Following a large disturbance, transient stability becomes the concern. Power system may become instable for a period of time: angles may reach high magnitudes and rapidly change over a wide range. Synchronous generators are critical to the transient stability analysis. When torque/ power angles are too large, and disturbances occur, magnetic bonds of generators may be lost. The system becomes angle unstable when system operators lose their ability to control angles and power flows. Stability analysis is often used to determine stability limits. Many power systems restrict their real power transfers due to transient stability concerns. In general, those are the power systems with long transmission lines and remote generation. Detailed stability analysis is covered in Section 20. Voltage Stability.  Voltage stability is the ability of a power system to maintain adequate voltage magnitudes. In a voltage stable system, both power and voltage are controllable. Voltage stability is mainly a function of power system load. The reactive component of the load has a greater impact than the real component. Excessive loading in the power system leads to deficiencies in reactive power and the system is no longer able to support voltage. A voltage collapse could then occur. The shortage of reactive power drives to voltage instability. When a power system experiences a voltage collapse, system voltages decay to a level from which they are unable to recover. Voltage collapse is a process during which voltage instability leads to loss of load in a part of the power system. The effects of a voltage collapse are more serious than those of a typical lowvoltage scenario from system perspective. As a consequence of voltage collapse, the entire systems may experience a blackout. Restoration procedures are then required to restore the power system. As power systems are pushed to transfer more and more power, the likelihood of the occurrence of a voltage collapse becomes greater. Voltage stability is mainly a concern in heavily loaded systems, and has been responsible for major network collapses in recent years [15]. Often, system transfer capabilities are limited by steady state voltage stability limits. 18.3.4  Voltage Limits All equipment is designed to operate at certain rated supply voltages. Large deviations could cause damage to system equipment. High voltages can lead to the breakdown of equipment insulation, cause transformer over-excitation, and adversely affect customer equipment. Low voltages can impact power system equipment and operations in numerous ways.

18_Santoso_Sec18_p1097-1168.indd 1108

23/11/17 10:53 AM

Power System Operations   1109 

Voltage control is closely related to the availability of reactive power. Amount of available reactive support often determines the power transfer limit. Heavy power transfers are the main cause of low voltages due to the reactive power losses. Lightly loaded transmission lines are the main cause of high voltages. Capacitors, reactors, load tap changers (LTCs), and static VAR compensators (SVCs) are the equipment aimed at controlling system voltages. For example, reactive support from capacitor is often needed to help prevent low-voltage problem. Synchronous machines can also provide voltage control. In system operation, reactive reserves need to be maintained and voltage deviations need to be controlled. 18.3.5  Maintain Network Security EMS is the primary tool to monitor and evaluate current system state and simulated post-contingency states, for pre-/post-contingency thermal and voltage limits, stability limits, as well as assess voltage collapse for reactive interfaces. Reactive transfer interfaces are often defined across the transmission paths to prevent voltage criteria violation and voltage collapse. The interface limits are used to limit the total flow over the interfaces. The reactive interface limits are either pre-contingency active power limits, or post-contingency active power limits. PV curves are often used to determine reactive interface limits. When a facility overloads, the general practice is to apply corrective actions with a little or no cost first, such as transformer tap adjustments, phase shift regulators (PAR) adjustments, capacitor/reactor switching, line switching, and curtailment of non-firm transactions. Adjusting generation real power output via re-dispatch can be used pre-contingency to control post-contingency operation. Cost-effective generation redispatch is mostly achieved through SCED application for congestion management. If the above actions do not relieve an actual or simulated post-contingency violation, then emergency procedures can be directed, including dropping or reducing load as required. The following control actions are often used to control low-voltage or high-voltage conditions: •  Switch capacitors in-service for low-voltage conditions and out-of-service for high-voltage conditions •  Switch reactors out-of-service for low-voltage conditions and in-service for high-voltage conditions •  Adjust variable reactor tap positions •  Adjust voltage set points of SVC •  Operate synchronous condensers •  Change transformer tap positions •  Change generation excitation •  Adjust generation MW output •  Adjust transactions •  Adjust PARs •  Switch facilities in/out of service Thermal and voltage constraints are often controlled cost effectively on a pre-contingency basis. Due to the high cost associated with pre-contingency control and low probability of contingency events, some systems have started considering post-contingency congestion management under certain conditions. 18.3.6  Impact of Intermittent Renewable Resources on Transmission Security Intermittent renewable resources, such as wind and solar, can often cause local congestions with flow over thermal limits or low-voltage limits. Their volatile nature poses challenge to the congestion management, resulting in volatile dispatch signals. Due to the low or zero operating cost of these resources, often, more dispatchable resources, such as steam units, are dispatched up or down to

18_Santoso_Sec18_p1097-1168.indd 1109

23/11/17 10:53 AM

1110  SECTION EIGHTEEN

relief congestion. Sometimes, the output of these intermittent renewable resources has to be curtailed for congestion control. More advanced dispatch algorithms, such as risk-based dispatch, are being developed to accommodate high intermittent renewable impact. 18.3.7 References 1. Gómez-Expósito, A., Conejo, A. J., and Cañizares, C., “Electric Energy Systems: Analysis and Operation”, CRC Press, Boca Raton, FL, USA, 2009. 2. www.nerc.com. 3. www.pjm.com 4. “Ancillary Services Manual,” New York Independent System Operator, Dec. 2015. 5. “PJM Manual 13: Emergency Operations,” PJM, Jan. 1, 2016. 6. www.ercot.com. 7. Chen, H., “Power Grid Operation in a Market Environment: Economic Efficiency and Risk Mitigation,” Wiley-IEEE Press, USA, 2016. 8. Fu, Y., Shahidehpour, M., and Li, Z., “Security-Constrained Unit Commitment with AC Constraints,” IEEE Transaction On Power Systems, vol. 20, no. 3, Aug. 2005. 9. “Balancing and Frequency Control,” NERC, Jan. 26, 2011. 10. “System Operating Limit Definition and Exceedance Clarification,” NERC, Aug. 4, 2014. 11. “PJM Manual 3: Transmission Operations,” PJM, Dec. 1, 2015. 12. www.iso-ne.com. 13. www.entsoe.eu. 14. Kundur, P., “Power System Stability and Control,” McGraw-Hill, Inc, USA, 1994. 15. Hossain, J., and Pota, H. R., “Robust Control for Grid Voltage Stability: High Penetration of Renewable Energy,” Springer, New York, USA, 2014.

18.4  ENERGY MANAGEMENT SYSTEM BY JAY GIRI 18.4.1 Introduction The big Northeastern U.S. blackout of 1965 was a watershed event for the electric power industry. Millions of dollars of lost business revenue, as well as intense consumer dissatisfaction, have been attributed to this blackout. This unprecedented event alerted the United States public to the importance of grid reliability and security, to ensure the lights stay on at all times. The EMS at a utility control center collects real-time measurements to monitor current grid conditions. The EMS is a suite of analytics that synthesize these measurements to provide the grid operator with information to identify current problems and potential future threats to grid security. Managing the grid is becoming more challenging because of evolving grid influences, such as growth of variable renewable generation resources, distributed generation, microgrids, demand response, and customer engagement programs. Concurrently, however, there are nascent technologies and other advances that improve our ability to manage future grid operations. These technologies include new sub-second synchrophasor measurements and analytics; advances in high performance computing, visualization platforms, digital relays, cloud computing, etc. Other advances include adding more intelligence at substations and distribution systems, as well as self-managed microgrids and wide area monitoring systems. One key initiative is to create a “predict and mitigate” proactive grid management paradigm to enable better anticipation, so that timely decisions can be made to mitigate problems before they spread across the grid.

18_Santoso_Sec18_p1097-1168.indd 1110

23/11/17 10:53 AM

Power System Operations   1111 

This subsection describes the historical development of EMS control centers and their evolution to manage uncertainties in the future grid. The Energy Management System.  The EMS is a centralized facility of software and hardware whose primary purpose is to ensure that the transmission system operating conditions stay safe, reliable, and secure around the clock. The EMS is deemed the nerve center or brain of utility grid management. Since there is a tremendous volume of constantly changing conditions across the grid, the challenge is to sift through this data to identify conditions that are potential imminent problems that need operator attention. Conditions need to be monitored in a timely, periodic manner in order to immediately detect any adverse conditions, as soon as they arise, so that corrective actions could be implemented to mitigate potentially harmful conditions that could lead to a wide spread grid collapse. A major challenge is to convert vast amounts of data into useful information. Another challenge is to show the operator this information in an intelligent, concise manner, so as to facilitate prompt decision making. Timely visualization of real-time grid conditions is essential for successful grid operations. The EMS has evolved based on a centralized command and control grid management paradigm. The goal very simply is “Keep the lights on.” Figure 18-3 is an overview of the control room at a typical large modern EMS. There are multiple operator positions along with their respective monitors and communication systems. These include operators who manage generation, transmission, switching, interchanges with neighbors and a supervisor. The EMS also has large wallboard screen displays which can be monitored by all the control room operators.

FIGURE 18-3  A modern EMS control center.

18.4.2  EMS Subsystems Figure 18-4 shows the main EMS functional subsystems. There are three operator-related subsystems and a system-related infrastructure subsystem. The operator-related subsystems are: 1. SCADA—supervisory control and data acquisition 2. Generation—monitoring and control 3. Network—analysis and optimization

18_Santoso_Sec18_p1097-1168.indd 1111

23/11/17 10:53 AM

1112  SECTION EIGHTEEN

SCADA (Supervisory control and data acquisition)

System functions

• SCADA • Loadshed • Historical recording

• • • • •

NETWORK State estimator Powerflow Contingency analysis Security enhancement Optimal powerflow

GENERATION • AGC • Study functions • Load forecast

Communication server data acquisition

Real-time database

User interface

Inter control center communication

System modeling

Historical data warehouse

FIGURE 18-4   EMS functions.

The system-related subsystem is primarily for support engineers, software engineers, and IT staff. Their function is to maintain the software and hardware infrastructure, database models, displays, interfaces to other entities and other ancillary functions, to ensure that the EMS environment is up to date and available around the clock. Figure 18-5 shows a typical hardware configuration of the EMS. Figure 18-6 shows the multiple subsystem application layers. Figure 18-7 shows the various periodicities and cycles at which the EMS analytics run. The various EMS subsystems are described next. SCADA.  SCADA receives real-time power system measurements typically every 2 to 4 seconds. It consists of a master station that communicates with remote terminal units (RTUs) for monitoring the major components of the transmission system: generating plants, transmission lines and transformers, substations. RTUs transmit device status and measurements to, and receive control commands from the master station. Communication is generally via dedicated circuits. The main SCADA functions include: •  Data Acquisition. Provides telemetered measurements and status information. •  Supervisory Control. Allows operator to remotely control devices, e.g., open and close circuit breakers. A “select before operate” procedure is used for greater safety. •  Tagging. Identifies a device subject to operating restrictions and prevents unauthorized operation. •  Alarms. Informs operators of unplanned events and undesirable operating conditions. •  Alarms are sorted by criticality, area of responsibility, and chronology. Acknowledgment may be required. •  Logging. Logs all operator entries, alarms, and other key data. •  Load Shedding. Provides automatic and operator-initiated tripping of load in response to system emergencies. •  Trending. Plots measurements on selected time scales. •  Communication circuit configuration management.

18_Santoso_Sec18_p1097-1168.indd 1112

23/11/17 10:53 AM

Power System Operations   1113 

Operator workstations

Generation transmission scada habitat

Analyst /Training environment Browser

Modeler simulator

Browser Advanced vision

Analyst workstations

Printers

True time NTP server

EMS LAN Routers

Control for Front-End control ICCP Gateway WAN

Secure Serial + IP Links Router at Plant

Trust Firewalls

Active directory servers

Substation RTUs

Control for plants control for substation

Replicated servers

Plant DCS/ Substation DCS

Remote clients

FIGURE 18-5  Typical EMS hardware.

Generation Monitoring and Control.  The generation subsystem is responsible for monitoring the generating plants and for sending them controls to increase or lower generation based on system conditions. AGC is the primary generation function that typically runs every 4 to 10 seconds. The objective is to adjust the generation to continually meet load while minimizing production costs. The major

What is coming up next? Future system-wide view System-wide Grid: Automatically correlated view Generation, Ties: Energy balance view Asynchronous, Uncorrelated: Telemetry view

DSS

30 min

Proactive brain

SE and CA 60 seconds

AGC

4 seconds

SCADA

2 to 4 seconds

Analytical brain

Reactive brain

Eyes

FIGURE 18-6  EMS functional layers.

18_Santoso_Sec18_p1097-1168.indd 1113

23/11/17 10:53 AM

1114  SECTION EIGHTEEN

System model description Breaker/Switch status indications 2-4 secs

SCADA

Telemetry & communications equipment

Network topology program

Updated system electrical model

Analog measurements Generator outputs Generation raise/Lower signals

Substation RTUs

10-30 secs

State estimator

Power flows, voltages etc.,

Bad measurement alarms

AGC 4-10 secs Economic dispatch calculation

Operator displays 1 sec update

OPF

10-30 secs Security constrained

Contingency analysis

Contingency selection

Overloads & voltage problems

FIGURE 18-7  EMS application cycles.

functions are load-frequency control (LFC) and economic dispatch (ED). Other functions are reserve monitoring, interchange scheduling, and related monitoring and recording functions. Load-Frequency Control.  The primary objectives of LFC are: 1. Maintain frequency at its nominal value (50 Hz or 60 Hz). 2. Maintain net power interchanges with neighboring control areas at scheduled values. 3. Allocate generation across plants to minimize overall system production cost. The LFC philosophy is that each utility of the interconnection should closely follow its own load during normal operation, and during emergencies, should provide support to the interconnection according to its relative size. In order to provide this support the utility needs to maintain adequate regulation margin as well as adequate response capability. The objective of the AGC control logic is to ensure “good prompt” control without “excessive unnecessary” movement of units. AGC controller tuning is system-specific and depends on the unit type (thermal, hydro, gas turbine, etc.) and the characteristics of the communication system. Economic Dispatch.  Since all generating units have different costs of generation, it is necessary to optimally allocate these units to meet load at minimum cost. The minimum dispatch cost is when the incremental cost of all the generators is equal. This allocation logic is performed by the economic dispatch function within AGC and is run typically every 60 seconds.

18_Santoso_Sec18_p1097-1168.indd 1114

23/11/17 10:53 AM

Power System Operations   1115 

Reserve Monitoring.  Reserve capacity is required in case generation is lost or load suddenly increases. Typical reserves include spinning (already online) and operating (available within 10 minute or 30 minute). Interchange Transaction Scheduling.  AGC needs to account for contractual exchanges of power between utilities. The net interchange (sum of all the buy and sale agreements) is used to augment the AGC generation target. Forecasting and Accounting.  Grid operation also needs to monitor and consider •  System Load Forecast. Forecasts system energy demand for a specified forecast period. •  Generally a mix of forecast intervals (5, 15, 30, 60 minutes) with time horizons from 15 minutes, to hours, to multiple days. •  With the growth of unpredictable renewable energy resources, it is important to have forecast updates more frequently—typically every few hours. •  Unit Commitment. Determines start-up and shut-down times for most economical operation of thermal generating units for each hour of a specified period of 1 to 7 days. •  Fuel Scheduling. Determines the most economical choice of fuel consistent with plant requirements, fuel purchase contracts, and stockpiled fuel. •  Hydro-Thermal Scheduling. Determines the optimum schedule of thermal and hydro energy production for each hour of a study period up to 7 days while ensuring that hydro and thermal constraints are not violated. •  Transaction Evaluation. Determines the optimal incremental and production costs for exchange (purchase and sale) of additional blocks of energy with neighboring companies. •  Transmission Loss Minimization. Recommends controller actions to be taken in order to minimize overall power system network losses. •  Security Constrained Dispatch. Determines optimal outputs of generating units to minimize production cost while ensuring that a network security constraint is not violated. •  Production Cost Calculation. Calculates actual and economical production costs for each generating unit on an hourly basis. Network Analysis and Optimization.  The goal of grid security is to be able to survive probable potential contingencies. A contingency is defined as the unplanned loss of a major component such as: transmission lines, transformers, generators, substations, etc. Survival means that the system stabilizes and continues to operate at acceptable voltage and frequency levels without loss of load. The following steps are sequentially performed: 1. Determine the state of the system based on either current measurements. 2. Process a pre-defined list of contingencies to determine the consequences of each contingency. 3. Determine preventive or corrective actions for contingencies which represent unacceptable risk. The following is a typical real-time sequence of network analytics performed at the EMS: •  Topology Processor. Processes real-time status measurements to determine an electrical connectivity (bus) model of the power system network. •  State Estimator. Uses real-time status and analog measurements to determine the “best” estimate of the state of the power system. •  It uses a redundant set of measurements; calculates voltages, phase angles, and power flows for all components in the system; and reports overload conditions. •  Contingency Analysis. Assesses the impact of contingencies on the state of the power system and identifies potentially harmful contingencies that could cause operating limit violations.

18_Santoso_Sec18_p1097-1168.indd 1115

23/11/17 10:54 AM

1116  SECTION EIGHTEEN

•  Optimal Power Flow. Recommends controller actions to optimize a specified objective function (such as system operating cost or losses) subject to a set of power system operating constraints. •  Security Enhancement. Recommends corrective control actions to be taken to alleviate an existing or potential overload in the system while ensuring minimal operational cost. •  Preventive Action. Recommends control actions to be taken in a “preventive” mode before a contingency occurs to preclude an overload situation if the contingency were to occur. •  Bus Load Forecasting. Uses real-time measurements to adaptively forecast loads for the electrical connectivity (bus) model of the power system network. •  Transmission Loss Factors. Determines incremental loss sensitivities for generating units; calculates the impact on losses if the output of a unit were to be increased by 1 MW. Other offline study analytics include: •  Power Flow. Determines the steady-state conditions of the power system network for a postulated generation and load pattern. •  Short-Circuit Analysis. Determines fault currents for single-phase and three-phase faults at different fault locations. 18.4.3  Dispatcher Training Simulator A dispatcher training simulators (DTS) is an offline simulation environment which models the EMS with a power system simulation model in order to provide a realistic environment for operators to practice normal, every-day operating tasks and procedures, as well as experience emergency operating situations. Training activities can be safely practiced with the simulator responding in a manner similar to the actual power system. The DTS can be used to recreate past actual operational scenarios and to formulate and develop system restoration procedures. Scenarios can be created, saved, and reused. NERC has been emphasizing the need for black start training—the DTS provides an invaluable environment for this. The DTS can also be used to evaluate the functionality and performance of new real-time EMS functions and for tuning AGC in an off-line, secure environment. Figure 18-8 shows the three main subsystems of the DTS: 1. The energy control system 2. Power system dynamic simulation 3. Instructional system Energy Control System.  The energy control system (ECS) emulates normal EMS functions and is the only part of the DTS with which the trainee interacts. It consists of the supervisory control and data acquisition (SCADA) system, generation control system, and all other EMS functions. Power System Simulation.  This subsystem simulates the dynamic behavior of the power system. System frequency is simulated using the “long-term dynamics” system model, where frequency of all units is assumed to be the same. The prime-mover dynamics are represented by models of the units, turbines, governors, boilers, and boiler auxiliaries. The network flows and states (bus voltages and angles, topology, transformer taps, etc.) are calculated at periodic intervals. Relays are modeled, and they emulate the behavior of the actual devices in the field. Instructional System.  This subsystem includes the capabilities to start, stop, restart, and control the simulation. It also includes making save cases, retrieving save cases, reinitializing to a new time, and initializing to a specific real-time situation. It is also used to define event schedules. Events are associated with both the power system simulation and the ECS functions. Events may be deterministic (occur at a predefined time), conditional (based on a predefined set of power system conditions being met), or probabilistic (occur randomly).

18_Santoso_Sec18_p1097-1168.indd 1116

23/11/17 10:54 AM

Power System Operations   1117 

Instructional system

Weather & energy forecast

Events

Instructor

Simulation control

Power system simulation

Power system simulation

Power flow

Dynamics

Load model

Prime movers

Topology processing Power flow solution

Relays

Data retrieval Energy control system

Network applications

Control SCADA applications

Generation applications

Dispatcher trainee FIGURE 18-8  DTS.

18.4.4  Recent EMS Trends A major recent trend related to the EMS is the growth of synchrophasor measurement units. Cybersecurity issues are also an emerging requirement for EMS. These are described in the following subsections. Other trends that impact the EMS include: •  Electricity markets—market dispatch replacing economic dispatch in some utilities •  Interfaces and integration with decentralized management systems such as: •  Distribution management systems •  Substation automation systems •  Microgrids •  Renewable and distributed generation resources •  Demand response programs 18.4.5  Next Generation EMS Synchrophasor Measurements in EMS.  In the past few years, phasor measurement units (PMUs) have been deployed in greater numbers at utilities globally. PMUs provide synchronized, sub-second measurements, which provide prompt and higher resolution visibility of grid conditions. Advances in visualization capabilities coupled with the availability of PMU data dramatically improves the

18_Santoso_Sec18_p1097-1168.indd 1117

23/11/17 10:54 AM

1118  SECTION EIGHTEEN

ability to manage grid operations more effectively, which in turn helps grid operators make faster and better decisions to maintain grid integrity. New control center applications are continually being developed to use this new type of PMU synchronized measurement technology to further improve the ability to maintain the integrity of the power system. The objective is to provide the operator “eyes” to always be aware of current system conditions and potential problems that might be lurking ahead. As the volume and frequency of measurement data grows—especially with the growth of sub-second synchronous measurement, such as PMUs—it is of utmost importance, to convert this data tsunami into relevant useful information that can be concisely shown on an operator display screen and to allow prompt decisions to be made with confidence. Figure 18-9 shows the next generation modern EMS with synchrophasor measurements and analytics. Figures 18-10, 18-11, and 18-12 show typical EMS operator displays in a modern EMS. Figure 18-13 shows how the modern EMS is evolving to meet the changing grid environment. It is becoming a utility’s central hub of information for the increasing plethora of various grid management processes and solutions. Cyber Security in EMS.  In the United States, the NERC Critical Infrastructure Protection (CIP) standards 002 through 009 require utilities and other responsible entities to place critical cyber assets within an electronic security perimeter. The electronic security perimeters must be subjected to vulnerability analyses, use access control technologies, and include systems to monitor and log the electronic security perimeter access. The Federal Energy Regulatory Commission (FERC) requires responsible entities involved in bulk electricity transmission to adhere to the NERC CIP standards. So as the EMS evolves with new measurements and analytics, the next generation EMS must carefully consider these emerging cyber-security requirements.

EMS

Other EMS applications

SCADA & alarms

WAMS alarms

State estimator

State measurement

Small signal stability

Oscillation monitoring

Transient & voltage stability

Stability monitoring & control

Island management

Island detection, resync, & blackstart

New applications

Synchrophasor measurementbased analysis

Traditional modelbased analysis

Control center - PDC FIGURE 18-9  Next generation EMS.

18_Santoso_Sec18_p1097-1168.indd 1118

23/11/17 10:54 AM

Contour: area voltage

Query: station voltages

FIGURE 18-10  Integrated SCADA and GIS displays.

FIGURE 18-11  Voltage stability—locations and controls. 1119

18_Santoso_Sec18_p1097-1168.indd 1119

23/11/17 10:54 AM

1120  SECTION EIGHTEEN

FIGURE 18-12  Visualization of dynamic clusters and frequency.

Future EMS development also needs to be designed to protect against potential network attacks. The primary threats to process control systems include: data injection, command injection, and denial of service. 18.4.6  Proactive Grid Management Most control center operator decisions today are still quite reactive. Current information is used to reactively make an assessment of the current state. Operators then mentally extrapolate to make decisions to avoid imminent potential problems. The next step is to help operators make decisions that are proactive. Advances in hardware, software, and visualization technologies are helping us solve larger analytical problems and to visualize them more quickly. This provides an opportunity to perform look ahead predictive analysis in real time in order to “see what is coming up” and to facilitate proactive decision making to avoid potential imminent problems. 18.4.7 Summary When introduced in the 1970s, the EMS was designed to achieve the following grid management objectives: reliability, security, and efficiency. Today the objectives also include resiliency and flexibility— resiliency to withstand unforeseen events such as super storms, etc.—and flexibility to accommodate new types of distributed energy resources and other new stakeholders. The EMS was originally designed as a single, centralized command and control system, which relied on imperfect real-time measurements that had variable latencies. Today, with the growth of synchrophasor PMU measurements, this premise is no longer valid—we know precisely when they were measured—and we can create a set of perfectly synchronized grid measurements. This facilitates development of a new genre of EMS analytics that utilize perfectly synchronized measurements.

18_Santoso_Sec18_p1097-1168.indd 1120

23/11/17 10:54 AM

Power System Operations   1121 

The EMS Hub Serial RTU

ICCP

DNP RTU

Alarm

Substn server

Archive

SMP

ETA

ETV

PMU

Historian

Phasor PDC

PI

RDS

DTS

Consolidated EMS

OSM Operator log

ETS VSAT TSAT

Alarm SCADA Network Generation Tagging Loadshed SVC

iDMS

DOC

Intelligent alarm

GPM

TOC

SOC

LBA

GEN

Gas distribution

T/D/G users

FIGURE 18-13  The EMS hub.

18_Santoso_Sec18_p1097-1168.indd 1121

23/11/17 10:54 AM

1122  SECTION EIGHTEEN

Many large utilities have been moving toward more decentralized management. For example, independent system operators (ISOs) are comprised of many self-managed transmission owners (TOs). Some large grids have implemented a 3- to 4-level hierarchy of EMS functions—one such is the 4-level Indian national grid. Substation automation solutions are also growing which ensure better local grid management. Distribution management systems (DMS) are also being deployed to provide active management of the lower-voltage distribution network. This benefits the high-voltage transmission network, since many problems which originate in the low-voltage grid are being managed locally. With the proliferation of distributed energy resources, microgrids, and decentralized intelligence, the utility business model continues to evolve—and to keep pace, the EMS needs to evolve as well. Regions of the interconnected grid are becoming more autonomous and actively self-managed— hence more predictable—and in turn, grid management will undoubtedly benefit. Customer engagement and demand response programs are helping flatten the load profile. This is also leading the way to evolve from a traditional generation following grid management paradigm to a load following paradigm. Advances in hardware, software, and visualization technologies are facilitating faster than real time look ahead predictive analysis, in order to facilitate proactive decision-making to ensure grid reliability. Today, uncertainties in the grid are growing at a faster pace than ever before. Nevertheless, nascent creative solutions show significant promise to ensure accomplishing our enduring mission “to always keep the lights on!” 18.4.8 Acknowledgments The effort of hundreds of GE Grid Software Solutions staff is gratefully acknowledged—their dedication, passion, and creativity helped develop EMS technology over the past many decades. Utility EMS customers are also acknowledged for providing opportunities to develop the modernday EMS. 18.4.9  Further Reading 1. Giri, J., Podmore, R., et al., “An Advanced Dispatcher Training Simulator,” IEEE PAS Transactions, PAS-101(1), 17–24, 1982. 2. Phadke, A. G. and Thorp, J. S., “Synchronized Phasor Measurements and Their Applications”, Springer: New York, 2008. 3. Giri, J., Sun, D., Avila-Rosales, R., “Wanted: A More Intelligent Grid,” IEEE Power & Energy Magazine, Digital Object Identifier 10.1109/MPE.2008.000000, Jan./Feb. 2009. 4. Giri, J., “System-Wide Computerization of India’s Grid Operations,” Homi Bhabha and the Computer Revolution (editors R. K. Shyamasundar and M. A. Pai), Oxford University Press: Mumbai, 2011. 5. Giri, J., Parashar, M., Trehern, J., Madani, V., “The Situation Room,” IEEE Power & Energy Magazine, Digital Object Identifier 10-1109/MPE_2012.2205316, Sep./Oct, 2012. 6. Giri, J., “Benefits of Synchrophasors in Operation of the Future Grid,” Presentation made at the Cigre US National Committee, 2012 Grid of the Future Symposium, Kansas City, Oct. 2012. 7. Giri, J., Morris, T., Huang, Z., et al., Transmission Systems, Smart Grids—Infrastructure, Technologies and Solutions (editor S. Borlase), CRC Press: Boca Raton, FL, pp. 156–162 and pp. 188–210, 2013. 8. Madani, V., Jampala, A., Parashar, M., Giri J., “Advanced EMS Applications Using Synchrophasor Systems for Grid Operations,” IEEE T&D, Chicago, Apr. 2014. 9. Avila-Rosales, R., Fairchild, R., Giri, J., et al., “An Advanced Training Simulator for Synchrophasor Applications,” Cigre US, National Committee, 2014 Grid of the Future Symposium, Houston, Oct. 2014. 10. Giri, J., “Proactive Management of the Future Grid”, IEEE Power & Energy Technology Systems Journal 2, http://ieeexplore.ieee.org/stamp/stamp.jsp?tp=&arnumber=7080837, 2015.

18_Santoso_Sec18_p1097-1168.indd 1122

23/11/17 10:54 AM

Power System Operations   1123 

18.5  OUTAGE SCHEDULING IN ISO SYSTEMS BY SIMON TAM 18.5.1  General Principles Transmission outage management is very important in maintaining power system reliability. TOs have the right and obligation to maintain and repair their portion of the transmission system. The ISO/RTO has the responsibility to study and to approve transmission facility outage requests prior to removal of the equipment from service. The ISO/RTO has to coordinate scheduled outages of transmission facilities with planned generation outages that may affect power system operation. The ISO/RTO maintains a list of reportable transmission facilities which TOs are required to obtain outage approval from the ISO/RTO. TOs should submit tentative dates of all transmission outages of reportable transmission facilities to the ISO/RTO as far in advance as possible. The ISO/ RTO establishes procedures and timelines for the scheduling, coordinating, studying, approving, and notifying of the transmission outage submitted by TOs. These procedures and timelines are kept upto-date by periodic reviews and revisions. Under certain conditions such as extreme weather, peak load, heightened homeland security, etc., the ISO/RTO will evaluate the need to operate the power grid in a more conservative manner. Actions that may be taken under these special circumstances include, but are not limited to, canceling or rescheduling transmission outages and returning out-of-service equipment back to service. 18.5.2  Scheduling Transmission Outage Requests Each transmission owner submits the tentative dates of all planned transmission outages of reportable transmission facilities to the ISO/RTO as far in advance as possible and provide updates on outage dates as soon as practical. The ISO/RTO maintains a planned transmission outage schedule for a period of at least the next 13 months. The latest planned transmission outage schedule is posted online on a public domain, such as the open access same-time information system (OASIS). Planned transmission outages are given priority based on the time of submission. The ISO/RTO periodically reviews all submissions of planned transmission outages and assesses the effect of proposed transmission outages upon the integrated operation of the transmission system using established operating reliability criteria. When a transmission owner submits an outage request to the ISO/RTO, the request includes the following information: •  Date •  Facility and associated elements •  All line and transformers that will be taken out of service or open-ended as a result of the scheduled outage must be included in the outage request. For example, an outage request for circuit breaker work that open-end a line must include the line as being out of service in the request. This will ensure proper posting of all outages on the ISO/RTO website. •  Planned switching times •  Job description •  Availability/emergency return time Transmission Outage Submission Requirements.  The ISO/RTO must clearly define the transmission outage submission rules which have to be explicitly communicated to all TOs. The rules determine whether an outage request can be approved or not.

18_Santoso_Sec18_p1097-1168.indd 1123

23/11/17 10:54 AM

1124  SECTION EIGHTEEN

Here are some examples of ISO/RTO outage submission rules: •  To obtain “On Time” status for outage duration of 5 days or less, the transmission owner must submit the outage request before the 1st of the month prior to the month of the requested start date. •  To obtain “On Time” status for outage duration of more than 5 days, the transmission owner must submit the outage request before the 1st of the month 6 months in advance of the requested start date. •  “On Time” outage will be approved, provided it does not jeopardize system reliability. •  “Late” outage may be cancelled if it jeopardizes system reliability or causes congestion requiring out-of-merit dispatch operations in some markets. Coordinating Outage Requests with Other Transmission Owners.  In the event that a scheduled outage of one transmission owner affects the availability of another transmission owner’s facility, it is the responsibility of the transmission owner initiating the request to notify the affected transmission owner for their consideration. If agreeable to the directly connected transmission owner, the initiating transmission owner may submit the outage request to the ISO/RTO Coordinating Transmission Outage Requests with Planned Generation Outages.  The ISO/RTO and TOs are to coordinate transmission outages with planned outages for generators. The ISO/RTO resolves potential transmission and generation outage conflicts based on system reliability by performing the following actions: •  Review the transmission and generator maintenance schedules to coordinate major transmission and generator outages and communicate with the outage submitting entities in attempting to minimize the anticipated constrained operations •  Recommend adjustments to transmission outage schedules throughout the year to coincide with planned generator outages within the ISO/RTO and surrounding balancing authorities 18.5.3  Processing Transmission Outage Requests The ISO/RTO is required to maintain system reliability under all planned outage conditions. Transmission outage requests are studied to ensure: •  No actual flows exceed normal thermal ratings •  No actual voltages exceed normal voltage limits •  No post-contingency overloads exceed emergency thermal ratings •  No post-contingency voltages exceed emergency voltage limits •  No non-converged contingencies •  All defined transfer limits are observed [A transfer limit is the MW flow limitation across an interface to protect the system from large voltage drops or collapse caused by any viable contingency— in some regions this may be referred to an interconnection reliability operating limit (IROL)] •  No defined stability limits are violated If it appears that the expected outage will adversely impact system reliability, the ISO/RTO will determine if a better window of opportunity exists for this work to be scheduled. The ISO/RTO will deny the outage request if there are no satisfactory mitigation measures to address all the identified reliability concerns. If conflicting outages that are submitted for the same timeframe from different TOs, the outage submitted first for that timeframe will have priority. The ISO/RTO is to communicate to the TOs the final status of all outage requests (either approved or denied) at least a few days before the requested start of the outage.

18_Santoso_Sec18_p1097-1168.indd 1124

23/11/17 10:54 AM

Power System Operations   1125 

18.6  IMPACT OF REGULATORY ISSUES ON POWER SYSTEM OPERATIONS BY MIKE BRYSON By now you have read an overview of a few of the aspects of power system operations to include power balance, frequency control, EMS systems, and outage scheduling. This subsection focuses on some of the impacts of regulatory issues on system operations. It explores the more prominent U.S. regulatory agencies but also touches on state regulatory bodies as well as international regulatory bodies. That discussion also includes some of the more conspicuous regulations introduced by those bodies and addresses the impact of some of these regulations on system operations. One of the more active and relevant U.S. Federal Regulatory Agencies is the FERC which is an independent agency that regulates the interstate transmission of natural gas, oil, and electricity. FERC also regulates natural gas and hydropower projects.a Congress established FERC with the Department of Energy Organization Act of 1977b in response to a national concern of the United States dependency on foreign energy sources and a general lack of national energy policy.c The Department of Energy (DOE) whose mission is to ensure America’s security and prosperity by addressing its energy, environmental, and nuclear challenges through transformative science and technology solutions were also established as part of this act.d While FERC has initiated numerous regulations since the years of its establishment, there are a couple of noteworthy orders in the last few decades. In April 1996, FERC issued order 888.e In the introduction to the final rule, FERC spelled out its purpose: “The legal and policy cornerstone of these rules is to remedy undue discrimination in access to the monopoly owned transmission wires that control whether and to whom electricity can be transported in interstate commerce. A second critical aspect of the rules is to address recovery of the transition costs of moving from a monopoly-regulated regime to one in which all sellers can compete on a fair basis and in which electricity is more competitively priced.”

The more significant of the two aspects was the requirement for utilities to file an open access transmission tariff. This fundamentally allowed energy producers and purchasers to conduct energy transactions over the bulk transmission system regardless of who had built the infrastructure or who owned it. While the rule pushed traditional utilities into putting in place processes to make available for sale unused capacity on the transmission system, it also established a significant set of business rules and financial transactions which has impacted system operations for years. The rule required a public website to allow customers to view available transmission capacity and request “transmission service” for purchase. These websites became known as “OASIS” sites. Once transmission service was purchased, it quickly became necessary for system operators to manage the actual day-to-day transactions and their impact on system operations. This may be a good segue to discuss NERC, which has been mentioned earlier in this section. In June 1968, the National Electric Reliability Council (NERC) is established by the electricity industry in response to the 1965 blackout and the recommendation of the Federal Power Commission, which is the predecessor to FERC. Nine regional reliability organizations are formalized under NERC.f Eventually this organization is formalized as the electric reliability organization (ERO) envisioned in the Energy Policy Act of 2005.g The new North American Electric Reliability Corporation (NERC) is a not-for-profit international regulatory authority whose mission is to assure the reliability of the bulk power system in North America. NERC develops and enforces reliability standards; annually assesses http://www.ferc.gov/about/about.asp. https://www.gpo.gov/fdsys/pkg/STATUTE-91/pdf/STATUTE-91-Pg565.pdf. http://energy.gov/management/office-management/operational-management/history/brief-history-department-energy. d http://www.energy.gov/about-us. e http://www.ferc.gov/legal/maj-ord-reg/land-docs/rm95-8-00v.txt. f  http://www.nerc.com/AboutNERC/Documents/History%20AUG13.pdf. g http://energy.gov/sites/prod/files/2013/10/f3/epact_2005.pdf. a b c

18_Santoso_Sec18_p1097-1168.indd 1125

23/11/17 10:54 AM

1126  SECTION EIGHTEEN

seasonal and long‐term reliability; monitors the bulk power system through system awareness; and educates, trains, and certifies industry personnel. NERC is the ERO for North America, subject to oversight by the FERC and governmental authorities in Canada. NERC’s jurisdiction includes users, owners, and operators of the bulk power system, which serves more than 334 million people.h Back in 1997, NERC was still a voluntary organization of industry participants, but it developed the initial “etag”i concept to allow system operators to manage energy transfers between operating regions. As described above, NERC eventually became the ERO reporting to FERC under Energy Policy Act of 2005. As the ERO, NERC is responsible for mandatory reliability standards, so the voluntary “etag” spreadsheet developed in 1997j is now part of the mandatory interchange scheduling and coordination (INT) standards.k System operators have been using some form of the NERC tagging system for the past 19 years to plan the system, model the impact of transactions on reliability of the system, monitor transactions in real time, and curtail and reload transactions that have a negative effect on system operations. In February 2007, FERC issued an additional order—Order Nos. 890 and 890-A and 890-B—as Improvements in Open Access Transmission, e.g., Transmission Planning (Part 1) to add additional clarity and standardization to the open access standard it had established in 1996.l This order also addressed consistency in transmission planning standards across regions. Another regulatory agency that impacts system operations is the United States Environmental Protection Agency (EPA). “The mission of EPA is to protect human health and the environment. EPA’s purpose is to ensure that all Americans are protected from significant risks to human health and the environment based on the best available scientific information; federal laws protecting human health and the environment are enforced fairly and effectively; environmental protection is an integral consideration in U.S. policies concerning natural resources, human health, economic growth, energy, transportation, agriculture, industry, and international trade, and these factors are similarly considered in establishing environmental policy.”m

The EPA was established on December 2, 1970.n From the time of the initiating act, The Clean Air Act of 1970 that established the EPA, the agency has been establishing escalating standards for air and water emissions which govern the way power generation operates on the system. These rules affect the way units operate, particularly in hot weather conditions. For example, the rules limit air emissions, water temperature, and water quality conditions which, depending on the circumstances, impact how and whether generators operate. In December 2011, the EPA announced standards to limit mercury, acid gases and other toxic pollution from power plants.o This rule defined pollution limits that individual facilities must meet by a set date. These rules set technology-based emissions limitation standards for mercury and other toxic air pollutants, reflecting levels achieved by the best-performing sources currently—coal- and oil-fired electric generating units (EGUs) with a capacity of 25 MW or greater. The EPA gave existing generators up to 4 years to comply with Mercury Air Toxic Standards (MATS). “From data reports provided to the Energy Information Administration (EIA), about 16 gigawatts of generating capacity will be retired in 2015, of which nearly 13 gigawatts is coal-fired. The coal-fired capacity will be retired primarily because of EPA’s Mercury and Air Toxics Standards (MATS), which requires coal- and oil-fired electric generators to meet stricter emissions standards by incorporating emissions control technologies or retire the generators.”p

http://www.nerc.com/Pages/default.aspx. http://www.nerc.com/docs/oc/is/Interchange_Reference_Guidlines_V2_2012_02_17_Final.pdf. http://www.nerc.com/comm/OC/Operating%20Manual%20DL/opman_20140825.pdf. k http://www.nerc.net/standardsreports/standardssummary.aspx. l http://www.ferc.gov/industries/electric/indus-act/oatt-reform.asp. m https://www.epa.gov/aboutepa/our-mission-and-what-we-do. n https://www.epa.gov/aboutepa/origins-epa. o https://www3.epa.gov/mats/actions.html. p http://instituteforenergyresearch.org/analysis/eia-13-gigawatts-of-coal-capacity-to-retire-in-2015-due-to-epa-regulation/. h i j

18_Santoso_Sec18_p1097-1168.indd 1126

23/11/17 10:54 AM

Power System Operations   1127 

As a result of this rule and other factors—such as innovative extraction methods that allow for the cheap recovery of Shale natural gas—an unprecedented quantity of generation has retired. The impact of the retirement of this magnitude had a significant effect on system operations in the regions where these units retired. While ultimately the regions were able to be operated reliably, new rules to compensate for the loss of some of the reliability parameters of the retiring units needed to be added. Much of the replacement generators were renewable or gas-fired generation.q Renewable generation is an intermittent energy source—only providing needed electricity during certain hours of the day, and additional gas generation added pressure to the gas pipeline infrastructure during peak energy demand periods such as the winter months. System operators needed to make adjustments in the way units are scheduled and cycled throughout the days given the changing dynamics of the generation mix. In the coming decades, the generation mix may also be affected by the EPA’s Clean Power Plan (CPP). “On August 3, 2015, President Obama and EPA announced the Clean Power Plan – a historic and important step in reducing carbon pollution from power plants that takes real action on climate change. Shaped by years of unprecedented outreach and public engagement, the final Clean Power Plan is fair, flexible and designed to strengthen the fast-growing trend toward cleaner and lower-polluting American energy. With strong but achievable standards for power plants, and customized goals for states to cut the carbon pollution that is driving climate change, the Clean Power Plan provides national consistency, accountability and a level playing field while reflecting each state’s energy mix. It also shows the world that the United States is committed to leading global efforts to address climate change.”r

While the CPP rule is still under review by the Supreme Court, many states have already initiated the process to develop plans to address the targets by the year 2030. This rule is likely to also drive a number of both retirements and new entry in power generation which will in turn require system operators to adapt to changes in future resource mixes. State regulatory agencies also affect system operations. One example of this is the Public Utilities Commission of Ohio (PUCO) which “affects every household in Ohio. That’s because the PUCO regulates providers of all kinds of utility services, including electric and natural gas companies, local and long distance telephone companies, water and wastewater companies, rail and trucking companies. The PUCO was created to assure Ohioans adequate, safe and reliable public utility services at a fair price. More recently, the PUCO gained responsibility for facilitating competitive utility choices for Ohio consumers.”s

Most states rely on utilities commission. These commissions are responsible for a number of areas including electricity. While FERC governs electricity at the wholesale level, the states make the rules at the residential, retail, and distribution levels. This could include areas such as competitive retail electric service providers, interconnection services, electric reliability, safety and customer service standards enforcement, and certification to operate as a provider of competitive retail electric services, etc.t Most of this discussion has dealt with regulations from federal and state agencies in the United States. Similar regulations promulgated by parallel state and federal utility commissions and agency exist around the world, all effecting the way operators have to run their systems on a daily basis. One example of this is the Australian Energy Market Commission (AEMC). The AEMC is “The rule maker for Australian electricity and gas markets. We make and amend the National Electricity Rules, National Gas Rules and National Energy Retail Rules. We also provide market development advice to governments… The Reliability Panel forms part of the AEMC’s institutional arrangements that http://www.eia.gov/todayinenergy/detail.cfm?id=20292. https://www.epa.gov/cleanpowerplan/fact-sheet-overview-clean-power-plan. http://www.puco.ohio.gov/puco/index.cfm/how-the-puco-works-for-you/#sthash.neAZ54E3.dpbs. t http://www.puco.ohio.gov/puco/index.cfm/rules/#sthash.Cp9QRE7g.dpbs. q r s

18_Santoso_Sec18_p1097-1168.indd 1127

23/11/17 10:54 AM

1128  SECTION EIGHTEEN

support the national electricity system. The Panel’s core functions relate to the safety, security and reliability of the national electricity system.”u

This has been a brief overview of just a few of the regulations and regulatory agencies which have affected system operators at the wholesale or bulk level over the years. Additional details for the agencies and regulations are available at some of the referenced websites. Regulations are adopted by government agencies for a myriad of reasons—safety, jobs, industry growth, defense, and many others. Regulations that are addressed at the energy industry are bound to have a direct impact on some aspects of system operations whether it be the resource mix to serve energy demand, or the energy market rules which provide incentives for resources to respond to changes in system conditions.

18.7  INTERNATIONAL EXPERIENCES 18.7.1  Power System Operation Practices in European Countries BY PATRICK PANCIATICI AND FEDERICO MILANO European Power System.  The European power system is one of the largest power systems in the world. It has been built and improved during the last 100 years, even though the period of maximum expansion began after WWII. The system is characterized by a vast diversity in the generation mix, the voltage levels, and the structure of the grid, which is densely meshed in some areas and mostly radial in some peninsulas. In recent years, the transition toward a low-carbon economy associated with the shutdown of nuclear power plants has led to rapid changes in the generation mix all over Europe. This trend is clearly shown by some statistics related to the European Union section of the grid (EU-28,v Source: Eurostat), as reported in the subsections below. Generation Mix in Europe (EU-28).  EU-28 total electricity generation in 2013 was 3262 TWh, which is a 1.1% decrease compared with the same figure in 2012. For the first time, renewable energy resources, with a total production of 890 TWh, have the highest share in electricity production (27.2%), followed closely by nuclear power plants (26.9%) and coal fired plants (26.7%) then gas (16.6%), oil (1.9%) and non-renewable waste (0.8%). Over the last two decades, there have been significant changes in the structure of renewable energy resources used for electricity production. In 1990, 94.2% of electricity obtained from renewable sources was produced from hydro power plants, while in 2013 the share of hydro energy was less than half of that. In 2013, the figures of renewable energy sources used for electricity production were 45.4% hydro, 26.5% wind, 9.2% solid biofuel, 9.1% solar PV, 6.0% biogas, 2.1% municipal renewable waste, 0.7% geothermal energy, and 1% other sources. The trend in electricity production of nuclear power plants shows a moderate increase from 1999 to 2004. From 2004 to 2013, however, the production of nuclear power fell by 13.0%. Germany accounted for the sharpest decrease during that period (-41.8%), as several nuclear power plants were shut down. In the same period, electric energy produced from coal, which had been decreasing since the 90s, rose by 9.7% from 2009 to 2012 and experienced a decrease of 3.3% in 2013. The installed electrical capacity increased by 70% in the period from 1990 to 2013. The figures of the installed capacity changed significantly over this period. Comparing the situation in 2013 with previous decades, the share of installed capacity of combustible fuels decreased to 50%, the http://www.aemc.gov.au/. EU-28 consists of the following countries: Austria, Belgium, Bulgaria, Croatia, Cyprus, Czech Republic, Denmark, Estonia, Finland, France, Germany, Greece, Hungary, Ireland, Italy, Latvia, Lithuania, Luxembourg, Malta, Netherlands, Poland, Portugal, Romania, Slovakia, Slovenia, Spain, Sweden, United Kingdom. u v

18_Santoso_Sec18_p1097-1168.indd 1128

23/11/17 10:54 AM

Power System Operations   1129 

share of hydro to 16% and the share of nuclear to 13%. On the other hand, the share of wind increased to 12% and the share of solar to 9%, while geothermal and tide, wave and ocean have remained negligible. Electricity Consumption (EU-28).  During the last decades, the European electricity consumption in the EU-28 has significantly increased (32.5%) in the period from 1990 to 2008. In 2009, due to the worldwide financial and economic crisis, consumption decreased by 5.2% but recovered immediately in 2010 almost back to the 2008 level. Overall, in the period from 1990 to 2013, electricity consumption increased by 28.1%. Residential and services sectors are the main responsible for this growth. It is expected, however, that two aspects will affect this trend in the next decade. On one hand, strong incentives and policies to improve the efficiency of consumption processes, e.g., building insulation, and optimization of industrial process. On the other hand, the gradual substitution of fossil-fuel with electricity, e.g., electrical transportation and building heating. The resulting trend is not easy to anticipate, thus further complicating generation and grid planning. Exchanges of Electricity.  The creation of the internal energy market for electricity and gas in EU-28 has fostered the exchanges of electricity between European countries. As a consequence, cross border capacities have been potentiated and better utilized through shorter-term grid capacity allocation mechanisms. In the past, the interconnections were utilized mainly to ensure the reliability of the European power system and energy was exchanged based on long-term constant contracts. In 2013, Italy was the largest net importer; France and Germany were the main net exporters (see Fig. 18-14).

45000

Net imports

35000 25000 15000

GWh

5000 –5000 –15000 –25000

–45000

EU-28 EA-19 Belgium Bulgaria Czech Republic Denmark Germany Estonia Ireland Greece Spain France Croatia Italy Cyprus Latvia Lithuania Luxembourg Hungary Malta Netherlands Austria Poland Portugal Romania Slovenia Slovakia Finland Sweden United Kingdom Norway Montenegro FYR of Macedonia Albania Serbia Turkey

Net exports

–35000

FIGURE 18-14  Electricity net imports by country in 2013. (Eurostat.)

18_Santoso_Sec18_p1097-1168.indd 1129

23/11/17 10:54 AM

1130  SECTION EIGHTEEN

The yearly generation exported and consumption imported by each EU-18 countries in 2014 are shown in Figs. 18-15 and 18-16, respectively. These quantities are defined as follows. Yearly Generation Exported. The share of generation of a country which is physically exported by a country to its neighbors is the ratio between the country’s net exports and generation. Yearly Consumption Imported. The ratio between its imports and its consumption represents the share of its yearly consumption which is covered by physical imports from its neighbors. As it can be observed in Figs. 18-15 and 18-16, in 2014, 10 countries of ENTSO-E’s perimeter export more than 10% of their annual national generation to neighboring countries; whereas 11 countries of ENTSO-E import more than 10% of their annual internal consumption from other ENTSO-E countries. The situation is evolving rapidly and the volatility of exchanges increased with the integration of more and more renewable energy sources (wind, solar) in the system. Figure 18-17 shows the exchanges between France and Germany. During sunny days in the south of Germany; Germany exports around noon and imports during the night. Share of yearly generation exported

10.5% 0% 13.4% 23.3%

0.%

0.6% 0%

9.1%

0.% 0.%

0.3% 0.1%

7.1%

0.4% 20.8%

12.1%

13.2% 0%

1.5% 17.2%

3.3% 0%

0.8% 16.7%

0.7%

2.2%

3.5%

6.5%

Exports:

11.4% 15.5%

0.2% 0%

≥ 10% of its generation

Isolated/no data

≥ 5% and < 10% of its generation < 5% of its generation FIGURE 18-15  Share of yearly generation exported in 2014 by EU-28 countries. (ENTSO-E.)

18_Santoso_Sec18_p1097-1168.indd 1130

23/11/17 10:54 AM

Power System Operations   1131 

Share of yearly consumption imported

0.3% 18.9% 2% 0.4% 4.4% 68.1%

17.4% 4.4%

6.3%

11.3%

14.8% 0.6%

1.7%

19.7% 0.1% 0%

7.3% 5.7% 14.3%

18.6%

35.7%

0.7% 29%

1.8%

0% 0.3%

43.6%

8%

8.3%

Imports:

0%

36.4% 17.7%

≥ 10% of its consumption

Isolated/no data

≥ 5% and < 10% of its consumption < 5% of its consumption FIGURE 18-16  Share of yearly consumption imported in 2014 by EU-28 countries. (ENTSO-E.)

Synchronous Areas.  There are four synchronous areas in Europe. The nominal frequency is 50 Hz in all areas. 1. The continental Europe area (CE) includes part or all of Austria, Belgium, Bosnia and Herzegovina, Bulgaria, Croatia, Czech Republic, Denmark (western part), France, Germany, Greece, Hungary, Italy, Luxembourg, Macedonia, Montenegro, the Netherlands, Poland, Portugal, Romania, Serbia, Slovakia, Slovenia, Spain, and Switzerland. 2. Great Britain (GB) alone constitutes a synchronous area. 3. The all-island Irish system (IRE) composed of Republic of Ireland and Northern Ireland is another synchronous area. 4. The synchronous inter-Nordic system (NE) includes the transmission grids of Sweden, Norway, eastern Denmark, and Finland.

18_Santoso_Sec18_p1097-1168.indd 1131

23/11/17 10:54 AM

1132  SECTION EIGHTEEN

MW

MW

Exchanges between France and Germany along with renewable generation in Germary

30000

3000

25000

2500

20000

2000

15000

1500

10000

1000

5000

500

0

0 –500 –1000 –1500 –2000

Production Samedi 24/09

Net exchanges

Dimanche 25/09

Lundi 26/09

Wind in Germany

Mardi 27/09

Mercredi 28/09

Photovoltaic in Germany

Jeudi 29/09

Vendredi 30/09

–2500

Exchanges FR 2 DE

FIGURE 18-17  Power exchanges between France and Germany. (RTE.)

A small west electricity island of Ukraine is synchronized with the grid of CE. Albania is operating the national grid synchronously with the synchronous grid of CE. Note that also the grids of Morocco, Algeria, and Tunisia are synchronized with the European grid through the Gibraltar ac link. Finally, the grid of Turkey was synchronized to CE in April 2015. Despite being EU Member States for more than a decade, Lithuania, Latvia, and Estonia, have remained a part of the huge synchronous Russian Power System (IPS/UPS). In December 2015, two HVDC interconnections connecting Lithuania to Poland and Sweden have been officially inaugurated. ENTSO-E.  ENTSO-E is the association of European TSOs for electricity (see Fig. 18-18). The TSOs are entities that operate independently from other electricity market players and are responsible for the bulk transmission of electric power on the main high-voltage transmission networks. TSOs provide grid access to the electricity market players (i.e., generating companies, traders, suppliers, distributors, and directly connected customers) according to non-discriminatory and transparent rules. In order to ensure the security of supply, they also guarantee the safe operation and maintenance of the system. In Europe, TSOs are generally owners of grid’s assets and in charge of the development of the grid infrastructure. Diversity of European Power Systems.  There are significant differences between the grids of each country in Europe. These differences are not limited to the geographical diversity (e.g., coast lines, plains, and mountains) and meteorological conditions (e.g., Arctic, Continental, Atlantic, and Mediterranean), which are clearly not identical all over the continent and power systems have been designed taking into account these constraints. The urbanization and the density of population are also quite different, leading again to different choices for the grid design. Finally, the variety of

18_Santoso_Sec18_p1097-1168.indd 1132

23/11/17 10:54 AM

Power System Operations   1133 

IS

ENTSO-E members

FI NO SE EE

RU

LV DK IE

RU

LT BY

GB

NL

PL DE

BE

UA

CZ

LU

SK FR

AT

CH

MD

HU RO

SI HR BA

IT PT

RS BG

ME

MK AL

ES

GR

MA

DZ

TR

TN CY

FIGURE 18-18  The 42 TSOs from 35 countries that are members of ENTSO-E. (ENTSO-E.)

national energy policies amplifies even more these differences. Table 18-1 shows statistics illustrating this large diversity. Note that small generating units ( 200 kV (km) 60,000 50,000 f(x) = 0.24x + 1620.27 R2 = 0.81

40,000 30,000 20,000 10,000 0 0

20,000 40,000 60,000

80,000 100,000 120,000 140,000 160,000 180,000 200,000 Generation capacity (MW)

FIGURE 18-20  Correlation between generation capacity and length of circuits.

radial mode, while transmission systems are active and meshed. However, due to the high penetration of renewable sources, this distinction is not valid anymore. This has led to the current situation where most European DSOs partly operate high voltage networks as well. The DSOs of only six EU member states—namely, Cyprus, Estonia, France, Italy, Lithuania, and Latvia—operate exclusively low and medium voltage lines. Figure 18-21 illustrates the voltage levels operated by DSOs and/or TSOs in the European power system. Power System Operation in European Countries.  The objective of power system operation (PSO) is to ensure a secure, sustainable, and efficient electrical supply for all the European citizens. That means the best possible utilization of existing grid assets allowing the usage of the most efficient and sustainable electrical generations. Since the grids have technical limitations and finite capacities, as it would be economically inefficient to design grids with no limitations, the PSO effectively consists in finding the trade-off between efficiency, security and economic dispatch. PSO is also essential to

18_Santoso_Sec18_p1097-1168.indd 1135

23/11/17 10:54 AM

1136  SECTION EIGHTEEN

TABLE 18-2  Lengths of Circuits per EU-28 Countries (ENTSO-E) Lengths of circuits > 200 kV on December 31st 2015 (km) ISO country code AT BA BE BG CH CZ DE DK EE ES FI FR GB GR HR HU IE+NI IS IT LT LU LV NL PL PT RO RS SE SI SK

L: Total length (km) 6 729 2 390 1 929 5 256 6 700 5 526 34 615 1 641 1 692 39 613 6 690 48 723 18 630 4 698 2 458 4 640 3 275 857 21 931 1 812 259 1 360 2 000 13 990 6 147 9 966 3 975 14 567 997 2 332

G: Total generation capacity (MW) 24 226 3 638 21 289 12 710 8 128 20 627 187 904 13 922 2 984 106 188 17 681 129 310 70 641 17 570 4 336 8 176 9 601 2 633 119 720 3 794 2 037 2 884 32 238 37 472 18 533 20 419 8 558 22 812 3 722 7 985

cope with low frequency stressed conditions in particular during planned outages and to maintain grid assets. PSO is based on the definition of reliability criteria, as defined below. Reliability Criteria.  Power systems are affected by external factors (threats) including: •  Natural hazards •  Human/technical errors •  Terrorist attacks, sabotages These threats are not very likely but their impact is unacceptable (i.e., large and long lasting blackouts) for our modern societies, which is more and more dependent on electrical supply. Clearly, it is impossible to design and to operate a power system in order to cope with all the possible threats so that they do not have any impact on the electrical supply. The well-accepted N-1 contingency criterion states that the system should be able to withstand at all times a credible contingency, that is, unexpected failure or outage of a system component (such as a line, transformer, or generator— in such a way, that the system is capable of accommodating the new operational situation without violating operational security limits. Credible contingencies are, in this case, the outage of a single component. This criterion is based on the outage of a component, regardless the threat causing it. For example, in case of a permanent short circuit (the threat is generally lightning), local protections open breakers to isolate the short circuit causing the outage of a power line.

18_Santoso_Sec18_p1097-1168.indd 1136

23/11/17 10:54 AM

Power System Operations   1137  Country/ MV HV voltage LV 3kV 5kV 6kV 10kV 11kV 15kV 20kV 22kV 23kV 24kV 25kV 30kV 33kV 35kV 36kV 38kV 45kV 50kV 52kV 60kV 65kV 66kV 70kV 110kV 120kV 130kV 132kV 150kV level AT BE* BG CY CZ DE DK EE ES FI FR GR HU IE IT** LT LU LV MT NL*** PL PT RO SE SI SK UK NO

FIGURE 18-21  Voltage levels operated by DSOs and TSOs in the European power system. Asterisks in the figure indicate the actual utilized voltage levels. (Eurelectric.)

In the past, the N-1 criterion was implemented in a purely preventive way. The operating conditions of the power system were selected in order to cope with all credible contingencies without taking any action immediately after the occurrence of a failure or an outage. Such an implementation is not optimal and indeed one needs to make costly decisions (increase of the grid losses, adjustment of generation, postponing of maintenance works, etc.) even if the failure/outage never occurs. The substation automation and advanced ICT system (SCADA/EMS) in control centers allowed moving towards a smarter implementation using corrective actions (remedial actions) through local automated controls or simple rules in control centers. The N-1 criterion is a very basic risk based approach since it does not consider explicitly the probability of failure/outage (fuzzy concept of credible contingency) and assuming that the state of the system is perfectly known even for day-ahead assessment. With the massive integration of renewables, in the European System, the N-1 criterion must be reviewed and this can be done by taking into account the joint probability of a failure/outage and uncertainties on the system state. The concept of joint probability is better explained through an example. Let us consider a wind farm with 100 MW of installed capacity and assume that this power plant will never produce more than 30 MW in average over a year. If the N-1 contingency criterion were strictly enforced, the associated upgrade of the grid should imply to build two power lines of 100 MW capacity each to properly accommodate the maximum generation of the wind power plant. In case of line outage, in fact, the other line could stand the total power flow. However, this solution is clearly non-economical as the transmission line would be underutilized for the majority of the time.

18_Santoso_Sec18_p1097-1168.indd 1137

23/11/17 10:54 AM

1138  SECTION EIGHTEEN

A much more reasonable solution is to build two power lines of 50 MW each. The probability to have an outage of power line simultaneously with a wind speed larger than the average annual value, in fact, is very low. This is only a simple example and complex systems require sophisticated analysis.w Reliability risk analysis is so important that ENTSO-E as well as most European TSOs have defined their own criteria. Some of these are described in the following subsections. N-1 Criterion: ENTSO-E Rules and Some TSO Practices.  ENTSO-E defines general principles regarding “reliability criteria” focusing on coordination. For Central Continental Europe, the document UCTEx OH—Policy 3: Operational Security—provides a set of rules, some of which are summarized below. The rules reported in the remainder of this subsection are “mandatory” for all the TSOs of Central Continental Europe. N-1 Contingency Criterion—ENTSO-E Policies.  A1-S1. Any event of the contingency list (normal and exceptional types of contingencies considered in the contingency list) must not endanger the security of interconnected operation. After any of these contingencies the operational condition within the TSO’s responsibility area must not lead to the triggering of an uncontrollable cascading outage propagating across the borders or having an impact outside the borders of the TSO itself— which can be summarized as the “no cascading with impact outside my borders” principle. Following conditions must be fulfilled after the implementation of remedial actionsy: •  A1-S1.1. Power Flow Pattern Within Security Limits. All current values of individual network elements of a responsibility area must remain under control avoiding the impact of cascading effects outside the area. •  A1-S1.2. Voltage Deviation. Any contingency of the contingency list should not cause a voltage drop outside acceptable operating limits within the TSO’s responsibility area, which can initiate voltage collapse and cascading outages with impact outside the area. •  A1-S1.3. Locally Limited Consequences. As long as the secure operation of the interconnected system is ensured, locally limited and predictable consumption outages can be tolerated by the TSO within its responsibility area. •  A1-S1.4. Limiting Cascading Effects. If the TSO anticipates the risk of a cascading effect with impact outside its borders, it must inform the affected neighbor(s). The neighbors complement their respective security computation in order to check the cascading risk at home and to prepare remedial actions by mutual agreement. •  A1-S2. Coordination for Exceptional Type of Contingency. It is the responsibility of the operator of the concerned network elements to establish the list of exceptional contingencies utilized for security calculations and to communicate this list to the neighboring TSOs. Such list shall be based on the likelihood of occurrence of the event. •  A1-S3. N-1 Security Calculations. Each TSO has to perform N-1 security calculations to assess the effects of contingencies on their responsibility area concerning power flow and voltage patterns. •  A1-S3.2. Calculations in the Operational Planning Phase. The N situation has to be determined by load flow calculationsz on the basis of adequate forecast.aa Each TSO has to perform N-1 simulations for all the contingencies of the contingency list. •  A1-S3.3. Calculations in Real-Time Operation. The N situation has to be determined by state estimation on the basis of measurements and topology. Each TSO must perform an automatic N-1 simulation for all the contingencies of the contingency list in real time. R. Billington, R. Karki, A. K. Verma, eds. “Reliability and Risk Evaluation of Wind Integrated Power Systems,” Springer, 2013. UCTE is the former name of Continental Europe section of ENTSO-E. ENTSO-E defines remedial actions as normal means to cope with “credible” contingencies. z Here, the expression “load flow” is not precise. Remedial actions must be taken into account. Time domain simulations or, at least, quasi-steady-state simulations (sequence of power flow computations) should be solved. aa In this context, “adequate forecast” means the most likely system status. This appears to be a deterministic approach even for day-ahead assessment despite the increasing amount of uncertainties. w x y

18_Santoso_Sec18_p1097-1168.indd 1138

23/11/17 10:54 AM

Power System Operations   1139 

•  A1-S3.3.1. Frequency of Calculation. The automatic N-1 simulation must run periodically, at least every 15 minutes in real time. N-1 Contingency Criterion—TSO Practices.  Some TSOs go beyond the minimal rules defined by ENTSO-E. In any case, the method to define the contingency list (credible contingencies) is not imposed by ENTSO-E and some TSO have some specific rules to define this list. Moreover, N-2 contingencies can be added to the list. For example, if two power lines are installed on the same towers at least during a significant length (typically more than 10 km). In some countries, power lines with two different voltage levels can be found on the same tower. In this case, the N-2 contingency consists in the simultaneous outage of both lines. The addition of N-2 contingencies can be also based on forecast weather conditions, e.g., if a thunderstorm is expected. More and more remedial actions are used to ensure the system reliability and some TSOs must simulate these remedial actions in their contingencies analysis using a sequence of power flows or time domain simulations. In particular, phase shifting transformers are installed in order to control the power flows and some of them are equipped with local automated control which changes the tap position automatically when the current is higher than a given threshold. The period with which real-time contingency analysis is repeated is generally 5 minute. In order to improve the coordination, groups of TSOs had created coordination centers: CORESO (www.coreso.eu) and TSC (www.tscnet.eu). In March 2016, ENTSO-E approved a Regional Security Coordination Initiative and each TSO must be now part of at least one initiative.ab Coordination centers perform security analysis using a full model of the transmission grid of their area in day ahead, intraday and real time based on data provided by all European TSOs. These coordination centers focus on cross border issues: a failure/outage in country A could induce a constraint violation in country B and an efficient remedial action could involve another country C. In case of possible cross border impacts, a coordination center alerts all involved TSO main control centers and propose coordinated actions. The coordination centers are service providers and coordination facilitators. The decisions remain to the TSO, which has the legal responsibility to manage the grid. Balancing Principles: Load-Frequency Control and Active Power Reserves.  This subsection describes relevant balancing principles defined by ENTSO-E and rules in the network code on loadfrequency control and reserves. This network code defines three levels of controls, as follows: 1. Frequency Containment (FC): FC shall aim at containing the system frequency deviation after an incident within a pre-defined range which is similar to the traditional primary load-frequency control. 2. Frequency Restoration (FR): FR shall aim at restoring the system frequency to its nominal frequency of 50 Hz which is similar to the traditional secondary load-frequency control. 3. Replacement Reserves (RR): RR replace the activated reserves to restore the available reserves in the system or for economic optimization which is similar to the tertiary load-frequency control. The network code defines frequency quality parameters for each synchronous area. Some of these parameters are shown in Table 18-3. The network code defines also the principles to select the required reserves associated for the three levels of controls. For the frequency containment reserves (FCR), the capacity required for the synchronous area shall at least cover the Reference Incident of the synchronous area, based on a deterministic analysis and respecting the frequency quality defining parameters. The size of the reference incident must respect the two following conditions: 1. For the Synchronous Area CE. The reference incident is the absolute value of the largest imbalance that may result from an instantaneous change of active power of one or two power generating modules or one or two HVDC interconnectors connected to the same electrical node or the ab More information is available at: https://www.entsoe.eu/news-events/announcements/announcements-archive/Pages/ News/historical-agreement-on-regional-operational-coordination.aspx.

18_Santoso_Sec18_p1097-1168.indd 1139

23/11/17 10:54 AM

1140  SECTION EIGHTEEN

TABLE 18-3  ENTSO-E Network Code: Frequency Quality Parameters per Synchronous Area

Standard frequency range Maximum instantaneous frequency deviation Maximum steady-state frequency deviation Time to recover frequency Frequency recovery range Time to restore frequency Frequency restoration range Alert state trigger time Maximum number of minutes outside the   standard frequency range per year

CE

GB

IRE

±50 mHz 800 mHz 200 mHz not used not used 15 min not used 5 min 15 000 (3%)

±200 mHz 800 mHz 500 mHz 1 min ±500 mHz 10 min ±200 mHz 10 min 15 000 (3%)

±200 mHz 1000 mHz 500 mHz 1 min ±500 mHz 20 min ±200 mHz 10 min 10 500 (2%)

NE ±100 mHz 1000 mHz 500 mHz not used not used 15 min ±100 mHz 5 min 15 000 (3%)

maximum instantaneous loss of active power consumption due to the tripping of one or two connection points. 2. For the Synchronous Areas GB, IRE, and NE. The reference incident is the largest imbalance that may result from an instantaneous change of active power of a single power generating module, single demand facility, single HVDC interconnector or from a tripping of an ac-line or the maximum instantaneous loss of active power consumption due to the tripping of one or two connections points, separate for positive and negative direction. The typical value for the FCR is 3000 MW in CE area. The sharing between the countries based on the previous year statistics gives for example around 700 MW for France, 600 MW for Germany, and 100 MW for Belgium. The interested reader can find in “The Supporting Document for the Network Code on Load-Frequency Control and Reserves” more details on all the processes discussed above.ac Thermal Limits Management.  The thermal limits of transmission assets are the main constraints which are manageable in control centers by operators. Indeed, these are not fast processes (generally last few minutes) and the operators have time to act in order to relieve these constraints. Overhead power lines, underground/undersea cables, and transformers have different characteristics but all these branches have some thermal limits which impose a maximum capacity. Generally, each TSO defines maximum loading capacity versus duration of the loading by branch. The following are relevant quantities: •  Permanently admissible transmission loading (PATL): this is the loading in Amps, MVA or MW that can be accepted by a branch for an unlimited duration. •  Temporarily admissible transmission loading (TATL) that is an overload corresponding to a fixed percentage of the PATL for a given duration is allowed (for example, 115% of the PATL can be accepted during 15 minutes). •  Several specific couples (TATL, admissible duration) are calculated for each branch taking into accounts its particular configuration (e.g., age, health index, and local climate) and condition of functioning (e.g., for a given line, it can be defined one TATL acceptable during 20 minutes and another one acceptable during 10 minutes). •  Tripping current without delay (TC) is the maximum admissible instantaneous current. This value can also be applied considering potential bottlenecks due to substations. Note that, effectively, PATL is a temporarily admissible transmission loading which could last indefinitely and TC is a TATL which could not last more than one second. We have PATL < TATL(d1) < …< TATRL(dn) < TC; d1 > d2> .. > dn; with di the duration. ac The document is available at http://networkcodes.entsoe.eu/wp-content/uploads/2013/08/130628-NC_LFCR-Supporting_ Document-Issue1.pdf.

18_Santoso_Sec18_p1097-1168.indd 1140

23/11/17 10:54 AM

Power System Operations   1141 

Management of the PATL and the Overload Conditions.  The fulfillment of the PATL and other overloading conditions (TATL and admissible duration) can be undertaken in different ways. For example: •  By the dispatcher in control centers who can be supported for that by his SCADA/EMS; in real time, in case of violation of the PATL or TATL respectively, no local device will order the tripping of the branch. In that case, the dispatcher decides whether to open the network element or not. •  By local overload protections in which several conditions (TATL; admissible duration) can be implemented. If the loading has not come back under a given TATL after its allowed duration, the local protection will order immediately and automatically the tripping of the network element without any possible action of the dispatcher as to stop this process. In this case, the dispatcher must act before the local protection to relieve the violation. This type of protection is imposed by laws in some countries (for example in France) to ensure the safety around the electrical assets. •  The tripping current without delay (TC) can be monitored by a distance protection or by an overload protection, but in any case, the tripping of the line will be ordered immediately without any possible remedial actions performed by the dispatcher, and is effective at the end of the cycle of the protection device (less than 1 second in case of a distance protection, less than 1 minute in case of an overload protection). Definition of the Temporarily Admissible Transmission Loading.  Thermal limits obviously depend on the local temperature, wind, moisture, etc., around the branch counterbalancing or affecting the heating effect of the current in the branch (i.e., Joule effect). Hence, the TATL are defined as per branch depending on local weather conditions. TATL can be assigned a single value for the whole duration of a year but, more often, seasonal values are utilized, e.g., four values, corresponding to the four seasons are used in France. The definition of the seasons can be different for each branch. In some cases, also day/night values are used. This approach is a first step toward dynamic rating. With the integration of wind generation in power system, TSOs try to exploit the relevant fact that when the wind blows, a high power must be transmitted but, in some favorable conditions, the wind cools down overhead power lines, thus increasing the overall grid capacity. Different types of local devices are installed to monitor the overhead power lines (and, indirectly, their current sag). Some meteorological based approaches are also proposed. The main challenge is that the benefits are mainly brought by the avoidance of costly preventive actions and accurate forecast of the dynamic capacities is a critical issue. Moreover, the complexity to operate such dynamic system is not negligible and dedicated software tools must be implemented to help the operators. The main current operational application of dynamic rating is the utilization in local controls which curtail the power generated by wind farm.ad Actions to Manage Overloading.  In general, TSOs gives priority to inexpensive actions based on the exploitation of the flexibility of the grid. Example of such non-costly actions are breaker switching; changes of PST tap positions and adjustments flows of HVDC links in parallel with ac power lines. These actions are inexpensive as they have no direct impact on the economic dispatch. TSOs can also enforce adjustments of generations, loads or flows of HVDC connected to another synchronous area but, in this case, these actions have a measurable direct impact on the market and the TSOs have to pay for these services. Unfortunately, in Europe, there is still no agreement on the price of these services, which are currently defined by each national regulatory framework. This lack of harmonization is a barrier to improve the coordination among TSOs. Voltage/Reactive Power Management.  Voltage and reactive power are mostly local phenomena. These dynamics are generally fast (i.e., less than a minute) and possible issues are mainly managed by local closed loop controls. The mission of the operators in the control centers is to define the relevant

ad Potential of Improved Wind Integration by Dynamic Thermal Rating of Overhead Lines Tilman Ringelband, Matthias Lange, Martin Dietrich, and Hans-Jürgen Haubrich. http://ieeexplore.ieee.org/stamp/stamp.jsp?arnumber=5281897.

18_Santoso_Sec18_p1097-1168.indd 1141

23/11/17 10:54 AM

1142  SECTION EIGHTEEN

set points for the local controls and to select the reactive power reserves (procurement of ancillary services). The main objectives are: •  to maintain voltage magnitudes inside the contractual range for the transmission grid users: generators, industrial loads and distribution grids; •  to minimize transmission grid losses; and •  to avoid voltage collapse that can trigger uncontrollable cascading failures. Some TSOs can change remotely the voltage set points of the automatic voltage regulators (AVR) of the generating units and large wind/photo-voltaic solar farms generally on the high voltage side of the step up transformers. Other TSOs (e.g., in France and Italy) have installed decades ago, centralized closed loop secondary voltage control which controls the voltage at some pilot nodes sending automatically, typically each 10 seconds, a new set point to the local AVR of all the generating units of an area. With this regard, TSOs must take into account the reactive power capabilities of the generating units which are generally part of the performances defined in the connection contract. In order to manage the dynamic reactive reserve of the generating units, the TSOs can use capacitor/reactor banks which can be switched remotely and by local automated controls based on voltage thresholds. Some TSOs installed SVCs in area without generating units or with costly generating units which are not started very often based on market prices. Some other TSOs negotiate special contacts to be able to run some generating units in synchronous condenser mode to avoid voltage problems. Moreover, the TSO in Germany transformed a stopped nuclear power plant (Biblis) in synchronous condenser to support the voltage in central Germany far away from the wind power in the north and photo-voltaic solar power in the south.ae During summer, the power lines are not loaded and they produce reactive power boosting the voltage. The TSOs must open power lines in order to manage the possible overvoltage. Sometimes, they have to install reactors because opening line becomes incompatible the N-1 criterion avoiding overloading. Emergency Controls (Defense Plans).  As previously mentioned, it is impossible and totally inefficient to design and operate a power system in order to avoid any possible impact on the electrical supply against every conceivable threat. Emergency controls and defense plans are designed to mitigate the impact of low probability events, in particular, to speed up the restoration. Under Frequency Load Shedding.  The most common emergency control installed all over European power system is the under frequency load shedding. The objective is to keep the system frequency beyond a minimum threshold because generating units are equipped with a local protection that disconnects the unit in case of low frequency, hence creating uncontrollable cascading failures and possibly very large blackouts. This minimum frequency is defined in the connection contract of each generating unit. The ENTSO-E network code for requirements for grid connection applicable to all generators defines the expected behavior of generating units in case of under frequency. For the continental Europe area, the behavior is defined in Table 18-4. TABLE 18-4  Expected Behavior of Generating Units in Case of Under Frequency as Defined by the ENTSO-E Network Code Frequency range

Time period for operation

47.5—48.5 Hz 48.5—49.0 Hz 49.0—51.0 Hz

To be defined by each TSO but not less than 30 minutes To be defined by each TSO but not less than the period for 47.5—48.5 Hz Unlimited

ae Further details are available at: http://www.energy.siemens.com/mx/pool/hq/automation/automation-control-pg/sppa-e3000/ Electrical_Solutions/BiblisA_RWE-Power-AG_electrical-solutions_generator_synchronous-condenser_sppa-e3000.pdf.

18_Santoso_Sec18_p1097-1168.indd 1142

23/11/17 10:54 AM

Power System Operations   1143 

The generating units are not allowed to trip instantaneously if the frequency is larger than 47.5 Hz but they can trip after certain duration; they are allowed to reduce their active power if the frequency is below 49 Hz. Moreover, at this time, there are no mandatory rules for the generating units connected to the distribution grids. Under frequency load shedding (UFLS) schemes are generally triggered if the frequency is lower than 49 Hz. Different implementations are used with different thresholds associated with different percentages of amount of load shedding; some utilize the Rate of Change of Frequency (ROCF). The system disturbance on the 4th of November 2006 is a good illustration of the UFLS efficiency. On the evening of the 4th of November 2006, there were significant east-west power flows as a result of international power trade and the obligatory exchange of wind feed-in inside Germany. The tripping of several high-voltage lines, which originated in Northern Germany, split the Continental European grid into three separate areas (west, north-east, and south-east) with significant power imbalances in each area (see Fig. 18-22). Area 1 under-frequency Area 2 over-frequency Area 3 under-frequency

FIGURE 18-22  Areas in which the ENTSO-E system split during the system disturbance on the 4th of November 2006. (ENTSO-E.)

In both under-frequency areas (west and south-east), there were sufficient generation reserves and load shedding allowed to restore the normal frequency within about 20 minutes. The imbalance between supply and demand as a result of the splitting was further increased in the first instants due to a significant amount of tripped generation connected to the distribution grid. In the over-frequency area (north-east), the lack of sufficient control over generation units contributed to deteriorate system conditions in this area (long-lasting over-frequency with severe overloading on high-voltage transmission lines). Moreover, the uncontrolled operation of dispersed generation (mainly wind and combined-heat-and-power) during the disturbance complicated the process of re-establishing normal system conditions. Full resynchronization of the UCTE system was completed 38 minutes after the separation. The involved TSOs were able to restore a normal situation in all European countries in less than 2 hours. Due to the adequate performance of automatic countermeasures (mainly UFLS) in each individual TSO control area and additional manual actions by TSOs a few minutes after the separation, a further deterioration of the system conditions and a Europe-wide black-out could be avoided but the severe frequency drop caused an interruption of supply for more than 15 million European households during less than one hour.

18_Santoso_Sec18_p1097-1168.indd 1143

23/11/17 10:54 AM

1144  SECTION EIGHTEEN

During the incident, in the Western area, load and pumpaf shedding comply with the values declared by TSOs in defense plans. A total of about 17,000 MW of consumption was shed and 1600 MW of pumps was shed. Whereas the load shedding related to the imbalance caused by the splitting of the grid amounted to about 9000 MW, additional load shedding was necessary due to tripping of generation.ag Other Emergency Control Schemes.  Emergency control schemes other than the UFLS exist in the European power system. For example, to prevent the loss of synchronism of large generators caused by the possible failure of local protection, there exists a control scheme that allows clearing fast enough three-phase short circuits. Another emergency control scheme deals with voltage collapse of importing areas with a lack of local voltage/reactive support. The voltage collapse can cause the tripping of the nearest generators leading to uncontrollable cascading failures. This happened, for example, in January 1987, in Brittany, a western region of France. On load tap changers (OLTC) play a key role in this mechanism. As a consequence of the blackout in Brittany, a dedicated emergency control was designed to stop (or, at least, to postpone) this phenomenon. Three actions are undertaken, sequentially, if the voltage magnitude does not recover: (1) the reduction of voltage set point of OLTC (-5%); (2) the blocking of OLTC; and (3) under-voltage load shedding (UVLS). Interaction With Grid Maintenance and Outage Management.  Grid assets must be maintained and maintenance must be performed without any impact on the electrical supply. Planned maintenance activities are generally performed when the system is not in stressed conditions. In the north part of Europe, this is the case, in spring and summer and fortunately weather conditions are also favorable to perform outdoor works. But some unexpected breakdowns must be fixed as soon as possible whatever the season. A strong coordination between the maintenance activity and the system operation is necessary. Indeed, in order to perform the maintenance work, some equipment must be de-energized. A specific and unusual topology in the substation must be chosen. Beforehand, this configuration must be analyzed carefully because it can impact the stability of the system in case of short circuit due to too large currents and/or too long fault clearing times. Another important issue is that the N-1 contingency criterion must be enforced also in this case. Maintenance can be postponed if existing conditions are consistently different than the expected ones (e.g., more wind power or consumption). This is a very challenging and costly decision which must be made almost in real time. Interaction With Electricity Markets.  In Europe, day ahead electricity markets are operated by market operators which are never the TSOs. At the beginning of the deregulation, electricity markets were national but, nowadays, the European Commission is pushing toward a single internal electricity market and national markets are merging in a common initiative based on multilateral market coupling. The target model is the “flow based market coupling.”ah This mechanism is already in place in the Continental West Europe (CWE). The old explicit allocation of grid capacities is not in-place anymore in most part of Europe. The allocation is achieved implicitly at the coupled clearing of different market places. In order to perform the balance between demand and supply, a grid model is required, which is provided by the TSOs. For the sake of simplicity, highly sought by market players and market operators, it has been decided to use a dc approximation of the grid, the so called PTDF (power transfer distribution factors), that accounts for the impact of the balance of each market place on the flows of critical branches. This model is clearly approximated but is able to ensure that the power flows in critical branches are lower than branch maximum capacities. In CWE, the TSOs have developed a common process to compute the PTDF and coordination centers (e.g., CORESO and TSC) perform the associated tasks. All data must be provided before the market clearing, generally the morning before day-ahead market clearing. This is a complex process, which requires a forecast of the most likely base case and then the derivation of all N-1 cases as well Pumped-storage hydroelectric plants. Full details on the are available at https://www.entsoe.eu/fileadmin/user_upload/_library/publications/ce/otherreports/ Final-Report-20070130.pdf. ah http://www.cigre.org/content/download/17044/680596/version/1/file/C5_204_2012.pdf. af

ag

18_Santoso_Sec18_p1097-1168.indd 1144

23/11/17 10:54 AM

Power System Operations   1145 

as associated remedial actions. Uncertainty is included by reducing the maximum capacity of each critical branch based on a statistical analysis. This procedure leads to a large set of linear inequalities which is compressed using a presolving method.ai Once the market is cleared, each market participant submits to the TSOs its unit commitment that matches his portfolio bid. Then, the TSOs solve a security analysis taking into account remedial actions to check that there are all constraints are satisfied. If some unit commitment has to be modified, The TSOs must pay for this service. This process pushes TSOs to give priority to inexpensive grid flexible actions in order to have a minimal impact on the unit commitment defined by the electricity market. This procedure can be seen, in fact, as a pragmatic relaxation of a large complex optimization problem, which would be otherwise intractable. 18.7.2  Power System Operation Practices in China BY JIAN ZHOU AND JIANWEI LIU This subsection focuses on power system operation practices in China—the balancing of electricity demand and supply subject to the physical constraints of the power system. This subsection is divided into four main subsections: Overview, Power System Operations in China, Ultra-High Voltage (UHV) and Smart Grid, and Smart Grid Dispatching and Control System. Overview.  With the rapid development of the power grid, the generation capacity in China is growing very fast. At the end of the 2013, in terms of the total installed generation capacity, China overtakes the United States for the first time. The total capacity is 1250 GW and the renewable energy is 390 GW at that time. In 2015, according to the National Bureau of Statistics of China, the total installed capacity reached 1506 GW; the total power demand of society reached about 5550 TWH, and the anticipated power demand of 2020 will reach 7670 TWH. In addition, the power resources are far away from load centers. 76% of coal and 80% of wind resources are located in the northern areas. 80% of hydropower resources are located in the Southwest. Over 2/3 of the power demand concentrates in East and Central China. Long-distance and high-voltage transmission systems are necessary choice for massive development of wind power. Meanwhile the fluctuation of the renewable energy greatly influences the security of the grid. All these factors put forward a huge challenge to the dispatching system. After the electricity “Plant-Grid Separation” reform in early 2002, the assets of State Electric Power Corporation were divided into the five “power generation groups” that retained the power plants and two grid companies. The two grid companies created were the State Grid Corporation of China (SGCC) and a smaller China Southern Power Grid Company (CSGC). Six regional branch belonging to the SGCC in Beijing, they are SGCC North China Branch, SGCC Central China Branch, SGCC Northwest China Branch, SGCC East China Branch, SGCC Northeast China Branch, and SGCC Southwest China Branch. Under the regulations, the National Energy Administration (NEA), have the authority to determine the responsibilities of dispatch organizations (DOs). DOs are currently power dispatching and control centers (PDCC) within the SGCC (or SPGC), the regional branch companies, the provincial grid companies, the prefecture-level and county-level electricity supply companies. The organizational hierarchy laid out in the Regulations is based on a principle of “unified dispatch and multi-level management.” Multilevel management is based on a five-level hierarchy of DOs, each with a separate jurisdiction and function. They are National Power Dispatching and Control Center (NPDCC), the Regional Dispatching and Control Centers (RDCC), the Provincial Dispatching and Control Centers (PDCC), Prefecture-level Dispatching and Control Centers (MDCC), and countylevel Dispatching and Control Centers (CDCC). The three principal actors within this five-level hierarchy are NPDCC, RDCC, and PDCC, which are responsible for scheduling and balancing most of ai Presolving is a preprocessing used in linear programming in order to reduce very efficiently the number of redundant variables or constraints without any approximation. http://lpsolve.sourceforge.net/5.5/Presolve.htm.

18_Santoso_Sec18_p1097-1168.indd 1145

23/11/17 10:54 AM

1146  SECTION EIGHTEEN

the system. As a general principle, scheduling and balancing responsibilities among DOs are separated according to geography and voltage levels, with PDCC responsible for managing the 220-kV provincial grids and generators that are dispatched to meet within-province demand, and RDCC responsible for higher voltage (330 to 500 kV) provincial interconnections and generators that are dispatched across provinces. The NPDCC, SGCC’s dispatching and control center, has jurisdiction over regional grid interconnections and generators that are dispatched across regions. MDCC and CDCC are responsible for implementing dispatch instructions from PDCC, monitoring frequency and voltage conditions in local grids, and managing local generators and load. MDCC control any generating units in their geographic area that are not under the control of a more senior DO, as well as lower-voltage ( IPU (19-14)



IOP > SLP IRT (19-15)

where SLP is the slope, a relay setting. Figure 19-28 shows the differential element operating characteristic as a scalar plot of IOP as a function of IRT. The characteristic is a straight line with a slope equal to SLP and a horizontal straight line defining the element minimum pickup current IPU. The operating region is located above the characteristic, and the restraining region is below the characteristic. The figure also represents the fictitious operating current resulting from CT errors for external faults. For low fault currents, the CTs behave linearly and the error current is a linear function of the restraining current. For higher fault currents, the CTs saturate and cause a nonlinear growth of the operating current. The slope characteristic of the percentage differential element provides security for external faults that cause CT saturation. Two solutions that further increase the element security for high-current external faults are a dual-slope differential characteristic and an adaptive characteristic with a slope that increases upon external fault detection [2].

FIGURE 19-28  Percentage differential element operating characteristic.

CT saturation is only one cause of undesirable differential current. In transformer applications, there are other possible causes [2]: •  Mismatch between the CT ratios and the transformer turns ratio. This mismatch creates a fictitious differential current that can cause a differential element misoperation. The solution is to perform current scaling. Electromechanical transformer differential relays have physical transformer taps for scaling the currents. Compensation is rarely perfect because the number of available taps is limited. In contrast, microprocessor-based transformer relays can fully compensate for the current amplitude differences resulting from the mismatch. The relay calculates TAP values based on the transformer MVA rating, transformer winding voltage ratings, and CT ratios and connections (wye or delta). The relay uses the calculated TAP values to scale the secondary currents to a common base.

19_Santoso_Sec19_p1169-1238.indd 1197

27/11/17 2:41 PM

1198        SECTION NINETEEN

•  Phase shift between the transformer primary and secondary currents for delta-wye connections. This phase shift also creates a fictitious differential current. The solution is to perform phase-shift compensation. Electromechanical relays require using wye- and delta-connected CTs, as appropriate, to mirror the transformer connections. Modern transformer relays perform the phase-shift compensation internally, which allows using wye-connected CTs on both sides of the transformer. •  Presence of a grounded-wye transformer winding inside the differential protection zone. For external ground faults, the positive- and negative-sequence currents enter and exit the protection zone, resulting in a nonoperation condition for the differential element. However, the zero-sequence current only passes through the differential element CTs on the grounded-wye side of the transformer, creating a differential current that could cause a relay misoperation. By applying delta compensation to the currents of the wye winding, microprocessor-based relays remove the zero-sequence current, preventing it from getting to the differential element. The delta connection of the CTs removes the zero-sequence current in transformer differential schemes with electromechanical relays. •  Magnetizing inrush currents during transformer energization, voltage recovery after the clearance of an external fault, or energization of a parallel transformer. Transformer magnetizing current only passes through the source-side differential element CTs, creating a differential current that could cause a differential element misoperation. The harmonic content of the differential current serves to differentiate faults from inrush conditions. Harmonics can be used to either restrain or block the transformer differential element. Harmonic restraint methods use harmonic components of the differential current to provide additional differential element restraint. The presence of harmonics desensitizes the differential element. Harmonic blocking methods block the differential element when the ratio of the harmonic content to the fundamental component of the differential current is above a preset threshold. Other methods for discriminating internal faults from inrush conditions directly recognize the wave-shape distortion of the differential current. •  High transformer excitation currents caused by overexcitation. The high excitation current produced by transformer overexcitation could cause a differential element misoperation. The harmonic content of the differential current serves to differentiate faults from overexcitation conditions. Transformer differential elements use fifth-harmonic blocking to prevent misoperation on overexcitation. 19.4.2  Restricted Earth-Fault Protection Transformer differential protection provides excellent sensitivity for phase-to-phase and most phase-to-ground winding faults. However, the phase current is low for ground faults close to the transformer neutral. Differential elements that respond to phase currents have low sensitivity for these faults. On the other hand, the neutral current is very high for these faults. Restricted earth fault (REF) protection, which responds to neutral current, can detect ground faults close to the transformer neutral quickly and reliably. Microprocessor-based relays with REF elements calculate the REF operating current using the currents measured by all the CTs of the REF protection zone. These enhanced elements only require connection of the transformer neutral CT to the relay to complete the REF protection zone. The scheme does not require a dedicated set of CTs and can compensate for different CT ratios. In the past, REF protection used current-polarized directional relays or high-impedance differential relays. Modern microprocessor-based relays generally use directional elements, which are stable for external faults with heavy CT saturation. For example, the relay can use a zero-sequence, currentpolarized directional element (32I) that measures the phase angle between the transformer neutral current and the residual current at the transformer terminals. The 32I element uses Eq. (19-16) to calculate the scalar quantity T. T = Re  I X •  IY ∗   

(19-16)

where I X  is derived from the residual current at the transformer terminals; IY∗   is the complex conjugate of IY , which is the transformer neutral current.

19_Santoso_Sec19_p1169-1238.indd 1198

27/11/17 2:41 PM

POWER SYSTEM PROTECTION        1199 

The 32I element compares T with two thresholds. When T is positive and above the positive threshold, the element declares an internal ground fault. When T is negative and below the negative threshold, the element declares an external ground fault. To improve security, the 32I element calculates T only when IX and IY are above threshold values. This element can be set with high sensitivity because of its inherent security for external faults with CT saturation. This security comes from the fact that the neutral current IY is measured using a single CT. Uneven CT saturation for external phase faults may cause a fictitious zero-sequence value of I X , but IY will equal zero, FIGURE 19-29  REF protection for twowinding transformers using a current-polarized resulting in T = 0. Figure 19-29 shows an REF element connected to directional element. protect a two-winding transformer. The relay uses the phase currents to calculate the Winding 1 residual current I RW1. Then, the relay multiplies this current and the secondary neutral current by the corresponding CT ratios to calculate currents I X and IY in amperes primary. Finally, the relay calculates T using Eq. (19-16). For the external ground fault shown in this figure, I X and IY are 180° out of phase, and T is negative. For internal ground faults, I X and IY are in phase, and T is positive.The REF element includes logic (not shown in Fig. 19-29) to ensure element operation for internal faults when the wye-side breaker is open (I X = 0) or the external system has no ground sources. 19.4.3  Overexcitation Protection Transformer overexcitation can occur when the ratio of the per unit voltage to per unit frequency at the secondary terminals exceeds 1.05 at full load, 0.8 power factor, or 1.1 at no load [27]. Transformers may temporarily exceed their continuous volts-per-hertz capability. Transformer manufacturers provide information on the short-term volts-per-hertz capability as a function of time. The overexcitation limit is either a curve or a set point with a time delay. During overexcitation, the increase in exciting current can cause the transformer differential element to operate. However, the differential element may not operate for some overexcitation conditions that could damage the transformer or may operate too quickly. Transformers typically withstand overexcitation conditions longer than differential element operating times. Premature tripping of a transformer during a system disturbance can make the situation worse. In microprocessor-based transformer relays, fifth-harmonic blocking prevents differential element tripping during transformer overexcitation. For transformer overexcitation protection, use a volts-per-hertz (24) element, especially on large network transformers and generator step-up transformers. This element is available in multifunction transformer relays that also include voltage inputs. The volts-per-hertz element uses Eq. (19-17) for calculating the ratio of the measured voltage to frequency in per unit of the rated quantities, which is proportional to the transformer magnetic flux. ϕ  =

V f NOM • f   VNOM

(19-17)

where j is the estimated magnetic flux value in per unit; V is the measured voltage; f is the measured frequency; VNOM is the transformer rated voltage; fNOM is the rated frequency.

19_Santoso_Sec19_p1169-1238.indd 1199

27/11/17 2:41 PM

1200        SECTION NINETEEN

Microprocessor-based relays provide several types of time curves for the volts-per-hertz element. Some relays also allow user-programmable curves. Set the volts-per-hertz element to coordinate with the volts-per-hertz capability curve of the protected transformer. 19.4.4  Overcurrent Protection Traditionally, overcurrent protection was often the main protection for small transformers. This approach precludes fast fault clearing because overcurrent elements must coordinate with protective devices in adjacent zones. Thus, internal faults could cause severe damage to the transformer. The low cost of modern relays makes differential protection feasible even for small transformers. Transformer differential elements, sudden-pressure relays, and Buchholz relays do not protect the transformer from through-fault damage. Overcurrent protection provides this primary protection function. Coordinate it with the transformer through-fault capability curves to take the transformer out of service before damage from an uncleared external fault occurs. IEEE Standard C57.109 [28] provides transformer through-fault capability curves. Overcurrent protection can also provide backup protection that is independent of the transformer primary protection but at significantly reduced sensitivity and speed. Overcurrent devices provide some transformer overload protection by detecting heavy transformer overloads. For better overload protection and monitoring, we recommend using elements based on transformer thermal models [2]. Figure 19-30 depicts a typical overcurrent relay protection scheme for a delta-grounded wye transformer. In the past, this scheme required several relays. Today, one multifunction transformer relay can provide all overcurrent protection functions, in addition to transformer differential and other functions. Two multifunction transformer relays provide fully redundant transformer protection with higher reliability and less cost than a scheme that uses individual relays.

FIGURE 19-30  Typical transformer overcurrent relay protection scheme.

Primary-side instantaneous phase overcurrent elements (50) provide high-speed primary protection for internal phase faults. These elements should trip the transformer high-side breaker and/or the transformer lockout relay. Primary-side inverse-time phase overcurrent elements (51) provide backup protection for internal phase faults and also provide primary protection for phase faults between the transformer and the secondary-side main breaker. These elements should trip the high-side breaker and/or the lockout relay. The primary-side residual overcurrent element (51N) provides sensitive primary protection for ground faults in the delta winding if the source is a grounded system. This element should trip the high-side breaker and/or the lockout relay. The phase overcurrent elements on the delta side of the transformer are relatively insensitive to ground faults on the wye side. The inverse-time ground overcurrent element (51G) provides primary protection for these faults. Transformers do not remove negative-sequence currents caused by

19_Santoso_Sec19_p1169-1238.indd 1200

27/11/17 2:41 PM

POWER SYSTEM PROTECTION        1201 

ground faults. Therefore, if a neutral CT is not available, a primary-side negative-sequence overcurrent element (51Q) can provide primary protection for ground faults on the wye side and backup protection for all other unbalanced faults. The 51G and 51Q elements should trip the high-side breaker and/or the lockout relay. Secondary-side inverse-time phase (51) and ground (51N) overcurrent elements provide primary protection for secondary-side bus faults and backup protection for feeder faults. These elements should trip the low-side breaker. 19.4.5  Sudden-Pressure and Gas-Accumulation Protection Sudden-pressure and gas-accumulation relays provide partial redundancy for transformer differential protection, because they respond only to faults inside the transformer tank. Sudden-pressure relays (63) monitor the pressure inside the transformer tank and trip when a fault inside the tank causes a sudden pressure change. Sudden-pressure relays provide sensitive detection of low-grade faults, such as turn-to-turn faults; however, sudden-pressure relays can misoperate for the following reasons: •  Winding movement on severe through-fault or seismic events. •  Arcing over of the microswitch contact. •  Operator error when maintaining the oil-preservation system. Supervising sudden-pressure relays with microprocessor-based relays improves their security, increasing sensitivity and reliability in overall transformer protection [2]. Incipient transformer faults under oil typically generate combustible gases. Gas-accumulation relays detect these gases and provide an early warning. Gas-accumulation relays allow drawing off the gas for analysis to identify the problem. The Buchholz relay is a variation of this type of relay. These relays may misoperate for the same reasons as sudden-pressure relays.

19.5  BUS PROTECTION Buses are the nodes in electric power networks. When a bus fault occurs, all branches supplying current to that node must be opened to clear the fault. Bus faults are rare but can be very disruptive. The high fault current can cause severe and costly damage to power system equipment, power system transient instability, and service disruption to customers. A fault at a critical bus that is left uncleared for a long enough time can result in a widearea blackout. The consequences of a bus cleared in error are basically the same. For these reasons, bus protection must provide fast operation for all bus faults and high security for external faults. The selection of a bus protection method depends on the bus configuration (if it is fixed or switchable), the availability and characteristics of CTs, and the availability of disconnect switch auxiliary contacts (for switchable bus arrangements) [2]. Microprocessor technology improves bus protection performance and economics. Microprocessorbased bus protection schemes are faster, more reliable, more selective, more sensitive, and more economical than older bus protection schemes. The major types of bus protection schemes are as follows [2, 29]: •  Differential protection: •  Differential overcurrent protection. •  High-impedance differential protection. •  Low-impedance percentage differential protection. •  Partial differential protection.

19_Santoso_Sec19_p1169-1238.indd 1201

27/11/17 2:41 PM

1202        SECTION NINETEEN

•  Zone-interlocked protection. •  Fault-bus protection. •  Protection using remote time-coordinated relays that overlap the bus zone. This subsection covers the high-impedance and low-impedance differential, partial differential, and zone-interlocked bus protection schemes. 19.5.1  High-Impedance Differential Protection The high-impedance differential scheme obtains the differential current from parallel connected CTs. The scheme introduces a high-value resistor (called a stabilizing resistor) in the differential branch of the circuit. The stabilizing resistor reduces the differential current that results from heavy CT saturation during external faults. Figure 19-31 shows the relay connection for a typical application. A low-impedance overcurrent element (87) senses the current flowing through the stabilizing resistor RS. The current through the 87 element is proportional to the voltage VS across the relay. If CT saturation occurs for an external fault, the high impedance of the relay will force the current through the lower impedance path of the saturated CT. Very little current will then flow through the 87 element. For this small current, the relay will not operate. For internal faults, the voltage produced by the CTs drives a significant differential current through the stabilizing resistor that causes the 87 element to operate. The resulting high voltage across the relay, which can reach dangerous levels, typically drives all CTs into saturation. The relay circuit includes a voltage limiter, such as a metal-oxide varistor (MOV), to limit this voltage to a safe level (Fig. 19-31). Shorting the stabilizing resistor and MOV with an auxiliary lockout relay contact (86a) prevents damage by limiting the energy absorbed by these components when the relay trips. The scheme shown in Fig. 19-31 includes an optional instantaneous overcurrent element (50). Use this element when a sustained breaker-failure initiation (BFI) signal is required [2]. When the 87 element operates and trips the lockout relay, the high-impedance path is short-circuited, and the 87 element drops out. The differential current will continue to flow until all breakers successfully

FIGURE 19-31  Bus high-impedance differential protection scheme.

19_Santoso_Sec19_p1169-1238.indd 1202

27/11/17 2:41 PM

POWER SYSTEM PROTECTION        1203 

interrupt the fault, so the 50 element remains asserted and sustains the BFI signal. The 50 element can also improve scheme dependability by sustaining the trip condition if an MOV failure short-circuits the high-impedance path when high voltage is present. The high-impedance differential scheme is very sensitive because it only takes a small differential current flowing through the stabilizing resistor to produce voltage high enough to trip. This high sensitivity makes it generally suitable for application in high-impedance grounded systems. This scheme requires dedicated CTs on all bus terminals. When available CTs comply with the scheme requirements, the high-impedance bus differential scheme is a very effective and economical solution, especially for buses with many branch circuits and simple configurations. 19.5.2  Low-Impedance Percentage Differential Protection Although widely used, the high-impedance bus differential scheme is less effective when the CTs do not meet the scheme requirements or when the substation bus arrangement is complex. A percentage differential scheme with multiple restraint inputs is the most versatile solution for bus protection. Section 19.4.1 describes the operation principle of percentage differential elements. Figure 19-32 shows the application of a percentage differential relay to a bus with N terminals. The relay measures all the bus terminal currents (no CT paralleling required). A percentage differential element uses Eqs. (19-18) and (19-19) to calculate the operating (IOP) and restraining (IRT) currents.

FIGURE 19-32  Bus percentage differential protection scheme.

IOP = I1 + I 2 + ... + I N

(

I RT = k I1 + I 2 + ... + I N

)

(19-18) (19-19)

where k is a scaling factor. The percentage differential element generates a tripping signal if the operating current IOP is greater than the minimum pickup current IPU [Eq. (19-14)] and is also greater than a percentage of the restraining current IRT [Eq. (19-15)]. Figure 19-28 shows the operating characteristic of a percentage differential element. The number of available restraint inputs is usually the main limitation of a multiple restraint differential relay. In the past, engineers paralleled CTs when the bus had more CT circuits than available restraint inputs. This practice sacrificed security, because if one of the paralleled CTs were to saturate, it would not contribute adequate restraint. Paralleling CTs is no longer necessary with the availability of modern bus differential relays. Traditional percentage differential relays lack security for external faults in substations with heavy CT saturation problems. High-impedance differential relays are difficult to apply with CTs that have low voltage ratings. Advanced microprocessor-based bus protection schemes solve these problems. These systems are a good choice for the following applications: •  Where the CTs present saturation problems. •  Where CTs of different ratios must be shared with other protection schemes. •  Where the substation has a complex bus arrangement.

19_Santoso_Sec19_p1169-1238.indd 1203

27/11/17 2:41 PM

1204        SECTION NINETEEN

Advanced microprocessor-based bus protection schemes perform these requirements [30, 31]: •  Fast operating times for all bus faults. •  Security for external faults with heavy CT saturation. •  Security during normal switching conditions. •  Security with subsidence current present after clearing an external fault. •  Security when a CT is open or short-circuited. •  Minimum operating time for external-to-internal evolving faults. 19.5.3  Partial Differential Protection Partial differential protection schemes (Fig. 19-33) use inverse-time overcurrent relays connected to paralleled CTs that only measure the bus source currents. Each relay provides primary protection to its corresponding bus section and backup protection to the feeders connected to this bus section. Therefore, each overcurrent relay must coordinate with the overcurrent relays of these feeders. The result is time-delayed bus fault clearing. Partial differential protection schemes are used when not all bus branch circuits have CTs available to provide a complete differential zone. Previously, these schemes were also used when feeder CTs were unsuitable for differential protection because they had different ratios and/or characteristics than the CTs of the source circuits and the bus-tie breaker. Some modern microprocessor-based relays can tolerate high CT ratio mismatch values. The zone-interlocked schemes discussed in Sec. 19.5.4 are also suitable for applications with dissimilar CTs. Whenever possible, use differential or zone-interlocked schemes for FIGURE 19-33  Bus partial differential protection bus primary protection and use partial differscheme. ential schemes only for backup protection. 19.5.4  Zone-Interlocked Protection An alternative to bus differential protection is a zone-interlocked scheme, which uses information from the relays on each of the bus branch circuits to determine whether a fault is internal or external to the bus. Each relay sends status information on its branch circuit. For buses with multiple sources, the scheme requires directional relays on the source circuits. Reference [2] describes this application. In radial systems, the scheme only requires overcurrent relays. To implement this scheme with existing devices, use the directional and overcurrent elements available in the branch circuit multifunction relays. The performance of this scheme is almost independent of the ratio, characteristics, and performance of the CTs. This substantial independence makes the scheme suitable for substations that have CTs of different types and/or ratios, especially when high operating speed is not required. Zone-interlocked schemes are only applicable for single-breaker configurations where the branch circuits connect to only one bus through one breaker. Another disadvantage is that the scheme requires a small time delay for coordination with the blocking elements and is more complex than a dedicated bus differential scheme. Also, the scheme does not provide the desired zone overlap when the branch circuits have bus-side CTs. Bus faults are more common at distribution levels because small animals can easily bridge the small clearances between the grounded steel structures and energized buswork. The most common practice is to clear bus faults with transformer backup protection, which has a time delay to

19_Santoso_Sec19_p1169-1238.indd 1204

27/11/17 2:41 PM

POWER SYSTEM PROTECTION        1205 

coordinate with feeder protection. Fault clearing times are typically between 0.5 and 1.0 s. However, the high fault current and the number and duration of bus faults can reduce the operating life of the power transformer, the most important and expensive equipment in the substation. In radial substations, a simple and economical zone-interlocked blocking scheme, sometimes called a fast bus-tripping scheme, provides relatively high-speed fault clearing for buses that do not have differential protection. Instead of relying on a traditional coordination interval in the bus main relay, this scheme only requires a short delay to allow the feeder relays to block the bus main relay for an external fault. This scheme can operate for bus faults in approximately two to three cycles. You can implement the scheme as shown in Fig. 19-34 (Ref. [2] describes the logic for this application): 1. Program an instantaneous overcurrent element in each of the feeder relays to close an output contact when a fault occurs on the feeder. 2. Wire the blocking contacts from each of the feeder relays in parallel to an input on the bus main relay (input IN104 in this example). 3. Delay overcurrent elements in the bus main relay only long enough to allow sensing of the blocking contacts; a typical coordination delay is approximately one to two cycles.

FIGURE 19-34  Fast bus-tripping scheme application.

19.6  GENERATOR PROTECTION Power generating stations represent approximately half of the capital investment in an electric power system. Synchronous generators are complex electromechanical systems that may experience many harmful operation conditions. Generator outages caused by faults, abnormal operation conditions, or generator protection misoperations are costly. A complete generator protection system must include a variety of protection functions to respond to faults and also to abnormal operation conditions to prevent future failures. Modern microprocessor-based generator protection relays include all the protection functions required in most installations. Multifunction relays can provide even small-capacity generators with complete protection at low cost. Selecting the protection functions that a particular generator needs and determining appropriate setting values require a thorough knowledge of the protected machine. References [2, 32, 33] provide comprehensive coverage of generator protection. 19.6.1  Generator Connections and Grounding In large utility generating stations, generators are typically connected directly to the step-up transformer as shown in Fig. 19-35. This arrangement is referred to as a generator-transformer unit. One or two unit auxiliary transformers may also be connected to the generator terminals. High-resistance generator grounding is common in generator-transformer units. This method uses a transformer connected between the generator neutral

19_Santoso_Sec19_p1169-1238.indd 1205

FIGURE 19-35 Generator-transformer unit arrangement.

27/11/17 2:41 PM

1206        SECTION NINETEEN

FIGURE 19-36  Direct connection of generators to a distribution system.

and ground, and a resistor connected to the transformer secondary, as shown on Fig. 19-35. Typically, high resistance limits ground fault currents to 15 A or less to prevent stator core lamination damage for generator stator ground faults. Figure 19-36 depicts the direct connection of small generators to a medium-voltage distribution system, which is typically used in industrial power systems. In this arrangement, generator neutral grounding is generally determined by the distribution system grounding needs, and is typically a lowresistance grounding. This grounding method uses a resistor connected between the generator neutral and ground. The ground fault current is usually no higher than 150% of generator rated current. The main disadvantage of generator low-resistance grounding is that the high ground fault current can cause significant stator core lamination damage, which increases the cost of the generator repair.

19.6.2  Stator Phase Fault Protection Stator phase faults (three-phase, phase-to-phase, and phase-to-phase-to-ground faults) require very fast clearing times because of the high fault currents and their potentially destructive effect. Fault current continues to flow for seconds after the generator main and field breakers trip and the prime mover valve closes, because of the magnetic energy trapped within the machine. Generator phase fault protection must trip and shut down the generator and prime mover and transfer unit auxiliaries to a standby source with minimal delay. Stator phase protection schemes for large generators often use differential elements (87) connected as shown in Fig. 19-37. High fault currents and a high generator impedance X/R ratio may cause heavy CT saturation during external faults. Typically, percentage differential elements with variable or dual-slope characteristics provide adequate security. The stator windings of certain types of generators have coils with multiple turns. An interturn insulation failure can cause a turn-to-turn fault. Stator phase differential protection does not detect turnto-turn faults. For these generators, dedicated turn-to-turn fault protection must trip and shut down the generator and prime mover and transfer unit auxiliaries to a standby source with minimal delay. For generators with two or more parallel circuits per phase, users can provide turnto-turn fault protection by splitting the circuits into two groups and comparing the currents of these groups. During normal operation, the current difference between two groups of the same phase is very small. Turn-to-turn faults cause an unbalance current that increases the current difference. Traditional split-phase turn-to-turn fault protection schemes use an overcurrent relay with instantaneous and timedelayed elements that is connected to measure the current difference. In large capacity generators, split-phase protection requires connecting a CT to each FIGURE 19-37  Generator differential protection scheme. circuit group and connecting the CTs

19_Santoso_Sec19_p1169-1238.indd 1206

27/11/17 2:41 PM

POWER SYSTEM PROTECTION        1207 

in parallel to obtain the current difference. Uneven CT saturation for external faults causes a fictitious current difference. The instantaneous element, set above the maximum current difference caused by CT saturation, provides high-speed operation. The time-delayed element has a lower pickup setting to improve the scheme sensitivity. A split-phase protection scheme using a selfbalanced CT connection (Fig. 19-38) minimizes the chance of CT saturation. This scheme uses fluxsumming, low-ratio CTs. The conductors carrying the circuit group currents pass in opposite directions through the CT window. The overcurrent elements only receive the difference current. The small size of the CT window limits the size of the conductor and, therefore, the size of generators that can be protected. 19.6.3  Stator Ground Fault Protection Stator phase fault protection has low sensitivity for ground faults because grounding impedance and fault resistance limit ground fault current magnitude. In addition, ground faults close to the generator FIGURE 19-38 Generator split-phase protection using flux-summing CTs. winding neutral point cause very low fault currents. Generators need separate sensitive stator ground fault protection that generally trips and shuts down the generator and prime mover and transfers unit auxiliaries to a standby source. For high-resistance-grounded generators, you can use the voltage at the neutral point of the stator winding to detect ground faults. This voltage is close to zero when the system is balanced; it rises significantly for the system unbalance caused by stator ground faults. The neutral voltage is at maximum magnitude for faults at the generator terminals and decreases as the fault location moves closer to the neutral point. As shown in Fig. 19-39, an overvoltage element (59GN) connected to the grounding transformer secondary detects stator ground faults. The 59GN element responds to the fundamental-frequency voltage; its pickup must be above the neutral voltage that results from normal system unbalance. The magnitude of the voltage across the 59GN element depends directly on the ground fault location inside the generator winding. The 59GN will measure the full generator phase-to-ground voltage if the fault occurs at the generator terminals, and it will measure zero voltage if the ground fault occurs at the generator neutral point. Therefore, a 59GN element does not protect a region of approximately 5% of the total winding length, starting FIGURE 19-39  Ground fault protection for highfrom the neutral point. resistance grounded generators using fundamentalGenerator windings normally produce frequency and third-harmonic voltage. varying amounts of third-harmonic voltage, depending on machine construction and loading. Under normal operation conditions, the neutral voltage and the terminal voltage have a certain third-harmonic content. Ground faults close to the neutral point cause the neutral third-harmonic voltage to decrease and the terminal third-harmonic voltage to increase. Ground faults close to the generator terminals increase the neutral third-harmonic voltage and decrease the terminal third-harmonic voltage. A third-harmonic undervoltage element (27TN) measuring the neutral voltage can detect ground faults in the proximity of the neutral point (Fig. 19-39). Other solutions include a third-harmonic

19_Santoso_Sec19_p1169-1238.indd 1207

27/11/17 2:41 PM

1208        SECTION NINETEEN

overvoltage element measuring the terminal voltage and a third-harmonic voltage differential element that responds to the difference between the neutral and terminal third-harmonic voltages. Setting these elements requires knowing the normal values of third-harmonic voltages over the full range of generator output conditions. Modern generator protection relays can provide these measurements. By combining the fundamental-frequency neutral overvoltage element and the third-harmonic undervoltage element or the voltage differential element, the relay provides 100% protection of the stator windings for ground faults. Some generators do not produce sufficient third-harmonic voltage to apply third-harmonic-based ground fault protection. If a generator does not produce adequate third-harmonic voltage, a signal injection method is an alternative for 100% stator ground fault protection. Figure  19-40 shows a protection module (64S) that injects a multifrequency current signal (IINJ in the figure) into the generator neutral [34]. The 64S module estimates the leakage resistance and capacitance of the stator circuit, and compares the insulation leakage resistance to a setting value. This scheme provides protection even when the generator is in turning gear and during startup, which allows for continuous FIGURE 19-40  Ground fault protection for high-resistance supervision and reliable detection of stator grounded generators using the low-frequency injection method. winding insulation failure before the generator is put online. For low-resistance grounded generators, you can use a time-delayed overcurrent element 51N to provide stator ground fault protection. Connect the 51N element to a low-ratio CT placed on the generator neutral. Since this element also responds to ground faults beyond the generator terminals, it needs to time coordinate with the distribution circuit overcurrent elements. Coordination requirements limit the sensitivity and speed of the 51N element for stator ground faults. Restricted-earth fault (REF) elements provide fast, selective, and sensitive ground fault protection for low-resistance grounded generators. In this application, REF protection compares the current flowing in the generator neutral with the zero-sequence current measured at the generator terminals. REF protection only responds to ground faults located between the neutral CT and the CTs at the generator terminals and does not require any coordination time delay.

19.6.4  Rotor Fault Protection The field winding of a generator is wound on the rotor and ungrounded. A dc voltage source or exciter connected to the field winding produces the field current. In many generators, a stationary exciter injects current into the field winding through brushes and collector rings. Rotating exciters include dc generators and ac generators with rectifiers. Modern static excitation systems receive power from the machine terminals or the power system. A step-down excitation transformer feeds a three-phase controlled rectifier bridge that converts ac voltage into dc voltage. Another alternative is a brushless excitation system, in which the ac exciter armature and the rectifier bridge are mounted on the same rotating shaft system as the field. In this subsection, we discuss rotor fault protection for generators that have brushes and collector rings. Insulation deterioration or breakdown can cause the field winding to contact the rotor core. The first ground fault does not affect generator operation. However, the chance of a second fault increases, because the first fault establishes a ground reference. A second ground fault shorts

19_Santoso_Sec19_p1169-1238.indd 1208

27/11/17 2:41 PM

POWER SYSTEM PROTECTION        1209 

part of the field winding and causes unbalanced air gap fluxes in the generator. This unbalanced field can cause excessive rotor vibration that damages the machine. The localized excessive heat generated by the fault current causes uneven rotor temperatures, which also leads to excessive vibration. The level of magnetic field unbalance depends on the location of the ground fault points. Rotor field ground fault protection (64F) detects the first ground fault and provides an alarm or initiates generator tripping. Users that apply alarming normally keep the generator in service. If the ground fault persists for some time, the operator removes the generating unit from service in an orderly manner. Traditional rotor field ground fault detection methods include the following: •  Voltage divider method. This method uses a voltage divider circuit and a voltage relay, which is connected across the divider midpoint and ground. •  DC injection method. In this method, a dc power supply, in series with a voltage relay, is connected across the excitation negative terminal and ground. •  AC injection method. This method is similar to the dc injection method, but it uses an ac power supply. A new field ground module that uses a dc-switching injection method can detect field ground faults in generators that have brushes and collector rings [2]. The module periodically measures the rotor winding insulation resistance and transmits this value through a fiber-optic link to the generator protection relay, which then compares this value with threshold values for alarm or trip. The module connects to the generator field circuit as shown in Fig. 19-41 to measure the field resistance to ground. This device applies square-wave voltage through two resistors R at the points where the exciter connects to the field winding. In this figure, Rf is the value of the fault resistance between the rotor winding and ground, and Cfg is the capacitance between the field circuit and ground. By measuring the voltage across a sensing resistor Rs, the dc-switching injection method calculates Rf  . Under normal conditions, Rf equals the insulation resistance, which has a very high value. For ground faults, Rf takes a smaller value. The dc-switching injection method provides a fault resistance calculation that is independent from the fault location and the field voltage.

FIGURE 19-41  The dc-switching injection method measures the field resistance to ground. The measured resistance is very high under normal conditions and lower for ground faults.

19_Santoso_Sec19_p1169-1238.indd 1209

27/11/17 2:41 PM

1210        SECTION NINETEEN

19.6.5  Current Unbalance Protection Synchronous generators may experience many abnormal operation conditions. This and the following subsections describe some of the functions required to protect the generator and the prime mover (and in some cases, to also protect the power system) against generator abnormal operation conditions. When a generator operates with unbalanced three-phase stator currents, the resulting negativesequence current generates a magnetic flux that rotates in opposition to the rotor rotation. This reverse-rotating flux induces double-frequency currents in the rotor, which may cause high temperatures on some parts of the rotor and eventually cause machine damage. System asymmetries and unbalanced loads may cause low-magnitude, long-duration negativesequence currents. IEEE Standard C50.12 [35] and IEEE Standard C50.13 [36] specify the permissible continuous negative-sequence current for generators, which is between 5% and 10% of the machine rated current. Unbalanced short circuits and open phases generally cause high-magnitude negative-sequence currents. Generators can withstand these currents for a short time. Equation (19-20) expresses the short-time generator capability as a function of the integrated negative-sequence current that the generator can withstand during a time interval T. The K factor depends on the generator type and capacity. References [35] and [36] specify the K factors for various types of generators. I 22T = K

(19-20)

where I2 is the stator negative-sequence current. An inverse-time negative-sequence overcurrent element provides generator current unbalance protection (46). Equation (19-21) describes the time-current characteristic as implemented in a modern relay [2]. T  =

46Q2K  I2  I   NOM 

2



(19-21)

where T is the element operating time in seconds; 46Q2K is the time-dial setting; INOM is the generator rated current. Figure 19-42 shows that the element time-current characteristics are a family of straight lines with slope equal to −2 when plotted using a log-log scale. The element picks up when the per unit negative-sequence current is greater than a preset 46Q2P threshold. Set 46Q2P to a value slightly greater than the permissible continuous negative-sequence current. Set 46Q2K at a value slightly smaller than the generator K factor. 19.6.6  Loss-of-Field Protection A generator may totally or partially lose its excitation as a result of accidental field breaker tripping, field open circuit, field short circuit (slip-ring flashover, for example), voltage regulator failure, or loss of the excitation system. When a generator loses excitation, the rotor field gradually extinguishes, and the magnetic coupling between rotor and stator magnetic fields eventually diminishes to a point where the machine loses synchronism. The rotor speed increases to a value for which the machine, operating as an induction generator, produces the active power demanded by the power system in this new condition. Operating as an induction machine, the generator draws large amounts of reactive power from the system, which causes high stator-current values (approximately two to four times rated current) and depresses the voltage. Additionally, slip-frequency eddy currents circulate in the rotor. The magnitude of these currents is proportional to the generated power.

19_Santoso_Sec19_p1169-1238.indd 1210

27/11/17 2:41 PM

POWER SYSTEM PROTECTION        1211 

FIGURE 19-42  Time-current characteristics of a modern negative-sequence overcurrent element for generator current unbalance protection.

The machine and the power system are at risk when a generator loses excitation. The generator may suffer rotor or stator overheating and experience large pulsating torques. No general guidelines exist for the length of time a generator may operate without excitation. Some generator manufacturers provide this information. The reactive-power deficit may cause a voltage collapse, especially if a large generator connected to a weak system loses excitation. Another possible problem is the loss of steady-state stability. When these problems arise, the system may lose voltage or synchronous stability in a few seconds. Loss-of-field (LOF) protection (40) should provide an early alarm to permit the operator to restore the field for an accidentally tripped field breaker. After a time delay, the protection must trip the main generator breaker and the field breaker and transfer unit auxiliaries. Tripping steam turbine stop valves may also be necessary [32]. Use a distance mho element to detect LOF; the generator terminal voltage and current are input signals to this element. Figure 19-43 shows the offset mho element characteristic with the originally recommended settings [37]. In this figure, Xd and X d′ are the direct-axis synchronous and transient generator reactances, respectively. The impedance measured by the mho element when the generator

19_Santoso_Sec19_p1169-1238.indd 1211

27/11/17 2:41 PM

1212        SECTION NINETEEN

FIGURE 19-43  LOF protection using a negative-offset mho element.

loses its field describes a trajectory on the impedance plane that starts at the impedance value corresponding to the generator initial load and ends oscillating in a region of the fourth quadrant. The location of this region depends on the generator load [38]. During stable and unstable power swings, the impedance measured by the LOF element also describes a trajectory on the impedance plane (not shown in Fig. 19-43). The element may misoperate if the impedance penetrates the operating characteristic. Delaying operation of the LOF element enhances security. For old generators with typical Xd values of 1.1 to 1.2 p.u., a time-delay setting of 0.1 s normally ensures security for power swings. The larger Xd values (1.5 to 2 p.u.) of modern generators may require longer time-delay settings. Perform transient stability studies to determine element time-delay settings. Modern LOF protection elements have two-zone characteristics suitable for generators with large direct-axis reactance. References [2] and [32] describe these elements. 19.6.7  Motoring Protection Generator motoring occurs when the energy supply to the prime mover is cut off while the generator is connected to the power system. The generator operates as a synchronous motor driving the prime mover. This operation condition will not harm the generator, but may damage the prime mover. In addition, the mechanical load that the prime mover presents to the generator, when the generator is operating as a synchronous motor, may be high. This load represents an active-power loss for the power system. For steam turbines, motoring causes overheating and may damage turbine blades and other turbine parts. Steam turbines may overheat even when the generator is operating at no load or with low power output. Turbine manufacturers provide information on the permissible time that steam turbines may operate in a motoring condition. Other types of prime movers may have different problems during motoring. Hydraulic turbines may suffer cavitation of the blades on low water flow during motoring. Gas turbines may have gear problems when rotating as a mechanical load. Dieselengine generating units are in danger of explosion and fire from unburned fuel. Motoring protection is typically used to trip and shut down all types of generating units for inadvertent motoring conditions except hydroelectric units designed to operate as synchronous condensers [32]. A time-delayed directional power element (32) detects the active power reversal caused by the motoring condition. The element setting depends on the type of prime mover. Time

19_Santoso_Sec19_p1169-1238.indd 1212

27/11/17 2:41 PM

POWER SYSTEM PROTECTION        1213 

delay prevents misoperation for power swings caused by system disturbances or when synchronizing the machine to the system. Typical delay values are tens of seconds. A motoring protection element generally trips the main generator breaker and the field breaker, transfers the auxiliaries, and provides a trip signal to the prime mover [32]. Another application for 32 elements is sequential tripping of generators. To prevent overspeed, sequential tripping requires detecting a motoring condition following the steam turbine valve closing, to ensure steam flow is completely shut off before opening the generator breaker. You can use a 32 element to monitor the reverse power condition and perform tripping interlock in sequential tripping. 19.6.8  Other Generator Protection Functions Other generator protection functions include the following [2, 32]: •  Stator thermal protection. •  Field thermal protection. •  Overexcitation protection. •  Overvoltage protection. •  Abnormal frequency protection. •  Out-of-step protection. •  Inadvertent energization protection. •  External fault backup protection.

19.7  MOTOR PROTECTION Electric motors include induction (asynchronous) motors and synchronous motors. Induction motors may have squirrel cage or wound rotors. Synchronous motors have a rotor dc winding fed by an excitation system. These motors typically have a squirrel cage winding for starting. In this subsection, we focus on medium-voltage squirrel cage induction motor protection, which is covered in more detail in [39–41]. 19.7.1  Induction Motor Basic Concepts The stator of an induction motor has a distributed three-phase winding that creates a rotating magnetic field when a three-phase voltage is applied to it. Equation (19-22) defines the field rotating speed or synchronous speed ns. ns =

120 f p

(19-22)

where ns is the synchronous speed in revolutions per minute; f is the power system frequency in hertz; p is the number of stator poles. As noted before, induction motor rotors can have either a squirrel cage or a wound rotor winding. The squirrel cage winding consists of aluminum or copper bars placed in the slots of the rotor and running almost parallel to the shaft. Rings connect the bar ends to form a short-circuited assembly. The rotor bar assembly resembles a squirrel cage. The wound rotor winding is a three-phase winding, similar to the stator winding. Winding terminals are connected to three slip rings. Stationary brushes that press against the slip rings allow connecting the rotor winding to an external circuit, such as a three-phase resistor for high-staring torque applications or speed control purposes. The squirrel

19_Santoso_Sec19_p1169-1238.indd 1213

27/11/17 2:41 PM

1214        SECTION NINETEEN

cage induction motor is widely used in the industry because it is simpler, more rugged, and more economical than the wound rotor motor. The stator rotating magnetic field cuts the rotor bars and induces voltage in the conductors. The voltage drives a large current through the short-circuited bars. The field of the rotor current opposes the stator field and produces a torque to accelerate the rotor. At synchronous speed, there would be no relative motion between the rotor and the stator field and no induced voltage. Consequently, the rotor attains a speed slightly short of the synchronous speed at a point where the induced current supplies the load torque and losses. The slip s is the difference between the synchronous speed ns and the rotor speed nr , in per unit of ns , as Eq. (19-23) shows. s  =

ns − nr ns

(19-23)

Motor manufacturers provide information in the motor nameplate. For large motors, manufacturers generally also provide test data sheets and the characteristic current and torque graphs of the motor. These characteristic graphs include the torque versus speed and current versus speed graphs. Figure 19-44 depicts the typical variation of induction motor current and torque as functions of speed during the starting process. It shows the distinctive characteristic of the induction motor to drive very high current until the peak (or breakdown) torque develops near full speed. The lockedrotor current (labeled LRA in the figure) may be three to seven times or more of the motor rated full-load current (labeled FLA).

FIGURE 19-44  Induction motor characteristic graphs.

In some cases, the manufacturer provides partial information about the torque graph, such as the following values: •  Rated torque (FLT). •  Locked-rotor torque (LRT) in percent of the rated torque. •  Breakdown torque in percent of the rated torque.

19_Santoso_Sec19_p1169-1238.indd 1214

27/11/17 2:41 PM

POWER SYSTEM PROTECTION        1215 

Manufacturers also provide the motor thermal limit curves, which specify the motor thermal capability. A thermal limit curve is a plot of the maximum possible safe time as a function of the motor winding current for conditions other than normal operation. They represent three conditions: 1. Locked rotor. 2. Starting and accelerating. 3. Running overload. IEEE Standard 620 [42] provides the guidelines for presenting thermal limit curves of squirrel cage motors. The document states that the curves shall represent two initial conditions: the machine initially at ambient temperature, and the machine initially at rated operating temperature. Plots of the motor starting current as a function of time at 100% and 80% of rated voltage should also be included. The thermal limit curves show only two of the possible conditions of a first-order thermal process, where a balance of heat storage and heat loss determines temperature. Figure 19-45 shows the thermal limit curves for a 2250 hp, two-pole motor and the plot of the motor starting current at rated voltage. The motor starting time is typically shorter than the locked-rotor time, as shown in the figure. This allows the operating time of an inverse-time overcurrent relay to be set long enough to let the motor start, yet short enough to prevent the motor from exceeding the locked-rotor time. However, for high-inertia loads, the starting current may encroach on the locked-rotor limit curve, resulting in an insufficient coordination time margin. The motor appears to overheat and the inverse-time overcurrent relay cannot be set to avoid a trip. A microprocessorbased relay with an accurate motor thermal model can properly protect the motor. Motor insulation systems lose their physical and dielectric integrity over time from mechanical stress, contaminants in the insulation, and heat. Excessive temperatures substantially accelerate the decay process. The effect of elevated temperature is to reduce the ability of the insulation to withstand electrical or mechanical stress. The temperature level at which the insulation should be protected is a matter of judgment with some guidance in standards (such as NEMA Standard MG-1 [43]). Insulation failures cause motor internal faults. Motor overheating may result from FIGURE 19-45  Thermal limit curves of a 2250 hp, continuous or intermittent overload, unbal- two-pole induction motor. anced or low-voltage operation, locked-rotor conditions, higher than design ambient temperature or clogged cooling ducts. Induction motors have a large heat storage capacity, and slight balanced overloads for short periods of time do not produce damaging temperature excursions. Motor operation under voltage unbalance conditions causes negative-sequence current. The rotor negativesequence resistance is higher than the positive-sequence resistance. As a result, unbalanced motor

19_Santoso_Sec19_p1169-1238.indd 1215

27/11/17 2:41 PM

1216        SECTION NINETEEN

operation may cause excessive rotor heating even for normal load currents. Locked-rotor current causes rotor temperature to rise so quickly that there is little time for heat lost before reaching the limiting temperature. Motor thermal limit curves only specify the motor thermal capability for locked-rotor and balanced, slow-varying overload conditions. These curves do not show the effect of unbalanced, fastvarying, or intermittent overload conditions. In summary, typical induction motor problems include the following [41]: •  Electrical faults (phase and ground faults). •  Overheating resulting from: •  Overload (continuous or intermittent). •  Unbalanced operation. •  Locked rotor (failure to start or load jams). •  High ambient temperature. •  Clogged cooling ducts. •  Other abnormal conditions: • Abnormal voltage. • Abnormal frequency. •  Reversed phases. •  Frequent starts. •  Load loss. 19.7.2  Thermal Protection The purpose of motor thermal protection is to allow the motor to start and run within the manufacturer’s published guidelines, but trip if the motor thermal energy exceeds allowable values because of overloads, unbalanced operation, locked-rotor conditions, high ambient temperature, clogged ventilation ducts, or too frequent or prolonged starting. There are two methods of motor thermal protection. One method uses resistive temperature detectors (RTDs) to directly measure the motor temperature. The other method measures the motor stator currents (and in some cases voltages) and estimates the rotor and stator thermal energy levels. RTD-based protection provides good stator thermal protection for balanced, slow-varying overloads. It may also detect motor overheating because of high ambient temperature or clogged ventilation ducts. Additional RTDs on motor and drive gearings provide temperature information for the relay to detect impending mechanical problems. RTDs may also provide ambient temperature information. Unfortunately, the slow response of RTDs reduces their value to detect fast motor heating during the starting process. Additionally, the heating problems during starting conditions are mostly manifested in the rotor, making RTD transmission difficult and expensive. Finally, RTDs fail to provide reliable motor thermal information for unbalanced conditions and for fast-varying or intermittent overload conditions. RTD-based thermal protection is a good solution for large motors, but it must be complemented with current-based thermal protection. In the past, users relied on inverse-time phase overcurrent elements and a separate negativesequence overcurrent element to detect currents that could lead to overheating. However, inversetime overcurrent elements do not respond properly to the motor thermal dynamics during variable or intermittent load conditions. These elements neither accurately track the excursions of conductor temperatures nor account for the motor thermal history. A better approach for current-based motor thermal protection is to use mathematical thermal models that account for the I2R heating caused by positive- and negative-sequence currents. These

19_Santoso_Sec19_p1169-1238.indd 1216

27/11/17 2:41 PM

POWER SYSTEM PROTECTION        1217 

mathematical models use current information to calculate the motor thermal energy in real time. The thermal energy is then compared to thermal limit trip and alarm thresholds to prevent overheating from overload, unbalanced operation, locked rotor, or too frequent or prolonged startups [39, 44, 45]. The thermal models are defined by motor nameplate and thermal limit data. An electric motor behaves like a heat transfer system. The motor body is heated up by a heat source, which is given by the I2R losses. For a constant current condition, all the heat source energy is transferred to ambient by convection, conduction, and radiation, and the motor temperature is constant. When the motor current increases, the additional thermal energy is initially absorbed by the motor body, its temperature increases, and part of that energy is transferred to the cooler ambient. During some time, defined by the motor thermal time constant, the temperature rises to a new equilibrium value. The first-order equation of the heat transfer system has the same form as the equation expressing the voltage rise in an electrical resistive-capacitive circuit fed by a current source. Therefore, we can use the electrical analog circuit shown in Fig. 19-46 to visualize the motor thermal model. This electric analog of the heat transfer system includes a heat source, modeled as a current source; a thermal capacitance CTH, modeled as a capacitor that represents the motor body capacity to absorb thermal energy; a thermal resistance RTH, modeled as a resistor that represents the motor capacity to transfer heat to ambient; and a comparator, to compare the present thermal energy estimate U with a thermal trip threshold UTRIP. Figure 19-46 also shows the time variation of U when the motor experiences a sudden overload condition. The thermal model trips when U = UTRIP. The operating time is TTRIP in this example.

FIGURE 19-46  Electric analog circuit of the motor first-order thermal model.

Three thermal models describe the induction motor. The rotor thermal model includes an adiabatic model for the motor starting process and a first-order model for the motor normal running condition. The stator thermal model is a first-order model that represents the motor normal running condition. To define the rotor and stator thermal models, we need to determine the characteristics of each component of the electric analog circuit depicted in Fig. 19-46. For the rotor thermal model, we need to consider that, because of the skin effect, the current distribution on the rotor bar cross-sectional area depends on the rotor current frequency. The rotor current frequency fr equals s times the power system nominal frequency f. When the motor is in a normal running condition, the very low rotor current frequency (0.6 Hz for s = 0.01 at 60 Hz, for example) causes the current to be uniformly distributed on the rotor bar area. The rotor resistance RN at the rated running condition is low. At the beginning of the starting process, with the rotor at rest, s = 1, and fr = f. At this higher frequency, the rotor current flows in a fraction (approximately one-third) of the rotor bar crosssectional area. With the current flowing in approximately one-third of the area, the locked-rotor resistance RL is roughly three times the running resistance RN. The combination of high rotor starting current and increased rotor resistance produces very high I2R heating during the starting process.

19_Santoso_Sec19_p1169-1238.indd 1217

27/11/17 2:41 PM

1218        SECTION NINETEEN

For example, a typical starting current of six times the rated current with RL = 3 RN causes the I2R heating to be approximately 62 (3) = 108 times the heating at rated current [39]. Consequently, the extreme temperature caused by the high starting current must be tolerated for a limited time to allow the motor to start. This 60 Hz skin effect is called the deep bar effect. It is an important phenomenon used by motor designers to increase the starting torque by increasing the initial rotor resistance. As the motor accelerates, s decays, and the current occupies more and more of the rotor bar crosssectional area. The rotor positive-sequence resistance R1 varies linearly from the RL value to the RN value during the starting process. Equation (19-24) gives the positive-sequence rotor resistance R1 [39, 44, 45]. R1 = ( RL − RN )s + RN

(19-24)

Motor operation under three-phase unbalanced supply voltages causes unbalanced stator currents. The resulting negative-sequence current causes a magnetic field that rotates in opposition to the rotor rotation. The field rotates with respect to the rotor at twice synchronous speed, less the slip value, and the induced rotor current has a frequency equal to (2 – s) f. Because of the skin effect, this high-frequency current concentrates close to the rotor bar surface and occupies a very small portion (approximately one-sixth) of the rotor bar cross-sectional area. With the current flowing in approximately one-sixth of the area, the rotor negative-sequence resistance R2 is approximately six times the running resistance RN. This concentration of current causes excess heating that can quickly overheat and damage the rotor. We obtain the expression for the negative-sequence resistance R2 by replacing s with the negativesequence slip 2 – s in Eq. (19-24): R2 = ( RL − RN )(2 − s ) + RN

(19-25)

In an induction motor, the rotor heat source is the I2R losses caused by the positive- and negativesequence currents. We can obtain factors expressing the relative heating effect of positive- and negative-sequence currents by dividing Eqs. (19-24) and (19-25) by the running resistance RN. Equation (19-26) provides the heat source expression, valid for the starting and running conditions.

Heat Source =

R1 2 R2 2 I + I (19-26) RN 1 R N 2

Figure 19-47 depicts the adiabatic rotor thermal model for motor starting, assuming the rotor positive- and negative-sequence resistances to be constant during the starting process. During this process, the motor heats up very fast without losing thermal energy to the surrounding environment. Heat transfer is limited by the fact that forced cooling is absent at the initial locked-rotor condition and increases slowly as the motor gains speed. In this adiabatic process, the motor temperature grows continuously until the starting current decreases to a normal value or the motor is disconnected. For this reason, the model does not include a thermal resistance. After successfully starting, the motor cools down and eventually reaches the normal running temperature.

FIGURE 19-47  Rotor thermal model for the motor starting condition.

19_Santoso_Sec19_p1169-1238.indd 1218

27/11/17 2:41 PM

POWER SYSTEM PROTECTION        1219 

For the locked-rotor condition, s = 1. Hence, both the positive-sequence slip s and the negativesequence slip 2 – s equal unity. From Eqs. (19-24) and (19-25), we get

R1 = R2 = RL (19-27)

Substituting Eq. (19-27) into Eq. (19-26), we get the heat source expression for the locked-rotor condition:

Heat Source =  

RL 2 2 ( I + I ) (19-28) RN 1 2

In order to determine the thermal trip threshold of the model we use the motor safe starting time, which is indicated by the thermal limit curves shown in Fig. 19-45. The cold locked-rotor characteristic specifies the time for the starting current to heat the rotor to the limit temperature with the motor initially at ambient temperature. The hot locked-rotor characteristic specifies the time for the starting current to heat the rotor to the limit temperature with the motor initially at rated operating temperature. The rotor model trip threshold (Fig. 19-47) should equal the allowable temperature rise for starting from rated operating temperature:

Thermal Trip Threshold = I L2TO

(19-29)

where IL is the locked-rotor current in per unit of the rated current IN; TO is the safe locked-rotor time from rated operating temperature. The thermal capacitance CTH of the model is selected equal to RL/RN (Fig. 19-47). With CTH = RL/RN, the thermal energy estimate U reaches the trip value in the locked-rotor time when the motor positive-sequence current I1 equals the locked-rotor current IL. Figure 19-48 depicts the rotor thermal model for the motor running condition. When the motor is running, it transfers thermal energy to the surroundings through radiation, conduction, and convection. The rotor running thermal model simulates this heat transfer through the thermal resistor RTH.

FIGURE 19-48  Rotor thermal model for the motor running condition.

For the motor running condition, s ≈ 0. Hence, the positive-sequence slip s is close to zero, and the negative-sequence slip 2 – s is close to two. From Eqs. (19-24) and (19-25), we get

R1 = RN (19-30)



R2 = 2RL – RN (19-31)

Substituting Eqs. (19-30) and (19-31) into Eq. (19-26), we get the rotor heat source expression for the motor running condition:

19_Santoso_Sec19_p1169-1238.indd 1219

 R  Heat Source = I12 +  2 L − 1 I 22  RN 

(19-32)

27/11/17 2:41 PM

1220        SECTION NINETEEN

The thermal trip threshold in this case equals the thermal energy level representing the motor rated operating temperature times the motor service factor squared:

Thermal Trip Threshold = SF 2U O =   SF 2 ( I L )2 (TA − TO )

(19-33)

where UO is the motor thermal energy level at rated operating temperature; SF is the motor service factor; TA is the safe locked-rotor time from ambient temperature. The value of the thermal resistance RTH should reflect the fact that the motor will reach a thermal energy level representing the rated operating temperature when 1 p.u. of positive-sequence current flows in the motor for a long time. Because the positive-sequence heating factor equals one in the running model, and 1 p.u. of I1 squared equals one, the value of the thermal resistance RTH equals the thermal energy level at the motor rated operating temperature U O =   I L2 (TA − TO ). As in the rotor model for the starting condition, the thermal capacitance CTH is selected equal to RL/RN (Fig. 19-48). Relays using the described thermal models automatically select the rotor thermal model state to use based on the magnitude of the sum of positive- and negative-sequence currents [39, 44, 45]. The relay declares a starting state when this current exceeds 2.5 p.u. of the motor rated current. In this starting condition, the model assumes the rotor resistance remains constant at the locked-rotor value (Rr = RL). The relay declares a running state when the current becomes less than 2.5 p.u. In this state, the trip threshold decreases exponentially from the locked-rotor value to the running condition value using the motor thermal time constant. This method emulates the motor temperature that decreases to the steady-state running condition after the motor starts. In the running condition, the model assumes the rotor resistance has the rated running value (Rr = RN). Assuming the RL/RN ratio to be equal to three, the model thermal capacitance CTH equals three. From Eqs. (19-28) and (19-32), the heat sources for the rotor thermal models are the following:

Starting model: Heat Source = 3( I12 + I 22 )

(19-34)



Running model: Heat Source = I12 + 5 I 22

(19-35)

The running overload curves (Fig. 19-45) show the stator thermal limit. These curves fit the timecurrent Eq. (19-36), which has the form of the thermal characteristic equation defined in Clause 3.1.2 of IEC Standard 255-8 [46].  I 2 − I02  t   =  τ  • ln  2  I − SF 2 

(19-36)

where t is the stator thermal time constant; I is the stator current in per unit of rated current; I0 is the initial current in per unit of rated current; SF is the motor service factor. The overload curves shown in Fig. 19-45 are asymptotic to a current equal to the service factor, which heats the stator to its temperature limit. These curves are taken as the trip threshold. The stator thermal time constant can be determined by a heat run, where a load current is applied and the temperature rise is measured at regular time intervals. The temperature will rise exponentially, and the thermal time constant will be the time it takes the temperature to reach 63.2% of its final value. In the case of the 2250 hp motor, the time constant τ is 4940 s. Figure 19-49 depicts the equivalent circuit that corresponds to the stator first-order thermal model. In this case, the thermal capacitance CTH equals the motor thermal time constant τ. By assigning a value of 1 to the thermal resistor RTH, we get a value equal to τ for the time constant RTH CTH of the equivalent circuit. Since the positive- and negative-sequence currents have the same heating effect on the stator, the heat source equals I12   +   I 22 . With RTH = 1, the trip threshold should equal the service factor squared. Another alternative for the stator thermal model equivalent circuit results when we assign a value of

19_Santoso_Sec19_p1169-1238.indd 1220

27/11/17 2:41 PM

POWER SYSTEM PROTECTION        1221 

FIGURE 19-49  Stator thermal model for the motor running condition.

I L2 (TA – TO) to the thermal resistance RTH and a value of SF2 (IL)2 (TA – TO) to the thermal trip setting. The heat source and the thermal capacitance CTH do not change in this case. 19.7.3  Short-Circuit Protection Phase and ground overcurrent protection limits the damage caused by faults in the motor stator windings and leads. Phase overcurrent elements also provide a certain level of ground fault protection. However, ground overcurrent elements provide higher sensitivity for ground fault detection. Figure 19-50 shows two motor overcurrent protection schemes. With modern relays, the scheme in Fig. 19-50a can include the following elements: phase overcurrent instantaneous elements (50);

FIGURE 19-50  Motor overcurrent protection schemes. (a) The ground elements measure the CT residual current; (b) a flux-summing CT provides the zero-sequence current.

19_Santoso_Sec19_p1169-1238.indd 1221

27/11/17 2:41 PM

1222        SECTION NINETEEN

phase short-time, definite-time elements (50D); phase overcurrent inverse-time elements (51); a ground overcurrent instantaneous element (50N); and a ground overcurrent inverse-time element (51N) or a ground short-time, definite-time element (50ND). In this scheme, ground fault detection sensitivity is limited by the high phase CT ratios and by the fictitious residual current caused by uneven CT saturation during the motor starting process. Figure 19-51 depicts a typical coordination chart for the overcurrent elements included in the Fig. 19-50a scheme.

FIGURE 19-51  Typical coordination chart for the overcurrent protection scheme shown in Fig. 19-50a.

To improve sensitivity, we can use a ground element (50G) connected to the secondary of a fluxsumming CT, as shown in Fig. 19-50b. Since this CT measures three times the zero-sequence current, it can have a considerably lower ratio than phase CTs (a typical ratio is 50/5). In addition, this scheme avoids the false residual current problem of the Fig. 19-50a scheme. In high-capacity medium voltage motors, we can also apply differential protection. The protection scheme is similar to the scheme used in generators (Fig. 19-37). Three CTs are usually located in the switchgear in order to include the motor cables in the protection zone. The remaining three CTs are located in the neutral connection of the motor. Six leads must be brought out from the motor as specified at the time of purchase.

19_Santoso_Sec19_p1169-1238.indd 1222

27/11/17 2:41 PM

POWER SYSTEM PROTECTION        1223 

19.7.4  Other Motor Protection Functions Motor protection must cover other abnormal operation conditions, such as the following: •  Load jam and load loss are abnormal operation conditions that require detection and protection. We can provide load-jam protection with a definite-time overcurrent element. This function is armed once the motor is running to ride through high starting currents. Load-jam conditions can also be detected by a well-designed motor thermal element; however, the specific load-jam protection trips faster than the thermal element. A load-loss condition is caused by an issue with the driven load, such as a broken shaft. For load-loss detection, we can use time-delayed undercurrent or underpower elements, which are enabled once the motor is running. •  During each startup, the components of the induction motor (stator coil, rotor bars, and rotor end rings) are subjected to very high mechanical and thermal stresses due to the high value of the starting current and inadequate cooling before the motor comes up to speed and forced cooling becomes effective. The cumulative effect of frequent startups can cause critical component temperatures to rise and exceed the design limits. This condition can result in damage to the rotor or insulation system. We must limit the number of startups per hour to a safe value, recommended either by the manufacturer or by NEMA Standard MG-1 [43]. We can use a startup counter to protect the motor from excessive starting. •  The rotor running thermal model presented earlier accounts for the negative-sequence heating and provides current unbalance protection under all operation conditions. However, some motor protection relays lack a thermal model. In other relays, the thermal model does not account for the negative-sequence rotor heating. In these cases, a separate negative-sequence overcurrent element should provide current unbalance protection. A pickup current of 3I2 = 1.5 A with a definite time delay of 4 s are typical settings [39]. You can also use this negative-sequence overcurrent element to complement a thermal element that accounts for the negative-sequence heating. •  In some applications, such as pumps, the head causes the motor pump to reverse rotation direction after the motor is shut down. It is not desirable to restart the motor during this condition because the excessive torques can damage the motor and driven equipment. The solution is to block a restart for some time until after the motor and pump have stopped turning. •  Induction motors are capable of operating at rated balanced load with a ±10% variation from normal voltage. Because motors are constant kVA loads, the current increases with decreasing voltage. In addition, torque decreases as a function of the voltage squared. Consequently, low voltage causes increased temperature and the possibility of stalling, in the worst case. Undervoltage elements with an appropriate time delay provide motor undervoltage protection. The time delay allows overriding transient voltage sags caused by motor starting and short circuits on adjacent sections of the power system. However, the application of undervoltage protection depends on the service provided by the motor. A general approach is to trip nonessential motors for undervoltage conditions to allow the voltage to recover and to keep the essential motors in operation.

19.8  WIDE-AREA PROTECTION AND CONTROL Modern power systems typically have reduced redundancy and operate close to their security limits. They are prone to angle and voltage stability problems that could lead to major system collapse. Local systems protecting transmission lines, generators, transformers, and buses are the first line of defense against power system disturbances. Reliable, fast, and selective fault clearance normally prevents cascading events that could cause wide-area disturbances. However, modern power systems also need wide-area protection and control systems (system integrity protection systems) that detect abnormal system conditions and take preplanned, corrective actions to minimize the risk of wide-area disruptions and to increase power system transfer capability [2]. This subsection reviews power system out-of-step protection, underfrequency and undervoltage load shedding, and

19_Santoso_Sec19_p1169-1238.indd 1223

27/11/17 2:41 PM

1224        SECTION NINETEEN

automatic generator shedding. Reference [2] provides a comprehensive coverage of modern widearea protection, control, and monitoring systems. 19.8.1  Power Swing Blocking and Out-of-Step Tripping Power system disturbances cause oscillations in machine rotor angles that result in power flow swings. Depending on the disturbance severity and the control actions, the system may return to a new equilibrium state (a stable power swing) or may have an out-of-step condition, a loss of synchronism between groups of generators. Fast fault clearing prevents power system transient stability problems that could cause major blackouts. Power swings may cause undesirable power system protection operation that could have a compounding effect on the power system disturbance. Hence, protection systems must trip fast for faults and remain secure during power swings. Figure 19-52 shows the angular behavior of a simple two-machine system during stable and unstable power swings. In a stable system, the angle d between the machine voltages oscillates in a damped mode around a final value d1. The system reaches a new steady-state operation point. No protection operation is required during stable power swings. In an unstable system, d grows monotonically, and the machines lose synchronism. Unstable system operation is undesirable, as it creates high currents and power flows, as well as high and low voltages. Unstable system operation also causes severe generator torque oscillations. Voltage fluctuations may also affect the power station auxiliaries, which may need to be tripped. The protection systems must detect unstable system oscillations and make the appropriate tripping decisions in order to divide the system into electrical islands.

FIGURE 19-52 Power system angular behavior during stable and unstable power swings.

Current and voltage fluctuations during the power swing may cause undesirable operation of distance, phase directional overcurrent, phase overcurrent, and phase undervoltage elements. Current differential protection schemes are immune to power swings because these swings only cause through current in the differential scheme. The impedance measured by distance elements tends to oscillate during power swings as a result of voltage and current oscillations. The voltage near the electrical center of the system decreases while the current increases, which appears as an underimpedance condition. The measured impedance may penetrate the element operating characteristic and cause a misoperation. Figure 19-53 depicts typical impedance trajectories for stable and unstable power swings. In a stable power swing, d grows to a given maximum value (typically between 90° and 120°) during the first oscillation and then recovers. The impedance trajectory typically does not leave the first (and eventually fourth) quadrant or the second (and eventually third) quadrant, depending on the initial system operation condition. During an unstable power swing, d continues to grow (or to decrease)

19_Santoso_Sec19_p1169-1238.indd 1224

27/11/17 2:41 PM

POWER SYSTEM PROTECTION        1225 

FIGURE 19-53  Power swings may cause undesirable distance element operation.

monotonically and never recovers. The resulting impedance trajectory moves from the first or fourth quadrant to the second or third quadrant, or vice versa, depending on the initial system operation condition. Figure 19-53 shows that the measured impedance can penetrate distance element operating characteristics. The element will trip if the measured impedance stays inside the operating characteristic for a time greater than the zone time delay. Fast-operating Zone 1 elements and directional comparison tripping schemes are particularly sensitive to power swings. However, Zone 2 and Zone 3 elements may also misoperate for slow power swings. The protection philosophy for power swings is to avoid tripping for stable power swings and to separate the power system into islands for unstable power swings, to prevent wide-area blackouts and equipment damage. The power swing blocking (PSB) function (68) discriminates between faults and power swings and blocks relay elements prone to operate during power swings. The out-of-step tripping (OOST) function (78) discriminates between stable and unstable power swings and initiates system islanding during loss of synchronism. Most power swing detection methods use measured impedance information. Other methods estimate the swing-center voltage and its rate of change or use synchrophasor information [2]. Power swing detection is often based on the rate of change of the measured impedance [47]. The traditional approach is to compare the measured phase or positive-sequence impedance with an element characteristic on the impedance plane. This characteristic may consist of circles, blinders, or polygons. Figure 19-54 shows a characteristic composed of two concentric polygons, defined on the positive-sequence impedance plane. You can use this characteristic to provide PSB and OOST functions. Set the outer power swing detection characteristic (OPSD) so that it does not operate for the maximum load conditions. For PSB applications, set the inner characteristic (IPSD) to be outside the largest distance element characteristic you want to block (shown as a mho circle in Fig. 19-54). For OOST applications, set the IPSD characteristic so that it does not operate for the worst stable power swing. An alternative to the use of two concentric polygons is a characteristic with four blinders. The PSB logic using the characteristic shown in Fig. 19-54 measures the impedance rate of change to discriminate power swings from faults. The measured impedance changes slowly during power swings because of large generator rotor inertias. The impedance rate of change is very fast during a system fault. The PSB logic issues a blocking signal when the measured positive-sequence impedance stays between the OPSD characteristic and the IPSD characteristic longer than a blocking delay (a relay setting). The impedance rate of change also helps discriminate between stable (slower) and unstable (faster) power swings. The OOST logic based on the Fig. 19-54 characteristic issues a tripping signal when the positive-sequence impedance remains between the OPSD characteristic and the IPSD characteristic longer than a tripping delay (a relay setting) and then enters the IPSD characteristic. The tripping

19_Santoso_Sec19_p1169-1238.indd 1225

27/11/17 2:41 PM

1226        SECTION NINETEEN

FIGURE 19-54  Power swing detection characteristic composed of two concentric polygons, applicable to PSB and OOST functions.

delay is shorter than the blocking delay. This trip-on-the-way-in (TOWI) occurs before the first pole slip, when the angle between the equivalent generators at both sides of the relay is less than 180°. You can also program the OOST logic to trip after the timer expires and the impedance enters and then exits the IPSD characteristic. This trip-on-the-way-out (TOWO) occurs after the first pole slip. To select between TOWI and TOWO, conduct transient stability studies and evaluate the ability of the breakers to interrupt current with a significant voltage across the contacts. Another impedance-based power swing detection method uses the characteristic shown in Fig. 19-55, which is applicable to the OOST function in generators. Two blinders divide the impedance plane into three areas. The blinders are located at both sides of the system impedance. During faults or stable swings, the apparent impedance moves from Area 1 to Area 2 or from Area 3 to Area 2, depending on the initial system operation condition. On the other hand, an

FIGURE 19-55  Power swing detection characteristic composed of two blinders, applicable to the OOST function in generators.

19_Santoso_Sec19_p1169-1238.indd 1226

27/11/17 2:41 PM

POWER SYSTEM PROTECTION        1227 

unstable swing causes the apparent impedance to cross all three areas of the impedance plane. This information can be used as the basis for the OOST logic. This logic initiates generator breaker tripping after the first pole slip (TOWO). The swing center of a two-source equivalent power system is the location where the voltage magnitude equals zero when the angle between the source voltages is 180°. The swing-center voltage provides information for power swing detection. References [2] and [48] describe a PSB method that uses the rate of change of the positive-sequence swing-center voltage. This method does not require user settings or stability studies for proper application. Reference [2] also describes synchrophasor-based power swing detection methods. 19.8.2  Underfrequency Load Shedding When a power system experiences a sudden increase of load (tripping of a tie line, for example) or a sudden generation loss, the resulting overload condition causes the frequency to decrease. If the available generators cannot increase output fast enough, the magnitude of the frequency drop and its rate of change depend on the magnitude of the overload, the effect of frequency-sensitive loads, which demand less active power at lower frequencies, and the power system inertia constant, which represents the total rotational inertia of all generating units and loads. Generator operation at abnormal frequency subjects steam turbine blades to mechanical resonance and fatigue. Manufacturers typically provide data on permissible turbine operating time at specified frequency bands. The manufacturer could require that blade fatigue damage be considered cumulative during the turbine life. Generator abnormal frequency protection trips the generator breaker when the generating unit operates out of the specified frequency bands. The abnormal frequency operation limitations of combustion gas turbines are similar to those of steam turbines. Hydraulic turbines have broader frequency operating ranges than steam and combustion gas turbines. At low frequencies, the power station auxiliaries driven by induction motors have reduced output. These auxiliaries include boiler feed pumps, fans supplying combustion air, and in nuclear stations, coolant fluid pumps. The result is reduced power station capability, which limits the generation reserve available for frequency control. During power system underfrequency disturbances, the resulting reduction of power plant output compounds the problem. If the frequency reaches the setting values of generator abnormal frequency protection, generation unit tripping further increases the active power deficit and can cause a major blackout. The solution to this problem is a wide-area underfrequency (81) load-shedding scheme that disconnects load to restore the generation-load balance before generation units begin to trip on underfrequency. In most disturbances, load-shedding schemes restore the system frequency close to its rated value. Traditional load-shedding schemes consist of underfrequency relays located at selected feeders, which are grouped in several load-shedding stages. When the frequency drops below the firststage setting value, the corresponding feeders are disconnected from the system. If the frequency continues to drop, other load-shedding stages are activated. Some underfrequency load-shedding schemes have as many as five underfrequency stages set at, for example, 59.2, 59, 58.8, 58.6, and 58.4 Hz in a 60 Hz system. Ideally, all underfrequency load-shedding schemes should have the same operating time so that the schemes act simultaneously across the power system when the frequency drops. A typical operating time is six cycles. Some traditional schemes also shed load groups at the same frequency, but with different time delays. This time-delayed operation allows for temporary frequency drops. Schemes based on frequency drop typically work well for small overloads. For large overloads, frequency drops very fast, and a scheme that takes into account frequency drop and frequency rate of change provides better performance. Designing underfrequency load-shedding schemes requires determining the total amount of load to shed, the number of load groups, and the frequency and delay settings for each load group. Schemes that also respond to frequency rate of change require determining this setting for each load group. Scheme design involves extensive dynamic simulation studies. These studies should consider

19_Santoso_Sec19_p1169-1238.indd 1227

27/11/17 2:41 PM

1228        SECTION NINETEEN

system topology (and possible formation of islands), types of generation and loads, operation conditions, allowable frequency bands, and types of frequency relays. Once the scheme is in operation, systematic analysis of its operation using disturbance records provides data for improving the scheme. Underfrequency load-shedding scheme design considerations include the following: •  The total amount of load to shed should be no less than the maximum expected system overload in order to restore frequency to a normal level. The analysis to determine this value should consider system operation as a whole and the possibility of system islanding. Typical load values to shed are 25% to 50% of maximum demand. •  System underfrequency relays should be coordinated with generator underfrequency protection. This setting ensures that load shedding prevents the frequency from falling to a value where generators start tripping, thus aggravating the disturbance. In some cases, you have to set some system underfrequency relays below the generator underfrequency protection setting values. In these cases, the system underfrequency relays should operate faster than the generator relays to ensure coordination. •  Frequency settings for the load groups depend on the types of generating units and frequency elements. Typical values of the minimum separation between load group frequency settings are 0.3 Hz for hydraulic generation and 0.2 Hz for thermal generation. Traditional underfrequency load-shedding schemes trip predetermined feeders when underfrequency conditions exist for a certain amount of time. The system has no information on the amount of power that has been shed. Sometimes, more load is shed than necessary. Ideally, we want to shed just the amount of load necessary for the system to recover and to optimize power delivery. We can develop an underfrequency load-shedding scheme that adapts to system operation conditions. Such a scheme can be designed with existing microprocessor-based relays, taking advantage of relay programmability, mathematical calculation ability, and the ability to communicate with other IEDs. The adaptive scheme shown in Fig. 19-56 reads the amount of power PSD that the system must shed according to system operation conditions in real time [49]. At the same time, the scheme has information about the power demand P1 and P2 of the feeders. Additionally, load priority can be programmed into the scheme to trip less critical loads first. Load shedding and system performance can be optimized with this information.

FIGURE 19-56  Adaptive underfrequency load-shedding scheme.

The scheme reads the system active-power load-shedding requirements PSD. When an underfrequency condition exists, the scheme trips Feeder 1 if the Feeder 1 active power P1 is greater than PSD. Otherwise, the scheme checks if the load P2 in Feeder 2 is greater than PSD. If P2 is greater than PSD, the scheme trips Feeder 2. If neither of the above loading conditions occurs, the scheme trips both feeders. With this scheme, one feeder, Feeder 2, could remain in service during an underfrequency disturbance when Feeder 1 load exceeds the system load-shedding requirements for a specific substation. Similarly, Feeder 1 could remain in service during the underfrequency disturbance when the Feeder 2 load exceeds the system load-shedding requirements for a specific substation.

19_Santoso_Sec19_p1169-1238.indd 1228

27/11/17 2:41 PM

POWER SYSTEM PROTECTION        1229 

19.8.3  Undervoltage Load Shedding When a power system experiences a sudden deficit of reactive power (losing a large reactive power source, for example), the resulting condition causes the voltage to decrease. If the reactive power sources available cannot increase output fast enough, the system may experience a voltage collapse. Load shedding is the last resort in preventing a system voltage collapse; definite-time undervoltage elements (27) are traditionally used for load shedding [50]. One disadvantage of this loadshedding method is that the tripping time is fixed independently of the type of load. However, voltage collapse depends on the type of load. For example, induction motors demand more reactive power from the system than other loads. A load-shedding scheme should identify loads demanding the most reactive power and shed these loads as soon as possible without affecting other loads in the system [49]. The system shown in Fig. 19-57 consists of two transmission lines that feed a load with constant power. Figure 19-58 shows the PV curves of this system for normal operation conditions and for operation with one transmission line out of service [2]. Point A is the operation point for a normal operation condition; PA is the active power that the load consumes for this condition. When one of the lines opens, the system PV curve changes, and Point C is the new critical operating point. The amount of load to be shed PSD must be greater than PA – PC to restore stable operation conditions in the system. If PSD = PA – PB, which is greater than PA – PC, the new operating point is B.

FIGURE 19-57 Two-transmission line power system feeding a constant power load.

FIGURE 19-58  PV curves of Fig. 19-57 system for normal operation conditions and for operation with one of the transmission lines out of service.

19_Santoso_Sec19_p1169-1238.indd 1229

27/11/17 2:41 PM

1230        SECTION NINETEEN

Undervoltage load-shedding schemes can have distributed or centralized topologies: •  Distributed schemes use relays associated with load groups. Using feeder multifunction relays for undervoltage load shedding reduces scheme cost. These schemes respond to local voltage only. •  Centralized schemes use a processor that receives voltage information from several locations, makes load-shedding decisions, and sends tripping commands to remote loads. These schemes measure voltage at critical system nodes and can also monitor load flow over important tie lines, which provides better information about impending voltage collapse conditions. These schemes require communications channels. Figure 19-59 shows a distributed undervoltage load-shedding scheme using a multifunction relay. The positive-sequence undervoltage element (27V1) operates with some time delay to shed the feeder load when the voltage drops below a threshold value. Old schemes used three phase undervoltage elements (27P) instead of a 27V1 element. The positive-sequence voltage is a better measure of the system voltage level than individual phase voltage measurements.

FIGURE 19-59  Distributed undervoltage load-shedding scheme.

The scheme requires supervision to avoid misoperation for voltage sags caused by faults: •  Phase instantaneous overcurrent elements (50) provide supervision to prevent undervoltage scheme operation for feeder phase faults. We can add instantaneous negative-sequence (50Q) and/or ground (50N) overcurrent elements to detect unbalanced faults, including ground faults. •  A ground overvoltage element (59N) detects the zero-sequence voltage caused by ground faults. The load-shedding scheme operates only when there is no zero-sequence voltage present. A negativesequence overvoltage element (59Q) is an alternative to the 59N element. Figure 19-60 depicts the distributed load-shedding scheme logic. If an undervoltage condition exists, and there is no overcurrent and no zero-sequence or negative-sequence voltage, the timer starts. After a certain time T (1 s, for example), the scheme sheds the feeder load. Schemes with different delays provide staggered load shedding to minimize voltage overshooting conditions after the load is shed. Figure 19-61 shows a more elaborate power system model to study voltage stability [49, 51]. The system has constant impedance load at Bus 8 and a combination of constant impedance and constant current loads at Bus 11. Figure 19-62 shows the voltage magnitudes at Bus 8 and Bus 9 after two of the five transmission lines that connect Bus 6 and Bus 7 open. The voltages at both buses drop immediately after the lines open. The voltage magnitude at Bus 9 is about 4% lower than the voltage

19_Santoso_Sec19_p1169-1238.indd 1230

27/11/17 2:41 PM

POWER SYSTEM PROTECTION        1231 

FIGURE 19-60 Distributed undervoltage load-shedding scheme logic.

magnitude at Bus 8. The load at Bus 11 is the most critical one for voltage stability because of the under-load tap changer (ULTC) of the transformer feeding this load. The ULTC operates to raise the voltage at Bus 11. This action increases the reactive power consumption at Bus 11 and causes the voltages at Bus 8 and Bus 9 to continue dropping. Definite-time undervoltage elements at Bus 8 and Bus 9 (set to 95% of rated voltage as shown in Fig. 19-62) trip after a preset time delay to drop both loads. This undervoltage element operation does not consider the fact that the voltage at Bus 9 is lower than the voltage at Bus 8. We can use an inverse-time undervoltage element to provide faster undervoltage element operation at the buses where the voltage drops deeper and faster in order to minimize system disturbance. Another advantage of this approach is that the inverse-time element operating time increases during system voltage recovery because the voltage magnitude increases over time. That is, inverse-time undervoltage elements take advantage of load dynamics for optimizing load shedding to prevent system voltage collapse while minimizing overshedding. Figure 19-63 shows an inverse-time undervoltage element characteristic. The element starts timing when the voltage drops below a threshold value and trips in a time TU that is a function of the per unit voltage magnitude V/VNOM.

FIGURE 19-61  Power system model to study voltage stability.

19_Santoso_Sec19_p1169-1238.indd 1231

27/11/17 2:41 PM

1232        SECTION NINETEEN

FIGURE 19-62  Voltage magnitudes at Bus 8 and Bus 9 of Fig. 19-61 system. When two lines open, both voltages drop below 95% (the setting of definite-time undervoltage elements).

FIGURE 19-63  Inverse-time undervoltage element characteristic.

19_Santoso_Sec19_p1169-1238.indd 1232

27/11/17 2:41 PM

POWER SYSTEM PROTECTION        1233 

Figure 19-64 depicts the effect of applying inverse-time undervoltage elements at Bus 8 and Bus 9 of the system shown in Fig. 19-61. The undervoltage element at Bus 9, the bus with the lowest voltage, operates faster than the element at Bus 8 because of the inverse-time characteristic. This operation drops Bus 11 load. After the load at Bus 11 drops, the system returns to stable conditions, without dropping the load at Bus 8.

FIGURE 19-64  Voltage magnitudes at Bus 8 and Bus 9 of Fig. 19-61 system. The voltage at Bus 8 recovers immediately after the inverse-time undervoltage element at Bus 9 trips to drop the Bus 11 load.

Figure 19-65 depicts a centralized undervoltage load-shedding scheme that monitors undervoltage conditions in three areas of a power system with inadequate reactive power reserve [52]. The scheme also monitors the reactive power output of four synchronous condensers. The synchronous condensers are located in Area 3. The voltage measurements are taken from 230 kV buses. Figure 19-66 depicts the scheme logic. The total reactive power output of the four synchronous condensers enables and disables the undervoltage load-shedding scheme. The scheme is enabled when the synchronous condensers operate close to their rated output. In this condition, the synchronous condensers may not be able to provide system reactive power requirements during some disturbances. If the voltage drops below 97% of the minimum normal voltage in Area 1 and Area 3 or in Area 2 and Area 3 for longer than a T1 delay, the scheme sheds Load Block 1. Load Block 2 and Load Block 3 are shed after T2 and T3 delays to provide staggered load shedding. 19.8.4  Automatic Generator Shedding Line tripping during severe disturbances reduces power transfer over critical transmission links and may cause the system to lose synchronism. As a consequence, the OOST schemes will divide the system in islands and many generators will be tripped. Automatic, selective tripping of generating units upon detection of line tripping is a preventive action that may preserve power system stability. Utilities typically design automatic generation-shedding schemes (AGSSs) to operate for double contingencies. For most AGSSs, the double contingencies of interest occur when two parallel lines are lost simultaneously. Loss of two major transmission lines will severely stress most power systems.

19_Santoso_Sec19_p1169-1238.indd 1233

27/11/17 2:41 PM

1234        SECTION NINETEEN

FIGURE 19-65  Centralized undervoltage load-shedding scheme.

FIGURE 19-66  Centralized undervoltage load-shedding scheme logic.

For transmission links with several lines and intermediate substations, existing AGSSs monitor network topology and power transfer capability using open-line detectors to enable generation shedding, select generators to trip, or activate tripping commands. Open-line detectors are based on the following: •  Breaker auxiliary contact signals (52a or 52b). •  Undercurrent elements and/or underpower elements. Usually, these AGSSs use information from both terminals of each transmission line to determine whether the line is open. This method requires twice as many open-line detectors as transmission lines. This subsection describes a synchrophasor-based AGSS as an example of the many possible applications of synchrophasors for wide-area protection, control, and monitoring. This system

19_Santoso_Sec19_p1169-1238.indd 1234

27/11/17 2:41 PM

POWER SYSTEM PROTECTION        1235 

uses information on the angle difference d between two buses to detect open-line conditions. The two-machine system shown in Fig. 19-67 illustrates this concept. During steady-state operation conditions, the voltage magnitudes of the power system buses are close to 1 p.u. The active power transfer capability depends mainly on voltage angle difference d and transmission link reactance. This reactance depends on the number of lines and transformers in service between the two buses. When transmission lines are lost during a system disturbance, the link reactance and angle difference increase to maintain the same active power transfer between the two buses.

FIGURE 19-67  Angle difference serves to detect an open-line condition.

Figure 19-68 illustrates the active-power transfer capability as a function of voltage angle difference d and the operating point of the power system, both during normal operation conditions and after transmission lines are lost because of a system disturbance. The increase in transmission link reactance reduces the system power transfer capability and causes the angle difference to increase from d0 to d1.

FIGURE 19-68  Angle difference increases when the parallel line opens.

Figure 19-69 shows the section of the utility power system where the synchrophasor-based AGSS was installed [53]. In this power system, two 400 kV transmission links and one 115 kV subtransmission network interconnect two hydroelectric power plants, called Power Plant 1 and Power Plant 2

19_Santoso_Sec19_p1169-1238.indd 1235

27/11/17 2:41 PM

1236        SECTION NINETEEN

FIGURE 19-69  Simplified diagram of the utility power system.

in the figure. When two of the 400 kV parallel lines between Power Plant 1 and Power Plant 2 trip, the shedding of all generators except one at Power Plant 2 avoids uncontrolled power flow over the subtransmission network. The generator that remains in service feeds the load in the isolated area. The AGSS installed at Power Plant 2 includes relays that measure the 400 kV bus positivesequence voltages at the Power Plant 1 and Power Plant 2 buses, respectively. The relay at Power Plant 1 sends the voltage information to the relay at Power Plant 2. The AGSS monitors the voltage angle difference between Power Plant 1 and Power Plant 2 and detects the loss of the 400 kV links. The AGSS needs only two synchrophasor voltage measurements and one communications channel to monitor the system. Therefore, the AGSS has fewer points of failure, which makes it more reliable than a system using traditional open-line detectors.

19.9 REFERENCES 1. North American Electric Reliability Corporation, “Misoperations Report,” prepared by the Protection System Misoperation Task Force, Apr. 2013. Available: http://www.nerc.com/docs/pc/psmtf/PSMTF _Report.pdf. 2. H. J. Altuve Ferrer, and E. O. Schweitzer, III (eds.), Modern Solutions for Protection, Control, and Monitoring of Electric Power Systems. Schweitzer Engineering Laboratories, Inc., Pullman, WA, 2010. 3. IRIG Serial Time Code Formats, IRIG Standard 200-04, 2004. 4. K. Behrendt and K. Fodero, “The Perfect Time: An Examination of Time-Synchronization Techniques,” in 60th Annual Georgia Tech Protective Relaying Conference, Atlanta, GA, May 2006. 5. IEEE Standard for a Precision Clock Synchronization Protocol for Networked Measurement and Control Systems, IEEE Standard 1588, 2008. 6. K. Fodero, C. Huntley, and D. Whitehead, “Secure, Wide-Area Time Synchronization,” in 12th Annual Western Power Delivery Automation Conference, Spokane, WA, Apr. 2010. 7. E. O. Schweitzer, III, D. Whitehead, S. Achanta, and V. Skendzic, “Implementing Robust Time Solutions for Modern Power Systems,” in 14th Annual Western Power Delivery Automation Conference, Spokane, WA, Mar. 2012. 8. IEEE Standard for Synchrophasors for Power Systems, IEEE Standard C37.118, 2005. 9. A. F. Elneweihi, E. O. Schweitzer, III, and M. W. Feltis, “Improved Sensitivity and Security for Distribution Bus and Feeder Relays,” in 18th Annual Western Protective Relay Conference, Spokane, WA, Oct. 1991.

19_Santoso_Sec19_p1169-1238.indd 1236

27/11/17 2:41 PM

POWER SYSTEM PROTECTION        1237 

10. C. R. Mason, The Art and Science of Protective Relaying. John Wiley and Sons, New York, 1956. 11. A. Guzmán, J. B. Roberts, and D. Hou, “New Ground Directional Elements Operate Reliably for Changing System Conditions,” in 23rd Annual Western Protective Relay Conference, Spokane, WA, Oct. 1996. 12. J. B. Roberts and A. Guzmán, “Directional Element Design and Evaluation,” in 21st Annual Western Protective Relay Conference, Spokane, WA, Oct. 1994. 13. D. Costello, M. Moon, and G. Bow, “Use of Directional Elements at the Utility-Industrial Interface,” in 31st Annual Western Protective Relay Conference, Spokane, WA, Oct. 2004. 14. V. Cook, Analysis of Distance Protection. Letchworth, Hertfordshire: Research Studies Press Ltd., 1985. 15. E. O. Schweitzer, III and J. B. Roberts, “Distance Relay Element Design,” in 19th Annual Western Protective Relay Conference, Spokane, WA, Oct. 1992. 16. W. Tucker, A. Burich, M. Thompson, R. Anne, and S. Vasudevan, “Coordinating Dissimilar Line Relays in a Communications-Assisted Scheme,” in 67th Annual Conference for Protective Relay Engineers, College Station, TX, Apr. 2014. 17. J. B. Roberts, D. A. Tziouvaras, G. Benmouyal, and H. J. Altuve, “The Effect of Multiprinciple Line Protection on Dependability and Security,” in 55th Annual Georgia Tech Protective Relaying Conference, Atlanta, GA, May 2001. 18. H. J. Altuve Ferrer, B. Kasztenny, and N. Fischer (eds.), Line Current Differential Protection: A Collection of Papers Representing Modern Solutions. Schweitzer Engineering Laboratories, Inc., Pullman, WA, 2014. 19. H. Miller, J. Burger, N. Fischer, and B. Kasztenny, “Modern Line Current Differential Protection Solutions,” in 36th Annual Western Protective Relay Conference, Spokane, WA, Oct. 2009. 20. A. R. van C. Warrington, Protective Relays: Their Theory and Practice, Volume One. Chapman and Hall Ltd., London, 1962. 21. B. Kasztenny, G. Benmouyal, H. J. Altuve, and N. Fischer, “Tutorial on Operating Characteristics of Microprocessor-Based Multiterminal Line Current Differential Relays,” in 38th Annual Western Protective Relay Conference, Spokane, WA, Oct. 2011. 22. E. O. Schweitzer, III, B. Kasztenny, A. Guzmán, V. Skendzic, and M. V. Mynam, “Speed of Line Protection— Can We Break Free of Phasor Limitations?” in 41st Annual Western Protective Relay Conference, Spokane, WA, Oct. 2014. 23. D. Hou, A. Guzmán, and J. B. Roberts, “Innovative Solutions Improve Transmission Line Protection,” in 24th Annual Western Protective Relay Conference, Spokane, WA, Oct. 1997. 24. R. B. Eastvedt, “The Need for Ultra-Fast Fault Clearing,” in 3rd Annual Western Protective Relay Conference, Spokane, WA, Oct. 1976. 25. E. O. Schweitzer, III, B. Kasztenny, and M. V. Mynam, “Performance of Time-Domain Line Protection Elements on Real-World Faults,” in 42nd Annual Western Protective Relay Conference, Spokane, WA, Oct. 2015. 26. B. Kasztenny, M. Thompson, and N. Fischer, “Fundamentals of Short-Circuit Protection for Transformers,” in 63rd Annual Conference for Protective Relay Engineers, College Station, TX, Mar. 2010. 27. IEEE Guide for Protecting Power Transformers, IEEE Standard C37.91, 2008. 28. IEEE Guide for Liquid Immersed Transformers Through-Fault-Current Duration, IEEE  Standard C57.109, 1993. 29. IEEE Guide for Protective Relay Applications to Power System Buses, IEEE Standard C37.234, 2009. 30. A. Guzmán, C. Labuschagne, and B. L. Qin, “Reliable Busbar and Breaker Failure Protection with Advanced Zone Selection,” in 31st Annual Western Protective Relay Conference, Spokane, WA, Oct. 2004. 31. A. Guzmán, B. L. Qin, and C. Labuschagne, “Reliable Bus Protection with Advanced Zone Selection,” IEEE Transactions on Power Delivery, vol. 20, no. 2, pp. 625–629, Apr. 2005. 32. IEEE Guide for AC Generator Protection, IEEE Standard C37.102, 2006. 33. IEEE Guide for Generator Ground Protection, IEEE Standard C37.101, 2006. 34. P. Soñez, F. Vicentini, V. Skendzic, M. Donolo, S. Patel, Y. Xia, and R. Scharlach, “Injection-Based Generator Stator Ground Protection Advancements,” in 41st Annual Western Protective Relay Conference, Spokane, WA, Oct. 2014. 35. Salient-Pole 50 Hz and 60 Hz Synchronous Generators and Generator/Motors for Hydraulic Turbine Applications Rated 5 MVA and Above, IEEE Standard C50.12, 2005.

19_Santoso_Sec19_p1169-1238.indd 1237

27/11/17 2:41 PM

1238        SECTION NINETEEN

36. IEEE Standard for Cylindrical-Rotor 50 Hz and 60 Hz Synchronous Generators Rated 10 MVA and Above, IEEE Standard C50.13, 2014. 37. C. R. Mason, “A New Loss of Excitation Relay for Synchronous Generators,” AIEE Transactions, vol. 68, pt. II, pp. 1240–1245, 1949. 38. R. Sandoval, A. Guzmán, and H. J. Altuve, “Dynamic Simulations Help Improve Generator Protection,” in 33rd Annual Western Protective Relay Conference, Spokane, WA, Oct. 2006. 39. S. E. Zocholl, AC Motor Protection. Schweitzer Engineering Laboratories, Inc., Pullman, WA, 2003. 40. IEEE Guide for AC Motor Protection, IEEE Standard C37.96, 2012. 41. J. L. Blackburn, Protective Relaying, Principles and Applications, 2nd ed. Marcel Dekker, Inc., New YorkBasel, 1998. 42. IEEE Guide for the Presentation of Thermal Limit Curves for Squirrel Cage Induction Machines, IEEE Standard 620, 1996. 43. Motors and Generators, NEMA Standard MG-1, 2014. 44. S. E. Zocholl, E. O. Schweitzer, and A. Aliaga-Zegarra, “Thermal Protection of Induction Motors Enhanced by Interactive Electrical and Thermal Models,” IEEE Transactions on Power Apparatus and Systems, vol. PAS-103, no. 7, pp. 1749–1755, Jul. 1984. 45. E. O. Schweitzer and S. E. Zocholl, “Aspects of Overcurrent Protection of Feeders and Motors,” in PEA Relay Committee Spring Meeting, Matamoras, PA, May 1995. 46. Electrical Relays—Part 8: Thermal Electric Relays, IEC Standard 255-8, 1990. 47. D. A. Tziouvaras and D. Hou, “Out-of-Step Protection Fundamentals and Advancements,” in 30th Annual Western Protective Relay Conference, Spokane, WA, Oct. 2003. 48. G. Benmouyal, D. Hou, and D. A. Tziouvaras, “Zero-Setting Power-Swing Blocking Protection,” in 31st Annual Western Protective Relay Conference, Spokane, WA, Oct. 2004. 49. A. Guzmán, D. Tziouvaras, E. O. Schweitzer, III, and K. E. Martin, “Local and Wide Area Network Protection Systems Improve Power System Reliability,” in 31st Annual Western Protective Relay Conference, Spokane, WA, Oct. 2004. 50. C. W. Taylor, “Concepts of Undervoltage Load Shedding for Voltage Stability,” IEEE Transactions on Power Delivery, vol. 7, no. 2, pp. 480–488, Apr. 1992. 51. P. Kundur, Power System Stability and Control. McGraw-Hill, New York, 1994. 52. Protection Aids to Voltage Stability Working Group, “Summary of System Protection and Voltage Stability,” IEEE Transactions on Power Delivery, vol. 10, no. 2, pp. 631–637, Apr. 1995. 53. E. Martínez, N. Juárez, A. Guzmán, G. Zweigle, and J. León, “Using Synchronized Phasor Angle Difference for Wide-Area Protection and Control,” in 33rd Annual Western Protective Relay Conference, Spokane, WA, Oct. 2006.

19_Santoso_Sec19_p1169-1238.indd 1238

27/11/17 2:41 PM

20

POWER SYSTEM STABILITY AND CONTROL Arturo R. Messina Professor, Graduate Studies Program in Electrical Engineering, Center for Research and Advanced Studies, Guadalajara, Mexico

Emilio Barocio Professor, Graduate Studies Program in Electrical Engineering, Universidad de Guadalajara, Guadalajara, Mexico

Kai Sun Associate Professor, University of Tennessee, Knoxville, Tennessee

Daniel Ruiz-Vega Professor, Graduate Program in Electrical Engineering, Instituto Politécnico Nacional, Mexico

Nilanjan Senroy Associate Professor, Indian Institute of Technology, Delhi, India

Sukumar Mishra Professor, Indian Institute of Technology, Delhi, India

20.1 SMALL-SIGNAL DYNAMIC PERFORMANCE AND STABILITY. . . . . . . . 1240 20.1.1 System Response to Small Disturbances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1240 20.1.2 Free Oscillations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1245 20.1.3 Forced Oscillations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1256 20.1.4 Measurement-Based Analysis Techniques. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1258 20.1.5 Mitigation and Control of System Oscillations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1259 20.1.6 Bibliography. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1264 20.2 MEASUREMENT-BASED VOLTAGE STABILITY ASSESSMENT TECHNIQUES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1266 20.2.1 Concepts on Voltage Stability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1266 20.2.2 Voltage Stability Assessment and Model-Based Techniques. . . . . . . . . 1268 20.2.3 Measurement-Based Voltage Stability Assessment for a Load Bus. . . 1271 20.2.4 Measurement-Based Voltage Stability Assessment for a Load Area. . . . 1277 20.2.5 Bibliography. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1282 1239

20_Santoso_Sec20_p1239-1328.indd 1239

23/11/17 4:43 PM

1240        SECTION TWENTY



20.3 TRANSIENT STABILITY ASSESSMENT AND CONTROL. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1282 20.3.1 Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1282 20.3.2 Transient Stability Assessment Methods for Realistic Power System Models. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1288 20.3.3 Transient Stability Control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1296 20.3.4 Bibliography. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1303 20.4 IMPACT OF WIND GENERATION ON POWER SYSTEM STABILITY. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1306 20.4.1 Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1306 20.4.2 Rotor Angle Stability. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1307 20.4.3 Voltage Stability. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1309 20.4.4 Frequency Stability. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1310 20.4.5 Control Techniques to Emulate Inertia. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1313 20.4.6 Bibliography. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1315 20.5 IMPACT OF SOLAR GENERATION ON POWER SYSTEM STABILITY. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1315 20.5.1 Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1315 20.5.2 Outer Control Loop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1317 20.5.3 Mathematical Modeling of PV-DG System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1319 20.5.4 System Mathematical Model with DG Governor and Induction Machine Load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1325

20.1  SMALL-SIGNAL DYNAMIC PERFORMANCE AND STABILITY BY ARTURO R. MESSINA AND EMILIO BAROCIO 20.1.1  System Response to Small Disturbances Power system dynamic response to small disturbances encompasses a wide range of temporal and spatial scales from fast electromagnetic to slow electromechanical phenomena. The temporal scales are to some degree, dynamically coupled with each other, but it is often convenient to analyze transient phenomena separately using various analytical approaches and simulation tools [1–4]. The description and understanding of oscillatory processes is a central question in power system small-signal stability analysis and control. From a mathematical point of view, any physical system disturbed from an equilibrium condition will oscillate under some circumstances or physical conditions [5]. In this sense, small-signal stability can be defined as the ability of a physical system to regain a state of operating equilibrium after being subjected to a small disturbance or change in the system [5, 6]. The instability that results occurs in the form of increasing or sustained oscillations associated with the interaction of system generators, wind farms, control devices, and other dynamic elements. Oscillations may manifest themselves in many ways depending on the nature of the disturbance, system structure, operating mode, and the level of stress and control characteristics. Experience shows that the oscillations can be triggered by events or disturbances, or result from changes in the initial operating condition and interactions between dynamic devices and have spatial scales ranging from local to global, and temporal scales ranging from 0.1 Hz to hundreds of hertz. Knowledge of the fundamental characteristics of the system oscillation modes provides valuable information about the stability of the oscillatory phenomena and may be helpful in identifying machines and other dynamic devices and their control systems involved in the exchange of oscillating energy and the design or modifications of controllers [2]. Small signal stability analysis techniques are also of interest to design appropriate countermeasures for the phenomenon. The class of oscillatory processes is exceptionally large. Unstable system oscillations can be caused by electromechanical and electromagnetic interactions, small random disturbances or be the result of cyclic or random forcing of the system and manifest in different ways. In some cases, oscillations can exhibit amplitude and phase modulation, be nonperiodic or exhibit nonlinear and time-varying characteristics.

20_Santoso_Sec20_p1239-1328.indd 1240

23/11/17 4:43 PM

POWER SYSTEM STABILITY AND CONTROL        1241 

Power system oscillatory processes can be categorized and classified in a number of different ways, including their interaction characteristics, operating characteristics, and the nature of system oscillations. Three main types of oscillatory processes are usually recognized: 1. Electromechanical oscillations involving the interaction between the rotor masses of system generators. Such dynamic phenomenon commonly arises from minor perturbations or even without apparent cause, and is mostly exhibited at interconnections between electric machines. Oscillations may emerge from the interaction of large groups of closely coupled machines connected by weak links. In some cases, system oscillations may result from a combination of system events involving operational changes, highly stressed transmission grids, weak transmission system, load levels, and inadequate control. Protection and control actions are required to stop the propagation of the system disturbance and restore the system to a normal state. References [1, 2] provide a historical perspective of the development of oscillatory phenomena in North America. 2. Subsynchronous resonance and subsynchronous torsional interactions between turbine-generator units and series capacitive compensated transmission lines occur when the negative damping of the series compensated system exceeds the inherent mechanical damping of the shaft at a specific subsynchronous torsional frequency [7]. Torsional oscillations may result in fatigue and loss of life of the turbine-governor shaft segments. Sources of potential interaction are the fast-acting control systems of high-voltage direct current (HVDC) converters, power system stabilizers, FACTS controllers, and other power electronic based equipment [7, 8]. Other related phenomena concern the potential interaction between a series compensated line and fast acting controls used on HVDC systems and FACTS devices. Subsynchronous control interactions (SSCI) between modern power electronics based wind turbine generators and a nearby series compensated line have also been observed in field tests and actual system operation. 3. Control mode oscillations associated with inadequate tuning of control systems. These include interactions between power system controllers such as power system stabilizers (PSSs), FACTS devices, AVRs, static VAR compensators (SVCs) and torsional modes, and interactions between the control systems of modern wind farms and other major system controllers [9]. The use of emerging technologies such as inverter-based wind and photovoltaic resources and the increasing size and complexity of modern power systems is expected to introduce new interaction and phenomena. These interactions, in turn, may influence the nature of existing oscillatory processes. Examples of typical oscillatory processes involving low- and high-frequency oscillations are shown in Fig. 20-1. Power System Models for Small-Signal Stability Studies.  To study the system response to small perturbations, the nonlinear power system model is linearized around the predisturbance operating condition to extract modal properties. As a general statement, the governing equations of motion of the system are assumed to be nonlinear,

x = f ( x , y , u ), x (0 ) = x o

0 = g( x , y ), y (0 ) = y o

(20-1)

where x is the n-dimensional vector of system states (the trajectory of the system in the space of n dimensions), y is the r-dimensional vector of algebraic states, and u is the p-dimensional vector of system inputs; xo is the vector of initial conditions or an initial perturbation state vector at t = 0. Alternative models can be obtained for the study of dynamic phenomena involving the electrical dynamics of the transmission network when each of the power system components is represented by a linear differential equation [10]. Equilibrium Points. Equilibrium solutions of Eq. (20-1) satisfy f(xo, yo, uo)  =  0, g(xo, yo)  =  0. Physically, this means that the sum of all forces acting on the system is zero. In the case of an unstable equilibrium condition, the system will be displaced from the equilibrium position.

20_Santoso_Sec20_p1239-1328.indd 1241

23/11/17 4:43 PM

1242        SECTION TWENTY 26

100 Wind output power (MW)

24 Power (MW)

22 20 18

Ambient oscillations

Transient oscillations

16 14 Transient oscillations

12 10 0

50

100

150

Ambient oscillations

200

80 60 40 20 0 –20

250

0

100

200

Time (s) (a)

300 400 Time (hrs)

500

600

700

(b) 3 2.5 Rotor angle (rad)

Torque (N-m)

1000 500 0 –500

1 0.5 0 –0.5 –1

–1000 0.5

2 1.5

1

–1.5

Time (s)

30 Time (s)

(c)

(d)

1.5

2

2.5

3

0

10

20

40

50

60

FIGURE 20-1  Examples of oscillatory system response. (a) Combined ambient and transient oscillations; (b) wind power fluctuations; (c) torsional oscillations in wind farms; (d) combined ambient and forced oscillations. (Note the time scales.)

Stability of the Solutions. The nominal stability of an equilibrium point of the system is established using Lyapunov analysis. An equilibrium point of Eq. (20-1) is stable if all the eigenvalues of the Jacobian f evaluated at the equilibrium have negative real parts. Methods of Analysis of Small Signal Stability.  Quantitative analysis of the equation of motion for small perturbations involves numerical solution of a simplified (linear) version of Eq. (20-1). A typical and practical approach is to assume that system motion is limited to small variations from a reference condition or equilibrium point. Modeling practices to obtain the state representation Eq. (20-1) have traditionally focused on two main approaches which have different advantages and disadvantages: (1) Linearization of system equations about an initial operating condition, and (2) numerical approximation of the state representation. Analytical Methods.  In many practical cases, the system oscillatory modes can be analyzed by eigenvalue decomposition techniques applied to linearized models. As a special case, the power series expansion of Eq. (20-1) about a stable equilibrium point (SEP), x o, is [11]  ∂f ( x , y ) ∂f ( x , y ) 1 ∂2 f ( x , y ) 1 ∂2 f (x , y )  x = f ( x , y ) x = x o + ∆x 2 +  ∆x + ∆x + ∆x 2 + 2 y =yo ∂x x=xo ∂y x =xo 2! ∂ x x = x o 2! ∂ 2 y  x =xo y = y y =yo o y =yo y =yo   ∂g ( x , y ) ∂g ( x , y )  ∆x + ∆y +  0 = g (x , y ) x =xo +  y =yo x =xo ∂x ∂y x =xo y =yo  y =yo  (20-2)

20_Santoso_Sec20_p1239-1328.indd 1242

23/11/17 4:43 PM

POWER SYSTEM STABILITY AND CONTROL        1243 

Conceptually, the linearization procedure is equivalent to assuming that the state variables are of the form xo  +  Dx, yo  +  Dy, where xo, yo characterizes the reference condition (the equilibrium condition), and Dx, Dy represents a perturbation from the reference condition. Differential-Algebraic Equation (DAE) Power System Models. Linearization of the nonlinear DAE model Eq. (20-2) about a given system operating condition neglecting second- and higher-order terms yields the sparse model  ∆x   J xx  =  0   J yx y =  c Tx 

J xy   ∆x   B     +  u J yy   ∆y   0    ∆x  T  c y   + Du   ∆y 

(20-3)

where Jxx, Jxy, Jyx, and Jyy are Jacobian matrices, and the superscript T denotes a transposition operator. The output vector y contains input signals for the controllers. Differential Equation Power System Models. Many dynamic phenomena and devices can be represented by linear homogeneous equations of the form

x = Ax + Bu , x (0 ) = x o y = cT x



(20-4)

where A and B are the system matrix and control matrix, respectively. These models can be obtained directly from a time domain simulation program by perturbing the states and inputs, or be obtained from Eqs. (20-1) through (20-3) by eliminating the algebraic equations. In this latter case, the reduced-order matrix A = J xx − J xy (J yx )−1 J yy is called the state matrix of the system, as discussed below. Linearization-Based Methods.  These models, used in various software packages for small signal stability analysis can be derived from Eq. (20-1) or constructed directly from a properly modified nonlinear time simulation program. Let the Taylor’s theorem be expressed as

1 1 1 f ( x o + ∆x ) = f ( x o ) + f ′( x o )∆x + f ′′( x o )∆x 2 +  + f ( r −1) ( x o )∆x ( r −1) + f r ( x o )∆x r (20-5) r! 2 (r − 1)!

subject to the network constraints g ( ∆x i , ∆y i ) = 0. Two main approaches have been proposed to construct the state matrix representation: (1) forward-difference approximation and (2) centraldifference approximation [11]. The methods are summarized in Table 20-1. Implementation issues are discussed in [12] and are briefly discussed below.

TABLE 20-1  Finite Difference Approximations to Numerical Derivatives [11, 12] Approximation

20_Santoso_Sec20_p1239-1328.indd 1243

Expression

Forward-difference approximation

f ( x o + ∆x ) − f ( x o ) = f ′( x ) + O( ∆x ) ∆x

Central-difference approximation

f ( x o + ∆x ) − f ( x o − ∆x ) = f ′( x ) + O( ∆x 2 ) 2 ∆x

23/11/17 4:43 PM

1244        SECTION TWENTY

FIGURE 20-2  Schematic of numerical approximation of the state matrix.

One practical procedure is to start from a given initial state, xi, and then consider a small perturbation Dxi. By perturbing each state in turn by a small amount, h, the columns Ai, i = 1, …, n of matrix A can be computed sequentially. The process is summarized in Fig. 20-2. Once the perturbed response is found using Eq. (20-2), the columns of the state matrix are computed as A i = ∆x i+ /h

(20-6)

In practice, the accuracy of these approximations depends on the truncation error. Special techniques are needed to deal with the size of perturbations and nonlinear behavior associated with the representation of axis transformations, generator saturation, control limits, and other nonlinearities [10]. Power System Response to Small Disturbances.  Using eigenvector analysis techniques [13], the general solution of Eq. (20-4) with initial conditions x(0) = xo at t = 0 is n

y (t ) =

n

t

∑( ψ x ) φ e +∑ ∫ ( ψ u(τ )) φ e T i

i =1

o

i

λi t

i =1

o

T i

i

λi (t −τ )

d τ = Ce At x o + C

t

∫e o

A (t −τ ) Bu d τ

(20-7)

where li (i = 1, …, n) are the roots or eigenvalues of the characteristic equation f(l) = det[lI - A] = 0, and ei, xi are, respectively, the corresponding right and left eigenvectors defined as follows:

[λi I − A] φi = 0 , φi ≠ 0 ψ Ti [λ i I − A]= 0 , ψ Ti ≠ 0



where φ i ψ Ti = 1 if i = j , φi ψ Ti = 0 if i ≠ j .

20_Santoso_Sec20_p1239-1328.indd 1244

23/11/17 4:43 PM

POWER SYSTEM STABILITY AND CONTROL        1245 

20.1.2  Free Oscillations From a physical point of view, the free system response is obtained when no energy is added or removed from the system and is entirely due to the initial conditions. In terms of the modal parameters, the time evolution of the system states is given by n

n

n

i =1

i =1

i =1

λt λt λt T T x (t ) = ∑[( ψ i x o )e i ] φ i = ∑[( φ i ψ i )x oe i ] = ∑[R i x o ]e i

(20-8)

where Ri = [Rij ] = φi ψ Ti is the residue matrix. Free oscillations are determined by three sets of parameters: 1. The eigenvalues li, which determine the decay or growth rate of the response

2. The eigenvectors ei, which determine the shape of the response 3. The initial conditions xo, which determine the extent to which each mode will participate in the free system response This following subsection highlights those aspects of linear system representations that are relevant to the study and control of power system oscillatory behavior. The Notion of System Modes.  The dynamic motion of complex systems with many degrees of freedom can be considered as a superposition of simple oscillatory processes or motions called modes. From Eq. (20-7), the system response to small perturbations can be expressed through mode superposition as n

n

i =1

i =1

x (t ) = ( ψ T x )e λit φ = (α )e λit φ ∑ i o i ∑ i i where α i = ψ Ti x o provides the initial excitation of the ith mode. In expanded form,  φ (t )   φ (t )   φ (t )  φ (t )   x (t )   1j   1n   12   11   1    φ2 j (t ) λ t φ (t )  φ22 (t )  λ t φ21 (t )  λ t  x 2 (t )   e j +  + α n  2n  e λnt    e 2 ++ α j  e 1 +α2   = α1   ...   ...   ...   ...   ...   φ (t )  φnn (t )  φn 2 (t )  φn1 (t )   xn (t )  nj             

(20-9a)

jth mode

When a fault or small perturbation occurs, multiple modes may be excited and the system response may be affected by linear (nonlinear) interactions between the modes as discussed below. Oscillatory Modes of Motion.  Oscillatory modes of motion appear in pairs of complex conjugates li = si ± jwi. The free system response Eq. (20-9a) now becomes n/2

∗ x (t ) = ∑ ( ψ Ti x oe λit φ i + ψ Ti ∗x oe λi t φ ∗i ) = i =1

n/2

∑e i =1

σ it

(α i φi e jω it + α i∗φ ∗i e − jω it )

(20-9b)

with α i = ψ Ti x o, α i∗ = ψ Ti ∗ x o, ei = [f1i f2i … fni]T, and xj = [y1i y2i … yni]T.

20_Santoso_Sec20_p1239-1328.indd 1245

23/11/17 4:43 PM

1246        SECTION TWENTY

Several facts emerge on examination of Eq. (20-9a) and (20-9b) results. •  The system response is the combination of n/2 complex conjugate modes. In other words, the oscillations can be represented as a combination of single harmonic motions with appropriate amplitude, frequency and initial phases •  The amount aifki, provides a measure of the excitation (weight) of each mode in the kth state •  The eigenvalues li determine system stability: the components of the right eigenvector ei determine the relative activity of each variable in the ith mode, while the components of the left eigenvector xi weight the initial conditions in the ith mode Nonlinear Aspects of System Oscillations.  The dynamic response of complex interconnected power systems to random perturbations can exhibit strongly nonlinear behavior, especially under conditions of heavy stress or weakening structure of the system [14, 15]. Typically, in such cases, modes are coupled and nonlinear interactions between them have the potential to influence system behavior in key respects. As the simplest example, the equation of motion of a single-machine infinite-bus (SMIB) system is

∆δ = ω o ∆ωˆ r 2 H ∆ωˆ = ( P − P r

m

max

sinδ − K D ∆ωˆ r )



where d  is the rotor angle position relative to the infinite bus, in radians, ∆ωˆ r = (ω r − ω o )/ω o is the pu speed deviation, Pm is the input mechanical power in pu, Pmax is the maximum transmitted power in pu, and KD is the damping coefficient (pu power/pu speed) [6]. Expanding these equations about an equilibrium condition (δ o ,ω r = ω ro ) and retaining the first significant nonlinear terms results in the incremental model [14] gives   ω o ∆ωˆ r   0   ∆δ      − P  P P K 1 1    max max max D = x = 2 3 + O(4) +   1  ∆Pm  ∆ωˆ    2 H cosδ o ∆δ − 2 H ∆ωˆr + 2 2 H sinδ o ∆δ + 6 2 H sinδ o ∆δ   2 H   r      Quadratic terms Cubic terms   Linear terms   or      x T H1  x 0  x   0  3  x T H1 x  1 1 0 x   2  + O(4)(20-10) x = Ax + f2 ( x ) + f3 ( x ) + Bu = Ax +  1  ∆Pm +  T 2  +   2!  x H 2 x  3!  x 0   2 T f (x )  2 H     x  x H3  f (x )  0 x    2  f (x ) 3

in which H12 , H 22 , H13 , H32 are real and constant squares matrices of order n = 2, defined as follows:



20_Santoso_Sec20_p1239-1328.indd 1246

H12

P 0 0   max sinδ o 2 =  ; H2 =  2H 0 0   0

  0 0  0 0 1 2    H3 =  0 0  ; H3 =     0 0 

 Pmax sinδ o  2H   0

23/11/17 4:43 PM

POWER SYSTEM STABILITY AND CONTROL        1247 

The system has an equilibrium of interest at x o = [δ o ∆ωˆ ro ]T = [sin −1 ( Pm /Pmax )0]T ; the Jacobian at the equilibria is  0  J = A =  −KS  2H 

ωo   KD   − 2 H 

where K S = Pmax cosδ o and KD are the synchronizing and damping power coefficients, respectively. Perturbing the initial condition, xo, will cause the system to oscillate. Two forces influence this behavior: the synchronizing force, KS which is directly proportional to the angular deviation Dd, and the damping torque, KD, which is proportional to the speed deviation. Stability of the equilibria is determined by the roots of the characteristic equation ω K λ1,2 = − D ± o j K D2 /ω o2 − 8 K S /ω o = σ ± jω , in which, without loss of generality it is assumed that 4H 4H K D2 /ω o2 < 8 K S /ω o ; the eigenvalues are complex conjugates with real part σ = −K D /4 H and imaginary part f ( Hz ) = K D2 /ω o2 − 8 K S /ω o (undamped behavior). When higher-order terms are of small order, the free system response is a simple damped harmonic movement of the form

  

 s + K /2 H ωo D ∆δ o + ∆ω ro  (s − λ1 )(s + λ2 ) ∆δ (t )  −1  (s − λ1 )(s + λ2 ) =L  ∆ω r (t )  − K S /2 H s   ∆δ + ∆ω ro  (s − λ1 )(s + λ2 ) o (s − λ1 )(s + λ2 ) 

      

    eσ t a sin(ω t + ϕ )∆δ + ω eα t sin(ω t )∆ω  δ δ o ro   ωo   =  σ t  KS  sin(ω t )∆δ o + aω cos(ω t − ϕω )∆ω ro   e −   H 2 ω 

      

where l is the Laplace operator, and aδ = 1 + ( K D /4 H )2 , ϕ = tg −1 (1/( K D /4 H )). Figure 20-3 illustrates the system response to a step change in the initial conditions Ddo and its phase plane representation. For a stable case, the phase diagram describes a slowly changing spiral converging to the origin (the stable equilibrium point) as t → ∞. The linear approximation [Eq. (20-10)] is valid for only a limited range of the operating regime. Close to the onset of system instability or under large perturbations and high system stress, the system may exhibit a complex dynamic behavior. Modeling of Local Nonlinearities.  Among the several techniques for obtaining approximations to models of the form Eq. (20-10), the method of normal forms (NF) [15] has been used to analyze the system response to small perturbations. In this approach, a set of nonlinear change of coordinates are used to eliminate or simplify equation nonlinearities. As a first step, a linear transformation x = Fy is used to transform the system in Eq. (20-10) into its complex Jordan canonical form y = Λy + Φ −1[∑ ik= 2 fi (Φ y ) + O(k + 1)] = Λy + F2 ( y ) + ∑ ik= 2 Fi ( y ) + Oˆ (k + 1), where L is a diagonal matrix of the eigenvalues, and the nonlinear terms are of the form ∑ nk =1 ∑ nl = k C2j y k yl , j = 1, 2, ..., n . This represents a linearly decoupled but nonlinearly coupled kl system in which internal resonances may exist between modes. Strong interactions may cause performance degradation and adversely affect controller performance. Once the geometry of the nonlinear system is known, nonlinear coordinate transformations of the form y = z + h 2 (z ), are used to annihilate second- and third-order terms and focus on the

20_Santoso_Sec20_p1239-1328.indd 1247

23/11/17 4:43 PM

1248        SECTION TWENTY

FIGURE 20-3  Free response and phase plane representation of the swing equation.

governing dynamics. The system response (the NF solution) for the kth state is given by, to second order: n

x k (t ) =

∑ψ

kj z jo e

λ jt

n

+

j =1

n

n

m=1

p=1

∑ψ ∑ ∑h kj

j =1

j ( λm + λ p )t 2mp zmo z po e

+  k = 1,… ,n

(20-11)

where z jo , z mo , z po represent the initial conditions in the z coordinate framework, and the h2jmp are coefficients of the second-order transformation that measure the interaction between modes of the linearized system [15]. Figure 20-4 is an example of a typical simulated system response to a step change in the initial angle Ddo. Figure 20-4 highlights three key points: (1) The system response converges to the post-disturbance SEP; (2) higher-order solutions approximate system behavior better for a longer time; and (3) physically interesting results are obtained only when third-order (or higher) terms are retained. As discussed above, nonlinear modal interaction between system modes contributes to different properties in physical processes and may significantly influence the performance of system controllers. The normalized term max mp (| h2jmp z mo z op |)/z oj provides a measure of the nonlinearity present in the initial value and can be used to evaluate the severity of nonlinear interaction. Free System Response from Initial Conditions.  To discuss the basic nature of system electromechanical modes, it is convenient to represent the system by its classical model [16]. The equation of motion of a system with ng classically modeled generators is               

 ∆δ1    ∆δ2    ...     ∆δng   = ∆ωˆ r 1   − Ag11   ∆ωˆ r 2   − Ag 21    ...    −A   ˆ g ng 1 ∆ω rng   

ωo ωo

0ˆ

− Ag

12

− Ag  ...

2

 ...

− Ag

...

− Ag

  ... − Ag

1 ng

2 ng

ngng

ωo

− Kˆ D

1

− Kˆ D 2  − Kˆ

Dng

               

∆δ 1 ∆δ 2  ∆δ ng ∆ωˆ r 1

∆ωˆ r 2  ∆ωˆ rng

              +                

0 0  0 ∆Pm1 2 H1 ∆Pm 2 2H 2  ∆Pmng 2 H ng

                

(20-12)

20_Santoso_Sec20_p1239-1328.indd 1248

23/11/17 4:43 PM

POWER SYSTEM STABILITY AND CONTROL        1249 

FIGURE 20-4  System response to a change in Ddo. (a) Test system, (b) comparison of linear approximation, Dd(t) =

aδ e −σ t cos(ω t − ϕ ) ∆δ o, with higher-order approximations.

where

Ag = ij

1 ∂ Pei 2 Hi ∂∆δ j

= δ io ,δ oj

Eqi′ Eqj′ 2 Hi

n

[Gij sin(δ io − δ jo ) − Bij cos(δ io − δ jo )] ; Ag = − ii

∑A i =1 i≠ j

g ij ;

Kˆ Di =

KD

i

2 Hi



and Gij and Bij are the mutual conductance and susceptance between buses i and j, respectively. Equation (20-12) can be rewritten in matrix form as

 ∆δ   0  =  ∆ω ˆ   − M −1K S  r  

  ∆δ   0   cT   ˆ  +  M −1  ∆Pm ; y =  δ − M −1K D   ∆ω r    

ω oI

 ∆δ   c Tω   ˆ  (20-13)   ∆ω r  

ˆ = [∆ω ˆ ˆ ˆ T where ∆δ = [∆δ 1 ∆δ 2  ∆δ ng ]T , ∆ω r r 1 ∆ω r 2  ∆ω rng ] , M = diag[ M1 M 2  Mn ], with Mi = 2 Hi , K D = diag [K D K D  K Dng ], ∆Pm = [∆Pm ∆Pm 2  ∆Pmng ]T , and KS is the 1 2 1 synchronizing torques matrix evaluated at the post-disturbance SEP. It follows from this definition that, for a purely inductive network, synchronizing power is small when the synchronous machines are coupled through high reactance, that is, Bij = 0. The eigenvectors of the state model satisfy

 0   − M −1K S 

φ    φδ  δ  i =λ  i  i  φω  − M −1K D   φω i   i    

ω oI

where φδ = φδ + j φδ and φω are referred to as the angle and speed components of the right eigenvectors, i Ri Ii i respectively.

20_Santoso_Sec20_p1239-1328.indd 1249

23/11/17 4:43 PM

1250        SECTION TWENTY

TABLE 20-2  Modal Properties of the State Representation Eq. (20-13) Feature

Expression

σi = −

Modal damping

Modal frequency

ωi =

σ i2 ( φδ

Ri

T Mφ δ Ri

+ φω

Ii

T D φδ Rii + φδ Ii K D φδ Ii T 2( φδ δ Mφδ + φδ T Mφδ ) Ri i Ri Ii Ii

φδ

Ri

TK

T Mφ T T ω Ii ) + σ j φδ Ri K D φδ Ri + φω Ii K D φω Ii φδ T Mφδ + φω T Mφω Ri Ri Ii Ii

Eigenvector relationship

φω = i

+ ω o ( φδ

Ri

TK

S φδ Ri

+ φω

Ii

TK

S φω Ii )

λi φ ω o δi

Table 20-2 shows the modal characteristics of the state representation determined using Eq. (20-13). Several key findings should be emphasized: (1) Modal damping is directly proportional to the damping coefficient, KD; (2) modal frequency is determined by the synchronizing torque, KS, and modal damping s. With small damping, frequency is directly proportional to the synchronizing coefficients. In complex systems, damping may be influenced by control characteristics such as high-gain control systems and speed-governor characteristics. Eigenvalues of a Classical Model.  As an example for modal analysis consider a two-area system, four-machine system represented classically, refer to Fig. 20-5. The state matrix A associated with the classical model in Eq. (20-12) is      A=     

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 −0.0979 0.0936 0.0999 −0.1114 0.0036 0.0072 0.0070 0.0145

 0 0 376.9911 0 0 0  0 0 0 376.9911 0 0  0 0 0 0 376.9911 0  0 0 0 0 0 376.9911   0 0 0 0.0019 0.0025 −0.0769  0.0046 0.0069 0 −0.0769 0 0   0 0 0 − 0.1064 0.0957 −0.0810  0.1011 −0.1226 0 0 0 −0.0810 

Area 1 ACbus1

Area 3 ACbus5

ACbus6

ACbus3

GEN 1

GEN 3

GEN 2

ACbus2

ACbus4

GEN 4

FIGURE 20-5  Two-area test system.

20_Santoso_Sec20_p1239-1328.indd 1250

23/11/17 4:43 PM

POWER SYSTEM STABILITY AND CONTROL        1251 

The eigenvalues of matrix A above are −0.0385 ± j 8.714, − 0.0404 ± j 8.969, − 0.0398 ± j 2.971; the first two modes represent local oscillations to areas 1 and 2, respectively, while the third mode is an inter-area mode. The eigenvectors associated with the inter-area mode are      φ5 =      

0.3298∠179.92° 0.2921∠179.91° 0.6609∠0° 0.6075∠0.0024° 0.0026∠ − 89.30° 0.0023∠ − 89.31° 0.0052∠90.76° 0.0048∠90.77°

      φδ 5 =   φω 5     

 ;  

     φ6 =      

0.3298∠ − 179.92° 0.2921∠ − 179.91° 0.6609∠0° 0.6075∠ − 0.0024° 0.0026∠89.30° 0.0023∠89.31° 0.0052∠ − 90.76° 0.0048∠ − 90.77°

     ∗   φδ 6 = ∗   φω 6     

   

The physical meaning of the entries of the right eigenvector is clear: the magnitude of the right eigenvector gives the contribution of the kth state to the ith mode. From a physical perspective, the right eigenvector entries have large magnitudes at machines having a strong participation in the oscillations, while the phase angle gives the relative oscillation. From Eq. (20-9), the free system response become m   σ t   2a1 j e j cos(ω j t + φ1 j )   j =1   m     φ   φ   φ σ t  ∆δ (t )    δ 1n δ11 δ12 2a2 j e j cos(ω j t + φ2 j ) 1           j = 1       φδ φδ φδ  ∆δ 2 (t )    2n 22 21           ... ...  ...   ...   ...      m   φ   φ   φ  ∆δ ng (t )    σ jt δ δ δ 2angj e cos(ω j t + φngj )   = α  ng ,1  e λ 1t + α  ng ,2  e λ 2t +  + α  ng ,n  e λnt =         1 2 n j =1  ∆ω r1 (t )  φ φ  φ   ω1,n   ω1,2   ω1,1      m     φ   φ  ∆ω r2 (t )  σ jt φω   ω ω + ω φ a e t 2 cos( ) 2,2 2,1 2, n       ng +1 j j ng +1 j     ...  ...   ...   ...      j =1        ∆ω r (t )    φω φω φω ... ng       ng ,1 ng ,2 ng ,n             m   σ t  2a2ngj e j cos(ω j t + φ2ngj )    j =1   (20-14)

∑

∑

∑

∑

∑

with m = n/2, akj = α jU kj = akj ∠φkj .a∗kj = α ∗j U kj∗ = akj ∠ − φkj. Mode Shape.  For a given mode i, the relative rotor oscillation between machines k and l is given by the phase angle of the right eigenvector fi. More formally, two machines swing out of phase if φ ki − φli ≈ 180°. Areas or Regions Connected by Weak Tie Lines. During a fault or perturbation, the individual generators are accelerated initially according to the electrical proximity of each generator to the disturbance and their individual inertias. The ensuing accelerating energy will initiate both, slow interarea oscillations between loosely connected geographical areas and fast inter-machine oscillations within the areas.

20_Santoso_Sec20_p1239-1328.indd 1251

23/11/17 4:43 PM

1252        SECTION TWENTY

Assuming that generators within a given area, A, are connected through negligible reactances Xij ≈ 0 , the initial angle deviation Ddij is the same for all machines, and ∆PA = Σ j∈A

∂ Pi ∂δ j

∆δ j ≈

(

∂ P1 ∂δ 1

∂P

∂P

)

+ ∂δ 2 +  + ∂δng ∆δ ∀j ∈ A or ∆ω 1 = ∆ω 1 = ... ∆ω ng . Physically, machines more 2

ng

distant from the fault are expected to swing together in groups with in phase slow motion. The collective behavior of the machines having identical motion is given by

∆ωˆ r = A

1 H eq

∑

∂ Pe

i

j ∈A

∂δ j

∆δ j − K D ∆ωˆ r eq

A

Once the machines exhibiting a common behavior are identified, a reduced order model can be extracted. The procedure involves three main stages: (1) coherency identification, (2) generator aggregation, and (3) network reduction. Interarea Mode Oscillations. Large power systems consist of an interconnection of geographical areas or coherent machines that are weakly interconnected. Interarea mode oscillations are electromechanical swings usually associated with groups of machines exchanging kinetic energy across a relatively weak transmission path. Inter-area oscillations typically exhibit frequencies in the range 0.2 to 0.8 Hz and may involve the interaction of two or more modes (multimodal oscillations). Local Plant or Inter-Machine Modes of Oscillation. These oscillations represent more localized system dynamics and may involve a single machine swinging against the rest of the system or the interaction of a small group of closely connected machines. Figure 20-6 shows a mechanical analogy of a two-area equivalent system for both, local and inter-area modes. Modal Representations. Inspection of the state representation Eq. (20-13) shows that the state equation can be diagonalized using the right eigenvectors associated with matrix − M −1K s , that is, Φ −1 (− M −1K s )Φ = Λ = diag(λ1 λ2  λn ). Use of the transformation Φ   ∆δ m  x = Tx m =   ˆ   Φ   ∆ω   rm  in Eq. (20-13) yields the decoupled system  ∆δ   ω o I   ∆δ m  0 Φ −1ω o IΦ   ∆δ m   0 m   =   =  1 1 1 1 − − − −  ∆ω ˆ   Λ − M −1K D   ∆ω ˆ  ˆ   − Φ M K S Φ − Φ M K D Φ   ∆ω rm rm rm         The equation above states that the linear transformation T, decomposes the phase-space into uncorrelated patterns of the form, ∆δ m = ω o ∆ωˆ rm , ∆ωˆ rm = λi ∆δ m − ( K D /2 Hi )∆ωˆ rm , i = 1,…, ng. i

i

i

i

i

i

Multimodal Oscillations.  Transient processes in small signal stability studies exhibit multiscale spatial and temporal patterns, with complex dynamics. Often, modes can interact and result in complex nonlinear interactions. Figure 20-7 shows a typical multimodal oscillation involving the interaction of three major electromechanical modes or oscillatory frequencies. From the perspective of system modeling, three main aspects are of interest: 1. Tracking the temporal behavior the observed oscillations 2. Extracting their spectral content 3. Determining statistical patterns and trends in the oscillations

20_Santoso_Sec20_p1239-1328.indd 1252

23/11/17 4:43 PM

POWER SYSTEM STABILITY AND CONTROL        1253 

(a)

(b) FIGURE 20-6  Schematic illustrating the notion of ideal local and interarea mode oscillations. (a) Conceptual representation; (b) mechanical analogy.

Mode-State Relationships.  In the study of modal interaction it is often desirable to quantify the participation of a particular mode in a given state variable. Participation factors (PFs). The concept of participation factor was developed to measure the degree of participation of a state variable in a mode. From Eq. (20-8), the time evolution of the kth state is given by [17] n

x k (t ) =

∑ i =1

(φki ψ Ti x o )e λ it =

n

∑ i =1

e λit

n

(φkiψ ik )    

Linear participation factor

x ko +

n

∑ ∑(φ ψ i =1

e λit

ki

ij )x jo



(20-15)

j =1 j≠k

where pki = φkiψ ik is called the linear participation factor, and it is assumed that xjo = 0. Eq. (20-15) indicates that the participation factor pki can be seen as the relative participation of the ith mode in the kth state at t = 0. Then, the participation matrix is defined as P = [pki]. Participation factors are dimensionless quantities and satisfy the following properties: (1) ∑ ni =1 pki = 1 = ∑ nk =1 pki = 1 and (2) akk = ∑ ni =1 λi pki , where akk is the (k, k) element of matrix A. In common practice, PFs are often used to identify the system states that have most influence in producing a particular mode as well as to locate system controllers; the PFs should have large magnitudes at the selected locations or states. It should be observed, however, that participation factors as defined above represent open-loop measures. A similar, but more accurate estimate of the best places

20_Santoso_Sec20_p1239-1328.indd 1253

23/11/17 4:43 PM

1254        SECTION TWENTY

(a)

Power (MW)

750 700 650 600 550

5

0

10

15 Time (s)

20

25

30

20

25

30

Aver. variance (MW2)

(b) 1 0.5 0

5

0

10

15 Time (s) (c)

(d)

Frequency. (Hz)

1

2.0

0

1.0

–1

0.5

–2

0.125

–3

5

10

15 Time (s)

20

–4

25

0

20

40

60

80

2

Power (MW )

FIGURE 20-7  Example of multicomponent signal showing the intervals of influence of dominant modes. (a) Temporal evolution; (b) scaled average significance; (c) power spectrum; (d) global spectrum.

to locate system controllers can be obtained by using residue analysis. In addition to participation factors, kinetic energy and modal power can also be used as sensitive indicators of coupling between modes and state variables. Table 20-3 shows energy and power modal expansions based on these notions. Modal Power Flow.  Once an efficient method for computing the modal properties of the state representation is available, the modal power flow distribution or energy exchange can be computed. Typically, large power system models represent system behavior by two highly sparse small signal models [6]:  x   ∆i

   AD =   C D 

∆i = YN ∆v

20_Santoso_Sec20_p1239-1328.indd 1254

B

D −Y D

  x   ∆v  

 B + u   0 

 u  

(20-16)

23/11/17 4:43 PM

POWER SYSTEM STABILITY AND CONTROL        1255 

TABLE 20-3  Dynamic Energy and Power Relationships Feature

Definition KE =

Kinetic energy

1 2

Modal relationship

ng

∑

1 T ω Mωr 2 r

M kω r 2 = k

k =1

∆ KEk =

 1  M k [ 2  

ng

∑α e j

j =1

λ jt

φω r ]2 + kj

  (φω r φω r )(α pα q )e( λ p + λq )t  kp kq  p=1 q= p+1  ng

ng −1

∑∑

n−1     ∆ Pk = (α k e λkt )2 φTk φ k + 2(λk )(α kα j )e( λk + λ j )t φTk φ j    j = k +1  

∑

P = x T x = ( x , A x )

System power

where submatrices A D , B D , C D , YD represent sensitivity relations of appropriate dimension and include the effect of FACTS controllers, synchronous machines, wind farms and other dynamic devices, and YN is the network admittance matrix. Models of any degree of complexity can be handled using this approach. Assuming that x(t ) = Σni =1α i e λit φi, and solving for the bus voltage deviations, Dv, in terms of the time evolution of the system states, x, yields

(Y

N

n

)

+ YD ∆v (λ1 ,, λn ) = C D x = C D

∑(α ) φ e j

j

λ jt

= I mod (λ1 ,, λn )

j =1



n

∆i(λ1 ,, λn ) = C D

∑(α ) φ e j

j

λ jt



(20-17)

− YD ∆v (λ1 ,, λn )

j =1

where Imod essentially represents a modal, current injection vector. Physically, the magnitude of the bus voltage deviations allows the identification of those buses where the swing oscillation has the stronger influence on the bus voltage magnitude. It is equivalent to the notion of bus voltage mode shape. Of major interest, modal contributions are finally obtained by expressing the incremental variations in power to the corresponding variations in voltage and currents. Noting that, PD = vd id + vq iq , QD = vq id − vd iq , the modal power can be written as k

k

k

k

k

k

k

k

k

k

∆PD (λ ) = ∆PD ∠ϕ P = [ v oD ]∆i D (λ ) + [i oD ]∆v D (λ ) D

and ∆Q D (λ ) = ∆Q D ∠ϕQ = [ˆi oD ]∆v D (λ ) + [ vˆ oD ]∆i D (λ ) D

where [i oD ],[ v oD ],[ˆi oD ], and [ vˆ oD ] are constant, block-diagonal matrices, whose values are dependent on the initial device and current injections. Modal power flow analysis is of special interest to analyze the impact of low-to-no-inertia devices such as wind farms and photovoltaic generation, and the exchange of swing oscillation energy in the network.

20_Santoso_Sec20_p1239-1328.indd 1255

23/11/17 4:43 PM

1256        SECTION TWENTY

20.1.3  Forced Oscillations Forced oscillations are associated with a driving force in which energy is continuously supplied to the system. The driving force can take many ways including cyclic load variations, mechanical load changes or stochastic forcing associated with random load variations [18–20]. Harmonic Excitation.  In this case, the driving force is usually assumed to be sinusoidal. The equation of motion for a set of ng machines represented classically driven by a simple harmonic force is, in physical space  ∆δ   0 x =    =   ∆ω ˆ   − M −1K S  r  

  ∆δ    0   +  −1 jω t − jω t  1 − ˆ r +e r ) ∆ ω ( M f e  − M K D  r     

ω oI

(20-18)

Harmonic forcing term

where wr is the excitation (forcing) frequency, and f = [A1, …, Ang] is a vector of amplitudes for each mechanical torque; Ai, i = 1, …, ng is the magnitude or level of the excitation. The total system response is given by

{

}

ˆ (s ) = (sI − Λ )−1 x + (sI − Λ )−1 T −1M −1F(s ) ∆ω rm o where T is the modal transformation matrix, and F(s ) = [2 A1s (s − jω r )(s + jω r )2 H1 2 A2 s (s − jω r )(s + jω r )2 H 2  2 An s (s − jω r )(s + jω r )2 Hn ]T . The modal speed deviations can then be expressed as   s ∆ωˆ rm (0) + ∆δ m (0) i i ∆ωˆ rm (t ) = L−1  + i ( )( s − σ − j ω s − σ + jω i ) i i i     Free response

n

∑ k =1

  2 Akψ ik s  H k (s + jω r )(s − jω r )(s − σ i − jω i )(s − σ i + jω i )     Forced response

(20-19) When the Ai’s are small (weak excitation), the solution of Eq. (20-18) approximates to the free response. For a stable, well-damped system, the free system response vanishes for large times, and the steady-state modal response due to a sinusoidal excitation is also sinusoidal. A more detailed analysis of Eq. (20-19) shows that the amplitude of the forced oscillation becomes very large when the forcing frequency, wr, takes values close to the frequency of weakly damped inter-area (local) modes, and the system is said to be in a state of resonance. As an example, Fig. 20-8 shows system responses to resonant frequency, wr for the system shown in Fig. 20-5. The oscillations are, in general, nonperiodic and under some circumstances may not decay with time. References [19, 20] discuss recent experience with the analysis of actual system oscillations. Stochastically Driven Linear Dynamical Systems.  A second case of interest is obtained when the primary source of excitation to the system is random load variations, which result in a low-amplitude stochastic system response. Under these assumptions, it is reasonable to assume that the system dynamic behavior may be approximated by a stochastically driven linear system of the form

x (t ) = Ax (t ) + Bu(t ) + Fξ(t ) y (t ) = Cx (t ) + υ(t )

(20-20)

where x(t) is the vector of states, Ax(t ) is the deterministic part of the model, and w is a vector of random vector perturbing the system; the vector t is measurement noise, and F is the forcing matrix.

20_Santoso_Sec20_p1239-1328.indd 1256

23/11/17 4:43 PM

POWER SYSTEM STABILITY AND CONTROL        1257  1.5

2

GEN 1 GEN 2 GEN 3 GEN 4

1

0.47 Hz

0.5 0 –0.5 –1 –1.5

0

1

2

3

4

5 6 Time (s)

GEN 1 GEN 2 GEN 3 GEN 4

1 Rotor angle (rads)

Rotor angle (rads)

1.5

7

8

9

10

1.3 Hz

0.5 0 –0.5 –1 –1.5

0

1

2

3

4

5 Time (s)

6

7

8

9

10

(b)

(a)

FIGURE 20-8  Forced system response for the system in Fig. 20-5. (a) fr = 0.47 Hz; (b) fr = 1.32 Hz.

The output y is influenced by the dynamic of the system and results in random variations in measurable signals such as bus voltages, tie-line power and other signals. The input x(t) generally takes the form of a complex Gaussian white-noise process, having zero mean and unit covariance that best represent load characteristics or other effects. Loads are assumed to be of the form PLi = PLio + ξ Pi ; QLi = QLio + ξ Pi, where ξ Pi , ξ Qi are the random load perturbations associated with the real and reactive components of the load and the superscript o denotes initial conditions. Spatial variability can be described by the off-diagonal elements of matrix F. Figure 20-9 provides a conceptual representation of the above model. Similar to the case of forced oscillations, the solution of Eq. (20-20) may be written as

x (t ) = e At x o +  Deterministic response

t

∫ e ξ(τ )dτ ,  A (t −τ )

o

y (t ) = Ce At x o + C

t

∫e o

A (t −τ ) ξ (τ ) dτ

+ Dξ(τ ) (20-21)

Stochastic response

FIGURE 20-9  Schematic illustrating the nature of system response to random load changes.

20_Santoso_Sec20_p1239-1328.indd 1257

23/11/17 4:43 PM

1258        SECTION TWENTY

In general terms, the idea of this approach is to recover the system properties through modal analysis of the stochastic response when the system has settled to steady-state random behavior. For a stable system, the first part on the rhs of Eq. (20-21) (deterministic response) decays to zero and is of no interest for the analysis of the steady-state response; the second term on the rhs represents the steady-state stochastic response and can be used to determine the loads associated with dominant system behavior, as well as to assess modal distribution. Two main parameters define the steady-state stochastic system response: 1. The mean value, and standard deviation, D 2. The ensemble average energy of the forcing, E = x (t )T x (t ) Under a statistical steady-state condition, the predominant spatial structure describing the stochastic forcing responses can be obtained from the covariance matrices of the state and measurement vectors. 20.1.4  Measurement-Based Analysis Techniques In recent years, the development of wide-area measurement systems (WAMS) and advanced monitoring devices has added much to the knowledge of system behavior. A major effort has been made to develop methods to extract important patterns (mode shapes) and dynamical variables directly from measured data. A related but separate question is on how to describe the complex system dynamics using a greatly reduced number of measurements. Data-Driven Techniques.  Practical study and analytical experience suggest that the ringdown phase of the observed oscillations following a disturbance is well described by a linear superposition of (complex) oscillation modes. In the noise-free linear case, the set of measurements y(t), t = 1, …, M can be approximated as

yˆ (t ) = bo + b1t +   offset

linear drift

pc

∑

a j e −σ j t +

j=1

 Monotonic components

po

∑a e

−σ kt

cos(ω kt + θ k ) = k 1   k

(20-22)

Oscillatory components

where sk is the damping coefficient in Napiers/s, wk is the modal frequency in rad/s, qk is the phase angle in radians, ak is the amplitude in pu and N is the number of samples; pc and po are the number of significant monotonic and oscillatory components in the approximation. This model is based on two implicit assumptions: nonlinearities are inconsequential and mode coupling is negligible. In most practical cases, the true dynamics of the observed oscillations may be poorly known due to the difficulties in accounting for various damping effects, nonstationarities, and noise. Further, high levels of noise result in nonstationary signals, which may lead to inefficient performance and inaccurate results. Practical methods are designed to accomplish two major goals: reducing the dimensionality of the data sets by retaining only the dominant modes, and extracting features of interest such as modal parameters. Examples include techniques such as Prony analysis and nonparametric analysis methods [21]. Figure 20-10 illustrates the nonstationary behavior of a measured signal showing phase changes for three different time intervals. Note the changes in the magnitudes and phases of the relative oscillations. Oscillation Detection and Analysis.  Monitoring methods for detection of impending loss of stability or the onset of oscillations have been developed [22]. Given a sufficiently dense set of dynamic recording devices such as phasor measurement units (PMUs), the first step of a wide-area monitoring system is often preprocessing to correct noise, errors, and missing data. Then, an appropriate signal processing identification algorithm is selected to run on the processed data, and produce output patterns.

20_Santoso_Sec20_p1239-1328.indd 1258

23/11/17 4:43 PM

POWER SYSTEM STABILITY AND CONTROL        1259 

61 Signal PMU 1 Signal PMU 2

60.5

Mode shape

Signal PMU 3

60 59.5 59 58.5 120

Mode shape

Mode shape

130

140

150

160

170

180

190

200

Time FIGURE 20-10  Measured signals showing changes in modal parameters. The inset shows the mode shape of the dominant mode.

Typical output patterns include global outliers, mode coupling and clustering, predictive models, as well as change patterns and critical event detection. There also other application domains such as the development of triggering algorithms for PMUs or control and protection systems. The monitoring system incorporates four basic functions or stages: filtering, detrending and rectification, detection of abnormal activity, and thresholding [22]. In the context of oscillation detection, the definition on an appropriate threshold is a crucial issue in the identification process as it may result in false alarm errors. Figure 20-11 provides an illustration of the use of time-domain analysis to detect the onset of system oscillations. Other alternatives using filters and user-defined threshold levels are described in [22].

FIGURE 20-11  Detection of the onset of system oscillations.

20.1.5  Mitigation and Control of System Oscillations Damping Criteria and Anomaly Detection.  Grid codes are increasingly specifying criteria for damping of electromechanical modes of oscillation. In practice, a number of well-defined parameters can be used in order to identify the onset and damping of spontaneous oscillations. These include the start time and duration of the oscillatory process, settling times, threshold crossings, rise

20_Santoso_Sec20_p1239-1328.indd 1259

23/11/17 4:43 PM

1260        SECTION TWENTY

and decay time, and the envelope of the observed oscillations. With reference to Eq. (20-22), the damping ratio x, and the associated time constant t can be computed as

ξ (%) =



σ x100; τ = 1/ σ +ω 2

σ2

(s)(20-23)

Several criteria to define acceptable damping rates for system oscillations have been developed. Figure 20-12 illustrates this notion. Three main time intervals can be considered: (1) ambient, predisturbance operating conditions, (2) increasing oscillations following fault inception, and (3) decaying oscillations.

FIGURE 20-12  Basic parameters for disturbance detection.

Decay Time.  For a stable system, the oscillations gradually decay with the envelope of maximum amplitudes following the dotted curve. Typical time constants for acceptable performance range from 7.0 to 12 s [23] following credible contingency events. According to the above expression, a time constant of 12 s, corresponds to a damping constant with magnitude greater than −0.083 Np/s and a 2% settling time shorter than 47 s. Factors Influencing System Damping.  System damping is influenced by many parameters, including network structure, control actions, and operating conditions. Damping is usually small and can be made negative by the actions of controls, leading to growth of oscillations. Feedback control actions of automatic voltage regulators and speed governors and FACTS devices are generally recognized to have the potential to contribute to negative damping of power swings. Damping, Basic Control Idea.  Damping may be affected considerably by control action and control structure. To illustrate how control actions can influence system damping, it suffices to consider a simple two-area system with SVC voltage control at an intermediate bus shown in Fig. 20-13a [24]. Under small disturbances, the swing equation of the system can be written as

2H

∂ Pe ∂P ∂P ∂P d ∆ωˆ r ∆β svc − K D ∆ωˆ r (20-24) ≈ ∆Pm − e ∆δ − e ∆X e − e ∆Eq′ − ∂β svc dt ∂δ ∂ Xe ∂ Eq′

where bsvc is the variable SVC susceptance and the other symbols have the usual meaning. It follows from physical considerations that the transmitted power and transmission bus voltage are given by Eq′V2 sinδ 1 Pe = fˆP (δ , β svc ) = ; Vm = fˆv (δ , β svc ) = ( X 2 Eq′ cosδ + X1V2 )2 + ( X 2 Eq′ sinδ )2 Xe Xe where X e = ( X1 + X 2 − X1 X 2 β svc ).

20_Santoso_Sec20_p1239-1328.indd 1260

23/11/17 4:43 PM

POWER SYSTEM STABILITY AND CONTROL        1261 

(a)

(b)

FIGURE 20-13  Simple test system with SVC voltage support and its block-diagram representation.

Three basic control strategies can be considered: Generator excitation control, constant SVC voltage support, and modulation of the SVC bus voltage. Attention is focused on the effect of SVC voltage support on system damping (∆Eq′ = 0 ). SVC in voltage control mode. With this control strategy, Vm = Vref. The state representation is  ∆δ(t )   0 = x =  K  ∆ωˆ r (t )   − S   2H 

ωo    ∆δ (t )  1 + KD   ˆ  ∆ω r (t )  2 H −    2H 

 0     ∆Pm 

where K S = ∂ Pe / ∂δ = Eq′V2 sinδ /X e. Effect of SVC Voltage Support.  Under closed-loop control, the SVC output can be defined symbolically by ∆β svc = Gsvc (s )[∆Vref (s ) − ∆Vm (s )], where Gsvc (s) is the SVC’s transfer function, and ∆Vm =

∂ fˆv (δ , β svc ) ∂δ δ =δ o

o β svc = β svc

∆δ +

∂ fˆv (δ , β svc ) ∂β svc δ =δ o

∆β svc

o β svc = β svc

In this case, the overall state representation is of the form 0   0 0 ωo  ∆δ     ∆δ     − K /(2 H ) − K /(2 H ) (1/2 H ) ∂ fˆ / ∂β     0  svc S D P   ∆ωˆ r  +   ∆ωˆ r  =    K ∂ fˆ     K ∂ fˆv  ∆βsvc   − svc v   ∆β svc   0 0 − svc   Tsvc ∂δ  Tsvc ∂β svc     

0 1 2H 0

0   0  0   ∆   Pm  K svc   ∆V    ref  Tsvc  

Figure 20-13b shows a conceptual representation of the system model. Two control loops can be easily recognized: (a) the electromechanical loop, and (b) the SVC control loop [24, 25]. Several points can be learned from this simple model. (1) With the SVC in voltage control mode, Dbsvc = 0, the SVC provides, essentially, synchronizing power (the SVC contribution is in phase with the rotor angle deviation and damping contribution is rather limited); (2) the SVC control loop introduces a

20_Santoso_Sec20_p1239-1328.indd 1261

23/11/17 4:43 PM

1262        SECTION TWENTY

frequency-dependent phase lag; and (3) damping can be increased by introducing a supplementary damping control loop, Gpsdc(jw). The contribution of the SVC to the damping/synchronizing power is given by ∆Pd (β svc ) =

∂ fˆP ∂β svc

Gsvc (s )

∂ fˆ (1 − Gsvc (s ) v ) ∂β svc

Gpsdc (s )∆ω r

Damping contribution in complex systems involves two main mechanisms: (1) A change in the SVC’s susceptance changes the terminal voltage Vt and results in changes in power transfers. This in turn, may affect the electric output of the generators and rotor acceleration; (2) suitable modulation of the SVC bus voltage may be result in a torque component in phase with the rotor speed deviations thus indirectly damping system oscillations. In this context, the control synthesis task involves two main subtasks: (1) computing the phase shift introduced by the SVC control action, and (2) designing the PSS damping controller Gpsdc to cancel the phase shift. Controller Design Methodology.  As discussed above, the design of feedback controllers to damp power system oscillations involves four main subtasks: (1) The identification of oscillatory modes that are most controllable and observable by the controllers and the machines and devices associated with the oscillations; (2) the selection of measurements and controlled variables; (3) the selection of the control structure interconnecting the measured and controlled variable; and (4) the design of system controllers. Control Structure.  Study experience shows that wide-area power system controllers may enhance the ability of the power system to control electromechanical oscillations. Control structure, however, can affect control performance and result in adverse interaction problems. The class of control strategies discussed here is divided into three distinct subclasses: centralized control, partially decentralized control structure, and hierarchical control. The reader is referred to Refs. [26, 27] for more details about a broader class of control structures. Insight into the problem of loop interaction can be gleaned from the analysis of the ith control loop in the linear system representation. From Eqs. (20-16) and (20-17), the dynamic behavior of the ith dynamic subsystem or device is given by x i = A D xi + B D ∆v i + Bu ui = A D x i + i i i ii  Local feedback

∑

n

i =1 A Dij x j + Bui u i≠ j    

(20-25)

Interactions with other subsystems

The interaction between the ith dynamic device and other controllers is given by the ith row of the modal relationship Eq. (20-17), ∆v (s ) = ( YN + Yd )−1 Wd x (s ) = Lx (s ), and ∆v i (s ) = ∑ j Lij x j (s ). A more physical interpretation is that the output measurement Dvi will only affect the controlled input via its controlled law if Lij = 0 for all j ≠ i. In dealing with interacting power system controllers two major aspects must be addressed: the first aspect is the study of the extent of interaction between the control loops, and the second aspect involves assessment of the nature of this interaction. The overall design of decentralized controllers can be broadly divided into two main stages [26]: (1) The selection of feedback signals for the controllers, or pairings of inputs and outputs; and (2) The design of supplemental power system damping controllers. With the advent of renewable and dispersed generation and the increasing complexity of modern power systems, there has been a surge of interest in utilizing hierarchically structured, distributed control systems for enhancing global behavior.

20_Santoso_Sec20_p1239-1328.indd 1262

23/11/17 4:43 PM

POWER SYSTEM STABILITY AND CONTROL        1263 

Decentralized Control Structures.  In practice, control structures are decentralized or semi-decentralized. Let G(s ) = [ g ij (s )] be the open-loop transfer matrix from u(s) to y(s) and G c (s ) = diag[ g c (s )], j = 1, …, k be the controller transfer function matrix. A control system is said j to be decentralized if the off-diagonal terms of G c (s ) are zero. Clearly, if, g ij (s ) = 0, (i ≠ j ) each controller g c (s ) can be designed independently for the isolated subsystem g ii (s ) without any effect i on the other subsystems. From Eq. (20-4), let the transfer function relating the ith output to the jth input be expressed as yi ( s )



u j (s )

= g ij (s ) = c Ti (sI − A )−1 b j = cˆTi (sI − Λ )−1 bˆ j =

n

∑

c Ti φk ψ Tk b j s − λk

k =1

n

=

Rijk

∑s−λ k =1

(20-26) k

Several observations are of interest here •  The quantities c Ti φ k and ψ Tk b j determine, respectively, the outputs participating in the response of each mode (observability) and the state variables in each mode that are affected by each input (controllability). •  The residue Rijk = c Ti φ k ψ Tk b j of g ij (s ) associated with the eigenvalue λk is independent of the scaling of the eigenvector and provides an unambiguous mode-selection criteria. •  Large off-diagonal terms g ij (s ) in the transfer function matrix, G(s) and large terms in the transfer function residue matrix, are associated with strong coupling between control loops. This may result in performance degradation under decentralized control. Most closed-loop, output-feedback power system controllers use local information to provide system stabilization. In this case, the residue Rijk can be used for designing system controllers and assessing the effect of critical system modes on system dynamic behavior. Formally, it can be shown that the shift in a selected rotor mode is given by ∆λk = Rijk g c (λk )∆K pss , where g c (λk ) is the transfer i i function of the damping controller, and Kpss is the power system stabilizer gain. As a demonstration of this procedure, Fig. 20-14 compares the reactive power response to a step change in the voltage setpoint of an actual 300 MW hydro unit for the case with no PSS and a designed PSS using the above procedure. From Fig. 20-14 is seen that proper tuning of the PSS can significantly enhance damping of the critical mode of concern.

Reactive power (MVAr)

170

Without PSS With PSS

165 160 155 150

gc (s) = i

145 140

0

2

4

6

yi (s) ui (s)

= Kpss

sTw

(1 + sT1) (1 + sT3)

1

1 + sTw (1 + sT2) (1 + sT4) 1 + sTm

8 10 Time (s)

12

14

16

18

FIGURE 20-14  Reactive power response to a 5% step change in terminal voltage at a 300-MW hydro generator.

20_Santoso_Sec20_p1239-1328.indd 1263

23/11/17 4:43 PM

1264        SECTION TWENTY

Hierarchical Control Architectures.  Hierarchical control structures, with multiple levels of control strategies acting at different scales are well suited to achieve control requirements of large interconnected power systems. Figure 20-15 shows a general conceptual representation of a power system control structure using both, local and hierarchical control structures in which m wide-area damping controllers (WADCs) are used to enhance damping of the system.

WADC1

WADCi

y^i(s) gci(s) Local PSDC

gii(s) Σ

PMU

Gen/FACTS

ui(s) Power system

Local PSDC

Σ

Gen/FACTS

yi(s)

PMU

yk(s)

PMU ym(s)

um(s) y^m(s)

FIGURE 20-15  General hierarchical control architecture.

At the primary control level, local measurements are used to enhance damping of local modes. At the wide-area level, the input signals to the hierarchical controllers are provided from a WAMS. The outputs of the WADCs are used to modulate the reference signals of excitation systems, FACTS controllers and HVDC systems. Finding suitable pairings from block-decentralized controllers is critical to the whole design procedure due to the interactions that may occur between the inputoutput variables.

20.1.6 Bibliography 1. P. Kundur, J. Paserba, V. Ajjarapu, G. Andersson, A. Bose, C. Canizares, N. Hatziargyriou, et al., (IEEE = CIGRE Joint Task Force on Stability Terms and Definitions), Definition and classification of power system stability, IEEE Trans. Power Systems, August 2004. 2. P. Kundur and G. K. Morison, “A Review of Definitions and Classification of Stability Problems in Today’s Power Systems,” Panel Session on Stability Terms and Definitions, IEEE PES Meeting, New York, Feb. 1997. 3. CIGRE Task Force 38.01.07 on Power System Oscillations, Analysis and Control of Power System. 4.  “Inter-Area Oscillations in Power Systems,” Prepared by Systems Oscillations Working Group, IEEE Technical Publication 95 TP 101.

20_Santoso_Sec20_p1239-1328.indd 1264

23/11/17 4:43 PM

POWER SYSTEM STABILITY AND CONTROL        1265 

5. A. A. Andronov, A. A. Vitt, and S. E. Khaikin, Theory of Oscillators, Dover Publications Inc., New York, 1966. 6. P. Kundur, Power Systems Stability and Control, Electric Power Research Institute, Power System Engineering Series, McGraw-Hill Inc., 1994. 7. IEEE Committee Report, “Terms, Definitions and Symbols for Subsynchronous Oscillations,” IEEE Trans. on Power Apparatus and Systems, vol. PAS-104, June 1985, pp. 1326–1344. 8. K. Clark, “Overview of Subsynchronous Resonance Related Phenomena,” IEEE General Meeting, 2012. 9. CIGRE Task Force 38.02.16, Impact of the Interaction among Power System Controllers, CIGRE Technical Brochure No. 116, 2000, N. Martins, Convenor. 10. E. V. Larsen, and W. W. Price, “Manstab/Possim Power System Dynamic Analysis Programs—A New Approach Combining Nonlinear Simulations and Linearized State-Space/Frequency Domain Analysis,” 1977 Power Industry Computer Applications Conference, pp. 350–358. 11. Philip E. Gill, Walter Murray, and Margaret H. Wright, Practical Optimization, Academic Press, Inc, San Diego, CA, 1981, IEEE PES Special Publication 95-TP-101, Inter-area Oscillations in Power Systems, 1995.



12. Jonas Persson and Lennart Soder, “Comparison of Three Linearization Methods,” 16th Power Systems Computation Conference (PSCC), Glasgow, Scotland, July, 2008. 13. Raymon A. DeCarlo, Linear Systems—A State Variable Approach with Numerical Implementation, Prentice Hall, Englewood Cliffs, 1989. 14. Vijay Vittal and A. R. Messina, Normal Form Analysis of Power Systems, PowerLearn, 2004. 15. J. Sanchez-Gasca, V. Vittal, M. Gibbard, A. Messina, D. Vowles, S. Liu, and U. Annakkage, “Inclusion of Higher-Order Terms for Small-Signal (Modal) Analysis: Committee Report—Task Force on Assessing the Need to Include Higher-Order Terms for Small-Signal (Modal) Analysis,” IEEE Trans. Power Systems, vol. 20, no. 4, pp. 1886–1904, Nov. 2005. 16. S. M. Chan, “Modal Controllability and Observability of Power System Models,” Electrical Power and Energy Systems, vol. 6, no. 2, pp. 83–88, Apr. 1984. 17. J. I. Pérez-Arriaga, G. C. Verghese, and F. C. Schweppe, “Selective Modal Analysis with Applications to Electric Power Systems. Part I: heuristic introduction. Part II: the dynamic stability problem,” IEEE Trans. on Power Apparatus and Systems, vol. PAS-101, pp. 3117–3134, 1982. 18. M. A. Magdy, and F. Coowar, “Frequency Domain Analysis of Power System Forced Oscillations,” IET Proceedings, Pt. C, no. 4, pp. 261–268, Jul. 1990. 19. J. E. Van Ness, “Response of Large Power Systems to Cyclic Load Variations,” IEEE Trans. on Power Apparatus and Systems, vol. PAS-85, no. 7, pp. 723–727, July 1966. 20.  Nezam Sarmadi, S. Arash, and Vaithianathan Venkatasubramanian, “Inter-Area Resonance in Power Systems from Forced Oscillations,” IEEE Trans. on Power Systems, vol. 31, no. 1, pp. 378–386, Jan. 2016. 21. J. J. Sanchez-Gasca and V. Vittal (eds.), “Identification of Electromechanical Modes in Power Systems,” Technical Report PES-TR15, IEEE Power & Energy Society, Jun. 2012. 22. J. F. Hauer and F. Vakili, “An Oscillation Detector Used in the BPA Power System Disturbance Monitor,” IEEE Trans. on Power Systems, vol. 5, no. 1, pp. 7479, 1990. 23. D. J. Vowles, C. Samarasinghe, M. J. Gibbard, and G. Ancell, “Effect of Wind Generation on Small-Signal Stability—A New Zealand Example,” Power and Energy Society General Meeting, 2008 IEEE, Pittsburgh, US. 24. E. V. Larsen and J. H. Chow, “SVC Control Design Concepts for System Dynamic Performance, Application of Static VAR Systems for System Dynamic Performance,” IEEE Special Publication No. 87TH1087-5-PWR on Application of Static Var Systems for System Dynamic Performance, pp. 36–53, 1987. 25. Wei Xuan, Joe H. Choe, and Juan J. Sanchez-Gasca, “On the Sensitivities of Network Variables for FACTS Device Damping Control,” IEEE Power Engineering Society Winter Meeting, pp. 1188–1193, Jan. 2002. 26. E. N. Reyes, M. A. Messina, and M. A. Pérez, “Design of Wide-Area Damping Controllers Using the Block Relative Gain,” Electric Power System Research, 126, pp. 56–67, 2015. 27. Manfred Morari and Evanghelos Zhafiriou, Robust Process Control, Prentice Hall, Englewoods Cliff, 1989.

20_Santoso_Sec20_p1239-1328.indd 1265

23/11/17 4:43 PM

1266        SECTION TWENTY

20.2  MEASUREMENT-BASED VOLTAGE STABILITY ASSESSMENT TECHNIQUES BY KAI SUN Growths in electrical energy consumptions and penetration of intermittent renewable resources energy would often make power transmission systems operate closer to their stability limits. Among all stability issues, voltage instability due to the inability of the transmission system to deliver power to loads is one of major concerns in power system operations. Voltage instability usually originates from a local bus but may spread out to a larger area potentially causing a systemwide instability. At present, electric utilities use model-based online voltage stability assessment (VSA) software tools to assist operators in foreseeing potential voltage instability under a disturbance. Based on the online state estimation of the system, those VSA tools employ power system models to simulate presumed contingencies or load variations. Such a model-based VSA approach has several limitations. First, it needs a convergent system state estimate as the starting point of simulation and stability assessment, which may be hard to obtain under a stressed system condition. Second, the fidelity of its results highly depends on whether the system model used is accurate. Usually, the time-domain simulation on a voltage instability scenario needs to consider a longer period than a transient stability simulation. The reason is that the initial stage of a voltage instability scenario often involves slow dynamics or switches on devices such as shunt compensators and tap changing transformers. If those devices are also modeled and simulated, the simulation will be time consuming for a large system and hence not suitable for online applications. Many countries deploy GPS-synchronized phasor measurement units (PMUs) on transmission systems to provide wide-area measurements for real-time stability monitoring. That leads to more interests in developing data driven VSA methods that utilize real-time measurements to directly assess voltage stability on selected buses. 20.2.1  Concepts on Voltage Stability Definitions and Classifications.  Voltage stability refers to “the ability of a power system to maintain steady voltages at all buses in the system after being subjected to a disturbance from a given initial operating condition” [1]. In contrast to generator rotors in angular stability of a power system, the driving forces for voltage instability are mainly loads and the means by which voltage or reactive power are controlled to support loads. Occurring more in a heavily stressed power system, voltage instability becomes one of the major concerns in today’s system operations and an impacting factor on the power transfer capability of a transmission network. When voltage instability leads to loss of voltage in a significant part of the system, such a process is called voltage collapse, in which many bus voltages in the system decay to an unrecoverable level. As a consequence of voltage collapse, the system may experience a power blackout over a large area. A system restoration procedure would then be taken to bring the blackout area back to service. The literature often classifies voltage stability by the severity of the disturbance for the ease of analyzing causes and phenomena: 1. Small-disturbance voltage stability is concerned with a system’s ability to control voltages following small perturbations such as gradual load increases. Voltage stability problems of this type can be studied effectively by either steady-state analysis on a power flow model or eigenanalysis on a simplified, linearized system model. 2. Large-disturbance voltage stability is concerned with a system’s ability to control voltages following large disturbances such as system faults, line outages, loss of load or loss of generation. A study on voltage stability of this type usually requires examination of the dynamic performance of

20_Santoso_Sec20_p1239-1328.indd 1266

23/11/17 4:43 PM

POWER SYSTEM STABILITY AND CONTROL        1267 

the system over a period of time that is sufficient to capture the dynamics or switches of voltage control devices such as generator field current limiters, tap changing transformers and shunt compensators. Therefore, nonlinear dynamics of the system need to be analyzed or simulated using a more detailed system model. Another perspective for classification is the time frame of voltage instability and collapse dynamics, which varies from tens of minutes to a few seconds. Conventionally, electric utilities categorize voltage stability problems as follows: 1. Long-term voltage stability involves slower acting equipment such as tap-changing transformers, thermostatically controlled loads and generator field current limiters. Voltage stability problems of this category usually take several minutes to several hours to occur and are usually studied by static analysis techniques with complementary use of dynamic analysis. 2. Short-term or transient voltage stability involves dynamics with fast acting load components such as induction motors, electronically controlled loads and HVDC links under contingencies near loads. Voltage stability problems of this category take several seconds or even shorter time to occur. The above classifications are helpful for simplification of complicated voltage instabilities, identification of the causes and selection of the right tools for voltage stability analysis. However, any realistic voltage instability is essentially a nonlinear dynamic system problem. As a result, the analysis from a perspective of any single category may not be sufficient to understand voltage instability in the real-time operation environment. |V|

P-V curve and V-Q curve.  As shown Operating point in Fig. 20-16, a P-V curve is a useful tool for conceptual, steady-state analysis of voltage stability, especially for long-term Vmargin voltage stability. It is originally developed “Nose” for a radial system to study how the voltage Critical point magnitude |V| of one bus on the system voltage decays with the increase of active power P transferred through the bus. The upper portion of a P-V curve can be drawn by power-flow simulation that increases load from an initial light-load operating point Pmargin until the maximum power is reached. The P maximum power point is also called the “nose” or “knee” point of the curve. For a real power system model, power flow FIGURE 20-16  P-V curve. simulation usually diverges near the “nose” point, which leads to voltage collapse [2–4]. In order to obtain the lower portion of the P-V curve under the “nose” point, the continuation power flow (CPF) is often used [5]. Projecting the distance between the initial operating point and the “nose” point onto the |V| axis and P axis will give the voltage stability margins respectively in terms of voltage and active power as indicated by Vmargin and Pmargin in Fig. 20-16. For a large meshed network, P-V curves are also used by engineers. P could be the total load of a load area, which is assumed to increase in one specific way, for example, all loads of the area being evenly increased, and |V| is often selected to be the voltage of the most critical bus or a representative bus. Of course, multiple P-V curves may be plotted for different buses and for different ways of load increase. However, for a large system, it is difficult to assess voltage stability by P-V curves because there are usually a wide variety of possible changes on loads. In addition, associated generators that are supporting the load area must also be realistically redispatched to match any change of the area load in creation of P-V curves.

20_Santoso_Sec20_p1239-1328.indd 1267

23/11/17 4:43 PM

1268        SECTION TWENTY

Q

Vmargin

Operating point Qmargin

Critical voltage

|V|

As illustrated in Fig. 20-17, a V-Q curve is also often used to plot the voltage magnitude (|V|) at a critical bus versus the reactive power injected (Q) to the same bus. The bottom point of the curve corresponds to the “nose” point of the P-V curve, so a voltage-stable operating point should be on the right portion of the curve with a sufficient margin to the bottom point. Another indicator of voltage stability margin at an operating point is the steepness of the slope DQ/D|V| of the V-Q curve. Once that slope decreases to zero, the voltage will dramatically drop to cause voltage instability.

Voltage Stability Margin.  Voltage stability margin of an operating point is its distance to the “nose” point on the P-V curve. For instance, the stability margin Pmargin in terms of active power is defined as the distance between the active power of the operating point and the loadability limit; that is, the active power at the “nose” point, as illustrated in Fig. 20-16. Usually, the voltage stability margin refers to the loadability at one load bus. However, it can also be utilized for the interface or tie lines of a load area. If the voltage stability margin is smaller than a certain threshold, a preventive action should be taken to avoid potential voltage instability. The indices on voltage stability margin can be regarding a pre- or post-contingency condition, which are often called the “n − 0” and “n − 1” conditions, respectively, by the industry: FIGURE 20-17  V-Q curve.

1. Voltage stability margin for the “n − 0” condition considers one specific system topology to be stressed in an anticipated way of load increase together with generation redispatch until the loadability limit is reached, so the margin equals the distance from the operating point of interest on the P-V curve to the maximum power point. If applied in the operation environment, this type of margin indices provide the real-time voltage stability margin for the current operating condition. 2. Voltage stability margin for the “n − 1” condition provides the smallest voltage stability margin on the P-V curves about a list of postcontingency conditions such as line outages and generation outages, and is often evaluated by power flow “n − 1” simulations. Depending on whether steady-state analysis or dynamic analysis is employed, model-based VSA techniques adopt either a power flow model or a dynamic model of the system to evaluate voltage stability margin for “n − 0” and “n − 1” conditions and predict voltage collapse. Many factors influence voltage stability margin for both “n − 0” and “n − 1” conditions, such as adjustments by transformer tap changers and variations of reactive power outputs from generators and other reactive power sources. Therefore, real-time, accurate voltage stability margin information is critical for system operators to be aware of any potential or already developing voltage instability. However, it is challenging for model-based VSA to provide such real-time margin information especially for a large system. Many generators, busses and transmission lines have to be modeled and also lots of uncertainties need to be addressed such as load variations and intermittent behaviors of renewable generation. 20.2.2  Voltage Stability Assessment and Model-Based Techniques Modal Analysis.  For small-disturbance voltage stability, the modal analysis conducts eigenvalue analysis based on the power-flow model of a power system [6]. First, the linearized power-flow equation is calculated as below, which utilizes the Jacobian matrix to give sensitivity of the incremental

20_Santoso_Sec20_p1239-1328.indd 1268

23/11/17 4:43 PM

POWER SYSTEM STABILITY AND CONTROL        1269 

changes in bus real powers (DP) and reactive powers (DQ) to the incremental changes in bus voltage angles (Dp) and voltage magnitudes (DV).  ∆P   J Pθ  =  ∆Q   J Qθ

J PV   ∆θ    J QV   ∆V  

(20-27)

Let ΔP = 0, there is ∆V = J −R1 ∆Q    where J R = J QV − J Qθ J −P1θ J PV

(20-28)

JR is the reduced Jacobian matrix of the system. It represents the approximate, linearized relationship between the incremental changes in bus voltage magnitudes (DV) and bus reactive power injections (DQ). Voltage stability characteristics of the system can be identified by computing the eigenvalues (i.e., modes) and eigenvectors (i.e., mode shapes) of JR and following these criteria: 1. Only when all eigenvalues are positive, the system is voltage stable because the modal voltage deviation DV and modal reactive power variation DQ regarding each eigenvalue are along the same direction so as to make reactive power control be effective. 2. For a negative eigenvalue, the corresponding modal voltage cannot be improved by adjusting the modal reactive power and hence is unstable. 3. For a zero eigenvalue, JR becomes singular and the corresponding modal voltage collapse since any small change in the modal reactive power causes infinite change in the modal voltage. The V-Q curve introduced by Fig. 20-17 plots the characteristics of Eq. (20-28) about a single bus having reactive power injection vary over a range. The eigenvectors of JR regarding a mode indicate the bus participation factors, and tell the critical buses and areas associated with that mode. The modal analysis discovers that the voltage collapse is essentially the collapse of the voltage in the critical mode, the mode that corresponds to the eigenvalue having the minimum magnitude. Although that magnitude gives the proximity or margin to voltage instability regarding the critical mode, it is not a good indicator for online applications due to these two reasons: first, it is based on a linearized power-flow model and hence suitable only for analysis on long-term or small-disturbance voltage stability; second, it does not explicitly provide actionable information for system operators. Singular Value Decomposition.  Since the singularity of the reduced Jacobian matrix JR indicates occurring voltage instability, a quantitative value on its singularity indicates voltage stability margin. The singular value decomposition (SVD) method is generally used for factorization of a matrix [7]: M = U × S × V*, where U and V are unitary matrices and S is a diagonal matrix with nonnegative real numbers the diagonal, which are called singular values. This method can be applied to JR to determine the minimum singular value, which corresponds to the critical mode. If the minimum singular value is equal to zero, the system becomes voltage unstable regarding that mode [8]. Continuation Power Flow.  The maximum loadability of a power system can be determined by increasing the loads in a specific way and computing power flows until singularity appears making the power flow unsolvable, where the maximum power point, the “nose” point, is reached from the upper portion of the P-V curve. However, the lower portion of the P-V curve can hardly be obtained by conventional power flow analysis. Continuation power flow (CPF) is a modification of conventional power flow analysis for finding a static voltage stability margin, Pmargin or Vmargin, and it overcomes the singularity problem by reformulating the power flow equations so that they can remain well-conditioned even at a loading condition near the “nose” point [5]. As illustrated in Fig. 20-18, starting from an initial power flow solution 1, the general principle of the CPF is to utilize a tangent predictor followed by a vertical or horizontal corrector to determine a series of power flow solutions 3, 5, 7, etc. until the complete P-V curve is plotted. Each predictor step

20_Santoso_Sec20_p1239-1328.indd 1269

23/11/17 4:43 PM

1270        SECTION TWENTY

|V| 1

Predictor 2 3

Critical voltage

Corrector 5

4

7

6

“Nose” point

P FIGURE 20-18  Calculations of CPF.

(e.g., 1 → 2, 3 → 4, and 5 → 6) assumes a specific pattern of load increase, following which a vertical corrector step (e.g., 2 → 3) determines the exact solution with the load fixed by conventional power flow analysis. Once the predicted new load (e.g., 4 and 6) is beyond the maximal power, a horizontal corrector step (e.g., 4 → 5 and 6 → 7) with the voltage fixed should be used instead of a vertical corrector to give the exact solution near or below the “nose” node. The CPF is currently supported by some model-based VSA tools for online applications [9]. However, its computation time could be a concern in online applications. Dynamic Security Assessment.  The dynamic security assessment (DSA) performs offline or online time-domain simulation on a list of preselected contingencies to find which may cause transient instability under a specific steady-state power-flow condition. A DSA program can also be used to assess voltage stability if dynamics of the system are concerned especially for largedisturbance, short-term voltage stability problems. The time-domain simulation estimates the system response following a contingency by solving a set of nonlinear differential-algebraic equations that model generators, the transmission network, control devices and static and dynamic loads of the power system. The traditional DSA for rotor angle stability models generators and auxiliary control devices in detail but often represents loads by the ZIP (constant impedance + constant current + constant power) model. Nevertheless, a DSA program for voltage stability studies need to give sufficient considerations to the dynamics on the load side, especially for motor loads and electronically controlled loads, and to controls or switches related to reactive power, for example, the current limiters of generators, transformer tap changers, and reactive power supports. Dynamics such as frequency regulation that are not directly related to voltage stability can be moderately approximated in the simulation models. A recently increasing operation concern on voltage stability is the FIDVR (fault-induced delayed voltage recovery) issue, which sometime happens in summer to a transmission system with a high percentage of induction motor loads, mainly air conditioners [10]. Those motors are considered “prone to stall” motors and may draw lots of reactive power when they attempt to recover from stalling so as to delay a system voltage recovery and lead to voltage collapse. To simulate FIDVR issues, electricity utilities usually conduct time-domain simulation with detailed models on induction motors and other dynamic loads. There are increasing needs for online DSA tools to foresee not only rotor angle instability but also voltage instability for predefined “what-if  ” scenarios, critical contingencies influencing the

20_Santoso_Sec20_p1239-1328.indd 1270

23/11/17 4:43 PM

POWER SYSTEM STABILITY AND CONTROL        1271 

system strongly with high occurrence probability of the voltage collapse. However, the accuracy of such a model-based approach can be influenced by the following factors: 1. The time-domain simulation requires accurately models of all system components related to voltage stability and reactive power control. The use of inaccurate models may influence the creditability of the final VSA results. However, in practice, model validations for both generation and load in a timely manner are not trivial efforts for power system engineers. 2. The simulation is based on a system operating condition, a steady-state power flow solution. Such a solution can be provided by the online state estimator but may become unavailable if the state estimation diverges under, for example, a heavily stressed condition with insufficient voltage stability margin. 3. The high computational burden with online simulation is another concern. A time-domain simulation on voltage stability is usually much longer than a typical 10 to 20 s transient stability simulation because the initial stage of a scenario often involves slow dynamics and the switches on, for example, shunt compensators and tap changing transformers, should be modeled well, which makes the simulation be time consuming for a large system and becomes bottleneck for online applications. Online assessment of voltage stability margin is critical for system operations to prevent voltage instability and take a timely remedial action, so the margin information is expected to be accurate all the time, even when the system is heavily stressed to approach the edge of voltage stability. However, as discussed above, the model-based approach has many limitations. An alternative approach is to directly using real-time measurements to assess voltage stability margin. 20.2.3  Measurement-Based Voltage Stability Assessment for a Load Bus Unlike model-based methods for VSA, measurement-based methods aim at estimation of voltage stability margin in real time using only measurements. Those methods can be applied to either individual load buses using local voltage and current measurements or a load area using synchronized phasor measurements on boundP + jQ E ary buses and tie lines of the area. ZT

I

V

Thevenin Equivalent-Based Methods.  A family of measurementExternal system based methods is based on Thevenin’s theorem applied to a single ZL load bus [4, 11, 12]. As shown in Fig. 20-19, the external system seen from a load bus can be represented by a Thevenin equivalent (TE), which is a constant voltage source E connected through a Thevenin impedance ZT . The theorem says that the active power P FIGURE 20-19 Thevenin received by the load bus reaches its maximum when the Thevenin equivalent for a load bus. impedance has the same magnitude as the load impedance:

Z L = ZT (20-29)

Typically, the load impedance ZL has a smaller magnitude than the Thevenin impedance ZT . If no disturbance happens in the external system, ZT does not change significantly. When the load impedance ZL decreases its magnitude to increase current as well as active power, the bus voltage magnitude |V| decreases following the characteristics of the P-V curve. Once Eq. (20-29) is met, the “nose” point on the P-V curve is reached and voltage instability occurs. The circuit in Fig. 20-19 satisfies Eq. (20-30). E − ZT I = V

20_Santoso_Sec20_p1239-1328.indd 1271

(20-30)

23/11/17 4:43 PM

1272        SECTION TWENTY

If Thevenin parameters E and ZT are assumed to be constant over a time window, they can be estimated from measurements of voltage V and current I over a time window. Let E = er + jei , V = vr + jvi , I = ir + jii , and ZT = r + jx . Then Eq. (20-30) becomes Eq. (20-31).  1 0 −i r   0 1 −ii 

er  ii  ei   vr  × =   −ir  r   vi       x 

(20-31)

Since ir, ii, vr, and vi are directly measured, this still leaves four unknowns er, ei, r, and x, which require at least two different measurement points from the time window. With T (T ≥ 2) measurements, the equation is extended to Eq. (20-32). 1  0    1  0 

0 1  0 1

 v (1)  ii (1)   er   r  −ii (1) −ir (1)     vi (1)   ei      ×   =    r −ir (T ) ii (T )     vr (T )   x    −ii (T ) −ir (T )     vi (T )     H X V −ir (1)



(20-32)

Thus, Thevenin parameters X = [er, ei, r, x]T can be solved by the method of least squares [4]: X = (HTH)−1HTV

(20-33)

An alternative approach is the recursive least squares (RLS) method with a forgetting factor [11]. Then, the gap between the estimated |ZT| and the calculated |ZL| = |V/I| gives the voltage stability margin in terms of the magnitude of impedance. Consider a two-bus system having the same circuit as in Fig. 20-19, where E = 1.3∠0° (p.u.), ZT = 0.03∠80° (p.u.) and the load gradually decreases its impedance magnitude |ZL| while keeping a constant power factor 0.986. Then, the least squares estimate of |ZT| gives the lower limit of |ZL| against voltage instability as shown in Fig. 20-20. Their gap indicates voltage stability margin. The voltage stability margin indices in terms of the active power P and voltage V are given as follows [12]. Let Y = 1/ZT, that, the Thevenin admittance, and denote the angles of E, V, and ZT respectively by d, q, and b. Then, the active power P and reactive power Q transferred from the external system to the load bus are calculated by P = |E ⋅ V ⋅ Y| ⋅ cos (q − d + b) − |V|2 ⋅ |Y| ⋅ cosb

(20-34)

Q = |E ⋅ V ⋅ Y| ⋅ sin (q − d + b) − |V|2 ⋅ |Y| ⋅ sinb (20-35) If the power factor f = cos[tan−1(Q/P)] of the load bus is constant, Q will change proportionally with P, and the maximum of P will be solved as

20_Santoso_Sec20_p1239-1328.indd 1272

Pmax =

2

E Y cosφ (20-36) 2[1 + cos(φ − β )]

23/11/17 4:43 PM

POWER SYSTEM STABILITY AND CONTROL        1273 

0.055 Estimated |ZT| Calculated |ZL| 0.045 0.04 Margin

Impedance magnitude (p.u.)

0.05

0.035 0.03 0.025

0

50

100

150

200 250 Time (second)

300

350

400

FIGURE 20-20  Magnitudes of the load impedance and Thevenin impedance.

Pmax corresponds to the “nose” point of the P-V curve having the critical voltage magnitude Vcritical =

E 2[1 + cos(φ − β )]

(20-37)

Vcritical is the lowest voltage magnitude the load bus may have before it loses voltage stability. Accordingly, the voltage stability margin indices in terms of the active power and voltage magnitude are Pmargin = Pmax − P (20-38) Vmargin = |V| − Vcritical (20-39) If the load is represented by a pure resistance and the Thevenin impedance is assumed to be a pure reactance jXT, Pmax, and Vcritical become Pmax =



2

E 2 XT

(20-40)

E 2

(20-41)

Vcritical =

For the two-bus system, P, Pmax, and Pmargin are shown in Fig. 20-21 and |V|, Vcritical, and Vmargin are illustrated in Fig. 20-22.

20_Santoso_Sec20_p1239-1328.indd 1273

23/11/17 4:43 PM

1274        SECTION TWENTY

Pmargin

21

Active power (MW)

20.5

Pmax

20

P 19.5

19

18.5

0

50

100

150

200 250 Time (second)

300

350

400

FIGURE 20-21  The active power and its maximum.

1.05 Vcritical 1

|V|

Voltage (p.u.)

0.95

Vmargin

0.9 0.85 0.8 0.75

0

50

100

150

200 250 Time (second)

300

350

400

FIGURE 20-22  The voltage magnitude and critical voltage.

20_Santoso_Sec20_p1239-1328.indd 1274

23/11/17 4:43 PM

POWER SYSTEM STABILITY AND CONTROL        1275 

The above method with Eqs. (20-31) to (20-33) assumes er and ei to be two constants for estimation. That is true only when the Thevenin voltage E appears to be a constant phasor over the entire time window for estimation, which may be a too strong assumption in practice. The following algorithm estimates |E| and ZT using k measurement points of V and I over a time window [13]. The algorithm allows the angle of E and the power factor angle f to vary during the window: 1. Let current phasor I be the reference, whose angle at different measurement points is reset to be zero. Then the angle of V relative to I at measurement point k equals the power factor angle f(k). Assume d (k) to be the angle of E relative to I at measurement point k: | E | ∠δ (k ) = | V (k )| ∠φ (k ) + | I (k )| × ZT ,

k = 1,,T

(20-42)

2. To have a constant ZT over T measurement points, there must be Eq. (20-43), where a = d (1) − d (T). Substitute Eq. (20-43) for ZT in Eq. (20-42), we have Eq. (20-44). ZT (α ) = −



∠α × | V (T )| ∠φ (T ) − | V (1)| ∠φ (1) ∠α × I (T ) − I (1)

E(k ) = | V (k )| ∠φ (k ) − | I (1)| ×

∠α × | V (T )| ∠φ (T ) − | V (1)| ∠φ (1) ∠α × I (T ) − I (1)

(20-43)

(20-44)

3. Find a to minimize the variance of |E(1)|, …, |E(T)| over the time window. Then, ZT is calculated from Eq. (20-43) and the mean value of |E(1)|, …, |E(T)| gives an estimate of |E|. For the aforementioned two-bus system, if the angle of E has about 5° variation during the period of load increase, the |ZL| estimated from the least squares method defined by Eqs. (20-31) to (20-33) will contain errors. Figure 20-23 compares that least squares method and the above algorithm given by Eqs. (20-43) and (20-44) regarding the estimated |ZT| and Pmax. The estimates from the above algorithm are marked by subscript “T2”, which is not influenced by the variation in the angle of E. Voltage Stability Indices.  As shown in Fig. 20-24, at the maximum power point, the voltage drop E-V across the Thevenin impedance has the same magnitude as the voltage phasor at the load bus and hence there is Eq. ( 20-45) [4]:

| V |=| E − V | ,

| E |= 2| V |cos(δ − θ ) (20-45)

Thus, a voltage stability index (VSI) can be defined to assess the risk of voltage collapse

VSI =

|V | (20-46) | E −V |

The proximity to voltage collapse at this load bus is told from how close the VSI is to one. For all load buses, the Thevenin equivalent of the external system can be estimated from measurement data and then such a VSI is calculated in real time. The buses with VSIs closer to one are more vulnerable to voltage instability.

20_Santoso_Sec20_p1239-1328.indd 1275

23/11/17 4:43 PM

1276        SECTION TWENTY

Impedance magnitude (p.u.)

0.055 Estimated |ZT|

0.05

Estimated |ZT2| Calculated |ZL|

0.045 0.04 0.035 0.03 0.025

0

50

100

150

200 250 Time (second) (a)

300

350

400

450

21.5

Active power (MW)

21 20.5 20 Pmax Pmax2

19.5

P

19 18.5

0

50

100

150

200 250 Time (second) (b)

300

350

400

450

FIGURE 20-23  Comparison of two methods on (a) estimates of |ZL| and (b) estimates of Pmax.

E d-q

Based on measured V-Q characteristics at bus i, the following Q-V sensitivity based voltage stability index Gi for bus i can be defined [14]

d-q E-V

V FIGURE 20-24 Voltage phasors of the Thevenin source and load bus.

20_Santoso_Sec20_p1239-1328.indd 1276

Γi =

∆Qi = ∆Vi

∆Qij

∑ ∆V j



(20-47)

i

where DVi represents the voltage magnitude change during a time window, DQij represents the change of the reactive power flow on

23/11/17 4:43 PM

POWER SYSTEM STABILITY AND CONTROL        1277 

the line from bus j to bus i and DQi is the change of the total reactive power injection to bus i. A voltage-stable bus should have positive Gi, or in other words, a positive slope of the V-Q curve. When the bus approaches voltage instability, Gi should decrease to be close to zero. Thus, real-time calculation of this sensitivity index on each bus using the local measurements on the voltage magnitude and reactive power injection can provide an indicator of voltage stability. Thus, real-time applications of this sensitivity index Gi for voltage stability monitoring needs a credible estimate on the index (mainly its sign) over a window of measurements against measurement noises or data quality issues [15]. 20.2.4  Measurement-Based Voltage Stability Assessment for a Load Area

Tie line

Thevenin Equivalent-Based Voltage Stability Margin.  This TE-based approach can also be extended to a load pocket area fed by N tie lines from the external system through buses at the boundary of the load area [16, 17], as illustrated in Fig. 20-25. Assume that the N tie lines have currents I1 to IN and the boundary buses they connect have voltages V1 to VN, whose synchronized phasor measurements can be obtained. Let a load pocket area be defined as follows:

Tie line

Tie line

Load area Tie line Tie line

FIGURE 20-25  Load area. N

S = P + jQ =

∑V I∗ i i

i =1

N

I=

∑ I∗ i



(20-48)

i =1

V = S /I ∗ Z L = V /I Then the TE-based approach can still apply to the estimation of Thevenin voltage and impedance for this load area and then calculation of voltage stability margin indices Pmargin and Vmargin. Note: Those margin indices are regarding an average voltage V and the total active power P as defined in Eq. (20-48) rather than any specific bus or tie line. To summarize, the TE-based VSA method for a load area (a single load bus is a special case with N = 1) conducts the following step: 1. For a sliding time window, collect synchronized measurements on voltage and current waveforms at all boundary buses of the load area. 2. Calculate the voltage phasor V and current phasor I by Eq. (20-48), which are simply the measurements if N = 1. 3. Estimate the external system’s Thevenin parameters E and ZT. 4. Calculate the voltage stability limits and margin indices by Eqs. (20-36) to (20-39). N + 1 Buses Equivalent-Based Voltage Stability Margin.  When applied to a load area fed by N tie lines, the TE-based VSA method merges all tie lines and boundary buses as done in Eq. (20-48) to estimate the voltage stability margin for the entire boundary. However, voltage instability often initiates from one boundary bus or tie line, so it is important to estimate the voltage stability margin

20_Santoso_Sec20_p1239-1328.indd 1277

23/11/17 4:43 PM

1278        SECTION TWENTY

for each individual boundary bus and tie line. Thus, instead of the TE, a more general N + 1 buses equivalent can be used [18]. zT1 zTN As shown in Fig. 20-26, the N + 1 buses m e st y equivalent system reduces the network s z zT3 l na S1 T2 SN details both inside and outside of the load ter r x te E area. Assume that the external system has en z1N d c z11 a strong generation coherency and angular z13 z2N zNN Lo stability. Thus, it is represented by a single S3 z12 S2 voltage phasor E like the TE. The source is connected by N branches with impedances z23 zT1 to zTN (or admittances yT1 to yTN) repz22 z33 resenting N tie lines to N boundary buses, respectively. Each boundary bus is monitored and connects an equivalent load with FIGURE 20-26  N + 1 buses equivalent. impedance zii or admittance yii modeling the portion of load seen from that bus. Connection between any two boundary buses i and j is modeled by impedance zij or admittance yij. The power transfer limit of each tie line is a function of N ( N − 1)/2 + 2 N + 1 complex parameters about that equivalent system including: E

1. Voltage phasor E 2. N tie-line impedances zTi’s

3. N ( N − 1)/2 transfer impedances zij’s 4. N load impedances zii’s Let Si = Pi + jQi and Ii denote the complex power and current coming to boundary bus i and let Vi denote the bus voltage phasor. Using synchronized measurements on Ii and Vi, all parameters of the N + 1 buses equivalent including external system parameters E and zTi, and load area parameters zii and zij can be identified over a sliding time window by, example for, the LS method or other optimization approaches [18]. The admittance matrix of the load area of the equivalent system is given in Eq. (20-49) Y  Y1i  Y1N    11     Yii YiN  Y = Yi1       Y  YNi  YNN    N1 where N

Yij = Y ji = − yij and Yii = ∑ yij j =1

(20-49)

Define YT = [ yT 1 yT 2  yTN ]T

(20-50)

V = [V1 V2  VN ]T

(20-51)

20_Santoso_Sec20_p1239-1328.indd 1278

23/11/17 4:43 PM

POWER SYSTEM STABILITY AND CONTROL        1279 

The vector I of injected currents satisfies both equations in Eq. (20-52)

I = VY I = E YT − diag( YT )V



(20-52)

Then, solve both V and I:

V = E[( Y + diag( YT )]−1 YT I = E[( Y + diag( YT )]−1 YT Y



(20-53)

The active powers transferred on tie lines are calculated by P = [P1 P2  PN ]T = Re(diag(I∗ ) × V )

(20-54)

which only explicitly depends on E, Y, and YT, parameters of the equivalent. If there is no contingency on either the external system or load area, E, yTi, and yij (i ≠ j) are constant. Also, if the power factors of all loads are assumed to be constant, over a sliding time window, the active power on each tie line is a function of magnitudes of all load impedances, which is, Pi = Pi (| y11 |,,| y NN |). Its maximum Pmax,i,j with respect to the change of the load admittance at bus j is reached if

∂ Pi (| y11 |,,| y NN |) = 0   i, j = 1 ~ N (20-55) ∂ | y jj |

Pmax,i,j has a long, complex but explicit expression about E, yTi, and yij. The expression can be obtained by solving a quadratic equation [18]. Pmax,i,j represents the voltage stability limit in terms of the active power on the ith tie line if only the load at bus j varies, which can be calculated by plugging the values of E, yTi, and yij. For each tie line, there are N such voltage stability limits respectively with respect to the changes of loads at N buses. Figures 20-27 and 20-28 illustrate the results from this N + 1 buses equivalent based method with N = 3 for two cases, which are strong connection (Fig. 20-27) and weak connection (Fig. 20-28) between boundary buses. Each tie line i has three limits, Pmax,i,1, Pmax,i,2, and Pmax,i,3, respectively, corresponding to ∂Pi/∂|y11| = 0, ∂Pi/∂|y22| = 0, and ∂Pi/∂|y33| = 0. If only the magnitude of z33 decreases, Pmax,i,3 will be the most reliable power transfer limit among the three. If z12, z13, and z23 are close to zero (indicating strong connection between boundary buses), as shown in Fig. 20-27, all limits as well as the total limit PS,max(TE) from the TE-based method are met at the same time, and the P-V curves of three boundary buses are very close. However, if z12, z13, and z23 have large magnitudes, as shown in Fig. 20-28, since the three P-V curves are very different, the power transfer limits at buses 1, 2, and 3 are met at different times, which are all different from the time when PΣMax(TE) is met, indicating the inaccuracy of the TE-based method for this case. The N + 1 buses equivalent based VSA method for a load area conducts the following steps: 1. For a sliding time window, collect synchronized measurements on voltage and current waveforms at N boundary buses of the load area. 2. Estimate the parameters of the N + 1 buses equivalent including E, zEi’s, zii’s, and zij’s from the measurements. 3. For each tie line i, calculate the transfer limits Pmax,i,1, … Pmax,i,N which give probable limits of the tie line depending on how the actual load increases. For example, if load in this area is found mainly increasing near bus j, Pmax,i,j will be the most accurate estimation on the transfer limit.

20_Santoso_Sec20_p1239-1328.indd 1279

23/11/17 4:44 PM

1280        SECTION TWENTY

P1 Pmax,1,1 Pmax,1,2 Pmax,1,3 P2 Pmax,2,1 Pmax,2,2 Pmax,2,3 P3 Pmax,3,1 Pmax,3,2 Pmax,3,3 P∑ P∑ max(TE) P∑ max(N+1)

Active power transfer & limits (× 100MW)

6

5

4

3

2

1 100

0

200

300

400 Time (s) (a)

500

600

700

800

1 Bus 1 PV curve Bus 2 PV curve Voltage magnitude of boundary bus (pu)

0.9

Bus 3 PV curve

0.8

0.7

0.6

0.5

0.4 0.4

0.6 0.8 1 1.2 1.4 1.6 1.8 Active power transfer from external system to boundary bus (pu) (b)

2

FIGURE 20-27  3 + 1 buses system (z12, z13, and z23 are close to zero). (a) Power transfer limits; (b) P-V curves.

20_Santoso_Sec20_p1239-1328.indd 1280

23/11/17 4:44 PM

POWER SYSTEM STABILITY AND CONTROL        1281 

P1 Pmax,1,1 Pmax,1,2 Pmax,1,3 P2 Pmax,2,1 Pmax,2,2 Pmax,2,3 P3 Pmax,3,1 Pmax,3,2 Pmax,3,3 P∑ P∑ max(TE) P∑ max(N+1)

Active power transfer & limits (× 100MW)

6

5

4

3

2

1 0

100

200

300

400 Time (s) (a)

500

600

700

800

1 Bus 1 PV curve

Voltage magnitude of boundary bus (pu)

0.9

Bus 2 PV curve Bus 3 PV curve

0.8

0.7

0.6

0.5

0.4

0.3 0.4

0.6 0.8 1 1.2 1.4 1.6 1.8 2 Active power transfer from external system to boundary bus (pu) (b)

2.2

FIGURE 20-28  3 + 1 buses system (z12, z13, and z23 have large magnitudes). (a) Power transfer limits; (b) P-V curves.

20_Santoso_Sec20_p1239-1328.indd 1281

23/11/17 4:44 PM

1282        SECTION TWENTY

20.2.5 Bibliography 1. P. Kundur, J. Paserba, V. Ajjarapu, G. Andersson, A. Bose, C. Canizares, and N. Hatziargyriou, et al., (IEEE = CIGRE Joint Task Force on Stability Terms and Definitions), “Definition and Classification of Power System Stability,” IEEE Trans. Power Systems, Aug. 2004. 2. I. Dobson and L. Lu, “Voltage Collapse Precipitated by the Immediate Change in Stability When Generator Reactive-Power Limits Are Encountered,” IEEE Trans. Circuits Syst., pt. 1, vol. 39, pp. 762–766, Sep. 1992. 3. F. Gubina and B. Strmcnik, “Voltage Collapse Proximity Index Determination Using Voltage Phasor Approach,” IEEE Trans. Power Syst., vol. 10, pp. 788–793, May 1995. 4. K. Vu, M. Begovic, D. Novosel, and M. M. Saha, “Use of Local Measurements to Estimate Voltage-stability Margin,” IEEE Transactions on Power Systems, vol. 14, no. 3, pp. 1029–1035, Aug. 1999. 5. V. Ajjarapu and C. Christy, “The Continuation Power Flow: A Tool for Steady State Voltage Stability Analysis,” IEEE Transactions on Power Systems, vol. 7, no. 1, pp. 416–423, Feb. 1992. 6. B. Gao, G. K. Morison, and P. Kundur, “Voltage Stability Evaluation Using Modal Analysis,” IEEE Transactions on Power Systems, vol. 7, no. 4, pp. 1529–1542, Nov. 1992. 7. W. W. Hager, Applied Numerical Algebra, Prentice Hall Inc., New Jersey, 1998. 8. P. Löf, T. Smed, G. Andersson, and D. Hill, “Fast Calculation of a Voltage Stability Index,” IEEE Transactions on Power Systems, vol. 7, no. 1, pp. 54–64, Feb. 1992. 9. C. Cañizares (ed.), Voltage Stability Assessment: Concepts, Practices, and Tools, Special publication of the IEEE Power System Stability Subcommittee, 2002. ISBN 0 780 378 695. 10. NERC/WECC Planning Standards, WECC, Apr. 2003. 11. Borka Milosevic and Miroslav Begovic, “Voltage-Stability Protection and Control Using a Wide-Area Network of Phasor Measurements,” IEEE Transactions on Power Systems, vol. 18, No. 1, pp. 121­–127, Feb. 2003. 12. P. Zhang, L. Min, and N. Zhang, “Voltage Instability Load Shedding,” EPRI Report No. 1012491, 2006. 13. K. Sun, F. Hu, and N. Bhatt, “A New Approach for Real-Time Voltage Stability Monitoring Using PMUs,” IEEE PES Innovative Smart Grid Technologies Asia (ISGT Asia) Conference, Kuala Lumpur, Malaysia, May 20–23, 2014. 14. V. Venkatasubramanian, X. Liu, G. Liu, Q. Zhang, and M. Sherwood, “Overview of Wide-Area Stability Monitoring Algorithms in Power Systems Using Synchrophasors,” Proc. IEEE Amer. Control Conf., San Francisco, CA, pp. 4172–4176, Jun. 2011. 15. X. Liu, X. Zhang, and V. Venkatasubramanian, “Distributed Voltage Security Monitoring in Large Power Systems Using Synchrophasors,” IEEE Transactions on Smart Grid, vol. 7, No. 2, pp. 982–991, Mar. 2016. 16. P. Zhang, L. Min, and J. Chen, “Measurement-Based Voltage Stability Monitoring and Control,” U.S. Patent 8,126,667, 2012. 17. K. Sun, P. Zhang, and L. Min, “Measurement-Based Voltage Stability Monitoring and Control for Load Centers,” EPRI Report No. 1017798, 2009. 18. F. Hu, K. Sun, A. Del Rosso, E. Farantatos, and N. Bhatt, “Measurement-Based Real-Time Voltage Stability Monitoring for Load Areas,” IEEE Transactions on Power Systems, vol. 31, No. 4, pp. 3189–3201, Jul. 2016.

20.3  TRANSIENT STABILITY ASSESSMENT AND CONTROL BY DANIEL RUIZ-VEGA 20.3.1 Introduction Transient stability has always been, and remains, a major concern in power systems. From the initial stages of the electric power industry, where synchronous machines started being operated in parallel, up to late 1950s, most of the stability problems encountered in planning and operating stages were mainly related to transient instabilities.. After the interconnection of electric utilities and the resulting formation of large widespread power systems, new forms of instability like small signal

20_Santoso_Sec20_p1239-1328.indd 1282

23/11/17 4:44 PM

POWER SYSTEM STABILITY AND CONTROL        1283 

angle instabilities, frequency instabilities and, more recently, voltage instabilities, started being also considered as concerns in power systems planning and operation [1]. Being historically the dominant form of instability in most power systems, transient stability is one of the most studied dynamic problems. Transient stability assessment methods evolved along the years in the same way the complexity and size electric power systems did, according to the stability theory of dynamic systems and the developments of the art of computation. However, as was pointed out as early as in 1970, up to now “no matter how fast computers grew in size and speed, they were never big enough to meet the demands imposed by stability studies” [2]. This statement is still true today, especially for online transient stability assessment and control. The present trend in power systems is the analysis of huge interconnecting systems that current simulation programs and computer facilities can hardly manage. As an example, some authors claim that rather than 800 individual electric utilities in the United States today, there will be only 50 utilities (others say 4) as a result from deregulation [3, 4]. Analyzing networks comprising 50,000 or more nodes is now a current need for transient stability assessment in existing large interconnected systems in United States and Europe [5]. Even more problematic than size and speed requirements for transient stability assessment, is the design of methods able to extract the most important features of the dynamic phenomena, and to provide suitable control countermeasures. The next subsections present the basics of the transient stability phenomena, and describe some of the different methods that have been developed to analyze them, culminating with the single machine equivalent method, which provides the dynamic information and the sensitivities required for designing and implementing online and real-time transient security assessment and control techniques, that are suitable to be applied in large scale power systems. Definitions.  Any change in the power system operating variables or parameters can be considered as a disturbance, in the sense that all of them cause a power imbalance. Some disturbances, like the natural change in load consumption, or programmed outages of some power system components for maintenance purposes, can be considered as “normal, or predictable” disturbances. Besides these normal changes, power systems are usually subjected to sudden unpredictable changes in their operating conditions and structure, that are caused by major system component failures, human errors, natural calamities and weather conditions (like lightning, strikes).a The consequences of a disturbance can still roughly be considered as mismatches between system generation and load, but are much severer than the ones produced by normal changes. According to these ideas, the following definition is going to be considered in this document: “A disturbance in a power system is a sudden change or a sequence of changes in one or more of the parameters of the system, or in one or more operating quantities” [6]. In power systems, nearly all electric power is produced by synchronous machines. By its very principle, the parallel operation of these machines requires them to operate in synchronism, that is, in a condition in which the average electrical speed of each machine (product of its rotor angular velocity and its number of pole pairs) equals the angular frequency of the ac network to which they are connected. Transient stability of a power system is its ability to maintain synchronism when subjected to a large disturbance. This implies that it must always be analyzed using a nonlinear model [6, 7]. Power System Stability Analysis.  In order to describe the basics of transient stability it is very useful to use a simplified model of the power system. The simplest power system dynamic representation is known as the “classical model,” which is adequate to analyze first swing stability. Modeling considerations of the classical model are [8–10]: •  Machines are represented by an electromagnetic force E ′ = E ′∠δ of constant magnitude, where δ is the rotor angle position, behind the direct axis transient reactance X’d. •  Loads are represented by a constant impedance model. •  The mechanical power Pm is constant and damping is neglected. a

A very detailed description of the different causes of possible power system disturbances is given in [4].

20_Santoso_Sec20_p1239-1328.indd 1283

23/11/17 4:44 PM

1284        SECTION TWENTY

•  Generator dynamics are described by the electromechanical balance equation (also known as “swing equation”), w is the rotor angular speed, M is the inertia coefficient, Pe is the electrical power and Pa is the accelerating power: M

d2 d (δ ) = M (ω ) = Pm − Pe = Pa dt 2 dt

(20-56)

In what follows, we illustrate transient stability concepts using a simplified one-machine infinite bus system, (shown in Fig. 20-29),which represents a system in which a single machine is supplying power to a very large external system, modeled by an “infinite” bus (Fig. 20-29a).b Because of the relative size of the system to which the machine is connected, dynamics of the machine will not cause virtually any change in voltage and frequency of the infinite bus, represented, in this way, by a constant magnitude, phase and frequency voltage source, or by a large synchronous machine having infinite inertia and a zero transient reactance [8, 10]. The equivalent system of the classical model is depicted in Fig. 20-29b, where the equivalent reactance Xeq is composed by a combination of all the reactances between the infinite bus, and the internal bus of the machine behind the transient reactance. Infinite bus voltage angle is taken as the system angle reference, so Vinfbus = VinfBus ∠0. Vt

XTL1

Vinf Bus E’

XTR

Xeq

Vinf Bus

XTL2 Infinite Bus Infinite Bus (a)

(b)

FIGURE 20-29  One machine-infinite bus system. (a) One machine-infinite bus system; (b) equivalent system.

Taking into consideration the equivalent one-machine infinite bus system of (Fig. 20-29b), the electrical power of the synchronous generator can be represented by equation Eq. (20-57) [8]: Pe =

E ′VinfBus X eq

sin(δ )

(20-57)

According to the IEEE [7], stability analysis is only valid for one specific operating condition under a given contingency. In this work the term “contingency” is used to denote a disturbance, or a sequence of disturbances, and the corresponding actions performed by the protective devices (protective relays and special discrete controls), in order to correct the disturbance and its effects, and to protect the elements of the power system from being damaged. The sequence of a stability study can be described as follows: 1. The system is initially operating in a predisturbance equilibrium condition. This operating point is usually in steady state, that is, “an operating condition of a power system in which all of the operating quantities that characterize it can be considered to be constant for the purpose of analysis” [6]. 2. Next, the specific preselected contingency of interest is applied, and the system enters a faulted or transient state. Usually the contingency is characterized by a specific fault scenario, and its clearing

b In [2] an additional simplification of the model is that all generators in the same power plant are represented as a single machine. This restriction had a sense in those times due to the very low computing power digital computers had. In modern analyses, this is not required anymore.

20_Santoso_Sec20_p1239-1328.indd 1284

23/11/17 4:44 PM

POWER SYSTEM STABILITY AND CONTROL        1285 

mechanism (e.g., short circuit somewhere in the transmission network, followed by a line disconnection after a pre specified duration of the event—“fault clearing time”) [7]. 3. After the disturbance is eliminated, the system dynamics is studied in order to determine whether the power system is able to reach a new, acceptable postdisturbance equilibrium condition, the steady postdisturbance operating state, or it becomes unstable. When the system experiences all the operating conditions described above (prefault, during-fault or disturbed, and postdisturbance states), the effect of the different changes in the system is represented in the one machine-infinite bus system of Fig. 20-29b, by a change in the value of the equivalent system reactance Xeq. In this way, the system model has a different representation depending on the given operating state. This can also be roughly seen as a change in the power transmission capacity of the system, as can be seen in Eq. (20-57); in the faulted and postdisturbance states this capacity usually decreases with respect to the one of the initial, predisturbance state. Transient Stability Assessment using the Equal Area Criterion.  The equal area criterion (EAC) is a powerful graphical technique to assess power system transient stability. It provides a clear explanation of transient stability, based on the physics of this phenomenon, which allows understanding its causes, and possible solutions, in terms of the energy variations of the system during the transients. Its origins are not clear, but the first proposals were made in [8, 11, 12]. This method was initially developed to allow studying the behavior of one-machine infinite bus systems, or two-machine systems, represented by the classical model, without numerical integration. Considering the one machine-infinite bus (OMIB) system of Fig. 20-29b, which is governed by the swing equation (Eq. (20-56)), it can be shown that, after solving this equation, we can arrive to the following expression [13]: δ



1 M (ω − ω 0 )2 = Pa dδ 2

∫

(20-58)

δ0

Equation (20-58) describes the EAC. It states that the kinetic energy of the synchronous machine (the left side term of the equation), equals the integral of the machine’s accelerating power Pa during the whole transient period, from an initial steady-state machine angle d0, to a final angle d. To illustrate the EAC, let us consider a case where the power system of Fig. 20-29b is subjected to a three-phase fault at the terminals of the synchronous generator. The system initial steady-state operating point is the intersection of mechanical and electric powers (point 1 in Fig. 20-30). Due to the application of the disturbance (the three phase fault), the electric power transfer falls to zero (point 2) and is smaller than the mechanical power Pm (accelerating power Pa is positive), and the machine accelerates, gaining kinetic energy [see Eq. (20-56)], until fault is cleared at point 3, where the system reaches point 4. Area 1, 2, 3, 4 represents the accelerating area of the system Aacc. When the fault is cleared, the system trajectory continues along the post fault electric power curve Pep. In this region, electrical power Pep is larger than mechanical power Pm and machine decelerates (by dissipating the kinetic energy gained by the machine’s rotor in the accelerating area). The EAC states that the system will be stable, if the decelerating area Adec is at least equal to the accelerating area Aacc. The EAC provides the more accurate and descriptive assessment of the transient stability phenomena, by evaluating the problem in terms of the energy of the system: in order to be stable, the system should be able to dissipate the kinetic energy that the disturbance produced. The kinetic energy gained by the system during the disturbance application and the potential energy available in the system in the postdisturbance state to dissipate the excess of kinetic energy, can be computed accurately by integrating the accelerating area (Aacc) and the decelerating area (Adec) of Fig. 20-30, respectively. In addition to permit a better understanding of the physical reasons of transient stability, the graphical description provided in Fig. 20-30 allows to devise means to control the problem: the system

20_Santoso_Sec20_p1239-1328.indd 1285

23/11/17 4:44 PM

1286        SECTION TWENTY

25 Pe

0

20 Adec 15 P(MW)

Pm 1

4

5

10

Pep

Aacc

5

δ0

δc δm

0

2 0

20

3 40

60

80 100 Angle (deg)

120

140

160

180

FIGURE 20-30  EAC of an infinite bus machine equivalent [14].

becomes unstable because of an excess of kinetic energy, so the control measures for transient instability must aim at correcting the energy imbalance by decreasing the accelerating area and increasing the decelerating area. The control measure must, at least, make both areas be equal. These are the reasons by which, most books in the area of electric power system analysis use the EAC to explain transient stability. However, since its development in the 1930s, this method was relegated to be applied only to very small, academic systems, represented by the classical model. As it is going to be presented in the subsection Nonlinear Aspects of System Oscillations, it was found in mid-1990s that it is possible to apply this method to multi-machine, fully detailed power system models, when combining the EAC with time-domain simulations, giving rise to a new, hybrid transient stability method: SIME [13]. The next subsection describes the transient energy function method, a second direct method that has been proposed to assess transient stability. Transient Stability Assessment Using the Transient Energy Function Method.  The Western technical literature recognizes Magnusson as being the first to use the concept of energy for studying general multi-machine power system transient stability in a pioneering work published in 1947 [15], followed about 10 years later by Aylett [16]. Magnusson and Aylett may therefore be considered as the forerunners of the Lyapunov method application to power system stability. In the 1960s, the research on the application of the Lyapunov method was restarted all around the world, due the appeal of both, the theory as such, and the expected needed practical outcomes (e.g., see [17–19]). From that moment on, more than 50 years of intensive research have been performed in this area, to develop a Lyapunov-based direct method, able to be applied in large-scale realistic power system models. Some of the most important approaches that have been published can be consulted in [20–22, 23–25].

20_Santoso_Sec20_p1239-1328.indd 1286

23/11/17 4:44 PM

POWER SYSTEM STABILITY AND CONTROL        1287 

In this document, the transient energy function (TEF) method developed by Athay et al. [26] is considered to explain the basics of the application of Lyapunov-based methods for transient stability assessment. This version of the TEF method is applied to a simplified equivalent one machine–infinite bus power system of Fig. 20-29, represented by the classical model. The analysis of the method is as follows (Fig. 20-31): •  The assessment of transient stability of the TEF method can be understood more clearly by using a mechanical analog in which the system state is a rolling ball, initially resting at the bottom of the potential energy surface of Fig. 20-31a (the point labeled as “initial operating condition”). •  When the disturbance is applied, the system gains kinetic energy in the transient period, and moves away from its initial condition. In the analogy, the rolling ball starts going up the slope of the potential energy surface (Fig. 20-31b). •  When the disturbance is eliminated, the system starts dissipating into potential energy, the kinetic energy that it gained during the transient period; to avoid instability, it must be able to absorb all the kinetic energy. In the rolling ball analogy, this means that if the kinetic energy that the system gained in the transient period is not enough to climb up to the top of the potential energy surface, the ball would go down, oscillate, and regain a new postdisturbance equilibrium (the system would be stable,

FIGURE 20-31  Transient energy function method applied to a one machine-infinite bus system. (a) Potential energy surface; (b) phase plane representation [27].

20_Santoso_Sec20_p1239-1328.indd 1287

23/11/17 4:44 PM

1288        SECTION TWENTY

because all the kinetic energy of the ball was dissipated). On the contrary, if the kinetic energy that the ball acquired during the transient process, is enough to make the ball reach the top of the potential energy surface, the ball would continue its way out of the surface (the system would be unstable). •  The potential energy surface represents the maximum amount of kinetic energy that the system can absorb in the post disturbance period, without loss of synchronism. It depends on both, the system initial operating condition and the specific contingency of interest. Two main advantages where expected from the direct approach, namely: (1) straightforward computation of transient stability limits, since direct methods reduce the T-D simulations to the sole during-fault period, while avoiding all repetitive runs; (2) suitable definition and computation of margins, which in turn allows sensitivity analysis. But on the other hand, in order to make the method applicable in practice, one should be able to [1]: •  Construct “good” Lyapunov V –functions. •  Assess “good” limit values or, equivalently, good practical stability domain estimates. Both of the above conditions have been shown to be extremely difficult to meet properly. With reference to condition (i), it appeared quite early that the construction of V–functions was only possible with oversimplified (actually unacceptably simplified) system modeling, like the classical model. Among the many interesting attempts to circumvent this difficulty is the “structure preserving modeling” proposed by Bergen and Hill [28]. Another one, which has finally prevailed, led to the use of “pseudo-Lyapunov functions” (the transient energy function) consisting of hybridizing V–functions with T-D methods (see below); credit for this may be given to Athay et al. [26]. As for condition (ii), among the large variety of solutions proposed are the methods of Athay et al., [26], of Kakimoto et al. [29], the acceleration approach [30], the BCU or exit point [31], the PEBS [21], and the IPEBS [32] methods. All these methods aim at identifying the value taken by the Lyapunov function at the boundary of the practical stability domain estimate; but they differ in the way of doing so. Broadly, two different approaches may be distinguished: the one consists of computing xu, the “unstable equilibrium point of concern” (UEP point of Fig. 20-31), and hence the energy limit V(xu) ; the other relies on criteria able to suggest when the system trajectory comes “close enough” to the boundary of the practical stability domain estimate. Nevertheless, however inventive, the various solutions were not able to properly overcome the difficulties met. Indeed, the proposed stability domain estimates were found to provide overly conservative stability assessments, with unpredictably varying degree of conservativeness; besides, from a computational point of view, the involved computations were often quite cumbersome, counterbalancing the computer gains expected of direct methods, and even making them much slower than T-D methods. One very important outcome, of the TEF method developed by Athay et al. [26], is one stability criterion for detecting the moment when the system trajectory has reached the boundary of the stability region, also named as the “potential energy boundary surface” (PEBS in Fig. 20-31b). This point is known as “exit point” in the phase plane. As it is shown in the subsection The Dot Product Method, this stability criterion actually works for systems represented by a detailed model, and was used to develop a hybrid stability method, currently known as the “dot product.” 20.3.2  Transient Stability Assessment Methods for Realistic Power System Models It was shown in the previous subsection that transient stability is a dynamical phenomenon that is better understood when analyzing the power system energy. Both methods presented above, the

20_Santoso_Sec20_p1239-1328.indd 1288

23/11/17 4:44 PM

POWER SYSTEM STABILITY AND CONTROL        1289 

EAC and the TEF method, conduct an energy analysis of the system that provides very valuable information that allows performing a correct stability assessment, and to design some means to control this problem. However, due to different difficulties encountered in its development, the application of both methods was limited to small academic systems (in the case of EAC) or to unacceptably simplified power system models (in the case of the TEF method). As power system grew in size and interconnections, they could no longer be represented by the OMIB system. With power system interconnection, new stability problems emerged and the modeling requirements to represent the system evolved too mathematical representation of generators and their controls rose in detail and complexity, and new methods to assess stability were employed: the time‑domain (T-D) simulation methods. The advent of the digital computer in late 1960s made possible the development of T-D simulators. Along the years, T-D simulators have shown to have a great flexibility in terms of modeling detail, and of the size of the system that they can analyze. Providing that the parameters of the system are close to the ones of the real power system, T-D simulator is the mean to obtain the most accurate estimation of the system dynamic performance nowadays. Today, the T-D simulation method using the system nonlinear model, for the reasons mentioned before, has become an indispensable tool for power system stability analysis. However, T-D methods have advantages and disadvantages. Some of them are described below [13]: Pros of TD Methods •  They provide the most accurate dynamic description of the system behavior in the time domain, if parameters are precise enough. •  They can study a power system any degree of modeling detail in system components and contingencies. Cons of TD Methods •  They do not provide tools to identify and discard harmless disturbances from the study. •  They are unable to provide sensitivity variables and stability margins. •  They are helpless in the design of control actions to improve stability. T-D methods are definitely insufficient, yet indispensable to in-depth transient stability investigations [33]: indispensable, since they are very accurate and effective in handling different models; insufficient, since they are unable to meet the current needs of online transient stability assessment, not to mention control, which is certainly their major weakness (“Achilles’ heel”). The inability of T-D methods to meet such needs justified the development of nonconventional methods, aiming at enhancing and complementing T-D program: the hybrid methods [1]. The most successful hybrid transient stability methods combine T-D simulations with direct methods, which analyze the power system energy; in this way, these approaches combine the accuracy and flexibility of T-D simulations with the important information about the power system dynamics that the direct methods provide. In this document, two hybrid direct-time-domain hybrid transient stability assessment methods are described: •  The single machine equivalent (SIME) method, combining the EAC with the T-D method. •  The dot-product method, which applies the exit point instability criterion of the TEF method to the T-D method. These methods are of interest because they do not require any simplification in modeling detail and can assess power system transient stability under any contingency. The Time-Domain Simulation Method.  T-D methods started being popular with the advent of computers because they allow representing system dynamic behavior closer to its real functioning, making possible the use of detailed models of the elements involved in the system (generators,

20_Santoso_Sec20_p1239-1328.indd 1289

23/11/17 4:44 PM

1290        SECTION TWENTY

loads, transmission network elements and some other dynamic devices) and to represent system nonlinearities. T-D methods have two main features [1]: •  Time-domain simulation results are able to accurately predict the dynamic behavior of the system, but it depends on the precision of the parameters employed. •  T-D methods are not capable of providing sensitivity techniques to determine the causes of the stability problem and design adequate control measures. In consequence most of the research efforts are devoted to improve some aspects of the T-D methods. In these methods, the model of a multi-machine system is divided into two sets of equations: x = f ( x, y )

(20-59)

0 = g( x, y )

(20-60)



where x is the vector of state variables of power system dynamic elements and y is the vector of bus voltages. Equation (20-59) is the dynamic differential equations of machines, other dynamic devices and their controls. Equation (20-60) represents the algebraic equations of machine stators, the network, and loads. The sets of Eqs. (20-59) and (20-60) must be coordinately solved. In most modern T-D simulation programs the implicit-simultaneous method is preferred [10]. An implicit numerical integration method (like the trapezoidal rule of integration) is first applied to differential equations [Eq. (20-59)], which become nonlinear algebraic. This new set of algebraic equations is combined with network algebraic equations [Eq. (20-60)] to be solved simultaneously. Investigation about improvements of the T-D method is still performed nowadays. One interesting problem that has recently appeared is the need for performing the online stability assessment of huge power systems, covering large geographical areas, like the UCPTE system in Western Europe, with systems represented by a model with 50,000 or more buses. In all cases a detailed model representation of all the power system components is considered. One recent example of the improvements proposed for the T-D simulations, modifying the Newton-Raphson method and using parallel programming can be consulted in [5]. The SIME Method.  The equivalent system most often considered to study the power system in emergency conditions is a two-machine system comprising two generators with an interconnecting transmission line between them [34]. That system configuration can be achieved by reducing the original multi-machine power system into a one machine-infinite bus (OMIB) equivalent system; this latter is valid since the behavior of a real power system is similar to that of a two-machine system when the system loses synchronism [8]. This fact was known for a long time (almost 80 years) in power system transient stability assessment, but it was considered that the equivalent OMIB could only be properly obtained in two machine systems represented by classical model. One of the most important achievements of SIME is that during its development it was fully demonstrated that the OMIB equivalent could be derived for large-scale multi-machine systems, and considering any modeling level detail in both, system components and contingencies [13]. Foundations of the SIME Method.  SIME is a hybrid method that combines time-domain simulations with the EAC. It is based on the following two principles [35]: •  Proposition 1. However complex, the mechanism of a power system loss of synchronism originates from the irrevocable separation of its machines into two groups. Hence, the multi-machine system transient stability may be inferred from that of an OMIB system properly selected (the critical OMIB). •  Proposition 2. The transient stability of an OMIB may be assessed in terms of its transient stability margin η, defined as the excess of its decelerating over its accelerating energy. SIME combines the benefits of time-domain and direct methods, while avoiding their disadvantages. Using the time-domain simulation method has the advantage of providing the most

20_Santoso_Sec20_p1239-1328.indd 1290

23/11/17 4:44 PM

POWER SYSTEM STABILITY AND CONTROL        1291 

accurate system dynamic response available, while the essential advantage of the equal area criterion application is that it provides margins in order to assess the instability severity. Combination of both methods provides a very important “emergent” advantage: the identification of the machines responsible for system loss of synchronism. SIME’s main information: stability margin and identification of the set of critical machines, is importantly complemented with three very useful simplified representations of the multi machine large scale system dynamic response: the OMIB equivalent representation in the time domain, in the P‑d plane and in the phase plane, which have been used to derive very important assessment and control techniques that could be implemented either online or in real time. Depending upon whether the during transients multi-machine temporal data are furnished by a time-domain program or by real-time measurements, SIME takes on two different forms, namely, the preventive and the emergency SIME. •  The preventive SIME, which analyzes the dynamic response of the system provided by a timedomain program, and aims at assessing “what to do” in order to prevent loss of synchronism, that is, to enable the system to face a priori “harmful” contingencies. It is suitable for implementing a transient stability online security function. •  The emergency SIME, which uses measurements of the power system transients, and aims at assessing in real-time and closed-loop fashion “what to do” in order to stabilize the system after a “harmful” contingency has actually occurred. Overall Formulation of the SIME Method.  SIME concentrates on the postfault configuration of a system after being subjected to a large disturbance that may drive the system to instability. Then, based on the proposition 1 of the method, the two groups of machines (the critical one and the noncritical machines’ group) are identified and replaced by a two-machine system and then by an OMIB; transient stability is assessed by means of the EAC in this latter OMIB. Identification of critical machines is done in the following fashion [13]: •  SIME drives the T-D simulation first in the during-fault and then in the post-fault configuration. •  Immediately after the system enters into a post-fault state, SIME begins sorting the machines in decreasing order of their rotor angles at each time step of the T-D simulation. •  SIME identifies the larger rotor angle deviation (gap) between adjacent machines and two groups are conformed: the critical group (those machines whose rotor angle deviation above the largest gap) and the noncritical group (the rest of the machines). •  These two machine groups are first reduced to a two-machine system, then to a candidate OMIB whose parameters are computed as described below, and the procedure is repeated until the candidate OMIB reaches instability conditions (given by the EAC). Then the OMIB is considered the critical OMIB. The derivation of OMIB time-varying parameters is accomplished as follows [13]: •  To apply EAC, the system must be transformed into a two-machine equivalent system, later they are aggregated into their corresponding center of angle (COA) and replaced by an OMIB. All these changes are made using system variables refreshed by the T‑D program. •  The following formulas correspond to the pattern which decomposes machines into critical (subscript C) and non-critical machines (subscript NC). The expressions to calculate the corresponding OMIB parameters are • COA of the group of critical machines (CMs) and noncritical machines (NMs)

δ C (t ) 

20_Santoso_Sec20_p1239-1328.indd 1291

1 MC

∑ M δ (t )   k k

k∈C

δ NC (t ) =

1 M NC

∑ M δ (t ) j

j

(20-61)

j ∈NC

23/11/17 4:44 PM

1292        SECTION TWENTY

where MC =



∑M

k

;   M NC =

k∈C

∑M

j



(20-62)

j ∈NC

• Rotor angle of the corresponding OMIB

δ (t )  δ C (t ) − δ NC (t )



(20-63)

• Rotor speed of the corresponding OMIB ω (t ) = ω C (t ) − ω NC (t )

(20-64)

where

ω C (t ) =



1 MC

∑ M ω (t );  ω k

k

NC (t ) =

k∈C

1 M NC

∑ M ω (t ) 

(20-65)

  

(20-66)

j

j

j ∈NC

• Mechanical power of the corresponding OMIB  1 Pm (t ) = M   MC

∑P

mk (t ) −

k∈C

1 M NC

∑P

mj (t )

j ∈NC

• Electric power of the corresponding OMIB  1 Pe (t ) = M   MC



∑ P (t ) − M ∑ P (t ) ek

k∈C

1

NC j ∈NC

ej

(20-67)

• Accelerating power of the corresponding OMIB Pa (t ) = Pm (t ) − Pe (t )

(20-68)

• Equivalent OMIB inertia coefficient M=

MC M NC MC + M NC

(20-69)

Transient Stability Assessment.  Transient stability assessment is performed by means of the EAC, described in the subsection Transient Stability Assessment using the EAC. Despite the fact that T-D simulations are very useful methods that can provide a very detailed analysis of the transient stability problem, EAC has demonstrated to be a powerful and unique tool for sensitivity analysis and control issues [13]. EAC states that the stability of a system in faulted conditions may be assessed by means of a stability margin, which is defined as the excess of decelerating area (that represents the maximum potential energy that system can dissipate in post-fault conditions) over the accelerating area (that represents the kinetic energy gained during the fault) of the equivalent OMIB P-δ curve; this margin is written as follows: η = Adec − Aacc

20_Santoso_Sec20_p1239-1328.indd 1292

(20-70)

23/11/17 4:44 PM

POWER SYSTEM STABILITY AND CONTROL        1293 

Expression (20-70) establishes the energy conservation: the energy gained during the fault must be released as potential energy in the post-fault period for the system to be stable, and otherwise the system is unstable [13]. In this context SIME uses EAC to assess transient stability; however, what makes it attractive is that SIME calculates the Pm-δ and the Pe-δ curves using the results of a T‑D program (or real-time measurements depending upon the case) only for the period of time EAC requires to assess stability (that is usually quite short). The computation duration is upper bounded by the time the OMIB takes to reach unstable and return angles δu or δr. Angle δu is met at the unstable equilibrium point of the Pe and Pm curves at which system becomes unstable. Angle δr represents the maximum angular deviation the system reaches without going unstable (see Fig. 20-32 for a graphical example of both angles). In general, for during-fault and post-fault scenarios the stability margin can be expressed as: δ ch

∫

η = − Pa dδ −



δ0

δu

∫

δ ch

δu

∫

Pa dδ = − Pa dδ (20-71) δ0

where δch represents the angle where accelerating power changes sign (from positive to negative). The conditions (criteria) for the system to be declared stable or unstable are described below (As in [13]).

(a)

(b)

FIGURE 20-32  SIME stability and instability conditions and computation of their corresponding stability margins. Simulations performed on the three-machine test system. Application of the EAC to the rotor anglepower curve of the OMIB equivalent. Corresponding OMIB rotor angle and speed curves [35]. (a) Unstable case illustrating transient instability conditions and negative (unstable) margin; (b) stable case illustrating transient stability conditions and positive (stable) margin.

20_Santoso_Sec20_p1239-1328.indd 1293

23/11/17 4:44 PM

1294        SECTION TWENTY

Unstable Conditions. In this case, stability margin is negative, η < 0, what means that the accelerating area is greater than the decelerating area (Adec < Aacc). The Pe curve crosses Pm and Pa passes by zero and continues increasing, then the OMIB losses synchronism. An OMIB reaches the unstable angle at time tu when: 

Pa (tu ) = 0,   Pa (tu ) =

dPa dt

>0

(20-72)

t =t u

where w > 0 for t > t0. The conditions expressed in Eq. (20-72) are used to determine the critical OMIB of the system. Stable Conditions. In this case, the stability margin is positive, η > 0, what means that the decelerating area is greater than the accelerating area (Adec > Aacc). System kinetic energy is less than the potential energy and Pe curve stops at δ = δr before crossing Pm then the rotor angle starts decreasing. An OMIB is stable when the return angle δr is reached at tr: ω (tr ) = 0, 

with Pa (tr ) < 0

(20-73)

Stability Margins.  The unstable margin is written as follows: 1 ηu = − Mω u2 2

(20-74)

Computation of this margin is simple and closed, and avoids accelerating and decelerating areas calculation by numerical integration. The stable margin is defined as follows: δu

ηs =

∫ P dδ a

(20-75)

δr

The stable margin can only be approximated because δu and Pe(δ) (δu > δ > δr) cannot be computed in a direct way, since the P-δ curve returns at δ = δr, before reaching them. To calculate this margin we can only use an approximation. Figure 20-32 schematically shows stability margins computation from simulations performed in the IEEE 9-bus, three-machine test system [9]. In this work, the approximation of stability margin was performed by means of the least squares technique. The Dot Product Method.  A widely used heuristic criterion for detecting system loss of synchronism using T-D simulations, consists of verifying the evolution in time of rotor angle difference between extreme machines (the most advanced and the most delayed ones), measured with respect to an established referencec. If this angle difference is greater than a given maximal (threshold) value (say, 360 electrical degrees), the system is declared unstable. However, the heuristic criterion has the disadvantage of being very subjective; for example, the maximum angle separation values are arbitrarily chosen, and their practical values can be different for different systems [1]. To overcome this disadvantage of the heuristic stability criteria, the dot product method was developed as an objective stability/instability criterion to be used in the T‑D simulations. The dot product method was first proposed in [36], and is a hybrid method, because it applies the transient energy function instability criterion that detects the moment when the post-fault

c Rotor angle is the important factor because appreciable increase in machine speeds does not necessarily imply that the synchronism is lost [8]. However, rotor speed variations are sometimes taken into account, generally in combination with rotor angle variations. The choice of the heuristic criterion depends strongly on the power system modeling; the choice of the threshold values (stability/instability boundary) depends upon the very physical system.

20_Santoso_Sec20_p1239-1328.indd 1294

23/11/17 4:44 PM

POWER SYSTEM STABILITY AND CONTROL        1295 

system trajectory crosses the PEBS (the exit point), to assess instability of a T-D simulation (see Fig. 20-32) [37–39]. The dot product instability criterion DOT 1 is objective, since it does not depend on any arbitrary or system-dependent parameter, and can be defined as DOT1 = Fk ⋅ (Θ k − Θ pst ) =

∑

ng i =1

fi (θi − θ psti )

(20-76)

where all the following variables, are referred to the system center of inertia (COI): •  Fk is the vector of accelerating powers of all the synchronous generators of the system, at the kth time-step of the T-D simulation. •  Qk is the vector of load angles of all the synchronous generators of the system, at the kth time-step of the T-D simulation. •  Qpst is the constant vector of load angles of all the synchronous generators of the system at the postdisturbance stable equilibrium point. •  ng is the number of synchronous machines in the system. The reason behind the name of the present method can be readily understood, by observing Eq. (20-76): it consists of applying, at each time step of the T-D simulation in the postdisturbance state, a dot product of two vectors of generator variables, to compute DOT1. At the moment DOT1 changes sign, instability is detected; if DOT1 sign remains constant, the system is stable. This makes the method implementation very easy and straightforward. In addition, the accelerating power fi, and the rotor load angle di, of the synchronous generator “i” of the system, can be determined as fi = Pmi − Pei −

Mi

PCOI

MT

(20-77)

where Pmi and Pei are the mechanical and electrical power of machine “i.” Mi is the inertia coefficient of machine “i,” while MT is the system equivalent inertia coefficient; they are defined as Mi =

2 Hi ,  MT = ω0

∑

ng i =1

Mi

(20-78)

In Eq. (20-78), Hi is the per unit inertia constant of generator “i,” and w0 is the base angular synchronous speed of the system. The accelerating power of the COI, Pcoi, is computed using the individual machine accelerating powers Pa as PCOI =

∑

ng i =1

Pai

(20-79)

The load angles of all the synchronous generators of the system, at the kth time-step of the T-D simulation and at the stable equilibrium point (denoted by subscript psti), referred to the COI are θi = δ i − δ COI   θ psti = δ psti − δ COI

(20-80)

where is di the rotor load angle of machine “i” of the system and the system angular reference dCOI is computed as δ COI =

20_Santoso_Sec20_p1239-1328.indd 1295

1 MT

ng

∑M δ i

i



(20-81)

i =1

23/11/17 4:44 PM

1296        SECTION TWENTY

In [38] a stability criterion DOT2, was proposed for the dot product method, to detect first swing stable simulations. This criterion is defined as follows: DOT2 = Ω k ⋅ (Θ k − Θ pst ) =

∑

ng i =1

ω i (θi − θ psti )

(20-82)

where all the following variables, are referred to the system COI: •  Wk is the vector of rotor angular speeds of all the synchronous generators of the system, at the kth time-step of the T-D simulation. •  Qk, Qpst, and ng are the same variables used in Eq. (20-76) described above. wi is the rotor angular speed of machine “i,” referred to wCOI, the speed of the COI, which are computed as ω i = ω Ai − ω COI

ω COI =

1 M



(20-83)

n

∑M ω i

Ai



(20-84)

i =1

For practical reasons, when implementing the stability criteria of Eqs. (20-71) and (20-82), it is recommended in [38] that the vector of initial, pre-fault steady state angles Q0 should be used; instead the post fault equilibrium angles Qpst. Using the dot products DOT1 and DOT2 presented above [Eqs. (20-71) and (20-72), respectively], two versions of the dot product method can be implemented: •  A first-swing dot product method, using both, DOT1 and DOT2 simultaneously. •  A multi-swing dot product method using DOT1 only. The first-swing dot product method could be used as an early termination criterion of T-D simulations, limiting the simulation time to the one required for detecting the instability or the stability conditions right after the first-swing of the transient conditions [38]. This early termination criterion of T-D simulations helps saving computational resources and simulation time, and is very useful in the analysis of power systems that do not have poorly damped oscillation problems. Stability assessment is performed as follows: after the fault is cleared, both dot products, DOT1 and DOT2 are computed at each integration time step of the simulation. The values of these dot products at two successive time steps (the current and the previous one) are compared. If DOT1 (which is usually negative at the beginning of the simulation [26]) changes sign before DOT2, the simulation is classified as unstable, because the post-fault system trajectory has crossed the PEBS; otherwise, if DOT2 changes sign first, the simulation is declared as first-swing stable [38]. The multi-swing dot product method is easily implemented by using DOT1 criterion only: if it changes sign during the simulation, the system is declared to be unstable; if the T-D program reaches its maximum integration time without meeting DOT1 conditions, is classified as multi-swing stable. 20.3.3  Transient Stability Control Introduction.  Power system operating states can be classified into five main types [40], that must be born in mind to make an adequate design of control schemes. Figure 20-33 shows a Dy Liacco’s diagram or transition states diagram, which shows the operating states and their interactions. Equality restrictions (E) in Fig. 20-33 are related to maintaining the balance between system load and generation. Inequality restrictions (I) represent the fact that specific variables (like line power

20_Santoso_Sec20_p1239-1328.indd 1296

23/11/17 4:44 PM

POWER SYSTEM STABILITY AND CONTROL        1297 

On-line security assesment and control E, I

Normal

Economic optimization of the power system state,system coordination

Security margin reduction or augment of the probability of a disturbance

Preventive control action

Restorative control action Restorative control action

E, I

Alert

Restorative

Emergency control action

Emergency control action

E, I

In Extremis

System not intact

E, I

Insecure

Foreseen or unforeseen disturbances

E, I

System separation and/or load loss

Secure

Emergency

A-Secure

System intact

E: Equality constraints, I: Inequality constraints, -: Negation FIGURE 20-33  Dy Liacco’s diagram (adapted from [40]).

and bus voltages) must not exceed or equal their limit values, which represent the equipment physical limits [40]. In the normal operating state, all the variables must be within their own limits, which means that all the restrictions are satisfied and the generation is adequate to satisfy the total system load [10, 40]. In this operating state reserve margins must be large enough to maintain an adequate security level respect to the strains, so that the system has to be able to stand the occurrence of a disturbance without violating any restrictions. If the security level is diminished or the probability of a disturbance augments, then the system enters into an alert operating state, in spite of the fact that in this state all the restrictions are satisfied and, within specific margins, the reserve margin would be such that a disturbance would result in a violation of the equality or inequality restrictions. In these conditions, preventive control actions must be applied to restore the security level of the system to the normal state. If the fault actually occurs, the system enters into an emergency operating state. Here inequality restrictions are violated. At this point, the system would still remain intact only if emergency control actions are performed; otherwise the system enters into an in extremis operating state. In this state both, equality and inequality restrictions are violated and the system cannot hold on intact, what would result in the loss of parts of the system (brownouts), unless more drastic emergency control actions (“heroic measures”) are carried out to save as many parts of the system as possible, from the total collapse (blackout).

20_Santoso_Sec20_p1239-1328.indd 1297

23/11/17 4:44 PM

1298        SECTION TWENTY

When the collapse has concluded, the system enters into a restorative state. In this state, control actions are performed to reconnect the system, and pick up load again. From the restorative state the system could enter into a normal or alert operating state depending on the circumstances. Table 20-4 displays the control actions that are considered adequate to be applied in each of the operating states. TABLE 20-4  Control Actions That Are Suitable for Different Operating States (adapted from [40]) Operating state

Control action

Alert

Economic dispatch or security redispatch, network reconfiguration, voltage reduction, etc. The purpose is to restore the reserve margins of the system. Emergency Immediate control measures to eliminate the equipment overloaded like: fast fault-clearing (automatic), fast valving (automatic), dynamic braking (automatic), modulation of the excitation system (automatic), capacitors switching (manual), HVDC lines modulation, load modulation, generation tripping (automatic), and all measures for the alert operating state. In extremis Heroic actions to avoid the system’s breakthrough: load shedding (manual), controlled islanding of some areas of the system and all measures mentioned for the alert and emergency operating state. Restorative Corrective control actions to restore the optimal functioning of the system, such actions are: the units restarting, load restoration, resynchronizing the isolated areas of the system, etc.

Control systems currently used can be classified into different ways, depending on various factors such as [1]: •  The operating state of the power system. •  The type of control system (open-loop or closed-loop). •  The geographic area covered by the control system (distributed or centralized). Depending on the operating state of the system, controls can be classified into •  Preventive controls (online controls) •  Corrective controls (real-time or emergency controls) Preventive controls are applicable to the system when the operating state is classified as normal or alert. When the system is faced to a possible contingency, vulnerability of the system must be determined in order to design and apply a control action before the occurrence of the disturbance and, in consequence, to enlarge the security level of the system. In the normal operating state, the control systems commonly employed are those with the main objective of improving the economic efficiency of the system. Preventive control actions in the alert state are mainly performed to increase the system security level. They include security constrained redispatch and online adjustment of system protection schemes. In order to improve feasibility and acceptation of these control actions, very advanced online dynamic security assessment and control methods have proposed to include economic criteria in the design of these controls. In this way, methods including stability constraints in the optimal power flow problem have been proposed for both, transient stability security redispatch and updating of SPS settings [41, 42]. Corrective or emergency controls act when the contingency has actually occurred. There are two basic schemes of emergency control [43]: •  Response-based (or measurement-based) emergency controls •  Event-based emergency controls

20_Santoso_Sec20_p1239-1328.indd 1298

23/11/17 4:44 PM

POWER SYSTEM STABILITY AND CONTROL        1299 

Response-based emergency controls are based on measured electric variables (such as voltage, frequency, etc.) and initiate their protective actions when the contingency has caused that the measured value hits the trigger level of the corresponding variable [43]. These emergency controls are used to adjust the control action magnitude in accordance to the contingency severity. Event-based controls are designed to operate upon the recognition of a particular combination of events (like the loss of several lines in a substation). These controls act automatically, applying a previously determined fixed control action, when the occurrence of the event has been detected. The event-based emergency control is faster than the measurement- based control since it does not have to wait for the system response to a specific event [43]. However, these kinds of controls must be designed for all relevant events, while a response-based control operates even for events for which they were not planned. Applying transient stability controls appropriately, requires the use of a dynamic security assessment and control function that could be online (for preventive controls) or in real time (for corrective controls). The structure of both types of security functions is described below. Transient Stability Security Assessment and Control Functions.  After the 1965 Northeast system blackout in the United States, the concept of security started shifting from that of system robustness designed at the planning stage, to its present sense of risk aversion in the operating stage (firstly known as “adaptive reliability” [44]). Now, power system security is also defined in the system operation framework as “an instantaneous, time-varying condition” reflecting the robustness of the system relative to imminent disturbances [45]. Security analysis should therefore be performed in both, planning and operating environments, with different objectives and requirements. For the planner, the term “security” refers to those aspects of reliability analysis that deal with the ability of the system, as it is expected to be constituted at some future point in time, to withstand unexpected losses of certain system components. What is overlooked in this approach is that even the most reliable systems will inevitably experience periods of severe insecurity from the operator perspective. This new view of system security (starting after the 1965 blackout) required implementing new strategies and institutions for monitoring, operating and controlling power system online. Some of the most important technical achievements coming from this new vision are the implementation of hierarchical power system control techniques, discrete emergency controls and the creation of a new facility, the control center. The Control Center Energy Management System.  In the initial stage of control centers’ development, the dispatcher office already had a digital SCADA (for supervisory control and data acquisition) system that collected data, and presented it in a graphical form on a computer monitor or a mimic board. That system also allowed the operator to perform remote control actions on the power system by entering commands or by pushing on correspondingly labeled buttons on the monitor [46]. The main difference between the new control center installed sometime after the 1965 Northeast system blackout and the former dispatcher office in a large power plant is the addition of online security functions, which require the use of an energy management system (EMS). The EMS is a computer system that provides basic support services and a set of applications for performing the operation and control of a power system in a secure and economic fashion. A schematic representation of the EMS software structure is presented in Fig. 20-34. Power system measurements are transmitted via a digital information system to the central data base. The dispatcher training simulator is an EMS function providing real-time power system simulation under routine and emergency conditions that is required for training the operating personnel. Its importance was highlighted by some blackouts in Europe, and after the 1977 New York Blackout [47], in which operator reactions under emergency situations involving slow phenomena, like network elements overloads or long-term voltage instabilities, were not always correct [48]. One very important component of the EMS is the man-machine interface (MMI). It consists of cathode ray tube (CRT) screens, dynamic wall displays, trend recorder, loggers, and alarms. Its function is to present the measurements collected by the SCADA and the results of the analysis performed

20_Santoso_Sec20_p1239-1328.indd 1299

23/11/17 4:44 PM

1300        SECTION TWENTY

RTU Power system RTU

Control actions Measurements

Control actions

SCADA

Filtered measurements

Application programs Database

Control actions

Energy management system

Man-machine interface

Dispatcher training simulator

FIGURE 20-34  Main component functions of a control center EMS (adapted from [1]).

in the application programs, in a way suitable for helping the operator in the decision-making process. EMS application programs can be classified in terms of their functions as [1, 48]: •  Economic functions •  Preprocessing data functions •  Security functions The scope of this document is limited to security functions related to transient stability, which are classified in the area of dynamic security, which can be defined as [1]: Dynamic Security Assessment (DSA) are methodologies for evaluating the stability and quality of the transient processes between the precontingency and postcontingency states. In this case, Dynamic Security Assessment and Control (DSA&C) aims at ensuring that the system will be stable after the contingency occurrence and that the transients caused by such a contingency will be well damped, of small amplitude and with little impact on the quality of service [49, 50].

As mentioned above, power system controls are applied depending on the security level of the power system operating state. For determining this security level, and designing a suitable control action in case it is required, two main types of DSA&C functions have been developed: online security functions for preventive controls and real-time security functions for emergency controls. The structure of both of them is presented in Fig. 20-35, and a description is given below. Online Security Assessment and Control Function.  In online analysis, after obtaining the current operating condition, the operator uses security functions to assess the security level of the system. Security assessment of the current power system state is performed with respect to a set of probable contingencies, chosen by the system operator. Sometimes, the “n − 1” principle is used for setting up the set of contingencies: this principle implies checking that the loss of any of the transmission system elements does not lead to a power system disruptiond [48]. Security assessment responds the question “what if next contingency, out of a set of probable contingencies, takes place?,” before the contingency of interest actually happens. This concept of analyzing the “next contingency set” is a sound operating strategy in which the operator should always check whether a next contingency would cause a problem, especially when the system has undergone one or more equipment outages due to previous disturbances or operating actions [51].

d The “n − 1” principle can also be applied in transient stability assessment, but it considers two contingencies for each element of the transmission network: each one of the contingencies applies a short circuit at a different terminal node of the transmission element.

20_Santoso_Sec20_p1239-1328.indd 1300

23/11/17 4:44 PM

POWER SYSTEM STABILITY AND CONTROL        1301 

Preprocessing

List of contingencies

Power system

Current system operating condition Real time measurements 1*

Contingency filtering Predictive SIME: Predictive TSA

Worst contingencies

2*

Security assessment EMS Security function

Is the state secure?

Yes

No Security enhancement

Control action (a)

No

Normal state

Unstable case (margin 1 ms

1.2 Oscillatory 1.2.1 Low frequency 1.2.2 Medium frequency 1.2.3 High frequency

< 5 kHz 5–500 kHz 0.5–5 MHz

0.3–50 ms 20 ms 5 ms

0–4 ­pu* 0–8 ­pu 0–4 ­pu

2.0 Short duration variations 2.1 Instantaneous 2.1.1 Sag (dip) 2.1.2 Swell

0.5–30 cycle 0.5–30 cycle

0.1–0.9 ­pu 1.1–1.8 ­pu

2.2 Momentary 2.2.1 Interruption 2.2.2 Sag (dip) 2.2.3 Swell

30 cycle–3 s 30 cycle–3 s 30 cycle–3 s

< 0.1 p ­u 0.1–0.9 ­pu 1.1–1.4 ­pu

2.3 Temporary 2.3.1 Interruption 2.3.2 Sag (dip) 2.3.3 Swell

3 s–1 min 3 s–1 min 3 s–1 min

< 0.1 p ­u 0.1–0.9 ­pu 1.1–1.2 ­pu

3.0 Long duration variations 3.1 Interruption, sustained 3.2 Undervoltages 3.3 Overvoltages

> 1 min > 1 min > 1 min

0.0 ­pu 0.8–0.9 ­pu 1.1–1.2 ­pu

4.0 Voltage unbalance

steady state

0.5–2%

5.0 Waveform distortion 5.1 DC offset 5.2 Harmonics 0–100 Hz 5.3 ­Inter­harmonics 0–6 kHz 5.4 Notching 5.5 Noise ­broad­band

steady state steady state steady state steady state steady state

0–0.1% 0–20% 0–2%

6.0 Voltage fluctuations < 25 Hz intermittent 7.0 Power frequency variations < 10 s

0–1% 0.1–7% 0.2–2 ­Pst

*pu = per unit.

Oscillatory ­Transient.  An oscillatory transient is a sudden, n ­ on­power frequency change in the steadystate condition of voltage, current, or both, that includes both positive and negative polarity values. It consists of a voltage or current whose instantaneous value changes polarity rapidly. It is described by its spectral content (predominate frequency), duration, and magnitude. The spectral content subclasses defined in Table 22-2 are high, medium, and low frequency. The frequency ranges for these classifications are chosen to coincide with common types of power system oscillatory transient phenomena. High- and ­medium-­frequency oscillatory transients are transients with a primary frequency component greater than 500 kHz with a typical duration measured in microseconds, and between 5 and 500 kHz with duration measured in the tens of microseconds, respectively. Figure 22-2 illustrates a medium frequency oscillatory transient event due to b ­ ack-­to-­back capacitor ­energization.

22_Santoso_Sec22_p1371-1426.indd 1375

23/11/17 11:18 AM

1376  SECTION TWENTY-TWO

0

20

40

Time mS 60 80

100

120

140

0

Current (kA)

–5

–10

–15

–20

–25 FIGURE 22-1  Lightning stroke current impulsive t­ ransient.

22.2.4 ­Short-­Duration Voltage ­Variations Short-duration voltage variations are caused by fault conditions, the energization of large loads that require high starting currents, or intermittent loose connections in power wiring. Depending on the fault location and the system conditions, the fault can cause either temporary voltage drops (sags), or voltage rises (swells), or a complete loss of voltage (interruptions). The fault condition can be close to or remote from the point of interest. In either case, the impact on the voltage during the actual fault condition is of short duration variation until protective devices operate to clear the ­fault.

FIGURE 22-2  Oscillatory transient current caused by b ­ ack-­to-­back capacitor s­ witching.

22_Santoso_Sec22_p1371-1426.indd 1376

23/11/17 11:19 AM

POWER QUALITY AND RELIABILITY   1377 

This category encompasses the IEC category of voltage dips and short interruptions. Each type of variation can be designated as instantaneous, momentary, or temporary, depending on its duration as defined in Table 22-­2. Interruption.  An interruption occurs when the supply voltage or load current decreases to less than 0.1 pu for a period of time not exceeding 1 min. Interruptions can be the result of power system faults, equipment failures, and control malfunctions. The interruptions are measured by their duration since the voltage magnitude is always less than 10% of nominal. The duration of an interruption due to a fault on the utility system is determined by the operating time of utility protective devices. Instantaneous reclosing generally will limit the interruption caused by a n ­ on­permanent fault to less than 30 cycles. Delayed reclosing of the protective device may cause an instantaneous, momentary, or temporary interruption. The duration of an interruption can be irregular due to equipment malfunction or loose connections. Some interruptions may be preceded by a voltage sag when the interruptions are due to clearing faults on the source system. The voltage sag occurs between the time a fault initiates and the protective device operates. Figure 22-3 shows a plot of the rms voltages for all three phases for such an interruption. The voltage on the faulted phase initially sags to 15% to 25% for 0.6 s while the fault is arcing. A voltage swell occurs on the other two phases at the same time. The breaker then opens, clears the fault, and recloses successfully 0.4 s later. Utility distribution engineers frequently refer to this as an instantaneous ­reclose. Voltage ­Sags.  A sag is a decrease to between 0.1 and 0.9 pu in rms voltage or current at the power frequency for durations from 0.5 cycles to 1 min. The IEC definition for this phenomenon is voltage dip. The two terms are considered interchangeable, with sag being the preferred synonym in the U.S. power quality community. Figure 22-4 shows a typical voltage sag associated with an SLG fault on another feeder from the same substation. The voltage sags to 60% for about 5 cycles until the substation breaker is able to interrupt the fault current. Typical fault clearing times range from 3 to 30 cycles, depending on the fault current magnitude and the type of overcurrent ­protection. Voltage ­Swells.  A swell is defined as an increase to between 1.1 and 1.8 pu in rms voltage or current at the power frequency for durations from 0.5 cycle to 1 min. The term momentary overvoltage is used by many writers as a synonym for the term swell. As with sags, swells are usually associated with system fault conditions. One way that a swell can occur is from the temporary voltage rise on the unfaulted phases during a single ­line-­to-­ground (SLG) fault. An example is shown in Fig. 22-5. Swells can also be caused by switching off a large load or energizing a large capacitor ­bank.

FIGURE 22-3  An instantaneous interruption due to an SLG fault and subsequent recloser o ­ peration.

22_Santoso_Sec22_p1371-1426.indd 1377

23/11/17 11:19 AM

1378  SECTION TWENTY-TWO

Voltage ( V pu)

1.1

RMS Waveform for Voltage Sag Event

1.0 0.9 0.8 0.7 0.6 0.5 0.00

0.05

0.10

0.15

Time (s)

Voltage ( V pu)

1.5

Voltage Sag Waveform

1.0 0.5 0.0 –0.5 –1.0 –1.5 0.00

0.05

0.10

0.15

Time (s) FIGURE 22-4  Voltage sag caused by an SLG f­ ault.

FIGURE 22-5  An 8-cycle voltage swell caused by an SLG f­ ault.

22_Santoso_Sec22_p1371-1426.indd 1378

23/11/17 11:19 AM

POWER QUALITY AND RELIABILITY   1379 

22.2.5  Long-Duration Voltage ­Variations Long-duration voltage variations encompass rms deviations at power frequencies for longer than 1 min. ANSI C84.1 specifies the steady-state voltage tolerances expected on a power system. A voltage variation is considered to be long duration when the ANSI limits are exceeded for greater than 1 min. Long-duration variations can be either overvoltages or undervoltages. Overvoltages and undervoltages generally are not the result of system faults, but are caused by load variations on the system and system switching operations. Such variations are typically displayed as plots of rms voltage versus ­time. Overvoltage.  An overvoltage is an increase in the rms ac voltage greater than 110% at the power frequency for a duration longer than 1 min. They are usually the result of load switching (e.g., switching off a large load or energizing a capacitor bank). The overvoltages result because the system is either too weak for the desired voltage regulation or voltage controls are inadequate. Incorrect tap settings on transformers can also result in system ­overvoltages. ­Undervoltage.  An undervoltage is a decrease in the rms ac voltage to less than 90% at the power frequency for a duration longer than 1 min. They are the result of the events that are the reverse of the events that cause overvoltages. A load switching on or a capacitor bank switching off can cause an undervoltage until voltage regulation equipment on the system can bring the voltage back to within tolerances. Overloaded circuits can result in undervoltages also. The term brownout is often used to describe sustained periods of undervoltage initiated as a specific utility dispatch strategy to reduce power demand. Because there is no formal definition for brownout, and it is not as clear as the term undervoltage when trying to characterize a disturbance, the term brownout should be a­ voided.

22.2.6 

Sustained ­Interruption When the supply voltage has been zero for a period of time in excess of 1 min, the long duration voltage variation is considered a sustained interruption. Voltage interruptions longer than 1 min are often permanent and require human intervention to repair the system for restoration. The term sustained interruption refers to specific power system phenomena and, in general, has no relation to the usage of the term outage. Utilities use outage or interruption to describe phenomena of similar nature for reliability reporting purposes. However, this causes confusion for end users who think of an outage as any interruption of power that shuts down a process. This could be as little as ­one-­half of a cycle. Outage, as defined in IEEE Std 100 [4], does not refer to a specific phenomenon, but rather to the state of a component in a system that has failed to function as expected. Also, use of the term interruption in the context of power quality monitoring has no relation to reliability or other continuity of service statistics. Thus, this term has been defined to be more specific regarding the absence of voltage for long ­periods.

22.2.7 

Voltage ­Imbalance Voltage imbalance (also called voltage unbalance) is sometimes defined as the maximum deviation from the average of the 3-phase voltages or currents, divided by the average of the 3-phase voltages or currents, expressed in percent. Unbalance is more rigorously defined in the standards [3–6] using symmetrical components. The ratio of either the negative or z­ ero ­sequence component to the positive sequence component can be used to specify the percent unbalance. The most recent standard [5] specifies that the negative sequence method be used. Figure 22-6 shows an example of these two ratios for a 1 week trend of imbalance on a residential feeder.

22_Santoso_Sec22_p1371-1426.indd 1379

23/11/17 11:19 AM

1380  SECTION TWENTY-TWO

FIGURE 22-6  Voltage unbalance trend for a residential f­ eeder.

22.2.8 

Waveform ­Distortion Waveform distortion is defined as a steady-state deviation from an ideal sine wave of power frequency principally characterized by the spectral content of the deviation. There are five primary types of waveform distortion: dc offset, harmonics, interharmonics, notching, and ­noise. DC Offset.  The presence of a dc voltage or current in an ac power system is termed dc offset. This can occur as the result of a geomagnetic disturbance or asymmetry of electronic power converters. Incandescent lightbulb life extenders, for example, may consist of diodes that reduce the rms voltage supplied to the lightbulb by ­half-­wave rectification. Direct current in alternating current networks can have a detrimental effect by biasing transformer cores so they saturate in normal operation. This causes additional heating and loss of transformer life. DC may also cause the electrolytic erosion of grounding electrodes and other ­connectors. Harmonics and ­Interharmonics.  Harmonics are sinusoidal voltages or currents having frequencies that are integer multiples of the frequency at which the supply system is designed to operate (termed the fundamental frequency, usually 50 or 60 Hz) [3]. Periodically distorted waveforms can be decomposed into a sum of the fundamental frequency and the harmonics. Harmonic distortion originates in the nonlinear characteristics of devices and loads on the power system. Figure 22-7 illustrates the waveform and harmonic spectrum for a typical adjustable speed drive input ­current. Voltages or currents having frequency components that are not integer multiples of the frequency at which the supply system is designed to operate (e.g., 50 or 60 Hz) are called interharmonics. They can appear as discrete frequencies or as a ­wide­band spectrum. Interharmonics can be found in networks of all voltage classes. The main sources of interharmonic waveform distortion are static

22_Santoso_Sec22_p1371-1426.indd 1380

23/11/17 11:19 AM

POWER QUALITY AND RELIABILITY   1381 

FIGURE 22-7  Current waveform and harmonic spectrum for an ASD input c­ urrent.

frequency converters, ­cyclo­converters, induction furnaces, and arcing devices. Power line carrier signals can also be considered as ­interharmonics. Notching.  Notching is a periodic voltage disturbance caused by the normal operation of power electronics devices when current is commutated from one phase to another. Since notching occurs continuously, it can be characterized through the harmonic spectrum of the affected voltage. However, it is generally treated as a special case. The frequency components associated with notching can be quite high and may not be readily characterized with measurement equipment normally used for harmonic analysis. Figure 22-8 shows an example of voltage notching from a 3-­phase converter that produces continuous dc current. The notches occur when the current commutates from one phase to another. During this period, there is a momentary short circuit between two phases pulling the voltage as close to zero as permitted by system ­impedances. ­Noise.  Noise is defined as unwanted electrical signals with broadband spectral content lower than 200 kHz superimposed upon the power system voltage or current in phase conductors, or found on neutral conductors or signal lines. Noise in power systems can be caused by power electronic devices, control circuits, arcing equipment, loads with ­solid-­state rectifiers, and switching power supplies. Noise problems are often exacerbated by improper grounding that fails to conduct noise away from the power system. In principle, noise consists of any unwanted distortion of the power signal that

22_Santoso_Sec22_p1371-1426.indd 1381

23/11/17 11:19 AM

1382  SECTION TWENTY-TWO

1000 500 0 –500 –1000 0.020

0.025

0.030

0.035

0.040

0.045

0.050

FIGURE 22-8  Example of voltage notching caused by a 3­ -­phase converter.

cannot be classified as harmonic distortion or transients. Noise disturbs electronic devices such as microcomputer and programmable controllers. The problem can be mitigated by using filters, isolation transformers, and line ­conditioners. 22.2.9 

Voltage ­Fluctuation Voltage fluctuations are systematic variations of the voltage envelope or a series of random voltage changes, the magnitude of which does not normally exceed the voltage ranges specified by ANSI C84.1 of 0.9 to 1.1 pu. IEC 61000-2-1 defines various types of voltage fluctuations. We will restrict our discussion here to IEC 61000-2-1 Type (d) voltage fluctuations, which are characterized as a series of random or continuous voltage fluctuations. Loads that can exhibit continuous, rapid variations in the load current magnitude can cause voltage variations that are often referred to as flicker. The term flicker is derived from the impact of the voltage fluctuation on lamps such that they are perceived to flicker by the human eye. To be technically correct, voltage fluctuation is an electromagnetic phenomenon while flicker is an undesirable result of the voltage fluctuation in some loads. However, the two terms are often linked together in standards. Therefore, we will also use the common term voltage flicker to describe such voltage fluctuations. Figure 22-9 illustrates 2 PU

1.5 1 0.5 0 03/21/2002 00:00:00.00

4:00

8:00

12:00

16:00

20:00

03/22/2002 00:00:00.00

Time Short-Term Flicker A

Dranetz/Electrotek Concepts ®

FIGURE 22-9  Flicker (Pst) at 161-kV substation bus measured according to IEC 61000-4-­15.

22_Santoso_Sec22_p1371-1426.indd 1382

23/11/17 11:19 AM

POWER QUALITY AND RELIABILITY   1383 

a voltage waveform which produces flicker. This is caused by an arc furnace, one of the most common causes of voltage fluctuations on utility transmission and distribution s­ ystems.

22.2.10  Power Frequency ­Variations Power frequency variations are defined as the deviation of the power system fundamental frequency from its specified nominal value (e.g., 50 or 60 Hz). The power system frequency is directly related to the rotational speed of the generators supplying the system. There are slight variations in frequency as the dynamic balance between load and generation changes. The size of the frequency shift and its duration depends on the load characteristics and the response of the generation control system to load changes. Figure 22-10 illustrates frequency variations for a 24-h period on a typical 13-kV substation bus. Frequency variations that go outside of accepted limits for normal steady-state operation of the power system can be caused by faults on the bulk power transmission system, a large block of load being disconnected, or a large source of generation going off­line.

LCUBSub

60.05

Hz

60 59.95 59.9 03-21-2002 00:00:00.00

4:00

8:00

Frequency A minimum

12:00

16:00

Time Frequency A maximum

20:00

03-22-2002 00:00:00.00

Frequency A average Dranetz/Electrotek Concepts ®

Count

10

00:00:00.00 00:00:00.00

LCUBSub

20 15

03-21-2002 03-22-2002

100% 80% 60% 40% 20% 0

Samples: 286 Minimum: 59.951 Hz Average: 60.0 Hz Maximum: 60.03 Hz

5 59.951 59.953 59.955 59.957 59.959 59.961 59.963 59.965 59.967 59.969 59.971 59.973 59.975 59.977 59.979 59.981 59.983 59.985 59.987 59.989 59.991 59.993 59.995 59.997 59.999 60.001 60.003 60.005 60.007 60.009 60.011 60.013 60.015 60.017 60.019 60.021 60.023 60.025 60.027 60.029

0

Cumulative probability (%)

Frequency voltage A

Frequency A average

Hz Frequency A average cumulative probability Dranetz/Electrotek Concepts ®

FIGURE 22-10  Power frequency trend and statistical distribution at 13-kV substation b ­ us.

22_Santoso_Sec22_p1371-1426.indd 1383

23/11/17 11:19 AM

1384  SECTION TWENTY-TWO

22.3  VOLTAGE SAGS AND INTERRUPTIONS ON POWER ­SYSTEMS 22.3.1 ­Characteristics Voltage sags and interruptions are related power quality problems. They are the result of faults in the power system and switching actions to isolate the faulted sections. A voltage sag is characterized by a short duration (typically 0.5 to 30 cycles) reduction in rms voltage caused by faults on the power system and the starting of large loads, such as motors. Momentary interruptions (typically no more than 2 to 5 s) cause a complete loss of voltage and are a common result of the actions taken by utilities to clear transient faults on their systems. Sustained interruptions of longer than 1 min are generally due to permanent faults. Due to the nature of the interconnected power systems and the utility ­fault-­clearing schemes, voltage sags are the most common power quality ­disturbances.

22.3.2  Sources of Sags and ­Interruptions Voltage sags and interruptions are generally caused by faults (short circuits) on the utility system and subsequent operations of protective devices in isolating the faults. Transient or temporary faults on the same or parallel feeders can result in voltage sags. Permanent faults usually result in interruptions. It is also possible that voltage sags are the result of starting of large loads, such as large motors. In some rare circumstances, energizing a transformer in a weak power system can also result in voltage sags. The voltage sag and interruption performance is greatly influenced by the utility feeder design and fault-clearing ­practices.

22.3.3  Utility System Fault ­Clearing A radial distribution system is designed so that only one fault interrupter must operate to clear a fault. For permanent faults, that same device, or another, operates to sectionalize the feeder. That is, the faulted section is isolated so that power may be restored to the rest of the loads served from the sound sections. Orchestrating this process is referred to as the coordination of the overcurrent protection devices. While this is simple in concept, some of the behaviors of the devices involved can be quite complex. What is remarkable about this is that nearly all of the process is performed automatically by autonomous devices employing only local ­intelligence. Overcurrent protection devices appear in series along a feeder. For permanent fault coordination, the devices operate progressively slower as one moves from the ends of the feeders toward the substation. This helps ensure the proper sectionalizing of the feeder so that only the faulted section is isolated. However, this principle is often violated for temporary faults, particularly if fuse saving is employed. The typical hierarchy of overcurrent protection devices on a feeder ­is Feeder Breaker in the Substation.  This is a circuit breaker capable of interrupting typically 40 kA of current and controlled by separate relays. When the available fault current is less than 20 kA, it is common to find reclosers used in this ­application. Line Reclosers Mounted on Poles at Mid­ feeder.  The simplest are s­elf-­ contained with hydraulically-­ ­ operated timing, interrupting, and reclosing mechanisms. Others have separate electronic ­controls. Fuses on Many Lateral Taps Off the Main Feeder.  These protective devices have significant implications on power quality ­issues.

22_Santoso_Sec22_p1371-1426.indd 1384

23/11/17 11:19 AM

POWER QUALITY AND RELIABILITY   1385 

22.3.4 ­Reclosers Reclosers are special circuit breakers designed to perform interruption and reclosing on temporary faults. They can reclose two or three times if needed in rapid succession. The multiple operations are designed to permit various sectionalizing schemes to operate and to give some more persistent transient faults a second chance to clear. The majority of faults will be cleared on the first operation. These devices can be found in numerous places along distribution feeders and sometimes in substations. They are typically applied at the head of sections subjected to numerous temporary faults. However, they may be applied nearly anywhere a convenient, ­low-­cost ­primary-­side circuit breaker is needed. Figure 22-11 shows a typical ­pole-­mounted line ­recloser. In addition to performing interruption and reclosing on temporary faults, reclosers are used for ­fuse-­saving or ­fast-­tripping applications. They are some of the fastest mechanical fault interrupters employed on the utility system. While they are typically rated for no faster than 3 to 6 cycles, many examples of interruptions as short as 1.5 cycles have been observed with power quality monitors. This can be beneficial to limiting sag durations. Where fast tripping is not employed, the recloser control will commonly delay operation to more than 6 cycles to allow time for downline fuses to c­ lear.

FIGURE 22-11  Typical standard 3-­phase ­oil-­insulated line recloser with vacuum interrupters. (Photo courtesy of Cooper Power Systems.)

22_Santoso_Sec22_p1371-1426.indd 1385

23/11/17 11:19 AM

1386  SECTION TWENTY-TWO

22.3.5 

Reclosing ­Sequence Reclosing is quite prevalent in North American utility systems. Utilities in regions of low lightning incidence may reclose only once because they assume that the majority of their faults will be permanent. In ­lightning-­prone regions, it is common to attempt to clear the fault as many as four times. Figure 22-12 illustrates the two most common sequences in use on 4-shot r­ eclosers: 1-fast operation, 3-­delayed 2-fast, 2-­delayed Reclosers tend to have uniform reclose intervals between operations. The original hydraulic reclosers were limited to about 1 to 2 s and this setting has been retained by many utilities, although modern ­electronically ­controlled reclosers can be set for any value. It is common for the first reclose interval on some types of reclosers to be set for instantaneous reclose, which will result in closure in 12 to 30 cycles (0.2 to 0.5 s). This is done to reduce the time of the interruption and improve the power quality. However, there are some conflicts created by this, such as with distributed generation disconnecting ­times. Substation circuit breakers often have a different style of reclosing sequence as shown in Fig. 22-13. This stems from a different evolution of relaying technology. Reclosing times are counted from the first tripping signal of the first operation. Thus, the common “0-15-45” operating sequence recloses essentially as fast as possible on the first operation, with approximately 15 and 30 s intervals between the next two ­operations. Although the terminology may differ, modern breakers and reclosers can both be set to have the same operating sequences to meet load power quality requirements. Utilities generally choose one technology over the other based on cost or construction standards. It is generally fruitless to automatically reclose in distribution systems that are predominantly underground distribution cable, unless there is a significant portion that is overhead and exposed to trees or ­lightning.

FIGURE 22-12  Common reclosing sequences for line reclosers in use in the U ­ nited States.

22_Santoso_Sec22_p1371-1426.indd 1386

23/11/17 11:19 AM

POWER QUALITY AND RELIABILITY   1387 

FIGURE 22-13  A common reclosing sequence for substation breakers in the U ­ nited States.

22.3.6 ­Fuse ­Saving or Fast ­Tripping Ideally, utility engineers would like to avoid blowing fuses needlessly on transient faults because a line crew must be dispatched to change it. Line reclosers were designed specifically to help save fuses. Substation circuit breakers can use instantaneous ground relaying to accomplish the same objective. The basic idea is to have the mechanical circuit interrupting device operate very quickly on the first operation so that it clears before any fuses downline from it have a chance to melt. When the device closes back in, power is fully restored in the majority of the cases and no human intervention is required. The only inconvenience to the customer is a slight blink. This is called the fast operation of the device, or the instantaneous trip. If the fault is still there upon reclosing, there are two options in common u ­ sage: 1. Switch to a Slow, or Delayed, Tripping Characteristic. This is frequently the only option for substation circuit breakers; they will operate only one time on the instantaneous trip. This philosophy assumes that the fault is now permanent and switching to a delayed operation will give a downline fuse time to operate and clear the fault by isolating the faulted s­ ection. 2. Try a Second Fast Operation. This philosophy is used where experience has shown a significant percentage of transient faults need two chances to clear while saving the fuses. Some line constructions and voltage levels have a greater likelihood that a ­lightning-­induced arc may reignite and need a second chance to clear. Also, a certain percentage of tree faults will burn free if given a second s­ hot. Many utilities have abandoned fuse saving in selected areas due to complaints about power quality. The fast, or instantaneous, trip is eliminated so that breakers and reclosers have only ­time-­delayed ­operations. 22.3.7 ­Fault-­Induced Voltage Sags The majority of voltage sags are caused by faults on the power systems and the subsequent operations of protective devices. Consider a customer that is supplied from the feeder supplied by circuit breaker no. 1 on the diagram shown in Fig. 22-14. If there is a fault on the same feeder, the customer will experience a voltage sag during the fault followed by an interruption when the breaker opens to clear the fault. If the fault is temporary in nature, a reclosing operation on the breaker should be successful and the interruption will only be temporary. It will usually require about 5 or 6 cycles for the breaker to operate, during which time a voltage sag occurs. The breaker will remain open for typically a minimum of 12 cycles up to 5 s depending on utility reclosing practices. Sensitive equipment will almost surely trip during this ­interruption.

22_Santoso_Sec22_p1371-1426.indd 1387

23/11/17 11:19 AM

1388  SECTION TWENTY-TWO

FIGURE 22-14  Fault locations on the utility power s­ ystem.

A much more common event would be a fault on one of the other feeders from the substation, that is, a fault is on a parallel feeder, or a fault somewhere on the transmission system (see the fault locations shown on Fig. 22-14). In either of these cases, the customer will experience a voltage sag during the period that the fault is actually on the system. As soon as breakers open to clear the fault, normal voltage will be restored at the customer. Note that to clear the fault shown on the transmission system, both breakers A and B must operate. Transmission breakers will typically clear a fault in 5 or 6 cycles. In this case there are two lines supplying the distribution substation and only one has a fault. Therefore, customers supplied from the substation should expect to see only a sag and not an interruption. The distribution fault on feeder no. 4 may be cleared either by the lateral fuse or the breaker, depending on the utility fuse saving practice. Any of these fault locations can cause equipment to misoperate in customer facilities. The relative importance of faults on the transmission system and the distribution system will depend on the specific characteristics of the systems (underground vs. overhead distribution, lightning flash densities, overhead exposure, etc.) and the sensitivity of the equipment to voltage s­ ags. Example of Voltage Sags due to a Fault on a Parallel F ­ eeder.  This example illustrates voltage sag and momentary interruption events due to a temporary fault on a utility feeder. Figures 22-15 and 22-16 show an interesting utility fault event recorded for an Electric Power Research Institute research project [7, 8] by 8010 PQNode instrumentsa at two locations in the power system. The top chart in each of the figures is the rms voltage variation with time and the bottom chart is the first 175 ms of the actual waveform. Figure 22-15 shows the characteristic measured at a customer location on an unfaulted part of the feeder. Figure 22-16 shows the momentary interruption (actually two separate interruptions) observed downline from the fault. The interrupting device in this case was a line recloser that was able to interrupt the fault very quickly in about 2.5 cycles. This device can have a variety of settings. In this case, it was set for two fast operations and two delayed operations. Figure 22-15 shows only the brief sag to 65% voltage for the first fast operation. There was an identical sag for the second operation. While this is very brief sag that is virtually unnoticeable by observing lighting blinks, many industrial processes would have shut d ­ own.

PQNode is a registered trademark of Dranetz, Edison, NJ.

a

22_Santoso_Sec22_p1371-1426.indd 1388

23/11/17 11:19 AM

POWER QUALITY AND RELIABILITY   1389 

FIGURE 22-15  Voltage sag due to short-circuit fault on a parallel utility f­ eeder.

FIGURE 22-16  Utility short-circuit fault event with two fast trip operations of utility l­ine.

22_Santoso_Sec22_p1371-1426.indd 1389

23/11/17 11:19 AM

1390  SECTION TWENTY-TWO

Figure 22-16 clearly shows the voltage sag prior to fault clearing and the subsequent two fast recloser operations. The reclose time (the time the recloser was open) was a little more than 2 s, a very common time for a utility line recloser. Apparently, the fault—perhaps, a tree branch—was not cleared completely by the first operation, forcing a second. The system was restored after the second operation. 22.3.8  Motor Starting ­Sags Motors have the undesirable effect of drawing several times their full load current while starting. This large current will, by flowing through system impedances, cause a voltage sag which may dim lights, cause contactors to drop out, and disrupt sensitive equipment. The situation is made worse by an extremely poor starting displacement factor—usually in the range of 15% to 30%. The time required for the motor to accelerate to rated speed increases with the magnitude of the sag, and an excessive sag may prevent the motor from starting successfully. Motor starting sags can persist for many seconds, as illustrated in Fig. 22-17. 22.3.9  Motor Starting ­Methods Energizing the motor in a single step (full voltage starting) provides low cost and allows the most rapid acceleration. It is the preferred method unless the resulting voltage sag or mechanical stress is ­excessive. Autotransformer starters have two autotransformers connected in open delta. Taps provide a motor voltage of 80%, 65%, or 50% of system voltage during start-up. Line current and starting torque vary with the square of the voltage applied to the motor, so the 50% tap will deliver only 25% of the full voltage starting current and torque. The lowest tap which will supply the required starting torque is ­selected. Resistance and reactance starters initially insert an impedance in series with the motor. After a time delay, this impedance is shorted out. Starting resistors may be shorted out over several steps; starting reactors are shorted out in a single step. Line current and starting torque vary directly with the voltage applied to the motor, so for a given starting voltage, these starters draw more current from

FIGURE 22-17  Typical motor starting voltage s­ ag.

22_Santoso_Sec22_p1371-1426.indd 1390

23/11/17 11:19 AM

POWER QUALITY AND RELIABILITY   1391 

the line than with autotransformer starters, but provide higher starting torque. Reactors are typically provided with 50%, 45%, and 37.5% ­taps. Part winding starters are attractive for use with ­dual-­rated motors (220/440 or 230/460 V). The stator of a d ­ ual-­rated motor consists of two windings connected in parallel at the lower voltage rating, or in series at the higher voltage rating. When operated with a part winding starter at the lower voltage rating, only one winding is energized initially, limiting starting current and starting torque to 50% of the values seen when both windings are energized ­simultaneously. Wye-­Delta starters connect the stator in wye for starting, then after a time delay, reconnect the windings in delta. The wye connecting reduces the starting voltage to 57% of the system l­ine-­line voltage; starting current and starting torque are reduced to 33% of their values for full voltage ­start. 22.3.10  Estimating the Sag Severity during Full Voltage ­Starting As shown in Fig. 22-17, starting an induction motor results in a steep dip in voltage, followed by a gradual recovery. If full voltage starting is used, the sag voltage, in per unit of nominal system voltage, is

Vmin (pu) =

V (pu) ⋅ kVA SC (22-1) kVA LR + kVA SC

where V(pu) = actual system voltage, in per unit of nominal kVALR = motor locked rotor kVA kVASC = system short circuit kVA at the m ­ otor Figure 22-18 illustrates the results of this computation for sag to 90% of nominal voltage, using typical system impedances and motor ­characteristics. If the result is above the minimum allowable ­steady-­state voltage for the effected equipment, then the full voltage starting is acceptable. If not, then the sag magnitude versus duration characteristic must be compared to the voltage tolerance envelope of the effected equipment. The required calculations are fairly complicated, and best left to a motor starting or general transient analysis computer ­program.

FIGURE 22-18  Typical motor vs. transformer size for full voltage starting sags of 90%.

22_Santoso_Sec22_p1371-1426.indd 1391

23/11/17 11:19 AM

1392  SECTION TWENTY-TWO

22.4  ELECTRICAL TRANSIENT ­PHENOMENA 22.4.1  Sources and Characteristics In principle, electrical transient phenomena can be generated due to natural events such as lightning strokes, and switching operations such as capacitor, load, and transformer energizing, and protective device operations. However, two main sources of transient overvoltages on utility systems are capacitor switching and ­lightning.

22.4.2  Capacitor Switching Transient ­Overvoltages Capacitor switching is one of the most common switching events on utility systems. Capacitors are used to provide reactive power (vars) to correct the power factor, which reduces losses and supports the voltage on the system. One drawback to capacitors is that they yield oscillatory transients when switched. Some capacitors are energized all the time (a fixed bank) while others are switched according to load levels. Various control means are used to determine when they are switched including time, temperature, voltage, current, and reactive power. It is common for controls to combine two or more of these functions, such as temperature with voltage o ­ verride. Figure 22-19 shows the o ­ ne-­line diagram of a typical utility feeder capacitor switching situation. When the switch is closed, a transient similar to the one in Fig. 22-20 may be observed upline from the capacitor at the monitor location. In this particular case, the capacitor switch contacts close at a point near the system voltage peak. This is common for many types of switches because the insulation across the switch contacts tends to break down when the voltage across the switch is at a maximum value. The voltage across the capacitor at this instant is zero. Since the capacitor voltage cannot change instantaneously, the system voltage at the capacitor location is briefly pulled down to zero and rises as the capacitor begins to charge toward the system voltage. Because the power system source is inductive, the capacitor voltage overshoots and rings at the natural frequency of the system. At the monitoring location shown, the initial change in voltage will not go completely to zero because of the impedance between the observation point and the switched capacitor. However, the initial drop and subsequent ringing transient that is indicative of a capacitor switching event will be observable to some degree. The overshoot will generate a transient between 1.0 and 2.0 pu depending on system damping. In this case, the transient observed at the monitoring location is about 1.34 pu. Utility capacitor switching transients are commonly in the 1.3 to 1.4 pu range, but have also been observed near the theoretical ­maximum.

FIGURE 22-19  ­One-­line diagram of capacitor switching o ­ peration.

22_Santoso_Sec22_p1371-1426.indd 1392

23/11/17 11:19 AM

POWER QUALITY AND RELIABILITY   1393 

FIGURE 22-20  Typical utility capacitor switching transient reaching 134% voltage, observed upline from the c­ apacitor.

22.4.3  Magnification of Capacitor Switching Transient ­Overvoltages Capacitor switching transients can propagate into the local power system and will generally pass through distribution transformers into customer load facilities by nearly the amount related to the turns ratio of the transformer. If there are capacitors on the secondary system, the voltage may actually be magnified on the load side of the transformer if the natural frequencies of the systems are properly aligned. The circuit of concern for this phenomenon is illustrated in Fig. 22-21. Transient overvoltages on the ­end-­user side may reach as high as 3.0 to 4.0 pu on the ­low-­voltage bus under these conditions, with potentially damaging consequences for all types of customer ­equipment. 22.4.4  Options to Limit ­Magnification Magnification of utility capacitor switching transients at the ­end-­user location occurs over a wide range of transformer and capacitor sizes. Resizing the customer’s power factor correction capacitors or ­step-­down transformer is therefore usually not a practical solution. One solution is to control the transient overvoltage at the utility capacitor. This is sometimes possible using synchronous closing breakers or switches with p ­ re­insertion resistors. At the customer location, h ­ igh-­energy surge arresters can be applied to limit the transient voltage magnitude at the customer bus. Energy levels associated with the magnified transient will typically be in the range of 1 kJ. Figure 22-22 shows the expected arrester energy for a range of ­low-­voltage capacitor sizes. High-energy MOV arresters for ­low-­voltage applications can withstand 2 to 4 ­kJ.

22_Santoso_Sec22_p1371-1426.indd 1393

23/11/17 11:19 AM

1394  SECTION TWENTY-TWO

FIGURE 22-21  Voltage magnification of capacitor bank ­switching. (a) Voltage magnification at customer capacitor due to energizing capacitor on utility system; (b) equivalent circuit.

FIGURE 22-22  Arrester energy duty caused by magnified t­ ransient.

22_Santoso_Sec22_p1371-1426.indd 1394

23/11/17 11:19 AM

POWER QUALITY AND RELIABILITY   1395 

While such brief transients up to 2.0 per unit are not generally damaging to the system insulation, it can often cause misoperation of electronic power conversion devices. Controllers may interpret the high voltage as a sign that there is an impending dangerous situation and subsequently disconnect the load to be safe. The transient may also interfere with the gating of thyristors. It is important to note that the arresters can only limit the transient to the arrester protective level. This will typically be approximately 1.8 times the normal peak voltage (1.8 pu). Another means of limiting the voltage magnification transient is to convert the ­end-­user, ­powerfactor-­correction banks to harmonic filters. An inductance in series with the ­power-­factor-­correction bank will decrease the transient voltage at the customer bus to acceptable levels. This solution has multiple benefits by providing correction for displacement power factor, controlling harmonic distortion levels within the facility, and limiting the concern for magnified capacitor switching ­transients. In many cases, there are only a small number of load devices, such as a­ djustable-­speed motor drives, that are adversely affected by the transient. It is frequently more economical to place line reactors in series with the drives to block the high frequency magnification transient. A 3% reactor is generally effective. While offering only a small impedance to power frequency current, it offers a considerably larger impedance to the transient. Many types of drives have this protection inherently, either through an isolation transformer or a dc bus ­reactance. 22.4.5  Options to Limit Capacitor Switching Transients—Pre­insertion Pre­insertion resistors can reduce the capacitor switching transient considerably. The first peak of the transient is usually the most damaging. The idea is to insert a resistor into the circuit briefly so that the first peak is damped significantly. This is old technology, but still quite effective. Figure 22-23 shows one example of a capacitor switch with preinsertion resistors to reduce transients. The preinsertion is accomplished by the movable contacts sliding past the resistor contacts first before mating with the main contacts. This results in a preinsertion time of approximately one-fourth of a cycle at 60 Hz. The effectiveness of the resistors is dependent on capacitor size and available short-circuit current at the capacitor location. Table 22-3 shows expected maximum transient overvoltages upon energization for various conditions, both with and without the preinsertion resistors. These are the maximum values expected; average values are typically 1.3 to 1.4 pu without resistors and 1.1 to 1.2 with ­resistors.

22.4.6  Options to Limit Capacitor Transient Switching—Synchronous ­Closing Another popular strategy for reducing transients on capacitor switching is to use a synchronous closing breaker. This is a relatively new technology for controlling capacitor switching transients. Synchronous closing prevents transients by timing the contact closure such that the system voltage closely matches the capacitor voltage at the instant the contacts are made. This avoids the step change in voltage that normally occurs when capacitors are switched, causing the circuit to oscillate. Figure 22-24 shows a vacuum switch made for this purpose. It is applied on 46-­kV-­class capacitor banks. It consists of three independent poles with separate controls. The timing for synchronous closing is determined by anticipating an upcoming voltage zero. Its success is dependent on the consistent operation of the vacuum switch. The switch reduces capacitor inrush currents by an order of magnitude and voltage transients to about 1.1 pu. A similar switch may also be used at distribution voltages. Each of the switches described here requires a sophisticated ­microprocessor-­based control. Understandably, a synchronous closing system is more expensive than a straightforward capacitor switch. However, it is frequently a cost-effective solution when capacitor switching transients are disrupting ­end-­user ­loads.

22_Santoso_Sec22_p1371-1426.indd 1395

23/11/17 11:19 AM

1396  SECTION TWENTY-TWO

FIGURE 22-23  Capacitor switch with ­pre­insertion resistors. (Courtesy of Cooper Power Systems.)

TABLE 22-3  Peak Transient Overvoltages Due to Capacitor Switching with and without ­Pre­insertion Resistor Size, kvar

 900  900  900 1200 1200 1200 1800 1800 1800

Avail. short circuit, kA  4  9 14  4  9 14  4  9 14

Without resistor (pu)

With 6.4 W resistor (pu)

1.95 ­1.55 1.97 ­1.45 1.98 ­1.39 1.94 ­1.50 1.97 ­1.40 1.98 ­1.34 1.92 ­1.42 1.96 ­1.33 1.97 ­1.28

Source:  Cooper Power Systems.

22.4.7 ­Lightning Lightning is a potent source of impulsive transients and can have serious impacts on power system and ­end-­user equipment. Figure 22-25 illustrates some of the places where lightning can strike that results in lightning currents being conducted from the power system into loads. The most obvious conduction path occurs during a direct strike to a phase wire, either on the primary or the secondary side of the transformer. This can generate very high overvoltages, but some analysts question whether this is

22_Santoso_Sec22_p1371-1426.indd 1396

23/11/17 11:19 AM

POWER QUALITY AND RELIABILITY   1397 

the most common way that lightning surges enter load facilities and cause damage. Very similar transient overvoltages can be generated by lightning currents flowing along ground conductor paths. Note that there can be numerous paths for lightning currents to enter the grounding system. Common ones, indicated by the dotted lines in Fig. 22-25, include the primary ground, the secondary ground, and the structure of the load facilities. Note also that strokes to the primary phase are conducted to the ground circuits through the arresters on the service transformer. Thus, many more lightning impulses may be observed at loads than one might think. Note that grounds are never perfect conductors, especially for impulses. While most of the surge current may eventually be dissipated into the ground connection closest to the stroke, there will be substantial surge currents flowing in other connected ground conductors in the first few microseconds of the ­strike. The chief power quality problems with lightning stroke currents entering the ground system ­are

FIGURE 22-24  Synchronous closing capacitor switch. (Courtesy of Joslyn ­Hi-­Voltage Corporation.)

•  They raise the potential of the local ground above other grounds in the vicinity by several kilovolts. Sensitive electronic equipment that is connected between two ground references, such as a computer connected to the telephone system through a modem, can fail when subjected to the lightning surge ­voltages. •  They induce high voltages in phase conductors as they pass through cables on the way to a better ­ground. 22.4.8 ­Low-­Side ­Surges Some utility and ­end-­user problems with lightning impulses are closely related. One of the most significant ones is called the ­low-­side surge problem by many utility engineers. The name was coined

FIGURE 22-25  Stroke locations for conduction of lightning impulses into load f­ acilities.

22_Santoso_Sec22_p1371-1426.indd 1397

23/11/17 11:19 AM

1398  SECTION TWENTY-TWO

FIGURE 22-26  Primary arrester discharge current divides between pole and load g­ round.

by distribution transformer designers because it appears from the transformer’s perspective that a current surge is suddenly injected into the ­low-­voltage side terminals. Utilities have not applied secondary arresters at l­ ow-­voltage levels in great numbers. From the customer’s point of view, it appears to be an impulse coming from the utility and is likely to be termed as “secondary surge.” Both problems actually have different side effects of the same surge phenomenon—lightning current flowing from either the utility side or the customer side along the service cable neutral. Figure 22-26 shows one possible scenario. Lightning strikes the primary line and the current is discharged through the primary arrester to the pole ground lead. This lead is also connected to the X2 bushing of the transformer at the top of the pole. Thus, some of the current will flow toward the load ground. The amount of current into the load ground is primarily dependent on the size of the pole ground resistance relative to the load ground. Inductive elements may play a significant role in the current division for the front of the surge, but the ground resistances basically dictate the division of the bulk of the stroke c­ urrent. The current that flows through the secondary cables causes a voltage drop in the neutral conductor that is only partially compensated by mutual inductive effects with the phase conductors. Thus, there is a net voltage across the cable, forcing current through the transformer secondary windings and into the load as shown by the dashed lines in the figure. If there is a complete path, substantial surge current will flow. As it flows through the transformer secondary, a surge voltage is induced in the primary, sometimes causing a ­layer-­to-­layer insulation failure near the grounded end. If there is not a complete path, the voltage will buildup across the load and may flash over somewhere on the secondary. It is common for the meter gaps to flashover, but not always before there is damage on the secondary because the meter gaps are usually 6 to 8 kV, or higher. The amount of voltage induced in the cable is dependent on the r­ ate-­of-­rise of the current, which is dependent on other circuit parameters as well as the lightning ­stroke. The chief power quality problems this causes ­are •  The impulse entering the load can cause failure or misoperation of load e­ quipment. •  The utility transformer will fail causing an extended power o ­ utage.

22_Santoso_Sec22_p1371-1426.indd 1398

23/11/17 11:19 AM

POWER QUALITY AND RELIABILITY   1399 

•  The failing transformer may subject the load to sustained steady-state overvoltages because part of the primary winding is shorted, decreasing the transformer turns ratio. Failure usually occurs in seconds, but has been known to take ­hours. The key to this problem is the amount of surge current traveling through the secondary service cable. Keep in mind that the same effect occurs regardless of the direction of the current. All that is required is for the current to get into the ground circuits and for a substantial portion to flow through the cable on its way to another ground. Thus, lightning strikes to either the utility system or the ­end-­user facilities can produce the same symptoms. Transformer protection is more of an issue in residential services, but the secondary transients will appear in industrial systems as ­well. 22.4.9  Low-­Side Surges—An Example Figure 22-27 shows a waveform of the ­open-­circuit voltage measured at an electrical outlet location in a laboratory ­mock-­up of a residential service [9]. For a relatively small stroke to the primary line (2.6 kA), the voltages at the outlet reached nearly 15 kV. In fact, higher current strokes caused random flashovers of the test circuit, which made measurements difficult. This reported experience is indicative of the capacity of these surges to cause overvoltage p ­ roblems. The waveform is a very ­high-­frequency, ringing wave riding on the main part of the ­low-­side surge. The ringing is very sensitive to the cable lengths. A small amount of resistive load, such as a lightbulb, would contribute greatly to the damping. The ringing wave differs depending on where the surge was applied while the base ­low-­side surge wave remains about the same; it is more dependent on the waveform of the current through the service cable. One interesting aspect of this wave is that the ringing is so fast that it gets by the spark gaps in the meter base even though the voltage is two times the nominal sparkover value. In the tests, the outlets and lamp sockets could also withstand this kind of wave for about 1 ms before they flashed over. Thus, it is possible to have some high overvoltages propagating

FIGURE 22-27  Voltage appearing at outlet due to l­ow-­side surge p ­ henomena.

22_Santoso_Sec22_p1371-1426.indd 1399

23/11/17 11:19 AM

1400  SECTION TWENTY-TWO

throughout the system. The waveform in this figure represents the available ­open-­circuit voltage. In actual practice, a flashover would have occurred somewhere in the circuit after a brief t­ ime. 22.4.10 Ferroresonance The term ferroresonance refers to a resonance that involves capacitance and ­iron-­core inductance. The most common condition in which it causes disturbances in the power system is when the magnetizing impedance of a transformer is placed in series with a system capacitor due to an open-phase conductor. Under controlled conditions, ferroresonance can be exploited for useful purpose such as in a c­ onstant-­voltage transformer. In practice, ferroresonance most commonly occurs when unloaded transformers become isolated on underground cables of a certain range of lengths. The capacitance of overhead distribution lines is generally insufficient to yield the appropriate ­conditions. The minimum length of cable required to cause ferroresonance varies with system voltage level. The capacitance of cables is nearly the same for all distribution voltage levels, varying from 40 to 100 nF per 1000 ft, depending on conductor size. However, the magnetizing reactance of a 35-­kV-­class distribution transformer is several times higher (curve is steeper) than a ­comparably-­sized 15-­kV-­class transformer. Therefore, damaging ferroresonance has been more common at the higher voltages. For ­delta-­connected transformers, ferroresonance can occur for less than 100 ft of cable. For this reason, many utilities avoid this connection on c­ able-­fed transformers. The grounded ­ wye-­ wye transformer has become the most commonly used connection in underground systems in North America. It is more resistant, but not immune, to ferroresonance because most units use a three-legged or five-legged core design that couples the phases magnetically. It may require a minimum of several hundred feet of cable to provide enough capacitance to create a ferroresonant condition for this connection. The most common events leading to ferroresonance ­are •  Manual switching of an unloaded, c­ able-­fed, 3-­phase transformer where only one phase is closed (Fig. 22-28a). Ferroresonance may be noted when the first phase is closed upon energization or before the last phase is opened on de-­energization. •  Manual switching of an unloaded, ­cable-­fed, ­3-­phase transformer where one of the phases is open (Fig. 22-28b). Again, this may happen during energization or de-­energization. •  One or two ­riser-­pole fuses may blow leaving a transformer with one or two phases open. ­Single-­phase reclosers may also cause this condition. Today, many modern commercial loads will have controls that transfer the load to backup systems when they sense this condition. Unfortunately, this leaves the transformer without any load to damp out the r­ esonance. •  Phase of a cable connected to a ­wye-­connected ­transformer. 22.4.11 

Transformer ­Energizing Energizing a transformer produces inrush currents that are rich in harmonic components for a period lasting up to 1 s. If the system has a parallel resonance near one of the harmonic frequencies, a dynamic overvoltage condition results that can cause failure of arresters and problems with sensitive equipment. This problem can occur when large transformers are energized simultaneously with large power factor correction capacitor banks in industrial facilities. The equivalent circuit is shown in Fig. 22-29. A dynamic overvoltage waveform caused by a t­ hird-­harmonic resonance in the circuit is shown in Fig. 22-30. After the expected initial transient, the voltage again swells to nearly 150% for many cycles until the losses and load damp out the oscillations. This can place severe stress on some arresters and has been known to significantly shorten the life of c­ apacitors. This form of dynamic overvoltage problem can often be eliminated simply by not energizing the capacitor and transformer together. One plant solved the problem by energizing the transformer first and not energizing the capacitor until load was about to be connected to the t­ ransformer.

22_Santoso_Sec22_p1371-1426.indd 1400

23/11/17 11:19 AM

POWER QUALITY AND RELIABILITY   1401 

FIGURE 22-28  Common system conditions where ferroresonance may occur: (a) one phase closed, (b) one phase o ­ pen.

22.5  POWER SYSTEMS ­HARMONICS 22.5.1 ­General Harmonic distortion is not a new phenomenon on power systems. Concern over distortion has ebbed and flowed a number of times during the history of ac electric power systems. Scanning the technical literature of the 1930s and 1940s, one will notice many articles on the subject. Then the primary sources were the transformers and the primary problem was inductive interference with ­open-­wire telephone systems. The forerunners of modern arc lighting were being introduced and were causing quite a stir because of their harmonic ­content—­not unlike the stir caused by electronic power converters in more recent ­times.

22_Santoso_Sec22_p1371-1426.indd 1401

23/11/17 11:19 AM

1402  SECTION TWENTY-TWO

FIGURE 22-29  Energizing a capacitor and transformer simultaneously can lead to dynamic ­overvoltages. Phase A 2

Voltage (Vpu)

1

0

−1

−2 0

200

400 Time (ms)

600

800

FIGURE 22-30  Dynamic overvoltages during transformer e­ nergizing.

In contrast, voltage sags and interruptions are nearly universal to every feeder and represent the most numerous and significant power quality deviations. The end user sector suffers more from harmonic problems than the utility sector. Industrial users with adjustable speed drives, arc furnaces, induction furnaces, and the like, are much more susceptible to problems stemming from harmonic d ­ istortion. A good assumption for most utilities in the United States is that the sine wave voltage generated in central power stations is very good. In most areas, the voltage found on transmission systems typically has much less than 1% distortion. However, the distortion increases closer to the load. At some loads, the current waveforms barely resemble a sine wave. Electronic power converters can chop the current into seemingly arbitrary ­waveforms. 22.5.2 

Harmonic ­Distortion Harmonic distortion is caused by nonlinear devices in the power system. A nonlinear device is one in which the current is not proportional to the applied voltage. Figure 22-31 illustrates this concept by the case of a sinusoidal voltage applied to a simple nonlinear resistor in which the voltage and current vary according to the curve shown. While the applied voltage is perfectly sinusoidal, the resulting current is distorted. Increasing the voltage by a few percent may cause the current to double and take on a different waveshape. This is the source of most harmonic distortion in a power system. Figure 22-32 illustrates that any periodic, distorted waveform can be expressed as a

22_Santoso_Sec22_p1371-1426.indd 1402

23/11/17 11:19 AM

POWER QUALITY AND RELIABILITY   1403 

FIGURE 22-31  Current distortion caused by nonlinear r­ esistance.

FIGURE 22-32  Fourier series representation of a distorted w ­ aveform.

22_Santoso_Sec22_p1371-1426.indd 1403

23/11/17 11:19 AM

1404  SECTION TWENTY-TWO

sum of sinusoids. When a waveform is identical from one cycle to the next, it can be represented as a sum of pure sine waves in which the frequency of each sinusoid is an integer multiple of the fundamental frequency of the distorted wave. This multiple is called a harmonic of the fundamental, hence the name of this subject matter. The sum of sinusoids is referred to as a Fourier series, named after the great mathematician who discovered the ­concept. 22.5.3  Voltage and Current Distortion The term “harmonics” is often used by itself without further qualification. Generally, it could mean one of the following ­three: 1. The harmonic voltages are too great (the voltage too distorted) for the control to properly determine firing a­ ngles. 2. The harmonic currents are too great for the capacity of some device in the power supply system such as a transformer and the machine must be operated at a lower than rated p ­ ower. 3. The harmonic voltages are too great because the harmonic currents produced by the device are too great for the given system c­ ondition. Clearly, there are separate causes and effects for voltages and currents as well as some relationship between them. Thus, the term harmonics by itself is inadequate to definitively describe a problem. Nonlinear loads appear to be sources of harmonic current injecting harmonic currents into the power system. For nearly all analyses, it is sufficient to treat these ­harmonic-­producing loads simply as current sources. There are exceptions to this as described l­ater. Voltage distortion is the result of distorted currents passing through the linear, series impedance of the power delivery system as illustrated in Fig. 22-33. Although, assuming that the source bus is ultimately a pure sinusoid, there is a nonlinear load that draws a distorted current. The harmonic currents passing through the impedance of the system cause a voltage drop for each harmonic. This results in voltage harmonics appearing at the load bus. The amount of voltage distortion depends on the impedance and the current. Assuming the load bus distortion stays within reasonable limits (e.g., less than 5%), the amount of harmonic current produced by the load is generally c­ onstant. While the load current harmonics ultimately cause the voltage distortion, it should be noted that load has no control over the voltage distortion. The same load put in two different locations on the power system will result in two different voltage distortion values. Recognition of this fact is the basis for the division of responsibilities for harmonic control that are found in standards such as IEEE Std 519-­1992. •  The control over the amount of harmonic current injected into the system takes place at the ­end-­use application. •  Assuming the harmonic current injection is within reasonable limits, the control over the voltage distortion is exercised by the entity having control over the system impedance, which is often the ­utility.

FIGURE 22-33  Harmonic currents flowing through the system impedance results in harmonic voltages at the l­oad.

22_Santoso_Sec22_p1371-1426.indd 1404

23/11/17 11:19 AM

POWER QUALITY AND RELIABILITY   1405 

One must be careful when describing harmonic phenomena to understand that there are distinct differences between the causes and effects of harmonic voltages and currents. The use of the term harmonics should be qualified accordingly. By popular convention in the power industry, the majority of time the term is used by itself when referring to load apparatus, the speaker is referring to the harmonic currents. When referring to the utility system, the voltages are generally the ­subject. 22.5.4  Power System Quantities under Nonsinusoidal ­Conditions Traditional power system quantities such as rms, power (reactive, active, apparent), power factor, and phase sequences are defined for the fundamental frequency context in a pure sinusoidal condition. In the presence of harmonic distortion the power system no longer operates in a sinusoidal condition, and unfortunately many of the simplifications power engineers use for the fundamental frequency analysis do not apply. Therefore, these quantities must be r­ edefined. 22.5.5  RMS Values of Voltage and ­Current In a sinusoidal condition both the voltage and current waveforms contain only the fundamental frequency component, thus the rms values can be expressed simply a­ s V rms =  



1 1 V1 and I  rms = I1 (22-2) 2 2

where V1 and I1 are the amplitude of voltage and current waveforms, respectively. The subscript 1 denotes quantities in the fundamental frequency. In a nonsinusoidal condition, a harmonically distorted waveform is made up of sinusoids of harmonic frequencies with different amplitudes as shown in Fig. 22-32. The rms values of the waveforms are computed as the square root of the sum of rms squares of all individual components, that is,



Vrms = I rms =

hmax

2

∑ 

1 1  Vh    = V12 + V22 + V32 +  + Vh2max (22-3) 2  2

hmax

1  1 Ih   = I12 + I 22 + I 32 +  + I h2max (22-4) 2  2

h=1

∑  h=1

2

where Vh and Ih are the amplitude of a waveform at the harmonic component h. In the sinusoidal condition, harmonic components of Vh and Ih are all zero, and only V1 and I1 remain. Equations (22-3) and (22-4) simplify to Eq. (22-2). 22.5.6  Active Power The active power, P, is also commonly referred to as the average power, real power, or true power. It represents useful power expended by loads to perform real work, that is, to convert electric energy to other forms of energy. Real work performed by an incandescent light bulb is to convert electric energy into light and heat. In electric power, real work is performed for the portion of the current that is in phase with the voltage. No real work will result, from the portion where the current is not in phase with the voltage. The active power is the rate at which energy is expended, dissipated or consumed by the load, and is measured in units of watts (W). P can be computed by averaging the product of the instantaneous voltage and current, that is,

22_Santoso_Sec22_p1371-1426.indd 1405

P=

1 T

∫

T

0

v(t )i(t )dt . (22-5)

23/11/17 11:19 AM

1406  SECTION TWENTY-TWO

The above equation is valid for both sinusoidal and nonsinusoidal conditions. For sinusoidal condition, I1rms resolves to the familiar form,

P=

V1 I1 cosθ1 = V1rms I1rms cosθ1 = S cosθ1 (22-6) 2

where q1 is the phase angle between voltage and current at the fundamental frequency. Equation 22-6 indicates that the average active power is a function only of the fundamental frequency quantities. In the nonsinusoidal case, the computation of the active power must include contribution from all harmonic components, thus it is the sum of active power at each harmonic. Furthermore, because the voltage distortion is generally very low on power systems (less than 5%), Eq. (22-6) is a good approximation regardless of how distorted the current is. This approximation cannot be applied when computing the apparent and reactive power. These two quantities are greatly influenced by the distortion. The apparent power, S, is a measure of the potential impact of the load on the thermal capability of the system. It is proportional to the rms of the distorted current and its computation is straightforward, although slightly more complicated than the sinusoidal case. Also, many current probes can now directly report the true rms value of a distorted w ­ aveform. 22.5.7 

Reactive ­Power The reactive power is a type of power that does no real work and is generally associated with reactive elements (inductors and capacitors). For example, the inductance of a load such as a motor causes the load current to lag behind the voltage. Power appearing across the inductance sloshes back and forth between the inductance itself and the power system source producing no net work. For this reason it is called imaginary or reactive power since no power is dissipated or expended. It is expressed in units of ­volt-­ampere-­reactive or var. In the sinusoidal case, the reactive power is simply defined a­ s Q = S  sinθ1 =



V1 I1 sinθ1 = V1rms I1rms sinθ1 (22-7) 2

which is the portion of power in quadrature with the active power shown in Eq. (22-6). Figure 22-34 summarizes the relationship between P, Q, and S in sinusoidal ­condition. There is some disagreement among harmonics analysts on how to define Q in the presence of harmonic distortion. If it were not for the fact that many utilities measure Q and compute demand

S

Q

P FIGURE 22-34  Relationship between P, Q, and S in sinusoidal c­ ondition.

22_Santoso_Sec22_p1371-1426.indd 1406

23/11/17 11:19 AM

POWER QUALITY AND RELIABILITY   1407 

billing from the power factor computed by Q, it might be a moot point. It is more important to determine P and S; P defines how much active power is being consumed while S defines the capacity of the power system required to deliver P. Q is not actually very useful by itself. However, Q1 the traditional reactive power component at fundamental frequency, may be used to size shunt ­capacitors. The reactive power, when distortion is present, has another interesting peculiarity. In fact, it may not be appropriate to call it reactive power. The concept of var flow in the power system is deeply ingrained in the minds of most power engineers. What many do not realize is that this concept is valid only in the sinusoidal steady state. When distortion is present, the component of S that remains after P is taken out, is not conserved—that is, it does not sum to zero at a node. Power quantities are presumed to flow around the system in a conservative ­manner. This does not imply that P is not conserved or that current is not conserved because the conservation of energy and Kirchoff’s current laws are still applicable for any waveform. The reactive components actually sum in quadrature (square root of the sum of the squares). This has prompted some analysts to propose that Q be used to denote the reactive components that are conserved and introduce a new quantity for the components that are not. Many call this quantity D, for distortion power or, simply, distortion voltamperes. It has units of voltamperes, but it may not be strictly appropriate to refer to this quantity as power, because it does not flow through the system as power is assumed to do. In this concept, Q consists of the sum of the traditional reactive power values at each frequency. D represents all cross products of voltage and current at different frequencies, which yield no average power. P, Q, D, and S are related as follows, using the definitions for S and P above as a starting ­point: S = P2 + Q2 + D2

Q = ∑Vk I k sinθ k k

(22-8)

Therefore, D can be determined after S, P, and Q ­by

D = S 2 − P 2 − Q 2 (22-9)

Some prefer to use a ­three-­dimensional vector chart to demonstrate the relationships of the components as shown in Fig. 22-35. P and Q contribute the traditional sinusoidal components to S while D represents the additional contribution to the apparent power by the h ­ armonics.

FIGURE 22-35  Relationship of components of the apparent ­power.

22_Santoso_Sec22_p1371-1426.indd 1407

23/11/17 11:20 AM

1408  SECTION TWENTY-TWO

22.5.8 

Power ­Factor A power factor is a ratio of useful power to perform real work (active power) to the power supplied by a utility (apparent power), that is,

PF =

P (22-10) S

In other words, the power factor ratio measures the percentage of power expended for its intended use. Power factor ranges from zero to unity. A load with power factor of 0.9 lagging denotes that the load can effectively expend 90% of the apparent power supplied (VA) and convert it to perform useful work (W). The term “lagging” denotes that the fundamental current lags behind the fundamental voltage by 25.84°. In the sinusoidal case there is only one phase angle between the voltage and the current (since only the fundamental frequency is present), the power factor can be computed as the cosine of the phase angle and is commonly referred to as the displacement power factor,

PF =

P = cosθ (22-11) S

In the nonsinusoidal case the power factor cannot be defined as the cosine of the phase angle as in Eq. (22-11). The power factor that takes into account contribution from all active power both fundamental and harmonic frequencies is known as the true power factor. The true power factor is simply the ratio of total active power for all frequencies to the apparent power delivered by the utility as shown in Eq. (22-10). Power quality monitoring instruments now commonly report both displacement and true power factors. Many devices such as s­ witch-­mode power supplies and PWM a­ djustable-­speed drives have a ­near-­unity displacement power factor, but the true power factor may be 0.5 to 0.6. An AC-side capacitor will do little to improve the true power factor in this case because Q1 is zero. In fact, if it results in resonance, the distortion may increase, causing the power factor to degrade. The true power factor indicates how large the power delivery system must be built to supply a given load. In this example, using only the displacement power factor would give a false sense of security that all is ­well. The bottom line is that distortion results in additional current components flowing in the system that do not yield any net energy except that they cause losses in the power system elements they pass through. This requires the system to be built to a slightly larger capacity to deliver the power to the load than if no distortion were ­present. 22.5.9  Harmonic Phase ­Sequence Power engineers have traditionally used symmetrical components to help describe ­3-­phase system behavior. The ­3-­phase system is transformed into three ­single-­phase systems that are much simpler to analyze. The method of symmetrical components can be employed for analysis of the system’s response to harmonic currents provided care is taken not to violate the fundamental assumptions of the m ­ ethod. The method allows any unbalanced set of phase currents (or voltages) to be transformed into three balanced sets. The positive sequence set contains three sinusoids displaced 120° from each other, with the normal A ­ -­B-­C phase rotation (e.g., 0°, -120°, 120°). The sinusoids of the n ­ egative-­sequence set are also displaced 120¬∞, but have opposite phase rotation ­(A-­C-­B, e.g., 0°, 120°, -120°). The sinusoids of the zero sequence are in phase with each other (e.g., 0, 0, 0). In a perfect balanced 3­-­phase system, the harmonic phase sequence can be determined by multiplying the harmonic number h with the normal positive sequence phase rotation. For example, for the second harmonic, h = 2, produces 2 × (0°, -120°, -120°) or (0°, 120°, -120°) which is the negative sequence. For the third harmonic, h = 3, produces 3 × (0°, -120°, -120°) or (0°, 0°, 0°) which is the z­ ero ­sequence. Phase sequence for all other harmonic orders can be determined in the

22_Santoso_Sec22_p1371-1426.indd 1408

23/11/17 11:20 AM

POWER QUALITY AND RELIABILITY   1409 

same fashion. Since a distorted waveform in power systems contains only odd harmonic components (see Sec. 22.5.1), only odd harmonic phase sequence rotations are summarized ­below: •  Harmonics of order h = 1, 7, 13, … are purely positive ­sequence. •  Harmonics of order h = 5, 11, 17, … are purely negative ­sequence. •  Triplens (h = 3, 9, 15, …) are purely zero ­sequence.

22.5.10 

Triplen ­Harmonics Triplen harmonics are the odd multiples of the third harmonic (h = 3, 9, 15, 21, …). They deserve special consideration because the system response is often considerably different for triplens than for the rest of the harmonics. Triplens become an important issue for g­ rounded-­wye systems with current flowing on the neutral. Two typical problems are overloading the neutral and telephone interference. One also hears occasionally of devices that misoperate because the ­line-­to-­neutral voltage is badly distorted by the triplen harmonic voltage drop in the neutral c­ onductor. For the system with perfectly balanced ­single-­phase loads illustrated in Fig. 22-36, an assumption is made that fundamental and third harmonic components are present. Summing the currents at node N, the fundamental current components in the neutral are found to be zero, but the third harmonic components are three times the phase currents because they naturally coincide in phase and ­time.

22.5.11  Triplen Harmonics in ­Transformers Transformer winding connections have a significant impact on the flow of triplen harmonic currents from ­single-­phase nonlinear loads. Two cases are shown in Fig. 22-37. In the w ­ ye-­delta transformer (a), the triplen harmonic currents are shown entering the wye side. Since they are in phase, they

FIGURE 22-36  High neutral currents in circuits serving s­ ingle-­phase nonlinear l­oads.

22_Santoso_Sec22_p1371-1426.indd 1409

23/11/17 11:20 AM

1410  SECTION TWENTY-TWO

FIGURE 22-37  Flow of third harmonic current in ­3-­phase ­transformers.

add in the neutral. The delta winding provides ­ampere-­turn balance so that they can flow, but they remain trapped in the delta and do not show up in the line currents on the delta side. When the currents are balanced, the triplen harmonic currents behave exactly as ­zero-­sequence currents, which is precisely what they are. This type of transformer connection is the most common employed in utility distribution substations with the delta winding connected to the transmission ­feed. Using ­grounded-­wye windings on both sides of the transformer (b) allows balanced triplens to flow from the low voltage system to the high voltage system unimpeded. They will be present in equal proportion on both sides. Many loads in the United States are served in this ­fashion. Some important implications of this as related to power quality analysis ­are 1. Transformers, particularly the neutral connections, are susceptible to overheating when serving single phase loads on the wye side that have high third harmonic c­ ontent. 2. Measuring the current on the delta side of a transformer will not show the triplens and, therefore, not give a true idea of the heating the transformer is being subjected t­ o.   The flow of triplen harmonic currents can be interrupted by the appropriate isolation transformer ­connection. 3. Removing the neutral connection in one or both wye windings blocks the flow of triplen harmonic current. There is no place for ­ampere-­turn balance. Likewise, a delta winding blocks the flow from the line. One should note that t­ hree-­legged core transformers behave as if they have a “phantom” delta tertiary winding. Therefore, a ­wye-­wye with only one neutral point grounded will still be able to conduct the triplen harmonics from that s­ ide. These rules about triplen harmonic current flow in transformers apply only to balanced loading conditions. When the phases are not balanced, currents of normal triplen harmonic frequencies

22_Santoso_Sec22_p1371-1426.indd 1410

23/11/17 11:20 AM

POWER QUALITY AND RELIABILITY   1411 

may very well show up where they are not expected. The normal mode for triplen harmonics is to be zero sequence. During imbalances, triplen harmonics may have positive or negative sequence components ­as well. One notable case of this is a 3-phase arc furnace. The furnace is nearly always fed by a d ­ elta-­delta connected transformer to block the flow of the zero sequence currents, as shown in Fig. 22-8. Thinking that third harmonics are synonymous with zero sequence, many engineers are surprised to find substantial third harmonic current present in large magnitudes in the line current. However, during scrap meltdown, the furnace will frequently operate in an unbalanced mode with only two electrodes carrying current. Large third harmonic currents can then freely circulate in these two phases just as a ­single-­phase circuit. However, they are not zero sequence currents. The third harmonic currents are equal amounts of positive and negative sequence currents. But to the extent that the system is mostly balanced, triplens mostly behave in the manner ­described. 22.5.12  Total Harmonic ­Distortion The total harmonic distortion (THD) is a measure of the effective value of the harmonic components of a distorted waveform. That is, the potential heating value of the harmonics relative to the fundamental. This index can be calculated for either voltage or c­ urrent: h max

THD =



∑M h>1

M1

2 h

(22-12)

where Mh is the rms value of harmonic component h of the quantity M. The rms value of a distorted waveform is the square root of the sum of the squares as shown in Eqs. (22-3) and (22-4). THD is related to the rms value of the waveform as ­follows:



RMS =

h max

∑M h=1

2 h

= M1 ⋅ 1 + THD2 (22-13)

THD is a very useful quantity for many applications, but its limitations must be realized. It can provide a good idea of how much extra heat will be realized when a distorted voltage is applied across a resistive load. Likewise, it can give an indication of the addition losses caused by the current flowing through a conductor. However, it is not a good indicator of the voltage stress within a capacitor because that is related to the peak value of the voltage wave form, not its heating value. The THD index is most often used to describe voltage harmonic distortion. Harmonic voltages are almost always referenced to the fundamental value of the waveform at the time of the sample. Because voltage varies only a few percent, the voltage THD is nearly always a meaningful ­number. 22.5.13  Total Demand ­Distortion Current distortion levels can be characterized by a THD value, as described above, but this can often be misleading. A small current may have a high THD but not be a significant threat to the system. For example, many adjustable speed drives will exhibit high THD values for the input current when they are operating at very light loads. This is not necessarily a significant concern because the magnitude of harmonic current is low, even though its relative current distortion is h ­ igh. Some analysts have attempted to avoid this difficulty by referring THD to the fundamental of the peak demand load current rather than the fundamental of the present sample. This is called

22_Santoso_Sec22_p1371-1426.indd 1411

23/11/17 11:20 AM

1412  SECTION TWENTY-TWO

total demand distortion (TDD) and serves as the basis for the guidelines in IEEE STD 519-1992. It is defined as f­ ollows: h max



TDD =

∑I h= 2

IL

2 h

(22-14)

where IL is the peak, or maximum demand load current at the fundamental frequency component measured at the point of common coupling (PCC). There are two ways to measure IL. With a load already in the system, it can be calculated as the average of the maximum demand current for the preceding 12 months. The calculation can simply be done by averaging the 12-month peak demand readings. For a new facility, IL has to be estimated based on the predicted load ­profiles.

22.5.14  System Response ­Characteristics In analyzing harmonic problems, the response of the power system is equally as important as the sources of harmonics. In fact, power systems are quite tolerant of the currents injected by ­harmonic-­producing loads unless there is some adverse interaction with the impedance of the system. Identifying the sources is only half the job of harmonic analysis. The response of the power system at each harmonic frequency determines the true impact of the nonlinear load on harmonic voltage d ­ istortion. There are three primary variables affecting the system response characteristics, that is, the system impedance, the presence of capacitor bank, and the amount of resistive loads in the ­system. 22.5.15  System ­Impedance At the fundamental frequency, power systems are primarily inductive, and the equivalent impedance is sometimes called simply the s­ hort-­circuit reactance. Capacitive effects are frequently neglected on utility distribution systems and industrial power systems. One of most ­frequently-­used quantities in the analysis of harmonics on power systems is the s­ hort-­circuit impedance to the point on a network at which a capacitor is located. If not directly available, it can be computed from s­ hort-­circuit study results that give either the ­short-­circuit MVA or the ­short-­circuit current as ­follows: Z SC = RSC + jX SC

=

kV 2 kV = MVASC 3I SC

(22-15)

where ZSC = ­short-­circuit impedance RSC = short-­circuit ­resistance XSC = short-­circuit ­reactance KV = phase-­to-­phase voltage, ­kV MVASC = 3-phase ­short-­circuit, ­MVA ISC = short-­circuit current, A ­ ZSC is a phasor quantity, consisting of both resistance and reactance. However, if the ­short-­circuit data contains no phase information, one is usually constrained to assuming that the impedance is purely reactive. This is a reasonably good assumption for industrial power systems, for buses close to the mains, and for most utility systems. When this is not the case, an effort should be made to determine a more realistic resistance value because that will affect the results once capacitors are ­considered.

22_Santoso_Sec22_p1371-1426.indd 1412

23/11/17 11:20 AM

POWER QUALITY AND RELIABILITY   1413 

The inductive reactance portion of the impedance changes linearly with frequency. One common error made by novices in harmonic analysis is to forget to adjust the reactance for frequency. The reactance at the h-th harmonic is determined from the ­fundamental-­impedance reactance, X1, ­by X h = hX1 (22-16)



In most power systems, one can generally assume that the resistance does not change significantly when studying the effects of harmonics less than the ninth. For lines and cables, the resistance varies approximately by the square root of the frequency once skin effect becomes significant in the conductor at a higher frequency. The exception to this rule is with some transformers. Because of stray eddy current losses, the apparent resistance of larger transformers may vary almost proportionately with the frequency. This can have a very beneficial effect on damping of resonance as shown later. In smaller transformers, less than 100 kVA, the resistance of the winding is often so large relative to the other impedances that it swamps out the stray eddy current effects and there is little change in the total apparent resistance until the frequency reaches about 500 Hz. Of course, these smaller transformers may have an X/R ratio of 1.0 to 2.0 at fundamental frequency while large substation transformers might typically be 20 to 30. Therefore, if the bus that is being studied is dominated by transformer impedance rather than line impedance, the system impedance model should be considered more carefully. Neglecting the resistance will generally give a conservatively high prediction of the harmonic ­distortion. At utilization voltages, such as industrial power systems, the equivalent system reactance is often dominated by the service transformer impedance. A good approximation for XSC may be based on the impedance of the service entrance transformer ­only

X SC ≈ Xtx (22-17)

While not precise, this is generally at least 90% of the total impedance and is commonly more. This is usually sufficient to evaluate whether or not there will be a significant harmonic resonance problem. Transformer impedance in ohms can be determined from the percent impedance, Ztx, found on the nameplate ­by  kV 2  Xtx =  × Ztx (%) (22-18)  MVA3φ 



where MVA3 f is the kVA rating of the transformer. This assumes that the impedance is predominantly reactive. For example for a 1500 kVA, 6% transformer, the equivalent impedance on the 480 V side ­is  kV 2   0.4802  Xtx =  × Z (%) =   × 0.06 = 0.0092 Ω tx 1.5   MVA3φ 

22.5.16 

Capacitor ­Impedance Shunt capacitors, either at the customer location for power factor correction, or on the distribution system for voltage control, dramatically alter the system impedance variation with frequency. Capacitors do not create harmonics, but severe harmonic distortion can sometimes be attributed to their presence. While the reactance of inductive components increases proportionately to frequency, capacitive reactance, Xc, decreases ­proportionately:

22_Santoso_Sec22_p1371-1426.indd 1413

XC =

1 (22-19) 2π fC

23/11/17 11:20 AM

1414  SECTION TWENTY-TWO

where C is the capacitance in farads. This quantity is seldom readily available for power capacitors, which are rated in terms of kvar or Mvar at a given voltage. The equivalent ­line-­to-­neutral capacitive reactance at fundamental frequency for a capacitor bank can be determined ­by Xc =



kV 2 (22-20) Mvar

For 3-phase banks, use p ­ hase-­to-­phase voltage and the 3-phase reactive power rating. For s­ ingle-­phase units, use the capacitor-can voltage rating and the reactive power rating. For example, for a 3-phase, 1200 kvar, 13.8-kV capacitor bank, the ­positive-­sequence reactance in ohms would ­be

Xc =

kV 2 13.82 = = 158.7 Ω Mvar 1.2

22.5.17  Parallel and Series ­Resonance All circuits containing both capacitance and inductance have one or more natural resonant frequencies. When one of these frequencies corresponds to an exciting frequency being produced by nonlinear loads, harmonic resonance can occur. Voltage and current will be dominated by the resonant frequency and can be highly distorted. Thus, the response of the power system at each harmonic frequency determines the true impact of the nonlinear load on harmonic voltage ­distortion. Resonance can cause nuisance tripping of sensitive electronic loads and high harmonic currents in feeder capacitor banks. In severe cases, capacitors produce audible noise, and they sometimes bulge. To better understand resonance, consider the simple parallel and series cases shown in the ­one-­line diagrams of Fig. 22-38. Parallel resonance occurs when the power system presents a parallel combination of power system inductance and power factor correction capacitors at the nonlinear load. The product of harmonic impedance and injection current produces high harmonic voltages. Series resonance occurs when the system inductance and capacitors are in series, or nearly in series, with respect to the nonlinear load point. For parallel resonance, the highest voltage distortion is at the nonlinear load. However, for series resonance, the highest voltage distortion is at a remote point, perhaps miles away or on an adjacent feeder served by the same substation transformer. Actual feeders can have five or ten shunt capacitors each, so many parallel and series paths exist, making computer simulations necessary to predict distortion levels throughout the f­ eeder.

FIGURE 22-38  Examples of (a) parallel and (b) series ­resonance.

22_Santoso_Sec22_p1371-1426.indd 1414

23/11/17 11:20 AM

POWER QUALITY AND RELIABILITY   1415 

In the simplest parallel resonant cases, such as an industrial facility where the system impedance is dominated by the service transformer, shunt capacitors are located inside the facility, and distances are small. In these cases, the simple parallel scenario shown in Fig. 22-38a often a­ pplies. 22.5.18  Effects of Resistance and Resistive ­Load Determining that the resonant harmonic aligns with a common harmonic source is not always cause for alarm. The damping provided by resistance in the system is often sufficient to prevent catastrophic voltages and currents. Figure 22-39 shows the parallel resonant circuit impedance characteristic for various amounts of resistive load in parallel with the capacitance. As little as 10% resistive loading can have a significant beneficial impact on peak impedance. Likewise, if there is a significant length of lines or cables between the capacitor bus and the nearest upline transformer, the resonance will be suppressed. Lines and cables can add a significant amount of the resistance to the equivalent c­ ircuit.

FIGURE 22-39  Effect of resistive loads on parallel r­ esonance.

Loads and line resistances are the reasons why catastrophic harmonic problems from capacitors on utility distribution feeders are seldom seen. That is not to say that there will not be any harmonic problems due to resonance, but that the problems will generally not cause physical damage to the electrical system components. The most troublesome resonant conditions occur when capacitors are installed on substations buses, either in utility substations or in industrial facilities. In these cases, where the transformer dominates the system impedance and has a high X/R ratio, the relative resistance is low and the corresponding parallel resonant impedance peak is very sharp and high. This is a common cause of capacitor failure, transformer failure, or the failure of load ­equipment. It is a misconception that resistive loads damp harmonics because in the absence of resonance, loads of any kind will have little impact on the harmonic currents and resulting voltage distortion. Most of the current will flow back into the power source. However, it is very appropriate to say that resistive loads will damp resonance, which will lead to a significant reduction in the harmonic d ­ istortion. 22.5.19 

Harmonic ­Impacts Harmonics have a number of undesirable effects on power system components and loads. These fall into two basic categories: ­short-­term and ­long-­term. ­Short-­term effects are usually the most noticeable and are related to excessive voltage distortion. On the other hand, ­long-­term effects often go undetected and are usually related to increased resistive losses or voltage stresses. S­ hort-­term effects can cause nuisance tripping of sensitive loads. Some ­computer-­controlled loads are sensitive to voltage distortion. For example, one documented case showed that a voltage distortion of 5.5% regularly shut down computerized lathes at a large pipe company heat treatment operation. While voltage distortions of 5% are not usually a problem, voltage distortions above 10% will almost always cause significant nuisance tripping or transformer ­overheating.

22_Santoso_Sec22_p1371-1426.indd 1415

23/11/17 11:20 AM

1416  SECTION TWENTY-TWO

Harmonics can degrade meter accuracy. This is especially true with common s­ingle-­phase i­nduction-­disk meters. In general, the meter spins 1% to 2% faster when a customer produces harmonic power. However, the greater issue in metering is the question of how active power, and especially reactive power, should be defined and measured when distortion is present. Debate on these definitions continues ­today. Blown capacitor fuses and failed capacitor cans are also attributed to harmonics. Harmonic voltages produce excessive harmonic currents in capacitors because of the inverse relationship between capacitor impedance and frequency. Voltage distortions of 5% and 10% can easily increase rms currents by 10% to 50%. Capacitors may also fail because of overvoltage stress on dielectrics. A 10% harmonic voltage for any harmonic above the third increases the peak voltage by approximately 10% because the peak of the harmonic usually coincides, or nearly coincides, with the peak of the fundamental v­ oltage. Harmonics can also cause transformer overheating. This usually occurs when a dedicated transformer serves only one large nonlinear load. In such a situation, the transformer must be derated accordingly. Derating to 0.80 of nameplate kVA is ­common. Overloaded neutrals appear to be the most common problems in commercial buildings. In a ­3-­phase, ­four-­wire system, the sum of the 3-phase currents returns through the neutral conductor. Positive and negative sequence components add to zero at the neutral point, but zero sequence components are additive at the ­neutral. 22.5.20  Control of ­Harmonics The two common causes of harmonic problems ­are •  Nonlinear loads injecting excessive harmonic currents •  The interaction between harmonic currents and the system frequency r­ esponse When harmonics become a problem, ­commonly-­employed solutions ­are •  Limit harmonic current injection from nonlinear loads. Transformer connections can be employed to reduce harmonics in a ­3-­phase system by using parallel ­delta-­delta and ­wye-­delta transformers to yield net 12-pulse operation, or delta connected transformers to block triplen ­harmonics. •  Modify system frequency response to avoid adverse interaction with harmonic currents. This can be done by feeder sectionalizing, adding or removing capacitor banks, changing the size of the capacitor banks, adding shunt filters, or adding reactors to detune the system away from harmful ­resonances. •  Filter harmonic currents at the load or on the system with shunt filters, or try to block the harmonic currents produced by loads. There are a number of devices to do this. Their selection is largely dependent on the nature of the problems encountered. Solutions can be as simple as an ­in-­line reactor (i.e., a choke) as in ­PWM-­based adjustable speed drive applications, or as complex as an active f­ ilter.

22.6  ELECTRICAL POWER RELIABILITY AND RECENT BULK POWER ­OUTAGES 22.6.1  Electric Power Distribution Reliability—­General The term reliability in the utility context usually refers to the amount of time end users are totally without power for an extended period of time (i.e., a sustained interruption). Definitions of what constitutes a sustained interruption vary among utilities in the range of 1 to 5 min. This is what many utilities refer to as an “outage.” Current power quality standards efforts are leaning toward calling any interruption of power for longer than 1 min, a sustained interruption. In any case, reliability is affected by the permanent faults on the system that must be repaired before service can be ­restored.

22_Santoso_Sec22_p1371-1426.indd 1416

23/11/17 11:20 AM

POWER QUALITY AND RELIABILITY   1417 

22.6.2  Electric Power Distribution Reliability ­Indices Most commonly used reliability indices for utility distribution systems are defined as ­follows: •  SAIFI: System Average Interruption Frequency ­Index SAIFI represents the average interruption frequency experienced by customers served in the system over a given period of time. It is computed as f­ ollows:



SAIFI =

(no. of customers interrupted)(no. of interruptions) total no. of customers



•  SAIDI: System Average Interruption Duration ­Index SAIDI represents the average interruption duration experienced by customers in the system over a given period of ­time.



SAIDI =

∑ (no. of customers affected)(duration of outage)   total no. of customers



•  CAIFI: Customer Average Interruption Frequency ­Index CAIFI represents average interruption frequency for affected customers. Customers not experiencing interruption are not included in the ­calculation.



CAIFI =

total no. of customer interruptions total no. of customers affected

•  CAIDI: Customer Average Interruption Duration ­Index CAIDI represents the average interruption duration for customers experiencing interruptions. In other words, this is the average restoration time for affected c­ ustomers.



CAIDI =

∑ (customer interruption durations) total no. of customer interruptions



•  ASAI: Average System Availability ­Index ASAI represents the average system availability over a given observation period, which is usually a year (or 8760 h). The index is given in ­percent.

ASAI =

∑ customer hours service availability customer hours service demand

22.6.3  Major Bulk Electric Power ­Outages Since the electric power industry was born in the early twentieth century, there have been several notable major bulk power outages. Most common causes of these outages are errors in protective device system design, overgrown vegetation, loss of system awareness due to failure of alarm systems, and a combination of unexpected events, whether they are natural or man-made. Summary of these bulk power outages are compiled from various sources and presented in the next ­paragraphs.

22_Santoso_Sec22_p1371-1426.indd 1417

23/11/17 11:20 AM

1418  SECTION TWENTY-TWO

22.6.4  Great Northeast Blackout of ­1965 The 1965 power outage started on November 9 at about 5:15 p.m. in Ontario, Canada. It cascaded down through the power system to the majority of New York, Connecticut, Massachusetts, Rhode Island, and some portions of northern Pennsylvania, and New Jersey. There were about 30 million customers out of service for up to 13 h. The power outage left 20 GW of load demand unserved. The outage was triggered by a backup protective relay in opening one of five 230-kW lines delivering power from the Adam Beck Station No. 2 to the Toronto load area. System operators were not aware that the backup relay was set to take the line out of service when the line loading exceeded 375 MW. This relay setting was below the unusually high line loadings of recent months. Higher than normal line loadings was imposed due to higher than normal import from the United States to cover nearby Lakeview power plant (west of Toronto) outage. Upon opening the 230-kV line, the remaining four 230-kV lines were also tripped out successively within 21⁄2 s. Subsequently, two key east–west 345-kV lines between Rochester and Syracuse tripped out due to line instability. Several lower voltage lines tripped open along with 5 of 11 generation units at the St. Lawrence (Massena) Station. Losses of major transmission lines caused 10 generators at Adam Beck Station to shut down due to low governor oil pressure. By 5:30 p.m., the majority of northeast was without power. The service was, however, restored by 4:44 a.m. the next day in Manhattan [11]. 22.6.5  New York Blackout of ­1977 The event started on July 13 at about 8:37 p.m., when a lightning stroke caused a phase B to ground fault on both of a d ­ ouble-­circuit 345-kV transmission line between Buchanan South and Millwood West Substations [11,12,14]. The tripping of circuit breakers at Buchanan South Circuit rings isolated Indian Point No. 3 generating unit without a transmission path to any load. The plant tripped off line and shut down causing a generation loss of 883 MW. A coordination error in the protective system played a critical role in the subsequent chain of events in which a transfer trip signal to Ladentown was initiated to open the 345-kV line from Buchanan South to Ladentown. A subsequent lightning stroke also caused a t­rip ­out of two more 345-kV lines between Sprain Brook and Buchanan North, and Sprain Brook and Millwood West. The latter was restored to service in about 2 s. However, the Sprain Brook to Buchanan North 345-kV was out of service. Losses of key transmission lines eventually forced the electrical system to separate and collapse. The power outage affected 9 million people. However, it was limited to New York City alone. Unlike the 1965 blackout, the 1977 event was marred by violence and looting [13]. Timeline of key events in the total collapse of the ConEd system are as follows [12,14]: •  At 8:37:17 p.m., July 13, 1997, two 345-kV lines connecting Buchanan South to Millwood West were each subjected to a phase B fault to ground as a result of a severe lightning ­stroke. •  The tripping of circuit breakers at the Buchanan South ring bus, isolated the Indian Point No. 3 generating unit from any load, and the unit tripped for a loss of 883 M ­ W. •  Loss of the ring bus isolated the 345-kV tie to Ladentown, which had been importing 427 MW, with a total loss now of 1310 ­MW. •  At 8:55:53 p.m., about 181⁄2 min after the first incident, a severe lightning stroke caused the ­trip-­out of two 345-kV lines, which connect Sprain Brook to Buchanan North, and Sprain Brook to Millwood West. These two 345-kV lines share common towers between Millwood West and Sprain Brook. One line (Millwood West to Sprain Brook) was restored to service in about 2 s. The failure of the other line to reclose isolated the last ConEd interconnection to the ­northwest. •  The resulting surge of power from the northwest, caused the t­ rip-­out of the line between Pleasant Valley and Millwood West (a bent contact on one of the relays at Millwood West caused the improper action). •  At 9:19:11 p.m., a 345-kV line, Leeds Substation to Pleasant Valley, tripped as a result of a phase B fault to ground (fault probably caused by line sag to a tree because of the excessive overload imposed on the line).

22_Santoso_Sec22_p1371-1426.indd 1418

23/11/17 11:20 AM

POWER QUALITY AND RELIABILITY   1419 

•  At 9:19:53 p.m., the 345-kV/138-kV transformer at Pleasant Valley, tripped on overcurrent relay and left ConEd with three remaining ­interconnections. •  At 9:22:11 p.m., the Jamaica/Valley Stream tie was opened manually by the Long Island Lighting Co. system operator after obtaining the approval of the pool d ­ ispatcher. •  About 7 min later, the ­tap-­changing mechanism failed on the Goethals ­phase-­angle regulating transformer resulting in the trip of the Linden/Goethals tie to PJM, which was carrying 1150 MW to ­ConEd. •  The two remaining external 138-kV ties to ConEd tripped on overload isolating the ConEd s­ ystem. 22.6.6  The Northwestern Blackout of July ­1996 This outage occurred on July 2 at about 2:24 p.m. when a tree fault tripped a 345-kV taking power from Jim Bridger power plant in southwest Wyoming to southeast Idaho [10]. Protective devices detected the fault and ­de-­energized the line. However, due to a protection coordination error, a parallel 345-kV line was also tripped. The loss of two 345-kV line severely limited power transfers from Jim Bridger plant causing generator protective devices to trip two 500-MW generators to maintain the system stability. With two generators out, frequency in the entire western interconnection began to decline forcing some customers out of service. This move was not successful and the system disintegrated into five islands. About 2 million customers were interrupted for up to several hours with about 11,850 MW of loss of load ­demand. 22.6.7  The Northwestern Blackout of August 1996 This blackout occurred on August 10 when ­Keeler-­Allston 500-kV transmission line sagged into a grove of trees [10]. Prior to the disturbance, the Northwest area was importing about 2300 MW from Canada due to excellent hydroelectric conditions that lead to high electricity transfers. This and other conditions, that is, hot weather, maintenance outage of a transformer that connects a static var compensator to a 500-kV line in Portland, and/or failure to trim trees, led to a cascading outage. A series of tree fault disturbances finally broke the western interconnection area into four islands, interrupting services to 7.5 million customers for up to 9 h ­. 22.6.8  The Great Northeastern Power Blackout of 2003 [15, 16] This outage on August 14, 2003 is by far the largest and most severe among all major outages. It affected 50 million customers for up to 2 days in two Canadian provinces and eight northeastern U.S. states. The outage caused an estimated $4 to $8 billion in lost economic a­ ctivity. The outage was preceded by an abnormal computer software operation, a series of generator tripping, and line outages. This series of events is considered as a precursor to the cascading outage. MISO’s (Midwest Independent Service Operator) state estimator software solution did not converge and produced a solution with a high mismatch due to outdated input data in the state estimator. Eastlake No. 5 generating unit tripped along with two other units (Conesville and Greenwood) causing a severe shortage in reactive power supply. Adequate reactive power supply is an important requirement for high-voltage long-distance electric power transmission. At about 2:02 p.m., Stuart–Atlanta 345 kV in southwestern Ohio tripped due to contact with trees causing a short circuit to ground and locked out. This situation was exacerbated by the loss of key alarm functions in FirstEnergy’s (Ohio) control room. The controller also lost a series of other important computer functions. Unfortunately, FirstEnergy operators were unaware of computer failures, thus they lost situational awareness of their s­ ystem. Precipitating events that lead to the cascading outage began around 3:00 p.m., when three key 345-kV transmission lines into northern Ohio from eastern Ohio tripped out, Harding– Chamberlain (3:05 p.m.), Hanna–Juniper (3:32 p.m.), and Start–South Canton (3:41 p.m.).

22_Santoso_Sec22_p1371-1426.indd 1419

23/11/17 11:20 AM

1420  SECTION TWENTY-TWO

300 250

60

Total no. of tripped lines and transf. Accumulated no. of tripped gen. plants Accumulated no. of GWs of gen. lost

50

40 200 30 150

GW lost

Number of lines, transf., or units tripped

350

20 100 10

50 0 16:05

16:06

16:07

16:08

16:09

16:10

16:11

0 16:12

FIGURE 22-40  Accumulated line and generator trips during the cascade [23].

They were all tripped out due to tree faults caused by overgrown vegetation. With these three 345-kV lines out, power flowed over through other remaining lines including the underlying 138-kV system. This redirection of flow caused severe overloading in 138-kV lines. As a result, between 3:39 p.m. and 3:58 p.m., seven 138-kV lines tripped. At 3:59 p.m., West Akron bus tripped due to breaker failure. This event caused another five 138 kV-lines to trip. A few minutes later, between 4:00 p.m. and 4:08 p.m., another four 138-kV lines tripped. Losses of these transmission lines disconnected northern Ohio from Eastern Ohio. The last 345-kV line between Sammis and Star tripped at 4:06 p.m. The loss of this line left northern Ohio without any 345-kV path to eastern Ohio, and initiated a cascading blackout across the northeast U.S. and Canada. Within 7 min after the loss of 345-kV Sammis–Start line, more than 508 generating units at 265 power plants had been lost, and close to 300 lines and transformers ­tripped. 22.6.9  Power Quality Characteristics in the Great Northeastern Power Blackout of ­2003 A major power quality characteristic of the blackout was sagging voltage when transmission lines experienced fault clearing operations (opening and reclosing) due to tree ­contacts. An 8-cycle voltage sag was measured at an industrial site in Cleveland at about 3:45 p.m. This was when a series of 138-kV lines experienced tree faults and attempted to isolate them (Fig. 22-41). This particular fault was detected and cleared promptly, but the voltage recovery at the site appears to be slow, suggesting that the system was now much weaker than previously. At least one more line was out of ­service. Shortly after 4:00 p.m. there was another instantaneous voltage sag recorded (Fig. 22-42). The voltage drops abruptly and remains at the lower level. Phase unbalance develops, suggesting either the presence of a remote fault or that the system has become very weak due to the tripping of another ­line.

22_Santoso_Sec22_p1371-1426.indd 1420

23/11/17 11:20 AM

POWER QUALITY AND RELIABILITY   1421 

480

V

460 440 420 400

0

0.05

0.1

0.15

0.2

0.25

Time (s)

FIGURE 22-41  Instantaneous sag on phase C captured at service entrance of Cleveland industrial facility at around 3:45 p.m. likely due to a fault on a transmission line. Voltage recovers slowly after fault is cleared, suggesting a weakened system. (Courtesy of Electrotek Concepts and Dranetz.)

400

Base: 391.7 Vpk

200 V

0

−200 −400

0

0.1

08/14/2003 16:23:17.486

0.2 Time (s) Instantaneous sag

0.3

0.4

Dranetz/Electrotek concepts®

Main service entrance

320

Base: 277.0 Vrms

V

300 280 260 240

0

0.1

0.2 Time (s)

0.3

0.4

FIGURE 22-42  3-Phase instantaneous sag shortly after 4 p.m. on August 14. (Courtesy of Electrotek Concepts and Dranetz.)

22_Santoso_Sec22_p1371-1426.indd 1421

23/11/17 11:20 AM

1422  SECTION TWENTY-TWO

Manhattan office building - 8/14/2003 16:14:32.248 Va

Vb

Vc

20

Voltage (%)

10 0 −10 −20

2.5

0.0

5.0

7.5 Time (cycles)

Electrotek/EPRI

10.0

12.5

15.0 PQView®

FIGURE 22-43  Waveform captured as the grid collapsed in New York City showing the instability of the system. (Courtesy of Electrotek Concepts and Dranetz.)

A short time later (accuracy of the time stamp is uncertain), the disturbance in the voltage shown in Fig. 22-43 was recorded in an office building in downtown Manhattan. This waveform is consistent with that of a power system that is going ­unstable. Waveforms of this type can be observed in system dynamics simulations for buses in the weaker part of the system as it begins to move relative to a more distant part of the system that remains in synchronism. A “beating” frequency develops as the two interconnected systems operate at different frequencies. In this case, it would appear that the system containing this power monitor had drifted by approximately 2 Hz from the rest of the system. Once this occurred, the power system supplying Manhattan detected the instability and immediately shut down the generators and separated from surrounding power ­systems. Several of the neighboring systems successfully separated and remained stable throughout the blackout period despite briefly experiencing voltage waveforms like this while they were still interconnected with the part of the system that was ­collapsing. Once the massive amount of load in the affected areas was lost, the entire eastern interconnection experienced a jump in frequency of approximately 0.2 Hz. This could be seen over a large geographic area (Fig. 22-44). After a few minutes, generator controls brought the average frequency back to 60 Hz and few energy users outside the affected area realized that anything had happened. While large in terms of system dynamics issues, this frequency change is inconsequential to most l­oads. Figure 22-45 shows the complete rms voltage trend for the Manhattan site from the beginning of the blackout shortly after 4:00 p.m. on August 14 until the power was restored at 5:30 a.m. on August ­15. 22.6.10  Blackouts Due to Natural Disasters In addition to error in protection coordination and overgrown vegetation, widespread outages can arise from major failures of power apparatus and equipment during natural disasters (earthquakes

22_Santoso_Sec22_p1371-1426.indd 1422

23/11/17 11:20 AM

FIGURE 22-44  System frequency jump when the major systems separated was seen in locations as far away as Knoxville, TN. (Courtesy of Electrotek Concepts and Dranetz.) Service entrance of Manhattan office building 3-Phase RMS voltage Min[V RMS A] (%)

Avg[V RMS A] (%)

Max[V RMS A] (%)

Min[V RMS B] (%)

Avg[V RMS B] (%)

Max[V RMS B] (%)

Min[V RMS C] (%)

Avg[V RMS C] (%)

Max[V RMS C] (%)

100

75

50

25

0 6PM 14 Thu Aug. 2003 Electrotek/EPRI

9PM

15 Fri Time

3AM

6AM PQView ®

FIGURE 22-45  Rms voltage trend showing the min/max/avg of all three phases for the entire duration of the blackout at a Manhattan office building. (Courtesy of Electrotek Concepts and Dranetz.) 1423

22_Santoso_Sec22_p1371-1426.indd 1423

23/11/17 11:20 AM

1424  SECTION TWENTY-TWO

and tsunamis) and extreme weather conditions (ice storms, hurricanes, and flooding). The 9.0 magnitude Tohoku undersea earthquake and the ensuing tsunami on March 11, 2011 in northeast Honshu, Japan resulted in catastrophic failures at the Fukishima nuclear power plant. A total of eleven reactors tripped offline causing a loss of 9.7 GW of generation [17]. Rolling outages of a few hours (up to 5 h) for a few months were employed to avoid a complete power outage. Another example of rolling outage, but on a much lesser scale, occurred in the ERCOT service area. ERCOT is the Electric Reliability Council of Texas, an independent system operator managing about 85% of Texas’ electric load over 40,500 mi of transmission lines with more than 550 generation units for a total of 78 GW capacity. Its service area covers 75% of the land area of the State of Texas. Significantly colder than usual weather, in the tens of degrees of Fahrenheit, affected much of Texas between February 1 and 4 of 2011. The winter freeze caused a widespread failure of generation units primarily due to improper or non-existent weatherization equipment. In the morning of February 2, 2011, ERCOT experienced more than 7 GW of generation loss. According to the report submitted by Texas Public Utility Commission [18], a total of 152 generators experienced forced outages over the 4-day period. An increase in load demand coupled with the loss of generation triggered rolling outages as long as one to several hours on February 2 and 3. A new all-time record for winter peak demand of 56,334 MW occurred in the evening of February 2. Figure 22-46 shows the locations of customers experiencing outages in the greater Dallas and Fort Worth area in the afternoon of February 3.

FIGURE 22-46  Locations of customers without power during the rolling outages in the afternoon of February 3, 2011.

22_Santoso_Sec22_p1371-1426.indd 1424

23/11/17 11:20 AM

POWER QUALITY AND RELIABILITY   1425 

22.7 REFERENCES 1. TC77WG6 (Secretary) 110-R5, Draft Classification of Electromagnetic Environments, January 1­ 991. 2. IEEE Std 1159-1995, Recommended Practice on Monitoring Electric P ­ ower. 3. IEC 61000-2-1(1990-05), “Description of the environment—Electromagnetic environment for low frequency conducted disturbances and signaling in public power supply systems,” Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC)—Part 2 Environment, Section 1, 1­ 990. 4. IEEE Std 100-1992, IEEE Standard Dictionary of Electrical and Electronic T ­ erms. 5. IEC 61000-4-30 77A/356/CDV, Power Quality Measurement M ­ ethods. 6. IEC 61000-4-15, Flicker Meter—Functional and Design S­ pecifications. 7. Lamoree, J., Mueller, D., Vinett, P., and Jones, W., “Voltage Sag Analysis Case Studies,” 1993 IEEE I&CPS Conference, St. Petersburg, F ­ L. 8. Dugan, R. C., Ray, L. A., Sabin, D. D., et al., “Impact of Fast Tripping of Utility Breakers on Industrial Load Interruptions,” Conference Record of the 1994 IEEE/IAS Annual Meeting, Vol III, Denver, October 1994, pp. 2326–­2333. 9. Goedde, G. L., Dugan, R. C., and Rowe, L. D., “Full Scale Lightning Surge Tests of Distribution Transformers and Secondary Systems,” Proceedings of the 1991 IEEE PES Transmission and Distribution Conference, Dallas, September, 1991, pp. 691–­97. 10. Consortium for Electric Reliability Technology Solutions, “Review of Recent Reliability Issues and System Events,” Grid of the Future White Paper, December, 1­ 999. 11. Website http://blackout.gmu.edu, accessed on February 24, 2­ 005. 12. U.S. Department of Energy, The Con Edison Power Failure of July 13 and 14, 1977, Final Report, June 1­ 978. 13. TIME, “Night of Terror,” July 25, 1977, pp. 12–­26. 14. Lesson Learned From the 1977 Blackout Case Study 1—Sequence of Events, www.blackout.gmu.edu/ archive/pdf/lessons_learned_77.pdf, accessed on February 24, 2­ 005. 15. North American Electric Reliability Council, Technical Analysis of the August 14, 2003, Blackout: What Happened, Why, and What Did We Learn, July 13, 2­ 004. 16. U.S.–Canada Power System Outage Task Force, Final Report on the August 14, 2003, Blackout in the United States and Canada: Causes and Recommendation, April 2­ 004. 17. International Energy Agency, Impact of Earthquakes and Tsunamis on Energy Sectors in Japan, http://www.iea.org/files/japanfactsheet.pdf. 18. Reports of the Electric Reliability Council of Texas, Project 27706, to Public Utility Commission of Texas, ERCOT’s second supplemental response to Commission’s request for information dated February 7, 2011, http://www.ercot.com/content/news/presentations/2011/Forced%20Outage%20List%20-%20PUC% 20Filing%2027706.pdf.

22_Santoso_Sec22_p1371-1426.indd 1425

23/11/17 11:20 AM

This page intentionally left blank

22_Santoso_Sec22_p1371-1426.indd 1426

23/11/17 11:20 AM

23



LIGHTNING AND OVERVOLTAGE PROTECTION 23.1 INTRODUCTION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1427 23.2 BASIC CONCEPTS AND DEFINITIONS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1428 23.3 MECHANISMS AND CHARACTERISTICS OF LIGHTNING. . . . . . . . . . 1433 23.4 POWER SYSTEM OVERVOLTAGES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1441 23.5 ANALYSIS METHODS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1449 23.6 OVERVOLTAGE PROTECTION DEVICES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1464 23.7 OVERVOLTAGE PROTECTION (INSULATION) COORDINATION. . . . 1476 23.8 MONTE CARLO SIMULATION–BASED METHODS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1494 23.9 LIGHTNING ELIMINATION DEVICES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1497 23.10 ACKNOWLEDGMENTS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1498 23.11 BIBLIOGRAPHY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1499

23.1 INTRODUCTION Temporary overvoltages in power systems occur from a variety of causes such as faults, switching, and lightning. By far, the most severe overvoltages result from lightning strokes to the power system. Quite often, lightning overvoltages will be very high, resulting in insulation breakdown of power apparatus with destructive results. It is therefore imperative that power systems be designed in such a way that expected overvoltages be below the withstand capability of power apparatus insulation. Many times, this basic requirement is translated into excessive cost. For this reason, one seeks a compromise in which power systems are designed in such a way that the possibility of destructive failure of power apparatus due to lightning overvoltages is minimized. This procedure is based on coordinating the expected overvoltages and the withstand capability of power apparatus. Two steps are typically involved: (1) proper design of the power system to control and minimize the possible overvoltages and (2) application of overvoltage protective devices. Collectively, the two steps are called overvoltage protection or insulation coordination. The importance of overvoltage protection cannot be emphasized enough. First it affects system reliability, which translates into economics. Traditionally, overvoltage protection methods were guided by the objective to maximize system reliability with reasonable investment cost. In this sense, transient overvoltages which do not lead to interruptions are acceptable and short-duration interruptions are tolerable. Recently, however, with the introduction of sensitive electronic equipment, such as digital controllers, relays, recorders, power devices with power electronic interfaces such as PV, wind, etc., new concerns have been raised. Lightning overvoltages can damage electronic equipment leading to outages and downtimes. In addition, follow-up power faults (initiated by lightning overvoltages) create power frequency undervoltages and overvoltages (sags and swells), which can also trigger load disruption. Any disturbance, damage, downtime, etc. is characterized as a power quality issue. It is transforming the practices for overvoltage protection. While the application of overvoltage protection devices is pertinent, more and more emphasis is placed on design procedures to minimize the possible overvoltages and control the sources of

Grateful acknowledgment is given to a past contributor to this section: A. P. (Sakis) Meliopoulos.

1427

23_Santoso_Sec23_p1427-1502.indd 1427

23/11/17 10:48 AM

1428        SECTION TWENTY-THREE

disturbances. An attempt has been made in this section to provide a balanced treatment of overvoltage protection in view of present-day concerns. The subject of lightning and overvoltage protection is rather complex. A thorough treatment requires good understanding of many related subjects. First, the mechanisms by which lightning is generated and how its pertinent characteristics are related to power systems must be well understood. Second, the response of power systems to lightning and other causes of overvoltages must be studied. Analysis methods to study the phenomena are indispensable tools, which provide the basis for proper selection of design options. Invariably, overvoltages can be minimized, but they cannot be eliminated. As a result, power systems must be protected against overvoltages using overvoltage protection devices (surge arresters). In recent years, major breakthroughs have occurred in protective device technology. Effective protection requires a deep understanding of the capabilities of present technology as well as its limitations.

23.2  BASIC CONCEPTS AND DEFINITIONS Electric power systems are subjected to external surges (lightning) as well as internally generated surges (switching), which may result in temporary high voltages. To maintain a highly reliable system, protection against these overvoltages is needed. This need is dictated by the fact that the insulation of power equipment (which may be air, oil, SF6, etc.) is subjected to breakdown if sufficiently high voltage is applied. This protection involves a coordinated design of the power system itself and placement of proper protection devices at strategic locations for the purpose of suppressing overvoltages and avoiding or minimizing insulation failures. Coordinated design involves these items: •  Effective grounding techniques •  Use of shielding conductors •  Preinsertion resistors during switching •  Switching angle control among breaker poles •  Use of surge capacitors •  Use of surge arresters Protection devices include spark gaps and various designs of surge arresters. The basic objective of overvoltage protection of power systems is to avoid insulation breakdown and associated outages or damage to equipment. This means that the design objective is to make sure that the actual overvoltages reaching a device should be lower than the breakdown voltage of the insulation. The most common insulators used in power system apparatus and their characteristics are listed in Table 23-1.

TABLE 23-1  Common Insulators in Power Apparatus Breakdown, Insulator MV/m

Resistivity, W ⋅ m

Relative permitivity

Air 3 r = ∞ ϵr = 1 Oil 10 104 × 1010 2.2 SF6 15 at 1 atm 59 at 5 atm Mica 100 1011–1015 4.5–7.5 XLPE 50 MV/m 1011–1014 2.8–3.5 EPR 60 MV/m 1011–1014 2.5–3.5 Porcelain 10 3 × 1012 5.7 Glass … 1012 4–7

23_Santoso_Sec23_p1427-1502.indd 1428

23/11/17 10:48 AM

LIGHTNING AND OVERVOLTAGE PROTECTION        1429 

In general, in terms of potential damage to equipment, the insulation of power apparatus can be classified into external and internal as follows: •  External insulation Air Porcelain Glass •  Internal insulation Oil SF6 Mica XLPE EPR The effects of external insulation breakdown are not as destructive as internal insulation breakdown. The reason is that external insulation is, in general, self-healing (self-restoring) after the cause of breakdown (overvoltage) ceases to exist. On the other hand, internal insulation breakdown generally results in permanent damage to the equipment and possibly catastrophic failure. These facts dictate different approaches for external and internal insulation protection. For external insulation protection, the objective is to minimize the expected number of insulation breakdowns subject to economic constraints. In this sense, many sophisticated approaches have been developed, which balance system reliability (which is mainly related to insulation breakdowns) versus cost. Because many of the exogenous parameters, such as lightning strength and soil parameters are statistical in nature, the methodologies use statistical approaches. For internal insulation protection, deterministic methods are preferred where the objective is to design for zero insulation breakdowns. The above simplistic characterization of external and internal insulation is not always apparent in power apparatus. Specifically, the insulation of a specific power apparatus may be complex. For example, consider a transformer. The windings of the transformer may be submerged in oil (the dielectric is oil) while the terminals are exposed to air through the bushings (the dielectric is the air). When considering withstand capability of a power apparatus, we are not concerned with which dielectric will break first, although this is part of the design process. But rather we are concerned with the question of at what voltage the insulation (any part) will break down. Because insulation breakdown depends on voltage waveform as well as on some other factors, the following definitions, which have been taken from the ANSI Std C92.1, apply: Withstand Voltage. The voltage that electrical equipment is capable of withstanding without failure or disruptive discharge when tested under specified conditions. Insulation Level. An insulation strength expressed in terms of a withstand voltage (typically 10% less than the withstand voltage). Transient Insulation Level (TIL). An insulation level expressed in terms of the crest value of the withstand voltage for a specified transient wave shape, for example, lightning or a switching impulse. Lightning Impulse Insulation Level. An insulation level expressed in terms of the crest value of a lightning impulse withstand voltage. Switching Impulse Insulation Level. An insulation level expressed in terms of the crest value of a switching impulse withstand voltage. Basic Lightning Impulse Insulation Level (BIL). A specific insulation level expressed in terms of the crest value of a standard lightning impulse. Basic Switching Impulse Insulation Level (BSL). A specific insulation level expressed in terms of the crest value of a standard switching impulse. Note that two of the most commonly used measures, the basic lightning impulse insulation level and the basic switching impulse insulation level, are the most widely used values to characterize the

23_Santoso_Sec23_p1427-1502.indd 1429

23/11/17 10:48 AM

1430        SECTION TWENTY-THREE

80

80

60

60

Current

100

Current

100

40

40 20

20 0

0

10

20 30 Time (microseconds) (a)

40

0 100 m

50

80

80

60

60

Current

100

Current

100

40 20 0

1

100 10 Time (microseconds) (b)

1k

10

1k 100 Time (microseconds) (d)

10 k

40 20

0

500

2000 1000 1500 Time (microseconds) (c)

2500

0

1

Current (kA)

0

–40

–80

–120

0

20

40 60 Time (microseconds) (e)

80

100

FIGURE 23-1  Standard waveform: (a) standard lightning impulse, linear-linear scale; (b) standard lightning impulse, linearlog scale; (c) standard switching impulse, linear-linear scale; (d) standard switching impulse, linear-log scale; (e) example or actual lightning current.

23_Santoso_Sec23_p1427-1502.indd 1430

23/11/17 10:48 AM

LIGHTNING AND OVERVOLTAGE PROTECTION        1431 

insulation of power apparatus. Note that they are defined in terms of two specific waveforms: (1) the standard lightning impulse and (2) the standard switching impulse. The definitions of these waveforms are Standard Lightning Impulse. A full impulse having a front (rise) time of 1.2 ms and a time to half value of 50 ms. It is described as a 1.2/50 impulse. (See American National Standard Measurement of Voltage in Dielectric Tests, C68. 1.) Standard Switching Impulse. A full impulse having a front (rise) time of 250 ms and a time to half value of 2500 ms. It is described as a 250/2500 impulse. (See American National Standard C68.1.) These waveforms are illustrated in Fig. 23-1. The standard impulses were introduced because they remotely resemble lightning and switching waveforms, and they can be easily generated in a laboratory via an impulse generator. The basic (singlestage) structure of an impulse generator is illustrated in Fig. 23-2a. By stacking many basic structures together (as shown in Fig. 23-2b), one can create an impulse generator capable of generating an output impulse many million volts in crest. The impulse voltage withstand of a power apparatus is strongly dependent on the duration of the impulse voltage. The time dependence is mainly due to the fact that arc generation involves an electron avalanche which takes some time to form. The full development of an arc across an insulator is classified as a breakdown. The time to breakdown is normally quantified with a volt-time characteristic. This characteristic can be determined by applying impulses across an insulator of increasing magnitude and recording the voltage and time at which breakdown occurred. For self-restoring

FIGURE 23-2  Impulse generator: (a) single-stage; (b) multiple-stage.

23_Santoso_Sec23_p1427-1502.indd 1431

23/11/17 10:48 AM

1432        SECTION TWENTY-THREE

FIGURE 23-3  Determination of the volt-time curve of insulation breakdown.

insulation, this test is relatively simple and is illustrated in Fig. 23-3. In this way, volt-time curves for all insulators in usage have been determined. Unfortunately, the withstand voltage of non-selfrestoring insulation cannot be readily determined without destroying the sample. This means that determining the volt-time curve of non-self-restoring insulation is a practical impossibility. For this reason, the methods for determining withstand voltage for internal insulation are different. Specifically, internal insulation is designed for a specific withstand capability, the design withstand. The manufacturer must guarantee a certain withstand at which the insulation, if tested, will not fail. This is the tested withstand and it is normally lower than the design withstand. Apparently, the actual withstand cannot be known without destroying the sample. The actual withstand is definitely higher than the tested withstand and probably higher than the design withstand. There is another issue related to the fact that the withstand voltage depends on many other factors that exhibit random variations. Some of them are •  Insulation geometry and smoothness of surfaces •  Insulation contamination •  Atmospheric conditions •  Voltage polarity It is a practical impossibility to quantify the effects of all variables on voltage withstand. For this reason, voltage withstand is described in statistical terms. In this sense, the following definitions apply with reference to Fig. 23-3: Critical flashover (CFO) is the crest voltage of an applied impulse wave that will cause flashover on the tail of the wave 50% of the time and no flashover the other 50% of the time. Critical withstand is the highest crest voltage insulation can take without flashover under specified conditions—usually less than 1% probability of flashover. Rated withstand is the crest voltage that insulation is required to withstand without flashover when tested by established standards under specified conditions (usually 5% to 10% less than critical withstand).

23_Santoso_Sec23_p1427-1502.indd 1432

23/11/17 10:48 AM

LIGHTNING AND OVERVOLTAGE PROTECTION        1433 

In summary, in this subsection we reviewed several basic concepts and definitions, which are useful in the process of designing overvoltage protection systems.

23.3  MECHANISMS AND CHARACTERISTICS OF LIGHTNING Introduction.  Atmospheric electrical discharges known as lightning or thunderbolts (from cloud to cloud or cloud to ground) have captured the imagination and fear of the human race since ancient times. The ancient Greeks believed that lightning was Zeus’ tool to punish human misbehavior or to demonstrate his anger. It was not until Benjamin Franklin that the first scientific inquiry occurred into the phenomenon of lightning. Since that time, lightning has been extensively studied and many theories have been developed, which reasonably explain the phenomenon. In addition to these theories, there exists an enormous amount of measured data of lightning characteristics. These data are useful for design of protection schemes against lightning. This subsection presents a brief overview of the theory of thundercloud formation and lightning, the characteristics of lightning, and describes existing relevant data. The Electrification of Thunderclouds.  The cause of lightning is separation and accumulation of electrical charges in clouds via certain microphysical and macrophysical phenomena. This electrification results in electric field intensities high enough to cause air breakdown and subsequent development of lightning. To explain these phenomena, certain theories have been developed. The most useful are the precipitation and convection theories and later improvements, most notably the charge-reversal temperature theory. Understanding of these theories is helpful in the design of protection systems against lightning. A brief description of the cloud electrification theories is provided in this subsection. The precipitation theory, postulated as early as 1885 by physicists Elster and Geitel, is based on the observation that large water droplets accelerate toward ground because of gravity, while smaller water droplets (mist) remain suspended in air or rise as warmer air moves upward. Collisions between large water droplets and mist of water droplets and possibly ice crystals in the colder altitudes result in transfer of a net negative charge to the large water droplets. As they move toward lower altitudes (by gravity), they cause a net negative charge in the lower part of the cloud. Conservation of charge requires that the upper part of the cloud be positively charged, resulting in a dipole structure in the thundercloud. A simplified illustration of the process is given in Fig. 23-4.

FIGURE 23-4  Illustration of the precipitation theory of cloud electrification: (a) separation of the charge due to collisions; (b) cloud electrification due to precipitation of charged water droplets.

23_Santoso_Sec23_p1427-1502.indd 1433

23/11/17 10:48 AM

1434        SECTION TWENTY-THREE

The convection theory, which was formulated much later, is based on transfer of charged particles from one location of a cloud to another by the upward and downward drafts in the cloud. The theory suggests that the charged particles are generated by two mechanisms: (1) cosmic rays impinge on air molecules and ionize them, resulting in two ions, one positively charged, the other negatively charged; and (2) high-intensity electric fields around sharp objects on the earth’s surface produce corona discharges, which result in positively charged ions. The positive ions are transported to higher altitudes by the upward draft in the cloud. On the other hand, the negative ions attach themselves to water droplets and ice particles, which move to lower altitudes due to gravity or downward drafts. The net result is a dipole structure in the thundercloud. A simplified illustration of the process is given in Fig. 23-5.

FIGURE 23-5  Illustration of the convection theory of cloud electrification.

Precipitation and convection occur in a thundercloud simultaneously. Yet the two theories are distinct and independent. Both theories postulate that the thundercloud is a dipole with the negative pole near the earth, that is, negative dipole. Measurements made by Wilson and later by Simpson of the polarity of the dipole resulted in conflicting conclusions which generated debate and further research. Specifically, Wilson’s measurements indicate that the thundercloud is a negative dipole (negative charge at the lower part of the cloud) while Simpson’s measurements indicated a positive dipole. It took five decades of additional experimentation and measurements to resolve this apparent conflict. Today’s most complete theory for lightning phenomena has established the fact that the structure of a thundercloud is tripolar, not bipolar. This structure allows the understanding of both Wilson’s and Simpson’s conclusions. Specifically, an electric tripole of the size of a thundercloud observed from a single specific point will appear as a dipole. Depending on the point of observation one may conclude that it is a negative or positive dipole. Apparently, Wilson and Simpson made their measurements from different observation points. Their measurements were correct but because Wilson made the measurements from a distant point he concluded that the thundercloud is a negative dipole, while Simpson made his measurements from a point underneath the head of the cloud and concluded that the thundercloud is a positive dipole. Both theories, precipitation and convection, do not completely explain all phenomena occurring in a thundercloud. For example, it has been observed from studies that larger droplets, when they

23_Santoso_Sec23_p1427-1502.indd 1434

23/11/17 10:48 AM

LIGHTNING AND OVERVOLTAGE PROTECTION        1435 

break, acquire positive charge on aggregate. This leads to the hypothesis that the positive charge is due to large droplets that break as they accelerate toward ground. However, this hypothesis is not totally true because it does not explain the fact that precipitation particles below the negative charge carry much greater positive charge than those produced by the droplet fragmentation process. Another hypothesis was based on ice particles accelerating toward ground—as the ice particles reach lower altitudes, they melt and tend to acquire positive charges, which explains the existence of positive charge at altitudes below 4 km. However, this hypothesis still does not explain the existence of positive charges at higher altitudes. Recent measurements and observations in the past three decades resulted in another hypothesis which explains the tripole nature of a thundercloud. This is the so-called charge-reversal hypothesis, which states that when graupel particles collide with ice crystals, the charge transferred to a graupel particle is dependent on the temperature. At temperatures above a certain value, which is called the charge-reversal temperature, the transferred charge is positive. The exact value of the charge-reversal temperature is being debated, but it is believed to be around -15°C. The process is illustrated in Fig. 23-6 in a simplified manner. Considering the fact that the temperature of the atmosphere is -15°C at an approximate altitude of 6 km, this means that due to collisions of graupel particles and ice crystals, the thundercloud will be, on aggregate, negatively charged for altitudes above 6 km and positively charged below 6 km. The situation is illustrated in Fig. 23-7. This hypothesis has been verified in the laboratory and explains the levels of negative and positive charges in a thundercloud. Yet, the exact microphysics of this phenomenon are practically unknown.

FIGURE 23-6  Explanation of the charge-reversal temperature theory.

23_Santoso_Sec23_p1427-1502.indd 1435

23/11/17 10:48 AM

1436        SECTION TWENTY-THREE

FIGURE 23-7  An electrified thundercloud is typically tripolar.

In summary, the precipitation model with the graupel—ice crystal interaction and charge-reversal temperature best explains most of the behavior of a thundercloud. Yet this model totally ignores the forceful upward and downward drafts within a thundercloud. The convection model considers these drafts but it is unable to explain certain observed phenomena in a thundercloud. Perhaps one day a theory will be developed, which combines the precipitation and convection models and completely accounts for all phenomena related to the electrification of a thundercloud. What has been verified with measurements are the following facts: a thundercloud can be electrified in such a way that positive charge accumulates at the top of the cloud and negative, at the lower part of cloud. A smaller positive charge may be present at lower altitudes of a thundercloud. These charges are responsible for lightning. The mechanism of lightning is explained next. Mechanisms of Lightning.  Lightning initiates whenever the charge accumulation in a thundercloud is such that the electric field between charge centers inside the cloud or between cloud and earth is very high. For power engineering purposes, only cloud-to-earth lightning strokes (ground flashes) are of importance and will be discussed next. An electrified thundercloud will generate an electric field in the space between the cloud and earth as is illustrated in Fig. 23-8. When the intensity of this field is high enough, a discharge will initiate. Typically, the process involves three phases. In the first phase, the high electric field intensity may generate local ionization and electric discharges, which are known as pilot streamers. A pilot streamer is followed by the so-called stepped leader. The stepped leader is a sequence of electric discharges, which are luminous; they propagate with a speed approximately 15% to 20% of the speed of light, and they are discrete, progressing approximately 50 m at a time. The time between steps is few microseconds to several tens of microseconds. A pictorial view of the stepped leader development is shown in Fig. 23-9. The stepped leader will eventually reach the surface of the earth and will strike an object on the earth. However, where it will strike is not determined until the stepped leader is within a striking distance from the object. A model for the striking distance will be described in Sec. 23.7. It is possible that a stepped leader or multiple stepped leaders may also initiate from an object on the surface of the earth. In this case, the two stepped leaders may meet at some point. There is also evidence that the initial stepped leader may originate from a tall structure on the earth and not from the cloud. The second phase initiates when the stepped leader reaches an object on the earth or meets an upward moving stepped leader. When this occurs, a conductive path between the thundercloud and

23_Santoso_Sec23_p1427-1502.indd 1436

23/11/17 10:48 AM

LIGHTNING AND OVERVOLTAGE PROTECTION        1437 

FIGURE 23-8  Illustration of electric field below an electrified thundercloud.

FIGURE 23-9  Illustration of stepped-leader development.

23_Santoso_Sec23_p1427-1502.indd 1437

23/11/17 10:49 AM

1438        SECTION TWENTY-THREE

FIGURE 23-10  Illustration of return-stroke development.

earth has been established. Then, a high-intensity discharge occurs through the channel established by the stepped leader. This discharge is extremely luminous and therefore visible. It propagates with a speed of about 10% to 50% of the speed of light. The development of the return stroke is illustrated in Fig. 23-10. The return stroke carries an electric current of anywhere from few thousands of amperes to 200 thousands of amperes. The current magnitude rises fast, within 1 to 10 ms, to the peak value and then decreases rapidly. The discharge is known as the return stroke or simply the lightning stroke. The return stroke transfers a substantial amount of positive charge from the earth to the cloud and specifically to the charge center where the lightning was originated. This transfer results in a significant lowering of the potential of the charge center. This phenomenon initiates the third phase of lightning. In this phase, discharges may occur from other charge centers within the thundercloud to the depleted charge center because of the increased potential difference between them. This discharge will trigger another stroke between cloud and ground through the already established conductive channel with the first stroke. This process may be repeated several times, depending on the electrification status of the thundercloud, resulting in multiple strokes. There is evidence that most lightning to ground involves multiple strokes. For example, an analysis of 1430 strokes to the earth by Anderson (1968) resulted in the following statistics: Single-stroke lightning Lightning involving six or more strokes Mean value of multiple strokes

36% 21% 3

It should be mentioned, however, that positive polarity lightning is typically single stroke. Extreme cases have been recorded with a large number of multiple strokes such as 40 or 50 with duration of the entire lightning event approaching 1 s. For example, a 40-stroke lightning event, which

23_Santoso_Sec23_p1427-1502.indd 1438

23/11/17 10:49 AM

LIGHTNING AND OVERVOLTAGE PROTECTION        1439 

lasted 0.624 s is on record. The time interval between successive strokes may be in the order of few milliseconds. However, there is evidence that sometimes the multiple strokes may be so smooth as to appear as a continuous lightning current. This occurs because as long as there is a conductive path between the cloud and ground, electric current will flow until the cloud is neutralized enough for the conductive path to interrupt. The continuous flow of lightning current can be destructive because of its long duration even if the magnitude may be much lower than the crest of a stroke. Characteristics of Lightning Strokes.  The parameters of lightning ground strokes are very important in the design of protection schemes against lightning. The most important parameters are •  Voltage between cloud and earth •  Electric current •  Waveform •  Frequency of occurrence The voltage between a thundercloud and the earth prior to a ground stroke has been estimated from 10 to 1000 MV. For design work, however, the protection engineer is interested in the voltage appearing on the stricken power apparatus. For reasons explained in the next paragraph, this voltage will be equal to the product of the impedance times the stroke current. It is generally accepted that the ground-stroke current is independent from the terminating impedance. The reason is that the terminating impedance is much lower than the resistance of the lightning discharge channel, which is on the order of few thousand ohms. Thus, a ground stroke is normally considered as an ideal current source at the point of strike. The crest of the stroke electric current can vary over a wide range: 1 to 200 kA. Data on ground-stroke current magnitudes have been collected by many researchers. Among those, the work of Berger (1967) at Mount San Salvatore in Switzerland has been widely accepted. Statistical representation of these data is shown in Fig. 23-11. The waveform of the lightning ground stroke current, and especially the rise time, is very important. Again, statistical representation of stroke current rise times data collected by Berger is given in Fig. 23-12. The frequency of occurrence is also a very important parameter. In order to quantify lightning activity, the crude measure of thunderstorm day has been introduced. A thunderstorm day is defined as a 24-h period in which at least one thunder clap has been heard. Collection of historical thunderstorm activity data by the National Weather Service resulted in maps of equi-thunderstorm-day contours.

FIGURE 23-11  Distribution of lightning current magnitudes [recorded by Berger (1967) at Mount San Salvatore].

23_Santoso_Sec23_p1427-1502.indd 1439

FIGURE 23-12  Distribution of lightning current rise times [recorded by Berger (1967) at Mount San Salvatore].

23/11/17 10:49 AM

1440        SECTION TWENTY-THREE

FIGURE 23-13  Isokeraunic curves for the continental United States.

These maps are known as isokeraunic maps, from the Greek word keraunos, lightning. Such a map is illustrated in Fig. 23-13. It is important to note that this map, by definition, provides only a crude measure of lightning activity. Specifically, by definition, a thunderstorm day does not provide any information on the frequency of and total lightning activity. Yet, because of lack of better data before the development of the lightning detection system (see next paragraph), the isokeraunic maps have been used for estimation of lightning activity in an area. There are several models, which provide the approximate number of cloud-to-ground lightning per unit of area as a function of the isokeraunic level. These models will be discussed in detail in Sec. 23.7. As an example, Anderson (1975) has suggested the following

N1 = 0.12T



where N1 is the ground flash density per square kilometer per year and T is the number of thunderstorm days (or isokeraunic level). Early in the 1980s, the Electric Power Research Institute sponsored a project at the State University of New York at Albany (SUNYA) which resulted in the National Lightning Detection Network (NLDN) records. The system integrated two networks and basically records cloud-to-ground lightning discharges. The objective of the project was to collect lightning data over a period of 10 years, which could be used for lightning protection of power systems. Figure 23-14 illustrates average lightning flashes per square kilometer for the state of Florida. The data were collected over a 5-year period (1985 to 1989). Note that these data correlate reasonably well with the isokeraunic maps data of Fig. 23-13 and the model that provides ground flashes from isokeraunic levels. Similar systems have been installed in many countries. Today, the National Lightning Detection Network developed to a system that provides the magnitude (crest) of lightning and the location of lightning with precision in the order of 1 km. Summary.  This subsection has described the mechanism of thundercloud formation and electrification and the initiation, mechanism, and characteristics of lightning. Finally, statistical data on lightning parameters were presented. These data are useful for design work.

23_Santoso_Sec23_p1427-1502.indd 1440

23/11/17 10:49 AM

LIGHTNING AND OVERVOLTAGE PROTECTION        1441 

Flashes/km2 1-2 2-3 3-4 4-5 5-6 6-7 7-8 8-9

FIGURE 23-14  Average annual flash density data from 1985 to 1989. (Electric Power Research Institute.)

23.4  POWER SYSTEM OVERVOLTAGES The causes of power system overvoltages are numerous and the waveforms are complex. It is customary to classify the transients on the basis of frequency content of the waveforms. In this sense, the following three broad categories are defined: Power frequency overvoltages Switching overvoltages Lightning overvoltages Table 23-2 provides brief descriptions and typical causes of the most commonly encountered overvoltages in power systems. The relative level of overvoltages due to these causes is illustrated in Fig. 23-15. This figure provides typical and usual levels of overvoltages in a well-designed system and excludes specific cases such as ferroresonance. In designing a well-protected electric power system, it is extremely important to thoroughly understand the types, frequency, and magnitude of the expected overvoltages on the power system. For this reason, this subsection provides a concise discussion of the nature, generation mechanisms, and characteristics of power frequency, switching, and lightning overvoltages in power systems.

23_Santoso_Sec23_p1427-1502.indd 1441

23/11/17 10:49 AM

1442        SECTION TWENTY-THREE

TABLE 23-2  Power-System Overvoltages Category

Description

Causes

Power frequency Temporary overvoltages dominated by the Electric faults   overvoltages   power frequency component Sudden changes of load Ferroresonance Switching overvoltages Temporary overvoltages resulting from a Energization of lines   switching operation Deenergization of capacitor  banks Fault interruption/TRV High-speed reclosing Energization/deenergization   of transformers Other Lightning overvoltages Temporary overvoltages resulting from a Lightning—cloud-to   lightning stroke terminating at a phase   ground flashes   conductor, shield conductor, any other part   of a power system, or a nearby object (tree, etc.)

Power Frequency Overvoltages.  The magnitude of power frequency overvoltages is typically low compared to switching or lightning overvoltages. Specifically, for most causes of these types of overvoltage, the magnitude may be few percent to 50% above the nominal operating voltage. In a few cases, power-frequency voltages may reach 300% to 400% of nominal voltages, for example, during ferroresonance. Power-frequency overvoltages play an important role in the application of overvoltage

FIGURE 23-15  Typical range of magnitude and duration of power system temporary overvoltages excluding specific cases such as ferroresonance. [From Regaller (1980).]

23_Santoso_Sec23_p1427-1502.indd 1442

23/11/17 10:49 AM

LIGHTNING AND OVERVOLTAGE PROTECTION        1443 

protection devices. The reason is that modern overvoltage protection devices are not capable of discharging high levels of energy associated with power frequency overvoltages. Thus, it is imperative that protective device ratings be selected in such a way that they do not operate under any foreseeable power frequency overvoltages. The most common causes of power frequency overvoltages are (1) electric faults, (2) sudden changes of load, and (3) ferroresonance. An electric fault results in voltage collapse for the faulted phase and in a possible overvoltage at the unfaulted phases. The magnitude of the overvoltage depends on the parameters of the circuit, such as positive-, negative-, and zero-sequence impedance, as well as the grounding parameters of the system, such as ground impedance or single- or multiple-grounded system. Figure 23-16 illustrates a typical case of a single-phase-to-ground fault at the end of a 40-milong 115-kV transmission line. Because the electric power system is not completely symmetric, the magnitude of the overvoltage on the unfaulted phases may be different; that is, for the case of Fig. 23-16, the overvoltage on phase B is 28.3%, while for phase C the overvoltage is 31.9%. Many studies have been performed over the years to determine simple techniques for determining the power frequency overvoltages. As a first approximation, one can determine the power frequency overvoltage due to a fault from the sequence parameters (positive-, negative-, and zero-sequence impedances) at the fault

FIGURE 23-16  Overvoltage due to a single-phase-to-ground fault at the end of a 40-mi-long 115-kV line: (a) phase A voltage; (b) phase B voltage; (c) phase C voltage.

23_Santoso_Sec23_p1427-1502.indd 1443

23/11/17 10:49 AM

1444        SECTION TWENTY-THREE

FIGURE 23-17  Overvoltage on unfaulted phase during single-line-to-ground fault. [From Johnson (1979).]

location. Figure 23-17, taken from Johnson (1979), illustrates the power frequency overvoltage at the unfaulted phases due to a ground fault in one phase as a function of the ratios (X0/X1) and (R0/X1). Computer models for determining the power frequency overvoltage by taking into consideration all relevant factors have been developed. Using these models, one can determine the exact power frequency overvoltage and the effect of grounding practices. As an example, Fig. 23-18, taken from Mancao et al. (1992), illustrates the maximum line-to-ground overvoltage, per unit (pu), on typical distribution circuits versus fault distance from the feeding substation. Another source of power frequency overvoltages is the so-called Ferranti effect, which occurs when a load is disconnected at the end of a long transmission line. In this case, the line draws a capacitive current from the source, which generates a voltage gradient along the line of such a phase as to increase the voltage at the open end of the line. An approximate expression of the overvoltage at the open end of the line is given by

Overvoltage in pu =

1.0 cos(β l )

where b is the propagation characteristic of the line (ω LC ) and l is the total length of the line. A typical transmission line of 400 mi may experience an overvoltage of 1.30 pu when one end of the line is open. Ferroresonance is another cause of power frequency overvoltages but is less frequent. Ferroresonance may occur when energizing long transmission lines and unloaded power transformers, in single-phase switching of a 3-phase transformer, and in other cases involving an iron-core magnetic circuit connected to a substantially capacitive circuit. The overvoltages

23_Santoso_Sec23_p1427-1502.indd 1444

23/11/17 10:49 AM

LIGHTNING AND OVERVOLTAGE PROTECTION        1445 

FIGURE 23-18  Overvoltage on unfaulted phases of a distribution circuit as a function of fault distance and circuit length. [From Mancao et al. (1992).]

resulting from ferroresonance can be serious and especially destructive to gapless arresters present in the system. As an example, Fig. 23-19, taken from an IEEE committee report, illustrates the maximum overvoltage due to ferroresonance involving single- or double-phase switching of a 3-phase transformer with an ungrounded primary (delta or wye). The severity of ferroresonance depends on the amount of capacitive reactance present in the system and it can reach a value over 400%.

FIGURE 23-19  Maximum overvoltage due to ferroresonance triggered by single-or double-phase switching of a 3-phase transformer with an ungrounded primary.

23_Santoso_Sec23_p1427-1502.indd 1445

23/11/17 10:49 AM

1446        SECTION TWENTY-THREE

Other causes of power frequency overvoltages are (1) generator speedup due to load rejection, (2) generator self-excitation, and (3) malfunction of regulating equipment. Switching.  Switchings in a power system occur frequently. A variety of switchings are performed for routine operations or automatically by control and protection systems. Typical switchings are as follows: Lines (transmission or distribution) Cables Shunt/series capacitors Shunt reactors Transformers Generators/motors Another class of switching transients are those generated from insulation flashovers and breaker restrikes. These phenomena are equivalent to the closing of a switch and generate switching surges, which propagate in the system. Overvoltages resulting from switching operations are typically proportional to the power frequency voltage. For example, energization of a 3-phase line can result in an overvoltage at the open end, which can be as high as 5 pu, depending on the timing of switching with respect to the source. The frequency content of switching transients depends on system parameters. As an example, Fig. 23-20, taken from Johnson (1979), illustrates probability distribution curves of measured line switching overvoltages. Note that there is a substantial probability for overvoltages higher than 5.0 pu. Switching transients for extra-high-voltage systems, that is, 230 kV and above, can be quite high and must be controlled to avoid the need for higher insulation. There are two methods for controlling the magnitude of switching overvoltages: (1) using breakers with resistor preinsertion and (2) using opening resistors or wound-type potential transformers to discharge trapped charge on lines. Breakers with resistor preinsertion place a resistor between source and line under energization for a short duration (e.g., 0.8 ms) prior to a direct connection of the source to the line. Proper selection

FIGURE 23-20  Probability distribution curves of measured switching overvoltages. [From Johnson (1979).]

23_Santoso_Sec23_p1427-1502.indd 1446

23/11/17 10:49 AM

LIGHTNING AND OVERVOLTAGE PROTECTION        1447 

FIGURE 23-21  Probability distribution curves of computed switching overvoltages (switching with a resistor preinsertion breaker).

of resistor values and insertion time enables effective control of maximum switching overvoltages. As an example, Fig. 23-21 illustrates the probability distribution curve of switching overvoltages when a resistor preinsertion breaker is used. Note that the maximum switching overvoltage is below 2.5 pu. Trapped charge on a transmission line can cause excessive switching overvoltages (for specific timing of line energization with respect to source phase). In addition, trapped charge can cause breaker restrike because it contributes to overstressing the breaker insulation. Wound-type potential transformers or opening resistors provide a mechanism for quick drainage of trapped charge on lines. Switchings can cause other undesirable effects such as inrush currents in transformers and ferroresonance, which has already been discussed. Lightning Overvoltages.  Electric power systems are exposed to weather and therefore are subjected to lightning strikes, which result in overvoltages. Lightning overvoltages are generated by direct lightning strikes on a power system apparatus or indirect strikes to nearby objects, from which subsequent overvoltage is transferred to the system via inductive, capacitive, and conductive coupling. Unlike power frequency overvoltages and switching overvoltages, which are proportional to the system voltage, lightning overvoltages are independent of system voltage but depend on system impedances. For example, a direct lightning hit to a phase conductor of an overhead transmission line will generate an overvoltage proportional to the characteristic impedance of the line and proportional to the current magnitude of the lightning stroke. This overvoltage may be several million volts. It is a practical and economical impossibility to insulate distribution or lower-kilovolt-level transmission lines (i.e., 100 kV and below) to withstand this type of overvoltage. As will be discussed in Sec. 23.7, a coordinated design procedure is applied to minimize the effects of lightning; this procedure involves among other things: (1) shielding of lines and equipment, (2) effective grounding, and (3) application of protective devices (surge arresters). The presence of the shielding system ensures that lightning, which otherwise will terminate to a phase conductor, will terminate on a wire,

23_Santoso_Sec23_p1427-1502.indd 1447

23/11/17 10:49 AM

1448        SECTION TWENTY-THREE

FIGURE 23-22  Typical lightning overvoltages on a transmission line: (a) top of tower voltage; (b) voltage across insulator (phase A); (c) tower ground potential ruse. [From Meliopoulos (1988).]

terminal, etc., which is electrically connected to the grounding system. A well-designed grounding system will divert the majority of the lightning stroke current into the soil and thus will minimize the destructive lightning overvoltages. The subject will be further discussed later. Here, a typical example of lightning overvoltages on a 115-kV shielded line is shown in Fig. 23-22. The figure shows the overvoltage at the top of the tower, voltage across insulator of phase A, and the ground potential rise at the tower base. The voltages are given in kilovolts per kiloampere of lightning stroke current. The case shown is for a relatively short tower with effective grounding. The figure shows the effects of nearby towers, which generate reflections of the lightning surge with the end effect of quickly reducing the lightning overvoltages. It should be apparent that the tower-grounding system plays an important role in determining the magnitude of lightning overvoltages, as illustrated in Fig. 23-23. The topic of grounding will be further discussed later. Lightning strokes to nearby trees, ground, or other objects can result in voltage surges into the power system through coupling. The coupling can be conductive through the conductive soil and the power system grounding structures, inductive, or capacitive. In a typical situation, all the coupling mechanisms may be present, resulting in a voltage surge to the power system. These voltages are called induced voltage surges or induced lightning overvoltages and are generally much lower than those occurring after a direct strike. Specifically, they rarely exceed 400 kV. The induced lightning overvoltages are of concern for distribution lines 35 kV or below. Higher-kilovolt-level lines (i.e., 69 kV and above) have sufficient insulation withstand so that induced lightning voltages do not present the risk of flashover.

23_Santoso_Sec23_p1427-1502.indd 1448

23/11/17 10:49 AM

LIGHTNING AND OVERVOLTAGE PROTECTION        1449 

FIGURE 23-23  Effects of tower footing resistance on a specific 115-kV transmission line (standard lightning wave = 1.2/50 ms–1). [From Meliopoulos (1988).]

23.5  ANALYSIS METHODS Design of overvoltage protection systems requires a thorough understanding and analysis of transient overvoltages in power systems. Over the years, many analysis methods have been developed for this purpose. All analysis methods require a proper model of the system under study. In this subsection, we shall discuss modeling requirements for transient analysis and various analysis methods. Modeling is probably the most important task in a study. There are many modeling choices which must be made in a prudent way and in view of the objectives of the study. Modeling choices are affected by Phenomenon under study Period of concern Model selection of individual system components For overvoltage analysis, typical phenomena under study will be line switching, capacitor bank switching, and lightning. The period of concern may be seconds, milliseconds, or microseconds. Model selection of individual system components should be guided by the expected frequency content of the transient. The selected models should have the proper frequency response required for the study under consideration. There is a large number TABLE 23-3  A Representative List of of components to be modeled. A representative list is Power-System Components given in Table 23-3. Transmission lines Two other related issues are (1) what to model  Single-phase and (2) how to model. The types of choices to be  Three-phase made regarding the question of what to model may  Overhead include (1) bus inductance, (2) bus capacitance, (3)  Underground transformer winding capacitance, and (4) separation Lumped capacitors distance between arrester and transformer. The quesIron-core transformers tion of how to model is complicated. Typical choices Generators are illustrated in Table 23-4. The task of component Surge arresters model selection is very important. To illustrate the Grounding Switches, fuses, etc. point, consider a 40-mi-long transmission line. The line can be represented as a distributed-parameter

23_Santoso_Sec23_p1427-1502.indd 1449

23/11/17 10:49 AM

1450        SECTION TWENTY-THREE

TABLE 23-4  Typical Model Choices for Components Component description Lumped-parameter model  Resistors  Capacitors  Inductors Distributed-parameter model  Lines  Buses Iron-core transformers Surge arresters Circuit-breaker operator

Mathematical model Ordinary differential equations

Partial differential equations Nonlinear equations Nonlinear/time-varying equations Logical equations

model or a lumped-parameter model consisting of a set of cascaded pi sections. Figure 23-24 illustrates the switching voltages computed for this line by using the two models. Note that the solutions are different. Of course, the distributed-parameter model provides the correct answer. Examples of simplified lumped-parameter models and distributed-parameter models are illustrated in Fig. 23-25. Once the model has been selected, analysis can determine the transient overvoltages for a specific event. Analysis methods can be classified into three categories: Graphical methods Analytical methods Numerical methods

FIGURE 23-24  Switching overvoltage at the open end of a 40-mi-long 115-kV line: (a) distributed-parameter model; (b) model with six cascaded pi sections.

23_Santoso_Sec23_p1427-1502.indd 1450

23/11/17 10:49 AM

LIGHTNING AND OVERVOLTAGE PROTECTION        1451 

FIGURE 23-25  Power system models for transient analysis: (a) lumpedparameter models; (b) distributed-parameter models. [From Meliopoulos (1988).]

Graphical Methods.  The graphical method is based on the observation that the solution for transient voltages and currents in a transmission line can be represented with traveling waves along the line. Under the assumption of an ideal transmission line (zero losses and constant inductance and capacitance per unit length), the waves travel along a line without distortion. Figure 23-26 illustrates the general solution in this sense. Waves are altered when they reach a discontinuity. Specifically, at discontinuity, a wave will be partially reflected and partially transmitted. If the discontinuity involves

FIGURE 23-26  General wave solution for an ideal distributed-parameter single-phase transmission line.

23_Santoso_Sec23_p1427-1502.indd 1451

23/11/17 10:49 AM

1452        SECTION TWENTY-THREE

FIGURE 23-27  Transmission and reflection of waves at discontinuity.

only resistive elements, the coefficients of reflection and transmission will be constant. This situation is illustrated in Fig. 23-27. The basic relationship among incident (subscript i), reflected (subscript r), and transmitted (subscript t) waves are as follows: Reflected wave:

Er = α Ei



Ir = −α Ii



α=



Zeq =



Zeq − Z01 Zeq + Z01

(reflection coefficient)

RL Z02 RL + Z02

Transmitted wave:

Et = δ Ei

Z01 I It = δ Z02 i

δ=



2 Zeq Zeq + Z01

(transmission coefficient)

If the discontinuity involves storage elements, that is, capacitors or inductors, the coefficients are not constant and the analysis becomes much more complex. The graphical method consists of monitoring all traveling waves on a line with the aid of a diagram, known as the Bewley diagram. The Bewley diagram provides, for every point in a system, all the waves present and the time at which they arrive. From this information, the actual voltage waveform at a specific point can be constructed as the superposition of all waves at that point. Such a construction is illustrated in Fig. 23-28. Analytical Methods.  Analytical methods are based on systematic algorithms for solution of the differential equations describing a system. A useful method is based on Laplace transforms. This method

23_Santoso_Sec23_p1427-1502.indd 1452

23/11/17 10:49 AM

LIGHTNING AND OVERVOLTAGE PROTECTION        1453 

FIGURE 23-28  Illustration of the graphical method: (a) system description; (b) voltage surge due to lightning l(t); (c) Bewley’s diagram; (d) construction of voltage at point B as the superposition of all surges arriving at point B.

transforms the differential equations describing a component into an equivalent circuit. An example follows. Consider the equation describing an inductor di(t ) dt Application of the Laplace transform on this equation yields



υ (t ) = L

V (s ) = sLI (s ) − Li(0)

where V(s) is the Laplace transform of u(t) and I(s) is the Laplace transform of i(t).

23_Santoso_Sec23_p1427-1502.indd 1453

23/11/17 10:49 AM

1454

23_Santoso_Sec23_p1427-1502.indd 1454

FIGURE 23-29  Equivalent-circuit representation in the Laplace domain. [From Meliopoulos (1988).]

23/11/17 10:49 AM

LIGHTNING AND OVERVOLTAGE PROTECTION        1455 

The above equation represents the equivalent circuit of Fig. 23-29 (b3). This is known as the Thévenin form of the Laplace domain equivalent circuit. The process can be applied to any power system element described with a set of differential equations. Figure 23-29 illustrates the equivalent circuits in the Laplace domain of typical elements. Note that the equivalent circuits are represented with algebraic equations in complex variables. Application of the analytical method involves transformation of the differential equations describing individual element with the Laplace transform into an equivalent circuit. Subsequently, nodal analysis (or loop analysis) is applied on the transformed elements to obtain the solution of the voltage at a point of interest as a function of the Laplace variable. Finally, application of the inverse Laplace transform will provide the time waveform of the voltage of interest. Many efficient algorithms were developed during 1975–1995 or so. The details can be found in the literature. Numerical Methods.  Numerical methods are based on transforming the differential equations describing a component into a discrete time equation. This transformation is achieved by proper integration of the differential equations. Many different integration methods can be applied. A very successful method is based on the trapezoidal integration method, because this method is an absolutely stable numerical method. The basic idea is explained as follows. Consider the differential equation dx (t ) = ax (t ) dt



Integration of this equation in the time interval (t - h, t) yields

x (t ) − x (t − h) = a

∫

t

t −h

x (τ )dτ

The integral on the right-hand side can be evaluated, assuming that the function x(t) varies linearly in the time interval (t - h, t), yielding t

h x (τ )dτ = [x (t ) + x (t − h)] 2 t −h

∫

This integration is graphically illustrated in Fig. 23-30, which shows that the value of the integral is approximated with the area of the shown trapezoid—thus the name trapezoidal integration. Combining above equations and solving for x(t) x (t ) =

1 + ah/2 ⋅ x (t − h) (1 − ah)/2

If x(0) is known, then the above equation can be applied to obtain the value x(h), then x(2h), x(3h), etc. This is a simple algorithm useful for computing the solution at specified times, h, 2h, 3h, . . . . The basic idea described above can be applied to the differential equations of any component. The result will be a set of algebraic equations which can be interpreted as a resistive companion circuit. The results for simple elements are illustrated in Fig. 23-31. Application of the method requires transformation of each element of the power system into a resistive companion circuit. The process replaces the actual system with a resistive network. This network includes voltage and current sources that depend on the state of the system at times less than t. Application of nodal analysis (or loop analysis) provides the solution for voltages and currents at time t. The process

23_Santoso_Sec23_p1427-1502.indd 1455

FIGURE 23-30  Graphical representation of the trapezoidal integration.

23/11/17 10:49 AM

1456

23_Santoso_Sec23_p1427-1502.indd 1456

FIGURE 23-31  Equivalent resistive comparison circuits. [From Meliopoulos (1988).]

23/11/17 10:49 AM

LIGHTNING AND OVERVOLTAGE PROTECTION        1457 

FIGURE 23-32  3-Phase line model: (a) 3-phase transmission line; (b) equivalent circuit of an infinitesimal length (dy) of 3-phase line.

can start at time t = 0 and be repeated at times t = h, t = 2h, . . . , yielding the values of voltages and currents at times t = 0, h, 2h, . . . , etc. Further details can be found in Meliopoulos (1988). 3-Phase Transmission Lines.  3-Phase transmission is represented with a distributed-parameter model. This model can be derived by considering an infinitesimal length of a 3-phase line as in Fig. 23-32b. Assuming an ideal line (zero losses and constant inductance and capacitance per unit length), the model equations are ∂2 ∂2 υabc ( y , t ) = 2 υabc ( y , t ) 2 ∂t ∂y ∂2 ∂2 CL 2 iabc ( y , t ) = 2 iabc ( y , t ) ∂t ∂y

CL

L

∂ ∂ υ ( y, t) i ( y, t) = ∂t abc ∂ y abc

where







υ ( y , t )    a υabc ( y , t ) = υb ( y , t )    υc ( y , t )  i ( y , t )   a iabc ( y , t ) =  ib ( y , t )     ic ( y , t )  L L L   aa ab ac  L =  Lab Lbb Lbc     Lac Lbc Lcc 

is the inductance matrix per unit length of the line and C C C   aa ab ac  C =  Cab Cbb Cbc     Cac Cbc Ccc  is the capacitance matrix per unit length of the line, y is distance along line, and t is time.

23_Santoso_Sec23_p1427-1502.indd 1457

23/11/17 10:50 AM

1458        SECTION TWENTY-THREE

This is a rather simplified model of a 3-phase line and yet very complex. To make clear the behavior of the 3-phase line, the concept of the ideal continuously transposed line will be introduced. This concept assumes a perfectly symmetrical line Laa = Lbb = Lcc = Ls

Lab = Lac = Lbc = Lm

Caa = Cbb = Ccc = Cs



Cab = Cac = Cbc = Cm

Next, Karrenbauer’s transformation is introduced as follows

υabc ( y , t ) = Kυ gll ( y , t )



iabc ( y , t ) = Ki gll ( y , t )



where υ ( y, t)    g υ gll ( y , t ) =  υl1 ( y , t )    υl 2 ( y , t ) 



i ( y, t )   g i gll ( y , t ) =  il1 ( y , t )     i2 ( y , t ) 

and

1 1 1    K = 1 −2 1  1 1 −2 



Replacement of the actual voltages and currents uabc(y, t) and iabc(y, t) with the voltages and currents ugll(y, t) and igll(y, t) through Karrenbauer’s transformation yields the following transformed equations for the 3-phase line (Meliopoulos 1988): Set 1 (ground-mode equations)

( Ls + 2 Lm )(Cs + 2Cm )

∂2 ∂2 υ ( y , t ) = υ ( y, t) g ∂t 2 ∂y 2 g

∂2 ∂2 ( Ls + 2 Lm )(Cs + 2Cm ) 2 i g ( y , t ) = 2 i g ( y , t ) ∂t ∂y



∂ ∂ ( Ls + 2 Lm ) i g ( y , t ) = υ ( y, t) ∂t ∂y g

Set 2 (line-mode 1 equations)



23_Santoso_Sec23_p1427-1502.indd 1458

( Ls − Lm )(Cs − Cm )

∂2 ∂2 υ l1 ( y , t ) = 2 υ l1 ( y , t ) 2 ∂t ∂y

∂2 ∂2 ( Ls − Lm )(Cs − Cm ) 2 il1 ( y , t ) = 2 il1 ( y , t ) ∂t ∂y ∂ ∂ ( Ls − Lm ) il1 ( y , t ) = υ ( y, t) ∂t ∂ y l1





23/11/17 10:50 AM

LIGHTNING AND OVERVOLTAGE PROTECTION        1459 

Set 3 (line-mode 2 equations) ∂2 ∂2 υl 2 ( y , t ) = 2 υl 2 ( y , t ) 2 ∂t ∂y



( Ls − Lm )(Cs − Cm )



( Ls − Lm )(Cs − Cm )

∂2 ∂2 il 2 ( y , t ) = 2 il 2 ( y , t ) 2 ∂t ∂y

( Ls − Lm )



∂ ∂ il 2 ( y , t ) = υ ( y, t) ∂t ∂y l 2



Note that the complex equations for the 3-phase line have been replaced with three sets of equations, each set representing an ideal single-phase line. The characteristic impedance and speed of propagation of surges for the three ideal single phase lines are Ground mode Zg =

Ls + 2 Lm 1 = Yg Cs + 2Cm

cg = Line mode (1 or 2) Zl =



cl =

1 ( Ls + 2 Lm )(Cs + 2Cm )

( Ls − Lm ) 1 = (Cs − Cm ) Yl

1 ( Ls − Lm )(Cs − Cm )

This model of the line is illustrated in Fig. 23-33. The three sets of equations or three ideal singlephase line models above are known as (1) the ground mode g, (2) line mode 1 l1, and (3) the line mode 2 l2. The names become obvious if one considers excitation of the 3-phase line with one mode. For example, consider that the line is excited in such a way that il1 (y, t) = 0 and ig (y, t) = 0, il2 (y, t) = 0. In this case, the actual phase currents will be iabc ( y , t ) = Ki gll ( y , t )

FIGURE 23-33  Equivalent circuit of a continuously transposed line.

23_Santoso_Sec23_p1427-1502.indd 1459

23/11/17 10:50 AM

1460        SECTION TWENTY-THREE

which yields

ia ( y , t ) = il1 ( y , t )



ib ( y , t ) = −2il1 ( y , t )



ic ( y , t ) = il1 ( y , t )

This state of the line is illustrated in Fig. 23-34a. Note that there is a positive surge on phases a and c, which returns through phase b. All electric current surges are confined in the line conductors, thus the name line mode. Consider now excitation with ig (y, t) ≠ 0, il1(y, t) = 0, and il2(y, t) = 0. In this case, the equation iabc ( y , t ) = Ki gll ( y , t )

yields

ia ( y , t ) = i g ( y , t )



ib ( y , t ) = i g ( y , t )



ic ( y , t ) = i g ( y , t )

This state of the line is illustrated in Fig. 23-34b. Note that the surges on all phases are equal. The return current is through the earth, thus the name ground mode. The parameters of the various modes of propagation of surges in a 3-phase line are different. As an example, the following values apply to a 115-kV 3-phase line. The inductance matrix is FIGURE 23-34  Modes of propagation along a 3-phase line: (a) line mode; (b) ground mode.

Therefore,

 2.2289 1.032 0.8935   L = 1.032 2.2289 1.032  µH /m  2.2289   0.8935 1.032



Ls = 2.2289 µH /m

Lm = 0.9858 µH /m

The capacitance matrix is

 7.6737 −1.9129 −1.0065    C =  −1.9129 8.0184 −1.9129  × 10−12 F/m  −1.0065 −1.9129 7.6737 

Therefore,

Cs = 7.7886 × 10−12 F/m Cm = −1.608 × 10−12 F/m

Line mode (1 or 2): Zl = cl =

23_Santoso_Sec23_p1427-1502.indd 1460

( Ls − Lm )

(Cs − Cm )

= 363.7 Ω

1 = 2.926 × 108 m/s ( Ls − Lm )(Cs − Cm )



23/11/17 10:50 AM

LIGHTNING AND OVERVOLTAGE PROTECTION        1461 

Ground mode:



Zg =

( Ls + 2 Lm ) = 959.1Ω (Cs + 2Cm )

cg =

1 = 2.283 × 108 m/s ( Ls + 2 Lm )(Cs + 2Cm )

When lightning hits a 3-phase line, all modes of propagation are excited. The overvoltage of the 3-phase line as a result of the lightning stroke is determined from the parameters of all the modes. Later, examples of these calculations will be provided. Frequency-Dependent Models.  The para­ meters of power-system elements are frequency dependent. As an example, consider the ground-mode resistance of a 3-phase line. This resistance value may change several orders of magnitude in the frequency range 60 Hz (power frequency) to 1 MHz. This increase of resistance is mainly due to skineffect-type phenomena. The higher resistance values at high frequencies tend to attenuate higher-frequency components of transient overvoltages with the end effect of reducing the maximum overvoltages. Computer models to account for the frequency dependence have been developed for almost all power components. The reader is referred to the literature. Frequency-dependent models are complex, but, on the other hand, they provide a better representation of the real system. As an example, consider Fig. 23-35. The figure illustrates comparison of measured and computed switching transients in a 224.15-mi-long 230-kV line. The singleline diagram of the system is illustrated in Fig. 23-36. The tests were performed by Bonneville Power Administration. The calculated switching transient was performed with a frequency-dependent model (Cokkinides and Meliopoulos 1988). Note that the maximum switching overvoltage is 1.81 pu. It is important to note that simulation of the same system assuming an ideal continuously transposed line results in a maximum switching overvoltage of 2.05 pu. The conclusion is that frequencydependent models are more realistic. Grounding Models.  Grounding plays an important role in dissipation of lightning strokes and therefore controlling overvoltages resulting from lightning. Yet, grounding has been widely misunderstood and

23_Santoso_Sec23_p1427-1502.indd 1461

FIGURE 23-35  Comparison of simulation and test results of switching surges: (a) phase A transient voltage; (b) phase B transient voltage; (c) phase C transient voltage. [From Cokkinides and Meliopoulos (1988).]

23/11/17 10:50 AM

1462        SECTION TWENTY-THREE

FIGURE 23-36  Illustration of system for switching surge test. (Bonneville Power Administration.)

proper analysis models are scarce. Modeling of grounding systems is a rather complex task, and it is strongly coupled to the overall modeling procedure for power systems. Two distinct approaches apply: (1) grounding models for low frequency generally consider grounds as a pure resistance and thus dc analysis models are utilized, based on the method of moments or relaxation methods; (2) grounding models for higher frequencies require complete electromagnetic analysis. For this purpose, finite element analysis or the method of moments can be utilized. Since the grounds are typically complex systems, simplifications are typically introduced. A rule of thumb for selecting dc models or the more complex models is to compare the largest dimension of a grounding system l to the depth of penetration δ = 2 / µωσ . If l > 0.1d, then a complete model is necessary. In this expression, m is the permeability of the medium, w is the frequency in radians per second, and s is the conductivity. The choice of the grounding model can be crucial. As an example, consider a grounding system consisting of a counterpoise buried in soil of 100 W ⋅ m. The dc ground resistance of this system is 2.29 W. The frequency-dependent impedance is much higher for high frequencies and approaches 2.29 W for frequencies below 50 kHz. As a result, a lightning discharge through this ground will require a frequencydependent ground model to accurately predict the transient overvoltages. As an example, Fig. 23-37 shows the differences between the correct model and the dc model for the standard lightning waveform. The example emphasizes the importance of selecting the proper model for the grounding system.

FIGURE 23-37  Transient voltage on a 300-ft counterpoise from a 1.2- to 50-m/s lightning wave of a 1-kA crest: (a) frequency-dependent model; (b) frequency-independent model.

23_Santoso_Sec23_p1427-1502.indd 1462

23/11/17 10:50 AM

LIGHTNING AND OVERVOLTAGE PROTECTION        1463 

FIGURE 23-38  Illustration of a typical service entrance to a commercial or industrial facility.

Grounding systems play an important role in propagation of surges from high-voltage power systems to lower-voltage secondary systems. Specifically, transients initiated in the power system can travel through the grounding system and enter the secondary power system of a facility, reaching sensitive electronic equipment. Transformers do not exist in the path of a neutral. Thus, highfrequency transients travel almost unattenuated through the neutral. Attenuation is provided only by the grounds if the neutral is multiply grounded. A proper model of the grounds, neutrals, and the power system can provide a good tool to determine the transient overvoltages reaching a specific piece of equipment. As an example, consider a facility served by a 1-mi (1.6-km) underground distribution cable as in Fig. 23-38. The underground cable is fed from an overhead distribution circuit, which is subject to lightning. At such a service entrance, transients can enter a facility through the cable concentric neutral and the ground conductors. Probabilistic Methods.  The objective of these methods is to provide a probabilistic description of overvoltages in a specific power apparatus. The method takes into consideration the uncertainty in parameters affecting the overvoltages. Some of the uncertain parameters are listed in Table 23-5. The probabilistic methods consist of the following three components: 1. A probabilistic model for the uncertain parameters 2. An analysis model for the system under study 3. A Monte Carlo simulation method

TABLE 23-5  Typical Parameters with Uncertainty Lightning Crest value Rise time Frequency of occurrence Shielding failure Other Switching Switch closing time Time of preinsertion of resistors Trapped charge Other

The result of the method is the probability distribution of the overvoltages at the apparatus of interest. Given the probabilistic model for the uncertain parameters and an analysis model for the system under study, the Monte Carlo simulation consists of the following steps:

Step 0: Set count of trial n equal to 0. Step 1: Generate (randomly) a sample of parameters from the probabilistic model of uncertain parameters (crest value of lightning stroke, rise time, fall time, location of incidence, etc.).

23_Santoso_Sec23_p1427-1502.indd 1463

23/11/17 10:50 AM

1464        SECTION TWENTY-THREE

Step 2: Use the analysis model and the parameter values determined in step 1 to evaluate the maximum overvoltage at points of interest (or other quantities of interest). Store the computed values. Step 3: Repeat steps 1, 2, and 3 until the number of trials = n. Then go to step 4. Step 4: Use the stored computed values of overvoltages (or other quantities of interest) to generate histograms and/or probability distribution functions. The utility of probabilistic methods is quite obvious. They provide the tool to determine not only the expected overvoltages but also the frequency of occurrence. For external insulation protection practices, probabilistic methods provide an indispensable tool for optimal designs.

23.6  OVERVOLTAGE PROTECTION DEVICES With certainty, temporary overvoltages on power-system apparatus will exceed their withstand capability. In this case, if the apparatus is left unprotected, insulation failure will occur. Therefore, it is necessary to protect power system components against overvoltages. The philosophy and objectives of this protection vary depending on the type of overvoltages, frequency, effects of insulation failure, and cost of repair. These issues will be discussed later. In this subsection, we will be concerned with available protection devices, their characteristics, and protection levels. An overvoltage protection device should ideally limit the voltages across the insulation of a power apparatus below a specified value. This specified value is called the protection level. The ideal protection device has the voltagecurrent characteristic indicated in Fig. 23-39. Specifically, if the voltage across the protection device is less than the protection level, then the protection device should have an infinitely large impedance. If the voltage across the protection device is higher than the protection level, then the protection device should allow the flow of electric current through it in such a way that the voltage is clipped to the protection level value. Such a characteristic can be mathematically described with the equation n



abs [υ (t )] i(t ) = i0   sign [υ (t )] (23-1) υp   

FIGURE 23-39  Voltage-current characteristics of the ideal overvoltage protection device.

23_Santoso_Sec23_p1427-1502.indd 1464

23/11/17 10:50 AM

LIGHTNING AND OVERVOLTAGE PROTECTION        1465 

where i0 = a constant up = protection level abs (·) = absolute value of the argument (·) u(t) = voltage across the protective device sign [u(t)] = sign of voltage u(t), + or n = a very large number The protection characteristics of Fig. 23-39 correspond to a very large value of n. Of course, a protection device with these characteristics does not exist. Research and development has resulted in protection devices which come close to that of Fig. 23-39 to varying degrees. It is important to note that the research and development of protection devices has been evolutionary; over the years the following major breakthroughs have occurred: Air gaps Gapped surge arresters Expulsion arresters Gapped valve-type arresters Gapped silicon carbide (SiC) Metal oxide varistors Shunt-gapped metal oxide varistors (MOVs) The most important application characteristics of a protection device are the protection level and the reseal level. These are defined as follows: Protection Level. The maximum voltage, which will be allowed by the device across its terminals. Reseal Level. The maximum voltage below which the protection device will disallow significant electric current through it. For best protection, it is expedient that these two parameters be as close as possible. Observe that for the ideal protection device, the protection level is equal to the reseal level. In order to quantify the protection quality of various technologies of protective devices, the following definition is introduced: Protection quality index (PQI).  The protection-quality index is defined as the ratio of the reseal level over the protection level:

PQI =

Vr Vp

Note that the ideal protective device has a protection-quality index of 1. As should be expected, the protective capabilities of protective devices increase with every breakthrough in the technology. Air gaps provide rudimentary protection, gapped SiC surge arresters provide improved protection, and finally MOVs provide even better protection. Within each class of technology, many variations exist. The next paragraphs will discuss the above technologies. Air (Spark) Gaps.  A spark gap was the first protection device to be applied on a power system. It can be constructed with two electrodes placed at a certain distance. The shape of the electrodes varies depending on the application—for example, two wires, a wire and a planar electrode, or two spheres. When the voltage across the air gap exceeds a certain value, an arc will initiate between the electrodes. The voltage across the arc will depend on the current of the arc, the length of the arc, and time. A typical variation of the voltage across the gap is illustrated in Fig. 23-40. The protection level as well as the reseal level, indicated as maximum permissible operating voltage across the gap, are shown. Note that for good protection, the protection quality index (the ratio Vr/Vp) should be maximized. Unfortunately, air gaps exhibit very low protection quality index. In many applications, and in order

23_Santoso_Sec23_p1427-1502.indd 1465

23/11/17 10:50 AM

1466        SECTION TWENTY-THREE

FIGURE 23-40  Typical voltage-time characteristic of a long air gap.

to improve the protection quality index, the electrodes are shaped in such a way as to force the arc to elongate and therefore increase the voltage reseal value Vr.

FIGURE 23-41  Construction of a gapped arrester: (a) block diagram; (b) detail of a gap.

23_Santoso_Sec23_p1427-1502.indd 1466

Gapped Surge Arresters.  Gapped surge arresters consist of a series of spark gaps with or without series blocks of nonlinear resistors, which act as current limiters. The construction of such an arrester is illustrated in Fig. 23-41. The function of the air gap is to isolate the current limiting block of the surge arrester from the power frequency voltage under normal operating conditions. The air gap is necessary because the current limiting block will fail thermally if subjected to the continuous normal power frequency voltage. Elaborate designs of air gaps have been developed, which assure (1) consistent sparkover voltage and (2) arc extinction (resealing) after the overvoltage ceases to exist. Consistent sparkover voltage is achieved by either a trigger gap or a preionizer. In order to prevent damage of the trigger mechanism, the main current is not allowed to pass through it by use of grading resistors as is illustrated in Fig. 23-41, but through the main arc gaps. To ensure arc extinction and good resealing properties, a mechanism is provided for the control of the arc. Specifically, the main current is passed through a coil. The magnetic field of the coil is established in the space of the arc and is oriented so as to force the arc into a serrated-tooth chamber. The end result of this interaction is that the arc is elongated, cooled, and the voltage

23/11/17 10:50 AM

LIGHTNING AND OVERVOLTAGE PROTECTION        1467 

FIGURE 23-42  Evolution of voltage across the arc of a gapped arrester.

across the arc becomes substantial. Figure 23-42 illustrates the buildup of the voltage across the arc due to this mechanism. An illustration of the serrated-tooth chamber is illustrated in Fig. 23-43. The elongated arc improves the capability of the arrester to reseal when the current through it decreases after the overvoltage ceases to exist. It is important to note that the arc control process takes a relatively long time (hundreds of microseconds) to develop full voltage across the gap. This means that for fast transients, that is lightning, almost the entire voltage FIGURE 23-43  Illustration of a appears across the current-limiting block. The current-limiting block in modern gapped arresters serrated-tooth chamber of a gapped is constructed from SiC. The block has nonlinear resistance arrester. characteristics that are controlled with the manufacturing process. Specifically, the block is constructed from SiC crystals which are ground into powder form and then are mixed and pressed together with insulating material, forming a block. In this way, an SiC particle partially touches other particles and partially is insulated by the insulating material. The nonlinear properties are due to the resistancetemperature properties of the junction between the SiC crystals. This relationship is illustrated in Fig. 23-44. The combined operation of the gap and the current-limiting block result in the voltagecurrent characteristic illustrated in Fig. 23-45. It is important to note that, while the sparkover voltage Vs is typically consistent, the voltagecurrent curve depends on the waveform of the electric current, since the gap voltage is FIGURE 23-44  Typical resistance versus temperature of junction between SiC crystals. time dependent.

23_Santoso_Sec23_p1427-1502.indd 1467

23/11/17 10:50 AM

1468        SECTION TWENTY-THREE

Gapped SiC arresters are subject to power-follow current because of the poor nonlinear characteristics of the SiC block. Specifically, after sparkover and after the temporary overvoltage has subsided, if the power voltage across the arrester is substantial, a relatively high current will continue to flow through the arrester. The reason for this behavior can be easily visualized if one considers that the arc in the gap is a lowresistance conductor and that the current is primarily determined by the voltage-current characteristics of the SiC block. The situation is illustrated in Fig. 23-46. In the figure, the power-follow current of a SiC gap arrester is also compared to the power-follow current of an MOV arrester, which is discussed next. FIGURE 23-45  Typical voltage-current characteristics of a modern SiC gapped arrester.

Metal Oxide Varistor Arresters.  An MOV is formed from a variety of materials via a manufacturing process, which provides the desired electrical properties to the varistor. These electrical properties are not existent in the raw materials. In other words, the electrical properties of the final product are completely dependent on the manufacturing process. Much research effort has been expended to achieve electrical properties of the varistor close to those of the ideal protective device. The typical structure of a metal oxide varistor consists of highly conductive tiny particles of metal oxide (usually zinc oxide, ZnO) suspended in a semiconducting material. This structure is illustrated in Fig. 23-47. The manufacturing process determines the size of the metal oxide particles as well as the thickness and resistivity of the semiconducting material. The key to a good manufacturing process is that the conductive metal oxide particles do not touch each other but are separated by semiconducting material. This structure gives the varistor the properties of a pair of back-to-back-connected zener diodes. A typical voltage-current characteristic of an MOV is illustrated in Fig. 23-46. It should be understood that this function holds for negative voltages and currents as well.

FIGURE 23-46  Illustration of power-follow current for a SiC gapped arrester and an MOV arrester.

23_Santoso_Sec23_p1427-1502.indd 1468

23/11/17 10:50 AM

LIGHTNING AND OVERVOLTAGE PROTECTION        1469 

FIGURE 23-47  Structure of a metal oxide varistor (MOV). Size is exaggerated for illustration purposes.

In addition to this characteristic, it is necessary that the MOV material be capable of absorbing energy losses during conduction. The average energy absorption capability of a conventional ZnO varistor is about 150 to 200 J/cm3. Recent advances in MOV technology under Electric Power Research Institute sponsorship resulted in new formulations and manufacturing processes for MOVs. The new MOVs are capable of absorbing four to five times more energy per volume as above. The first designs of MOV arresters were subject to problems. The most common were thermal runaway and failures due to moisture ingress causing insulation failures. Thermal runaway can occur because an MOV is typically applied to the energized conductor without a series gap, and a small electric current always flows through the MOV during normal operating conditions. This small current and the associated ohmic losses can potentially raise the temperature of the MOV to the point that its electrical properties deteriorate, allowing more current to flow and further raising the temperature until failure. However, improvements in metal oxide materials and in packaging resulted in robust MOV arresters. The present state of the art and the superior properties of the MOV arresters make them the protection device of choice. The first commercially available MOV arresters were gapless. As a result, the MOV block is continuously subjected to the power frequency voltage. The performance of the MOV block under this condition is very important for determining the life of the arrester. A deep understanding of these characteristics is essential for the proper application of MOV arresters. First, observe that the voltage-current characteristic for an MOV arrester in Fig. 23-46 exhibits a knee for small currents (in the milliampere region). The knee is defined to be near the voltage required across the MOV block to cause 1 mA/cm2 of current to flow through the block. It is important to mention that while the voltage-current characteristic of an MOV block in the protection region (high current flow) is insensitive to the temperature of the block, the voltage-current characteristic near the knee is temperature-sensitive. This is illustrated in Fig. 23-48. Figure 23-49 illustrates the voltage versus current curves for an MOV arrester for different levels of applied voltage (sinusoidal, 60 Hz) expressed in pu of arrester rating. Note that for an applied voltage near nominal (1.05 pu), the electric current through the arrester is mostly capacitive (voltage and current are approximately 90° apart) and of low value on the order of a milliampere. As the voltage increases, the electric current increases much faster. It can be observed from the figure that the increase of the current occurs in the component, which is in phase with the voltage (resistive current) while the capacitive component remains constant. The current flow through the FIGURE 23-48  Voltage-current characteristic is temperaturearrester is responsible for power sensitive near the knee of the curve.

23_Santoso_Sec23_p1427-1502.indd 1469

23/11/17 10:50 AM

1470        SECTION TWENTY-THREE

FIGURE 23-49  Illustration of voltage vs. current through an MOV for different levels of a sinusoidal (60-Hz) applied voltage.

FIGURE 23-50  Typical power loss of an MOV block vs. applied voltage.

loss within the MOV block, which increases the temperature of the block. A typical power loss— applied voltage function is illustrated in Fig. 23-50. Note that as the voltage increases the power loss increases disproportionately. Increased losses and increased operating temperature have a detrimental effect on the MOV arrester life. Figure 23-51 illustrates the expected MOV arrester life as a function of continuously applied sinusoidal voltage.

FIGURE 23-51  Expected MOV arrester life as a function of continuously applied power frequency voltage.

An MOV block, because of its dimensions, exhibits a capacitance and an inductance. Both of them are insignificant at low frequencies. However, at higher frequencies they affect the performance of the arrester. This performance is illustrated in Fig. 23-52, which shows the discharge voltage across the MOV arrester as a function of time for specific values of electric current through the arrester.

23_Santoso_Sec23_p1427-1502.indd 1470

23/11/17 10:50 AM

LIGHTNING AND OVERVOLTAGE PROTECTION        1471 

FIGURE 23-52  Discharge voltage across an MOV arrester vs. time for various current levels through the arrester.

From this figure it is obvious that the protective level of an MOV arrester will depend on the waveform of the overvoltage. This behavior of the MOV surge arrester can be captured with the model of Fig. 23-53. Note that this model consists of two parallel resistance-inductance (R-L) circuits, a parasitic capacitance, and two nonlinear resistors. The nonlinear resistor RN0, represents the nonlinear characteristics of the arrester to fast front end surges, while the nonlinear resistor RN1 represents the nonlinear characteristics of the arrester to slow front-end surges. The parameters of the model are selected to match the measured discharge characteristics of the arrester. Typical parameters are illustrated in Fig. 23-54.

FIGURE 23-53  Nonlinear MOV arrester model.

It can be observed in Fig. 23-48 that, as the arrester discharge current increases in an MOV, the desirable nonlinear characteristics are deteriorating. This occurs in Fig. 23-48 at discharge

23_Santoso_Sec23_p1427-1502.indd 1471

23/11/17 10:50 AM

1472        SECTION TWENTY-THREE

FIGURE 23-54  Typical nonlinear voltage-current characteristic of the nonlinear resistor RN0 and RN1.

currents above 10 kA. Specifically, the discharge voltage at currents above 10 kA increases, resulting in inferior protection characteristics. In this aspect SiC arresters are superior to MOVs because SiC arresters do not exhibit this abrupt increase of discharge voltage at higher currents. The performance of MOVs at higher discharge currents can be improved by equipping them with a shunt gap (Westrom 1990). Such a construction is illustrated in Fig. 23-55. Specifically, an MOV block in an arrester is equipped with a shunt spark gap. The gap is designed to spark over whenever the discharge current through the arrester exceeds a certain value, for example 10 kA. In this way, when the discharge current increases beyond the value at which the desirable nonlinear characteristics of the MOV block start to deteriorate, the shunt gap sparks over, resulting in reduced discharge voltage and therefore FIGURE 23-55  Typical construction of a shunt-gap improved protection characteristics. MOV arrester.

Protective Margins.  Another important concept is the protection margin (PM). The protective margin is related to the properties of the protective device relative to the withstand capability of the power apparatus under protection. For the ideal situation depicted in Fig. 23-39, the protection margin is defined as



PM =

Vw − Vp Vp



where Vw is the withstand capability of the power apparatus under protection and Vp is the protection level.

23_Santoso_Sec23_p1427-1502.indd 1472

23/11/17 10:50 AM

LIGHTNING AND OVERVOLTAGE PROTECTION        1473 

FIGURE 23-56  Illustration of the protection margin definition.

Because both the protection level of a surge arrester and the withstand capability of a power apparatus depend on the rise time of the transient overvoltage, it is expedient to define protective margins for the standard surge waveforms. In this sense, the following protective margins are defined (see Fig. 23-56). 1. Equivalent front-of-wave protective margin (PMfow)

PM fow =

Vcww − Vp , fow Vp , fow

× 100

where Vcww is the equipment chopped-wave withstand (cww) voltage and Vp,fow is the arrester protection level for the front of wave (fow). 2. Equipment impulse protection margin (PMi)

PMi =

BIL − Vp ,d BIL

× 100

where BIL is the equipment basic insulation level and Vp,d is the arrester protection level for a full impulse wave. 3. Equipment switching protective margin (PMs)

PM s =

BSL − Vp ,ss Vp ,ss

× 100

where BSL is the equipment basic switching insulation level and Vp,ss is the arrester protective level for a switching surge.

23_Santoso_Sec23_p1427-1502.indd 1473

23/11/17 10:50 AM

1474        SECTION TWENTY-THREE

The definition of these three protective margins is illustrated in Fig. 23-56. In this definition one should bear in mind that the arrester protective levels may be defined differently for gapped and gapless arresters. Specifically, the definition of the protective levels for gapped and gapless arresters follows. •  Vp,fow, arrester protection level for front of wave Series-gapped arresters—front-of-wave sparkover: standard test dictates the rate of rise of front of wave to be 5.89 pu V/ms Gapless MOV arresters—front-of-wave sparkover: the highest discharge voltage to a surge-current impulse with 0.5 ms rise time and of specified crest (typically 3 to 40 kA) Shunt-gapped MOV arresters—front-of-wave sparkover: same as for gapless MOV arresters •  Vp,d , arrester protection level for a full impulse wave Series-gapped arresters—let-through level: the highest full impulse expected to cause sparkover after 8 ms Gapless MOV arresters—discharge voltage: the highest discharge voltage to a surge-current impulse (8 × 20 ms) of specified crest (typically 5 to 20 kA) Shunt-gapped MOV arresters—discharge voltage: same as for gapless MOV arresters •  Vp,ss, arrester protection level for a switching impulse Series-gapped arresters—switching surge sparkover: the highest full impulse causing sparkover at a time greater than 30 ms Gapless MOV arresters—switching surge discharge voltage: the highest discharge voltage to a current switching impulse of specified crest (typically 3 kA) Gapped MOV arresters—switching surge discharge voltage: same as for gapless MOV arresters Arrester Classification.  Arresters can be classified into the following groups: Station arresters Intermediate arresters Distribution arresters Secondary, industrial, and commercial arresters This classification is based on kilovolt ratings. Historically, station arresters provide the lowest protective levels relative to their rating (i.e., they have the highest protection quality index) and are capable of discharging the highest amount of energy. Intermediate arresters have somewhat higher protective levels relative to their rating and are capable of discharging somewhat less energy. Distribution and secondary, industrial, and commercial arresters have even higher protective levels and are capable of discharging even less energy. This historical classification and description of arresters may not be valid anymore. For example, there are MOV products that use MOV blocks for secondary arresters of the same quality as station class arresters, and therefore exhibit a very high protection quality index. It is important, however, to adopt this classification for consistency with standards. Specific voltage ratings, protective levels, and other mechanical characteristics of complete arrester units can be found in the ANSI/IEEE standards. As an example, Table 23-6a, taken from ANSI/IEEE C62.1-1989, lists the standard voltage ratings for surge arresters. Table 23.6b lists the MOV arrester ratings taken from ANSI/IEEE std. C62.11-1999. Another example is Table 23-7, taken from ANSI/IEEE C62.2, which provides several important arrester parameters and application data for station- and intermediate-class arresters. More accurate data for specific products are available from the manufacturers. There are a variety of commercial transient voltage suppression devices based on MOV technology. The quality of some of these products in terms of (1) their nonlinear characteristics, (2) energy absorption characteristics, and (3) current handling capability is very high. As an example, Table 23-8

23_Santoso_Sec23_p1427-1502.indd 1474

23/11/17 10:50 AM

LIGHTNING AND OVERVOLTAGE PROTECTION        1475 

TABLE 23-6a  Surge Arrester Voltage Ratings in Kilovolts Secondary arresters

Distribution arresters

Intermediate arresters

0.175 0.650 1 3 3 6 6 9 9 10 12 12 15 15 18 21 21 24 25 27 30 30 36 39 48 60 72 90 96 108 120

23_Santoso_Sec23_p1427-1502.indd 1475

Station arresters

3 6 9 12 15 21 24 30 36 39 48 60 72 90 96 108 120 144 168 180 192 240 258 276 294 312 372 396 420 444 468 492 540 576 612 648 684

23/11/17 10:50 AM

1476        SECTION TWENTY-THREE

TABLE 23-6b  MOV Arrester Ratings in Kilovolts* Duty-cycle voltage (kV rms) 3 6 9 10 12 15 18 21 24 27 30 36 39 45 48 54 60 72 90 96 108 120 132

MCOV (kV rms)

Duty-cycle voltage (kV rms)

2.55 5.1 7.65 8.4 10.2 12.7 15.3 17 19.5 22 24.4 29 31.5 36.5 39 42 48 57 70 76 84 98 106

144 168 172 180 192 228 240 258 264 276 288 294 312 396 420 444 468 492 540 564 576 588 612

MCOV (kV rms) 115 131 140 144 152 180 190 209 212 220 230 235 245 318 335 353 372 392 428 448 462 470 485

*For ratings not shown, consult with the manufacturer.

illustrates the characteristics of a 480-V rated transient voltage suppression device, HA series. Figure 23-57 also illustrates the voltage-current characteristic of this device. By a simple fitting procedure, the nonlinear characteristic of this device in the range 1 to 1000 A is approximately described by Eq. (23-1), where n ≈ 24. This is a relatively high exponent, suggesting a rather high protection quality index.

23.7  OVERVOLTAGE PROTECTION (INSULATION) COORDINATION The objective of overvoltage protection coordination, otherwise known as insulation coordination, is to minimize the number of insulation failures and therefore the number of interruptions. This has been a fundamental task of power engineering with a profound effect on the reliability of the system. Insulation coordination methods have evolved from the ad hoc procedures of the past to the highly sophisticated computer methods of today. Yet protection schemes remain an art, and a review of the evolution of methods provides an invaluable insight. By necessity, the methods are based on incomplete data or parameters with substantial uncertainty. As a result, present models are incomplete and interpretation of results is necessary. The objectives of insulation coordination procedures also depend on the effects of insulation failure. In this respect, power apparatus may be grouped in two broad categories: (1) those that use air as insulation (external insulation) and (2) those that use solid or liquid dielectrics as insulating material (internal insulation). Insulation failure in devices of the first category is not as destructive as insulation failure in devices of the second category. With the exception of secondary effects, failure

23_Santoso_Sec23_p1427-1502.indd 1476

23/11/17 10:50 AM

23_Santoso_Sec23_p1427-1502.indd 1477

TABLE 23-7  Station and Intermediate Arrester Characteristics Ratings, kV rms

Protective levels,

3–9 12–15 21–48  60–120 144–240 258–312 372 or higher

Durability characteristics

per unit crest arrester rating Range of application nominal system Front-of- Switching Discharge voltage, wave 1.2/50-ms surge voltage, 10 kA, kV sparkover sparkover sparkover 8/20-ms wave

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

Duty cycle High- Pressure initiating Transmission current relief, surge, line withstand, rms crest discharge, crest symmetrical amperes mi amperes amperes

Station class 2.2–12.47 13.2–18 18–46  69–138 161–287 345 500 or higher

2.24–4.24 2.12–2.83 2.09–2.56 1.99–2.24 1.83–2.22 2.06–2.17 1.94–2.10

1.89–3.30 1.89–2.42 1.80–2.29 1.60–1.94 1.57–1.70 1.56–1.70 1.65–1.70

Test not required 1.60–1.80 1.57–1.61 1.57–1.61 1.44–1.58



1.57–1.77 1.57–1.70 1.56–1.70 1.56–1.69 1.56–1.79 1.56–1.58 1.54–1.60

10,000 10,000 10,000 10,000 10,000 10,000 10,000

150 150 150 150 175 200 200

65,000 65,000 65,000 65,000 65,000 65,000 65,000

5000 5000 5000

100 100 100

65,000 65,000 65,000

65,000 25,000 65,000 25,000 40,000 25,000 40,000 25,000 40,000 25,000 40,000 25,000 40,000 25,000

Intermediate class

3–6  9–48  60–120

2.4–7.2 7.2–46  69–138

2.47–2.83 2.24–2.83 Test not 2.10–2.59 1.78–2.51 required 1.76–2.26 1.63–1.84 2.06–2.43

1.77–2.36 1.77–2.19 1.77–2.02

16,100 16,100 16,100

TABLE 23-8  Characteristics of a Commercial MOV-Type Device, HA Series, 480 V Maximum Continuous Continuous clamping Varistor voltage at rms dc Transient Peak voltage at 1-mA dc test current voltage voltage energy current 200 A, Typical Model Size, rating, rating, absorption, 8/20 ms, Min., Normal, Max., 8/20 ms, capacitance, number mm V V J A V V V V pF

23/11/17 10:50 AM

1477

V481HA32

32

480

640

450

25,000

670

750

825

1290

1300

1478        SECTION TWENTY-THREE

FIGURE 23-57  Voltage-current characteristic of transient voltage suppressor V481HA32, HA series.

of air insulation is self-healing, since removal of the overvoltage will restore the insulation. For this reason, the objectives of insulation coordination for external insulation are typically the minimization of insulation failure. It is permissible to tolerate a small probability of insulation failure if this will minimize the cost. Probabilistic methods are pertinent for this purpose. On the other hand, the objective of insulation coordination for internal insulation is to disallow any insulation failure from any known causes. Adherence to this objective is dependent on the cost of the apparatus under protection. As an example, this objective is strictly observed for higher MVA-rating power transformers while for distribution transformers the cost of meeting the objective may not be justifiable. Because of this variability in objectives, the process of insulation coordination is examined separately for transmission lines, substations, overhead distribution systems, undergound distribution systems, and industrial/commercial systems. Transmission Lines.  Overhead transmission lines use air or porcelain as the external insulating material. Flashovers across insulator strings or phase conductor to ground wire do not lead to catastrophic failures but rather to momentary outages. In other words, the insulation strength is quickly restored after arc extinction. For this system, the objectives of insulation coordination are to minimize the momentary outages at minimum cost. This is achieved through a procedure by which the cost of momentary outages is balanced against the cost of providing for overvoltage protection. The procedure is statistical, since many driving factors are statistical, for example, lightning strength and rise time. It is illustrated in Fig. 23-58, where the distribution of overvoltages is plotted as well as the distribution of withstand capability. Outages may occur when the overvoltage exceeds the withstand capability. This procedure can be carried one step further, where the performance (reliability) of the system is balanced against cost of designs. This concept is illustrated in Fig. 23-59, where the optimum design is defined at the minimum of the total cost consisting of the investment cost plus the unreliability cost. A drawback of this method is the fact that, while the investment cost can be properly assessed, the cost of unreliability may be elusive and at best subjective. In any case, insulation coordination of overhead transmission lines involves the following basic tasks: Design of an effective shielding against direct lightning strokes Design of an adequate insulation strength to withstand power frequency, switching, and lightning overvoltages Design of an effective grounding system to minimize backflashovers The design procedure typically consists of selecting a standard design and subsequently estimating the expected number of momentary outages. Design modifications are exercised if objectives are

23_Santoso_Sec23_p1427-1502.indd 1478

23/11/17 10:50 AM

LIGHTNING AND OVERVOLTAGE PROTECTION        1479 

FIGURE 23-58  Statistical evaluation of insulation failures.

not met. In this subsection, we will be concerned with estimation of the number of momentary outages. This task involves the following procedure: Estimation of the number of lightning strokes in the area Estimation of the percentage of strokes reaching the line Estimation of number of shielding failures Estimation of probability of backflashover Effects of corona Summary of results

FIGURE 23-59  Optimal design procedures that provide best tradeoff between performance (reliability) and cost.

23_Santoso_Sec23_p1427-1502.indd 1479

23/11/17 10:50 AM

1480        SECTION TWENTY-THREE

TABLE 23-9  Empirical Relationships between Lightning Ground-Flash Density and Annual Thunderstorm Days T Location

Ground-flash density, number of ground flashes/km2 ⋅ year

India 0.1T Rhodesia 0.14T South Africa 0.04T 1.25 Sweden 0.004T 2 (approx.) United Kingdom aT b (a = 2.6 ± 0.2 × 10-3; b = 1.9 ± 0.1) United States (north) 0.11T United States (south) 0.17T United States 0.1T United States 0.15T U.S.S.R. (Former) 0.036T1.3 World (temperate climate) 0.19T World (temperate climate) 0.15T World (temperate climate) 0.13T Source: EPRI (1975).

Estimation of the Number of Lightning Strokes in the Area. The ground flash density is defined as the number of lightning strokes (cloud to ground) per unit of area. It is preferable to use actual data on ground flash density if available. If not, then, as a first approximation, the ground flash density is taken to be approximately proportional to the thunderstorm activity, measured in thunderstorm days. Empirical formulas have been developed and are listed in Table 23-9. For the United States, the most commonly used formula is N1 = 0.12T



or

N 2 = 0.31T



where N1 = ground flash density per square kilometer per year N2 = ground flash density per square mile per year T = number of thunderstorm days It must be emphasized that this formula should be viewed as an average and approximate only, since thunderstorm activity may vary from year to year and the lightning activity in a thunderstorm day may vary. Estimation of the Percentage of Strokes Reaching the Line.  The number of strokes reaching the line (shield wire or phase conductor) can be estimated with two basic models: The geometric model The electrogeometric model These basic models have many variations, as many researchers have made improvements to improve their correlation to observed data. The principle of the geometric model is illustrated in Fig. 23-60. The model postulates that the line casts a shadow around it of width W. Any ground flash which would terminate at the shadow of width W if the line was not present will be intercepted by the line. Assuming that the ground flashes are uniformly distributed over the surface of the ground, the following equation applies for the number of strokes to the line: N t1 = 0.00012 WT or

23_Santoso_Sec23_p1427-1502.indd 1480

N t 2 = 0.000193 WT (23-2)

23/11/17 10:50 AM

LIGHTNING AND OVERVOLTAGE PROTECTION        1481 

FIGURE 23-60  Illustration of application of the geometric model.

where Nt1 = number of strokes to the line per kilometer of line length per year Nt2 = number of strokes to the line per mile of line length per year W = width of the line shadow, m T = number of thunderstorm days in the area An expression for the shadow width is W = 4h + d where d = distance between shield wires (zero if only one shield wire) h = effective height of the line, which can be approximated with h = hg + 2/3 (hg - hgw) hg = shield wire height at the tower or pole hgw = shield wire height at midspan The geometric model is very simplistic. It fails to take into account that the striking distance of lightning is determined by the magnitude of the return stroke as well. An improved method is the so-called electrogeometric model. The principle of this model is illustrated in Fig. 23-61. This model is based

FIGURE 23-61  Illustration of application of the electrogeometric model. [Note: The value of b is a function of tower height. Anderson (1975) uses b = 0.67 for ultra-high-voltage (UHV) lines.]

23_Santoso_Sec23_p1427-1502.indd 1481

23/11/17 10:50 AM

1482        SECTION TWENTY-THREE

on the observation that the point where the stepped leader of a lightning terminates is not S = striking distance in meters; Is = first return stroke current, kA determined until the stepped leader is within a striking distance. The striking distance is Proposed formula Reference defined as the length of the final leg of the S = 2 Is + 30 (1 - e–0.147I) Darveniza (1979) stepped leader which establishes contact with S = 10 I 0.65 Love (1973) a ground object. The striking distance was S found to depend on the amplitude of the first S = 9.4 I 0.67 Whitehead (1977) S return stroke. A number of empirical formuS = 8 I 0.65 IEEE (1987) S las have been proposed for determining the S = 3.3 I 0.78 Suzuki (1981) S striking distance. Table 23-10 lists the most 0.6 0.74 S = 0.67 h I Erickson (1982) common ones. S = 1.57 h0.45I 0.69 Rizk (1994) The equation most commonly used in S = [3.6 + 1.7 ln (43–Yc)] I 0.65 for Yc < 40m and 5.5 I 0.65 for the United States is the second one listed Yc > (or equal to) 40m (See IEEE Std. 1243) in Table 23-10. Using a striking distance, which depends on stroke magnitude, generates a model, which suggests that the number of strokes intercepted by the line depends on their magnitude. Figure 23-61 illustrates the application of the method to compute the number of strokes terminating at the line for two different stroke magnitudes, 7 and 12 kA. Specifically, for strokes of 7 kA, the striking distance is S1. For this striking distance, one can construct the width over which the strokes will be intercepted by the line. This width, W1, is shown in the figure. It is constructed by (1) drawing a line above ground at height bS1, where b = 0.8 (from Anderson 1968), (2) drawing a circle of radius S1 with center at the phase conductor, and (3) drawing a circle of radius S1 with center at the shield wire. The construction of the width W2 for strokes of 12 kA is also shown in the figure. The computed widths W1 and W2 can be used in Eq. (23-2) to estimate the number of strokes to the line. It should be understood that the process is repeated for several stroke magnitudes, spanning the distribution of lightning current magnitudes; then all the results are utilized to compute the statistical distribution of the expected strokes to the line. The average value can be extracted from this distribution. TABLE 23-10  Proposed Equations for Determining the Striking Distance

Estimation of Number of Shielding Failures.  It is important to know how many of the strokes reaching the line will actually terminate on a phase conductor or on a shield wire. The consequences are obvious. A lightning stroke terminating at the phase conductor and of sufficient magnitude will most likely result in a flashover. This is obvious when one considers the magnitude of the overvoltage. When shielding failure occurs and the lighting stroke terminates on the phase conductor, it generates an overvoltage on the stricken phase which is given by

us(t) = 1/6 (Zg + 2Zt)i(t)

and an overvoltage on the other two phases which is given by

un(t) = 1/6 (Zg - Zt)i(t)

where i(t) = lightning stroke current Zg = characteristic impedance for the ground mode of propagation of surges along the line Zt = characteristic impedance for the line mode of propagation of surges along the line us(t) = lightning overvoltage on the stricken phase un(t) = lightning overvoltage on any one of the other two phases For a typical transmission line design

23_Santoso_Sec23_p1427-1502.indd 1482

Z g ≈ 800 Ω Zt = 400 Ω



23/11/17 10:50 AM

LIGHTNING AND OVERVOLTAGE PROTECTION        1483 

In this case, the overvoltage is

υ s (t ) ≈ 300i(t )





υn (t ) ≈ 60i(t )



Obviously, a shielding failure for a lightning stroke of 20 kA will generate an overvoltage of about 6 MV, which will with certainty cause a flashover. On the other hand, a lightning stroke terminating on a shield wire will result in much lower overvoltages, if the transmission line is effectively grounded. It is, of course, possible that the overvoltages resulting from a lightning stroke to the shield wire will be of such magnitude as to cause a flashover from the shield wire or tower to the phase conductor. This event is known as a backflashover. In any case, the line shielding must be designed in such a way that the number of times lightning reaches a phase conductor is minimized. Occurrences of such incidents are termed shielding failure. The electrogeometric model provides an adequate tool to determine shielding failure. The basic premise of the method is defined in Fig. 23-61. Consider the striking distance S1 for a lightning stroke of magnitude I1. Consider also the line above ground at a height bS1, the circle of radius S1 with center at phase A, and the circle of radius S1 with center at shield wire g1. The intersections of these circles define the points P1 and P2. The electrogeometric model states that any stepped leaders, which reach the arc P1P2 and of magnitude less than I1 will terminate on the phase conductor A, resulting in a shielding failure. Any stepped leader reaching the arc P2P3 will be attracted by the shield wire. The percentage of lightning strokes of magnitude I1 or lower, which will reach a phase conductor, can be estimated by comparing the length of the arc P1P2 to the length of the arc P2P3. This process can be repeated for various stroke magnitudes. Subsequently, and utilizing the statistics of the stroke magnitude distribution, the probability distribution of shielding failures can be computed. The expected number of shielding failures can also be computed. For lightning strokes of a certain magnitude, the striking distance will be such that the points P1 and P2 may collapse to one point. This condition is illustrated in Fig. 23-61 for a different magnitude of stroke current I2, where the points R1 and R2 coincide. Any stepped leader resulting in stroke current magnitude I2 or higher and reaching the arc R2R3 will terminate on the shield wire. Any other stepped leaders reaching points to the right of points R2 will terminate to the ground. In this case, the line is shielded for lighting strokes of magnitude greater than I2. Now assume that the line insulation can withstand the overvoltages resulting from a direct hit on a phase conductor of magnitude I2. In this case, a shielding failure for lighting strokes of magnitudes I2 or lower will not result in a flashover. The line is said to be effectively shielded. An extension of this statement results to the concept of the critical striking distance. The critical striking distance is the striking distance for the smallest lightning stroke current magnitude, which, if it terminates on a phase conductor, will cause a flashover. The critical striking distance can be used to define the location of shield wires which will provide an effective shielding. Estimation of Probability of Backflashover.  Backflashover can occur when the transmission tower voltage at the location where the phase insulators are suspended (crossarms) becomes so high as to initiate an arc between the crossarm and the phase conductors. The driving force for initiating the arc is the voltage across the insulator which depends on many factors: Voltage at the crossarm due to the lightning stroke Induced voltage on the phase conductor due to surges on the shield wire generated by the lightning stroke Power frequency voltage at the phase conductor Tower footing impedance Traveling-wave phenomena along the tower Lightning strokes to the tower result in the highest overvoltage at the top of the tower as compared to overvoltages from lightning strokes on the shield wire along the span. As an example,

23_Santoso_Sec23_p1427-1502.indd 1483

23/11/17 10:50 AM

1484        SECTION TWENTY-THREE

FIGURE 23-62  Simplified calculations of overvoltages resulting for a lightning stroke to a tower: (a) schematic; (b) simplified circuit; (c) Bewley diagram.

consider a lightning stroke of crest 10 kA and rise time 1 ms terminating on the shield wire of a transmission line. For simplicity, neglect the phase conductors. The system is illustrated in Fig. 23-62a. All tower ground resistances are 80 W. The parameters of the shield wire, for the example under consideration, are

L = 2.7µH/m

and

23_Santoso_Sec23_p1427-1502.indd 1484

C = 6.58 × 10−12 F/m

23/11/17 10:50 AM

LIGHTNING AND OVERVOLTAGE PROTECTION        1485 

The characteristic impedance of the shield wire is Z = L /C = 640 Ω, and the speed of propagation of surges is u = 1 LC = 237 m/µs. The travel time from one tower to the next is 0.75 ms. To further simplify the computations, traveling-wave phenomena along the tower are neglected, resulting in the simplified circuit of Fig. 23-62b. The reflection and transmission coefficients at the tower are a = -0.80 and d = 0.20. The Bewley diagram for this circuit is illustrated in Fig. 23-62c, where u(t) is computed as

u(t ) = Req i(t ) = 64i(t )

where 64 W is the impedance “seen” by the lightning current. 64 W resulting from the parallel combination of 80 W, 640 W to the right of the tower. Thus, u(t) will have a rise time of 1 ms and crest of 640 kV. By summing up all the waves arriving at point C, the voltage waveform c1 of Fig. 23-63 is obtained. This procedure can be repeated, assuming that the same lightning stroke terminates at the shield wire in the middle of the span. The resulting overvoltage at the top of the tower C is shown as waveform c2 in Fig. 23-63. Note that the crest of this waveform is much lower. In reality, the tower footing impedance is frequency-dependent and traveling-wave phenomena along the tower affect the overvoltages. Figure 23-64 illustrates a typical voltage waveform across the phase insulators using a rather sophisticated model (Cokkinides and Meliopoulos 1988). Note that reflections from adjacent towers quickly reduce the voltage across the phase insulators. Also, the crossarm voltage is in general lower than the top of the tower voltage. As a result, bottom phase insulators, in general, experience the highest overvoltage for backflashover. The tower ground also affects the overvoltage. As an example, Fig. 23-65 illustrates the effect of tower grounding on the lightning voltage at the top of the tower. Note that the voltage at the top of the tower is not affected by tower grounding for the first approximately 0.2 ms after lightning initiation. However, the overall overvoltage waveform is drastically affected by tower grounding. Since the characteristics of arc initiation across the insulator string have a

FIGURE 23-63  Lightning overvoltages at top of tower; in c1 the lightning stroke terminates at tower top, and in c2 the lightning stroke terminates at midspan.

23_Santoso_Sec23_p1427-1502.indd 1485

23/11/17 10:51 AM

1486        SECTION TWENTY-THREE

FIGURE 23-64  Typical voltage waveforms across phase insulators due to lightning: (a) transient voltage of phase conductors and shield wire; (b) transient voltage across insulators.

volt-time characteristic, it is very important to examine the effect of voltage waveform on backflashover initiation. CIRGE has accepted the following volt-time curve for line insulator flashover, which is consistent with the work of Darveniza et al. (1975, 1979) and Whitehead (1977)

V f = 0.4W +

0.71W t 0.75

where W = line insulator length in meters t = time to breakdown in microseconds Vf-  = flashover voltage in megavolts for negative surges

FIGURE 23-65  Illustration of effects of tower grounding on voltage at top of tower due to a lightning stroke at the tower.

23_Santoso_Sec23_p1427-1502.indd 1486

23/11/17 10:51 AM

LIGHTNING AND OVERVOLTAGE PROTECTION        1487 

FIGURE 23-66  Insulator voltage-time curve and insulator voltage.

One should compare the volt-time characteristic to the actual voltage across the phase insulators to determine whether a backflashover will occur. Figure 23-66 illustrates such a construction where the insulator withstand capability versus time of a 1-m-long insulator string is superimposed on the actual voltage experienced by the insulator. Effects of Corona.  The overvoltage occurring at a phase conductor or shield wire establishes an extremely high-voltage gradient perpendicular to the conductor. This gradient, wherever it exceeds the withstand capability of air, will generate electric discharges, which will electrify the air surrounding the conductor. This phenomenon is known as corona. Corona increases the apparent radius of the conductor while it does not affect the geometric mean radius of the conductor. As a result, it decreases the characteristic impedance of the line and the level of overvoltages resulting from lightning. The voltage gradient (electric-field intensity) around an energized conductor is approximately E=

V r ln(2h/a)

where V is the conductor voltage, r is the distance from the conductor centerline, h is the conductor height above the earth, and a is the conductor radius. The value of 15 kV/cm is accepted as the electric-field intensity required to establish corona. Thus, corona will exist in a radius ac such that 15 kV/cm =

V ac ln (2h/ac )

As an example, a conductor 50 ft above the earth which experiences an overvoltage of 3.5 MV will establish corona at a radius ac = 2 ft. Summary of Results.  In summary, methods have been discussed for design of line-shielding systems, estimation of shielding failure, estimation of overvoltage stresses across insulators, and methods to determine the possibility of flashover across an insulator. There is a considerable uncertainty with almost all parameters and models affecting shielding failure, magnitude, and waveform of overvoltage across insulators, etc. This uncertainty can be dealt with by using probabilistic methods. Monte Carlo simulation is utilized for this purpose and is described in Sec. 23.8.

23_Santoso_Sec23_p1427-1502.indd 1487

23/11/17 10:51 AM

1488        SECTION TWENTY-THREE

Substation Lightning Insulation Coordination.  Substations typically comprise equipment such as transformers, bus work, breakers, reactors, and capacitor banks etc. This equipment must be protected against lightning overvoltages. As a rule, substations are shielded against direct lightning strikes on phase conductors. Thus, lightning overvoltages in a substation may occur for the following reasons: 1. Backflash due to a strike in the shield of the substation 2. Direct lightning hit due to shield failure 3. Lightning surges from lines (most common) a. Line shielding failure b. Line backflashover c. Induced voltage The overvoltage protection of substations consists of shielding against direct lightning strikes and application of protective devices (surge arresters) to protect specific power apparatus. Substation shielding methods are similar to those applied for transmission lines. One can use the geometric model or the electrogeometric model to determine the effectiveness of the shielding wires, masts, etc. The application of the electrogeometric model for substation shielding analysis is more complex since the analysis must be performed on a three-dimensional basis as opposed to a two-dimensional basis for a transmission line. A simplified variation of the electrogeometric model for the three-dimensional problems is the so-called rolling-sphere method. The basic idea of the rolling-sphere method is illustrated in Fig. 23-67a. Let Sc be the critical striking distance as defined for transmission lines:

Sc = 10 Ic0.65

where Ic is the critical stroke current, kA, as defined for transmission lines. The rolling-sphere method postulates that by rolling a sphere of radius Sc over the shield system of the substation, the protected equipment are those which are not crossing the path of the sphere as is illustrated in Fig. 23-67. This method provides a simple procedure to design an effective shielding system for the substation. Figure 23-67b provides a visualization of the application of this method to an actual substation. In addition to the shielding system, protection must be provided against overvoltages resulting from (1) lightning strikes to the shielding system and (2) surges entering the substation from the transmission lines (which are the most common). The magnitudes of the overvoltages in (1) above depend on the design of the grounding system. On the other hand, the overvoltages from (2) above depend on many factors, such as distance of point of initiation and source of surge (direct hit, induced). These overvoltages are typically limited by the insulation level of the transmission line. Since the usual case is that the substation equipment will have a BIL below the insulation level of the lines connected to the substation, overvoltage protection for the substation equipment must be provided. The application of protective devices (surge arresters) for the protection of power transformers is illustrated in Fig. 23-68. The application procedure consists of the following steps: 1. Select arrester rating (preliminary). 2. Determine arrester protection levels Vp, fow = arrester protection level for a front of wave Vp,d = arrester protection level for a full-impulse wave Vp,ss = arrester protection level for a switching impulse 3. Determine transformer withstand capability Vfoww = front-of-wave withstand Vcww = chopped-wave withstand BIL = basic insulation level BSL = basic switching insulation level 4. Plot arrester protection levels and transformer withstand capability on a common coordinate system, as illustrated in Fig. 23-68.

23_Santoso_Sec23_p1427-1502.indd 1488

23/11/17 10:51 AM

LIGHTNING AND OVERVOLTAGE PROTECTION        1489 

(a)

(b)

FIGURE 23-67  Illustration of the basic idea of the rolling-sphere method.

5. Determine protection margins. 6. If protection margins are not higher than the minimum recommended, select the next-lower arrester rating that is compatible with the normal operating voltage of the system, and go to step 2. Otherwise, go to step 7. 7. Determine whether arrester has adequate energy absorption capability for the application.

23_Santoso_Sec23_p1427-1502.indd 1489

23/11/17 10:51 AM

1490        SECTION TWENTY-THREE

FIGURE 23-68  Application of surge arresters for protection of power transformers.

This procedure is pertinent for application of surge arresters near the transformer. If there is a separation distance between arrester and transformer, the effects of separation must be accounted for. Specifically, separation results in deterioration of protective margins, as illustrated in Fig. 23-69. The figure shows an application of an ideal arrester 15 m away from the transformer. The ideal arrester is rated 150 kV. Because of the separation distance, the overvoltage reaching the transformer will be 300 kV, double the protective level of the arrester. Distribution System Overvoltage Protection.  Distribution circuits are typically not insulated to withstand direct lightning strokes. As a result, direct strikes will cause a flashover. Direct strikes on distribution lines are not frequent since the poles are not as high and therefore are shielded from trees and structures. On the other hand, distribution lines may be vulnerable to overvoltages resulting from lightning strokes to nearby trees, ground, or other objects. These voltage surges are known as induced lightning voltages and are injected into the power system through coupling. The coupling can be conductive through the conductive soil and the power system grounding structures, inductive, or capacitive. In a typical situation, all the coupling mechanisms may be present resulting in a voltage surge to the power system. These voltages are called induced voltage surges and are generally much lower than those occurring after a direct strike. Specifically, they rarely exceed 500 kV. The induced lightning overvoltages are of concern for distribution lines 35 kV or below. Higher kilovolt-level lines (i.e., 69 kV and above) have sufficient insulation to withstand induced voltage surges. The mechanism of induced voltage surges is illustrated in Fig. 23-70. A lightning stroke terminating at a location near a distribution line induces a surge on the line through conductive, inductive, and capacitive coupling. Several models to estimate the level of the induced voltage surges have been reported in the literature (Eriksson et al. 1982; Liew and Mar 1986). A simplified formula suggests the following induced voltage  1  1 + (x + β y ) 2β x + y 1 + 2β 2 x + β y − β x  υ p = Z0 Ih ⋅   + 2 ⋅  2 x 2 + 2 y 2 + 2β xy − β 2 y 2  2 y x 2 + 2 y 2 + 2β xy − β 2 y 2 y + (2β x + y ) where b  = 0.004I0.64 + 0.068 first stroke = 0.004I0.86 + 0.18 subsequent strokes Z0 = distribution line characteristic impedance I = stroke current crest The terms x, y, and h are as illustrated in Fig. 23-70. In addition, many measurements of induced voltage surges have been performed which practically verify the available models. Induced voltage surges on distribution lines are quite frequent. It is therefore necessary to insulate distribution lines to withstand these surges. This translates into the requirement of a 300 BIL for

23_Santoso_Sec23_p1427-1502.indd 1490

23/11/17 10:51 AM

LIGHTNING AND OVERVOLTAGE PROTECTION        1491 

FIGURE 23-69  Example of arrester-transformer separation effects: (a) system configuration; (b) Bewley diagram; (c) voltage at transformer.

23_Santoso_Sec23_p1427-1502.indd 1491

23/11/17 10:51 AM

1492        SECTION TWENTY-THREE

FIGURE 23-70  Illustration of lightning stroke near a distribution line.

distribution lines. In addition, power apparatus, connected to distribution lines and with BIL lower than the induced voltage surges, such as distribution transformers (typically the BIL of distribution transformers is 100 kV) must be protected. It is practical to protect transformers with surge arresters of appropriate ratings. Underground Distribution System Overvoltage Protection.  A typical configuration of an underground distribution system is shown in Fig. 23-71. Typically a surge arrester will be applied at the riser pole. Underground residential distribution systems present a relatively low characteristic impedance (30 to 50 W). When a transient (surge) reaches the URD system through the high-surge-impedance overhead system, and because of the presence of a surge arrester at the riser pole, the surge transmitted to the cable will be of very fast rise time, typically a small fraction of a microsecond. The magnitude of the surge is determined by the characteristics of the arrester. This surge will propagate along the cable and will double when it arrives at an open point or at the end of the cable where a transformer may be present. If this overvoltage is below the BIL level of the URD cable, no additional protection is required. However, the BIL of typical URD cable is relatively low. As an example, Table 23-11 illustrates the typical BIL for the most usual cable classes. In most cases, if a cable is protected with a surge arrester at the riser pole only (of the recommended arrester rating), it is possible that the overvoltage at the open end of the cable exceeds the BIL of the cable with the potential of failure. Use of surge arresters at the open ends, or, better yet, use of elbow type arresters at each transformer, drastically improves cable and transformer protection. Overvoltage Protection of Industrial and Commercial Systems.  Industrial and commercial power systems are subject to overvoltages resulting from lightning or switching operations. By far, lightning overvoltages are the most stressful. Since these systems are interconnected to power systems, disturbances on the power system will be transmitted to them. These systems are also subjected to

23_Santoso_Sec23_p1427-1502.indd 1492

23/11/17 10:51 AM

LIGHTNING AND OVERVOLTAGE PROTECTION        1493 

FIGURE 23-71  Typical overvoltage protection scheme for underground residential distribution (URD) systems.

TABLE 23-11  Typical Basic Insulation Levels for Cables Cable kV class Typical BIL 15 25 34.5

95 125 150

direct lightning. Therefore, these systems also require shielding against lightning. Typically, a grounding system will be installed as well as a lightning protection system (shielding) to divert any direct lightning strokes to ground. This grounding system is referred to as external grounding to distinguish it from the socalled internal grounding, which refers to the grounding system of various equipment in the facility. The external grounding systems of industrial/commercial power systems are interconnected to the power system, as shown in Fig. 23-72. The lightning protection system is basically a shielding system designed to

23_Santoso_Sec23_p1427-1502.indd 1493

Recommended arrester rating 9 18 25

FIGURE 23-72  Conceptual description of the grounding system of an industrial or commercial facility.

23/11/17 10:51 AM

1494        SECTION TWENTY-THREE

route the lightning surges into the external grounding system for the purpose of minimizing potential Air terminals differences within the facility. A system like this is Communication towers (if present) subjected to lightning overvoltages which may enter Power system grounding from a number of points. Table 23-12 lists a number Fence of possible points of entry. A coordinated design of the external grounding system, lightning protection system, and internal grounding system can provide a system, which is hardened against lightning and other sources of overvoltages. The effectiveness of the system can be assessed with analysis by using the methods discussed in this subsection. TABLE 23-12  Lightning Points of Entry

23.8  MONTE CARLO SIMULATION–BASED METHODS In many parts of the globe, the performance of electrical installations is affected by lightning. In this case, it is important to design the system in such a way that outages and damages from lightning are minimized. Typically, transmission lines, substations, and commercial and industrial buildings are the focus of the design process. Because lightning parameters present substantial variability, the effects of lightning must be evaluated on a statistical basis. Other parameters that affect system performance may also present substantial variability. One important parameter is soil resistivity, which affects ground impedances and therefore lightning overvoltages. Monte Carlo simulation methods are well suited to evaluate the effects of these parameters on system performance. A simplified description of a Monte Carlo simulation, given by Moussa and Wehling (1992), considers two parameters with substantial variability, and is illustrated in the following sequence of steps: 1. Generate a sample of lightning stroke described with respect to (a) crest magnitude and (b) rise time. 2. Generate a sample of soil resistivity. 3. Generate a sample of power frequency voltages. 4. Compute probability of shielding failure. 5. Perform an experiment and determine the lightning termination point (phase conductor, shield wire, etc.). 6. Compute transient voltages in system for conditions described above. 7. Perform effects (failure) analysis (compare voltage stresses on insulation against withstand capability). 8. If number of trials exceeded allowable, go to step 9. Otherwise go to step 1. 9. Generate histograms of maximum overvoltage and backflashover. It should be understood that this Monte Carlo simulation requires that a good analysis procedure should be available to reliably compute the overvoltages on the insulation. Such models have been developed and are available. Detailed description of these methods is beyond the scope of this text. Instead, some typical results will be presented and discussed. A typical application of these methods is to evaluate the performance of a specific power line. Figures 23-73 and 23-74 respectively illustrate examples of shielding analysis for two different samples (trials) of the Monte Carlo simulation. Note that for the same system, when the current is low, there is a probability of shielding failure. As the lightning current increases, shielding failure may be eliminated. Figures 23-75 and 23-76 respectively illustrate examples of effects (failure) analysis for two different trials of the same system. Note that the conditions illustrated in Fig. 23-75 will lead to insulation flashover, while the system will withstand the conditions illustrated in Fig. 23-76.

23_Santoso_Sec23_p1427-1502.indd 1494

23/11/17 10:51 AM

LIGHTNING AND OVERVOLTAGE PROTECTION        1495 

FIGURE 23-73  Example of shielding analysis. Lightning crest is 1.386 kA. There is a finite probability of direct strike on the phase conductor.

FIGURE 23-74  Example of shielding analysis. Lightning crest is 10.969 kA. The probability of direct strike on the phase conductor is zero.

23_Santoso_Sec23_p1427-1502.indd 1495

23/11/17 10:51 AM

1496        SECTION TWENTY-THREE

FIGURE 23-75  Example of effects analysis. Overvoltage across insulator exceeds the volt-time withstand curve of the insulator.

FIGURE 23-76  Example of effects analysis. Overvoltage across insulator does not exceed the volt-time withstand curve of the insulator.

23_Santoso_Sec23_p1427-1502.indd 1496

23/11/17 10:51 AM

LIGHTNING AND OVERVOLTAGE PROTECTION        1497 

FIGURE 23-77  Example of Monte Carlo simulation results.

The results of the Monte Carlo simulation are illustrated in Fig. 23-77. Note that for this case, which refers to a transmission line, there is a small probability of direct hit to the phase conductor and that the average crest of direct hit is 8.17 kA s. The results are in terms of expected number of flashovers per 100 mi of the line and per year.

23.9  LIGHTNING ELIMINATION DEVICES It is always desirable to eliminate the destructive effects of lightning on electrical equipment. Benjamin Franklin was the first to invent the lightning rod that provides a controlled path for the flow of the lightning current. Professor Moore (1997) has researched Franklin’s investigations and points out that, initially, Franklin believed that his lightning rod would eliminate lightning. Experimental observations have shattered this belief and Franklin accepted the fact that the lightning rod does not eliminate lightning but rather behaves as the control electrode for the termination of lightning so that other structures in the vicinity can be protected. This observation developed into the modern shielding theory we use for design purposes and which was discussed earlier. The desire to seek a device that prevents lightning did not die. The Czech scientist Prokop Divisch has advocated this goal in 1754. The basic idea in lightning prevention is to provide multiple points of discharge to neutralize an electrified thundercloud. In theory, these charges can reach the electrified cloud and prevent the initiation of lightning. In fact, in 1930 a patent was awarded to J. M. Cage of Los Angeles for a lightning prevention device consisting of point-bearing wires suspended from a steel tower for the purpose of protecting petroleum storage tanks. Later, in 1971, lightning prevention systems were commercialized.

23_Santoso_Sec23_p1427-1502.indd 1497

23/11/17 10:51 AM

1498        SECTION TWENTY-THREE

+

Discharge Sources +

+ +

+ +

+

+

+ +

– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –

Electric Field Intensity

Good Ground (a)

(b)

FIGURE 23-78  Conceptual illustration of a lightning elimination system showing (a) a good ground with discharge sources and (b) the discharge into the electrified cloud.

There are many technologies of lightning prevention systems: (a) active air terminal that generate ions which blend into the atmosphere to minimize the electric field around the protected facility, (b) terminals with multiple sharp edges that ionize the air around the terminal for the purpose of minimizing the electric field around the protected facility and (c) umbrella terminals, which provide a smooth surface that minimizes the maximum electric field around the protected facility. As an example the theory of operation of technology (b) is discussed. Specifically, the basic idea of this technology is illustrated in Fig. 23-78. The system consists of sharp objects (discharge sources), which are electrically connected to a good grounding system (Fig. 23-78a). The theory is that the discharge released by the discharge sources into the atmosphere will reach the electrified cloud (Fig. 23-78b) and will partially neutralize it. The idea of using umbrella terminals to provide a smooth surface that minimizes electric field intensity is due to Tesla who has applied and received U.S. Patent 1 266 175 May 14. 1019 on this idea. The success of lightning prevention systems has not been as advertised. There is indisputable field evidence that the lightning elimination devices cannot eliminate lightning. On the other hand, there are cases in which these devices helped reduce the frequency and extent of damage from lightning (Moussa 1998). The present knowledge and theories of lightning are consistent with this field experience.

23.10 ACKNOWLEDGMENTS A large number of people directly or indirectly contributed to the development of this section. Professor Nikolopoulos of the National University of Athens, Greece, introduced me to high voltage engineering principles. Dr. Roger Webb, Director of the School of Electrical Engineering, introduced and developed a course on power system transients at Georgia Tech and subsequently worked with me in teaching this course. Several folks at the Electric Power Research Institute (EPRI) supported and contributed to my work, namely, John Dunlap, Gil Addis, and Mario Rabinowitz, and numerous EPRI project advisors contributed in the development of ideas in many different ways. Art Westrom has been an enthusiastic supporter of this work, reviewed the manuscript, and provided valuable suggestions and inputs. Dr. George Cokkinides developed the transmission-line model for lightning performance evaluation and worked with me on many aspects of lightning shielding and evaluation. Finally, Fan Zhang, a Ph.D. candidate at Georgia Tech, worked with me long hours in typing the manuscript and preparing the drawings.

23_Santoso_Sec23_p1427-1502.indd 1498

23/11/17 10:51 AM

LIGHTNING AND OVERVOLTAGE PROTECTION        1499 

23.11 BIBLIOGRAPHY Anders, G. J., and M. A. El-Kady. 1992. Transient Ratings of Buried Power Cables. Part I: historical perspective and mathematical model, paper 92 WM 044-8 PWRD. Anderson, J. G. 1968. EHV Transmission Line Reference Book. Washington, DC: Edison Electric Institute. Anderson, J. G. 1975. Lightning Performance of Transmission Lines, in Transmission Line Reference Book, 345 KV and Above. Palo Alto, Calif.: Electric Power Research Institute (EPRI). ANSI Standard C62.2. Guide for Application of Valve-Type Lightning Arresters for Alternating Current Systems. Barker, P. P., et al. 1992. Characteristics of Lightning Surges Measured at Metal Oxide Distribution Arresters, paper 92 WM 255-0 PWRD. Berger, K. 1967. Novel Observations on Lighting Discharges: Results of Research on Mount San Salvatore. J. Franklin Institute 283(6):478–524. Boyd, E. L. 1992. Internal Spark Gap Protection of Distribution Transformers from Low-Side Current Surges. IEEE Trans. Power Delivery, pp. 1592–1600. Braunstein, A. 1970. Lightning Strokes to Power Transmission Lines and the Shielding Effect of Ground Wires. IEEE Trans. PAS-89(8):1900–1910. Brown, G. W. 1978. Lightning Performance. Updating Backflash Calculation. IEEE Trans. PAS-97:33–38. Chalmers, J. A. 1967. Atmospheric Electricity. New York: Pergamon Press. Chowdhuri, P., and E. T. B. Gross, 1969. Voltages Induced on Overhead Multiconductor Lines by Lightning Strokes. IEEE Proc. 116:561–564. Cokkinides, G. J. and A. P. Meliopoulos. 1988. Transmission Line Modeling with Explicit Grounding Representation. Electric Power Syst. Research 14(2):109–119. Darveniza, M., et al. Nov./Dec. 1979. Modeling for Lightning Performance Calculations. IEEE Trans. Power Appar. Syst. PAS-98(6):1900–1908. Darveniza, M., F. Popolansky, and E. R. Whitehead. July 1975. Lightning Protection of UHV Transmission Lines. Electra (41): 36–39. Dean, D. S. 1966. Insulation Tests for the Design and Uprating of Wood-pole Transmission Lines. IEEE Trans. PAS-85:1258. Dommel, H. W. 1969. Digital Computer Solution of Electromagnetic Transients in Single and Multiphase Networks. IEEE Trans. PAS-88:388–399. Dommel, H. W., and W. S., Meyer, 1974. Computation of Electromagnetic Transients. Proc. IEEE 62:983–993. Durie, R. C., and C. Pottle, 1992. An Extensible Real-Time Digital Transient Network Analyzer, paper 92 WM 255-0 PWRD. EPRI. 1984. Report EL-3608, Single-Phase, Multiphase, and Multiple-Circuit Lightning Flashovers of Transmission Lines. Palo Alto, Calif.: EPRI. EPRI. 1990. Report EL-6782, Characteristics of Lightning Surges on Distribution Lines. Palo Alto, Calif.: EPRI. Eriksson, A. J., M. F. Stringefellow, and D. V. Meal 1982. Lightning Induced Overvoltages on Overhead Distribution Lines. IEEE Trans. PAS-101:960–968. Fink, D. G., and H. Wayne Beaty. 1993. Standard Handbook for Electrical Engineers, 13th ed. New York: McGraw-Hill. Flugum, R. W. 1970. Operation of Lightning Arresters on Abnormal Power Frequency Voltages. IEEE Trans. PAS-89(7):1444–1451. Furukawa. S. et al. 1989. Development and Application of Lightning Arresters for Transmission Lines. IEEE Trans. Power Delivery 4(4). Gallagher, T. J., and A. J. Pearmain. 1983. High Voltage Measurements, Testing and Design. New York: Wiley. Goedde, G. L., R. C. Dugan, and L. D. Row. 1991. Full Scale Lightning Surge Tests of Distribution Transformers and Secondary Systems. IEEE Proc. Dallas, Tex. PES T&D Conference pp. 577–581. Golde, R. H., ed. 1977. Lightning. New York: Academic Press. Hileman, A. R., P. R. Leblanc, and G. W. Brown. 1970. Estimating the Switching Surge Performance of Transmission Lines. IEEE Trans. PAS-89:1455–1466. IEEE. 1987. Power System Transient Recovery Voltages. Seminar Report 87THO176-8-PWR. New York: IEEE. Ishida, K., et al. 1992. Development of a 500 kV Transmission Line Arrester and Its Characteristics. IEEE Trans. Power Delivery 7(3):1265–1274. Johnson, I. B., et al. 1979. Surge Protection in Power System. IEEE Tutorial Text 79 EH0144-6 PWR.

23_Santoso_Sec23_p1427-1502.indd 1499

23/11/17 10:51 AM

1500        SECTION TWENTY-THREE

Kolcio, N., et al. 1992. Transient Overvoltages and Overcurrents on 12.47 kV Distribution Lines; Computer Modeling Results, paper 92 WM 273-3 PWRD. Kroninger, H. 1974. Further Analysis of Prof. Berger’s San Salvatore Lightning Current Data, CSIR Spec. Report ELEK 53. Pretoria, South Africa: National Electrical Engineering Research Institute. Larson, A. 1905. Annual Report. Washington, DC: Smithsonian Institute, pp. 119. Liew, A., and M. Darveniza. 1974. Dynamic Model of Impulse Characteristics of Concentrated Earths. Proc. IEEE 121(2):123–135. Liew, A. C., and S. C. Mar. 1986. Extension of Chowdhuyri-Gross Model for Lightning Induced Voltage on Overhead Lines. IEEE Trans. Power Delivery PWRD-1(4):1073–1081. Love, R. R., 1973. Improvements on Lightning Stroke Modeling and Applications to the Design of EHV and UHV Transmission Lines, M.Sc. thesis, University of Colorado. McComb, T. R., et al. 1992. Digital Techniques in HV Tests: Summary of 1989 Panel Session, paper 92 WM 175-0 PWRS. Mak, S. T. 1992. Propagation of Transients in a Distribution Network, paper 2/92 WM 272-5 PWRD. Mancao, R. T., J. J. Burke, and A. Myers 1992. The Effect of Distribution System Grounding on MOV Selection, paper 92 WM 223-7 PWRD. Meliopoulos, A. P. 1972. Problems and Concise Theory of High Voltage Structures (in Greek). Athens, Greece: S. B. H. Sellountos Publishing Co. Meliopoulos, A. P. 1988. Power System Grounding and Transients: An Introduction. New York: Marcel Dekker. Meliopoulos, A. P., and M. G. Moharam. 1983. Transient Analysis of Grounding Systems. IEEE Trans. PAS-102(2): 389–397. Meliopoulos, A. P., Sakis, W. Adams, and R. Casey. May 1997. An Integrated Backflashover Model for Insulation Coordination of Overhead Transmission Lines. Electrical Power Energy Syst. 19(4):229–234. Melvold, D. J., S. A. Miske, Jr., and E. C. Sakshung May 15, 1974. Switching Cables Can Stress Arresters. New York: Electrical World magazine. Moore, C. B. Jan. 1997. Study of Behavior of Sharp and Blunt Lightning Rods in Strong Electric Fields: Review of Lightning Protection Technology for Tall Structures. Publication AD-A075 449, pp. 96–107. Mousa, A. M. Oct. 1998. The Applicability of Lightning Elimination Devices to Substation and Power Lines. IEEE Trans. Power Delivery 13(4):1120–1127. Mousa, A. M., and R. J. Wehling 1992. A Survey of Industry Practices Regarding Shielding of Substation against Direct Lightning Strokes, paper 92 WM 224-6 PWRD. Ogbuobiri, E. C., W. F. Tinney, and J. W. Walker 1970. Sparsity-Directed Decomposition for Gaussian Elimination on Matrices. IEEE Trans. Power Appar. Syst. PAS-89:141–150. Papalexopoulos, A. D., and A. P. Meliopoulos 1987. Frequency Dependent Characteristics of Grounding Systems. IEEE Trans. Power Delivery PWRD-2(4):1073–1081. Powell R. W. 1967. Lightning Protection of Underground Residential Distribution Circuits. IEEE Trans. PAS-86: 1052–1056. Regaller, K. ed. 1980. Surges in High-Voltage Networks. New York: Plenum Press. Rizk, F. A. M. 1994. Modeling of Lightning Incidence to Tall Structures, Part II: Application, IEEE Transactions on Power Delivery, pp. 172–193. Sakshung, E. C., T. J. Carpenter, and E. W. Stetson. 1965. Duty Cycle Testing of Current-Limiting Station and Intermediate Lightning Arresters. IEEE Trans. PAS-84(3):422–425. Sakshaug, E. C., J. S. Kresge, and S. A. Miske, Jr. 1977. A New Concept in Station Arrester Design. IEEE Trans. PAS-96(2):647–656. Sargent, M. A. 1972. Monte Carlo Simulation of the Lightning Performance of Overhead Shielding Networks of High Voltage Stations. IEEE Trans. PAS(pt. III)-91:1651–1656. Sargent, M. A., and M. Darveniza 1969. Tower Surge Impedance. IEEE Trans. PAS-88:680–687. Semlyen, A., and M. R. Iravani 1992. Frequency Domain Modeling of External Systems in an Electromagnetic Transient Program, paper 92 WM 304-6 PWRS. Shindo, T., et al. 1992. Model Experiments of Laser-Triggered Lightning, paper 92 WM 25804 PWRD. Smith, S. B., and R. B. Standler 1991. The Effects of Surges on Electronic Appliances, paper 91 SM 384-8 PWRD, IEEE summer meeting. Stone, G. C., R. G. van Heeswijk, and R. Bartnikas. Investigation of the Effect of Repetitive Voltage Surges on Epoxy Insulation, paper 92 WM 067-9 EC.

23_Santoso_Sec23_p1427-1502.indd 1500

23/11/17 10:51 AM

LIGHTNING AND OVERVOLTAGE PROTECTION        1501 

Suzuki, T., K. Miyake, and T. Shindo 1981. Discharge Path Model in Model Test of Lightning Strokes to Tall Mast IEEE Transactions on Power Apparatus and Systems, vol. PAS-100, No. 7, pp. 3553–3562. Thomas, H. 1968. Transport Time-Delay Simulation for Transmission Line Representation. IEEE Trans. Computers C-17:204–214. Tominager, S. 1980. Stability and Long-Term Degradation of Metal Oxide Surge Arresters. IEEE Trans. PAS-99(4): 1548–1556. Transmission Line Reference Book, 345 kV and Above. Palo Alto, Calif.: EPRI. Udo, T. 1965. Switching Surge and Impulse Sparkover Characteristics of Large Gap Spacing and Long Insulator Strings. IEEE Trans. PAS-84:304. Uman, M. A. 1969. Lightning. New York: McGraw-Hill. Uman, M. A. 1987. The Lightning Discharge. New York: Academic Press. Walsh, G. W. 1977. A New Technology Station Class Arrester for Industrial and Commercial Power Systems, Conf. Rec. IEEE Industrial and Commercial Power System Technical Conference, catalog no. 77 CH1198-11A. Westrom, A. C. 1990. Surge Arrester with Shunt Gap. U.S. Patent 4,908,730. Whitehead, E. R. 1977. Protection of Transmission Lines, in Lightning, vol. 2, R. H. Golde, ed. New York: Academic Press, pp. 697–745. Williams, E. R. Nov. 1988. The Electrification of Thunderstorms. Scientific American pp. 88–99.

23_Santoso_Sec23_p1427-1502.indd 1501

23/11/17 10:51 AM

This page intentionally left blank

23_Santoso_Sec23_p1427-1502.indd 1502

23/11/17 10:51 AM

24

COMPUTER APPLICATIONS IN THE ELECTRIC POWER INDUSTRY Juan A. Martinez-Velasco Professor, Universitat Politècnica de Catalunya, Spain

24.1 INTRODUCTION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1504 24.1.1 A Vision of the Power Industry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1504 24.1.2 The Transition to the Smart Grid. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1505 24.1.3 Computer Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1507 24.1.4 Spectrum of Computer Usage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1510 24.1.5 Organization of the Section. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1512 24.2 ENGINEERING APPLICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1513 24.2.1 System Expansion. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1514 24.2.2 Transmission Planning and Analysis. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1514 24.2.3 Distribution Planning and Analysis. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1517 24.2.4 Design and Construction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1519 24.2.5 Project Management. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1522 24.2.6 Administrative Support. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1522 24.2.7 Power Market Computer Simulation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1523 24.3 OPERATING APPLICATIONS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1525 24.3.1 Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1525 24.3.2 Energy Management System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1526 24.3.3 Power Plant Monitoring and Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1535 24.3.4 Power Plant Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1535 24.3.5 Fuel Management. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1535 24.3.6 Load Management. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1536 24.4 TOOLS FOR THE SMART GRID. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1536 24.4.1 Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1536 24.4.2 Combined Modeling of Power Grids and Communication Systems. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1538 24.4.3 High Performance Computing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1540 24.4.4 Real-Time Simulation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1541 24.4.5 Big Data and Analytics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1544 24.4.6 Cloud Computing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1546 24.5 THE COMMON INFORMATION MODEL. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1549 24.5.1 Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1549 24.5.2 Background . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1550 24.5.3 Main CIM Features. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1552 24.5.4 CIM Packages and Profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1552 24.5.5 CIM Interoperability Tests. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1553 24.5.6 CIM Harmonization. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1554 24.6 THE IoT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1555 24.6.1 Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1555 24.6.2 Drivers, Barriers, and Challenges. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1555 24.6.3 IoT Applications in the Smart Grid. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1556

1503

24_Santoso_Sec24_p1503-1574.indd 1503

23/11/17 1:53 PM

1504  SECTION TWENTY-FOUR



24.7 CYBERSECURITY. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1557 24.7.1 Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1557 24.7.2 Cybersecurity Threats and Vulnerabilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1558 24.7.3 Cybersecurity Measures. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1558 24.7.4 Cybersecurity Standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1561 24.7.5 Ongoing Efforts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1562 24.8 ACKNOWLEDGMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1563 24.9 REFERENCES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1563 24.10 ACRONYMS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1572

24.1 INTRODUCTION 24.1.1  A Vision of the Power Industry The power industry is engaged in the generation, transmission, and distribution of electrical energy which is obtained by conversion from other forms of energy such as coal, gas, oil, nuclear, water, or other renewable energy. These activities often include mining, rail transport, shipping, slurry pipelines, and storage of energy in many forms. In the first 90 years of its history, the industry expanded at a pace nearly twice that of the overall economy, doubling roughly every 10 years. During that period, real prices per kilowatt hour (kWh) decreased steadily because of technical improvements, productivity increases, and stable fuel prices. Throughout the 1970s, increased fuel costs, limits in economies of scale, diminishing returns in technology improvement, and increased regulation costs led to increased kilowatt hour costs and reduced demand growth. The political and economic response to increasing costs has been a movement to smaller generator sizes, minimization of capital investment, and attempts to control costs by fostering competition in generation supply. Incentives were also established to reduce demands and increase load factors. Today power supply is diversifying away from large central station technologies and toward increased use and availability of the transmission and distribution systems. The industry’s purpose is to provide adequate, reliable, environmentally compatible electricity at reasonable cost with the ultimate goal of improving its productivity and net earnings. In spite of the differences between publicly and privately owned utilities, this goal is applicable to each, in different form. Several issues have recently emerged, whose impacts will increase in future years: •  Large blackouts have raised concerns that the current control structure for the power grid is or will be unable to cope with an increasing demand for reliable electric power. Improving the reliability of power systems will require experience with uncommon system behaviors, broader situational awareness at control centers, fast and reliable automatic controls, and active participation by power consumers in the control process. •  There are currently many legislative efforts to increase the percentage of power derived from lowcarbon sources and reduce carbon-intensive generation. Renewable power generation depends largely on local conditions (e.g., wind or sunlight availability). The best locations for production are often not where the greatest power demands are. Power transmission, then, could be a limiting factor in the growth of distributed, renewable energy generation. In addition, without a proper design, a too high penetration of intermittent power sources, such as wind or solar, can result in grid instability. •  The difficulties and barriers to developing new transmission network capacity are leading many transmission and distribution parts to an operation closer to the thermal, mechanical, and electrical limits. This reflects the need to manage the congestions on transmission and distribution networks and identify solutions that could defer investments. •  The operation of the power system will need to address an increase in plug-in hybrid electric vehicles, which will significantly alter the demand pattern.

24_Santoso_Sec24_p1503-1574.indd 1504

23/11/17 1:53 PM

COMPUTER APPLICATIONS IN THE ELECTRIC POWER INDUSTRY   1505 

•  The increase of sensitive semiconductor-based electronic equipment has increased concern about power line disturbances. In addition, interruption costs for industrial facilities may be too high. All this calls for a better quality and reliability. •  The connection of distributed energy resources (DERs) to the distribution system raises some technical concerns. For instance, although distributed generation (DG) units may successfully operate in island when there is a balance between load and generation, islanded operation is not generally allowed because power quality cannot be always maintained within an acceptable level by the islanded generators, and restoring the outaged circuits is complicated when having islanded generators since automatic reclosing is generally used. In addition, DG can cause miscoordination of protective devices. The design and installation of microgrids is foreseen as a solution to some of these problems. •  The increasing use of sensors (e.g., phasor measurement units—PMUs) to monitor the network state in both transmission and distribution levels, and smart meters at costumer facilities to remotely read consumption or store electricity price will require an advanced two-way communication system. •  The network of physical objects (e.g., home appliances, electrical vehicles, buildings) connected to the Internet framework and that form the Internet of Things (IoT) can be seen as a new step of the smart grid development in which devices are embedded with both intelligence and sensors that provide them with decision-making capabilities. •  The proliferation of any type of intelligent electronic devices (IEDs) and the deployment of the IoT raises concerns about cybersecurity. Energy management systems (EMSs) are critical to the flow of power through the grids, and a malicious manipulation of one or several IEDs can cause a major grid failure. On the other hand, the increase of information exchange within the utility and between the utility and costumers raises a concern about privacy and confidentiality. For more details about some topics covered in this section, readers are referred to other sections of this handbook (e.g., Secs. 8 and 17 through 23). 24.1.2  The Transition to the Smart Grid The state of the current power grid in developed nations is considered mature. Although its reliability is very high, its structure still has some significant limitations, such as inefficiency at managing peak load, too high cost of power outages and power quality variations, or relatively slow data transmission rates. The power supply has to change according to the power demand continuously and the power grid will also need to maintain a buffer of excess supply, which results in lower efficiency and higher costs. In addition, environmental constraints push power providers for lower greenhouse gas (GHG) emissions. On the other hand, advances in computers, controls, communications, alternative energy sources, and other components may enable methods of using the existing grid structure more efficiently and help to moderate electrical demand at critical times, resulting in less pollution and lower costs. A smarter grid will use new technologies to reduce the environmental impact of power grid and increase efficiency as well as renewable energy utilization. Although there is no coincidence with an accurate definition for the term “smart grid,” the features it should have or the goals it should achieve, the smart grid may be seen as an upgrade of the present power system in which the current and new functionalities will monitor, protect, and automatically optimize the operation of its interconnected elements to maintain a reliable and secure environment. The new functionalities represent challenges that depend on each utility’s context (e.g., legacy systems). The smart grid offers better management of the energy consumption by the usage of dualway advanced metering infrastructure and real-time communication, improved power reliability and quality, enhanced security by reducing outages and cascading problems, better integration of DERs and new loads (e.g., plug-in hybrid electric vehicles), reduction in greenhouse gases and other pollutants, or financial benefits for suppliers and consumers. Although the smart grid will build upon the basic design of the current power grid, it will have features essential to its operation that will involve

24_Santoso_Sec24_p1503-1574.indd 1505

23/11/17 1:53 PM

1506  SECTION TWENTY-FOUR

monitors, sensors, switching devices and sophisticated two-way communication systems that will allow it to be a highly automated power delivery system. By delivering real-time information over a distributed computing and communications infrastructure, the smart grid will be able to provide a near-instantaneous balance between electricity supply and electricity demand. According to the model proposed by the U.S. National Institute of Standards and Technology (NIST) [1], a smart grid may be considered an interconnected set of domains: markets (operators and participants in electricity markets), operations (managers of the movement of electricity), service providers (organizations providing service to electrical customers and utilities), bulk generation (generators of electricity in bulk quantities), transmission (carriers of bulk electricity over long distances), distribution (distributors of electricity to and from customers), and customers (end users of electricity). The actors in each domain may be organizations, devices, computer systems or software applications that make decisions and exchange information. Each domain will have secure communications connections with the other actors, whereas the electrical connections will be between bulk generation, transmission, distribution, and customer, although the customer may also be an electrical supplier [1]. The European version of the smart grid reference architecture was presented in a CENELEC report released in November 2012 [2]. The drivers behind smart grid solutions are needs for more energy, sustainability, increased usage of renewable energy resources, competitive energy prices, or security of supply. To achieve smart grid goals, utilities have to face several challenges, such as high power system loading, increased use of DERs and intermittent renewables, new loads (hybrid/e-cars), cost pressure, utility unbundling, increased energy trading, transparent consumption and pricing for the consumer, or significant regulatory push. Obviously, the priority of drivers and challenges will differ from place to place. Although the smart grid does not yet exist as such, certain aspects of what the smart grid will become are already evident. Moreover, specific devices or techniques may already exist commercially and/or may be part of pilot projects currently underway in various geographic regions. The list of these technologies include power electronics technologies for transmission and distribution (e.g., HVDC, FACTS, and custom power), sensing, measurement and metering technologies (e.g., smart meters, meter reading systems and phasor measurement units), DERs, advanced telecommunications technologies, demand-side technologies, or an information management system (i.e., a system including functions such as collection and processing, analysis, integration, improved interfaces, and information security). The implementation of the smart grid involves new technologies and regulations. Existing equipment that functions adequately in the present grid may not fulfill the demands of the smart grid, the technologies required to realize the smart grid in all of its functionality may not yet exist along with the skilled workforce to implement and maintain it, and some regulatory agencies may not have yet experienced with the smart grid concept. The smart grid will greatly change the way residential customers have always used electrical power as they would have to consider the actual cost of power at time of use. In addition, the access to and information available from customers through the telecommunication system will also cause concern for data privacy and cybersecurity. The list of barriers to the adoption of the smart grid may thus include regulatory uncertainty, economic disincentives, reluctance to change the existing system, data privacy and cybersecurity, available technology and required skills. Lack of technology standards is being another major obstacle to smart grid deployment. The utilities will deploy many new products and will be greatly affected by adopted standards, particularly those regarding information transfer, interoperability, cybersecurity, and data privacy. The importance of these standards will vary in their relation to smart grid applications. Deployment of various smart grid elements, including smart sensors on distribution lines, smart meters in homes, and widely dispersed energy resources, is already underway and without standards there is the potential for technologies developed or implemented to become obsolete prematurely or to be implemented without measures necessary to ensure security. Lack of standards may also impede future innovation and the realization of promising applications. The International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC) Smart Grid Standardization Roadmap recognizes that a very high level of interoperability of an increased number of intelligent devices, solutions, and organizations is one major common requirement for most of the smart grid applications [3].

24_Santoso_Sec24_p1503-1574.indd 1506

23/11/17 1:53 PM

COMPUTER APPLICATIONS IN THE ELECTRIC POWER INDUSTRY   1507 

Interoperability has different aspects which will be present in most of the new applications. Syntactic interoperability is the ability of two or more systems to communicate and exchange data; it is mainly done through standardized data formats and protocols. Another aspect is the ability of two or more systems to automatically interpret the exchanged data. This is called semantic interoperability. To achieve this, one must accept a common information exchange reference model. Both aspects are typical domains for standardization. A detailed list of standards was provided in a CENELEC document [4]. Major steps to be made toward achieving a Smart Grid Interoperability Framework are proposed in the NIST Framework and Roadmap for Smart Grid Interoperability Standards [1], which identifies applicable smart grid interoperability standards, discusses the gaps present in currently available standards, and lays out priorities for near-term development of smart grid standards. The report describes a high-level conceptual reference model for the smart grid, identifies existing standards that are applicable (or likely to be applicable) to the ongoing development of the smart grid, specifies high-priority gaps and harmonization issues (in addition to cybersecurity) for which new or revised standards and requirements are needed, documents action plans with timelines by which designated standards-setting organizations will address these gaps, and describes the strategy to establish requirements and standards to help ensure smart grid cybersecurity. The smart grid will require hundreds of standards, specifications, and requirements. According to NIST, the priority areas are wide-area situational awareness (WASA), demand response, electric storage, electric transportation, advanced metering infrastructure, distribution grid management, and cybersecurity. 24.1.3  Computer Applications Utility Information Systems.  In scheduling its day-to-day operation, and in planning for its future growth, the industry has made extensive use of analytical tools and mathematical models which, through optimization and simulation, help in the decision-making process. The digital computer is applied in a variety of fields within a utility, whether to control its operations in real-time or to perform complex calculations. Nearly every piece of equipment installed in modern power system has been designed with the help of a software application. The power industry has long been one of the largest users of computers and among the most sophisticated in applying computational techniques. This use is quite understandable when one considers the high cost of power system equipment, the complexity of power systems, and the severe operational, reliability, and environmental requirements on the electricity supply. Computer applications have assisted the industry in achieving its objectives: reducing the cost of energy delivered to consumers, improving the quality of service, enhancing the quality of the environment, and extending the life of existing equipment. These objectives have been achieved as follows: 1. Since the industry is one in which capital investment is usually high, unit costs have been reduced by operating facilities closer to their design limits, allowing better utilization of equipment. 2. Unit costs also have been reduced by automation, allowing operation with fewer personnel, and by optimization, lowering fuel consumption per kilowatt hour delivered. 3. Although there have been significant advances in energy storage technologies, electricity cannot be stored in large quantities; therefore, production and consumption must be simultaneous. Hence enough capacity is required to meet the maximum coincident demand or peak load of all customers. Interconnections between power systems provide important economies arising from different time patterns or diversity of use of the component systems in the network. They allow higher power system reliability at lower capital cost. 4. Quality of service has been improved by reducing the number, extent, and duration of service interruptions, thus providing a more reliable service. 5. Quality of environment has been maintained by operating facilities within acceptable bounds of emission, thermal discharge, waste disposal, and more effective land use. It is foreseen a significant improvement by increasing the percentage of renewable energy in the total energy production.

24_Santoso_Sec24_p1503-1574.indd 1507

23/11/17 1:53 PM

1508  SECTION TWENTY-FOUR

The electric power industry has been taking advantage of the tremendous power provided by computer and microprocessor-based technology. Protection and control equipment, SCADA (supervisory control and data acquisition), remote control and monitoring, and many other applications are routinely implemented with this technology. Recent experience has shown that security-related issues must be addressed by the power industry. Government regulations are legislating for proactive measures to be taken in terms of securing the computer network infrastructure within the power grid. Today the industry has reached a stage where computer systems are no longer merely an engineering tool. The effectiveness of computer applications is one of the key elements in achieving the basic functions associated with the planning, designing, construction, operation, and maintenance of the power system. In fact, engineering and computers have been integrated. This integration may be viewed as tending toward the construction of a utility industry information system. Such a system is shown in Fig. 24-1. It depicts a typical information system which may be viewed as a combination and integration of several functional information systems. Such an information system can extend the company capabilities by making relevant and current information accessible to both technical and management personnel. Designs can be refined by using measured data or operations experience, projects can be monitored, revenue requirements can be

Customer accounting

Customer information system

Finance

Text services

Personnel services

Energy management system Power plant monitoring & control

Customer services

Power plant maintenance Corporate services

Operating Fuel management

Executive information system

Load management

Engineering

System expansion System planning and analysis

Nuclear data center Design and construction

Project management

Administrative support

FIGURE 24-1  Electric utility information systems.

24_Santoso_Sec24_p1503-1574.indd 1508

23/11/17 1:53 PM

COMPUTER APPLICATIONS IN THE ELECTRIC POWER INDUSTRY   1509 

predicted more closely, and the experience of operations can be reflected in the methods and criteria used in planning and engineering. The information system thus can provide meaningful data at proper times and locations to make decisions and concentrate resources in the most effective manner. Computing Support.  Engineering users require several categories of computing support: 1. Performance Requirements. Less than 0.4-s response time is required for human-intensive work at a terminal. Longer response times reduce concentration and increase frustration. A predictable response time is required for machine-intensive work. Consistent timings for load flow are expected when operating under deadlines. High-bandwidth terminals are required to support graphics user interface (GUI) color graphics applications, which are used to speed work flow and to reduce volumes of data to a presentation of results in a form that can be readily assimilated. 2. Technical Support Requirements. The engineering user requires a minimum of system programming knowledge to use the computing system. Included in this are user-friendly selection panels, menus, aids, and help functions; a library of programming tools, languages, and application packages, all of which are maintained by the central data processing department; and training facilities and technical support to assist engineers with the use of computing resources. 3. Operational Support Requirements. Security features and operational procedures are required to protect the user’s data and access to the computing system. Included are security features such as password protection of user data files and sign-on’s and operational procedures to provide backup of user data and prevent its destruction or loss. Computer Configurations.  Computer configurations such as shown in Figs. 24-2 and 24-3 are used to support engineering functions. Although the centralized computing approach has traditionally been used, the trend during the last years has been to a distributed approach in which a separate engineering information center is assigned strictly to engineering work.

Corporate computer facility

Realtime systems

Corporate data

Interactive work stations

Engineering data Applications libraries – Terminals – Displays – Plotters – Tablets – Personal computers FIGURE 24-2  Power engineering centralized architecture.

24_Santoso_Sec24_p1503-1574.indd 1509

23/11/17 1:53 PM

1510  SECTION TWENTY-FOUR

Corporate computer facility

Realtime systems

Corporate data Common engineering data

Interactive work stations

– Terminals – Displays – Plotters – Tablets – Personal computers

Engineering information centers

• Engineering data base • Workspace • Applications libraries

FIGURE 24-3  Power engineering distributed architecture.

24.1.4  Spectrum of Computer Usage A review of engineering and operating computer applications indicates that they fall within several broad categories, as shown in Fig. 24-4 and as described below. System Expansion.  These applications are related to 20-, 10-, and 5-year construction programs and cover planning, design, and construction of new facilities. These functions are performed at least once a year and use long-range load forecasts and other predictions as input data. Competitive pressures and complexity of expansion options demand that engineers have sophisticated interactive computer tools, decision-support and communication systems, and report-generating mechanisms. System Planning and Analysis.  These applications deal with 3- and 1-year construction of new facilities and the economic and reliable operation of these additions in conjunction with other interconnected power systems. Nuclear fuel management, annual hydrothermal coordination, and coordination for firm transmission and generation planning are among these functions. Because these programs are more frequently called on, they normally reside on disk storage devices. Thus only changes in data and programs need be entered when using specific programs. Long-Range Scheduling (Operating).  These applications are related to annual, monthly, and daily operation of the power system. In this category are transmission and generation maintenance scheduling, unit commitment and withdrawal, and other functions dealing with both reliability and economy of operation. Electric power systems are more complex and stressed than ever before.

24_Santoso_Sec24_p1503-1574.indd 1510

23/11/17 1:53 PM

COMPUTER APPLICATIONS IN THE ELECTRIC POWER INDUSTRY   1511 

Sec

Min

101

1

Hr

102

103

Day

104

Wk

105

Mo

Yr

Dec

Cent

106

107

108

109

Engineering System expansion System planning and analysis Design and construction Operations Long range scheduling Realtime control

Online scheduling

Local control FIGURE 24-4  Spectrum of computer use.

Maintenance of reliability and cost reduction require fast interactive computation in order to evaluate contingencies, operating options, and limits. Online Scheduling.  These applications are related to security monitoring and determination of reserve indexes and hourly data recording. These schedules are performed at least once an hour, although some applications such as pumped storage scheduling are performed weekly and daily. They are based on historical data but also need current power system data such as facilities in and out of operation, generation outputs, and line flows. Therefore, they require direct data flow into the computer. The results, however, are presented to the user for consideration and execution. Because of the scheduling nature of these applications, very fast data acquisition is not a prerequisite; however, accuracy and timeliness of schedules are related to the extent that they include direct data acquisition. Real-Time Control.  These regulating functions are carried out to meet the changing demands on the power system. Power system monitoring, security assessment, and display, rescheduling, and control of system frequency, tie-line flows, voltage conditions, and transmission flows are examples of this category. Other examples are closed-loop automatic control of generating units and interchange scheduling with neighboring companies and pool areas. These functions are performed in a time range of a few seconds to several minutes and therefore not only require direct data flows into the central computer but, in addition, require signals from the computer to the various remote controllers and actuators. Local Control.  These applications require a response speed beyond the capability of central computer control and related communication. Most of these functions are initiated immediately after

24_Santoso_Sec24_p1503-1574.indd 1511

23/11/17 1:53 PM

1512  SECTION TWENTY-FOUR

a fault develops or a variable exceeds certain limits. Their objective is to react quickly and correct the situation or to isolate and contain a disturbance. These functions are performed in the few milliseconds to several seconds range and can best be handled by local computers: (1) by directly sensing variables and controlling through actuators (e.g., direct digital control of boilers or digital relaying of the substations) and (2) by superimposing the computer on the local controllers or protective relays in order to reset their operating positions. The latter applications are in the 1- to 10-s range. The computational requirements shown in Fig. 24-4 cover both engineering and operating functions. These areas of computer activities are interrelated. From the preceding discussion it is clear that the power system operating functions do not have to be performed necessarily in real time. In addition, both engineering analysis and power equipment operation may be related to other functions whose time scale is much shorter than 1 s. Power Quality.  The increased use of equipment sensitive to voltage deviations has been raising concerns about power quality. Power-line disturbances, such as voltage sags and momentary interruptions, cause electric utility customers high economic losses every year. The operation of modern power quality conditioners is initiated as soon as a voltage deviation is detected and may be required to response within half a cycle of the power frequency. Overcurrent Calculation and Protection.  Overcurrents can be caused by faults and short circuits. They can cause not only thermal overload but power system instability too. A fast isolation of the fault location can be then vital for equipment survival and power system security. Protective systems aimed at detecting and isolating have a different design depending whether they are installed at transmission or distribution level. Fault detection and isolation must be faster at transmission and the required response can be in the range of half a cycle of the power frequency. Overvoltage Calculation and Protection.  Power system overvoltages can be caused by transients whose duration may as short as a few nanoseconds. Power system overvoltages can induce power system faults as a result of damage to power equipment insulation. Several mitigation techniques can be used to prevent or limit overvoltages. One of the most useful means for limiting power system overvoltages is the surge arrester which is installed in parallel to the protected equipment and whose response time is in the order of one microsecond.

24.1.5  Organization of the Section The organization of the section is as follows. Sections 24.2 and 24.3 describe the applications used by two of the functional information systems shown in Fig. 24-1, namely engineering and operating systems. The tools required for the design, analysis, and optimization of the smart grid are discussed in Sec. 24.4; this covers some topics of crucial importance for the future grid such as the combined simulation of power and communication systems, the fields for which high-performance computing (HPC) capabilities are required, the main features of real-time simulation platforms, the benefits that big data and analytics will bring to the smart grid operation, and the application of cloud computing to smart grid analysis and operation. Section 24.5 summarizes the main features, the present state and the harmonization progress of the common information model (CIM), a solution implemented for solving the problem of integrating software applications from different vendors with different data formats. The IoT is aimed at achieving real-time interaction between the grid and the user, and enhancing power grid services. The deployment of advances networking technologies and more reliable communications, as well as the development of more powerful data processing tools, will increase the intelligence level of electricity services, enhance user interaction with the grid, and provide more secure, convenient, and environmentally friendly electricity service. Section 24.6 provides as short introduction to the elements and architectures of the IoT, and the applications of the IoT in the future Smart Grid.

24_Santoso_Sec24_p1503-1574.indd 1512

23/11/17 1:53 PM

COMPUTER APPLICATIONS IN THE ELECTRIC POWER INDUSTRY   1513 

Issues related to computer security are addressed in Sec. 24.7. Cybersecurity is the term used to cover issues that involve automation and communications that can affect the power grid. This subsection describes cybersecurity threats and vulnerabilities, as well as the measures recommended for preventing and detecting computer intrusions, and those measures aimed at recovering from a cyber attack.

24.2  ENGINEERING APPLICATIONS As the electric utility industry has grown in size and complexity, modifications, and additions to existing electric power networks have become increasingly costly. Therefore, it is vital that different design possibilities for additions and modifications to the network be studied in detail to determine their effect on the network, their effect during abnormal operating conditions, and their applicability as a flexible solution to current and future power demands. The design and construction of planned facilities involves the efforts of a sizable engineering staff and a substantial investment in facilities. To provide support in these activities, computer programs have been developed for analysis of specified designs. The application of these programs contributes to the installation of reliable and economic facilities. The major engineering applications are shown in Fig. 24-5 and summarized below.

Economics

History

Population Industrial trends projections

Load forecasting model Case studies Generation expansion Schedule Type Reliability Capital requirement Operating criteria

Production costing model Fuel budget Pooling economy Buy/sell strategy Maintenance strategy

Corporate model

Transmission expansion Corridors Voltage Bulk substation plan Line capacity

Constraints • Load-loss probability • Environmental impact • Facility-land use analysis • Reserve requirements • Regulatory approval

• Rate design • Return on investment • Earning per share

FIGURE 24-5  System expansion applications.

24_Santoso_Sec24_p1503-1574.indd 1513

23/11/17 1:53 PM

1514  SECTION TWENTY-FOUR

24.2.1  System Expansion The system-expansion applications (see Fig. 24-5) support the long-term (5 to 20 years) planning function for generation and transmission of power. The system-expansion application area represents the typical decision support environment in that many cases are produced and a variety of options and strategies are considered in the planning process [5]. This area controls large common data sets from multiple sources. Lengthy reports are produced for internal documentation and regulation approval. In the past, most of the processing was batch-oriented because of the length of computation. Today online dialog with the applications is feasible and essential for evaluation of alternatives. Currently, the emphasis in the industry is to develop more efficient use of existing facilities rather than new construction. Load forecasting and production costing are becoming the most significant items in system expansion to predict load requirements and operating costs. Trade-offs between expansion and new facilities are increasingly important. The applications in this category are as follows. Load Forecasting.  This application is the basis for all planning functions; see [6–8]. It utilizes historical data, trends, economic factors, and residential and industrial projections by geographic area to produce load requirements and load duration plots by area. The effects of demand-side management are incorporated to evaluate the most cost-effective options. It also predicts the load factor. Generation Mix Analysis.  This plans the optimal mix of peaking, base-loaded, or independent power producer units; fuel type; and location of units to meet the future load requirements. It also provides a buy-and-sell analysis and accounts for reliability of generation. In a liberalized environment, generation is not planned, it is instead proposed by generation companies based on foreseen market demand. Generation can be also proposed to secure long-term commitments for power generation that could be disconnected. In recent years, the use of renewable energy resources has increased due to environmental concerns and to a significant reduction in costs. This raises some challenges and requires a different modeling approach that should account for intermittent power generation. Production Costing.  This stimulates the operation of the existing and planned generation facilities for several years in order to predict the fuel budget. It meets the load forecast and accounts for the generation availability and the hour-by-hour dispatch of generation. New techniques use statistical approaches versus detailed models. Loss of Load Probability.  This accounts for unit availability and the reserve requirement to produce a probability of loss of specific loads. Voltage Level Analysis.  This application is a tool to plan voltage levels of existing and planned transmission facilities. It provides trade-offs of network losses versus capital requirements. Environmental and Facility Land-Use Analysis.  This set of applications assists the planner in locating plants, substations, transmission towers, and lines. Trade-offs considered are expansion versus new facilities, right-of-way utilization, and environmental impact of planned facilities. Tighter environmental controls are increasingly affecting expansion and operating plans.

24.2.2  Transmission Planning and Analysis Planning is aimed at identifying major capital investment projects needed to maintain reliable and secure system performance [9–11]. Reliability refers to the probability of its satisfactory operation over the long run, while security refers to the degree of risk in its ability to survive imminent disturbances (contingencies) without interruption of customer service. This application area

24_Santoso_Sec24_p1503-1574.indd 1514

23/11/17 1:53 PM

COMPUTER APPLICATIONS IN THE ELECTRIC POWER INDUSTRY   1515 

supports the short-term planning process and provides tools for analyzing incremental transmission expansion. System planning and analysis applications are high in floating-point content and represent a significant computational requirement. Many cases are analyzed, and there is a rapid turnaround requirement. While there is online dialog with the application and it is common to provide online display and edit of results, the trend is to use interactive graphics in all phases of this decision support process. The specific applications are shown in Fig. 24-6 and described below.

External network data (Steady state, Dynamic)

Network equivalents • Simplified equivalent network

Prime Protection Load and mover dynamics dynamics control

Generation injection Network parameters System loads

Load flow model

Transient analysis model

• Line flows (kW, kvar) • Bus voltages • Phase angles

• Stability analysis • Electromagnetic transients analysis

Other analysis functions • Protective system design (Fault studies, Relay coordination) • Performance analysis (Network voltage studies, Loss calculations, Optimum load flow studies) • Contingency analysis FIGURE 24-6  System planning and analysis applications.

Load Flow.  The load-flow program is one of the major tools of system planning and is utilized extensively. Important to the system planner are that input data errors be minimized and that there be an easy and rapid turnaround for answers when the frequency of program use is high. To accomplish this, interactive capability is provided with the ability to store base cases or numerous power system models on the computer’s disks. The storage capability provides many different cases that the planning engineer can access for studying or varying a particular system condition. Load flow enables the power system planning engineer to simulate and solve various power system expansion alternatives in an interactive mode. It utilizes a graphics color terminal specified with a special set of graphic characters that presents results in the form of system online diagrams. The multicolor feature of the terminal is used to indicate heavily loaded lines, bus voltages outside normal limits, and open circuit breakers. The engineer working at such a terminal may, with a mouse and alphanumeric keyboard, remove, add, or change elements of the system being studied and request a solution from the host computer. The simulation programs associated with the load flow program are a system of linked programs that have the following capabilities [12–14]:

24_Santoso_Sec24_p1503-1574.indd 1515

23/11/17 1:53 PM

1516  SECTION TWENTY-FOUR

1. Basic programs involving calculation of voltages, power flows, angles, and interchanges between areas of a power system. 2. A network reduction program to represent large networks as equivalents in conjunction with the specified area to be studied. 3. A distribution-factors program that indicates the sensitivity of response of the various circuits to outages of specified transmission lines, used to predict thermal limits with linear (superposition) techniques. 4. The series of programs associated with the stored load flow files which permit accessing a particular case, deleting a case, adding a case, and changing a case. 5. The var allocation program which selects the minimum amount of kilovars of compensation necessary to maintain bus voltages within specified limits under normal and/or emergency conditions. Optimal Power Flow (OPF).  It is a versatile alternative for var planning, economic dispatch, and performance improvement [14, 15]. Optimal power flow applications take the load flow solutions and analyze them according to user-defined objective functions, such as least cost or minimization of transmission loading. Where the ordinary load flow solution provides only engineering information (e.g., voltage, power, and phase angle values), OPF applications assist operators in ranking alternatives according to economic and other criteria. Stability Analysis.  Transient stability is the ability of a power system to maintain synchronism when subjected to a severe disturbance (e.g., the loss of a generator or a transmission line, a fault, or a sudden variation in demand) [16, 17]. An accurate system response requires an adequate modeling of the nonlinear behavior of the system; these studies use detailed modeling of generator characteristics including excitation systems, control systems, inertia, and governor response. Subsets of stability studies are done to determine the allowable time intervals for protective relays and circuit breakers to sense and isolate faults without causing instability on the system, or to address imbalances between generation and load when electrical islands are formed due to major disturbances. The transient stability application will usually include tools for analyzing other stability aspects: 1. Small Signal Stability. Small Signal Stability is the ability of the system to maintain stability under small disturbances. 2. Mid-Term Stability. It is essentially an extension of transient stability to cover a longer period of time up to 2 min. This program is used for study of such a phenomenon. 3. Long-Term Stability. It is used for the study of very severe disturbances lasting over 2 min. This application has extended modeling capabilities, such as boiler and nuclear reactors, which are not required for the other dynamic programs. 4. Voltage Stability. The program is used for study of the voltage collapse phenomenon [18, 19]. 5. Network Equivalent. A dynamic reduction application is used to obtain a reduced model of a power system, maintaining its dynamic characteristics, so that the computational burden for a study is reduced. Short Circuit Calculations.  Short-circuit calculations are needed to compute fault currents for various types of short circuits (i.e., three-phase, phase-to-phase, phase-to-ground) [14, 20]. Short circuit current calculations are used to determine the required specifications for protection equipment such as circuit breakers and relays, and to determine the proper settings for relays to clear faults, or to assess the ability of circuit breakers to interrupt fault currents and the ability of all equipment to withstand the mechanical forces associated with fault currents. Protective System Design.  This application automates the work of the relay engineer in designing the protective system. It includes relay-coordination studies and calculations of complex relay settings [21, 22].

24_Santoso_Sec24_p1503-1574.indd 1516

23/11/17 1:53 PM

COMPUTER APPLICATIONS IN THE ELECTRIC POWER INDUSTRY   1517 

Electromagnetic Transient Studies.  They are used to compute the magnitude of transient voltages and current spikes caused by lightning or circuit switching [23, 24]. The solutions are used to specify the insulation requirements for power equipment (e.g., lines, cables, transformers), to design grounding schemes, or to obtain surge arrester specifications. These types of studies are conducted to ensure that planned expansions are designed in a manner that will not impose transient stresses beyond the capability of equipment on their system, either existing or new. Scenarios studied include energizing and deenergizing, fault clearing under normal and stuck breaker conditions, backfeed conditions, potential resonance conditions, ferroresonance, and lightning overvoltages. These studies may be also conducted to address unusual or unexpected electrical phenomena observed on the power system in real-time operation. Contingency Analysis.  This is the offline analysis of predetermined outages and network contingencies [10, 13]. These studies are run with a load flow application and used by planning in design studies. Results are used as input to the operating area for guidance during problem or alert conditions. A standard reliability requirement is that utilities meet the n − 1 criterion, aimed at assessing whether the system will be able to continue to supply all loads despite the loss of a large generator or the outage of large transmission line. If the solution indicates a problem, it must be addressed by adding new generation and/or transmission capacity, or by changing operational procedures. When combined with OPF, this is referred to as security constrained optimization. Extreme contingency scenarios that stress the transmission system beyond its design criteria must be also are assessed. Recent studies have shown that the n − 1 criterion may not be adequate to assess the vulnerability of cascading failures, so n − 2 and even higher order (i.e., n − x) contingency events need to be considered [25].

24.2.3  Distribution Planning and Analysis Distribution system analysis has been usually applied to radially connected systems with simple power flow methods. However, the actual distribution system is more complex than transmission systems. In addition, distribution systems may contain a mixture of three-phase, two-phase, and single-phase lines and transformers interconnected in nearly every imaginable way. Distribution system analysis is becoming much more sophisticated, and distribution system modeling is now commonly done with full three-phase models [26–29]. The list of capabilities implemented in modern packages for load flow calculations could include full three-phase analysis, simulations over periods of time with variable time step, meshed network analysis, end use load modeling made generally with time-invariant ZIP models. Distribution system analysis is a fast-changing field, being models and solution techniques regularly updated and improved. This subsection discusses not only the present status, but also the current limitations and future needs for simulation tools. See also Sec. 24.4. Load Flow.  The primary needs for distribution system load-flow software are to assess voltage profile, power flows, and losses [29]. However, it must also capture the behavior of DER devices and voltage-sensitive loads, and be capable of reproducing unbalance. Transmission system methods are generally based on positive-sequence models while distribution system analysis requires full multiphase analysis. Some distribution programs accommodate only one-, two-, or three-phase sections while others will accommodate an arbitrary number of phases (and other conductors on a pole). The connection of DERs adds special requirements, and when low-voltage distribution networks are modeled detailed models of single-phase DERs may be required. Short Circuit Calculation.  This is essential for determining overcurrent protective device settings, and is a component of reliability analysis. Traditional radial circuit methods assume that there is only one source, but DER addition increases the time varying nature of the fault current, and its contribution to short-circuit currents may be important. The list of capabilities of a short-circuit simulator for distribution systems must include a broad array of features: single- and three-phase

24_Santoso_Sec24_p1503-1574.indd 1517

23/11/17 1:53 PM

1518  SECTION TWENTY-FOUR

analyses; dc analysis; balanced and unbalanced networks; minimum and maximum faults; derating of breakers; arcing fault contributions; accurate and flexible DG models; a full range of transformer connections; interface with protection and reliability software; fault current flow under numerous switching states; overvoltage estimation during faults. Reliability Analysis.  Reliability evaluations are a major part of distribution planning [30, 31]. There are many widely varying approaches for managing reliability that make reliability evaluations for planning purposes very difficult. In general, a reliability tool uses equipment outage frequency and repair time statistics to calculate standard industry customer and system reliability indices [32]. The results can be used to evaluate the performance of a network configuration or a protection scheme. Capabilities that should be available in distribution reliability planning tools include full three-phase representations; integration with advanced metering systems and information for characterizing load profiles and for forecasting; built-in equipment reliability databases; addition of risk assessment methods, economics of reliability, and economics of different maintenance and operation approaches for improving reliability; automatic reconfiguration algorithms; calculation of voltage sag and momentary interruption indices. Power Quality.  Very different tools can be used for analysis of harmonics, flicker, voltage sags, and any type of current and voltage waveform analysis [33, 34]. Time-domain tools are a common approach in power quality studies, since they can accurately represent almost any scenario. But for some cases (e.g., harmonic studies), a frequency-domain approach can be faster and accurate enough. Some programs only model balanced three-phase harmonics; however, for analyzing voltage/load unbalance or single-phase DER applications, three-phase modeling is important. Flicker analysis is important for generation with fluctuating output, since it may be the limiting factor for certain types of generators. Modeling multiple generators is another challenge, since the flicker generated by some units may be totally independent, but others, such as PV, may show a high correlation since they will be located close together geographically. Voltage sag analysis can be also performed by means of simulators with capabilities for short-circuit calculations. Transient Studies.  Several types of transient overvoltages can occur in a distribution system (ground-fault overvoltage, load-rejection overvoltage, ferroresonance); under some conditions, these overvoltages can be severe enough to damage equipment and customer loads. Overvoltages are generally simulated by means of a time-domain solution technique [35]. Feasibility Analysis of Distributed Energy Resources.  A DER installation is by default connected to a nearby load and may consist of any combination of electrical generation and energy storage technologies. Current simulation tools for economic operation and design of distributed microgeneration plants vary in terms of capabilities, structure, scale of application, and computing code/platform; in general they have been designed as decision support tools that can be used to select the optimal technology and size, and allow users to analyze different technologies and sizes from among the available alternatives to adequately address the trade-offs between economics, financial risks, and environmental impacts [28, 36]. Planning.  A distribution planning package is a set of tools that can be grouped into three distinct categories [6]: (1) electrical performance simulators, (2) analytical tools for reliability analysis, and (3) decision support methods to assist in evaluating and selecting from the possible alternatives. Present planning tools can be used to assess the trade-offs between deploying small DER units and building new or upgrading existing networks, or building new conventional central power plants. The integration of DER devices must take into account multiple factors, such as the existing resources, costs, or the environmental impact. Geographic information systems (GIS) may solve these problems, since they can handle information of very diverse origins and formats (maps, photographs, satellite images, tables, records, or historical time series), and offer a variety of structured data models suitable for the storage, manipulation, and analysis of the information needed in DG planning [37]. GIS tools can perform calculations aimed at determining the optimal location for DG facilities with

24_Santoso_Sec24_p1503-1574.indd 1518

23/11/17 1:53 PM

COMPUTER APPLICATIONS IN THE ELECTRIC POWER INDUSTRY   1519 

a given technology (i.e., photovoltaic or wind systems), or be used in applications of spatial load forecasting that allow users to identify areas with a future increase in demand. See also the subsection Distribution Facilities Information System.

24.2.4  Design and Construction This function includes all software applications associated with the design and construction of power plants, transmission facilities, substations, service centers, and distribution facilities. Although the primary objective of electric utility companies is the usual production and sale of a product, they must be concerned with a large capital investment program. Efficient planning, scheduling, and control of labor and material resources are necessary if customer demand is to be met and at the same time a fair rate of return is to be provided on the investment. Some Major Programs.  Design and construction is a multidiscipline activity that employs computer applications dealing with electrical, mechanical, and civil engineering functions. A partial listing of specific applications is provided below. The tower analysis program provides a summary of the maximum tension and maximum compression for each member of a three-dimensional structure over the entire load range specified. This program also spots structure locations, plots a profile of the transmission line, and calculates sag, insulator swing, and ground clearance. Line sag calculates sag and tension of conductors under a given situation. Branch circuit design uses the load, distance, number of cables in a raceway, wire temperature rating, motor starting, and full-load amps to compute the voltage drops and sizes of breakers, cable, and conduit in a circuit. Structural design programs are used to design concrete and steel structures using as input the structure configuration and loads such as floor, roof, and impact. The structural steel framing program is used to design the beams, columns, girders, and baseplates of power plant structures. The foundation-slab analysis program is used to design large, complex foundation mats. The results permit evaluation of various slab thicknesses, soil bearing pressures, shears and bending moments, and reinforcement areas. The concrete stack analysis program is used to analyze proposed stacks by determining loadings, resulting stresses, and required steel reinforcement. This program is used extensively in the design of very tall concrete stacks selected for new power plants. Piping programs are used to perform stress analysis of piping systems and determine hanger design information. The power plant piping program analyzes the flexibility of a piping system under the influence of temperature. The cable routing program provides the shortest cable route between nodes, percent raceway fill, and number of cables in a tray or raceway. Interference analysis resolves the interference between pipe, cable tray, and structures occupying the same space. The heating, ventilating, and air-conditioning design program uses thermal loads and the building configuration to calculate the size of refrigeration equipment and ductwork required. Fluid dynamics analysis analyzes piping systems for pressure drop, flow distribution, and power requirements. Hydrologic analysis is used to determine seepage flow networks, underground flow, and rainfall and runoff drainage for culvert and bridge size and design. Earthwork design is used to design embankments and roadways, and perform settlement and embankment stability analysis. Geotechnical evaluation is used to evaluate soil testing results and determine the strength and swell of soil for dam and foundation design. Foundation design programs are used to design foundation pile, pier, mat, and spread footing.

24_Santoso_Sec24_p1503-1574.indd 1519

23/11/17 1:53 PM

1520  SECTION TWENTY-FOUR

A statistical analysis of equipment failures uses data collected on the frequency and cause of equipment failure to determine the likelihood of similar failures in the future based on various changes. The purpose of establishing an equipment operation database is to record and summarize the specific causes of service interruption to generation, transmission, distribution, and communication system equipment as well as to customers. The data provide the basis for designing new systems to specific reliability levels, monitoring equipment and manufacturer adherence to desired availability standards, and carrying out maintenance scheduling activities. The database consists of a main file for each major equipment category and supplementary files which supply input to a family of programs designed to provide the engineers with periodic statistical reports. Engineers also have the ability to retrieve from this database any combination of data of their own choosing. Transformer load management consists of a series of programs to process manufacturing performance data for distribution transformers and derive an economic evaluation based on unit cost and expected loss contributions over the expected lifetime. Since distribution transformers represent such a substantial proportion of system investment, it is imperative that they be utilized to their fullest economic capability. A large percentage of distribution transformers are nominally underloaded; that is, they are oversized for the load being served and hence waste money through overinvestment and excessive core losses. Overloaded transformers also waste money in terms of losses, loss of life, fuse, and transformer burnouts and replacements. Drafting includes engineering sketches and standard symbols used to lay out a drawing on a terminal and the results are printed or plotted. Included in this application are computer-aided design and drafting packages. Economic analysis is used to make economic decisions between alternative sets of system designs or equipment. Most of the preceding applications require common data. The trend is to treat the data as a corporate resource and to capture and maintain them in a common database. This provides for consistency of data, avoids duplication, and minimizes errors due to entry of the same data in different programs. This common database can then be used by many of the design and construction programs. Resource-management subsystems that support the design and construction applications are briefly described below. The purpose of resource management is to help utilities in more effective utilization, control, and management of their basic resource (people, equipment, and facilities) in the distribution system. Distribution Construction Information System.  This application supports the management of new investment and maintenance in the distribution area. It provides information for planning, scheduling, and controlling equipment, labor, and material resources and becomes a tool to assist public utilities in providing consistent service and meeting customer demands while realizing fair rates of return on capital investment. The term “distribution construction” refers to the entire process of work requesting, design, scheduling, reporting, and closing of that portion of the facilities closest in service to customers. New distribution work stems from three types of activity: system maintenance and improvement requirements, customer requests, and inspections or surveys. There exists a continuing concern with the process by which facilities are constructed and maintained and by which costs are transferred to property accounts or charged to expense appropriations. This concern is often focused on improving the distribution work process to support the planning, design, scheduling, controlling, and tracking of jobs. Such improvements are undertaken to obtain a more effective and efficient work process leading to an earlier plant-in-service and to improving the utilization of the many resources devoted to distribution construction, maintenance, and operating tasks. Computerizing the distribution work process is desirable because of the significant capital investment and expense components of utility costs and because the work process has characteristics that lend themselves to a high degree of computerization and to improved productivity and control. Distribution Facilities Information System.  This application provides the information required to plan, control, maintain, locate, account for, and manage the distribution facilities of an electric utility.

24_Santoso_Sec24_p1503-1574.indd 1520

23/11/17 1:53 PM

COMPUTER APPLICATIONS IN THE ELECTRIC POWER INDUSTRY   1521 

It is also referred to as an automated mapping and facilities management system. When combined with terrain and other landmark information, it is referred to as a geographic information system (GIS). It is composed of a graphics system and a database system and has been already mentioned as a fundamental tool in Sec. 24.2.3. The graphics system provides the interactive functions required to capture information needed to maintain a database for facilities by locations. The user is required to define to the graphics system the facilities and the data elements which are associated with them. This includes its data fields, the pictures that are displayed on a map to represent it, and the connectivity requirements, if it is a network facility. The graphics system employs a graphics workstation composed of at least one high-resolution display, an alphanumeric display, a keyboard, a mouse, and various hard-copy devices. This workstation is used to enter geographically related data, making it subsequently possible to display the data pictorially (maps), interact with the display (zoom in, window, edit, etc.), display facilities data and alter them, or to make additions or revisions. These are functions that formerly involved manual drafting and filing methods. Maps or data generated at the workstation may be stored in a common facilities database accessible to many users. The manner in which these data are stored varies. Some systems are able to retrieve only the map facets that were entered; the user must establish the relationship between adjoining facets. In other systems the data exist as a continuous network, and the user requests only the portion and type of data needed. Storage techniques based on the common corporate database management system are becoming prevalent because of the common requirements for facilities data by many departments throughout the company. The production of maps, diagrams, and pictures is a by-product of this system. Of far greater importance is the network relationship of the facilities data. This allows such applications as feeder analysis, transformer load management, fuse coordination, branch circuit design, and fault current calculations to be executed using the common facilities database. Material-Management Information System.  This system is used to plan for and control the flow of materials in and out of the company. A material items database may be accessed by many departments for multiple purposes. The main subsystems are stores operations, materials planning, and purchasing. Stores operations relates to all day-to-day activities within the warehouse location. Included in these are functions such as stock inquiry handling, recording of stores transactions (receipts, issues), item location management, order and requisition initiation, and material reservation and allocation control. Materials planning refers to the control and management of an inventory, both repairable and expendable parts. The functions under this application are acquisition analysis, item forecasting, materials requirements planning, reporting, and stock taking control. The purchasing area includes the functions of ordering material from the suppliers and transferring to the inventory on receipt of the material. The functions within this are purchase order writing, quotation preparation, receiving, returns, implementation, quality assurance, vendor performance analysis, and invoice matching. Asset Management.  Asset Management is a systematic process of operating, maintaining, and upgrading assets cost-effectively, and refers to any system where things that are of value are monitored and maintained. An asset management tool is a composite financial/engineering method, automated by a set of software modules that provides decision makers improved quantitative information regarding investments, supports strategic long-term planning and life cycle management, portfolio evaluation, and risk assessment and management at the control area, corporate, or even regional levels. Decisions affecting the design, operation, and maintenance of components and systems will not only impact reliability and power quality, but will also affect the economic performance of the asset through their impact on expected revenues, costs, and profitability. For a review of asset management tools and a proposal for implementation of an asset management toolkit, see reference [38].

24_Santoso_Sec24_p1503-1574.indd 1521

23/11/17 1:53 PM

1522  SECTION TWENTY-FOUR

24.2.5  Project Management The objective of project management is to control project costs and schedules in the maintenance and construction of power system facilities. Project management in the engineering departments includes project control, project scheduling, and resource optimization tools. These tools are required to manage small procurement projects. However, they also could be major, long-term projects such as construction of a facility, installation of a major program, or daily tracking of activities within a department. Automated techniques, taking into consideration the control of time, resources, and costs, allow more productive utilization of project management personnel and stricter control of projects than manual methods. There are three major components of a project management system: 1. Critical-Path Method. A network represents a project which consists of a mixture of serial and parallel activities and employs a combination of personnel resources, materials, and facilities. When time is associated with each activity within a network, critical-path methodology can be used to analyze the network and determine the longest time path to completion of the project. All other time paths through the network will then have some slack in terms of the critical path. 2. Resource Management. Project management and scheduling provides the means to plan and control a variety of projects. These systems permit tasks to be scheduled, resources assigned, costs allocated, and progress reported. Using this process, management can address identified problem areas and adjust its plans accordingly. 3. Project Costing and Estimating. Cost control techniques involve the ability to estimate and assign costs for labor, material, facilities, test equipment, and other resources to all activities comprising the execution of all phases of a project. In addition, some application programs permit extending rates; accommodate matrix and other organization structures; compute general, administrative, and overhead expenses; and summarize project costs over selected parts of projects as well as multiproject groups. 24.2.6  Administrative Support Administrative functions have been automated to serve the various requirements of engineering departments. Because these requirements are common throughout the company, integrated or common solutions are often used. Administrative support typically falls into the following categories. Text processing is the preparation, output, and data entry and editing of text using an interactive host-based or stand-alone computer system. This service may be used by a secretary to compose a letter or modify an existing memo. It may also be used directly by an engineer for notes, lists, progress reports, and general documentation. Text processing in a power company is used to prepare and maintain operating standards and procedures, standard material lists, nuclear records, training manuals, maintenance and safety procedures, regulatory reports, and specifications. Administrative processing allows the user to manage electronic document images. It includes activities such as copying and reproducing, document distribution, records file processing, mailing, and office correspondence. Documents may be filed on disk, searched for, and retrieved. Document search may be by name or by complex search parameters as in nuclear records. Other administrative services provide a convenient means for writing notes, reminders, messages, and appointment records. Typical functions include calendaring, tickler file (diary), meeting schedule, phone list, and to-do lists. Text and data integration applications provide the ability to include data created outside of text applications to form reports and letters. These may be used for the creation of manuals which include specification data to reduce redundant keystrokes and increase accuracy. Communications applications provide an informal and unstructured method of communication within an organization. This provides the means of handling messages that might otherwise require a phone call or memo. It also allows for distribution to multiple locations and receipt acknowledgment.

24_Santoso_Sec24_p1503-1574.indd 1522

23/11/17 1:53 PM

COMPUTER APPLICATIONS IN THE ELECTRIC POWER INDUSTRY   1523 

Personal computing provides engineers with the tools, packages, and techniques that allow them to enter and manipulate data and accomplish in hours what might otherwise take weeks. The intelligent workstation provides local processing, user-friendly interfaces, and access to host applications. Many times, all applications programs can be executed on a personal computer. Presentation graphics applications are used to present data in a pictorial form. The graphics may be displayed on a terminal or converted to a hard copy using a printer, plotter, terminal copier, or an attached camera device. Typical uses include the presentation of engineering or statistical data as line, bar, or pie charts, preparation of foils for a presentation, or drawing sketches or diagrams for inclusion in a publication. 24.2.7  Power Market Computer Simulation Power Market Overview.  The electric power industry has changed worldwide from vertically integrated monopolies to multiple independent companies. This process has replaced the centralized cost-based market to supply- and demand-based competition. The major goals of this reform have been to promote energy conservation, increase the use of more efficient generation technologies, and reduce energy consumption. Over time, the number of business transactions has increased and new market products have emerged. These products range from long-term contracts, to participation in ancillary services or demand response programs. The future energy system will apply the ever increasing information technology (IT) capabilities to coordinate DERs with bulk generation resources, enhance system performance and reduce the impact of component failure. To accomplish this transformation, the traditional paradigm of meeting all demand at a fixed cost at all times is giving way to mechanisms that recognize the value of an array of energy services to market participants [39]. Economic modeling forms the foundation for power market settlement and simulation. Under vertically integrated utilities, all decisions across the power system are integrated and balanced by the company. In a deregulated and competitive environment, firms interact through market mechanisms, so the nature of the model becomes that of an economic equilibrium, wherein agents make buy and sell decisions. Several equilibrium models have been applied (e.g., the Competitive Equilibrium, the Nash Equilibrium, and the Supply Function Equilibrium) [40]. Although, all of these equilibrium models rely on simplifying assumptions that may be unrealistic, they represent important benchmarks because they are well understood and have shed insights on the detailed behaviors and interactions that make up markets of many different forms. Models for analyzing the economics of power markets range from stochastic models that correlate trades, prices, weather conditions and energy resources, to optimization models that aim at maximizing the benefit of market agents. Game theory models are knowledge-based models that attempt to simulate the behavior of market agents, and can be used for developing/testing trading strategies or detecting/monitoring unusual trades [41]. Power Market Simulation.  A power market simulator is a software tool that mimics the operation of electricity markets and can help users to simulate hedging strategies in electricity markets before they are put into practice. In a broader sense, a power market simulator can be seen as a tool for predicting the economic and physical behavior of a power system. The capabilities of a simulator will depend on the goals for which it was developed or the vendor product. Some power market simulators include only generation and transmission, while other tools add also distribution representation. The most advanced tools may be used for •  system contingency analysis to develop hedging strategies for system contingencies; •  market contingency analysis to develop hedging strategies for market contingencies, such as changes in price caps, bidding mechanisms, and new entrants; •  congestion management to develop hedging strategies for congestion charges; •  planning and expansion to demonstrate improved efficiency, reliability, and service from planned generation expansion in specific network locations; •  inter-regional coordination to simulate seams issues and help test strategies for coordinating production across multiple markets.

24_Santoso_Sec24_p1503-1574.indd 1523

23/11/17 1:53 PM

1524  SECTION TWENTY-FOUR

The input may include information about generation (e.g., size, cost, availability), power delivery system (e.g., system data, constraints) and load (e.g., location, hourly variation), while the output may provide information about generator utilization (dispatch, production cost, revenues, hours on marginal), clearing prices for energy and ancillary services, transmission loading and congestion (e.g., hours of congestion), or reliability indices (e.g., energy not supplied). Agent-based Simulation of Electricity Markets.  Agent-based simulation (ABS) is a powerful approach for the development of power market simulators. ABS techniques have received increasing attention due to their advantages in modeling large-scale complex systems. The increasing popularity of ABS among power market modelers can be explained by the additional opportunities that this modeling paradigm offers for the analysis of economic systems, as compared to other models. Aspects like the interaction structure, the individual behavior of agents, learning effects in repeated interactions, asymmetric information or imperfect competition can be included in a more realistic way in agent-based models. Increasingly, powerful computational resources as well as the development of toolkits that facilitate the implementation of ABS models in object-oriented programming languages have further pushed their applications. Two different reviews of the application of ABS to power market simulation have been presented in [42] and [43]. The works on power market simulation using ABS can be classified into three main categories [42]: analysis of market power and design, modeling agent decisions, and coupling of long-term and short-term decisions. Starting from simple models with aggregated demand curves and few supply bidders on one market, the development of agent-based power market simulation has progressed to concepts of large scale simulation platforms capable of dealing with multiple markets and time scales. However, the development of these tools is a demanding task and raises several challenges. A first issue is the development of an adequate architecture and the use of suitable learning algorithms. Another important issue is the provision of data for agent decisions. For this purpose, the use of conventional optimization models as a source of data for agent decisions has been successfully applied. Since the concept of ABS is applied to large scale simulation models, the requirements on data and architecture are considerable, ranging from detailed electricity market and load data to future power plant options. A common challenge to all ABS models is the validation of simulation results. In the reviewed literature, outcomes are compared to real-world market data (e.g., with respect to market prices). Another issue is the validation of the behavior of single agents. The analysis of agent decisions, such as consumer contract choice or investment decisions, may require considerable efforts to improve the empirical data basis. The concept of ABS as a test bed for the electricity sector can provide additional insights for market and policy design. Figure 24-7 illustrates a power market model based on the ABS framework proposed in [43]. The figure shows the interactions among market participants and their roles in this framework. The common design issues are the physical transmission system configuration, the power market model, the definition of agents, their roles and their interactions, and the decision making and adaptation in each agent. The physical model includes only a transmission system and several generators and customers located at each local region. Any transaction between two regions is conducted by the physical transmission system, which links generators from one region to customers in another region. The market model includes two components: a day-ahead pool market and a bilateral contact market. The participants in the power market model include generators, generation companies, customers, customer companies, transmission system, and the independent system operator (ISO). Each participant is modeled as an agent, is responsible for some functionalities, and has a specific decision making framework with possible adaptation mechanisms. Generation companies interact with the ISO by submitting bids to the pool market, receiving bidding results, and conducting dispatch specified by the ISO. Although the generation companies could directly negotiate with the customer companies for long-term bilateral contracts, these contracts should be approved by the ISO. The interactions between customer companies and the ISO are similar. The objective of customer companies is to reduce the amount of payment to the generation companies and transmission companies. Finally, the transmission companies deliver transmission information to the market information service (MIS) and implement the transmission schedules determined by the ISO.

24_Santoso_Sec24_p1503-1574.indd 1524

23/11/17 1:53 PM

COMPUTER APPLICATIONS IN THE ELECTRIC POWER INDUSTRY   1525 

Pool bids and bilateral contracts

Generators

Bidding results Transmission schedule

Market information service Operated by ISO

Bidding results Pool bids and bilateral contracts

Power Transmission system

Bilateral contracts

Power

Customers

FIGURE 24-7  Framework for an agent-based power market simulator.

At the physical system level, transmission lines transmit electricity directly from generators to customers. Participants with strategic decision making are the ISO, generation companies, and customer companies. The decision-making procedures include two types of decisions: short-term operational decisions and long-term planning. An adaptation mechanism is applied to the bidding process of generation companies and/or customer companies; there is no adaptation in the ISO’s decision making.

24.3  OPERATING APPLICATIONS The prime concern of the electric utility industry is to meet the consumer’s power demand at all times and under all conditions. Electric utilities are continually seeking and have been most receptive to every available technique which would reduce the capital investment per kilowatt of installation, reduce the operating expenditures per kilowatt hour of energy delivered, and improve the quality of service to the consumer. Computer systems can be found in use at all levels of operation in power systems. At the generating-plant level, for example, they are used to control and monitor unit startup and operating conditions. In bulk power substations they serve such functions as monitoring, event recording, and switching. And at the system operating center level, they help to improve the economy of operation, improve the quality of service, and simplify system operation. The major computer applications for the operating area of a utility are briefly described below. See also Fig. 24-1. 24.3.1  Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition System Most electric utilities have means to monitor their power system activity and control substation equipment from a central location that would be classified as a SCADA (supervisory control and data acquisition) system [44]. This system connects two distinctly different environments: the substation, where it measures, monitors, and digitizes, and the operations center, where it collects, stores, displays, and processes substation data. A communications pathway connects the two environments. Interfaces to substation equipment and conversations and communications resources complete the system. The substation terminus for traditional SCADA system is the remote terminal unit (RTU) where the communications and substation interface interconnect.

24_Santoso_Sec24_p1503-1574.indd 1525

23/11/17 1:53 PM

1526  SECTION TWENTY-FOUR

RTUs collect measurements of power system parameters and transport them to an operations center where the SCADA master presents them to system operators. Predominantly, there are real and reactive power flow (watts and vars), voltages and currents, but other measurements like tank levels/pressures and tap positions are common to SCADA systems. These belong to the class of measurements termed analogs. Almost anything that can be viewed as a continuous variable over a range fits this category. Analog data is refreshed periodically so that the operator can be assured that data on this screen is relevant. The refresh rate is often dependent on the characteristics of the data being viewed and the communications resources available. SCADA master stations monitor the incoming stream of analog variables and flag values that are outside prescribed limits with warnings and alarms to alert the system operator to potential problems. Data are screened for “bad” (i.e., out of reasonability limits) data as well. SCADA systems also collect the state of power equipment such as circuit breakers and switches. These data are presented usually on graphical displays, to give the operator a view of the connectivity of the power system at any given moment. Various state change-reporting techniques have been used to report changes for the system operator. These include flagging momentary changes, counting changes and time tagging them with varying degrees of resolution (sometimes as short as 1 ms). SCADA systems almost always provide a means for the system operator to control power equipment. This includes circuit breakers, switches, tap changers, and generators. It may include some peripheral equipment in the substation as well. In the operation center, a SCADA system has at least one computer, communicating to substations and/or generating stations collecting data, issuing control commands, and storing the incoming data. The system operator views data and messages through a set of displays on “view stations.” The displays allow the operator to control power equipment and make system changes through a screen dialog. Besides these basic functions, the operations center computer archives data and displays selected data sets, such as trends and logs in special ways for the operators. More modern systems provide data to other areas of the utility enterprise in any number of different forms and services.

24.3.2  Energy Management System EMS/SCADA Technologies.  As the central nervous system of the power network, the control center, along with its energy management system (EMS), is a critical component of the power system operational reliability picture [44]; see Fig. 24-8. The following technologies have been or are being implemented in the EMS/SCADA solutions: •  Visualization Control. Control-room visualization today is still limited primarily to one-line diagrams, which are insufficient when it comes to today’s needs to understand the availability of electricity at any given time and location and in understanding load, voltage levels, real and reactive power flow, phase angles, the impact of transmission-line loading relief measures on existing and proposed transactions, and network overloads. Three-dimensional, geo-spatial, and other visualization software will become increasingly indispensable as electricity transactions continue to increase in number and complexity and as power data, historically relevant to a contained group of entities, is increasingly communicated more widely to the ISOs and regional transmission organizations (RTOs) charged with managing an open grid. Not only do visualization capabilities enable all parties to display much larger volumes of data as more readily understandable computergenerated images, but they also provide the ability to immediately comprehend rapidly changing situations and react almost instantaneously. Visualization is an invaluable tool for using calculated values to graphically depict reactive power output, impacts of enforcing transmission line constraints, line loadings, and voltages magnitudes, making large volumes of data with complex relationships easily understood. •  Advanced Metering Technology. Automated meter reading (AMR) has set new standards by which the energy market can more closely match energy supply and demand through more precise load forecasting and management, along with programs like demand-side management and

24_Santoso_Sec24_p1503-1574.indd 1526

23/11/17 1:53 PM

COMPUTER APPLICATIONS IN THE ELECTRIC POWER INDUSTRY   1527 

Man-machine • Color display consoles • Loggers • Trend recorders • Hard-copy devices

Main processor

Backup processor Shared data base Peripherals

Preprocessor

Preprocessor

Communication medium

Sensor based RTUs FIGURE 24-8  EMS architecture.

time-of-use rate structures. Beyond AMR, however, a host of real-time energy management capabilities are now on the market, which, through wireless communication with commercial, residential, or industrial meters, enables utilities to read meters and collect load data as frequently as once every minute. This enables utilities to better cope with dynamic market changes through real-time access to the critical load forecasting and consumption information needed to optimize decision support. The convergence of demand-response technologies and real-time pricing, wireless communications, and the need for more reliable and timely settlement processes are all drivers for enhanced metering capabilities. This, in turn, will create a demand for EMS solutions capable of handling much larger volumes of data and the analytical tools to manage this data. See Sec. 24.4.5. •  More Stringent Alarm Performance. The 2003 blackout drew attention to what has become a potentially overwhelming problem: SCADA/EMS has little ability to suppress the bombardment of alarms that can overwhelm control room personnel during a rapidly escalating event. In a matter of minutes, thousands of warnings can flood the screens of dispatchers facing an outage situation, causing them to ignore the very system that has been put in place to help them. Although distribution SCADA has been able to take advantage of straightforward priority and filtering schemes to reduce the alarm overload, the transmission operations systems have not. This is because

24_Santoso_Sec24_p1503-1574.indd 1527

23/11/17 1:53 PM

1528  SECTION TWENTY-FOUR

Power system

Inputs Advice and corrective actions How do I get the system to the condition I want?

Controls

Sensors Data

What is the state of the system?

Respond Condition or state

Knowledge-based models enable reasoning

Outputs

Diagnose and explain

What is the significance of the data?

Detect

Events

Model

• Detect • Diagnose and explain • Respond with models

FIGURE 24-9  Real-time event management. (Courtesy of Gensym Corp.)

transmission systems are networked, and it is more difficult to analyze the alarms to determine what needs to be shown to help the operator reach a conclusion. Also, reaction time is not an issue in distribution, and there is more value in taking the time to locate the fault before taking action; short outages can be tolerated. New analytical tools are needed in the EMS to enable operators to manage and respond to abnormal events and conditions. See Fig. 24-9. •  Data Warehousing. For many years, utilities have been archiving the operational (real-time) and nonoperational (historic) information captured by energy management systems. A current trend is to focus on how this archived operational and nonoperational data can be combined with emerging analytic functionality to meet a host of business needs; for example, to more readily identify parts of the network that are at the greatest risk of potential failure. If integrated properly, heads-up information stored by these systems can also aid utilities in proactive replacement or reinforcement of weak links, thus reducing the probability of unplanned events. A data mart is a repository of the measurement and event data recorded by automated systems. This data might be stored in an enterprise-wide database, data warehouse, or specialized database. In practice, the terms data mart and data warehouse are sometimes used interchangeably; however, a data mart tends to start from the analysis of user needs, while a data warehouse starts from an analysis of what data already exist and how it can be collected in such a way. •  Communication Protocols. EMS systems must have the capacity to talk to legacy (i.e., preexisting RTUs). Consequently, they are severely handicapped today in that many still rely on serial RTU protocols that evolved in an era of very limited bandwidth. As a result, many EMS solutions in use today are unable to exploit breakthroughs in communications, in particular, secure communications such as encryption and validation. This will need to change. Eventually, the need for encrypted, secure communications to the RTU, combined with adoption of substation automation and substation computers, may lead to the end of RTU protocols as they are known today. •  Enterprise Architectures. To achieve the benefits offered by the technologies described here, EMS solutions need to be able to take advantage of modern enterprise architectures (EAs). EMS systems are typically not included as part of utility EA initiatives, but as their importance becomes readily apparent, this will change. Though EA definitions vary, they share the notion of a comprehensive

24_Santoso_Sec24_p1503-1574.indd 1528

23/11/17 1:53 PM

COMPUTER APPLICATIONS IN THE ELECTRIC POWER INDUSTRY   1529 

blueprint for an organization’s business processes and IT investments. The scope is the entire enterprise, including the control room, and, increasingly, the utility’s partners, vendors, and customers. Though no industry-standard technical/technology reference model exists for defining an EA, it is clear that component-based software standards, such as Web services, as well as popular data-exchange standards, such as the Extensible Markup Language (XML), are preferred, as are systems that are interoperable, scalable, and secure, such as Sun Microsystem’s Java 2, Enterprise Edition (J2EE) platform, or Microsoft’s.Net framework. By using shared, reusable business models (not just objects) on an enterprise wide scale, the EA provides tremendous benefits through the combination of improved organizational, operational, and technological effectiveness for the entire enterprise. •  Web Services Architecture. There are no EMS deployments today that take full advantage of modern Web services architecture, although the architecture is providing tremendous benefits to businesses around the world and holds big promise for control room operations. Like object-oriented design, Web services encompass fundamental concepts like encapsulation, message passing, dynamic binding, and service description and querying. With Web services architecture, everything is a “service,” encapsulating behavior and providing the behavior through an API that can be invoked for use by other services on the network. Systems built with these principles are more likely to dominate the next generation of e-business systems, with flexibility being the overriding characteristic of their success. As utilities move more of their applications to the Internet, a Web services architecture will enable them to take strong advantage of e-portals and to leverage standards, such as Universal Description, Discovery and Integration (UDDI); Simple Object Access Protocol (SOAP); Web Services Definition Language (WSDL); Web Services Flow Language (WSFL); J2EE; and Microsoft.NET. EMS Functions.  The dispatcher’s interface to the EMS system is through color display terminals used to display online diagrams and tabular displays. These displays are updated cyclically or whenever a change is detected. Various data and operating conditions are highlighted with color. The dispatcher uses the displays to interact with the system such as acknowledging an alarm, changing operating limits, controlling devices, determining system status, or executing a program. The major EMS functions perform tasks that include periodic work to be completed within a specific cycle, random work that results from alarms and system events, real-time or demand work with specific response-time requirements, and interactive work which is dispatcher-initiated and also has response-time requirements. •  Network Surveillance and Control. This consists of continuous scanning of remote sensor-based units, acquiring all key network and generation data on a 2-s cycle, checking the data for problems, and presenting the status of the network to the dispatcher through displays. The control function allows the dispatcher to take selective control action on power system devices such as circuit breakers. These functions are those performed by SCADA systems, described above.   Network data acquisition programs acquire power system data through periodic scanning of local and remote sensors attached to RTUs. The raw data are checked for missing or invalid data before being sent to the central processors by the communications front end. Retransmissions are requested for missing status data.   Data conversion and limit checking programs are used to process the raw data. The data are scaled and converted to engineering units and stored in a database for use by application programs. Reasonability checks are made on the data and values not found to be within limits cause alarms.   Alarm processing programs generate alarms for scanned data and calculated results as changes of network status are discovered, limits are exceeded, or other invalid conditions are encountered.   Logging and reporting programs store selected data in historical log files, where they are available for analysis through displays and reports.   Power device control functions provide for the control of power system devices and for the placement or removal of device tags. Control actions made by the dispatcher to activate power devices are verified, then forwarded through the network to the proper destination.

24_Santoso_Sec24_p1503-1574.indd 1529

23/11/17 1:53 PM

1530  SECTION TWENTY-FOUR

  Load shedding provides rapid access to data for guiding the action of the dispatcher during abnormal operating conditions. Typical of the data that are displayed is the amount of load relief that can be obtained through emergency output of all generating sources, generation requirements, interruptible loads, load curtailment, voltage reduction, and emergency backup through tie lines. •  Generation Commitment and Control. This consists of a set of programs used to optimize the production and delivery of power for fuel savings. See also Sec. 24.2.1.   Automatic generation control (AGC) regulates generator output to match the load in order to maintain the frequency in an area and the sum of all active tie-line power exchanges with neighboring power systems. This program executes cyclically every 2 s.   Economic dispatch minimizes the cost of meeting the energy requirements of the system over a period of time and in a manner consistent with reliable service. Desired generator settings are computed and fed to the automatic generation control program. This cyclic program executes every 5 min and also on demand.   Load forecasting computes the total system hourly load for a specified number of days. It provides an adaptive forecasting system based on observed values of demand and estimated weather conditions. The program generally consists of three mathematical models. A load forecasting model uses past load data to compute hourly load forecasts; see [6–8]. A weather forecasting model computes hourly weather forecasts based on past weather history. A weather correction model uses telemetered values of load and weather conditions to correct the forecast. The dispatcher may optionally enter these values through a display. The historical load and weather data are stored and maintained in files which also contain special events that affect load such as holidays or unusual weather phenomena.   Renewable energy forecasting has been incorporated into some EMSs to estimate the expected power production from intermittent renewable energy resources (i.e., wind and sun). The increasing penetration of renewable energy resources raises some concerns about the effects that intermittent energy can have of the power grid performance. Power forecast models are computer programs that can estimate power production with different time scales, which may range from 1 min to several days, depending on the energy resource and the user’s need. In general, operational planners and ISOs use 1-h ahead and 1-day ahead forecasts for system operating, power scheduling, or power trading. Several approaches have been developed for wind and sun power forecasting, and some commercial products are already available. For a review of models and products see [45] and [46].   Unit commitment determines a schedule for optimal startup and shutdown of thermal units which minimizes unit startup costs subject to generation objectives, predicted area requirements (load forecast), security (spinning reserve requirements and off-system capacity), and operational constraints (unit minimum up and down times, limits, ramp rates, maintenance and derating schedule). It minimizes the operating costs of the dispatchable generating units. The total dispatchable generation is the sum of the load forecast and net scheduled interchange minus the total nondispatchable generation. The operating cost is defined as the sum of production, startup, shutdown, and maintenance costs. Production cost is calculated by the use of input and output curves adjusted by fuel prices. Transmission losses are also considered using one or more sets of penalty factors. Transmission limits are considered with simple approximations. The output of unit commitment is the hourly unit schedule. Several sets of schedules (or strategies) may be output for operator review and selection. The output is stored and made available to other applications such as transaction evaluation.   Reserve monitor calculates the available operating reserve necessary to meet company operating policies. Typically, a spinning reserve, 30-min reserve, and 2-h reserve are computed. This program executes cyclically every 4 min or on demand. The dispatcher is alerted when there is inadequate reserve.   Maintenance scheduling assists operating personnel in scheduling generator maintenance in an optimum manner. It generates a maintenance schedule while taking into account constraints and limitations on available resources required to perform maintenance work. The maintenance schedule indicates when particular generating units will be out of service (unit outages). Maintenance is performed routinely at desired intervals or may be required because of unexpected forced outages. During the maintenance of a given generator, the outage of this unit is compensated for

24_Santoso_Sec24_p1503-1574.indd 1530

23/11/17 1:53 PM

COMPUTER APPLICATIONS IN THE ELECTRIC POWER INDUSTRY   1531 

by other capacities in the power system. This is done by maintaining a level of system reserves. The scheduling of generator outages is performed in a manner which maintains a flat megawatt reserve level or a consistent level of probabilistic level of risk (i.e., probability of emergency procedures). •  Interchange Management. Formal and informal interchange agreements may exist between neighboring companies. Operating the power system as an interconnected system has economic and security advantages. While many power pools have control centers to manage the interconnection, most companies prefer to manage, or at least monitor, their own interchange of power. The interchange management programs provide the dispatcher with the ability to make good deals with the neighbors. These interactive routines allow the dispatcher to evaluate a buy or sell transaction before being committed to it. Once initiated, the interchange scheduling program automatically schedules the transaction through the automatic generation control program.   Production costing provides the capability to compare a change in interchange with the current schedule. The program always starts by accessing a study file. The calculations are based on current or forecast system load and a proposed interchange schedule entered by the operator.   Transaction evaluation calculates the costs and savings associated with the sale and purchase of power with a selected interconnected company. The program can be used to evaluate past, present, and future operation costs. A production cost calculation is generally included as a part of this program or may be an independent routine. For evaluating transactions, the transaction evaluation program computes the costs of savings of a proposed transaction by comparing the production costs computed from two economic dispatch calculations: a base economic dispatch calculation for the operating conditions with and without the proposed transaction. The transaction evaluation program usually can be executed in two modes which specify the starting point for all calculations. These two modes are whether the unit commitment program will be called or not. Essentially, the two options determine how the generation schedule is to be determined. Mode A (also called economy A) is executed without unit commitment. Current system load, interchange schedules in study file, and existing unit commitment form the starting conditions. Mode B (also called economy B) is executed with unit commitment and is used for transactions in the future.   Interchange scheduling is used to process and display each scheduled transaction with interconnected utilities. It computes the total net scheduled interchange as a function of time for use by the automatic generation control program. This calculation considers the start and stop times, generator ramp rate, magnitude, and direction of each active interchange transaction. Interchange schedules and cost information may be logged and displayed.   Interchange accounting provides the capability to account for electric power in the system. This power, in the form of measured, calculated, or scheduled megawatts, includes megawatts which are generated, consumed, lost, passed through, sold, and purchased. It includes functions for logging, displaying, reporting, and updating data recorded by the real-time system. •  System Security. These programs help to reduce the chance of a major outage or blackout condition [47, 48]. They operate on a study database which has been cleansed of missing data and metering errors by the network status and state estimation programs.   Network status determines the current configuration of the network based on the status of circuit breakers and disconnectors obtained from the real-time data and from manually entered status information for devices not telemetered. The program is executed periodically, whenever a status change is detected, or on dispatcher request. In addition, the program develops the corresponding mathematical model of the network using the impedance data for the current base load flow or state estimation case. The model will be used in the subsequent calculation of real-time system conditions using the load flow or state estimation programs.   State estimation determines the current state of the power system, including voltage levels and power flows, and calculates loss factors for use by the economic dispatch program for generation scheduling [49]. It filters real-time measurements to detect and eliminate known errors; estimates expected values of the next real-time measurements; and determines the current network configuration. State estimation corrects the mathematical model of the current network configuration, so this program acts as a filter between the raw real-time data and the real-time data requirements of other security applications. This task is executed whenever the network status program detects a change, periodically, or on dispatcher request.

24_Santoso_Sec24_p1503-1574.indd 1531

23/11/17 1:53 PM

1532  SECTION TWENTY-FOUR

  Contingency analysis computes the potential effect of contingencies involving the loss of generation and transmission facilities. A specific set of predefined contingencies is analyzed on a cyclic basis. It simulates a contingency and calculates the changes in bus voltages and power flows resulting from the contingency. The base conditions for this calculation are the bus voltages or power flows obtained from the load flow program.   Interactive load flow (ILF) allows the dispatcher to perform load flow studies for a scheduled outage or analyze corrective actions after an unexpected outage. ILF uses real-time data to project bus loads in a network. A bus is a connection where power lines change direction or voltage. A bus load is the load at this point. The ILF program stores mathematical models of the present and planned networks. A color display terminal is used to display one-line diagrams of these models. Colors are used to differentiate voltages, heavily loaded lines, bus voltages outside of limits, and open circuit lines. The dispatcher can retrieve previous load flow cases, make modifications, create displays, execute load flow cases, and store them.   Training simulator uses a model of the power network to produce realistic reactions to a dispatcher in training. This function is usually run on the backup central processing unit (CPU). The program can operate in either of two modes: monitor or simulation mode. In monitor or playback mode, the simulator reflects the changing status of the power system during the time period when a playback tape was written. The trainee can view displays, thus monitoring power system changes, but cannot take any control action. In simulator mode, the trainer can input system changes, and the trainee is allowed to perform control actions. The simulator software will reflect the state of the power system based upon the changes input and control actions taken. In this manner the trainee can operate the control system without affecting the true state of the power system.   Customer response systems control centers are a critical link in responding to customer complaints and reacting to outages. Customer information systems, used for many business and commercial purposes, are increasingly being combined with the engineering and operations information in order to speed repair crew dispatch and reduce outage times. Work orders, repairs, and inspections are increasingly being merged with inventory, warehouse, and engineering records to reduce costs, speed reaction times, and improve technical performance. Wide-Area Measurement System (WAMS).  The restructuring of the electric power industry has changed operational planning tasks, which are moving toward more close interaction with operating activities [50]. The increased need for accuracy is moving operational planning toward real-time operations (e.g., voltage and transient stability could be handled in real time), although other aspects (e.g., transaction scheduling), by their nature, are not likely to converge to real time. There are several limitations and constraints for developing accurate simulations. In some cases, the data does not match real-time data gathered by an EMS; in other cases, data gathered from a SCADA system is not sufficiently accurate. For example, to determine steady state and dynamic operating margins input data come from a state estimator, whose output consists of estimated values which limit the accuracy of some data. As a result, some studies (e.g., stability margin) produce conservative estimates. Moreover, gathered data might not cover a sufficiently large geographical area to meet the needs of some operational planning studies. Another limitation is the lack of modeling of the details of circuit breakers in operational planning studies; that is, the level of detail that is needed to ensure accuracy. The term wide-area measurement system (WAMS) denotes a more complete and accurate system of measuring a wide range of data on power systems that can be used to improve the quality of the input data and that of power system simulations [51–53]. This system can gather a wide range of time-stamped data in the form of real-time synchronized phasor measurements (i.e., synchrophasors), across broad geographical areas, and make it rapidly available via satellite to receiving stations. Substation Automation.  A substation automation (SA) system uses microprocessor-based IEDs integrated by a communication technology for the purpose of monitoring, controlling, and configuring the substation. IEDs provide inputs and outputs to the system while performing some primary control or processing service [54–56]. Common IEDs are protective relays, load survey and/or operator indicating meters, revenue meters, programmable logic controllers, and power

24_Santoso_Sec24_p1503-1574.indd 1532

23/11/17 1:53 PM

COMPUTER APPLICATIONS IN THE ELECTRIC POWER INDUSTRY   1533 

Station level

Bay level

Switchgear control Event list Alarm list Parameter setting

Gateway to network control

Station bus

Bay control

Bay protection

Process bus Process level

Station computer

Process interface

Combined protection control

Bay protection

Bay control

Hadwired process connection Process interface Process interface

Time synchronization Status position Events Commands Parameters Blockings Releases Disturbance records ....

Status and position indicators Commands Trips Voltages Currents

Switchgear and instrument transformers

FIGURE 24-10  Configuration of substation automation system and data exchange (adapted from Ref. [58]).

equipment controllers of various descriptions. Other devices dedicated to specific functions for the SA system may also be present. These may include transducers, position sensors, and clusters of interposing relays. Common communications connections include utility operations centers, maintenance offices, and/or engineering centers. Most SA systems connect to a traditional SCADA system master station serving the real-time needs for operating the utility network from one or more operations center. SA systems may also incorporate a variation of SCADA RTU for this purpose or the RTU function may appear in a SA controller or substation host computer. SA systems may be broken down into three hierarchical levels, which are found in most implementations as physical levels also [57, 58], see Fig. 24-10: (1) the process level, which refers to the power system equipment in the substation represented by the process interface, (2) the bay level, which consists of bay protection and control IEDs hosting the related functions, and (3) the station level, which refers to tasks for the complete substation and consists typically of the substation computer with central functions and human-machine interface and of the gateway to the network control center. Station and bay level are connected by the station bus. Present bay and process levels are connected by a lot of parallel copper wires, the future substation will use the process bus. This architecture has some data paths from the substation to the utility enterprise, the SCADA system and the data warehouse [55]. For modern SA systems or for legacy SA systems that need to be updated, IEC 61850 is becoming the general choice for standard protocols [59–61]. IEC 61850 is also a comprehensive approach for the conception of substation automation and protection with serial communication. SA design involves a series of steps from the specification to the commissioning of the project system. The first step of the engineering of a SA system is to define the functional specification according to the selected protection, automation and control design. The list of elements that are part of the specification may include the single line diagram of the substation, the geographical layout (extension, buildings, cable channels, etc.), protection functions required for each primary distribution substation or system component, measurements and status information needed, controls to be used, reporting requirements, monitoring and recording requirements, redundancy requirements, communications architecture, distribution substation level functions, and others [57].

24_Santoso_Sec24_p1503-1574.indd 1533

23/11/17 1:53 PM

1534  SECTION TWENTY-FOUR

Substation configuration description language (SCL) is the language proposed by IEC 61850 for describing the configuration of substation devices. The SCL is based on the XML, and its goal is to provide a formal description of the SA on engineering level (i.e., files that can be exchanged between proprietary tools of different suppliers). The formal SCL description will allow exchanges between compliant tools independent from the supplier and result in a machine-readable documentation of the data and communication structure of the SA system. Distribution Automation.  The concept distribution automation (DA) and its implementation vary from one utility system to another. The traditional DA function has been the remote control of switches to locate, isolate the fault and restore the service, when a fault occurs in the power distribution line [62]. A more advanced DA system involves utilization of communications infrastructure and information technologies to enable remote control of switching devices including substation breakers, reclosers, and field switches as well as capacitor banks and line regulators. This category of DA is commonly referred to as feeder automation (FA). With the application of remote data collection and control through FA, switching tasks are accomplished in an automated fashion giving rise to shorter restoration times. DA has evolved since then and turned into an established concept. DA has gained renewed attention with the transition toward the smart grid and the need for more reliable and efficient distribution systems. The DA system to be implemented in the smart grid will be based on new emergent technologies and concerned with complete automation of all the controllable equipment and functions in the distribution system. A broad definition of DA includes any automation which is used in the planning, engineering, construction, operation, and maintenance of the distribution power system, including interactions with the transmission system, interconnected DERs, and automated interfaces with end users. A smarter DA system will have to address enhancements in efficiency as well as reliability and quality of power distribution, reduce operation and maintenance costs, enable new customer services, or defer capacity expansion projects. The future DA will cover the complete range of functions from existing SCADA systems to ever-increasing deployment of advanced metering infrastructure (AMI) technologies at the customer level in which local automation, remote control, and central decision making are brought together to deliver a costeffective, flexible, and cohesive operating architecture [63]. Feeder switching and protection systems utilizing powerful IEDs, sophisticated algorithms, various technologies of sensing devices, and all connected by increasingly fast and secure data communications, enable the implementation of distributed intelligence, which is fundamental to implementation of the future smart grid. Centralized control of the distribution system will move to distributed computing, which may effectively eliminate communication bottlenecks and time delays associated with centrally controlled SCADA systems, and may be sustainable even if single computing nodes do not function. Properly designed systems based on distributed intelligence offer a completely scalable advanced FA system that can improve reliability, or grow to deliver system-wide automation functionality and improved asset utilization. A challenging application of the smart grid DA system will be the extension to the consumer location, since there will be a large number of installation points, and automation at the consumer’s location will include the ability to remotely read meters, program time-of-use meters, connect/ disconnect services, and control consumer loads. DA functions that have been implemented by utilities throughout the world vary greatly in nature and so does their communication requirement. To date most DA functions have been implemented by using proprietary protocols. The natural shift from proprietary communication protocols to standardized protocols is being accelerated and directed toward more advanced solutions that will provide an interoperable environment. The IEC 61850 standard is also becoming the common communication protocol for DA. Although IEC 61850 standard can be potentially used as the communication protocol for FA applications or communication with the control centers, it does not standardize the representation of combinatorial, sequential, rule-based (or any other form of) power system control and automation logic (e.g., the interlocking logic for determining whether a control operation can be performed or not). To play this role, reference [64] proposes the application of the IEC 61499 standard to define the algorithms for control and automation functions.

24_Santoso_Sec24_p1503-1574.indd 1534

23/11/17 1:53 PM

COMPUTER APPLICATIONS IN THE ELECTRIC POWER INDUSTRY   1535 

24.3.3  Power Plant Monitoring and Control This application approaches the traditional process control application. Several applications such as fuel monitoring and performance calculations increase the requirement for the data processing resource. The three major computer systems for fossil power plant monitoring and control are described below. 1. Process Control System. This is a closed-loop control system which takes its direction from EMS and automatically collects plant data by reading instruments. Physical and electrical parameters associated with the boiler, turbine, and generator are monitored on a continuous cyclic basis. Alarms and events are logged, and control of pumps, valves, and switches for routine functions and for startup and shutdown are provided. 2. Plant Monitoring System. This is strictly a data-collection system for fuel monitoring, performance calculations, and balance-of-plant calculations; no control actions are performed. Data are stored and retrieved as required to prepare reports and perform analysis. These reports include those required by the plant management, load dispatchers, and planning and engineering groups. Periodic reports are prepared to reflect plant operation. Unit incremental generation cost is determined periodically by collecting data that continuously reflect actual operating conditions. This information is transmitted to the dispatcher for use in load dispatching. 3. Operational Monitoring System. This is used by plant operators to enter manually collected operational data for record keeping, report writing, and engineering analysis. In addition to these systems, the power plant also may use mini- or microcomputers for security systems, environmental systems, controlled access systems, and chemical analysis systems.

24.3.4  Power Plant Maintenance Power plant maintenance stores pertinent plant maintenance information for analysis of maintenance costs and evaluation of equipment performance. The interactive portion of the system provides power plant personnel with the capability to enter problem data, planning data, and work execution data. Approval and verification functions are at each step of a work order’s progress from problem description through work completion and commitment to history. Interactive functions also are provided for entry and maintenance of an equipment database and for access to equipment history. The batch portion of the system provides for moving completed and rejected work from the active work database to the equipment history database. Batch functions are also used for work backlogs, scheduled work, and other reports. Because of its varied data requirements, the maintenance information system also has interfaces to other computer systems in the power company. These are the materials-information system for equipment stocking levels, the personnel information system for labor resources, and the general accounting system for cost tracking.

24.3.5  Fuel Management Operating support personnel must plan for both short-term (1 year) and long-term (5 years) fuel availability. Thus control and improvement of fuel cost represent the most substantial contribution to the overall economy of power production. The system is used to administer the procurement of coal and oil. It facilitates the monitoring, reconciliation, and performance of fuel contracts. Accounting functions are used for fuel purchases, transportation costs, fuel usage, and inventory value. Also included are short- and long-term cash flow projections and managerial and regulatory reporting capabilities. The overall fuel management application is an integrated model of the load forecast, generation scheduling and dispatch, and fuel allocation with an objective of optimizing fuel contracts. This application is used routinely with growth and on demand as system perturbations occur.

24_Santoso_Sec24_p1503-1574.indd 1535

23/11/17 1:53 PM

1536  SECTION TWENTY-FOUR

24.3.6  Load Management The objective of the load management application is to improve the load factor (ratio of average load to peak load) and to be able to shed selected load during emergency conditions. Most utilities have pilot tested some form of load management. The pilot solutions range from consumer guidance (voluntary) to complete control and metering of the consumer’s load. The benefits of load management have been shown to be enhanced by combining two-way utility to customer communications and control into a distribution automation system. An automated distribution system can have valuable additional functions such as automated meter reading, performance monitoring, and quality-of-service improvement. Load Curtailment System.  This scheme employs one master computer at the power company and several computers at major industrial and commercial load centers. In this scheme there is a limited sensor-based data-acquisition requirement and no closed-loop control. Reduction of load will be manual. Automatic Meter Reading and Load Management.  This hierarchical approach employs the corporate customer information system and the EMS system to direct and receive the meter readings, an intermediate level to serve as a communication concentrator, and an intelligent data control unit to scan remote transponders at the meter locations.

24.4  TOOLS FOR THE SMART GRID 24.4.1 Introduction The smart grid uses a wide variety of technologies and performs functions ranging from wide-area monitoring at transmission levels to home automation at low-voltage distribution levels. The design, analysis, and optimization of the smart grid have to be carried out taking into account, among others, the following aspects: •  Power system planning, operation, and control require large amount of computational work due to large mathematical models and, in certain applications, fast time response. •  Traditional computational resources do not meet the emerging requirements of a grid model that is evolving into a more dynamic, probabilistic, and complex representation. New computing techniques and solutions should enable faster and more comprehensive analysis. In addition, the focus is moving to real-time simulation platforms. •  In the foreseen smart grid scenario, the manipulation of large amount of data collected from smart meters and sensors will make necessary the application of new computing capabilities, like those provided by graphics processing units (GPU), and geographically distributed processing techniques, like cloud computing. •  The study of the smart grid requires a combined simulation of power systems and information and communications technology (ICT) infrastructures. Since the operation of the power system increasingly depends on communication and data networks [65], it is crucial to understand the impact of the ICT infrastructures on the operation of the power grid. •  The operation of the smart grid also involves issues such as safety and security (including protection against potential cyber attacks) [65]. To deal with those aspects and achieve the goals mentioned above, new analytical methods and simulation tools are required. Simulation has always been an important tool for the design of power systems; in a smart grid context it can be useful to reduce the costs associated with upgrades to both power and communication infrastructures, analyze the potential loss of service that can occur as a consequence of a failure or a cyber attack, or enable the design and evaluation of different solutions

24_Santoso_Sec24_p1503-1574.indd 1536

23/11/17 1:53 PM

COMPUTER APPLICATIONS IN THE ELECTRIC POWER INDUSTRY   1537 

before deploying them in the field [65]. Simulation faster than real time can be crucial for the development and implementation of smart grids [66]. Some features of the tools required for the design, analysis and optimization of the smart grid are discussed below; the rest of Sec. 24.4 covers with some detail the combined simulation of energy and communication systems, the fields in which HPC has been applied to date, the development and capabilities of real-time simulation platforms, the advantages that big data and analytics will bring to the smart grid operation, and the application of cloud computing to smart grid analysis and operation. Simulation of Very Large-Scale Systems.  Several large-scale grid concerns and threats cannot be adequately modeled using present capabilities. Among these concerns are wide-area disruptive events, including natural events, cascading accidents, coordinated cyber and physical attacks, interdependencies of the power grid system and critical infrastructures, or scenarios including wide-scale deployment of intermittent distributed generation. For instance, understanding the interdependencies of the electric power grids with other critical infrastructures is a serious need, since disruptions in one infrastructure (e.g., the electric grid system) can have severe consequences for other infrastructures (e.g., natural gas and water supply systems). New modeling approaches could span different applications (operations, planning, training, and policymaking) and concerns (security, reliability, economics, resilience, and environmental impact) on a set of spatial and temporal scales wider than those now available. To fulfill this role, new simulation tools are needed. Such tools could be built through a combination of existing distributed and new capabilities, and take either the form of a single, centralized facility or a virtual, integrated environment. Several issues would have to be addressed, however, in their development and implementation. In particular, acquisition of and access to validated electric infrastructure data, physical and administrative protection of controlled information, including protection of sensitive information generated as model output, opportunity for data sharing, data verification and validation, identification of data use, and an environment that simplifies the integration of diverse system models. For a discussion of this topic see reference [67]. However, the main challenges will not be in the size of the systems to be analyzed but on the effectiveness of the analytical methods and the accuracy of the implemented models. Some experience is already available in the implementation of tools for simulating huge power systems at a reasonable time; see for instance [68] and [69]. Multidomain Simulation Tools.  An accurate modeling of some generation and energy storage technologies may require the application of simulation tools capable of connecting and interfacing applications from different types of physical systems (mechanical, thermal, chemical, electrical, electronics). Several packages offer a flexible and adequate environment for these purposes. They can be used to develop custom-made models not implemented in specialized packages. Open connectivity for coupling to other tools, a programming language for development of custom-made models and a powerful graphical interface are capabilities available in some circuit-oriented tools that can be used for expanding their own applications and for developing more sophisticated models. These tools can be applied for the development and testing of highly detailed and accurate device models, or linked to other tools to expand their modeling capabilities [70]. Interfacing Techniques.  Power system studies are numerous and each has its own modeling requirements and solution techniques. Over time, several software applications have been developed to meet the individual needs of each study. However, a need is also recognized to exploit the complementary strengths by interfacing two or more applications for model validation or to exchange data between different tools. Examples are the interface of time- and frequency-domain tools, the interface of a circuit-oriented tool and a tool based on the finite element method (FEM), or the interface for analysis of interactions between communication and power systems, each system being represented by a specialized tool [70–76]. Although there have been significant improvements in tools that can simultaneously reproduce different physical systems (e.g., multidomain simulation tools), the interfacing will become an increasing necessity for the simulation of complex systems whose modeling requirements cannot be met by a single tool.

24_Santoso_Sec24_p1503-1574.indd 1537

23/11/17 1:53 PM

1538  SECTION TWENTY-FOUR

Agent-Based Simulation.  Agent-based simulation (ABS) is a powerful approach for simulation of real-world systems with a group of interacting autonomous agents modeled as computer programs that interact with each other. The design of an agent-based simulator involves communication protocols and languages, negotiation strategies, software architecture, and formalisms. ABS can conveniently model the complex behavior of system participants and is particularly suitable for large-scale systems involving various types of interacting system participants with distinct roles, functionalities, behavior, and decisions. ABS is a suitable approach for some type of simulations: power market simulation [42, 43], system vulnerability assessment [77], or co-simulation of power and communication systems [78]. ABS has been applied in power system studies for many years and will increase its application mainly due to the increasing demand for large-scale system simulators. 24.4.2  Combined Modeling of Power Grids and Communication Systems Communication technology will have a prominent role in the future smart grid; therefore, an accurate prediction of the power grid behavior will require accurate models of the communication infrastructure and the integrated simulation of generators, transmission and distribution systems, control processes, loads, and data networks. Current approaches to hybrid system simulation focus on integrating available software packages. However, the results often have limited application or make significant sacrifices of precision and accuracy; the analysis of integrated power and ICT infrastructures requires integrated simulation frameworks [65]. The scenarios to be considered for the electric grid require the systematic construction of nontrivial hybrid models, which should include complex continuous and discrete dynamics [78–80]. The Role of Communication Networks in Smart Grids.  Communication networks already play an important role in the power system, and they will play an even more crucial role in the future smart grid. The smart grid communications layer can be seen as consisting of several types of networks, each having a distinct scale and range. For instance, wide-area networks (WAN) are bandwidth communication networks that operate at the scale of the medium voltage network and beyond, handle long-distance data transmission and provide communication between the electric utility and substations; AMIs interconnect WANs and end-user networks, and provide communication for low voltage power distribution areas; home area networks (HAN) provide communication between electrical appliances and smart meters within the home, building or industrial complex. Power line communication (PLC) is an option that uses the existing power wires for data communication (i.e., the power grid itself becomes the communication network); narrowband PLC technologies that operate over distribution systems are also used for monitoring (e.g., AMI) or grid control. However, the power grid was not designed for communication purposes; from a communication perspective, existing power grid networks suffer from several drawbacks [65]: fragmented architectures, lack of adequate bandwidth for two-way communications, lack of interoperability between system components, or inability to handle increasing amount of data from smart devices. Continuous Time and Discrete Event Simulation Models.  Power system and communication network simulators use different modeling approaches and solution techniques: •  Dynamic power system simulation uses continuous time where variables are described as continuous functions of time, but since some discrete dynamics are to be introduced, a time stepped approach is used (numerical algorithms with discrete time slots are applied). •  Communication networks are packet switching networks, which can be adequately modeled as discrete events that occur unevenly distributed in time. This is different approach from that used for power system dynamic simulation, based on a fixed interval between events. Figure 24-11 illustrates the difference between the two types of simulators: it is evident that synchronizing the time of different components is a crucial aspect when combining several tools.

24_Santoso_Sec24_p1503-1574.indd 1538

23/11/17 1:53 PM

COMPUTER APPLICATIONS IN THE ELECTRIC POWER INDUSTRY   1539 

t0

t1

t2

∆t

tn

(a)

t0 (b) FIGURE 24-11  Continuous time versus discrete event simulation. (a) Continuous time simulation—evenly distributed time steps; (b) discrete event simulation—unevenly distributed time steps.

An option to deal with both approaches is the use of predefined synchronization points: each simulator pauses when their simulation clock reaches a synchronization point; after each simulator is paused, information is exchanged. However, this can have some drawback as messages that need to be exchanged between both simulators are delayed if they occur between synchronization points. A solution to this problem is to reduce the time step between synchronization points, although this will degrade performance. Consequently, the co-simulation needs to achieve balance between accuracy and simulation speed, and take into account that not all time instants at which communication between the different simulators must occur are known a priori. See [65] and [81]. Combined Simulation of Power and Communication Systems.  The combined simulation of the power systems and communication networks can be achieved by two approaches [65]. •  Co-simulation. An approach that combines existing specialized simulators can be a faster and cheaper solution that constructing a new environment that combines power and communication systems in a single tool. On the other hand, using existing models and algorithms that have already been implemented and validated reduces the risk of errors. In the smart grid context, a co-simulator would consist of a specialized communication network simulator and a specialized power system simulator. When multiple simulators are interfaced, the main challenge is to connect, handle and synchronize data between simulators using their respective interfaces: time management between two simulators can be challenging if each simulator manages its time individually, and the necessary synchronization between simulators running separately implies penalties, such as start-up times, reading and processing input data. A significant effort on this field has been carried out to date; see [82–88]. •  Integrated Simulation. An approach in which the power system and the communication network are simulated in a single environment simplifies the interface between tasks and allows sharing the management of time, data, and power/communication system interactions among the simulator parts. Several tutorials on the combined simulation of power systems and communication networks have been presented in [65, 89, 90].

24_Santoso_Sec24_p1503-1574.indd 1539

23/11/17 1:53 PM

1540  SECTION TWENTY-FOUR

24.4.3  High Performance Computing Definition.  Simulation, optimization, and control of the smart grid can be included in the category of highly intensive computer problems. Smart grid studies require very complex mathematical models due to the increasing use of power electronic based control devices, the implementation of deregulation policies, or the co-simulation of energy and communications systems. All these facts are increasing the computer requirements for power system applications. The concept high performance computing (HPC), usually associated to supercomputing, is now used to denote a multidisciplinary field that combines powerful computer architectures (e.g., computer clusters) with powerful computational techniques (e.g., algorithms and software) [91–93]. The availability of affordable medium-size computer clusters and multicore processors, together with the increased complexity of power system studies, is promoting the application of HPC [94], which may involve grid computing [95] or multicore computing. Early attempts focused in two categories: naturally parallel applications, like Monte Carlo simulation and contingency analysis, and coupled problems, like the simulation of large-scale electromechanical transients [96, 97]. Parallel computing is a type of computation in which calculations are carried out simultaneously: a large problem is divided into smaller ones, which are then solved at the same time. Parallelism has been employed for many years but interest in it has grown lately, and parallel computing is becoming a dominant paradigm in computer architecture, mainly in the form of multicore processors. Parallel computers can be roughly classified according to the level at which the hardware supports parallelism, with multicore computers having multiple processing elements within a single machine, while clusters and grids use multiple computers to work on the same task [98–102]. The availability of desktop computers with parallel computing capabilities raises new challenges in software development, since these capabilities can be exploited for developing tools that could support the smart grid simulation requirements. A first option is to adapt current methods, since some current algorithms can be easily adapted to parallel computing environments; however, the real challenge is the development of new solution methods specially adapted to a parallel processing environment. Application to Power System Analysis.  A first classification of power system computations may distinguish between steady-state and dynamic analysis: steady-state analysis determines a snapshot of the power grid, without considering the transition from a snapshot to the next; dynamic analysis solves the set of differential-algebraic equations that represent the power system to determine its evolving path. Current power system operation is based on steady-state analysis. Central to power grid operations is state estimation. State estimation typically receives telemetered data from the SCADA system every few seconds and extrapolates a full set of conditions based on the grid configuration and a theoretically based power flow model. State estimation provides the current power grid status and drives other key functions such as contingency analysis, economic dispatch, OPF, and AGC. A computational effort aimed at obtaining adequate simulators must account for the following aspects [91–93]: (1) power grid operation functions are built on complex mathematical algorithms, which require significant time to solve; (2) a low computational efficiency in grid operations can lead to inability to respond to adverse situations; (3) a power grid can become unstable and collapse within seconds; (4) studies are usually conducted for areas within individual utility boundaries and examine an incomplete set of contingencies prioritized from experience as the most significant; (5) dynamic analysis still remains as an offline application, but grid operation margins determined by offline analysis do not always reflect real-time operating conditions. Consequently, power system operations demand the application of HPC technologies to transform grid operations with improved computational efficiency and dynamic analysis capabilities. Potential areas of HPC application in power systems are dynamic simulation, real-time assessment, planning and optimization, or probabilistic assessment. For a review of HPC development and applications in power system analysis see references [92, 93].

24_Santoso_Sec24_p1503-1574.indd 1540

23/11/17 1:53 PM

COMPUTER APPLICATIONS IN THE ELECTRIC POWER INDUSTRY   1541 

24.4.4  Real-Time Simulation Introduction.  Continuous advances of hardware and software have led to the replacement of expensive analog simulators by fully digital real-time simulators (RTSs) [103–107]. Due to advances in digital processors, parallel processing, and communication technology, RTSs are becoming increasingly popular for a variety of applications [108–110]. Field programmable gate arrays (FPGAs) are also making significant inroads into real-time simulators: this technology can offer high-speed high-precision simulations in standalone configurations, and work as accelerator components in PCcluster simulators [111, 112]. Real-time simulators can be used for testing equipment in a hardware-in-the-loop (HIL) configuration or for rapid control prototyping (RCP), where a model-based controller interacts in real time with the actual hardware; see Fig. 24-12 [35, 103]. To achieve their goals, RTSs must have the ability to simulate all phenomena within a specified time step and maintain its real-time performance so all signals must be exactly updated at the specified time step; a failure to update outputs and inputs at the specified time step can cause distortion that will affect the simulation or the performance of the equipment under test. The rest of this subsection summarizes the main features of a real-time simulator and their applications. Main Features of Real-Time Simulation.  The implementation and development of real-time simulation platforms are based on the features detailed below [106]. Real-Time Constraint.  A real-time computation must be fast enough to keep up with real time; this constraint must be respected at any time step. In general, the differential-algebraic equations (DAEs) of the system under study are discretized and computed along a sequence of equal time-spaced points. Then, all these points must be computed and completed within the specified time step. If a time step is not completed in time, there is an overrun. Overruns create distortion of the waveforms injected into the equipment under test, and can lead to equipment misoperation. Bandwidth.  The time step selected for a simulation must be compatible with the frequency range of the phenomena to be simulated. Electric systems are difficult to simulate because their bandwidth is high. Mechanical systems with slow dynamics generally require a simulation time-step between 1 and 10 ms, although a smaller time-step may be required to maintain numerical stability in stiff systems. A common practice is to use a simulation time-step below 50 µs to provide acceptable results for transients up to 2 kHz, a time-step of approximately 10 µs for phenomena with frequency content up to 10 kHz, and time steps shorter than 1 µs for simulating fast-switching power electronic devices used in transmission and distribution systems, or used to interface distributed generators. Power electronic converters with a higher PWM carrier frequency in the range of 10 kHz may require time-steps of less than 0.5 µs. Parallel Processing.  Real-time constraints require the use of highly optimized solvers that can take advantage of parallel processing. The application of parallel processing can be facilitated by using distributed-parameters transmission lines to make the admittance matrix block-diagonal (i.e., creating subsystems that can be solved independently from each other). This approach allows dividing the network into subsystems with smaller admittance matrices; however, an effective implementation of this technique assumes that the processing time for data exchange between processors is much smaller than the time used to simulate each subsystem. Some software packages have been specifically developed to take advantage of parallel processing, with great improvements in simulation speed. Linkage is performed to generate different executable modules that can be assigned to different processor cores and increase the simulation speed according to the number of assigned processor cores. Using hundreds of cores to simulate very large grids requires the use of efficient and automatic processor allocation software to facilitate to use of such powerful parallel computers.

24_Santoso_Sec24_p1503-1574.indd 1541

23/11/17 1:53 PM

1542  SECTION TWENTY-FOUR

Host computer

Real-Time simulator

Feed-back signals Filters and Isolation

D/A

A/D

Digital controller (Real hardware)

Actuating signal/Control signal (a) Real plant hardware Motor supply 3-phase AC supply

Power electronic drive

Machine Gating signals Feedback signals

Digital controller

Feedback signals

Host PC (b) FIGURE 24-12  Applications of real-time digital simulators. (a) Hardware-in-the-loop simulation; (b) controller prototyping [103]. (©IEEE 2011.)

Latency.  In power electronic converter simulation it can be defined as the time elapsed between the semiconductor firing pulses sent by the controller under test and the reception by the controller of voltage and current signals sent back by the simulator. The use of voltage source converters with PWM frequency higher than 10 kHz as well as modular multilevel converters (MMC) with a very large number of levels may require time step values below 1 µs to achieve a total latency below 2 µs. Reaching such a low latency requires the use of FPGA chips. The difficulties in implementing low-latency inter-processor communications capable of fast data transfer

24_Santoso_Sec24_p1503-1574.indd 1542

23/11/17 1:53 PM

COMPUTER APPLICATIONS IN THE ELECTRIC POWER INDUSTRY   1543 

without overloading processors is one of the main impediments for the development of very high performance simulators. Solvers.  Two important aspects to be implemented in real-time solvers are parallelization and stiffness. Parallel solvers for real-time applications are generally based on the presence of lines or cables that split the system into smaller subsystems, each of which can be simulated within the specified time step using only one processor. If the computational time for one of these subsystems becomes too long because of its size, the common practice is to add artificial delays to obtain a new reduction of size and computational time. An artificial delay is usually implemented with a stub line, which is a line with a length adjusted to obtain a propagation time of one time step. Large capacitors and inductors can also be used to split a large system in several smaller subsystems to take advantage of parallel processing; however, the addition of these artificial delays may be problematic as parasitic Ls and Cs could be large compared to actual component values. Consequently, circuit solvers capable of simulating large circuits in parallel without adding parasitic elements can be very useful to increase simulation speed and accuracy. This is the key feature of the state-space-nodal algorithm [113], a nodal admittance based solver that minimizes the number of nodes (and thus the size of the nodal admittance matrix) to achieve a faster simulation. Another important issue is the stiffness exhibited by the equations of electric circuits: the circuit has a spread of natural frequencies. Nonstiff solvers (e.g., explicit Runge-Kutta) will be unstable due to the high-frequency components of the DAEs unless a very short-time step corresponding to the highest frequency is used; under such circumstance the simulation becomes extremely long. Some stiff solvers are able to cut through the high-frequency components and be less influenced by frequency components higher than sampling frequency. For switching transient studies, the concern is usually for components below 2 kHz, but the equations may have eigenvalues in the MHz range that cannot easily be eliminated. This is the reason why most solvers are based on the A-stable order-2 trapezoidal rule of integration, although it can exhibit numerical oscillations and in many cases users must use snubber circuits across the switches to avoid such oscillations [114]. Other more stable and accurate rules, such as the order-5 L-stable discretization rule, enable the use of larger time step values [106]. Input/Output Requirements.  Real-time simulators are built around multicore PCs with extensive input/output (I/O) capabilities. FPGA chips mounted on electronic boards can provide a direct and rapid interface and be used to implement models and solvers of moderate complexity, as well as fast control systems and signal processing. I/O requirements for real-time simulation are increasing mainly due to the increasing complexity of current power electronics systems. Real-time simulators must be able to physically interface with communication protocols (e.g., DNP3 protocol used for power system relays and substations) with an appropriate driver. The user can also program the FPGA board to interface to the desired protocol. The simulator must also provide proper signal conditioning for all I/Os such as filtering and isolation. Applications of Real-Time Simulators.  The applications of real-time simulators can be classified into the following categories [106]: 1. Rapid Control Prototyping (RCP). A real-time simulator is used to quickly implement a controller prototype that is connected to either the real or a simulated plant. 2. Hardware-in-the-Loop (HIL). This approach acts in an opposite manner; its main purpose is to test actual hardware (e.g., a controller) connected to a simulated plant. See also [115]. 3. Software-in-the-Loop (SIL). It is applied when controller object code can be embedded in the simulator to analyze the global system performance and to perform tests prior to the use of actual controller hardware (HIL). 4. Power-Hardware-in-the-Loop (PHIL). This option consists of using an actual power component in the loop with the simulator. 5. Rapid Simulation (RS). It takes advantage of parallel processing to accelerate simulation in massive batch run tests (e.g., a Monte-Carlo simulation). RS is very useful for reducing the simulation time of large systems using detailed models.

24_Santoso_Sec24_p1503-1574.indd 1543

23/11/17 1:53 PM

1544  SECTION TWENTY-FOUR

The list of fields in which RTSs have been applied include among others FACTS and HVDC applications, Monte Carlo simulations, and protection system studies [106]. Research is also done to develop real-time and faster-than-real-time transient stability simulators. Although real-time simulation of power system transient is well established, the need for offline real-time phasor-domain simulation has been recognized for a long time; real-time phasor-type simulators can be useful for testing the functionality of controllers and protective devices in large-scale power systems, for training purposes, as operator training tool in energy management centers, for online prediction of system instability, or for implementing corrective actions to prevent system collapse. For a more detailed list of applications of real-time simulation, see [110]. The future generation of real-time simulation platforms will be capable of simulating long-term phenomena simultaneously with very short transients and fast switching events requiring submicroseconds time-steps, performing multidomain and multirate simulation (i.e., capable of simulating the dynamic response of all aspects and components affecting the system performance and security assessment), and integrating high-end general purpose processors with reconfigurable processor technologies, such as FPGAs, to achieve the best performance at a low cost [116]. 24.4.5  Big Data and Analytics Introduction.  Big data is a term coined to denote large and complex data sets for which traditional data processing applications are inadequate. The term often refers to the use of advanced methods to collect, manipulate and extract value from huge collections of data. To achieve such goal it is important to account for the following aspects: •  Big data manipulation includes capture, search, storage, transfer, visualization, analysis, curation, sharing, updating, and information privacy. The list of challenges includes how to characterize the uncertainty in large and complex data sets, reconcile information from multiple sources, and extract information from large volumes of data. •  Data can be complex in many ways (volume, noise, heterogeneity, multisource, collected over a range of temporal and spatial scales). Deducing information from such complexity can be useful to optimize performance, improve design, or create predictive models. •  The data are usually generated as random information from an unknown probability distribution. Understanding data means to deduce the probabilistic model from which they have been generated. The information to be gained is the relationship between the variables of the model. •  Accuracy in big data may lead to more confident decision making, and better decisions can result in greater operational efficiency, as well as reduction of cost and risk. However, there are always sources of error (e.g., noise in the measurements, lossy data compression, mistakes in model assumptions, unknown failures in algorithm executions) in the process from data generation to inference. For more details on big data and data engineering, see references [117]–[119]. Data is increasing at exponential rates, which requires new framework for modeling uncertainty and predicting the change of the uncertainty. Powerful techniques are needed to efficiently process very large volume of data within limited time. The concept analytics is generally used to denote the discovery, interpretation, and communication of meaningful patterns in data. Big data analytics refers to the set of technologies, such as statistics, data mining, machine learning, signal processing, pattern recognition, optimization and visualization methods, which can be used to capture, organize, and analyze massive quantity of information as it is produced, and obtain meaningful insight to provide a better service, at a lesser cost, and taking advantage of multiple data sources. The main challenges faced by analytics software (i.e., massive and complex data sets in a constant state of change) are leading to the development of tools that will be useful for its application in the smart grid. Two concepts closely related to big data are data mining and machine learning [120–122]. Data mining is the process of discovering patterns in large data sets: it is aimed at extracting information

24_Santoso_Sec24_p1503-1574.indd 1544

23/11/17 1:53 PM

COMPUTER APPLICATIONS IN THE ELECTRIC POWER INDUSTRY   1545 

from data and transforms it into knowledge for further use. The goal is the extraction of patterns and knowledge from large amounts of data, not the extraction (mining) of data itself; the actual task of data mining is the analysis of large quantities of data to extract previously unknown patterns such as groups of data records (cluster analysis), unusual records (anomaly detection), and dependencies (association rule mining). These patterns can then be seen as a kind of summary of the input data, and may be used in further analyses. Machine learning explores the study and construction of algorithms that can learn from and make predictions on data: such algorithms build a model from inputs in order to make predictions or decisions expressed as outputs. Machine learning is employed where designing and programming explicit algorithms is infeasible. Within the field of data analytics, machine learning is used to devise complex models and algorithms that lend themselves to prediction. These models allow users to produce reliable decisions and uncover hidden insights through learning from relationships and trends in the data. The Role of Big Data in Smart Grid Operation [123–130].  Utilities are collecting an increasing amount of real-time information from homes, factories, power plants, and transmission/distribution infrastructures. Big data is generated in the grid from various sources [130]: (1) synchrophasormeasured data; (2) condition-based measurements acquired by IEDs; (3) data from smart meters and other customer interaction channels (e.g., voice, Internet, or mobile); (4) data from home automation and intelligent home devices; (5) data from new technologies requiring additional monitoring (e.g., electric vehicles, wind generation, photovoltaic panels, microgrids); (6) energy market pricing and bidding data; (7) offline entered nameplate and maintenance data; (8) data on customers, service connection and assets; and (9) management, control, and maintenance data in the power generation, transmission, and distribution networks acquired by IEDs. Some data widely used in decision making, such as weather and GIS information, are not directly obtained through grid measurements. Utilities can also collect large amount of data from computer simulations based on reliable power system models and powerful software tools. Figure 24-13 shows the main sources of big data in the smart grid. Planning & forecasting situational awareness asset management & condition monitoring DER integration

Energy efficiency demand response dynamic pricing billing services

Power generation

Transmission

Distribution

Asset management & condition monitoring long-term planning & forecasting

Industrial customers

Planning & forecasting volt/var control fault location, isolation & service restoration DER integration

Residential and commercial customers

Energy efficiency demand response dynamic pricing billing services FIGURE 24-13  Sources of big data in the smart grid.

24_Santoso_Sec24_p1503-1574.indd 1545

23/11/17 1:53 PM

1546  SECTION TWENTY-FOUR

Key characteristics of data from power grids are volume (e.g., immense amounts of data), velocity (i.e., some information is made available in real or near real time), and variety (i.e., either structured or unstructured data can come from multiple data sources, such as network monitors, meters, or even images and videos). The data from AMI generates information on how individual customers respond to requests of consumption reduction. Both the supply of power and the demand for it can be managed more efficiently if utilities and consumers get accurate information about power use (e.g., consumers could be guided to move some electricity consumption to off-peak hours and reduce the need for nonrenewable power plants to be activated at peak hours). This information can also be used to improve grid reliability, outage response, reducing the cost of distribution operations, or measuring the impact of a demand response program. For efficient asset management and outage prevention, real-time operation can be crucial, often requiring fast processing of large volumes of data. To unlock the full value of this information, utilities need complex event-processing engines that are still under development. However, many utilities do not have the capabilities to transmit, store and manipulate such information. In addition, focusing on high volumes of data rather than on the data management can lead to nonadequate decisions; although volume is a significant challenge in managing big data, data information variety and velocity must be focused on as well. A challenge for utilities is that they run their central control operations on a mix of legacy computer systems, many of which cannot communicate with each other. Past experience, particularly from large blackouts, has shown the need for better situational awareness about network disturbances such as faults and dynamic events, sudden changes of intermittent power from renewable resources such as wind generation, outage management tasks such as fault location and restoration, and monitoring of system operating conditions such as voltage stability. These and other tasks have been handled reasonably well by existing solutions, but improvements in decision making are highly desirable in order to produce more cost-effective and timely decisions, facilitating more efficient and secure grid operation. Appropriate big data analytics capabilities will deliver value to (1) anticipate failures of distribution assets, such as transformers, to organize maintenance operations; (2) improve balance of generation and demand through better forecasting and demand response management; (3) improve energy planning forecasts to decrease energy costs; (4) improve customer service quality, identifying power cuts more accurately at the moment they occur for faster restoration; (5) enable optimization and control of delocalized generation to facilitate the connection of a large number of electrical vehicles and renewable energy sources; (6) support distribution network operations, such as voltage optimization or outage management; (7) structure energy saving policies; (8) improve customer service with error-free metering and billing services; (9) allow utilities to identify and reduce losses. The incorporation of big data analytics into utilities is finding some evident barriers, such as the heterogeneity of data types and formats, security, confidentiality and privacy issues [131], the ownership of private data, or the unavailability of adequate tools. Some emerging technologies, such as the IoT and cloud computing, are closely related to big data in the smart grid [132]. The IoT represents an enormous amount of networking sensors which collect various kinds of data (e.g., environmental, geographical, operation and customer data). These new technologies offer new opportunities, as they can contribute to create the value that big data will generate to smart grid through efficiently integrating, managing and mining large quantities of complex. 24.4.6  Cloud Computing Definition.  Cloud computing is a model for enabling ubiquitous, on-demand access to a pool of configurable computing resources (e.g., networks, servers, storage, applications, and services) [133]. Cloud computing provides users with capabilities to process data in third-party data centers. The current availability of high-capacity networks, low-cost computers and storage devices, as well as the widespread adoption of hardware virtualization, service-oriented architecture, and autonomic and

24_Santoso_Sec24_p1503-1574.indd 1546

23/11/17 1:53 PM

COMPUTER APPLICATIONS IN THE ELECTRIC POWER INDUSTRY   1547 

utility computing, have led to a growth in cloud computing, which is becoming a highly demanded service due to high computing power, low cost of services, high performance, scalability, accessibility, and availability. For more details on cloud computing see [134–139]. Cloud computing is often compared to the following technologies with which it shares certain aspects [134]: •  Virtualization abstracts away the details of physical hardware and provides virtualized resources for high-level applications. Virtualization forms the foundation of cloud computing, as it provides the capability of pooling computing resources from clusters of servers and dynamically assigning or reassigning virtual resources to applications on demand. •  Grid computing coordinates networked resources to achieve a common computational objective. Cloud computing and grid computing employ distributed resources to achieve application-level objectives; however, cloud computing takes one step further by leveraging virtualization technologies at multiple levels to realize resource sharing and dynamic resource provisioning. •  Utility computing provides resources on demand and charges customers based on usage rather than a flat rate. Cloud computing can be perceived as a realization of utility computing, and adopts a utility-based pricing scheme for economic reasons. With on-demand resource provisioning and utility-based pricing, service providers can maximize resource utilization and minimize their operating costs. •  Autonomic computing aims at building computing systems capable of self-management (i.e., they react without human intervention). Its goal is to overcome the management complexity of current computer systems. Although cloud computing exhibits certain autonomic features, such as automatic resource provisioning, its objective is to reduce cost rather than complexity. Deployment Models.  Several models of cloud computing, with variations in physical location and distribution, have been adopted. Basically, cloud computing can be grouped into four subcategories: public, private, community, or hybrid [133, 137]. A public cloud is a cloud made available to the general public in a pay-as-you-go manner while a private cloud is as internal data center not made available to the general public. In most cases, establishing a private cloud means restructuring an existing infrastructure by adding virtualization and cloud-like interfaces to allow users to interact with the local data center while experiencing the same advantages of public clouds, most notably self-service interface, privileged access to virtual servers, and per-usage metering and billing. A community cloud is shared by several organizations with common concerns (e.g., goal, security requirements, policy, compliance considerations) [137]. A hybrid cloud takes shape when a private cloud is supplemented with computing capacity from public clouds. Types of Clouds.  From the perspective of service model, cloud computing is divided into three classes, depending on the abstraction level of the capability provided and the service model of providers [133–135] (see Fig. 24-14): •  Infrastructure as a Service (IaaS). This option offers virtualized resources (i.e., computation, storage, and communication) on demand. A cloud infrastructure provisions servers running several choices of operating systems and a customized software stack. Users are given privileges to perform numerous activities to the server (e.g., starting and stopping it, customizing it by installing software packages, attaching virtual disks to it, and configuring access permissions and firewalls rules). •  Platform as a Service (PaaS). This option offers a higher level of abstraction to make a cloud easily programmable: an environment on which developers create and deploy applications and do not necessarily need to know how many processors or how much memory applications will be using. In addition, multiple programming models and specialized services (e.g., data access, authentication, and payments) are offered as building blocks to new applications. •  Software as a Service (SaaS). Services provided by this option can be accessed by end users through Web portals. Consumers are increasingly shifting from locally installed computer programs to

24_Santoso_Sec24_p1503-1574.indd 1547

23/11/17 1:53 PM

1548  SECTION TWENTY-FOUR

End user

Web interface

Software as a service Applications: Business applications, Web services, multimedia

Applications are hosted on the cloud and offered as services

Platform as a service Platforms: Software framework, storage

The platforms used to design, develop and test applications are provided by the cloud infrastructure

Infrastructure as a service Hardware: CPU, Memory

Services (computing capabilities, storage) are offered on demand

FIGURE 24-14  Cloud computing classes.

online software services that offer the same functionally; traditional desktop applications such as word processing and spreadsheet can now be accessed as a service in the Web. This model alleviates the burden of software maintenance for customers and simplifies development and testing for providers. A Practical Experience.  Utilities will have to provide new business capabilities in the face of rapidly changing technologies. Cloud computing solutions promise great technological capabilities and benefits; however, not much experience is yet available on its application by utilities. The experience of ISO-NE presented in [140] is a good example from which some important conclusions were derived. The list of challenges associated with migrating power system simulations to the cloud-computing platform includes topics related to development, software license, cost management, and security. The main findings provided in reference [140] can be summarized as follows: •  A platform developed on the basis of an open architecture should not only accommodate different resource management and job balancing tools, but also support different power system simulation programs. •  The cloud-computing platform can comply with current cybersecurity and data privacy requirements, comparable to existing on-premise infrastructures. •  Deploying power system applications to the cloud can result in significant cost savings and performance improvement without the compromise of system security and quality of service. •  Utilities need to develop a strong business case when making the decisions on which data and applications will be deployed in the cloud so as to take advantage of all the benefits. •  The way cloud computing functions is significantly different from the traditional on-premise infrastructure, so understanding all the implications is important to equip utilities with the information needed to make the appropriate assessment. Cloud computing can achieve significant cost saving by avoiding unnecessary over-expenditure on IT infrastructure and eliminating capital investment expenditures. Public cloud computing can be a robust solution far beyond the economic reach of many organizations. The high resiliency and availability of services provided by cloud computing are critical to utilities as their daily operations

24_Santoso_Sec24_p1503-1574.indd 1548

23/11/17 1:53 PM

COMPUTER APPLICATIONS IN THE ELECTRIC POWER INDUSTRY   1549 

become increasingly dependent on IT services and makes cloud computing an attractive solution to meet the growing internal computational needs; in addition, migrating power system applications to public cloud services can comply with current cybersecurity and data privacy requirements. The potential cloud computing applications in power system analysis and operations have been analyzed in several works; see [141–145].

24.5  THE COMMON INFORMATION MODEL 24.5.1 Introduction Computer engineering and operation applications require digitally stored data and their exchange between these applications. Large-scale EMSs and asset-management systems use database schemes for defining the structure of the data storage, often custom-written to reflect the specific requirement of the operator. They communicate with each other, generally using a vendor-custom format. In the past this required the user to purchase each piece of software from the same vendor to ensure compatibility. Offline applications for performing calculations use proprietary formats that represent the data required by each application. When subsequent versions of the program require additional details, the file format is changed, resulting in multiple formats for a single application. Changing the file format for each new software version has been common practice within the software industry, although its impact has been mitigated since the new software contained import facilities to convert previous versions of the file format into the new format. In addition, power companies have long needed to share system modeling information with one another in order to construct simulation environments for power system economics and security analysis. The major motivation has been to support system planning functions including transmission planning, maintenance scheduling, and operations planning. Typically, a utility must also model significant portions of neighboring systems, even for proper analysis. Finally, the deregulation of the power industry has resulted in multiple utilities running software from a number of different vendors and having to exchange large data sets on a regular basis. ISOs must maintain operational power system models that span multiple service areas for reliable operation of the transmission grid; to accomplish this, they must regularly exchange detailed models with their member utilities. These situations may become unmanageable when the software bridges are built by different vendors using diverse technologies and the number of interfaces is too large because of the so many areas of integration. The situation is further aggravated when systems are upgraded or replaced and/or when processes change. The large number of proprietary formats used by these applications requires a myriad of translators to import and export the data between multiple systems. As a result of this situation, new vendors face high market entry barriers, because it is necessary to interface their products with large and customized data systems at each potential utility customer. A way to reduce the effort and complexity of this task is for each system to map its data elements to a common data model. Instead of mapping the data elements from each system directly to the data elements of each other connected system, the mapping is performed once from each system to this common model. In cases where both the number of systems and the number of interconnects are large, this method can significantly reduce the number of mappings required. Consider the example shown in Fig. 24-15 with six different systems. Within this configuration, the SCADA is used to monitor the current status of the power system; data about the system topology is stored within a GIS and must be transferred into the SCADA, which is connected to the EMS in order to track and control the power flow. Since there are six foreign formats to support, then six interface modules must be developed; however, without a common object model, each pair-wise interface might have to be implemented separately, and that would mean up to 15 different modules to develop. Using a common language, only six adaptors are required to connect the six systems. The number of systems within an electric utility is higher than six, although there can be systems from the same vendor having the same formats and not every system is linked to all others. Another important issue that requires using commonly accepted and compatible data exchange formats is the integration of renewable energy sources (RES), which is affecting the electric grid

24_Santoso_Sec24_p1503-1574.indd 1549

23/11/17 1:53 PM

1550  SECTION TWENTY-FOUR

SCADA

OMS

Adapter SCADA/CIM

GIS

Adapter GIS/CIM

Common information model

Adapter MDMS/CIM

MDMS

Adapter OMS/CIM

Adapter CIS/CIM

CIS

Adapter DMS/CIM

DMS

FIGURE 24-15  Adapters between CIM and different systems. (SCADA: supervisory control and data acquisition; OMS: outage management system; GIS: geographic information system; CIS: customer information system; MDMS: meter data management system; DMS: distribution management system.)

infrastructure and the functioning of the electricity market, and requires for their intermittency to be balanced. To achieve this, an efficient information exchange is necessary between an increasing number of companies (i.e., generators, TSOs, DSOs). Such information exchanges have become indispensable in network planning (e.g., network development, interconnection development to tackle congestions), power system operation (e.g., real-time information, balancing control), and market operation (e.g., generation schedules, trades, balancing resource management). A technique for further simplifying this task is to utilize an industry standard information model, so that the common model does not have to be created, it is instead adopted. A common language used within EMSs is the standard Common Information Model (CIM) [146, 147]. 24.5.2 Background CIM History.  According to [148], the beginning of CIM can be traced back to the efforts made by the IEEE PES Energy Management System Architecture Task Force, whose purpose was to think about and make recommendations on future EMS architectures. The task force met from 1982 to 1989, when it was dismantled after writing a final report. The next efforts were headed by EPRI in early 1990s. To integrate different systems from different vendors, EPRI sponsored the Control Center Application Programming Interface (CCAPI), an attempt to produce a set of common Application Programming Interfaces (APIs) that could be provided and used by vendors to communicate information between applications, potentially provided and used by different vendors. Over time, it was evident that having a common definition of the data

24_Santoso_Sec24_p1503-1574.indd 1550

23/11/17 1:53 PM

COMPUTER APPLICATIONS IN THE ELECTRIC POWER INDUSTRY   1551 

between applications was the fundamental problem that needed to be solved. It was also becoming apparent that APIs are typically tied to specific technologies. Thus, it would be very difficult to get vendors and users who had made significant investments in specific technologies to agree upon a set of APIs. For these reasons, the focus shifted toward defining what is called an information model. As the research progressed and started to produce a concrete information model, the next step was to promote its use among the vendors. One way to do this was to turn the information model into an international standard since vendors would build products using the standard. For this reason, the development of CIM standards was started by the IEC. The committee chartered with turning the information model into a standard was Technical Committee 57 (TC57): Power Systems Management and Associated Information Exchange. A new working group, WG13, was appointed to start this work primarily in the transmission operations domain, although the application to distribution operations and market communications quickly followed with the establishment of WG14, Distribution Management Systems Interfaces, and WG16, Market Communications. Other working groups followed later to incorporate the CIM semantic model into their work as well. The TC57 has expanded to include many working groups that are based on the CIM. Today, the CIM is composed of a series of standards comprising a single, unified semantic model and multiple profiles developed in these different working groups defining specific information exchanges between applications/systems/devices in support of business processes in transmission, distribution, and markets. See Secs. 24.5.5 and 24.5.6. The two most relevant CIM standards are the IEC 61970 and IEC 61968 series [149–152]. The IEC 61970-301 standard is the core of CIM and includes information associated with control center applications, such as EMS, SCADA, and network planning. The IEC 61968 standard extends CIM to include distribution management system (DMS) functions. These two standards are known as the CIM for power systems and have two primary uses: to facilitate the exchange of power system network data between companies and allow the exchange of data between applications within a company. Because IEC TC 57 is focused on defining and revising the official standard and is formally part of the IEC, another forum, the CIM Users Group (CIMug), was created in 2005 to provide a venue for utilities, vendors, consultants, and integrators who use the CIM. The CIMug also provides a channel to the standard organization for users to make suggestions for changes and extensions to the current standard. In 2006, EPRI initiated the CIM for planning models with the objective of developing a common power system network model that both operations and planning groups can use as a basis for information exchange. EPRI launched in 2008 the CIM for dynamic models [153]. In 2008, the European Union for the Coordination of Transmission of Electricity (UCTE) decided to use the CIM-based data exchange format and joined the international efforts of EPRI projects and CIMug. These activities were expanded with the creation of the European Network of Transmission System Operators for Electricity (ENTSO-E) in 2009. ENTSO-E has established liaisons with IEC TC 57/WG13 (the working group dealing with CIM for transmission) and IEC TC57/WG16 (the working group responsible for energy markets). The establishment of an electricity energy market requires information to be exchanged among utilities but also from a number of participants from various sectors (e.g., traders, power exchanges, aggregators of information, meter data collectors). A harmonized approach is necessary to define data interchanges to reduce the complexity and cost of IT systems while ensuring that ongoing quality and usability is maintained. With this objective in mind, the IEC 62325 series of standards was developed to facilitate efficient interactions among market participants, market operator, and system operators to provide a unified approach to conducting market operations [154]. Two market models are being developed: one for the North American–style market (nodal market) and the other one for the European-style market (zonal market). The initial focus was on European-style markets, which resulted in the series of IEC 62325-451-n for dedicated business processes such as acknowledgment, scheduling transmission capacity allocation and nomination, settlement and reconciliation, status request and problem statement, and transparency data publication [155]. IEC 62325-450 provides the modeling rules necessary to ensure that contextual models derived from the CIM are in conformity with the CIM model, ensures modeling consistency and avoids ambiguity between objects by providing a clear understanding on what they are based within the CIM [156]. The work

24_Santoso_Sec24_p1503-1574.indd 1551

23/11/17 1:53 PM

1552  SECTION TWENTY-FOUR

for North American–style markets will be in the form of a series of standards dealing with day ahead and intraday markets. These standards will describe the exchange of supplemental market definition data and run-time market data (bids, offers, schedules of award, and locational marginal prices). For a good introduction to the CIM foundations, see the EPRI CIM Primer [157]. A tutorial introduction to CIM was provided in a special issue of the IEEE Power & Energy Magazine [158]. The articles included in the issue aim to explain the high-level challenges of power systems and related use cases, demonstrate where the CIM can be applied to help resolve problems that power system engineers are facing, and bring forward current information on approaches that can resolve important issues in a key domain such as data exchanges in a complex and increasingly challenging environment. 24.5.3  Main CIM Features The Unified Modeling Language.  An information model is an abstract and formal representation of objects, their attributes, their associations to other objects, and the behavior and operations that can be performed on them. The primary purpose of the information model is to formally describe a domain without constraining how that description is implemented in a software application. The information model is formally described in a particular, well-defined fashion. The Unified Modeling Language (UML) was chosen as the language to represent the CIM semantics used in electric utilities: the UML is a formal descriptive language that unifies several methodologies commonly used by software engineers to model systems [159, 160]. A UML model can be directly used in electronic form by software tools to generate artifacts (e.g., power system network models) that vendors can download and incorporate in their products. A complete model includes not only diagrams but also supporting written documents; UML diagrams are used to provide functional requirements, static structure and dynamic behavior of a model. At implementation level, the IEC has proposed the simplified CIM XML exchange format [161]. The XML is a markup language developed by the World Wide Web Consortium (W3C). A markup language is a way to encode both information and meta-information so that a clear, unambiguous communication of the information can be exchanged between computer applications and systems. HyperText Markup Language (HTML) is an example of well-known markup language. A pragmatic reason for using XML is the availability of an extensive technology infrastructure covering functions such as transformation, presentation, query, schema and exchange protocols. The adoption of XML has other benefits; for instance, it is compatible to different industry standards. Resource Description Framework.  The IEC proposes a resource description framework (RDF) schema as a proper way to exchange data in a common format. RDF is a method of defining information models and is based upon the idea of making statements in a subject-predicate-object expression. That is, each expression in RDF terminology has a subject, defined by naming a resource (i.e., anything that can be identified), an object, which denotes traits or attributes associated with the subject, and a predicate, which expresses the relationship between the subject and the object. The object in a statement can be a literal, such as a string, or another resource. The CIM XML language is an application of RDF to CIM. It is defined by a confluence of the CIM, RDF schema, and RDF syntax specifications. Since RDF is general enough to describe UML concepts, the conversion is straightforward. The standard RDF schema vocabulary is extended to represent additional UML association concepts such as inverse roles and multiplicity. This enables the CIM to be translated from UML to RDF schema with sufficient fidelity. The final result is a concrete schema, encoded in RDF syntax and employing RDF concepts that software tools can readily interpret. CIM RDF is both machine and human readable and self-describing. Standard mechanisms to convert the UML model into an RDF scheme are defined in IEC 61970-501 [150]. 24.5.4  CIM Packages and Profiles The basic CIM data model consists of several packages that describe a unique subdomain of the information model. Figure 24-16 shows an incomplete list of packages. Each package contains a set of classes along with their inheritance structure, their attributes, and their associations. For instance,

24_Santoso_Sec24_p1503-1574.indd 1552

23/11/17 1:53 PM

COMPUTER APPLICATIONS IN THE ELECTRIC POWER INDUSTRY   1553 

Generation

LoadModel

Outage

Protection

Assets

Wires

Meas

Consumer

Toplogy

Cores

Documentation

SCADA

Financial

Energy scheduling

Domain

Reservation

FIGURE 24-16  CIM packages.

the core package contains definitions of classes that are parent classes to many of the more specific classes in other packages, including classes defined in both IEC 61970 and 61968 series. The wires package is a relatively large package that can be broken down into three parts (lines, transformers, and switches), each one having classes that define the corresponding devices. The EnergyScheduling package is used in applications that support the exchange of electricity, provides the capability to schedule and account for transactions for the exchange of electricity between energy utility companies, and includes transactions for power which is generated, consumed, lost, passed through, sold and purchased. The assets package defines the attributes and relationships that are commonly part of an asset management program; it includes a large number of attributes, such as manufacturer, serial number, manufacture date, or purchase date. A profile is defined as the set of classes, attributes, and relationships that are a subset of the classes, attributes, and relationships found in another schema. Thus, a given profile is a subset of a parent schema. Profiles are used to define domain models and can be realized in a variety of forms (e.g., text documents or HTML). Examples of CIM profiles are the common power system model (CPSM), which defines the subset of classes, attributes, and associations necessary to execute the EMS applications of power flow and state estimation; the common distribution power System Model (CDPSM), which defines the subset of classes, attributes, and associations necessary to execute several DMS applications; the planning profile, which is required for defining models required in performing transmission planning power flow and other related applications; or the dynamics profile, which is required to handle dynamic stability packages. 24.5.5  CIM Interoperability Tests Interoperability (IOP) tests provide a mechanism to ensure compliance of applications with the IEC standards and integration architectures. The main goal of an IOP test is to check whether applications can exchange models using the CIM standards. The general objectives are to [162]: (1) demonstrate

24_Santoso_Sec24_p1503-1574.indd 1553

23/11/17 1:53 PM

1554  SECTION TWENTY-FOUR

interoperability between different products based on the latest CIM version; (2) verify compliance with the CIM for those CIM classes/attributes involved in the information exchanges supported by the tests; (3) demonstrate the exchange of power system models using the CIM with an RDF Schema and XML representation of the model data; (4) check that the profile documentation is correct, complete and ready to be implemented by the tests; (5) validate the correctness and completeness of IEC draft standards; and (6) validate the test models, the UML, and the RDF files created for the test. A result of IOP tests is the development of tools that can be used to validate compliance with the standards and provide testing artifacts to enable IOP testing [162]. ENTSO-E runs tests on a yearly basis to demonstrate the interoperability of CIM standards and to support CIM development. These tests are tailored to ensure adequate representation of TSO requirements and designed to allow vendors to verify the correctness of the interpretation of the CIM standards [163]. The last ENTSO-E IOP test, held in July 2016, was aimed at (1) validating the proposal for CIM extensions to be included in the next Common Grid Model Exchange Standard (CGMES) version of IEC standards that will be used to support the data exchanges required by the European legislation; (2) demonstrating exchange of dynamic models following the implementation effort performed by a group of vendors; (3) demonstrating exchange based on efficient XML interexchange defined by the W3C. ENTSO-E has also conducted IOP tests on the IEC 62325 series for the electricity market; these tests aim to demonstrate that the IEC 62325-451-n series satisfy the information requirements for the corresponding business processes in the European-style market profile [164]. The results of IOP tests have proved that the work carried out on the IEC standards is in line with the business requirements, there are no major deficiencies in the standards, and the standards include all the capabilities needed to support the exchanges already implemented.

24.5.6  CIM Harmonization The CIM standards are continuously revised to correct errors, incorporate improvements, include extensions desirable to standardize, and meet the changing requirements for data exchange, which are increasing in both frequency and type, with higher RES integration and the introduction of smart grids. To unambiguously specify the CIM XML version, a uniform resource identifier (URI) is used for the CIM namespace. A CIM XML document declares the CIM namespace with the version being used in a statement. Software reading the CIM XML document can then detect the CIM XML version and respond accordingly. CIM XML documents can be extended to model vendor or utility special needs. The CIM RDF schema can be extended with new classes and attributes by providing a separate namespace. Because a separate namespace is used, the customized CIM XML documents can clearly delineate what is standard and what is custom. Several different custom extensions can exist and be clearly identified within the same XML document. When these customized documents are imported to information systems that know nothing about the extensions, the elements with the unknown tags can be simply ignored. Although the IEC 61970 and IEC 61850 standards were developed within the IEC TC57, they were independently developed and historically have not shared a common model or modeling approach. A project to harmonize both standards, following the approach for interoperability recommended by the NIST Smart Grid Roadmap, suggests the development of a common semantic model to be used for the smart grid [165]. The goal is define a IEC 61850 profile that could be used to generate IEC 61850-6 SCL files in a fashion already used to create CIM XML files and message payloads for the IEC 61968/70 CIM standards. A unified 61850/CIM model offers the possibility to create an environment that can be used to automatically configure SCADA communication interfaces and to exchange the communication related information to other systems. IEC CIM is a sophisticated approach to data exchange still under development. A significant activity on CIM applications has been carried out during the last years; for more details about the scope and the applications of this language; see [166–175].

24_Santoso_Sec24_p1503-1574.indd 1554

23/11/17 1:53 PM

COMPUTER APPLICATIONS IN THE ELECTRIC POWER INDUSTRY   1555 

24.6  THE IoT 24.6.1 Introduction The Internet of Things (IoT) can be defined as a network of physical objects (e.g., home appliances, electrical vehicles, buildings) connected to the Internet framework, able to identify themselves to other devices, and enabled to collect and exchange data. The IoT can be seen as an extension of Internet and communication infrastructures in which devices are embedded with both intelligence and sensors that provide them with decision-making capabilities. Each object, uniquely identifiable through its embedded computing system, is able to interoperate within the Internet infrastructure: objects can sense, analyze and process data, exchange information with other objects to achieve realtime status of the physical world, and take intelligent decisions. The IoT is enabled by the latest developments in radio frequency identification (RFID), smart sensors, communication technologies and Internet protocols, and will enable new applications by connecting physical objects together in support of intelligent decision making. For a thorough overview of the IoT, see [176–181]. The IoT can also be seen as a step of the smart grid development: the electric system, protected by means of relays, breakers, and disconnectors, uses a centralized management (i.e., SCADA and EMSs) that allows control centers to remotely sense and reconfigure grids; a further step is an interaction between devices and the electrical grid, in which power plants maintain constant communication with consumers, and connected objects (e.g., home appliances) can self-adjust to consume less power or even turn off. From the data collected from all the devices, an accurate energy demand can be estimated, so generation can be automatically shifted according to a predicted demand variation. The interconnection of devices can promote automation in nearly all fields and enable advanced smart grid applications. Since IoT is expected to generate large amounts of data from diverse locations, an aggregation of the data will be required, as well as an increasing need to store and process such data.

24.6.2  Drivers, Barriers, and Challenges Drivers.  In addition to the advances in sensors, communications, Internet infrastructures, and computing capabilities, the IoT implementation and development will also be supported by other drivers [182]: 1. The price of solar photovoltaic panels is declining, and as the adoption of solar increases, there will be an adoption and usage of devices and applications that should allow users to monitor their system. 2. The increasing availability of onsite backup power will make solar useful at any time, while the expansion of ancillary services in energy markets will enable cost-effective energy storage solutions (e.g., battery-based technologies). 3. It is expected a rise in demand response (DR) programs that could be connected via the cloud. Newly designed programs will use DR bidding and market-based measurement and verification to measure success. The market will see DR direct participation in energy markets. 4. Consumers will utilize smart meters for measurement and verification of participation in demand response. 5. Utilities are already increasing the use of data analytics to optimize grid operations, including outage management and volt/var control; massive data collected from the deployment of the IoT will require new and more powerful analytics tools, and at the same time will promote the development of these tools.

24_Santoso_Sec24_p1503-1574.indd 1555

23/11/17 1:53 PM

1556  SECTION TWENTY-FOUR

Barriers.  The connection of billions of devices through the Internet infrastructure will raise some concerns about the generated data [183]: •  Privacy and Confidentiality. The data gathered by billions of devices create concerns in privacy, confidentiality, and integrity. Providers of IoT-enabled services will have to develop new techniques to collect and use data, provide transparency into what data are used and how they are used, and ensure that the data are appropriately protected. •  Security. Organizations that gather data from devices will need to deal with new categories of risk that the IoT can introduce: extending IT systems to new devices creates many more opportunities for potential breaches. If the IoT is used to control physical assets, the consequences associated with a breach in security extend beyond the unauthorized release of information since they could potentially cause physical harm. •  Intellectual Property. A common understanding of ownership rights to data produced by various connected devices will be required to unlock the full potential of IoT. Clarification about the rights to the data from a sensor manufactured by one company and part of a solution deployed by another in a setting owned by a third party. Challenges.  The deployment of the IoT is raising the need for •  Standards. The implementation of the IoT should be based on standards that facilitated and simplified the tasks of programmers and service providers. Different groups worldwide are presently involved in the development of IoT protocols. Reference [181] classifies the IoT protocols into four categories: application protocols, service discovery protocols, infrastructure protocols, other influential protocols. However, not all of these protocols have to be bundled together to deliver a given IoT application, and some of them may not be required to be supported in an application. As with the smart grid, the variety of standards and technologies required for the deployment of the IoT and the way IoT objects should interoperate are some of the main challenges that can slow down the development of IoT applications. •  Software Tools. The connection of billions of devices to power and Internet/communication networks will demand for specialized tools with capabilities not available in any present software package. The simulation of an IoT-type system will require not only complex co-simulation capabilities for simultaneously reproduce power systems, Internet protocols, and decision-making algorithms, but also skills for analyzing cybersecurity issues and capabilities for simulating very large systems. 24.6.3  IoT Applications in the Smart Grid A smart grid is an energy delivery system that moves from a centrally controlled system to a more consumer driven one, relying on bidirectional communications to constantly adapt and tune the delivery of energy: a smart grid includes a broad range of sophisticated sensors that are constantly assessing the state of the grid, the availability of power flowing into the grid, and the demand on the grid. The sensors must collect a vast amount of information that can be used to estimate the changes required to optimize energy delivery. Through adaptation and tuning, the energy can be delivered at the right time and at the best price. Since the IoT brings together traditionally separate systems (e.g., lightning, electric vehicle, security, and IT) into one platform that increases energy management requirements, it can be assumed the IoT will significantly impact the smart grid performance. Although the design of the IoT framework for energy management capabilities requires a significant commitment in resources, a smart grid in which all devices are in communication can provide improved energy efficiency. IoT technology can •  Support the smart grid by improving the grid reliability, providing users with more intelligent and diversified services, and improving the power supply service (including user energy information, two-way interactive services, home energy management services, intelligent home control, or distributed energy electric car charging for electric auxiliary management). •  Help utilities to optimize and control assets, increase safety, control the grid, and keep the lights on.

24_Santoso_Sec24_p1503-1574.indd 1556

23/11/17 1:53 PM

COMPUTER APPLICATIONS IN THE ELECTRIC POWER INDUSTRY   1557 

Two already-implemented examples of IoT usage in the electric power industry are SCADA and AMI [184]. PMUs collect a vast amount of information on the status of the grid and smart meters can allow energy pricing to be based on the cost to deliver at a very granular level, offering a wider range of options on how and when energy should be consumed. Some IoT functionalities will enable reaching balanced resources that previously were only possible through less accurate central control: (1) with a unique identification, devices will not only provide their information for monitoring but will be capable of dynamically discovering nearby devices to collaborate with, so peer-to-peer interactions will emerge with advanced capabilities to interact with networked-based services hosted in enterprise systems or somewhere on the Internet; (2) devices will be able to enhance their own functionality in dynamic ways through emerging services; available price signals will also be used to affect device behavior; and (3) consumers can behave as an energy storage system by agreeing to control mechanisms that run home appliances when the system demand is low (e.g., in the middle of the night). The interaction between the IoT and the smart grid as well as the impact that the IoT could have on the smart grid has been the subject of a number of works; see [185–189].

24.7 CYBERSECURITY 24.7.1 Introduction Traditionally, the concerns of electric utilities about the security of their assets have centered on protecting them from physical threats (i.e., electromagnetic pulse, geomagnetic storm, inclement weather). However, the nature and the magnitude of the threats have now changed because the equipment to monitor and control devices is frequently connected by communication lines to WANs potentially accessible by the general public; as a consequence, the potential threat can be very far from the target and impact multiple devices simultaneously. The smart grid is introducing new security risks related to communications, system automation, and data collection technologies. In addition, the smart grid has to support legacy systems, which typically do not implement security features that newer systems will have, and new smart grid technologies exhibit security vulnerabilities that can be exploited by intruders. Approaches to secure these new technologies and to protect privacy must be designed and implemented in the design stage. The smart grid security must be addressed in a manner that balances protection with the need to provide affordable energy to consumers [190]. Cybersecurity is the term used for security with respect to the area of computers. Computers in power industry can be subject to malicious attacks and inadvertent errors, and vulnerable not only to direct and focused attacks, but also to indirect attacks (e.g., from viruses). Impacts by cyber incidents in electric power can be ranged from trivial to significant, and include, equipment damage, environmental damage, and even deaths. For a summary of the difference between traditional and contemporary threats to utility substation assets, see [191]. In a broad sense, cybersecurity for the power industry must cover all issues involving automation and communications that affect the operation of electric power systems, and the functioning of the utilities that manage them, as well as the business processes that support the customer base [192, 193]. As the grid is increasingly networked, it is becoming increasingly vulnerable to intrusions. With the increased use of smart grid and IoT technologies, there will be a greater number of access points, requiring increased security awareness by utilities, device manufacturers, and the general public. The interconnectivity between grid components and the increasing reliance on its cyber system makes the grid more vulnerable to a multitude of cyber-physical attacks (CPAs) that aim at compromising its functionalities. The security of the smart grid is one of the most critical technical challenges facing its deployment. Since the attacks against computers are increasing in frequency, intensity, and variety and not all cyber intrusions and/or cyber attacks are the same, understanding the purpose of the attack can be crucial for the security response. Many of the viruses that have caused substantial damage to critical facilitates across the world were specifically designed to compromise SCADA systems (e.g., the Stuxnet virus intercepts commands sent to high-speed frequency converters, which are devices that control functions, such as motors). A list of recent attacks and their targets is presented in [190].

24_Santoso_Sec24_p1503-1574.indd 1557

23/11/17 1:53 PM

1558  SECTION TWENTY-FOUR

The objectives of the smart grid cybersecurity are different from most of the other industries: any security countermeasure implemented in the smart grid should not impede power availability, which is the most important security objective. The electricity in the power grid not only needs to always be available, but it must also have quality, and this quality depends on the quality of the state estimation. The integrity of data collected by various sensors and agents, used to monitor the current state of the electrical power system, is very important; inadvertent or unauthorized modification of the data can cause failures or damage in the power system. The final security objective is confidentiality. Although the loss of data confidentiality has a lower risk than loss of availability or integrity, there are certain areas where confidentiality is more important. The privacy of customer information, general corporation information, and electric market information are some examples. For an introduction to cybersecurity of the smart grid, see the special issue of the IEEE Power & Energy Magazine [194]. See also [195–202]. For an interesting discussion about misconceptions related to cybersecurity threats; see also [203]. 24.7.2  Cybersecurity Threats and Vulnerabilities Threats.  Although most blackouts have been caused by a combination of natural events and human errors, it is, however, not difficult to imagine scenarios in which a deliberate action could cause a power outage. In addition, power system cybersecurity can be attacked from an unintentional threat; for instance, substation control can be impacted by inappropriate testing or procedures [191]. In general, threats are directed toward information held by the utility, but the target of the threat may be an entity other than the utility, such as a customer or a supplier. Although a physical attack can damage or destroy a single device, it can compromise a highly networked device and exploit electronic vulnerabilities to cause outages in one or several remote devices. Attackers cannot only exploit electronic vulnerabilities from publicly accessible networks, but they may also launch an automated attack on several target sites from a single location geographically separated from the target. If a physical attack can be effective on a limited basis, an automated electronic attack can multiply the force of the attack because it enables just one or few individuals to simultaneously attack many targets. Utilities can properly design SCADA systems against physical threats such as radiofrequency interference, electromagnetic pulse, and voltage transients. However, there are a variety of threats that can compromise securely installed SCADA systems: unauthorized individuals who gained access to the facility could install a key logger to expose the system, and a cyber attack could be used to damage the entire network. Cyber threats include denial of service (DoS), data interception, unauthorized user access, data alteration, and/or data-retransmission. In addition, these threats could interrupt the ability for other critical infrastructures to function. Securing against such challenges not only requires the development of improved security protocols for utility employees, but also improved behavioral analysis aimed at preventing or detecting unauthorized access or software installation, inadvertent or malicious. Vulnerabilities.  Traditional IT business systems have been the object of a wide variety of cyber attacks, which include exploitation of programming errors in operating systems and application software, cracking user passwords, use of ports left open to attack or use improperly configured firewalls. In addition to these vulnerabilities, a highly networked power system may have a number of special cyber vulnerabilities (e.g., insecure communications media, open protocols, lack of authentication, or lack of centralized system administration) [191]. Vulnerabilities related to protection can be organized into several groups and categorized by source and attack methods, see [204, 205]. 24.7.3  Cybersecurity Measures Goals and Objectives.  Cybersecurity measures must be aimed at achieving three primary goals [194, 206]: (1) confidentiality to ensure that only authorized entities have access to sensitive information (e.g., electricity market data and transaction information should only be accessible

24_Santoso_Sec24_p1503-1574.indd 1558

23/11/17 1:53 PM

COMPUTER APPLICATIONS IN THE ELECTRIC POWER INDUSTRY   1559 

to authorized market agents); (2) integrity to ensure that any unauthorized modifications to data and information are detected (e.g., an adversary should not be able to modify sensor data without detection); (3) availability to ensure that critical systems and information must be available when needed (e.g., communication networks supporting WAMSs must be available to deliver synchrophasor measurements even in the presence of malicious activity such as a DOS attack). For an infrastructure such as the smart grid, availability and integrity are considered to be more important than confidentiality. Other security properties include nonrepudiation and privacy [194]: nonrepudiation ensures that a particular message was actually sent as the receiving entity claims, while privacy refers to adequate protection of personally identifiable information accessible only to authorized entities (e.g., consumer energy consumption data need to be kept private). A common approach to achieving these properties is to design, develop, and deploy technologies for protection, detection, and response. Protection systems devise security components such as key management, authentication and authorization, and perimeter defense that help ensure the above goals against a range of attacks (e.g., encryption tools help provide confidentiality, cryptographic message authentication tools help provide integrity, and redundancy helps provide availability). Detection tools observe network and system behavior to identify malicious activities and attacks (e.g., intrusion-detection systems may look for malware signatures on the network). Response tools enable administrators to deal with detected attacks (e.g., they may allow dynamic changes in firewall policies in order to limit information flow to and from adversaries to contain an attack). There are regulatory mandates (e.g., NERC CIP 002-009 [207]), as well as business reasons for establishing a cybersecurity program, which should be correlated with a program for ensuring the physical security of the utility assets. The main components of a cybersecurity strategy can be classified into four types of actions: prevention, detection, response, and recovery [208]. The following paragraphs summarize the actions that may be considered for each activity. Preventing Cyber Intrusion.  The power system operations environment is very different from the Internet environment and poses many security challenges that are different from most other industries. Security services and technologies developed primarily for industries do not have many of the requirements that are needed by power system operations. For instance, many communication channels used in the power industry are narrowband, thus not permitting some of the overhead needed for certain security measures, such as encryption and key exchanges. However, IEC 61850 is designed to operate efficiently over 10 Mbps switched, 100 Mbps shared, or switched Ethernet, so a prerequisite for shifting IEC 61850 is the installation of high-speed communications. The impact of implementing cybersecurity requirements related to the use of IEC 61850 was analyzed by a CIGRE working group and presented in [209]. Potential barriers to the success of any electronic attack may be based on making difficult: (1) the access to the communications channel (i.e., the attacker must be in a position to read data from the communications channel and/or write data to the communications channel); (2) bypassing linksecurity mechanisms (i.e., the attacker must defeat any defensive technologies protecting access to the communications channel), or (3) bypassing electronic access-control mechanisms (i.e., the attacker must defeat any electronic access-control mechanisms on the target device itself) [205]. Cybersecurity measures can consider electronic access control and link security. The distinction between these two terms lies in the fact that many potential target devices in the electric power infrastructure do not have integrated electronic access-control mechanisms. SCADA connections are automated data retrieval links that do not contain security provisions such as requirements for username and password entry; to secure such connections, security devices, like cryptographic modules, can be implemented. In contrast, engineering access connections are often protected by electronic access-control mechanisms, such as password requirements. The list of electronic access control alternatives that can be considered include strong password, multilevel password, or time-outs and channel disconnects [205]. Link-security technologies provide a very effective means of limiting access to the communications media itself and protecting the contents of the data that travels over the media. Many devices provide strong cryptographic security in the form of encryption, which ensures that data cannot be read by unauthorized individuals, and authentication, which ensures that data is sent by an authorized individual.

24_Santoso_Sec24_p1503-1574.indd 1559

23/11/17 1:53 PM

1560  SECTION TWENTY-FOUR

Encryption modifies a file or message so it cannot be read without reversing the modifications using another piece of information called an encryption key. The key provides data needed for controlling modifications, which are performed according to an encryption algorithm. Encrypting all data transmitted on a communications link protects sensitive data like passwords, device settings, and system status information from being intercepted and read by unauthorized individuals. A strong password is extremely hard to guess with automated attack tools, but even the strongest password will fail if an attacker can intercept it and read it directly from the communications channel. Strong link encryption prevents password interception by scrambling the data prior to transmission. The scrambling function can only be reversed by an authorized individual with knowledge of the secret encryption key. Authentication is the process of determining that the user is authentic. This is done by receiving information about the user and comparing the received information to a stored version of the information for the authentic user; for instance, something the user knows, such as a password. There are numerous ways in which an authentication system can be attacked and compromised; for instance, capturing a password as it moves in the system. There are also ways in which an authentication system can be bypassed, essentially involving attacks on the security of the overall system. Linkauthentication mechanisms are independent of any electronic access controls (e.g., passwords) in the protected devices themselves. Because of this, they provide a means of locking out unauthorized access to otherwise unprotected communications access points such as SCADA protocol ports. Detecting Cyber Intrusion.  Although measures to prevent intrusion can make difficult a successful attack, they do not make it impossible. It is extremely important to prevent intrusions, but it is also essential that intrusions be detected if they do occur. It can be very difficult to detect software modifications when the intrusion does not produce any damage. But even when the intrusion causes damage, it cannot be always said that the damage was caused due to an intrusion rather than some other failure (e.g., a software bug). For these reasons, it is important to detect intrusions when they occur [191]. Time is an important concern. If attackers are given unlimited time to check system vulnerabilities, they may then eventually succeed. A way to combat this is to install technologies that allow the utility to monitor electronic connections for suspicious activity and receive timely notification of a possible attack. Measures to be taken to quickly detect and react to electronic attacks include decreasing alarm response time, securing status visibility, or consolidating and monitoring electronic access. Some manufacturers have developed intrusion detection systems (IDSs), which are designed to recognize intrusions when communications are attempted from unauthorized/unusual addresses and when there is an unusual pattern of activity. They generate logs of suspicious events, which must be inspected to distinguish between a true intrusion and a false alarm. However, unusual activities cannot be easily defined, and more research is necessary to investigate what would constitute unusual activity in a computer-based environment [191]. With the implementation of IDSs, operators have the ability to use firewalls to prevent the attack from spreading, thus mitigating the overall damage the cyber threat could cause. To secure SCADA systems from cyber threats, utilities can integrate software management and documentation systems into SCADA to assist operators with an application restoration following a catastrophic event, and to develop security solutions to prevent unwanted access to a network. Through the use of a virtual private network (VPN) utilities can ensure the proper authentication and authorization of data transactions between different networks: VPN gives a private use of a public network through the development of an encrypted tunnel between the server and client. To fully secure the VPN from unauthorized access, a high level of authentication must be implemented in all networked devices. Securing systems will also require an increased emphasis on behavioral analysis, background investigations, psychological profiling, and analysis of individual motives; all these factors are key tools for detecting potential threats and revealing how potential adversaries may seek to target individuals who can provide access to vital networks. Responding and Recovering from Cyber Intrusion.  Even if an intrusion is neither detected nor recorded when it occurs, it is essential to develop a procedure for the restoration of service after a

24_Santoso_Sec24_p1503-1574.indd 1560

23/11/17 1:53 PM

COMPUTER APPLICATIONS IN THE ELECTRIC POWER INDUSTRY   1561 

cyber attack. After discovering a cyber attack, it is critical to make a full assessment of the situation as quickly as possible since it might not be an isolated incident and more attacks might occur if left unmitigated. Reference [204] recommends that the recovery and remediation procedure determines five things regarding the attack: who, what, where, when, and why. Depending on the security features of the device and administrative procedures, it may not be possible to determine all of these parameters; in such case, consideration should be given to upgrading technology and installation/ maintenance procedures to provide a better analysis of the attack. The utility has to maintain backups of the software of all programmable substation units and documentation regarding the standard parameters and settings of all IEDs. When a programmable device has been compromised, the secure backup software should be reloaded, and if the settings have been changed, the original settings must be restored. However, unless the nature of the security breach is known and can be repaired, the utility must consider taking the device offline or making it inaccessible to prevent a future attack [191]. Theoretically, it is desirable to record all data communications into and out of all IEDs. After a successful attack, the recordings can be used to determine what intrusion technique was used, in order to modify the system and close that particular vulnerability, and also to identify the intruder. However, it may be impractical to record all communications. So this option will be deferred until fast, voluminous, and inexpensive storage media are developed or IDSs with capabilities to filter out the nonsuspicious usual traffic and record only the deviant patterns are available [191]. 24.7.4  Cybersecurity Standards Standardization is a crucial aspect for the development of a secure smart grid. All institutions involved in the development of standards for the smart grid are also concerned with cybersecurity standards. IEEE has developed several standards that affect smart grid and substation cybersecurity, see [210–212]. The IEC TC57 is responsible for developing international standards for power system information exchanges (e.g., CIM standards). In 1999 the TC57 WG15 was formed to undertake the development of standards for security of the communication protocols, standards and technical reports on end-to-end security issues. The result is the IEC 62351 series, some of which are still under development [213]. Of special importance are NERC Critical Infrastructure Protection (CIP) standards [207], which require compliance by North American entities such as generator owners, generator operators, transmission owners, transmission operators, or regional reliability organizations. The purpose of CIP standards is to ensure that the bulk electric system in North America is reliable, adequate, and secure, so each interconnected entity should maintain an independent level of security, as well as manage the self-certification and compliance of partners with whom the utility interconnects. The suite of standards documents the requirements to demonstrate due diligence in creating and executing a cybersecurity plan. The three-volume NIST report, NISTIR 7628, Guidelines for Smart Grid Cybersecurity, presents an analytical framework for effective cybersecurity strategies tailored to the particular combinations of smart grid-related characteristics, risks, and vulnerabilities [206]. The report recognizes that the electric grid is changing from a relatively closed system to a complex, highly interconnected environment, so cybersecurity requirements of each organization should evolve as technology advances and threats to grid security multiply and diversify. The Guidelines report is a companion document to the NIST Framework and Roadmap for Smart Grid Interoperability Standards, Release 3.0 [1]; it describes a high-level conceptual reference model for the smart grid, identifies standards that are applicable (or likely to be applicable) to the ongoing development of an interoperable smart grid, and specifies a set of high-priority standards-related gaps and issues. Cybersecurity is recognized as a critical, cross-cutting issue that must be addressed in all standards developed for smart grid applications. The Framework document is the first instalment in an ongoing standards and harmonization process. Ultimately, this process will deliver the hundreds of communication protocols, standard interfaces, and other technical specifications necessary to build an advanced, secure electric power grid with two-way communication and control capabilities.

24_Santoso_Sec24_p1503-1574.indd 1561

23/11/17 1:53 PM

1562  SECTION TWENTY-FOUR

Reference [214] presents a tutorial on how to deploy IEDs and communications and security technology to satisfy the NERC CIP and reduce the chances of electronic intrusion.

24.7.5  Ongoing Efforts Technologies are not yet mature for ensuring the cybersecurity of the future smart grid. Utilities must evaluate what assets have the highest value and deserve the greatest effort at protecting. Some of the ongoing efforts and activities aimed at achieving a better security are summarized below. New Tools.  Simulation can be a powerful tool to test and design cybersecurity measures. Software manufacturers have begun to develop big data analytics; their application as well as that of grid monitoring software can be useful to manage risks, increase efficiency and reliability. The patterns of grid usage and data access can provide a better foundation for detecting malicious activity: a rapid identification of grid behavior can allow grid operators to quickly isolate affected systems, the ideal system would respond with an instantaneous and automated isolation of an affected system and would subsequently reroute electric power to minimize disruption. Physical hardware under development allow for automatic adjustment of grid voltage and load; technologies that have been developed to automatically balance the input of solar and wind generation can also work in case of a cyberattack to balance electric power loads: these systems can be designed to work without computerized input, so that in the event of a cyberattack, there could still be an automated, hardware-based response. Development of Test Beds.  A cybersecurity test bed is a model that captures the relevant complexity of a test system from a perspective of cybersecurity concerns and can be used to determine the vulnerabilities of the system by taking into account hardware and software interactions between system components: cybersecurity test beds are a powerful mean for studying grid vulnerabilities and identifying security enhancements. Several efforts have been made to develop test beds for cybersecurity assessment [215]. A test bed was also presented in the Special Issue on Cybersecurity [194]: it is based on the IEEE 39-bus system and can be used to analyze intrusions originated from remote access connections to a substation communication network; IEC 61850-based communication is used between IEDs and the user interface, which is able to acquire monitored data generated by power system simulation tools; there are remote access points using dial-up, VPN, or wireless technology, which can serve as intrusion paths; a dispatcher training simulator is used for training of operators and simulation of system operation, control, and restoration scenarios. Development of Maturity Models.  A maturity model is a management tool that provides a common language and framework for defining key elements of smart grid transformation and helping utilities develop a programmatic approach and track their progress. Two examples of maturity models are the Smart Grid Maturity Model (SGMM), an initiative of the Global Intelligent Utility Coalition currently administrated by the DOE [216, 217], and the Electricity Subsector Cybersecurity Capability Maturity Model (ES-C2M2), an initiative of the DoE in partnership with the U.S. Department of Homeland Security (DHS) and in collaboration with industry, private-sector, and public-sector experts [218]. In January 2015, the DoE released the Cybersecurity Framework Implementation Guidance [219]; ES-C2M2 is the recommended implementation tool to help organizations evaluate, prioritize, and improve cybersecurity capabilities. The C2M2 model does not measure cybersecurity performance; rather it should be used to assess the maturity of a cybersecurity program. Grid Security Exercises.  The NERC conducts biennial grid security and emergency response exercises. The third one (GridEx III) was organized in November 2015 and provided an opportunity for participants to respond to simulated cyber and physical attacks affecting the reliable operation of the grid [220]. The exercise was aimed at practicing response and recovery, improving communication, and identifying the learned lessons. Results can be used to propose recommendations that can enhance grid security and reliability (e.g., coordinated response and communication; reporting mechanisms; active participation of personnel; introduction of new exercise tools).

24_Santoso_Sec24_p1503-1574.indd 1562

23/11/17 1:53 PM

COMPUTER APPLICATIONS IN THE ELECTRIC POWER INDUSTRY   1563 

24.8 ACKNOWLEDGMENT This section covers many topics. For some of them only a short tutorial introduction is provided. This means that for some topics the material presented here mostly comes from review or state-ofthe-art publications. The author wants to thank all those who produced such publications, which have been extremely useful for writing this section.

24.9 REFERENCES   1. National Institute of Standards and Technology, “NIST Framework and Roadmap for Smart Grid Interoperability Standards,” NIST Special Publication 1108r3, Release 3.0, September 2014.   2. CEN-CENELEC-ETSI Smart Grid Coordination Group, “Smart Grid Reference Architecture,” November 2012.   3. IEC SMB Smart Grid Strategic Group (SG3), “IEC Smart Grid Standardization Roadmap,” edition 1.0, June 2010.   4. CEN-CENELEC-ETSI Smart Grid Coordination Group, “SGCG/M490/G-Smart Grid Set of Standards,” Version 3.1, October 2014.   5. F. Elkarmi and N. Abu Shikhah, Power System Planning Technologies and Applications. Concepts, Solutions and Management, IGI Global, 2012.   6. H. Lee Willis, Power Distribution Planning Reference Book, 2nd ed., Marcel Dekker,New York, NY, USA, 2004.   7. H. Lee Willis, Spatial Electric Load Forecasting, Marcel Dekker, New York, NY, USA, 1996.   8. S. A. Soliman and A. M. Al-Kandari, Electrical Load Forecasting: Modeling and Model Construction, Butterworth-Heinemann, Elsevier, Burlington, MA, USA, 2010.   9. EPRI, “Scoping Study for Identifying the Need for New Tools for the Planning of Transmission and Distribution Systems: Converting the Legacy Infrastructure into an Intelligent Grid,” Report 1015285, 2007.   10. W. Li, Probabilistic Transmission System Planning, John Wiley, Hoboken, NJ, USA, 2011.   11. H. Seifi and M.S. Sepasian, Electric Power System Planning. Issues, Algorithms and Solutions, Springer, Berlin, Germany, 2011.   12. G. Kusic, Computer-Aided Power Systems Analysis, 2nd ed., CRC Press, Boca Raton, FL, USA, 2009.   13. A. Gómez-Expósito, A. Conejo, and C. Cañizares (eds.), Electric Energy Systems: Analysis and Operation, CRC Press, Boca Raton, FL, USA, 2009.   14. J. C. Das, Power System Analysis, 2nd ed., CRC Press, Boca Raton, FL, USA, 2012.   15. J. A. Momoh, Electric Power System Applications of Optimization, 2nd ed., CRC Press, Boca Raton, FL, USA, 2009.   16. P. Kundur, Power System Stability and Control, McGraw-Hill, New York, NY, USA, 1994.   17. P. M. Anderson and A. A. Fouad, Power System Control and Stability, John Wiley—IEEE Press, Piscataway, NJ, USA, 2002.   18. C. W. Taylor, Power System Voltage Stability, McGraw-Hill, New York, NY, USA, 1994.   19. V. Ajjarapu, Computational Techniques for Voltage Stability Assessment and Control, Springer, New York, NY, USA, 2006.   20. P. M. Anderson, Analysis of Faulted Power Systems, John Wiley—IEEE Press, New York, NY, USA, 1995.   21. P. M. Anderson, Power System Protection, McGraw-Hill—IEEE Press, Piscataway, NJ, USA, 1999.   22. J. Gers and T. Holmes, Protection of Electricity Distribution Networks, 3rd ed., IET, Power and Energy Series 63, Stevenage, UK, 2011.   23. N. Watson and J. Arrillaga, Power System Electromagnetic Transients Simulation, IET, Power and Energy Series 39, Stevenage, UK, 2003.   24. J. A. Martinez-Velasco (ed.), Transient Analysis of Power Systems. Solution Techniques, Tools and Applications, John Wiley—IEEE Press, Chichester, UK, 2015.

24_Santoso_Sec24_p1503-1574.indd 1563

23/11/17 1:53 PM

1564  SECTION TWENTY-FOUR

  25. IEEE TF on Understanding, Prediction, Mitigation and Restoration of Cascading Failures, “Survey of Tools for Risk Assessment of Cascading Outages,” IEEE PES General Meeting, Detroit, MI, July 2011.   26. W. H. Kersting and R. C. Dugan, “Recommended Practices for Distribution System Analysis,” IEEE PES Power Systems Conference and Exposition, Atlanta, November 2006.   27. R. C. Dugan, R. F. Arritt, T. E. McDermott, S. M. Brahma, and K. Schneider, “Distribution System Analysis to Support the Smart Grid,” IEEE PES General Meeting, Minneapolis, MN, July 2010.   28. J. A. Martinez, F. de León, and V. Dinavahi, “Tools for Analysis of Distribution Systems with Distributed Resources: Present and future trends,” IEEE PES General Meeting, Minneapolis, MN, July 2010.   29. W. H. Kersting, Distribution System Modeling and Analysis, CRC Press, 3rd ed., 2012.   30. R. E. Brown, Electric Power Reliability, CRC Press, 2nd ed., Boca Raton, FL, USA, 2009.   31. A. Chowdhury and D. Koval, Power Distribution System Reliability: Practical Methods and Applications, John Wiley, Hoboken, NJ, USA, 2009.   32. IEEE Std. 1366-2003, “IEEE Trial Use Guide for Electric Power Distribution Reliability Indices,” 2003.   33. R. C. Dugan, M. F. McGranaghan, S. Santoso, and H. Wayne Beaty, Electrical Power Systems Quality, 3rd ed., McGraw-Hill, New York, NY, USA, 2012.   34. M. H. Bollen, Understanding Power Quality Problems: Voltage Sags and Interruptions, John Wiley—IEEE Press, Piscataway, NJ, USA, 1999.   35. J. Mahseredjian, V. Dinavahi, and J. A. Martinez, “Simulation Tools for Electromagnetic Transients in Power Systems: Overview and Challenges,” IEEE Trans. on Power Delivery, vol. 24, no. 3, pp. 1657–1669, July 2009.  36. T. Lambert, P. Gilman, and P. Lilienthal, “Micropower System Modeling with HOMER,” Chap. 15 of Integration of Alternative Sources of Energy, by F. A. Farret and M. Godoy Simões, John Wiley, Hoboken, NJ, USA, 2006.  37. I. J. Ramirez-Rosado, L.A. Fernandez-Jimenez, C. Monteiro, V. Miranda, E. Garcia-Garrido, and P. J. Zorzano-Santamaria, “Powerful planning tools,” IEEE Power & Energy Magazine, vol. 3, no. 2, pp. 56–63, March/April 2005.   38. EPRI, “Asset Management Toolkit Modules: An Approach for Risk-Informed, Performance-Focused Asset Management in the Power Delivery Industry,” Report 1011365, 2005.   39. S. E. Widergren, J. M. Roop, R. T. Guttromson, and Z. Huang, “Simulating the Dynamic Coupling of Market and Physical System Operations,” IEEE PES General Meeting, Denver, CO, June 2004.   40. EPRI and New York ISO, “Survey of Electricity Market Simulation,” Report 1010703, Palo Alto, CA, 2005.   41. H. Singh (ed.), “Game Theory Applications in Electricity Power Markets,” IEEE Special Publication, TP-136-0, 1999.  42. F. Sensuß, M. Genoese, M. Ragwitz, and D. Möst, “Agent-Based Simulation of Electricity Markets: A Literature Review,” Energy Studies Review, vol. 15, no. 2, Article 2, 2007.   43. Z. Zhou, W. K. Chan, and J. H. Chow, “Agent-Based Simulation of Electricity Markets: A Survey of Tools,” Artificial Intelligence Review, vol. 28, pp. 305–342, 2007.   44. M. S. Thomas and J. D. McDonald, Power System SCADA and Smart Grids, CRC Press, Boca Raton, FL, USA, 2015.   45. C. Monteiro, R. Bessa, V. Miranda, A. Botterud, J. Wang, and G. Conzelmann, “Wind Power Forecasting: State-of-the-Art 2009,” Report ANL/DIS-10-1, Argonne National Laboratory, Argonne, Illinois, November 6, 2009.   46. W. Glassley, J. Kleissl, C. P. van Dam, H. Shiu, J. Huang, G. Braun, and R. Holland, “California Renewable Energy Forecasting, Resource Data and Mapping,” California Institute for Energy and Environment, 2010.   47. G. N. Sorebo and M. C. Echols, Smart Grid Security. An End-to-End View of Security in the New Electrical Grid, CRC Press, Boca Raton, FL, USA, 2012.   48. P. Venkatesh, B. V. Manikandan, S. Charles Raja, and A. Srinivasan, Electrical Power Systems: Analysis, Security and Deregulation, PHI Learning, New Delhi, India, 2010.   49. A. Abur and A. Gómez Expósito, Power System State Estimation. Theory and Implementation, Marcel Dekker, New York, NY, USA, 2004.  50. EPRI, “Scoping Study for Identifying the Need for New Tools for the Planning of Transmission and Distribution Systems: Converting the Legacy Infrastructure into an Intelligent Grid,” Report 1015285, 2007.

24_Santoso_Sec24_p1503-1574.indd 1564

23/11/17 1:53 PM

COMPUTER APPLICATIONS IN THE ELECTRIC POWER INDUSTRY   1565 

  51. A. Monti, C. Muscas, and F. Ponci, Phasor Measurement Units and Wide Area Monitoring Systems, Elsevier, London, UK, 2016.  52. A. Román Mesina, “Wide Area Monitoring of Interconnected Power Systems,” IET, Power and Energy Systems 77, 2015.   53. Y. Li, D. Yang, F. Liu, Y. Cao, and C. Rehtanz, Interconnected Power Systems. Wide-Area Dynamic Monitoring and Control Applications, Springer, Berlin, Germany, 2016.   54. J. W. Evans, “Interface between Automation and the Substation,” Section 6 of Electric Power Substations Engineering (J. D. McDonald, Ed.), 2nd ed., CRC Press, Boca Raton, FL, 2007.   55. J. D. McDonald, “Substation Integration and Automation,” Sec. 7 of Electric Power Substations Engineering (J. D. McDonald, ed.), 2nd ed., CRC Press, Boca Raton, FL, 2007.   56. E. Padilla, Substation Automation Systems: Design and Implementation, John Wiley, Chichester, UK, 2015.   57. K. P. Brand, Ch. Brunner, and I. De Mesmaeker, “How to Use IEC 61850 in Protection and Automation,” Electra, Issue 222, pp. 11–21, October 2005.   58. K. P. Brand, Ch. Brunner, and I. De Mesmaeker, “How to Complete a Substation Automation System with an IEC 61850 Process Bus,” Electra, Issue 255, pp. 12–24, April 2011.  59. IEC TR 61850-1, “Communication Networks and Systems in Substations. Part 1: Introduction and Overview,” 2003.   60. IEC 61850-5, “Communication Networks and Systems in Substations—Part 5: Communication Requirements for Functions and Device Models,” 2003.  61. CIGRE Working Group B5.11, “The Introduction of IEC 61850 and Its Impact on Protection and Automation within Substations,” CIGRE Brochure 326, August 2007.   62. J. Northcote-Green and R. Wilson, Control and Automation of Electrical Power Distribution Systems, CRC Press, Boca Raton, FL, USA, 2007.   63. EPRI, “Technical and System Requirements for Advanced Distribution Automation,” Report 1010915, Palo Alto, CA, June 2004.  64. N. Higgins, V. Vyatkin, N. K. C. Nair, and K. Schwarz, “Distributed Power System Automation with IEC 61850, IEC 61499, and Intelligent Control,” IEEE Trans. on Systems, Man, and Cybernetics-Part C: Applications and Reviews, vol. 41, no. 1, pp. 81–92, January 2011.   65. K. Mets, J. A. Ojea, and C. Develder, “Combining Power and Communication Network Simulation for CostEffective Smart Grid Analysis,” IEEE Communications Surveys & Tutorials, vol. 16, no. 3, pp. 1771–1796, Third Quarter 2014.   66. R. Podmore and M. R. Robinson, “The Role of Simulators for Smart Grid Development,” IEEE Trans. on Smart Grid, vol. 1, no. 2, pp. 205–212, September 2010.  67. “National Power Grid Simulation Capability: Needs and Issues,” National Power Grid Simulator Workshop, U.S. Dept. of Homeland Security, Science and Technology Directorate, Argonne, Illinois, December 2008.   68. R. Idema, D. J. P. Lahaye, C. Vuik, and L. van der Sluis, “Scalable Newton-Krylov Solver for Very Large Power Flow Problems,” IEEE Trans. on Power Systems, vol. 27, no. 1, pp. 390–396, February 2012.   69. R. Idema, G. Papaefthymiou, D. Lahaye, C. Vuik, and L. van der Sluis, “Towards Faster Solution of Large Power Flow Problems,” IEEE Trans. on Power Systems, vol. 28, no. 4, pp. 4918–4925, November 2013.   70. M. O. Faruque, V. Dinavahi, M. Steurer, A. Monti, K. Strunz, J. A. Martinez, G. W. Chang, J. Jatskevich, R. Iravani, and A. Davoudi, “Interfacing Issues in Multi-Domain Simulation Tools,” IEEE Trans. on Power Delivery, vol. 27, no. 1, pp. 439–448, January 2012.   71. S. Filizadeh, M. Heidari, A. Mehrizi-Sani, J. Jatskevich, and J. A. Martinez, “Techniques for Interfacing Electromagnetic Transient Simulation Programs with General Mathematical Tools,” IEEE Trans. on Power Delivery, vol. 23, no. 4, pp. 2610–2622, October 2008.   72. B. Asghari, V. Dinavahi, M. Rioual, J. A. Martinez, and R. Iravani, “Interfacing Techniques for Electromagnetic Field and Circuit Simulation Programs,” IEEE Trans. on Power Delivery, vol. 24, no. 2, pp. 939–950, April 2009.  73. V. Jalili-Marandi, V. Dinavahi, K. Strunz, J. A. Martinez, and A. Ramirez, “Interfacing Techniques for Transient Stability and Electromagnetic Transient Programs,” IEEE Trans. on Power Delivery, vol. 24, no. 4, pp. 2385–2395, October 2009.

24_Santoso_Sec24_p1503-1574.indd 1565

23/11/17 1:53 PM

1566  SECTION TWENTY-FOUR

  74. W. Ren, M. Sloderbeck, M. Steurer, V. Dinavahi, T. Noda, S. Filizadeh, A. R. Chevrefils, et al., “Interfacing Issues in Real-Time Digital Simulators,” IEEE Trans. on Power Delivery, vol. 26, no. 2, pp. 1221–1230, April 2011.   75. X. Wang, P. Zhang, Z. Wang, V. Dinavahi, G. Chang, J. A. Martinez, A. Davoudi, A. Mehrizi-Sani, and S. Abhyankar, “Interfacing Issues in Multiagent Simulation for Smart Grid Applications,” IEEE Trans. on Power Delivery, vol. 28, no. 3, pp. 1918–1927, July 2013.   76. S. C. Mueller, H. Georg, J. J. Nutaro, E. Widl, Y. Deng, P. Palensky, M. Usman Awais, et al., “Interfacing Power System and ICT Simulators: Challenges, State-of-the-Art, and Case Studies,” to be published in IEEE Trans. on Smart Grid.  77. EPRI, “Development of Analytical and Computational Methods for the Strategic Power Infrastructure Defense (SPID) System: EPRI/DoD Complex Interactive Networks/Systems Initiative: Second Annual Report,” Report 1006089, 2001.   78. K. Hopkinson, X. Wang, R. Giovanini, J. Thorp, K. Birman, and D. Coury, “EPOCHS: A Platform for AgentBased Electric Power and Communication Simulation Built from Commercial Off-the-Shelf Components,” IEEE Trans. on Power Systems, vol. 21, pp. 548–558, May 2006.   79. K. Tomsovic, D. E. Bakken, V. Venkatasubramanian, and A. Bose, “Designing the Next Generation of RealTime Control, Communication, and Computations for Large Power Systems,” Proc. of IEEE, vol. 93, no. 5, pp. 965–979, May 2005.   80. J. Nutaro, P. T. Kuruganti, M. Shankar, L. Miller, and S. Mullen, “Integrated Modeling of the Electric Grid, Communications, and Control,” Int. Journal of Energy Sector Management, vol. 2, no. 3, pp. 420–438, 2008.  81. S. Ciraci, J. Daily, K. Agarwal, J. Fuller, L. Marinovici, and A. Fisher, “Synchronization Algorithms for Co-simulation of Power Grid and Communication Networks,” 22nd Int. Symp. on Modelling, Analysis & Simulation of Computer and Telecommunication Systems, Paris, September 2014.   82. T. Godfrey, S. Mullen, R. C. Dugan, C. Rodine, D. W. Griffith, and N. Golmie, “Modeling Smart Grid Applications with Co-simulation,” 1st IEEE Int. Conf. on Smart Grid Communications (SmartGridComm), Gaithersburg, MD, October 2010.   83. H. Lin, S. Sambamoorthy, S. Shukla, J. Thorp, and L. Mili, “Power System and Communication Network Co-simulation for Smart Grid Applications,” IEEE PES Innovative Smart Grid Technologies (ISGT), Anaheim, CA, January 2011.  84. M. Lévesque, D. Qian Xu, M. Maier, and G. Joós, “Communications and Power Distribution Network Co-simulation for Multidisciplinary Smart Grid Experimentations,” 45th Annual Simulation Symposium, Orlando, FL, March 2012.  85. H. Lin, S. S. Veda, S. S. Shukla, L. Mili, and J. Thorp, “GECO: Global Event-Driven Co-simulation Framework for Interconnected Power System and Communication Network,” IEEE Trans. on Smart Grid, vol. 3, no. 3, pp. 1444–1456, September 2012.   86. S. C. Muller, H. Georg, C. Rehtanz, and C. Wietfeld, “Hybrid Simulation of Power Systems and ICT for RealTime Applications,” 3rd IEEE PES Innovative Smart Grid Technologies Europe (ISGT Europe), Berlin, October 2012.   87. R. Majumder, G. Bag, G. Velotto, and A. Marinopoulos, “Closed Loop Simulation of Communication and Power Network in a Zone Based System,” Electric Power Systems Research, vol. 95, pp. 247–256, 2013.   88. S. Ciraci, J. Daily, J. Fuller, A. Fisher, L. Marinovici, and K. Agarwal, “FNCS: A Framework for Power System and Communication Networks Co-simulation,” Symp. on Theory of Modeling & Simulation, San Diego, CA, April 2014.   89. E. Moradi-Pari, N. Nasiriani, Y. P. Fallah, P. Famouri, S. Bossart, and K. Dodrill, “Design, Modeling, and Simulation of On-Demand Communication Mechanisms for Cyber-Physical Energy Systems,” IEEE Trans. on Industrial Informatics, vol. 10, no. 4, pp. 2330–2339, November 2014.   90. W. Li, M. Ferdowsi, M. Stevic, A. Monti, and F. Ponci, “Cosimulation for Smart Grid Communications,” IEEE Trans. on Industrial Informatics, vol. 10, no. 4, pp. 2374–2384, November 2014.  91. M. Collette, B. Corey, and J. Johnson, “High Performance Tools and Technologies,” Report UCRLTR-209289, Lawrence Livermore National Laboratory, U.S. Department of Energy, 2004.  92. R. C. Green II, L. Wang, and M. Alam, “High Performance Computing for Electric Power Systems: Applications and Trends,” IEEE PES General Meeting, Detroit, CO, July 2011, 2007.   93. S. Kumar Khaitan and A. Gupta (eds.), High Performance Computing in Power and Energy Systems, Springer, Berlin, Germany, 2013.

24_Santoso_Sec24_p1503-1574.indd 1566

23/11/17 1:53 PM

COMPUTER APPLICATIONS IN THE ELECTRIC POWER INDUSTRY   1567 

  94. L. Zhang, A. Hoyt, and B. Calson, “A Review of High Performance Technical Computing in Midwest ISO,” IEEE PES General Meeting, Minneapolis, MN, July 2010.   95. M. Irving, G. Taylor, and P. Hobson, “Plug in to Grid Computing,” IEEE Power and Energy Magazine, vol. 2, no. 2, pp. 40–44, March 2004.   96. D. J. Tylavsky, A. Bose, F. Alvarado, R. Betancourt, K. Clements, G. T. Heydt, G. Huang, et al., “Parallel Processing in Power Systems Computation,” IEEE Trans. on Power Systems, vol. 7, no. 2, pp. 629–638, May 1992.  97. D. M. Falcao, “High Performance Computing in Power System Applications,” in Vector and Parallel Processing—VECPAR’96, Volume 1215 of the series Lecture Notes in Computer Science, J. M. L. M. Palma and J. Dongarra (eds.), Springer, Heidelberg, Germany, 1997.   98. C. Dufour, V. Jalili-Marandi, J. Bélanger, and L. Snider, “Power System Simulation Algorithms for Parallel Computer Architectures,” IEEE PES General Meeting, San Diego, CA, July 2012.   99. K. Asanovíc, R. Bodik, B. Catanzaro, J. Gebis, P. Husbands, K. Keutzer, D. Patterson, W. Plishker, J. Shalf, S. Williams, and K. Yelick, “The Landscape of Parallel Computing Research: A View from Berkeley,” Technical Report No. UCB/EECS-2006-183, December 18, 2006. 100. K. Asanovic, R. Bodik, J. Demmel, T. Keaveny, K. Keutzer, J. Kubiatowicz, N. Morgan, et al., “A View of the Parallel Computing Landscape,” Communications of the ACM, vol. 52, no. 10, pp. 56–67, October 2009. 101. K. H. Hoffmann and A. Meyer (eds.), Parallel Algorithms and Cluster Computing. Implementations, Algorithms and Applications, Springer, Berlin, Germany, 2006. 102. R. Trobec, M. Vajtersic, and P. Zinterhof (eds.), Parallel Computing: Numerics, Applications, and Trends, Springer, London, UK, 2009. 103. J. A. Martinez, V. Dinavahi, M. H. Nehrir, and X. Guillaud, “Tools for Analysis and Design of Distributed Resources. Part IV: Future Trends,” IEEE Trans. on Power Delivery, vol. 26, no. 2, pp. 1663–1670, July 2011. 104. C. Dufour, T. Ould Bachir, L.-A., Grégoire, and J. Bélanger, “Real-Time Simulation of Power Electronic Systems and Devices,” Chap. 15 of Dynamics and Control of Switched Electronic Systems: Advanced Perspectives for Modeling, Simulation and Control of Power Converters, F. Vasca and L. Iannelli (eds.), Springer Series on Advances in Industrial Control, Springer, London, UK, 2012. 105. K. Popovici and P. J. Mosterman (eds.), Real-Time Simulation Technologies: Principles, Methodologies, and Applications, CRC Press, Boca Raton, FL, USA, 2013. 106. C. Dufour and J. Bélanger, “Real-Time Simulation Technologies in Engineering,” Chap. 4 of Transient Analysis of Power Systems: Solution Techniques, Tools and Applications, J. A. Martinez-Velasco (ed.), John Wiley—IEEE Press, Chichester, UK, 2015. 107. M. O. Faruque, T. Strasser, G. Lauss, V. Jalili-Marandi, P. Forsyth, C. Dufour, V. Dinavahi, et al., “RealTime Simulation Technologies for Power Systems Design, Testing, and Analysis,” IEEE Power and Energy Technology Systems Journal, vol. 2, no. 2, pp. 63–73, June 2015. 108. P. G. McLaren, R. Kuffel, R. Wierckx, J. Giesbrecht, and L. Arendt, “A Real Time Digital Simulator for Testing Relays,” IEEE Trans. on Power Delivery, vol. 7, no. 1, pp. 207–213, January 1992. 109. G. G. Parma and V. Dinavahi, “Real-Time Digital Hardware Simulation of Power Electronics and Drives,” IEEE Trans. on Power Delivery, vol. 22, no. 2, pp. 1235–1246, April 2007. 110. X. Guillaud, M. O. Faruque, A. Teninge, A. Hasan Hariri, L. Vanfretti, M. Paolone, V. Dinavahi, et al., “Applications of Real-Time Simulation Technologies in Power and Energy Systems,” IEEE Power and Energy Technology Systems Journal, vol. 2, no. 3, pp. 103–115, September 2015. 111. L.-F. Pak, M. O. Faruque, X. Nie, and V. Dinavahi, “A Versatile Cluster-Based Real-Time Digital Simulator for Power Engineering Research,” IEEE Trans. on Power Systems, vol. 21, no. 2, pp. 455–465, May 2006. 112. Y. Chen and V. Dinavahi, “FPGA-Based Real-Time EMTP,” IEEE Trans. on Power Delivery, vol. 24, no. 2, pp. 892–902, April 2009. 113. C. Dufour, J. Mahseredjian, and J. Bélanger, “A Combined State-Space Nodal Method for the Simulation of Power System Transients,” IEEE Trans. on Power Delivery, vol. 26, no. 2, pp. 928–935, April 2011. 114. H. W. Dommel, Electromagnetic Transients Program Reference Manual (EMTP Theory Book), Bonneville Power Administration, Portland, OR, August 1986. 115. G. F. Lauss, M. O. Faruque, K. Schoder, C. Dufour, A. Viehweider, and J. Langston, “Characteristics and Design of Power Hardware-in-the-Loop Simulations for Electrical Power Systems,” IEEE Trans. on Industrial Electronics, vol. 63, no. 1, pp. 406–417, January 2016.

24_Santoso_Sec24_p1503-1574.indd 1567

23/11/17 1:53 PM

1568  SECTION TWENTY-FOUR

116. J. Bélanger, S. Abourida, and C. Dufour, “Real-Time Digital Simulation and Control Laboratory for Distributed Power Electronic Generation and Distribution,” Huntsville Simulation Conference, Huntsville, AL, USA, 2005. 117. J. Manyika, M. Chui, B. Brown, J. Bughin, R. Dobbs, C. Roxburgh, and A. Hung Byers, “Big Data: The Next Frontier for Innovation, Competition, and Productivity,” McKinsey Global Institute, May 2011. 118. C. L. Stimmel, Big Data Analytics Strategies for the Smart Grid, CRC Press, Boca Raton, FL, USA, 2014. 119. X. W. Chen and X. Lin, “Big Data Deep Learning: Challenges and Perspectives,” IEEE Access, vol. 2, pp. 514–525, 2014. 120. M. J. Zaki and W. Meira Jr., Data Mining and Analysis. Fundamental Concepts and Algorithms, Cambridge University Press, New York, 2014. 121. X. Wu, X. Zhu, G. Q. Wu, and W. Ding, “Data Mining with Big Data,” IEEE Trans. on Knowledge and Data Engineering, vol. 26, no. 1, pp. 97–107, January 2014. 122. P. Flach, Machine Learning: The Art and Science of Algorithms that Make Sense of Data, Cambridge University Press, Cambridge, UK, 2012. 123. M. Kezunovic, L. Xie, and S. Grijalva, “The Role of Big Data in Improving Power System Operation and Protection,” Symposium-Bulk Power System Dynamics and Control (IREP), Rethymnon, Greece, August 2013. 124. A. Ukil and R. Zivanovic, “Automated Analysis of Power Systems Disturbance Records: Smart Grid Big Data Perspective,” IEEE Innovative Smart Grid Technologies—Asia (ISGT ASIA), Kuala Lumpur, Malaysia, May 2014. 125. P. C. Chen, T. Dokic, and M. Kezunovic, “The Use of Big Data for Outage Management in Distribution Systems,” CIRED, Paper 0406, Rome, June 2014. 126. R. Meier, E. Cotilla-Sanchez, B. McCamish, D. Chiu, M. Histand, J. Landford, and R. B. Bass, “Power System Data Management and Analysis Using Synchrophasor Data,” IEEE Conf. on Technologies for Sustainability (SusTech), Portland, OR, July 2014. 127. N. Yu, S. Shah, R. Johnson, R. Sherick, M. Hong, and K. Loparo, “Big Data Analytics in Power Distribution Systems,” Innovative Smart Grid Technologies Conference (ISGT), Washington DC, February 2015. 128. G. C. Zweigle, “A Wide-Area, Wide-Spectrum Big Data System,” IEEE PES General Meeting, Denver, CO, July 2015. 129. M. Kezunovic, L. Xie, S. Grijalva, P. Chau, T. Dokic, Y. Gu, A. Anand, and S. T. Cheng, “Systematic Integration of Large Data Sets for Improved Decision-Making,” PSERC Publication 15-05, September 2015. 130. J. Deign and C. Márquez Salazar, “Data Management and Analytics for Utilities,” Smart Grid Update, 2013. 131. L. Xu, C. Jiang, J. Wang, J. Yuan, and Y. Ren, “Information Security in Big Data: Privacy and Data Mining,” IEEE Access, vol. 2, pp. 1149–1176, 2014. 132. Y. Sun, H. Song, A. J. Jara, and R. Bie, “Internet of Things and Big Data Analytics for Smart and Connected Communities,” IEEE Access, vol. 4, pp. 766–773, 2016. 133. P. Mell and T. Grance, “The NIST Definition of Cloud Computing,” NIST Special Publication 800-145, September 2011. 134. Q. Zhang, L. Cheng, and R. Boutaba, “Cloud Computing: State-of-the-Art and Research Challenges,” J. Internet Serv. Appl., vol. 1, pp. 7–18, 2010. 135. C. N. Höfer and G. Karagiannis, “Cloud Computing Services: Taxonomy and Comparison,” J. Internet Serv. Appl., vol. 2, pp. 81–94, 2011. 136. L. Qian, Z. Luo, Y. Du, and L. Guo, “Cloud Computing: An Overview,” in Cloud Computing, M. G. Jaatun, G. Zhao, and C. Rong (eds.), Springer, Berlin, Germany, 2009. 137. N. Antonopoulos and L. Gillam (eds.), Cloud Computing: Principles, Systems and Applications, Springer, London, UK, 2010. 138. R. Buyya, J. Broberg, and A. M. Goscinski (eds.), Cloud Computing: Principles and Paradigms, John Wiley, Hoboken, NJ, USA, 2010. 139. T. Erl, R. Puttini, and Z. Mahmood, Cloud Computing: Concepts, Technology & Architecture, Prentice Hall, 2014. 140. F. Ma, X. Luo, and E. Litvinov, “Cloud Computing for Power System Simulations at ISO New England— Experiences and Challenges,” to be published in IEEE Trans. on Smart Grids.

24_Santoso_Sec24_p1503-1574.indd 1568

23/11/17 1:53 PM

COMPUTER APPLICATIONS IN THE ELECTRIC POWER INDUSTRY   1569 

141. D. S. Markovic, D. Zivkovic, I. Branovic, R. Popovic, and D. Cvetkovic, “Smart Power Grid and Cloud Computing,” Renewable and Sustainable Energy Reviews, vol. 24, pp. 566–577, 2013. 142. C. Xu, F. Zhao, Z. Wang, X. Lin, S. He, and C. Shao, “Design of Cloud Computing Architecture for Power System Analysis,” IEEE Region 10 Conference (TENCON), Xian, China, October 2013. 143. Z. Liang and L. Xiuqing, “The Core of Constructing the Future Power Systems Computation Platform is Cloud Computing,” Int. Conf. on Mechatronic Science, Electric Engineering and Computer (MEC), Jilin, China, August 2011. 144. Q. Huang, M. Zhou, Y. Zhang, and Z. Wu, “Exploiting Cloud Computing for Power System Analysis,” Int. Conf. on Power System Technology (POWERCON), Hangzhou, China, October 2010. 145. S. Rusitschka, K. Eger, and C. Gerdes, “Smart Grid Data Cloud: A Model for Utilizing Cloud Computing in the Smart Grid Domain,” 1st IEEE Int. Conf. on Smart Grid Communications (SmartGridComm), Gaithersburg, MD, October 2010. 146. EPRI, “Common Information Model (CIM). CIM 10 Version,” Report 1001976, Palo Alto, CA, 2001. 147. M. Uslar, M. Specht, S. Rohjans, J. Trefke, and J. M. Vasquez González, The Common Information Model CIM, Springer, Berlin, Germany, 2012. 148. B. Wollenberg, J. Britton, E. Dobrowolski, R. Podmore, J. Resek, J. Scheidt, J. Russell, T. Saxton, and C. Ivanov, “A Brief History. The Common Information Model,” IEEE Energy & Power Magazine, vol. 14, no. 1, January/February 2016. 149. IEC 61970-301, “Energy Management System Application Program Interface (EMS-API)—Part 301: Common Information Model (CIM) base,” edition 5.0, 2013. 150. IEC 61970-501, “Energy Management System Application Program Interface (EMS-API)—Part 501: Common Information Model Resource Description Framework (CIM RDF) schema,” 2006. 151. IEC 61968-11, “Application Integration at Electric Utilities—System Interfaces for Distribution Management—Part 11: Common Information Model (CIM) Extensions for Distribution,” 2010. 152. IEC 61968-13, “Application Integration at Electric Utilities—System Interfaces for Distribution Management—Part 13: CIM RDF Model Exchange Format for Distribution,” 2008. 153. EPRI, “Reference Manual for Exchanging Standard Power System Dynamic Models: Based on the IEC 61970 Common Information Model (CIM),” Report 1020200, Palo Alto, CA, 2009. 154. IEC 62325-301, “Framework for Energy Market Communications—Part 301: Common Information Model (CIM) Extensions for Markets,” 2014. 155. IEC 62325-451-1, “Framework for Energy Market Communications—Part 451-1: Acknowledgement Business Process and Contextual Model for CIM European Market,” 2013. 156. IEC 62325-450, “Framework for Energy Market Communications—Part 450: Profile and Context Modelling Rules,” 2013. 157. EPRI, “Common Information Model Primer,” 3rd ed., Technical Report 3002006001, Palo Alto, CA, 2015. 158. Special Issue on The Common Information Model, “The Root of All Data Exchange,” IEEE Energy & Power Magazine, vol. 14, no. 1, pp. 30–104, January/February 2016. 159. G. Booch, J. Rumbaugh, and I. Jacobson, The Unified Modeling Language User Guide, 2nd ed., AddisonWesley, Upper Saddle River, NJ, USA, 2005. 160. J. Rumbaugh, I. Jacobson, and G. Booch, Unified Modeling Language Reference Manual, Addison-Wesley, Upper Saddle River, NJ, USA, 1999. 161. IEC 61970-552, “Energy Management System Application Program Interface (EMS-API)—Part 552: CIMXML Model Exchange Format,” 2013. 162. EPRI, “Major 2010 Common Information Model Interoperability Test of Power System Model Revisions: CIM Standards Revisions for Major Energy Management System Vendors,” Report 1017804, Palo Alto, CA, 2010. 163. ENTSO-E, “Interoperability Test—CIM for System Development and Operations,” Final Report, August 2013. 164. ENTSO-E, “ENTSO-E Interoperability Tests for the Market,” June 2015. 165. EPRI, “Harmonizing the International Electrotechnical Commission Common Information Model (CIM) and 61850 Standards via a Unified Model: Key to Achieve Smart Grid Interoperability Objectives,” Report 1020098, Palo Alto, CA, 2010.

24_Santoso_Sec24_p1503-1574.indd 1569

23/11/17 1:53 PM

1570  SECTION TWENTY-FOUR

166. X. Wang, N. N. Schulz, and S. Neumann, “CIM Extensions to Electrical Distribution and CIM XML for the IEEE Radial Test Feeders,” IEEE Trans. on Power Systems, vol. 18, no. 3, pp. 1021–1028, August 2003. 167. A. W. McMorran, G. W. Ault, I. M. Elders, C. E. T. Foote, G. M. Burt, and J. R. McDonald, “Translating CIM XML Power System Data to a Proprietary Format for System Simulation,” IEEE Trans. on Power Systems, vol. 19, no. 1, pp. 229–235, February 2004. 168. J. P. Britton and A. N. deVos, “CIM-Based Standards and CIM Evolution,” IEEE Trans. on Power Systems, vol. 20, no. 2, pp. 758–764, May 2005. 169. A. W. McMorran, G. W. Ault, C. Morgan, I. M. Elders, and J. R. McDonald, “A Common Information Model (CIM) Toolkit Framework Implemented in Java,” IEEE Trans. on Power Systems, vol. 21, no. 1, pp. 194–201, February 2006. 170. D. S. Popovic, E. Varga, and Z. Perlic, “Extension of the Common Information Model with a Catalog of Topologies,” IEEE Trans. on Power Systems, vol. 22, no. 2, pp. 770–777, May 2007. 171. G. Ravikumar, Y. Pradeep, and S. A. Khaparde, “Graphics Model for Power Systems Using Layouts and Relative Coordinates in CIM Framework,” IEEE Trans. on Power Systems, vol. 28, no. 4, pp. 3906–3915, November 2013. 172. R. Santodomingo, S. Rohjans, M. Uslar, J. A. Rodríguez-Mondèjar, and M. A. Sanz-Bobi, “Facilitating the Automatic Mapping of IEC 61850 Signals and CIM Measurements,” IEEE Trans. on Power Systems, vol. 28, no. 4, pp. 4348–4355, November 2013. 173. L. Sabari Chandramohan, G. Ravikumar, S. Doolla, and S. A. Khaparde, “Business Process Model for Deriving CIM Profile: A Case Study for Indian Utility,” IEEE Trans. on Power Systems, vol. 30, no. 1, pp. 132–141, January 2015. 174. B. Lee, D. K. Kim, H. Yang, H. Jang, D. Hong, and H. Falk, “Unifying Data Types of IEC 61850 and CIM,” IEEE Trans. on Power Systems, vol. 30, no. 1, pp. 448–456, January 2015. 175. J. D. Moseley, N. V. Mago, N. D. R. Sarma, W. Mack Grady, and S. Santoso, “Extending CIM Standards to Support Exchange of Ratings on Dynamically Rated Equipment,” IEEE Trans. on Power Systems, vol. 31, no. 1, pp. 296–303, January 2016. 176. A. McEwen and H. Cassimally, Designing the Internet of Things, John Wiley, Chichester, UK, 2013. 177. S. Greengard, The Internet of Things, The MIT Press, Essential Knowledge Series, Cambridge, MA, USA, 2015. 178. L. Atzori, A. Iera, and G. Morabito, The Internet of Things: A Survey, Computer Networks, vol. 54, pp. 2787–2805, 2010. 179. J. A. Stankovic, “Research Directions for the Internet of Things,” IEEE Internet of Things Journal, vol. 1, no. 1, pp. 3–9, February 2014. 180. L. Da Xu, W. He, and S. Li, “Internet of Things in industries: A Survey,” IEEE Trans. on Industrial Informatics, vol. 10, no. 4, pp. 2233–2242, November 2014. 181. A. Al-Fuqaha, M. Guizani, M. Mohammadi, M. Aledhari, and M. Ayyash, “Internet of Things: A Survey on Enabling Technologies, Protocols, and Applications,” IEEE Communication Surveys & Tutorials, vol. 17, no. 4, pp. 2347–2376, Fourth Quarter 2015. 182. Parks Associates Whitepaper, “Top 2016 Trends for the Consumer IoT,” 2016. 183. McKinsey Global Institute, “The Internet of Things: Mapping the Value Beyond the Hype,” 2015. 184. C. Grant, J. McCue, and R. Young, “The Power Is On. How IoT Technology Is Driving Energy Innovation,” Report, Deloitte Center for Energy Solutions, 2015. 185. S. Karnouskos, “The Cooperative Internet of Things Enabled Smart Grid,” 14th IEEE Int. Symp. on Consumer Electronics, 2010. 186. IEC White Paper, “Internet of Things: Wireless Sensor Networks,” 2014. 187. E. Spanò, L. Niccolini, S. Di Pascoli, and G. Iannaccone, “Last-Meter Smart Grid Embedded in an Internetof-Things Platform,” IEEE Trans. on Smart Grid, vol. 6, no. 1, pp. 468–476, January 2015. 188. G. Bedi, G. Kumar Venayagamoorthy, and R. Singh, “Navigating the Challenges of Internet of Things (IoT) for Power and Energy Systems,” Clemson University Power Systems Conference (PSC), Clemson, South Carolina, March 2016. 189. S. Ciavarella, J. Y. Joo, and S. Silvestri, “Managing Contingencies in Smart Grids via the Internet of Things,” IEEE Trans. on Smart Grid, vol. 7, no. 4, pp. 2134–2141, July 2016.

24_Santoso_Sec24_p1503-1574.indd 1570

23/11/17 1:53 PM

COMPUTER APPLICATIONS IN THE ELECTRIC POWER INDUSTRY   1571 

190. Center for the Study of the Presidency and Congress, “Securing the U.S. Electrical Grid,” 2014. 191. J. Weiss and M. Delson, “Cyber Security of Substation Control and Diagnostic Systems,” Chap. 17 of Electric Power Substations Engineering (J. D. McDonald, ed.), 2nd ed., CRC Press, Boca Raton, FL 2007. 192. E. D. Knapp and R. Samani, Applied Cyber Security and the Smart Grid, Syngress-Elsevier, Waltham, MA, USA, 2013. 193. Y. Xiao (ed.), Security and Privacy in Smart Grids, CRC Press, Boca Raton, FL, USA, 2013. 194. Special Issue on Cybersecurity for Electric Systems, “Keeping the Smart Grid Safe,” IEEE Power & Energy Magazine, vol. 10, no. 1, pp. 18–73, January/February 2012. 195. T. Baumeister, “Literature Review on Smart Grid Cyber Security,” Dept. of Information and Computer Sciences, University of Hawaii, December 2010. 196. S. Sridhar, A. Hahn, and M. Govindarasu, “Cyber-Physical System Security for the Electric Power Grid,” Proc. of the IEEE, vol. 100, no. 1, pp. 210–224, January 2012. 197. K. S. Wilson and M. Ayse Kiy, “Some Fundamental Cybersecurity Concepts,” IEEE Access, vol. 2, pp. 116–124, February 2014. 198. Y. Yan, Y. Qian, H. Sharif, and D. Tipper, “A Survey on Cyber Security for Smart Grid Communications,” IEEE Communications Surveys & Tutorials, vol. 14, no. 4, pp. 998–1010, Fourth Quarter 2012. 199. W. Wang and Z. Lu, “Cyber Security in the Smart Grid: Survey and Challenges,” Computer Networks, vol. 57, pp. 1344–1371, 2013. 200. P. Jokar, N. Arianpoo, and V. C. M. Leung, “A Survey on Security Issues in Smart Grids,” Security and Communication Networks, vol. 9, no. 3, pp. 262–273, February 2016. 201. A. Sanjab, W. Saad, I. Guvenc, A. Sarwat, and S. Biswas, “Smart Grid Security: Threats, Challenges, and Solutions,” Available at http://arxiv.org/pdf/1606.06992v1.pdf. 202. I. L. G. Pearson, “Smart Grid Cyber Security for Europe,” Energy Policy, vol. 39, pp. 5211–5218, 2011. 203. L. Piètre-Cambacédès, M. Tritschler, and G. N. Ericsson, “Cybersecurity Myths on Power Control Systems: 21 Misconceptions and False Beliefs,” IEEE Trans. on Power Delivery, vol. 26, no. 1, pp. 161–172, January 2011. 204. IEEE PES Power System Relaying Committee Working Group C1, “Cyber Security Issues for Protective Relays,” IEEE PES General Meeting, Tampa, FL, July 2007. (There is an expanded version available at http:// www.pes-psrc.org/kb/published/reports.html). 205. A. Risley and K. Carson, “Low- or No-Cost Cybersecurity Solutions for Defending the Electric Power System Against Electronic Intrusions,” Schweitzer Engineering Laboratories, Inc. 206. The Smart Grid Interoperability Panel—Cyber Security Working Group, “NISTIR 7628 Rev. 1- Guidelines for Smart Grid Cyber Security: Vol. 1, Smart Grid Cyber Security Strategy, Architecture, and High-Level Requirements; Vol. 2, Privacy and the Smart Grid; Vol. 3, Supportive Analyses and References,” NIST, U.S. Dept. of Commerce, September 2014. 207. NERC Standards CIP-002 through CIP-009—Cyber Security, January 2011. 208. The Smart Grid Interoperability Panel—Cyber Security Working Group, “Introduction to NISTIR 7628 Guidelines for Smart Grid Cyber Security,” September 2010. 209. CIGRE Working Group B5.38, “The Impact of Implementing Cyber Security Requirements Using IEC 61850,” CIGRE Brochure 427, August 2010. 210. IEEE 1686-2007, “Standard for Substation Intelligent Electronic Devices (IEDs) Cyber Security Capabilities,” 2007. 211. IEEE-1711-2010, “IEEE Trial-Use Standard for a Cryptographic Protocol for Cyber Security of Substation Serial Links,” 2010. 212. IEEE Std 2030, “IEEE Guide for Smart Grid Interoperability of Energy Technology and Information Technology Operation with the Electric Power System (EPS), End-Use Applications, and Loads,” 2011. 213. IEC TC57 WG15 (F. Cleveland, Convenor), “IEC 62351 Security Standards for the Power System Information Infrastructure,” 2012. 214. T. Tibbals and D. Dolezilek, “Communications Technologies and Practices to Satisfy NERC Critical Infrastructure Protection (CIP),” 5th Annual Clemson University Power Systems Conference, Clemson, South Carolina, March 2006.

24_Santoso_Sec24_p1503-1574.indd 1571

05/06/19 11:48 am

1572  SECTION TWENTY-FOUR

215. A. Hahn, A. Ashok, S. Sridhar, and M. Govindarasu, “Cyber-Physical Security Testbeds: Architecture, Application, and Evaluation for Smart Grid,” IEEE Trans. on Smart Grid, vol. 4, no. 2, pp. 847–855, June 2013. 216. Software Engineering Institute, “Smart Grid Maturity Model,” Update, October 2010. 217. R. Caralli, M. Knight, and A. Montgomery, “Maturity Models 101: A Primer for Applying Maturity Models to Smart Grid Security, Resilience, and Interoperability,” Carnegie Mellon University, November 2012. 218. Smart Grid Cybersecurity Committee, “Implementing Cybersecurity Frameworks: Utility Lessons Learned,” SGIP White Paper, April 25, 2016. 219. National Institute of Standards and Technology (NIST), “Framework for Improving Critical Infrastructure Cybersecurity,” Version 1.0, February 12, 2014. 220. NERC, “Grid Security Exercise. GridEx III Report,” March 2016.

24.10 ACRONYMS ABS Agent-based simulation AGC Automatic generation control AMI Advanced metering infrastructure AMR Automated meter reading API Application programming interface CCAPI Control center application programming interface CDPSM Common distribution power system model CENELEC Comité Européen de Normalisation Electrotechnique—European Committee for Electrotechnical Standardization CGMES Common Grid Model Exchange Standard CIGRE Conseil International des Grands Réseaux Electriques—Council on Large Electric Systems CIM Common information model CIMug CIM users group CIP Critical infrastructure protection CIS Component interface specification CPA Cyber-physical attack CPSM Common power system model CPU Central processing unit DA Distribution automation DAE Differential-algebraic equation DER Distributed energy resource DG Distributed generation DHS Department of Homeland Security DMS Distribution management system DoE Department of Energy DoS Denial of service DR Demand response DSO Distribution system operator

24_Santoso_Sec24_p1503-1574.indd 1572

23/11/17 1:53 PM

COMPUTER APPLICATIONS IN THE ELECTRIC POWER INDUSTRY   1573 

EA Enterprise architecture EMS Energy management system EMTP Electromagnetic transients program ENTSO-E European network of transmission system operators for electricity EPRI Electric Power Research Institute FA Feeder automation FACTS Flexible AC transmission system FEM Finite element method FPGA Field programmable gate array GHG Greenhouse gas GIS Geographic information system GPU Graphics processing unit GUI Graphics user interface HAN Home area network HIL Hardware-in-the-loop HPC High-performance computing HTML HyperText Markup Language HVDC High-voltage direct current ICCP Inter-Control Center Communications Protocol ICT Information and communications technology ID Identification IDS Intrusion detection systems IEC International Electrotechnical Commission IED Intelligent electronic device IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers ILF Interactive load flow I/O Input/output IOP Interoperability IoT Internet of Things ISO Independent system operator IT Information technology MIS Market information service MMC Modular multilevel converter NERC North American Electric Reliability Corporation NIST National Institute of Standards and Technology NRECA National Rural Electric Cooperative OPF Optimal power flow OWL Ontology Web language PHIL Power-hardware-in-the-loop PLC Power line communication PMU Phasor measurement unit PWM Pulse width modulation

24_Santoso_Sec24_p1503-1574.indd 1573

23/11/17 1:53 PM

1574  SECTION TWENTY-FOUR

RCP Rapid control prototyping RDF Resource description framework RES Renewable energy source RFID Radio frequency identification RS Rapid simulation RTO Regional transmission organization RTS Real-time simulator RTU Remote terminal unit SA Substation automation SCADA Supervisory control and data acquisition SCL Substation configuration description language SGMM Smart grid maturity model SIL Software-in-the-loop TC Technical committee TSO Transmission system operator XML eXtensible Markup Language UCTE Union for the co-ordination of transmission of electricity UML Unified Modeling Language URI Uniform resource identifier VPN Virtual private network W3C World Wide Web Consortium WAMS Wide-area measurement system WAN Wide-area network WASA Wide-area situational awareness WG Working group

24_Santoso_Sec24_p1503-1574.indd 1574

23/11/17 1:53 PM

25

STANDARDS IN ELECTROTECHNOLOGY, TELECOMMUNICATIONS, AND INFORMATION TECHNOLOGY Marco W. Migliaro President and CEO, IEEE Industry Standards and Technology Organization (IEEE-ISTO); Fellow, IEEE

Adam C. Newman Senior Director, Business Development and Alliance Management, IEEE Standards Association



25.1 INTRODUCTION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1575 25.2 HISTORY OF ELECTRICAL STANDARDS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1576 25.3 STANDARDS AND THE LAW. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1581 25.4 THE VOLUNTARY STANDARDS PROCESS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1582 25.5 TERMINOLOGY IN STANDARDS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1584 25.6 ISO 9000 AND ISO 14000 STANDARDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1588 25.7 INTERNATIONAL ORGANIZATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1589 25.8 REGIONAL ORGANIZATIONS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1594 25.9 NATIONAL ORGANIZATIONS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1595 25.10 OTHER STANDARDS DEVELOPERS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1598 25.11 U.S. GOVERNMENT REGULATORY STANDARDS BODIES . . . . . . . . . . 1601 25.12 CONTACTING STANDARDS ORGANIZATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1603

25.1 INTRODUCTION Standards are technical agreements published in documents on which agreement has been reached, normally by consensus, that contain specifications or criteria to be used to ensure that materials, products, processes, tests, or services are suitable for their intended purpose. Those documents have gone from being published on paper to being published in electronic formats such as Adobe’s Portable Document Format (PDF) and are now often being published in hypertext markup language (html) or eXtensible markup language (xml) for online and electronic uses. Standards apply to virtually everything in the world today. The average person is not even aware of their existence, but life would not be the same without them. Engineers, computer scientists, and other scientists, however, are acutely aware of standards and their impact on the work they perform. Development of many of the original standards associated with electrotechnology was a slow process. The products, tests, or specifications being standardized were often in use in industry and had, in reality, become de facto standards before the standards that referred to them were written and 1575

25_Santoso_Sec25_p1575-1608.indd 1575

21/11/17 11:16 AM

1576  SECTION TWENTY-FIVE

approved. In general, most of the standards written were not mandatory, and it was voluntary for users to apply them. In some instances, these voluntary standards became part of government regulations, were adopted by government agencies, or were mandated by companies in specifications. When these types of events occurred, compliance with a specific standard became mandatory. Early standards also became regional to varying degrees. For example, the United States had its electric power standards and European countries had their own electric power standards. Although the two sets of standards had many similarities, there were significant differences between them. Overall, although there were some complaints, the standards development processes remained slow and the differences between standards continued to exist. The 1980s brought some dramatic changes. The deregulation of the telephone industry, the privatization of government-run electric and telecommunication organizations, the birth of the information age, and the realization of a global market created a huge demand for standards in the fields of telecommunications and information technology. The Internet has, by itself, created the need for standards that govern its use, domain registration, and so forth. Many new players have entered the standards arena and found the traditional methods for developing standards unacceptable, primarily because they were too slow and bureaucratic. New standards in telecommunications and information technology were needed immediately, and the affected industries were moving so fast that many of the standards developed using traditional methods were obsolete before they were issued. Standards developers responded by streamlining processes and adopting fast-track systems. Even these proved too slow for some, and standards saw the birth of consortia whose charters included standards development. The global economy also caused people to take a hard look at existing regional standards. The differences between the standards were viewed as potential “barriers to trade,” and harmonization efforts began to make these standards more widely accepted. For example, the United States and Canada are now harmonizing their electrical codes and standards. The global market brought about another significant change in standards. In addition to the traditional standards that dealt with products, tests, and specifications, the protection of intellectual property (e.g., trademarks, inventions, and copyrights) became an important issue. In addition, certification and conformity assessment has, in many instances, become a formal follow-on activity to standards development. Standards activity in electrotechnology, telecommunications, and information technology is greater today than ever before as standards developing organizations have focused on providing products for the full life-cycle of a standard. One example of increased standards activity is in the area of “smart grid.” The first interoperability cross-discipline guide on smart grid was issued by IEEE in August 2011.a The guide includes a knowledge base that addresses terminology, characteristics, functional performance and evaluation criteria, and the application of engineering principles for smart grid interoperability of the electric power system with end use applications and loads. It is intended for use by the power engineering, communications, and information technology industries worldwide as a foundational, cross-discipline guide for smart grid interoperability. Many standards developers have already begun to make their standards available on the Internet for a fee, although grassroots initiatives have continued to allow free access to standards via the Internet. Many consortia make their standards and specifications available at no charge. A few standards development organizations have also initiated programs that allow access to a limited number of standards without fee (e.g., the IEEE’s “Get 802” program).

25.2  HISTORY OF ELECTRICAL STANDARDS Early History.  The early history of electrical standards stems from activities dominated by the American Institute of Electrical Engineers (AIEE).b In 1884, the institute actively began to develop standard specifications for the growing electrical industry. In 1890, it proposed that the practical unit a IEEE 2030-2011, IEEE Guide for Smart Grid Interoperability of Energy Technology and Information Technology Operation with the Electric Power System (EPS), and End-Use Applications and Loads. b In 1963, the AIEE merged with the Institute of Radio Engineers to form the IEEE.

25_Santoso_Sec25_p1575-1608.indd 1576

21/11/17 11:16 AM

STANDARDS IN ELECTROTECHNOLOGY, TELECOMMUNICATIONS, AND IT   1577 

of self-induction be named the henry. At the same time, the institute appointed its first committee on standardization—the Committee on Units and Standards. The members of this committee were A. E. Kennelly, chairman, F. B. Crocker, W. E. Geyer, G. A. Hamilton, and G. B. Prescott, Jr. The institute also appointed a “Standard Wiring Table Committee” under the chairmanship of E. B. Crocker, to assign linear resistance of standard-conductivity copper wire and at standard temperatures. A committee was also appointed to prepare a program for the delegates to the International Electrical Congress, held in Chicago in 1893, in regard to units, standards, and nomenclature. As a result of the congress, there were adopted units for magnetomotive force (gilbert), flux (weber), reluctance (oersted), and flux density (gauss). Subsequently, as a result of correspondence with engineering organizations in England, France, and Germany, the term inductance was adopted to represent the coefficient of induction (with the symbol L) and the present definition of the term reactance was proposed by Steinmetz and adopted. First Electrical Standards.  In 1896, a “National Conference of Standard Electrical Rules” was held. The institute’s delegate, Professor F. B. Crocker, was made its president, and in cooperation with other national organizations, the conference promulgated the “Underwriters’ Rules,” which finally resulted in the National Electrical Code® (NEC®).c In 1897, the Units and Standards Committee recommended adoption of the standard of luminous intensity, or candlepower, as the output of the amylacetate Hefner-Alteneck lamp. It also recommended that the Lummer-Brodhun photometer screen be adopted for measuring the mean horizontal intensity of incandescent lamps. At the beginning of 1898, a discussion was organized on the subject of “standardization of generators, motors, and transformers.” This resulted in the formation of the first AIEE product standards committee, which in 1899 published the first electrical standard under the unique title Report of the Committee on Standardization. National Institute of Standards and Technology.  The AIEE was a prime mover in the endorsement of a bill before the U.S. Congress, in 1901, for establishing a national standardizing bureau in Washington, DC, “for the construction, custody, and comparison of standards used in scientific and technical work.” This bureau became known as the National Bureau of Standards (NBS) and has had a marked influence on the growth of U.S. technology. In 1988, the mission of the NBS was broadened by The Omnibus Trade and Competitiveness Act and other legislation, to help enhance competitiveness of U.S. industry and speed up the commercialization of new technology. At that time, the NBS was renamed the National Institute of Standards and Technology (NIST). International Electrical Standards.  In 1904, an International Electrical Congress was held in St. Louis which set a precedent for international congresses related to electrical units and standards. The congress unanimously recommended the establishment of two committees. Committee 1 consisted of government representatives and was responsible for legal maintenance of units and standards. This committee evolved into the International Conference on Weights and Measures (GPMU). Committee 2, of which Lord Kelvin was elected president, was responsible for standards related to commercial products in the electrical industry and became the International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC) in 1906. Another international body, the International Commission on Illumination [Commission International de l’Eclairage (CIE)], had its first meeting in 1913. The CIE establishes international units, standards, and nomenclature, in the science and technology of light and illumination. International Telecommunications Standards.  In 1865 the first International Telegraph Convention was signed by 20 countries. This marked the formation of the International Telegraph Union (ITU). After the invention of the telephone in 1876 and wireless telegraphy (the first type of radiocommunication) in 1896, the scope of the ITU was broadened to include these new technologies. In 1906, the first International Radiotelegraph Convention was signed. The International Telephone National Electrical Code and NEC are registered trademarks of the National Fire Protection Association (NFPA).

c

25_Santoso_Sec25_p1575-1608.indd 1577

21/11/17 11:16 AM

1578  SECTION TWENTY-FIVE

Consultative Committee (CCIF) was formed in 1924, and the International Telegraph Consultative Committee (CCIT) was formed in 1925. In 1920 sound broadcasting began, and in 1927 the International Radio Consultative Committee (CCIR) was formed. At the Madrid Conference in 1932, the previous conventions were combined into the International Telecommunication Convention. The ITU changed its name in 1934, to the International Telecommunication Union. After World War II, the ITU became a specialized agency of the United Nations in October 1947. In 1956, the CCIF and CCIT merged to form the International Telephone and Telegraph Consultative Committee (CCITT). The year 1963 saw the first telecommunications satellite and the ITU set up a study group on space communications. Most recently, the Plenipotentiary Conference held in 1992 has remodeled the ITU to meet the challenges of the future. Today, work in the ITU covers all sectors of information and communication technologies including digital broadcasting, the Internet, mobile devices, and 3D television. International Standards Outside the Electrical Field.  The original standards work in the fields outside electrotechnology was performed under the International Federation of the National Standardizing Associations (ISA), which was formed in 1926. ISA’s activities ended in 1942 as a result of World War II. In 1947, the International Organization for Standardization (ISO) was established, as a result of a meeting of delegates from 25 countries that was held in London in 1946. Like the IEC, the ISO is a nongovernmental organization that promotes the development of international standardization and related activities. Its areas of responsibility are fields outside electrotechnology, light, and telecommunications. International Information Technology Standards.  When the need for international standards in the field of information technology arose, it was clear that both the IEC and the ISO needed to be involved. In 1987, an agreement between the IEC and the ISO created the Joint Technical Committee on Information Technology (JTC-1). The ITU provides input to JTC-1 as an official liasion. Another organization, The Internet Society (ISOC), was formed in 1992. Its formation came as a result of the INET Conference held in Copenhagen in 1991, where it was decided that a neutral and internationally recognized body devoted to the support of Internet administrative infrastructure was needed. National Standardization.  Although an international standards organization for electrotechnology existed, representation on the IEC was by national committees from its member countries. Many of these countries had their own national standards organizations responsible for their national standards program, endorsement of national standards, participation in international standards development, and so forth. A number of these national organizations later became founding members of the ISO. In the United States, five professional engineering societies and three government agencies spearheaded by the AIEE organized the American Engineering Standards Committee (AESC) in 1918. The AESC has been aptly described as a “national clearinghouse for industrial standardization.” In its early years, this body was organized with 12 divisions, each based on its own area of technology. Few of these became active. The electrical engineering division actually became the strongest, even to the point of having its own bylaws. Today, the AESC is known as the American National Standards Institute (ANSI); however, at times during its history it was also known as the American Standards Association (ASA) and the United States of America Standards Institute (USASI). In 1926, under the auspices of the ASA, engineering abbreviations and symbols were standardized. The AIEE, in cooperation with ASA, sponsored in 1928 the development of a glossary of terms used in electrical engineering. This work was coordinated with the IEC.d Over the years, ANSI (and its predecessors) has had many responsibilities in the standards arena, including development of standards. Although many people still believe ANSI develops standards, it has not done so for many years. Standards that become American National Standards (ANSs) are written by 1 of more than 270 standards developers that can submit their completed standards to ANSI for acceptance as ANSs. It is interesting to d The 6th edition of the IEC Multilingual Dictionary was published in 2005, with over 19,400 definitions in English and French. Equivalent terms wherever available are included in up to 11 additional languages, including Arabic, Chinese, Dutch, German, Italian, Japanese, Polish, Portuguese, Russian, Spanish, and Swedish.

25_Santoso_Sec25_p1575-1608.indd 1578

21/11/17 11:16 AM

STANDARDS IN ELECTROTECHNOLOGY, TELECOMMUNICATIONS, AND IT   1579 

note that, in the electrical industry, basic standardization was first in order of development, dating back before 1890. Technical standardization came next, with the formation of the Standards Committee of the AIEE in 1898. Manufacturing standardization came only as a result of World War I and did not take effect until 1920. In Canada, the Canadian Standards Association (CSA) was formed in 1919. It is a not-for-profit organization supported by its members and develops standards in many fields. In 1970, a new organization called the Standards Council of Canada (SCC) was established by an act of parliament to coordinate voluntary standardization in Canada. The SCC is a federal Crown Corporation. The CSA represents Canada on a number of ISO Committees on behalf of the SCC. Standards may be submitted by accredited standards developing organizations to the SCC for approval as a National Standard of Canada. Regional Standardization.  Once standards began to be developed, it did not take long for regional organizations such as the Organization of American States (OAS), the Pan American Standards Commission (COPANT), or the Pacific Area Standards Congress (PASC), and alliances such as the North American Treaty Organization (NATO) to see the value in having common (or harmonized) standards. For example, in May 1923, the OAS (then known as American States of the Pan-American Union) established the Inter-American Electrical Communication Commission (now known as the Inter-American Telecommunication Commission). However, it was not until the formation of three regional standards organizations by the European Economic Community that the world really took notice. In the area of electrotechnology, the European Committee for Electrotechnical Standardization (CENELEC) was formed in 1973. Telecommunications standardization is the responsibility of the European Telecommunications Standard Institute (ETSI). All other standardization is the responsibility of the European Committee for Standardization (CEN). Associations.  Many associations have come to exist for various reasons, which may include standards. One of the earliest was the Association of Edison Illuminating Companies (AEIC). It was founded in 1885 to provide guidance to the Edison Illuminating companies that were being formed around the United States. The AEIC became a place where problems facing the growing electric utility industry could be solved by pooling the knowledge and experience of managers, engineers, and operators. Most of the work of the AEIC was technical in nature until 1948; however, in 1948 a committee was formed to deal with load forecasting and end-use management. The AEIC today continues to produce standards for equipment, such as cable, used by electric utilities. Another example of an early association was Aeronautical Radio, Inc. (ARINC), formed in 1929 by four major airlines. ARINC was incorporated to serve as “the single licensee and coordinator of radio communication outside of the [U.S.] government.” Once ARINC was organized, the Federal Radio Commission (predecessor of the Federal Communications Commission) transferred responsibility for all aeronautical ground radio stations to ARINC. ARINC, now part of Rockwell Collins, continues to provide services today to the airlines, aviation-related companies, and government agencies. In the field of telecommunications, the Exchange Carriers Association was formed in 1983 as part of the breakup of the Bell System (i.e., AT&T) in the United States. It later changed its name to the Alliance for Telecommunications Industry Solutions (ATIS). Its membership is open to those involved in telecommunications in North America and the Caribbean. Committee T1 was formed in 1984 to give exchange carriers a voice in the creation of telecommunication standards, which had previously been developed, de facto, by AT&T. ATIS eventually became the secretariat for committee T1; however, committee T1 was retired in 2004 and its standards work was assumed by ATIS. Standards in Current Times.  The information age and global economy have increased the demand for new standards that are internationally acceptable. The completion of the Uruguay Round of negotiations (1986–1994) of the General Agreement on Tariffs and Trade (GATT) led to the establishment of the World Trade Organization (WTO) in 1995 and a new set of agreements covering goods, services, and intellectual property. It also established a new dispute settlement mechanism. The WTO is the only international agency overseeing the rules of international trade with 164 member nations (as of July 2016). In 2001, the WTO began to host a new round of negotiations under the

25_Santoso_Sec25_p1575-1608.indd 1579

21/11/17 11:16 AM

1580  SECTION TWENTY-FIVE

Doha Development Agency. The formation of the European Commission (EC) along with its regional entities and requirements for compliance with European Norms has had a significant impact on standards. For example, in 1990 the European Organization for Certification and Testing (EOTC) was created under a memorandum of understanding between CEN, CENELEC, and the European Free Trade Agreement (EFTA) countries. EOTC was formed to promote the mutual recognition of test results, certification procedures, and so forth throughout the EC and EFTA countries. The North American Free Trade Agreement (NAFTA) and EFTA have had similar effects on the standards community. Programs intended to harmonize standards to make them more internationally acceptable were instituted by many standards developers. Certification (or registration) began to take on additional importance to those organizations that wanted to compete in the global market. As a result, conformity assessment (which includes both registration and certification) programs began to expand, and in a number of instances certification organizations in one country expanded into other countries or partnered with a certification organization in another country. In 1979, ISO established a technical committee to harmonize the increasing international activity in quality management and quality assurance standards. One product of this committee was the ISO 9000 series of standards, which are internationally accepted and can provide a company that uses them with a route to the world markets. After ISO 9000, the ISO 14000 series of standards on environmental management tools and systems was developed. These standards address a company’s system for managing its day-to-day operations as they impact the environment. ISO now has a number of series standards that focus on various topics including risk management, food safety management systems, and social responsibility. Other changes that have occurred in the standards development arena are that the standards developers themselves are changing. Many have been renamed to reflect a more international flavor, and most have reengineered their processes to provide standards in a more timely manner or have begun to introduce new products such as emerging technology standards. For example, the IEC introduced the Industry Technical Agreement (ITA) as a new product in 1997 “in its drive to remain relevant in the field of electrotechnology.”An ITA is a document that addresses specifications for areas of rapidly developing technology that can be created by any group of interested parties, including a single or large company or a consortium. The stakeholders themselves decide who participates in the creation of an ITA and what its content is. ITAs are not produced within the traditional IEC committee structure, nor are they consensus documents; however, they can be produced in months rather than years. Later, the Technology Trend Assessment (TTA) was introduced. A TTA presents the state-of-the-art or trend in a field of emerging technology that might become an area for standardization in the near-to-medium-term. TTAs are typically the result of research or prestandardization work. Although these programs have met with some degree of success, those in the information technology and telecommunications market want standards in place before, not after, their products are created. These industries are more interested in the anticipatory information provided by the standards process than they are in the final standard. They are also interested in new and more flexible forms of standards development. As a result, these industries have turned to the formation of trade associations and consortia to develop their standards. In the United States, the number of standards produced in this manner will be greater than those produced by traditional SDOs. In contrast to traditional standards which are typically produced by volunteers, trade associations and consortia use paid professionals and provide them with budgets for expenses, research, legal advice, and so forth. Additionally, international standards organizations such as IEC and ISO have recognized a number of these standards as Publicly Available Specifications (PASs). A PAS is a publication that responds to an urgent market need, representing consensus in an organization (including consortia) outside the IEC or experts within a working group. Although PASs do not conflict with international standards, it is possible to have more than one PAS on the same subject. One example of an industry consortium is the World Wide Web Consortium (W3C). It was founded in 1994 and its mission is “to lead the World Wide Web to its full potential by developing protocols and guidelines that ensure long-term growth of the web.” Other examples are the Unicode Consortium, established in 1991, to bring together leading software corporations and researchers at the leading edge of standardizing international character encoding; the Open Group, established to answer questions in IT that corporate IT users need answers to by aiding in the development and implementation of a secure and reliable IT infrastructure; the

25_Santoso_Sec25_p1575-1608.indd 1580

21/11/17 11:16 AM

STANDARDS IN ELECTROTECHNOLOGY, TELECOMMUNICATIONS, AND IT   1581 

DSDM Consortium, established in 1994 to develop and promote a public-domain rapid application development method; and the North American Electric Reliability Corporation (NERC), founded in 1968 after the Northeast Blackout to promote reliability of the electrical supply for North America.

25.3  STANDARDS AND THE LAW Voluntary Standards System.  The word standard has a number of meanings, but in the context of trade or engineering, it refers to voluntary technical standards that are normally developed by a consensus of experts. Many standards set safety or performance requirements for products or services, for example, standards for workshoes for those involved in electrical work to be “nonconductive with a reinforced toe” for safety purposes. These standards are not normally developed by lawmakers, and because they are outside of the mandatory scope of laws, they are sometimes referred to as voluntary standards. In general, standards are developed under a voluntary system. To the extent that their adoption is also voluntary, there is less vulnerability to legal liability. However, many standards are made mandatory, either through reference in purchase specifications and contracts or through adoption by government bodies as regulatory documents. For example, in certain states it may be illegal for a person to drive (or ride as a passenger) a motorcycle without a helmet that meets the requirements of a specific standard. Under such circumstances, compliance ceases to be voluntary and the effect of the document is to disqualify or limit the acceptability of certain products or services. The ability of standards to limit acceptable suppliers is a potential danger of standards and the processes under which they are developed must minimize the possibility of discrimination against specific companies. One can begin to see that standards could be developed that contain absurd requirements that could act as a barrier to trade from a foreign nation, or within the same nation violate antitrust laws. Additionally, once a standard is written into the law, if the law simply states that compliance with standard xyz is required, then any revision to the standard (as occurs periodically) has the effect of amending the law. Legality of Standards.  The legality of standards activities is primarily affected by laws related to the fixing of prices, conspiracy in restraint of trade, and intellectual property. Throughout history, standards have been well-known barriers to trade as countries hide protectionism in the veil of an absurd standard. An example would be a standard written by a country that requires the use of a specific material available only in that country for a particular part of the product. Today, however, standards are covered by the GATT, the WTO, and other trade agreements such as NAFTA. The WTO supports the use of international standards developed under the auspices of international standards organizations such as IEC and ISO. One reason for this is the belief that it is felt that the international development process will identify and exclude any documents that contain hidden trade barriers. From the users’ perspective, certification to international standards should result in greater international acceptance for their product or service. In the United States, the two key governmental agencies involved are the Federal Trade Commission (FTC) and the Department of Justice. In 1975, the FTC and the Justice Department held hearings on a number of abuses of standards development and certification activities. These abuses involved individuals involved in the standards process who attempted to use standards for market advantage or to deny competitors entrance into an established market. One conclusion of the hearings was that there needed to be some fundamental guidelines and practices that would ensure that the activities related to standards development would be “fair.” Those fundamentals were due process, openness, balance, public notice, and the right to participate and appeal. These are the same basic principles that govern standards development around the world; however, they have, in many instances, been interpreted and reinterpreted to the point where they slow down the process. This, as stated earlier, has driven many away from the traditional standards organizations, especially in the areas of new, emerging, or rapidly evolving technologies. Since standards activities involve meetings in which representatives of competing organizations make agreements that affect engineering and industrial practices (both of which have economic

25_Santoso_Sec25_p1575-1608.indd 1581

21/11/17 11:16 AM

1582  SECTION TWENTY-FIVE

implications), such meetings must take place under conditions that are subject to carefully regulated procedures. Failing this, participants could be subject to charges of violation of antitrust or conspiracy statutes. Trade associations and consortia are particularly vulnerable in this respect, as meetings restricted to their membership involve participants who tend to be exclusively competitive manufacturers, whereas meetings of committees of professional societies involve technical personnel who are more apt to be representative of the total industry (both manufacturers and users), independent consultants, government personnel, educators, and scientists. Similarly, international standards committees are populated by experts from the national committees from the member countries. These persons individually represent the consensus of experts in their country when developing or voting on standards. However, the degree of liability of participants in standards development activities is virtually negligible when these activities are conducted under the auspices of, and under the strict rules of, an organization experienced in standards development; that is, an organization whose procedures are designed to promote fair and unprejudiced participation by all eligible parties. Certification.  The certification of a product provides additional assurance that a product is reasonably safe and reasonably suited for its intended function. Certification is particularly important for products that are purchased by the general public (i.e., consumers). Legal action against certifying organizations is rare; however, negligence in the certification process could cause a certifying organization to become exposed to a claim for liability. Patents.  The issue of patents as related to their use (or specification) in standards has become something that most standards developers have had to deal with, particularly for new technology standards. Most standards development organizations (SDOs) have patent policies that require disclosure of patents at the time a proposal for development of a standard is submitted. They further require disclosure at any time in the standards development process that it becomes known that a patent is applicable to a standard. Some consortia/associations that are developing standards/ requirements may not require patent disclosure. Personal Liability.  An area of legal concern for participants in the standards generation or approval process is the question of legal liability. A typical situation deals with the case where an accident occurs under circumstances where potentially negligent parties demonstrate that they faithfully complied with the provisions of the applicable safety standards. The question here is one of the extent of liability of those who participated in the generation or adoption of the standard. A somewhat equivalent situation arises in product liability cases. Any such claim in a legal action turns on allegations of negligence in writing the standard. The general conclusion held by counsel is that members of voluntary standards committees operating under procedures that embody the fundamental principles of due process, openness, balance, public notice, and the right to participate and appeal are not likely to incur significant legal risks. Some standards developers indemnify those persons who are members of the organization, provided the processes of the organization have been followed during the standards development process. Other standards developers require those participating in its standards writing groups to sign a statement attesting to the fact that they will follow the organization’s procedures when partici­pating in standards activities for the organization.

25.4  THE VOLUNTARY STANDARDS PROCESS Voluntary Development of Standards.  There are literally tens of thousands of experts in the fields of electrotechnology, telecommunications, and information technology who participate in standards development worldwide. It should be clear that it is the process by which the standards are developed that is of importance. The process should embody the fundamental principles; however, there are almost as many processes as there are standards developers. Although it would be impossible to describe them all in this subsection, the information age has made access for interested parties easier

25_Santoso_Sec25_p1575-1608.indd 1582

21/11/17 11:16 AM

STANDARDS IN ELECTROTECHNOLOGY, TELECOMMUNICATIONS, AND IT   1583 

than ever before. Today, the World Wide Web allows direct access to a wealth of standards information. A listing of organizations (including their acronyms) and their websites, is provided at the end of this section to enable an interested party to begin exploration of the “world of standards.” Many of the websites contain the full text of the policies and procedures followed by the standards developer. These are typically available for download. Although the development processes are designed to enable the broadest possible input to standards, duplicate standards, conflicts between standards, and other problems may exist. The resolution of these problems may be by the standards developers themselves, or by a national or international organization. For example, in the field of electric power cable, conflicts have arisen between standards developed by ASTM and IEEE that had to be resolved by the developers, or by ANSI where resolution was not achieved by the developers. In the case of duplicate standards in a voluntary system, the standard of choice will usually be decided by the market (i.e., the standard referenced by users will become the standard used). Complementary standards for a product are sometimes developed by two or more standards organizations, with each organization responsible for preparing standards within its area of expertise. For example, for power switchgear standards in the United States, IEEE develops those standards related to specifications and tests, while NEMA is responsible for those standards related to ratings. Occasionally, two or more organizations may develop a standard jointly; however, issues related to copyright and reproduction need to be agreed to by each organization before work begins. An example of this is standard IEEE/ASTM SI10, which was jointly developed by IEEE and ASTM International and first published in 1976. This standard is intended to give authoritative information on use of the SI system of units and guidance on its application to U.S. citizens and industry. Its use became more important in 1988 when the U.S. Metric Conversion Act was amended to designate “the metric system of measurement as the preferred system of weights and measures for U.S. trade and commerce.” Many U.S.-based standards developers today have policies requiring the use of SI units as the primary unit in its standards, with English units shown in parentheses or in an annex. Approval of standards is normally by consensus, with the definition of what constitutes consensus defined by the developing organization’s procedures. What this means is that a standard may be made available to users once consensus is reached by the sponsor. A problem here is that some sponsors apply a more rigid interpretation of consensus than intended (some even try to attain unanimity), which ultimately delays the standard. In these instances, the sponsor is doing a disservice to the users that need the standard. Although the sponsor is responsible for the technical content of the standard, the standards developer often has some sort of authority (e.g., a standards board) that is responsible for ensuring the organization’s process has been followed. Approval by that authority is the final step in the process before publication. Here, too, interpretation of the process by the authority can cause standards to be returned to the sponsor, resulting in an unnecessary delay of the standard. Another part of the process that has not been discussed is the maintenance of a standard once it is developed. All standards require periodic review to ensure that the information contained in them is current. Once reviewed, the standard may be reaffirmed (or confirmed), revised, or withdrawn. The standards developers also have the ability to administratively withdraw a standard if it has not been reviewed by its sponsor within some maximum period of time. For example, in the United States, the maximum time a standard can exist without being revised or reaffirmed is 10 years. The IEEE requires the majority of its standards to be reviewed every 5 years (a stabilized standard that has little likelihood of revision is reviewed every 10 years). The standard is administratively withdrawn by IEEE after 5 (or 10 for stabilized standards) years if maintenance of the standard by its sponsor has not been initiated. Internationally, both ISO and IEC require a review of their standards by the responsible Technical Committee (or Subcommittee) periodically. The review periods can vary based upon an assessment of the maturity of the standard and foreseen changes to associated standards. Based on this, a year is targeted for completion of maintenance (e.g., revision) of the current standard. This year is called the stability date and is included on the website www.webstore.iec.ch. The process for maintenance of standards developed by some consortia is an area that traditional standards developers are targeting for new work (i.e., to provide standards maintenance services to consortia).

25_Santoso_Sec25_p1575-1608.indd 1583

21/11/17 11:16 AM

1584  SECTION TWENTY-FIVE

Intellectual Property Rights and the Voluntary Standards Process.  Another important aspect to the standardization process is the consideration of intellectual property (IP) issues. In many cases today companies have IP in the technology they seek to include in voluntary or mandatory standards. In some cases those IP rights may include patent rights in one or more jurisdictions. SDOs of all types must have IP rights (IPR) policies that address the contribution and inclusion of such technologies to their standardization work. Over the last two decades patents have been granted to system and software design innovations that have significantly impacted the work of standards developers, and SDOs have been working to understand and in some cases update their IPR policies in light of these events. As noted above, most SDOs require the declaration and disclosure of such IPR when it is contributed to a standards project. SDOs generally have one of three regimes for acceptance of IP: Reasonable and Non-Discriminatory (RAND), Fair Reasonable and Non-Discriminatory (FRAND), and Free RAND where access to the IP is expected to be free reasonable and nondiscriminatory. Determination of fair and reasonable can be subject to significant differences between parties involved. Additionally, as part of the standards process in most SDOs the patent holder is normally required to provide a letter stating that (1) the patentee will not enforce any of its present or future patent(s) whose use would be required to implement the proposed standard against any person or entity using the patent(s) to comply with the standard or (2) a license will be made available to all applicants without compensation or under reasonable rates, with reasonable terms and conditions that are demonstrably free of any unfair discrimination. If these conditions are met, the patent may be included in the standard; however, the standards developer normally publishes a disclaimer in the standard making no claims as to the validity of the patent or the reasonableness of rates and/or terms and conditions of the license. In the case of SDOs that have individual membership as participants rather than entities, there is some allowance often made for the individual to declare or disclose to the best of their knowledge but not require a complete patent search within their organization. Some large entities that have large IP portfolios and seek monetization via licensing rather than sales of an end product (or in addition to such sales) may look to choosing to contribute to an SDO or consortia/alliance based in significant part on the IPR policy in place and not necessarily on the traditional scope of that SDO. This is part of the marketplace that has lead to a burgeoning number of alliances/ consortia, especially in the design and software technology areas.

25.5  TERMINOLOGY IN STANDARDS Standards Terms.  The following comprises a partial list of terms used by participants in standards activities. Many of these terms have unique and specialized meaning when used in the context of standardization, and a brief definition is given for each as applied in this context. Some of the terms are specific to the processes of the IEC and are identified by an (IEC) at the end of the explanation of the term. accreditation  A process in which certification of authority, competency, or creditability is verified typically by an external (or third-party) review or assessment. approval stage  The point after the enquiry stage, at which the final-draft international standard (FDIS) is circulated to the National Committees for a 2-month voting period. If the FDIS is approved it is published, and if it is not approved it is referred back to committee for reconsideration (IEC). balance  The characteristic of a standards approving unit (committee, subcommittee, or working group) which assures that all classifications of interests are represented and that no single classification has a representation sufficiently large to enable it to unduly influence the resulting output. balanced committee  A committee so constituted as to maintain a balance among its members. Many committees are balanced among manufacturers, users, and general-interest classifications. basic standard  A standard common to all disciplines, or to an overall technology. canvass  A method used for approval of standards which is dependent on circulation of a draft document to a list of concerned organizations for review and ballot.

25_Santoso_Sec25_p1575-1608.indd 1584

21/11/17 11:16 AM

STANDARDS IN ELECTROTECHNOLOGY, TELECOMMUNICATIONS, AND IT   1585 

certification  An attestation to the effect that a particular product or service meets the requirements of a relevant standard. certification mark  A special kind of trademark that appears only on products that have been certified against a standard. classification of membership  The classification assigned to a participant or member of a standards developing unit which identifies the member’s functional relationship or interest in the subject to be standardized. Thus, a participant may be a manufacturer of a product being standardized, a user or purchaser of the product, a technically qualified expert with no welldefined functional relationship (classified as general-interest), a labor or insurance representative (in the case of safety standards), or a constructor (one who installs the product for use by others). A variety of other classifications is possible as dictated by the scope of the standards activity. code (a) A body of recommendations of good practice to be followed during design, manufacture, construction, installation, operation, and maintenance to satisfy considerations of safety, quality, economy, or performance in a given application. (b) A particular form of identification marking or reference which serves the dual purpose of establishing in a systematic manner the complete identity of an individual product and of identifying its similarity with other products. It may consist of a brief, systematic combination of letters, numerals, and symbols. committee stage  The point at which the document is submitted as a committee draft (CD) to the National Committees for comment (IEC). conformity assessment  An activity or set of activities that determines directly or indirectly whether relevant local product requirements have been fulfilled. Typical forms of conformity assessment include testing, inspection, assessment, auditing, registration, and certification. consensus  A substantial agreement of those concerned. It implies that no important interested parties are strongly opposed on substantive grounds, or alternatively, that any opposition is in a small minority and the changes required to effect agreement by this minority would lead to substantive disagreement by the majority. Consensus implies that all disagreements have been given careful consideration and all reasonable attempts have been made for their resolution. designation  A definite and distinguishing name or symbol given to a product or to a group of functionally similar products or to an abstract matter. It emphasizes the group similarity but does not bring out the differences among the various members of the group. dimensional interchangeability  A condition in which the dimensions of two or more products are such that one can physically replace another in a given application. dimensional standard  A standard whose main content is dimensions and sizes of a product or group of products. e.ballot  A “letter ballot” or equivalent that is conducted electronically (e.g., via e-mail). enquiry stage  A point before the approval stage where the bilingual Committee Draft for Vote (CDV) is submitted to all national committees for a 5-month voting period. It is the last stage at which technical comments can be taken into consideration (IEC). functional interchangeability  A condition where the characteristics of two or more products are such that they are able to perform the same functions. guide  A standards document that provides alternative information which comprises good engineering practice. Guides may contain application information for use of products and may be tutorial in nature. The user should be cautioned that the use of the word “guide” in the title of a document does not guarantee that the document is in fact nonmandatory. There are many governmental regulatory guides which in fact set forth mandatory requirements. Conversely, many documents that are differently titled are in fact guides. harmonization  The act of coordinating requirements from multiple standards (e.g., multiple countries or multiple SDO’s standards) and copublishing the resulting document.

25_Santoso_Sec25_p1575-1608.indd 1585

21/11/17 11:16 AM

1586  SECTION TWENTY-FIVE

harmonization committee (or task force)  A group of individuals responsible for technically developing the proposed draft of the harmonized standard. The group typically consists of a representative of each involved country (or SDO), the secretariat, and the chair. interface standard  A standard whose main purpose is to ensure coordination between systems. international standard  A standard that has been adopted by a recognized international standards body (such as IEC or ISO). joint publication  A standard that has been submitted through the standards development process of two or more SDOs and is published separately by all involved SDOs. A joint publication may also be referred to as a harmonized or copublished standard, or if the SDOs represent different countries, as a binational or trinational standard. letter ballot  A ballot used in standards development to determine agreement on a draft standard, or to generate comments that will be instrumental in developing a document on which consensus agreement can be achieved. Such ballots provide for affirmative and negative votes. Negative votes, however, must be accompanied by reasons in sufficient detail to enable the writers of the document to determine what steps need to be taken in revision to change the vote from negative to affirmative. The primary advantage of a letter ballot is that it provides adequate time for the recipients to review thoroughly the document that is subject to ballot. marking  The action and the result of stamping, inscribing, printing, or labeling marks, symbols, letters, or numerals on a product or its package for the purposes of identifying the product. may  An operative verb used in a standards document which identifies a possible means for satisfying a requirement. For example, several alternative procedures may be indicated for measuring a particular characteristic or phenomenon, and the selection of the most suitable procedure is left to the user of the document. national standard  A standard that has been adopted by a recognized national standards body (such as ANSI), or a standard that is in effect recognized and used nationally in preference to other documents. O-member  An observer member of a technical committee who has the right, but not the obligation, to submit comments and attend meetings (IEC). performance characteristic  A characteristic of a product which determines the product’s suitability for a specific application. P-member  A participating member of a technical committee who is obliged to contribute to meetings and vote at all stages (IEC). preliminary stage  Projects envisaged for the future but not yet ripe for immediate development, or preliminary work, such as better definition of a project for new work, data collection, or round-robin tests necessary to develop standards, which is not part of the standardization process (IEC). preparatory stage  The phase during which a working draft (WD) of a document is prepared (IEC). product standard  A standard containing requirements to be met by a product or group of products, usually including, directly or by reference to other standards, all or some of the following elements: dimensions, performance characteristics, other characteristics, and test methods. proposal stage  A proposal for new work originated from industry via a National Committee, communicated to the members of a technical committee or subcommittee with a form. A simple majority vote takes place within 3 months; if the result is positive and the minimum number of experts (4 or 5 depending on committee size) are nominated by the P-members that approved the proposal, it is included in the work program (IEC). publication stage  The period after approval of an FDIS that ends with the publication of the international standard, normally within 1.5 months. During this stage, minor editorial changes can be made to the final text (IEC).

25_Santoso_Sec25_p1575-1608.indd 1586

21/11/17 11:16 AM

STANDARDS IN ELECTROTECHNOLOGY, TELECOMMUNICATIONS, AND IT   1587 

rating  A characteristic of a product which is determined in an arbitrary, yet consistent, manner, based on the intended function of the product. recommended practice  A standards document that provides information on good engineering practice. Such documents may contain application information for use of products. registration authority  A body given the authority for maintaining lists of codes under standards and issuing new codes to those wishing to register them. safety standard  A standard whose primary purpose is to ensure the safety of people and property. SDO  Standards Developing Organization. secretariat  An organization that assumes the responsibility for providing administrative oversight of a standards committee’s activities and assures compliance with all applicable procedures. self-certification  An attestation by a manufacturer or supplier of a product or service that it meets the requirements of a relevant standard. shall  An operative verb used in a standards document which indicates a mandatory requirement that must be specifically complied with for conformance to the document. should  An operative verb used in a standards document which indicates a problem area that must be resolved and specifies a requirement, compliance with which resolves the problem. In this sense, the verb “should” can be read as “shall.” Alternatively, it is allowable under the document to use some other method which can be proved to resolve adequately the condition or problem area addressed. In some cases, it is also possible to demonstrate clearly that the condition or problem area addressed does not in fact exist, or apply to the product or circumstance in a specific instance. simplification  A form of standardization consisting of the reduction of the number of types of products within a definite range to that number which is adequate to meet prevailing needs at a given time. specification  A standards document that specifies all the characteristics and conditions to be met by a product or service to be supplied to the purchaser. Such a document may refer to other standards, selecting among the specific allowable options. A specification is intended to be a complete purchasing document. sponsor  The group (e.g., a technical committee) that assumes responsibility for the development and/or maintenance of a standard. standard  A documented agreement containing technical specifications or other precise criteria to be used consistently as rules, guidelines, or definitions of characteristics to ensure that materials, products, processes, and services are fit for their purpose. standardization  An activity aimed at an increase of order, giving solutions for recurring problems in the spheres of scientific, technological, and economic activity. Generally it consists of the processes of formulating, issuing, and implementing standards. technical specification  Similar to an international standard in that it is normative in nature and developed according to consensus procedures, except that the final vote is taken at the draft technical specification (DTS) stage immediately following the committee draft (CD) stage (IEC). terminology standard  A standard containing exclusively terms and their definitions. test standard  A standard containing test methods which may be combined with other requirements related to testing, such as sampling, use of statistical methods, and sequence of tests. third-party certification  An attestation by a recognized, technically qualified, independent organization that a product or service supplied by others meets the requirements of a relevant standard. Such certification may be based on inspections and tests conducted by the certifying organization, or on supervision, monitoring, or auditing by the organization of such tests which may be conducted by others. The tests may be performed by the manufacturer or supplier of the service or product while being witnessed or audited by the certifier.

25_Santoso_Sec25_p1575-1608.indd 1587

21/11/17 11:16 AM

1588  SECTION TWENTY-FIVE

trial-use  A publication (standard, recommended practice, or guide) that is effective for not more than 2 years, during which time comments and criticisms from a broad constituency are sought. In the absence of comments during the trial-use period, the document is subject to automatic approval on recommendation of the sponsor. unification  A form of standardization in which two or more specifications are combined into one in such manner that the products obtained are interchangeable in use.

25.6  ISO 9000 AND ISO 14000 STANDARDS ISO 9000 and ISO 14000 Overview.  Unlike the vast majority of ISO standards which are highly specific, ISO 9000 and ISO 14000 are generic families of standards and guidelines relating to management systems. When introduced in 1987 and 1997, ISO 9000 and ISO 14000, respectively, introduced standards to a much broader business community (i.e., beyond organizations in the field of engineering and science only) than did any standards published previously. ISO 9000 is concerned primarily with quality management systems, while ISO 14000 is concerned mostly with environmental management systems. In the context of the standards, quality management means what an organization does to conform to its customers’ requirements; environmental management means what an organization does to minimize harmful effects on the environment caused by its activities. Neither standard is a product standard, and organizations such as law firms, consulting engineers, or standards developers can become ISO 9000–certified. The reason for this is that both ISO 9000 and ISO 14000 are concerned with the way an organization goes about its work (i.e., the process), rather than the direct result of the work (e.g., a product or a service). (For additional information visit the ANSI, ASQ, ISO, and NIST websites listed at the end of this section.) ISO 9000 History.  In 1959, the U.S. Department of Defense (DoD) established a quality management program designated as MIL-Q-9858, which was later revised to MIL-Q-9858A. NATO essentially adopted the provisions of MIL-Q-9858A in 1968, and published them in Allied Quality Assurance Publication 1 (AQAP-1). In 1970, the U.K. Ministry of Defense adopted the provisions of AQAP-1 when it published its Management Programs Defence Standard DEF/STAN 05-8. In 1979, the British Standards Institution (BSI) developed the first commercial quality management system standard, BS 5750. It was from all of these documents, and BS 5750, in particular, that ISO created the ISO 9000 standards family of documents (the base standards of which are shown next). When Countries Adopt ISO 9000.  By 1992, the European Economic Community (EEC) and 56 countries had adopted ISO 9000. The EEC and other countries assigned numbers to the adopted ISO 9000 standards according to their own national standards numbering system. In the United States, the ISO 9000 series was adopted as ANSI/ASQ Q9000 in 1987. The ANSI/ASQ Q9000 series is essentially identical to the ISO 9000 series with the exception that the text incorporates customary American English language and spelling. Some other examples of adoption of the ISO 9000 series are the EEC as the European Norm (EN) 29000 series, the United Kingdom as BS 5750 Parts 0 to 3, Pakistan as PS 3000-3004 series, Tanzania as TZS 500-504, and China as GB/T 10300.1–10300.5. Certification.  ISO does not itself certify conformity to ISO 9000. This is done by independent certification bodies in different countries. There is also no “official” database of entities certified to ISO 9000. ISO 9000.  This standard, entitled Quality Management Systems—Fundamentals and Vocabulary, explains fundamental quality concepts. Additionally, it defines terms and provides guidance on selecting, using, and tailoring the standards in the series.

25_Santoso_Sec25_p1575-1608.indd 1588

21/11/17 11:16 AM

STANDARDS IN ELECTROTECHNOLOGY, TELECOMMUNICATIONS, AND IT   1589 

ISO 9001.  This standard, entitled Quality Management Systems—Requirements, is the most comprehensive standard in the series. It addresses all the elements in design, development, and so on and provides requirements for quality planning. ISO 9002.  Superseded by the 2000 Edition of ISO 9001. ISO 9003.  Superseded by the 2000 Edition of ISO 9001. ISO 9004.  This standard, entitled Quality Management Systems—Guidelines for Performance Improvements, provides guidance for developing and implementing an internal quality system. Since their introduction, the number of standards in the ISO 9000 and ISO 14000 families has grown to more than 40 documents. In 2004, ISO 90003 was introduced which addresses guidelines for the application of ISO 9001 to computer software.

25.7  INTERNATIONAL ORGANIZATIONS The International Electrotechnical Commission.  The IEC, a nongovernmental body located in Geneva, Switzerland, is the world organization that develops and publishes international standards for electrotechnology and related technology. Its membership is limited to countries. Today, the IEC membership consists of 82 participating countries, including all the world’s major trading countries (see Table 25-1). Full membership (presently at 60) in the IEC allows the country to participate in TABLE 25-1  Member Countries of the IEC Albania* Algeria Argentina Australia Austria Bahrain* Belarus Belgium Bosnia and Herzegovina* Brazil Bulgaria Canada Chile China Colombia Croatia Cuba* Cyprus* Czech Republic Democratic People’s Republic of Korea* Denmark Egypt Estonia* Finland France Georgia* Germany Greece

Hungary Iceland* India Indonesia Iran Iraq Ireland Israel Italy Japan Jordan* Kazakhstan* Kenya* Republic of Korea Latvia* Libya Libian Arab Jamahiriya Lithuania* Luxembourg Macedonia* (former Yugoslav Rep. of) Malaysia Malta* Mexico Montenegro* Morocco* Netherlands New Zealand Nigeria* Norway

Oman Pakistan Republic of the Philippines Poland Portugal Qatar Romania Russian Federation Saudi Arabia Serbia Singapore Slovakia Slovenia South Africa Spain Sri Lanka* Sweden Switzerland Thailand Tunisia* Turkey Ukraine United Arab Emirates United Kingdom United States of America Vietnam*

*Associate member.

25_Santoso_Sec25_p1575-1608.indd 1589

21/11/17 11:16 AM

1590  SECTION TWENTY-FIVE

all international standardization activities. Participation of a country is by a national committee. Each national committee agrees to open access and balanced representation from all electrotechnical interests in its country (i.e., public and private). A country may also become an associate member (presently 22), which allows for limited participation in the IEC. Associate members have observer status at all IEC meetings, but have no voting rights. The mission of the IEC is to promote, through its members, international cooperation on all questions of electrotechnical standardization and related matters, such as the assessment of conformity to standards, in the fields of electricity, electronics, and related technologies, including magnetics and electromagnetics, electroacoustics, telecommunication, energy production and distribution, terminology and symbols, measurement and performance, dependability, design and development, safety, and the environment. The work of the IEC is carried out by more than 10,000 experts worldwide who participate on more than 175 technical committees and subcommittees, and more than 1100 working groups, project teams, and maintenance teams. All IEC publications are bilingual (English and French). Certain documents have also been translated into Spanish. The Russian Federation National Committee develops Russian-language editions of IEC documents. English, French, and Russian are the three official languages of the IEC; however, in all bodies of the IEC other than the Council, discussions may be held in English and/or French, following agreement of the delegates. Standards developed by the IEC follow the procedures in the ISO/IEC Directives, published jointly by both organizations and administered by the Joint Technical Program Committee (JTPC). These directives are published in two parts. Part 1 covers the procedures for the technical work. Part 2 covers drafting and presentation of international standards. These common procedures were adopted by ISO/IEC in recognition of the need to develop timely and cost-effective international standards. The joint ISO/IEC Committee JCT 1, Information Technology develops and maintains its own procedures. All of these procedures may be accessed on each organization’s website. Figure 25-1 is an organization chart for the IEC. The Council, which is a “general assembly” of committees, is the supreme authority of the IEC and sets policy, financial objectives, and strategy.

Management advisory committees

IEC Council (Full member national committees)

Executive committee (IEC officers)

Council board

Marketing strategy board (MSB)

Standardization management board (SMB)

Special working groups

Technical committees, technical advisory committees, industry sector boards, strategy groups

Conformity assessment board (CAB)

Central office (The executive)

CA Schemes B working groups, IECEE, IECEx, IECQ

FIGURE 25-1  IEC structure and management.

25_Santoso_Sec25_p1575-1608.indd 1590

21/11/17 11:16 AM

STANDARDS IN ELECTROTECHNOLOGY, TELECOMMUNICATIONS, AND IT   1591 

The Council delegates the management of all IEC work to the Council Board. The responsibility for standards and conformity assessment is assumed by the Standardization Management Board and Conformity Assessment Board, respectively. In the areas of standards and conformity assessment, the IEC works closely with other international organizations such as the ISO, WTO, and ITU. It also has relationships with governmental agencies and regional standardization organizations. For example, an agreement between IEC and CENELEC ratified in 1996, known as the Dresden Agreement, addresses common planning of new work and parallel IEC/CENELEC voting. Other standards organizations may interface with the IEC as liaisons. For example, the IEEE is recognized as a Class D liaison to the IEC. International Organization for Standardization.  Like the IEC, ISO is a nongovernmental body, located in Geneva, Switzerland, that is a worldwide federation of national standard bodies. ISO is the world’s largest developer of standards, publishing approximately 18,000 documents. Its membership is limited to countries and, at present, 163 countries are members of ISO. The member body of a country to ISO is the national body “most representative of standardization in its country,” and only one body in each country can be admitted to membership in ISO. So, for example, ANSI is the ISO member from the United States, Standards Council of Canada is the ISO member from Canada, Standards Australia is the ISO member from Australia, and DIN is the ISO member from Germany. ISO has two other categories of membership for countries. The first is correspondent member, for countries which do not yet have a fully developed national standards activity; the second is subscriber member, for countries with very small economies. ISO likes to think of its documents as international agreements that are published as international standards. Some might note an apparent inconsistency between the short form of the organization’s name, specifically, ISO and its official title. That is because the short form of the name is not an acronym as many believe, but rather a word ISO derived from the Greek isos meaning equal. On this basis, the connection between “standard” and “equal” is easy to understand. The mission of ISO is essentially to promote the development and standards-related activities in the world with a view to facilitating the international exchange of goods and services, and to developing cooperation in the spheres of intellectual, scientific, technology, and economic activity. The scope of ISO’s work is not limited to any particular field, except that electrotechnology is the responsibility of the IEC and information technology is carried out by JTC 1 (a joint committee of ISO/IEC). Among the documents that affect those in electrotechnology that ISO is responsible for is the universal system of measurements, known as SI (Système International d’Unités) units, which are described in a series of 14 international standards. The work of ISO is carried out by thousands of experts worldwide who participate on more than 1100 technical committees and subcommittees, and more than 2400 working groups. An organization chart for ISO is shown in Fig. 25-2. ISO cooperates with other international bodies such as the IEC and ITU, with regional standardization organizations and is building a strategic partnership with the WTO. ISO also has liaisons with over 700 entities worldwide that are interested in specific aspects of its standardization work. All ISO publications are bilingual (English and French) and are developed following the ISO/IEC directives. The International Telecommunication Union.  The ITU, unlike the IEC and ISO, is part of the United Nations (UN), and its members are governments. It is located in Geneva, Switzerland and has 12 regional and area offices around the world. Today the ITU has 193 member states (i.e., countries) and approximately 700 private-sector entities. The ITU is an organization “within which governments and the private sector coordinate global telecom networks and services.” It is the leading publisher of telecommunication and information technology, regulatory, and standards information. The governing bodies of the ITU are shown in Fig. 25-3. The Plenipotentiary Conference, held every 4 years (most recently in 2014, in the Republic of Korea), has the responsibility to determine the structural and operating changes necessary in the ITU to effectively influence and affect the development of information and communication technologies (ICTs) worldwide.

25_Santoso_Sec25_p1575-1608.indd 1591

21/11/17 11:16 AM

1592  SECTION TWENTY-FIVE

FIGURE 25-2  The ISO organization. (Legend: CASCO—Committee on Conformity Assessment; COPOLCO—Committee on Consumer Policy; DEVCO—Committee on Developing Country Matter.) Solid lines indicate Reporting/responsibility and dashed lines indicate Advisory.

Plenipotentiary Conference

Council

Radiocommunication Sector (ITU-R)

Telecommunication Standardization Sector (ITU-T)

Telecommunication Development Sector (ITU-D)

World Conferences on International Telecommunications FIGURE 25-3  Governing bodies of the ITU.

25_Santoso_Sec25_p1575-1608.indd 1592

21/11/17 11:16 AM

STANDARDS IN ELECTROTECHNOLOGY, TELECOMMUNICATIONS, AND IT   1593 

Joint Technical Committee 1 on Information Technology.  In recognition of the broad scope and applicability of international standards in the field of information technology, ISO and the IEC approved an agreement in 1987 that formed a joint committee, known as JTC 1 to carry out this work. Membership in JTC 1, like ISO and IEC, is limited to countries; its publications are bilingual (English and French). JTC 1 has 32 member countries (P-members) and 63 observer countries (O-members). It has 20 subcommittees and 4 working groups and an Advisory Group that accomplish its work, and even though it is part of the ISO/IEC, its website is contained on the ISO website. The International Committee on Illumination.   The International Committee on Illumination (CIE), located in Wien (Vienna), Austria, is “an organization devoted to worldwide cooperation and exchange of information on all matters relating to the science and art of light and lighting, color and vision, photobiology and image technology.” Its short form, CIE, is an acronym from its French title, Commission Internationale de l’Eclairage. The subjects covered by CIE in the fields of light and lighting include vision, photometry, colorimetry, application of light both indoors and out, environmental effects, aesthetic effects, and means for the production and control of light and radiation. The spectrum of light covered is both natural and synthetic over the ultraviolet, visible, and infrared regions. CIE also addresses the optical, visual, and metrological aspects of the processing and reproduction of images using all types of analogous and digital imaging devices, storage media, and imaging media. Participation in CIE is like that of other international organizations, by national committee, with 37 countries represented at present. In addition to its own publications, the CIE has published standards jointly with IEC (e.g., the IEC/CIE International Lighting Vocabulary) and ISO. The Internet Society.  The ISOC, located in Reston, Va. (U.S.A.), is a nonprofit, nongovernmental, international organization. It was formed to provide an institution home for the Internet Standards process, as well as to provide financial support for the process. It provides the leadership for addressing issues that affect the future of the Internet and it is the organizational home for the groups responsible for Internet infrastructure standards. The ISOC also acts as a global clearinghouse for Internet information and education and facilitates and coordinates Internet-related efforts around the world. The primary organization supported is the Internet Engineering Task Force (IETF), which since its inception had been supported primarily from research supporting agencies of the U.S. government. The combined efforts of the ISOC and IETF have formed and maintained the foundation for all modern networks and Internet products and services. The ISOC also charters the Internet Assigned Numbers Authority (IANA) as the central clearing house to assign and coordinate unique parameter values for Internet protocols. Today, the ISOC has more than 150 organizational members in more than 180 countries. The ISOC also encourages individual memberships. The World Trade Organization.  The WTO, located in Geneva, Switzerland, is an intergovernmental organization and is the only international organization involved in the rules of trade between nations. The WTO is a place where member governments can go to try to resolve trade problems that are between them. The main decision-making bodies are councils and committees consisting of the WTO’s entire membership. The authority of the WTO comes from agreements, which are the legal ground rules for international trade and commerce policy. These agreements have three main objectives: “to help trade flow as freely as possible; to achieve further liberalization gradually through negotiation; and to set up an impartial means for settling disputes.” Prior to the establishment of the WTO, the GATT had governed international trade and commerce since 1948. The GATT itself was initially an agreement that was provisional. It later became an international organization created to support the agreement but was not recognized in law as an international organization; however, the GATT (i.e., the agreement) has been incorporated into the WTO agreements. Unlike the GATT, which only dealt with trade in goods, the WTO agreements deal with other issues such as copyright, trademarks, patents, industrial designs, and trade secrets. Members of the WTO agree to use international standards (or harmonized standards) to minimize the risk of barriers to trade being introduced by standards. The WTO rules, however, sometimes support

25_Santoso_Sec25_p1575-1608.indd 1593

21/11/17 11:16 AM

1594  SECTION TWENTY-FIVE

maintaining trade barriers when necessary such as in cases where there is a need to protect consumers or to prevent the spread of disease. The World Intellectual Property Organization.  The World Intellectual Property Organization (WIPO), located in Geneva, Switzerland, is one of the United Nation’s specialized agencies. As such, it is an intergovernmental agency, dedicated to “the promotion of innovation and creativity for the economic, social, and cultural development of all countries through a balanced and effective international IP system.” It is responsible for “the promotion and protection of intellectual property throughout the world through cooperation among States, and for the administration of various multilateral treaties dealing with the legal and administrative aspects of intellectual property.” The WIPO currently has 189 member states and administers 26 international treaties. Although the WIPO officially became part of the UN in 1974, its “roots” go back to 1883 when the Paris Convention for the Protection of Industrial Property was the first treaty designed to protect intellectual creations through patents and trademarks. Protection of copyrights was added in 1886 with the Bern Convention for the Protection of Literacy and Artistic Works. These groups united in 1893 to form what became the WIPO in 1970.

25.8  REGIONAL ORGANIZATIONSe European Committee for Electrotechnical Standardization.  CENELEC, located in Brussels, Belgium, is a not-for-profit organization and has been officially recognized as the European Standards Organization in its field by the EC in Directive 83/189 EEC. Its membership is made up of national committees from 33 countries. Sixteen additional national committees from Eastern Europe, the Balkans, Northern Africa, and the Middle-East work in CENELEC as affiliates. CENELEC has entered into agreements with European associations and federations (currently three) that give them a status of “cooperating partners” and also offers a special partnership status PSB (partner standardization body) to countries outside of Europe. In 2009, it introduced the Technical Liaison Partnership to organizations active in rapidly evolving and innovative market segments. Thousands of technical experts are involved in the development of its standards in more than 300 technical bodies, which are identified as European Norms (ENs) or Harmonization Documents (HDs). At the end of 2010, CENELEC had more than 5800 active standards. ENs in the field of information technology are developed and published jointly with the European Commission for Standardization (CEN). In developing standards, it is the policy of CENELEC to use an IEC standard if it exists (approximately 70% of CENELEC standards). Voting in CENELEC is weighted according to the size of the country. Larger countries such as Germany, Italy, France, and the United Kingdom have 29 votes. The smaller countries have three weighted votes depending on size. An affirmative vote must meet two conditions. First, a majority of the national committees must vote affirmative and second, at least 71% of the weighted votes must be affirmative. Once an EN or HD is approved, it is mandatory that it be adopted as a national standard by CENELEC members (this is unlike most standards processes, e.g., those of the IEC, which allow for voluntary adoption). Each CENELEC member is also obligated to withdraw any of its national standards that conflict with an approved EN. On this basis, it is acceptable for a national committee to vote one way in CENELEC (e.g., negative) and another way in IEC (e.g., affirmative). All documents are published in three official languages, English, French, and German; however, any national committee may translate documents into their own language.

e Author’s note: It is not possible, nor practical, to list all the regional and national organizations, and other standards organizations, that are involved with electrotechnology, telecommunications, and information technology standards. For those readers having additional interest, the World Wide Web provides one with an excellent means of researching these organizations. The reader is also referred to the listing of websites at the end of this section.

25_Santoso_Sec25_p1575-1608.indd 1594

21/11/17 11:16 AM

STANDARDS IN ELECTROTECHNOLOGY, TELECOMMUNICATIONS, AND IT   1595 

European Telecommunications Standards Institute.  European Telecommunications Standards Institute (ETSI), located in Sophia Antipolis, France, is a nonprofit organization whose mission is “to produce telecommunications standards for use today and in the future.” It is an open forum (i.e., to European organizations) that brings together over 800 members from 66 countries, representing governments, network operators, manufacturers, service providers, and users across 5 continents. ETSI, unlike CEN and CENELEC, produces voluntary standards, some of which may be adopted by the EC as the technical base for directives or regulations. Promotion of international standardization is favored by ETSI, and as such, it coordinates its activities with international bodies (primarily with the ITU). Voting on standards within ETSI is done according to its Rules of Procedure depending on the issue, with only those that are full and associate members allowed to vote. The voting method is weighted individual voting.

25.9  NATIONAL ORGANIZATIONS The American National Standards Institute.  ANSI, headquartered in Washington, DC with its operation center located in New York City, is a federation founded in 1918 that has been the administrator and coordinator of the U.S. private-sector voluntary standardization for over 90 years. It is a private, not-for-profit organization supported by a number of organizations (i.e., its membership) in the public and private sectors. Today ANSI has more than 1100 members from businesses, professional societies, trade associations, standards developers, consumer and labor organizations, and government agencies and institutions. ANSI’s primary goal is “the enhancement of global competitiveness of U.S. business and the American quality of life by promoting and facilitating voluntary consensus standards and ensuring their integrity.” ANSI also “promotes the use of U.S. standards internationally, advocates U.S. policy and technical positions in international and regional standards organizations, and encourages the adoption of international standards as national standards where these needs meet the needs of the user country.” ANSI is the U.S. member of ISO and, via the United States National Committee (USNC), the IEC. ANSI does not itself develop standards but functions, rather, as a coordinating body for the purpose of encouraging development and adoption of worthwhile standards as American National Standards. It looks to its organizational members, as well as to other concerned organizations, for accomplishing the task of standards development. These development activities may be performed wholly within one of these organizations, or in accredited committees organized and administered by one of these organizations and operating under a set of rules meeting the basic procedures of ANSI. A large number of standards (more than 11,000 in 2015) that are processed for adoption by ANSI are developed, approved, and published by any of more than 240 standards development organizations accredited by ANSI. Organizations wishing to become ANSI accredited must develop and maintain procedures (subject to periodic audit by ANSI) that consistently adhere to a set of ANSI requirements or procedures entitled “ANSI Essential Requirements: Due Process Requirements for American National Standards,”f that govern the consensus development process. Three of the more commonly used methods are described below: 1. Accredited Organization Method. The organization method is most often used by associations and societies that have, among other activities, an interest in developing standards. Although participation on the consensus body is open to all interested parties, members of the consensus body often participate as members in the association or society. The organization’s procedures must meet the general requirements of the ANSI procedures. By choosing to use this method, flexibility is provided, allowing the standards developer to utilize a system that accommodates its particular structure and practices. Available for download from the ANSI website.

f

25_Santoso_Sec25_p1575-1608.indd 1595

21/11/17 11:16 AM

1596  SECTION TWENTY-FIVE

2. Accredited Standards Committee Method. Accredited standards committees are standing committees of directly and materially affected interests created for the purpose of developing a document and establishing consensus in support of this document for submittal to ANSI. The committee method is most often used when a standard affects a broad range of diverse interests or where multiple associations or societies with similar interests exist. The committee serves as a forum where many different interests, without a common membership in an organization or society, can be represented. Accredited standards committees are administered by a secretariat. An accredited standards committee develops and maintains its own operating procedures consistent with the requirements of the ANSI procedures. 3. Accredited Canvass Method. A standards developer using the canvass method identifies, to the extent possible, those who are directly and materially affected by the activity in question and conducts a letter ballot or canvass of those interests to determine consensus on a document. Although canvass developers provide ANSI with internal procedures used in the development of the draft American National Standard, the due process used to determine consensus begins after the draft standard has been developed. Standards developers using the canvass method must use procedures consistent with the requirements of the ANSI procedures. Figure 25-4 is an organization chart for ANSI. Standards work is under the Executive Committee (EC). The EC has responsibilities for American National Standards and U.S. participation in those international standards activities in which ANSI participates. EC is also responsible for maintaining ANSI procedures for standards development, development and coordination of U.S. position in international standards activities, and establishing and supervising such groups as needed to carry out these responsibilities. The approval and withdrawal of American National Standards has been delegated by the EC to the Board of Standards Review (BSR), one of the boards that report to the National Policy Committee. Chinese Standardization Organizations.  China has become a driver on international standardization over the last decade and as one of the largest emerging markets its national standard development activities are of interest to those wishing to enter and succeed in that market. China is very active in most major international and regional standardization organizations. The standards system in China is administered by the General Administration of Quality Supervision, Inspection and Quarantine and headed primarily by the Standardization Administration of the People’s Republic of China. Other governmental and private sector organizations provide a significant amount of additional input and participate in the standards process. Within China there are several organizations officially working on standardization that are outlined below. In addition, China has recently adopted new policies encouraging the formation of consortia or alliances to allow for the rapid introduction of new technologies to be brought to the marketplace. These consortia seem to be still subject to more governmental oversight than consortia from North America or Europe but are a beginning for China and Asia in general to be more nimble in the development of voluntary standards and technologies. China Communications Standards Association.  A major research institute in information and communications technology (ICT) standardization in China. China Communications Standards Association (CCSA) carries out standardization activities throughout China. The organization is composed of a General Assembly and a Council that oversees various committees focusing on standardization in ICT fields. The Ministry of Information Industry is the government body that oversees CCSA activities. The scope of activities for CCSA include standards drafting, interoperability testing, study and surveys on communication standards, and organizing domestic and international exchanges in ICT and standardization. China Electronics Standardization Institute.  A major research institute in ICT standardization in China. China Electronics Standardization Institute (CESI) was founded in 1963 and is an organization involved in standardization in the IT and electronics fields under the Ministry of Industry and Information Technology. Some significant steps that CESI has taken include, taking charge of

25_Santoso_Sec25_p1575-1608.indd 1596

21/11/17 11:16 AM

STANDARDS IN ELECTROTECHNOLOGY, TELECOMMUNICATIONS, AND IT   1597 

ANSI Membership Board of directors Forums Company member Consumer interest

Executive committee Finance committee

Nominating committee

Board officers

Government member

Policy committees

Organizational member

Conformity assessment policy comm.

Intellectual property rights policy committee

National policy committee

International conformity assessment committee Program oversight and standing committees

Appeals board Board of standards review Executive standards council Committee on education

ANSI ISO Council

Int’I. policy comm.

U.S. national committee IEC council

Regional standing committees ANSI ISO forum

Technical management committee

Asia Pacific Europe MidEast Africa Americas

FIGURE 25-4  ANSI organization chart.

centralized management for 51 national technical mirrors to IEC TC/SCs and ISO/IEC JTC 1 SCs. With 11 secretariats of national standardization technical committees, CESI has played a role in disseminating and applying standards in the field of electronics and information technology. The Association for Electrical, Electronic and Information Technologies.  The Association for Electrical, Electronic and Information Technologies (VDE), located in Frankfurt am Main, Germany, is a nonprofit, nongovernmental organizations founded in 1893 and is one of the largest technical and scientific organizations in Europe with more than 34,000 members. In the area of standards in electrotechnology, VDE participates with The German Institute for Standardization (DIN) on the German Commission for Electrical, Electronic and Information Technologies of DIN and VDE (DKE), in both the IEC and CENELEC. The DKE is a joint organization of VDE and DIN; however, VDE is responsible for the administration of DKE. The focus of standardization has shifted in the recent past toward the development of European Standards (based on international standards where possible). Pure national standards activity has dropped to approximately 5% of all work done.

25_Santoso_Sec25_p1575-1608.indd 1597

21/11/17 11:16 AM

1598  SECTION TWENTY-FIVE

VDE also performs certification and testing through the VDE Testing and Certification Institute, which was originally established in 1920 as the VDE Test Center. The VDE Testing and Certification Institute works together with other organizations, such as Underwriters’ Laboratories, Inc. (UL) in the United States and CSA in Canada. Standards Australia.   SA, located in Sydney, Australia, is an independent not-for-profit organization whose primary role is “to meet Australia’s need for contemporary, internationally aligned standards and related services.” SA was originally founded in 1922, as the Commonwealth Engineering Standards Association. In 1929, it became the Standards Association of Australia and was granted a Royal Charter in 1950. Its name officially changed to Standards Australia in 1988. SA represents Australia on both the ISO and the IEC. It is also involved in regional standardization activities and was a founding member of the Pacific Area Standards Congress (PASC). It maintains close ties with Standards New Zealand (SNZ) and has a formal agreement with SNZ for developing and publishing joint standards. At present, approximately 8000 volunteer experts serve on the many committees that are responsible for the development and maintenance of more than 7000 Australian Standards. SA is no longer involved in system and product certification services. Standards Council of Canada.   The SCC, located in Ottawa, Canada, is a federal crown corporation with a mandate to “promote efficient and effective standardization in Canada.” The SCC reports to Parliament through the Minister of Industry. The Governing Council of the SCC consists of 13 members, appointed by the federal government, representing a broad spectrum of stakeholder interests. The council is responsible for setting the strategic direction of the organization, ensuring the fulfillment of the SCC’s mandate, and providing direction on governance matters. Canadian participation in the ISO and the IEC operates under a program under the SCC. The SCC acts as the secretariat for the Canadian National Committee of the ISO (CNC/ISO) and the Canadian National Committee of the IEC (CNC/IEC). There are more than 15,000 Canadian volunteers involved in standardization activities and some 400 organizations have been accredited by the SCC, as SDOs, certification organizations, testing and calibration laboratories, registration organizations, or auditor certifiers and trainers. Of these organizations, four have been accredited as SDOs. These are Bureau de normalization du Québec (BNQ), Canadian General Standards Board (CGSB), Canadian Standards Association (CSA), and Underwriters’ Laboratories of Canada (ULC). These accredited SDOs may submit standards they develop to the SCC for approval as National Standards of Canada (NSC). To become an NSC, a standard must be developed by a process incorporating the fundamental principles, be subject to public scrutiny, be consistent with or incorporate appropriate international and national standards, and be available in the English and French languages. A NSC cannot in any way be presented in such a manner that it will act as a barrier to trade.

25.10  OTHER STANDARDS DEVELOPERS The Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers—Standards Association.  The Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers—Standards Association (IEEE-SA), located in Piscataway, N.J. (U.S.A.), has been responsible for all matters related to standards since its formation in 1998. Actually, the concept of the IEEE-SA was approved by the IEEE Board of Directors in 1996 as part of an overall restructuring of IEEE as it moved into the twenty-first century. Prior to 1998, the IEEE standards program was administered by a Standards Board that reported to the Board of Directors. Under the IEEE-SA, the Standards Board still exists; however, it reports to the IEEE-SA Board of Governors. Standards development in the IEEE, which is the world’s largest professional society, with more than 400,000 members in 160 countries, goes back to 1884, when the AIEE began to develop standards. Even today, the IEEE publishes 25% of all of the world’s literature in electrotechnology.

25_Santoso_Sec25_p1575-1608.indd 1598

21/11/17 11:16 AM

STANDARDS IN ELECTROTECHNOLOGY, TELECOMMUNICATIONS, AND IT   1599 

The IEEE-SA was formed “to provide a major entity that would offer increased responsiveness to the standards interests of IEEE societies and their represented industries.” The IEEE-SA provides services and innovative standards development processes that will keep pace with the needs of users. New classes of membership in the IEEE-SA have been approved, such as corporate membership, which will assist the IEEE-SA in realizing its strategic objectives. At present, the IEEE-SA has more than 30,000 volunteers and more than 200 corporate members participating in its standards activities. The IEEE-SA develops standards in such diverse subjects as broadcasting and communications, electrical practices for large industry (mining, textiles, shipbuilding, transportation, cement plants, and others), instrumentation and measurement, insulators and insulation, magnetics, motors and generators, nuclear power, power apparatus and systems, recording, symbols and units, electrical transmission and distribution, medical devices, electrical practices for commercial buildings and hospitals, emergency power systems, stationary batteries, and information technology. The IEEE-SA also has dual logo agreements and joint standards development agreements for certain standards with the IEC, ISO, and other standards bodies. The IEEE-SA also serves as secretariat for a number of accredited standards committees (ASCs), an example of which is ASC C2, the National Electrical Safety Code® (NESC®).g The National Electrical Manufacturers Association.   National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA), located in Rosslyn, Va. (U.S.A.), is responsible for the development and maintenance of over 500 standards. NEMA is the largest trade organization for manufacturers of electrical products in the United States, and its more than 475 member companies are domestic firms varying in size from small companies to large diversified companies. It develops standards in the technical committees of its eight divisions covering products in such fields as building equipment, power electronics, industrial electrical equipment, insulation, lighting, power equipment, wire and cable, radiation imaging products, and industrial automation. NEMA technical committees comprise engineers designated to represent member companies who are manufacturers of electrical equipment. Since manufacturers are most knowledgeable in the technology associated with their respective products, NEMA committees are highly competent in developing product standards that realistically take into consideration the economic tradeoffs that are essential to practical standardization. Standards are adopted by consensus with final approval given by the NEMA Codes and Standards Committee. NEMA Standards are generated in five classifications: 1. NEMA Standard—defines a commercially standardized product subject to repetitive manufacture. 2. Suggested Standard for Future Design—suggests an approach to future product improvement or development. 3. Authorized Engineering Information—included as part of other NEMA standards to explain data or information. 4. Application guides—provides information for the layperson, inspector, installers, and employees working with a product. 5. White papers—intended for a broad audience, they contain practical tips on subjects like phantom voltages and hazards of working with “hot” electrical equipment. NEMA is a member of and actively participates in ANSI. It administers the work of a number of ASCs, acting as the secretariat. h

The National Fire Protection Association.   The NFPA, located in Quincy, Mass. (U.S.A.), has been active in standards development since its founding in 1896. Working under the direction of g National Electrical Safety Code® is a registered IEEE trademark, and its acronym, NESC®, is a registered IEEE service mark of the IEEE. h National Electrical Code®, Life Safety Code®, and NEC® are registered trademarks of NFPA.

25_Santoso_Sec25_p1575-1608.indd 1599

21/11/17 11:16 AM

1600  SECTION TWENTY-FIVE

its Standards Council, the technical committees of NFPA, composed of organization representatives, personal members, and liaison members from other technical committees, develop standards documents that are then subject to public review as a result of advance publication, and are finally approved at a semiannual meeting of the entire NFPA membership. Although dedicated to fire prevention, NFPA is responsible for a series of electrical standards, the most noted of which are the National Electrical Code (NFPA 70) and the Life Safety Code (NFPA 101). The NEC covers “the installation of electric conductors and equipment in public and private buildings or other structures (including mobile homes, recreational vehicles, and floating buildings), industrial substations, and other premises (such as yards, carnivals, and parking lots). The NEC also covers installation of optical fiber cable.” The NEC is adopted and enforced in all the 50 U.S. states. It is also the basis for electrical codes in several other countries. The first edition of the NEC was published in 1897. The NFPA took over responsibility for the NEC in 1911. The NEC is produced and maintained by volunteers on 19 codemaking panels and a correlating committee that oversees the work of the panels. The Life Safety Code “provides minimum requirements for the design, operation, and maintenance of buildings and other structures for safety to life from fire and similar emergencies.” The Life Safety Code has been adopted by many states. Additionally, all health-care facilities in the United States receiving Medicare or Medicaid funding must comply with the Life Safety Code. The groundwork for the Life Safety Code began in 1913, when the NFPA appointed its first “Committee on Safety to Life.” Its first pamphlet was on exit drills in factories, schools, department stores, and theaters. By 1921, the committee had produced a more comprehensive Building Exit Code. The Life Safety Code is produced and maintained by members of 15 technical committees. i

Underwriters’ Laboratories, Inc. (UL).   UL, located in Northbrook, Ill., (U.S.A.) is the leading third-party certification organization in the United States and the largest in North America. It is an independent, not-for-profit organization, founded in 1894, whose mark is recognized throughout the world as a symbol of safety. It has expanded its business to focus on five areas, namely, product safety, environmental, life and health, university, and verification services. UL maintains and operates laboratories for testing devices, systems, and materials with relation to public safety. Products so tested and meeting its requirements are eligible for UL “listing.” UL maintains an inspection and follow-up program in factories where UL-listed devices are manufactured. UL representatives conduct in-factory and in-the-field inspections of manufacturers’ procedures for assuring production compliance with UL requirements. Such requirements appear in appropriate UL Standards for Safety, which are developed by UL under procedures that involve consultation with industry and government experts and consumers, among others. The majority of insurance underwriters in the United States, and many federal, state, and municipal authorities, either accept or require listing or classification by UL as a condition of their recognition of devices, systems, and materials having a bearing upon life and fire hazards. UL is divided into several engineering departments, each dealing with distinct and separate subjects as follows: electrical heating, air conditioning, and refrigeration; casualty and chemical hazards; burglary protection and signaling; fire protection; and marine. Each department has prepared standards for systems, materials, and appliances. UL publishes (lists) the names of companies who have demonstrated the ability to provide products conforming to its requirements. Listing authorizes the manufacturer to use the laboratories’ listing mark (classification marking, recognition marking, or certificate) on the listed products. UL submits its standards to ANSI for adoption as American National Standards. UL is active in international standards development and product certification, and is a registrar for quality systems for various systems, including ISO 9000. UL acquired the Danish National Testing and Certification Organization (DEMKO) in July 1996 from the kingdom of Denmark, making it a wholly owned subsidiary of UL. This acquisition has enabled direct European certification of products to customers worldwide. In 2011 UL acquired the quality assurance business of STR Holdings, i

Underwriters’ Laboratories, Inc.® and its acronym, UL®, are registered trademarks of Underwriters’ Laboratories.

25_Santoso_Sec25_p1575-1608.indd 1600

21/11/17 11:16 AM

STANDARDS IN ELECTROTECHNOLOGY, TELECOMMUNICATIONS, AND IT   1601 

Inc., allowing UL to complement its existing expertise and to provide a complete suite of QA services focused on consumer products. UL is responsible for the development and maintenance of more than 1000 safety standards, the evaluation of more than 19,000 products, and more than 5700 registrations to a management system standard. In 2004, UL estimated that approximately 19 billion products enter the marketplace each year bearing a UL mark.

25.11  U.S. GOVERNMENT REGULATORY STANDARDS BODIES U.S. Government Policy on Voluntary Standardization.  In 1995 the National Technology Transfer and Advancement Act (NTTAA) codified pre-existing polices on the development and use of standards in Circular A-110 and assigned to NIST a coordinating role in conformity assessment activities. In January 2016, the U.S. Office of Management and Budget published an new circular OMB Circular A-119 “Federal Participation and Use of Voluntary Consensus Standards and in Conformity Assessment Activities.” The revision to the Circular was in part to provide guidance for Federal agencies to meet the U.S. strategic objectives for Federal engagement in standards. The Circular applies to all agencies and agency representatives who use standards or conformity assessment and/or participate in the development of standards. The NTTAA and A-119 note that all Federal agencies “must use voluntary consensus standards in lieu of government unique standards in their procurement and regulatory activities except where inconsistent with law or otherwise impractical.” The revision also stressed the importance of coordination and harmonization with international standardization efforts. The comments in the proceeding for this revision, and the text of the circular itself demonstrate the continued value of standardization to the U.S. government and in the U.S. market. Below is a brief discussion of some of the major U.S. regulators The U.S. Consumer Products Safety Commission.  The Consumer Products Safety Commission (CPSC) is an independent federal regulatory agency that was created by Congress in 1972, in the Consumer Products Safety Act. The mission of the CPSC is to “protect the public against unreasonable risks of injury and death from thousands of types of consumer products under the agency’s jurisdiction.” The CPSC has jurisdiction over approximately tens of thousands of consumer products. There are some exceptions such as motor vehicles, trucks, motorcycles, tires, and car seats, which are covered by the Department of Transportation; foods, drugs, radiation, medical devices, veterinary medicines, and cosmetics, which are covered by the Food and Drug Administration (FDA); pesticides and fungicides, which are covered by the Environment Protection Agency; radioactive materials, which are covered under the Nuclear Regulatory Commission (NRC); and alcohol, tobacco, ammunition, and firearms, which are covered by the Department of the Treasury. Jurisdiction of amusement rides is governed by the states. The CPSC works to reduce the risk of death and injury to consumers by developing voluntary standards with industry, and issuing and enforcing mandatory standards. If no feasible standard would adequately protect the public, the CPSC can ban a product. It can also require a recall of products to arrange for their repair. The CPSC also conducts research on potential product hazards and sponsors consumer educational activities (e.g., through the media). All work related to standards or regulations are published in the Federal Register. Initially, notice of the proposed standards or regulation is published for comment. Final regulations are also published in the Federal Register. The U.S. Environmental Protection Agency.  The Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) is an independent federal agency created by Congress in 1970. Its mission is “to protect human health and the environment.” The EPA develops regulations and has additional responsibilities for enforcement of these regulations.

25_Santoso_Sec25_p1575-1608.indd 1601

21/11/17 11:16 AM

1602  SECTION TWENTY-FIVE

The EPA, like other U.S. government agencies, follows a prescribed rulemaking process. The U.S. Congress establishes these requirements to support the development of quality rulemaking and protect the rights of those affected by the rules. Examples of these requirements include the Administrative Procedure Act, the Regulatory Flexibility Act, the Unfunded Mandates Reform Act, the Paperwork Reduction Act, and the National Technology Transfer and Advancement Act. The five stages of rulemaking are 1. Prerulemaking—actions to determine whether the agency should initiate rulemaking 2. Proposed rules 3. Final rules 4. Long-term actions—prerulemaking, proposed rules, and final rules expected to be published beyond the next 12 months 5. Completed actions—actions that are promulgated and published or actions that are no longer being considered Comments from interested parties are encouraged during the rulemaking process. All rulemaking activities are published in the Federal Register. The U.S. Federal Communications Commission.  The Federal Communications Commission (FCC) is an independent U.S. government agency established in 1934 by Congress in the Communications Act of 1934. It “regulates interstate and international communications by radio, television, wire, satellite and cable in all 50 states, the District of Columbia and all U.S. territories.” The FCC is organized in bureaus and offices, and the official statement of the FCC actions is called an order. Although there are 14 bureaus and offices, most of the FCC’s documents are issued by 7 major regulatory bureaus or offices. When the FCC considers a change to its regulations, it issues a Notice of Proposed Rule Making. Essentially all documents issued by the FCC since 1994 can be found online through its website. The U.S. Federal Trade Commission.  The FTC deals with issues that touch the economic life of every American in that it enforces federal antitrust and consumer protection laws and seeks to ensure that the nation’s markets function competitively, and are vigorous, efficient, and free of undue restrictions. It is the only federal agency with both consumer protection and competition jurisdiction in broad sectors of the economy. The FTC has enforcement and administrative responsibilities under numerous acts. Its rules are published in Title 16 of the Code of Federal Regulations. The U.S. Food and Drug Administration.  The FDA is one of the oldest federal agencies involved with the protection of consumers. In the area of electrotechnology standards, it is involved with setting standards for medical devices and radiation-emitting products. This work is done under the FDA’s Center for Devices and Radiological Health (CDRH). The CDRH is responsible for “ensuring the safety and effectiveness of medical devices and eliminating unnecessary human exposure to man-made radiation from medical, occupational, and consumer products.” Products covered in the CDRH’s scope include thousands of medical devices (e.g., pacemakers), videodisplay terminals, microwave ovens, medical x-ray machines, and medical ultrasound devices. National Institute of Standards and Technology.  NIST, which is under the U.S. Department of Commerce, has been involved in the development of standards since its founding in 1901 (then known as the National Bureau of Standards). The documents it produced played a great role in the industrial development of the United States in a broad range of industries, including steel manufacturing, railroads, electric power, and telephone communications. Under NTTAA NIST coordinates federal, state, and local technical standards and conformity assessment activities, as well as coordinating with those in the private sector. NIST has also developed an National Computer Security

25_Santoso_Sec25_p1575-1608.indd 1602

21/11/17 11:16 AM

STANDARDS IN ELECTROTECHNOLOGY, TELECOMMUNICATIONS, AND IT   1603 

Resource Center to coordinate efforts in this important area. In quality systems, it sponsors the Baldridge Performance Excellence Program and the National Voluntary Laboratory Accreditation Program. NIST also develops standards and guidelines for federal computer systems. These documents, known as Federal Information Processing Standards (FIPSs), are approved by the Secretary of Commerce. FIPSs are generally developed only when there are no acceptable industry standards available or there are compelling federal requirements (e.g., security). There are also Federal Standards (FED-STDS) developed for telecommunications; however, these are developed by the National Communications System (NCS) and are approved by the General Services Administration (GSA). The major focus of NIST is on information technologies although NIST has been actively involved in smart grid initiatives in recent years. NIST cooperates with national and international standards organizations, trade associations, consortia, user groups, and so forth to have needed standards developed. The U.S. Nuclear Regulatory Commission.  The NRC is an independent federal agency established by Congress under the Energy Reorganization Act of 1974. Its mission is to regulate the nation’s civilian use of byproduct, source, and special nuclear materials to ensure adequate protection of the public health and safety, the common defense and security, and to protect the environment. Its predecessor was the U.S. Atomic Energy Commission. NRC regulations are issued under the U.S. Code of Federal Regulations (CFR) Title 10, Chapter 1. Typically, rulemaking is initiated by the NRC’s staff; however, any member of the public may petition the NRC to develop, modify, or rescind any regulation. During the rulemaking process, the documents are published in the Federal Register and interested parties are allowed at least one opportunity to comment. In some instances, the NRC will hold meetings and workshops before a proposed rule is drafted to obtain a broad range of input from interested parties. Most often in the area of electrotechnology, the NRC will endorse existing industry standards by issuing a regulatory guide (RG). The RG will describe methods that are acceptable to the NRC for applying the standard. The NRC may also use the RG to make recommendations or guides presented in a standard’s mandatory requirements. The NRC also issues NUREG reports to provide information and expertise to support the NRC’s decision making and to assess potential technical issues. In the area of electrical standards there has been renewed activity as a result of recent applications to build and license new nuclear power generating stations. There has also been significant activity in the area of nuclear generating station security. The U.S. Occupational Safety and Health Administration.  Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA), which is under the U.S. Department of Labor, was established by Congress in 1970 under the Occupational Safety and Health Act to “ensure safe and healthful working conditions for working men and women by setting and enforcing standards and by providing training, outreach, education, and assistance.” OSHA has responsibilities for developing standards and regulations, and enforcement. OSHA may set standards on its own initiative or in response to petitions from state and local governments, employers, labor representatives, standards organizations, or any other interested party. If it is decided to develop a standard, any one of several advisory committees may be tasked with the development. The process is very similar to that for other U.S. government agencies, including notice and comment period for interested parties.

25.12  CONTACTING STANDARDS ORGANIZATIONS There are literally thousands of organizations around the world that are involved in standards development. The World Wide Web (WWW) makes contacting these organizations easier than ever. The following listing is just a small sample of what is out on the Web. Many of the websites listed contain links to the websites of other standards developers.

25_Santoso_Sec25_p1575-1608.indd 1603

21/11/17 11:16 AM

1604  SECTION TWENTY-FIVE

International IEC (International Electrotechnical Commission) 3, rue de Varembé PO Box 131 CH-1211 Geneva 20 Switzerland http://www.iec.ch ISO (International Organization for Standardization) ISO Central Secretariat Chemin de Blandonnet 8 CP 401 1214 Vernier, Geneva Switzerland http://www.iso.org JTC1 (Joint Technical Committee 1 Information Technology)j http://www.iso.org/iso/jtc1_home.html ITU (International Telecommunication Union) Place des Nations CH-1211 Geneva 20 Switzerland http://www.itu.ch

ISOC (Internet Society) 1755 Wiehle Ave. Suite 201 Reston VA 20190-5108 U.S.A. http://www.isoc.org The ISOC also has an office located in Geneva, Switzerland and the address can be found on the website. (At this website the information on the following related groups can be found.) IETF (Internet Engineering Task Force) IESG (Internet Engineering Steering Group) IAB (Internet Architecture Board) IRTF (Internet Research Task Force) ICANN (The Internet Corporation for Assigned Names and Numbers) and IANA (Internet Assigned Numbers Authority) http://www.iana.org NRO (The Numbers Resource Organization) and RIRs (Regional Internet Registries) CIE (International Commission on Illumination) Babenbergerstraße 9/9A 1010 Vienna Austria http://www.cie.co.at

Regional Organizations CEN (European Committee for Standardization) http://www.cen.eu/cen ETSI (European Telecommunications Standards Institute) 650, route des Lucioles Sophia-Antipolis 06560 Valbonne France http://www.etsi.org CENELEC (European Committee for Electrotechnical Standardization) [In 2010, CEN and CENELEC created a joint CEN-CENELEC Management Centre (CCMC) that replaced the CEN Management Centre and the CENELEC Central Secretariat.]

CCMC 4th Floor Avenue Marnix 17 B-1000 Brussels Belgium http://www.cenelec.eu [At this website a considerable number of contacts are provided for other regional organizations such as the European Computer Manufacturers Association (ECMA), as well as the national standards bodies for member countries such as the National Standards Authority of Ireland (NSAI), and affiliate countries.]

j

JTC1 is a joint committee of both the ISO and the IEC. The ITU has an official liaison to the committee.

25_Santoso_Sec25_p1575-1608.indd 1604

21/11/17 11:16 AM

STANDARDS IN ELECTROTECHNOLOGY, TELECOMMUNICATIONS, AND IT   1605 

Selected National Organizations Australia SA (Standards Australia) http://www.standards.org.au Canada CSA (Canadian Standards Association) 178 Rexdale Blvd. Toronto, ON Canada M9W 1R3 http://www.csagroup.org/ SCC (Standards Council of Canada) 600-55 Metcalfe Street Ottawa, ON K1P 6L5 Canada CNC/IEC (Canadian National Committee of the IEC) CNC/ISO (Canadian National Committee of the ISO) http://www.scc.ca France UTE (Union Technique de l’Electricité) http://www.afnor.org

AFNOR (L’Association FranÇaise de Normalisation) http://www.afnor.org

Germany DIN (German Institute for Standardization) http://www.din.de

VDE (The Association for Electrical, Electronic and Information Technologies) DKE (German Commission for Electrical, Electronic and Information Technologies of DIN and VDE) http://www.vde.com/de

Italy CEI (Comitato Elettrotecnico Italiano) http://www.ceiweb.it (Click on English flag for the website in English) United Kingdom BSI (British Standards Institution) BEC (British Electrotechnical Committee) http://www.bsigroup.com

25_Santoso_Sec25_p1575-1608.indd 1605

21/11/17 11:16 AM

1606  SECTION TWENTY-FIVE

United States ANSI (American National Standards Institute) USNC (U.S. National Committee of the IEC) 25 West 43rd Street, 4th Floor New York, NY 10036 U.S.A. http://www.ansi.org (At this website a considerable number of links are provided to websites for standardsdeveloping organizations located in the United States.)

ASC T1 (Accredited Standards Committee T1—Telecommunications) (T1 was retired in 2004 and its work assumed by ATIS.) http://www.atis.org INCITS (InterNational Committee for Information Technology Standards) (Formerly Accredited Standards Committee X3 and NCITS.) http://www.incits.org

Selected Standards-Developing Organizations AAMI (Association for the Advancement of Medical Instrumentation) http://www.aami.org ABMA (American Bearing Manufacturers Association) http://www.americanbearings.org AEIC (Association of Edison Illuminating Companies) http://www.aeic.org AHAM (Association of Home Appliance Manufacturers) http://www.aham.org AIIM (Formerly Association for Information and Image ManagementThe EMC Association) http://www.aiim.org ANS (American Nuclear Society) http://www.ans.org API (American Petroleum Institute) http://api.org ARINC (Aeronautical Radio, Inc.) ARINC is now part of Rockwell Collins http://www.rockwellcollins.com/ ASA (Acoustical Society of America) http://acousticalsociety.org ASQ (American Society for Quality) http://www.asq.org ASTM International http://www.astm.org

25_Santoso_Sec25_p1575-1608.indd 1606

ATIS (Alliance for Telecommunications Industry Solutions) http://www.atis.org EEI (Edison Electric Institute) http://www.eei.org ECIA (Electronic Components Industry Association) [Formed by a merger of the Electronic Components Association (ECA) and the National Electronic Distributors Association (NEDA); standards produced by the former Electronic Industries Alliance (EIA) are maintained by ECIA] www.eciaonline.org TechAmerica [Formed by a merger of the Government Electronics & Information Technology Association (GEIA), American Electronics Association (AeA), Cyber Security Industry Alliance (CSIA), and Information Technology Association of America (ITAA)] www.geia.org JEDEC http://www.jedec.org TIA (Telecommunications Industry Association) http://www.tiaonline.org IS Alliance (Internet Security Alliance) http://www.isalliance.org/

21/11/17 11:16 AM

STANDARDS IN ELECTROTECHNOLOGY, TELECOMMUNICATIONS, AND IT   1607 

Electro (Electro-Federation of Canada) CAMA (Canadian Appliance Manufacturers Association) CEMC (Consumer Electronics Marketers of Canada) EC (Electrical Council) IMR (Installation, Maintenance and Repair Sector Council and Trade Association) http://www.electrofed.com IEEE (Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers) http://www.standards.ieee.org IESNA (Illuminating Engineering Society of North America) http://www.iesna.org ISA (The International Society of Automation) http://www.isa.org IMAPS (International Microelectronics and Packaging Society) http://www.imaps.org ITI (Information Technology Industry Council) http://www.itic.org

NACE (NACE International) http://www.nace.org NEMA (The Association of Electrical Equipment and Medical Imaging Manufacturers) (Includes standards of the Insulated Cable Engineers Association, ICEA) http://www.nema.org NETA (InterNational Electrical Testing Association) http://www.netaworld.org NFPA (National Fire Protection Association) http://www.nfpa.org SAE (SAE International) http://www.sae.org SEMI (Semiconductor Equipment and Materials International) http://www.semi.org/en/ SMPTE (Society of Motion Picture & Television Engineers) http://www.smpte.org UL (Underwriters’ Laboratories, Inc.) http://www.ul.com VITA (VMEbus International Trade Association) http://www.vita.com

U.S. Government CPSC (Consumer Products Safety Commission) http://www.cpsc.gov EPA (Environmental Protection Agency) http://www.epa.gov FCC (Federal Communications Commission) http://www.fcc.gov FDA (Food and Drug Administration) http://www.fda.gov FTC (Federal Trade Commission) http://www.ftc.gov

25_Santoso_Sec25_p1575-1608.indd 1607

NIST (National Institute of Standards and Technology) http://www.nist.gov NRC (Nuclear Regulatory Commission) http://www.nrc.gov NCS (National Communications System) http://www.hhs.gov/ocio/ea/National%20 Communication%20System/ NTIA (National Telecommunications & Information Administration) http://www.ntia.doc.gov OSHA (Occupational Safety and Health Administration) http://www.osha.gov

21/11/17 11:16 AM

1608  SECTION TWENTY-FIVE

Other Organizations CITEL (Inter-American Telecommunication Commission) CITEL Organization of American States 1889 F Street NW, 6th Floor Washington, DC 20006 U.S.A. http://www.citel.oas.org WIPO (World Intellectual Property Organization) 34, chemin des Colombettes CH-1211 Geneva 20 Switzerland http://www.wipo.int

WTO (World Trade Organization) World Trade Organization Centre William Rappard Rue de Lausanne 154 CH-1211 Geneva 21 Switzerland http://www.wto.org The World Wide Web Consortium (W3C) In the Americas, contact W3C at: WC3/MIT 32 Vasser Street, Room 32-G515 Cambridge, MA 02139 U.S.A. http://www.w3.org

Webpages of Interest to Those Searching for Standards-Related Information NSSN (National Standards System Network) (A free online information service providing bibliographic information for more than 225,000 approved standards.) http://www.nssn.org New Approach Standardisation in the Internal Market (A website sponsored by CEN, CENELEC, ETSI, the European Commission, and EFTA.) http://www.newapproach.org University of Waterloo—Canada: standards and specifications written by scholarly societies (Provides links to the Internet sites of scholarly societies around the world many of which include standards organizations.) http://www.lib.uwaterloo.ca/society/

25_Santoso_Sec25_p1575-1608.indd 1608

U.S. General Services Administration—Index of U.S. Federal Specifications, Standards and Commercial Items (An alpha numerical listing of federal specifications and standards, including a separate listing of all canceled or superseded federal specifications and standards.) http://www.gsa.gov/portal/content/100847 FDSys—Federal Digital System (Provides online access to official federal government publications, allowing a user to search, browse, and download documents in various formats.) http://www.gpo.gov/fdsys/ World Wide Legal Information Alliance (Provides information on product standards and the law.) http://www.wwlia.org

21/11/17 11:16 AM

INDEX

A/D converter, 73 ABC to DQ transformation, 980 AC-AC converters, 998–999 AC regulator, 999 matrix converters, 998–999 thyristor cyclo-converters, 998 AC commutator motors, 957–958 AC-DC converters (rectifiers), 991–997 controlled thyristor, 994–997 single-phase diode bridge, 992–993 three-phase diode bridge, 994 AC excitation, 128 AC filters, 370 AC regulators, 999 AC slip-ring motor control, 947 Active power, 12, 128, 1405–1406 Acyclic DC generators, 887 Administrative processing, 1522 Administrative support, 1522–1523 Admittance, 9 Admittance matrix, 1092–1096 Agent-based simulation (ABS), 1524, 1538 Aging, magnetic, 128 Air-blast circuit breaker, 711, 733–734 Air circuit breakers, 740 Air-insulated substations, 649–693 arrangements and equipment for, 656–657 bus schemes for, 651–654 buses, 658–664 clearance requirements, 666–668 components of, 656 design for, 650–654 grounding for, 682–688 mechanical and electrical forces, 668–673 protective relaying for, 674–682 reliability of, 654–655 site selection for, 657–658 support structures for, 656–657 surge protection for, 690–693 transformers, 688–690 connections, 688–689 loading practice, 689–690 Air (spark) gaps, 1465–1466 Air switches, 710–711 Alliance for Telecommunications Industry Solutions (ATIS), 1579

Alloys: aluminum, 97, 110 amorphous metal, 146 constant-permeability, 144 copper, 97, 108–109 ductile, 148 fusible, 125–126 Heusler’s, 145 iron-cobalt, 144–145 iron-silicon aluminum, 145 Mn-Al-C alloys, 148 nickel-iron, 143 quench-hardened, 147–148 silicon-iron, 145 silver, 127 temperature-sensitive, 145 Alternating-current generators, 888–914 armature reactions of, 896–897 armature windings of, 900–901 capability diagram of, 897–898 claw pole generators, 913–914 d-q axis transformation of, 892–893 dynamic models of, 904–909 electromagnetics of, 895–896 losses and efficiency of, 902 machine size and utilization of, 893–894 mechanical construction of, 901–902 operation of, 890–891 permanent magnet synchronous generators, 909–910 saturation curves and excitation of, 898–899 testing of, 902–904 topology, 888–890 two-reaction theory of, 892–893 wind turbines generators, 910–912 Aluminum, 109–110 alloys, 97, 103, 110 annealing of, 110 conductors, 101–102 in line conductors, 444 thermal conductivity of, 107 American National Standards Institute (ANSI), 1578, 1595–1596 American wire gage, 112–113 Amorphous metal alloys, 146 Ampere, 2 Ampere-second balance, 967 Ampere-turn, 128 Anchors, 319–321 Anderson’s bridge, 85 Angle, measurement of, 92–93

1609

26_Santoso_Index_p1609-1634.indd 1609

24/11/17 4:49 PM

1610        INDEX

Angular stability, 1108 Anisotropic material, 128 Antialiasing, 72–73 Antiferromagnetic material, 129 Apparent power, 12, 129 Applied voltage dielectric test, 845 Arc-resistant switchgear, 752 Area control error, 1105–1106 Area product method, 1039 Armature loss, 902 Armature-circuit time constants, 886 Armature reactions, 879–881, 896–897 Armor rods, 308–309 Arresters, 431–433, 1474–1476 Asset management, 1521 Association for Electrical, Electronic and Information Technologies (VDE), 1597–1598 Astronomical unit, 7 Australian Competition and Consumer Commission (ACCC), 180–181 Australian Energy Market Commission, 182 Australian Energy Market Operator (AEMO), 182 Australian Energy Regulator, 181 Automated feeder switching systems, 775–778 Automated mapping and facilities management system, 1521 Automated meter reading, 1526, 1536 Automatic generation control (AGC), 1530 Automatic generator shedding, 1233–1236 Autonomic computing, 1547 Autotransformer starters, 1390 Autotransformers, 689, 814 Auxiliary systems, 1007 Backflashover, 1483–1487 BACnet, 504 Balance of plant (BOP), 621, 622 Balanced loads, 401 Banking, 440–441 Base quantities, 2 Basic lightning impulse insulation level, 1429 Basic switching impulse insulation level, 1429 Batteries: charging, 1003–1004 electrochemical, 622–623 flow, 625 lead-acid, 623 nickel-cadmium, 623–624 nickel-metal hydride, 624 sodium, high-temperature, 624 vanadium redox, 625–626 zinc-bromine, 626 Batteries, lithium-ion, 624–625 Beryllium, 111 Bi-positional switch, 964–965 power loss in, 968–969 Bid-based economic dispatch, 1336 Big data, 1544–1546 Bipolar junction transistors (BJTs), 1030, 1031–1036 Black start, 504, 1347 Block offer, 1336

26_Santoso_Index_p1609-1634.indd 1610

Boeing Co., 515 Boost converters, 972–973 Branch circuit design, 1519 Brass, 109 Brazilian Interconnect Power System (BIPS), 190–195 British-American units, 7 Bronze, 109 Brown & Sharp gage, 112 Brownout, 1379 Brushless DC motors, 953, 1000–1001 Buck converters, 969–971 component selection for, 970–971 operation of, 969–970 PWM controls for, 971 Bulk measurement, 87 Bulk-oil circuit breaker, 711 Bundle conductors, 249 Bus protection, 1201–1205 high-impedance differential protection, 1202–1203 low-impedance percentage differential protection, 1203–1204 partial differential protection, 1204–1205 Bus regulation, 417 Butyl rubbers, 171 Cable routing program, 1519 Cables, 111 capacity ratings, 332–333 N-conductor, 112 N-conductor concentric, 112 preformed, 116 primary, 450 secondary, 451 special, 331 submarine, 382, 571–572 underground, 326–334, 458–464 uprating and dynamic ratings, 333–334 CAIDI (customer average interruption duration index), 472 Calibration, 59–66 external networks in, 61–65 of transformers, 70–72 Canadian Standards Association (CSA), 1579 Candela, 2 Candlepower, 13 Capacitance, 9 measurement of, 84 Capacitance current switching, 723–724 Capacitive reactance, 124 Capacitivity, 12 Capacitor current, 967 Capacitor impedance, 1413–1414 Capacitor switching, 1392–1396 Capacitor units, 782–786 Capacitors, 632, 1044–1045 ampere-second balance, 967 application of, 441–443 installations, 441 power factor correction, 441 shunt, 441–442 switching, 798

24/11/17 4:49 PM

INDEX        1611 

Capacity markets, 1361 Carbon steel, 140 Cascaded full bridge converters, 989 Cast iron, 139 Celsius scale, 6 Central African Power Corridor (CAPCO), 227 Ceramic magnet material, 147–148 CGPM base quantities, 2 CGS units, 7–8 Charge rate, 619 Charge-reversal temperature, 1435 Charger, 621 China Communications Standards Association (CCSA), 1596 China Electronics Standardization Institute (CESI), 1596–1597 Chinese Standardization Organizations, 1596 Circuit breakers, 710–742 AC interruption, 716–717 altitude corrections for, 730 DC interruption, 717–718 environmental considerations for, 729 fundamentals of, 712–718 high-voltage: application and selection of, 728–739 construction of, 724–725 rating and capabilities, 721–724 testing and installation of, 726–728 history of development, 710–712 low-voltage: application of, 742 construction of, 740–741 ratings for, 739 protection for, 680–681 ratings for, 729 severe interrupting conditions for, 718–721 closing on fault, 720–721 interruption of capacitive currents, 720 interruption of small inductive currents, 719–720 out-of-phase switching, 718–719 short-line fault, 718 terminal fault, 718 short-circuit duty, 714–715 switching considerations for, 729 symmetrical current basis for, 715–716 total current basis for, 715 tripping facilities, 714 Circuit switchers, 767–775 capacitor switching, 769 definition of, 767 general construction of, 769–771 history of development, 768–769 ratings for, 771–773 reactor switching, 769 selection and application of, 773–775 transformer protective devices, 771 Claw pole generators, 913–914

26_Santoso_Index_p1609-1634.indd 1611

Closed loop scalar control, 951 Cloud computing, 1547–1549 Coercive force, 129 Coercivity, 129 Coincidence factor, 468 Common information model (CIM), 1549–1554 harmonization, 1554 history of, 1550–1552 interoperability tests, 1553–1554 main features of, 1552 packages and profiles, 1552–1553 Common-neutral system, 412–414 4-wire vs. 3-wire systems, 413–414 grounding of neutral, 413 size of primary neutral, 413 telephone circuits and, 414 Community energy storage (CES), 645 Commutating poles, 882 Commutation, 881–883 Compensating windings, 882–883 Complex numbers, 1054–1055 Complex power, 1056–1057 Compound motors, 922–923 Compressed air energy storage, 630–631 Computer applications, 1503–1562 common information model, 1549–1554 cybersecurity, 1557–1562 engineering applications, 1513–1525 administrative support, 1522–1523 design and construction, 1519–1521 distribution planning and analysis, 1517–1519 power market computer simulation, 1523–1525 project management, 1522 system expansion, 1514 transmission planning and analysis, 1514–1517 Internet of Things, 1555–1557 operating applications, 1525–1536 energy management system, 1526–1534 fuel management, 1535 load management, 1536 power plant maintenance, 1535 power plant monitoring and control, 1535 SCADA, 1525–1526 tools for smart grid, 1536–1549 utility information systems, 1507–1509 Computers: configurations, 1509 usage, 1509–1512 Computing support, 1509 Concentrating solar power, 605–609 costs of, 611–613 dish/engine, 608 linear, 605–606 market share for, 613 power tower, 606–608 thermal energy storage, 609 Concentric-lay conductor, 112 Concentric strand, 112 Concrete stack analysis, 1519

24/11/17 4:49 PM

1612        INDEX

Conductance, 9 Conduction current, 9 Conduction current density, 9 Conductivity, 9 Conductivity modulation, 1026–1027 Conductor materials, 95–128 fusible metals and alloys, 125–126 general properties of, 95–96 in line conductors, 444 metal properties, 96–111 Conductors, 96 alternating-current resistance, 122 bundle, 249 bus, 124 capacitive reactance, 124 composite, 125 creep elongation, 286–288 current reversal, 881–882 definition of, 111 effect of stranding, 115–116 elastic limit, 119 elasticity of, 116 electrical, definitions of, 111–125 electrical properties of, 248–252 hollow (expanded), 124–125 inductive reactance, 122–124 insulated, 168–172 internal conductance, 120 line, 444–445 modulus of elasticity, 117–118 permanent elongation due to high tensions, 286 prestressed, 119 resistance of, 119 size designation for, 113 skin effect, 120–121 standard, number of wires in, 114 stranded, 111, 113–114 structure loads and, 278–283 tension limits, 283–286 wire sizes of, 112–113 Young’s modulus for, 118–119 Congestion cost, 1351 Congestion rent, 1351 Congestion revenue rights, 1358–1359 Constant impedance model, 1063 Constant load model, 1063 Constant-permeability alloys, 144 Consumer Products Safety Commission (CPSC), 1601 Consumer surplus, 1332 Contingency analysis, 1517, 1532 Contingency reserves, 1102 Continuous conduction mode (CCM), 974 Continuous current, 722 Contract for differences, 1348–1349 Control performance standards (CPS), 1105–1106 Conversion factors, 29–51 Converter transformers, 369 Converters, capacitor-commutated, 367

26_Santoso_Index_p1609-1634.indd 1612

Convex hull prices, 1341 Copper, 96–98, 102–103, 107, 108 alloys, 97, 108–109 annealing of, 108 density and weight of, 96 hardening and heat-treatment of, 108 in line conductors, 444 Cord, 112 Core geometry method, 1039 Core loss, 129, 902 Corona, 1487 Coulomb, 4 Coupling-capacitor voltage transformer, 68 Coupling coefficient, 9 Critical flashover, 1432 Critical-path method, 1522 Critical temperature, 631 Critical withstand, 1432 Cross-magnetization, 879–880 Crystalline silicon, 599–600 Curie temperature, 129 Current chopping, 719–720 Current density, 9 Current differential protection, 1189–1192 Current-limiting circuit breakers, 740–741 Current-limiting fuses, 762 Current-line acceleration, 925 Current mode control, 980 Current transformer, calibration, 70–71 Currents, 9 capacitor, 967 conduction, 9 continuous, 722 displacement, 9 distortion, 1404–1405 no-load, 811, 845 RMS values of, 1405 short-circuit, 1087–1096 test, 81 Customer average interruption duration index (CAIDI), 1417 Customer average interruption frequency index (CAIFI), 1417 Customer response systems control centers, 1532 Cybersecurity, 1557–1562 cyberintrusions, 1559–1561 in EMS, 1118 goals and objectives of, 1558–1559 grid security exercises, 1562 maturity models, 1562 new tools, 1562 standards, 1561–1562 test beds, 1562 threats, 1558 vulnerabilities, 1558 Damping, 1260–1262 Damping coefficient, 9 Data warehousing, 1528

24/11/17 4:49 PM

INDEX        1613 

Day-ahead markets, 1344–1345 DC-AC converters (inverters), 982–991 multilevel converters, 987–991 single-phase AC synthesis, 982–985 quasi-square wave inverter, 983 single-phase sinusoidal synthesis, 983–985 space vector modulation, 986–987 three-phase AC synthesis, 985–986 DC-DC converters, 969–976 boost converters, 972–973 buck converters, 969–971 flyback converters, 973–974 forward, 975–976 full bridge, 974–975 isolated, 975–976 push-pull, 975–976 DC filters, 371 DC in AC networks, 1374 DC offset, 1380 DC power flow, 1081–1082 DC power supplies, 999–1000 Dead-end clamps, 308 Dead-tank “bulk oil” circuit breakers, 730 Deenergized tap changer, 823 Definitional uncertainty, 57 Deformation, 116 Delta-connected transformers, 689 Delta-delta-connected transformers, 688–689 Delta-star connection, 689 Deltamax, 144 Demagnetization curve, 129 Demagnetizing effect, 880 Demand factor, 467–468 Density, 96 Dialectric loss, 88 Diamagnetic material, 129 Dibutylphthalate, 171 Dielectric constant, 12, 151 Dielectric routine tests, 845–846 Dielectric withstand capability, 722 Dielectrics: circuit analogy of, 150 composite, 156 defined, 148 potential distribution in, 156–157 resistance and resistivity of, 152–154 strength, 157–159 variation with frequency, 154–155 variation with temperature, 155–156 Differential protection, 1196–1198 Digital filters, 74 Digital signal processors (DSPs), 1001–1002 Diode clamped converters, 989 Diode rectifiers, multimodular, 548–549 Diodes, 1026–1027 Dip, 1373 Direct-current drives, 948

26_Santoso_Index_p1609-1634.indd 1613

Direct-current generators, 875–887 applications for, 875 armature reactions, 879–881 characteristics of, 885–886 commutation, 881–883 construction of, 875–876 cooling and ventilation for, 883 design components for, 876–877 general principles for, 877–879 losses and efficiency of, 883–885 special generators, 887 Direct-current motors, 921–926 brushless, 953 classification of, 921–924 losses and efficiency of, 923–924 permanent-magnet, 923 power supplies, 923 speed control for, 926 starters, 925–926 Direct torque control, 951 Directional comparison protection, 1186–1189 Discontinuous conduction mode (DCM), 974 Dispatcher training simulator (DTS), 116–117 Displacement current, 9 Displacement current density, 9 Displacement power factor, 1408 Dissipation factor, 1044–1045 Distortion, 620 Distortion power, 1407 Distortion voltamperes, 1407 Distributed generation: interface, 1008–1011 microgrids and, 1011 Distributed loads, 403 Distribution automation, 394–395, 775, 1534 Distribution construction information system, 1520 Distribution energy resource management system (DERMS), 395 Distribution facilities information system, 1520–1521 Distribution STATCOM, 1018 Distribution systems: application of, 395–396 classification, 395 distribution transformers, 440–441 losses, 469–470 overvoltage protection for, 1490–1492 power flow equations for, 1083–1086 primary, 407–412 Distribution transformers, 814 banking of, 440–441 pole-mounted regulators, 437 single-phase, standard ratings of, 436–437 District loading, 279–280 Diversity factor, 468 Domains, ferromagnetic, 129 Dot product method, 1294–1296 Double O-ring sealing, 699

24/11/17 4:49 PM

1614        INDEX

Doubly fed induction generators (DFIG), 536, 554, 559–560 Drafting, 1520 Drilled shaft foundations, 318–319 Drives: alternating-current (AC), 948–950 direct-current (DC), 948 electric, 1000–1003 switched reluctance motor, 1002–1003 three-phase inverters, 948–950 vector-controlled AC, 1001–1002 Dry-type transformers, 815 Ductile alloys, 148 Ductile cast irons, 140 Duke Energy, 513 Dynamic braking, 1001 Dynamic security assessment, 1300 Dynamic voltage restorer, 1016–1018 Earthwork design, 1519 Economic analysis, 1520 Eddy-current loss, 129 Elastance, 9 Elastic limit, 119 Elasticity, 116 Electric charge, 9 Electric circuit, 96 Electric constant, 9–10 Electric displacement, 10 Electric field strength, 10 Electric flux, 10 Electric flux density, 10 Electric polarization, 10 Electric power, 12 Electric susceptibility, 10 Electric transient phenomena, 1391–1401 capacitor switching, 1392–1393 ferroresonance, 1400 lightning, 1396–1397 low-side surges, 1397–1400 sources and characteristics of, 1392 transformer energizing, 1400–1401 Electric vehicles (EVs), 1006, 1011 Electrical quantities, definitions of, 8–13 Electrical resistivity, 100 Electrical steel, 140 Electrically excited synchronous generators, 536 Electricity markets, 1329–1369 building blocks of, 1335–1362 capacity markets, 1361 characteristics of, 1335 consumers, 1334 day-ahead markets, 1344–1345 ERCOT, 1365–1369 establishment of, 1331 hedging energy price risk, 1347–1349 hedging transmission price risk, 1357–1360 impacts on ISO system operations, 1361–1362 locational marginal prices, 1349–1357

26_Santoso_Index_p1609-1634.indd 1614

Electricity markets (Cont.): offer-based economic dispatch, 1336–1347 ancillary services, 1346–1347 efficiency of, 1339–1340 energy offer curve, 1341 energy offers, 1336–1337 financial unit commitment, 1343–1344 intraday markets, 1347 pricing, 1342–1343 pricing rule, 1338 reliability unit commitment, 1344 unit commitment, 1341, 1343 uplift, 1341 virtual bids and offers, 1345 principles of market economics, 1331–1332 producers, 1334 real-time markets, 1344–1345 regulators, 1333–1334 speculators, 1334 traders, 1334 types of, 1362–1364 mandatory pool, 1362–1363 minimalist model, 1364 physical bilateral trading model, 1363 power exchanges, 1364 real-time balancing energy market, 1363 voluntary pool with bilateral contracts, 1364 Electrization, 10 Electrochemical batteries, 622–623 Electrochemical energy storage, 622–627 Electromotive force, 13 Electronvolt, 7 Electrostatic potential, 10 Electrostatic potential difference, 10 Emergency SIME (E-SIME) method, 1302–1303 End-user bill management, 646–647 Energy density, 618 Energy management system (EMS), 1110–1122, 1526–1534 dispatcher training simulator, 116–117 next-generation, 117–120 proactive grid management in, 1120 subsystems, 1111–1116 generation monitoring and control, 1113–1115 network analysis and optimization, 1115–1116 SCADA, 1112 synchrophasor measurements in, 117–118 trends in, 117 Energy product, 129 Energy-product curve, magnetic, 130 Energy retention time, 620 Enterprise architectures, 1528–1529 Environmental Protection Agency (EPA), 1601–1602 Eolian vibration, 294–295 Equal area criterion, 1285–1286 ERCOT markets, 1365–1369 comparison of markets in different regions, 1368–1369 market dynamics in, 1367–1368 market operations in, 1365–1367

24/11/17 4:49 PM

INDEX        1615 

Ester fluids, 167–168 Ethernet, 503 Ethylene-propylene rubber, 170 Europe, power system operations in, 1128–1144 European Committee for Electrotechnical Standardization (CENELEC), 1594 European Organization for Certification and Testing (EOTC), 1580 European Telecommunications Standards Institute (ETSI), 1595 Exciters, 943 Exciting power, 130 Externally fused shunt capacitor banks, 789–790 Extreme wind loadings, 280–282 Extruded-dielectric systems, 328–329, 339–340, 342 Farad, 4 Fast decouple load flow (FDLF), 1081 Fast tripping, 1387 Federal Communications Commission (FCC), 1602 Federal Trade Commission (FTC), 1602 Feeder-voltage regulator, 417 Ferrite cores, 146 Ferroresonance, 1400 Fiber-optic links, 503 Field loss, 902 Field time constants, 886 Filtering, 74 Financial transmission rights, 1358 Financial unit commitment, 1343–1344 Finite impulse response (FIR) filter, 74 Fixed series capacitors, 796–797 Flexible AC transmission systems (FACTS), 1012–1016 functions of, 1012 thyristor-controlled series capacitor, 1013 transient stability of, 1012–1013 voltage source converter-based, 1013–1016 Flow batteries, 625 Fluid dynamics analysis, 1519 Fluorescent lamps, 1004–1006 Fluorinated ethylene propylene, 171 Fluorocarbon liquids, 167 Flux method, 891 Flyback converters, 973–974 Flying capacitor converters, 989 Flywheel energy storage, 627–628 Food and Drug Administration (FDA), 1602 Forced oscillations, 1256–1258 Foundation design programs, 1519 Foundation-slab analysis, 1519 Fractional-horsepower motors, 939 Free oscillations, 1245–1254 Frequency, 6 measurement of, 86–87, 93 rate of change of, 93 Fuel cells, 627 Full-bridge DC-DC converters, 974–975 Fuseless shunt capacitor banks, 792–794

26_Santoso_Index_p1609-1634.indd 1615

Fuses, 755–764 breaking capacity for, 756 classification of, 756–764 current-limiting, 762 current rating, 756 definition of, 755 electronically controlled protective devices, 762–764 in enclosures, 762 holders, 762 low-voltage, 756–757 medium- and high-voltage, 757–758 ratings for, 756 resistance of, 756 saving, 1387 self-resetting, 761 thermal, 764 time-current curves for, 758–760 voltage rating, 756 Fusible alloys, 125–126 Galloping, 295 Game theory, 1523 GaN heterojunction field effect transistor, 1036–1039 Gapped surge arresters, 1466–1468 Gas-accumulation protection, 1201 Gas-insulated substations, 695–705 ampacity for, 699–701 enclosure and conduction design, 699–701 enclosure designs for, 702–706 equipment used in, 696–697 layout for, 702–706 sealing system for, 698–699 sulfur hexafluoride properties in, 697–698 voltage withstand for, 699–701 Gas-insulated transformers, 830 Gas turbines, 873–875 Gate turn-off thyristors, 1029–1030 Gauss, 130 Gauss-Seidel method, 1076–1077 General Agreement on Tariffs and Trade (GATT), 1579 Generation mix analysis, 1514 Generator circuit breakers, 734–735 Generators, 867–914 alternating-current, 888–914 direct-current, 875–887 electrically excited synchronous, 536 magnetic gear integrated, 537 modeling, 1057–1058 permanent magnet synchronous, 536–537, 909–910 prime movers, 868–875 protection for, 1205–1213 connections and ground, 1205–1206 current unbalance protection, 1209 loss-of-field protection, 1210–1212 motoring protection, 1212–1213 rotor fault, 1208–1209 stator ground fault, 1207–1208 stator phase faults, 1206–1207

24/11/17 4:49 PM

1616        INDEX

Generators (Cont.): squirrel cage induction, 534, 551–552 superconducting, 536–537 synchronous, 536–537, 1057–1058 wound rotor induction, 534–536, 552–553 Geotechnical evaluation, 1519 Gigaelectronvolt, 6 Global Positioning System (GPS), 1174 Gold, 127 Governor model, 1325–1326 Grain-oriented electrical steel, 141 Graphic symbols, 27 Gray cast iron, 139 Grid computing, 1547 GRID4EU, 516 Ground electrodes, 382–384 Ground resistance, 90–91 Ground resistivity, 88–90 Grounding, substation, 682–688 Guarding, 87–88 Guyed structures, 312–318 concrete spread foundations, 315–317 cross-rope suspension or chainette, 313–314 direct embedment, 317–318 drilled shafts, 317 portal towers, 312–313 rigid, 314–315 rock foundations, 317 steel grillages, 315 V tower, 313 Guys, 309–310 H-bridge, 982–983 Harmonic excitations, 1256 Harmonic filter shunt capacitor banks, 794–795 Harmonics, 1373, 1380–1381, 1401–1416 active power, 1405–1406 capacitor impedance, 1413–1414 control of, 1416 current distortion, 1404–1405 distortion, 1402–1404 effects of resistance and resistive load, 1415 impacts, 1415–1416 parallel and series resonance, 1414–1415 phase sequence, 1408–1409 power factor, 1408 power system quantities under nonsinusoidal conditions, 1405 reactive power, 1406–1407 RMS values of voltage and current, 1405 system impedance, 1412–1413 system response characteristics, 1412 total demand distortion, 1411–1412 total harmonic distortion, 1411 triplen, 1409–1411 voltage distortion, 1404–1405 Heat sinks, 1045 Heating, ventilating, and air-conditioning design program, 1519 Henry, 4 Hertz, 3

26_Santoso_Index_p1609-1634.indd 1616

Heusler’s alloys, 145 High-intensity discharge (HID) lamps, 1004–1006 High-performance computing (HPC), 1540 High-pressure fluid-filled systems, 329–330, 340, 343–344 High-side switches, 1027 High voltage and resistance, measurement of, 87 High-voltage direct-current (HVDC) transmission, 351–388 applications of, 354–355 capacitor-commutated converters, 367 control systems, 362–365 economics and efficiency of, 366–367 fundamentals for, 355–367 converter behavior and equations, 355–358 grid power flow controller, 367–368 multiterminal operations, 365–366 reactive power compensation for, 361–362 station design and equipment, 368–372 AC filters, 370 converter transformers, 369 DC filters, 371 smoothing reactor, 370 thyristor valves, 368–369 valve cooling system, 371 station layout and system configuration, 358–361 variable frequency transformer, 368 voltage source converter-based, 372–378 Home area networks (HANs), 1538 Homopolar DC generators, 887 Horizontal-axis wind turbines, 529–530 Horsepower motors, 939 HVDC transformers, 815 Hybrid electric vehicles (HEVs), 1006 Hydrogen fuel, electrolysis of water for, 626 Hydrologic analysis, 1519 Hysteresis, magnetic, 131 Hysteresis loop, 130 Hysteric current control, 980 I2R losses, 403 Ice loads, 278 wind-induced motion of overhead conductors, 293–294 IGBTs, 1029 Impedance, 10 Impedance values, 399 Impedance voltage, 845 Impulsive transient, 1374 In-service performance tests, 81–82 Independent system operators (ISOs), 1329–1330 Induced lighting voltages, 1490 Induced voltage, 803–805 dielectric test, 846 surges, 1448, 1490 Inductance: internal, 120 measurement of, 84–86 mutual, 86 permeability, 135 self-inductance, 13

24/11/17 4:49 PM

INDEX        1617 

Induction: intrinsic, 131 magnetic, 132–133 maximum, 131 remanent, 131 residual, 131 saturation, 131 Induction motors, 926–940 analysis of, 930–932 basic concepts, 1213–1216 characteristics of, 935–937 construction of, 926–927, 933 online starting of, 940 operation of, 926 polyphase, 926–933 power, 932–933 revolving magnetic field in, 927–929 rotor impedance in, 929–930 single-phase, 937–940 slip, 929–930 slip ring, 947 testing of, 933–935 theory of, 926–933 torque, 929–930, 932 Inductive reactance, 122–124 Inductor(s): design of, 1041–1042 volt-second balance, 967 voltage, 967 Industry Technical Agreement (ITA), 1580 Infinite impulse response (IIR) filter, 74 Inframarginal offers, 1340 Infrastructure as a Service (IaaS), 1547 Inner current control, 1318–1319 Instantaneous electric power, 12 Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers—Standards Association (IEEE-SA), 1598–1599 Instrument transformers, 815 Instrumentation, 67–74 sampling, 72–74 uses, 74–76 Insulated-case circuit breakers, 740 Insulating braces and guys, 309 Insulating gases, 160–164 corona, 163 corona discharges, 163 dielectric breakdown, 162 dielectric properties at low electric fields, 161–162 flashover on solid surfaces, 164 general properties of, 160–161 relative dielectric strengths of, 162–163 Insulating materials, 149–173 application of, 160 arc tracking of, 159 conductors, 168–172 effect of ionizing radiation, 159 general properties of, 149

26_Santoso_Index_p1609-1634.indd 1617

Insulating materials (Cont.): insulating gases, 160–164 thermal aging of, 159–160 thermal conductivity of, 173 water penetration, 159 Insulating oils and liquids, 164–168 deterioration of, 166 dielectric properties of, 166 ester, 167–168 fluorocarbon, 167 general properties of, 164–165 mineral, 165 servicing, filtering and treating, 166–167 silicone, 167 synthetic, 167 Insulation: circuit analogy of, 150 defined, 149 level, 1429 resistance and resistivity of, 152–154 thermal conductivity of, 173 Integral-horsepower motors, 939 Integrated-demand meters, 82–83 Intellectual property, 1584 Interactive load flow, 1532 Interchange, forecasting, 1100 Interchange accounting, 1531 Interchange management, 1531 Interchange scheduling, 1531 Interconnected power grid, 175–242 in Australia, 178–189 in Brazil, 190–195 in China, 190–195, 195–202 in India, 203–210 in Japan, 211–215 in North America, 215–225 in Southern Africa, 225–242 Interconnection, 621 Interference analysis, 1519 Interharmonics, 1373, 1380–1381 Internal inductance, 120 Internally fused shunt capacitor banks, 791–792 International Annealed Copper Standard (IACS), 97 International Committee on Illumination (CIE), 1593 International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC), 1577, 1589–1591 International Organization for Standardization (ISO), 1578, 1591–1592 International System Units (ISU), 8 International Telecommunication Union (ITU), 1577–1578, 1591–1592 Internet of Things (IoT), 1555–1557 Internet Society (ISOC), 1593 Interrupting time, 722 Interruptions, 1377, 1379 characteristics of, 1384 sources of, 1384 Intraday markets, 1347 Intrinsic magnetic flux density, 11 Inverted bus, 658

24/11/17 4:49 PM

1618        INDEX

Inverters, 621, 982–991 matrix, 950 multilevel converters, 987–991 single-phase AC synthesis, 982–985 quasi-square wave inverter, 983 single-phase sinusoidal synthesis, 983–985 space vector modulation, 986–987 special, 949–950 three-phase, 948–950 three-phase AC synthesis, 985–986 two-level, 948–949 Iron, 107 Iron-cobalt alloys, 144–145 Iron-cored conductors, 86 Iron-nickel-copper-chromium, 144 Iron-silicon aluminum alloys, 145 ISO 9000, 1588–1589 ISO 14000, 1588–1589 Isokeraunic maps, 1440 Isotropic material, 132 JFETs11, 1031–1036 Johnson elastic limit, 119 Joint Technical Committee 1 on Information Technology (JTC 1), 1593 Joule, 4 Karrenbauer’s transformation, 1458 Kelvin, 2 Kelvin double bridge, 62–64 Kilogram, 2 Kirchoff’s laws of averages, 968 Krämer drive, 947 Lagged-demand meters, 83 Lead-acid batteries, 623 Letter symbols, 15 Light, 13 definitions of quantities of, 13–14 quantity of, 14 Light-emitting diodes (LEDs), 1006 Lightning, 430, 1396–1397 backflashover, 1483–1487 corona, 1487 elimination devices, 1497–1498 impulse insulation level, 1429 mechanism and characteristics of, 1432–1441 protection against, 847–848 striking distance, 1436, 1482 stroke, 1439–1440, 1480–1481 Line conductors, 444–445 Line-drop compensator, 417 Line insulation, 263–269 design, 265–269 insulator design, 264–265 insulator standards, 265 materials, 263–264 protective and grading devices, 269 requirements, 263

26_Santoso_Index_p1609-1634.indd 1618

Line losses, 469 Line protection, 1176–1195 current differential protection, 1189–1192 directional comparison protection, 1186–1189 directional overcurrent protection, 1178–1182 distance protection, 1182–1186 overcurrent protection, 1176–1178 time-domain protection, 1192–1195 Line sag, 1519 Line-to-line fault, 1090–1092 Liquid-insulated transformers, 829–830 Lithium-ion batteries, 624–625 Live-tank “minimum oil” circuit breakers, 730 Load-interrupter devices, 765–766 Load tap changers, 824–825 Load(s): curtailment system, 1536 factor, 470 forecasting, 1100–1101, 1514, 1530 losses, 809–810, 845 models, 1063–1064 Locational marginal prices, 1349–1357 basic principle, 1361 commercial network model, 1356 evaluation of, 1354–1355 properties of, 1355–1356 value of energy in, 1350 Locked-rotor test, 934 Locked-rotor torque, 943 Logarithmic decrement, 11 Logarithmic meters, 83 Long duration voltage variation, 1373 Loss factor, 470 Low-side surges, 1397–1400 Low sustained level (LSL), 1337 Lumen, 4 Luminance, 14 Luminous efficacy of radiant flux, 14 Luminous flux density, 6 Luminous flux density at a surface, 14 Luminous intensity, 6, 14 Lux, 4 Magnetic circuit, 132 Magnetic constant, 11, 132 Magnetic core materials, 1039–1041 Magnetic field strength, 11 Magnetic flux, 11, 132 Magnetic flux density, 6, 11 Magnetic gear integrated generators, 537 Magnetic induction, 11, 131, 132–133 Magnetic lamination steels, 142 Magnetic materials, 128–149 carbon steels, 140 commercial, 139 definitions of, 131–137

24/11/17 4:49 PM

INDEX        1619 

Magnetic materials (Cont.): high-frequency materials applications, 145 for laminated cores, 140–143 quench-hardened alloys, 147–148 soft, 139 for solid cores, 139–140 for special purposes, 143–145 Magnetic moment, 11 Magnetic permeability, 119–120 Magnetic polarization, 11 Magnetic susceptibility, 11 Magnetic vector potential, 11 Magnetism, types of, 138–139 Magnetization, 11 Magnetizing force, 133 Magnetomotive force, 11, 133–134, 890–891 Magnetorestriction, 134 Magnetostatic, 134 Magnitude, measurement of, 92 MAIFI (momentary average interruption frequency index), 472 Maintenance scheduling, 1530–1531 Malleable cast iron, 140 Mandatory pool, 1362–1363 Marginal offer price, 1338 Marginal surplus, 1338 Market operators (MOs), 1330 Mass-conductivity ratio, 97 Material-management information system, 1521 Materials planning, 1521 Matrix converters, 950, 998–999 Maximum-demand meters, 82 Maximum voltage, 721–722 Maxwell, 134 Maxwell-Wien bridge, 85 Measurement, 54–59 of component values, 83–86 of energy, 78–83 of frequency, 86–87 model, 57–59 phasor, 91–93 power-factor, 78 uncertainty, 56–57 unusual, 87–91 Mechanical energy storage, 627–631 compressed air, 629–630 flywheel, 627–628 pumped hydroelectric storage, 628–629 Mesh networks, 503 Metal-clad switchgear, 746–747 Metal-enclosed bus, 749–751 isolated-phase, 750–751 nonsegregated-phase, 749–750 segregated-phase, 749–750 Metal oxide varistor arresters, 1468–1474

26_Santoso_Index_p1609-1634.indd 1619

Metals: contact, 126 fusible, 125–126 hard, 126 highly conductive, 126 miscellaneous, 126–128 noncorroding, 126 Meter, 2 Meter constants, 81 Microgrids, 485–486, 502–512 anti-islanding for, 504–505 communication infrastructure for, 503–504 control and operation of, 506–512 centralized, 507 hierarchical, 507 inner control loops, 508 primary, 508, 509–510 secondary, 510–511 tertiary, 511–512 distributed generation and, 1011 islanded electrical systems and, 646 islanding in, 502–504 black start, 504 control of, 504–505 planned, 503 unplanned, 503 multiple, 512 Micrometer, 6 Micron, 6 Millimeter wire gage, 113 Minimalist model, 1364 Minimum-oil circuit breaker, 711, 730, 731 Missing money, 1341 Mn-Al-C alloys, 148 Modular multilevel converter (MMC), 540, 1022–1025 Modulus of elasticity, 117–118 Molded-case circuit breakers, 740 Mole, 2 Molybdenum, 127 Monel metal, 144 Monte Carlo simulation, 1494–1497 MOSFETs, 968–969, 1001, 1025–1030, 1028–1029, 1031–1036 Motors: AC commutator, 957–958 basic concepts, 1213–1216 direct-current (DC), 921–926 induction, 926–940, 1213–1216 multiphase, 956 permanent magnet synchronous, 952–953 primary voltage control, 946–947 protecting devices for, 958–959 protection for, 1213–1223 short-circuit, 1221–1223 thermal, 1216–1221 pseudo-direct drive PM, 957 speed control for, 946–948, 950–951 starting methods, 1390–1391 stator PM, 956

24/11/17 4:49 PM

1620        INDEX

Motors (Cont.): switched reluctance, 954–955 synchronous, 940–946 synchronous reluctance, 956 types of, 920 Multidomain simulation tools, 1537 Multilevel converters: multilevel PWM for, 988 topologies, 988–991 Multimodal oscillations, 1252–1256 Multiphase motors, 956 Multiple synchronous machines, 536 Mutual impedance, 10 Mutual inductance, 12 N-conductor cable, 112 N-conductor concentric cable, 112 National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA), 1599 National Electricity Market (Australia), 180–181, 186 National Fire Protection Association (NFPA), 1599–1600 National Institute of Standards and Technology (NIST), 1577, 1602–1603 National Rural Electric Cooperative Association (NRECA), 515–516 Neoprene, 171 Network security, 1109 Newton, 3 Newton-Raphson method, 1077–1081 Nickel-cadmium batteries, 623–624 Nickel-iron alloys, 143 Nickel-iron powder cores, 146 Nickel-metal hydride batteries, 624 Nitrile rubbers, 171 No-load current, 811, 845 No-load losses, 809, 845 Noise, 1381–1382 Nominal-p representation, 250 Nominal-T representation, 250 Nonoriented electrical steel, 140–141 Notching, 1381 NSTAR Electric and Gas Corporation, 515 Nuclear Regulatory Commission (NRC), 1603 Numerical values, 28–29 Nylons, 171 Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA), 1603 Oersted, 134 Offer-based economic dispatch, 1336–1347 ancillary services, 1346–1347 efficiency of, 1339–1340 energy offer curve, 1341 energy offers, 1336–1337 financial unit commitment, 1343–1344 intraday markets, 1347 pricing, 1342–1343 pricing rule, 1338 reliability unit commitment, 1344

26_Santoso_Index_p1609-1634.indd 1620

Offer-based economic dispatch (Cont.): transmission-constrained, 1352–1353 unit commitment, 1341, 1343 uplift, 1341 virtual bids and offers, 1345 Offshore wind power, 565–574 cost reduction for, 566 definition of, 565 submarine power cables for, 571–572 super grid, 585–588 transmission, 568–572 turbines for, 566–568 wind farms, 568–574 Ohm, 4 Oil circuit breakers, 730 Oil-immersed transformers, 815 Oil-insulated transformers, 829 Oil-type LTC, 824 Old English wire gage, 113 One-machine infinite bus (OMIB), 1291–1294 Open-bus substation, 657–658 Open loop scalar control, 950 Open operating duty, 722 OpenDSS, 1086 Operating reserve, 1346–1347 Operating reserve demand curves, 1347 Operational monitoring system, 1535 Optimal power flow, 1516 Oscillations: damping, 1260–1262 detection and analysis of, 1258–1259 forced, 1256–1258 free, 1245–1255 mitigation and control of, 1259–1260 multimodal, 1252–1256 nonlinear aspects of, 1246–1248 Oscillatory transient, 1374–1375 Out-of-phase switching current, 723–724 Out-of-step tripping, 1224–1227 Outage scheduling, 1123–1124 Overcurrent protection, 419–430, 847 branch-circuit protection, 420 clearing nonpersistent or temporary faults for, 421–422 clearing persistent faults for, 422–424 current-limiting fuses, 429–430 directional, 1178–1182 equipment protection, 427–430 expulsion cutouts, 429 fuse-to-fuse coordination in, 425–426 in line protection, 1176–1178 main-line sectionalizing for, 419–420 permanent fault protection, 420–421 protective equipment, selection of, 421 recloser-fuse coordination in, 424–425 sectionalizer, isolation by, 426–427 temporary fault protection, 420–421 for transformers, 1200–1201 utility system fault clearing, 1384 Overexcitation protection, 1199–1200

24/11/17 4:49 PM

INDEX        1621 

Overhead AC power transmission, 246–323 electrical environmental effects of, 252–263 foundations, 310–321 anchors, 319–321 drilled shaft, 318–319 framed structure, 311–312 guyed structures, 312–318 lattice-tower, 310–311 rotational displacement of, 310 single-shaft, 311 spread, 318 subsurface investigations, 318 line accessories, 307–310 line and structure location, 269–274 computerized line design, 274 insulator swing, 272 location survey, 270–271 long spans, 273–274 manual tower spotting, 271–272 preparation for construction, 269 purchase, 271 uplift, 272 line insulation, 263–269 mechanical interaction of suspension spans, 289–296 overhead line uprating and upgrading, 321–323 overhead spans, mechanical design of, 274–289 conductor length, 276–277 conductor tension limits, 283–286 creep elongation, 286–288 sags and tension in inclined spans, 277–278 sags and tension in level spans, 275–276 sag-tension tables, 288–289 stranded conductors, catenary calculations for, 274–275 stress-strain curves, 286 supporting structures, 296–307 combined forces on, 299 conductor spacing and clearances, 296–297 guyed towers, 303–304 longitudinal forces on, 298–299 metal structures, 299–300 self-supporting or rigid, 300–303 semi-flexible, 303 stresses in, 306–307 tests, 307 transverse forces on, 298 tubular steel poles, 304–306 types of, 296 vertical forces on, 299 transmission systems, 247 voltage levels, 247 Overhead transmission lines: design criteria for, 380–381 resistance and reactance of, 445–447 uprating and upgrading, 321–323 Overvoltage, 1379 power frequency, 1442–1446 power system, 1441–1449 switching, 1446–1447

26_Santoso_Index_p1609-1634.indd 1621

Overvoltage protection, 430–436, 1427–1498 analysis methods, 1449–1464 analytical methods, 1452–1455 frequency-dependent models, 1461 graphical methods, 1451–1452 grounding models, 1461–1463 numerical methods, 1455–1457 probabilistic methods, 1463–1464 three-phase transmission lines, 1457–1461 basic concepts, 1428–1432 coordination, 1476–1494 distribution system, 1490–1492 substation, 1488–1490 transmission lines, 1478–1487 underground distribution system, 1492 devices for, 1464–1476 air (spark) gaps, 1465–1466 arresters, 1474–1476 gapped surge arresters, 1466–1468 metal oxide varistor arresters, 1468–1474 lightning elimination devices, 1497–1498 Monte Carlo simulation-based methods, 1494–1497 protection quality index, 1465 Owen’s bridge, 85–86 P-V curve, 1267–1268 Pacific Gas and Electric Company, 513 Pacific Northwest Smart Grid Demonstration (PNWSGD), 514–515 Pad-mounted transformers, 449–450 Palladium, 127 Parallel processing, 1541 Parallel resonance, 1414–1415 Paramagnetic material, 134 Parasitic load, 620 Parsec, 7 Part winding starters, 1391 Pascal, 4 Patents, 1582 Per-unit system, 1064–1067 calculation formulas, 1065 converting per-unit values from one base to another, 1066–1067 Percenter registration of meter, 81 Permanent magnet DC motors, 923 Permanent magnet synchronous generators, 536–537, 909–910, 1000–1001 Permanent magnet synchronous machines, 1010–1011 Permanent-magnet design, 148 Permanent-magnet materials, 146 Permanent magnet synchronous motors, 952–953 Permeability, 12 absolute, 136 AC, 134 DC, 135–136 differential, 136 effective circuit, 136 ideal, 135 impedance, 134

24/11/17 4:49 PM

1622        INDEX

Permeability (Cont.): incremental, 136 incremental intrinsic, 136 inductance, 135 initial, 136 initial dynamic, 135 instantaneous, 135 intrinsic, 136 maximum, 136 normal, 136 peak, 135 relative, 136 reversible, 137 space, 137 Permeance, 12 Permittivity, 12 Personal area network, 504 Personal computing, 1523 Personal liability, 1582 Phase-shifting transformers, 825–826, 1062–1063 Phasor, 398–399, 402–403 Phasor diagrams, 1055–1056 Phasor measurement, 91–93 Phasors, 1055–1056 Photometric brightness, 14 Photovoltaics, 599–605 balance of systems, 602–603 concentrating, 600–601 costs of, 609–610 crystalline silicon, 599–600 distributed grid-connected, 644–645 future technologies, 602 grid interface for, 1008–1009 market share for, 609–611 thin-film, 600 Physical bilateral contract, 1347 Physical bilateral trading model, 1363 Physical constants, 27 Pilot streamers, 1436 Piping programs, 1519 Pitch angle, 115 Pitch diameter, 115 Pitch ratio, 115 Plant monitoring system, 1535 Platform as a Service (PaaS), 1547 Platinum, 127 Plug-in hybrid electric vehicles (PHEVs), 1006 Polyamides, 171 Polychloroprene, 171 Polychlorotrifluoroethylene, 171 Polyethylene, 170 Polyimides, 171 Polyphase induction motors: characteristics of, 935–937 construction of, 926–927 efficiency of, 936 full-load current of, 936 operation of, 926 power factor, 936 revolving magnetic field in, 927–929

26_Santoso_Index_p1609-1634.indd 1622

Polyphase induction motors (Cont.): rotor impedance in, 929–930 slip, 929–930 starting, 937 testing of, 933–935 theory of, 926–933 torque, 929–930 types of, 935 Polyphase meter connections, 79 Polytetrafluoroethylene, 171 Polyvinyl chloride, 170 Positive-sequence resistance and reactances, 248–250 Powdered-iron cores, 146 Power: active, 12, 128, 1405–1406 apparent, 12, 129 definition of, 12 electric, 12 measurement of, 76–77 reactive, 12, 77–78, 137, 1406–1407 Power balance: area control error, 1105–1106 control performance, 1105–1106 forecasting, 1100–1101 frequency control, 1106, 1106–1107 fundamentals for, 1099 generation scheduling and dispatch, 1103–1105 security-constrained economic dispatch, 1104–1105 security-constrained unit commitment, 1104 unit commitment, 1103–1104 reserves, 1101–1103 Power capacitors, 778–798 capacitor units, 782–786 power factor correction for, 778–781 shunt capacitors, 786–796 system benefits of, 778–781 Power conditioning system (PCS), 622 Power conditioning units (PCU), 621–622 Power density, 618 Power distribution, 391–479 application of distribution systems, 395–396 calculation of voltage regulation and I2R loss, 396–403 capacitors, application of, 441–443 classification of distribution systems, 395 common-neutral system, 412–414 distribution-system automation, 394–395 distribution system losses, 469–470 distribution transformers, 436–437 European practices in, 473–475 line conductors, 444–445 low-voltage secondary-network systems, 454–457 overcurrent protection, 419–430 overhead lines, resistance and reactance of, 445–447 overview, 391–394 overvoltage protection, 430–436 primary distribution systems, 407–412

24/11/17 4:49 PM

INDEX        1623 

Power distribution (Cont.): reliability of, 471–473 secondary radial distribution, 438–440 subtransmission system, 403–407 underground cables, 458–464 underground residential distribution, 447–451 underground service to large commercial loads, 451–454 voltage control in, 414–419 Power electronic converters, 961–1045 AC-AC converters, 998–999 ac-dc converters (rectifiers), 991–997 applications of, 962–964, 999–1007 battery charging, 1003–1004 DC power supplies, 999–1000 electric drives, 1000–1003 fluorescent lamps, 1004–1006 solid-state lighting, 1004–1006 automotive applications of, 1006–1007 components of, 1025–1045 capacitors, 1044–1045 heat sinks, 1045 magnetic components, 1039–1044 silicon power semiconductor devices, 1025–1030. wide bandgap power semiconductor devices, 1030–1039 dc-ac converters (inverters), 982–991 dc-dc converters, 969–976 feedback control of, 976–982 current mode control, 980 design, 979–980 dynamic modeling, 977–979 role of, 962 switched mode, 964–969 utility applications of custom power, 1016–1018 distributed generation interface, 1008–1011 electric-sourced transportation, 1011 flexible AC transmission systems, 1012–1016 microgrids, 1007–1011 modular multilevel converters, 1022–1025 renewable generation interface, 1008–1011 solid-state transformers, 1018–1022 Power exchanges, 1364 Power factor, 400–401, 778–781, 1408 Power-factor measurement, 78 Power flow, 1072–1085 bus types, 1075–1076 distribution systems, 1083–1086 software, 1086 transmission systems, 1076–1082 Power frequency, 722 overvoltage, 1442–1446 variations, 1383 Power line communication (PLC), 1538 Power market, 1523–1525

26_Santoso_Index_p1609-1634.indd 1623

Power plant piping program, 1519 Power quality, 1372–1415 definition of, 1373 disturbances, general classes of, 1373–1374 long-duration voltage variations, 1379 power frequency variations, 1383 short-duration voltage variations, 1376–1378 sustained interruption, 1379 transient, 1374–1376 voltage fluctuation, 1382–1383 voltage imbalance, 1379–1380 waveform distortion, 1380–1382 electric transient phenomena, 1391–1401 harmonics, 1401–1416 voltage sags and interruptions, 1384–1391 Power reliability, 1416–1424 definition of, 1417 major power outages, 1417–1424 due to natural disasters, 1422–1423 Great Northeast Blackout of 1965, 1418 Great Northeastern Blackout of 2003, 1419–1422 New York Blackout of 1977, 1418–1419 Northwestern Blackout of August 1996, 1419 Northwestern Blackout of July 1996, 1419 reliability indices, 1417 Power swing blocking, 1224–1227 Power system analysis, 1053–1096 complex power, 1056–1057 component modeling, 1057–1064 generator, 1057–1058 loads, 1063–1064 transformers, 1061–1063 per-unit system, 1064–1067 phasor analysis, 1054–1057 power flow, 1072–1085 sequence impedances, 1070–1072 short circuit, 1087–1096 symmetrical components, 1067–1070 Power system operations, 1092–1096 cybersecurity in, 1118 energy management system, 1110–1122 international experiences in, 1128–1167 Australia, 1150–1159 China, 1145–1150 Europe, 1128–1144 India, 1159–1167 outage scheduling, 1123–1124 regulatory issues in, 1125–1128 transformer protection, 1195–1201 transmission operation and security, 1107–1110 impact of intermittent renewable resources, 1109–1110 network security, 1109 security criteria, 1107 system stability limitation, 1108 Power system protection, 1169–1236 bus protection, 1201–1205 function characteristics of, 1172–1173 fundamentals for, 1170 generator protection, 1205–1213

24/11/17 4:49 PM

1624        INDEX

Power system protection (Cont.): line protection, 1176–1195 motor protection, 1213–1223 primary and backup protection, 1171–1172 protection for, wide-area, 1223–1236 relay protection systems, 1170–1171 time-synchronized measurements, 1173–1176 Power system stability and control, 1239–1327 small-signal stability, 1240–1264 forced oscillations, 1256–1258 free oscillations, 1245–1255 measurement-based analysis, 1258–1259 mitigation and control of system oscillations, 1259–1260 system response to small disturbances, 1240–1244 solar generation’s impact on, 1315–1327 transient stability, 1282–1303 voltage stability assessment, 1266–1281 wind generation’s impact on, 1306–1314 Power transfer distribution factor, 1352 Power transformers, 129, 801–864 condition monitoring and assessment of, 853–856 connections, 816–819 D–D, 817–818, 818–819 D–Y, 817–818 Y–D, 817 Y-Y, 817 Z, 819 cooling, 831–834 design requirements, 832–833 heat transfer mechanisms in, 832 temperature calculation, 832–833 design of, 826–828 electrical characteristics of, 808–814 altitude of installation, 809 ambient temperature, 808 efficiency, 812–814 frequency, 811 impedance voltage, 809 load losses, 809–810 no-load current, 811 no-load losses, 809 rated power, 808 rated voltages, 810 short-circuit current, 811 temperature rise, 808 vector group, 810 voltage regulation, 811–812 equivalent circuit for, 805–808 induced voltage, 803–805 installation and maintenance of, 849–853 insulation of, 828–831 aging, 834 gas-insulated transformers, 830 liquid-insulated transformers, 829–830 oil-insulated transformers, 829 loss evaluation and selection, 856–862 magnetic materials for, 803

26_Santoso_Index_p1609-1634.indd 1624

Power transformers (Cont.): nameplate information, 848–849 operation of, 836–844 loading practice, 836–837 parallel, 837–844 phase-shifting, 825–826 protection for, 846–848 against lightning, 847–848 overcurrent protection, 847 sound levels, 834–836 measurement of, 835 reduction of, 836 sources, 835 standards for, 862–864 step-voltage regulators for, 819–823 tap changers, 823–826 testing, 844–846 routine tests, 845–846 special tests, 846 types tests, 844–845 theory and principles, 802–808 types of, 814–816 by cooling method, 815 by core construction, 816 by insulating medium, 815 by uses, 814–815, 814–816 Presentation graphics applications, 1523 Primary distribution systems, 407–412 automation, 409 conductor sizes, 409–410 loading, 410 overhead, 407–408 primary-distribution-system voltage levels, 409 underground, 408 voltage drop in, 412 voltage regulation of, 410 Prime movers, 868–875 gas turbines, 873–875 steam prime movers, 868–870 steam turbines, 870–873 Process control system, 1535 Producer surplus, 1332 Production costing, 1514, 1531 Project costing and estimating, 1522 Project management, 1522 Protection quality index, 1465 PSAT software, 1086 Pseudo-direct drive PM motors, 957 Publicly Available Specifications (PASs), 1580 Pull-in torque, 943 Pull-up torque, 943 Pulse width modulation, 965–966 Pumped hydroelectric storage, 628–629 Qualified scheduling entities (QSEs), 1337 Quality factor, 12 Quantity of light, 14 Quantity symbols, 16–20

24/11/17 4:49 PM

INDEX        1625 

Quasi-square wave inverter, 983 Quench-hardened alloys, 147–148 Radian, 3 Radiance, 14 Radiant density, 14 Radiant energy, 14 Radiant flux, 14 Radiant flux density at a surface, 14 Radiant intensity, 14 Radiant power, 14 Radiation, definitions of quantities of, 13–14 Ramp rate, 619 Rate earth cobalt magnets, 148 Rated voltages, 810 Rated withstand, 1432 Reactance, 12 capacitive, 124 inductive, 122–124 Reactance-impedance method, 86 Reactance starters, 1390–1391 Reactive power, 12, 77–78, 137, 1406–1407 Reactive power control, 1318 Reactor-type LTC, 824 Real-time balancing energy market, 1363 Real-time markets, 1344–1345 Real-time simulation (RTS), 1541–1544 applications of, 1543 bandwidth, 1541 future of, 1544 input/output requirements, 1543 latency, 1542–1543 parallel processing, 1541 solvers, 1543 Reclosers, 1385 Reclosing sequence, 1386–1387 Rectifiers, 991–997 controlled thyristor, 994–997 single-phase diode bridge, 992–993 three-phase diode bridge, 994 Reflected wave, 1452 Register constant, 81 Register ratio, 81 Relative capacitivity, 12 Relative permittivity, 12 Relay protection system, 1170–1171 Relays: communication-based, 675 differential protection, 677 direct-comparison, 676–677 direct underreaching, 675–676 full bus differential relay, 678 partial bus differential relay, 678 permissive overreaching, 676 permissive underreaching, 676 phase-comparison, 677 pilot-wire, 677 protective, 674

26_Santoso_Index_p1609-1634.indd 1625

Relays (Cont.): shunt capacitor, 796 station bus protection, 677–678 step distance, 674–675 Reliability, 1514 Reliability operators (ROs), 1330 Reliability unit commitment, 1344 Reluctance, 12 Reluctance torque, 943 Reluctivity, 12 Remanence, 137 Renewable energy: forecasting, 1530 grid interface for, 1007–1011 intermittent resources of, 1106–1107, 1109–1110 in Southern Africa, 236–237 Reserve monitor, 1530 Reserves, 1101–1103 contingency, 1102 regulating, 1101–1102 requirements, 1102–1103 supplemental, 1102 Residential subsurface transformers, 450 Resin-type transformers, 815 Resistance, 13 of conductors, 119 effects on harmonics, 1415 ground, 91–93 measurement of, 83–84 starters, 1390–1391 temperature coefficient of, 102 Resistive companion circuit, 1455 Resistive load, 1415 Resistive temperature detectors (RTDs), 1216 Resistivity, 13 Resistor-type LTC, 824 Resource Description Framework (RDF), 1552 Resource management, 1522 Responsibility factor, 469 Responsive reserve, 1346 Restricted earth-fail protection, 1198–1199 Retentivity, 137 Return stroke, 1438 Ring bus, 653–654 Rope-lay conductor, 112 Rotating regulators, 887 Rotor angle stability, 1307–1309 Rotor fault, 1208–1209 Rubber, 171 Running light test, 934 Rural power distribution, 464–467 cables, 466 conductor and spans, 467 location of circuits, 466 poles and spans, 466 stray voltages in, 467 transformers, 467 voltage, 466–467

24/11/17 4:49 PM

1626        INDEX

Sags, 1384–1391 characteristics of, 1384 definition of, 1373, 1377–1378 estimating severity of, 1391 fault-induced, 1387–1390 fuse saving, 1387 motor starting, 1390 reclosers, 1385 reclosing sequence, 1386–1387 sources of, 1384 SAIDI (system average interruption duration index), 471–472 SAIFI (system average interruption frequency index), 471 Sampling, 72–74 SARFI (system average rms frequency index), 472–473 SCADA, 1112 Scalar control, 950–951 Scherbius drive, 947 Schottky diodes, 1026–1027, 1030–1031 Second, 2 Secondary-network systems, low voltage, 454–457 cables, 455 continuity of service in, 455–456 high-rise buildings, 456–457 network monitoring in, 456 network protectors, 455 network size, 456 network transformers, 455 spot networks, 456 Secondary radial distribution, 438–440 Security-constrained economic dispatch (SCED), 1104–1105, 1356–1357 Security-constrained unit commitment (SCUC), 1104, 1357 Selenium, 127 Self-contained liquid-filled (SCLF) systems, 331, 339–340, 344 Self-discharge, 619 Self-excited generators, 886 Self-impedance, 10 Self-inductance, 13 Self-resetting fuses, 761 Series capacitor: banks, 796–798 thyristor-controlled, 1013 Series generators, 886 Series motors, 922 Series resonance, 1414–1415 SF6 gas circuit breakers, 711–712, 735–739 Shielding failure, 1483 Shift factors, 1352 Short-circuit current, 811, 1087–1096 calculations, 1516 inversion of admittance matrix by column, 1092–1096 modeling assumptions, 1087 motor protection from, 1221–1223

26_Santoso_Index_p1609-1634.indd 1626

Short-circuit current (Cont.): nonsymmetrical faults, 1088–1092 line-to-line fault, 1090–1092 single-line-to-ground fault, 1089–1090 rated, 722–723 symmetrical faults, 1087–1088 Short-circuit duty, 714–715 Short-duration voltage variations, 1373 Shunt capacitors, 786–796 common connections for, 786 distribution, 787–789 effect on losses, 441–442 externally fused shunt capacitor banks, 789–790 fuseless shunt capacitor banks, 792–794 harmonic filter shunt capacitor banks, 794–795 internally fused shunt capacitor banks, 791–792 low-voltage, 786 protective relaying for, 796 substation shunt capacitor banks, 789 Shunt motors, 921–922 SI units, 1–2 Siemens, 4 Silicon, 110 Silicon power semiconductor devices, 1025–1030 diodes, 1026–1027 IGBTs, 1029 MOSFETs, 1027–1028 super-junction MOSFETs, 1028–1029 thyristors, 1029–1030 Silicon-iron alloys, 145 Silicone fluids, 167 Silver, 127 SIME method, 1290–1294 Simultaneous feasibility test (SFT), 1360 Single-line-to-ground fault, 1089–1090 Single O-ring sealing, 699 Single-phase AC synthesis, 982–985 quasi-square wave inverter, 983 single-phase sinusoidal synthesis, 983–985 Single-phase compensated series motors, 957 Single-phase diode bridge rectifier, 992–993 Single-phase induction motors, 937–940 characteristics of, 940 efficiency of, 939 general theory of, 937–939 horsepower, 939 power factors of, 939 speed of, 939 temperature rise in, 939 voltage ratings of, 939 Single-phase sinusoidal synthesis, 983–985 Single-phase straight series motors, 957 Single-phase thyristor rectifiers, 994–996 Slip or releasing clamps, 308 Slip ring induction motors, 947 Slip test, 934–935 Small-signal stability, 1240–1264 analysis of, 1516 analytical methods for, 1242–1244 forced oscillations, 1256–1258

24/11/17 4:49 PM

INDEX        1627 

Small-signal stability (Cont.): free oscillations, 1245–1255 measurement-based analysis, 1258–1259 mitigation and control of system oscillations, 1259–1260 system response to small disturbances, 1240–1244 of wind penetrated power system, 1307–1308 Smart grid(s), 481–518 architecture, 483 communication systems, 1538–1539 components of, 484–485 control and operation of, 498–502 demand response in, 498–500 distributed control in, 500–501 distributed energy resources in, 501 information technology and data management in, 501–502 cyber-physical interdependencies, 493–494 cyber security for, 490–493 definition of, 483 demonstration projects, 513–516 deployment projects, 513 domains, 486–487 enabling technologies for, 487–488 vs. existing power grids, 486 fundamentals for, 486–494 future trends, 516–518 infrastructure, 494–502 distribution automation, 497–498, 517 smart meter, 494–495 synchrophasor, 496–497, 517–518 initiatives: in Brazil, 193–194 in China, 200, 513 in India, 209–210 in Southern Africa, 237–238 internationalization of, 516 interoperability in, 489 microgrid system for, 485–486, 502–512 standards, 489 tools for, 1536–1549 big data and analytics, 1544–1546 cloud computing, 1547–1549 high-performance computing, 1540 real-time simulation, 1541–1544 transition to, 1505–1507 Smart meter, 494–495 Smoothing reactor, 370 Social welfare, 1332 Sodium, 111 Sodium batteries, high-temperature, 624 Software as a Service (SaaS), 1547–1548

26_Santoso_Index_p1609-1634.indd 1627

Solar energy, 596–647 basics of, 596 concentrating solar power, 605–609 dish/engine, 608 linear, 605–606 power tower, 606–608 thermal energy storage, 609 forecasting, 1100–1101 grid integration of, 614–616 distribution, 615–616 transmission, 614–615 impact on power system stability, 1315–1327 outer control loop, 1317–1319 PV-DG system, 1319–1325 markets for, 609–613 photovoltaics, 599–605 storage, 617–647 characteristics of, 617–621 economics of, 633–641 electrical and magnetic, 631–632 electrochemical, 622–627 mechanical energy, 627–631 technologies, 617–621 thermal, 631 value propositions and applications, 641–647 Solid-state lighting, 1004–1006 Solid-state transformers, 1018–1022 South West Interconnected System (Australia), 187–188 Southern African Power Pool (SAPP), 228–235 Southern California Edison Company, 515 Space vector modulation, 986–987 Special power transformers, 815 Specific energy, 618 Specific gravity, 96 Specific heat, 107 Specific power, 618 Spectral emissivity, 13 Spectral luminous efficacy of radiant flux, 14 Speed control, 946–948 of AC motors, 950–951 direct torque, 951 scalar, 950–951 of slip ring induction motors, 947 vector, 951 Spread foundations, 315–317 Squirrel cage induction generators, 534, 551–552 Squirrel cage induction machines, 1000 Squirrel cage motors, 935 Stability analysis, 1516 Standard lightning impulse, 1431 Standard switching impulse, 1431 Standards, 1575–1608 certification, 1582 definition of, 1575 electrical, history of, 1576–1581 international organizations, 1589–1594, 1604 ISO 9000 and ISO 14000, 1588–1589 law and, 1581–1582 legality of, 1581–1582

24/11/17 4:49 PM

1628        INDEX

Standards (Cont.): national organizations, 1595–1598, 1605–1606 organizations, 1603–1608 patents, 1582 personal liability, 1582 regional organizations, 1594–1595, 1604 terminology in, 1584–1588 U.S. government regulatory bodies, 1601–1603, 1607 voluntary, 1581, 1582–1584 websites, 1608 Standards Australia, 1598 Standards Council of Canada (SSC), 1598 Standby losses, 620 Standby power, 620 Star-star-connected transformers, 689 State estimation, 1531 State Grid Corporation of China, 513 Static synchronous compensator (STATCOM), 1013–1015 distribution, 1018 Static synchronous series compensator (SSSC), 1015 Station-type cubicle switchgear, 752–753 Statistical analysis of equipment failures, 1520 Stator ground fault, 1207–1208 Stator phase faults, 1206–1207 Stator PM motors, 956 Steam prime movers, 868–870 Steam turbines: applications for, 870–872 performance of, 872–873 Steel: carbon, 140 electrical, 140 grain-oriented electrical, 141 in line conductors, 444–445 Steel wire gage, 113 Step-voltage regulators, 819–823 bypassing, 821–822 control functions, 821–822 developments in, 822–823 methods, 820–821 technical characteristics of, 821 three-phase, 822 Stepped leader, 1436 Steradian, 3 Strain, 116–117 Stranded conductors, 113–114 catenary calculations for, 274–275 definition of, 111 tensile efficiency of, 116 Stranding: decrease in strength due to, 116 effects of, 115 increase in resistance due to, 115 weight increase due to, 115 Stray load loss, 902 Stray-load loss tests, 935 Stray voltages, 467 Stress, 116–117

26_Santoso_Index_p1609-1634.indd 1628

Structural design programs, 1519 Structural steel framing program, 1519 Submarine cables, 382, 571–572 Substation shunt capacitor banks, 789 Substations, 649–706 air-insulated, 649–693 arrangements and equipment for, 656–657 automation, 1532–1534 bus schemes for, 651–655 breaker and a half, 654 double bus, double breaker, 653 double bus, single breaker, 652–653 main and transfer bus, 652 ring bus, 653–654 single bus, 651–652 buses, 658–664 clearance requirements, 666–668 components of, 656 design for, 650–654 function of, 649–650 gas-insulated, 695–705 grounding for, 682–688 lightning insulation coordination, 1488–1490 mechanical and electrical forces, 668–673 protective relaying for, 674–682 reliability of, 654–655 site selection for, 657–658 support structures for, 656–657 surge protection for, 690–693 transformers, 688–690 connections, 688–689 loading practice, 689–690 voltage levels, 650 Subtransmission system, 403–407 definition of, 403–404 patterns of, 406–407 voltage regulation of, 404 voltages of, 404 Sudden-pressure protection, 1201 Superconducting generators, 536–537 Superconducting magnetic energy storage, 631–632 Supervisory control and data acquisition (SCADA), 775–778 operating applications, 1525–1526 Supplemental reserves, 1102 Surface measurement, 87–88 Surge, 1374 Surge impedance loading, 252 Susceptance, 13 Suspension clamps, 307 Suspension spans, 289–296 catenary constants, 292–293 line design sag-tension parameters, 291–292 ruling-span approximation, 289–291 stringing sag tables, 291 tension differences for adjacent dead-end spans, 289 tension equalization by suspension insulators, 289

24/11/17 4:49 PM

INDEX        1629 

Suspension spans (Cont.): tower spotting, 293 unbalanced ice loads, 293–294 uplift, 293 wind and weight spans, 293 wind-induced motion of overhead conductors, 294–296 Sustained interruption, 1379 Swell, 1373, 1377–1378 Switchboards, 751–752 Switched mode power converters, 964–969 bi-positional switch, 964–965, 968–969 power loss in, 968–969 pulse width modulation, 965–966 steady state, 967–968 Switched reluctance motors, 954–955, 1000–1001, 1002–1003 Switched shunt capacitors, 417–418 Switches, 764–767 load-interrupter devices, 765–766 for underground circuits, 767 Switchgear assemblies, 745–753 arc-resistant metal enclosed, 752 metal-clad, 746–747 metal-enclosed bus, 749–751 isolated-phase, 750–751 nonsegregated-phase, 749–750 segregated-phase, 749–750 metal-enclosed gas-insulated, 748–749 metal-enclosed interrupter, 747–748 metal-enclosed low-voltage power, 745–746 station-type cubicle, 752–753 switchboards, 751–752 Switching impulse insulation level, 1429 Switching overvoltage, 1446–1447 Symmetrical components, 1067–1070 Symmetrically cyclically magnetized condition (SCM), 137 Synchronization, 943 Synchronous converters, 887 Synchronous generators, 536–537, 1057–1058 Synchronous motors, 940–946 damper windings, 943 definition of, 940 efficiency of, 944 exciters for, 943 online starting of, 944–946 operation of, 941–942 permanent magnet, 952–953 power-factor correction for, 942–943 ratings for, 943, 944 starting, 942–943 tests for, 944 torque, 943 types of, 940–941 Synchronous reluctance motors, 956 Synchronous torque, 943 Synchrophasor, 117–118, 496–497, 517–518, 1174–1175

26_Santoso_Index_p1609-1634.indd 1629

System average interruption duration index (SAIDI), 1417 System average interruption frequency index (SAIFI), 1417 System impedance, 1412–1413 Tap changers, 823–826 deenergized, 823 load, 823–885 Technology Trend Assessment (TTA), 1580 Teflon, 171 Telecommunication transformers, 815 Temperature coefficient of expansion, 107 Temperature scale, 6 Temperature-sensitive alloys, 145 Temperature tests, 935 Terrestrial time-distribution systems (TTDSs), 1174 Tesla, 4, 137 Test current, 81 Test transformers, 815 Test uncertainty ratio, 66 Text processing, 1522 Thermal conductivity, 107 Thermal energy storage, 631 Thermal fuses, 764 Thermal meters, 83 Thermoplastic resin, 170 Thermoset resin, 170 Three-phase AC synthesis, 985–986 Three-phase diode bridge rectifier, 994 Three-phase inverters, 948–950 Three-phase thyristor rectifiers, 996–997 Three-winding transformers, 1061–1062 Three-wire devices, 887 Thunderclouds, electrification of, 1432–1436 Thunderstorm day, 1439 Thyristor-controlled series capacitors, 797, 1013 Thyristor cyclo-converters, 998 Thyristor rectifiers, 1029–1030 controlled, 994–997 gate turn-off, 1029 single-phase, 994–996 three-phase, 996–997 Thyristor valves, 368–369 Time-domain protection, 1192–1195 Time-domain simulation methods, 1289–1290 Time-limit acceleration, 925–926 Time synchronization, 1174 Time-synchronized system, 1175–1176 Torque, 929–930, 932, 943 Total demand distortion, 1411–1412 Total harmonic distortion, 992–993, 1411 Tower analysis program, 1519 Training simulator, 1532 Transfer function, 13 Transfer impedance, 10

24/11/17 4:49 PM

1630        INDEX

Transfer ratio, 13 Transformers: calibration of, 70–72 connections, 688–689 conventional, 428–429 current, 67–68 delta-delta-connected, 688–689 design of, 1043–1044 distribution, 436–437, 440–441 energizing, 1400–1401 load management, 1520 loading practice, 689–690 losses, 469 models, 1061–1063 nonconventional, 68–70 overheating protection for, 680–681 pad-mounted, 449–450 phase-shifting, 825–826, 1062–1063 protection for, 678–680, 1195–1201 differential protection, 1196–1198 gas-accumulation protection, 1201 overcurrent protection, 1200–1201 overexcitation protection, 1199–1200 restricted earth-fail protection, 1198–1199 sudden-pressure protection, 1201 residential subsurface, 450 self-protected, 427–428 sequence impedances, 1071–1072 solid-state, 1018–1022 star-star-connected, 689 substation, 688–690 three-winding, 1061–1062 triplen harmonics in, 1409–1411 two-winding, 1061–1062 underground residential distribution, 449–450 variable frequency, 368 voltage, 68 Transient energy function method, 1286–1288 Transient insulation level, 1429 Transient recovery voltage, 723 Transient stability, 1282–1303 assessment of, 1283–1285 dot product method, 1294–1296 equal area criterion, 1285–1286 for realistic power system models, 1288–1296 SIME method, 1290–1294 time-domain simulation, 1289–1290 transient energy function method, 1286–1288 control of, 1296–1303 definition of, 1283 Transmission congestion contracts, 1358 Transmission lines: models, 1058–1061 long line, 1060–1061 medium line, 1059–1060 short line, 1058–1059

26_Santoso_Index_p1609-1634.indd 1630

Transmission lines (Cont.): overhead: design criteria for, 380–381 resistance and reactance of, 445–447 uprating and upgrading, 321–323 overvoltage protection, 1478–1487 sequence impedances, 1070–1071 Transmission prices, 1357 Transmission systems: overvoltage protection, 1478–1487 planning and analysis, 1514–1517 power flow equations for, 1076–1082 DC power flow, 1081–1082 fast decouple load flow, 1081 Gauss-Seidel, 1076–1077 Newton-Raphson, 1077–1081 Transmitted wave, 1452 Traveling waves, 1192–1195 Treeing, 169 Triplen harmonics, 1409–1411 True power factor, 1408 Trunnion-type clamps, 308 Tungsten, 127 Two-level inverters, 948–949 Two-winding transformers, 1061–1062 U.S. Government Policy on Voluntary Standardization, 1601 Ultrahigh-voltage direct-current (UHVDC) transmission, 384–388 Uncertainty, 56–57 Underfrequency load shedding, 1227–1228 Underground cables, 382, 458–464 ambient earth temperatures, 463 ampacity of, 463–464 cable applications, 326–327 cable capacity ratings, 332–333 cable systems, 327 cable uprating and dynamic ratings, 333–334 charging current of, 461 demand and diversity factors, 467–468 diameters of, 460 direct current cables, 331 distribution system losses, 469–470 electrical characteristics of, 460 electrostatic capacitance of, 460–461 feeders for rural service, 464–467 geometric factors of, 461–462 insulation in, 458–459 manufacturing of transmission cables, 344–345 maximum allowable conductor temperature, 463 number of conductors in, 458 overvoltage protection for, 1492 primary cables, 450 secondary cables, 451 skin-effect coefficients of, 460

24/11/17 4:49 PM

INDEX        1631 

Underground cables (Cont.): special cables, 331 terminations, 463 Underground power transmission, 326–348 accessories, 342–344 cable applications, 326–327 cable capacity ratings, 332–333 cable systems, 327 cable uprating and dynamic ratings, 333–334 cables, 382 controlled backfill, 334–337 corrosion, 347 direct current cables, 331 electrical characteristics, 337–338 extruded-dielectric systems, 328–329, 339–340, 342 fault location, 346–347 future developments in, 348 high-pressure fluid-filled systems, 329–330, 340, 343–344 horizontal directional drilling, 341–342 installation, 339–340 magnetic fields, 338 manufacturing of transmission cables, 344–345 operation and maintenance, 345–346 self-contained liquid-filled systems, 330, 339–340, 344 soil thermal properties, 334–337 special cables, 331 submarine installations, 340–341 testing, 347–348 water crossings, 340–341 Underground residential distribution, 447–451 costs of, 447 homes served per transformer, 451 performance of, 447–448 primary cables, 450 reliability of, 448–449 secondary cables, 451 transformers, 449–450 Undervoltage, 1379 Undervoltage load shedding, 1229–1233 Underwriters’ Laboratories, Inc. (UL), 1600–1601 Unified atomic mass unit, 7 Unified Modeling Language (UML), 1552 Unified power flow controller (UPFC), 1015 Unified power quality conditioner (UPQC), 1018 Unit commitment, 1103–1104, 1341, 1343, 1356–1357, 1530 Unit symbols, 21–26 Universal motors, 957–958 Uplift, 1341 Utility computing, 1547 V-Q curve, 1267–1268 Vacuum circuit breakers, 712, 730–732 Vacuum-type LTC, 824 Value of lost reserves, 1347 Valve cooling system, 371 Vanadium redox batteries, 625–626

26_Santoso_Index_p1609-1634.indd 1631

Var, 137 Var-hour meters, 79–80 Variable frequency transformer, 368 Vector, 951 Vector control: AC voltage oriented, 543–545 reference frames for, 542–543 Vector-controlled AC drives, 1001–1002 Vertical-axis wind turbines, 530 Vibration dampers, 309 Virtual bids and offers, 1345 Virtualization, 1547 Volatility, 1347, 1357–1358 Volt, 4 Volt-ampere, 137 Volt-second balance, 967 Voltage, 13 collapse, 1266 control, 414–419, 1317, 1347 distortion, 1404–1405 drop, 398, 401–402, 403 fluctuations, 1382–1383 imbalance, 1379–1380 impedance, 809 induced, 803–805 limits, 1108–1109 long-duration variations, 1379 overvoltage, 1379 rated, 810 RMS values of, 1405 sag, 1377–1378, 1384–1391 short-duration variations, 1376–1378 swells, 1373, 1377–1378 undervoltage, 1379 Voltage level analysis, 1514 Voltage ratio, 845 Voltage regulation, 416–417 bypassing, 822 control functions, 821–822 developments in, 822–823 method, 820–821 on secondary wire, 418–419 supplementary, 417 three-phase, 822 Voltage source converted-based HDVC transmission, 372–378 applications of, 373–374 converter control, 374–375 harmonic generation, 379–380 pulse-width modulation, 379–380 station configuration and design, 374–375 Voltage source converters (VSCs), 538–539 back to back, 545–547 configurations, 539 DC/DC converter, 548 FACTS devices, 1013–1016 modulation techniques for, 540 multivoltage, 549–551 power control of, 542 voltage control PWM for, 540–542

24/11/17 4:49 PM

1632        INDEX

Voltage stability, 1266–1281 assessment of, 1268–1271 continuation power flow, 1269–1270 dynamic security assessment, 1270–1271 for load area, 1277–1281 for load bus, 1271–1277 modal analysis, 1268–1269 singular value decomposition, 1269 definition of, 1266 large-disturbance, 1266–1267 long-term, 1267 margin, 1268 P-V curve, 1267–1268 short-term or transient, 1267 small-disturbance, 1266 V-Q curve, 1267–1268 of wind generators, 1309–1310 Voltage transformer calibration, 71–72 coupling-capacitor, 68 Voltampere-hour (var-hour) meters, 79–80 Volume-conductivity ratio, 97 Voluntary pool with bilateral contracts, 1364 Voluntary standards, 1582–1584 definition of, 1581 developments of, 1582–1583 intellectual property and, 1584 Wake-induced oscillation, 295–296 Watt, 4, 137 Watthour constant, 81 Watthour meters, 79 Wattmeter, 76–77 Waveform distortion, 1380–1382 DC offset, 1380 definition of, 1373 harmonics, 1380–1381 interharmonics, 1380–1381 noise, 1380 notching, 1381 Web services, 1529 Weber, 4, 137 Western Australia Wholesale Electricity Market (WEM), 188–189 Wheatstone bridge, 62 Wide area measurement system (WAMS), 1532 Wide area networks (WANs), 1538 Wide bandgap power semiconductor devices, 1030–1039 BJT, 1031–1036 GaN heterojunction field effect transistor, 1036–1039 JFET, 1031–1036 SiC MOSFET, 1031–1036 SiC power devices, 1030 SiC Schottky diodes, 1030–1031

26_Santoso_Index_p1609-1634.indd 1632

Wide-area protection and control, for motors, 1223–1236 automatic generator shedding, 1233–1236 out-of-step tripping, 1224–1227 power swing blocking, 1224–1227 underfrequency load shedding, 1227–1228 undervoltage load shedding, 1229–1233 Wind farms, 562–565 control of, 563–565 electrical system, 562–563, 563 layout and wake effects, 562–563 offshore, 568–574 site selection and assessment for, 562 Wind power generation, 523–589 controllability for large-scale penetration, 580–582 curtailment in, 584 fault-ride through, 578–580 forecasting in, 1100 impact on power system stability, 1306–1314 control techniques to emulate inertia, 1313–1314 frequency stability, 1310–1313 rotor angle stability, 1307–1309 voltage stability, 1309–1310 interconnected networks, 582–583 in island systems, 584–585 large-scale, 580–589 offshore, 565–574 operation range of frequency and voltage, 575–578 overview, 524–525 power electronics for, 537–542 power system requirements, 574–575 reactive power support in grid faults, 578–580 spatial variation in wind speed, 527–528 temporal variations in wind speed, 525–527 transmission, 584 virtual power plant, 582–583 weak grid operation, 584 wind energy conversion systems, 551–565 wind farms, 562–565 wind turbines for, 528–551 Wind turbines, 528–551 blade pitched, 557 classification, 530–531 control of, 556–558 active power control, 556, 561 aerodynamic approaches, 556–557 braking systems, 562 full-scale power electronic interfaced, 560 output active power, 559 pitch angle controller, 557–559 reactive power control, 561–562 definition of, 528–529 DFIG, 559–560 drivetrain, simple lumped mass mode of, 532–533 fixed blade passive stall, 556–557 gear boxes, 532

24/11/17 4:49 PM

INDEX        1633 

Wind turbines (Cont.): generators, 533–537 squirrel cage induction, 534, 551–552 synchronous, 536–537 wound rotor induction, 534–536, 552–553 grid interface for, 1010–1011 horizontal-axis, 529–530 multimodular diode rectifier systems, 548–549 multivoltage source converters, 549–551 offshore, 566–568 PMSG, 910–912 power control of voltage source converters, 542–548 power curves, 531–532 power electronics for, 537–542 types of, 551–556 fixed speed, 551–552 limited variable speed, 552–553 limited variable speed with DFIG, 553–554 variable speed with full power converter, 554 vertical-axis, 530

26_Santoso_Index_p1609-1634.indd 1633

Winding resistance, 845 Wire, 111 sizes, 112 stranded, 111 in stranded conductors, 114 Wireless local area network, 503 Wireless metropolitan area network, 504 Withstand voltage, 1429 World Intellectual Property Organization (WIPO), 1594 World Trade Organization (WTO), 1579–1580, 1593–1594 Wound rotor induction generators, 534–536, 552–553 Wound rotor motors, 935 Wrought iron, 139 Wye-delta starters, 1391 Yield point, 119 Zero-sequence impedance, 250 Zinc-bromine batteries, 626 ZIP coefficients model, 1063–1064

24/11/17 4:49 PM